SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION WASHINGTON, DC 20549 FORM 20-F (Mark One) ☐ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 OR ☑ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the fiscal year ended 31 December 2025 OR ☐ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 For the transition period from ______________ to ______________ ☐ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 Date of event requiring this shell company report ______________ Commission file number Barclays PLC 1-09246 BARCLAYS PLC (Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter) England (Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization) 1 CHURCHILL PLACE, LONDON E14 5HP, England (Address of Principal Executive Offices) KATHRYN ROBERTS, +44 (0)20 7116 3170, KATHRYN.ROBERTS@BARCLAYS.COM 1 CHURCHILL PLACE, LONDON E14 5HP, England (Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person) Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act: | Title of each class | Trading symbol(s) | Name of each exchange on which registered | | --- | --- | --- | | 25p ordinary shares* | Not applicable* | New York Stock Exchange* | | American Depositary Shares, each representing four 25p ordinary shares | BCS | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.25% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2045 | BCS45 | New York Stock Exchange | | 4.375% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2026 | BCS26 | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.20% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes due 2026 | BCS26A | New York Stock Exchange | | 4.337% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2028 | BCS28 | New York Stock Exchange | --- | 4.950% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2047 | BCS47 | New York Stock Exchange | | --- | --- | --- | | 4.836% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes due 2028 | BCS28A | New York Stock Exchange | | 3.250% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2033 | BCS33 | New York Stock Exchange | | 4.972% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2029 | BCS29 | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.088% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Subordinated Notes due 2030 | BCS30 | New York Stock Exchange | | 2.645% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2031 | BCS31 | New York Stock Exchange | | 3.564% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes due 2035 | BCS35 | New York Stock Exchange | | 2.667% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2032 | BCS32 | New York Stock Exchange | | 3.811% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes due 2042 | BCS42 | New York Stock Exchange | | 2.279% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2027 | BCS27 | New York Stock Exchange | | 2.894% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2032 | BCS32A | New York Stock Exchange | | 3.330% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2042 | BCS42A | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.501% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2028 | BCS28B | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.746% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2033 | BCS33A | New York Stock Exchange | | 7.385% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2028 | BCS28C | New York Stock Exchange | | 7.437% Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2033 | BCS33B | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.829% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2027 | BCS27A | New York Stock Exchange | | 6.224% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes due 2034 | BCS34 | New York Stock Exchange | | 7.119% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes due 2034 | BCS34A | New York Stock Exchange | | 6.496% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2027 | BCS27B | New York Stock Exchange | | 6.490% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2029 | BCS29A | New York Stock Exchange | | 6.692% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2034 | BCS34B | New York Stock Exchange | | Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2027 | BCS27C | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.674% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2028 | BCS28D | New York Stock Exchange | --- | 5.690% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2030 | BCS30A | New York Stock Exchange | | --- | --- | --- | | 6.036% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2055 | BCS55 | New York Stock Exchange | | Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2028 | BCS28E | New York Stock Exchange | | 4.837% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2028 | BCS28F | New York Stock Exchange | | 4.942% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2030 | BCS30B | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.335% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2035 | BCS35A | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.086% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2029 | BCS29B | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.367% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2031 | BCS31A | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.785% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2036 | BCS36 | New York Stock Exchange | | 4.476% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2029 | BCS29C | New York Stock Exchange | | 5.860% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2046 | BCS46 | New York Stock Exchange | | Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes due 2029 | BCS29D | New York Stock Exchange | * Not for trading, but in connection with the registration of American Depository Shares, pursuant to the requirements to the Securities and Exchange Commission. Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: None Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer's classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report. 25p ordinary shares 13,866,661,730 Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. ☑ Yes ☐ No If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. ☐ Yes ☑ No Note – Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections. Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. ☑ Yes ☐ No --- Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files). Yes ☑ No ☐ Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or an emerging growth company. See definition of “large accelerated filer”, “accelerated filer” and “emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act: Large Accelerated Filer ☑ Accelerated Filer ☐ Non-Accelerated Filer ☐ Emerging growth company ☐ If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards† provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ☐ † The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012. Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management’s assessment of the effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C. 7262(b)) by the registered public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. ☑ If securities are registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act, indicate by check mark whether the financial statements of the registrant included in the filing reflect the correction of an error to previously issued financial statements. ☐ Indicate by check mark whether any of those error corrections are restatements that required a recovery analysis of incentive-based compensation received by any of the registrant's executive officers during the relevant recovery period pursuant to §240.10D-1(b). ☐ *Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing: U.S. GAAP ☐ International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board ☑ Other ☐ *If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow: Item 17 ☐ Item 18 ☐ If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes ☐ No ☑ (APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS) Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court. Yes ☐ No ☐ --- # SEC Form 20-F Cross reference information Form 20-F item number Page and caption references in this document* 1 Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers Not applicable 2 Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable Not applicable 3 Key Information A. [Reserved] B. Capitalization and indebtedness Not applicable C. Reason for the offer and use of proceed Not applicable D. Risk factor 184-201 4 Information on the Company A. History and development of the company 14, 80-83, 315-336, 402-406 (Note 25), 441, 449 ii (Market and other data), 14-24, 186-188, 300-313, 355-357 (Note 2) B. Business overview 421-425 (Notes 33 and 34), 434-436 (Note 42) C. Organizational structure 392-395 (Notes 19 and 20) D. Property, plants and equipment 4A Unresolved staff comments Not applicable 5 Operating and Financial Review and Prospects A. Operating result 100-104, 193-197, 202-213, 276-285, 290-291, 300-313, 315-336, 371-377 (Note 14) B. Liquidity and capital resource 192-193, 207-208, 276-285, 287, 347, 350, 351 (Note 1), 371-377 (Note 14), 407-410 (Notes 26 and 27), 421-422 (Note 33), 426-427 (Note 36), 466-475 C. Research and development, patents and licenses, etc Not applicable D. Trend information 184-201, 275-294, 315-336 E. Critical Accounting Estimates Not applicable F. [Reserved] G. [Reserved] 6 Directors, Senior Management and Employees A. Directors and senior management 72-75, 79, 109-115 B. Compensation 116-156, 413-420 (Notes 31 and 32), 430-431 (Note 38), 457-8, 464-465, 478 C. Board practice 72-75, 77-79, 92-99, 107-108, 116, 155-156, 457-458 D. Employees 26-28, 321-329, 355-357 (Note 2), 461 E. Share ownership 153-154, 413-414 (Note 31), 430-431 (Note 38), 464-465, 478 F. Erroneously awarded compensation Not applicable 7 Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions A. Major shareholder 113-114, 444-445, 452 B. Related party transaction 430-431 (Note 38), 478 C. Interest of experts and counsel Not applicable 8 Financial Information A. Consolidated statements and other financial information 339-437, 442, 444 B. Significant change Not applicable --- 9 **The Offer and Listing** A. Offer and listing detail 444, 451 B. Plan of distribution Not applicable C. Market 444, 451 D. Selling shareholder Not applicable E. Dilution Not applicable F. Expenses of the issue Not applicable 10 **Additional Information** A. Share capital Not applicable B. Memorandum and Articles of Association 109-115. 441-443 C. Material contract 130-133. 456-458 D. Exchange control 449 E. Taxation 446-449 F. Dividends and paying agent Not applicable G. Statement by expert Not applicable H. Documents on display 449 I. Subsidiary information 421-422 (Note 33), 434-436 (Note 42) J. Annual Report to Security Holders Not applicable 11 **Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk** 182-313, 371-390 (Notes 14-17) 12 **Description of Securities Other than Equity Securities** A. Debt Securities Not applicable B. Warrants and Rights Not applicable C. Other Securities Not applicable D. American Depository Shares 450 13 **Defaults, Dividend Averages and Delinquencies** Not applicable 14 **Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds** Not applicable 15 **Controls and Procedures** A. Disclosure controls and procedures 453 B. Management's annual report on internal control over financial reporting 108, 114-115 C. Attestation report of the registered public accounting firm 339-341 D. Changes in internal control over financial reporting 114-115 16A **Audit Committee Financial Expert** 75. 92-99 16B **Code of Ethics** 451 16C **Principal Accountant Fees and Services** 98-99, 432 (Note 39) 16D **Exemptions from Listing Standards for Audit Committees** Not applicable 16E **Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers** 460 16F **Change in Registrant's Certifying Accountant** Not applicable 16G **Corporate Governance** 107-108, 451 16H **Mine Safety Disclosure** Not applicable 16I **Disclosure Regarding Foreign Jurisdictions that Prevent Inspections** Not applicable 16J **Insider Trading Policies** 459 16K **Cybersecurity** 80-83, 102-104, 178-179, 193-194, 295-297 17 **Financial Statements** See item 8 18 **Financial Statements** Not applicable 19 **Exhibits** Exhibit Index * Captions have been included only in respect of pages with multiple sections on the same page in order to identify the relevant caption on that page covered by the corresponding Form 20-F item number. --- 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F Notes The terms Barclays or Group refer to Barclays PLC together with its subsidiaries. Unless otherwise stated, the income statement analysis compares the year ended 31 December 2025 to the corresponding twelve months of 2024 and balance sheet analysis as at 31 December 2025 with comparatives relating to 31 December 2024. The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Pounds Sterling respectively; the abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of US Dollars respectively; and the abbreviations ‘€m’ and ‘€bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Euros respectively. There are a number of key judgement areas, for example impairment calculations, which are based on models and which are subject to ongoing adjustment and modifications. Reported numbers reflect best estimates and judgements at the given point in time. Relevant terms that are used in this document but are not defined under applicable regulatory guidance or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) are explained in the results glossary that can be accessed at home.barclays/investor-relations/reports-and-events/latest-financial-results. Barclays is a frequent issuer in the debt capital markets and regularly meets with investors via formal road-shows and other ad hoc meetings. Consistent with its usual practice, Barclays expects that from time to time over the coming quarter it will meet with investors globally to discuss these results and other matters relating to the Group. Non-IFRS performance measures The Group's management believes that the non-IFRS performance measures included in this document provide valuable information to the readers of the financial statements as they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the businesses' performance between financial periods and provide more detail concerning the elements of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of the Group. They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by Barclays management. However, any non-IFRS performance measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well. Refer to the appendix on pages 330 to 334 for further information and calculations of non-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document, and the most directly comparable IFRS measures. Key non-IFRS measures included in this document, and the most directly comparable IFRS measures, are: - Average allocated equity represents the average shareholders' equity that is allocated to the businesses. The comparable IFRS measure is average equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 332; - Average allocated tangible equity is calculated as the average of the previous month's period end allocated tangible equity and the current month's period end allocated tangible equity. The average allocated tangible equity for the period is the average of the monthly averages within that period. Period end allocated tangible equity is calculated as 13.5% (2024: 13.5%) of RWAs for each business, adjusted for capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. Head Office allocated tangible equity represents the difference between the Group's tangible shareholders' equity and the amounts allocated to businesses. The comparable IFRS measure is average equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 332; - Average tangible shareholders' equity is calculated as the average of the previous month's period end tangible equity and the current month's period end tangible equity. The average tangible shareholders' equity for the period is the average of the monthly averages within that period. The comparable IFRS measure is average equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 332; - Group net interest income (NII) excluding Barclays Investment Bank (IB) and Head Office represents Group NII excluding IB NII and Head Office NII. The comparable IFRS measure is Group NII. A reconciliation is provided on page 333; - Operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct represents operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct charges. The comparable IFRS measure is operating expenses. A reconciliation is provided on page 333; - Return on average allocated equity represents the return on shareholders' equity that is allocated to the businesses. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 334; - Return on average allocated tangible equity is calculated as the annualised profit after tax attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent, as a proportion of average allocated tangible equity. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 334; - Return on average tangible shareholders' equity is calculated as the annualised profit after tax attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent, as a proportion of average shareholders' equity excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 334; and - Tangible net asset value per share is calculated by dividing shareholders' equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments, less goodwill and intangible assets, by the number of issued ordinary shares. The comparable IFRS measure is net asset value per share. A reconciliation is provided on page 333. --- # Forward-looking statements This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the Group. Barclays cautions readers that no forward-looking statement is a guarantee of future performance and that actual results or other financial condition or performance measures could differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements sometimes use words such as 'may', 'will', 'seek', 'continue', 'aim', 'anticipate', 'target', 'projected', 'expect', 'estimate', 'intend', 'plan', 'goal', 'believe', 'achieve' or other words of similar meaning. Forward-looking statements can be made in writing but also may be made verbally by directors, officers and employees of the Group (including during management presentations) in connection with this document. Examples of forward-looking statements include, among others, statements or guidance regarding or relating to the Group's future financial position, business strategy, income levels, costs, assets and liabilities, impairment charges, provisions, capital leverage and other regulatory ratios, capital distributions (including policy on dividends and share buybacks), return on tangible equity, projected levels of growth in banking and financial markets, industry trends, any commitments and targets (including sustainability-related commitments and targets), plans and objectives for future operations, International Financial Reporting Standards ('IFRS') and other statements that are not historical or current facts. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to future events and circumstances. Forward-looking statements speak only as at the date on which they are made. Forward-looking statements may be affected by a number of factors, including, without limitation: changes in legislation, regulations, governmental and regulatory policies, expectations and actions, voluntary codes of practices and the interpretation thereof, changes in IFRS and other accounting standards, including practices with regard to the interpretation and application thereof and emerging and developing sustainability reporting standards (including emissions accounting methodologies); changes in tax laws and practice; the outcome of current and future legal proceedings and regulatory investigations; the Group's ability along with governments and other stakeholders to measure, manage and mitigate the impacts of climate change effectively or navigate inconsistencies and conflicts in the manner in which climate policy is implemented in the regions where the Group operates, including as a result of the adoption of rules and regulations taking a different or opposing position on sustainability matters, or other forms of governmental and regulatory action against sustainability policies; environmental, social and geopolitical risks and incidents and similar events beyond the Group's control; financial crime; the impact of competition in the banking and financial services industry; capital, liquidity, leverage and other regulatory rules and requirements applicable to past, current and future periods; UK, US, Eurozone and global macroeconomic and business conditions, including inflation; volatility in credit and capital markets; market related risks such as changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates; reforms to benchmark interest rates and indices; higher or lower asset valuations; changes in credit ratings of any entity within the Group or any securities issued by it; changes in counterparty risk; changes in consumer behaviour; changes in trade policy, including the imposition of tariffs or other protectionist measures; the direct and indirect consequences of the conflicts in Ukraine and the Middle East on European and global macroeconomic conditions, political stability and financial markets; changes in US legislation and policy; developments in the UK's relationship with the European Union; the risk of cyberattacks, information or security breaches, technology failures or operational disruptions and any subsequent impact on the Group's reputation, business or operations; the use of new technology, including artificial intelligence; the Group's ability to access funding; and the success of acquisitions, disposals, joint ventures and other strategic transactions. A number of these factors are beyond the Group's control. As a result, the Group's actual financial position, results, financial and non-financial metrics or performance measures or its ability to meet commitments and targets may differ materially from the statements or guidance set forth in the Group's forward-looking statements. In setting its targets and outlook for the period 2026-2028, Barclays has made certain assumptions about the macroeconomic environment, including, without limitation, inflation, interest and unemployment rates, the different markets and competitive conditions in which Barclays operates, and its ability to grow certain businesses and achieve costs savings and other structural actions. Additional risks and factors which may impact the Group's future financial condition and performance are identified in Barclays PLC's filings with the US Securities and Exchange Commission ("SEC") (including, without limitation, this Barclays PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F for the financial year ended 31 December 2025), which are available on the SEC's website at www.sec.gov. Subject to Barclays PLC's obligations under the applicable laws and regulations of any relevant jurisdiction (including, without limitation, the UK and the US) in relation to disclosure and ongoing information, we undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise. # Market and other data This document contains information, including statistical data, about certain Barclays markets and its competitive position. Except as otherwise indicated, this information is taken or derived from Datastream and other external sources. Barclays cannot guarantee the accuracy of information taken from external sources, or that, in respect of internal estimates, a third party using different methods would obtain the same estimates as Barclays. # Uses of Internet addresses This document contains inactive textual addresses to internet websites operated by us and third parties. Reference to such websites is made for information purposes only, and information found at such websites is not incorporated by reference into this document. # References to Strategic Report and Pillar 3 Report This document contains references throughout to the Barclays PLC Strategic Report and Pillar 3 Report. References to the aforementioned reports are made for information purposes only, and information found in said reports is not incorporated by reference into this document. --- | Strategy | | 10 | | --- | --- | --- | | Climate & Sustainability | | 30 | | Governance | • Governance contents | 70 | | | • Directors’ report | 102 | | | • Remuneration report | 116 | | | • Other Governance | 157 | | Risk review | • Risk review contents | 180 | | | • Risk management | 182 | | | • Material existing and emerging risks | 184 | | | • Principal risk management | 202 | | | • Risk performance | 275 | | | • Supervision and regulation | 300 | | Financial review | • Key performance indicators | 315 | | | • Consolidated summary income statement | 317 | | | • Income statement commentary | 318 | | | • Consolidated summary balance sheet | 319 | | | • Balance sheet commentary | 320 | | | • Analysis of results by business | 321 | | | • Non-IFRS performance measures | 330 | | Financial statements | • Consolidated financial statements | 342 | | | • Notes to the financial statements | 351 | | Shareholder information | • Key dates, Annual General Meeting, dividends, and other useful information | 438 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 10 # Our business environment # The world in which we operate Barclays is driven by a common Purpose: working together for a better financial future. To do so, we must be strong as an institution, prepared for the future, and able to navigate different market conditions and evolving trends. # Broader considerations in our operating environment In the development of our strategy and the evolution of our operating model, we regularly review and reflect on the changing environment in which we operate. Our plan is designed to remain resilient amid ongoing volatility and uncertainty, while meeting the needs of our wider stakeholders – including customers, clients, regulators, and shareholders. ![img-0.jpeg](img-0.jpeg) # Geopolitical - Ongoing geopolitical conflicts - Rising protectionism and influence on trade flows - Political polarisation ![img-1.jpeg](img-1.jpeg) # Macroeconomic - Economic uncertainty and subsequent volatility - Disintermediation of existing markets - Demographic and immigration trends - Focus on defence spending ![img-2.jpeg](img-2.jpeg) # Climate - Energy transition and security - Changing climate cycles and associated physical risks ![img-3.jpeg](img-3.jpeg) # Technology - Adoption of AI and increasing cyber security threats - Customer expectations regarding digital experience and resilience - Traction of crypto and digital assets ![img-4.jpeg](img-4.jpeg) # Regulatory - Regulatory divergence - Implementation of capital regulations --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Our business model # Working together for a better financial future ## We deploy our resources... We draw on tangible and intangible assets to drive long-term, sustainable value creation. We invest and maintain our resources to ensure we can continue to provide maximum value to our customers and clients. ## Our people, Purpose, Values and Mindset Our people are our organisation. We deliver success through a Purpose-driven culture. ## Our brand Our brand equity instils trust, lowers the cost of acquiring customers and clients, and helps retain them for longer. ## Technology and infrastructure Our AI-enabled technology and infrastructure capabilities enhance customer experience and support strong resilience. ## Operations and governance Our risk management, governance and controls help ensure customer and client outcomes are delivered in the right way. ## ...to serve a broad range of customer and client needs... We provide a comprehensive offering through UK consumer, corporate and wealth and private banking franchises, a leading investment bank and a specialist US consumer bank. ## Lending We lend to customers and clients to support their needs. ## Protecting We ensure the assets of our clients and customers are safe. ## Investing and advising We help our customers and clients invest. ## Moving We facilitate transactions and move money around the world. ## Connecting We connect companies seeking funding. Our universal banking model enables us to create synergies across the organisation and deliver long-term value for our stakeholders. ## ...deliver sustainably higher returns... We seek growth and stability of income, delivering cost efficiencies, prudent risk management, and efficient allocation of our resources. ### Total income by business (£m) ![img-5.jpeg](img-5.jpeg) Excludes Head Office. A Barclays UK 8,708 B Barclays UK 2,064 Corporate Bank C Barclays Private 1,380 Bank and Wealth Management D Barclays 13,055 Investment Bank E Barclays US 3,681 Consumer Bank ### Profit before tax (PBT) by business (£m) ![img-6.jpeg](img-6.jpeg) Excludes Head Office. A Barclays UK 3,413 B Barclays UK 970 Corporate Bank C Barclays Private 375 Bank and Wealth Management D Barclays 4,614 Investment Bank E Barclays US 515 Consumer Bank ## ...and provide positive outcomes for our stakeholders. Our diversified model positively impacts our stakeholders and provides the resilience and consistency needed to deliver value for them. ## Customers and clients Supporting our customers and clients to achieve their goals with our products and services. ## Colleagues Providing employment to c.93,000 colleagues globally and helping them develop as professionals. ## Society Providing support to our communities, and access to social and environmental financing to address societal needs. ## Investors Delivering attractive and sustainable shareholder returns on the foundation of a strong balance sheet. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Technology # Supercharging our strategy through technology ## Innovating for customers and clients For customers and businesses, our investment translates into real benefits. From more intuitive digital experiences that make everyday banking simple, to faster onboarding so new customers can get started without delay, stronger fraud protection to keep accounts safe, and richer market insights to help businesses grow. Technology, including AI, is enabling us to deliver seamless, connected services that anticipate customer and client needs and provide faster, more personalised, more intuitive services. ## AI Help Hub Assistant In Barclays UK, our newly introduced AI-powered Help Hub Assistant supports colleagues in delivering exceptional customer service. This conversational tool gives colleagues instant access to accurate information as they support customers in-the-moment. We're investing in modern tools and smarter systems so we can deliver better and more personal experiences for our customers and clients, while strengthening our resiliency and reducing complexity and cost. ## Empowering our colleagues Our teams have access to modern tools like Copilot and the Barclays AI platform to help them make better decisions, collaborate more effectively across regions and focus on higher value activities. We're also fostering a culture of experimentation and collaboration. Through hackathons, demos and other interactive events we've reached over 20,000 colleagues, empowering them to experiment to deliver scalable solutions that drive sustainable growth and value for our customers and clients. ## AI for colleagues M365 Copilot is Microsoft's AI-powered assistant and we have c.100,000 licences for colleagues across the bank to help improve productivity and encourage innovation. In addition, we're investing in our Barclays AI platform, which provides a common set of services for the responsible development, deployment and operation of AI solutions. Technology is at the heart of Barclays' ambition to be Simpler, Better and More balanced ## Modernising our technology We're focused on consolidating and simplifying our estate by investing in enterprise-wide platforms across infrastructure, data and digital. This focus on common platform adoption is supported by decommissioning legacy platforms to reduce technology debt, complexity and cost, whilst strengthening resilience. ## Hybrid cloud strategy Our hybrid cloud strategy - where we use both internal and external services - helps to build resilience, reliability, agility, and improved operational performance across our technology. Today, we have almost 90% of our estate in the cloud. This hybrid multi-cloud environment provides flexibility, scalability and the control needed for future growth, underpinning our data, AI and digital-platform capabilities. ## Driving innovation through partnerships We're working with leading technology partners, including Amazon Web Services, Microsoft, GitLab and Databricks, to harness data, digital and AI. These collaborations also shape thinking on AI, innovation and industry standards; for example, in November 2025 Barclays was recognised as one of the inaugural Frontier Firms – an initiative by Harvard Business School and Microsoft that brings together organisations putting AI at the heart of their transformation strategy. ## AI for engineers Through our partnerships we're embracing AI across our software development tools to enable developers to plan, develop and deploy new technologies at pace and responsibly. Across Barclays, 19,000 developers have access to AI tools, with early-stage adoption already delivering productivity gains of c.15%. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Our plan and targets # Delivering our next three-year plan We have a clear plan to deliver a better run, more strongly performing and sustainably higher returning Barclays. | Our Purpose | | Working together for a better financial future | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Our Vision | | The UK-centred leader in global finance | | | | | | | Our Priorities | | Simpler | | Better | | More balanced | | | We want Barclays to be renowned for excellent operational performance, highly satisfied customers and clients, strong liquidity, capital and risk management, and predictable, attractive shareholder returns. We have built strong foundations and have a clear plan to achieve these objectives and deliver further value for shareholders by 2028. Over the next three years we are accelerating momentum towards making Barclays Simpler, Better and More balanced. | Simpler business | | Better financial returns | | More balanced allocation of RWAs | | | | | | Five focused businesses Digital and AI enabling revenue growth and efficiencies | | Continue to improve performance across all our businesses Improving mix towards UK businesses | | Capital allocation to our highest returning businesses UK lending growth to diversify sources of net interest income Capital discipline in Investment Bank | | | | | Simpler organisation | | Better customer experience and outcomes | | Diversify sources of income growth | | | | | Standardised, modernised, harmonised processes | | Improving customer experience across businesses Deepening relationships in corporates and retail | | Invest in fee-based income growth | | | 2028 targets | Statutory RoTE1>14% | Total payout 2026-2028>£15bn2with capacity to support investment and growth | Investment Bank RWAsc.50% | Supporting targets | Income>5% CAGR2025-2028 | Cost: income ratioLow 50s% | Loan loss rate50-60bps through the cycle | | 2026 targets | Statutory RoTE1>12% | Total payout 2024-2026At least £10bn2,3incl. planned £2bn dividend for 2026 | Investment Bank RWAsMid 50s%4 | Supporting targets | Incomec.£31bn | Cost: income ratioHigh 50s% | Loan loss rate50-60bps through the cycle | | 2025 actuals | Statutory RoE 9.8%Statutory RoTE 11.3% | Total payout 2025£3.7bn | Investment Bank RWAs55% | Supporting actuals | Income£29.1bn | Cost: income ratio61% | Loan loss rate52bps | # Continue to target a 13-14% CET1 ratio range # Notes: 1 Management does not assess forward-looking "return on equity" (target RoE) as a performance indicator of the business, and therefore reconciliation of the forward-looking non-IFRS measure "return on tangible equity" (target RoTE) to an equivalent IFRS measure is not available without unreasonable efforts. 2 This multiyear plan, including planned dividend of £2bn for 2026, is subject to supervisory and Board approval, anticipated financial performance and our published CET1 range of $13\% - 14\%$ . 3 Progressive increase in 2026 total capital returns versus 2025. 4 Updated to reflect IRB model migration and Basel 3.1 now expected in 2027. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 14 # Group overview # A diversified structure promoting synergies Our five business areas deliver greater accountability and transparency for our shareholders while supporting synergies across the Group that allow us to better serve our customers and clients. ![img-7.jpeg](img-7.jpeg) # 2025 RWA allocation Barclays UK 24% Barclays UK Corporate Bank 7% Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management 7% Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management 2% Barclays US Consumer Bank 8% Head Office 8% ![img-8.jpeg](img-8.jpeg) Barclays Investment Bank 55% Barclays PLC Barclays Pivote Bank Offering co-branded partner cards, deposit accounts and personal loans. With more than 25 million customers, we work with some of America's leading brands across the airline, travel, retail and affinity sectors. Notes: 1 Smart Investor will be known as Barclays Direct Investing. 2 Head Office provides centralised services across the Group. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review ## Barclays UK ### Barclays UK consists of Retail Banking and Business Banking. #### Our business - Retail Banking offers retail solutions to help customers with their day-to-day banking needs, including current accounts, savings accounts, mortgages and unsecured lending, such as credit cards and loans. - Business Banking serves business clients, from high-growth start-ups to SMEs, with banking solutions and specialist advice. #### Focus areas - Improving customer experience. - Creating opportunities to deepen relationships with our customers and clients. - Growing lending market share. - Delivering operational efficiencies to facilitate investment in growth. ### Measuring where we are | £8.7bn | £3.4bn | | --- | --- | | Income | Profit before tax | | 2024: £8.3bn | 2024: £3.6bn | | £4.9bn | 15.5% | | Operating expenses | Return on equity | | 2024: £4.3bn | 2024: 16.9% | | | 20.7% | | | Return on tangible equity | | | 2024: 23.1% | ## Year in review Barclays UK is one of the country's leading financial brands. We are committed to putting customers first – powered by the expertise and passion of our people, and strengthened by technology. Our multi-brand proposition - which includes Barclaycard, Tesco Bank, Kensington Mortgages and relationships with Amazon and IAG Loyalty (to offer Avios benefits) - reflects the broad range of solutions we offer customers. Our 2025 performance demonstrates Barclays UK's strength, delivering a RoE of 15.5% and RoTE of 20.7%. Customers and clients remain at the heart of everything we do. This year, we enhanced experiences and deepened relationships. We extended opening hours across 86 branches, adding c.33,500 hours per year of in-branch availability to support customers at times that work for them. A significant increase in our channel transactional Net Promoter Score (tNPS) - which measures customer satisfaction across our retail colleague-led channels - since 2023 reflects the high level of support our colleagues give our customers. This now stands at +61 for branch servicing. Technology and digitisation play an important role in helping us better serve our customers and clients. Within Barclays UK, a significant amount of innovation is driven by our teams, leading to faster response times provided by the tools and technology our colleagues use every day. We also used technology to make it easier for our customers to save. We redesigned our Savings Hub, making it simpler to find and choose the right products. Our customers can now digitally provide instructions on maturing bonds through the app in just a few minutes. ### Notes: 1. Three month rolling average for December 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) A key focus for Barclays UK is to grow lending to individuals and businesses, and we have continued to make progress. We are making our mortgage application process simpler and helping more customers achieve home ownership. We relaunched Mortgage Boost, enabling customers to support family members to get onto the property ladder beyond just helping with a deposit – another option alongside our Family Springboard offering. Ahead of the 1 April 2025 stamp duty changes, we processed over 14,000 completions in March alone. In total, we supported 146,000 mortgage completions, the highest since 2021 and an increase of 42% on 2024. Loans acquisitions have increased 4% year-on-year driven by more relevant, in-the-moment marketing and improved decisioning capabilities. For the second year running, we have onboarded over one million new Barclaycard customers and provided existing customers with improved journeys and capabilities, including the option to switch to the Amazon Barclaycard. One year since the Tesco Bank acquisition, we are making good progress on the integration and have grown credit card and personal loan balances by continuing to offer value to customers through Clubcard. Business Banking contributed to the UK business landscape by lending £3bn to small businesses. We also celebrated 10 years of Eagle Labs, which has supported almost 20,000 businesses that have collectively secured over £5bn in investment and created more than 50,000 jobs¹ over the course of a decade. ## Looking ahead We remain focused on improving our products and services to deliver a world-class experience for customers and clients. We will continue to enhance how customers interact with us, making banking simpler and more intuitive across personal and business channels. Technology, AI and innovation will play a key role, helping us to streamline processes, strengthen resilience, offer a better experience on our digital channels and support colleagues in providing exceptional service. We see opportunities to grow retail deposits and lending, and business banking by deepening engagement and relationships, and building stronger propositions. In particular, we are focused on growing our Premier customer base. Completing the Tesco Bank integration will allow us to broaden our reach and create greater value for customers. We are also committed to helping people manage their money better to achieve their goals, and are focused on building people's financial confidence across the UK. > "Our efforts to enhance customer and client service have helped improve NPS scores - with Barclays UK NPS reaching +25², the highest since we started tracking." > > *Vim Maru* > CEO, Barclays UK* ## Notes: 1 Source: Beahurst, for businesses supported by Eagle Labs between December 2015 to September 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) ## UK Corporate Bank UK Corporate Bank offers a range of Corporate Lending and Transaction Banking services to clients with an annual revenue of more than £6.5m, through to FTSE350 companies. ### Our business - Corporate Lending: Offers a range of term, revolving and overdraft facilities to medium and large-sized corporates across the UK, with financing solutions tailored to specific industries and sectors. - Transaction Banking: Provides cash management, trade and working capital solutions, risk management solutions and payment services internationally. ### Focus areas - Driving productivity and seamless digital delivery, simplifying and improving client experience. - Growing broad-based income through deeper client relationships with products and solutions which address their needs. - Growing share of lending and attracting new clients. ### Measuring where we are | £2.1bn | £1.0bn | | --- | --- | | Income | Profit before tax | | 2024: £1.8bn | 2024: £0.7bn | | £1.1bn | 18.9% | | Operating expenses | Return on equity | | 2024: £1.0bn | 2024: 16.0% | | | 18.9% | | | Return on tangible equity | | | 2024: 16.0% | ### Year in review Barclays UK Corporate Bank serves over 13,000 businesses across the UK, playing an important role in joining together the different aspects of the organisation to deliver for clients. In 2025, the UK Corporate Bank delivered robust income growth of 16% underpinned by a strong deposit franchise and growing debt balances. RoE was 18.9% and RoTE was 18.9%, and we maintained a disciplined cost-to-income ratio, ensuring operational efficiency. Throughout the year, we responded proactively to a competitive market. By adapting to evolving client needs and maintaining our focus on providing lending to help our clients to invest, we positively repositioned ourselves among peers and grew lending market share by 1%. In 2025, we attracted c.580 new to bank clients who drove c.50% of the increase in lending compared to 2024. This focus enabled us to achieve total loan growth of £4.6bn for the year. Despite our growth in lending, our loan loss rate remains well within our stated risk appetite and guidance. Our willingness to lend plays a crucial role in giving UK businesses the confidence to invest in their workforce and technology, helping in turn to unlock economic growth. We made strides in enhancing client experience by advancing our digital capabilities and streamlining processes. Clients now have more opportunities to self-serve through digital channels, including our 'Client Chat' capability, which resolves a significant number of queries at first contact. In 2025, c.50% of client interactions were self-served, compared to c.40% in 2024. ### Notes: 1. Bank of England December 2025 market data. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) We’ve also reduced client onboarding times by around 50% since the start of 2024 and, in response to client feedback, we have improved the speed, ease, and flexibility of our borrowing solutions, with further enhancements planned for 2026. To strengthen client relationships and support diversified income streams, we’ve invested significantly in modernising our technology. Our iPortal platform, which is now available to more clients, has simplified how they interact with us – a key step towards consolidating five online access channels to a single online point of access to our products and services. All our corporate clients will be enabled on iPortal through 2026. Our focus on deepening relationships and our efforts to improve experience have been reflected in improved client satisfaction scores. Measured as an independent benchmarking score by Savanta, our overall client satisfaction score has increased to 66%, up four percentage points from 2024 and 10 percentage points from 2023. Satisfaction scores relating to our client-facing colleagues are also strong, placing us second among our peers¹. In April 2025, we announced a long-term strategic partnership with Brookfield to grow and transform Barclays’ payment acceptance business, which provides critical infrastructure to the UK economy, processing billions of pounds of payments annually for small businesses and corporate clients. Our extensive client relationships and experience of UK payments will benefit from Brookfield’s global private equity expertise in payments, technology, operational transformation and corporate carve-outs, to ensure that the payment acceptance business is strategically positioned for long-term growth. The partnership will drive business growth by broadening the range of services offered and enhancing the experience for both existing and prospective clients. ## Looking ahead We will continue to deepen client relationships, accelerate digital transformation and improve operational efficiency. We are focused on enhancing our product mix, strengthening income quality and driving technology-led improvements in client experience. Efforts will be shaped by the evolving market environment, with an emphasis on adapting to client needs, regulatory changes and competitive pressures. We will continue to simplify processes, invest in talent and leverage data-driven insights to support growth and resilience. > "Our willingness to lend plays a crucial role in giving UK businesses the confidence to invest in their workforce and technology, helping in turn to unlock economic growth." > > Matt Hammerstein > CEO, Barclays UK Corporate Bank Notes: 1. SavantaMarket Vue Survey, Q4 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) ## Private Bank and Wealth Management Private Bank and Wealth Management (PBWM) comprises PBWM UK – serving clients across the full wealth continuum in the UK and Crown Dependencies – and PBWM International, serving high- and ultra-high-net worth clients in selected international markets. ### Our business - UK Digital Investing is for self-directed investors, with investment starting from just £1. - UK Affluent is for UK clients with £250k to £3m of investable assets¹. - Private Banking UK is a full-service proposition for clients with investable assets of £3m+. - Private Banking International is a full-service proposition for clients with investable assets of £5m+ internationally², with a focus on clients in the Europe, Middle East and Asia wealth corridors. ### Focus areas - Leveraging our simplified business structure – aligned to market opportunity in the UK and internationally – and reinvesting cost efficiencies to strengthen the business and support growth. - Supporting Private Bank clients with their lifestyle, liquidity and legacy, and helping retail investors gain access to transparent, fairly priced investment solutions. - Continuing to grow assets under management to increase the relative contribution of non-interest income, to deliver high-quality recurring revenue. ### Measuring where we are | £1.4bn | £0.4bn | | --- | --- | | Income | Profit before tax | | 2024: £1.3bn | 2024: £0.4bn | | £1.0bn | 24.3% | | Operating expenses | Return on equity | | 2024: £0.9bn | 2024: 25.7% | | | 26.3% | | | Return on tangible equity | | | 2024: 28.1% | ### Year in review PBWM’s vision is to be the investment partner for our clients, their families and the next generation. In 2025, financial markets witnessed trade and geopolitical volatility, and strong tailwinds driven by AI – investors looked to take advantage of volatility spikes while diversifying risk. For PBWM, this led to strong transactional activity supported by increased trading on our digital investing offering, continued inflows into multi-asset portfolios, and alternative strategies such as private markets and hedge funds. Our ability to support clients in such environments sustained our strong business performance. Assets under management grew by £5.2bn and PBWM overall achieved a RoE of 24.3% and RoTE of 26.3%. At the start of 2025, PBWM simplified its business model to operate through two core areas: PBWM UK and PBWM International. Throughout the year, there were a series of strategic hires to strengthen the business. In our UK Digital Investing business, we further enhanced client journeys and investment capabilities on our Smart Investor platform. These changes continued to support growth, with c.65,000 new accounts opened in 2025, up 11% year on year and up 169% compared to 2023 levels. In addition, we were awarded Best Stocks & Shares ISA Provider from Moneyfacts and received a ‘Value for Money’ consumer rating from Boring Money. ### Notes: 1. The lower end threshold is under review. 2. For India, the Private Bank proposition is available for clients with investable assets of £3m+. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) In UK Affluent, we launched a pilot of a new digitally enabled mass affluent proposition – focused initially on Barclays UK Premier clients with £250k-£1m in assets to invest. Our ambition is to provide a fairly priced, transparently constructed advice service addressing the needs of this segment. In our UK Private Bank, we expanded our Private Markets proposition with the launch of a new multi-vintage private equity fund and made it easier for clients to use our securities backed lending capability. In addition, we continued to grow our assets under management in our flagship funds and discretionary managed portfolios, and maintained their strong underlying long-term investment performance. Internationally, we have been focused on building our presence in the Middle East and Asia. In order to further support our international capabilities, we continue to progress the development of our new Singapore booking centre, which we intend to launch during 2026. Underpinning all of our strategic ambitions is a continued focus on improving our risk and control resilience, including by increasing our automation levels. # Looking ahead Within UK Digital Investing, we're committed to delivering an integrated digital SIPP (self-invested personal pension). Following the completion of our pilot, we're launching our new UK mass affluent proposition, starting with Barclays UK Premier customers. We will also focus on supporting retail investing through the launch of Targeted Support following the FCA's Advice Guidance Boundary Review. Within the Private Bank we will continue to enhance our client experience, focusing on our digital capabilities, as well as further expanding our credit proposition. We're investing in productivity and generative AI (GenAI) capabilities that support our front-line colleagues so they can spend more time with clients. We plan to expand our international business with further investments in the Middle East and Asia markets, including the launch of our new Singapore booking centre. "We have continued to strengthen our capabilities and service this year, supporting clients across the UK and in priority international markets." Sasha Wiggins CEO, Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) ## Investment Bank The Investment Bank provides corporate clients, money managers, financial institutions, governments and supranational organisations with advisory, finance and risk management services. ## Our business - Global Markets provides institutional investors, sovereigns, and corporates with a full range of execution services, ideas and risk management solutions across asset classes (Equities, Credit, Rates, FX and Securitised Products). The Research team provides institutional investors with data-driven analysis, actionable insights and access to our analysts across global sectors, markets and economies. - Investment Banking works with companies, governments and financial institutions worldwide to provide expert advice, innovative solutions and access to capital. It includes International Corporate Banking, which provides financial institutions and large corporate clients with wholesale lending and treasury solutions – supported by deep industry knowledge and local, on-the-ground specialists. ## Focus areas - Driving higher RWA productivity across all Investment Bank businesses. - Deepening client relationships while maintaining prudent risk management. - In Global Markets, sustaining momentum in our businesses with Top 5 market share¹, growing our focus businesses and continuing to scale more stable financing income. - In Investment Banking, building share and product penetration across Advisory, Capital Markets and Treasury Coverage, and delivering an expanded reach for our International Corporate Bank. ## Measuring where we are | £13.1bn | £4.6bn | | --- | --- | | Income | Profit before tax | | 2024: £11.8bn | 2024: £3.8bn | | £8.1bn | 10.6% | | Operating expenses | Return on equity | | 2024: £7.9bn | 2024: 8.5% | | | 10.6% | | | Return on tangible equity | | | 2024: 8.5% | ## Year in review Barclays has a top-tier Investment Bank supporting corporate and institutional clients around the world. In 2025, we maintained our rank of sixth across the Investment Bank in both Global Markets² and Investment Banking³. We are a leading non-US-domiciled bank that can consistently compete with its US peers in each of the major capital markets of the US, Europe, and Asia. Through our expertise, scale, and reach, we support global clients and help them achieve their commercial goals. The Investment Bank delivered a RoE of 10.6% and RoTE of 10.6% and remained disciplined on costs with consistent operational progress, following seven consecutive quarters of positive jaws leading to a cost-to-income ratio of 62%. RWAs remained stable for the fourth consecutive year. We grew income and improved return on RWAs by focusing on more stable income streams and on disciplined client management, capital deployment, and technology enhancements to improve client experience, such as BARXBot, a client-facing GenAI chatbot that automates how colleagues in Global Markets handle Requests for Quotes (RFQs) for clients. ## Notes: 1. Top 5 market share as defined in the 20 February 2024 Investor Update: 1H23 and FY19 Coalition Greenwich Global Competitor Analytics. Industry wallet is defined as the total revenue of the following banks: BofA, Barclays, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Suisse, Deutsche Bank, Goldman Sachs, J.P. Morgan, Morgan Stanley and UBS. Analysis is based on Barclays' internal business structure and internal revenues. Market share for purpose of this analysis is calculated as Barclays' internal revenues divided by the aggregate revenue of the banks identified above within the given product set. 2. Based on external reported revenues. Peer banks include BoA, BNP, CITI, DB, GS, JPM, MS and UBS. 3. Dealogic for the period 1 January 2025 to 31 December 2025 (as at 6 January 2026). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) "Our relentless client focus, trusted expertise, and fully integrated model allow us to better understand client needs and deliver tailored products and services to help them succeed." Adeel Khan Head of Global Markets The Investment Bank helped clients navigate a complex, evolving landscape throughout 2025 - one shaped by policy change, geopolitical events and economic conditions - by delivering strategic solutions through our diversified portfolio of products and services. In Global Markets, we remain focused on executing our key product priorities while delivering our full suite of products and services to our clients. We continue to progress on our goal of achieving 70 top five ranks with our Top 100 clients. We have made strong progress with improved performance in the three focus businesses in Markets, while sustaining momentum in financing. Our Research team is central to our Investment Bank franchise and continues to rank highly among our institutional client base. According to Extel, Barclays ranks as the #4 overall global research firm and #3 for developed markets. We continue to expand our Barclays conference and corporate access offering across the Americas and EMEA. Engagement with our Barclays Live platform has grown, with site visits up 11% and readership up 18%, highlighting the strength of the platform in delivering differentiated insights to our clients. In Investment Banking, we delivered revenue growth of 3% year on year. We also made good progress in key focus areas, continuing to optimise our loan book which helped to drive improved return on RWAs. This year, we maintained our traditional strength in DCM, and saw an increase in both ECM fee share and advisory fee share with financial sponsors². International Corporate Bank (ICB) revenues were up 10% year on year, reflecting the continued rollout of the Treasury Coverage model - which has doubled the number of focus clients with this model since 2024. This has also helped to drive c.23% year on year growth in US deposits³. # Looking ahead Our goal is to strengthen our position as a leading global investment bank by leveraging our advisory expertise, deep sector knowledge, and differentiated client offering. The Investment Banking business is focused on building share in Advisory and Capital Markets through productivity improvement, Treasury Coverage evolution and the continued investment and growth of our International Corporate Bank. Global Markets continues its focus on strengthening its core capabilities while maintaining a strong baseline of stable revenues in the form of financing. We aim to be prudent managers of the firm's capital, and to drive consistent returns through client discipline, focused execution, capital nimbleness and operational efficiency. We're also streamlining operations, reducing legacy systems, and leveraging AI to scale and innovate. We plan to achieve this through low single-digit compound annual income growth combined with disciplined cost management, driving operating leverage. # Notes: 1. Dealogic as at 31 December 2025, based on offer to market. 2. Dealogic Banking Fee share as at 31 December 2025. 3. Reflects month-end deposits. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) ## US Consumer Bank US Consumer Bank (USCB) is a leading co-branded credit card issuer and financial services partner in the United States. ### Our business - Barclays US Consumer Bank has more than 25 million customers and partnerships with 20 of America's leading brands across the airline, travel, retail and affinity sectors. - We provide co-branded, small business and private label credit cards, personal loans, online savings accounts, and certificates of deposits. ### Focus areas - Scaling and diversifying by growing existing partnerships and winning new partners. - Investing in digitisation and AI to deliver enhanced customer experiences and operational efficiencies. - Improving net interest margin by optimising pricing and credit mix, while reducing funding costs. - Selective risk transfer to optimise use of balance sheet. ### Measuring where we are | £3.7bn | £0.5bn | | --- | --- | | Income | Profit before tax | | 2024: £3.3bn | 2024: £0.4bn | | £1.6bn | 9.5% | | Operating expenses | Return on equity | | 2024: £1.6bn | 2024: 8.1% | | | 11.0% | | | Return on tangible equity | | | 2024: 9.1% | ## Year in review The US is the world's largest credit card market, and growing. With a c.3% share¹ of the total market and partnerships with 20 major brands, we continue to see significant opportunities for growth. In 2025, we delivered RoE of 9.5%, up from 8.1% in 2024 and 3.4% in 2023, and a RoTE of 11.0%, up from 9.1% in 2024 and 4.1% in 2023. Our results were impacted by the appreciation of the average GBP against USD through 2025. However, when normalised for FX movements, in USD terms income and profit before tax were up 14% and 31% respectively, year on year. We remain focused on building lasting partnerships with top US brands. In 2025, we launched a new co-branded card programme with iconic automaker General Motors (GM) and acquired $1.6bn in receivables, further diversifying our mix of card partners. We also extended our current partnership agreements with Wyndham Hotels & Resorts, Upromise and our cruise line partners: Carnival, Princess and Holland America. We added three million new customers organically in 2025, and our average FICO* score² remains stable at 757, reflecting the strength of our prime customer base. Our average payment rate of 31% in the fourth quarter is higher than pre-pandemic levels, further demonstrating the resilience and quality of our book. We grew our retail deposit balances by 20% year on year and increased the percentage of core deposit funding for USCB from 64% to 69%. This was driven by demand for the tiered savings product and a new suite of exclusive digital banking products offered through our co-branded banking partnership with AARP. ### Notes: 1. Source: newyorkfed.org/microeconomics/hhdc 2. FICO* is a registered trademark of Fair Isaac Corporation in the United States and other countries. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) In 2025, we announced that we had entered into an agreement to acquire Best Egg¹, a leading US digital direct-to-consumer originator of personal loans. Through our continuous focus on enhancing customer experience, transactional NPS (tNPS) for digital and contact centre agent servicing averaged 63 and 52 respectively. Digital performance remained consistent with 2024, while contact centre performance improved by one point year on year. In 2025, we improved digital onboarding, increased self-service options and developed flexible payment features for our customers. We also expanded our Rewards Hub, an intuitive, one-stop digital shop for cardmembers to more easily manage their benefits. Over the past year, unique visitors to the Rewards Hub increased by 15%, demonstrating stronger brand loyalty and digital connection. Since 2023, our investments in digitisation have led to an increase in customers using e-statements and resulted in higher digital engagement with 96.2% of customers who interact with us doing so through digital channels². The percentage of customers using the Barclays mobile app also increased 5.5 percentage points year on year³. Leveraging digital platforms to drive greater efficiency has helped reduce full year 2025 USCB cost to income ratio to 45%, down from 49% in 2024 and 51% in 2023. # Looking ahead We remain committed to executing our strategy and improving returns. We plan to scale the cards business through organic growth and new partnership acquisitions as appropriate and accelerate USCB's diversification through the Best Egg acquisition. We're embracing the latest technologies, such as AI and agile scalable platforms, to drive greater efficiency and deliver better experiences for our customers. We continue to enhance our digital capabilities and provide seamless, intuitive experiences across all channels. We will maintain our focus on customer feedback, continually optimise our processes, and invest in tools to reduce friction and drive loyalty and sustainable growth. "In 2025, we launched a new co-branded card programme with General Motors, entered into an agreement to acquire Best Egg, and extended our current partnership agreements with Wyndham Hotels & Resorts, Upromise and our cruise line partners: Carnival, Princess and Holland America." Denny Nealon CEO of US Consumer Bank # Note: 1. Measured at exit at end December 2025. Includes primary consumer card customers. Monthly interactions exclude Interactive Voice Response (IVR). 2. Reflects rate movement from December 2024 to December 2025 for mobile app users divided by open customers. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) ## Barclays UK Net Promoter Score (NPS) ![img-9.jpeg](img-9.jpeg) ## About this KPI and why we use it Net Promoter Score (NPS) is used to measure the strength of customer relationships. We track NPS to identify both our strengths and where there is room for improvement, informing how we develop our services and products in the future. Maintaining strong, personal relationships and building trust and advocacy is key across all our divisions, but most observable and material in Barclays UK which represents the largest customer base for which we serve customers throughout their financial lives. ## How we performed We improved Barclays UK main current account NPS to +25¹; our highest score since we began tracking in 2013, and an increase of eight on December 2024. This uplift was broadly across customer segments. Premier NPS was a significant driver, alongside improvements to customer service across channels and journeys. ## Barclays UK complaints (% movement year on year) ![img-10.jpeg](img-10.jpeg) ## About this KPI and why we use it The FCA publishes complaints information every six months – a good measure of how well UK institutions are driving customer outcomes. We measure our volume of complaints, tracking against goals and reviewing root causes to inform changes to our products and services. ## How we performed Material increase in complaints year on year was driven by the IT incident on 31 January 2025. Excluding this, complaints reduced by 2%. ## US Consumer Bank digitally interacting customer (%) ![img-11.jpeg](img-11.jpeg) ## About this KPI and why we use it Digitally interacting customer percentage assesses the monthly rate of customers using digital channels to interact with us². This measurement reflects the general health of the digital experience and allows us to better understand customer behaviour to boost satisfaction and efficiency. ## How we performed Digitally interacting customer percentage improved by 30 bps year on year, driven by continued investment in our mobile app and digital capabilities, including enhancements to registration and self-service. ## Investment Bank revenue ranks and market shares (%, #) ![img-12.jpeg](img-12.jpeg) A Global Markets revenue ranking and share³ B Dealogic Investment Banking global fee ranking and share demonstrating our performance vs peers⁴ ## About this KPI and why we use it Revenue ranks and market shares are a good indicator to monitor success and identify opportunities. By using Dealogic Investment Banking global fee ranking and share, and a comparison to global peers' share of reported revenues for Global Markets, we can assess our relative performance versus a defined peer group⁵ clearly and transparently. ## How we performed In 2025, we maintained our rank of sixth across the Investment Bank in both Global Markets and Investment Banking. See page 116 for details on Executive Director remuneration linked to these KPIs ## Notes: 1. © Ipsos 2025, Financial Research Survey (FRS), 12 months ended December 2025 (Dec 2024). Results based on a sample of 7,546 (6,646) Barclays main current account customers and 1,028 (865) Barclays Premier main current account customers. Total sample of ~50,000 GB adults (aged 16+) a year, weighted to align with overall profile of GB population. 2. Measured at exit at end of December 2025. Includes primary consumer card customers. Excludes Interactive Voice Response (IVR). 3. FY25 Market share for Barclays is based on external reported revenues. Peer banks include BoA, BNP, CITI, DB, GS, JPM, MS and UBS. 4. Dealogic for the period 1 January 2025 to 31 December 2025 (as at 6 January 2026). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) ## Colleagues At the heart of achieving our plan to make Barclays Simpler, Better and More balanced are our c.93,000 colleagues. We are united by a shared Purpose, Values and Mindset, delivering to a consistently excellent standard in all we do – and we are making Barclays a great place to work, where every colleague can reach their potential. ![img-13.jpeg](img-13.jpeg) Where to find out more: For further metrics, please see home.barclays/our-sustainability-/sustainability-resource-hub/reporting-and-disclosures/ ## Engaging with colleagues Sharing our strategy with colleagues – and explaining how they can contribute towards its delivery – has been a key part of our 2025 engagement. Regular, two-way dialogue helps us understand what is working well across the organisation and where we can improve. Engagement with colleagues is delivered through townhalls, skip-level meetings, site visits, leader-led events, focus groups and surveys. Through our bi-annual Your View survey, our people can share their feedback on working at Barclays – and 75% took part in 2025. We are committed to a respectful and inclusive environment where everyone feels safe to speak up. Our processes for raising concerns and whistleblowing provide channels for anonymous colleague feedback. Our longstanding partnership with Unite in the UK offers further insight into the views of our people. We continue to consult with Unite on major change programmes to minimise job losses and prioritise reskilling and redeployment. ## Embedding a consistently excellent standard A consistently excellent standard is what we expect of ourselves – and what our customers, clients and all our stakeholders trust us to deliver. This continues to be an integral part of our culture and a key enabler of our three-year plan. Our consistently excellent culture-change programme continued to embed these standards across the organisation. Throughout 2025, local initiatives across divisions and functions supported Group-wide efforts to simplify processes, strengthen risk and control, and drive efficiency. ## Notes: 1. Except for employees at Managing Director grade and Material Risk Takers, for whom a portion of compensation is typically delivered in shares. ## Global Share Award ## Colleagues share in our success ![img-14.jpeg](img-14.jpeg) To thank colleagues for their hard work and commitment as we continue to execute our strategy, in February 2025, colleagues¹ were granted Barclays shares – valued at approximately £500. In 2026, we will grant a similar colleague share award for the second successive year. By enabling colleagues to share directly in the bank’s future success, these awards celebrate the achievements to date and recognise the collective effort that is still required to help build a Simpler, Better and More balanced Barclays. A consistently excellent standard is now embedded in HR tools, processes and products from hiring and induction, to performance management, promotions and development programmes. By 2025, 1,995 workshops were delivered to our colleagues globally, creating strong understanding across the organisation of what it means to deliver to a consistently excellent standard. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) We also launched the Risk and Control Digital Credential (RCDC) – our first Group-wide, externally accredited online learning programme, certified by the Institute of Risk Management. The RCDC equips colleagues with the knowledge and skills to proactively manage risk and strengthen controls. At the end of 2025, almost 25,000 colleagues had achieved accreditation. This initiative marked a significant step in our ongoing commitment to strong risk management and delivering to a consistently excellent standard. ## Investing in our talent Our talent ambition is to help our colleagues grow, develop and thrive at every level of our organisation, building a strong talent pipeline for the future. In 2025, we strengthened how we identify, assess and develop high-potential talent, introducing greater rigour and consistency, through implementing our Talent Management Standards including a consistent definition of potential, approach to talent reviews and calibration. We delivered accelerator programmes and sponsorship initiatives and continued our Evolution leadership development programme. We also offered senior leaders a suite of practical tools, targeted workshops, and resources to develop their skills. In 2025, we hired 1,595 graduates, 1,508 interns and 213 apprentices globally, and continued building on our relationships with key partners to support inclusive access to all our opportunities. Barclays won the National Graduate Recruitment Award for Most Popular Graduate Recruiter in Banking, Insurance and Financial Services and was ranked in the top 20 in The Times Top 100 Graduate Employers list – recognising our focus on our Early Careers population as a key talent pipeline for the future. We simplified and personalised learning for colleagues and invested in technology to support our People Leaders' development. For example, by piloting virtual coaching for our People Leaders and newly promoted Managing Directors (MDs) and expanding the deployment of our 360-feedback tool. In 2025, we focused on enhancing our alumni proposition – including by launching a differentiated experience for our Executive Alumni. Our Group CEO hosted our first-ever MD alumni networking event in London, attended by members of the Executive Committee and Board. ## Our inclusive culture We are evolving our approach to Inclusion and Opportunity with a focus on empowering our colleagues and leaders and driving company success – cultivating high-performing teams and providing rich opportunities for colleagues to progress, while aspiring to hire from the broadest global talent pools. We are committed to creating a workplace where everyone feels valued and respected, within a culture of belonging and equal opportunity for all. ## Supporting our workforce Helping our people perform at their best remains a priority. We provide a range of support for colleagues through our policies covering annual leave, life events, health issues, family and caring, and flexible working. We support colleague wellbeing with data-driven campaigns that encourage healthy habits and a positive culture – reflected by an 87% favourable Wellbeing Index score in our 2025 Autumn Your View survey. Our mental health awareness eLearning has been completed by 87% of colleagues and 90% of People Leaders, and over 53,000 colleagues are registered on our ‘Be Well’ online wellbeing portal. We also continued to enhance our provision for colleagues in the UK with an updated Employee Assistance Programme providing additional mental health support to their family members. ## Rewarding our colleagues We offer eligible colleagues the opportunity to acquire Barclays shares on beneficial terms, with voluntary all-employee share plans available in countries representing 99% of our global workforce. In recognition of colleagues' collective effort towards delivering our three-year plan and the effort that is still required, in February 2025 we granted colleagues a share award worth approximately £500, and in 2026 we will grant a similar colleague share award, for a second successive year. In July 2025, all UK colleagues were given access to Barclays Premier Banking, which offers a suite of exclusive products, services and benefits. ## Enhancements to policy provisions In 2025, we focused on aligning to our global policies to better support our colleagues and People Leaders in managing their work life at Barclays. In November, we announced that our paternity leave policy in the UK will increase from two weeks to 16 weeks, and that the non-primary caregiver leave policy in Asia Pacific will increase from six weeks to 10 weeks. Effective from 1 January 2026, these updates aim to help new parents spend more time with their families and support colleagues in balancing work and personal life. ## Our people policies Our people policies' help us recruit the best people, provide equal opportunities and create an inclusive culture – in line with our Purpose, Values and Mindset, and in support of our long-term success. They are reviewed and updated regularly to ensure they remain aligned with our broader people strategy. As part of our Fair Pay Agenda, we are committed to paying our colleagues fairly and appropriately relative to their role, seniority, skills, experience and performance. We pay at least a living wage in all our locations and provide colleagues with resources to ensure everyone has equal opportunity to progress. ## Companies Act Diversity Disclosure In accordance with section 414C² basis of the Companies Act 2006, as of 31 December 2025, Barclays employed 98,141 colleagues globally (53,595 male, 44,037 female, and 509 undisclosed), including 540 senior managers (394 male, 146 female), and 13 Board of Directors at Barclays PLC (seven male, six female). ## Notes: 1. Our policies reflect relevant employment law, including the provisions of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and the International Labour Organization (ILO) Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work. 2. The variance to the c.93,000 stated earlier in the report is due to the Companies Act disclosure definition using Headcount rather than FTE, and also including colleagues on long-term leave. Unreported refers to colleagues who do not record their gender in our systems. ‘Senior managers’ is defined by the Companies Act, and is different to both our Senior Managers under the FCA and PRA Senior Managers regime, our Director and Managing Director corporate grades. It includes Barclays PLC Group Executive Committee members, their direct reports and directors on the boards of undertakings of the Group, but excludes Directors on the Board of Barclays PLC. Where such persons hold multiple directorships across the Group they are only counted once. You can read more about our Fair Pay Agenda on page 124. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) ## Colleague engagement (%) ![img-15.jpeg](img-15.jpeg) ### About this KPI Colleague engagement is derived from the responses to three questions in our Your View survey that measure advocacy, motivation and sense of personal accomplishment. The questions that make up this KPI are: I would recommend Barclays to people I know as a great place to work; my work provides me with a sense of personal accomplishment; Barclays motivates me to contribute more than is normally required to complete my work. It enables us to monitor how engaged our workforce is and closely relates to key organisational and colleague outcomes such as productivity, wellbeing and retention. ### How we performed Colleague engagement has remained stable at 85% compared with 2024. Overall, this continues to be a strong engagement score and four percentage points above our external benchmark. ## Inclusion index (%) ![img-16.jpeg](img-16.jpeg) ### About this KPI Our Inclusion Index¹ measures colleague sentiment around feeling included, valued, respected, listened to and treated fairly. It closely relates to key colleague outcomes like engagement, wellbeing and retention. ### How we performed In 2025, the Inclusion Index remained stable against 2024, at 81%. ## "I believe that my team and I do a good job of role modelling the Values every day" (%) ![img-17.jpeg](img-17.jpeg) ### About this KPI This question within our Your View survey measures colleagues' perception of how well the Barclays Values are role modelled by colleagues. The Values are our moral compass; the fundamentals of who we are and what we believe is right. ### How we performed This score has remained largely consistent and high over the past three years with 93% of colleagues believing themselves and their team do a good job of role modelling our Values. ## "I believe strongly in the goals and objectives of Barclays" (%) ![img-18.jpeg](img-18.jpeg) ### About this KPI This question within our Your View survey measures colleague perception of, and belief in, our three-year plan. ### How we performed In 2025, 89% of colleagues expressed strong belief in Barclays goals and objectives, an increase of one percentage point compared to 2024. ## Notes: 1. Our Inclusion Index is derived from seven questions in the Your View survey: I feel included in/within my team; Colleague performance is evaluated fairly; When a similar mistake has been made by different people, it is dealt with in the same way; Senior Leadership is truly committed to building a workforce with different perspectives and skills; My team makes adequate use of recognition and rewards other than money to encourage good performance; In my team people respect other people's opinions when making a decision; Everyone has equal opportunities to progress in their career regardless of background and working circumstances. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # 2025 divisional review (continued) ## Net zero operations progress ### Operational emissions | FY2025 absolute emissions (tCO₂e) | FY2024 absolute emissions (tCO₂d) | Performance vs. 2018 baseline | | --- | --- | --- | | Scope 1 and 2 market-based emissions | | | | 7,276 | 10,745 | -97% | | Scope 1 and 2 location-based emissions | | | | 80,096 | 93,789 | -62% | | Supply chain emissions | | | | 532,797 | 547,587 | -39% | About these KPIs and why we use them We are working towards achieving net zero operations as part of our ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050. This includes setting and meeting various milestones¹ and targets² to reduce our operational emissions, with significant progress already made. The metrics measure total gross Scope 1 and 2 (market-based and location-based) emissions generated from Barclays' global real estate portfolio² and UK corporate vehicles, as well as emissions generated indirectly from our supply chain³. ### How we performed Our detailed analysis of our performance is contained within the Climate and Sustainability section from page 58. See the Barclays Sustainability Reporting Framework for details on our operational emissions accounting approach. ## Sustainable and Transition Financing⁴ facilitated ($bn) | 2025 | 98.5 | | --- | --- | | 2024 | 94.4 | About this KPI and why we use it In 2022, we set a target of $1tm Sustainable and Transition Financing between 2023 and the end of 2030⁴ – encompassing green, social, transition and sustainability-linked financing, having exceeded our previous targets to facilitate £150bn of social, environmental and sustainability-linked financing by 2025 and £100bn of green financing by 2030. ### How we performed During 2025 we facilitated an additional $98.5bn of Sustainable and Transition Financing, bringing the total to date to $260.7bn. The 4% year-on-year increase in financing facilitated demonstrates our continued efforts in supporting our clients on their sustainability journeys. Please see page 41 for further detail on our target ## Skills and employability: Number of people upskilled⁵ (millions) | 2025 | 8.16 | | --- | --- | | 2024 | 6.05 | About this KPI and why we use it Barclays is delivering skills and employment opportunities for people in the communities where we operate. The total number of unique people supported to unlock skills and employment opportunities includes those upskilled through our LifeSkills, Digital Eagles and Military and Veterans Outreach programmes. ### How we performed After removing duplicates to account for repeat users, we upskilled a further 2.11 million people in 2025 through Barclays LifeSkills, Digital Eagles and Military and Veterans Outreach, growing the total to 8.16 million⁵ since the beginning of 2023 and demonstrating steady progress across Barclays' community programmes. ## Sustainable growth: Number of businesses supported⁶ | 2025 | 14,178 | | --- | --- | | 2024 | 10,247 | About this KPI and why we use it Barclays is championing innovation and sustainable growth through programmes that enable businesses and economies to grow. The total number of businesses supported in our communities includes those engaged through Barclays' Eagle Labs, Unreasonable Impact and select impact-led portfolios managed by Barclays' Principal Investments team. ### How we performed After removing duplicates to account for repeat users, in 2025, through these programmes, we supported a further 3,931 businesses, growing the total to 14,178⁶ since the beginning of 2023 and demonstrating Barclays' continued commitment to providing a connected pathway of support for start-ups and scale-ups at every stage of their growth journey. ## Notes: 1. On this page a reference to a 'milestone' denotes an indicator we are working towards and report against and a reference to a 'target' denotes an indicator linked to our executive remuneration. 2. On this page a reference to global real estate portfolio includes offices, campuses, branches, warehouses and data centres within our operational control. 3. Our reporting of supply chain emissions includes the following GHG Protocol Scope 3 Categories: Category 1, 2 and 4. Due to changes in GHG emissions conversion factors, we have recalculated our FY2024 supply chain emissions. For further details see page 59. 4. In the 2026 update to the Barclays Sustainable Finance Framework the reference to the target has been updated to reference $1tm Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030 (the 'Target') and accordingly references to the Target in this Annual Report have been reflected as such other than in this chart. 5. Our reporting of the number of people upskilled has changed from previous reports to reflect the cumulative number, since 2023. 6. Our reporting of the number of businesses supported has changed from previous reports to reflect the cumulative number, since 2023. ## Progress of financed emissions | Cumulative performance vs baseline | | | | --- | --- | --- | | Portfolio | Dec 2025 | | | December 2020 baseline | | | | Upstream Energy* | 43.7MtCO₂e | -41% | | Power | 204 kgCO₂e/MWh | -35% | | December 2021 baseline | | | | Cement | 0.551 tCO₂e/t | -13% | | Steel | 1.352 tCO₂e/t | -30% | | December 2022 baseline | | | | Automotive manufacturing | 169.1 gCO₂e/km | -3% | | December 2023 baseline | | | | UK Commercial Real Estate | 24.7 kgCO₂e/m² | -6% | | UK Agriculture* | 0.46 MtCO₂e | -13% | | Aviation | 866 gCO₂e/RTK | -2% | | UK Housing | 27.1 kgCO₂e/m² | -3% | All portfolios show physical intensity apart from: * absolute emissions. ## About these KPIs and why we use them In pursuit of our strategy to reduce our financed emissions, which are those deriving from in-scope activities of the clients that we finance, we have set 2030 financed emissions reduction targets which integrate 1.5°C aligned scenarios for eight high-emitting sectors. We also have a convergence point for our UK Housing portfolio. ## How we performed Our detailed analysis of our sectors and performance is contained within the Climate and Sustainability section from page 48. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 30 # Barclays' climate strategy: Clients, Capital and Innovation # A strategy for a better financial future In 2025 we published our Transition Update, reiterated our ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050 and outlined how we continue to deliver against our strategy. In recognition of the realities of the transition and to balance our climate ambition, shareholder expectations and continue to deliver our strategy, we outlined in our Transition Update how we have evolved our approach to focus on working with clients on their transition, financing clients' transition and scaling climate tech, while integrating nature and social considerations. ![img-19.jpeg](img-19.jpeg) ![img-20.jpeg](img-20.jpeg) To read the Barclays Transition Update, visit home.barclays/our-sustainability-/ barclays-approach-to-the-transition/ # Working with clients on their transition Barclays serves a wide range of retail customers, corporate and institutional clients worldwide. Understanding our clients' priorities is central to how Barclays supports the transition. Each client is at a different point in the transition and there is no single pathway that our clients may follow. We listen to our clients and build a nuanced understanding of the commercial realities shaping their transition pathways. This is informed by regular client dialogue led by our coverage teams and dedicated sustainable finance specialists, supported by specialised analytical tools such as our Client Transition Framework (CTF). This enables more informed conversations with clients about their transition strategies, challenges, and progress. Our capabilities and tools strengthen our ability to support client progress while helping us to maintain accountability for our own financed emissions reduction targets. # Financing clients' transition Across the bank we are helping to provide the sustainable and transition finance needed to support the transition to a low-carbon economy. From homeowners to UK farmers through to global multinationals, we are supporting all levels of the economy to transition. Since 2020, we have mobilised over $500bn of sustainable and transition finance, ensuring Barclays remains well positioned to support our clients and capture the addressable market. Reflecting our focus to mobilise capital for the transition, we have a target to facilitate $1trn of Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030. In 2025, we facilitated $98.5bn and $260.7bn since 2023. As the role for us to support our clients has continued to expand, in 2025, we generated just under £0.6bn of revenue from sustainable and transition-related activity¹. The sustained volumes of and revenue from sustainable and transition related activity underscores our continued momentum. Even in a more complex policy and market environment, we view the transition as a commercial opportunity for our clients, and in turn, Barclays. Reflecting society's need for available and affordable energy, we also remain a significant provider of capital to the conventional energy and power sector. Financing for clients in this sector is managed in line with Barclays' risk appetite, with decisions informed by transition progress, commercial returns, client engagement and market realities. The bank's approach recognises that energy security and transition progress must advance in parallel and that continued investment in both is critical to meeting evolving client needs and supporting economic stability. Note: 1 For further detail on revenue definition see footnote 2 on page 41. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 31 # Barclays' climate strategy: Clients, Capital and Innovation (continued) ## Scaling climate technology Scaling climate tech is integral to accelerating the transition, with the potential to create profitable means of decarbonisation for many sectors of the real economy. We are playing a key role in scaling climate tech companies from idea to IPO through the Barclays Climate Tech Escalator. Companies are provided tailored, dedicated support as they grow to help them to harness the power of capital markets. Barclays Climate Ventures, part of the Climate Tech Escalator, has a mandate to invest up to £500m of our own capital by the end of 2027. Barclays Climate Ventures prioritise investments into commercially scalable technologies that can unlock the transition for the high-emitting sectors in which we have meaningful client exposure, such as energy and power, real estate, and food and agriculture. Since 2020, £274m has been invested in over 20 companies, and in 2025, £71m was deployed. ## Integrating nature and social considerations Our climate strategy integrates nature and social considerations, including our work on human rights, recognising the need to address these interconnected topics holistically. In 2025, we extended nature-related criteria within our CTF assessments to now cover four sectors in total, building on a successful pilot for the Power sector in 2024. We also leveraged the findings from our application of the Taskforce on Nature-related Financial Disclosures (TNFD) ‘Locate Evaluate Assess Prepare’ (LEAP) approach across a sample of clients in the Barclays Mining and European Power portfolios to engage with companies in both sectors, and began extending this work to assess our Automotive manufacturing portfolio. ## Achieving net zero operations We are working towards achieving net zero operations as part of our ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050. This includes setting and meeting various milestones and targets to reduce our operational emissions, with significant progress already made. We have achieved all our 2025 net zero operations milestones and targets, including continuing to source 100% renewable electricity for our global real estate portfolio and reducing our Scope 1 and 2 market-based emissions by 97% against a 2018 baseline - exceeding our 90% reduction target. Building on this progress, we aim to continue sourcing 100% renewable electricity through to 2030 and work towards our 2030 milestones, inclusive of our Scope 1 and 2 location-based emissions and supply chain emissions reduction milestones. ## Reducing our financed emissions In pursuit of our strategy to reduce our financed emissions, which are those deriving from in-scope activities of the clients that we finance, we have set 2030 financed emissions reduction targets which integrate 1.5°C aligned scenarios for eight high-emitting sectors: Upstream Energy, Power, Cement, Steel, Automotive manufacturing, Aviation, UK Agriculture and UK Commercial Real Estate. We also have 2025 targets for Upstream Energy and Power and a convergence point for our UK Housing portfolio. We set out our progress against our financed emissions reduction targets in this report. We have continued to make progress towards these targets, including exceeding our 2025 target in Upstream Energy and Power. ## Implementing our strategy against a shifting landscape The current pace and momentum of the transition is uneven as governments pursue increasingly divergent approaches, creating a complex and fragmented policy environment. Some regions and sectors are accelerating, while others, are transitioning at a slower pace than anticipated in 2020 when we announced our ambition. Higher decarbonisation costs, a lack of clear and consistent long-term demand and persistent structural barriers often mean the economics of transition are not yet sufficiently compelling. At the same time, understanding of climate and nature-related risks, such as water scarcity, is becoming clearer for us and our clients. As a result, the window to limit global warming to 1.5°C above pre-industrial levels is narrowing. Decarbonisation is falling behind the pace required and the likelihood of a prolonged overshoot above 1.5°C is increasing, potentially making it more difficult to return to the pathway that underpins current corporate and financial planning. These developments and in the absence of consistent global policy signals and clearer long-term frameworks, mean financial institutions may need to choose between financing growth and maintaining the pace of reducing financed emissions. We are actively monitoring the latest science and economic modelling to assess how such risks could affect our portfolios and targets and will continue to maintain a disciplined, forward-looking approach. The transition, and therefore our future progress, will be affected by the significant uncertainties, will not be linear and constrained by the policy environment and availability of technology. Furthermore, these factors have scope to put our clients, customers', and our own, net zero ambitions at risk. We recognise we have an important role to play in the transition, we cannot tackle this challenge on our own and that our ability to implement our climate strategy and deliver against our targets depends heavily on our clients progress and a wide range of external factors. We will consider and adapt our approach as needed to reflect the evolving landscape. We remain committed to supporting the transition in a way that is inclusive, resilient, and economically sound, guided by our net zero ambition and our Purpose: working together for a better financial future. ## Notes: 1. These LEAP assessments were undertaken in 2024. ‘European Power’ refers Barclays Bank Ireland plc’s counterparties. For both ‘Mining’ and ‘European Power’, we only included counterparties that met selected criteria, as set out in our ‘Navigating Nature Risk-Applying the TNFD’s LEAP framework’ paper. --- Barclays' climate strategy: Clients, Capital and Innovation (continued) # Our strategy, selected targets and progress The table below sets out progress against our strategy and selected targets. | | | | Previously announced target or mandate | Progress | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | | 2025 performance | | Financing clients' transition | Sustainable financing | • Facilitate $1trn of Sustainable and Transition Financing between 2023 and the end of 2030^{1} | • $98.5bn • (Life-to-date $260.7bn) | | | Scaling climate technology | Barclays Climate Ventures | • Increase mandate to invest up to £500m of Barclays' capital in climate tech start-ups by the end of 2027 | • £71m (£274m invested by the end of 2025) | | | | By the end of 2025/2030 | | Cumulative change | | | Reducing our financed emissions portfolio reduction targets/convergence point | Upstream Energy^{3} | • By the end of 2025: 15% reduction in absolute CO_{2}e emissions against a 2020 baseline of 74.1 MtCO_{2}e (Scopes 1, 2 & 3) | -41% | | | | | • By the end of 2030: 40% reduction in absolute CO_{2}e emissions against a 2020 baseline of 74.1 MtCO_{2}e (Scopes 1, 2 & 3) | | | | | Power^{4} | • By the end of 2025: 30% reduction in CO_{2}e emissions intensity against a 2020 baseline of 316 kgCO_{2}e/MWh (Scope 1) | -35% | | | | | • By the end of 2030: 50-69% reduction in CO_{2}e emissions intensity against a 2020 baseline of 316 kgCO_{2}e/MWh (Scope 1) | | | | | By the end of 2030 | | | | | | Cement^{3} | • 20-26% reduction in CO_{2}e emission intensity against a 2021 baseline of 0.631 tCO_{2}e/t (Scopes 1 & 2) | -13% | | | | Steel^{3} | • 20-40% reduction in CO_{2}e emissions intensity against a 2021 baseline of 1.945 tCO_{2}e/t (Scopes 1 & 2) | -30% | | | | Automotive manufacturing^{3} | • 40-64 % reduction in CO_{2}e emissions intensity against a 2022 baseline of 174.8 gCO_{2}e/km (Scopes 1, 2 & 3) | -3% | | | | Aviation^{3} | • 11-16 % reduction in CO_{2}e emissions intensity against a 2023 baseline of 882 gCO_{2}e/RTK (Scopes 1 & 3) | -2% | | | | UK Commercial Real Estate^{2} | • 51% reduction in CO_{2}e emissions intensity against a 2023 baseline of 26.3 kgCO_{2}e/m^{2} (Scopes 1 & 2) | -6% | | | | UK Agriculture^{3} | • 21% reduction in absolute CO_{2}e emissions against a 2023 baseline of 0.53 MtCO_{2}e (Scopes 1, 2 & 3) | -13% | | | | UK Housing^{2} | • Convergence point: 40% reduction in CO_{2}e emissions intensity against a baseline of 27.9 kgCO_{2}e/m^{2} (Scopes 1 & 2) | -3% | | | | By the end of 2025 | | 2025 performance | | | Achieving net zero operations | Renewable electricity sourcing | • 100% renewable electricity sourcing for our global real estate portfolio by the end of 2025 | 100% sourced | | | | Scope 1 and 2 emissions | • 90% absolute reduction in our Scope 1 and 2 market-based GHG emissions against a 2018 baseline by the end of 2025 | 97% reduction | | Notes: 1. Our previously announced target to facilitate £150bn of social, environmental and sustainability-linked financing by 2025 was exceeded in 2021 and £100bn of green financing by 2030 was exceeded in 2023. In the 2026 update to the Barclays Sustainable Finance Framework, the reference to the target has been updated to reference $1 trillion Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030 (the "Target") and accordingly references to the Target in this Annual Report have been reflected as such, other than in this chart. 2. Previously reported baseline values have been re-baseline in the current year. For further details please see page 51. 3. Baseline values have not changed in the current year 4. The power sector has been re-baseline due to a data sourcing update. The impact of this change is not considered material. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk and opportunities TCFD Strategy Recommendation A ## Climate-related risks identified over the short, medium and long term Our climate strategy is underpinned by the way we assess and manage our exposure to climate-related risks. Climate Risk is a Principal Risk within the Barclays Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF). Barclays faces exposure to climate-related risks either directly through its operations and infrastructure or indirectly through its financing and investment activities. The two main categories of climate risk are physical risks and transition risks. - Physical risk is defined by Barclays as the risk of financial losses related to physical impacts of a changing climate. Physical risks can be event-driven (acute risks), including increased frequency and/or severity of extreme weather events such as cyclones, hurricanes and floods. Longer-term shifts in climate patterns (chronic hazards) arise from sustained higher temperatures that may cause rises in sea levels, changing precipitation patterns or heat stress. - Transition risk is defined by Barclays as the risk of financial losses caused by the changes driven by the economy shifting to a lower carbon basis, including for example changes in policy, technology and consumer and investor sentiment. Physical and transition risks can have varying degrees of impact on Barclays and its clients, influenced by geographic and jurisdictional factors, including differing vulnerabilities to physical hazards like flooding and hurricanes, as well as diverse regulatory requirements that must be adhered to for transitioning to a low-carbon economy. ## Time horizons The impact of physical and transition risks can be significant and widespread, affecting Barclays' portfolio and financial performance over short-, medium- and long-term horizons. Significant uncertainty remains around the timing of major climate-related impacts, although some effects have already surfaced. So far, these impacts have been largely contained within specific geographies and sectors, but they carry the potential to escalate and trigger broader impacts on financial systems. In the short term, physical risks arising from extreme weather events and climate-related disasters pose a direct threat to Barclays' physical assets and infrastructure. This can potentially result in immediate losses, increased costs for repair and higher insurance premiums. Similarly, acute events may also potentially damage the physical facilities of Barclays' clients or cause business disruptions, which may adversely impact the value of clients' assets, reduce their profitability and subsequently lead to potential increase in credit risk for Barclays. Additionally, business facilities and operations in regions prone to high physical risks may also experience higher insurance premiums or limited insurance coverage. Transition risks could occur in all timeframes. Short to medium-term developments may be largely driven by new regulations and technological breakthroughs aimed at replacing carbon-intensive methods. There remains significant uncertainty around the speed and scale of the transition. The cost of transitioning to cleaner technologies and sustainable business practices may strain the financial resources of businesses, affecting their profitability and long-term viability. There may be challenges related to employment as businesses transition away from carbon-intensive practices. This in turn may impact the creditworthiness of Barclays' clients and their ability to repay loans. Financial institutions like Barclays could also face significant increases in costs and resources allocated to adhere to new policies, laws and regulations aimed at transitioning to a low-carbon economy. This in turn may lead to higher conduct and operational risks to Barclays. Transition risks arising from actions aimed at mitigating climate change can shift market sentiment, introduce price volatility and equity shocks, leading to declines in the valuation of financial instruments and potential trading losses in Barclays' portfolios. Additionally, companies may face reputational damage and legal actions, including litigation, regulatory penalties, and shareholder lawsuits in relation to climate risks. These could lead to decreased customer trust or investor support and heightened liability risks for both the companies and their financial partners. Barclays may also face adverse media, negative investor sentiment or climate-related litigation in relation to its business activities. This in turn may adversely impact customer demand for Barclays' products, returns on business activities, and the value of assets and trading positions, resulting in higher impairment charges. In the longer term, the cumulative effects of global temperature rises are likely to become increasingly pronounced – influencing ecosystems, sea levels and societal structures. Climate change can also trigger tipping points through feedback loops that amplify its effects. Certain tipping points are already underway, manifesting in observable changes across the globe. Different tipping points, such as the melting of ice sheets or changes in ocean circulation, have varying time horizons. As the climate science develops, it appears that some tipping points may run on a shorter timeline than initially expected. Accordingly, the uncertainty of exact timeframes in which such tipping points could materialise adds a layer of complexity – making it challenging to precisely predict when impacts will materialise. When considering the timescales of climate-related risks, Barclays has categorised short, medium and long term as follows: - Short term (S): 0-1 year - Medium term (M): 1-5 years - Long term (L): >5 years. The short-term timescale coincides with the short-term plan for annual budgets and granular financial plans. The medium term coincides with the five-year financial, capital and funding plans. ## Climate change as a driver of risk The feedback effects of climate risk drivers through transmission channels are observed in Barclays' portfolio through traditional risk categories such as credit risk, market risk, operational risk and reputational risk. Climate risk is designated as a Principal Risk within Barclays' ERMF, with the purpose of capturing the impact of climate change on the bank's Financial and Operational risk categories. Barclays has implemented a dedicated risk management framework for climate risk. This framework aims to guide effective management of climate risk and support the delivery of Barclays' climate strategy. The Climate Risk Framework is reinforced by policies and standards, which contain control objectives and requirements that must be adhered to by different teams across business lines and risk management departments. Climate risk may also drive non-financial risks such as reputational risk, which continue to be managed under their respective risk frameworks. Barclays' approach and framework undergoes regular reviews and updates – including changes to the risk taxonomy, definitions and methodology – to align with changing regulatory expectations and external developments. ## Note: 1. The revised transition risk definition reflects further refinement of the underlying drivers and transmission channels as illustrated on the next page. --- Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 34 # Barclays' climate strategy: Clients, Capital and Innovation (continued) The potential impacts of physical and transition risk drivers will vary across Barclays' portfolios depending on composition, industry, geographic location, business operations and other contextual factors. The tables below set out example drivers and transmission channels, and the expected time horizons of physical and transition risks. Further details on how Barclays manages climate risk can be found on pages 202 to 204. | Transition risks | Policy | Consumer/Investor Sentiment | Technology | Litigation and Enforcement | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Definition | • Risks arising due to evolving climate and /or environmental legislation and policy, regulatory changes / penalties, disclosure mandates as the economy transitions. | • Risks arising from stakeholders' changing perceptions of businesses and industries, or individual preferences under a transitioning economy, impacting supply, demand and price dynamics. | • Risks arising from rapid innovation or obsolescence and the cost of adopting new, cleaner technologies. | • Risk of being the subject of a legal claim or regulatory investigation on the basis of perceived action or inaction relating to climate or environmental matters. | | Example transmission channels | • Increased costs and higher capital expenditure to meet regulatory compliance. • Asset stranding as a result of inability to operate under evolving regulatory or policy landscape. | • Asset devaluation as preferences shift away from certain goods and services. • Lowered revenue as demand falls in certain sectors and prices in turn drop. | • Higher capital expenditure costs as new technologies require increased investments. • Costs increasing as a result of changing prices of raw materials or supply chains altering. | • Increased costs via responding to claim or investigation, or potential liability for fine or damages. • Lowered revenue as demand falls due to reputational impacts. | | Expected time horizons | • S, M, L | | | | | Physical risks | Acute | Chronic | | --- | --- | --- | | Definition | • Risks arising due to event-driven hazards, including increasing frequency and/or intensity of extreme weather events, such as storms, heatwaves, wildfires, floods, etc. | • Risks arising due to longer-term changes in weather patterns, including increased mean temperatures, including sea-level rise, changing precipitation patterns, water stress/ scarcity, drought conditions, etc. | | Example transmission channels | • Business interruption causes lower revenues as physical hazards create production challenges from damaged building and operating sites. • Lower revenue or higher operating costs, driven by supply chain squeezes making raw materials more challenging to obtain. • Devaluation of assets as damages and risks to property from natural hazards are priced into the valuation. | • Higher capital expenditure costs to invest in adaptation measures to prevent future damages as climate causes increased frequency/severity of weather events. • Costs increase as a result of rising insurance costs and premiums. | | Expected time horizons | • S, M, L | • M, L | --- Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 35 # Barclays' climate strategy: Clients, Capital and Innovation (continued) ## Building our understanding of nature-related risk Barclays' understanding of nature impacts and dependencies and how they translate into physical, transition, and financial risks is evolving. We recognise the importance of supporting our clients in navigating the transition to nature-positive and net zero. We have continued to advance our work on nature, integrating it into our efforts to mitigate and adapt to climate change. In 2025, we published 'Navigating Nature Risk – Applying the TNFD's LEAP framework', which sets out the findings from our initial application of the Taskforce on Nature-related Financial Disclosures' (TNFD) Locate Evaluate Assess Prepare (LEAP) approach across a sample of clients in the Barclays Mining and European Power portfolios¹. We carried out this work to better understand the nature-related impacts, dependencies and financial risks associated with these companies. While there were limitations in our approach (including in both the data and methodological approaches used), we were able to use the output to assess various outcomes. In particular, the results indicated potential adverse cumulative earnings impact over five years for both sectors, across their modelled scenarios. However, while these earnings impacts varied between these portfolios, the analysis indicated that - despite scenario-driven losses – the impacts on each portfolio remained manageable and did not amount to a material change in overall portfolio credit quality. We leveraged these insights to engage with companies in both sectors in 2025, testing our approach, learning how they measure and manage nature-related impacts and risks and identifying potential collaboration opportunities. We are now carrying out an additional sectoral TNFD LEAP assessment of our Automotive manufacturing portfolio, measuring selected material impacts for this sector such as water use, water pollution, and air pollution across the value chain. This will be followed by client engagement to discuss our approach and results. > For more information on our ‘Navigating Nature Risk – Applying the TNFD’s LEAP framework’ paper, see our website: home.barclays/our-sustainability-/barclays-approach-to-the-transition/nature/ ## Sustainability and climate-related opportunities identified over the short, medium and long term We recognise that the global transition to a low-carbon economy presents an opportunity for Barclays to work with our clients, scaling up zero or near-zero-emitting technologies and businesses, and supporting emissions reductions in high-emitting and hard-to-abate sectors. We have a target a facilitate $1 trillion of Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030. ## The market opportunity Through 2025, the global landscape has continued to evolve. Investment in the energy transition has accelerated, climate technologies have matured further, and both energy demand and the focus on energy security have intensified. The physical impacts of climate change are becoming more apparent too. Global investment flows reached $2.3\mathrm{trn}$ in 2025, concentrated in mature segments such as renewable power, grid infrastructure, energy storage, energy efficiency solutions and low emission fuels²,³. The green economy is now valued at $8 trillion⁴. Against this backdrop, our sustainable finance strategy is aimed to support clients in the transition while enabling Barclays to capture this associated growth opportunity. The UK's residential sector is increasingly seeking to improve housing energy efficiency. Barclays is capturing this demand trend through its Green Home Mortgage performance, which performed strongly in 2025 with £2.4bn lent, and Greener Home Reward payments totalling £3m since launch supporting eligible retail mortgage customers in retrofitting their properties and helping reduce their energy consumption. Since 2020, we have mobilised over $500 billion of sustainable and transition finance, showcasing Barclays' ability to support clients and capture this market⁵. We expect our progress towards achieving our target of facilitating $1\mathrm{trn}$ of Sustainable and Transition Finance will be non-linear and will be shaped by market demand, evolving policy and regulatory developments; however so far capital flows into the transition have remained resilient. The Barclays Transition Update provides further insights into how Barclays is supporting clients with transition opportunities, with sector-specific analysis on how we are working with clients across the Energy and Power, Food and Agriculture, Real Estate, and Industrials⁶, sectors. > For further details please see the Barclays Transition Update ## Identifying nature-related opportunities Nature-related financing represents a growth opportunity for the financial services sector, reflecting the scale of capital required to halt and reverse nature loss by 2030 as outlined in the Global Biodiversity Framework (GBF). Private finance for nature has accelerated rapidly – rising from just $9.4 billion to more than $102 billion over four years – yet remains far short of what is needed to close the global nature financing gap⁷. In 2025, we incorporated nature-related eligibility criteria in the Transition Finance Framework (TFF) for the first time and expanded nature-related eligibility criteria in the Sustainable Finance Framework (SFF). These enhancements develop our ability to identify opportunities aligned with the SFF and TFF, scale finance that supports nature, and contribute to achieving our $1\mathrm{trn}$ Sustainable and Transition Finance target. During 2025, we also assessed potential nature-related opportunities and products that Barclays could advance. Following our Barclays Mining and European Power LEAP assessments, we engaged with clients in these sectors, exploring potential opportunities to support their nature-positive transition across value chains. We have noted that interventions that help clients avoid and minimise negative impacts on nature could have clear potential, supporting them in the transition to net zero and nature-positive activities. ## Notes: 1. These LEAP assessments were undertaken in 2024. 'European Power' refers Barclays Bank Ireland plc's counterparties. For both 'Mining' and 'European Power', we only included counterparties that met selected criteria, as set out in our 'Navigating Nature Risk-Applying the TNFD's LEAP framework' paper 2. about.bnef.com/insights/clean-energy/bloombergneffinds-global-energy-transition-investment-reached-record-2-3-trillion-in-2025-up-8-from-2024/ 3. www.iea.org/reports/world-energy-investment-2025/executive-summary 4. about.bnef.com/insights/clean-energy/bloombergneffinds-global-energy-transition-investment-reached-record-2-3-trillion-in-2025-up-8-from-2024/ 5. This $500bn figure refers to the sustainable and transition finance mobilised from 2020, of which approximately $260bn contributes towards the $1trn Sustainable and Transition Finance Target (2023 - 2030). 6. Industrials includes automotive manufacturing, aviation, cement, mining and steel. For further details please see the Barclays Transition Update. 7. UNEP FI: unepfi.org/wordpress/wp-content/uploads/2024/06/Press-release-New-Green-Shoots-research-Clean-10062024-updated-2.pdf --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Working with clients on their transition Barclays serves a wide range of retail customers, corporate and institutional clients worldwide. Understanding our clients' priorities is central to how Barclays supports the transition. Each client is at a different point in the transition and there is no single pathway that our clients may follow. We listen to our clients and build a nuanced understanding of the commercial realities shaping their transition pathways. This is informed by regular client dialogue led by our coverage teams and dedicated sustainable finance specialists, supported by specialised analytical tools such as our Client Transition Framework (CTF), see page 39. This enables more informed conversations with clients about their transition strategies, challenges, and progress. ## How we operate across our client base ![img-21.jpeg](img-21.jpeg) Key: Programmes Business units | Consumer | Small and growth stage | Mid-size corporates | Large corporates and governments | Investors | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | **Barclays Partnerships** | | | | | Barclays UK Retail and Business Banking | | UK Corporate Bank | | | | Private Bank and Wealth Management | | Investment Bank | | | | | **Barclays Climate Ventures** | | Green Bond Investment portfolio | | ## Retail Bank ### Sustainability Hub In 2025, we launched our in-app Sustainability Hub for current account customers providing information on our financial products, services, informative content and partner offers that may support them in making more sustainable choices. ### Greener Home Reward A key factor in decarbonising the UK Housing sector is improving the energy efficiency of the housing stock. Through our financial products and partner offers, we support our retail mortgage customers in retrofitting their properties and helping reduce their energy consumption. In 2025, we continued to support existing eligible residential mortgage customers in installing eligible energy-efficiency-related measures in their homes through our Greener Home Reward offer, providing a cash reward of up to £2,000. We supported more than twice as many customers as in any previous year, bringing the total reward payments since launch to £3 million. From January 2025, we expanded the offer to include Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) accredited installers focussed on small scale renewable energy technologies. Since the launch of the Greener Home Reward, more than 90% of customers installed renewable energy technologies, with 60% of reward payments attributed to installations of solar panels and solar battery storage, followed by 31% for low-carbon heating. All of our sustainable products and offers remain under review as we consider how we best support our customers and clients in making more sustainable choices. ### Reward payments by retrofit type 1,2 | | A | B | C | F | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | A | Solar energy | | | 60 % | | B | Low-carbon heating | | | 31 % | | C | Doors and windows | | | 5 % | | D | Insulation | | | 4 % | | E | Solid wall insulation | | | 0 % | ### Notes: 1. Data based on retrofit type for rewards paid since launch. 2. Previously titled 'Retrofit type at claim'. Further details on Barclays Greener Home Reward can be found at: barclays.co.uk/mortgages/greener-home-reward/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Working with clients on their transition (continued) ### Business Bank We recognise the importance and opportunities as businesses transition to a low-carbon economy. Within Business Banking we continue to actively engage and support our Small and Medium Sized Enterprises (SME) clients, including Agriculture and Real Estate. Barclays co-chaired the independent, government-backed Willow Review, which explored how UK SMEs can benefit financially from sustainability. The Willow Review was launched in 2025, and the UK Government formally responded to its recommendations in December. In line with the Review's recommendations for financial services, we have introduced a range of initiatives for our Business Banking clients, including SME Workshops, dedicated mentors and Eagle Labs modules focused on the business case for sustainability. The review also highlighted an important insight: access to finance was a key obstacle preventing SMEs from investing in sustainable practices. Building on the findings of the Willow Review, we published a policy snapshot¹ on access to sustainability grants. We recognise that a successful transition relies on businesses remaining profitable, resilient and innovative. Within our Innovation Banking community, we are exploring how Climate Tech solutions can solve for real-world challenges that SMEs experience. We recognise that some clients like to learn from each other - to encourage peer-to-peer learning, we have launched monthly Sustainability Breakfasts at Barclays Innovation Hub to convene businesses and industry experts on topics such as supply chains and the business case for sustainability. Our customer research and industry events help us develop policy positions and thought leadership, such as our 'Agritech: supporting the future of farming' report. For our Agriculture clients, Barclays research showed that >70% of our UK farming customers had witnessed the effect of climate change on their farms. It highlighted the importance of developing practical steps to help farms adopt innovative and more sustainable farming practices. In response, we worked with farmers, multinationals and other stakeholders to pilot a new model for supporting farmers to adopt regenerative practices through the Sustainable Markets Initiative's 'Routes to Regen' project. The pilot offered simplified support through a menu of options, on-farm guidance, technical assistance, peer-to-peer learning and financial support. The results of the pilot showed that 57% of participants reported that they were more likely to farm more regeneratively as a result, and 82% rated the multi-company collaboration as important in their decision to take part. Our Farm2Farm network was established in 2023 to enable farmers to learn from one another and share practical insights. We continue to facilitate gatherings that support peer-to-peer learning, assist with farmers' daily banking needs, and facilitate climate and sustainability discussions to help them navigate their transition to more sustainable farming practices. In 2025, we built on this and launched a collaboration with Dyson Farming to bring technology and engineering into farming. Through this, we connect farmers and Agritech founders to explore new technologies and learn about innovation trials and research that could be considered for implementation on their farms. ### UK Corporate Bank Working with clients to support their sustainability and transition ambitions remains a key factor in our focus of deepening client relationships and grow lending and products. There is demand from clients across the value chain for support and to inform them on products, services and relevant industry and regulatory themes as they transition to a low-carbon economy and are required to comply with evolving sustainability standards. We continue to work closely with clients to help them adapt through various collaborations including using our insights on best practice gleaned through industry working groups. Throughout 2025, UK Corporate Bank (UKCB) delivered specialised client support by assessing our clients' sustainability position and tailoring engagement to meet their objectives. We also developed a proactive strategy for select sectors to prioritise outreach, integrate innovative financing solutions, and deliver meaningful client impact. We regularly convened clients across a range of sectors and technology showcases to promote learning, peer-to-peer feedback, and direct engagement. Clients benefited from hearing about the latest relevant technologies, directly accessing Barclays Climate Tech ecosystem, discussing broader industry thematics and these sessions provided actionable insight on how Barclays can practically assist clients in their transition. Utilising some of this broader client feedback, we expanded our sustainable capabilities to help us support clients with innovative, practical solutions. These included preparing to launch a tool for Commercial Real Estate clients, undertaking a consulting and market landscape project to develop a carbon tracking tool for our Barclaycard Commercial Issuing clients, and launching a sustainable deposit solution in July 2025, enabling clients to align liquidity with their sustainability priorities. Amplifying client perspectives in key sustainability forums helps to ensure our clients' voices inform policy and helps position and develop UKCB's leadership role in aiming to drive systematic change through our thought leadership. In UKCB, we extended our external leadership, joining the Future Homes Hub and partnering with the Partnership for Carbon Accounting Financials (PCAF) and a range of global financial institutions to align industry thinking on accounting for embodied carbon. ### Broader engagement across Business Bank and UK Corporate Bank Across both the Business Bank and UK Corporate Bank, we recognise from industry reports and Barclays' own research that barriers to action for clients and customers include a lack of awareness of trusted information sources, understanding what actions to take, as well as access to finance. Note: 1 Policy Snapshot: home.barclays/insights/2025/10/making-sustainability-grants-work-for-SMEs/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Working with clients on their transition (continued) Noting these challenges, in UKCB we have continued our collaboration with SaveMoneyCutCarbon (SMCC) and have expanded the collaboration to our Business Bank, allowing a broader set of clients and customers the opportunity to complete carbon mentor calls. These calls assist clients in identifying practical steps to reduce energy consumption and operating costs, supporting measurable progress towards their sustainability goals. Nature markets, such as the Biodiversity Net Gain (BNG) scheme in England, are opening potential new revenue streams and the opportunity to better utilise areas of unproductive land for landowners and help property developers comply with legislation. We continue to provide support for our property developer and landowner clients through our collaboration with Environment Bank. To help clients across Business Banking and UKCB access information and share insights we have co-hosted regional roundtables with the British Chamber of Commerce focusing on topics such as supporting SMEs in the supply chain and decarbonisation in the built environment. We participated in various industry forums including Icebreaker One's Perseus, UK Business Climate Hub and the Net Zero Council and produced a series of Thought Leadership reports for clients and wider industry stakeholders, highlighting potential barriers and opportunities in our customers' and clients' transition journeys. ## Investment Bank ### Embedding sustainability in our business We have embedded sustainability expertise directly within our Investment Bank so that climate and transition considerations are integrated into day to day client coverage, financing and strategic advisory activities. By placing sustainability specialists alongside bankers in sector, product and markets teams, we can identify transition-driven risks and opportunities earlier, develop tailored financing and advisory solutions, and help clients navigate rapidly evolving policy and technology landscapes. ### Leveraging our teams' expertise to work with our clients Across sectors, especially Energy, Power, Industrials and Climate Technology, we increasingly supported firms responding to the major transition themes shaping 2025. These included investment in grid modernisation, growing renewable capacity, helping Industrial clients decarbonise, and the rapid expansion of battery storage and distributed energy solutions needed to stabilise the system. Much of our work focused on helping these businesses secure financing and navigate the scale up challenges that come with deploying new technologies at pace. Our Sustainable and Transition Finance Advisory team supported clients ahead of IPOs, M&A and capital raises, helping them articulate their transition strategy and address key investor concerns such as policy exposure, technology choices and capital expenditure plans. Our Sustainable Investing Research team provided data-driven insights on the sectors undergoing the most significant transition shifts, helping both issuers and investors navigate emerging risks and opportunities. Throughout the year, the team has met with clients around the world to discuss key sustainability themes and how to invest in them, and hosted a number of flagship events. Our work was recognised through industry rankings, including #1 in FICC sustainable investing research and ESG insight and UK's Best Bank for ESG¹. > For further details on how we work with clients across specific sectors please see the Barclays Transition Update ### Building relationships through engagement with stakeholders In 2025, Barclays strengthened client engagement in sustainable finance by leveraging major industry platforms, convening over 1,000 CEOs, investors, corporates and policymakers across our flagship Sustainable Finance Conferences, Climate Weeks in London and New York, and COP30. These forums focused on energy security, nature and landscape restoration, carbon management, grid optimisation and the commercial opportunities within the transition. Working with partners including the Sustainable Markets Initiative, C2ES, Johnson Controls and Fauna & Flora, we delivered practical sessions that deepened client relationships, supported knowledge-sharing and equipped clients with actionable pathways for decarbonisation and resilience. **Note:** 1. In 2025 Barclays was ranked #1 by Extel for FICC sustainable investing research and was also awarded IFR’s Best Bank for ESG Insights and Euromoney’s award for the UK’s Best Bank for ESG for the third consecutive year. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Working with clients on their transition (continued) ### Client Transition Framework (CTF) In 2025, we extended the CTF Methodology to increase the scope of clients covered by our assessments. For the first time, we have now evaluated our in-scope publicly listed corporate clients in all sectors across our Investment Bank and UK Corporate Bank, as well as in-scope clients within our UK Commercial Real Estate portfolio. This is in addition to continuing our annual CTF assessments for in-scope clients in the previously assessed sectors (Upstream Energy, Power, Steel, Cement, Automotive Manufacturing, & Aviation). The continued use of AI for data collection of clients public disclosures has enabled this expanded scope and has approximately quintupled the total limits covered by our assessments versus 2024. The aggregate 2025 CTF results reflects the impacts of our expanded scope, methodology updates, and lending activity. The CTF evaluates our in-scope clients' progress towards business models aligned to a low-carbon economy, primarily focused on clients' public disclosures. It provides a detailed understanding of clients' current and future transition activities. Clients who are assessed receive a CTF score of T1 (most developed) to T5. The CTF helps us monitor and measure the decarbonisation progress of our in-scope clients, which in turn informs our engagement efforts. Engaging with our clients to assist with understanding their businesses, the challenges they face and the risks and opportunities they are seeking to address is critical to our ability to support them as they navigate the transition to a low-carbon economy. In the sectors where we have set financed emissions reduction targets, these scores inform our engagement, origination decisions, and portfolio management, and help ensure that our approach is both commercially disciplined and forward-looking, enabling us to support clients credibly whilst managing transition-related exposures across the bank. We intend to implement this approach for UK Commercial Real Estate during 2026. For sectors where we have not set financed emissions reduction targets, we will continue to consider how we embed the outputs from these CTF assessments during 2026. In all cases, financing decisions continue to remain transaction-specific and subject to standard committee reviews including for credit risk, reputational risk, and capital impact. Since the CTF relies on clients' public transition plans and other related disclosures, changes in the breadth, depth, or frequency of these, often voluntary, disclosures could materially impact assessment results. The scores should be considered against the backdrop of evolving market dynamics and developments in the policy landscape. > For further details please see the Barclays Transition Update ### Incorporating nature into the CTF In 2025, we extended nature-related criteria within our CTF assessments to cover four sectors in total: Power, Mining, Automotive Manufacturing and Food, building on the pilot conducted for the Power sector last year. The evaluation focuses on governance, strategy, risk management and metrics and targets, providing a structured view of how clients are integrating nature considerations into their business models. Initial findings show around one in five link executive remuneration to nature and around two thirds have an executive accountable for nature, across the four sectors. These insights will help to inform client engagement activity for next year. ![img-22.jpeg](img-22.jpeg) Aggregate CTF results1,2 (% by lending limits) ### Notes: 1. Clients may have scores in multiple sectors but are included only once to avoid double-counting. 2. Given the expanded scope in total limits covered in 2025, aggregate CTF results are not directly comparable with 2024 ### Private Bank and Wealth Management #### Responsible investing and stewardship ##### Private Bank and Barclays Investment Solutions Limited (BISL)1,2 Private Bank and BISL provide clients with access to sustainable investing solutions across asset classes and investment approaches, within discretionary portfolio management (DPM) and managed funds. These are available alongside traditional investment products and allow clients to align investments with their financial objectives and where relevant, sustainability preferences. We support clients in meeting financial and, where applicable non-financial objectives. This includes clients who consider transition-related risks and opportunities to be financially material to long-term portfolio performance, as well as those seeking exposure to areas such as clean energy, resource efficiency, and low-carbon technologies, while managing downside risks in sectors exposed to regulatory change, evolving market expectations, or physical climate impacts. Where relevant to the investment strategy and asset class, as part of the investment process, we assess, among other things, an issuer’s/company’s management of environmental, social and governance related risks and opportunities, helping to identify risks and opportunities that are financially material and may affect long term returns. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Working with clients on their transition (continued) Private Bank and BISL are signatories to the Principles for Responsible Investment (PRI). BISL became a UK Stewardship Code signatory in 2023 and continues to meet the Code’s requirements through periodic reassessment. Since our initial PRI reporting, we have continued to enhance our ESG integration⁵ approach, supporting meaningful client engagement as well as through engagement and voting as core components of responsible investing⁴,⁵. For Private Bank clients please find further details on the Private Bank’s approach to responsible investing and stewardship activities at: privatebank.barclays.com/what-we-offer/investments/responsible-investing-engagement-and-voting-activities For Wealth Management clients please find further details on BISL’s approach to responsible investing and stewardship activities at: barclays.co.uk/wealth-management/important-information/responsible-investing-statement We undertake this activity in partnership with our stewardship provider, EOS at Federated Hermes Limited (EOS), which engages with companies on our behalf where they identify controversies and selected material ESG issues or opportunities to strengthen risk management practices³,⁵. We provide transparent reporting to our clients and publicly on engagement and voting activity, giving visibility on how these matters are escalated and considered over time. During 2025, we delivered targeted client engagement events to help clients understand how climate-related developments and the energy transition may influence financial markets, asset classes and investment decision making. Sessions covered key sustainability concepts and emerging technologies (including hydrogen, carbon capture, utilisation and storage and energy storage) and how these themes may translate into investment risks, opportunities, and portfolio construction considerations. ## Notes: 1. Private Bank and Wealth Management (PBWM) is one of Barclays’ five operating divisions (created during the 2024 Group restructuring). It brings together the Private Bank and the Wealth Management businesses under a single division. The Private Bank is a client-facing business line within PBWM, providing investment offerings. BISL is a wholly owned UK investment firm, operating within PBWM which serves as the investment manager responsible for delivering DPM and fund-of-fund solutions used across PBWM investment offerings. 2. Private Bank operates across multiple jurisdictions, including Ireland, the UK, the Channel Islands, Switzerland, India, South Africa, Dubai International Financial Centre, Monaco and Singapore. BISL manages investments for Barclays Asset Management Limited (BAML is an Authorised Fund Manager) for its UK domiciled funds and is delegated investment manager for external management companies for selected Luxembourg and Irish domiciled funds. BISL is responsible for making all day-to-day investment decisions on behalf of each fund range wherever it is domiciled. 3. Please refer to the respective Private Bank privatebank.barclays.com/what-we-offer/investments/responsible-investing-engagement-and-voting-activities and BISL Responsible Investing (barclays.co.uk/wealth-management/important-information/responsible-investing-statement) websites for more details. 4. Applies to Private Bank DPM and BISL DPM and BISL funds. Responsible Investing activities are not undertaken in India; where strategies are developed for the local market. 5. Please note our stewardship approach (guided by our stewardship provider EOS) may differ across different regions. Any voting is undertaken in line with applicable laws and rules, including on antitrust, conflicts of interest and acting in concert. ## Treasury green programmes ### Green bond investment portfolio Barclays Treasury invests in green bonds as part of the liquidity pool. As an investor we undertake work to ascertain the sustainability credentials of proposed investments. We engage with green, social and sustainability bond issuers to understand how their frameworks and goals align with our investment approach. The proceeds of our green bond investments fund projects in areas such as renewable energy and clean transport. We continue to consider new investments in supranational organisations and government-issued green bonds as they become available, with the aim to invest £4bn over time. ### Green bond investment portfolio size by year (£bn) ![img-23.jpeg](img-23.jpeg) ### Green bond investment portfolio impact by sector (%) ![img-24.jpeg](img-24.jpeg) A Transport B Renewable Energy and Energy Efficiency C Agriculture, Land Use D Water and Waste E Other ### Green bond investment portfolio impact by region (%) ![img-25.jpeg](img-25.jpeg) A Europe B Asia C South America D Africa E North America --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 41 # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Financing clients' transition Barclays is helping to provide the sustainable and transition finance needed to support the transition to a low-carbon economy and has set a target to facilitate $1trn of Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030¹. Our ability to meet the target and annual progress towards it, is subject to external factors such as policy, laws and geopolitics. For 2025, we generated just under £0.6bn of revenues from sustainable and transition-related activity². ## Progress against our $1trn target Our target to facilitate $1trn of Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030 encompasses the green, social, transition and broader sustainability-linked finance requirements of clients including corporates, governments and the public sector, financial institutions and consumers. Progress towards delivering our target will be nonlinear and will be shaped by market demand, evolving policy and regulatory developments; however so far capital flows into the transition have remained resilient. We will continue to review and adapt our approach to Sustainable and Transition Finance in response to the evolving market environment. During 2025, we facilitated $98.5bn of Sustainable and Transition Financing³, comprising $94.0bn in sustainable financing, (2024: $88.7bn) and $4.5bn in transition financing, (2024: $5.7bn). Bond issuance⁴ remained the largest product category, representing 72% of total Sustainable and Transition Financing. Loans and equity accounted for 24% and 1% respectively. This mix represents growth in bond activity and a shift away from loans and equity, compared with 2024, when the composition was 69% bond issuance, 22% loans, and 5% equity. As at the end of 2025 we had facilitated a cumulative $260.7bn of Sustainable and Transition Financing. ## Sustainable finance Sustainable finance, aligned to our Sustainable Finance Framework (SFF), consists of dedicated use of proceeds financing for clients with an eligible business mix in relevant green and/or social categories, and sustainability-linked financing. In 2025 our sustainable financing activities continued to support progress towards the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). Through the categories defined in our Sustainable Finance Framework (SFF), we assess how eligible social and environmental finance contributes to SDG aligned outcomes, including affordable and clean energy, climate action, sustainable cities and communities, good health and wellbeing, affordable housing and basic infrastructure. As our understanding evolves, we continue to refine our approach to tracking and reporting SDG contributions, which are disclosed in our Sustainability Resource Hub⁵. ## Social finance Raising finance for clients including supranational, national and regional development institutions was a key driver of the $40.2bn of social financing facilitated in 2025 (2024: $46.2bn). In 2025, we continued to see issuers aligning their finance commitments to social use of proceeds bonds which allocate funds to categories such as access to healthcare, affordable housing and essential services. ## Environmental finance In 2025, we facilitated $42.1bn of green or environmental financing (2024: $30.6bn). This performance reflected continued demand from our clients and our strategy to support them in the transition to a low-carbon economy. ## Sustainability-linked finance Instruments such as sustainability-linked bonds (SLBs) and sustainability-linked loans (SLLs) are forward-looking, performance-based debt instruments issued with specific sustainability performance targets. Our sustainability-linked financing totalled $11.7bn in 2025 (2024: $12.0bn). We expect product innovation in the sustainability-linked market given its importance to both investors and issuers alike. ## Transition finance We published version 2.0 of our Transition Finance Framework (TFF) in February 2026, which introduced changes to product scope, eligibility and screening. See page 42 for further detail. Over 2025, we generated $4.5bn of transition financing compared to $5.7bn in 2024. ## Notes: 1. This Target was previously known as the $1trn Sustainable and Transition Financing Target Activity refers to transactions, products and counterparties. Sustainable revenues as at 31 December 2025 is defined more broadly than finance covered by the Sustainable Finance Framework and the Transition Finance Framework and covers the net revenue on the following: a) Revenues generated from providing financing and lending activities and products qualified as per the SFF and TFF; b) Revenues from providing a broader range of products and services to counterparties assessed as 'pure play' as defined in the SFF and TFF. This includes all applicable qualifying revenues from M&A advisory, risk management solutions including derivatives, and liability products associated with the counterparty (as referenced in table on page 42); c) Revenues from qualifying products and services outside of the SFF and TFF, from Markets and Private Bank and Wealth Management offerings (as referenced in table on page 42); d) Revenues from investments in Barclays Climate Ventures (BCV). 3. In the 2026 update to the Barclays Sustainable Finance Framework the reference to the target has been updated to reference the facilitation of $1 trillion Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030 (the "Target") and accordingly references to the Target in this Annual Report have been reflected as such other than in this reference. 4. Bond issuance includes Bonds (DCM), CMBS, Securitisation, Munis and PCM Debt. 5. Barclays Sustainability Resource Hub: home.barclays/ our-sustainability-/sustainability-resource-hub/reporting-and-disclosures/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B # Financing clients' transition (continued) ## Sustainable finance dashboard ![img-26.jpeg](img-26.jpeg) Sustainable and Transition Financing facilitated (2023 - the end of 2030) $1trn target ![img-27.jpeg](img-27.jpeg) Achieved to date $260.7bn ![img-28.jpeg](img-28.jpeg) For 2025, we generated just under £0.6bn of revenues from sustainable and transition-related activity¹ ## Annual breakdown by product ($bn) | 2025 | A | B | C | D | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 2024 | A | B | C | D | | 2025 | 2024 | | | | | A | 2025 | 2024 | | | | A | 2025 | 2024 | | | | A | 2025 | 2024 | | | | A | 2025 | 2024 | | | | A | 2025 | 2024 | | | | A | 2025 | 2024 | | | | A | 2025 | 2024 | | | Note: 1 For further detail on revenue definition see footnote 2 on page 41. ## Barclays' Sustainable and Transition Finance Frameworks ## Sustainable Finance Framework We seek to be transparent about our approach to reporting against our sustainable finance targets. Our sustainable finance is tracked using the methodology set out in the Barclays Sustainable Finance Framework (SFF). This framework defines the criteria we use for green, social, sustainable and sustainability-linked finance. The legal and regulatory landscape relating to sustainable finance – including the naming and categorisation of products as ‘green’, ‘social’, ‘sustainability-linked’ and otherwise – is rapidly evolving with differing regulations across jurisdictions. We may wish to revisit our approach in that context in the future. There is currently no globally accepted framework or definition (legal, regulatory or otherwise) governing what constitutes 'ESG', 'green', 'sustainable', or similarly labelled products – nor is there unanimous agreement on what attributes a particular investment, product or asset should have to be labelled as such. We recognise that the quality, consistency and comparability of the data relied upon is not yet of the same standard as more traditional financial metrics and presents an inherent limitation to the performance reported. We will continue to review available data sources and enhance our methodology and processes to improve the robustness of the performance disclosed. ## Transition Finance Framework Our transition finance is tracked using the methodology set out in the Barclays Transition Finance Framework (TFF). The TFF sits alongside Barclays' SFF and determines the eligibility of transition activities that are outside the green and social sustainable finance criteria already covered by the SFF. The inclusion of transition finance in this target reflects our recognition of the importance of lending, facilitating funding and investing in technologies and activities that support GHG emissions reduction, directly or indirectly, in high-emitting and hard-to-abate sectors and finance real-economy decarbonisation. As innovation in sustainable and transition finance continues to accelerate, we will continue to review and update our SFF and TFF, our measurement of performance against targets, and keep our general approach under review. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 43 # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Financing clients' transition (continued) ### Products, transactions and counterparties included in Sustainable Finance volume and revenues | | $1tn Sustainable Finance volume target | Sustainable revenues | | --- | --- | --- | | Products/transactions qualified per the Barclays SFF/TFF | | | | Transactions eligible under the Barclays SFF | ✓ | ✓ | | Transactions eligible under the Barclays TFF | ✓ | ✓ | | Pure play clients | ✓ | ✓ | | Additional products beyond the scope of Barclays SFF/TFF provided to pure play clients | | | | Merger and acquisition advisory | | ✓ | | Risk management solutions products / derivatives | | ✓ | | Liability products | | ✓ | | Products and services outside the SFF/TFF framework | | | | Sustainable Discretionary Portfolio Management | | ✓ | | Risk management solution products / derivatives on sustainable and transition products | | ✓ | | Products with an underlying sustainable and/or transition feature | | ✓ | | Investment products with an underlying sustainable and/or transition feature | | ✓ | | Financing of sustainable or transition funds | | ✓ | | Revenue from Barclays Climate Ventures | | ✓ | Note: Sustainable Revenues as at 31 December 2025 and their basis of preparation are based on v4.2 of the SFF and v1.1 of the TFF. We published version 5.0 of SFF and 2.0 of TFF in February 2026, with changes to product scope, eligibility criteria and transaction screening processes. ## Framework updates We published version 5.0 of SFF and 2.0 of TFF in February 2026, with changes to product scope, eligibility criteria and transaction screening processes. The following changes apply from 1 January 2026: - Product scope: we will include eligible M&A advisory and will also include finance provided to banks and funds, provided these activities align with the SFF/TFF; - Eligibility criteria: we will include a new general purpose category in the TFF aligned to evolving market practice and guidelines for classifying entity level Transition Finance, as well as a Transition Incentive Products category for BUK and UKCB clients. Furthermore, we have been supported by technical expertise from The Biodiversity Consultancy to incorporate nature-related criteria into the TFF for the first time and to expand nature-related eligibility criteria in the SFF; - Risk management: we will widen our environmental and social screening approach for qualifying transactions and clients in the SFF/TFF; - Derecognition: we will update our approach to derecognise transactions which become ineligible based on our derecognition processes. In line with the updated SFF and TFF, our $1tm target will be referenced as Sustainable and Transition Finance from 2026 onwards. ## Retail Bank Through our financial products and partner offers, we support our UK retail customers in purchasing energy-efficient homes and in retrofitting their properties to help reduce their energy consumption. ## Green Home Mortgage We continue to support customers purchasing EPC A- and B-rated new-build homes with our Green Home Mortgage, launched in 2018 and expanded to buy-to-let in 2022. In 2025, we broadened our Green Home Mortgage range, now supporting more customers by offering LTVs from 60% to 90%. Our Green Home Mortgage has performed strongly, with £2.4bn lent to Green Home Mortgage customers in 2025. Since inception, Barclays UK has lent over £7.1bn to Green Home Mortgage customers. Further details on Barclays Green Home Mortgages can be found at: barclays.co.uk/mortgages/green-home-mortgage/ Further details on Barclays Green Buy-To-Let Mortgages can be found at: barclays.co.uk/mortgages/green-buy-to-let-mortgage/ ## Green Home Mortgage completions Number of completions | A: 9,110 | B: 29,504 | | --- | --- | A 2025 progress B Total since 2018 Value of completions (£m) | A: 2,393 | B: 7,132 | | --- | --- | A 2025 progress B Total since 2018 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Financing clients' transition (continued) ### Greener Home Loan In 2025, we continued our Greener Home Loan pilot, offering a cashback of up to £250 for eligible current account customers who take out a loan and use the money for qualifying energy-efficiency home improvements. We continue to monitor take-up and retrofit type, with solar being the most popular installation with 59% of claims where cashback payment was made. In 2026, following the pilot, the Greener Home Loan will be considered for inclusion within our full product range to continue supporting our customers in making home energy-efficiency improvements. ## Business Bank In 2025, uptake of Green Loans for Business continued to grow, supporting more customers than in any previous year to adopt eligible green assets. Our research showed that 48% of those of our UK farmers surveyed want products and services which incentivise them to farm more sustainably. In 2025, we launched Farm Transition Finance, which provides lending with discounted interest rates to agricultural businesses demonstrating adoption of more sustainable or regenerative practices. The facility is designed to support those clients making improvements in soil health, biodiversity, water efficiency and emissions reduction, thus supporting farmers and the UK agricultural transition. ## UK Corporate Bank To enhance UKCB's sustainable client engagement we have integrated Sustainable Product Group specialists into the new dedicated UKC Sustainable Finance team. ### Empowering UKCB Clients We continued to support our clients with sustainability-aligned corporate banking solutions¹ to help enable clients to embed their sustainability and transition ambitions into financing structures through traditional and sustainability-linked and green products. ### UKCB Green Loans In 2025, UKCB successfully launched the Fee Free Green Loan programme to help support UK clients' sustainable growth plans and transition to more sustainable operations. The product offers loans with no arrangement fees for projects with an eligible green purpose². Since launch we have identified a variety of opportunities that could utilise the programme. ### UKCB Green loans under Sustainable Residential Development Framework (SRDF) We updated our SRDF³ following its launch in 2022 to address evolving market and technological advances, regulation and policy. This proposition and framework provides a holistic and balanced approach to key sustainability themes including whole-life carbon, natural resources and social engagement. ### Notes: 1. Sustainability-aligned corporate banking solutions: barclayscorporate.com/solutions/sustainable-solutions/ 2. Barclays green purpose as defined in the Sustainable Finance Framework. 3. Sustainable Residential Development Framework. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B # Financing clients' transition (continued) ## Investment Bank Our Investment Bank plays a role in financing our clients' transition by providing access to capital markets, structuring innovative financing solutions and connecting issuers with investors focused on the transition. In 2025, we continued to work with clients across sectors as they sought to invest in renewables, strengthen grid and storage infrastructure, scale emerging technologies and accelerate decarbonisation across their operations. We also supported major sovereign and public sector entities in mobilising capital at scale. Barclays played key roles, such as Joint Active Bookrunner, facilitating capital raising for national-level transition priorities including renewable energy deployment, grid and network upgrades, climate resilience infrastructure and broader economic diversification programmes In the wider debt capital markets, we supported clients across sectors such as Power Generation and Industrials to issue sustainable and transition aligned instruments that channel investment into the areas most critical for decarbonisation including, renewables expansion, energy efficiency improvements, low-carbon transport, industrial electrification, and next-generation technologies such as storage, nuclear and hydrogen. This activity contributed to Barclays achieving a #1 ranking for UK Sustainable Labelled Bonds and a #2 ranking for 2025 Global Corporate Sustainable Labelled Bonds¹. Through our bookrunning and underwriting activity, Barclays supported clients' transition financing across a series of significant equity capital markets transactions. This activity enabled continued investment in low carbon and resilience focused programmes. Proceeds from these transactions were used to refinance maturing sustainability-linked instruments, fund regulated infrastructure cycles and scale next generation energy and power-system technologies. For example we acted as Joint Global Coordinator and Joint Bookrunner for SSE's £2bn equity placing, underpinning its five-year £33bn investment plan, which will support the upgrading and expansion of Britain's electricity networks. The transaction further exemplifies our role in enabling the delivery of critical transition infrastructure. In project finance, activity remained strong as clients pursued new renewable generation, storage, and network projects. By bringing together technical, financing and risk management expertise, we have grown our project finance threefold since 2020, including lead roles in all greenfield UK fixed-bottom offshore wind project financings closed in this period. Our Markets team continued to help clients manage exposures linked to their transition strategies. To deepen this support we launched the Barclays Bank PLC Sustainability Issuance Programme Framework that sets clear eligibility criteria for sustainability issuance products, including debt securities and deposits², issued by Barclays Bank PLC and select subsidiaries. The Framework complements the Barclays SFF and enhances the tools and infrastructure we use to finance clients' transition at scale³. ## Notes: 1. Data from Dealogic as at 31st December 2025. 2. Barclays Sustainability Issuance Framework. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Scaling climate technology Scaling climate technology is integral to accelerating the transition. Innovation is a key driver for opening new avenues for profitable decarbonisation. However, innovation alone is not enough. Widespread adoption is needed to convert emerging solutions into commercially mainstream, system-integrated offerings. ## Climate Tech Escalator Now in its second year, the Barclays Climate Tech Escalator provides a connected pathway that brings together the business units and partnerships dedicated to growing climate tech companies. The Climate Tech Escalator supports scaling by providing tailored, dedicated support as the companies grow and helps them to harness the power of capital markets. In June we launched our Barclays Innovation Banking proposition within the Business Bank, with Climate Tech as one of the four core sectors. Innovation Banking provides support for next-level growth through our dedicated relationship managers, financial products and network of Eagle Labs, including the rebranded Barclays Innovation Hub in Shoreditch. We continue to recognise the funding challenge inhibiting the success of growth-stage climate tech companies, particularly those at the Series B+ investment stage. In November, we announced our participation in Salica Investments Growth Debt Fund II, to expand the range of venture funding options to high-growth innovation-led businesses in the UK. The addition of venture funding provides growth stage companies with the opportunity to extend the funding continuum from Business Banking to Corporate Bank and onto Investment Bank as the companies grow. ## Barclays Climate Ventures A key pillar of the Climate Tech Escalator is Barclays Climate Ventures (BCV), which has a mandate to invest up to £500 million of Barclays' capital in climate tech start-ups by the end of 2027 to help address the funding gap facing early and growth-stage climate technology companies. Many such companies are capital-intensive and face longer paths to commercial scale than traditional venture-backed businesses. Barclays Climate Ventures aims to help bridge this gap, helping to crowd in additional funding¹. ![img-29.jpeg](img-29.jpeg) BCV prioritises investments into commercially scalable technologies that can unlock the transition for the high-emitting sectors in which we have meaningful client exposure, such as energy and power, real estate, and food and agriculture. Since 2020 £274m has been invested in over 20 companies, with £71m invested in 2025. Note: 1 See 2025 Climate-Tech-Report for further details. ## £274m Achieved as of the end of 2025 Our portfolio of investments since 2020 (£m) | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | A | 2020 | | | | | 24 | | B | 2021 | | | | | 30 | | C | 2022 | | | | | 35 | | D | 2023 | | | | | 49 | | E | 2024 | | | | | 65 | | F | 2025 | | | | | 71 | | G | Mandate by end of 2027 | | | | | 500 | Further examples of our green innovation financing can be found at: home.barclays/sustainability/our-position-on-climate-change/accelerating-the-transition/sustainable-impact-capital/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Climate tech partnerships and initiatives In 2025, Barclays strengthened its work on climate innovation through strategic partnerships, accelerator programmes and mentoring support. Our partnership with Sustainable Ventures has expanded to launch a National Climate Tech Accelerator with the Innovation Banking team providing a digital-first programme designed to reach ventures across the UK with support from Barclays Eagle Labs. It combined free access to platforms with enhanced services for Barclays banked customers. Business Bank Sustainable Finance sponsored Bright Tide to deliver programmes to Climate Tech businesses focused on 'Sustainability and AI' and 'Agriculture and Oceans'. This year also marked the third year of the Carbon 13 Venture Launchpad, These two programmes focused on venture growth, investment and carbon impact for early-stage climate tech startups. Specialist sustainability mentors have also been added to the existing Eagle Labs mentoring support with a focus on practical, commercially-minded sustainability such as carbon accounting, strategy, circular economy and regenerative agricultural practices. In 2025 we announced a collaboration with ExpectAI, aimed at helping small and medium-sized businesses grow their profits using AI-based sustainability insights. SMEs generate about half of UK private-sector turnover and employ around 60% of the workforce¹. Strengthening their energy resilience while reducing emissions is essential to the UK's economic transition. This initiative will assess how advanced AI can make this both practical and commercially attractive for SMEs. These initiatives reflect Barclays' ongoing work to help foster innovation and support the UK's climate tech landscape, supported by the launch of Barclays Innovation Banking in Barclays UK. ## Unreasonable Impact Since 2016, through its Unreasonable Impact programme, a partnership between Barclays and Unreasonable Group, Barclays has supported 395² high-growth ventures that seek to address global issues, through networks, resources and mentorship. Hundreds of Barclays colleagues around the world have been involved in coaching the participating entrepreneurs. Through regional gatherings and ongoing community-building initiatives, the programme is designed to help participants form strategic relationships and solve key challenges facing their businesses to help them scale. Unreasonable Impact entrepreneurs are pursuing solutions across a range of industries from food and agriculture to energy and manufacturing. Several of these high-growth ventures have also been supported through Barclays Climate Ventures, and some are involved in Barclays' own operations today. To date, the Unreasonable Impact ventures have raised more than $18bn in financing and employ more than 33,000 people globally. > Further details on Unreasonable Impact can be found at: home.barclays/sustainability/supporting-our-communities/unreasonable-impact/ ## Notes: 1. See the "Business population estimates for the UK and regions 2025: statistical release" for more details.gov.uk/government/statistics/business-population-estimates-2025/business-population-estimates-for-the-uk-and-regions-2025-statistical-release 2. After achieving its goal to support 250 ventures by the end of 2022, Barclays aims to support an additional 200 ventures through Unreasonable Impact, from 2023 through end 2027. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 48 # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Reducing our financed emissions We are committed to aligning our financing with the goals and timelines of the Paris Agreement, consistent with limiting the increase in global temperatures to 1.5°C. To meet our ambition, we need to reduce the client emissions we finance – not just for lending but for capital markets activities too. We work closely with our clients to ensure that over time the activities we finance are aligned to the goals and timelines of the Paris Agreement. Consistent with our Purpose, and taking into account considerations of all relevant business factors, we have set emissions reduction targets for our Upstream Energy, Power, Steel, Cement, Automotive manufacturing, Aviation, UK Commercial Real Estate, UK Agriculture portfolios and convergence point for UK Housing. We have also set clear restrictions on financing certain activities. Further details on our financing restrictions can be found on page 164 ## Understanding our financed emissions A building block for Barclays' ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050 is our ability to estimate the full in-scope balance sheet financed emissions: 1. In 2020, we developed our BlueTrack™ methodology to measure our financed emissions and track our progress against our Upstream Energy and Power generation targets. As of 2023, we extended the scope of our calculations to cover the full in-scope balance sheet financed emissions based on methodology which has been developed using the PCAF Standard² and expanded the scope of BlueTrack™ to track our progress against targets for a total of eight sectors as well as UK Housing for which we set a convergence point. 2. In 2025, we have refreshed our estimate of full in-scope balance sheet financed emissions. These emissions are set out on pages 48 to 51 where we also set out further information about this methodology. Because it takes time to fully analyse this data, these emissions are as at December 2024. For sectors where we have set 2030 targets, we have continued to use the BlueTrack™ methodology and have updated our financed emissions metrics and progress against those targets with data as at December 2025. Our approach to disclosing financed emissions is pivoted across two sections: 1. Estimating the full in-scope balance sheet financed emissions (Scope 3, Category 15) using a methodology which has been developed using the PCAF Standard. The data reported in this section of the Annual Report (up to page 51) is as at December 2024. Hence, these numbers follow a lag of one year when compared to other climate-related disclosures based on December 2025 in this report, due to the lead time required to fully analyse our entire in-scope exposures. 2. Continuing to use the BlueTrack™ methodology to assess financed emissions for material sectors and set 2030 targets integrating 1.5°C aligned scenarios. This data is being reported as at December 2025. Note: 1 PCAF Standard - PCAF (2022). The Global GHG Accounting and Reporting Standard Part A: Financed Emissions. Second Edition. ## Estimating the full in-scope balance sheet financed emissions ### Scope of activities included and basis of preparation We have estimated the financed emissions for c.£856bn of Barclays' activity as at December 2024 (of which c. £459bn are on-balance sheet exposures) as set out in the following table. ### Identification of in-scope exposure to calculate financed emissions (as at December 2024) | Category | Value (as at Dec 2024) in £m | Comments | | --- | --- | --- | | Total Barclays balance sheet | 1,518,202 | | | Exclusions: | | | | Cash and bank balances, Cash collateral and settlement balances, Derivative financial instruments, Goodwill and intangible assets, Current tax assets, Deferred tax assets, Other assets, Trading portfolio assets (excluding drawn loans), Reverse Repos, and Retail lending (personal lending, retail cards) | (-)1,052,618 | Exposures which have been excluded by the PCAF Standard | | Property, plant and equipment | (-)3,604 | Emissions covered under Barclays Scope 1 and Scope 2 | | Retirement benefit assets | (-)3,263 | Emissions on Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund reported separately as part of Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures Report 2024 | | Total Barclays exposure in scope for computing financed emissions | 458,717 | | | Inclusions | | | | Total Undrawn commitments and contingent liabilities | (+)261,687 | We have gone beyond the scope of PCAF's definition of asset classes to additionally cover undrawn commitments and contingent liabilities. We have excluded exposures for which PCAF is yet to establish a methodology (personal lending, retail cards and Trading balances) from our total undrawn commitments and contingent liabilities. | | Capital markets financing (33% of Barclays share) | (+)135,545 | Equity holdings, Bond issuances, Equity issuances, Syndicated loans | | Total Barclays activities considered for financed emissions calculations | 855,949 | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B Our approach for estimating financed emissions is based on a methodology which has been developed using the PCAF Standard with the following key exceptions: 1. We have gone beyond the scope of PCAF's definition of asset classes to additionally cover undrawn commitments, contingent liabilities and capital markets financing activities. For instance, in the case of a loan we consider the committed amount (both drawn and undrawn), as opposed to just outstanding amounts (which is the approach preferred by PCAF) for calculating financed emissions. 2. We have also consistently used the book value of equity and debt for all clients to calculate the attribution factor, while PCAF recommends using the Enterprise Value Including Cash (EVIC) for listed entities. 3. PCAF recommends calculating emissions at a client level. For certain sectors, clients could have presence in activities across multiple parts of the value chain and in such cases reported emissions may not be consistent and reliable to estimate financed emissions. To overcome this challenge we calculate emissions at an activity level, using a range of options aligned to the PCAF Standard's guidance to calculate client emissions. For certain activities – including Upstream Energy, Power Generation, Automotive manufacturing, UK Agriculture and Aviation – we employ asset-level production data to estimate client emissions. For activities such as Cement and Steel production, we use client reported emissions. Where we do not have sufficient data on reported emissions or physical activities – for example, in relation to mortgages where we do not have EPC data available – we use fallbacks based on emission factors. For an immaterial part of our balance sheet (c.1%), where the appropriate sector fallbacks could not be reliably obtained, we have used the respective asset class average economic emissions intensity to estimate emissions. Our Financed Emissions Methodology paper (published in 2026) provides more details of our methodology and can be found within the Sustainability Resource Hub: home.barclays/our-sustainability-/sustainability-resource-hub/reporting-and-disclosures/ # Emissions coverage We have estimated the full in-scope balance sheet financed emissions based on Scope 1 and Scope 2 of our clients' emissions as at December 2024. Hence, these numbers follow a lag of one year when compared to other disclosures based on December 2025 in this report. The lag of one year is due to the lead time required to fully analyse our entire in-scope exposures. We have excluded our clients' Scope 3 emissions from these calculations except for activities where we have set a target which covers Scope 3 emissions (which includes Upstream Energy, Automotive manufacturing, Aviation and UK Agriculture). This is due to challenges in sourcing reliable and consistent data, not just on reported Scope 3 emissions but also the fallback emission factors for downstream emission estimations. As we refine our approach and data sourcing strategy, we will continue to assess the suitability of including Scope 3 emissions in our financed emissions disclosures. We have included emissions on a $\mathrm{CO}_{2}\mathrm{e}$ basis. For activities where we have set targets, we have included emissions relating to GHGs which are relevant and material for the relevant sector. One of the approaches that we can use to assess the extent to which our financing is aligned to a wellbelow $2^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ pathway is by calculating the extent to which our financed emissions reduction targets cover our full in-scope balance sheet. Our 2030 financed emissions reduction targets (and our UK Housing convergence point) covering Scope 1 and 2 emissions integrate $1.5^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$ aligned scenarios and cover $41\%$ of our full in-scope balance sheet financed emissions. This coverage has decreased from $43\%$ reported last year. This reduction was primarily driven by increase in emissions for energy midstream and downstream activities which are outside the scope of our Upstream Energy target and a decline in emissions for power generation activities where we have set targets. Our targets include Scope 3 emissions for Upstream Energy, Automotive manufacturing, Aviation and UK Agriculture. --- Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 50 # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Financed emissions for activities with targets (as at December 2024) | Activities | Scope 1,2 emissions (MtCO₂e) | | | | Scope 3 emissions (MtCO₂e) | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | On-balance-sheet lending | Undrawn commitments and contingent liabilities | Capital markets financing | Data quality score¹ | On-balance-sheet lending | Undrawn commitments and contingent liabilities | Capital markets financing | Data Quality score | | Mining and Quarrying | | | | | | | | | | Upstream Energy | 0.7 | 3.0 | 0.9 | 3.1 | 7.6 | 22.2 | 6.6 | 3.1 | | Energy and water | | | | | | | | | | Power Generation | 0.5 | 9.2 | 4.5 | 3.2 | — | — | — | — | | Agriculture, Food and Forest Products | | | | | | | | | | UK Agriculture | 0.4 | 0.1 | — | 4.3 | 0.0 | 0.0 | — | 4.3 | | Manufacturing | | | | | | | | | | Automotive manufacturing (LDV) | 0.0 | 0.1 | 0.0 | 2.4 | 0.4 | 2.7 | 0.6 | 3.3 | | Cement manufacturing | 0.3 | 0.4 | 0.0 | 2.0 | — | — | — | — | | Steel manufacturing | 0.2 | 0.6 | 0.0 | 2.4 | — | — | — | — | | Mortgages | | | | | | | | | | UK Housing (Convergence point) | 1.4 | 0.1 | 0.0 | 3.5 | — | — | — | — | | Materials and Building | | | | | | | | | | UK Commercial Real Estate | 0.1 | 0.0 | — | 4.1 | — | — | — | — | | Transport | | | | | | | | | | Aviation | 0.5 | 2.7 | 0.9 | 3.0 | 0.1 | 0.6 | 0.2 | 3.0 | | Total Portfolio | 4.1 | 16.2 | 6.3 | — | 8.1 | 25.5 | 7.4 | — | ## Financed emissions for other activities not covered by targets (as at December 2024) | Activities | Scope 1,2 emissions (MtCO₂e) | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | On-balance-sheet lending | Undrawn commitments and contingent liabilities | Capital markets financing | Data quality score | | Mining and Quarrying | 0.7 | 1.6 | 0.3 | 3.0 | | Energy and water | 0.7 | 1.7 | 0.7 | 2.8 | | Agriculture, Food and Forest Products | 2.3 | 1.1 | — | 4.8 | | Manufacturing | 1.4 | 7.1 | 1.8 | 2.8 | | Mortgages | 0.0 | — | — | 5.0 | | Materials and Building | 0.2 | 0.2 | 0.0 | 3.9 | | Transport | 0.4 | 3.1 | 2.9 | 3.7 | | Other Sectors | 4.4 | 5.2 | 2.8 | 4.0 | | Total Portfolio | 10.1 | 20.0 | 8.5 | — | | Government and central bank | 18.9 | — | — | — | | Government and central bank (excluding LULUCF²) | 20.5 | — | — | — | | Portfolio Data Quality score (Scope 1, 2) | 3.7 | | | | | Emissions covered under targets integrating 1.5°C aligned scenarios (excluding Government and central bank) | 41% | | | | **Notes:** 1 For further details on Data quality score please refer 'Data sourcing and data quality' section on page 51. 2 Emissions excluding land-use, land-use change and forestry. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Data sourcing and data quality There are data quality challenges inherent in the calculation of financed emissions. Climate data, models and methodologies are evolving – and are not yet at the same standard as more traditional financial metrics. Our financed emissions calculations rely on externally sourced data mapped to internal customer and client identifiers. The externally sourced data has various limitations for each sector, including lack of coverage, low resolution, consistency and transparency of company-reported data, as well as the time lag for external sources to report estimates or actuals. Time lags in our external data could be as much as two years for data such as company value, company revenue share, emissions, production capacity and capacity factors. As a result, our financed emissions metrics are at best an estimate of our clients' activities on a given date, using the external data available at that point in time. We have scored the quality of the data we have used to estimate our financed emissions using PCAF's Global GHG Accounting and Reporting Standard. In the Standard, data quality score DQ1 and 2 relates to high quality data from company disclosures, DQ3 to emissions estimated using physical activity data and DQ4 and DQ5 to deriving emissions estimated using revenue or asset-based emission factors. We disclose DQ score at an activity level and at portfolio level. For activities where we have set targets (and for our UK Housing convergence point), DQ is mostly concentrated across DQ1/2 and DQ3, signifying that most of the relevant estimated financed emissions are either company-reported or calculated using the company's physical activity data. For activities where we have not set targets, activities have DQ score spread across the scale which signifies we have used a combination of company-reported emissions and revenue/asset fallbacks to calculate financed emissions. Our data vendor does not provide a split for reported emissions between DQ1 and DQ2. Hence, where we have relied on reported emissions sourced from the data vendor, we have conservatively used DQ2 for calculating DQ scores at an activity level. This indicates that we need to consider the current estimate of financed emissions for these activities as highly preliminary and indicative only, and which can change materially as we improve data quality. ## Our approach to reporting financed emissions data Given the evolving nature of climate data, models and methodologies, past-period metrics may change to reflect updates. To manage the impact of these changes we have adopted a principles-based approach to guide whether prior metrics and baselines should be restated or re-baseline. Where information has been restated or re-baseline this will be identified or explained. We will continue to review and evolve our approach as our processes mature and as accounting practices become clearer. - A restatement involves updating the historical starting point for a period and, if the impact is greater than five percentage points, recalculating the historical performance. - A re-baseline involves keeping the historical performance constant and recalculating the current period baseline to ensure consistency when reviewing performance. The indicative historical baseline will also be disclosed. As a result, reported baseline metrics may change from one reporting period to another and direct like-for-like comparisons may not always be possible from one reporting period to another. Updates in external client data are captured in-year. In line with our reporting approach for past period metrics, we have re-baseline the following metrics: - Our Power baseline physical intensity metric from 311 to $316\mathrm{kgCO_2e / MWh}$ to reflect revisions to our model and data sourcing. Since the net impact of these revisions to the reported progress was below our restatement threshold, we have not restated the past period progress, instead reflecting the impact in 2025. - In 2025, the UK Housing portfolio intensity metric has been re-baseline from 32.1 to 27.9 $\mathrm{kgCO_2e / m^2}$ to reflect an updated methodology which now considers sensitivities to energy consumption patterns using publicly available data which has a two-year lag. Despite the lag, the additional information helps to better reflect actual consumption trends. - Our UK Commercial Real Estate portfolio intensity metric has been re-baseline from 30.0 to $26.3\mathrm{kgCO_2e / m^2}$ to reflect a similar updated methodology noted above as well as an expanded scope of the assessment to include capital market financing activities. Please refer to page 55 for the re-baseline metrics for these sectors. --- Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 52 # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Our approach to reporting financed emissions data | Scenario | Our approach | | | --- | --- | --- | | Error identified in our internal finance data or methodology | Restatement | • Financed emissions metrics for all years impacted by the error will be recalculated including the baseline year • If the impact to portfolio progress over the reporting period is less than 5 percentage points (pp) we will reflect the updated progress in the current reporting period and update the baseline. If the impact is greater than 5pp we will restate prior progress. | | Changes to our methodology and/or data sources to calculate financed emissions (for example, including additional GHGs) | Re-baseline | • The updated methodology will be applied from the start of the current reporting period • The last reported financed emissions spot metric will be recalculated using the new methodology/data source to provide the new baseline. This will ensure consistency of data and methodology when calculating our performance • The recalculated baseline and the progress achieved to date will be used to disclose the theoretical baseline for the year in which the targets were originally set • The cumulative progress will be for the current reporting period (using the new methodology) and the progress up until the last reporting period (using the old methodology). | | Updates to external counterparty data driven by timing lags when data is reported (for example, counterparty valuations or emissions estimates) | Capture in-year | • The impact of updated external data will be included in the current period financed emissions data and the progress metric for the current reporting period • Data lags are inherent to the process and Barclays will endeavour to use the latest available data. Historically reported metrics will not be updated for data lags. | ## Financed emissions in scope of our targets ### Our targets We set our initial targets for our Upstream Energy¹ and Power portfolios in 2020, and since then have expanded the scope of sectors covered under a target to also include Cement, Steel, Automotive manufacturing, Aviation, UK Commercial Real Estate and UK Agriculture. We have also set a convergence point for the UK Housing sector. We keep our targets, policies that support our progress towards them, and our year-on-year and cumulative progress under review in light of the rapidly changing external environment and our need to balance a range of factors when managing our portfolios, including commercial objectives, effective risk management and the need to support governments and clients both in delivering an orderly transition and providing energy security. See page 57 for information on future target progress. ## Measuring our progress We have developed our BlueTrack™ methodology to measure and track our progress against our targets. The first step of our methodology is to use an external climate scenario to construct a Paris-aligned portfolio benchmark that defines how a given financing portfolio will need to reduce emissions over time. We estimate certain financed emissions within the selected boundary for a sector, then aggregate these into a portfolio-level metric, which is then compared to the benchmark. Our approach is explained in more detail below. ## Sector boundaries We have set targets on the segment of the value chain where either (i) it is generally recognised that decarbonisation efforts are likely to spur the rest of the sector value chain to fall into alignment or (ii) where financiers are likely to be able to engage with companies active in that segment. Our choice of segment is based on Barclays' own view, informed by guidance and recommended practice from portfolio alignment initiatives such as PACTA, SBTi and others. Our Financed Emissions Methodology paper (published in 2026) provides more details of our methodology and can be found within the Sustainability Resource Hub at: home.barclays/our-sustainability-/sustainability-resource-hub/reporting-and-disclosures/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Emissions scope Within the boundary of our target we aim to capture the part of a company's value chain that generates most of their emissions, taking into account considerations including materiality, consistency to benchmark, level of control and whether the emissions can be abated by the company. The financed emissions covered under BlueTrack™ are therefore a subset of the total financed emissions for each customer or client, as they only include the portion of the client's activities that are within both the value chain we have chosen for the sector, and the scope and type of greenhouse gas emissions we deem material for that activity. For example, our Upstream Energy target includes Scope 3 emissions for carbon dioxide and methane – recognising they are significant for a company extracting fossil fuels. ## Use of carbon credits We do not allow company-purchased offsets such as carbon credits to reduce emissions, as we believe it is important to base a metric on operational activities under a company's control. We therefore do allow company-operated removals, such as on-site carbon capture at a plant. Given that company-operated removals are currently marginal in the context of emissions, they currently have no impact on our portfolio-financed emissions metrics. ## Portfolio-level metrics Barclays uses two financed emissions metrics: 1. Absolute emissions: a measure of the absolute emissions generated, or fair share of the company's emissions over time; 2. Emissions intensity: how much CO₂e (Carbon Dioxide Equivalent) is released on average for a certain amount of economic activity or material produced. We use absolute emissions for the Upstream Energy and UK Agriculture sectors, whose decarbonisation pathways rely on a reduction in production volume as well as on a reduction in intensity. The Upstream Energy sector cannot reduce its carbon emissions intensity below a certain point – a barrel of oil cannot be decarbonised, for instance – and therefore a reduction in absolute carbon emissions is more appropriate. The Agriculture sector requires a shift away from the production of meat and dairy towards alternative protein sources, as farmers respond to changing diets, and therefore a reduction in absolute emissions is more appropriate. We use emissions intensity for the other sectors, whose decarbonisation pathways rely primarily on reduction in intensity rather than volumes. Both absolute and intensity metrics are sensitive to factors which are not directly related to real-world emissions. For example, absolute emissions are sensitive to changes in the book value of debt and equity, and intensity metrics are sensitive to changes in revenue share. ## Reference scenario Each of our 2030 targets were developed with reference to a 1.5°C-aligned scenario. For the majority, this was using the IEA's Net Zero by 2050 (NZE2050) scenario. In calculating a convergence point for our UK Housing portfolio and a target for UK Agriculture, we use a UK-focused Balanced Net Zero Scenario developed by the UK's Climate Change Committee (CCC BNZ). For the UK CRE portfolio we use the CRREM scenario that provides decarbonisation pathways across different property types consistent with the NZE2050 scenario. For the Aviation sector we use the Mission Possible Partnership (MPP)'s 'Prudent' (PRU) scenario – a 1.5°C-compatible roadmap for the sector to achieve net zero emissions by 2050. ## Baseline year We measure our financed emissions for each portfolio against a baseline metric determined in the year we first assessed that target. The baseline year therefore varies across the nine sectors assessed to date, to ensure we are using the most up-to-date data available when we set our targets – or, in the case of UK Housing, a convergence point. ## Use of target ranges Our 2030 financed emissions reduction targets for five sectors (Power, Cement, Steel, Automotive manufacturing, and Aviation) are expressed as ranges. The upper end of each range represents the reduction needed to align with the 1.5°C benchmark pathway at the time we set these targets. The lower end reflects our assessment of sector and client commitments at that time. Since these targets were set, the NZE2050 scenario we used to inform these targets has been updated and the scenario assumes slower progress to the transition up to 2030². As a result, some of our target ranges now exceed the emissions reductions reflected in the latest 1.5°C scenario. While we continue to seek to reduce our financed emissions in line with our ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050, our ability to achieve reductions within these ranges at any given point in time depends on a wide range of factors and scenario assumptions as explained in the Future target progress section on page 57. ## Notes: 1. When we first developed BlueTrack™, the best available scenario to develop Paris-aligned benchmarks for our financing portfolios was the International Energy Agency's Sustainable Development Scenario (SDS) which was aligned to a 1.7°C world. The 2025 targets set for the Upstream Energy and Power sectors were informed by the SDS scenario. 2. International Energy Agency: iea.org/reports/world-energy-outlook-2025 --- Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 54 # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B Overview of financed emissions reduction targets and progress | Sector | | | Setting our targets | | | | | | Monitoring our progress in 2025 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Sector | Sector boundaries | Emissions scope | GHG included | Reference scenario | Target metric | Unit of measurement | Baseline year | Target versus baseline | Cumulative change | Absolute emissions (MtCO2e) | Physical intensity | | Upstream Energy | Upstream Energy (producers of coal, oil, gas and NGLs) | 1,2 & 3 | Carbon dioxide and methane | IEA SDS | Absolute emissions | MtCO2e (absolute) | 2020 | -15% by end of 2025 | -41% | 43.7 | 59.2 gCO2e/MJ | | | | | | IEA NZE2050 | | | | -40% by end of 2030 | | | | | Power | Power generators | 1 | Carbon dioxide | IEA SDS | Physical intensity | kgCO2e/MWh | 2020 | -30% by end of 2025 | -35% | 13.6 | 204 | | | | | | IEA NZE2050 | | | | -50% to -69% by end of 2030 | | | | | Cement | Cement manufacturers | 1 & 2 | All GHGs | IEA NZE2050 | Physical intensity | tCO2e/t | 2021 | -20% to -26% by end of 2030 | -13% | 1.5 | 0.551 | | Steel | Steel manufacturers | 1 & 2 | All GHGs | IEA NZE2050 | Physical intensity | tCO2e/t | 2021 | -20% to -40% by end of 2030 | -30% | 0.8 | 1.352 | | Automotive manufacturing | Light Duty Vehicles manufacturers | 1,2 & 3 | All GHGs for Scope 1 and 2; carbon dioxide for Scope 3 | IEA NZE2050 | Physical intensity | gCO2e/km2 | 2022 | -40% to -64% by end of 2030 | -3% | 3.6 | 169.1 | | Aviation | Commercial Aviation (Air Travel) – Passenger (including belly cargo) and Dedicated cargo | 1 & 3 | Carbon dioxide for Scope 1; All GHGs for Scope 3 | MPP Prudent | Physical intensity | gCO2e/RTK | 2023 | -11% to -16% by end of 2030 | -2% | 4.6 | 866 | | UK Commercial Real Estate | UK Corporate Bank | 1 & 2 | Carbon dioxide, methane and nitrous oxide | CRREM II | Physical intensity | kgCO2e/m2 | 2023 | -51% by end of 2030 | -6% | 0.1 | 24.7 | | UK Agriculture | Livestock and dairy farmers | 1, 2 & 3 | Carbon dioxide, methane and nitrous oxide | CCC BNZ | Absolute emissions | MtCO2e | 2023 | -21% by end of 2030 | -13% | 0.5 | N/A | | UK Housing2 | UK buy-to-let and owner-occupied mortgages, Social Housing and Business Banking | 1 & 2 | Carbon dioxide, methane and nitrous oxide | CCC BNZ | Physical intensity | kgCO2e/m2 | 2023 | Portfolio convergence point vs. baseline | -3% | 1.6 | 27.1 | | | | | | | | | | -40% by end of 2030 | | | | Notes: 1 Physical intensity (CO2e emissions per v-km travelled by LDV produced), expressed in gCO2e/km. 2 Barclays has identified a 2030 emissions intensity convergence point for UK Housing but has not set a formal target. --- Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 55 # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B Baselines at December 2025 | Sector | Unit | Baseline year | Baseline metric (last reported) | Previously reported metrics | | Recalculated metrics | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | | Financed emissions for December 2024 | Change at December 2024 (percentage change) | Recalculated financed emissions for December 2024 | Theoretical baseline metric (re-baseline) | | Upstream Energy1 | MtCO2e (absolute) | 2020 | 74.1 | No major impact of methodology changes | | | | | Power3 | kgCO2e/MWh | | 311 | 219 | -30% | 225 | 316 | | Cement1 | tCO2e/t | 2021 | 0.631 | No major impact of methodology changes | | | | | Steel1 | tCO2e/t | | 1.945 | No major impact of methodology changes | | | | | Automotive manufacturing1 | gCO2e/km | 2022 | 174.8 | No major impact of methodology changes | | | | | Aviation1 | gCO2e/RTK | 2023 | 882 | No major impact of methodology changes | | | | | UK Commercial Real Estate | kgCO2e/m2 | | 30 | 29.5 | -2% | 25.9 | 26.3 | | UK Agriculture1 | MtCO2e (absolute) | | 0.53 | No major impact of methodology changes | | | | | UK Housing2 | kgCO2e/m2 | | 32.1 | 31.8 | -1% | 27.6 | 27.9 | Notes: 1. Baseline values have not changed in the current year. 2. Barclays has identified a 2030 emissions intensity convergence point for UK Housing but has not set a formal target. 3. The power sector has been re-baseline due to a data sourcing update. The impact of this change is not considered material. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B # BlueTrack™ dashboard ## Progress of our financed emission metrics ![img-30.jpeg](img-30.jpeg) **Upstream Energy** Absolute emissions (MtCO₂e) (Indexed 2020 = 100) ![img-31.jpeg](img-31.jpeg) **Power** Physical Intensity (kgCO₂e/MWh) (Indexed 2020 = 100) ![img-32.jpeg](img-32.jpeg) **Cement** Physical Intensity (tCO₂e/t) (Indexed 2021 = 100) ![img-33.jpeg](img-33.jpeg) **Steel** Physical Intensity (tCO₂e/t) (Indexed 2021 = 100) ![img-34.jpeg](img-34.jpeg) **Automotive manufacturing** Physical Intensity (gCO₂e/km) (Indexed December 2022 = 100) ![img-35.jpeg](img-35.jpeg) **Aviation (passenger and cargo)** Physical Intensity (gCO₂e/RTK) (Indexed December 2023 = 100) ![img-36.jpeg](img-36.jpeg) **UK Agriculture** Absolute emissions (MtCO₂e) (Indexed December 2023 = 100) ![img-37.jpeg](img-37.jpeg) **UK Housing** Physical Intensity (kgCO₂e/m²) (Indexed December 2023 = 100) ![img-38.jpeg](img-38.jpeg) **UK Commercial Real Estate** Physical Intensity (kgCO₂e/m²) (Indexed December 2023 = 100) --- Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 57 # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Update on progress against targets We have successfully achieved our 2025 financed emissions reduction targets for both the Upstream Energy and Power portfolios. ## Upstream Energy We achieved our 2025 target to reduce our absolute financed emissions by 15%. Cumulatively our absolute financed emissions from our Upstream Energy portfolio have decreased by 41% from our 2020 baseline. Our 2025 financed emissions comprised approximately 79% from clients with oil, gas and natural gas liquids (NGLs) production activities, and 21% from clients with coal production. ## Power We achieved our 2025 target to reduce our Power financed emissions intensity by 30% from a 2020 baseline. Cumulatively our Power portfolio emissions intensity has decreased by 35% from our updated 2020 baseline, see page 51. ## Aviation Our Aviation portfolio financed emissions intensity has cumulatively reduced by 2% from our 2023 baseline. ## Automotive manufacturing Our Automotive manufacturing portfolio financed emissions intensity has cumulatively decreased by 3% from our 2022 baseline. ## Steel Our Steel portfolio financed emissions intensity has cumulatively decreased by 30% from our 2021 baseline. ## Cement Our Cement portfolio financed emissions intensity has cumulatively decreased by 13% from our 2021 baseline. ## UK Agriculture Our UK Agriculture portfolio absolute financed emissions have cumulatively decreased by 13% from our 2023 baseline. ## UK Commercial Real Estate Our UK Commercial Real Estate portfolio financed emissions intensity has cumulatively decreased by 6% from our 2023 baseline which was re-baseline in 2025 (see page 51). ## UK Housing Our UK Housing portfolio financed emissions intensity has cumulatively decreased by 3% from our 2023 baseline, which was re-baseline in 2025 (see page 51). We continue to make strong progress against our EPC ambition for 55% of in-scope properties and collateral with a known EPC to be rated band C or better by 2030, achieving 51.4% by the end of 2025. Further details on each of these portfolios and sector targets can be found in Barclays Transition Update: home.barclays/content/dam/home-barclays/documents/citizenship/Sustainability/Barclays-Transition-Update.pdf ## Basis of Preparation Changes in our portfolio metrics reflect evolving financing activity, improved data inputs, and methodology refinements detailed in our latest Financed Emissions Methodology paper. In line with our established reporting approach, we have re-baseline our Power, UK Commercial Real Estate and UK Housing metrics as noted on page 51. See 'Data sourcing and data quality' on page 51 for more information on the data used to estimate our financed emissions Further details of how climate risk-related considerations are managed can be found in the managing impacts in lending and financing section on page 163. ## EPC ratings of properties and collateral in scope of EPC ambition | A | | | | --- | --- | --- | | B | A EPC Rating A | 4,492 | | | B EPC Rating B | 141,972 | | | C EPC Rating C | 263,583 | | C | D EPC Rating D | 281,279 | | | E EPC Rating E | 86,366 | | | F EPC Rating F | 16,356 | | | G EPC Rating G | 3,269 | | E F G | | 2025 total 797,318 | ## Notes: 1. EPC ambition scope does not currently include Private Bank due to EPC data reporting limitations. 2. Metric based on number of properties and collateral in portfolios that make up the EPC ambition scope as of 31 December 2025. 3. EPC data for Barclays UK mortgages and Kensington Mortgage Company Limited are as of 30 September 2025. Matched EPC data for Social Housing and Business Banking Real Estate are as of 31 December 2025. ## Future target progress Our ability to make progress towards our 2030 financed emissions reduction targets depends heavily on our clients' ability to decarbonise their business models. This, in turn, is influenced by a wide range of external factors including market developments, technological progress and its financial viability, public policy interventions, regulatory alignment, changes to societal behaviour, geopolitical developments and regional variations, energy security requirements, and an orderly transition. For more detail, please see 'Implementing our strategy against a shifting landscape' on page 31. Our sector portfolios will be affected by the complexity and significant uncertainties around the transition to a low-carbon economy. For example, aviation continues to depend on future sustainable aviation fuel (SAF) price and availability, as well as the continued production and delivery of lower emissions aircraft. Similarly, decarbonisation of the automotive sector depends on the pace of the adoption of electric vehicles and impacts from related policy initiatives and regulation in our key markets. Additionally, within UK Commercial Real Estate and UK Housing, decarbonisation is significantly dependent on the growing share of renewable energy sources in the UK energy mix and deployment of low carbon heating solutions. Globally, the expected pace and increase of AI-driven energy demand may impact our Upstream Energy and Power clients' decarbonisation progress. Our metrics will continue to be impacted in the future as data availability and quality, methodologies, guidance and best practices for calculating financed emissions, all involving varying estimation levels, continue to evolve and be refined. Our Cement and Steel portfolios are comprised of a small number of clients. We rely on data reported by those clients. Changes in the availability and quality of that data and changes in our financing activity with these clients can have a material impact on our financed emissions intensity metrics for these portfolios. We monitor our target performance regularly, recognising metrics are sensitive to the factors described above as well as changes in our financing mix, capital markets shifts, client financing needs and client emissions data. We continue to manage our portfolios and will continue to reassess our approach as new information becomes available, balancing between our and our clients' commercial goals, including potential franchise impacts, risk management and other non-financial objectives in support of our strategy. Our progress will likely remain non-linear amid these complexities and the significant uncertainties around the transition to a low-carbon economy. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Achieving net zero operations We are working towards achieving net zero operations as part of our ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050. This includes setting and meeting various milestones¹ and targets¹ to reduce our operational emissions, with significant progress already made. ## Net zero operations approach To achieve net zero operations we are pursuing a state in which we will achieve a greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions reduction of our Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 operational emissions² consistent with a 1.5°C-aligned pathway and counterbalance any residual emissions. We aim to develop our approach to counterbalancing residual emissions as we approach 2050, by evaluating the latest technology and market practices on carbon credits. We continue to focus our efforts on the most emission-intensive areas of our operations and where we think we have the greatest ability to influence a reduction in those emissions over time. We pursue this recognising that our progress is likely to be non-linear amid the significant uncertainties around the transition to a low-carbon economy. This is because projects will take time to be fully realised and because we depend on external factors, including changes in legislation, regulation and governmental policy, as well as the decarbonisation efforts of our Third-Party Service Providers (TPSPs)³ and the energy grids in the markets where we operate. We aim to continue evaluating and evolving our approach, taking into consideration internal management decisions and external factors, including the latest scientific developments and market standards. ## Progress to date Barclays has achieved all its 2025 net zero operations milestones and targets, continuing to source 100% renewable electricity for our global real estate portfolio⁴ and reducing our Scope 1 and 2 market-based emissions by 97% against a 2018 baseline - exceeding our 90% reduction target. We maintained 100% renewable electricity sourcing for our global real estate portfolio through instruments including green tariffs⁵ (2%), energy attribute certificates (EACs⁶)(49%), and EACs from a power purchase agreement (PPA)(49%). We have also achieved our milestone to have 100% of our UK corporate vehicle fleet transition to electric vehicles (EVs), and exceeded our milestone that 70% of suppliers, by addressable spend⁸, have science-based GHG emissions reduction targets⁹ in place—having achieved 73%¹⁰ by the end of the 2025 reporting year. Building on this progress, in 2025 we reviewed our milestones and targets and plan to: - Conclude reporting on our achieved 2025 targets and milestones, while continuing to work towards our 2030, 2035 and 2050 milestones. - Continue sourcing 100% renewable electricity through to the end of 2030, signalling demand for renewable electricity generation in the markets where we operate. ## 2025 targets and milestones achieved | Targets by the end of 2025 | | FY2025 performance | FY2024 performance | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 100% | renewable electricity sourcing for our global real estate portfolio | ☑ 100% | 100% | | 90% | absolute reduction in our Scope 1 and 2 market-based GHG emissions against a 2018 baseline | ☑ 97% | 95% | | Milestones by the end of 2025 | | FY2025 performance | FY2024 performance | | 100% | electric vehicles (EVs) transition for UK company cars | ☑ 100%⁷ | 98%⁷ | | 70% | of our suppliers, by addressable spend⁸, having science-based GHG emissions reduction targets⁹ in place | ☑ 73%¹⁰ | 64%¹⁰ | ## Notes: 1. In this Achieving net zero operations section, a reference to a 'milestone' denotes an indicator we are working towards and report against and a reference to a 'target' denotes an indicator linked to our executive remuneration. 2. We define the scope of our Scope 3 operational emissions for the purposes of our net zero operations approach, to include the following GHG Protocol Scope 3 categories: supply chain (Category 1,2 and 4), waste (Category 5), business travel (Category 6) and leased assets (Category 8 and 13). 3. TPSP means any entity that has entered into an arrangement with Barclays in order to provide business functions, activities, goods and/or services to Barclays. 4. In this Achieving net zero operations section a reference to global real estate portfolio includes offices, campuses, branches, warehouses and data centres within our operational control. 5. Green tariffs (retail procurement) are standardised renewable electricity products in regulated electricity markets offered by utility companies, allowing large commercial and industrial customers to buy bundled renewable electricity through a special utility tariff rate. Project-specificity is not a requirement for retail procurement. 6. EACs are standardised, tradable instruments, that prove that generally 1 MWh of electricity has been generated from a renewable source and added to a grid. 7. The performance metric comprises Battery Electric Vehicles and Plug-In Hybrid Vehicles that are at a maximum of 50g CO₂/km and a minimum 30 miles in electric range. 8. Addressable spend is a subset of external costs incurred by Barclays in the normal course of business where Procurement has oversight over spend. It excludes costs such as regulatory fines or charges, exchange fees, taxation, employee expenses or litigation costs and property rent. 9. Targets are considered 'science-based' if they are in line with what the latest climate science deems necessary to meet the goals and timelines of the Paris Agreement - limiting global warming to well below 2°C above pre-industrial levels and pursuing efforts to limit warming to 1.5°C. 10. The performance metric reflects the number of TPSPs, by addressable spend, that contribute to our supply chain emissions and have science-based targets in place. The 2025 reporting period addressable spend data is based on data extracted on 3 November 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B Our net zero operations milestones | By the end of | Net zero operations milestones | FY2025 performance | FY2024 performance | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 2030 | 50% absolute reduction in our Scope 1 and 2 location-based GHG emissions against a 2018 baseline | 62% | 56% | | | 100% EVs or ultra-low emissions vehicles (ULEVs) for all company cars | 68%² | 57%² | | | 90% of our suppliers, by addressable spend³, having science-based GHG emissions reduction targets⁴ in place | 73%⁵ | 64%⁵ | | | 50% absolute GHG supply chain emissions⁶ reduction against a 2018 baseline | 39%⁸ | 35%⁸ | | 2035 | 10MW on-site renewable electricity capacity installed across our global real estate portfolio | 2.33 MW | 0.40 MW | | | 115 kWh/m²/year average energy use intensity across our corporate offices⁷ | 234 kWh/m²/year | 225 kWh/m²/year | | 2050 | 90% absolute GHG supply chain emissions⁶ reduction against a 2018 baseline | 39%⁸ | 35%⁸ | # Our approach to operational climate-related data Accurate and meaningful climate-related data is central to our net zero operations strategy. The data helps us better identify sources of emissions, understand which actions to prioritise to reduce these emissions, and model expected impacts of our activities and external factors on our performance. We continue to focus our efforts on increasing our climate-related data quality and coverage. For example, in 2025, 60% of our supply chain emissions data was provided directly by our TPSPs, compared with 2018, when no such data was collected. However, due to the evolving nature of climate-related data, market methodologies and our continuous data enhancements, we are likely to see changes to previously reported figures and the overall trajectory of our decarbonisation efforts. In 2025 we recalculated our operational emissions 2018 baseline to reflect business changes, by: - Incorporating emissions from Tesco Bank operations following Barclays' acquisition of the Tesco Bank business on 1 November 2024. - Excluding emissions from Hamburg operations following Barclays' sale of its consumer finance business in Germany on 3 February 2025. To calculate our 2024 performance, we used the 2018 baseline reported in our FY2024 disclosures, and to calculate our 2025 performance we used our recalculated 2018 baseline (reflecting these business changes). We also recalculated our previously reported supply chain emissions 2018 baseline and 2024 emissions due to the UK Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs (Defra) updating its GHG emissions conversion factors. Barclays applies these factors in the calculation of its spend-based supply chain emissions. Following this recalculation we have observed an overall reduction in both our 2018 baseline and 2024 supply chain emissions. This update led to a change of our previously reported 2024 supply chain performance (from 36% to 35% reduction in GHG emissions relative to the 2018 baseline). For more details on our operational emissions accounting approach please refer to the Barclays Sustainability Reporting Framework, found here: home.barclays/investor-relations/reports-and-events/annual-reports/. # Notes: 1. We report on our zero waste milestone in the context of our nature programme, on page 60. 2. For UK vehicles the performance metric comprises, BEVs and PHEVs that are at a maximum of 50g CO₂/km and a minimum 30 miles in electric range; for Europe vehicles, BEVs and PHEVs that are at a maximum of 50g CO₂/km; for India vehicles, BEVs only. 3. Addressable spend is a subset of external costs incurred by Barclays in the normal course of business where Procurement has oversight over spend. It excludes costs such as regulatory fines or charges, exchange fees, taxation, employee expenses or litigation costs and property rent. 4. Targets are considered 'science-based' if they are in line with what the latest climate science deems necessary to meet the goals and timelines of the Paris Agreement - limiting global warming to well below 2°C above pre-industrial levels and pursuing efforts to limit warming to 1.5°C. 5. The performance metric reflects the number of TPSPs, by addressable spend, that contribute to our supply chain emissions and have science-based targets in place. The 2025 reporting period addressable spend data is based on data extracted on 3 November 2025. 6. Our reporting of supply chain emissions includes the following GHG Protocol Scope 3 categories: Category 1: Purchased Goods and Services, Category 2: Capital Goods, Category 4: Upstream transportation and distribution. In 2025 we reported GHG emissions of Categories 1, 2 and 4 by aggregating these under Category 1. 7. Our EUI milestone includes energy and floor space from our campuses and offices. 8. VAT, where applicable, is currently included in our spend-based supply chain emissions data. The 2025 reporting period addressable spend data is based on data extracted on 3 November 2025. 9. In this net zero operations section, climate-related data refers to quantitative and qualitative data that informs our net zero operations strategy. This may include but is not limited to GHG emissions data, energy and water usage, TPSP decarbonisation activities and industry data on climate scenarios. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Reducing our Scope 1 and 2 emissions ### Global real estate portfolio We are making progress towards our 2030 Scope 1 and 2 location-based emissions reduction milestone, having by the end of 2025, reduced these emissions by 62% against a 2018 baseline. This progress was driven by: - A reduction in our operational energy demand from the consolidation of our global real estate portfolio. - Improvements in energy efficiency of our global real estate portfolio. - The targeted electrification of our global real estate portfolio and our vehicle fleet. - The decarbonisation of external grids in the markets where we operate. We continued to progress decarbonisation initiatives across our real estate portfolio by implementing transformation projects across several of our campuses. For example, by the end of 2025: - We installed 2.33 MW of on-site renewable electricity capacity across our global real estate portfolio, with the Whippany¹ campus making the largest contribution through the installation of 3,400 solar panels. - At 1 Churchill Place², upgrades to the building management system (BMS), installation of solar panels and multi-function units contributed to an estimated 11%³ year on year reduction in the building's electricity consumption. These transformation projects are complemented by our ongoing efforts to improve energy efficiency across selected locations in our global real estate portfolio. For example, in 2025 as part of our energy optimisation programme at our Pune⁴, Noida⁵ and Mumbai⁶ locations we adjusted our BMS during periods of low or no occupancy to reduce these properties' energy demand. These types of initiatives have contributed to a 51% reduction in our energy consumption across our global real estate portfolio compared to 2018. Figure 1: Impacts of our energy optimisation programme at our Pune campus⁷ ![img-39.jpeg](img-39.jpeg) A Energy consumption with adoption of energy optimisation programme B Energy consumption with no energy optimisation programme As we advance the energy optimisation programme and invest in energy-efficient equipment across selected locations in our global real estate portfolio, we recognise that energy savings may fluctuate over time and will be realised progressively as those improvements begin to take effect. By the end of 2025, the energy use intensity (EUI) of our corporate offices was 234 kWh/m²/year, an increase from prior year driven by our corporate office footprint consolidation. Overall, however, we have been operating our corporate offices more efficiently, as our EUI has reduced by 26% against a 2018 baseline. In addition to transformation projects and ongoing energy efficiency activities, we are working with our landlords to pursue electrification and energy efficiency upgrades through our Green Leasing Toolkit. Since its launch in 2023, we have embedded green lease clauses⁸ into 68% of newly acquired or renewed offices and campus leases. This is a significant development given our leases makes up a substantial proportion of our Scope 1 and 2 emissions. In 2025 we updated our Sustainability Design and Construction Checklist, by including nature-related considerations that align to our initial real estate LEAP¹⁰ (Locate Evaluate Assess Prepare) assessment findings¹¹. This work is helping us to better understand and manage potential nature-related impacts within our real estate portfolio. To manage our nature-related impacts, we are also delivering on our zero waste programme¹². Across our campuses¹³ we have an ambition to achieve and maintain TRUE (Total Resource Use and Efficiency) zero waste certified projects by the end of 2035. By the end of 2025, we diverted 56% of our campuses' waste away from landfill, incineration and the environment, against a milestone to divert 90% by the end of 2035. ## Technology In 2025, we built and launched our Managed Lab Service at our Radbroke campus - a secure micro data centre environment to support validation and testing of current and next-generation IT hardware and software. The facility is intended to support our resilience, end-of-life management capabilities for our IT infrastructure, and adoption of emerging low-emission technologies, including the testing of direct liquid cooling capabilities. ## Corporate vehicle fleet By the end of 2025, as part of our commitment to Climate Group's EV100 initiative, we achieved our milestone to have 100% of our UK corporate vehicle fleet transition to electric vehicles (EVs). We have also made progress in transitioning our global corporate vehicle fleet to electric vehicles (EVs) or ultra-low emissions vehicles (ULEVs) having transitioned 68% of our 5,216 global fleet. We continue to monitor market developments, such as the adoption of Zero Emission Vehicles (ZEVs, which emit zero emissions at the tailpipes), as we transition our global fleet to EVs. We also recognise we are largely dependent on transport policy and infrastructure decarbonisation in the markets where we operate. These factors will influence our ability to progress towards our 2030 milestone. ## Notes: 1. Buildings 100, 300 & 400, Jefferson Park, Whippany, NJ 07981, USA. 2. 1 Churchill Place, Canary Wharf, London, E14 5HP, UK. 3. Data represents reduction when comparing September 2024 and September 2025 electricity consumption for 1 Churchill Place. 4. Gera Commerzone SEZ, Eon It Park Road, Kharadi, Pune, 411014, India. 5. Candor Techtspace, Institutional Plot No 2, 1& 2 Blk B, Sec-62, Gautam Budh Nagar, Uttar Pradesh, Noida, 201309, India. 6. Nirloin Knowledge Park, Wing B Block B-6, Off Western Exp Hwy), Goregaon (East), Mumbai, 400063, India. 7. Figure 1 represents the energy use patterns on a normal working day, a public holiday and a weekend day, at our Pune campus, which has adopted the energy optimisation programme. It highlights the resulting reduction in energy consumption from the programme, a trend we have observed across locations in our global real estate portfolio implementing the programme. 8. Our EUI milestone includes energy and floor space from our campuses and offices. 9. For more detail on our green lease clauses, please see page 75 of Barclays PLC Annual Report 2024. 10. Taskforce on Nature-related Financial Disclosure's (TNFD) methodology. 11. Refer to page 77 of Barclays PLC Annual Report 2024 to find out more on our TNFD LEAP assessment findings. 12. For more detail on the zero waste programme, please see page 77 of Barclays PLC Annual Report 2024. 13. Campuses include 1 Churchill Place, London, Radbroke, Northampton, Glasgow, Whippany, 745 7th Avenue, New York, Wilmington, Pune, Chennai and Noida. Chennai and Noida have been classified as campuses in our 2025 operational emissions reporting year. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our climate strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Addressing our Scope 3 operational emissions In 2025, supply chain emissions accounted for the largest proportion (67%) of our total operational GHG emissions¹. While emissions from waste and leased assets are comparatively lower, we remain committed to identifying and pursuing opportunities to reduce them. Further details on our waste and leased assets approach can be found in the Global real estate portfolio section on page 60. ## Supply chain In the 2025 reporting year, we observed a 39% reduction in our absolute supply chain emissions relative to the 2018 baseline. While this represents progress, it is important to note that approximately 40% of our supply chain emissions are estimated using spend-based data. As a result, reported reductions may not fully reflect actual decarbonisation within our supply chain. To look to address this limitation, we work with our TPSPs to enhance the availability and quality of our supply chain climate-related data, enabling more accurate tracking of our emissions reduction milestones. We leverage Carbon Disclosure Project (CDP) and EcoVadis as platforms to gather data and engage with TPSPs. In 2025, 89% of invited TPSPs responded to CDP, demonstrating strong engagement across our supply chain. This enabled us to enhance our use of primary supply chain emissions data, reaching 60% by year-end. ## Supply chain emissions primary and spend-based data ![img-40.jpeg](img-40.jpeg) A Spend-based data* B Primary data** ## Notes: * Spend-based data: data based on the calculation of the economic value of the goods and services purchased, multiplied by relevant industry average GHG emission factors (i.e. Defra). ** Primary data: GHG emissions data sourced from TPSPs. TPSP engagements also supported us to exceed our milestone of 70% of suppliers, by addressable spend, having science-based GHG emissions reduction targets in place — achieving 73%. Insights from our TPSP engagements and supply chain emissions were incorporated into our Supplier Transition Framework (STF)², identifying priority TPSPs that accounted for approximately 68% of Barclays' supply chain emissions in the 2024 reporting year. We are working closely with these priority TPSPs and their Barclays Accountable Executives to develop strategic, actionable engagement plans aimed at driving continuous improvement in data quality, climate commitments, and decarbonisation opportunities. Our approach is tailored to support priority TPSPs' unique needs, recognising that they are at different stages in their transition journeys. We continued to upskill our TPSPs Barclays Accountable Executives, supplier managers and sourcing colleagues on the sustainability impact of our supply chain to support with the delivery of the engagement plans. We also continued to seek to negotiate climate-related requirements in our TPSP contract terms and set climate-related expectations in the Barclays TPSP CoC. In 2025 we also began assessing our supply chain nature-related impacts by using the LEAP approach. Through this assessment, we identified 27 of 120 supply chain goods and services categories with potential for significant nature-related impacts. We are using these findings to prioritise pilot engagements with selected TPSPs, focusing on their maturity on nature-related topics. This pilot initiative is integrated within the STF strategic engagement plans. ## Travel Our 2025 total colleague business travel emissions reduced by 45% compared to the 2018 baseline, partly driven by an update in external emissions factors and a shift in business travel behaviours. To inform our decarbonisation approach we plan to continue monitoring our business travel emissions data. However, we recognise that where we can't reduce travel, to decarbonise these emissions we are dependent on transport and grid decarbonisation in the markets where we operate. ## Carbon credits In 2025 we signed an offtake agreement with UNDO⁴, a UK-based climate technology company, with the intent to contribute to high-potential climate mitigation projects. Under this agreement, UNDO expects to permanently remove 6,538⁵ tonnes of carbon dioxide from the atmosphere through enhanced rock weathering. These offtake agreements are funded through a carbon price on internal travel and forms part of our approach to focus on catalytic high-integrity carbon dioxide removal technologies. We do not use this for carbon offsetting. ## Net zero operations co-benefits As we progress on our transition to net zero operations, we seek to deliver strategic co-benefits for Barclays and its key stakeholders. These include driving cost savings - for example, through the energy optimisation programme - strengthening operational resilience, identifying commercial opportunities by collaborating with Climate Ventures and Unreasonable Impact companies, and building stronger relationships with TPSPs and clients. ## Notes: 1. In this net zero operations section, our total accounted operational GHG emissions include Scope 1, Scope 2 (location-based) and Scope 3 Category 1-8 and 13. Scope 3 Category 3 and 7 currently are not part of our net zero operations approach. 2. For more detail on the Supplier Transition Framework structure, please see page 57 of the Barclays Transition Update. 3. Significance is determined through ENCORE (Exploring Natural Capital Opportunities, Risks, and Exposure) a industry-standard tool to help businesses assess how they may depend on and impact nature. 4. To find out more please see our press release with UNDO: home.barclays/news/press-releases/2025/09/ barclays-backs-british-climate-tech-pioneer-undo-in- landmark-car/ 5. This offtake has not been netted against our operational emissions, as we continue to focus our efforts to reduce our operational emissions consistent with a 1.5°C-aligned pathway. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 62 # Implementing our Climate Strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Embedding climate and sustainability into our business We are embedding climate and sustainability throughout Barclays, taking into account the impact of climate-related risks and opportunities on our businesses, strategy and financial planning. ## Impact of climate-related risks and opportunities on our business, strategy and financial planning Barclays' 2025 financial planning process included a review of our strategy, its implementation, and tracking of our progress against climate-related targets – as well as capturing a view of climate-related risks and opportunities. During 2025 we continued to enhance our monthly reporting framework to cover a view of the balance sheet and revenues from sustainable and transition-related activity. This supports our ability to review our Sustainable and Transition Finance portfolio at greater granularity and improve relevant business engagement through the financial planning process. Enhancements were made to help us further evaluate the portfolio's performance and identify opportunities to maximise revenue generation activities. We also considered impairment over the horizon of the financial plan. There are no associated material amendments required to the 2025 financial plan. All key businesses and applicable functions are involved in integrating climate-related risks and opportunities into our financial planning process. Implementing our climate strategy is managed through central Sustainable Finance teams under the Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance. For example: - Our climate strategy is a factor in our finance planning process with a pathway towards aiming to achieve this as well as risks and opportunities reviewed with business heads. - We continue to develop our sustainable and transition finance to ensure that we have a full offering for our clients and customers. - We strive to continue to decarbonise our own operations, reducing our Scope 1 and 2 emissions and our Scope 3 operational emissions. - We measure and track progress towards our financed emissions reduction targets through our BlueTrack methodology. - We conduct portfolio reviews to monitor whether business activities are conducted within Barclays' mandate and aligned with our expectations, and whether they are of an appropriate scale relative to the risk and reward of the underlying activities. Mandate & Scale Exposure Controls form part of our overall Risk Appetite Control Framework and climate risks have been integrated into annual credit portfolio reviews for elevated risk sectors since 2020. We continue to monitor against mandate and scale limits linked to scoring within our Client Transition Framework. The 2025 financial planning process used a five-year baseline scenario to consider the impacts of climate risks. The baseline scenario implicitly considered the impact of current and agreed climate policies across the UK, US and EU on key macroeconomic variables (such as GDP growth and unemployment rates), consistent with market consensus forecasts. The outcome of this assessment found only a de minimis impact from climate-related factors on those macroeconomic variables used to project financial performance. We will continue to review how climate risks manifest in the economy through a baseline scenario. Workstreams specifically related to finance have been further embedded within our overall global financial planning processes, including dedicated climate management reporting information. Further details of how this work has served as an input in our five-year financial planning process and are set out below – including our approach to Sustainable and Transition Finance, targets and capital investments. During the 2025 financial planning process we assessed the financial impact of embedding individual parts of our climate strategy, new initiatives and targets across our businesses. A range of scenario analyses were undertaken during 2025 with the aim to further uncover areas of risk and opportunity, as well as integrate climate scenario analysis into our strategic and financial planning. This included a climate aware Internal Stress Test with the results allowing Barclays to also understand resilience to climate risks in this scenario. The strategic review of sustainable and transition finance was also refreshed during the year across key businesses. The review built upon both new and previously identified commercial opportunities. The output was considered in the financial planning process, including incremental revenue, cost and capital. For further detail on the strategy, please see the 'Sustainability and climate-related opportunities identified over the short, medium and long term' on page 35. The planning process included an assessment of our financed emissions portfolios for the eight high-emitting sectors where we have set absolute emissions or emissions intensity targets: Upstream Energy, Power, Cement, Steel, Aviation, Automotive manufacturing, UK Commercial Real Estate and UK Agriculture, as well as our UK Housing portfolio for which we have set a convergence point. The impacts of our current plans to achieve these targets (where applicable) are considerations and factors in our financial planning process. Barclays continues to engage with our clients to support them in the transition to a low-carbon economy. Our current financed emissions reduction targets are not currently forecasted to materially impact financial performance over the next five years. The financial planning process also covered a review of our net zero operations strategy. We will continue to endeavour to further enhance how Barclays' climate strategy is embedded into the way we think about financial planning over the coming years – reflecting on the progress we made during 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Implementing our Climate Strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation B ## Incentives Financial and non-financial measures, including key climate and sustainability-related measures, are considered in the determination of the Group incentive pool and the incentive outcomes for the Executive Directors of Barclays PLC. Measures are reviewed annually to ensure they reflect the Group's strategic priorities. The incentive pool is also adjusted to take account of risks, both crystallised and potential future risks, and consideration is given to vulnerabilities across all of Barclays' principal risks, which include climate risk. Climate and sustainability-related measures are included as part of the Executive Directors' Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP), reflecting the long-term nature of our ambition, and that progress is expected to be non-linear and is best assessed over a multi-year period. For the 2026-2028 LTIP, an overall weighting of 25% is allocated to the broader category of measures relating to Sustainability, customers and clients. The Group Executive Committee members responsible for Barclays' five business divisions have specific sustainability-related objectives relevant to the businesses they manage against which their performance is assessed at the end of each year. Performance for all colleagues is assessed against individual performance objectives, which are aligned to the consistently excellent standard and include sustainability considerations where applicable. Specific sustainability-related objectives will depend on the role of the individual. Further details can be found in our Remuneration report from page 116 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Resilience of our strategy TCFD Strategy Recommendation C ## Scenario analysis Climate scenario analysis forms a key part of Barclays' approach to assessing and quantifying the impact of physical and transition climate risks on the bank's portfolios. We use this to better understand the significant uncertainty that arises from how climatic weather patterns will change, as well as the rapidly evolving nature of the climate transition from government policies, new technologies and changing individuals' sentiment. Through climate scenario analysis, the risks and uncertainties can be translated into financial impacts to Barclays, allowing us to better understand the resilience of the business strategy. The scenarios explored in this section are under a stressed pathway. Barclays uses climate scenario analysis primarily for (i) understanding Barclays' resilience to climate scenarios, (ii) as a consideration within its financial planning process, (iii) as a consideration within its assessment of Expected Credit Losses reported under IFRS 9. More detail on the Expected Credit Losses uses can be found on page 242. Barclays has progressively developed its internal scenario analysis capabilities, developing new climate assessment methodologies, running internal targeted exercises with external subject matter experts, and participating in regulatory climate stress testing. Barclays continues to build its use of scenario analysis to explore and further understand the evolving landscape – identifying areas of risks and opportunities – to challenge existing assumptions of future climate pathways and measure the risks that climate change poses to the Group. ## Barclays' resilience to climate scenarios Two stress tests incorporating climate risk were conducted during 2025, each with its own scenario aligned to a less than 2°C pathway, to assess Barclays' financial resilience to transition and physical risks. Firstly, the 2025 Internal Stress Test (IST) featured a scenario with climate risk drivers over a five-year period. Secondly, a climate-based Reverse Stress Test (RST) was run with a shorter-term focus, designed to test resilience to extreme, near-term climate events. Based on the results of the scenario analysis performed to date, our view is that Barclays' strategy remains resilient to climate scenarios. Given the evolving climate landscape, we seek to further enhance our capabilities and modelling to refine our understanding of Barclays' resilience to various climate scenarios, particularly given high uncertainty in this area. ## Internal Stress Test The 2025 Internal Stress Test was conducted as a Group-wide exercise across all portfolios over a five-year period, with the scenario specifically designed to evaluate Barclays' ability to withstand both climate-related and traditional macroeconomic risks. This year's scenario placed greater emphasis on physical climate risks than in previous years, featuring two years of stormy and wet weather followed by three years of hot, dry conditions with droughts and wildfires. ## Scenario The 2025 Internal Stress Test (IST25) scenario was designed to be climate-aware, with climate risk drivers incorporated into the development of macroeconomic factors. By doing so, the exercise directly addresses Barclays' climate-related vulnerabilities, while complementing conventional macroeconomic stress testing. To achieve this, Barclays leverages its in-house scenario design capabilities, enabling a more tailored approach and deeper understanding of our risk profile. Rather than relying solely on external scenarios, such as those provided by the Network for Greening the Financial System (NGFS), we developed our own scenario for several reasons: 1) Baseline assumptions differ: External scenarios typically assume a stable macroeconomic backdrop. Our approach layers climate stress on top of an already stressed macroeconomic environment. 2) Policy outlook has shifted: Global climate policy continues to evolve rapidly. Since the NGFS established its baseline assumptions, significant changes have occurred, particularly in the United States. 3) Barclays-specific vulnerabilities: We sought to test risks unique to our portfolios. For example, given our substantial UK mortgage exposure, we incorporated an extreme flood event in London and The Wash region in eastern England to better assess these vulnerabilities, rather than relying on the more generic shocks used by external scenario providers. The scenario narrative was designed over a five-year timeframe aligned with Barclays' Medium Term Planning and Internal Stress Testing scenarios time frame. Specific variables were expanded using subject matter expert judgement by Barclays' internal Global Economic Scenarios and Climate Risk teams to assess both physical and transition climate risks. The exercise is designed to complement conventional Barclays macroeconomic stress testing, and seeks to understand: 1) How transition policies can influence conventional macroeconomic stressed environment pathways and severity. 2) The incremental impact of climate above macroeconomic stressed pathways. 3) How physical risk events may impact key Barclays' exposures. The climate scenario consists of three chronological stages, as depicted in the below chart. These stages include initial policy announcements that trigger immediate asset repricing, while more stringent policy requirements unfold over a longer time horizon - dampening recovery in years 3 to 5. Against this backdrop, the scenario stages also incorporate physical risk considerations: In the first two years, severe 'stormy and wet' weather occurs, characterised through floods and hurricanes. This is followed by three years of 'hot and dry' weather, resulting in water stress and wildfires. The insurance market tightens in the face of increased claims, with restricted risk appetite in high-risk zones and to key perils. Events create greater societal awareness of physical risks and their damages, shifting preferences towards lower risk assets. Implications and policies of the three stages are outlined below: --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Resilience of our strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation C ## Stage 1: Consumer preferences shift toward greener products and practices, particularly in the UK and EU, while consumption is cut to cope with the recessionary environment. Behavioural shifts are pronounced at sector level as consumers turn away from firms who finance carbon-heavy industries. Investors reassess their participation with certain firms. Those with heavy exposure to brown income and/or assets, combined with poor transition plans, are negatively impacted in equity markets – with capital reallocated to greener firms. ## Stage 2: Regional climate policy divergence grows as the UK, EU and China forge ahead as leaders on the transition, with India pivoting because of increased energy security concerns, and the US continuing to focus on domestic fossil fuel energy production, putting downward pressure on oil and gas prices. Low-carbon investments surge due to accelerated investment in the power grid and electric vehicles (EV) infrastructure, supported by declining costs and efficiency increases. In 2028, the UK and EU accelerate or announce additional climate policies. Governments rapidly scale-up investment in EV charging infrastructure to speed up the automotive sector's transition. Existing emissions trading schemes are strengthened to align with a 1.5°C pathway, triggering a significant carbon price shock in 2028. This slows economic recovery and leads to heightened inflation as production costs rise due to increased energy costs, although some of these impacts are partially offset by substantial public and private investment aimed at enabling a faster transition. Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanisms (CBAMs) are introduced, causing supply-side shocks and increased trade frictions. Proposals to tighten EPC minimum standards are accelerated, bringing forward compliance deadlines for Buy-to-Let, Social Housing, and UK Commercial Real Estate properties to achieve EPC rating C or above. In the US, no additional climate policy is assumed at this stage. Nevertheless, some indirect effects are felt from the transition in Europe, primarily through reduced demand for carbon-intensive US exports as CBAMs decrease their competitiveness, and global fossil fuel price shocks. ## Scenario impact (Illustrative only) ![img-41.jpeg](img-41.jpeg) ## Stage 3: By 2029, carbon price growth in the UK and EU slows but remains high. Technological progress, coupled with global capital shifting towards low-carbon solutions, drives the creation of new green jobs. In 2029, the US makes a rapid pivot back to transition policy, aiming to catch up domestically in low-carbon technologies. Policies similar to those introduced in Stage 2 in Europe are implemented, with similar inflationary impacts. The scenario will have significant impacts on Barclays, including: 1. Amplified market shocks: additional to existing macroeconomic shocks, there will be further equity and credit shocks for brown industries and financiers, as a result of immediate repricing. 2. Amplified credit deterioration: additional credit risk on brown industries as a result of lower earnings expectations and refinancing risks. 3. Increase in frequency of physical risk events: throughout the time horizon, there is an increase in the occurrence of physical hazards such as flood, hurricanes and droughts. --- # Resilience of our strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation C ## Results and insights Over the five-year horizon, the IST25 exercise demonstrates that Barclays remains resilient under a scenario of global economic fragmentation, persistent inflation and a combined climate shock. The scenario features both transition and physical climate risks, including severe weather events and a rapid repricing of financial assets. Following this is a steep increase in carbon prices in the EU and UK and accelerated policy action on energy efficiency and real estate standards. The Investment Bank is the main contributor to climate-related losses under IST25, reflecting its exposure to sectors most sensitive to transition and physical climate risks. Losses are driven by declining demand and sustained low prices in oil and gas, The scenario incorporates a sharp rise in carbon prices in the EU and UK, with the EU Emissions Trading System (ETS) price rising to $309/tCO_{2}e$. The UK Mortgages portfolio is directly impacted by both transition and physical climate risks. The scenario assumes major flood and storm events, as well as increased compliance costs from tightened EPC legislation, requiring upgrades to minimum energy performance standards by 2028. Other portfolios, such as BUK Business Bank and unsecured lending, are primarily affected by the broader macroeconomic environment under stress. While these portfolios are included in the overall scenario, their results are not materially driven by climate-specific factors in IST25. The IST25 results are fully integrated into the Group's Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP), informing the setting of risk appetite and supporting the Board's approval of the medium-term capital plan. The scenario confirms that the Group's capital and liquidity positions remain robust, with headroom above regulatory and internal thresholds. Management actions, both business-as-usual and strategic, provide additional capacity to absorb stress impacts if required. While the IST25 exercise incorporates further enhancements in scenario design, modelling, and risk transfer mechanisms, it is acknowledged that results are subject to inherent uncertainties and limitations. These include the evolving nature of climate risk modelling, the potential for more severe or frequent physical events, and the impact of future regulatory changes. The Group continues to refine its approach to stress testing, with a focus on improving data quality, model governance, and scenario relevance to ensure ongoing resilience in the face of emerging risks. ## Reverse Stress Test A climate-based Reverse Stress Test was conducted during 2025, testing the Group's resilience to extreme climate events that challenge the viability of the Group's business model. The exercise tested both physical and transition risk drivers. For physical risk, the scenario included more frequent and severe physical hazards unfolding and resultant tightening of insurance markets; for transition risk it explored a volatile transition, where uncertainty causes challenges to firms' business models in transition-sensitive sectors. ### Physical Risk Extreme weather events strike in the UK, EU and US. In the scenario, the Thames Barrier in the UK is modelled as failing due to inadequate funding of repairs, and an extreme hurricane season in the US is ~3x worse than historic averages. This leads to an insurance 'Minsky Moment', where (re)insurers rapidly update risk appetite for severe physical risks, leading to significant coverage restrictions, increases to premiums and stranded assets. Transition Risk: As a result of these physical risk events, the pressure for transition increases, as the ability to do so declines. Global responses are disorderly and divergent, as they seek to reduce GHGs whilst addressing impacts of physical risk events, and this increases the volatility and uncertainty over where and how fast the transition will occur. As a result, firms struggle to establish effective and efficient business plans, impacting firms with green and brown exposure and causing deterioration in financial performance. ### Results and insights Three sensitivities were assessed across the Group's Corporate, Mortgage, Cards and Structured Lending and Financing portfolios, reflecting the high level of uncertainty of the scenario. The Group's business model could reach non-viability in the two most extreme cases which tested our vulnerability to income losses and capital increases. The exercise highlighted the ways in which these portfolios could be the major driver of losses in a climate scenario, particularly due to physical risk, and provided valuable learnings for further investigation: 1. For UK Mortgages, the exercise provided valuable insights into how concentrations of flood risk can affect the portfolio, how acute (severe flood event) and chronic (ongoing precipitation saturating the ground) can interact to cause significant floods, and highlighted the crucial role that flood defences play in alleviating the impact of flooding on UK homes. 2. For the Corporate Portfolio, results highlighted how physical perils can impact those with high concentrations of assets exposed to these risks, as well as a longer tail of firms with some of their operating sites in sensitive locations. For transition, the portfolio can be exposed to both a fast and slow transition, particularly those companies who have a concentration of green or brown technologies. 3. For Cards, the assessment focused on the US portfolio, and demonstrated the reliance on ongoing affordable home, health and car insurance for customers, as well as wider reliance on FEMA and State disaster relief programmes. 4. For our Structured Lending and Financing portfolio, the exercise pointed out that extreme tail risk is driven by commensurately severe devaluation of properties in certain US states. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Resilience of our strategy (continued) TCFD Strategy Recommendation C ## 2025 Enhancements During 2025, Barclays have made several key enhancements across climate scenario development, climate risk modelling, and the ways in which we embed climate learnings into our risk management. - Climate scenarios are developed by our Global Economic Scenarios Team using existing scenario expansion tools and processes, supplemented with dedicated climate analysis for consistency and granularity. Climate considerations are increasingly embedded within our internal stress testing framework. - An expanded set of climate-specific variables enables modelling of a wider range of impacts. For example, this year we worked with the Barclays Commodities Research Team to assess the likely effect of the scenario on Brent oil prices, strengthening our climate stress-testing capabilities. - A new judgement-based approach model for climate scenario design has been introduced, establishing dedicated governance for climate scenario development. - Scenarios are benchmarked against the latest NGFS short-term scenarios to ensure alignment with industry standards. - For UK residential mortgages, we have continued enhancing the model for both Stress Testing and Economic Capital assessment. The methodology is now able to assess the impacts of windstorm, in addition to flood, subsidence and EPC risk. The model was also enhanced to capture properties for which we did not have flood or subsidence risk data by using a fallback mechanism. - The Corporate Model has been further enhanced this year by the addition of a capital expenditure module, delineating costs between clients who are more or less well-positioned under a climate scenario. This comes with refined assumptions, to address the fact that not all clients can achieve the same level of production that the economy desires in green alternatives, and that clients lagging behind would have to engage in further research and development to meet product demand. - The model is also taking greater geographical granularity into account, by considering regional specific demand and price curves across industries, to better reflect climate policy and sentiment. - The Commercial Real Estate portfolio continues to be an area of focus for assessing climate risk impacts, with additional sensitivities performed to help understand the range of outcomes. - The US REITs portfolio has been analysed using a qualitative model in IST 2025, with key considerations being physical risk drivers, e.g. floods, hurricanes and wildfires. The REITs book is analysed over a five-year horizon at a property and geography level. The analysis factors in rental revenue impact, property valuation impact, restoration costs, operating expense, insurance cover and debt. A sensitivity analysis has also been conducted to validate the model internally for all relevant parameters. ## Challenges and limitations Barclays is continuing to better its understanding of the interlinking relationships between climate, particularly transition risk, and macro variables, a lack of adequate historical data being a key limitation to progress. ## Data There are inherent challenges in climate modelling due to limitations in data quality and availability, given the short history of climate assessments within the financial services industry. - Data coverage is often lacking, where a subset of assets may not have the appropriate information publicly disclosed. Climate scenario risk analysis requires approaches and tools that are more granular (e.g. focus on company-level analysis), which differs from more traditional stress-testing exercises conducted at portfolio or sector level. This creates a need for more granular data. - While high data granularity is desirable to model client-specific features, the balances between high data granularity and the additional insights provided must be investigated to assess the appropriate level of modelling. - Data coherence issues may present inconsistencies in modelling. Emissions data is often one-year lagged, thus where the latest quarter/year financials are available, the emissions data may not be reflective of the company's operations, especially where there has been substantial growth or decline, mergers and acquisitions or other special activities. ## Scenario There are inherent uncertainties with scenario design, largely attributed to limited history of the interactions between climate risks and the economy. - Timing and interactions of physical and transition risks can impact the Group's assessment of capital adequacy and resilience. Assumptions around such compounding effects, while nuanced, are critical to our loss assessment and subsequently risk management processes and business strategy. - There is a level of uncertainty with climate stress-testing projections in (i) how the scenario will manifest; (ii) how customers and clients will react; and (iii) the final loss quantification. - An understanding of compounding risks and feedback loops between financial systems, the economy, and climate risks remains a challenge, given the lack of historical precedent of such interactions. Over longer time horizons, it becomes increasingly difficult to capture the range of second-order effects as physical and transition risks evolve, assess the rate in which risks manifest or subside, or identify inflection points. --- # Important information/Disclaimers ## Information provided in climate and sustainability disclosures What is important to our investors and stakeholders evolves over time, and we aim to anticipate and respond to these changes. Disclosure expectations in relation to climate change and sustainability matters are particularly fast moving, and differ from more traditional areas of reporting including in relation to the level of detail and forward-looking nature of the information involved and the consideration of impacts on the environment and other persons. We have adapted our approach in relation to the disclosure of such matters. Our climate and sustainability disclosures take into account the wider context relevant to these topics, which may include evolving stakeholder views, the development of our climate strategy, longer timeframes for assessing potential risks and impacts, international long-term climate and nature-based policy goals, evolving sustainability-related policy frameworks (and the harmonisation or interoperability of relevant regulation) and geopolitical developments and regional variations. Our climate and sustainability disclosures are subject to more uncertainty than disclosures relating to other subjects, given market challenges in relation to data reliability, consistency and timeliness -- the use of estimates, judgements and assumptions which are likely to change over time, the application and development of data, models, scenarios and methodologies, changes in the regulatory landscape, and variations in reporting standards. Our approach to materiality may continue to evolve as our, and the industry's, understanding of climate and sustainability-related risks and opportunities continues to develop. These factors mean disclosures may be amended, updated, and recalculated in future as market practice and data quality and availability develops, and could cause actual achievements, results, performance or other future events or conditions to differ, in some cases materially, from those stated, implied and/or reflected in any forward-looking statements or metrics included in our climate and sustainability disclosures. We give no assurance as to the likelihood of the achievement or reasonableness of any projections, estimates, forecasts, targets, commitments, ambitions, prospects or returns contained in our climate and sustainability disclosures and make no commitment to revise or update any such disclosures to reflect events or circumstances occurring or existing after the date of such statements. ## Disclaimers In preparing the climate and sustainability content within the Barclays PLC annual report on Form 20-F wherever it appears, we have: - Made certain key judgements, estimations and assumptions. This is, for example, the case in relation to financed emissions, portfolio alignment, classification of sustainable and transition finance and revenues, operational emissions and sustainability metrics, measurement of climate risk and scenario analysis - Used climate and sustainability data, models, scenarios and methodologies that we considered appropriate for these purposes at the time of deployment. Some of these were provided by third parties, over whom we have no control, and may have been based on differing or unknown methodologies. The underlying assumptions, interpretations or methodologies may not be independently verifiable and could be inaccurate. Climate and sustainability data, models, scenarios and methodologies are subject to future risks and uncertainties and may change over time. Climate and sustainability disclosures in this document, including climate and sustainability-related data, models and methodologies, are not of the same standard as those available in the context of other financial information and use a greater number and level of judgements, assumptions and estimates, including with respect to the classification of sustainable and transition finance and revenues. Climate and sustainability disclosures are also not subject to the same or equivalent disclosure standards, historical reference points, benchmarks or globally accepted accounting principles. Historical data cannot be relied on as a strong indicator of future trajectories in the case of climate change and its evolution. Outputs of models, processed data, scenario analysis and the application of methodologies will also be affected by underlying data quality, which can be hard to assess, or challenges in accessing data on a timely basis - Continued (and will continue) to review and develop our approach to data, models, scenarios and methodologies in line with market principles and standards as this subject area matures. The data, models, scenarios and methodologies used (including those made available by third parties) and the judgements, estimates and/or assumptions made in them or by us are rapidly evolving, including scientific evidence relating to climate change and scenarios outlining pathways to net zero, and this may directly or indirectly affect the metrics, data points, targets, convergence points and milestones contained in the climate and sustainability content within the annual report on Form 20-F. Further, changes in external factors which are outside of our control such as accounting and/or reporting standards, improvements in data quality, data availability, or updates to methodologies and models and/or updates or restatements of data by third parties, could impact -- potentially materially -- the performance metrics, data points, targets, convergence points and milestones contained in the climate and sustainability content within the annual report on Form 20-F. In future reports we may present some or all of the information for this reporting period (including information made available by third parties) using updated or more granular data or improved models, scenarios methodologies, market practices or standards. Equally, we may need to re-baseline, restate, revise, recalculate or recalibrate performance against targets, convergence points or milestones on the basis of such updated data. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Important information/Disclaimers (continued) Such updated information may result in different outcomes than those included in the annual report on Form 20-F. It is important for readers and users of the annual report on Form 20-F to be aware that direct, like-for-like comparisons of each piece of information disclosed may not always be possible from one reporting period to another. The 'Reducing our financed emissions' section of the annual report on Form 20-F highlights where information in respect of a previous reporting period has been updated. Page 51 sets out the data sourcing and data quality considerations and our approach to reporting financed emissions data. For operational emissions, this is covered on page 59. - Included in the annual report on Form 20-F a number of graphics, infographics, text boxes and illustrative case studies and credentials which aim to give a high-level overview of certain elements of the climate and sustainability content within the annual report on Form 20-F and improve accessibility for readers. These graphics, infographics, text boxes and illustrative case studies and credentials are designed to be read within the context of the annual report on Form 20-F as a whole. - On sustainable revenues, we review our revenue perimeter on an ongoing basis and assess our coverage against the pure-play criteria in our SFF and TFF. As a result, reported baseline metrics may change from one reporting period to another, and direct like-for-like comparisons may not always be possible from one reporting period to another. There are a variety of internal and external factors which may impact our reported metrics and progress against our targets, convergence points and milestones. We expect to continue to see this impact our metrics in the future as data availability and quality, methodologies, guidance, and best practices for calculating our financed and operational emissions metrics - all of which include differing levels of estimation - continue to evolve and be refined. Any information contained or referred to in the annual report on Form 20-F, in relation to any actual or potential climate and sustainability objective, issue or consideration is not intended to be relied upon for EU Sustainable Finance Disclosure Regulation classification purposes, EU Taxonomy Regulation classification purposes, or any other classification regimes. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Governance Our governance framework facilitates the effective management of the Group across its diverse businesses. ## Board Governance ### Directors' report Board of Directors 72 Group Executive Committee 76 Our governance framework 77 Key Board activities 80 Board Nominations Committee report 84 Board Audit Committee report 92 Board Risk Committee report 100 Board Sustainability Committee report 105 How we comply 107 Other statutory and regulatory information 109 Remuneration report 116 ## Other Governance Climate and sustainability governance 158 Managing impacts in lending and financing 163 Human rights/Modern slavery 165 Our supply chain 167 Supporting our customers 168 The Barclays Way 171 Whistleblowing 172 Tax 173 Financial crime 175 Health and safety 176 Managing data privacy, security and resilience 177 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 71 # Board Governance Welcome to our 2025 Board Governance report. The report sets out the composition of our Board and explains how our Board governance framework operates, alongside the key areas of focus for our Board and Board Committees in 2025. ## Aim of our governance The primary aim of our governance is that it: - seeks to ensure that our decision-making is aligned to our Purpose, Values and Mindset - creates long-term sustainable value for our shareholders, having regard to the interests of all our stakeholders - is effective in providing constructive challenge, advice and support to management - provides checks and balances and drives informed, collaborative and accountable decision-making. ## Compliance with the Code - Our Board Governance report reflects the requirements of the 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) in force as at 31 December 2025. - To view how we comply with the Code, please see the How We Comply section on page 107. Certain additional information, signposted throughout this report, is available at home.barclays/corporate governance | Directors’ report | | | --- | --- | | Board of Directors | 72 | | Group Executive Committee | 76 | | Our governance framework | 77 | | Key Board activities | 80 | | Board Nominations Committee report | 84 | | Board Audit Committee report | 92 | | Board Risk Committee report | 100 | | Board Sustainability Committee report | 105 | | How we comply | 107 | | Other statutory and regulatory information | 109 | | Remuneration report | 116 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F Directors' report: Board of Directors # Setting our strategic direction Responsible for the overall leadership of the Group, driven by our Purpose, Values and Mindset. ## Board Committee membership A Audit Committee Member N Nominations Committee Member R Risk Committee Member S Sustainability Committee Member C Committee Chair ## Nigel Higgins Group Chairman Appointed March 2019 (Board) May 2019 (Chairman) ![img-42.jpeg](img-42.jpeg) ## Skills, experience and contribution: - seasoned business leader with extensive experience in, and understanding of, banking and the financial services industry - strong track record in leading and chairing organisations - significant experience in providing strategic advice to major international organisations and governments - keen focus on culture and corporate governance. Nigel spent 36 years at Rothschild & Co. where his last role was as Deputy Chairman. Prior to that, he had been Co-Chief Executive, Chairman of the Group Executive Committee and Managing Partner of Rothschild & Co for a decade. ## Key current appointments: - Chairman, Sadler's Wells - Non-Executive Director, Tetra Laval Group - Non-Executive Director, Oxford Quantum Circuits Limited. ## C.S. Venkatakrishnan Group Chief Executive Appointed November 2021 ![img-43.jpeg](img-43.jpeg) ## Skills, experience and contribution: - highly regarded leader with significant global banking experience - extensive background in financial markets and risk management - deep understanding of the business and the areas within which the Group operates. Prior to his appointment as Group Chief Executive, Venkat served as Head of Global Markets and Co-President of Barclays Bank PLC from October 2020 and Group Chief Risk Officer from 2016 to 2020. Before joining Barclays in 2016, Venkat worked at JPMorganChase from 1994, holding senior roles in Asset Management, Investment Banking, and in Risk. ## Key current appointments: - Board Member, Institute of International Finance - Chair, Financial Services Taskforce to the Sustainable Markets Initiative - Director and Vice Chair, Focusing Capital on the Long Term (FCLT) Global. ## Brian Gilvary Senior Independent Director (SID) Appointed February 2020 (Board) January 2021 (SID) ![img-44.jpeg](img-44.jpeg) ## Skills, experience and contribution: - extensive senior level experience of management, finance and strategy - deep experience of US and UK shareholder engagement - significant experience with, and understanding of, the challenges and opportunities inherent in advancing a sustainable energy future. Brian spent much of his career with BP p.l.c. in senior leadership roles, where most latterly he held the role of Chief Financial Officer. His other senior-level experience includes serving on the boards of various commercial and charitable organisations. Brian was Chair of The 100 Group of FTSE 100 Finance Directors, a member of the UK Treasury Financial Management Review Board and has served on various Business in the Community Leadership Teams. ## Key current appointments: - Non-Executive Chair, INEOS Energy - Non-Executive Director, Defence Board, Ministry of Defence - Chair, The Royal Navy and Royal Marines Charity - Senior Independent Director, The Francis Crick Institute. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board of Directors (continued) ## Robert Berry Independent Non-Executive Director **Appointed** February 2022 ![img-45.jpeg](img-45.jpeg) **Skills, experience and contribution:** - proven track record of management of risk exposure for a global financial institution and building a modern group-wide risk management organisation - strong record of integrating risk management with strategy - significant experience in finance, model development and trading. Robert's career started with NatWest (Capital Markets) as a trader, before joining Goldman Sachs, where he spent most of his executive career, based in London and New York. At Goldman Sachs, NY, Robert developed expertise in risk management and finance roles. He was made partner in 2008, and latterly acted as Deputy Chief Risk Officer, serving various firm-wide risk and finance committees, up to his retirement in 2018. Other senior-level experience includes serving on boards of large charitable organisations. **Key current appointments:** - Trustee, High Watch Recovery Center (incorporating President, Alina Lodge) ## Anna Cross Group Finance Director **Appointed** April 2022 ![img-46.jpeg](img-46.jpeg) **Skills, experience and contribution:** - extensive accounting and financial services expertise - deep understanding of banking and retail sectors - significant financial leadership experience of financial institutions. Anna is a chartered accountant and Group Finance Director with responsibility for the Finance function, including Tax, Treasury, Investor Relations and Strategy. Prior to joining Barclays, Anna worked in both banking and retail and held various roles at Asda, HBOS and Lloyds Banking Group. Since joining Barclays in 2013, Anna was appointed Chief Financial Officer of Barclays Bank UK PLC in 2016, Group Financial Controller in 2019 and Deputy Group Finance Director in 2020. She joined the Group Executive Committee in February 2022, before taking up the role of Group Finance Director in April 2022. **Key current appointments:** - Chair, The 100 Group of FTSE 100 Finance Directors ## Dawn Fitzpatrick Independent Non-Executive Director **Appointed** September 2019 ![img-47.jpeg](img-47.jpeg) **Skills, experience and contribution:** - extensive management experience of international financial institutions - strong financial and strategic leadership experience - detailed knowledge of the markets in which the Group operates. Dawn holds the role of Chief Executive Officer and Chief Investment Officer at Soros Fund Management LLC. Her previous experience includes 25 years with UBS, most latterly as Head of Investments for UBS Asset Management. **Key current appointments:** - Chief Executive Officer and Chief Investment Officer, Soros Fund Management LLC - Non-Executive Director, Under Armour, Inc. - Advisory Council Member, The Bretton Woods Committee - Chair, Financial Sector Advisory Council, Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas ## Mary Francis CBE Independent Non-Executive Director **Appointed** October 2016 ![img-48.jpeg](img-48.jpeg) **Skills, experience and contribution:** - extensive board-level experience across a range of industries - strong focus on reputation management and promoting board governance values - detailed understanding of the interaction between public and private sectors. Mary's previous appointments include Non-Executive Directorships at the Bank of England, Alliance & Leicester, Aviva, Centrica and Swiss Re Group. In her executive career, Mary held senior positions with both HM Treasury and the Prime Minister's Office and served as Director General of the Association of British Insurers. Mary is the Barclays Bank PLC Consumer Duty Champion. Mary will be stepping down from the Board with effect from 6 May 2026. **Key current appointments:** - Senior Independent Director, PensionBee Group PLC - Member, UK Takeover Appeal Board --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board of Directors (continued) | Sir John Kingman Independent Non-Executive Director | | Skills, experience and contribution: • deep background in financial services • strong leadership qualities and chair experience • extensive expertise providing strategic advice to Government. John is Chair of Barclays Bank UK PLC. He had a long Whitehall career, where he was Second Permanent Secretary to HM Treasury and was also closely involved in the UK response to the financial crisis, handling the resolution of Northern Rock and leading negotiations with RBS, Lloyds and HBOS on their £37bn recapitalisation. | John was also the first Chief Executive of UK Financial Investments Ltd (UKFI), and from 2010-2012, he was Global Co-Head of the Financial Institutions Group at Rothschild. From 2016 to 2021, John was the first Chair of UK Research & Innovation, which oversees Government science funding of c.£8bn a year. Between 2020 and January 2023, he was Chair of Tesco Personal Finance plc. Key current appointments: • Chair, Legal & General Group Plc • Trustee & Deputy Chair of the Board of Trustees, The National Gallery | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Appointed June 2023 | No No | | | | Diony Lebot Independent Non-Executive Director | | Skills, experience and contribution: • significant leadership experience, including extensive board level experience, in banking and financial services • significant senior executive experience in global and investment banking activities • deep expertise in risk management. Diony had a notable executive career with Société Générale, holding various senior leadership positions, where she was most recently Deputy Chief Executive Officer, and prior to that was Group Chief Risk Officer. | She holds non-executive board roles at EQT AB, one of the largest global private equity firms, and Alpha Bank, one of the four systemic banks in Greece. Diony is a member of the Board of Barclays Bank Ireland PLC (Barclays Europe). Key current appointments: • Non-Executive Director, Alpha Bank • Non-Executive Director, EQT AB | | Appointed March 2025 | 2 | | | | Mary Mack Independent Non-Executive Director | | Skills, experience and contribution: • extensive leadership experience within the financial services industry • strong operations, strategic and transformation experience • deep understanding of retail, consumer lending and small business banking. Mary had a distinguished executive career with Wells Fargo (and its predecessor institutions) in multiple senior leadership roles across a wide range of banking businesses. | Most recently, she was Chief Executive Officer of Consumer and Small Business Banking, having previously held senior executive roles in Consumer Lending, Community Banking and Wealth Management and Retail Brokerage. Mary retired from Wells Fargo in 2024 and Mary currently serves on the board of US listed company, Martin Marietta Materials, Inc. Key current appointments: • Non-Executive Director, Martin Marietta Materials, Inc. | | Appointed June 2025 | 2 | | | | Marc Moses Independent Non-Executive Director | | Skills, experience and contribution: • strong technical finance background in accounting and audit-related matters • significant board and senior executive-level risk management experience • extensive knowledge of banking and financial services. Marc is a chartered accountant and his financial services experience extends over 43 years, initially as a trader and then in senior executive roles as an audit partner at PwC, and Chief Financial Officer of JP Morgan Europe. | He joined HSBC in 2005 where he was Group Chief Risk Officer for nine years and joined the Group board as an executive director in 2014. He retired from HSBC in 2019. Key current appointments: • Non-Executive Chair, Orenda FS B.V. | | Appointed January 2023 | No No | | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board of Directors (continued) | Brian Shea Independent Non-Executive Director Appointed July 2024 | Skills, experience and contribution: • deep experience of financial services sector • strong operations, technology and transformation experience • detailed knowledge and understanding of US financial regulation. Brian is Chair of Barclays Execution Services Limited (BX). Brian's executive and non-executive career extends to over 40 years in the financial services industry. He was Vice Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Investment Services at Bank of New York (BNY) Mellon from 2014 until his retirement in 2017. | Prior to this, he served in a variety of executive roles, including as Chief Executive Officer of Pershing, LLC. (a BNY Mellon company). He is a former non-executive director of Fidelity National Information Services, Inc. and has also held several US securities industry and regulatory board and advisory committee positions. **Key current appointments:** • Board of Directors, Ameriprise Financial, Inc. • Board of Directors, RBB Fund, Inc. • Board of Trustees, Catholic Charities of the Archdiocese of New York | | --- | --- | --- | | Julia Wilson Independent Non-Executive Director Appointed April 2021 | Skills, experience and contribution: • significant board and executive-level strategic and financial leadership experience • extensive accounting, audit and financial services expertise • strong UK regulatory experience. Julia is a chartered accountant and was the Group Finance Director of 3i Group plc, having served on its board from 2008 until she stepped down in June 2022. Prior to joining 3i, she was Group Director of Corporate Finance at Cable & Wireless where she also held a number of finance-related roles. | Julia was appointed a Non-Executive Director at Legal & General Group Plc (L&G) in 2011. She chaired L&G's Audit Committee between 2013 and 2016 and was Senior Independent Director from 2016 until she stepped down from L&G in March 2021. Julia previously served as the Chair of The 100 Group of FTSE 100 Finance Directors. Julia is a Non-Executive Director of Bunzl plc and is the Chair of the Bunzl plc Board Audit Committee. **Key current appointments:** • Non-Executive Director, Bunzl plc | | Hannah Ellwood Group Company Secretary Appointed February 2023 | Relevant skills and experience: Hannah is the Group Company Secretary for Barclays, and a standing attendee of the Group Executive Committee. She is an experienced lawyer and company secretary with significant experience in Board and executive-level governance and leads the global Corporate Secretariat function. **Career:** Hannah joined Barclays in September 2012 as Chief of Staff to the Investment Bank General Counsel, moving to Barclays Corporate Secretariat in 2016. Hannah was appointed Group Company Secretary in | February 2023, having served as Deputy Company Secretary of Barclays PLC since 2018. Hannah has in-depth knowledge of legal, risk corporate governance, regulatory disclosure and market conduct matters. Prior to joining Barclays, Hannah was a Senior Associate in the London Corporate practice of Clifford Chance LLP. Hannah is an active contributor to industry and governance best practice. She is a member of the Listing Authority Advisory Panel, which provides independent advice and challenge to the Financial Conduct Authority, representing views of participants in primary markets. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F Directors' report: Group Executive Committee # Leading the execution of our strategy The Group Executive Committee (ExCo), as the most senior management committee for the Barclays Group, supports the Group Chief Executive in executing Barclays' strategic priorities. | C.S. Venkatakrishnan Group Chief Executive | Anna Cross Group Finance Director | | --- | --- | | Wally Adeyemo Group Head of Strategy and Transformation | Craig Bright Group Co-Chief Operating Officer and BX Co-Chief Executive Officer | | Stephen Dainton President of Barclays Bank PLC and Head of Investment Bank Management | Anne Marie Darling Group Co-Chief Operating Officer and BX Co-Chief Executive Officer | | Cathal Deasy Global Co-Head of Investment Banking | Matt Fitzwater Group Chief Compliance Officer | | Matt Hammerstein Chief Executive Officer of the UK Corporate Bank and Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility | Adeel Khan Head of Global Markets | | Vim Maru Chief Executive Officer of Barclays UK | Denny Nealon Chief Executive Officer for Barclays US Consumer Bank (USCB) and Barclays Bank Delaware (BBDE) | | Tristram Roberts Group Human Resources Director | Taalib Shaah Group Chief Risk Officer | | Stephen Shapiro Group General Counsel | Sasha Wiggins Chief Executive of Private Bank and Wealth Management | | Taylor Wright Global Co-Head of Investment Banking | | # Changes in ExCo during 2025 In July 2025, we welcomed Craig Bright and Anne Marie Darling as Group Co-Chief Operating Officers and Co-Chief Executive Officers of BX. We are grateful for the contribution made by Alistair Currie (Group Chief Operating Officer and Chief Executive Officer of BX), who stepped down from his role in June 2025. To support the Group Chief Executive in driving the delivery of the Group's strategy, a new role of Group Head of Strategy and Transformation was introduced. We were pleased to welcome Wally Adeyemo in this role in October 2025. # Standing attendees The Group Chief Executive continues to extend a standing invitation on ExCo to: - Gijs Borghouts, Group Chief Internal Auditor - Hannah Ellwood, Group Company Secretary - Anita Tanna, Group Chief of Staff. # Ex-officio posts ExCo continues to utilise ex-officio positions on the Committee to promote diversity of thought, provide specialist input and bring new perspectives, with each appointee serving a four-month rotation. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Our governance framework # A governance framework to facilitate effective decision-making Committed to high standards of corporate governance to drive long-term sustainable value for our shareholders. ![img-49.jpeg](img-49.jpeg) Barclays PLC (BPLC) is the Group's parent company and is listed on the London Stock Exchange. Each of the Group's key operating entities - Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC), Barclays Bank UK PLC (BBUKPLC), Barclays Bank Ireland PLC (Barclays Europe), Barclays US LLC and Barclays Bank Delaware (BBDE) - has its own board (with executive and non-executive directors) and board committees. These main operating entities are supported by our Group-wide service company, BX, which also has its own board comprised of executive and non-executive directors, and provides technology, operations and functional services to businesses across the Group. # Our governance framework The Board recognises the importance of effective governance as an enabler to the successful development and execution of the Group's strategy. We consider governance to be how the Board makes decisions and provides oversight to promote Barclays' success for the long-term sustainable benefit of our shareholders, having regard to the interests of our stakeholders, which include our customers and clients, colleagues and the society and wider environment in which we operate. Our Group-wide governance framework is designed to: - facilitate the effective management of the Group by our Group Chief Executive and his ExCo across our five operating divisions; and - support and provide oversight and constructive challenge to the Group's major subsidiary boards in the UK, Ireland and the US, having regard to the legal, regulatory and independence requirements applicable to those entities. Generally, there is one set of operating principles for the Group. Group-wide frameworks, policies and standards are adopted throughout the Group unless local laws or regulations require otherwise (for example, the ring-fencing obligations applicable to BBUKPLC), or ExCo decides otherwise in a particular instance. # Corporate Governance Operating Manual Our Corporate Governance Operating Manual sets out how the Group's significant subsidiaries (and their respective boards and board committees) should interact with each other and with management. It also provides guidance and clarity for management and Directors as to how these relationships and processes should work in practice. This is a dynamic document that evolves alongside the changing nature of the Group. # The role of the Board The Board sets the purpose, strategic direction and risk appetite for the Group and is the ultimate decision-making body for matters of Group-wide strategic, financial, regulatory and/or reputational significance. The Board also has direct oversight of matters relating to culture. Membership of the BPLC and BBPLC Boards is partially consolidated to drive efficiency and co-ordination, whilst also reducing complexity and unnecessary duplication. Consequently, the BBPLC Board is composed of a subset of the BPLC Board, with all members of the BPLC Board (except for the SID, Chair of BBUKPLC and at least one other Non-Executive Director) also serving on the BBPLC Board. We believe that having members of the BPLC Board serving as the Chairs of some of the Group's main operating entities supports improved efficiency, oversight, escalation and co-ordination while ensuring an appropriate focus is given to matters relevant to each entity. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Our governance framework (continued) ## Board governance framework ### Barclays PLC Board Responsible for the overall leadership of the Group (with direct oversight of strategy, culture and strategic reputational matters relating to the Group) | Board Nominations Committee | Board Audit Committee | Board Risk Committee | Board Sustainability Committee | Board Remuneration Committee | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Oversees the composition of, and appointments to, the Board, Board Committees and ExCo. | Oversees financial reporting and monitors the internal control environment. | Oversees the Group's risk profile, risk appetite and management of principal risks. | Oversees climate and sustainability matters. | Sets the principles and parameters of remuneration policy. | | For more information, see page 84. | For more information, see page 92. | For more information, see page 100. | For more information, see page 105. | For more information, see page 116. | ## Matters reserved to the Board Our Matters Reserved to the Board sets out the matters reserved solely for the decision-making power of the Board. These matters include material decisions relating to strategy, risk appetite, medium term plans, capital and liquidity plans, risk management and controls frameworks, strategic reputational matters and the approval of financial statements, large transactions, share allotments, dividends and share buy-backs. Responsibility for the Group's business on a day-to-day basis has been delegated by the Board to the Group Chief Executive, supported by his ExCo, to make and implement strategy and operational decisions. ## Information provided to the Board The Group Chairman is responsible for setting the Board's agenda, primarily focused on strategy, performance, value creation, culture and stakeholders. In addition, the Group Chairman is responsible for ensuring that Board members receive timely and high quality information to enable sound decision-making and promote the success of BPLC. The Group Company Secretary, working in collaboration with the Group Chairman, is responsible for ensuring good governance and information flow to support the Board's effectiveness. In addition to presentations delivered to the Board and Board Committees as part of formal meetings, Board members are kept informed of key developments during the year outside of meetings through updates from the Executive Directors, ExCo and senior management. Directors have access to the advice of the Group Company Secretary and are also able to seek independent and professional advice at Barclays' expense, where required, to enable them to fulfil their obligations to BPLC. ## Board Committees The Board is supported in its work by its Committees: the Board Nominations Committee, Board Audit Committee, Board Risk Committee, Board Sustainability Committee and Board Remuneration Committee. Each Board Committee has its own terms of reference setting out its remit and decision-making powers. The Board may from time to time establish ad hoc Committees to oversee specific matters as and when they arise. The Board Committees are comprised solely of Non-Executive Directors, with the exception of the Board Sustainability Committee of which the Group Chief Executive is an Executive member. In that role, the Group Chief Executive brings invaluable strategic insights to the Committee's discussions, including external perspectives from his outside engagements. The Chairs of each Board Committee report regularly on their Committee's work to the Board. You can read more about the work of each Board Committee later in this Governance report. ## Conflicts of interest The Board has the authority to authorise Director conflicts of interest in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and BPLC's articles of association (Articles). This ensures that the influence of third parties does not compromise the independent judgement of the Board. Directors are required to declare any potential or actual conflicts of interest that could interfere with their ability to act in the best interests of BPLC. A conflicts register recording actual and potential conflicts of interest is maintained, together with any Board authorisations of conflicts. Authorisations are for an indefinite period, but are reviewed on an annual basis by the Board. The Board also considers the effectiveness of the conflicts authorisation process. The Board retains the power to vary or terminate conflicts authorisations at any time. ## Attendance at Board meetings Directors are expected to attend every Board meeting. Where a Director is not able to attend a Board meeting, the relevant Director's views are generally made known to the Group Chairman in advance of the meeting. The Group Chairman also meets privately with the Non-Executive Directors on a regular basis. Details of Director attendance at Board meetings during 2025 are set out on the next page, and details of Director attendance at Board Committee meetings are set out in the report of each Board Committee. ## Board effectiveness The effectiveness of the Board, Board Committees and individual Directors is assessed on an annual basis. As permitted by the Code, an internally facilitated effectiveness review was carried out for 2025. You can read about the results of the 2025 review, as well as progress against the recommendations from the externally facilitated Board review for 2024, in the report of the Board Nominations Committee from page 84. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Our governance framework (continued) ## Division of responsibilities and Board meeting attendance ### Roles on the Board In line with the provisions of the Code, a clear division of responsibilities has been established between Executive and Non-Executive Directors. Our Charter of Expectations sets out the individual role profiles and required behaviours and competencies for the Chair, SID, Non-Executive Directors, Executive Directors and Committee Chairs. A summary of the role profiles for Board members is set out in the table below. ### Attendance at Board meetings The table below provides details of Director attendance at Board meetings during 2025. | Role on Board | Meetings attended/eligible to attend | Ad hoc meetings attended/eligible to attend^{6} | Responsibilities | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Chair | | | | | Nigel Higgins^{1} | 7/7 | 5/5 | The Chair is responsible for: • leading the Board and its overall effectiveness in directing the Company • promoting a culture of openness and inclusion, and facilitating and encouraging open, constructive challenge and debate between all Directors • ensuring the Board has a clear understanding of shareholder views. | | Group Chief Executive | | | | | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 7/7 | 5/5 | The Group Chief Executive, supported by his ExCo, is responsible for: • managing the Group’s business on a day-to-day basis and making and implementing operational decisions • leading Barclays towards the achievement of its strategic objectives and implementing the strategy set by the Board • promoting and demonstrating the appropriate culture, values and behaviours, including Barclays’ Purpose, Values and Mindset. | | Senior Independent Director | | | | | Brian Gilvary | 7/7 | 3/5 | The SID is responsible for: • providing a sounding board for the Chair; serving as a trusted intermediary for the other Directors and shareholders, when necessary • maintaining contact as required with major shareholders to understand their issues and concerns, and ensuring the Board is aware of their views • leading the appraisal of the Chair’s performance, at least annually. | | Group Finance Director | | | | | Anna Cross | 7/7 | 5/5 | The Group Finance Director is responsible for: • together with the Group Chief Executive, the achievement of financial targets for the Group • providing strategic and functional leadership of the Finance functions • managing and responding to feedback on Barclays’ business performance from investors, financial institutions, regulators and auditors. | | Non-Executive Directors | | | | | Robert Berry | 7/7 | 5/5 | Non-Executive Directors (including the Chair and SID) are responsible for: • providing effective oversight, strategic guidance and constructive challenge • helping to develop proposals on strategy and empowering the Executive Directors to implement the Group’s strategy while scrutinising and holding to account the performance of management and Executive Directors against agreed performance objectives • with the support of the Board Nominations Committee, the appointment and removal and succession planning for Executive Directors. Notes: 1 As required by the Code, the Group Chairman was independent on appointment. 2 Diony Lebot was appointed to the Board with effect from 17 March 2025. 3 Mary Mack was appointed to the Board with effect from 1 June 2025. 4 Tim Breedon stepped down from the Board with effect from 30 April 2025. 5 Diane Schueneman stepped down from the Board with effect from 31 January 2025. 6 One ad hoc meeting was a combined Board and Board Risk Committee meeting. Owing to other commitments, some Directors were unable to attend certain ad hoc Board meetings, however they received papers in advance and had the opportunity to share their views with the Group Chairman ahead of the meetings. | | Dawn Fitzpatrick | 7/7 | 3/5 | | | Mary Francis | 7/7 | 5/5 | | | Sir John Kingman | 7/7 | 5/5 | | | Diony Lebot^{2} | 6/6 | 3/4 | | | Mary Mack^{3} | 5/5 | 2/2 | | | Marc Moses | 7/7 | 4/5 | | | Brian Shea | 7/7 | 5/5 | | | Julia Wilson | 7/7 | 5/5 | | | Former Directors | | | | | Tim Breedon^{4} | 1/1 | 2/2 | | | Diane Schueneman^{5} | 0/0 | 0/1 | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 80 # Directors' report: Key Board activities # Key Board activities in 2025 Overseeing delivery of our three-year strategy and transformation initiatives. Throughout 2025, the Board maintained its focus on overseeing management's execution of the Group's three-year strategy and supporting transformation initiatives, whilst also considering the new financial and operational targets through to 2028, to be announced on 10 February 2026. The Board received regular updates on the main business divisions and progress against existing targets, as well as briefings on matters of Group-wide significance, with consideration given to the impacts of the evolving macroeconomic, geopolitical and regulatory landscape on the Group's performance and operations, alongside strategy. The Board recognises that the rapidly changing technological environment presents both opportunities and challenges, necessitating an ongoing focus on digital innovation whilst ensuring the resilience of the Group's operations. You can read more about the Board's oversight of technology transformation in the Technology spotlight on page 83. # Spotlight on # Culture The Board recognises that a positive culture aligned to our Purpose, Values and Mindset is fundamental to our long-term success. During 2025, the Board reviewed the progress to embed the Group-wide 'consistently excellent' (CE) cultural change programme and discussed its continued importance to delivering the Group's strategy. The Board discussed performance against CE dashboard metrics and colleague sentiment expressed through Your View survey results. As part of this, the Board considered colleagues' understanding of, and engagement with, CE, and opportunities to make it easier for colleagues to achieve a consistently excellent standard. The Board reflected on the focus areas for 2026 to drive further change through the organisation, with key dependencies identified as being further simplification of the operating environment and continued colleague support. Furthermore, to provide ongoing focus to CE as a pillar that supports the delivery of strategy, the Board requested that progress updates be presented alongside updates on Group transformation initiatives. Board members also had the opportunity to hear about Group culture first hand through engagement with colleagues during the year, examples of which are set out in the table below. This included a visit to Barclays' campus at Pune by certain Board members, which provided the opportunity to engage with colleagues on a number of themes, including how they are enabling process simplification and automation (including using AI responsibly), and digitalising customer journeys to deliver more personalised and integrated customer and client experiences. | March | April | May | | | June | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Leadership Accelerator Programme Closing Event | India Visit | Annual General Meeting | Markets Floor Walk | Future Leaders Group Networking Reception | Citizenship, Inclusion & Opportunity Awards | | London | Pune | London | London | New York | London | | Audience: Colleagues | Audience: Colleagues | Audience: Shareholders | Audience: Colleagues | Audience: Colleagues / Clients | Audience: Colleagues | | September | | October | | November | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Managing Director Alumni Event | Mary Francis at the Managing Director alumni event | Global Family Office Forum | Dawn Fitzpatrick and Sasha Wiggins at the Global Family Office Forum | US Consumer Bank Immersion | Barclays Professional Services Conference | | London | | London | | Delaware | London | | Audience: Colleagues | | Audience: Clients | | Audience: Events at the Global Family Office Forum | Audience: Clients | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Key Board activities (continued) ## Key focus areas The following two pages highlight the key areas of focus for the Board during 2025 and the key stakeholder groups central to the matters considered and decisions taken. ## Stakeholder groups - Customers and clients - Colleagues - Society - Investors ## Strategy | Topic | Board activity | | --- | --- | | Strategy and business review | • Strategy was considered regularly during the year, including through dedicated corporate strategy sessions at the September and December Board meetings. • Reviewed and discussed the 2025 Medium Term Plan (MTP). • Reviews of the main operating businesses throughout the year enabled the Board to consider the key risks and opportunities for each of the businesses and monitor their progress against the targets set in our three-year plan. • Reviewed and evaluated an update on the entity and location strategy for Barclays Europe. **Key decisions** • Approved the 2025 MTP. • Confirmed continued support for the re-domiciliation of Barclays Europe to France. | | Strategic transactions | • In support of Barclays’ strategy to simplify and focus on growing key businesses, the Board assessed strategic opportunities for the Group and received updates on the progress of key strategic transactions across the Group. **Key decisions** • In Q1 2025, approved Barclays’ long-term strategic partnership with Brookfield Asset Management Limited in relation to our payment acceptance business. • In Q3 2025, approved the acquisition of Best Egg, Inc. by BBDE. | | Supporting implementation of strategy | • Monitored the progress made against the delivery of transformation initiatives to support implementation of the Group’s strategy. This included spotlights on customer journeys and operating effectiveness. | | Climate and sustainability strategy | • Considered progress on the Group’s climate and sustainability strategy through reports from the Board Sustainability Committee, with a focus on the Barclays Transition Update. • Received an update on the Group’s sustainable finance strategy, reviewing performance against targets and the development of the business, including in the context of the macro environment. **Key decisions** • In early 2025, approved the 2024 Group Modern Slavery Statement. • Approved the Barclays Transition Update. | ## Culture, colleague and inclusion | Topic | Board activity | | --- | --- | | Culture, colleague engagement and talent | • Considered the evolution of the organisation's culture through regular updates on the embedment of the Group-wide Consistently Excellent programme and Your View colleague survey results. Please see the spotlight on Culture on page 80 for further details. • Reviewed progress on the talent excellence programme, aimed at enhancing practices to identify, assess and develop high potential talent across the organisation. This included consideration of the success measures and proposed outcomes for the programme. • Considered Barclays’ method of workforce engagement to confirm it remained effective in facilitating meaningful, regular two-way dialogue with colleagues. • Considered Barclays' workforce policies and practices and key focus areas in 2025. • Board members engaged with colleagues at events during the year, examples of which are set out on page 80. **Key decisions** • Confirmed that Barclays’ method of workforce engagement has been effective in 2025. • Confirmed that Barclays’ workforce policies and practices are consistent with Barclays’ Values and support Barclays’ long-term sustainable success. Please see the Colleagues section from page 26 for further information on Barclays’ workforce engagement mechanisms and initiatives to continue to embed a CE standard of delivery. | | Inclusion and opportunity | • Received updates on Barclays' inclusion and opportunity strategy which seeks to create a workplace where everyone feels valued and respected, within a culture of belonging and equal opportunity. • Considered an updated version of the Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy in December 2025 and February 2026, to ensure the policy continues to reflect the Group's inclusion and opportunity strategy. **Key decisions** • Approved the updated Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy. Details of the Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy can be found in the Board Nominations Committee report from page 84. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Key Board activities (continued) | Risk, resilience, recovery and resolution | | | --- | --- | | Topic | Board activity | | Risk profile | • Regularly reviewed the Group's risk profile, compliance risk profile and emerging risks, taking into consideration the impact of the macroeconomic, regulatory and geopolitical environment. This included consideration of updates from management on market conditions, the impacts for Barclays and how these were being managed, including in response to market events early in 2025, in addition to a geopolitical update regarding the outlook for 2026. • Received regular updates on financial crime risk, including the Group-wide programme to enhance financial crime capabilities. Key decisions • Approved Barclays' Risk Appetite Statement. • Approved updates to the Group Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF). | | Resolution and recovery | • Received an update on Barclays' resolvability arrangements, including the testing and assurance activities completed in 2025, and a Group resolution simulation planned for 2026 to ensure our resolution capabilities are execution-ready. • Considered the Group Recovery Plan, including the options available to execute in a severe financial stress. Key decisions • Approved the Group Recovery Plan. | | Technology, operations and resilience | • Considered the Group's annual operational resilience self-assessment in respect of the Group's Important Business Services (IBS). The Board subsequently discussed changes to the impact tolerance thresholds for certain IBS following a review after the 31 January 2025 IT incident that impacted Barclays' business in the UK. The Board maintained close oversight of the IT incident review. • Closely monitored the progress of the Group-wide programme to enhance Barclays' cybersecurity capabilities and drive long-term resilience. The Board also considered the priority workstreams for the programme in 2026. • A number of Board members participated in a crisis event simulation exercise focused on governance and decision-making in relation to a cybersecurity scenario. • Continued to consider how to bring deeper technology advice and additional technology focus and insight to the Board, reflecting the importance of digitisation and technology-driven innovation to the Group's strategy. This included considering the remit of the BX Board within this context. Key decisions • Approved changes to the impact tolerance thresholds for certain IBS. • Agreed to bring the oversight of strategic technology matters within the remit of the BX Board. • The Technology spotlight on the next page provides further details on the Board's oversight of technology transformation across the Group. | | Finance | | | --- | --- | | Topic | Board activity | | Financial performance and reporting | • The Group Finance Director provided regular updates to the Board which included reporting on the financial performance of the Group and business divisions, including progress against targets and monitoring market reaction to the Group's financial results. Key decisions • Approved the BPLC Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2024. • Approved Q1 2025, HY 2025 and Q3 2025 financial results announcements. • Upon the recommendation of the Board Audit Committee, confirmed the reappointment of KPMG as the Group statutory auditor with effect from the 2027 financial year. | | Capital and liquidity position and distributions | • Monitored the Group's capital and liquidity position and considered distributions proposals, including a new quarterly cadence for share buy-backs. • Received an update on the Group's capital management practices. Key decisions • Approved a full year dividend for the year ended 31 December 2024 of 5.5p per ordinary share and a full year share buy-back for 2024 of up to £1bn. • Approved a half year dividend of 3.0p per ordinary share for the six months ended 30 June 2025 and a half year share buy-back of up to £1bn. • Approved a Q3 2025 share buy-back of up to £500m. | | Governance and regulatory matters | | | --- | --- | | Topic | Board activity | | Succession | • On the recommendation of the Board Nominations Committee, considered succession planning and proposed changes to Board and Board Committee membership. Key decisions • Approved the appointment of Diony Lebot and Mary Mack as Non-Executive Directors and, in February 2026, the resignation of Mary Francis. | | Regulatory engagement and oversight | • Representatives from our key regulatory stakeholders were invited to Board meetings in order to strengthen relationships and share feedback on their priorities and areas of focus for Barclays. Meetings were also held between individual Directors and regulatory stakeholders throughout the year. • Considered updates on public policy and regulatory developments impacting the Group and Barclays' priorities and response in the context of these developments. | | Consumer Duty | • To support the Board's oversight of Consumer Duty across the Group, it received a Consumer Duty Dashboard and, subsequently, the Consumer Duty Annual Board Reports for BBPLC and BBUKPLC. • With input from the BBPLC Consumer Duty Champion, the Board considered the approach to the broader oversight and coverage of customer service and good customer outcomes through Board reporting and discussions. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Key Board activities (continued) ## Spotlight on ## The Board's oversight of technology To support the continued and robust oversight of technology transformation, and in recognition of the strategic significance of transformation to the Group's longer-term success, the Board not only thoroughly assessed how management executed its plans, but also remained dedicated to continually deepening its own understanding of emerging technologies and its impact on Barclays' capabilities. As the organisation advanced its digital transformation - enhancing digital, data and AI expertise, and streamlining customer journeys and their related processes - the Board recognised the ongoing need to engage deeply in these rapidly-evolving fields. Building a deeper understanding included hearing from others, including those at the forefront of academic research in digital transformation, leaders driving the next generation of technology change, and organisations that have executed or are currently undertaking similar transformations, having learned the lessons critical to success. In support of this objective, in June 2025, Board members, together with some members of Group ExCo, visited San Francisco to learn about technology transformation and to hear from leaders of world-leading organisations about how their businesses have successfully navigated digital transformations, the pace of change and the cost of inaction. This provided the Board with an opportunity to reflect on how these lessons could be applied to Barclays, including the role of the Board in navigating the change ahead. ![img-50.jpeg](img-50.jpeg) The Board spent time with the Chairman and Research Scientists from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) Center for Information Systems Research, learning about best practices for integrating technology expertise into the Board, the potential of emerging technologies, and the Board's role in fostering responsible innovation and managing these risks. This was followed by engagement with five organisations that exemplify the capabilities and outcomes of successful digital transformation, including digital engagement with customers, use of data, streamlined and digitised processes, and agile execution of change. The emphasis of these engagements was on the successful adoption of tech innovation in digital, data and AI to enhance organisational capabilities and performance. Supported by the San Francisco trip, the Board has continued to make technology transformation a key focus area. The strategic ambition for Barclays beyond 2026 underscores the role of technology in our core purpose and long-term ambitions. The next phase of the strategy focuses on greater investment capacity to further deepen customer and client relationships, enhance resilience against cyber threats and realise further efficiency and productivity improvements through new technologies and responsible deployment of AI. This includes the Board's continued review of the approach to AI governance (including the internal policies and standards relating to AI) and adoption and the use cases being deployed within Barclays. ## BX Board's role in the oversight of strategic technology matters Barclays Execution Services Limited (BX) is the Group-wide service company providing technology operations and functional services to businesses across the Barclays Group. The Board recognises the rapidly-evolving nature and use of new technology, data and AI in the delivery of these services, and in 2025 considered how to bring greater relevant insight to the Board. It was determined that this would be best achieved by specifically including oversight of strategic technology matters within the remit of the BX Board, alongside its wider oversight of the operational, service delivery and performance aspects of technology. To support this increased remit, and provide greater independent oversight, changes have been made to the composition of the BX Board which now comprises a majority of independent non-executive directors. The BX Board is chaired by Brian Shea, who provides valuable connectivity between the Board and BX Board. During 2025, Duriya Farooqui and Prof Sir Anthony Finkelstein were appointed as new independent BX Non-Executive Directors, joining Avid Larizadeh Duggan, who has served on the BX Board since 2021. It is anticipated further independent BX Non-Executive Directors will be appointed in 2026. Collectively, the independent BX Non-Executive Directors bring wide-ranging experience across financial services transformation, operations, technology, cybersecurity and resilience, and innovation. In addition, new BX Co-CEOs (and Group Co-COOs) Anne Marie Darling and Craig Bright were appointed in 2025. A schedule of technology-centred education sessions for the Board, and regular updates from the BX Chair and BX Co-CEOs, commenced in 2025 and will continue during 2026. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F Directors' report: Board Nominations Committee report # Supporting delivery of Barclays' strategy through robust succession planning Focused on composition, succession and effectiveness to support continuity of strong leadership # Board Nominations Committee Nigel Higgins Chair, Board Nominations Committee ![img-51.jpeg](img-51.jpeg) Committee membership¹ and meeting attendance² during 2025³ | Member | Meetings attended/ eligible to attend | | --- | --- | | Nigel Higgins | 2/2 | | Brian Gilvary | 2/2 | | Julia Wilson | 2/2 | # Notes 1. The Group Chairman chairs the Committee, with its membership composed solely of independent Non-Executive Directors. 2. In addition to its members, Committee meetings were attended by representatives from senior management, including the Group Chief Executive and Group HR Director. 3. There were two scheduled meetings of the Committee in 2025 with no ad hoc meetings (2024: three meetings, no ad hoc meetings). # Dear Shareholders The Committee's primary focus is to ensure that the Board and its Board Committees and ExCo continue to have an optimal balance of skills, experience and knowledge to support delivery of the Group's strategy which is considered with input from the wider Board. Key to this is robust succession planning to ensure continuity of strong leadership. As part of that succession planning, this year we welcomed Diony Lebot and Mary Mack to the Board as independent Non-Executive Directors. Diony brings strong experience in banking, financial services, and European regulatory matters, and Mary similarly has deep expertise in financial services, in particular in the area of consumer banking. We recently announced that Mary Francis will be retiring from the Board, as a member of the Board Remuneration and Sustainability Committees and as Chair of the BBPLC Board Remuneration Committee, in each case with effect from 6 May 2026. As such, Mary will not seek re-election at the 2026 AGM. In addition, and as reported in our 2024 Annual Report, Diane Schueneman retired from the Board, the Board Audit and Nominations Committees and as Chair of the BX Board, in each case with effect from 31 January 2025, whilst continuing to serve as a non-executive director of Barclays US LLC. On 30 April 2025, Tim Breedon retired from the Board, whilst maintaining his role as Chair of Barclays Europe. The Committee and the Board are extremely grateful for Mary, Tim and Diane's significant contributions to Barclays during their respective tenures. None of Mary, Tim nor Diane raised any concerns about the operation of the Board or management. During 2025, the Committee also oversaw additional changes to Board Committee composition, including Diony's appointment to the Sustainability Committee and my appointment as a member of the Remuneration Committee. With regard to ExCo succession, both the Committee and the Board receive regular updates from management on succession planning, including hearing directly from the Group Chief Executive and the Group Human Resources Director, and in 2025, the Committee approved the appointment of new Group Co-Chief Operating Officers and a Group Head of Strategy and Transformation as members of ExCo. You can read more about the Committee's priorities and activities during 2025 below. Looking ahead to 2026, the Committee remains focused on the need to continue to review and refresh the skills on the Board and Board Committees and on ExCo composition as part of our ongoing succession planning activity. Nigel Higgins Chair, Board Nominations Committee 9 February 2026 # Role of the Committee The role of the Committee is to, among other things: - ensure the Board is comprised of individuals who are best able to discharge their duties and responsibilities; - oversee the appropriate assessment of the suitability of Directors, members of the ExCo and other key personnel; - support and advise the Board in ensuring that the Company has the appropriate corporate governance standards and practices in place that are consistent with best practice; and - keep the Board's governance arrangements under review. The Committee's terms of reference are available at home.barclays/who-we-are/our-governance/board-committees/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Nominations Committee report (continued) ## Composition The Committee reviews the composition of the Board and assesses recruitment priorities for Non-Executive Directors, considering the necessary skills, experience, knowledge and independence essential for an effective Board, supporting robust succession planning. Changes to Board and Board Committee composition during 2025 are noted above. Details of the tenure and industry and leadership experience of Directors is set out in the table below. Biographies of each Director are available from page 72, detailing their skills, expertise, experience, Board Committee roles, and other principal appointments. ## Board size The Committee considers that the size of the Board (13 Directors, as at 31 December 2025) is appropriate and contributes to its effectiveness. The Committee recognises that assessing the optimal size of the Board is a critical component of medium- and longer-term succession planning. In this context, careful consideration is given to ensuring that the Board remains small enough to facilitate effective collaboration and efficiency, while being sufficiently sized to provide a comprehensive mix of skills and perspectives. This approach supports robust succession planning and accommodates Directors' additional roles and responsibilities on Board Committees, as well as their participation on the Boards of BBPLC, BBUKPLC, Barclays Europe, BX, and other Group subsidiary boards. Both the Committee and the Board continue to believe that it is advantageous for Group-wide decision-making to have the Chairs of the Group's significant subsidiaries sit on the BPLC Board, where possible, considering that this provides connectivity with the significant subsidiaries, bringing with it important insight into Board discussions. ## Non-Executive Director independence The Committee and the Board consider all of the Non-Executive Directors to be independent. The Committee assesses the independence of our Non-Executive Directors on appointment and thereafter on an annual basis, having regard to the independence criteria set out in the Code. As part of this process, the Committee considers each Director's length of tenure, which, in line with Code guidance, is one of a list of factors outlined in the Code that can affect independence and makes any recommendations to the Board accordingly. In early 2026, the Committee reviewed the independence of all Non-Executive Directors serving on the Board as of 31 December 2025. Reflecting that Nigel Higgins, Dawn Fitzpatrick and Brian Gilvary have each served on the Board for over six years, each of them were subject to a thorough review of their continued independence. The Committee remains satisfied that the length of their tenure has no impact on their respective levels of independence or the quality and effectiveness of their contributions. Notwithstanding her intention to retire from the Board in May 2026, in light of her nine year tenure, the Committee undertook a rigorous assessment of Mary's continued independence. The Committee and the Board consider that length of tenure is only one of the factors to be considered with respect to Director independence, and accordingly, that tenure alone should not result in a loss of independence. Following careful consideration, the Committee concluded that Mary remains independent in accordance with the other circumstances listed in Provision 10 of the Code. In reaching this conclusion, the Committee and the Board considered that Mary's breadth of financial services sector experience, strong focus on reputation risk management, promoting board governance values and culture and her detailed understanding of the interaction between public and private sectors continue to bring significant value to Board discussions, providing constructive challenge to management and demonstrating objective judgement. With these factors in mind, the Committee and the Board consider it appropriate for Mary to continue as an independent Non-Executive Director until her retirement in May 2026. ![img-52.jpeg](img-52.jpeg) --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Nominations Committee report (continued) ## Process for appointments The Committee oversees Board appointments, ensuring that appointments are based on merit against objective criteria and give due consideration to the Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy. When appointing Board members, the Committee considers the necessary skills, experience, independence and knowledge to maintain the Board's effectiveness and the delivery of the Group's strategy, with due regard to the benefits of inclusion. Board appointments are made following a merit-based, formal, thorough and transparent process. The Committee facilitates this process with support from external search consultancy firms. ## Non-Executive Director recruitment The Committee regularly reviews its skills-based recruitment priorities for Non-Executive Director recruitment. These priorities serve as the foundation for targeted searches, enabling the Board to maintain orderly succession planning and achieve an optimal blend of expertise and experience among its members. The Committee reviewed and updated these priorities during 2025, considering changes in the composition of both the Board and the Committees during the year. Our current recruitment priorities include identifying potential candidates who can bring additional technology experience and insights to the Board, as well as a professional with deep US investment banking experience, reflective of our US operations. A recruitment priority has also been agreed for a candidate with a UK PLC background (or equivalent) with deep experience of executive leadership, having held the role of CEO or similar, able to provide challenge, advice and support to management. Independent search firms, Egon Zehnder, Perrett Laver, CZ Partners and Russell Reynolds Associates, assisted in our focused external mapping and recruitment efforts to identify additional Non-Executive Directors to enhance the Board's skill set in 2025. None of these firms have any connection to Barclays or any of the Directors other than to assist with searches for executive and non-executive talent. Open advertising for Board positions was not used in 2025. The Committee will continue to evaluate the Board's recruitment priorities for the year ahead and further assess the required skills and experience for prospective candidates, seeking to ensure that strong potential candidates who can enhance the Board's effectiveness are identified as necessary. Reflective of the importance that the Committee and the Board place on succession matters, all Board members have the opportunity to meet with leading candidates as part of the recruitment process. All Directors are subject to election or re-election (as appropriate) each year by shareholders at the AGM. ## Time commitment and conflicts All prospective Directors are required to disclose any significant external commitments. These disclosures are carefully considered by the Committee and/or the Board to ensure that each Director will be able to fulfill their responsibilities to Barclays effectively. Prior to their appointments, the Committee thoroughly reviewed the existing commitments declared by both Diony Lebot and Mary Mack and was satisfied that they each had the capacity to dedicate the necessary time to their duties at Barclays. The expected time commitments are agreed with each Non-Executive Director and encompass attendance and preparation for Board and Board Committee meetings, as well as sufficient time to gain a thorough understanding of the business and complete all required training. The Committee and/or the Board considers relevant regulatory and Code requirements when considering whether a Director has sufficient time to commit to their role, in addition to key investor and proxy adviser guidelines. Directors must obtain Board approval before accepting any significant roles outside of Barclays, providing an estimate of the time commitment involved. When considering such requests, the Board examines all relevant details, including the nature of the external organisation, the Director's expected role, and the anticipated time required. In 2025, the Board approved all requests for external appointments, having considered that there were no actual conflicts of interest and being satisfied that each Director remained able to dedicate enough time to fulfil their responsibilities to Barclays effectively. All Directors are expected, where circumstances require it, to commit additional time as necessary to their engagement on the Board. For the year ended 31 December 2025 and as at the date of publication, the Board is satisfied that none of the Directors are overcommitted and that each of the Directors allocates sufficient time to their role in order to discharge their responsibilities effectively. A record of each Director's external time commitments is maintained. You can find details of other principal appointments for each Director from page 72. As at 31 December 2025, Mary Francis, Sir John Kingman, Brian Shea, Julia Wilson, Dawn Fitzpatrick, Mary Mack, and Diony Lebot held external non-executive directorships with listed companies¹. No further members of the Board held external directorships with listed companies. ## Tenure Our Chair and Non-Executive Directors are typically appointed for an initial term of three years and may be invited to serve for a further term of up to three years based on the needs of the Board. A further extension of tenure for an additional three year term (and any extension beyond this) is subject to the discretion of the Committee. In determining whether it remains appropriate to extend the Chair or a Non-Executive Director's tenure, the Committee will have regard to a number of factors including whether the Board is satisfied that the Director in question continues to be independent, having regard to the factors set out in the Code, their performance, which is assessed annually, whether they have the ability to dedicate sufficient time to the role and the benefits of having diversity of thought on the Board. ## Note: 1 'Listed company' means companies whose shares are listed and traded on a regulated stock exchange, excluding appointments within the Barclays Group, and directorships held with the same group or within undertakings (including non-financial entities) in which the relevant firm holds a qualifying holding. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Nominations Committee report (continued) The Board approved a three year extension of tenure for each of Robert Berry and Nigel Higgins, and a further year for Mary Francis in February 2025 and in September 2025, the Board approved the extension of Dawn Fitzpatrick's tenure for a further three year term. During 2026, each of Marc Moses and Sir John Kingman reach their three year anniversaries on the Board, and Brian Gilvary reaches his six year anniversary. Having undertaken a review of Non-Executive Director tenure and having due regard to the factors referred to above, the Committee and the Board agreed to extend the tenure of each of Marc, Sir John, and Brian for a further three year term. The Board approved a short extension of Mary Francis' tenure, who has served on the Board for over nine years, aligned to her retirement from the Board with effect from 6 May 2026, in order to conclude orderly arrangements for Mary's succession as BBPLC Board Remuneration Committee Chair. An announcement will be made in due course confirming the successor to the role of Chair of the BBPLC Board Remuneration Committee. ## New Director induction A tailored induction programme is delivered for all new Directors appointed to the Board. This provides them with an understanding of the Group, its purpose, strategy, business areas and key issues it currently faces. After Diony Lebot and Mary Mack were appointed in 2025, they each participated in a comprehensive induction programme. This included sessions about the Group's strategy, culture and stakeholder environment, as well as Board and Board Committee structure. They also met with other Board members, the chairs of significant subsidiaries, and senior executives from across the business and key Group functions. ## Director training and development The Committee, together with the Group Company Secretary, supports the Group Chairman in facilitating continuous training and development for Directors. Directors are encouraged to participate in regular training and development sessions integrated within the Board and Board Committee schedules, and may additionally request tailored training as required. In 2025, Directors enhanced their business knowledge through Board/Committee deep dives into the Group's operating divisions and key Group functions, including Legal, Risk, Compliance, and Internal Audit. The Board also received regular updates on corporate governance matters and certain Barclays' Compliance Risk policies, including financial crime, as well as an annual briefing on the Senior Managers Regime. ## Technology In 2025, the Board visited San Francisco to spend time with experts and leaders in the field of digital transformation to deepen its own understanding of the pace and scale of this technology revolution. You can read more about the Board's technology-focused visit to San Francisco on page 83. ## Bank capitalisation briefing In light of the evolving regulatory landscape, the Board received a comprehensive briefing on bank capitalisation by an external expert. The briefing provided an update on capital regulation, varying global approaches to bank capitalisation, and potential future impacts for the banking sector. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Nominations Committee report (continued) ## Succession The Committee is responsible for succession planning, ensuring that Barclays maintains an optimal mix of skills, experience and effectiveness on the Board, its Committees, and the ExCo, taking into consideration both present and future business requirements. This remit encompasses medium-term initiatives, such as the orderly refreshing of the Board, Committees, and ExCo, as well as long-term preparations aimed at identifying and developing the skills likely to be needed on the Board and ExCo in the years ahead. The Committee and the Board have continued to focus on the development of a broad and deep bench of future leaders across the business. More information is set out in the Non-Executive Director recruitment section of this report. The Committee regularly refreshes the Board's Non-Executive Director recruitment priorities and leads the search process for any new Board appointments. ## ExCo succession The Group Chief Executive, supported by his ExCo, is responsible for the delivery of the Group's strategy as set by the Board. It is key that ExCo composition comprises the right balance of skills, experience and diversity of thought to drive that delivery while providing appropriate challenge and debate in discussions. With this in mind, the Committee considers and approves all changes to ExCo prior to announcement, taking into account executive succession plans. As noted above, the Committee considered changes to ExCo during the year, including approving the appointment of new Group Co-Chief Operating Officers and a Group Head of Strategy and Transformation. You can read about the changes to ExCo during 2025 on page 76. During the year, the Committee received updates regarding ExCo and executive talent and succession planning. Ensuring there is a strong talent pipeline remains a key consideration for the Committee and the Board. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Nominations Committee report (continued) ## Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy On the recommendation of the Committee, the Board adopted an updated version of the Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy in February 2026, to ensure the policy continues to reflect the Group's inclusion and opportunity strategy. The policy confirms that the Board aims to meet the recommendations of the FTSE Women Leaders Review regarding gender balance on boards and the Parker Review on ethnic representation on boards. The policy confirms the Board's support for the Group's culture in which Barclays is committed to continuing to build an inclusive workplace. ## Workforce composition within ExCo, Exco direct reports and the wider workforce Barclays is committed to an inclusive workplace where everyone can be their best and meet the fullest extent of their ambitions and capability. As a global company we do all this by complying with the local requirements in the jurisdictions in which we operate. You can read more about Barclays' approach to inclusion within the Colleagues section from page 26. In 2025, Barclays continued to have one ex-officio position on Group ExCo, with each appointee serving for a four-month rotation. This initiative helps to build technical industry knowledge, broaden the existing extensive experience of our most senior leaders and helps to develop diversity of thought at the highest level. There are additional initiatives and actions being taken across our businesses to further strengthen the senior leadership pipeline. We continue to offer sponsorship and mentoring programmes to strengthen individual development and work with senior recruitment partners to build and broaden our talent pipeline. ## Effectiveeness The Committee ensures that a formal and rigorous review of the performance of the Board, Board Committees and individual Directors is undertaken each year. In line with the requirements of the Code, the review is facilitated externally every three years. ## Progress against the 2024 Board effectiveness review The 2024 Board effectiveness review was facilitated externally. The table set out on page 90 sets out the key recommendations for the Board outlined in the 2024 review and actions taken during 2025 to address them. ## 2025 Board effectiveness review The 2025 review of the performance of the Board, Board Committees and individual Directors was conducted internally. ## Feedback from 2025 review Feedback from the review confirmed that the Board continues to operate effectively and highlights the collegiate culture around the board table. Discussions are noted to be respectful, bringing a broad range of perspectives and contributions. Meetings are considered to be well-chaired, with the review recognising the Chairman's thoughtful and inclusive style. The review commented positively on the relationship between the Board and management, with discussions reflecting an appropriate balance of support and constructive challenge. The Board's engagement with management on key strategic matters and the progress of our three year plan was commented on favourably. Board composition was considered to be strong, bringing a range of diverse and complementary backgrounds as well as deep financial services expertise, with good structure around Board succession planning. The review noted that Board members continue to welcome the introduction of external perspectives into the Board, deriving value from the discussions and briefing sessions which were scheduled during the course of the year. The interaction between the Board and the Board Committees was commented upon favourably, noting that reports from the Committee Chairs were helpful in ensuring the Board has appropriate visibility of key matters and emerging themes. Feedback from the review confirms that concurrent meetings of the BPLC and BBPLC Boards and Board Committees remain effective and continue to work well in practice. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Nominations Committee report (continued) ## Recommendation from 2024 review In light of the Group’s three-year strategy announced in early 2024, consider how future agendas might be best shaped to support continued discussion of the execution of the Group’s three-year strategic plan and the Group’s longer-term strategy. - Progress against the Group’s three-year strategic plan was discussed with senior management in every Board meeting, including opportunities for potential inorganic opportunities that align with the Group’s strategy. - Updates on execution of strategy were also provided through regular Transformation Office updates and non-financial performance reviews, including consideration of the role of technology in supporting the delivery of the Group’s strategy and plans. Reflective of the changes to the senior management structure announced as part of Barclays three-year strategy, maintain focus on succession planning to continue to develop a deep and broad bench of future leaders. - Talent was covered as part of regular business reviews presented to the Board, as well as updates on the Group’s Talent Excellence Plan and updates to the Committee and the Board on executive talent and succession planning. Consider how best to bring greater focus and insights on Tech, Data and Digital matters into the Boardroom. - The Board spent time discussing how to deepen technology input into the Board and agreed (i) to bring the oversight of strategic technology matters within the remit of the BX Board, with regular reporting to the Board from the BX Chair and BX Co-CEOs, and (ii) to include in the Board’s current Non-Executive Director recruitment priorities a search for a candidate to bring additional technology experience and insights to the Board. - Technology was covered as part of regular business reviews presented to the Board, as well as through presentations on digital strategy and the Group’s approach to insider threat management. - The Board participated in an intensive technology and digital immersion event in San Francisco in June 2025, as detailed in the Key Board Activities section on page 83. - There was significant focus by the Board Risk Committee and the Board on cyber resilience and enhancements to the cyber control environment. Continue to focus on the process of making papers shorter and more targeted. - This remains an ongoing area of focus and is addressed through detailed paper reviews by the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director, as well as the Group Chairman and other Board members. Identify further opportunities to bring relevant outside perspectives into the Boardroom. - External speakers were invited to join Board sessions to discuss topics including bank capitalisation, an update on India in the context of the Group’s business in India, including macroeconomic and geopolitical perspectives, geopolitical developments and technology. - The Board Sustainability Committee received a briefing from external advisors to support its review of the Barclays’ Transition Update. - Board members also engaged routinely with Barclays’ wider stakeholder groups – including shareholders, colleagues and regulators. ## Actions taken during 2025 ## Recommendations from the 2025 review The Board will be giving further consideration to the implementation of the following matters during 2026: - Consideration to be given to the structure of Board agendas in the year ahead to: - provide more space for the discussion of material strategic topics - maintain focus on the development of a broad bench of future leaders - deepen the Board’s engagement in AI and technology matters - A continued focus on ensuring balanced and targeted Board papers - Continuing to identify opportunities to bring external perspectives into the boardroom. The Board has already taken action to address some of these recommendations, and the other items will be subject to further consideration and discussion through the course of the year. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Nominations Committee report (continued) ## 2025 Board, Board Committee and individual Director review process | Board | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Board evaluation | Interviews held by SID with Board members | Findings discussed with Group Chairman and Board Nominations Committee and the Board | Board discussion and agreed action plan for 2026 | | Committee evaluation | Questionnaires completed by Committee members and senior management | Findings discussed with Committees | Agreed action plan for 2026 | | Individual Director evaluation | Group Chairman held a meeting with each Director and regularly has one-on-one meetings with Directors | SID held meeting with the Group Chairman | Confirmation of each Director's continuing effectiveness | ## 2025 Board Committee effectiveness review The Board Committee reviews are an important part of the way Barclays monitors and improves Committee performance and effectiveness, maximising strengths and highlighting areas for further development. Following consideration of the findings of the 2025 Board Committee effectiveness reviews, the Committee remains satisfied that each of the Board Committees is operating effectively. ## Review of Board Nominations Committee effectiveness An internal evaluation of the performance of the Committee was conducted for 2025, in line with the provisions of the Code. The results of the review confirmed that the Committee was operating effectively. Further information on the review of the Board and its Committees can be found in the section above. ## Individual Director effectiveness All Directors in office at the end of 2025 were subject to an individual effectiveness review. The Group Chairman considered each Director's individual contribution to the Board, as well as any feedback received as part of the broader Board and Board Committee effectiveness review. The Senior Independent Director considered the contribution of the Group Chairman. Based on the reviews, the Board supported the view of the Committee that each Director continues to be effective and contributes to Barclays' long-term sustainable success. In accordance with the Code, all of the current Directors, other than Mary Francis who is to retire from the Board prior to the AGM, intend to submit themselves for re-election at the 2026 AGM to be held on 7 May 2026. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Audit Committee report # Providing oversight of the Group's internal control environment Closely monitoring the integrity of our financial disclosures # Board Audit Committee Julia Wilson Chair, Board Audit Committee ![img-53.jpeg](img-53.jpeg) Committee membership and meeting attendance during 2025 | Member | Meetings attended/ eligible to attend | | --- | --- | | Julia Wilson | 16/16 | | Robert Berry | 16/16 | | Marc Moses | 16/16 | | Diane Schueneman² | 2/2 | # Notes 1. There were 13 scheduled and three ad hoc meetings of the Committee in 2025. 2. Stepped down with effect from 31 January 2025 # Dear Shareholders I am pleased to report on the Board Audit Committee's activities and responsibilities for 2025. I would like to thank Committee members for their contributions and support and also extend the Committee's thanks to Diane Schueneman, who stepped down as a Director and member of the Committee with effect from 31 January 2025. Throughout 2025, the Committee has been keenly focused on the oversight of the Group's internal control environment. Against a backdrop of a complex, evolving legal and regulatory requirements and a heightened global macroeconomic and geopolitical threat landscape, a robust controls framework is key to supporting a strong internal control environment, underpinned by a culture that recognises and supports the ongoing work of the business to invest in and enhance the overall control environment. Particular areas of focus in 2025 for the Group include work to strengthen controls relating to cybersecurity and financial crime prevention and detection, and to enhance processes in relation to regulatory reporting and regulatory change. Building on the work of prior years, the Committee was pleased to see the progress made by management to simplify and enhance the Group-wide controls framework, and progress with longer term remediation programmes across the Group. The Committee has a key role in monitoring the integrity of the Group's financial statements. In reviewing the Group's financial and narrative reporting for each quarterly and half-year results period for 2025, the Committee carefully considered management's judgements in relation to key accounting estimates and judgements. In light of the uncertain global macroeconomic environment, management's approach to expected credit losses and use of post-model adjustments were particular areas of focus. Specific areas of judgement outside credit provisioning included management's approach to provisioning for motor finance compensation claims, and the incorporation of Tesco Bank into the controls and reporting frameworks. In addition, the Committee has carefully reviewed the external reporting of the Group's performance against the current strategic targets for the period from 2024-2026 announced in February 2024, and supported the work of the Board in reviewing the new strategic targets through to 2028 to be announced on 10 February 2026. Sustainability reporting and the impact of climate on our financial statements continues to be monitored as legislative and regulatory requirements evolve particularly in the US, Europe and the UK. The Committee received updates on developments in sustainability reporting required by the European Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive and the EU Taxonomy Framework for FY25. Supported by management's recommendations, it also reviewed how the impacts of climate and sustainability reporting requirements are reflected in preparing the Group's financial statements. In anticipation of the changes to provision 29 of the Code, effective from the financial year beginning on 1 January 2026, the Committee spent time considering management's proposals for the identification of 'material controls' for these purposes, including consideration of the results of a management 'dry run' of how the internal assessment of the operation of those controls would work. The Committee is comfortable with management's proposals, which will be implemented during 2026 ahead of reporting on the new provision 29 requirements in next year's Annual Report. The Committee is responsible for overseeing the Group's relationship with the statutory auditor. Barclays is required to tender the external audit every 10 years and, as Barclays announced in December 2024, a formal tender process for the external auditor was launched in early 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Audit Committee report (continued) The Committee led the tender process, which concluded in May 2025 with the Board's selection of KPMG as the successful firm. Further detail on the external tender process is set out later in this report on page 99. The Committee is supported in its work by the assurance conducted by Barclays Internal Audit (BIA). The Committee attends an annual dedicated deep dive session on the BIA function and how BIA is implementing its strategic priorities, including ensuring appropriate skills and capabilities for the future. The Chairs of Barclays' key subsidiary Board Audit Committees are also invited to this session. The Committee monitors and assesses the performance of BIA and was satisfied with its performance against its objectives as agreed between the Group Chief Internal Auditor and I at the beginning of the year. I continue to hold the role of Group Whistleblowers' Champion. Together with the BBUKPLC Whistleblowers' Champion, we receive regular updates on cases being raised via the whistleblowing channels, as well as any potential trends or emerging themes and key areas of focus. The Committee also receives detailed semi-annual whistleblowing updates as part of its role in considering the adequacy of the Group's arrangements to allow colleagues to raise concerns. # Committee effectiveness An internal evaluation of the performance of the Committee was conducted for 2025, in line with the provisions of the Code. The results of the review confirmed that the Committee was operating effectively. Further information on the review of the Board and its Committees can be found in the Board Nominations Committee report on page 84. # Julia Wilson Chair, Board Audit Committee 9 February 2026 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Audit Committee report (continued) ## Committee composition and meetings The Committee is composed solely of independent Non-Executive Directors. Membership of the Committee is designed to provide the breadth of financial expertise and commercial acumen that the Committee needs to fulfil its responsibilities. Its members as a whole have recent and relevant experience of the banking and financial services sector, in addition to general management and commercial experience and are financially literate. Julia Wilson, the Committee Chair, who is the designated financial expert on the Committee for the purposes of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 (SOx), has significant corporate finance, tax and accounting experience, including previously serving as the Group Finance Director of 3i plc and as Chair of the Board Audit Committee at L&G Group plc. In 2025, the Committee met 16 times, which included three ad hoc meetings (2024: 16 times, including two ad hoc meetings). Attendance by members at Committee meetings is shown on page 92. Committee meetings were attended by representatives from management, including the Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Group Chief Internal Auditor, Co-Group Chief Operating Officers, Head of Group Control, Group Chief Risk Officer and Group Chief Compliance Officer, as well as representatives from the business and functions, and also BBPLC senior management (reflecting the partially consolidated operation of the BPLC and BBPLC Committee meetings). The lead audit engagement partner of KPMG (Stuart Crisp) also attended Committee meetings. The Committee held regular private sessions with each of the Group Finance Director, Group Chief Internal Auditor and lead KPMG audit engagement partner. The Board, together with the Committee, is responsible for ensuring the independence and effectiveness of the Internal Audit function and external auditors. The appointment and removal of the Group Chief Internal Auditor is a matter reserved to the Committee, and the appointment and removal of the external auditor is a matter reserved to the Board based on the recommendation of the Committee. Neither task is delegated to management. The Committee continues to work closely with the Board Risk Committee and Board Sustainability Committee to ensure a consistent approach is taken in relation to matters in which there is a connection across remits. This interconnectivity is supported by Committee cross-membership, including my membership of the Board Risk and Board Sustainability Committees. ## Role of the Committee The role of the Committee is to review and monitor, among other things: - the integrity of the Group’s financial statements and related announcements; - the effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls; - the independence and effectiveness of the internal and external audit processes; - the Group’s relationship with the external auditor; and - the effectiveness of the Group’s whistleblowing procedures. The Committee’s terms of reference are available at home.barclays/who-we-are/our-governance/board-committees/ Further information about the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies in the section on Our Board of Directors from page 72 ## Primary activities The Committee discharged its responsibilities and ensured compliance with the Audit Committees and the External Audit: Minimum Standard (the Minimum Standard) in 2025 through monitoring the effectiveness of the internal control environment and internal and external audit processes, as well as the integrity of financial statements and related announcements. Activities undertaken to meet the requirements of the Minimum Standard are described throughout this report. | Areas of focus | Key responsibilities of the Committee | Conclusion / action taken | | --- | --- | --- | | Financial reporting | | | | Fair, balanced and understandable reporting | In light of the Board’s obligation under the Code, the Committee assesses external reporting to ensure it is fair, balanced and understandable. | In addition to this Annual Report, the Committee reviewed the Group’s half-year and quarterly results announcements and associated investor presentations. The Committee informed these reviews through: • consideration of reports of the Group Disclosure Committee • direct questioning of management on the transparency and accuracy of disclosures • feedback from KPMG, including areas in which they challenged management • consideration of the results of management’s testing of controls relating to financial reporting processes, including the output of the Group’s internal control assessments and the SOx s404 internal control processes. The Committee provided feedback on the Group’s financial reporting disclosures, including requesting that management implement enhancements to the clarity and transparency of certain disclosures. Having evaluated the available information, the assurances by management and KPMG and underlying processes used to prepare the published financial information, the Committee concluded and recommended to the Board that the Annual Report 2025 and Accounts are fair, balanced and understandable. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 95 # Directors' report: Board Audit Committee report (continued) | Areas of focus | Key responsibilities of the Committee | Conclusion / action taken | | --- | --- | --- | | Critical accounting estimates and judgements | | | | Conduct provisions (refer to Note 23 to the financial statements) | Barclays makes certain assumptions and estimates, analysis of which underpins provisions made for the costs of customer redress. The Committee analyses the judgements and estimates made by management to evaluate the adequacy of the provisions. | The Committee reviewed and challenged management’s approach to conduct provisions throughout the year, supported by KPMG’s views on management’s judgement in relation to provisions. See the section below entitled ‘legal, competition and regulatory provisions’ for details on how the Committee considered the provision raised in relation to motor finance. The Committee was satisfied that management’s judgement and approach resulted in an adequate and appropriate level of provision in relation to conduct matters. | | Impairment of financial instruments (refer to Note 8 to the financial statements) | The Committee monitors management’s judgements in relation to expected credit losses (ECLs), which are modelled using a range of forecast economic scenarios. | The Committee considered regular reports from management on: • credit performance across the different businesses • the impact of the macroeconomic environment, including the impact of US tariffs and geopolitical tensions • the use of post-model adjustments (PMAs), including the retention or release of PMAs • the refresh of macroeconomic variables and associated weighting. The Committee considered management’s judgement on impairment coverage levels, including in respect of material exposures and the impact of delinquencies in certain areas of the portfolios. The Committee discussed with management and KPMG the use of PMAs, and requested further clarity from management in future presentations as to how PMAs had been used. Having considered and scrutinised the reports, the Committee agreed with management’s conclusion that the impairment provision was appropriate. | | Impairment of goodwill and intangibles (refer to Note 21 to the financial statements) | The Committee considers management’s judgement in relation to goodwill and intangibles. | The Committee considered management’s reports on its assessment of the Group’s goodwill balances and intangibles, including the methodology and controls applied in the process. The Committee was satisfied with management’s determination that no indicators of impairment had been identified. | | Legal, competition and regulatory provisions (refer to Note 25 to the financial statements) | Barclays is engaged in various legal, competition and regulatory matters that may give rise to provisioning based on the facts. The level of provisioning is subject to management judgement on the basis of legal advice. | The Committee received regular reports on the impact of current legal, competition and regulatory matters on the Group’s provision levels. It challenged management’s judgements in relation to provision levels and also sought KPMG’s views on the adequacy of provisions (including areas where they had challenged management and how management had satisfied KPMG on the position taken). The Committee monitored developments regarding the Supreme Court’s decision on motor finance and the subsequent FCA consultation on a motor finance redress scheme. The Committee reviewed and challenged management’s approach to the initial raising, and subsequent increase, of a provision for motor finance. Seeking KPMG’s views on the reasonableness of management’s position, the Committee focused in particular on the methodology to determine the level of provision for motor finance claims and the reasonableness of assumptions made by management in developing the proposed methodology. The Committee agreed that the level of provision for all legal, competition and regulatory matters at the year-end was appropriate. The Committee also reviewed the disclosures made in the legal, competition and regulatory notes during the year, providing feedback to enhance transparency in disclosures, where appropriate, and concluded that they provided appropriate information for investors. | | Valuations (refer to Notes 13 to 17 to the financial statements) | Barclays exercises judgement in the valuation and disclosure of financial instruments, derivative assets and certain portfolios, particularly where quoted market prices are not available. | The Committee received updates on management’s approach to valuations during the year. The Committee scrutinised management’s approach to key valuation changes, including the triggers and timing for such change. The Committee also received updates on management’s activities to enhance the internal control environment relating to valuations. The Committee was satisfied with the accounting treatment in respect of the various valuation matters. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 96 # Directors' report: Board Audit Committee report (continued) | Areas of focus | Key responsibilities of the Committee | Conclusion / action taken | | --- | --- | --- | | Critical accounting estimates and judgements | | | | Tax | The Committee considers the Group's tax matters, including the Group's tax strategy, compliance with the Group's Tax Principles and judgements related to tax risk and the recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets. | The Committee received reports from the Global Head of Tax on developments in tax matters during the year. The Committee monitored the Group's interactions with tax authorities, developments in tax litigation matters across the Group and the material tax risks for the Group (including considering the adequacy of tax provisions and KPMG's views). The Committee also monitored the potential impact of US legislative changes in relation to tax on the Group. The Committee approved the UK Tax Strategy statement published in the Country Snapshot report and recommended the Country Snapshot to the Board for approval. | | Going concern and viability | | | | Going concern and long-term viability | Barclays is required to assess whether it is appropriate to prepare the financial statements on a going concern basis. In accordance with the Code, Barclays must provide a statement of its viability. To support this, the Committee considers both the going concern assumption and the form and content of the Viability Statement. | The Committee considered both the going concern assumption and the form and content of the Viability Statement taking into account: • the MTP and Working Capital Report • the forecast capital, liquidity and funding profiles • the results of stress tests based on internal and regulatory assumptions. The Committee recommended to the Board that the financial statements should be prepared on a going concern basis and that there were no material uncertainties that would impact the going concern statement which required disclosure. The Committee also recommended the Viability Statement to the Board for approval. | | Distributions | | | | Distributions and return of capital to shareholders | The Committee assesses the distributable reserves position in considering management's proposals for distributions. | The Committee reviewed and recommended to the Board that there were sufficient distributable reserves in relation to (i) a full year dividend for the year ended 31 December 2024 of 5.5p per ordinary share along with a share buy-back of up to £1bn; (ii) a half year dividend of 3.0p per ordinary share for the six months ended 30 June 2025 along with a share buy-back of up to £1bn; and (iii) a Q3 2025 share buy-back of up to £500m. In early 2026, the Committee reviewed and reported to the Board on the distributable reserves position for the full year dividend for the year ended 31 December 2025 along with a proposed share buy-back. | | Internal controls | | | | Internal controls and business control environment | The Committee considers the effectiveness of the overall control environment, including the status of any significant control issues and the progress of specific remediation plans. | The Committee: • considered feedback received from regulatory stakeholders on the Group's internal control environment and monitored management's response, including (where appropriate) reviewing responses prior to submission to regulators • received regular reports on the more significant control matters and remediation programmes across the Group, including the outcome of assurance work conducted by BIA on those programmes • discussed reports from the heads of the key operating divisions across the Group on their control environment, together with views from the second and third lines of defence. The Committee considered the changes introduced by provision 29 of the Code and reviewed management's proposals as to how to define and monitor 'material controls' for this purpose, taking into account Financial Reporting Council (FRC) feedback. The Committee provided feedback to management and oversaw the results of a 'dry run' of the process to be followed to facilitate compliance with provision 29. The Committee Chair updated the Board on the changes introduced by provision 29. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Audit Committee report (continued) | Areas of focus | Key responsibilities of the Committee | Conclusion / action taken | | --- | --- | --- | | Whistleblowing | | | | Speaking up | The Committee considers the adequacy of the Group’s arrangements to allow colleagues to raise concerns in confidence and anonymously without fear of retaliation, and the outcomes of any substantiated case. | The Committee received detailed semi-annual reports on whistleblowing from management. It monitored key whistleblowing metrics, the 'speak up' culture across the Group and any potential whistleblowing trends, including around retaliation and anonymity. The Committee encouraged management to consider the different channels for raising concerns, both formal and informal, to determine the most efficient and effective means of addressing colleague concerns. | | Internal audit | | | | Internal audit | The Committee monitors and assesses the performance of BIA and delivery of the internal audit plan, including scope of work performed, the level of resources, and the methodology and coverage of the internal audit plan. | Through regular reports from BIA, the Committee: • reviewed and agreed the internal audit plan, methodology and deliverables for 2025 • reviewed BIA’s audit reports in relation to specific audits, key areas of focus and emerging themes • received updates on the work carried out by the ‘Financial Crime Validation Office’, a new team set up within BIA focused on assurance work in relation to financial crime matters • tracked the levels of adverse audits and issues raised by BIA and monitored related remediation plans • received updates on BIA colleague matters, including colleague engagement and resourcing • discussed BIA’s assessment of the control environment and key themes in Group entities and functions. • The Committee noted the independence of the BIA function and received regular updates from BIA’s quality assurance function, monitoring trends in the quality assurance report findings. In view of evolving business demands, the Committee discussed with the Group Chief Internal Auditor the resourcing requirements of BIA to ensure it had appropriate resourcing to respond to key areas of focus. Committee members, along with the Board Audit Committee chairs of BBUKPLC, Barclays Europe and Barclays US LLC, attended a ‘BIA Teach In’. This covered matters relating to People, BIA Strategy and Audit Methodology. At the end of the year, the Committee approved the 2026 BIA audit plan and also approved BIA’s Audit Charter following the annual review. | | External audit | | | | External audit | The Committee monitors the work and performance of KPMG as the Group’s statutory auditor. | The Committee: • recommended to shareholders for approval the reappointment of KPMG as Group statutory auditor at its 2025 AGM • met with key members of the KPMG audit team to discuss the 2025 audit plan and KPMG’s areas of focus and subsequently approved the 2025 audit plan • assessed regular reports from KPMG on the progress of the 2025 audit • discussed KPMG’s draft reports on control areas of focus and the control environment • approved the terms of the audit engagement letter and audit fees for 2025, on behalf of the Board. The Committee sought KPMG’s views on a number of specific matters, including management’s approach to accounting judgements, such as the use and release of PMAs and treatment of M&A transactions, and sought to understand where KPMG had challenged management’s assessment prior to reaching a conclusion. The Committee considered KPMG’s response to the PRA Written Auditor Reporting for 2024, and discussed with KPMG the questions in scope for the 2025 Written Auditor Reporting. See the next page for further detail on the Committee’s assessment of KPMG’s performance for 2025. The Committee conducted a formal audit tender process for the Group statutory auditor and recommended to the Board the re-appointment of KPMG from the 2027 financial year. Please see page 99 for details of the process. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Audit Committee report (continued) ## External auditor KPMG was appointed as Barclays' statutory auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year. Barclays conducted an external tender for the Group statutory auditor in 2025, details of which can be found on page 99. ## Assessing external auditor effectiveness, objectivity and independence The Committee is responsible for assessing the effectiveness, objectivity and independence of the Group's statutory auditor. This responsibility was discharged by the Committee throughout the year at formal Committee meetings, during private meetings with the KPMG lead audit engagement partner and through discussions with key Group executives. The Committee is satisfied that the external audit process for 2025 was effective. In particular, the Committee considered that KPMG maintained its independence and objectivity, exercised robust challenge and demonstrated professional scepticism in the audit process. ## Committee conclusion on KPMG effectiveness The Committee assessed KPMG's effectiveness, objectivity and independence in the following ways: ### Reporting throughout the year - Met with senior members of the KPMG audit team from the UK, Ireland and US to discuss the approach to the 2025 audit and key areas of focus. - Received regular reports from management on the non-audit services provided by KPMG and also on any employees or workers hired from KPMG. - Discussed with KPMG their consideration of internal controls over financial reporting and considered areas in which KPMG challenged management's assumptions in areas of key judgement. - Monitored for any potential threats to independence. No such matters were identified and reported by KPMG during 2025 that have an impact on BPLC. ### Annual assessment and audit quality reporting - The Group undertakes an annual formal assessment of KPMG's performance, independence and objectivity. The assessment for 2025 was conducted by way of a questionnaire completed by key stakeholders across the Group, who have regular interaction with KPMG (including input from the Board Audit Committees of BBUKPLC, Barclays Europe and Barclays US LLC). The questionnaire was designed to evaluate KPMG's audit process, its effectiveness and overall output. - During 2025, the Committee continued to receive reports from the KPMG UK Head of Audit Quality on her assessment of audit quality for Barclays. ### Other - External reports: The Barclays 2024 audit had been subject to Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (PCAOB) and FRC review, with no material issues identified and an overall positive outcome. - Audit tender: the formal audit tender process conducted by Barclays in 2025 provided a further opportunity for the Committee to assess the quality of KPMG's audit capabilities. KPMG was identified as the preferred firm in the tender process. Relevant to this decision was Barclays' first-hand experience of KPMG's offering, which the Committee believed can continue to deliver a high-quality audit for Barclays. ## Non-audit services In order to safeguard the auditor's independence and objectivity, Barclays has in place the Group Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory Auditor (the Policy) setting out the circumstances in which the auditor may be engaged to provide non-audit services. The Policy applies to all Barclays subsidiaries and other material entities over which Barclays has significant influence. The core principle of the Policy is that non-audit services (other than those legally required to be carried out by the Group's auditor) should be performed by the auditor only in certain controlled circumstances. The Policy sets out the type of service categories that the auditor is permitted to carry out. Certain services categories and proposed work for which the fee is above a certain threshold, require explicit Committee approval before work can commence. All other permitted service requests are deemed pre-approved by the Committee, subject to compliance with Policy requirements. The Policy requires that all proposed work must be sponsored by a senior executive who is not involved in any work to which the proposed engagement relates. The audit assignment partner must also confirm that the engagement has been approved in accordance with the auditor's own internal ethical standards and does not pose any threat to the auditor's independence or objectivity. The Policy is reviewed by the Committee on an annual basis to ensure that it is fit for purpose and that it reflects applicable rules and guidelines. The Policy is aligned with both the FRC's requirements and KPMG's own internal policy on non-audit services for FTSE 350 companies, which broadly restricts non-audit work to services that are 'closely related' to the audit. The fees payable to KPMG for the year ended 31 December 2025 amounted to £90m (2024: £91m), of which £20m (2024: £20m) was payable in respect of non-audit services. A breakdown of the fees payable to the auditor for statutory audit and non-audit work can be found in Note 39 of the financial statements. Of the £20m of non-audit services provided by KPMG during 2025, the significant categories of engagement, i.e. services where the fees amounted to more than £500,000, included: - limited assurance services provided pursuant to Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) requirements in relation to disclosures by BBPLC and Barclays Europe; - audit-related services, such as services in connection with CASS (Client Assets Sourcebook) audits; - services in connection with regulatory, compliance and internal control reports and specific audit procedures, required by law or regulation to be provided by the statutory auditor; and - attestation and assurance services in relation to treasury and capital markets transactions. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Audit Committee report (continued) ## External audit tender Barclays is in compliance with the requirements of The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014. As a UK public interest entity, Barclays is required to tender the external audit every 10 years and rotate the Group statutory auditor every 20 years. Barclays initially appointed KPMG as its external auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year. We disclosed in our 2024 Annual Report our intention to conduct a formal audit tender process for the Group statutory auditor. Following the conclusion of a formal audit tender process conducted in early 2025, the Board confirmed the re-appointment of KPMG as Barclays' statutory auditor for a period of up to 10 years, commencing from the financial year ending 31 December 2027. A resolution to re-appoint KPMG as Barclays' statutory auditor with effect from the 2027 financial year will be put to the Company's shareholders for approval at the Barclays 2027 Annual General Meeting. ## Scope Barclays' primary objective for the audit tender process was ensuring an efficient, transparent, fair and non-discriminatory tender process and appointing the audit firm that would provide the highest quality audit in an effective and efficient manner. The size and complexity of the Barclays Group requires an audit firm of sufficient size, resource and geographical reach to be able to ensure a high-quality audit. Having regard to the FRC guidance on best practice for audit tenders, the audit tender process was led by the Committee, with direct involvement by the Committee Chair at every stage. Management supported the Committee in the audit tender process and shared their views on an advisory only basis with the Committee. ## Process Barclays conducted an initial 'Request for Information' (RFI) in 2024 to identify firms which satisfied our minimum requirements relating to credibility, capacity and independence. As part of the RFI, the Committee Chair together with senior members of Finance management met interested firms to discuss with them Barclays' key priorities for the audit. The RFI process was followed by a 'Request for Proposal' (RFP) stage, which consisted of a series of workshops with each shortlisted firm. The workshops focused on key audit priorities for Barclays (including accounting policies, valuations, transition, principal risks and technology). All firms were given the opportunity to meet with members of the Committee, as well as the Board Audit Committee Chairs of BBUK and Barclays Europe, during the workshops (due to the consolidated BPLC/BBPLC Board Audit Committees, BBPLC was represented via the BPLC Board Audit Committee Chair). Feedback was provided to the firms following the RFI stage and through the RFP stage in order to ensure that each was given the best chance possible of putting forward a credible proposal. ## Evaluation Firms were evaluated based on the following key criteria approved by the Committee: - experience; - proposed solution; - audit quality; - corporate fit; - commercial compliance; and - use of technology. The RFP scorecard was reviewed alongside qualitative considerations around the transition process (or, in the case of KPMG as the incumbent, the ability to bring fresh perspectives to the audit) and cultural fit. While the firms were asked to submit fee proposals as part of the RFP process, these proposals were not considered by the Committee until after the Committee had confirmed its recommendation of two firms to the Board. ## Recommendation to the Board The Committee considered and discussed the output from the workshops, which augmented the RFI submissions and brought to life each firm's audit proposition. This enabled the Committee to conduct an objective review of the statutory audit process considering Barclays' key priorities for future audits and having regard to some of the inevitable challenges raised in the audit process. The Committee recommended two firms, indicating its preference for retaining KPMG, to the Board for selection. Supporting the Committee's recommendation was Barclays' first-hand experience of KPMG's offering, which can continue to deliver a high-quality audit for Barclays. The Board made a final decision to select KPMG as the successful firm in May 2025. ## Summary of tender process Set out below is a timeline of the audit tender process conducted. ### 2024 #### August-October - Initial meetings with each audit firm - Initial RFI process #### November-December - RFI responses considered #### December - Selection of audit firms to participate in the formal tender process - Recommendation from the Committee to the Board to formally commence the audit tender process - Announcement released to the market confirming intention to conduct an audit tender #### December-January 2025 - Key investor and proxy advisor outreach on audit tender process ### 2025 #### February-April - Summary of anticipated audit tender process included in Barclays PLC Annual Report 2024 - RFP issued - Workshops held with participating audit firms #### May - Committee recommendation of two firms to the Board for selection - Board approval of KPMG as preferred firm - Announcement released to the market confirming conclusion of the tender process --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F Directors' report: Board Risk Committee report # Continued focus on robust risk management and resilience in an uncertain and volatile external environment Strengthening risk management and resilience amid complex global challenges. # Board Risk Committee Robert Berry Chair, Board Risk Committee ![img-54.jpeg](img-54.jpeg) Committee membership and meeting attendance during 2025 | Member | Meetings attended/ eligible to attend | | --- | --- | | Robert Berry | 14/14 | | Dawn Fitzpatrick² | 13/14 | | Sir John Kingman² | 13/14 | | Marc Moses² | 12/14 | | Julia Wilson² | 13/14 | # Notes 1. There were ten scheduled Committee meetings and four ad hoc meetings held in 2025. One ad hoc meeting was a combined Board and Committee meeting. 2. Owing to other commitments or religious observance, some Directors were unable to attend certain meetings, however they received papers in advance and had the opportunity to share their views with the Chair ahead of the meetings. # Dear Shareholders I am pleased to report on the Board Risk Committee's activities and responsibilities during 2025. I would like to thank the Committee members for their contributions and support during the year. The Committee's agenda in 2025 continued to be shaped by a complex and evolving risk landscape, driven by heightened macroeconomic and geopolitical uncertainty, periods of market volatility, regulatory change, and the evolution of non-financial risks, such as cyber and AI-related threats. The Committee has sought to understand the impacts on Barclay's business model and reinforced the need for management to proactively identify and mitigate risks arising from these external factors. Our focus has remained on ensuring that Barclays' risk management framework is robust, forward-looking, and aligned with the Group's strategic ambitions. Geopolitical tensions have required enhanced scenario analyses and stress testing to assess exposures and inform management actions. The Committee has overseen increased monitoring of potential distress within the portfolio, particularly in relation to credit risk, as well as climate risk, and has considered the impact of global conditions on business growth strategies. The Committee has had close oversight of financial risks, including capital and liquidity risk, and actions being taken by management to seek to ensure they are well contained, as well as overseeing enhancements to the risk appetite framework. Operational risk has been an area of significant focus for the Committee. This has included consideration of cyber threats, payments processes, and technology change incidents, including the 31 January 2025 IT incident that impacted Barclays' business in the UK. The Committee has focussed on continuous improvement of the operational risk framework and the evolution of risk appetite and oversaw management's ongoing work to strengthen controls. With Financial Crime elevated to a principal risk from January 2025, the Committee has established a cadence of regular reporting to oversee developments in financial crime risk management and actions to improve the control environment. The Committee has also maintained focus on emerging threats, such as AI-driven fraud and crypto-related risks. The Committee oversees the Group's cyber security position, including threat-led testing and addressing vulnerabilities. As part of our consideration of model risk, we have considered the risks and opportunities presented by AI, both in terms of internal adoption and external threats, seeking to understand that governance frameworks and policies are in place to manage these evolving risks. Compliance risk has been a continued area of attention, with the Committee receiving updates on the complexities driven by the external environment. As well as Compliance's work in relation to market integrity, conduct, and laws, rules and regulations interpretation, the Committee has been focused on the actions taken to implement appropriate guardrails to contain compliance threats. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Risk Committee report (continued) Legal risk updates have highlighted the challenges of regulatory divergence and the pace of change, with the Committee seeking to ensure that Barclays remains compliant and resilient in the face of evolving requirements. The Committee assess how Barclays' strategy is informed by, and remains within risk appetite. As part of the Committee's role in reviewing the design of the ERMF, and making recommendations to the Board, it has spent significant time during 2025 on amendments to qualitative risk appetite statements, particularly those relating to non-financial risks, and encouraging management to refine their articulation and drive consistency. The Committee has also undertaken dedicated teach-in sessions on the Risk and Compliance functions to deepen its understanding of how they are executing on the strategic priorities for the function, including ensuring appropriate skills and capabilities for the future. The Chairs of Barclays' key subsidiary Board Risk Committees were invited to these sessions. To assist the Committee in having visibility over any material and key emerging issues impacting the Group (including its key subsidiaries), during the year I have attended meetings of the Barclays US LLC/BBDE Board Risk Committee, the Barclays Europe Board Risk Committee, and the BBUKPLC Board Risk Committee. ## Committee effectiveness An internal evaluation of the performance of the Committee was conducted for 2025, in line with the provisions of the Code. The results of the review confirmed that the Committee was operating effectively. Further information on the review of the Board and its Committees can be found in the Board Nominations Committee report on page 84. ## Looking ahead As we move into 2026, the Committee will continue to focus on ensuring Barclays remains resilient and agile in the face of ongoing uncertainty. We expect to maintain focus on several key topics, including the impact of the changing macroeconomic and geopolitical external landscape. We will maintain our commitment to robust governance and proactive risk management, ensuring that Barclays is well positioned to respond to emerging risks and to support the Group's strategic ambitions. **Robert Berry** Chair, Board Risk Committee 9 February 2026 ## Committee meetings During 2025, the Committee met 14 times, with 10 scheduled and four ad hoc meetings. One ad hoc meeting was a combined Board and Committee meeting. (2024: 10 times with no ad hoc meetings) and the attendance by members at these meetings is shown on page 100. In addition to its members, Committee meetings in 2025 were also attended by representatives from senior management including the Group Chief Executive, Group Chief Risk Officer, Group Chief Compliance Officer, Group Finance Director, Group Chief Internal Auditor, Group Treasurer, and Group General Counsel, as well as representatives from the businesses and additional colleagues from the Risk and Compliance functions. The lead audit engagement partner of KPMG also attended Committee meetings. The Committee held regular private sessions with each of the Group Chief Risk Officer and the Group Chief Compliance Officer, without other management present. The Committee continues to work closely with the Board Audit Committee and Board Sustainability Committee to ensure a consistent approach is taken in relation to matters in which there is a connection across remits. This interconnectivity is supported by Committee cross-membership, including the Chair of the Board Audit Committee being a member of the Board Risk Committee and my membership of the Board Audit and Board Sustainability Committees. ## Role of the Committee The Committee is responsible for reviewing, on behalf of the Board, management's recommendations on the principal risks as set out in the ERMF (with the exception of reputation risk with strategic implications relating to the Group, which is a matter reserved to the Board), and in particular: - reviewing, on behalf of the Board, the management of those principal risks in the ERMF - considering and recommending to the Board the Group's risk appetite and tolerances for those principal risks - reviewing, on behalf of the Board, the Group's risk profile for those principal risks - commissioning, receiving and considering reports on key risk issues - safeguarding the independence, and overseeing the performance, of Barclays' Risk and Compliance functions. The Committee's terms of reference are available at: home.barclays/who-we-are/our-governance/board-committees/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Risk Committee report (continued) ## Primary activities The table below highlights how the Committee discharged its responsibilities and its key areas of focus in 2025. | Areas of focus | Key responsibilities of the Committee | Key activities / actions taken | | --- | --- | --- | | Risk framework, governance and regulatory matters | • To review and recommend to the Board for approval the design of the ERMF. • To assess risk management matters raised by Barclays’ regulators and monitor the actions being taken by management to respond. • To monitor the progress of significant risk management projects. • To keep under review the effectiveness of the Group’s risk management systems. • To support management in embedding and maintaining throughout the Group a supportive culture in relation to risk management. | • The Committee reviewed and recommended to the Board for approval the ERMF. • Further to reports presented by management on guidance and feedback received from regulators, the Committee considered Barclays’ response to the matters raised by regulators, including updates on key remediation programmes. • The Committee received an update from the Group Chief Risk Officer and Group Chief Compliance Officer on their observations on Barclays’ Risk and Compliance culture, which included reflecting on the Committee’s role to support management in embedding the desired culture. • The Committee received regular reports from management on regulatory interpretation matters and related governance. | | Risk appetite and stress testing i.e. the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives, including testing whether the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe but plausible economic scenarios. | • To advise the Board on the Group’s risk appetite and tolerance for the principal risks and emerging risks that the Group may be willing to take when determining strategy. • To review and recommend to the Board for approval the Group’s Risk Appetite Statement. • To review and approve the methodology used to establish the Group’s risk appetite and associated stress testing. • To consider and approve stress loss limits and mandate and scale controls for financial principal risks (credit risk, market risk and treasury and capital risk), operational risk and climate risk. • To consider and approve Internal Stress Test (IST) themes and consider the financial and non-financial constraints and scenarios for stress testing risk appetite for the MTP. • To consider and approve the results of stress tests required by regulators. | • The Committee engaged extensively with management on proposed enhancements to Barclays’ qualitative risk appetite statements, in particular for non-financial principal risks, and subsequently recommended to the Board for approval Barclays’ Risk Appetite Statement. • The Committee reviewed and approved the stress loss limits and mandate and scale controls for the Group. • The Committee considered and approved the 2025 IST (including climate risk) scenario theme and severity and 2025 IST results, and recommended the Board approve the MTP on the basis that risk appetite was met under the IST. The Committee also approved the results of the 2025 Reverse Stress Test and considered key learnings. • The Committee approved the results of the 2025 Group Bank Capital Stress Test and considered management’s analysis of the stress test results published by the Bank of England. • The Committee considered updates on the results of Barclays US LLC’s 2025 supervisory stress test conducted by the Federal Reserve Board. | | Risk profile i.e. the impact on the Group’s risk profile from geopolitical and macroeconomic developments and conditions. | • To evaluate and report to the Board on the Group’s risk profile and risk tolerance for the principal risks in the ERMF. • To consider reports on key risk issues and emerging risks that assess the adequacy of the ERMF to manage those risks. | • The Group Chief Risk Officer reported regularly on the Group’s risk profile, which included assessments of macroeconomic developments and geopolitical risks, in addition to reporting on key risks and portfolio metrics. • The Committee received briefings on key risk themes in the context of the evolving risk environment in which Barclays operates and the response of management. • The Committee has overseen management in clearly defining the Group’s target presence in emerging markets. • The Committee reviewed and approved the Group’s approach to managing single name concentration risk. • The Committee received focused business risk updates for each of the main business areas which included assessments of principal risks. | | Credit risk and market risk i.e. the risk of loss from the failure of customers, clients or counterparties to fully honour their obligations to Barclays; or due to market movements. | • To review and consider vulnerabilities to credit losses in the Group’s lending and banking transactions that expose the firm to credit risk. • To review and consider the risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables. | • The Committee maintained an ongoing focus on credit risk in the context of the external environment. This included consideration of an update on key metrics and exposures by sector and reporting on management actions being taken to mitigate the risk in key portfolios. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Risk Committee report (continued) | Areas of focus | Key responsibilities of the Committee | Key activities / actions taken | | --- | --- | --- | | Treasury and capital risk i.e. liquidity risk, capital risk and interest rate risk in the banking book. | • To review capital performance against plan, tracking the capital trajectory, any challenges and opportunities and regulatory policy developments. • To assess liquidity performance against both internal and regulatory requirements, and review any challenges and opportunities. • To monitor capital and funding requirements. • To consider and approve Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP) submissions. | • The Committee reviewed capital and liquidity performance and the forecast capital and funding trajectory, including the actions identified by management to manage the Group's capital position. • Following preliminary assessments of the ICAAP and ILAAP by the Committee in early 2025, the Committee subsequently approved the Group's 2025 ICAAP and ILAAP prior to their submission to the PRA. • The Committee considered Barclays' risk appetite framework and strategy for managing significant risk transfer transactions. • The Committee recommended to the Board for approval the Group Recovery Plan. • The Committee considered an update on Barclays' resolvability arrangements, including the testing and assurance activities completed in 2025, and a Group resolution simulation planned for 2026 to ensure our resolution capabilities are execution-ready. | | Operational risk i.e. the risk of loss arising from inadequate or failed processes and systems, human factors or due to external events. | • To review the Group's operational risk profile and consider specific areas of operational risks, including fraud, operational resilience, cybersecurity, execution risk, technology and data, including the controls that are in place for managing and mitigating such risks. | • The Committee regularly reviewed the Group's operational risk profile through reporting on key metrics and key operational risks, including those relating to transactions operations, technology change, fraud, cyber security and the risks associated with new business activities. • The Committee considered updates on proposed changes to enhance the Operational Risk Management Framework and operational risk appetite statement. • The Committee reviewed and approved under a delegation of authority from the Board the 2025 Group Operational Resilience Self-Assessment assessing Barclays' ability to recover its Important Business Services (IBS) within impact tolerance in severe but plausible scenarios. The Committee subsequently recommended to the Board for approval changes to the impact tolerance thresholds for certain IBS following a review after the 31 January 2025 IT incident that impacted Barclays' business in the UK. • The Committee maintained oversight of cybersecurity risk, including through updates on the Group-wide programme of work to enhance Barclays' cybersecurity capabilities, encompassing activities to strengthen Barclays' risk posture, assessments of the external cyber environment and regulatory commitments. • The Committee received focused updates on AI that included consideration of AI oversight in Barclays, the external AI policy and regulatory landscape and AI-driven cybersecurity risks. | | Climate risk i.e. the risk of financial losses arising from climate change through physical risks and risks associated with transitioning to a lower carbon economy. | • To consider and assess the impact of climate risk on the Group's activities. | • Through updates on climate risk the Committee considered how climate change is driving financial and operational risks and how Barclays is managing these risks and incorporating them in its capital adequacy assessment. Matters covered in the updates included external regulatory trends, the global policy environment and actions taken to address physical risks. The Committee also considered progress against Barclays' financed emissions reduction targets. • Business risk updates to the Committee from the main business areas included assessments of climate risk. | | Model risk i.e. the potential for adverse consequences from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports. | • To evaluate the appropriateness of the Model Risk Management Framework, including receiving updates on findings in relation to specific modelling processes. | • The Committee received updates on model risk, including in relation to enhancements to the Model Risk Management Framework to address increasing regulatory expectations, including compliance with PRA Supervisory Statement 1/23 "Model risk management principles for banks", and oversight of AI risk management within the Group. • In compliance with the regulatory requirement for the Group's Model Risk Management Policy to be approved by the Board, the Committee approved the Model Risk Framework on behalf of the Board. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Risk Committee report (continued) | Areas of focus | Key responsibilities of the Committee | Key activities / actions taken | | --- | --- | --- | | Compliance risk i.e. the risk of poor outcomes for, or harm to, customers, clients and markets, arising from the delivery of the firm's products and services (Conduct Risk) and the risk to Barclays, its clients, customers or markets from a failure to comply with the laws, rules and regulations applicable to the firm (Laws, Rules and Regulations Risk, LRR Risk). | • To review the effectiveness of the processes and policies by which the Group identifies and manages Compliance risk, including reviewing the effectiveness of the Compliance Risk Framework. | • The Group Chief Compliance Officer reported regularly to the Committee on the Group's compliance risk profile, which included lessons learned reviews undertaken in response to industry developments and external events and the monitoring of ongoing remediation activities. • The Committee received a quarterly Compliance opinion on Group transformation initiatives. • The Committee considered focused updates on key compliance risks including surveillance, trade and transaction reporting and laws, rules and regulations. | | Financial Crime risk i.e. the risk that Barclays and its associated persons (employees or third parties) commit or facilitate financial crime, and/or the firm's products and services are used to facilitate financial crime. | • To monitor the financial crime risk profile of the Group and how such risk is mitigated. | • The Committee monitored financial crime risk through quarterly updates on the Group-wide programme to enhance financial crime capabilities and opinions from Compliance on Barclays' financial crime risk profile. • The Committee received a compliance focused update on the financial crime risks presented by AI and the risk of exploitation by criminals. | | Reputation risk i.e. the risk that an action, transaction, investment, event, decision, or business relationship will reduce trust in the Group's integrity and/or competence. | • To evaluate the effectiveness of the Group's management of reputation risk. • To escalate any matter with reputation risk which may have strategic implications for the Group to the Board. | • Updates on reputation risk provided to the Committee included discussion on risk appetite considerations and reviewing enhancements to the approach to identifying and assessing reputation risks. | | Legal risk i.e. the risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the Group to meet applicable laws, rules, regulations or contractual requirements or to assert or defend its intellectual property rights. | • To monitor the Group's legal risk profile, including considering potential material emerging legal risks. | • The Committee received periodic updates on emerging legal risks faced by the Group and actions being taken to manage such risks. | | Strategic transaction risk | • To satisfy itself that the due diligence process followed for proposed significant and strategic acquisitions or disposals by the Group is thorough. | • The Committee considered the key conclusions from the due diligence conducted on the acquisition of Best Egg, Inc. and the impact of the transaction on the Group's risk profile and overall risk appetite in the context of the Group's strategy, and reported its conclusions to the Board. | | Remuneration | • To provide input to the Board Remuneration Committee on performance against risk metrics to be taken into account in annual remuneration decisions. | • In early 2025, the Committee considered the recommended ex-ante risk adjustment for the 2024 incentives pool, which reflected input from the Group Chief Risk Officer and Group Chief Compliance Officer. • The Committee considered the methodology for setting the ex-ante adjustments to the 2025 incentives pool. | | Oversight of the Risk and Compliance functions | • To safeguard the independence, and oversee the performance, of Barclays' Risk and Compliance functions. • To satisfy itself that Barclays' Risk and Compliance functions are adequately resourced and have appropriate access to information, so as to be able to perform their functions effectively. • To review and approve the Compliance function's Annual Compliance Plan. | • In early 2026, both the Group Chief Risk and Chief Compliance Officers presented 2025 function effectiveness reviews assessing the performance of their respective functions against their remits. • The Committee reviewed and approved the Annual Compliance Plan and monitored delivery of the plan through a mid-year progress update. • The Committee considered Barclays Internal Audit's assessments of the control environment of the Risk and Compliance functions. • The Committee participated in teach-in sessions from the Risk and Compliance functions, providing deeper insight into the organisational shape and evolution of the functions. • The Committee met privately with the Group Chief Risk Officer and Group Chief Compliance Officer on a regular basis. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Sustainability Committee report # Working towards our ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050 and supporting our clients in the transition to a low-carbon economy # Board Sustainability Committee Nigel Higgins Chair, Board Sustainability Committee ![img-55.jpeg](img-55.jpeg) Committee membership and meeting attendance during 2025¹,² | Member | Meetings attended/ eligible to attend | | --- | --- | | Nigel Higgins | 4/4 | | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 4/4 | | Robert Berry | 3/4 | | Dawn Fitzpatrick | 2/4 | | Mary Francis | 4/4 | | Brian Gilvary | 2/4 | | Diony Lebot* | 3/3 | | Julia Wilson | 4/4 | * Diony Lebot joined the Committee on 17 March 2025. # Note: 1. There were three scheduled Committee meetings and one ad hoc meeting held in 2025. Owing to other commitments or illness, some Directors were unable to attend certain meetings, however they received papers in advance and had the opportunity to share their views with the Chair ahead of the meetings. 2. A non-executive representative from the BBUKPLC Board continues to attend Committee meetings. # Dear Shareholders, In furtherance of Barclays' ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050, during 2025, the Board Sustainability Committee has focused on monitoring the progress and evolution of the climate and sustainability strategy, particularly how the Group supports clients in the transition to a low-carbon economy, supporting the Board's oversight of these important issues. Climate change continues to be a critical and complex challenge, and the Committee plays an important role in shaping and overseeing the Group's climate and sustainability strategy, seeking to ensure that Barclays commitments remain robust, credible, and responsive to the rapidly-evolving external environment and to stakeholder expectations. As part of its discussions, the Committee reviewed the Barclays Transition Update in detail ahead of Board approval and publication in July. The Committee worked closely with management to seek to ensure that the Transition Update set out how Barclays is financing customers' and clients' transition, as it balances its climate ambition and stakeholder expectations, and continues to deliver the strategy whilst taking into consideration the dynamic external environment and risks associated with the transition. Banks are part of the fabric of economies across the world that are striving to align transition, growth and energy security and Barclays is seeking to support its clients with navigating this environment. Discussions centred on the risks and opportunities presented by the transition, with the Committee supporting a pragmatic approach to transition planning. The Transition Update reaffirmed Barclays' ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050, reported progress towards our target to facilitate $1 trillion Sustainable and Transition Finance, and provided more detail on how Barclays could work with clients in key sectors to support decarbonisation, while managing associated risks and opportunities. It also considered factors that may influence climate transition, and how Barclays could further evolve its strategy and policy positions. The Committee's discussions were informed by external perspectives, including external legal and policy experts, and underpinned by management's active engagement with our shareholders, NGOs, and other stakeholders, alongside feedback provided directly to me as Group Chairman. The Committee maintained emphasis on transparency and accountability in relation to the climate and sustainability strategy and discussed likely stakeholder impact and reaction to the publication of the Barclays Transition Update. The Committee also received regular updates on external developments, market practice, and regulatory changes. Beyond climate, the Committee discussed the continuing work to advance Barclays' position on nature and human rights, recognising the growing importance of these issues to our stakeholders and to the long-term sustainability of our business. Acknowledging the close interlock between climate and nature considerations, the Committee encouraged a thoughtful approach to the integration of nature risks and opportunities alongside our existing climate strategy. The Committee also received an update on the ongoing approach to identifying and managing human rights considerations. The topics covered by the Committee are reviewed regularly to ensure that members have visibility of the broader sustainability landscape, including material policy, regulatory, legal and political developments in our key markets. Having cross-membership on the Committee with the Chairs of our Board Audit, Remuneration and Risk Committees helps to ensure a streamlined approach to Board-level oversight of all climate and sustainability-related matters. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Board Sustainability Committee report (continued) The Committee continues to have a non-executive representative from the BBUKPLC Board, which provides further connectivity across the Group. ## Committee effectiveness An internal evaluation of the performance of the Committee was conducted for 2025, in line with the provisions of the Code. The results of the review confirmed that the Committee was operating effectively. Further information on the review of the Board and its Committees can be found in the Board Nominations Committee report on page 84. ## Looking ahead Looking ahead, the Committee remains committed to supporting the Board and management in delivering on our sustainability ambitions, monitoring progress against our strategy, and responding proactively to new risks and opportunities. On behalf of the Board, the Committee will continue to seek to ensure that Barclays is well-positioned to support our clients, deliver value to shareholders, and contribute positively to society in line with our Purpose. Nigel Higgins Chair, Board Sustainability Committee 9 February 2026 ## Committee composition and meetings During 2025, the Committee met four times and attendance by members is shown on page 105. Committee meetings in 2025 were also attended by management representatives including the Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance, Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility, and Head of Legal, Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility. As announced on 6 February 2026, Mary Francis will be stepping down from the Board and as a member of the Committee with effect from 6 May 2026. As an Executive member of the Committee, our Group Chief Executive, C.S. Venkatakrishnan, brings in-depth climate and sustainability insight to the Committee’s discussions, including the views of key external stakeholders. Through his past and current external roles, including as Chair of the Financial Services Taskforce to the Sustainable Markets Initiative, he brings external perspectives on key climate and sustainability matters relevant to the Committee’s discussions. ## Role of the Committee The Committee’s role is to provide oversight of climate matters and Barclays’ sustainability agenda, with particular focus on: - supporting and advising the Board in its oversight of climate and sustainability matters relating to (i) the services and products provided to Barclays’ clients and customers, (ii) particular sectors, and (iii) its own corporate activities - supporting the Board in monitoring the implementation of the Barclays’ climate and sustainability strategy and, if appropriate, making recommendations to the Board as to how to further develop these strategies - reviewing and making recommendations to the Board on the suitability of, material changes to, the Group’s climate and sustainability strategy; and - reporting to the Board on the climate and sustainability matters for which it is responsible, escalating issues and making recommendations to the Board where appropriate. The Committee’s terms of reference are available at home.barclays/who-we-are/our-governance/board-committees/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 107 # Directors' report: How we comply # Reporting against the Code’s principles and provisions As Barclays PLC is listed on the London Stock Exchange, the principles and provisions of the Code apply, a copy of which can be found at frc.org.uk For the year ended 31 December 2025, and as at the date of this report, we are pleased to confirm that Barclays PLC has complied in full with the requirements of the Code in force as at 31 December 2025. This section and our Board Governance report sets out how we complied with the Code in 2025. By virtue of the information included in the Annual Report, we comply with the corporate governance statement requirements of the FCA’s Disclosure and Transparency Rules (DTRs). The information required to be disclosed pursuant to DTR 7.2.6 is located on pages 109 to 115. Information in relation to the Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy, as required to be disclosed pursuant to DTR 7.2.8A, can be found on page 89. Barclays is permitted by New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) rules to follow UK corporate governance practices instead of those applied in the US. Any significant variations must be explained in Barclays PLC's Annual Report on Form 20-F filing, found at the Securities and Exchange Commission’s Electronic Data Gathering, Analysis, and Retrieval (EDGAR) database or on our website home.barclays The way in which Barclays has applied the principles and provisions of the Code during 2025 is summarised below and on the next page. ## Board Leadership and Company Purpose Our Board governance is designed to deliver an effective and entrepreneurial Board, which discharges its role effectively and efficiently. Details can be found on pages 77 to 78, including our Group-wide governance framework and the Board's responsibilities. Key Board activities for 2025 are set out on pages 80 to 83. The Board is fully supportive of The Barclays Way, which sets out our Purpose, Values and Mindset, and is our Code of Conduct, providing a path for achieving a dynamic and positive culture in the Group. Refer to page 171 for further detail. Our Group Whistleblowing Standard enables colleagues to raise any matters of concern anonymously and is embedded into our business. Further information can be found on page 172. Throughout 2025, we engaged with our stakeholders through a variety of means. Refer to page 25 for further detail about how Barclays engages with our stakeholders. ## Division of Responsibility The majority of the Board comprises independent Non-Executive Directors. The Group Chairman and Group Company Secretary work in collaboration to ensure an effective and efficient Board, as further described in Our governance framework from page 77. All Directors have access to the advice of the Group Company Secretary. The roles of Chair, Group Chief Executive, SID and Non-Executive Directors are defined within the Barclays Charter of Expectations, along with the behaviours and competencies for each role, as outlined on page 79. Directors are expected to commit sufficient time to ensure they can discharge their obligations to Barclays effectively, as detailed in our Board Nominations Committee report on page 84. The Board is responsible for setting the strategy for the Group. The day-to-day management of the Group is delegated by the Board to the Group Chief Executive, who is supported by his ExCo, the composition of which is outlined on page 76. Details of the number of meetings of the Board and its Committees, and the individual attendance by Directors, can be found in Our governance framework on page 79 and in each respective Board Committee report. ## Composition, Succession and Evaluation All Board appointments are based on merit against objective criteria and having regard to the Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy, considering the skills, experience, independence and knowledge required for the Board’s effectiveness and to support the continued delivery of the Group’s strategy. The Board Nominations Committee oversees succession to both Board and senior management positions. The Board adopted an updated version of the Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy in February 2026, as detailed in the Board Nominations Committee report on page 84. Board appointments are made following a rigorous and transparent process facilitated by the Board Nominations Committee, with the aid of external search consultancy firms. All Directors are subject to annual re-election at the AGM. See page 109 for further detail. Each year, an effectiveness review is carried out on the performance of the Board, Board Committees and individual Directors. As permitted by the Code, an internally-facilitated review was conducted for 2025. Refer to the Board Nominations Committee report from page 84 for details, as well as progress against the findings from the externally facilitated Board review for 2024. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 108 # Directors' report: How we comply (continued) ## Audit, Risk and Internal Control The Board, together with the Board Audit Committee, is responsible for ensuring the integrity of this Annual Report and that the financial statements as a whole present a fair, balanced and understandable assessment of Barclays' performance, position and prospects. The Board, together with the Board Audit Committee, is responsible for ensuring the independence and effectiveness of the internal audit function and external auditors. The Directors are responsible for ensuring that management maintains an effective system of risk management and internal control and for assessing its effectiveness. Such a system is designed to identify, evaluate and manage, rather than eliminate, the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable, and not absolute, assurance against material misstatement or loss. Processes are in place for identifying, evaluating and managing the principal risks facing the Group. A key component of The Barclays Guide is the ERMF. The purpose of the ERMF is to identify and set minimum requirements of the main risks to the strategic objectives of the Group. The Group is committed to operating within a strong system of internal control. The Barclays Guide contains the overarching framework setting out the approach of the Group to internal governance. Effectiveness of risk management and internal controls are reviewed regularly by the Board Risk Committee (responsible for overseeing the ERMF and current and potential future risk exposures) and the Board Audit Committee (responsible for evaluating the effectiveness of internal controls). Key controls are assessed on a regular basis for both design and operating effectiveness. Issues arising out of these assessments, where appropriate, are reported to the Board Audit Committee. The Board Audit Committee oversees the control environment (and remediation of related issues). It also reviews annually the risk management and internal control system. The Board Audit Committee has concluded that throughout the year ended 31 December 2025, the Group has operated an effective system of internal control that provides reasonable assurance of financial and operational controls and compliance with laws, rules and regulations. You can read more about the Board Audit Committee and its work, including its oversight of the internal control framework and areas of ongoing enhancement, from page 92. ## Remuneration The Remuneration report from page 116 sets out the purpose and activities of the Board Remuneration Committee, a summary of the remuneration policy for the Executive Directors and how it is aligned with the policy for the wider workforce, as well as the Directors' remuneration outcomes for 2025. The Group's remuneration policies and procedures support the Group's strategy and enable us to reward sustainable performance, which is a key element of our Remuneration Philosophy. For our Executive Directors, incentive outcomes are based on a structured assessment of performance against key financial and non-financial performance measures, aligned with the Group's strategic priorities. Wider workforce remuneration is reviewed every year by the Remuneration Committee for alignment with (i) Barclays' Remuneration Philosophy and Fair Pay Agenda, (ii) Barclays' Purpose, Values, Mindset, conduct expectations and long-term success, and (iii) Executive Director and senior management remuneration. All Executive Director and senior management remuneration policies are developed in accordance with the Group's formal and transparent procedures (ensuring that no Director is involved in deciding their own remuneration outcomes) and are, where appropriate, aligned to wider workforce policies. Board Remuneration Committee members exercise independent judgement and discretion when determining remuneration outcomes, considering the Group and individual performance, wider workforce and other relevant stakeholder considerations. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Other statutory and regulatory information # Other statutory and regulatory information The Directors present their report together with the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2025. Other information that is relevant to the Directors' report, and which is incorporated by reference into this report, can be located as follows: | | Page | | --- | --- | | Remuneration policy, including details of the remuneration of each Director and Directors' interests in shares | 130 to 132 135, 153 to 154 | | Corporate Governance Statement | 107 to 108 | | Risk review | 180 | Disclosures required pursuant to Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 as updated by Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 2018 can be found on the following pages: | | Page | | --- | --- | | Engagement with employees (Sch. 7, Para 11 and 11A 2008/2018 Regs) | 26 to 28 | | Engagement with suppliers, customers and others in a business relationship (Sch. 7, Para 11 B 2008/2018 Regs) | 25 29 and 168 to 170 | | Financial instruments (Sch. 7, para 6 2008 Regs) | 371 | | Hedge accounting policy (Sch. 7, para 6 2008 Regs) | 373 | Disclosures required pursuant to Listing Rule 6.6.1R can be found on the following pages: | | Page | | --- | --- | | Allotment for cash of equity securities | 409 | | Waiver of dividends | 109 | # Profit and dividends Statutory profit after tax for 2025 was £7,213m (2024: £6,356 m). The 2025 full year dividend of 5.60p per ordinary share will be paid on 31 March 2026 to shareholders whose names are on the Register of Members at the close of business on 20 February 2026. With the 2025 half year dividend totalling 3.0p per ordinary share, paid in September 2025, the total dividend for 2025 is 8.60p (2024: 8.4p) per ordinary share. The half year and full year dividends for 2025 amounted to £1,200m (2024: £1,216m). BPLC also completed share buy-back programmes during 2025, further details of which can be found later in this section. Shareholders may have their dividends reinvested in Barclays by joining the Barclays Dividend Reinvestment Plan (DRIP). Further details regarding the DRIP can be found at home.barclays/dividends and shareview.co.uk/info/drip The nominee company of certain Employee Benefit Trusts (EBTs) holding shares in Barclays in connection with the operation of our employee share plans has lodged evergreen dividend waivers on shares held by it that have not been allocated to employees. The total amount of dividends waived during the year ended 31 December 2025 was £1.2m (2024: £8.4m). # Board of Directors The names of the current Directors of BPLC, along with their biographical details, are set out on pages 72 to 119 and are incorporated into this Directors' report by reference. Changes to Directors during the year and up to the date of this report are set out below. | Name | Role | Effective date | | --- | --- | --- | | Diane Schueneman | Non-Executive Director | Resigned 31 January 2025 | | Diony Lebot | Non-Executive Director | Appointed 17 March 2025 | | Tim Breedon | Non-Executive Director | Resigned 30 April 2025 | | Mary Mack | Non-Executive Director | Appointed 1 June 2025 | As announced on 6 February 2026, Mary Francis will be stepping down from the Board with effect from 6 May 2026. # Appointment and retirement of Directors The appointment and retirement of Directors is governed by our Articles, the Code, the Act and related legislation. The Articles may be amended only by a special resolution of the shareholders. The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy among the Directors and any Director so appointed holds office only until the next AGM and may offer themselves for re-election. The Code recommends that all directors of companies listed in the commercial companies category should be subject to --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Other statutory and regulatory information (continued) annual re-election. All Directors, other than Mary Francis who is to retire from the Board prior to the AGM, intend to offer themselves for re-election at the 2026 AGM. ## Directors' indemnities Qualifying third party indemnity provisions (as defined by Section 234 of the Act) were in force during the course of the financial year ended 31 December 2025 for the benefit of the then Directors of the Company and the then Directors of certain of the Company's subsidiaries and, at the date of this report, are in force for the benefit of the Directors of the Company and the directors of certain of the Company's subsidiaries in relation to certain losses and liabilities which they may incur (or have incurred) in connection with their duties, powers or office. The Group also maintains Directors' and Officers' Liability Insurance which gives appropriate cover for legal action brought against its Directors. Qualifying pension scheme indemnity provisions (as defined by Section 235 of the Act) were in force during the course of the financial year ended 31 December 2025 for the benefit of the then Directors, and at the date of this report are in force for the benefit of directors of Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited as trustee of the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund, and Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited as Trustee of Barclays Capital International Pension Scheme (No.1) and Barclays PLC Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme. The directors of the trustees are indemnified against liability incurred in connection with the trustees' activities in relation to the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund, Barclays Capital International Pension Scheme (No.1) and Barclays PLC Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme. ## Political donations The Group did not give any money for political purposes in the UK or outside the UK, nor did it make any political donations to political parties or other political organisations or to any independent election candidates, nor did it incur any political expenditure during the year. In accordance with the US Federal Election Campaign Act, Barclays provides administrative support to a federal Political Action Committee (PAC) in the US, funded by the voluntary political contributions of eligible employees. The PAC is not controlled or funded by Barclays and all decisions regarding the amounts and recipients of contributions are directed by a steering committee comprising employees eligible to contribute to the PAC. Contributions to political organisations reported by the PAC during the calendar year 2025 totalled $123,000 (2024: $75,000). ## Country-by-Country reporting The Capital Requirements (Country-by-Country reporting) Regulations 2013 require the Company to publish additional information in respect of the year ended 31 December 2025. This information is included in the Barclays Country Snapshot available on the Barclays website: home.barclays/annualreport ## Support for candidates and colleagues with disabilities and long-term conditions Barclays' commitment to inclusion includes ensuring that candidates with disabilities and long-term health conditions receive support and adjustments in the application process and beyond. Barclays welcomes applications from all candidates and is committed to ensuring reasonable adjustments (accommodations) are put in place to ensure a fair and inclusive candidate experience. Barclays is committed to providing all colleagues with the support and tools they need to have a productive and fulfilling career. We can consider making adjustments to remove or reduce barriers colleagues might face if they have a disability, health concern or mental health condition. We also ensure opportunities for training, career development and promotion are available to all. ## Research and development In the ordinary course of business, the Group develops new products and services in each of its business divisions. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Other statutory and regulatory information (continued) ## Greenhouse gas emissions, energy consumption and energy efficiency action We are working towards achieving net zero operations as part of our ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050. This includes setting and meeting various milestones¹ and targets¹ to reduce our operational emissions, with significant progress already made. We pursue this recognising that our progress is likely to be non-linear amid the significant uncertainties around the transition to a low-carbon economy. This is because projects will take time to be fully realised and because we depend on external factors, including changes in legislation, regulation and governmental policy, as well as the decarbonisation efforts of our Third-Party Service Providers (TPSPs)² and the energy grids in the markets where we operate. We aim to continue evaluating and evolving our approach, taking into consideration internal management decisions and external factors, including the latest scientific developments and market standards. ## Progress to date Barclays has achieved all its 2025 net zero operations milestones and targets, including continuing to source 100% renewable electricity for our global real estate portfolio³ and reducing our Scope 1 and 2 market-based emissions by 97% against a 2018 baseline - exceeding our 90% reduction target. We maintained 100% renewable electricity sourcing for our global real estate portfolio through instruments, including green tariffs⁴ (2%), energy attribute certificates⁵ (EACs) (49%), and EACs from a power purchase agreement (PPA) (49%). We are also making progress towards our 2030 Scope 1 and 2 location-based emissions reduction milestone, having by the end of 2025, reduced these emissions by 62% against a 2018 baseline. This progress was driven by: - A reduction in our operational energy demand from the consolidation of our global real estate portfolio. - Improvements in energy efficiency of our global real estate portfolio. - The targeted electrification of our global real estate portfolio and our vehicle fleet. - The decarbonisation of external grids in the markets where we operate. We have disclosed global GHG emissions and energy use data as required by the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008. For further information about Barclays net zero operations milestones and targets progress and approach see page 58. ## Notes: 1. In this section, a reference to a 'milestone' denotes an indicator we are working towards and report against and a reference to a 'target' denotes an indicator linked to our executive remuneration. 2. TPSP means any entity that has entered into an arrangement with Barclays in order to provide business functions, activities, goods and/or services to Barclays. 3. In this section a reference to global real estate portfolio includes offices, campuses, branches, warehouses and data centres within our operational control. 4. Green tariffs (retail procurement) are standardised renewable electricity products in regulated electricity markets offered by utilities, allowing large commercial and industrial customers to buy bundled renewable electricity through a special utility tariff rate. Project-specificity is not a requirement for retail procurement. 5. EACs are standardised, tradable instruments, that prove that generally 1 MWh of renewable electricity has been generated from a renewable source and added to a grid. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Other statutory and regulatory information (continued) GHG Emissions Table and Notes | | Current Reporting Year120252 | | Previous Reporting Year12024 | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | UK & Offshore Area | Global | UK & Offshore Area | Global | | Operational GHG Emissions3 (tCO2e) | | | | | | Total4 Scope 1, Scope 2 location-based, Scope 3 operational GHG emissions (000' tonnes) | 118.2 | 266.2 | 124.9 | 271.7 | | Scope 1 CO2e emissions (000' tonnes)5 | 3.6 | 5.2 | 3.6 | 8.9 | | Scope 26 location-based CO2e emissions (000' tonnes) | 26.8 | 74.9 | 32.0 | 84.8 | | Scope 3 CO2e emissions (000' tonnes)7 | 87.8 | 186.1 | 89.3 | 177.9 | | Category 3 fuel and energy-related activities CO2e emissions (000' tonnes) | 10.5 | 19.3 | 11.0 | 11.3 | | Category 5 waste generated in operations CO2e emissions (000' tonnes) | 0.05 | 0.35 | 0.09 | 0.21 | | Category 6 business travel CO2e emissions (000' tonnes) | 15.7 | 38.1 | 18.6 | 45.3 | | Category 7 employee commuting CO2e emissions (000' tonnes) | 42.7 | 99.8 | 41.7 | 92.8 | | Category 8 upstream leased assets CO2e emissions (000' tonnes) | 18.9 | 27.8 | 18.1 | 27.5 | | Category 13 downstream leased assets CO2e emissions (000' tonnes) | 0 | 0.66 | 0 | 0.77 | | Energy consumption used to calculate Scope 1 and Scope 2 operational GHG emissions (MWh)8 | 161,493 | 324,185 | 172,213 | 337,388 | | Intensity Ratio | | | | | | Total 12-Month Average Full-Time Employees (FTE) | 45,052 | 92,769 | 43,421 | 91,500 | | Total CO2e per FTE (000' tonnes)6 | 2.62 | 2.87 | 2.88 | 2.97 | | Market-based emissions10 | | | | | | Scope 2 market-based CO2e emissions (000' tonnes)6 | 0.05 | 2.1 | 0 | 1.8 | | Total Scope 14 and 2 market-based CO2e emissions (000' tonnes) | 3.6 | 7.3 | 3.6 | 10.7 | # Notes: 1 The operational emissions reporting year is 1 October to 30 September. The operational emissions reporting year is not fully aligned to the financial reporting year covered by this Directors' report. In this table operational GHG emissions have been presented as thousands of tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalents. 2 We have incorporated emissions from Tesco Bank operations following Barclays' acquisition of Tesco Bank on 1 November 2024 and excluded emissions from Hamburg operations following Barclays' sale of its consumer finance business in Germany on 3 February 2025. Please see the Sustainability Reporting Framework for details on our operational emissions accounting approach. 3 The methodology used to calculate our GHG operational emissions follows the 'Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG): A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard (Revised Edition)', defined by the World Resources Institute/World Business Council for Sustainable Development. We have adopted the operational control approach to define our organisational boundary for our Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions. We continuously review and update our performance data based on updated GHG emission factors, improvements in data quality and updates to estimates previously applied. For 2025, we have applied the latest emission factors as of 31 December 2025. 4 In this section, our total accounted operational GHG emissions include Scope 1, Scope 2 (location-based) and Scope 3 Category 3, 5-8 and 13. All figures are gross and do not include netted figures from carbon credits. Scope 3 Category 3 and 7 currently are not part of our net zero operations approach. 5 Scope 1 emissions include our direct GHG emissions from natural gas, diesel and other fuels, corporate vehicles and HFC refrigerants. In the case of corporate vehicles, emissions are limited to UK vehicles only as this is the only country where expense data is available. 6 Scope 2 GHG emissions include our indirect GHG emissions from purchased electricity, purchased heat, cooling and steam. In 2025, we gained enhanced visibility into our district heating and cooling, and electricity consumption from our corporate electric vehicle charging. As a result, this data update has been incorporated into our 2025 Scope 2 market-based and location-based emissions. 7 GHG emissions from Scope 3 Category 1, 2 and 4 are excluded as these emissions cannot be broken down by country. 8 Energy consumption data is captured through utility billing; meter reads or estimates. Principal measures we have undertaken in 2025 to improve energy efficiency include the following: - Right-sized our global real estate portfolio, therefore optimising our space and associated resources for our operational needs. - Continued implementing our energy optimisation programme across selected locations in our global real estate portfolio. The programme aims to reduce energy demand of existing infrastructure during periods of low or no occupancy and to increase energy efficiency during normal operating hours. The measures build on those taken during 2024 to implement our net zero operations strategy. Further information about our energy efficiency measures is available on page 60 of the Barclays PLC 2025 Annual Report. 9 Intensity ratio calculations have been calculated using total accounted operational GHG emissions as reported in footnote 4. 10 For Scope 2 market-based emissions we have used a zero emission factor where we have green tariffs or energy attribute certificates in place globally. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Other statutory and regulatory information (continued) ## Share capital ### Share capital structure The Company has ordinary shares in issue. The Articles also allow for the issuance of sterling, US dollar, euro and yen preference shares (preference shares). No preference shares have been issued as at 6 February 2026 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report). Ordinary shares therefore represent 100% of the total issued share capital as at 31 December 2025 and as at 6 February 2026 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report). Details of the movement in ordinary share capital during the year can be found in Note 27 to the financial statements. The rights and obligations attaching to the Company's ordinary shares and preference shares are set out in the Articles, a copy of which is available on the Company's website at home.barclays/corporate governance. ### Voting Every member who is present in person or represented at any general meeting of the Company, and who is entitled to vote, has one vote on a show of hands. Every proxy present has one vote on a show of hands. The proxy will have one vote for, and one vote against, a resolution if they have been instructed to vote for, or against, the resolution by different members or in one direction by a member while another member has permitted the proxy discretion as to how to vote. On a poll, every member, who is present in person or by proxy and who is entitled to vote, has one vote for every share held. In the case of joint holders, only the vote of the senior holder (as determined by the order in the share register) or their proxy may be counted. If any sum payable remains unpaid in relation to a member's shareholding, that member is not entitled to vote that share or exercise any other right in relation to a meeting of the Company unless the Board otherwise determines. If any member, or any other person appearing to be interested in any of the Company's ordinary shares, is served with a notice under Section 793 of the Act and does not supply the Company with the information required in the notice, then the Board, in its absolute discretion, may direct that that member shall not be entitled to attend or vote at any meeting of the Company. The Board may further direct that, if the shares of the defaulting member represent 0.25% or more of the issued shares of the relevant class, dividends or other monies payable on those shares shall be retained by the Company until the direction ceases to have effect and no transfer of those shares shall be registered (other than certain specified 'excepted transfers'). A direction ceases to have effect seven days after the Company has received the information requested, or when the Company is notified that an excepted transfer of all of the relevant shares to a third party has occurred, or as the Board otherwise determines. ### Transfers Ordinary shares may be held in either certificated or uncertificated form. Certificated ordinary shares may be transferred in writing in any usual or other form approved by the Group Company Secretary and executed by or on behalf of the transferor. Transfers of uncertificated ordinary shares must be made in accordance with the Act and the CREST Regulations. The Board is not bound to register a transfer of partly paid ordinary shares or fully paid shares in exceptional circumstances approved by the FCA. The Board may also decline to register an instrument of transfer of certificated ordinary shares unless (i) it is duly stamped, deposited at the prescribed place and accompanied by the share certificate(s) and such other evidence as reasonably required by the Board to evidence right to transfer, (ii) it is in respect of one class of shares only, and (iii) it is in favour of a single transferee or not more than four joint transferees (except in the case of executors or trustees of a member). The Company is not aware of any agreements between holders of securities that may result in restrictions on the transfer of securities or voting rights. ### Variation of rights The rights attached to any class of shares may be varied either with the consent in writing of the holders of at least 75% in nominal value of the issued shares of that class, or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class. The rights of shares shall not (unless expressly provided by the rights attached to such shares) be deemed varied by the creation of further shares ranking equally with them or subsequent to them. ## Limitations on foreign shareholders There are no restrictions imposed by the Articles or (subject to the effect of any economic sanctions that may be in force from time to time) by current UK laws which relate only to non-residents of the UK and which limit the rights of such non-residents to hold or (when entitled to do so) vote the ordinary shares. ## Exercisability of rights under an employee share scheme EBTs operate in connection with certain of the Group's Employee Share Plans (Plans). The trustees of the EBTs may exercise all rights attached to the shares in accordance with their fiduciary duties, other than as specifically restricted in the documents governing the Plans. The trustees of the EBTs have informed the Company that their normal policy is to abstain from voting in respect of the Barclays shares held in trust. The trustees of the Global Sharepurchase EBT and UK Sharepurchase EBT may vote in respect of Barclays shares held in the EBTs, but only as instructed by participants in those Plans in respect of their partnership shares and (when vested) matching and dividend shares. The trustees will not otherwise vote in respect of shares held in the Sharepurchase EBTs. ## Special rights There are no persons holding securities that carry special rights with regard to the control of the Company. ## Major shareholders Major shareholders do not have different voting rights from those of other shareholders. Information provided to the Company by substantial shareholders (holding voting rights of 3% or more in the financial instruments of the Company) pursuant to the DTRs are published via a Regulatory Information Service and is available on the Company's website. As at 31 December 2025, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the DTRs of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Other statutory and regulatory information (continued) | Person interested | Number of Barclays Shares | % of total voting rights attaching to issued share capital¹ | Nature of holding (direct or indirect) | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | BlackRock, Inc.² | 944,022,209 | 5.78 | indirect | ## Notes: 1. The percentage of voting rights detailed above was calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTRs. 2. Total shown includes 6,687,206 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. Part of the holding is held as American Depositary Receipts. Between 31 December 2025 and 6 February 2026 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report), the Company has not received any additional notifications pursuant to Rule 5 of the DTRs. ## Powers of Directors to issue and allot or buy back the Company's shares The powers of the Directors are determined by the Act and the Articles. The Directors are authorised to issue and allot shares and to buy back shares subject to, and on the terms of, the annual shareholder approval at the AGM. Such authorities were granted by shareholders at the 2025 AGM. It will be proposed at the 2026 AGM that the Directors be granted new authorities to issue and allot and buy back shares. ## Repurchase of shares During 2025, the Company completed two ordinary share buy-back programmes and commenced a further buyback programme on 27 November 2025 which completed on 30 January 2026. As at 31 December 2025 the programmes had repurchased in aggregate 635,700,571 ordinary shares for an aggregate consideration of £2,220m. All the repurchased shares, representing approximately 4.6% of the issued share capital of the Company have been cancelled. The purpose of the buy-back programmes was to reduce the Company's number of ordinary shares. As at 6 February 2026, the remaining ordinary shares which could be repurchased under the authority for on-market share buy-backs granted at the 2025 AGM is 1,067,372,569. The table below sets out the details of shares repurchased and settled as at 31 December 2025¹: ## Distributable reserves As at 31 December 2025, the distributable reserves of the Company were £20,234m (2024: £20,866m). ## Change of control There are no significant agreements to which the Company is a party that take effect, alter or terminate on a change of control of the Company following a takeover bid. There are no agreements between the Company and its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or employment that occurs because of a takeover bid. ## Controls over financial reporting A framework of disclosure controls and procedures is in place to support the approval of the financial statements of the Group. Specific governance committees are responsible for examining the financial reports and disclosures to help ensure that they have been subject to adequate verification and comply with applicable standards and legislation. Where appropriate, these committees report their conclusions to the Board Audit Committee, which debates such conclusions and provides further challenge. Finally, the Board scrutinises and approves results announcements and the Annual Report to ensure that appropriate disclosures have been made. This governance process is designed to ensure that both management and the Board are given sufficient opportunity to debate and challenge the financial statements of the Group and other significant disclosures before they are made public. | Commencement | Completion | Buyback amount | Ordinary shares repurchased | Average price per share | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 14/2/2025 | 24/7/2025 | £1bn | 324,428,384.00 | £3.0823 | | 30/7/2025 | 26/11/2025 | £1bn | 262,093,958.00 | £3.8154 | | | Up to | | | | | 27/11/2025 | 31/12/2025 | £220m | 49,178,229.00 | £4.4654 | ## Note: 1. Between 1 January 2026 and 30 January 2026 a further 58,141,636 shares were repurchased for an aggregate consideration of £280m. ## Management's report on internal control over financial reporting Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting under the supervision of the principal executive and financial officers, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements, in accordance with (a) UK-adopted international accounting standards; and (b) International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), including interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee. Internal control over financial reporting includes policies and procedures that pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail: - accurately and fairly reflect transactions and dispositions of assets - provide reasonable assurances that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards and IFRS and that receipts and expenditures are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and the respective Directors - provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements. Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that internal control over financial reporting may become inadequate because of changes in conditions or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate. Management has assessed internal control over financial reporting as at 31 December 2025. In making its assessment, management utilised the criteria set out in the 2013 COSO framework. Management has concluded that, based on its assessment, internal control over financial reporting was effective as at 31 December 2025. The system of internal financial and operational controls is also subject to regulatory oversight in the UK and overseas. Further information on supervision by financial services regulators is provided under Supervision and Regulation in the Risk review section on pages 299 to 312. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Directors' report: Other statutory and regulatory information (continued) ## Changes in internal control over financial reporting There have been no changes that occurred during the period covered by this report, which have materially affected or are reasonably likely to materially affect the Group’s internal control over financial reporting. ## Preparation of accounts and audit report ### Disclosure of information to the auditor Each Director confirms that, so far as he/she is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which our auditor is unaware and that each of the Directors has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that our auditor is aware of that information. This confirmation is given pursuant to Section 418 of the Act and should be interpreted in accordance with, and subject to, those provisions. ### Directors’ responsibilities The following statement, which should be read in conjunction with the Auditor’s report set out on pages 339 to 341 is made with a view to distinguishing for shareholders the respective responsibilities of the Directors and of the auditor in relation to the accounts. ### Going concern The Group’s business activities and factors likely to affect its future development and performance are disclosed in the Strategy and Risk review sections of this report. The financial performance is disclosed within the Financial review with funding, liquidity and capital details contained within the Risk performance section. The Group’s objectives and policies in managing the financial risks to which it is exposed are discussed in the Risk management section. The Directors considered it appropriate to prepare the financial statements on a going concern basis. In preparing each of the Group and Company financial statements, the Directors are required to: - assess the Group and Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern - use the going concern basis of accounting, unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. ## Preparation of accounts The Directors are required by the Act to prepare Group and Company accounts for each financial year and, with regard to Group accounts, in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards. The Directors have prepared these accounts in accordance with (a) UK-adopted international accounting standards; and (b) IFRS as issued by the IASB, including interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee. Pursuant to the Act, the Directors must not approve the accounts unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and the Company and of their profit or loss for that period. The Directors consider that, in preparing the financial statements, the Group and the Company have used appropriate accounting policies, supported by reasonable judgements and estimates, and that all accounting standards that they consider to be applicable have been followed. The Directors are satisfied that the Annual Report and financial statements, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable, and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group and Company’s position and performance, business model and strategy. The Directors are responsible for such internal controls as they determine are necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. ## Auditor’s report The Auditor’s report on the Financial Statements of Barclays PLC for the year ended 31 December 2025 was unmodified and its statement under Section 496 of the Act was also unmodified. By order of the Board Hannah Ellwood Group Company Secretary 9 February 2026 Registered in England. Company No. 48839 Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F Remuneration report # Rewarding sustainable performance Ensuring pay supports the delivery of our strategy, and aligns with the interests of our shareholders and other stakeholders. ## Board Remuneration Committee Brian Gilvary Chair, Board Remuneration Committee ![img-56.jpeg](img-56.jpeg) Committee membership and meeting attendance during 2025¹,² | Member | Meetings attended/ eligible to attend | | --- | --- | | Brian Gilvary | 6/6 | | Dawn Fitzpatrick | 6/6 | | Mary Francis | 6/6 | | Sir John Kingman | 6/6 | | Julia Wilson | 6/6 | | Nigel Higgins³ | 5/5 | ## Notes: 1. The Committee is composed solely of independent Non-Executive Directors. 2. There were five scheduled meetings and one ad hoc meeting of the Committee in 2025. 3. Nigel Higgins was appointed to the Committee on 31 January 2025. ## Contents | Annual statement | 116 | | --- | --- | | Executive Director remuneration outcomes at a glance | 120 | | Wider workforce remuneration | 122 | | Directors’ Remuneration Policy | 130 | | Annual report on Directors’ remuneration | 134 | ## Dear Shareholders On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Remuneration report for 2025, setting out our key considerations and the remuneration decisions we took – both for the Executive Directors of Barclays PLC and for the wider workforce. First, I would like to thank Mary Francis for her contribution over nine years on the Committee, she will be stepping down from the Committee and the Board with effect from 6 May 2026. I would also like to thank you, our shareholders, for the support you showed at our 2025 Annual General Meeting. Our current Directors’ Remuneration Policy (DRP), which applies for three years from the date of that meeting, was approved with 97% of shareholder votes in favour, and the implementation during 2024 of our previous DRP was approved with 98% of shareholder votes in favour. In my statement last year, I described how we engaged with shareholders representing c.60% of our register, as we developed our current DRP. We remain grateful for the time our shareholders invested, and the feedback they provided, which was invaluable to the Committee as we reflected upon our formulation of that policy. ## Performance As always, our remuneration approach is rooted in our commitment to reward sustainable performance, considering the views and experiences of our stakeholders. In 2025, the second year of our three-year plan to improve Barclays’ operational performance and drive structurally higher and more consistent returns, we have continued to make good progress, meeting all our 2025 targets, strengthening our controls and continuing to manage our risks prudently. Group income was £29.1bn, up 9% year on year, driven by growth in more stable income streams. We continued to invest in talent and technology, control our costs and further simplify the bank, achieving c.£700m of gross cost savings, exceeding our full year target of c.£500m. Our continued cost discipline and positive operating leverage have led to an improvement in the cost to income ratio to 61%, in line with guidance. Our RoE was 9.8% and our RoTE was 11.3%, in line with our upgraded guidance of greater than 11%, with all five divisions generating double-digit returns. This performance has enabled higher shareholder distributions, with a total payout of £3.7bn for 2025 – up 25% year on year, and on track to return at least £10bn to shareholders from 2024 to 2026 as planned. We remain well capitalised, with a CET1 ratio of 14.3%. Our CET1 ratio and the move to quarterly buybacks, announced alongside our Q3 2025 results, reflect the consistency of Barclays’ capital generation. The progress we have made is also reflected in Barclays share price, which increased by 77% over the course of 2025, trading above tangible net asset value per share by year end. Each of our businesses contributed to this performance, delivering operational improvements and driving a better customer and client experience, which is reflected in increased satisfaction scores across the Group. - In Barclays UK, we remained focused on enhancing customers' experiences and deepening relationships. Loans and advances to customers increased by 4%, with strong net mortgage growth and higher card balances. - The UK Corporate Bank delivered robust income growth of 16% year on year, underpinned by a strong deposit franchise and growing debt balances. Corporate lending was up 18% year on year as we continued to increase lending market share, by 1 percentage point to 9.6%. - Private Bank and Wealth Management strengthened its capabilities and service, supporting clients across the UK and priority international markets, and grew client assets and liabilities by 9% year on year. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) - The Investment Bank increased RoE and RoTE by 2.1 percentage points to 10.6%, by focusing on more stable income streams and on disciplined client management, capital deployment, and technology enhancements to improve client experience. - The US Consumer Bank integrated the General Motors partnership, added another three million customers organically, and grew our retail deposit balances by 20% year on year. Barclays' momentum over the last two years has raised our expectations of what Barclays can deliver, and this is reflected in the new targets to 2028 set out on page 13. As we pursue this higher ambition for Barclays, our people's commitment and dedication to delivering to a consistently excellent standard will be central to our success. In recognition of this, we are granting all our colleagues below the Managing Director level, excluding Material Risk Takers¹, a Global Share Award of 110 Barclays shares each, worth around c.£500² per participant, which will need to be retained until after we announce our full year 2027 results. This share award, following a similar award in 2025, will further reinforce the alignment of colleagues' interests with those of our shareholders and ensure our colleagues participate directly in the success of the Group. ## Colleague remuneration In setting this year's incentive pool, the Committee considered Barclays' financial and non-financial performance, and the performance of the businesses that make up the Group, in both absolute and relative terms, including our risk and control resilience and an assessment of the levels of risk that are inherent in the Group's operations. We also looked to manage the challenges of the competitive global market – to attract and retain the talent required to deliver against our strategy – especially in areas where competitive pressures have in recent years driven market pay levels higher than had been expected. Taking all of this into account, the Committee approved a Group incentive pool for 2025 performance of £2,208m (2024: £1,914m), up 15% year on year. This was in the context of a 13% increase in profit before tax, RoE of 9.8% (2024: 9.1%) and RoTE of 11.3% (2024: 10.5%). This level of incentive funding for 2025 reflects performance across the Group, and enables us to reward colleagues for the outcomes they have helped to achieve. It allows us to recognise the significant progress made so far against our three-year plan, and selectively to address the specific competitive market pressures that we face. Alongside rewarding sustainable performance, our Fair Pay Agenda underpins all our remuneration decisions – paying colleagues fairly for the work they do and appropriately recognising the contributions of all. A central element of our Fair Pay Agenda is paying at least a living wage, and we ensure that we meet or exceed externally-sourced living wage benchmarks in every jurisdiction in which our employees are based. > You can read more about our Fair Pay Agenda from page 124 ## Executive Director remuneration ### Determining the Executive Directors' pay outcomes The Committee considered the Executive Directors' annual bonus and LTIP outcomes in the context of the Group's performance and the performance of each Executive Director during 2025. The 2025 annual bonus outcome was 83% of maximum for both C.S. Venkatakrishnan (known as Venkat) and Anna Cross (2024: 81% for Venkat and 80.5% for Anna). Profit before tax provided a 48% outcome out of a possible 55%, and cost: income ratio provided an 8.5% outcome out of a possible 10%. Performance against the strategic non-financial measures resulted in a 9% outcome out of a possible 15%. The personal performance of each of the Executive Directors against their strategic objectives was also assessed and taken into account, recognising the significant progress made over 2025 (17.5% for both Venkat and Anna out of a possible 20%). The 2023-2025 LTIP (granted under the old DRP) was the first LTIP granted to Anna following her appointment as Group Finance Director in 2022, and is her first LTIP vesting. The LTIP vesting outcome for both Executive Directors was 77.3%, reflecting TSR performance above upper quartile, average RoTE towards the upper end of the target range, and good performance against the strategic non-financial measures. The value of this LTIP has increased since it was awarded, due to the significant increase in the Barclays share price over that period, which accounts for 59% of the LTIP value shown for both Venkat and Anna this year. Over the same performance period, Barclays' market capitalisation increased by 162% to £66bn, and c.£9.7bn³ was returned to shareholders through dividends and share buybacks. The Committee also satisfied itself that there was no 'windfall gain' in respect of the LTIP, as outlined on page 142. --- Group income £29.1bn 2024: £26.8bn Group profit before tax £9.1bn 2024: £8.1bn Group RoE 9.8% 2024: 9.1% Group RoTE 11.3% 2024: 10.5% Group cost: income ratio 61% 2024: 62% Group CET1 ratio 14.3% 2024: 13.6% Group compensation to income ratio 31.8% 2024: 32.7% Group incentive pool £2,208m 2024: £1,914m --- ## Notes: 1. Employees at Managing Director grade or who have been identified as Material Risk Takers are typically awarded shares as part of their deferred compensation. 2. At the 5 February 2026 mid-market closing share price. 3. Refers to the total capital distributions announced in relation to 2023, 2024 and 2025, including the share buyback announced at FY25 results. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) As we do every year, before finalising the bonus and LTIP outcomes, the Committee reflected on whether they were appropriate in the context of the underlying financial health of the Group, bonus outcomes for the wider workforce, and also compared to historical outcomes for the Executive Directors in the context of performance each year. The Committee concluded that the outcomes were appropriate and that no discretionary adjustment was needed. For both Executive Directors, the single total remuneration figures for 2025 are higher than for 2024, by 29% for Venkat and 173% for Anna. This is due to the significant share price growth over the LTIP performance period, and for Anna due to this being her first LTIP vesting. Excluding the impact of share price appreciation each year, Venkat's single figure would have been 9% higher than for 2024. Excluding the LTIP vesting, Anna's single total remuneration figure would have been 2% higher than for 2024, with a higher bonus largely offset by her fixed pay reduction following shareholder approval of the DRP at the 2025 AGM. More information on the Executive Directors' pay outcomes is provided from page 134. ## The Executive Directors' pay in 2026 As part of the DRP review over 2024 and early 2025, the Committee carefully considered the performance measures used within the Executive Directors' annual bonus and LTIP awards, taking into account shareholder feedback received through the consultation. Measures and weightings for the 2025 annual bonus and 2025-2027 LTIP were strongly aligned with our strategy and shareholder priorities. Having reviewed these measures in the context of 2026 plans and targets, and the new Group and business performance targets to 2028, the Committee considers that these measures effectively link our Executive Directors' pay outcomes to performance against our key strategic priorities, and concluded that these same measures should continue to apply for the 2026 annual bonus and the 2026-2028 LTIP awards. For the 2026-2028 LTIP cycle, the Committee decided to grant awards with a face value at grant of 550% of salary for Venkat and 500% of salary for Anna, reflecting the personal contribution made by each to strong 2025 performance – and to provide each with a significant incentive award subject to forward-looking performance conditions during 2026 to 2028. Fixed pay for the Executive Directors was amended in May 2025, reduced by almost half and renamed 'salary', following the approval of the DRP. In early 2026, the Committee reviewed the level of salary for Venkat and Anna, in the same way and at the same time as fixed pay was reviewed for the wider workforce, and decided to increase Venkat's salary by 3.2% to £1,641,000 and Anna's salary by 5.3% to £1,000,000, effective from 1 March 2026. The salary increase percentage for Anna is slightly higher to reflect her competitive pay positioning, though her maximum total compensation opportunity will remain in the lower quartile compared to our international banking peer group, as shown in the charts below. After the salary increase for Venkat, his maximum total compensation opportunity will be positioned between lower quartile and median compared to our international banking peer group. More information on the Executive Directors' salary increases for 2026 is provided on page 145. ## Shareholder alignment The proportion of the total variable pay awards to Venkat and Anna in respect of 2025 performance (2025 annual bonus plus 2026-2028 LTIP) that will be in shares is 79% and 78% respectively, to be retained for a period of between one and five years from grant. See the section on 'Changes to UK remuneration regulations for banks' for more information on how the Executive Directors' incentive awards will be delivered, following those regulatory changes. Shareholding requirements also apply to each Executive Director, further aligning their interests with those of our shareholders. Both Venkat and Anna already have significant shareholdings in excess of their respective requirements. ## Executive Director maximum total compensation opportunity relative to market benchmarks ### Group Chief Executive C.S. Venkatakrishnan ### International banking peer group | A | B | C | D | | --- | --- | --- | --- | ### Group Finance Director Anna Cross ### International banking peer group | A | B | C | D | | --- | --- | --- | --- | A Lower quartile B 3rd quartile C 2nd quartile D Upper quartile → Positioning of maximum total compensation opportunity at Barclays relative to market benchmarks ## Notes: - Barclays and market benchmark data reflect maximum total compensation opportunity, excluding pension and benefits. - Benchmark data was provided by Willis Towers Watson, based on publicly disclosed data in respect of each company's 2024 or 2024/25 financial years, incorporating assumptions where companies do not disclose a maximum total compensation opportunity. - Barclays' international banking peer group currently comprises the following international banks: Bank of America, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Deutsche Bank, Goldman Sachs, HSBC Holdings, JPMorgan Chase & Co, Lloyds Banking Group, Morgan Stanley, Standard Chartered, and UBS Group. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## Group Chair and Non-Executive Director fees Each year, the Committee reviews the fees for the Group Chair, and the Board reviews the fees for the other Non-Executive Directors, to ensure those fees reflect the roles, responsibilities and time commitments expected, and the calibre of individual needed to support and oversee the implementation of our strategy. At our most recent review of the Group Chair's fee, from which the Group Chairman recused himself, the Committee observed that the fee was materially below the fee levels at other UK-listed banks of similar size and complexity. As a result, the Committee approved a fee for the Group Chair of £1,000,000 per annum, with effect from 1 January 2026, an 8.1% increase. The Committee noted that the Group Chair's fee remains materially below the Chair's fee at relevant peers, and will review this again over the coming year. The Board also reviewed the other Non-Executive Directors' fees and approved an increase of 3.2%, effective 1 January 2026 (with the relevant Non-Executive Directors having recused themselves from those discussions). The Board intends to undertake a more detailed review of Non-Executive Directors' fees over the coming year. This review will consider the fees in absolute terms and relative to market fee rates at banking peers, with a particular focus on the fees for committee chairs and members, to ensure that these are commensurate with the associated responsibilities and the required time commitments. ## Looking ahead As we move into 2026, the Committee maintains its commitment to rewarding sustainable performance. We will use our remuneration policies and practices to incentivise the Executive Directors and the management team to achieve the Group's targets for 2026, and to deliver sustainably higher returns in the future in line with the Group's 2028 targets. As part of this, we have already been considering how the recent changes to UK remuneration regulations for banks should be implemented, as explained in the box above. ## Changes to UK remuneration regulations for banks On 15 October 2025, the PRA and FCA published updated remuneration rules for UK-regulated banks, including simpler and more competitive incentive deferral requirements for employees who are deemed to have a material risk impact on their firm – known as Material Risk Takers (MRTs). We believe the new rules will, in time, enhance the domestic and international competitiveness of the UK banking sector. Following the publication of these regulations, the Committee has worked with management to consider how best to implement these changes to support the sustainable success of Barclays. In determining how these changes should influence our approach to pay, the focus is on balancing critical factors in line with our remuneration philosophy – continuing to provide a competitive pay proposition to attract and retain the talent required to deliver against our strategy; rewarding sustainable performance; and ensuring pay remains aligned with risk appetite, risk exposure, conduct expectations and stakeholder interests. For the Executive Directors, key elements of their pay structure were reviewed and amended as part of the DRP approved at the 2025 AGM. That DRP remains unchanged, but the updated regulations have enabled us to align the delivery of their incentives more closely to typical pay structures for executive directors of other UK-listed companies, as follows: - For the annual bonus, the Committee determined that the starting delivery structure would be 50% deferred into shares vesting over three years and the remainder paid in cash shortly after the end of the performance period. If an Executive Director has exceeded their shareholding requirement, the Committee each year may elect to reduce that deferral to 25%. For the 2025 annual bonus, the Committee considered the Executive Directors' existing shareholdings – in each case well in excess of their respective shareholding requirements – and decided that 25% deferral should apply this year. - For the 2026-2028 LTIP, 75% of the award will vest on the third anniversary of grant and 25% on the fourth anniversary, followed by holding periods such that the shares that vest must be retained until at least the fifth anniversary of grant (save for sales to cover taxes payable on vesting). - The updated regulations also allow for existing awards to be updated retrospectively, to bring them into line with the new deferral rules. The Committee determined that the one-year post-vesting holding periods will be removed from deferred bonus awards and most LTIP awards previously granted to the Executive Directors, to simplify those arrangements, given that the Executive Directors already exceed their shareholding requirements. Holding periods will not be removed for any LTIP tranche where to do so would result in it being released before the fifth anniversary of grant. No other changes are being made to the Executive Directors' in-flight awards. We will continue to engage with our shareholders and other stakeholders on pay, and will be available to meet with our shareholders to discuss pay outcomes for 2025 and implementation of our DRP in 2026, and how this supports our strategic priorities. Beyond this, we will maintain focus on our Fair Pay Agenda, continuing to support our colleagues and ensuring the way we pay our people supports the long-term health and success of the Group. Brian Gilvary Chair, Board Remuneration Committee February 2026 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 120 # Remuneration report (continued) ## At a glance – Executive Director remuneration for 2025 ![img-57.jpeg](img-57.jpeg) ## Total remuneration outcomes (£000) See single total figure for 2025 remuneration on page 134. ![img-58.jpeg](img-58.jpeg) C.S. Venkatakrishnan (Group Chief Executive) 2025 single total remuneration figure ## Anna Cross (Group Finance Director) ![img-59.jpeg](img-59.jpeg) ## Value from share price appreciation 1. The 2025 maximum opportunity figures include the actual 2025 value of earned fixed pay and pension and benefits (reflecting the reduction in fixed pay from 7 May 2025), the maximum 2025 annual bonus opportunity, and the maximum 2023-2025 LTIP award value at grant, based on the maximum number of shares that could have vested and the market share price on the date of grant. 2. 2025 and 2024 actual show the figures from the 'single total figures for 2025 remuneration' table, including fixed pay, pension and benefits received during each year, the annual bonus awarded in respect of performance each year, and the LTIP cycle with its performance period ending that year (2025: 2023-2025 LTIP; 2024: 2022-2024 LTIP). The LTIP value for Anna Cross's 2024 actual total remuneration is nil as she did not participate in the 2022-2024 LTIP cycle. ## Annual bonus outcome | Measures | Weighting | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | Anna Cross | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Financial^{3} | 65% | 56.5% | 56.5% | | • Profit before tax | 55% | 48.0% | 48.0% | | • Cost: income ratio | 10% | 8.5% | 8.5% | | Strategic non-financial | 15% | 9.0% | 9.0% | | Strategic objectives | 20% | 17.5% | 17.5% | | Total | 100% | 83.0% | 83.0% | | Final outcome approved by the Committee | | 83.0% | 83.0% | ## LTIP outcome | Measures | Weighting | C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross | | --- | --- | --- | | Financial^{3} | 70% | 57.0% | | • Average RoTE | 25% | 18.9% | | • Average CIR | 10% | 3.1% | | • Maintain CET1 ratio | 10% | 10.0% | | • Relative TSR | 25% | 25.0% | | Strategic non-financial | 20% | 13.5% | | Risk scorecard | 10% | 6.8% | | Total | 100% | 77.3% | | Final outcome approved by the Committee | | 77.3% | 3. The financial measures are defined as excluding material items. ## Proportion delivered in shares | | C. S. Venkatakrishnan | Anna Cross | | C. S. Venkatakrishnan | Anna Cross | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | of 2025 variable pay | 79% | 78% | of 2025 total remuneration | 70% | 69% | 4. 2025 variable pay comprises the actual 2025 annual bonus and the grant-date face value of the 2026-2028 LTIP award that will be granted in respect of 2025 performance. 2025 total remuneration consists of 2025 variable pay, 2025 Fixed Pay/salary and pension and benefits. ## Share ownership (£000) Shareholding shown as at 31 December 2025, using the Q4 2025 average share price of £4.1493. ## C.S. Venkatakrishnan ![img-60.jpeg](img-60.jpeg) A Actual shareholdings, including unvested shares not subject to performance conditions (estimated after-tax value). B Unvested shares subject to performance conditions (estimated after-tax value), which do not count towards the shareholding requirement. C Shareholding requirement under the current DRP, based on salaries as at 31 December 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## At a glance – Executive Director remuneration for 2026 Policy implementation for 2026 | Performance year | Year 1 | Year 2 | Year 3 | Year 4 | Year 5 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Salary | | | | | | | Paid in cash | | | | | • CEO: 3.2% increase to £1,641,000 effective 1 March 2026. Paid in cash. • GFD: 5.3% increase to £1,000,000 effective 1 March 2026. Paid in cash. | | Pension and benefits | | | | | | | Benefits and cash in lieu of pension | | | | | • CEO: Pension: £164,100 effective 1 March 2026, equal to 10% of salary. Benefits: entitlement as per the policy. • GFD: Pension: £100,000 effective 1 March 2026, equal to 10% of salary. Benefits: entitlement as per the policy. | | Annual bonus | | | | | | | Performance period | Cash^{5} | | | | • Up to 250% of salary, based on forward-looking performance measures set near the start of the year. | | | Deferral in shares^{6} | | | | | | LTIP | | | | | | | Preliminary performance period | Three-year performance period | | | Deferral in shares and holding period^{6} | • Up to 550% of salary for the CEO and 500% of salary for the GFD, based on forward-looking performance measures set shortly before the time of grant. | | Shareholding requirement | | | | | | | Shareholding requirement continues to apply | | | | | • Shareholding requirement: 550% of salary for the CEO and 500% of salary for the GFD. Shareholding requirements extend for two years after stepping down as an Executive Director. | 5 The starting position is that 50% of annual bonus will be deferred in shares over three years, but the Committee will review this each year and, if the Executive Directors have met their shareholding requirements, may reduce this deferral to 25%. The remaining amount will be delivered in cash. 6 LTIP awards will vest in two tranches: 75% will vest after year 3, subject to a two-year holding period, and 25% will vest after year 4, subject to a one-year holding period. The combined vesting and holding period for the entire LTIP award is five years. ## Alignment of performance measures and strategy | Performance measures | Weighting in 2026 annual bonus | Weighting in 2026-2028 LTIP | Alignment to strategy | Direct alignment to stakeholder groups | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Financial | | | | | | Profit before tax (with a CET1 ratio underpin) | 55% | | A measure of annual financial performance and a key factor that drives RoTE | 1 | | Cost: income ratio | 10% | | A measure of the efficiency of our business operations | 1 | | Return on tangible equity (RoTE) | | 50% | A measure of the returns we generate for shareholders | 1 | | Relative total shareholder return | | 45% | A measure of share performance (comprising share price appreciation and dividends paid), measuring Barclays' performance relative to a peer group of other international banks | 1 | | Strategic objectives | 20% | | Individual objectives for each Executive Director, aligned to our strategic priorities | C | | Strategic non-financial | 15% | | Includes the Group's non-financial key performance indicators, including Customers, clients & colleagues as key stakeholder groups, and Risk & operational excellence, which is fundamental to operating at a consistently excellent standard to deliver sustainable performance | C | | Sustainability, customers and clients | | 25% | Includes longer-term objectives relating to climate and sustainability, as a strategic priority, and customers and clients as a key stakeholder group | C | # Customers and clients # Colleagues # Society # Investors --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 122 # Remuneration report (continued) # Wider workforce remuneration ## Our remuneration philosophy Our remuneration philosophy applies to all employees, including the Executive Directors, and sets out the way we approach remuneration. It aims for remuneration to be as simple and clear as possible, while ensuring strong alignment with risk and conduct as well as our Values and Mindset. Our philosophy guided the 2025 remuneration decisions set out in this report. ## Philosophy | Attract and retain talent needed to deliver Barclays' strategy | Long-term success depends on the talent of our employees. This means attracting and retaining an appropriate range of talent to deliver against our strategy, and paying the right amount for that talent. | | --- | --- | | Align pay with investor and other stakeholder interests | Remuneration should be designed with appropriate consideration of the views, rights and interests of stakeholders. This means listening to our shareholders, other investors, regulators, government, customers and employees and ensuring their views are appropriately represented in remuneration decision-making. | | Reward sustainable performance | Sustainable performance means making a positive and enduring difference to investors, customers and communities, delivering good customer outcomes, taking pride in leaving things better than we found them and playing a valuable role in society. | | Support Barclays' Values and culture | Results must be achieved in a manner consistent with our Values. Our Values, culture and Mindset should drive the way that business is conducted. | | Align pay with risk appetite, risk exposure and conduct expectations | Remuneration should be designed to reward employees for achieving results in line with the Group's risk appetite and conduct expectations. | | Be fair, transparent and as simple as possible | We are committed to ensuring pay is fair, simple and transparent for all our stakeholders. All employees and stakeholders should understand how we reward our employees, and fairness should be a lens through which we make remuneration decisions. | ## Role of the Remuneration Committee in wider workforce remuneration The Committee considers the overarching objectives, principles and parameters of remuneration policy across the Group, ensuring a coherent approach in respect of all employees. In discharging this responsibility, the Committee seeks to ensure the policy is fair, transparent and avoids complexity. It assesses, among other things, the impact of pay arrangements on the Group's culture, Values and strategy, and on all elements of risk management. The Committee performs the following activities in relation to wider workforce remuneration: - Reviews alignment of remuneration with the remuneration philosophy, Fair Pay Agenda, Barclays' Purpose, Values, Mindset, conduct expectations and long-term success; - Reviews alignment of wider workforce and Executive Director remuneration policies; - Approves the incentive pool and reviews wider workforce pay outcomes; - Reviews budgets for fixed pay increases. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## How stakeholder views are considered in remuneration decisions We seek to consider the views of all our stakeholders in remuneration decision-making, including views of customers and clients, colleagues, investors, regulators, and how we impact society more broadly. ## Customers and clients The Remuneration Committee factors in performance against customer- and client-related measures when determining the incentive outcomes for the Barclays PLC Executive Directors, and when determining the Group incentive pool. For the Executive Directors' 2026 annual bonus, those measures are included within a broader category of measures relating to Customers, clients & colleagues, weighted 10%. The assessment will focus on how Barclays is driving world-class outcomes for customers and clients and is likely to include the following measures: - Improve customer and client satisfaction - Reduce customer complaints - Maintain rankings and market share in Barclays Investment Bank - Increase digital engagement. For the 2026-2028 LTIP, customer- and client-related measures are included as part of the broader category of measures relating to Sustainability, customers & clients, weighted 25%. ## Society The Remuneration Committee factors in performance against sustainability-related measures when determining the incentive outcomes for the Barclays PLC Executive Directors, and when determining the Group incentive pool. For the 2026-2028 LTIP, sustainability-related measures are included as part of the broader category of measures relating to Sustainability, customers & clients, weighted 25%. The sustainability-related measures are likely to include financing clients' transition, reducing our financed emissions, achieving net zero operations, and supporting our communities. As part of our commitment to fair pay, Barclays has been an accredited Living Wage Employer since 2013. This means that all our employees and relevant third-party contractors in the UK are paid at least a 'real Living Wage', as set by the Living Wage Foundation. Employees outside the UK are also paid at least a living wage, in line with benchmarks provided by the Fair Wage Network. For further details, please see the 'Living wage review' section on the next page. ## Colleagues We engage with colleagues to understand their views through our regular all-colleague Your View surveys, union and works council engagements, and 'townhall' meetings. We also engage with colleagues through our Employee Resource Groups, webcasts, and workshops. Our ongoing engagement with Unite the union in the UK covers a range of topics, such as fair pay and how we support colleagues through workforce change programmes, and this enables the views of colleagues to be shared with senior leaders to inform decision-making. For further details on our 2026 pay offer, please see the 'Salary increase budgets for 2026' section on the next page. We publish information on our HR Hub intranet site to explain to colleagues how the Group's performance and pay approach aligns to the Fair Pay Agenda, and to help them understand the employee benefits Barclays provides, so they can make the most of what is on offer. To communicate pay in a clear way, each colleague receives a Compensation Profile detailing their fixed pay and incentives for the previous year and their fixed pay for the following year. ## Investors We recognise that remuneration is an area of particular interest to shareholders. We listen to their views and take these into account when setting remuneration outcomes or considering changes to remuneration policies. Accordingly, the Group Chairman or Remuneration Committee Chair holds meetings each year with major shareholders and representative groups to understand their views, accompanied by senior Barclays employees. This kind of engagement helps inform the Committee's work and contributes directly to the decisions it makes in relation to Executive Directors' remuneration. In developing our current Directors' Remuneration Policy (DRP), which was approved by shareholders at the 2025 AGM, we engaged extensively with shareholders and had meetings with shareholder representative bodies and proxy agencies. The feedback provided was invaluable, and the DRP reflects their input, striking a balance across the relevant factors. ## Regulators We regularly review and update our remuneration policies in response to changes in regulation. Each year, our remuneration policies and processes are independently reviewed by the Barclays Internal Audit or Chief Controls Office functions to provide assurance that we are compliant with regulatory requirements. In 2025, we maintained active engagement with our regulators to explain our approach to performance and pay, and to understand their perspectives. Regulator feedback was considered in our remuneration decisions for 2025. We also responded to the PRA/FCA's consultation on the recent changes to UK bank pay regulations. We continue to ensure we have ongoing regulatory dialogue on relevant topics relating to remuneration. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 124 # Remuneration report (continued) ## Spotlight on ## Fair pay at Barclays Our Fair Pay Agenda is central to our remuneration approach and is a key consideration for all of our pay decisions. Since we first published our Fair Pay Agenda in 2018, we have continued to make improvements to how we pay and support our colleagues. ## Our fair pay principles ### Title **Fair pay for the lowest paid** Paying fairly for work done, in a simple and transparent way. ### Equal opportunities to progress Providing equal employment opportunities to all, so everyone can enjoy a successful career at Barclays. ### Engaging with colleagues Engaging with colleagues to understand their views on the culture of the organisation and enabling the representation of employees in our remuneration decision-making process. ### Alignment of employee and Executive Director pay Linking both Executive Director and employee pay to sustainable business performance. ### Equal pay commitment Rewarding employees fairly for their contribution and making sure pay and performance decisions never take into account any protected characteristics. ## Fair pay for the lowest paid Fair pay means paying the right salary, awarding the right incentives, providing the right benefits, and delivering the right level of support in the workplace. ### Living wage review - Paying at least a living wage to all our colleagues in all our locations is at the heart of our Fair Pay Agenda. We continue to meet or exceed living wage benchmarks in all our locations, as set by the Living Wage Foundation in the UK and the Fair Wage Network across other locations¹. - Minimum hourly pay rates for India and US will increase to INR163 and $23.50 respectively from 1 March 2026, exceeding applicable living wage benchmarks. For the UK, minimum hourly pay rates remain subject to agreement of the 2026 pay deal with Unite the union but will in any case exceed the Living Wage Foundation rates. ### Salary increase budgets for 2026 - We targeted our salary increase budgets so there are higher increases for the most junior colleagues. - In the UK, for over 36,000 employees covered by Unite the union, we offered a salary increase budget of c.4.0% for junior employees, and c.3.2% overall (subject to agreement of the 2026 pay deal with Unite). ### Benefits Colleagues are eligible to receive a range of benefits relevant to their location. Developments for this year include: ### Barclays Premier Account offering in the UK - In July 2025, all UK colleagues were given access to Barclays Premier Banking, which offers a suite of exclusive products, services, and benefits. ### Enhancements to benefits in India - During 2025, we increased critical illness cover by 50% and introduced a minimum life insurance payout above prior levels for our lowest-paid employees, providing greater financial security for them and their families. ### Parental leave - From 1 January 2026, we increased our UK paternity leave from two weeks to 16 weeks, and our Asia Pacific non-primary caregiver leave from six weeks to 10 weeks, supporting colleagues balancing work and personal life. For further details, please see page 27. ### Wellbeing - We remain committed to supporting our colleagues' wellbeing and equipping people leaders with practical guidance informed by our Your View colleague surveys to embed wellbeing into everyday working life. - Our Be Well service has seen record engagement, with over 53,000 (55%) colleagues registered on the wellbeing portal and over 1,450 volunteer champions. - To support financial wellbeing, we provide learning to all colleagues globally. In the UK, we offer a ‘Money Mentors for Me’ service, providing guidance on budgeting, goal setting and money confidence, and we run a ‘Talk Money Week’ to help normalise conversations about financial wellbeing and signpost support. ### Pay transparency - Since 2024, Barclays HR systems have provided managers with improved access to pay data for their teams and salary ranges by job (where available), supporting pay decisions. ### Note: 1. Living wage rates for employees in Jersey are sourced from Caritas Jersey, a charity affiliated with the Living Wage Foundation. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 125 # Remuneration report (continued) ## Spotlight on ## Fair pay at Barclays (continued) ## Equal opportunities to progress Barclays is an equal opportunities employer. This means we want to recruit, recognise, reward, and retain talented individuals from all backgrounds. ### Performance management and recognition - Our continuous performance management approach encourages ongoing feedback and personal development. - At the end of each year, colleague performance is assessed on 'what' they have delivered and 'how' they have achieved it, as well as leadership behaviours (for all people leaders). To support leaders with making informed decisions, all colleagues receive globally cascaded objectives aligned with our consistently excellent standard, and our HR system captures feedback, development, goals, and recognition moments in one place to support decision-making. - In 2025, we upgraded the 'Recognition at Barclays' platform to improve user experience. Approximately 1.5 million thank yous were received during 2025 and a colleague was recognised every 22 seconds on average. ### Inclusion and Opportunity - We are evolving our approach to Inclusion and Opportunity, with a focus on empowering our colleagues and leaders, engaging our communities and driving company success. We remain committed to creating a workplace where everyone feels valued and respected, within a culture of belonging and equal opportunity for all. ### Talent programmes and skills development - We are committed to unlocking potential, so colleagues have a clear path to succeed in their careers. To support this, we progressed our global Talent Excellence Programme to enhance how we identify potential and provide high-quality development opportunities. - We continue to invest in building the skills needed now, and in the future, supporting colleague development and enabling career progression. Our HR system enables colleagues to create personalised career profiles, access tailored learning, and identify open jobs that match their skills, supporting career development conversations. ### Pay gaps - We disclose pay gaps in line with location-specific requirements, including for the UK, Ireland, France and Japan. For more detail on our pay gaps reports, please refer to the Other section of our Annual Reports webpage: home.barclays/annual-reports ## Engaging with colleagues We engage with colleagues to understand their views on the culture of the organisation through our colleague surveys, union and works council engagement and other means. ### Unite - During 2025, Barclays maintained its constructive partnership with Unite, our recognised UK trade union representing 80% of our UK workforce (which equates to 39% globally)¹. ### Colleague surveys - These surveys give colleagues the opportunity to share their views on Barclays as a place to work, while also providing insights to help us improve the colleague experience. ### Communicating performance and pay - Each year, people leaders receive guidance on how to communicate performance and pay decisions. Colleagues are also able to access key materials via the HR Hub intranet pages. For further details on how we engage with colleagues, please see page 123. ### Note: 1. Barclays UK acquired Kensington Mortgage Company (KMC) on 1 April 2023 and Tesco Bank on 1 November 2024. KMC and Tesco Bank headcount is not included in these figures. ### 85% Colleague engagement (2024: 85%) Colleague engagement is derived from the responses to three questions in our Your View survey that measure advocacy, motivation and sense of personal accomplishment. ### 87% Wellbeing index (2024: 87%) Measures the psychological wellbeing of our colleagues. ### 81% Inclusion index (2024: 81%) Measures how included our colleagues feel. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 126 # Remuneration report (continued) # Spotlight on # Fair pay at Barclays (continued) # Alignment of employee and Executive Director pay To ensure that we reward appropriately, we review performance through financial and non-financial lenses and assess individual performance. This approach applies to executives, senior management and all other employees. | Element | Junior employees | Senior employees | How Executive Director policy aligns | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Fixed pay | Reflects the individual’s role, skills and experience and is reviewed annually. Fixed pay is increased where justified by role change, increased responsibility or a change in the market rate for the role. Salaries may also be increased in line with local statutory requirements and with union and works council commitments. | | Reflects the individual’s role, skills and experience, and is reviewed annually in the context of market pay rates and any changes in scope/responsibility. Annual increases will typically be no more than the average increase for UK employees. | | Delivery | All in salary for most, paid in cash. Some roles are also entitled to receive certain cash allowances. | All in salary for most. For a small number of senior employees (2% globally) a proportion is delivered in Role Based Pay (RBP), in cash or shares, to recognise the seniority, scale and complexity of their role. | All in salary, paid in cash. No entitlement to any allowances. | | Pension | Competitive pension offering set by location. Minimum of 12% of salary for more-junior colleagues in the UK. | Competitive pension offering set by location. Minimum of 10% of salary in the UK. | The Executive Directors receive cash in lieu of pension equal to 10% of salary. | | Benefits | Market-aligned benefits offering appropriate to the role and reflecting local market practice to support with health and wellbeing. | Market-aligned benefits offering, but typically a lower proportion of total pay than for junior employees. | Market-aligned benefits offering, but typically a lower proportion of total pay than for the wider workforce. | | Annual bonus | Annual bonuses incentivise and reward the achievement of Group, business and individual objectives, and reward employees for demonstrating individual behaviours in line with Barclays’ Values and Mindset. All eligible employees are considered. | | Assessed against predetermined measures to align with financial performance, strategic objectives and strategic non-financial key performance measures. | | Delivery | In cash following the performance year. | For many, a proportion of annual bonus is delivered in deferred cash and/or shares. Annual bonus deferral will always meet regulatory requirements. | A proportion of annual bonus is deferred in shares. Across the annual bonus and any LTIP award combined, deferral will always meet regulatory requirements. | | Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award | Not applicable to the wider workforce. | | The value received from LTIP awards depends on assessment of performance over a three-year period against Group-wide financial and non-financial measures. Delivery is in shares with release after the fifth year from grant. | # All-employee share plans Barclays operates all employee share plans in locations representing 99% of employees globally. These plans provide an opportunity for eligible employees to acquire Barclays shares on beneficial terms. # Alignment of pay decisions While the approach to pay for the Executive Directors is aligned to that for the wider workforce, the incentives approach for Executive Directors is significantly more structured, as required by institutional shareholders for directors of UK-listed companies. This can lead to greater year-on-year volatility in incentives outcomes for the Executive Directors compared to the norms for other colleagues. For 2025, the bonus pool for the wider workforce increased, as did the incentive outcomes (annual bonus and LTIP) for the Executive Directors, reflective of strong performance. # Employee share awards In recognition of our colleagues' collective effort and dedication to delivering to a consistently excellent standard, we are granting each of our colleagues' an award of 110 Barclays shares in early 2026. This share award, following a similar award in 2025, reinforces the alignment between our colleagues' and shareholders' interests. Note: 1 Except for employees at Managing Director grade and Material Risk Takers, for whom a portion of compensation is typically delivered in shares. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 127 # Remuneration report (continued) ## Spotlight on ## Fair pay at Barclays (continued) | Equal pay commitment | | | --- | --- | | We believe that colleagues should be appropriately and fairly rewarded for their contribution. Employees must be rewarded fairly with regard to their specific role, responsibilities, and other factors that properly affect pay. | Pay decisions must not take into account any protected characteristics. While legal definitions of ‘equal pay’ vary, our commitment to rewarding colleagues fairly is the same everywhere. | | There are times where differences in pay are justified, even among employees performing the same or similar roles. These may include differences in individual performance, the geography in which each role is based, or external market conditions. | | | Delivering on our commitment: | | --- | | Employees must be rewarded fairly, with regard to their specific role, seniority, responsibilities, skills, experience and other factors that properly affect pay | | Performance and pay decisions must not, directly or indirectly, take into account an individual’s gender, age, ethnicity, religion, sexual orientation, marital status, pregnancy, maternity, parental leave, veteran status, disability or any other protected characteristic | | We provide manager guidance and training to make it clear that pay and performance decisions must reflect an individual's role and contribution | | We have robust processes to review and challenge performance and pay decisions | | We work closely with Unite the union to review the fairness of performance management and pay distribution for the employees they cover in the UK | | We are actively making our approach to fair pay more transparent for employees | | Employees are encouraged to engage with their people leader if they have concerns about their pay and they can also raise an HR query. We will investigate any grievance raised by an employee, which includes any issues relating to pay | | We will continue to conduct our assurance activities to ensure that performance ratings and pay outcomes remain fair and free from bias | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 128 # Remuneration report (continued) ## Incentive pool and annual bonus outcomes for 2025 ### Determining the Group incentive pool In determining the 2025 Group incentive pool, the Committee considered: - the Group’s financial and non-financial performance during 2025 - the performance of individual businesses within the Group and their contributions to our targets and strategy - the Group’s capital position and current and future risks - the need to reward strong performers appropriately, as well as recognising colleagues who have exemplified the Barclays Values and Mindset - compensation market data and expected market trends, to maintain competitiveness where performance warrants. The Committee used its judgement to reach a balanced decision on the level of the Group incentive pool, in line with our remuneration philosophy. The 2025 incentive pool supports outcomes that reflect the performance of the Group without paying more than is necessary. It will also support the Group’s continuing ability to attract, retain and reward colleagues who will drive the delivery of the Group’s strategy and sustainable growth for shareholders in the future. On that basis, the Committee approved a Group incentive pool for 2025 performance of £2,208m (2024: £1,914m), up 15% compared to the final incentive pool for 2024. The incentive pool reflects risk and conduct adjustments of £252m. ### The Group incentive pool and Group Chief Executive bonus outcomes The incentive approach for our Executive Directors is significantly more structured than for other employees, as required by institutional shareholders for directors of UK-listed companies. This more-structured approach, with a need for direct alignment to specific financial performance metrics, leads to greater year-on-year volatility in incentive outcomes – both up and down – for the Executive Directors compared to other employees. For 2025, like every year, the Committee considered the Executive Director bonus outcomes in the context of the bonus outcomes for the wider workforce, ensuring appropriate alignment both this year and over a multi-year period. It also reviewed the historical outcomes for the Executive Directors in the context of performance each year. It concluded they were appropriate in the context of the performance achieved. ## Group incentive pool and Group Chief Executive bonus outcomes over the years ![img-61.jpeg](img-61.jpeg) A Group incentive pool (£m) B Risk and conduct adjustments (£m) Group Chief Executive bonus outcome (% of maximum) ## Annual percentage change in fixed pay of the Group Chief Executive and employees The annual percentage change in fixed pay earned in 2025, compared to 2024, is -30% for the Group Chief Executive, as his fixed pay was significantly reduced under the new DRP (and renamed as 'salary'), and +4% for the UK employee median – reflecting the salary increases awarded in early 2025. Full details and supporting narrative. See page 150 ## Group Chief Executive pay ratio: 248:1 Our Group Chief Executive median pay ratio for 2025 is up compared to 2024 (201:1). This principally reflects the increase in the value of the Group Chief Executive's LTIP due to share price growth since it was granted. Full details and supporting narrative. See page 149 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 129 # Remuneration report (continued) # Sustainability and remuneration ## Executive Directors The Committee reviews the Executive Directors' incentive measures each year to ensure they continue to support the delivery of our strategic priorities, including climate and sustainability priorities. The Executive Directors' annual bonus and LTIP awards include sustainability-related measures, aligned with the Group's evolving sustainability ambitions, metrics and targets. As most of our climate and sustainability-related measures and targets are longer term, and progress towards these targets is expected to be non-linear and is best assessed over a multi-year period, the climate measures are included in the Executive Directors' LTIP. For the 2026-2028 LTIP, the climate and sustainability measures are included as part of the broader category of measures relating to Sustainability, customers & clients, weighted at 25%. The climate and sustainability measures will likely include financing clients' transition, reducing our financed emissions and achieving net zero operations, as well as supporting our communities. Additionally, 10% of the 2026 bonus will be determined on a combination of colleague measures, including engagement, culture and inclusion, and measures relating to customers and clients, including improving customer and client satisfaction, reducing customer complaints, maintaining rankings and market share in Barclays Investment Bank, and increasing digital engagement. Risk & operational excellence measures are weighted at 5% in the 2026 bonus, as the management of risk underpins delivery against our strategy. Outcomes will be determined based on an assessment of performance against a range of measures, including risk awareness and operational excellence. ## Other employees Barclays' performance against non-financial measures, including climate and sustainability-related measures, is factored into the determination of the Group incentive pool – impacting annual bonus awards of all employees. In determining the Group incentive pool for 2025 performance, the measures used for the non-financial assessment included climate and sustainability-related measures focused on our progress towards our Sustainable and Transition Financing target, reductions in our financed emissions, reductions in our operational emissions, and investing in our communities. The incentive pool is also adjusted to take account of risks, both crystallised and potential future risks, and consideration is given to vulnerabilities across all of Barclays' principal risks, which include climate risk. Individual bonus outcomes are determined based on Group, business, and individual performance. Performance for all colleagues is assessed against individual performance objectives, which are aligned to the consistently excellent standard and include sustainability considerations where relevant. Specific sustainability-related objectives will depend on the role of the individual. The Group Executive Committee members responsible for Barclays' five business divisions have specific climate and sustainability-related objectives relevant to the businesses they manage included in their performance objectives and assessment. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F Remuneration report (continued) # Directors' Remuneration Policy (DRP) The DRP was approved by shareholders at the AGM on 7 May 2025, receiving 97% of shareholder votes in favour. It took effect from that date and will apply for a maximum of three years. A summary of the policy for the Executive Directors, its implementation during 2025, and the intended implementation for 2026 is set out below. More information on the implementation of the policy is provided on page 145. The full policy, including recruitment and leaver provisions, and the policy for the Non-Executive Directors, can be found on pages 204 to 213 of the 2024 Annual Report, which is available at home.barclays/annualreport. Remuneration policy summary – Executive Directors | Element and purpose | Operation | Implementation for 2025 | Implementation for 2026 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Salary To support the recruitment, retention and development of the right calibre of individual for the role. | • Factors considered in determining salary include: • the size and scope of the role, taking into account the size, complexity and breadth of the organisation • the skills, experience and performance of the individual • market practice and market data. • The salary for each Executive Director is reviewed annually. Percentage increases will normally be no more than the average annual percentage increase for UK employees, though may be higher if the Committee considered it appropriate. • Paid in cash, monthly via payroll. • No performance measures or malus and clawback provisions apply. | Effective 7 May 2025 (i.e. following shareholder approval of the policy): C.S. Venkatakrishnan £1,590,000 Anna Cross £950,000 | Effective 1 March 2026: C.S. Venkatakrishnan 3.2% increase to £1,641,000 Anna Cross 5.3% increase to £1,000,000 | | Pension To support Executive Directors to build long-term retirement savings. | • An annual cash allowance is provided in lieu of participation in a pension arrangement, paid monthly via payroll. • The cash allowance value is currently 10% of salary. The Committee may adjust this provided that the maximum allowance does not exceed the employer pension contribution rate provided to the wider UK workforce. • No performance measures or malus and clawback provisions apply. | Effective 7 May 2025 (i.e. following shareholder approval of the DRP): C.S. Venkatakrishnan £159,000 Anna Cross £95,000 (10% of salary) | Effective 1 March 2026: C.S. Venkatakrishnan £164,100 Anna Cross £100,000 (10% of salary) | | Benefits To provide a competitive and cost-effective benefits package appropriate to the role and reflecting local market practice, and to support the health and wellbeing of the Executive Directors. | • Benefits provision includes, but is not restricted to, private medical cover, annual health check, life assurance and ill health income protection, and use of a Company vehicle and driver for business purposes (including any tax liabilities that may arise from these benefits). • Mobility benefits may be provided in accordance with Barclays’ general employee mobility policies and practices if an Executive Director relocates to perform their role. • The maximum value of the benefits is determined by the nature of the benefit itself, and costs of provision may depend on external factors, e.g. insurance costs. • No performance measures or malus and clawback provisions apply. | Benefits as per policy | Benefits entitlement will remain unchanged | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) Remuneration policy summary – Executive Directors (continued) | Element and purpose | Operation | Implementation for 2025 | Implementation for 2026 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Annual bonus To reward delivery of short-term financial targets and strategic objectives, and the individual performance of the Executive Directors in achieving those. Delivery in part in shares increases alignment with shareholders and encourages longer-term focus. | • The maximum annual bonus opportunity is 250% of salary for each of the Group Chief Executive and the Group Finance Director. • Awards are discretionary and actual outcomes are based on an assessment of Executive Directors’ performance in the year, measured against financial and other strategic objectives. • The Committee sets performance measures, weightings and targets near the start of each year. Financial measures will normally make up at least 65% of annual bonus opportunity. • Discretion can be applied by the Committee to ensure the level of annual bonus outcome is reflective of the performance of the Group and the individual over the period. • Annual bonus awards are typically delivered as a combination of cash and shares, a proportion of which may be deferred, ensuring that the proportion of variable pay (annual bonus and LTIP combined) that is deferred is no less than required by regulations. • Malus and clawback provisions apply. | In respect of 2025 performance year: C.S. Venkatakrishnan’s annual bonus was £3,299,000 (83.0% of maximum) Anna Cross’s annual bonus was £1,971,000 (83.0% of maximum) 25% of the bonus award will be deferred into shares vesting over three years and 75% will be paid in upfront cash. | C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross up to 250% of salary Performance measures and weightings for the 2026 annual bonus remain unchanged from those for the 2025 annual bonus | | Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award To incentivise execution of Barclays’ strategy over the longer term. The multi-year performance period and deferral into Barclays shares encourage a long-term view and serve to align Executive Directors’ interests with those of shareholders. | • The maximum annual LTIP award is 550% of salary for the Group Chief Executive and 500% of salary for the Group Finance Director, with actual award levels determined based on satisfactory performance over the prior year (the preliminary performance period). • Awards are typically granted as conditional rights to receive Barclays shares at no cost. They are structured so no part of the award vests before the third anniversary of grant, the final tranche is released no earlier than the fifth anniversary of grant, and so that when combined with the annual bonus the proportion of variable pay that is deferred is no less than required by regulations. • Vesting of each award is dependent on performance against targets over the three-year period commencing with the year of grant. • The Committee sets performance measures, weightings and targets around the time awards are granted, covering financial and non-financial measures. Financial measures will normally make up at least 75% of the total opportunity. • Discretion can be applied by the Committee to reduce the vesting of any award to ensure that it is reflective of the performance of the Group and individual over the period. • Malus and clawback provisions apply. | In respect of 2025 performance year: C.S. Venkatakrishnan will be granted a 2026-2028 LTIP award of 550% of salary Anna Cross will be granted a 2026-2028 LTIP award of 500% of salary Performance measures and weightings for the 2026-2028 LTIP cycle remain unchanged from those for the 2025-2027 LTIP cycle 75% of the award will vest on the third anniversary of grant and 25% on the fourth anniversary, followed by holding periods such that the shares that vest must be retained until at least the fifth anniversary of grant (save for sales to cover taxes payable on vesting). | C.S. Venkatakrishnan up to 550% of salary Anna Cross up to 500% of salary | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## Remuneration policy summary – Executive Directors (continued) | Element and purpose | Operation | Implementation for 2025 | Implementation for 2026 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Shareholding requirement To further enhance the alignment of Executive Directors’ interests with those of shareholders, in long-term value creation. | • Executive Directors have a contractual obligation to build up a shareholding, within five years from their date of appointment as an Executive Director, with a value equivalent to 550% of salary for the Group Chief Executive and 500% of salary for the Group Finance Director. • Shares that count towards the requirement are those beneficially owned by the Executive Director, plus the value of any vested share awards (including those subject only to holding periods) and the estimated after-tax value of any shares from unvested deferred share bonuses and LTIP awards provided that no performance conditions remain untested. • Post-employment shareholding requirements apply for two years after stepping down as an Executive Director. | As at 31 December 2025: C.S. Venkatakrishnan’s shareholding was 1,479% of his salary. The relevant shareholding requirement has already been met, ahead of the five-year deadline which falls on 1 November 2026 Anna Cross’s shareholding was 611% of her salary. The relevant shareholding requirement has already been met, ahead of the five-year deadline which falls on 23 April 2027. | Shareholding requirements remain unchanged | ## Risk and conduct adjustment – malus and clawback Any annual bonus or LTIP awarded is subject to malus and clawback provisions. The malus provisions enable the Committee to reduce the amount of unvested bonus or LTIP (including to nil) prior to vesting in specified circumstances, including but not limited to: - a participant deliberately misleading Barclays, the market and/or shareholders in relation to the financial performance of the Barclays Group - a participant causing harm to Barclays’ reputation or where his/her actions have amounted to misconduct, incompetence, poor performance, material error or negligence - a material restatement of the financial statements of the Barclays Group or any subsidiary, or the Group or any business unit suffering a material downturn in its financial performance - a material failure of risk management in the Barclays Group - a significant deterioration in the financial health of the Barclays Group. The clawback provisions enable amounts to be recovered after they have been paid or vested, for a period in line with applicable regulation – currently seven years from grant (which can be extended to up to 10 years if a relevant investigation is ongoing at the end of the initial seven-year period) where (i) a participant’s actions or omissions have amounted to misbehaviour or material error and/or (ii) Barclays or the relevant business unit has suffered a material failure of risk management. During 2025, no risk or conduct adjustments were made to the Executive Directors' remuneration via the malus and clawback provisions that apply to their annual bonus or LTIP awards. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 133 # Remuneration report (continued) ## Determining measures and targets for the Executive Directors' annual bonus and LTIP awards The Committee has adopted a consistent approach in recent years when considering and agreeing performance measures and targets for the Executive Directors' annual bonus and LTIP plans, ensuring that Executive Directors' incentives support the delivery of sustainable performance and our strategic priorities. To illustrate this, the process for setting measures and targets for the 2026 annual bonus and 2026-2028 LTIP is set out below. ## 1. Select measures and weightings (December 2025) The Committee reviewed the key financial and non-financial measures for the Group, as set by the Board and senior management, including the measures for which there will be prospective external guidance or targets relevant to the annual bonus or LTIP performance periods. Measures within the annual bonus were selected to reflect the more immediate strategic priorities and building blocks for future delivery against our longer-term targets, while the measures in the LTIP were focused on key longer-term goals. Shareholder and other stakeholder considerations also informed the selection of measures and weightings. ## 2. Set targets and payout ranges (January 2026) The Committee set targets for the annual bonus and LTIP, considering: - the Group's external targets and stated ambitions, in the context of the Group's strategic plans - short-term and medium-term performance forecasts, and external financial analysts' expectations - shareholder and other stakeholder priorities - the wider economic environment. ## 3. Monitor performance (regularly through the performance period) Throughout the performance period, the Committee will receive updates on performance against the bonus and LTIP targets, combining performance to date and the future performance outlook, and the projected incentive outcomes that would result. ## 4. Assess performance and agree outcomes (January - February following the performance period) At the end of the performance period, the financial and non-financial performance measures will be assessed and the incentive outcomes will be determined. The Committee will then review these outcomes, in the following context, and will have the discretion to adjust the outcomes if it deems it appropriate: - overall Group performance, and the overall performance of each Executive Director, over the performance period - the underlying financial health of the Group - bonus outcomes for the wider workforce - historical outcomes for the Executive Directors in the context of performance each year. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 134 Remuneration report (continued) # Annual report on Directors' remuneration This section explains how our Directors' Remuneration Policy (DRP) was implemented for 2025 # Executive Directors Single total figure for 2025 remuneration The following table shows a single total figure for 2025 remuneration in respect of qualifying service for each Executive Director, together with comparative figures for 2024. | | 1 | 2 | 3 | | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Salary/Fixed Pay £000 | Pension £000 | Taxable benefits £000 | Total fixed pay £000 | Annual bonus £000 | LTIP - excluding share price appreciation £000 | LTIP - share price appreciation £000 | Total LTIP1,2 £000 | Total variable pay £000 | Total - excluding share price appreciation £000 | Total £000 | | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 2025 | 2,063 | 155 | 76 | 2,294 | 3,299 | 3,849 | 5,603 | 9,452 | 12,751 | 9,442 | 15,045 | | | 2024 | 2,935 | 147 | 95 | 3,177 | 2,219 | 3,285 | 2,941 | 6,226 | 8,445 | 8,681 | 11,622 | | Anna Cross | 2025 | 1,262 | 94 | 29 | 1,385 | 1,971 | 2,286 | 3,328 | 5,614 | 7,585 | 5,642 | 8,970 | | | 2024 | 1,837 | 92 | 15 | 1,944 | 1,336 | - | - | - | 1,336 | - | 3,280 | # Notes: 1 The LTIP amounts for 2025 relate to the award granted in 2023, with vesting based on performance measured over 2023 to 2025. The value was estimated using the Q4 2025 average share price of £4.1493 as this Annual Report 2025 was finalised prior to the first vesting date. This is the first LTIP vesting for Anna Cross following her appointment as Group Finance Director on 23 April 2022. The share price increased by $146\%$ between the date of grant and the share price used to estimate the award value, and columns 5 and 6 separate that share price appreciation within the total LTIP value. 2 The LTIP amount for 2024 has been updated based on the share price on the vesting date of the first tranche of the 2022-2024 LTIP, which was £3.049. The LTIP value disclosed in the 2024 Remuneration report was an estimate, based on the Q4 2024 average share price, as the 2024 Annual Report was finalised prior to the vesting date. # Additional information in respect of each element of pay for the Executive Directors # 1) Salary/Fixed Pay Under the current DRP, salary is delivered in cash, paid monthly. Under the previous DRP, in operation until 6 May 2025, Fixed Pay was delivered $50\%$ in cash, paid monthly, and $50\%$ in shares, delivered quarterly. These shares are subject to a holding period, with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). More information on the Committee's considerations in respect of the Executive Directors' salary is set out on page 145. # 2) Pension Executive Directors are paid cash in lieu of pension contributions equal to $10\%$ of salary (was $5\%$ of Fixed Pay or $10\%$ of Fixed Pay cash under the previous DRP). The pension cash allowance paid during 2025 was £154,940 for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and £94,042 for Anna Cross. The Executive Directors did not receive any other pension benefits. # 3) Taxable benefits Taxable benefits include, but are not restricted to, private medical cover, life assurance, income protection, tax advice and the use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## 4) 2025 annual bonus The bonus amounts included in the single total remuneration figures are the value awarded in respect of performance during the relevant year. In determining the bonus in respect of 2025 performance, the Committee considered the performance achieved against the Financial (65% weighting) and Strategic non-financial (15% weighting) performance measures that had been set to reflect Group priorities for 2025. Personal performance against each Executive Director's Strategic objectives for 2025 (20% weighting) was assessed on an individual basis. The outcome for each of the Financial measures would be 0% for performance below threshold, and then determined on a straight-line basis, between a 25% outcome for threshold performance and 100% for achievement of maximum performance. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table. ### 2025 annual bonus outcomes | Measures | Weighting | Threshold | Maximum | 2025 actual | Outcome | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | | | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | Anna Cross | | Profit before tax (excluding material items^{1}), with CET1 ratio underpin | 55% | £8.0bn | £10.0bn | See footnote 1 | 48.0% | 48.0% | | Cost: income ratio (excluding material items^{1}) | 10% | 61.5% | 58.5% | See footnote 2 | 8.5% | 8.5% | | Strategic non-financial | 15% | Performance against strategic measures, organised around two categories: Customers, clients & colleagues, and Risk & operational excellence | | | 9.0% | 9.0% | | Strategic objectives | 20% | Individual performance against each Executive Director's strategic objectives, assessed by the Committee | | | 17.5% | 17.5% | | Total | | | | | 83.0% | 83.0% | | Final 2025 annual bonus outcome approved by the Committee | | | | | 83.0% | 83.0% | **Note:** 1. Profit before tax of £9.659bn, which excludes material items: 2025 structural cost actions of £285m and the £235m charge for motor finance redress taken in Q325. 2. Cost: income ratio of 59.1%, which excludes material items: 2025 structural cost actions of £285m and the £235m charge for motor finance redress taken in Q325. Based on the assessment outlined above, the Committee determined an overall formulaic 2025 annual bonus outcome for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross that equates to £3,299,000, and £1,971,000 respectively. For the financial measures, materials items were excluded - 2025 structural cost actions of £285m and a £235m charge for motor finance redress, taken in Q325. The latter relates to historical activity that neither Executive Director was directly involved in, given their roles at the time, and C.S. Venkatakrishnan was the Chief Risk Officer when the decision to exit the business was taken in 2019. Further detail on the assessment of the Strategic non-financial measures, and performance against Strategic objectives, is set out on the following pages. In determining the bonus outcome, the Committee reflected on the appropriateness of these overall annual bonus outcomes, in the context of the performance achieved against the Financial measures, Strategic non-financial measures and Strategic objectives. The Committee considered the underlying financial health of the Group, which is strong and well-capitalised, and more holistically the performance and contribution of each Executive Director during 2025. The bonus outcomes were considered in the context of those for the wider workforce – ensuring appropriate alignment both this year and over a multi-year period – and also by comparing to historical outcomes for the Executive Directors in the context of performance each year. The Committee believes that the overall 2025 bonus outcomes above are aligned appropriately with stakeholder considerations and with the performance achieved. Based on this, the Committee concluded that no discretionary adjustment was warranted. The 2025 annual bonus will be delivered as 75% upfront cash, payable in March 2026, and 25% as a grant of deferred bonus shares that will vest in three equal tranches on the first, second, and third anniversaries of the grant. The number of shares awarded to each Executive Director will be based on the market share price on the date of grant, and additional shares will accrue equivalent to dividends paid on unvested share awards (as is now permitted under the new UK bank pay regulations). More information is provided on page 119. All of the 2025 variable pay (both the 2025 annual bonus and the 2026-2028 LTIP) is subject to clawback provisions, which allow the Committee to recover amounts that have been paid in certain circumstances. The deferred elements are subject to malus provisions, which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting of unvested amounts (including reducing to nil) in certain circumstances. Of the total variable pay to be awarded (the annual bonus and LTIP combined), a total of 79% of C.S. Venkatakrishnan’s 2025 variable pay will be in Barclays shares, and 78% for Anna Cross. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 136 # Remuneration report (continued) ## 4) 2025 annual bonus (continued) ### Assessment of the Strategic non-financial measures for the 2025 annual bonus The overall weighting of Strategic non-financial measures was 15%, within which the Customers, clients & colleagues category was weighted at 10% and the Risk & operational excellence category at 5%. The measures used in the Strategic non-financial assessment for bonus reflect key strategic priorities of the Group. Many outcomes are measured using an external provider, such as customer / client satisfaction or Investment Banking fee ranking and share. The Committee assessed progress in relation to each of the Strategic non-financial measures and agreed an overall outcome of 9% out of a maximum of 15%. Detail supporting this assessment is set out in the tables that follow. The overall assessment was based on the following scale: | For Customers, clients & colleagues (max weighting 10%) | Overall outcome for the category | For Risk & operational excellence (max weighting 5%) | Overall outcome for the category | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 0% to 2.0% | Behind track on most measures | 0% to 1.0% | Behind ambition | | 2.0% to 4.0% | Slightly behind track on most measures | 1.0% to 2.0% | Slightly behind ambition | | 4.0% to 6.0% | On track on most measures | 2.0% to 3.0% | On track to meet ambition | | 6.0% to 8.0% | Slightly ahead on most measures | 3.0% to 4.0% | At ambition | | 8.0% to 10% | Ahead of track on most measures | 4.0% to 5.0% | Exceeded ambition | ### Customers, clients & colleagues | Measure | Criteria | Performance | Commentary | Outcome | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Customers & clients | | | | | | Global Markets revenue ranking and share^{1} | Maintain rankings and market share in Barclays Investment Bank | Rank: 6th (2024: 6th) Share: 6.5% (2024: 6.3%) | • Global Markets revenue rank maintained; revenue share has increased since 2024. • We continue to make progress towards our goal of achieving 70 top five ranks with our Top 100 clients. | Slightly ahead of track | | Investment Banking fee ranking and share^{2} | | Rank: 6th (2024: 6th) Share: 3.0% (2024: 3.3%) | • Investment Banking fee rank has been maintained; fee share has decreased since 2024, driven by global fee wallet expansion, impacting our overall share. | Slightly behind track | | Customer and client satisfaction | Improve customer and client satisfaction | Barclays UK NPS^{3}: +25 (2024: +17) US Consumer Bank Contact Centre Agent Servicing tNPS^{4}: +52 (2024: +51) US Consumer Bank digital tNPS: +63 (2024: +63) UK Corporate Bank overall client satisfaction^{5}: 66% (2024: 62%) | • Barclays UK: we improved NPS to +25, our highest score since we began tracking in 2013, and +8 on December 2024. Premier NPS was a significant driver, reaching +37 at year-end. • US Consumer Bank: Contact Centre Agent Servicing tNPS increased by 1 point to +52. Digital tNPS remained consistent at +63. • UK Corporate Bank: overall client satisfaction has increased by 4 percentage points. | Slightly ahead of track | | Complaints | Reduce customer complaints | Barclays UK total complaints (movement year on year): +33% (2024: -36%) | • The increase in complaints year on year was driven by an IT incident in January 2025 that impacted many of our customers. Excluding this, complaints reduced by 2%. | Behind track | | Digital engagement | Increase digital engagement | Barclays UK digitally active customers: 13.9m (2024: 13.4m) US Consumer Bank digitally interacting customer^{6}: 96.2% (2024: 95.9%) UK Corporate Bank self-service take up: c.50% (2024: c.40%) | • Digital engagement has improved in all areas. • Barclays UK: The number of digitally active customers increased. • US Consumer Bank: digitally interacting customer measure improved, driven by continued investment in our mobile app and digital capabilities, including enhancements to registration and self-service. • UK Corporate Bank: significant increase in self-service take up (+ 10 percentage points). | Slightly ahead of track | ### Notes: 1. Global Markets market share for Barclays is based on external reported revenues of peer banks BoA, BNP, CITI, DB, GS, JPM, MS and UBS. 2. Investment Banking market share for Barclays calculated by Dealogic for the period covering 1 January 2025 to 31 December 2025. 3. © Ipsos 2025, Financial Research Survey (FRS), 12 months ended December 2025 (Dec 2024). Results based on a sample of 7,546 (6,646) Barclays main current account customers and 1,028 (865) Barclays Premier main current account customers. Total sample of ~50,000 GB adults (aged 16+) a year, weighted to align with overall profile of GB population. 4. US Consumer Bank Contact Center Agent Servicing tNPS measures US Consumer Bank customer experience across Contact Centre Agent Servicing, including Care and Chat, Fraud, Disputes, and Credit. 5. UK Corporate Bank OSAT (overall client satisfaction) calculated by Savanta based on proportion of clients surveyed rating Barclays' UK Corporate Bank as 'Excellent' or 'Very Good', data as at December 2025. 6. Measured at exit at end of December 2025. Includes primary consumer card customers. Excludes Interactive Voice Response (IVR). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) 4) 2025 annual bonus (continued) | Measure | Criteria | Performance | Commentary | Outcome | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Colleagues | | | | | | Inclusion | Maintain inclusion indicators | 81% (2024: 81%) | • Inclusion Index score has been maintained, with continued focus on driving an inclusive culture. • 88% of colleagues told us they felt included in their team (2024: 89%). | On track | | Engagement | Maintain engagement at healthy levels | 85% (2024: 85%) | • Employee engagement has been maintained at 85%, 4 percentage points above the Qualtrics 2024 upper quartile Financial Services benchmark. | Ahead of track | | Culture | Maintain culture indicators | Of colleagues surveyed: 89% believe strongly in the goals and objectives of Barclays (2024: 88%) 93% believe that they and their team do a good job of role modelling our Values every day (2024: 93%) 92% believe that they and their team do a good job of role modelling our Mindset every day (2024: 92%) | • The vast majority of colleagues believe in the goals and objectives of Barclays, which has been a key focus since we launched our three-year plan in February 2024. • Scores on Mindset and Values role modelling remain high, consistent with recent years. • Our consistently excellent culture-change programme continued to embed these standards across the organisation. Throughout 2025, local initiatives across divisions and functions supported Group-wide efforts to simplify processes, strengthen risk and control, and drive efficiency. The consistently excellent standard is embedded in HR tools, processes and products from hiring and induction, to performance management, promotions and development programmes. | Slightly ahead of track | Total Customers, clients & colleagues: 6% out of 10% Risk & operational excellence | Category | Performance commentary | | --- | --- | | Risk awareness | • The Committee was satisfied that the Group operated in line with its Board-approved risk appetite. • In 2025, we completed the delivery of 1,995 'Being consistently excellent' workshops to our colleagues globally. They provide our people with the skills and knowledge to take personal accountability for driving higher standards across the organisation, recognise what they can do differently to deliver improvements and build consistent practices to raise the standard of execution, with a focus on remediating risk and control weaknesses. • In 2025, we launched a Risk and Control Digital Credential to all colleagues, our externally accredited digital credential which is flexible, role - relevant and builds confidence in managing risk and control – critical for delivering consistently excellent outcomes. • Excluding charges for motor finance redress¹, litigation and conduct costs increased to £157m (2024: £130m), driven by FCA investigations concerning financial crime systems and controls, and compliance with the UK money laundering regulations, which resulted in settlements totalling £48m. • Conduct breaches have reduced year on year. | | Operational excellence | • During 2025, total operational risk losses² increased to £143m (2024: £127m) and the number of recorded events for 2025 (2,943) increased from the level for 2024 (2,392). The total operational risk losses for the year were mainly driven by events falling within the Execution, Delivery & Process Management and External Fraud categories, which tend to be high-volume but low-impact events. • In January 2025, an IT incident relating to our UK mainframe operating system impacted many of our customers. Despite this, there was an overall 44% reduction in major technology incidents since 2024, indicating improvement in proactive mitigation. • High standards of internal service delivery retained during 2025, with the >95% ambition being met throughout the year. | Total Risk & operational excellence: 3% out of 5% Overall strategic non-financial outcome for the 2025 annual bonus: 9% out of 15% # Notes: 1. £235m charge in Q325 (2024: £90m) for motor finance redress. Litigation and conduct costs were £392m in 2025 including the charges for motor finance redress. 2. The data disclosed includes operational risk losses for reportable events impacting the Barclays Group business areas, having an impact greater than £10,000 and excludes events that are compliance or legal risk, aggregate and boundary events. A boundary event is an operational risk event that results in a credit risk impact. Due to the nature of risk events that keep evolving, prior year losses are updated. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 138 # Remuneration report (continued) ## 4) 2025 annual bonus (continued) ### Assessment of performance against the Strategic objectives set for the 2025 annual bonus (20% weighting) The Committee assessed personal performance for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross against both their individual strategic objectives set for their respective roles and their shared strategic objectives. The assessment against these Strategic objectives makes up 20% of the total bonus opportunity. The table below summarises performance against the shared strategic objectives. ### Shared strategic objectives for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross | Objective | Outcomes | | --- | --- | | Deliver key financial targets including RoTE and capital distributions | • Achieved all our 2025 financial targets, with operational and financial performance improvement driven by disciplined execution of our plan to make Barclays Simpler, Better and More balanced. • Delivered Group statutory RoE of 9.8% and RoTE of 11.3%, in line with our upgraded target of >11%, with all five divisions delivering double-digit RoTE. • Group net interest income (NII) was £12.8bn (excluding Barclays Investment Bank (IB) and Head Office), of which Barclays UK was £7.7bn, meeting 2025 guidance of £12.6bn and £7.6bn respectively. • The Group’s cost: income ratio improved to 61% (2024: 62%) driven by positive operating leverage for the third consecutive year. • Total shareholder distributions of £3.7bn announced in relation to 2025 (2024: £3.0bn), on track to return at least £10bn to shareholders from 2024 to 2026¹. | | Maintain robust capital ratios across the Group and within the main operating entities | • Strong balance sheet, with Group CET1 ratio of 14.3%, or 14.0% if the £1.0bn share buyback announced with the FY25 results is factored in, at the top-end of the 13%-14% target range. • Similarly strong capital ratios prevail in all main operating entities: at the end of 2025, Barclays Bank PLC’s CET1 ratio was 12.7% and Barclays Bank UK PLC’s CET1 ratio was 14.5%, well in excess of regulatory minima. | | Continue to reduce organisational complexity and upgrade legacy technology | • Eliminated our remaining non-core businesses, selling our stake in Entercard, and further simplified our business model, including operating Private Bank and Wealth Management (PBWM) through two core areas, PBWM UK and PBWM International. • Continued to invest in enterprise-wide platforms across infrastructure, data and digital, strengthening resilience while reducing complexity and cost. Almost 90% of our technology estate is now in the cloud. • Introduced new technology, such as the AI-powered Help Hub Assistant in Barclays UK, to support us in delivering seamless, connected services that anticipate customer and client needs and provide faster, more personalised, more intuitive services. | | Deliver better income quality, growth within higher-returning divisions and greater RWA productivity in the Investment Bank | • Stable income streams (Financing, Retail and Corporate) comprised 74% of the total Group income in 2025. • Continued to rebalance the Group, successfully deploying £20bn of RWAs since 2024 into the three highest-returning UK businesses. • Investment Bank RWAs remained stable for the fourth consecutive year and made up 55% of Group RWAs in 2025. • Improved the Investment Bank’s return on RWAs, driven by focus on more-stable income streams and on disciplined client management, capital deployment, and technology enhancements. | | Drive growth in our home UK market | • Grew UK retail lending, with strong net mortgage growth and higher card balances in Barclays UK and £3bn lending to small businesses. • The UK Corporate Bank delivered robust income growth of 16%, underpinned by a strong deposit franchise and growing debt balances. We positively repositioned ourselves among peers and grew lending market share by 1%², with total loan growth of £4.6bn. • PBWM UK grew the UK Digital Investing business with c.65,000 new accounts opened on our Smart Investor platform (up 11% year on year), launched a pilot of a new digitally-enabled mass affluent proposition and expanded the UK Private Markets proposition. | ### Notes: 1. This multi-year plan is subject to supervisory and Board approval, anticipated financial performance and our published CET1 ratio target of 13-14%. 2. Source: Bank of England (December) 2025 market data. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## 4) 2025 annual bonus (continued) In addition to the shared strategic objectives described on the previous page, the table below summarises performance against the strategic objectives for C.S. Venkatakrishnan. ### Strategic objectives for C.S. Venkatakrishnan | Objective | Outcomes | | --- | --- | | Continue to drive better customer and client experience and outcomes, through technology and improved offerings | • Launched new customer technology, platforms and products across our various businesses, including a new mortgage platform, a redesigned Savings Hub for Barclays UK customers and more opportunities to self-serve through digital channels for UK Corporate Bank clients, and saw improvements in customer satisfaction scores across our business. • Barclays UK channel transactional Net Promoter Score (tNPS) increased to +61 for branch servicing and Premier Net Promoter Score (NPS) reached +37, the highest level to date¹. • UK Corporate Bank saw a 4 percentage point improvement in the overall client satisfaction score (an independent benchmarking score measured by Savanta), with 66% of clients surveyed rating us ‘Excellent’ or ‘Very Good’. • PBWM further enhanced client journeys and investment capabilities on our Smart Investor platform and were awarded Best Stock & Shares ISA Provider from Moneyfacts and received a ‘Value for Money’ consumer rating from Boring Money. • Investment Banking and Global Markets maintained our rank of sixth² – the highest of any bank domiciled outside the US. Our Research team continues to rank highly amongst our institutional client base – #4 overall global research firm and #3 for developed markets³. • US Consumer Bank saw tNPS for digital and contact-centre agent servicing averaging 63 and 52 respectively, consistent with 2024 for digital and improved by one point for contact centre performance. | | Drive delivery to a consistently excellent standard | • A consistently excellent standard is an integral part of our culture and a key enabler of our three-year plan, which is now embedded in HR tools, processes and products from hiring and introduction, to performance management, promotions and development programmes. • Delivered over 1,995 colleague workshops during 2025 on what it means to deliver to a consistently excellent standard, creating a strong shared understanding across the organisation. | | Drive leadership accountability to further strengthen our risk management and controls | • Local initiatives across divisions and functions supported Group-wide efforts to simplify processes, strengthen risk and control, and drive efficiency, further embedding the consistently excellent standard. • Launched the Risk and Control Digital Credential – our first Group-wide, externally accredited online learning programme, certified by the Institute of Risk Management – with almost 25,000 colleagues having achieved the accreditation by the end of 2025. | | Continue to invest in talent and continue to grow a winning culture | • Strengthened how we identify, assess and develop high-potential talent, introducing greater rigour and consistency through implementing our Talent Management Standards. Delivered accelerator programmes and sponsorship initiatives and offered senior leaders a suite of practical tools, targeted workshops, and resources to develop their skills. • 86% of colleagues have told us that their people leader clearly communicates the actions they need to take to deliver consistently excellent outcomes in their role. | ### Notes: 1. Highest since we started tracking in 2016. Source: © Ipsos 2025, Financial Research Survey (FRS). 2. Global Markets ranking based on external reported revenues. Peer banks include BoA, BNP, CITI, DB, GS, JPM, MS and UBS. Investment Banking ranking sourced from Dealogic for the period 1 January 2025 to 31 December 2025. 3. Source: Extel. The Committee recognised C.S. Venkatakrishnan's outstanding performance during 2025, his leadership of the organisation, the progress delivered against the Group's three-year plan, and substantial achievements against both his individual and shared personal objectives. The Committee assessed that an outcome of 17.5% out of a maximum of 20% was appropriate. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) # 4) 2025 annual bonus (continued) The table below summarises performance against the strategic objectives for Anna Cross. Strategic objectives for Anna Cross | Objective | Outcomes | | --- | --- | | Continue to simplify, standardise and automate Group Finance processes to improve effectiveness and efficiency | ·Agreed a transformation strategy for Group Finance to standardise and automate processes, and strengthen controls, which is expected to drive significant efficiency enhancements over the coming years. ·Delivered material automation in Product Control and Financial Control, and standardisation of cost reporting activities, with further potential to simplify and automate in the future. ·Launched nine Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning initiatives in the Group Finance function, delivering measurable benefits, with many more use cases in the pipeline. | | Oversee the effective management of risk and control across Group Finance | ·Group Finance continued to enhance risk management and controls for compliance with rules, laws and regulations, and work continued to strengthen the control environment around regulatory reporting. ·The risk and control agenda remains a priority in Group Finance, with a constant focus on identifying further improvements. | | Appropriate management of capital and resources to ensure we comply with governance and regulatory requirements | ·The Group continues to exceed regulatory requirements for CET1, Tier 1, total capital, leverage and Minimum Requirement of Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities. ·The Group has operated toward the upper half of its CET1 target range of 13%-14% throughout the year, after taking into account the impact of announced share buybacks. | | Retain focus on the talent and culture agenda across Group Finance | ·Consistent focus on talent management and succession planning has enabled 71% of all senior vacancies in Group Finance to be filled internally. ·Continued to focus on culture and colleague engagement, improving key measures, e.g. Inclusion index 79% (2024: 78%) and Wellbeing index 85% (2024: 83%). ·Further strengthened colleague engagement across Group Finance, at 83% (2024: 81%). | The Committee recognised Anna Cross's outstanding performance during 2025, ensuring delivery towards the achievement of the Group's three-year plan, and the substantial achievements against both her individual and shared personal objectives. Based on that performance, the Committee assessed that an outcome of $17.5\%$ out of a maximum of $20\%$ was appropriate. # 5) Vesting of the 2023-2025 LTIP cycle (also covers columns 6 and 7 of the single total figure for 2025) The total LTIP values included in the single total figure for 2025 for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross are based on the amounts that are due to be released from 9 March 2026 in relation to the 2023-2025 LTIP awards granted in March 2023. The total LTIP values that will vest to C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross (column 7 of the single total figure) have been estimated using the Q4 2025 average share price of £4.1493, as this Annual Report 2025 was finalised prior to the first vesting date. Of the estimated LTIP values, $59\%$ relates to share price appreciation between the grant date of the award and the share price used to estimate the award value. Column 5 of the single total figure shows the estimated LTIP values excluding the impact of share price appreciation and column 6 shows the additional value arising due to that share price growth. Release is dependent on, among other things, performance over the period from 1 January 2023 to 31 December 2025. In determining what proportion of the awards would vest, the Committee considered the performance achieved against the Financial (70% weighting), Strategic non-financial (20% weighting) and Risk scorecard (10% weighting) performance measures that were set shortly before the award was granted. The outcome for each of the Financial measures would be $0\%$ for performance below threshold. The outcome for threshold performance under the average return on tangible equity and average cost: income ratio measures would be $0\%$ , and for the relative total shareholder return measure would be $25\%$ , rising on a straight-line basis to $100\%$ for achievement of maximum performance for each of those measures. The CET1 ratio measure operates differently, as described in the table on the following page. A summary of the assessment of performance is also provided in that table. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) 5) Vesting of the 2023-2025 LTIP cycle (continued) 2023-2025 LTIP outcomes | Measure | Weighting | Threshold | Maximum vesting | Actual | % of award vesting | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Average return on tangible equity (RoTE) (excluding material items^{1,2}) | 25% | 0% of award vests for RoTE of 8.0%, rising on a straight-line basis | 25% of award vests for RoTE of 12.5% or higher | 11.4%^{3} | 18.9% | | Average cost: income ratio (excluding material items^{4}) | 10% | 0% of award vests for average cost: income ratio of 62.5%, rising on a straight-line basis | 10% of award vests for average cost: income ratio of 58.0% or lower | 61.1% | 3.1% | | Maintain CET 1 ratio within the target range | 10% | If CET1 is below the target range during the period, the Committee will consider what portion of this element should vest, based on the reasons for the CET1 shortfall If CET1 is above the range and does not make progress towards the range over the period, the Committee will consider what portion of the element should vest, based on the reasons for the elevated levels of CET1 versus target range and the associated impacts | 10% vests if either: • CET1 is within the range during the period or • CET1 is above but making progress towards the target range | 2023: 13.8% 2024: 13.6% 2025: 14.3% | 10% (more information is provided below the table) | | Relative total shareholder return^{5} | 25% | 6.25% of award vests for performance at median of the peer group^{6}, rising on a straight-line basis | 25% of award vests for performance at or above the peer group^{6} upper quartile | Rank 5 (out of 18) | 25.0% | | Strategic non-financial measures (details from page 142) | 20% | The evaluation focused on key strategic non-financial measures, which the Committee assessed to determine the percentage of the award that will vest, between 0% and 20%. The measures are organised around three main categories: Climate & sustainability (weighted 10%), Customers & clients (weighted 5%), and Colleagues (weighted 5%) | | | 13.5% | | Risk scorecard (details on page 143) | 10% | The Risk scorecard captures a range of risks and is aligned with the annual incentive risk alignment framework shared with the regulators. The framework measures performance against three broad categories – Capital & liquidity, Control environment, and Compliance – using a combination of quantitative and qualitative metrics | | | 6.8% | | Total | | | | | 77.3% | | Final 2023-2025 LTIP vesting outcome approved by the Committee | | | | | 77.3% | Notes: 1. Using average tangible shareholders' equity based on a CET1 ratio at the mid-point of the Group target range 13% to 14%. (2025: £53.6bn; 2024: £50.5bn; 2023: £46.5bn). 2. Material items consist of post-tax structural cost actions (2025: £217m; 2024: £209m; 2023: £739m taken in Q423) and post-tax charges in respect of motor finance redress (2025: £176m; 2024: £68m). 3. Please refer to the "Non-IFRS performance measures" section of this Annual Report on Form 20-F for further information on and a reconciliation of the non-IFRS measure "return on tangible equity" against the most directly comparable IFRS measure. 4. Material items consist of structural cost actions (2025: £285m; 2024: £273m; 2023: £927m taken in Q423) and charges in respect of motor finance redress (2025: £235m; 2024: £90m). 5. Performance assessed over the period from 1 January 2023 to 31 December 2025. Start and end total shareholder return data was the Q4 average for 2022 and 2025 respectively and was measured in GBP for each company. 6. The peer group is comprised of banks in the UK, Europe and North America of comparable size to Barclays and whose weekly returns have a high degree of correlation with Barclays. The peer group for the 2023-2025 LTIP award was: Banco Santander, Bank of America, BBVA, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Agricole, Deutsche Bank, HSBC, ING Group, Lloyds Banking Group, Morgan Stanley, NatWest Group, Société Générale, Standard Chartered, UBS, and UniCredit. The Group's external target range for the CET1 ratio is 13% to 14%, which reflects the judgement of the Board as to the appropriate CET1 ratio for the Group to operate within. As the CET1 ratio was 14.3% at the end of 2025, above the top of the LTIP target range, the Committee considered (as required under the performance target) what portion of this element should vest, based on the reason why the CET1 ratio was outside the target range. Taking into account the share buyback announced with FY25 results, the CET1 ratio as of 31 December would be 14.0%, at the top of the target range. The Committee was satisfied that the elevated CET1 ratio was temporary, that the Group's capital position had been appropriately and sensibly managed in the interests of shareholders over the performance period, and that it was therefore appropriate for this portion of the LTIP to vest in full. The Committee was satisfied that the total vesting outcome of 77.3% was consistent with the performance delivered over the period, and that the underlying financial health of the Group is strong. Based on that, it concluded that no discretionary reduction to the vesting outcome was required, so the award should vest at 77.3% of the maximum number of shares under the total award, to be released in five equal tranches annually, starting from March 2026. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) # 5) Vesting of the 2023-2025 LTIP cycle (continued) The 2023-2025 LTIP award was granted in line with the Group's usual annual timetable, in early March 2023. The share price at grant of £1.6896 was 5% higher than the share price at the time of the prior year LTIP grant. This level of share price movement between successive grants is not unusual. There was a larger increase in share price over the lifetime of the award, by 146% between the date of grant and the Q4 2025 average share price of £4.1493 on which the value vesting is estimated. As the share price growth was largely over 2024 and 2025, reflective of strong performance following the announcement of the three-year plan at the Investor Update in February 2024, the Committee concluded that there was no windfall gain and that therefore no adjustment was required. # Assessment of the Strategic non-financial measures for the 2023-2025 LTIP A summary of the Committee's assessment against the Strategic non-financial performance measures over the three-year performance period follows. The measures used reflect key strategic priorities of the Group. Many of the outcomes are measured by an external provider, such as NPS or Investment Banking fee ranking and share. | Measure | Criteria | Performance commentary | | --- | --- | --- | | Climate & sustainability | | | | Progress towards our Sustainable and Transition Financing target | Facilitate $1tm of Sustainable and Transition Financing between 2023 and end of 2030 | • Facilitated $260.7bn of Sustainable and Transition Financing, on a cumulative basis, since 2023. • Progress towards delivering our target of facilitating $1tm of Sustainable and Transition Financing will be non-linear and depend on market demand and wider regulatory and policy factors. We will continue to review and adapt our approach to Sustainable and Transition Financing in response to the evolving market environment (see page 54 for more detail). | | Reducing our financed emissions | 30% reduction in power portfolio emissions intensity (2020-2025) | • Successfully achieved 2025 financed emissions reduction targets for both the Upstream Energy and Power portfolios. • Cumulatively, Power portfolio emissions intensity has decreased by 35% from our updated 2020 baseline (see page 51 for more detail). | | | 15% reduction in energy portfolio absolute emissions (2020-2025) | • Cumulatively, absolute financed emissions from the Upstream Energy portfolio have decreased by 41% from the 2020 baseline. | | Reducing our operational emissions | 90% reduction in Scope 1 and 2 GHG emissions (market-based^{1}, against a 2018 baseline) by the end of 2025 | • Achieved 2025 net zero operations targets: – Reduced our Scope 1 and 2 market-based emissions by 97% against a 2018 baseline - exceeding our 90% reduction target – Continued to source 100% renewable electricity for our global real estate portfolio. | | | 100% renewable electricity sourcing for our global real estate portfolio^{2} by the end of 2025 | | | Supporting our communities | LifeSkills: Upskill 8.7 million people from 2023-2027 | • 6.3 million people upskilled since 2023, making good progress towards our 2023-2027 target. • Placed 154,776 people into work since 2023, making good progress towards our 2023-2027 target. | | | LifeSkills: Place 250,000 people into work from 2023-2027 | • 126 businesses solving social and environmental challenges supported since 2023, on track to support an additional 200 entrepreneurs over five years. | | | Unreasonable Impact (partnership with the Unreasonable Group): Support a further 200 businesses solving social and environmental challenges from 2023-2027 | | Total Climate & sustainability: 8% out of 10% # Notes: 1. Market-based method is a GHG Protocol accounting method for Scope 2 emissions, that reflects the GHG emissions associated with the choices a consumer makes regarding their electricity supplier or product, like the purchase of Energy Attribute Certificates (EACs). For more information please see the GHG Protocol Scope 2 Guidance: ghgprotocol.org/sites/default/files/2023-03/Scope%202%20Guidance.pdf 2. On this page a reference to global real estate portfolio includes offices, campuses, branches, warehouses, and data centres within our operational control. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) 5) Vesting of the 2023-2025 LTIP cycle (continued) | Measure | Criteria | Performance commentary | | --- | --- | --- | | Customers & clients | | | | Drive world-class outcomes for customers and clients | Maintain client rankings and market share in Barclays Investment Bank | • Markets global revenue rank¹ was maintained at 6th over the period. Revenue share has decreased slightly vs. 2022 (7.3% to 6.5%) but is on an upwards trajectory since 2024. • Investment Banking fee rank² was maintained at 6th. Fee share has been largely maintained vs. 2022 (3.1% to 3.0%). | | | Improve Net Promoter Scores | • Barclays UK: NPS score³ improved by 14 points over the period, ending at +25. • US Consumer Bank: Digital tNPS improved by 3 points and Contact Centre Agent Servicing tNPS⁴ increased by 8 points over the period⁵. • UK Corporate Bank: overall client satisfaction⁶ improved by 6 percentage points over the period. | | | Reduce Barclays UK customer complaints and improve resolution time | • Complaint volumes increased over the period driven by complaints associated with the IT incident on 31 January 2025. • 94% of complaints were resolved within 56 days in 2025. Excluding complaints related to the IT incident this would have been 98%. | | | Increase digital engagement | • Steady increase in the number of Barclays UK digitally active customers over the period to 13.9 million. | | | | Total Customers & clients: 2.5% out of 5% | # Notes: 1. Global Markets market share for Barclays is based on external reported revenues of peer banks BoA, BNP, CITI, DB, GS, JPM, MS and UBS. 2. Investment Banking fee share for Barclays calculated by Dealogic for the period covering 1 January 2022 to 31 December 2025. 3. Based on © Ipsos 2025, Financial Research Survey (FRS). 4. US Consumer Bank Contact Center Agent Servicing tNPS measures US Consumer Bank customer experience across Contact Centre Agent Servicing, including Care and Chat, Fraud, Disputes, and Credit. In 2022, Chat was not included. 5. US Consumer Bank Consumer Bank Digital tNPS and Contact Centre Agent Servicing: Results for 2022 are reported at month end December 2022, 2023-2025 are a full year average score. 6. UK Corporate Bank OSAT (overall client satisfaction) calculated by Savanta based on proportion of clients surveyed rating Barclays' UK Corporate Bank as 'Excellent' or 'Very Good', data as at December 2022 and 2025. | Measure | Criteria | Performance commentary | | --- | --- | --- | | Colleagues | | | | Inclusion | Improve inclusion indicators | • Inclusion Index score remains at 81% (consistent with 2024) but is 1 percentage point below 2022. | | Engagement | Maintain engagement at healthy levels | • Employee engagement levels are at 85% – 1 percentage point above 2022 and 4 percentage points above the Qualtrics 2024 upper quartile Financial Services benchmark. | | Culture | Maintain culture indicators | • In 2025, 89% of employees have told us that they believe strongly in the goals and objectives of Barclays, up 1 percentage point compared to 2022. • The vast majority of colleagues believe they and their teams role model the Values and Mindset every day (93% for Values and 92% for Mindset). | Total Colleagues: 3% out of 5% Overall Strategic non-financial outcome for the 2023-2025 LTIP: 13.5% out of 20% # Assessment of the Risk scorecard for the 2023-2025 LTIP A summary of the Committee’s assessment against the Risk scorecard performance measure over the three-year performance period is provided below. | Category | Performance commentary | | --- | --- | | Capital and liquidity | • Group CET1 ratio is 14.3%, above the 13% to 14% target range. • Stress testing confirmed the Group’s resilience across capital, liquidity and profitability, ensuring continued viability under adverse conditions. • Our Liquidity Coverage Ratio was well above the 100% regulatory requirement in the period. | | Control environment | • Over the period, the business invested in the overall control environment, and made progress on simplifying and enhancing the Group-wide framework. • Particular areas of focus over the period included work to strengthen controls relating to cyber security and financial crime prevention and detection, and to enhance processes in relation to regulatory reporting and regulatory change. | | Compliance | • A key area of focus has been enhancing the financial crime control environment to address emerging threats and evolving laws, rules and regulations. • Compliance Risks were refreshed and re-categorised into six core risks, with Financial Crime Risk separated into a standalone principal risk category, to reinforce the visibility and focus on this key area of risk to the business. | Overall Risk scorecard outcome for the 2023-2025 LTIP: 6.8% out of 10% --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## LTIP awards granted during 2025 Awards were granted to C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross on 20 June 2025 under the 2025-2027 LTIP. The value used to calculate the number of shares under each award was based on an adjusted fair value per share of £2.79925, which takes into account that dividends do not accrue during the vesting period, with the expected dividend stream determined by an independent adviser. The table that follows provides details of those awards. | | % of salary | Number of shares | Face value at grant | Performance period | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 550 % | 3,124,051 | £8,745,000 | 2025-2027 | | Anna Cross | 500 % | 1,696,883 | £4,750,000 | 2025-2027 | The performance measures for the 2025-2027 LTIP awards are as follows: | Performance measure | Weighting | Threshold | Maximum vesting | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Financial measures | | | | | Average RoTE (excluding material items^{1}) | 50% | 10% of award vests for average of 2026 and 2027 RoTE of 10.0%, rising on a straight-line basis | 50% of award vests for average of 2026 and 2027 RoTE of 14.0% or higher | | Relative total shareholder return^{2} | 25% | 6.25% vests for performance at the median of the peer group^{3}, rising on a straight-line basis | 25% of award vests for performance at or above the peer group^{3} upper quartile | ## Strategic non-financial measures The evaluation will focus on a range of key metrics, with a detailed retrospective narrative on progress during the year. Performance against the measures will be assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 25%. The measures will focus on sustainability, customers and clients, and will likely include the following: | Sustainability, customers & clients | 25% | Sustainability (including climate) – with measures to include: • Financing the transition • Reducing our financed emissions • Achieving net zero operations • Supporting our communities Driving world-class outcomes for customers and clients – with measures to include: • Improve customer and client satisfaction • Reduce customer complaints • Maintain rankings and market share in Barclays Investment Bank • Increase digital engagement | | --- | --- | --- | ## Notes: 1. Material items are defined as those large, atypical one-offs that are called out in the financial reporting. The exclusion is not automatic, and the Committee will determine whether each item should be treated as material for these purposes at the time that outcomes are determined. 2. Performance assessed over the period from 1 January 2025 to 31 December 2027. Start and end total shareholder return will be the Q4 average for 2024 and 2027 respectively and will be measured in GBP for each company. 3. The peer group is comprised of banks in the UK, Europe and North America of comparable size to Barclays and with a high degree of correlation to Barclays of weekly share price returns. The peer group for the 2025-2027 LTIP award is Bank of America, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Agricole, Deutsche Bank, Goldman Sachs, HSBC Holdings, ING Groep, Intesa Sanpaolo, JP Morgan Chase & Co, Lloyds Banking Group, Morgan Stanley, NatWest Group, Standard Chartered, and UBS Group. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F Remuneration report (continued) # Statement of the implementation of the Directors' Remuneration Policy in 2026 An overview of how the Directors' Remuneration Policy (DRP) will be implemented in 2026 is provided alongside the summary of the policy on page 130. # 2026 salary and market competitiveness of the Executive Directors' total compensation opportunities Pay benchmarking data is used as a reference point to ensure that the total compensation opportunities provided to the Executive Directors, which are driven by the terms of the DRP and their salaries, are appropriately positioned relative to other international banks, which are considered the most relevant comparators to Barclays based on size and complexity. Barclays has deep roots in the UK, supporting retail customers, small businesses and corporations, and also includes a top-tier investment bank, with a strong global ranking, and has a significant and important US presence. Our international banking peer group therefore consists of other large universal banks from continental Europe and the UK, and large US universal and investment banks. Five of the 11 firms in the peer group are US-based, reflecting the Group's large US operations and key competitors. Some of those peers are larger than Barclays, and it is recognised that market pay levels for executive directors of US companies are often higher than those of UK companies. To maintain balance, the international banking peer group also includes other large UK-listed banks most comparable to Barclays. An annual review of the Executive Directors' salaries, conducted in the same way and at the same time as for the wider workforce, is a feature of the DRP. The Committee reviewed the salary for each Executive Director as part of the year-end pay review process for colleagues across the Group, taking into consideration the significant personal contribution each of them made during 2025, and their critical role in the delivery of our strategy. The Committee determined that salary should increase by 3.2% for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and 5.3% for Anna Cross, to £1,641,000 and £1,000,000 respectively, effective 1 March 2026. In reaching that decision, it considered the maximum total compensation opportunity for each Executive Director, which is driven by their respective salaries, and noted that in each case maximum total compensation is materially below the median of the international banking peer group, and in the lower quartile for the Group Finance Director. This is despite the new DRP, which provides the EDs with higher maximum total compensation opportunities than they had under the previous DRP, after several peers also increased their Executive Directors' pay opportunities materially last year. The Committee also considered the context of the salary increase budgets offered for the wider UK workforce. The percentage salary increase for C.S. Venkatakrishnan is in line with the salary increase budget offered for employees covered by collective bargaining with Unite the union – c.4% for junior employees and c.3.2% overall (subject to agreement of the 2026 pay deal with Unite). Following the increase, his maximum total compensation opportunity sits between the market lower quartile and median (in the 3rd quartile) compared to the equivalent opportunities across international banking peers, as shown in the chart below. The percentage salary increase for Anna is slightly higher, reflecting her significant contribution to performance in 2025, the competitive positioning of her maximum total compensation opportunity (in the lower quartile of the international banking peer group), as well as internal relativities to other members of the Group Executive Committee. Even after the increase, Anna's maximum total compensation opportunity remains in the lower quartile of the international banking peer group, as shown in the chart below. The charts also show a comparison of the maximum total compensation opportunity for each Executive Director with the equivalent roles at the companies that make up the FTSE 30 (i.e. the 30 largest FTSE 100 constituents by market capitalisation). In this comparison the Executive Directors' maximum total compensation opportunities are more competitive, but within the range of opportunities for the FTSE 30 group. The Committee noted that it would be unlikely for the Group to fill either of the Executive Director roles by recruiting from other FTSE 30 companies outside financial services, recognising the necessity for candidates for these roles to have the right breadth and depth of banking knowledge and experience – particularly given Barclays' mix of businesses, as outlined above. However, this comparison is provided alongside the international banking peer group for additional UK context. # Executive Director maximum total compensation opportunity relative to market benchmarks | Group Chief Executive C.S. Venkatakrishnan | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | International banking peer group | | | | | A | B | C | D | | FTSE 30 | | | | | A | B | C | D | A Lower quartile B 3rd quartile C 2nd quartile D Upper quartile - Positioning of maximum total compensation opportunity at Barclays relative to market benchmarks Notes: - Data reflects maximum total compensation opportunity, excluding pension and benefits. - Market benchmark data was provided by Willis Towers Watson, based on publicly disclosed data in respect of each company's 2024 or 2024/25 financial years, incorporating assumptions where companies do not disclose a maximum total compensation opportunity. For the FTSE 30, maximum total compensation opportunities have been increased to assume modest salary increases of 3% since the underlying data was published, reflecting that maximum total compensation in respect of 2026 will be higher than for 2025. - Barclays' international banking peer group currently comprises the following international banks: Bank of America, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Deutsche Bank, Goldman Sachs, HSBC Holdings, JPMorgan Chase & Co, Lloyds Banking Group, Morgan Stanley, Standard Chartered, and UBS Group. | Group Finance Director Anna Cross | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | International banking peer group | | | | | A | B | C | D | | FTSE 30 | | | | | A | B | C | D | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## Performance measures for the 2026 annual bonus Performance measures for the annual bonus are set each year to cover a range of financial and non-financial goals that support the key strategic objectives of the Group, as described on page 133. For the 2026 annual bonus, no changes were made to the performance measures compared to the 2025 annual bonus, which included several changes to reflect shareholder feedback in the context of the DRP set out in last year's Remuneration report. The performance measures and weightings that result are shown below: | Performance measure | Weighting | Metrics | | --- | --- | --- | | Financial measures | | | | Profit before tax (with CET1 underpin²) (excluding material items²) | 55% | A performance target range has been set for this financial measure, which will be disclosed in the next Remuneration report. | | Cost: income ratio (excluding material items²) | 10% | A performance target range has been set for this financial measure, which will be disclosed in the next Remuneration report. | ## Strategic non-financial measures The evaluation will focus on a range of key metrics, with a detailed retrospective narrative on progress against each during the year. Performance against the measures will be assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. The measures are organised around two categories and will likely include the following: | Customers, clients & colleagues | 10% | Driving world-class outcomes for customers and clients – with measures to include: • Improve customer and client satisfaction • Reduce customer complaints • Maintain rankings and market share in Barclays Investment Bank • Increase digital engagement Protecting and strengthening our culture through our Purpose, Values and Mindset – with measures to include: • Maintain inclusion indicators • Maintain engagement at healthy levels • Maintain culture indicators | | --- | --- | --- | | Risk & operational excellence | 5% | Supporting a consistently excellent operating standard, risk management and controls: • Performance measured against two categories – risk awareness and operational excellence – using a combination of quantitative and qualitative metrics | ## Strategic objectives | Strategic objectives | 20% | Joint personal objectives: • Deliver key financial targets including RoTE and capital distributions • Maintain robust capital ratios across the Group and within the main operating entities • Continue to reduce organisational complexity and leverage new digital capabilities • Drive more balanced returns by deepening relationships with customers and clients and diversifying the mix of businesses • Deliver more stable income streams and continue growth in our home UK market C.S. Venkatakrishnan: • Continue to invest in talent and continue to grow a winning culture • Continue to drive better customer and client experiences and outcomes, through technology and improved offerings • Drive delivery to a consistently excellent standard • Drive leadership accountability to further strengthen our risk management and controls Anna Cross: • Continue to simplify, standardise and automate Group Finance processes to improve effectiveness and efficiency • Oversee the effective management of risk and control across Group Finance • Manage capital and resources appropriately to ensure we comply with governance and regulatory requirements • Retain focus on the talent and culture agenda across Group Finance | | --- | --- | --- | ## Notes: 1. Pay-out of the PBT element will also depend on the CET1 ratio at the end of the performance year. If the CET1 ratio is below the MDA hurdle at the end of the performance year, the Committee will consider what part if any of this element should pay out. 2. Material items are defined as those large, atypical one-offs that are called out in the financial reporting. As in previous years, the exclusion is not automatic, and the Committee will determine whether each item should be treated as material for these purposes at the time that outcomes are determined. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## 2026-2028 LTIP awards and performance measures The Committee decided to grant awards under the 2026-2028 LTIP cycle to C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross with face values at grant equal to 550% and 500% of salary respectively – which will be based on salary before applying the 1 March 2026 increases outlined earlier in this Remuneration report. As every year, the Committee carefully reviewed the performance measures for the Executive Directors' 2026-2028 LTIP. It considered the ambitions and targets set out for 2026, as well as the new financial and business performance targets through to 2028, and concluded that the measures adopted last year for the 2025-2027 LTIP should remain unchanged for the 2026-2028 LTIP, save a very small change to how the RoTE measure is assessed. For the 2026-2028 LTIP, the RoTE assessment will be based on the average RoTE over the three-year performance period, measuring progress against the 2026 target, as well as the new RoTE target for 2028, whereas the last two LTIP cycles have assessed RoTE over a shorter, one- or two-year period. The 2026-2028 LTIP award will be subject to the following forward-looking performance measures: | Performance measure | Weighting | Threshold | Maximum vesting | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Financial measures | | | | | Average RoTE (excluding material items^{1}) | 50% | 10% of award vests for average 2026-2028 RoTE of 10.5%, rising on a straight-line basis | 50% of award vests for average 2026-2028 RoTE of 14.25% or higher | | Relative total shareholder return^{2} | 25% | 6.25% vests for performance at the median of the peer group^{3}, rising on a straight-line basis | 25% of award vests for performance at or above the peer group^{3} upper quartile | ## Strategic non-financial measures The evaluation will focus on a range of key metrics, with a detailed retrospective narrative on progress during the year. Performance against the measures will be assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 25%. The measures will focus on sustainability, customers and clients, and will likely include the following: | Sustainability, customers & clients | 25% | Sustainability (including climate) – with measures to include: • Financing clients' transition • Reducing our financed emissions • Achieving net zero operations • Supporting our communities Driving world-class outcomes for customers and clients – with measures to include: • Improve customer and client satisfaction • Reduce customer complaints • Maintain rankings and market share in Barclays Investment Bank • Increase digital engagement | | --- | --- | --- | ## Notes: 1. Material items are defined as those large, atypical one-offs that are called out in the financial reporting. The exclusion is not automatic, and the Committee will determine whether each item should be treated as material for these purposes at the time that outcomes are determined. 2. Performance is assessed over the period from 1 January 2026 to 31 December 2028. Start and end total shareholder return will be the Q4 average for 2025 and 2028 respectively and will be measured in GBP for each company. 3. The peer group is comprised of banks in the UK, Europe and North America of comparable size to Barclays and with a high degree of correlation to Barclays of weekly share price returns. The peer group for the 2026-2028 LTIP award is Bank of America, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Agricole, Deutsche Bank, Goldman Sachs, HSBC Holdings, JP Morgan Chase & Co, Lloyds Banking Group, Morgan Stanley, NatWest Group, Santander, Société Générale, Standard Chartered, and UBS Group. The award will vest in two tranches – 75% will vest on the third anniversary of grant, followed by a two-year holding period, and the remaining 25% will vest on the fourth anniversary of grant, followed by a one-year holding period, such that all the shares that vest must be retained until at least the fifth anniversary of grant (save for sales to cover taxes payable on vesting). The number of shares awarded to each Executive Director will be based on the market share price on the date of grant, and additional shares will accrue equivalent to dividends paid on unvested share awards (as is now permitted under the new UK bank pay regulations). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 148 # Remuneration report (continued) # Additional remuneration disclosures ## Group performance graph and Group Chief Executive remuneration The performance graph below compares the total shareholder return of Barclays shares with the total shareholder return of the FTSE 100 index over the 10 years ended 31 December 2025. The FTSE 100 index has been selected because it represents a cross-section of leading UK companies, of which Barclays is a long-standing constituent. ## Total shareholder return – rebased to 100 in 2015 Year ended 31 December ![img-62.jpeg](img-62.jpeg) ## Group Chief Executive remuneration (£000) | Year | 2016 | 2017 | 2018 | 2019 | 2020 | 2021 | | 2022 | 2023 | 2024 | 2025 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Group Chief Executive | Jes Staley^{1} | Jes Staley^{1} | Jes Staley^{1} | Jes Staley^{1} | Jes Staley^{2} | Jes Staley^{2} | C.S. Venkata-krishnan^{3} | C.S. Venkata-krishnan | C.S. Venkata-krishnan | C.S. Venkata-krishnan^{4} | C.S. Venkata-krishnan^{4} | | Single total remuneration figure for Group Chief Executive | 4,233 | 3,873 | 3,362 | 5,929 | 4,220 | 2,121 | 866 | 5,197 | 4,641 | 11,622 | 15,045 | | Annual bonus award as a % of maximum | 60.0% | 48.5% | 48.3% | 75.0% | 38.6% | n/a^{2} | 92.6% | 75.4% | 53.3% | 81.0% | 83.0% | | Long-term incentive plan vesting as a % of maximum | n/a^{5} | n/a^{5} | n/a^{5} | 48.5% | 23.0% | n/a^{2} | n/a^{5} | n/a^{5} | n/a^{5} | 67.5% | 77.3% | # Notes: 1. Jes Staley's remuneration figures for performance years 2016 to 2020 reflect the single total figures of remuneration as disclosed at the time. These have not been restated for the decision made by the Committee during 2023 that Jes Staley's unvested bonus and LTIP awards should be forfeited, as outlined in the Remuneration report 2023. 2. Jes Staley stepped down as Group Chief Executive on 31 October 2021. The remuneration shown for 2021 is in respect of his services as an Executive Director between 1 January 2021 and 31 October 2021. This figure does not include variable remuneration as the Committee determined that Jes Staley should be ineligible for 2021 bonus and should forfeit his unvested LTIP awards. 3. The 2021 remuneration shown is in respect of C.S. Venkatakrishnan's services during 2021 following his appointment as Group Chief Executive on 1 November 2021. 4. The 2024 remuneration figure in respect of C.S. Venkatakrishnan has been updated to reflect the LTIP amount based on the share price on the vesting date of the first tranche of the 2022-2024 LTIP as the LTIP value disclosed in the 2024 Remuneration report was an estimate, based on the Q4 2024 average share price, as the 2024 Annual Report was finalised prior to the vesting date. 5. Not applicable as the individual was not a participant in a long-term incentive cycle that vested in the period. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## Group Chief Executive pay ratios The table below shows, for each year since 2019, the ratios of the Group Chief Executive’s total remuneration to the total remuneration of UK employees. The change in these pay ratios from 2024 to 2025 is explained below the table. | | Option | 25th percentile | Median | 75th percentile | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 2025 | A | 360 x | 248 x | 148 x | | 2024^{1} | A | 290 x | 201 x | 118 x | | 2023 | A | 122 x | 83 x | 49 x | | 2022 | A | 154 x | 101 x | 58 x | | 2021^{2} | A | 95 x | 62 x | 35 x | | 2020^{3} | A | 144 x | 95 x | 53 x | | 2019^{3} | A | 213 x | 140 x | 77 x | ## Notes: 1. 2024 Group Chief Executive pay ratio figures have been updated to reflect the actual 2022-2024 LTIP value based on the share price at the time of vesting of the first tranche. The LTIP value disclosed in the 2024 Remuneration report was an estimate, based on the Q4 2024 average share price. 2. 2021 pay ratios reflect the sum of the single total figures for 2021 remuneration for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Jes Staley, for their respective periods of service as Group Chief Executive in 2021. Jes Staley was ineligible for an annual bonus in respect of 2021 after he stepped down as Group Chief Executive. 3. The 2020 and 2019 ratios reflect the disclosed single total figures for 2020 and 2019 remuneration for Jes Staley and have not been restated for the decision made by the Committee in 2023 that Jes Staley's unvested bonus and LTIP awards should be forfeited, as outlined in the Remuneration report 2023. The Directors' Remuneration Report regulations provide three options that companies may use to calculate total pay for the employees at the 25th percentile, median and 75th percentile. Option A was selected as this is the most robust methodology, calculating total pay for all employees on the same basis that the single total figure for remuneration is calculated for Executive Directors. Total pay for each employee includes earned fixed pay, which is made up of salary, any Role Based Pay and any relevant allowances, annual incentives awarded for 2025 performance, and an estimate of pension and benefits for 2025 (based on what new UK hires at each corporate grade currently receive). Other elements of pay such as overtime and shift allowances have been excluded as the amounts are not material. Calculations use full-time equivalent pay data taken from our HR systems for all UK employees, using the employee population on 31 December for each year. Total pay and fixed pay for the UK employees at the 25th percentile, median and 75th percentile are set out in the table below. | | 25th percentile | | Median | | 75th percentile | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Total pay | Fixed pay | Total pay | Fixed pay | Total pay | Fixed pay | | 2025 | £41,783 | £34,602 | £60,603 | £48,629 | £101,858 | £79,750 | | 2024 | £40,094 | £33,277 | £57,854 | £46,628 | £98,224 | £77,333 | | 2023 | £38,194 | £31,897 | £55,801 | £45,230 | £95,341 | £75,583 | | 2022 | £33,711 | £28,300 | £51,493 | £41,608 | £89,911 | £71,071 | | 2021 | £31,404 | £26,035 | £48,253 | £39,461 | £85,407 | £67,408 | | 2020 | £29,380 | £24,706 | £44,631 | £37,460 | £79,324 | £64,272 | | 2019 | £27,875 | £23,348 | £42,362 | £35,158 | £77,488 | £62,263 | The pay ratios have increased between 2024 and 2025. This is due to the increase in the Group Chief Executive single total figure for remuneration, though employee pay has also increased, up 4%, 5% and 4% at the 25th percentile, median and 75th percentile respectively. The Group Chief Executive single total figure for 2025 remuneration is 29% higher than for 2024, largely due to two factors: - The majority of the increase is due to share price appreciation over the lifetime of the 2023-2025 LTIP award. The share price increased by 146% between the date of grant and the Q4 2025 average share price of £4.1493, on which the value vesting is estimated. This share price increase accounts for 59% of the LTIP value. The analysis of pay for the wider workforce does not capture any similar benefits from the increase to the share price, either on shares granted as part of deferred compensation or on shares employees acquired through participation in the Group's all-employee share plans. - The LTIP vesting outcome for the 2023-2025 LTIP is higher than for the previous LTIP due to improved performance against the financial measures (2023-2025: 77.3%; 2022-2024: 67.5%). More information on the LTIP vesting outcome is provided from page 140. The increase in the Group Chief Executive's maximum bonus opportunity, implemented following the approval of the DRP at the 2025 AGM, had only a small inflationary impact on the single total figure for 2025 remuneration. This is because the increase in bonus opportunity is largely offset by the fixed pay reduction, approved as part of the policy and effective 7 May 2025. Excluding share price appreciation on the LTIP, the 2025 CEO pay ratios would be 226:1, 156:1 and 93:1 compared to the employee 25th percentile, median and 75th percentile respectively. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) The Group Chief Executive pay ratios are an outcome of all remuneration decisions for the Executive Directors and the wider workforce that are made within the framework of the Group's remuneration philosophy. To ensure Executive Director remuneration outcomes are suitably commensurate with those of the wider workforce, the Committee specifically considers each year whether the annual bonus and LTIP outcomes for the Executive Directors appropriately reflect the Group's performance, and the remuneration outcomes for the wider workforce, when considering whether a discretionary adjustment should be made to the Executive Directors' incentive outcomes. In respect of the Group Chief Executive's 2025 annual bonus and 2023-2025 LTIP award vesting, the Committee concluded that no discretionary adjustments were warranted. The considerations are explained in more detail in the Committee Chair's annual statement. As such, the Committee is satisfied that the single total figure for 2025 remuneration for the Group Chief Executive, the total pay and fixed pay outcomes for UK employees, and the resulting pay ratios, reflect the application of the Group's remuneration philosophy and are commensurate with the pay outcomes for the wider workforce. # Annual percentage change in remuneration of Directors and employees The table below shows the percentage change in the Executive Directors' fixed pay, benefits and bonus each year between 2020 and 2025, compared with the percentage change in each of those components of pay for UK-based employees of Barclays Group and for employees of Barclays PLC, the Group's parent company. The percentage changes from 2024 to 2025 are explained below the table. For the Executive Directors, year-on-year percentage change figures are calculated using the single total figures for remuneration, annualised to a full-year equivalent where the individual served as an Executive Director for only part of the year. | | | Fixed pay | Benefits | Annual bonus | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 2024/2025 | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | (30%) | (20%) | 49% | | | Anna Cross | (31%) | 93% | 48% | | | Median UK employee | 4% | 10% | 12% | | | Median employee of Barclays PLC^{1} | 0% | 1% | 37% | | 2023/2024 | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 3% | (55%) | 56% | | | Anna Cross | 3% | (12%) | 52% | | | Median UK employee | 3% | 13% | 12% | | | Median employee of Barclays PLC^{1} | 2% | 2% | 20% | | 2022/2023 | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 3% | (38%) | (27%) | | | Anna Cross | 4% | 17% | (25%) | | | Median UK employee | 9% | 11% | (5%) | | | Median employee of Barclays PLC^{1} | 1% | 10% | (43%) | | 2021/2022 | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 2% | 853% | (16%) | | | Anna Cross | n/a | n/a | n/a | | | Tushar Morzaria | 2% | 82% | (20%) | | | Median UK employee | 5% | 10% | 3% | | | Median employee of Barclays PLC^{1} | 10% | 15% | (2%) | | 2020/2021 | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | n/a | n/a | n/a | | | Tushar Morzaria | 2% | (10%) | 152% | | | Jes Staley | 1% | (12%) | n/a | | | Median UK employee | 5% | 6% | 42% | | | Median employee of Barclays PLC^{1} | 11% | 0% | 38% | Note: 1 The Barclays PLC comparison is included because this is a statutory requirement, though Barclays PLC employs only a very small number of Head Office employees (61 in 2025). For C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross, the 2024 to 2025 fixed pay changes reflect the fixed pay reductions agreed under the DRP, effective 7 May 2025. The annual bonus outcomes for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross are up 49% and 48% respectively, largely due to increases in their respective maximum bonus opportunities, also agreed as part of the DRP, and largely offset by the fixed pay reductions. The percentage change in benefits is -20% for C.S. Venkatakrishnan and +93% for Anna Cross, reflecting relatively small changes in absolute value – a decrease of c.£19,000 and an increase of c.£14,000 respectively. For UK employees across the Group, the 4% increase in median fixed pay primarily reflects the salary increases awarded in early 2025 following last year's pay review process, while the 12% increase in median bonus reflects the increase in this year's Group incentive pool. The 10% increase in benefits costs is largely due to an increase in the cost of providing private medical cover in 2025. Barclays PLC only employs a very small number of predominantly senior Head Office employees (61 in 2025), and there is frequent movement of employees between Barclays PLC and other entities within the Barclays Group. For comparison purposes, the Barclays PLC figures are therefore based only on the 48 individuals who were employed by Barclays PLC in both years. The increase in median bonus is larger for this population than the increase for UK-based employees of Barclays Group. This is due to some relatively large year-on-year bonus increases across this very small population. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) The table below shows the percentage change in fee each year between 2020 and 2025 for the Chairman and the Non-Executive Directors serving on the Barclays PLC Board during 2025, including fees for Board Committee memberships and/or subsidiary board positions. The changes in fees shown relate to changes in responsibilities of the Non-Executive Directors and annual fee increases. The Non-Executive Directors appointed to the Barclays PLC Board during 2025 are not shown, as they did not receive relevant fees prior to 2025 so no percentage change figures can be calculated. | | 2024/2025 fees^{1,2} | 2023/2024 fees^{1} | 2022/2023 fees^{1} | 2021/2022 fees^{1} | 2020/2021 fees^{1} | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Nigel Higgins | 8% | 2% | 5% | 0% | 0% | | Robert Berry^{3} | 14% | 5% | 9% | n/a | n/a | | Tim Breedon^{4} | 3% | 0% | 1% | (19%) | 64% | | Dawn Fitzpatrick^{5} | 13% | 5% | 11% | 18% | 14% | | Mary Francis | 2% | 4% | 24% | 5% | 8% | | Brian Gilvary | 2% | (2%) | 2% | 3% | 95% | | Sir John Kingman | 2% | 3% | n/a | n/a | n/a | | Marc Moses^{6} | 31% | 2% | n/a | n/a | n/a | | Diane Schueneman^{7} | 4% | (2%) | 12% | 4% | (4%) | | Brian Shea^{8} | 23% | n/a | n/a | n/a | n/a | | Julia Wilson | 8% | 21% | 107% | 13% | n/a | # Notes: 1. In the year that a Non-Executive Director was appointed to or stepped down from the Barclays PLC Board, fees for that year are annualised to a full-year equivalent. Additional information has been provided in the notes that follow where 2024/2025 percentage changes in fees, which excludes benefits, were greater than 10%. 2. Fees were increased by 8% for the Group Chairman and by 2% for the Non-Executive Director roles on the Barclays PLC Board and its Board Committees, with effect from 1 January 2025. 3. The increase in fees paid from 2024 to 2025 for Robert Berry was primarily driven by a review and increase in fees for Non-Executive Directors of Barclays Capital Securities Limited. 4. Tim Breedon stepped down from the Barclays PLC Board with effect from 30 April 2025. 5. The increase in fees paid from 2024 to 2025 for Dawn Fitzpatrick was primarily driven by a review and increase in fees for Non-Executive Directors of Barclays Capital Securities Limited. 6. Marc Moses joined the Barclays Capital Securities Limited Board with effect from 1 January 2025 and was appointed as its Chair on 15 September 2025, therefore increasing the fees paid from 2024 to 2025. 7. Diane Schueneman stepped down from the Barclays PLC and Barclays Execution Services Limited Boards with effect from 31 January 2025. 8. Brian Shea was appointed to the Barclays PLC and Barclays Execution Services Limited Boards with effect from 19 July 2024 and received pro-rata fees for that year. For 2025, the full-year fees were paid. He was also appointed Chair of Barclays Execution Services Limited with effect from 1 February 2025 and received pro-rata fees for this role that year, therefore increasing the fees paid from 2024 to 2025. # Relative importance of spend on pay A year-on-year comparison of Group compensation costs and of distributions to shareholders is shown below. The distributions shown relate to dividends paid and share buyback programmes completed during the year. The distributions for 2025 do not include the dividends and share buyback programme announced on 10 February 2026. ![img-63.jpeg](img-63.jpeg) Group compensation costs £m ![img-64.jpeg](img-64.jpeg) Distribution to shareholders $^9$ £m A Non-performance compensation costs B Performance costs A Share buybacks B Dividends # Notes: 9. The chart shows the value of dividends paid and the repurchase of shares from share buyback programmes during the year. For example, for 2025, the figure includes the 2025 interim dividend and the full year dividend declared in relation to 2024, and three share buyback programmes together totalling £2,229m. The shareholder distributions announced on 10 February 2026 are not reflected in this chart. 10. Relates to costs arising from salaries and other elements of fixed pay, social security costs, post-retirement benefits and other compensation costs. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) # Chairman and Non-Executive Directors Remuneration for Non-Executive Directors reflects their responsibilities and time commitment, and the fees paid are comparable with those paid in Barclays' international peer group, with a particular focus on the UK-headquartered banks. Fees shown reflect actual fees paid for periods of service on the Board, any Board Committees and, where applicable, subsidiary Boards and Board Committees. Non-Executive Directors are reimbursed expenses that are incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by Barclays. Chairman and Non-Executive Directors: Single total figure for 2025 remuneration | | Fees | | Benefits | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | | | £000 | £000 | £000 | £000 | £000 | £000 | | Chairman | | | | | | | | Nigel Higgins¹ | 925 | 857 | 12 | 9 | 937 | 866 | | Non-Executive Directors | | | | | | | | Robert Berry | 328 | 288 | — | — | 328 | 288 | | Tim Breedon² | 136 | 396 | — | — | 136 | 396 | | Dawn Fitzpatrick | 263 | 233 | — | — | 263 | 233 | | Mary Francis | 222 | 218 | — | — | 222 | 218 | | Brian Gilvary | 246 | 241 | — | — | 246 | 241 | | Sir John Kingman | 601 | 589 | — | — | 601 | 589 | | Diony Lebot³ | 103 | — | — | — | 103 | — | | Mary Mack⁴ | 76 | — | — | — | 76 | — | | Marc Moses | 253 | 193 | — | — | 253 | 193 | | Diane Schueneman⁵ | 37 | 425 | — | — | 37 | 425 | | Brian Shea | 211 | 77 | — | — | 211 | 77 | | Julia Wilson | 366 | 338 | — | — | 366 | 338 | # Notes: 1. Nigel Higgins does not receive a fee in respect of his role as Chairman of Barclays Bank PLC. 2. Tim Breedon stepped down from the Board with effect from 30 April 2025. 3. Diony Lebot was appointed to the Board with effect from 17 March 2025. 4. Mary Mack was appointed to the Board with effect from 1 June 2025. 5. Diane Schueneman stepped down from the Board with effect from 31 January 2025. # Chairman and Non-Executive Directors: Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2026 The fees for the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors (including Board and Board Committee roles) are reviewed annually. A review was undertaken in the early part of 2026 and the fees for the Chairman were increased by 8.1% and fees for the Non-Executive Directors were increased by c.3.2% (with amounts rounded down to the nearest £100), both with effect from 1 January 2026. The Board intends to undertake a more detailed review of Non-Executive Directors' fees over the coming year. The updated fees are set out in the table below, and further information regarding fee increases is available in the Committee Chair's annual statement from page 116. | | 1 January 2026 | 1 January 2025 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £ | £ | | Chairman¹ | 1,000,000 | 925,000 | | Board member | 101,400 | 98,300 | | Additional responsibilities | | | | Senior Independent Director | 40,500 | 39,300 | | Chair of Board Audit or Risk Committee | 90,100 | 87,400 | | Chair of Board Remuneration Committee | 78,900 | 76,500 | | Membership of Board Audit, Remuneration or Risk Committee | 33,700 | 32,700 | | Membership of Board Nominations Committee | 16,900 | 16,400 | | Membership of Board Sustainability Committee | 16,000 | 15,600 | # Note: 1. The Chairman does not receive any fees in addition to the Chairman fees shown above. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) # Directors' shareholdings and share interests ## Interests in Barclays PLC shares The table below shows the number of ordinary shares of 25p each of the Company (ordinary shares) owned beneficially by each person who served as a Director during 2025 (including any ordinary shares owned beneficially by their connected persons). The holding of these ordinary shares carries no additional or different voting rights to those of other holders or holdings of ordinary shares. The rights attaching to ordinary shares are set out on page 113. For the Executive Directors, the table shows the number of ordinary shares over which each holds awards that are subject either to deferral terms or deferral terms plus performance measures, and the number of shares owned outright includes shares purchased by the Director as well as shares received in relation to remuneration. The numbers shown for shares that are subject to performance measures represent the maximum number of shares that may be released if those performance measures were to be satisfied in full. All Barclays employees, including the Executive Directors, are prohibited from investment activities that may create conflicts of interest, and in particular from using personal hedging strategies to undermine the risk alignment effects embedded in remuneration, or any other hedging in respect of Barclays securities. The total share interests at 6 February 2026, being the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report, were the same as shown below for all Directors in service as at 31 December 2025. Each Director's individual shareholding constituted less than 1% of the issued share capital of the Company as at 31 December 2025 and 6 February 2026. The Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors do not currently participate in any share option plans operated by Barclays. | Interests in Barclays PLC shares as at 31 December 2025 (or date of retirement from the Board, if earlier)1 | Owned outright | Unvested deferred awards | | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Subject to performance measures | Not subject to performance measures | | | Executive Directors | | | | | | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 4,897,066 | 9,093,764 | 3,306,166 | 17,296,996 | | Anna Cross | 1,053,937 | 5,258,511 | 652,355 | 6,964,803 | | Chairman | | | | | | Nigel Higgins | 1,908,754 | — | — | 1,908,754 | | Non-Executive Directors | | | | | | Robert Berry | 30,344 | — | — | 30,344 | | Tim Breedon2 | 235,449 | — | — | 235,449 | | Dawn Fitzpatrick | 974,775 | — | — | 974,775 | | Mary Francis | 102,534 | — | — | 102,534 | | Brian Gilvary | 184,252 | — | — | 184,252 | | Sir John Kingman | 15,680 | — | — | 15,680 | | Diony Lebot | 1,616 | — | — | 1,616 | | Mary Mack | 907 | — | — | 907 | | Marc Moses | 19,121 | — | — | 19,121 | | Diane Schueneman3 | 144,962 | — | — | 144,962 | | Brian Shea | 6,114 | — | — | 6,114 | | Julia Wilson | 46,952 | — | — | 46,952 | Notes: 1. Where American Depository Shares (ADS) are held, the ordinary shares equivalent is shown in the table. One ADS is the equivalent of four ordinary shares. 2. Tim Breedon stepped down from the Board with effect from 30 April 2025 and as a result his share interests are shown as at that date. 3. Diane Schueneman stepped down from the Board with effect from 31 January 2025 and as a result her share interests are shown as at that date. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## Executive Directors' shareholdings and share interests The charts below show the value of Barclays shares held as at 31 December 2025 by C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Anna Cross, in each case using the Q4 2025 average Barclays ordinary share price of £4.1493. Under the DRP, Executive Directors have a contractual obligation to build up the required shareholding within five years from their date of appointment as an Executive Director. For C.S. Venkatakrishnan, the shareholding requirement is 550% of year-end salary, and for Anna Cross it is 500% of year-end salary. For two years after stepping down as an Executive Director, they must maintain a shareholding at a level equal to the shareholding required immediately prior to stepping down, or the actual number of shares held on stepping down if lower (subject to the Committee determining that the resulting level of shareholding is appropriate given the relevant Executive Director’s tenure). Barclays shares held beneficially by each Executive Director count towards the shareholding requirement, as well as unvested shares that are not subject to performance conditions (net of estimated income tax and social security). Unvested shares that are still subject to performance conditions do not count towards the shareholding requirements, but contribute to aligning the Executive Directors' interests with those of shareholders through share price exposure, and are therefore also shown below (net of estimated income tax and social security). For the unvested shares subject to performance conditions, the proportion that is ultimately released may range from 0% to 100% depending on the achievement of the performance measures for each award, and on continued employment in accordance with the relevant plan rules and the DRP. Executive Directors are issued a shareholding statement twice yearly, reminding them of the level of shareholding they are required to build and maintain under the shareholding requirement, and informing them of the value of their current holdings. As at 31 December 2025, C.S. Venkatakrishnan's and Anna Cross's shareholding exceeded their respective shareholding requirements. After an Executive Director has stepped down, some of the continuing shareholding requirement will likely be met via shares held within the Group’s employee share plans and nominee accounts. In many cases this will be sufficient to cover the requirement in full. To the extent it is not, compliance with the balance of the requirement will be monitored and maintained through self-certification. | C.S. Venkatakrishnan £000 | | | Anna Cross £000 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Actual | A: 23,516 | B: 17,923 | Actual | A: 5,808 | B: 11,564 | | Requirement | C: 8,745 | | Requirement | C: 4,750 | | | Based on 31 December 2025 salary of £1,590k. | | | Based on 31 December 2025 salary of £950k. | | | A Actual shareholdings, including unvested shares not subject to performance conditions (estimated after-tax value) B Unvested shares subject to performance conditions (estimated after-tax value), which do not count towards the shareholding requirement C Shareholding requirement ## Payments to former Directors ### Former Group Finance Director: Tushar Morzaria In 2025, Tushar Morzaria was provided with UK and US tax compliance services in respect of Barclays employment income. ### Former Group Finance Director: Chris Lucas As disclosed in the 2013 Remuneration report (page 115), Chris Lucas was eligible to receive life assurance cover, private medical cover and payments under the Executive Income Protection Plan (EIPP). These benefits ceased on 22 September 2025. ### Former Non-Executive Director: Diane Schueneman Following Diane Schueneman stepping down as a Non-Executive Director on 31 January 2025, she remained a member of the Barclays US LLC (the US Intermediate Holding Company) Board. Diane received fees of $240,075 between 1 February 2025 and 31 December 2025 for this role. ### Former Non-Executive Director: Tim Breedon Following Tim Breedon stepping down as a Non-Executive Director on 30 April 2025, he remained the Chair and member of the Barclays Bank Ireland PLC Board. Tim received fees of €240,267 between 1 May 2025 and 31 December 2025 for this role. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) # Previous AGM voting outcomes The table below shows the shareholder voting results in respect of our 2024 Remuneration report and DRP approved by shareholders at the AGM held on 7 May 2025. | | For (% of votes cast and total number) | Against (% of votes cast and total number) | Withheld (total number) | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Vote on the 2024 Remuneration report at the 2025 AGM | 98.00% | 2.00% | | | | 9,825,476,891 | 200,513,221 | 11,251,816 | | Vote on the Directors’ Remuneration Policy at the 2025 AGM | 96.98% | 3.02% | | | | 9,709,663,457 | 302,390,857 | 25,187,614 | # Barclays Board Remuneration Committee ## Committee responsibilities The Board Remuneration Committee is responsible for overseeing remuneration at Barclays. The role of the Committee, as set out in its Terms of Reference, is to: - Set the overarching principles and parameters of remuneration policy across the Group - Consider and approve the remuneration arrangements of (i) the Group Chair, (ii) the Executive Directors, (iii) members of the Barclays Group Executive Committee and any other senior executives specified by the Committee from time to time, and (iv) all other Group employees whose total annual compensation exceeds an amount determined by the Committee from time to time - Exercise oversight over remuneration issues (including retirement benefits). The Committee’s Terms of Reference are available at home.barclays/who-we-are/our-governance/board-committees # Advisers to the Committee The Committee appointed PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC) as its independent adviser in October 2017. The Committee considered the advice provided by PwC to the Committee during the year and was satisfied that the advice is independent and objective. PwC is a signatory to the voluntary code of conduct in relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. PwC was paid £194,902 (excluding VAT) in fees for its advice to the Committee in 2025 relating to the remuneration of the Directors (either exclusively or along with other employees within the Committee’s Terms of Reference). In addition to advising the Committee, PwC provided unrelated consulting advice to the Group, covering strategic business planning, regulatory compliance, governance, risk and controls, target operating model design, cost optimisation, taxation, technology enablement, pensions and benefits, workforce and HR transformation, and sustainability including ESG frameworks. Throughout 2025, Willis Towers Watson (WTW) provided the Committee with market data on compensation, as context when considering incentive levels and remuneration packages. WTW was paid £79,000 (excluding VAT) in fees for these services. In addition to the services provided to the Committee, WTW also provides market data on compensation for other roles below Board level, pensions and benefits advice and brokerage services to the Barclays Group, and administration services to a number of the Group's pension funds. In the course of its deliberations, the Committee also considered the views of the Group Chief Executive, the Group Human Resources Director and the Group Reward and Performance Director/Co-Heads of Reward and Performance. The Group Finance Director and the Group Chief Risk Officer provided regular updates on Group and business financial performance and risk matters respectively. The Head of Corporate Communications attended when requested to advise on reward communications and disclosures. The Company Secretary advised on governance-related matters. No Barclays employee or Director was responsible for decisions of the Committee relating to his or her own remuneration. No other advisers provided services to the Committee in the year. # Committee effectiveness in 2025 An internal evaluation of the performance of the Committee was conducted for 2025, in line with the provisions of the Code. The results of the review confirmed that the Committee was operating effectively. Further information on the review of the Board and its Committees can be found in the Board Nominations Committee report from page 84. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Remuneration report (continued) ## Committee activity in 2025 and early 2026 The following table summarises the Committee’s activity during 2025¹, and at the January and February 2026 meetings at which remuneration decisions reported in this Remuneration report were finalised. The Committee is also regularly provided with updates on: the operation of its Remuneration Control Framework, headcount and employee attrition, and extant LTIP performance. | | | January 2025 | February 2025 | June 2025 | October 2025 | December 2025 | January 2026² | February 2026 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Overall remuneration | Finance and Risk updates | • | • | | • | • | • | • | | | Incentive funding including risk and control adjustments | • | • | | • | • | • | • | | | Remuneration report 2024 | • | • | | | | | | | | Group budgets for fixed pay increases | • | • | | • | • | • | | | | Wider workforce considerations | • | • | • | • | • | • | • | | | Incentive funding approach | | | • | | | | | | | Barclays’ Fair Pay Agenda | • | • | | | • | • | • | | | Regulatory changes for Material Risk Takers | | | • | • | • | • | | | | All-colleague share award | | | | • | • | | • | | | Remuneration report 2025 | | | | | • | • | • | | Executive Directors’ and senior executives’ remuneration | Executive Directors’ and senior executives’ bonus outcomes | • | • | | | • | • | • | | | Directors’ Remuneration Policy | • | • | | | | | | | | Annual bonus and LTIP performance measures and target calibration | • | • | | | • | • | | | Governance | Regulatory and stakeholder matters | • | • | • | • | • | • | • | | | Discussion with independent adviser | • | • | • | • | • | • | • | | | Remuneration Review Panel update | | | • | • | • | | • | | | Review of Committee effectiveness | | • | | | | | • | Notes: 1 During 2025, there were five scheduled Committee meetings and one ad hoc Committee meeting was called. 2 Two meetings were held in January 2026. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 157 # Other Governance This section aims to provide an overview of certain governance matters of particular relevance to ESG ratings agencies and investors across a range of sustainability matters. It covers topics such as our Code of Conduct, whistleblowing, tax, financial crime, health and safety and how we manage our data privacy and security as well as resilience. This section also includes our approach to managing social and environmental impacts as well as our Governance disclosures as part of the TCFD recommendations. This section does not discuss general corporate governance matters. Refer to the Board Governance report from page 71 in the Annual Report for information relating to the Board, ExCo and Board Committees, our Board governance framework and how we complied with the requirements of the 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code during 2025. | Climate and sustainability governance | 158 | | --- | --- | | Managing impacts in lending and financing | 163 | | Human rights / Modern slavery | 165 | | Our supply chain | 167 | | Supporting our customers | 168 | | The Barclays Way | 171 | | Whistleblowing | 172 | | Tax | 173 | | Financial crime | 175 | | Health and safety | 176 | | Managing data privacy, security and resilience | 177 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 158 # Other Governance # Climate and sustainability governance Oversight and management of climate and sustainability-related issues are embedded within our governance structure¹. Barclays' climate and sustainability governance structure consists of the Barclays PLC Board (Board) and its Committees along with Executive and Management Committees which span both business and legal entity lines. The Board sets the Group's climate and sustainability strategy and oversees its implementation by senior management. | Barclays PLC Board | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Board Sustainability Committee | Board Risk Committee | Board Audit Committee | Board Remuneration Committee | | | | Group Executive Committee (Group ExCo) | | Group Risk Committee | | | | | Group Sustainability Committee | Disclosure Committee | Group Reputation Risk Committee | Climate Risk Committee | | | | Business / Legal Entity Functions / Committees and Forums | | | | | | | Operational Sustainability Steering Committee | BBPLC Business-Level Committees for transaction reviews | Principal Investments Equity Committee | Sustainability Change Portfolio Governance Board | | | | | | | | | | | Group Chief Compliance Officer | Group Chief Operating Officer | Group Chief Risk Officer | Business CEOs | Group Finance Director | Group Head of PPCR | | Group Sustainability Chief Information Officer | Group Head of Climate Risk | BX Risk and Finance Chief Operating Officer | Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance | Head of Sustainability, Group | Head of Sustainability, Business | # Notes: 1. The committees, forums and governance bodies described here are non-exhaustive and their construct and Terms of Reference may vary on a legal entity basis or across the Group. 2. The presentation of Group Committees and senior management is not directly illustrative of the committees / forums they report into. # Climate and sustainability governance changes during 2025 In 2025, two new leadership roles were established within Group Sustainability: Head of Sustainability, Group and Head of Sustainability, Business, see page 162. Both roles report to the Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance, and were created to enhance the Group's ability to deliver on its sustainability ambitions by seeking to align strategic policy development with effective implementation of sustainability policies and environmental and social risk management across Barclays. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Board and Board Committee oversight of climate and sustainability-related risks and opportunities Roles and responsibilities of the Board and Board Committees with respect to climate and sustainability-related matters | Board | Board Sustainability Committee | Board Risk Committee | Board Audit Committee | Board Remuneration Committee | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Responsible for the overall leadership of the Group (with direct oversight of strategy, culture and strategic reputational matters relating to the Group). The Board sets the Group’s strategy, including in respect of climate and sustainability matters. | Responsible for oversight of climate matters and the Group’s sustainability agenda (including in relation to nature and human rights). The Committee supports the Board in considering the suitability and monitoring the implementation of the Group’s climate and sustainability strategy. | Responsible for monitoring principal risks (including climate risk), considering the Group’s risk appetite and tolerances, along with reviewing the Group’s risk profile and commissioning, receiving and considering reports on key risk issues. | Responsible for overseeing the integrity of the Group’s financial disclosures and the effectiveness of the internal control environment. The Committee oversees financial and narrative reporting, which encompasses climate and sustainability disclosures within the Annual Report. | Responsible for setting the overarching principles and parameters of remuneration policy across the Group. The Committee has responsibility for aligning Executive Director remuneration with strategic priorities, including in relation to climate and sustainability matters. | ## Barclays PLC Board The Board and, as appropriate, its Committees are responsible for the oversight of climate and sustainability matters, including climate-related risks and opportunities. During 2025, the Board received four reports from the Board Sustainability Committee, with a key focus on the Barclays Transition Update. Other matters covered included updates on Barclays' approach to nature and managing human rights risk. The Board also received an update on the Group's sustainable finance strategy. Please see the Key Board activities section from page 80 for further detail about what the Board considered in relation to climate and sustainability matters in 2025. Outside of formal Board briefings, the Group Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility and Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance also engaged with Board members on matters relating to the Group's climate and sustainability strategy. The Board is supported in its work by its Committees, each of which has its own Committee Terms of Reference setting out its remit and decision-making powers. The Chairs of each Committee report regularly on their Committee's work to the Board. ## Board Sustainability Committee During 2025, the Board Sustainability Committee met four times. It played a key role in reviewing the Barclays Transition Update ahead of its approval by the Board. It was kept updated on external developments and stakeholder perspectives in relation to climate and sustainability matters. The Committee also continued to have oversight of wider sustainability priorities, including nature and human rights. Please refer to the report of the Board Sustainability Committee from page 105 for further detail on the work of this Committee. ## Board Risk Committee (BRC) The Board Risk Committee plays an important role in overseeing and challenging the Group's progress towards achieving its climate targets and assessing the impact of climate risk on the Group's overall risk profile and financial position. During 2025, the BRC received regular updates from the Head of Climate Risk. These covered matters including external regulatory trends, the global policy environment, progress against financed emissions reduction targets and actions taken to address physical risks. The BRC also received quarterly climate risk dashboards during the year, providing updates on key climate risk metrics. The BRC received regular business risk updates from the main business areas during the year which included assessments of principal risks, including climate risk. Please refer to the report of the BRC from page 100 for further detail on the work of this Committee. ## Board Audit Committee The Board Audit Committee has oversight of the climate and sustainability disclosures within the Group's narrative reporting, seeking views from the Board Sustainability Committee on those disclosures where appropriate. During 2025, the Board Audit Committee received updates on developments in sustainability reporting, including those required by the European Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive, and reviewed how the impacts of climate and sustainability reporting requirements are reflected in preparing the Group's financial statements. Please refer to the report of the Board Audit Committee from page 92 for further detail on the work of this Committee. ## Board Remuneration Committee The principal activities of the Board Remuneration Committee include: setting the Barclays Group Remuneration Policy; determining the incentive pool, factoring in climate and sustainability-related performance measures that impact annual bonus awards of all employees, and; aligning Executive Director remuneration with strategic priorities, including in relation to climate and sustainability matters. For 2025, performance against climate and sustainability-related measures was considered in the determination of the incentive pool, impacting bonus awards of all employees. Climate and sustainability-related measures are also included in the 2026-2028 LTIP for the Executive Directors of Barclays PLC as part of the broader category of measures relating to Sustainability, customers & clients, weighted at 25%. These measures will likely include financing clients' transition, reducing our financed emissions and achieving net zero operations, as well as supporting our communities. Please refer to the Remuneration report from page 116 for further detail on the work of the Board Remuneration Committee. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Management's role in assessing and managing sustainability and climate-related risks and opportunities Oversight and management of Barclays' climate and sustainability strategy continues to be embedded in business-as-usual management structures, including executive committees. These committees are mandated and form part of Barclays' formal governance architecture. Each committee is itself governed by Terms of Reference that lay out the duties, decision-making authority and escalation route of any material issues. The executive management committees receive regular briefings on matters including climate change and consider both risks and opportunities. Climate and sustainability-related risks are assessed and escalated where relevant through the various risk forums. ## Group Executive Committee (Group ExCo) The Group Head of PPCR is a member of Group ExCo and is accountable for ensuring the Group's societal purpose is present in strategic decision-making at the highest levels in the organisation. The Group Head of PPCR, and their team, regularly update Group ExCo on a range of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility matters, covering key government and regulatory policy, regulator engagement and sustainability matters. Updates provided to Group ExCo in 2025 on sustainability matters included updates on the Barclays Transition Update, planned enhancements to Barclays' approach to human rights and the Group's sustainable finance strategy. The Group Chief Risk Officer is a member of Group ExCo and is accountable for the approach to managing climate-related financial and operational risks to Barclays; this is implemented within the Group's Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF). The Group Sustainability Committee, established by Group ExCo in 2023, continued to provide updates to Group ExCo on a range of sustainability issues. ## Executive remuneration Annual bonus outcomes and Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award outcomes for the Executive Directors of Barclays PLC are assessed against a framework of measures set by the Remuneration Committee at the start of the performance period for each award. For the Executive Directors of Barclays PLC, an element of their 2026-2028 LTIP award will be driven by non-financial performance measures, including measures relating to climate and sustainability. The climate and sustainability-related measures will be included as part of the broader category of measures relating to Sustainability, customers & clients, weighted at 25%. The climate and sustainability measures will likely include financing clients' transition, reducing our financed emissions and achieving net zero operations, alongside other measures relating to supporting our communities. See the Remuneration report from page 116. ## Group Risk Committee (GRC) The GRC is the designated forum to review and recommend, where necessary, submissions to the BRC. The GRC is the most senior risk executive body responsible for reviewing and overseeing the risk profile and risk practices of the Group. This includes coverage of all principal risks (including climate risk), and any other material risks, to which the Group is exposed. In relation to climate, the GRC reviews and recommends proposed risk appetite for climate risk and relevant limits to the BRC. The GRC oversees monitoring and reporting of climate risk, reviews periodic updates on exposures to climate risk (including physical and transition risk metrics), progress against financed emission reduction targets for sectors and mitigation plans, external developments and trends on climate risk, results of scenario analysis and stress test exercises including implications on risk appetite and limits. The GRC is also responsible for the oversight of design and effectiveness of risk frameworks for managing climate risk. The GRC receives escalations from the Climate Risk Committee, noting none were received in 2025. ## Group Sustainability Committee (GSC) The GSC is a sub-committee of Group ExCo and is chaired by the Group Head of PPCR. GSC members include senior sustainability representatives from across the businesses, including the Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance, as well as members representing key functions across the Group. The GSC is responsible for approving and recommending sustainability matters on behalf of Group ExCo to the Board Sustainability Committee as appropriate. The GSC is also responsible for determining, agreeing or recommending sustainability position statements, frameworks, targets, relevant disclosures and advocacy areas necessary to support strategy delivery and agreeing the strategic change priorities to support overall sustainability strategy. ## Climate Risk Committee (CRC) The CRC was established in 2021 as a subcommittee of the GRC to support the oversight of climate risk. The authority of the CRC is delegated by the GRC, and the Group Head of Climate Risk is the Chair of CRC. The CRC has reviewed or approved a range of updates, including those on risk appetite and plans for embedding climate risk considerations into business activities. Additionally, quantitative and qualitative metrics, emerging climate risk trends and progress against targets are presented and discussed at the CRC. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Disclosure Committee (DisCom) DisCom, which is chaired by the Group Finance Director, has been set up as a subcommittee of the Group ExCo. DisCom is convened to review and monitor the integrity of the Group’s financial and narrative statements and other information provided to stakeholders, whether by means of announcement or otherwise. In addition to reporting to the Group ExCo, DisCom also reports to the Board Audit Committee (BAC). DisCom is convened to undertake a number of specific duties, including: - financial reporting: to review and monitor the integrity of the Group’s financial statements, interim management statements, preliminary announcements (if prepared), and any other formal announcements relating to the Group’s financial performance; and - narrative reporting: to review and monitor the integrity of the Group’s narrative statements, including but not limited to the BPLC, BBPLC and BBUKPLC Annual Reports, the BPLC Country Snapshot and the Modern Slavery Statement. ## Group Reputation Risk Committee (GRRC) The GRRC is a sub-committee of the Group ExCo which reviews and challenges, and directs as appropriate, the management and mitigation of Reputation Risk matters in the Barclays Group as they are brought to the attention of the GRRC via relevant Reputation Risk assessment and escalation processes. This includes Reputation Risk associated with climate and sustainability-related matters. The GRRC is co-chaired by the Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility and Group Chief Compliance Officer, and members include the Group Risk Officer and Group General Counsel. ## Group Chief Executive (Group CEO) The Group CEO is responsible for driving Barclays’ focus on external societal and environmental stewardship, and overseeing progress towards Barclays’ ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050. The Group CEO is Chair of Group ExCo. The Group CEO is closely involved in identifying and promoting the development of Barclays’ climate and sustainable finance growth opportunities in the transition to a low-carbon economy. The Group CEO chairs the Sustainable Markets Initiative’s (SMI) Financial Services Task Force, leading the CEO-led group on key themes including Nature and Transition Technologies. Participation in the SMI, an action-oriented, sector-led organisation, provides Barclays an opportunity to work with real economy players, providing insights that help us to best support our clients’ transitions. ## Chief Risk Officer (CRO) The Group CRO is accountable for the approach to managing climate-related impacts on financial and operational risks to Barclays. This encompasses management and oversight of risk processes for identification, assessment, measurement, monitoring, limit setting and the supporting governance. ## Group Head of PPCR The Group Head of PPCR leads the Group’s overall sustainability agenda. Specifically, the role is responsible for overseeing the development and implementation of Barclays’ sustainability strategy. ## Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance The Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance leads the Group Sustainability team and the Sustainable Finance teams, reporting jointly to the Group Head of PPCR, the Global Co-Head of Investment Banking and the Global Head of Markets. The role leads the strategic direction and execution of Barclays’ policies and practices across a broad range of sustainability matters, including climate change, nature and human rights as well as the development and execution of the Group’s sustainable finance strategy to support clients navigate the opportunities and challenges of the transition to a low-carbon economy. In these capacities, the role includes driving sustainable and transition finance growth, strengthening client support and transition advisory, as well as overseeing the development of standards and metrics to advance sustainable finance and supports innovation in sustainable product development. ## Group Head of Climate Risk The Group Head of Climate Risk is the accountable executive for the management and oversight of climate risk. The scope of climate risk (which is a principal risk within the ERMF) encompasses the management of financial and operational risks from climate change. The Group Head of Climate Risk reports directly to the Group CRO and is the Chair of CRC. The Group Head of Climate Risk is responsible for the development and implementation of climate risk governance, including ownership of Barclays’ Climate Risk Framework, Standard and Policy. The Group Head of Climate Risk is also responsible for integrating climate risk considerations into existing risk management processes and overseeing risk management activities for climate risk, including identifying, assessing, and monitoring climate risk drivers and proposing risk appetite, alongside setting limits and controls for managing climate-related impacts on financial and operational risks. The Group Head of Climate Risk also leads the development of climate risk methodologies and Barclays’ approach to financed emissions calculation, including the BlueTrack™ methodology. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Sustainability Chief Information Officer The Sustainability Chief Information Officer (CIO) integrates technology, data, AI and change execution expertise in a single function. The Sustainability CIO works in partnership with the business and functions to deliver new and enhance existing capabilities, which seek to enable and accelerate delivery against Barclays' sustainability strategy. ## Head of Sustainability, Group Leads development of Group-wide sustainability policy and strategy, setting Barclays' positioning on key sustainability topics and driving innovation through pilots, partnerships, and emerging commercial opportunities. Represents Group Sustainability externally with NGOs, investors, and global platforms while fostering collaboration and strategic engagement across the organisation. ## Head of Sustainability, Business Leads the implementation of Group-wide sustainability policies and environmental and social risk management across Barclays, providing specialist input on client and transaction due diligence and our Sustainable and Transition Finance Frameworks. Works closely with clients to understand their sustainability strategies and supports delivery of programmes that embed sustainability-related risk considerations, supporting long-term business resilience and growth. ## Implementation - business working-level committees, forums and reports ### Operational Sustainability Steering Committee The Operational Sustainability Steering Committee (OSSCo) is responsible for oversight of Barclays Execution Services' sustainability operations strategy. The OSSCo is chaired by the Barclays Execution Services Chief Operating Officer and comprises leadership from Corporate Real Estate Solutions (CRES) and Location Strategy, Procurement, Functions Technology, Climate Risk and Legal. The OSSCo approves and monitors progress against our sustainability operations targets and milestones, reviews sustainability operations programmes and provides strategic direction regarding the prioritisation of initiative deliverables. The OSSCo provides updates to the GSC annually. The GSC is responsible for approving and recommending sustainability matters on behalf of Group ExCo to the Board Sustainability Committee as appropriate. ### BBPLC business-level committees for transaction reviews Business-level committees are convened for senior management to review transactions with potential material Reputation Risk to Barclays. These may include transactions involving climate and sustainability-related risks. Where particularly heightened risks are identified, these transactions may be escalated to the Group Reputation Risk Committee. Matters reviewed by these committees include transactions, relationships, agreements, strategies and other business activities. ### Principal Investments Equity Committee The Principal Investments Equity Committee (the 'Committee') undertakes the senior approval responsibilities relating to the execution and management of all principal strategic equity and workout equity transactions managed on behalf of Barclays PLC and all other Barclays Group entities. The formation and authority of this Committee comes from the Group CEO, acting through the Group ExCo. The Committee consists of senior stakeholders who meet on a regular basis which, when considering the Barclays Climate Ventures portfolio, includes the Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance. ### Sustainability Change Portfolio Governance Board The Sustainability Change Portfolio Governance Board is responsible for the strategic integration, governance and control (including budgetary), prioritisation, risk management and approval of change (subject to agreed tolerances) of the Group Sustainability portfolio of work. The Board is chaired by the Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 163 # Other Governance # Managing impacts in lending and financing At Barclays, we recognise the importance of risk identification and management in the provision of financial services to our customers and clients. This supports the longevity of our business and also enhances our ability to serve our clients and support them in improving their own sustainability practices and disclosures. ## Managing environmental and social impacts We have developed an approach for sustainability-related matters which sits under the management of the Reputation Risk Principal Risk within the Barclays Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), and governs our identification, assessment and management of environmental and social impacts associated with our client and customer relationships and transactions in relevant sensitive sectors and areas. This approach is defined in an internal standard which reflects objectives and responsibilities for all areas of Barclays. Our position statements on Climate Change, Forestry and Agricultural Commodities, Protected Areas, and the Defence and Security Sector set out our approach to financing certain sensitive sectors. Further details about these position statements can be found on page 164 and Sustainability Resource Hub ## Enhanced due diligence Clients in-scope of the above mentioned position statements are subject to enhanced due diligence, via a detailed Sustainability Enhanced Due Diligence (SEDD) questionnaire, which is used to evaluate their performance on a range of environmental and social issues and may be supplemented by a review of client policies/procedures, further client engagement and adverse media checks as appropriate. This review generates an outcome based on alignment with position statements and identified environmental and social issues. The review outcome determines whether further review by the Environmental and Social Risk Management (ESRM) team within Group Sustainability is required, Client engagement may be undertaken as part of the periodic review cycle (either annual or biennial). We follow a risk-based approach where certain clients require further risk assessment prior to execution of transactions. We undertook 770 (2024:775) reviews in 2025, being a combination of client reviews and individual transaction reviews per sector detailed below. | Sector | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | Agriculture | 12 | 26 | | Commodity Traders | 7 | 6 | | Defence, Aerospace & Security | 490 | 426 | | Infrastructure | 5 | 0 | | Manufacturing | 5 | 1 | | Metals & Mining | 23 | 26 | | Oil & Gas | 89 | 106 | | Paper & Forestry | 12 | 14 | | Power & Utilities | 113 | 128 | | Other | 14 | 42 | | Total | 770 | 775 | ## Engagement As part of our management of environmental and social impacts, we may require further client engagement in relation to the specific environmental and social issues that we have identified as part of our SEDD process. We have used this engagement as an opportunity to gain a more detailed understanding of the risks and challenges that the client is facing and to better understand any climate transition plan that they may have. ## Escalation and decision-making We assess the risk of client relationships, and associated transactions, through SEDD, and escalate to the relevant business unit review committee (e.g. IB Sustainability Review Committee, BBPLC Transaction Review Committee), where appropriate, for consideration and, if transaction-related, a decision on whether to proceed. Business unit review committees comprise of business management and representatives from the control functions, including Reputation Risk. Should the front office business team or the ESRM team believe the issues are sufficiently material and the front office business team wish to proceed, these clients/ relationships would be escalated to the Group Reputation Risk Committee (GRRC) for more senior consideration and decision. GRRC includes representation from the Group Executive Committee. These Committees may make the following determinations: - approve the transaction or relationship; - reject the transaction or relationship; - approve the transaction or relationship subject to prescribed modifications; and - escalate the review of the transaction or relationship to the Barclays Group CEO. Further details about the roles of these Committees and their activities during 2025 are set out on pages 160 and 161. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Equator Principles For project finance, we conduct assessments for environmental and social risks and impacts in line with the Equator Principles including, where appropriate, relevant International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards. Barclays categorises projects based on their risk and impact profile per Equator Principles guidance and will conduct commensurate due diligence (often with the support of an independent consultant) and will work with the client to address any material identified gaps. Barclays was one of the four banks that contributed to developing the Principles ahead of their launch in 2003. During 2025, 11 transactions (2024: six transactions) reached financial close and were reviewed for environmental and social risks and impacts under the scope of the Equator Principles. Further details can be found at: equator-principles.com/ ## Equator Principles transactions in 2025 | Category | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Sector | A | B | C | | Infrastructure | 1 | 2 | | | Power | 2 | 6 | | | Region | A | B | C | | Americas | 1 | 3 | | | EMEA | 2 | 5 | | | Country designation | A | B | C | | Designated | 2 | 8 | | | Non-designated | 1 | | | | Independent review | A | B | C | | Yes | 3 | 8 | | | No | | | | | Finance type | A | B | C | | Project finance | 3 | 8 | | Category A: Projects with potentially significant adverse social or environmental risks and/or impacts that are diverse, irreversible or unprecedented. Category B: Projects with potentially limited adverse social and environmental risks and/or impacts that are few in number, generally site-specific, largely reversible and readily addressed through mitigation measures. Category C: Projects with minimal or no social or environmental risks and/or impacts. ## Sensitive sector and area position statements In addition to setting sector-specific financed emissions reduction targets, consistent with our Purpose and driven by consideration of all relevant risks and other factors, we have outlined our approach to financing certain sensitive sectors and areas in our position statements, each of which contains various requirements and expectations, taking into account regional and jurisdictional considerations, and other provisions relevant to how we apply them. Our position statements are periodically reviewed and updates considered in light of the rapidly changing external environment, including, for example, public policy, laws and regulation, technological advancement, geopolitical or regional developments. Our approach is informed by engagement with our stakeholders, including shareholders, clients, subject specialists and civil society groups. Our Climate Change Statement sets out our positions and approach to certain sensitive sectors. In cases where clients are identified as not meeting the non-mandatory expectations and Barclays has an active relationship with those clients, we encourage them to adhere to these expectations; where clients are unable or unwilling to do so over time, we will review the relationship and may reduce our support. We believe we can best balance our climate ambition, shareholder expectations and deliver our strategy through working with clients on their transition (including using tools such as SEDD and Client Transition Framework (CTF)), as well as financing clients' transition and scaling climate technology. Reflecting society's need for available and affordable energy, we also remain a significant provider of capital to the conventional energy and power sector. Financing for clients in this sector is managed in line with Barclays' risk appetite, with decisions informed by transition progress, commercial returns, client engagement and market realities. Barclays' approach recognises that energy security and transition progress must advance in parallel and that continued investment in both is critical to meeting evolving client needs and supporting economic stability. Further details on Sustainability Enhanced Due Diligence can be found on page 163 and Client Transition Framework on page 39. ## Long-lead expansion policy exceptions The combined number and aggregate value of new financing or renewal of existing financing granted by exception in 2025 under the Non-diversified Group restriction in the Climate Change Statement is detailed below. | Non-diversified Groups, Exceptions Granted | Total | | --- | --- | | Client Groups | 2 | | Financing Transaction Count | 4 | | Financing Transaction Value (£m) | 377 | We will keep our policies, targets and progress under review in light of the output of both SEDD and CTF reviews, the evolving landscape and the need to support governments and clients, in our efforts to meet our ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050. Additional positions and approaches to financing sensitive sectors and areas are set out in our position statements relating to Forestry and Agricultural Commodities, Protected Areas and Defence and Security. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Human rights Barclays is continuing to develop and enhance our approach to respecting human rights. The Barclays Group Statement on Human Rights, updated in 2024, reiterates our commitment to respecting human rights as defined in the International Bill of Human Rights and the International Labour Organization’s (ILO) Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work. Our approach is guided by the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights (UNGPs) and the OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises on Responsible Business Conduct. In 2025, Barclays continued to develop its overall approach to human rights by delivering training to various businesses and functions across the Group, strengthening our due diligence screening processes, and increasing engagement with our clients on human rights risks. > For further information of our management of environmental and social impacts in our lending please see page 163. ## Corporate culture We continue to work to build our colleagues' understanding of human rights risk and responsibilities. In 2025, Group Sustainability delivered 15 human rights trainings across the Group. For example, we supported frontline bankers to better understand human rights risks and potential leverage opportunities in specific high-risk sectors. We also trained specific Risk functions, such as Financial Crime and Business Banking Client Risk Assessment, to empower colleagues to better identify human rights risk. ## Saliency assessments In 2025, we initiated human rights saliency assessments across all five business divisions, namely the Investment Bank (IB), Barclays UK (BUK), UK Corporate Bank (UKCB), Private Bank and Wealth Management (PBWM), and US Consumer Bank (USCB), as well as Human Resources. We have undertaken these assessments with specialist external human rights support. We are in the process of concluding the outputs of this assessment and will aim to develop an action plan in response to these conclusions in 2026. ## Policies and enhanced due diligence We continue to monitor external developments and review our approach to human rights due diligence accordingly. Our sustainability-related risk approach currently includes SEDD for clients in scope of the Climate Change, Forestry and Agricultural Commodities, Protected Areas, and Defence and Security Statements (please see 'Managing environmental and social impacts' on page 163 for further information). Where the SEDD process identifies a potential human rights issue, the client will be referred to the Environmental and Social Risk Management team for additional review. During 2025, we continued to strengthen our approach to Equator Principles due diligence. Our project finance volumes in scope of the Equator Principles have grown and we recognise this activity as a driver of potential social and human rights risk. As part of this, we have increased engagement with clients around risks and impacts. This included undertaking a site visit to a project with a heightened risk profile, directly engaging management teams during due diligence to assess whether risks were being managed appropriately, and providing guidance on strengthening impact management. For example, Barclays provided financing for an infrastructure project. During due diligence, Group Sustainability identified potential human rights and social risks associated with the project. We had extensive engagement with the client on these risks and worked collaboratively with the client, the deal teams, and other financiers in further strengthening the management of the risks and progressing towards alignment with IFC Performance Standards, including around stakeholder engagement and land acquisition. This included providing detailed feedback on resettlement action plans and livelihood restoration. As the final step in our due diligence process, representatives from the deal team and Group Sustainability jointly engaged directly on the ground with local community leaders, impacted residents, and the project's environmental and site management teams. These conversations helped us to understand whether social and human rights risks were being appropriately managed. ## Focus areas for progress | Corporate culture | Saliency assessments | Policies and EDD | Just transition | Remedy | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Strengthen a culture of respect for human rights • Build capacity to support colleagues’ understanding of human rights risks and responsibilities | Identify salient issues beyond corporate and investment bank financing portfolios • Extend saliency assessment to other areas of the bank, looking to engage with internal and external stakeholders | Enhance sustainability policies and due diligence to reflect salient issues for corporate and investment bank financing portfolios • Review existing sustainability policies and EDD and work to integrate salient issues • Evolve our approach to engaging with clients when responding to salient issues | Support a transition to a low-carbon economy which accounts for the societal risks as well as the opportunities • Continue industry engagement to help shape the definition and implementation of a just transition | Develop our approach to remedy • Explore approach to remedy in engagement with clients | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Just transition Barclays aims to contribute to a just transition that seeks to manage the negative societal impacts of the transition on people, maximise socio-economic opportunities for people, and engage with affected people on these impacts and opportunities. In pursuing this aim, Barclays seeks to consider its stakeholders, including its workers, communities, customers, and supply chains. Barclays is committed to respecting the rights of people and communities in the context of the transition. We continued our involvement in the Aberdeen Just Transition Collaboration with Aberdeen City Council, BP, Shell UK, and SSE, which is exploring ways to support a just energy transition for local communities and workers. In 2025, the collaboration appointed a third-party partner to take this work forward. In 2025, Barclays also continued engagement to help shape development of a just transition approach for the financial sector. For example, we continued our engagement with the LSE Just Transition Finance Lab, of which we are a founding funder. We co-hosted a roundtable with the lab exploring 'Gridlock or Greenlight? The impact of social risks to the cost and pace of the energy transition'. The event brought together participants from financial institutions, real-economy companies, and civil society to explore how effective management of these risks can preserve commercial value, mitigate impacts, and maximise opportunities for people to achieve win-win outcomes for communities and businesses as clean energy and grid infrastructure scale. Throughout 2025, we also actively engaged with peers on how financial institutions can advance a just transition, leading a session at Thun Group on what a just transition means for banks and how this connects with other human rights and labour risks, ## Remedy We continue to reflect on the financial sector's approach to remedy, including how considerations of remedy can be incorporated into our human rights due diligence and engagement with clients. ## Modern slavery and human rights in our supply chain We take the following steps with an intent to identify, assess and manage the risk of modern slavery and other adverse human rights impacts in our supply chain. ### Risk assessments We continue to assess the inherent risk of modern slavery across Barclays' TPSPs, as outlined in our Barclays Group Statement on Modern Slavery. It remains challenging to identify the inherent risk of modern slavery beyond Tier 1 of our supply chain. To strengthen our approach, in 2025, we started to integrate human rights and modern slavery risk-related questions into our procurement sourcing workflow, informed by our 2024 supply chain human rights saliency assessment¹. We evaluate responses to this process to determine whether due diligence is required. ### Management of modern slavery and adverse human rights risk We aim to embed modern slavery and broader human rights considerations into our procurement processes through: - General contract terms, which can be subject to negotiation, contain obligations on TPSPs to respect human rights, and to implement reasonable due diligence procedures to help identify, prevent, minimise and/or mitigate modern slavery and human trafficking in TPSPs' operations or supply chain delivering products or services to Barclays. - TPSP CoC, which sets our expectations on: - freely chosen employment, - avoidance of child labour, - avoidance of discrimination, harassment and abuse, - worker freedom of association and collective bargaining, - workplace arrangements, working conditions and third-party employment agencies, - wages and benefits, - occupational health and safety, - grievances and whistleblowing, and - privacy of workers. ## Ongoing TPSP due diligence and engagement In 2025, we continued to ask TPSPs identified for due diligence to register with Sedex² and complete a self-assessment questionnaire (SAQ), to allow us to gain insights into their business practices, policies and working conditions. The SAQ questions are framed on the ETI Base Code methodology³. Additionally, we have access to SMETA⁴ reports for TPSPs registered with Sedex, which we plan to use, along with the SAQs to understand how TPSPs respond to findings raised. ## Assessing the effectiveness of our actions We had an ambition for our TPSPs making up 70% of our addressable spend⁵ to have a modern slavery policy or standard in place by end of 2025. In 2025, 74%⁶ of our TPSPs had a modern slavery policy or standard in place, exceeding our ambition. In 2026, we aim to review our approach to modern slavery-related supply chain metrics. Further information on our approach can be found in our Barclays Group Statement on Modern Slavery. ## Notes: 1. Refer to page 249 of Barclays PLC Annual Report 2024 to find out more on our supply chain human rights saliency assessment. 2. Sedex (Supplier Ethical Data Exchange) is a global technology company that specialises in data, insights and professional services to empower supply chain sustainability. Their platform, tools and services enable businesses to easily manage supplier sustainability risks and improve on their social, environmental and ethical performance. 3. The Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) Base Code is founded on the ILO Conventions, and includes assessment of all key labour exploitation and child labour indicators, such as freely chosen employment and no harsh or inhumane treatment of workers. 4. SMETA (Sedex Members Ethical Trading Audit) methodology assesses the audited site against the ETI Base Code, the standards of the ILO Conventions and local law. The ILO Conventions set out basic principles and rights at work. 5. Addressable spend is a subset of external costs incurred by Barclays in the normal course of business where Procurement has oversight over spend. It excludes costs such as regulatory fines or charges, exchange fees, taxation, employee expenses or litigation costs and property rent. 6. We measure our performance by verifying the percentage of managed TPSPs (by addressable spend) that have self-certified to having: (i) a standalone Modern Slavery Policy and related Standards or; (ii) hold the Modern Slavery BS 25700:2022 Standard or; (iii) insert Modern Slavery considerations into relevant policies, e.g. Human Resources, Hiring of Workers, Supply Chain. The 2025 key performance indicator is based on supply chain data extracted on 14 January 2026. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Supporting our supply chain With approximately 7,100 companies from across 30 countries providing goods and/or services to Barclays, our supply chain helps our businesses deliver for our customers, clients and colleagues. The Barclays Group engages with Third-Party Service Providers (TPSPs)¹, seeking to integrate sustainability considerations across our supply chain. > Please see further details on our requirements of our Third-Party Service Providers at: home.barclays/who-we-are/our-suppliers/ our-requirements-of-external-suppliers/ ## Third-Party Service Provider operational and reputational risk management Barclays asks its TPSPs to (i) make responsible decisions that, where relevant, take our stakeholders' needs into account in both the short and long term and (ii) to comply with all applicable laws, rules and regulations within the geographies in which they operate. Barclays' standard approach² to TPSP onboarding and contract renewal begins by assessing the inherent risk associated with the goods and/or services being provided in-line with Barclays' TPSP risk assessment process. TPSPs that are assessed as being above a low risk of exposure from a business risk perspective are subject to Barclays' Supplier Control Obligations (SCOs). Prior to contractual agreement and service go-live, these TPSPs are required to confirm adherence to the SCOs (subject to negotiation) and the TPSP CoC. TPSPs to whom the SCOs apply will be actively managed and subject to controls assurance on an annual basis to assess whether the control requirements and expectations outlined within the TPSP CoC are being met. Where TPSPs are unable to meet our expectations defined within the SCOs and the TPSP CoC, the issue will be managed, as appropriate, in-line with Barclays' Issue Management Standard. The TPSP CoC and SCOs are published on the Barclays public website for all new and existing TPSPs to view and are refreshed at least annually to help ensure Barclays' expectations continue to be met. ## Payment on time Prompt payment is critical to the cash flow of every business, and especially to smaller businesses within the supply chain as cash flow issues are a major contributor to business failure. We aim to pay our TPSPs within clearly defined terms, and to help ensure there is a proper process for dealing with any issues that may arise. We measure prompt payment globally by calculating the percentage of TPSP spend paid within 45 days following invoice date. The measurement applies against all invoices by value over a three-month rolling average period for all entities where invoices are managed centrally. At the end of 2025, we achieved 94% on-time payments to our TPSPs, continuing to exceed our public commitment to annually pay 85% of TPSPs on time (by invoice value). Barclays continues to enhance its processes to improve faster payments to its TPSPs. Through these efforts and its reporting obligation under UK legislation, Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries have for the second consecutive year received the GoodBusinessPays Fast Payer Award, supported by the UK Department of Business & Trade. ## Our supplier ecosystem At Barclays, we continue to engage with suppliers of varying size³ and mission⁴, with the intent to build stronger value driven partnerships that deliver innovative solutions and enhance outcomes for our customers and clients. We expect our TPSPs to support our efforts to build a robust supply chain by recruiting, utilising and developing businesses of varying size and mission. ## Notes: 1. TPSP means any entity that has entered into an arrangement with Barclays in order to provide business functions, activities, goods and/or services to Barclays. 2. Where financial institutions and market counterparties provide services to Barclays, the nature of the services leveraged may require an alternate onboarding approach and as such some control expectations may not be applicable. This is assessed at the point of onboarding. 3. Size: micro, small, and medium-sized enterprises where revenue and/or employment eligibility limits are defined by the local country standards. 4. Mission: for-profit businesses aiming to achieve local, social and environmental goals (i.e. Social Enterprises and B Corp businesses) > Please see further details on our climate change initiatives in our supply chain within our Achieving net zero operations section from page 58 within the Climate and Sustainability report. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 168 # Other Governance (continued) # Supporting our retail customers ## Supporting customers through Barclays UK Barclays has a large retail presence in the UK, offering a wide range of products and services to more than 20 million customers through Barclays UK. ## Access to banking Customers are looking for more convenient, simpler ways to bank that fit their lives, including banking digitally: we have over 13 million digitally active customers. We are continuing to help deliver these solutions at pace. Alongside our investment in technology enabling digital customers to access tools and products whenever they need them, we are transforming our physical locations across the UK with a view to ensuring that customers can still access banking face to face when customers need us. We are committed to ensuring all our customers have the access to cash they need. In 2025 we have continued to collaborate with other banks, the Post Office and LINK through our new Joint Venture Cash Access UK Ltd, extending our network of Banking Hubs and shared cash deposit solutions across the UK. We are more than halfway towards our joint commitment to open 350 Banking Hubs over the course of this parliament, with 204 Shared Banking Hubs opened by the end of the year and where we maintain the highest face-to-face presence of any high street bank each week. We also recognise the importance of our traditional branches to provide access to banking services; we are now halfway through the rollout of next generation 'Smart ATMs' and are on track to complete this transformation in 2026. These devices offer full account servicing capability, which can now be accessed through our banking app, as well as via card. Nearly all our branches now have these machines externally too, meaning customers have greater access to their accounts via our branch channel. Recognising the shared challenge of digital inclusion, we have welcomed the UK Government's strategy on Financial Inclusion, and are proud to be partnering with other banks, broadcasters and telecommunication firms to agree how we can work together to improve digital outcomes for all. Alongside these changes, we are investing in multi-skilled training for our colleagues, so they are better able to serve customers in ways that meet their needs today as well as breaking down internal barriers to enable quicker resolution of customer queries. ## Economic crime and scams We take our responsibility to protect our customers' money very seriously and are proud to have one of the lowest scam rates and highest reimbursement rates in the industry¹. This is due to our continued investment in robust security systems and our established programme to educate customers and reduce the likelihood of them falling victim to scams. We have a dedicated Fraud and Scams hub on the Barclays website, which hosts a variety of content and resources to help the public learn how to keep themselves safe. Additionally, for each of the 450 million+² payments our UK customers make every month, our fraud detection systems and machine learning models help detect in less than a second if it is likely to be a fraudster rather than the customer, or if our customer appears at risk of being scammed. If the transaction appears as risky, the customer is presented with additional checks prior to the payment being released. We continue to invest in security features aimed at providing protection against fraud and scams, including 'App ID', which allows customers to verify that they are speaking to a Barclays colleague and not an impersonator. We are also part of the 'Do not originate' scheme, created in partnership with the telecommunications industry, UK Finance and Ofcom, aimed at preventing our most common inbound helpline phone numbers from being used in a scam. We are committed to providing measures that help prevent Authorised Push Payment (APP) scams taking place and building increased consumer protection standards for customers through both the UK Payment Systems Regulator's (PSR) new APP Scam Regulations that came into effect in October 2024 and the previous Contingent Reimbursement Model code. We are a founding member of Stop Scams UK, a cross-industry group made up of banks, telecoms and tech firms that have come together to seek to put an end to scams by collaborating, sharing best practices and engaging with the government and regulators to make it harder for scammers to operate. We have published a series of policy recommendations to tackle the spread of scams. ## Notes: 1. The PSR's latest report covering 2023 includes the UK's 14 largest banking groups, along with the data for 11 other smaller firms that were in the top 20 highest receivers of fraud. 2. 450 million + payments covers all retail/ card transactions and payments across all product types. Frontier Economics report on Tackling Fraud and Scams: home.barclays/news/press-releases/2023/08/eight-in-ten-brits-feel-unsafe-on-social-media-due-to-scammers/ ## Digital accessibility Digital services and workplace tools must be designed and developed to be easy to see, hear, understand and use for all customers and colleagues, including people with disabilities. There are legal obligations under national and international laws and regulations, alongside a moral duty to ensure that people with disabilities are not left out or left behind from using our digital services. All digital services and content must comply with our Barclays digital accessibility standards. These standards align to the minimum conformance of the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) v2.2 AA level and apply to both internal projects as well as external suppliers. We have invested in accessibility training, tooling and specialists to help embed accessibility at scale along with effective governance and oversight to meet increased regulations. The Barclays Accessibility Statement barclays.co.uk/who-we-are/our-suppliers/ our-requirements-of-external-suppliers/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Building financial wellbeing As part of our aim to deliver a world-class money management experience and help money work for our customers, particularly with a focus on driving financial confidence, we are delivering more educational content on managing their money at all life stages. We are providing knowledge and expertise through our colleagues, including helping customers to use our digital platforms via the Digital Wings Platform. The Barclays Money Management Hub gives us the ability to provide proactive money management information directly to customers, giving them a better grasp on their spending behaviours and steps they can take to improve their financial wellbeing and gain greater control over their finances. We also have a range of early intervention strategies which aim to support customers whose account behaviours may be showing signs of lacking financial resilience. These strategies largely focus on proactive communication with the customer, based on sets of customer behavioural triggers, and look to support customers to help them maintain or regain control of their finances. Where customers engage with these contact strategies, our Barclays Financial Assistance colleagues provide broad money management advice and, where appropriate, may suggest a range of solutions to manage their financial situation. This suite of solutions includes forbearance and nonforbearance options. ## Gambling At Barclays, we recognise that gambling and financial difficulty can sometimes go hand in hand, and asking for help isn't always easy. That's why we've invested in dedicated training for our customer-facing colleagues, equipping them to spot the signs and provide meaningful support. For customers who need extra help, our Specialist Colleagues are ready to handle sensitive conversations with care and guide them towards trusted charities and organisations for further assistance. Through the Barclays app, customers now receive personalised insights and gentle nudges designed to help them stay in control of their spending. These include notifications when gambling transactions increase, prompts to review spending patterns, and easy access to tools that can help set limits or block gambling payments. We seek to help empower customers with timely, practical support before issues escalate. Barclays is also participating in the Money Mental Health Policy Institute Gambling Harms Action Labs, a cross-bank initiative aimed at reducing gambling-related financial and mental health harms. Our involvement focuses on collaborative innovation, customer empowerment, and data-driven solutions to strengthen protections and support for vulnerable customers. Further details can be found at: barclays.co.uk/gambling-support/ ## Domestic abuse We are committed to supporting customers affected by domestic abuse. Through our ongoing partnership with Refuge – the UK's largest domestic abuse service provider – we help connect those impacted to specialist advice and practical support. This includes assisting survivors with opening bank accounts and accessing essential banking services, even when standard documentation isn't available. We're proud to remain a signatory to the UK Finance Domestic Abuse Code of Practice, which sets out how banks and building societies should protect and empower customers who are survivors of economic or financial abuse. ## Homelessness We continue to support customers who face challenges providing standard documentation – including those experiencing homelessness – by helping them open a basic current account. This ensures access to essential banking services, which can be a vital step towards financial stability and independence. Our approach includes working with trusted charities and local organisations to verify identity where traditional documents aren't available, and providing guidance to make the process as simple and stress-free as possible. By removing barriers, we seek to help give everyone the opportunity to manage their money safely and securely. ## Bereavement Throughout 2025, we have continued to try to make this extremely difficult time in people's lives a little easier. Our programme of work to enhance the customer experience has included: launching a digital settlement form to help customers stay in their channel of choice, and delivering a series of webpage and communication enhancements to make it easier to navigate and understand information. Further details can be found at: barclays.co.uk/what-to-do-when-someone-dies/notify-us/ ## Authorised users The Authorised User feature gives customers the ability to manage their current account with the help of a trusted person in their life. Whether they need someone to spend on their behalf or help managing their finances, customers have access to a reliable and accessible tool, at no additional cost. Further details can be found at: barclays.co.uk/ways-to-bank/authorised-users/manage-account/ ## Specialist support team In 2025, circa 34,000 Barclays UK colleagues completed the mandatory Customers in Vulnerable Circumstances annual eLearning module. This training strengthens awareness and understanding of vulnerability across both frontline and head office teams. We have also continued to deliver dedicated vulnerability induction training for new colleagues, ensuring they are equipped to identify and support customers who may be vulnerable or experiencing significant life events. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Accessibility & Vulnerability (A&V) Framework In 2025, Barclays continued to enhance its Accessibility & Vulnerability Framework to help ensure equitable and inclusive service for all customers. Key developments include: streamlining colleague processes by automating the Alternative Format journey, reducing it from a two-step process to a single step for greater efficiency; and enhancing customer experience by introducing a search functionality within the digital journeys and prioritising adjustments to help customers disclose themselves. These improvements help ensure both colleagues and customers benefit from a more seamless and supportive journey when managing vulnerable circumstances. ## Barclays UK Performance Framework The Framework seeks to mitigate the risks of inappropriate performance management practices, including by (among other things) seeking to ensure there is no undue pressure on colleagues to sell products, which can result in mis-selling. The Performance Framework operates controls to provide insight and subsequent oversight that the business is operating aligned to the expectations set out in the Performance Framework Policy Standards. ## Basic current account Since 2015, we have been offering our basic current account to individuals who may not be eligible for a standard account to access banking, including over the counter services, access to ATMs, and digital banking and free text alerts to manage finances. There were over 590,000 Barclays basic current accounts open at the end of December 2025¹. Access to a transactional bank account enables consumers to benefit from bill reductions through paying by direct debit and access to cheaper goods and services on the internet, to help them along their financial journey. If their circumstances change, customers on the basic current account are able to apply for a standard Barclays Current Account at any time. Periodically we also review accounts to upgrade customers from basic current account to Barclays Bank Account where eligible. ![img-65.jpeg](img-65.jpeg) Number of basic current accounts Note: 1 In 2025, we upgraded more than 39,000 customers from our Barclays Basic Bank Account to our Barclays Bank Account. ## Barclays' mortgages and first-time buyers 2025 saw a continued reduction in the rate environment with multiple Bank of England Base Rate decreases, leading to mortgage rates decreasing – reducing the impact to customers who are rolling off longer-term fixed rates, however, we recognise for some this can still create a rate shock and we seek to continue to supporting these customers, whether through our standard lending policy or under the Mortgage Charter. We remain focused on supporting those buying their first home. This year saw us launch 95% Loan-to-Value lending outside of the Mortgage Guarantee Scheme to support first-time buyers, along with a number of changes following the FCA Rules Clarification around stress testing and other policy changes aimed at responsibly increasing the borrowing power of customers. In 2025, we have helped over 50,000 first-time buyer customers accounting for approximately 35% of our gross lending. ## Financial inclusion in our US consumer business The Community Reinvestment Act (CRA) is a US federal law designed to encourage financial institutions to help meet the needs of borrowers in all segments of their communities, including low and moderate-income neighbourhoods. Barclays meets the CRA requirement by supporting and investing in local Community Development Financial Institutions (CDFIs), small-medium businesses and non-profits. The success of CDFIs, small-medium businesses and non-profits are key to a thriving community. Barclays has predefined goals with specific performance targets that we must meet each year in order to be considered in compliance with CRA guidelines. Barclays has met its CRA goals for 2025, evidencing that we are continuing to invest in the communities where we live, work and serve. Barclays Bank Delaware (BBDE), including Barclays US Consumer Bank (USCB), is committed to fair and equitable treatment of all prospective and existing customers without regard to race, sex, colour, national origin, religion, age, marital status, disability, sexual orientation, military status, gender identity, familial status, Limited English Proficiency, receipt of public assistance income, and good faith exercise of rights under the Consumer Credit Protection Act. We place a high priority on fair treatment of prospective and existing customers by BBDE and maintain diligent oversight of business practices and processes to ensure fairness. We also believe our commitment to fair lending and fair treatment principles and practices aligns with Barclays' core Values of Respect, Integrity, Service, Excellence, and Stewardship. We strive to develop long-term relationships by providing products and services that meet prospective and existing customer needs, avoid causing poor outcomes for, or harm to, customers, clients and markets arising from the delivery of the firm's products and services, and place our prospective and existing customers' interests at the heart of our strategy, planning, and decision-making processes. No form of illegal discrimination will be tolerated at BBDE or USCB and we recognise that only through the efforts of all colleagues can we ensure that all prospective and existing customers receive fair and equitable treatment. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 171 Other Governance (continued) # The Barclays Way The Barclays Way is our Code of Conduct. Together with our policies and practices, this provides a clear path towards achieving a positive and dynamic culture within the Group. Our commitment to being a responsible business includes seeking to ensure that: - we conduct ourselves in line with The Barclays Way, our Code of Conduct, to create the best possible working environment for our colleagues; - we treat our customers fairly and the products and services we deliver are transparent and responsible; - we operate in line with relevant laws and regulations including those applicable to financial crime; and - we safeguard the data that has been entrusted to us. Our Code of Conduct reflects the trust that millions of people place in us every day. We know that trust is earned by repeatedly doing the right thing. We believe the best way to build that trust is to invest in our culture and support our people in the choices they make every day, with guidance and policies that help them do this. That starts with our Purpose, Values and Mindset, and is locked into our organisation through The Barclays Way, the touchstone for everyone in Barclays on the standard of conduct we expect, setting an unequivocal tone from the top about who we are and what we stand for. "The Barclays Way is intrinsic to the trust that millions of customers, clients, other stakeholders and shareholders, place in us every day. That trust is earned by consistently delivering to the highest standard, investing in our culture, and supporting our people to thrive at work." The Barclays Way governs our way of working across our business globally. It constitutes a reference point covering all aspects of colleagues' working relationships, specifically but not exclusively with other Barclays employees, customers and clients, governments, regulators, business partners, suppliers, competitors and the broader community. It is aligned to the Code of Professional Conduct, published by the Chartered Banker Professional Standards Board, which sets out the ethical and professional attitudes and behaviours expected of bankers. Barclays subscribes to this code and is committed to embedding its broad principles into our business. The Barclays Way includes information and guidance on how employees are expected to behave and take personal accountability for making decisions. We apply a range of criteria, aimed at building a sustainable, strong and profitable business for the long term and adding value to our business relationships and the broader communities in which we live and work. We provide guidance across all key stakeholder groups, including in relation to servicing our customers and clients, promoting respect, inclusion and performance in the workplace and maintaining strong governance, robust controls and strict ethical standards. The Barclays Way also includes advice and guidance on speaking up and raising concerns. It is important for the success of Barclays, and for the safety and wellbeing of our customers, clients and colleagues, that we encourage a culture that supports speaking up when things aren't as they should be. All colleagues are required to undertake training on The Barclays Way. We know that our success is measured not only by our commercial performance, but also by our contribution to society and the way we work together for a better financial future for all our stakeholders. We are focused on the areas where we can have the greatest long-term impact: investing in our communities; managing the environmental and social impacts of our business; and working with our customers, clients and communities as they navigate the opportunities and challenges of the transition to a low-carbon economy. ## Employee survey results % "I believe that my team and I do a good job of role modelling the Values every day" | 2025 | 93 | | --- | --- | | 2024 | 93 | % of colleagues completing mandatory training on The Barclays Way 100% The Barclays Way Code of Conduct is available at: home.barclays/citizenship/the-way-we-do-business/code-of-conduct/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 172 Other Governance (continued) # Whistleblowing We support a culture where colleagues feel safe to speak up. At Barclays, we are committed to fostering a culture where colleagues feel safe and empowered to speak up. We strive to provide a respectful and inclusive environment, encouraging all colleagues to raise concerns about actions or behaviours that do not align with our Values. According to the Autumn 2025 Your View survey, 81% of global respondents agreed that it is 'safe to speak up' at Barclays. Colleagues are encouraged to speak up directly to their management, Compliance, HR or Legal. For those who may not feel comfortable using these channels, the Raising Concerns process offers an alternative, ensuring every concern is carefully assessed and referred to the most appropriate team for review and, where appropriate, investigation. All concerns are taken seriously, managed with sensitivity and confidentiality, and information about reporting channels is available both internally and externally. One key avenue via which concerns are reviewed is the whistleblowing programme, which is highlighted to colleagues globally through annual mandatory training, via our colleague intranet page and through communications and awareness sessions. Whistleblowing relates to concerns that are in the wider public interest, including breaches of policy, law, regulation, or any behaviour that could harm the Group's reputation or financial wellbeing. Concerns assessed by Raising Concerns as whistleblowing are directed to a dedicated, impartial team within the Compliance function. All whistleblowing concerns are taken seriously, and robust controls are in place to protect the confidentiality and identity of whistleblowers. Barclays maintains a zero-tolerance approach to retaliation against whistleblowers or anyone providing information as part of an investigation. Any act of retaliation may result in disciplinary action, up to and including dismissal. In 2025, the whistleblowing team received a total of 56 (2024: 69) whistleblowing concerns, including 9 (2024: 15) retaliation concerns. Of the whistleblowing concerns closed in 2025, 16% (2024: 22%) were found to have some level of substantiation, and other issues were identified in a further 33% (2024: 19%). No retaliation concerns closed in 2025 were substantiated. As a result of whistleblowing investigations, 35 (2024: 57) actions were implemented to address issues identified, including recommendations to enhance processes and controls. Oversight of the whistleblowing programme is provided by the Chair of the Group Board Audit Committee, who serves as the Group Whistleblowers' Champion, the Chair of the Barclays Bank UK PLC (BBUKPLC) Board Audit Committee, who serves as the BBUKPLC Whistleblowers' Champion, and the Chair of the Barclays Capital Securities Limited (BCSL) Board Audit Committee, who serves as the BCSL Whistleblowers' Champion¹. These Champions are responsible for ensuring the integrity, independence and effectiveness of the whistleblowing programme, supported by periodic impartial reviews and assurance of the whistleblowing process. Barclays is a member of Protect, the UK whistleblowing charity. Note: 1 Barclays Capital Securities Limited (BCSL), which is authorised as a PRA-designated investment firm. ![img-66.jpeg](img-66.jpeg) Whistleblowing cases opened by (top 4) categories 1. Breach of controls, process or other 21 2. Retaliation 9 3. Breach of policy 5 4. Financial crime 8 5. Other 13 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 173 # Other Governance (continued) # Tax Barclays supports a fair and transparent tax system. "We were shortlisted for the 2025 PwC Building Trust Award for Tax Reporting in the FTSE 350 (Multinationals) Group." Barclays takes a responsible approach to tax. We have strong governance and risk management over tax risk and are committed to transparency around tax. We know that it is important for our stakeholders, including our investors, customers and clients, regulators and tax authorities to understand our approach to tax and the tax contributions we make in the countries in which we operate. Our success in being able to clearly explain our approach to tax and understand what matters to our stakeholders is reflected in Barclays being one of three companies shortlisted for the 2025 PwC Building Trust Award for Tax Reporting in the FTSE 350 (Multinationals) Group. This award, for which we have been shortlisted every year since 2022 and which we won in 2023, recognises the clear explanations that companies provide about their tax affairs and responsiveness to both stakeholder interest and the continually changing tax transparency landscape. Taxes paid globally £3,261m Taxes paid globally in more detail (£m) ![img-67.jpeg](img-67.jpeg) A Corporation tax 1,393 and withholding taxes B Employer payroll taxes 835 C Irrecoverable VAT 731 D Bank levy 237 E Other taxes including business rates 65 2025 total tax contribution £7,182m # Tax contribution We continue to make substantial tax contributions across the jurisdictions in which we operate, both in terms of taxes paid and taxes collected. Our total tax contribution for 2025 was £7,182m. This includes taxes paid of £3,261m which represent a cost to us, and taxes collected on behalf of governments of £3,921m. Barclays was ranked as the fifth-largest UK taxpayer, in terms of taxes paid, in the most recent PwC Total Tax Contribution survey of the One Hundred Group ('100 Group'). The 100 Group represents members of the FTSE 100 along with several large UK private companies. Over the last decade we have paid over £14bn of taxes in the UK alone. For further details, see our Country Snapshot report at: home.barclays/annualreport # Approach to tax Barclays is driven by a common Purpose: working together for a better financial future. Our approach to taxation, also known as our tax strategy, is aligned with this Purpose as well as our Values of Respect, Integrity, Service, Excellence and Stewardship. # Our approach to tax has three core objectives: - Responsible approach to tax; - Effective interaction with tax authorities; and - Transparency in relation to our tax affairs. We manage our tax affairs in accordance with our Tax Principles, Tax Code of Conduct and HMRC's Code of Practice on Taxation for Banks and aim to file our returns on time and pay the correct amount of tax. We make clear disclosures to tax authorities and we are committed to only dealing with customer and client assets that have been appropriately declared to the relevant tax authority. We are also committed to being a leader in tax transparency. We have published details of the taxes we pay by country and our approach to tax every year since 2013, and have chosen to expand our external publications such as the Country Snapshot. Our Country Snapshot is publicly available, sets out our approach to tax in detail, including our Tax Principles, and is reviewed and approved annually by the Barclays PLC Board. # Key highlights from our approach to tax include: - We follow clear Tax Principles that we have published. These allow us to balance the needs of our stakeholders and make clear that tax planning must support genuine commercial activity; - As a result of this approach, transactions which artificially transfer profits into a low tax jurisdiction would not be consistent with our Tax Principles; - We seek to comply with the spirit as well as the letter of the law and we take account of established practice in the territories in which we operate. We are transparent in both the disclosure of our tax affairs to tax authorities as well as our tax reporting to other stakeholders; and - We aim to comply with all of our tax obligations in the territories in which we operate and where there is uncertainty we may seek external tax advice in order to help ensure our tax filings are appropriate. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) ## Tax governance, control and risk management As a global systemically important bank, our Group-wide risk and governance procedures are subject to continuous review and scrutiny. More details on our approach to tax governance, control and risk management can be found in our Country Snapshot, the key highlights of which include: - Our Board has ultimate responsibility for tax matters and the Board Audit Committee is responsible for overseeing the Group's tax matters; - At Barclays, risks are identified and managed through our ERMF, which supports the business in its aim to embed effective risk management and a strong risk management culture. Under the ERMF all risks, including tax risk, are managed in accordance with a ‘three lines of defence’ model; - As part of the ‘first line of defence’ the tax department identifies and manages tax risk by developing appropriate policies, standards and controls to apply across our organisation. Risk and Compliance comprise the ‘second line of defence’, and Barclays Internal Audit is the ‘third line of defence’, and these functions review, challenge and provide assurance to the Board in relation to the effectiveness of governance, risk management and controls including those relating to tax risk; - We are subject to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 control requirements in relation to financial statements disclosures including those related to tax; - Our tax department comprises appropriately qualified in-house professionals who are subject to clear standards including that they uphold our Tax Principles and follow our Tax Code of Conduct, which is an integral part of how we operate; - Our governance requires that suitably qualified people are involved in decisions related to tax, tax is fully taken into account when making business decisions and tax risk is identified, assessed and kept under review; and - We have no tolerance for tax evasion, have measures in place to prevent tax evasion facilitation and have well-established mechanisms for speaking up about unethical or unlawful behaviour through our raising concerns and whistleblowing processes, which apply equally to tax matters. ## Stakeholder engagement and management of uncertainties related to tax Our reputation is very important to us and we take our external stakeholders' expectations into account when we make decisions in relation to our tax affairs. More details on our approach to stakeholder engagement and managing stakeholder concerns related to tax can be found in our Country Snapshot, and key highlights include: - We believe that it is important to be transparent in the disclosure of our tax affairs both to tax authorities and stakeholders more broadly; - Our dealings with tax authorities are handled proactively, constructively and transparently, in real-time where possible; - We recognise that early resolution of our tax affairs is in everyone’s interest. We have ongoing engagement with tax authorities to discuss their inquiries and material issues in relation to our tax affairs, and we respond to feedback from tax authorities; - Where we face significant uncertainty in relation to the application of tax law, we may seek to agree with the tax authority how the tax law should apply; - Where relevant we seek to reach agreement with tax authorities using mechanisms available to all taxpayers including Advance Pricing Agreements and Mutual Agreement Procedures to clearly establish in which territories our profits should be taxed; - We engage with governments, tax authorities and NGOs through public consultations and other discussions to assist with the development of tax policy and the improvement of tax systems, and maintain our transparency with these stakeholders; and - We co-operate with tax authorities globally to reduce the scope for individuals and companies to evade tax, and have met all of our 2025 information reporting obligations under the Common Reporting Standard and Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act. The BPLC Board Audit Committee is responsible for overseeing the Group's tax matters. Please refer to page 96 for details of BPLC Board Audit Committee oversight of tax-related matters. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 175 # Other Governance (continued) # Financial crime Barclays is committed to conducting its global activities with integrity and respecting its regulatory, ethical, and social responsibilities to: - Protect customers, employees, and others with whom we do business; and - Support governments, regulators, and law enforcement in wider financial crime prevention. Barclays has no appetite for Financial Crime Risk issues and events that are material, systemic, not promptly remediated, not reported to regulators in a timely manner where required, and/or are likely to result in regulatory enforcement. The Financial Crime Risk Management Framework (FCRMF) outlines how the Group manages financial crime risk. The Group Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for developing, maintaining and overseeing the Group-wide FCRMF. The Financial Crime Risk Management consists of processes and tools under three categories: - Risk identification, assessment and testing; - Risk mitigation and management; and - Risk monitoring and reporting. The FCRMF is supported by a Group-wide Financial Crime Policy. The Financial Crime Policy sets control objectives for the first line of defence to manage four key risks: anti-bribery and corruption (ABC); anti-money laundering and counter-terrorist financing (AML); anti-tax evasion facilitation (ATEF) and; sanctions, including proliferation financing. This combined approach allows us to identify and manage relevant synergies and connections between these risks. Employees are made aware that failure to comply with the Financial Crime Policy may give rise to disciplinary action, up to and including dismissal. # Anti-bribery and corruption Bribery and corruption comprises: - Improperly obtaining or retaining business; - Improperly securing a business or personal advantage; - Inducing another person to perform their role in breach of an expectation of good faith, impartiality or trust; and - Using entrusted authority or power for personal/third party gain, to trade influence or to obtain any other unethical or illegal benefit. Barclays and its employees are prohibited from engaging in or facilitating any form of bribery and corruption (giving and receiving, directly or indirectly). The Financial Crime Policy contains the minimum risk-based control requirements that all our businesses, legal entities and employees must follow. The Financial Crime Policy is designed to ensure that Barclays' employees know how to identify and manage the legal, regulatory and reputational risks associated with all forms of bribery and corruption. # Anti-money laundering Money laundering, the processing of assets derived from criminal activity, and terrorist financing have been identified as major threats to the international financial services community and therefore to Barclays. The Financial Crime Policy includes the requirement for Barclays businesses and legal entities to have adequate systems, procedures, and controls in place to manage the risk of Barclays being used to facilitate money laundering and terrorist financing. The requirements of UK legislation apply to Barclays globally. As a transatlantic bank, the Financial Crime Policy takes into account US anti-money laundering requirements, in addition to EU and other jurisdictions in which we operate. Barclays also takes into account guidance issued by bodies such as the Wolfsburg Group. # Anti-tax evasion facilitation Tax evasion is a financial crime and a predicate offence to money laundering in the UK and many other countries in which we operate. Barclays takes a zero-tolerance approach to deliberate facilitation of tax evasion in any country and has procedures in place to prevent it. We also expect the same from our employees and third parties providing services for or on our behalf. Barclays is committed to preventing tax evasion facilitation by our employees or third parties acting for or on our behalf. # Sanctions Sanctions are restrictions on activity with targeted countries, regions, governments, entities, individuals and industries that are imposed by bodies such as the European Union, the United Nations, (including but not limited to the proliferation of nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons). In order to protect its reputation and other legitimate business interests, in certain circumstances Barclays' sanctions risk appetite may be more conservative than its legal obligations. The Financial Crime Policy is designed to ensure that Barclays and its employees know how to identify and manage the risks associated with sanctions, including the risk that activity is undertaken through Barclays in breach of sanctions regulations. For further details of the Barclays approach to Financial Crime compliance and prevention, please see our Financial Crime Compliance Statement in the Sustainable Resource Hub at home.barclays/our-sustainability-/sustainability-resource-hub/statements-and-policy-positions/ --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 176 # Other Governance (continued) # Health and safety ## Policy and standard Barclays has a suite of health and safety (H&S) policies and standards, and clear roles and responsibilities for leadership and colleagues. These combine under a single high-level statement of commitment endorsed by the Group ExCo. ## Health and safety management system Barclays has implemented and maintains a comprehensive H&S management system globally, which is certified to the international standard ISO 45001 in the USA, UK, India, Singapore, Hong Kong, Dubai and Japan. ## Health and safety risk assessment and assurance Barclays H&S management system is validated through H&S assurance and risk assessment programmes. Risk assessments identify hazards and the control measures required to proportionately manage the associated risks, whilst H&S assurance validates that control measures are designed effectively, implemented and operating effectively, and that site monitoring is taking place. While H&S legislative requirements vary globally, our assurance and risk assessment programmes apply a risk-based approach, designed by our internal H&S team and informed by their experience, specific legislative requirements and relevant factors such as building type, building criticality, activities, and occupancy. ## Incident management Barclays' incident reporting system ensures incidents are recorded and investigated appropriately, as required by local regulatory statute, and escalated as required by Barclays' risk management frameworks. | Measure | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | Lost Time Incidents (per 100 employees) | 0.026 | 0.018 | ## Contractor management Suppliers are subject to a supplier H&S risk evaluation during onboarding, annually thereafter and when they notify a change in service delivery. In addition, suppliers complete an annual control obligation review. ## Health and safety training Colleagues complete regular mandatory H&S training with additional information and guidance provided on Barclays' H&S intranet. This information includes risk assessments, guidance and templates for personal emergency evacuation plans, display screen equipment assessments, manual handling, occupational stress, and lone working. ## Governance Key indicators (KIs) and control environment characteristics (CECs) are defined to support the oversight and monitoring of Barclays' global H&S performance. These are reviewed at least annually and reported at least quarterly. The Health and Safety Risk Management Framework overview is as follows: | Health and Safety Forum | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Leadership | Statement of Commitment for Health and Safety | | | | H&S Data | Data: Performance against commitment | | | | Risk Categories | Premises | People | Physical Security | | Risks | Premises or infrastructure incidents (excluding Physical Security incidents) result in harm to people | Harm to colleagues' welfare as a result of health and wellbeing-related hazard mismanagement | Physical security incidents resulting in harm to staff or external parties | | Policies | Premises – Property and Health & Safety Policy | Health Services & Wellbeing Policy | Physical Security Policy | | Standards | Premises – Health & Safety Standard | Health Services & Wellbeing Standard | Physical Security Standard | KIs include quantitative and qualitative measures against defined tolerance. Examples of KIs and CECs include: - Annual review, or where change occurs, of health and safety hazard risk assessments; - 100% of reported incidents are reviewed (and investigated where required); - 100% of regulatory reportable incidents are reported within required timescale; - Quarterly horizon scanning of new/ revised local H&S legislation; - Completion of H&S site assurance visits within required risk-rated frequencies; - Completion of fire risk assessments within required risk-rated frequencies; and - Provision of necessary mandatory H&S training content. Barclays' programme of internal control testing supports the effective performance of KIs and CECs, and enables improvement opportunities to be identified and acted upon. H&S performance is reported to the Group H&S Forum which oversees effective management of H&S globally. Barclays operates a reward and recognition scheme through which colleagues are recognised for improving controls, including those supporting the H&S management system. ## Management information The H&S team collates and reviews management information including incident, risk assessment and H&S assurance data to identify themes and trends. Relevant insights, emerging themes and other information are reported to and reviewed by the Group H&S Forum. ## 2025 improvements H&S improvements delivered in 2025 include: - Extending ISO 45001 certification in line with our continuous improvement strategy; - Embedding an improved H&S site assurance and fire risk assessment execution schedule; - Enhancing colleague accessibility for completing display screen equipment assessments; and - Evolving driving for work programme to create improved risk management information. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 177 # Other Governance (continued) # Managing data privacy, security and resilience We have strict policies to protect privacy and keep data secure. ## Data privacy Many of the jurisdictions in which the Barclays Group operates have privacy and data protection laws in effect. While these may vary in detail, generally they reflect internationally recognised privacy principles found in the UN's Universal Declaration of Human Rights, the European Convention on Human Rights and the European Union's Charter of Fundamental Rights. We strive to operate in accordance with these standards and recognise that respect for privacy rights is a key element of good corporate governance and social responsibility. We strive to be transparent about our use of personal information when delivering our products and services and acknowledge the responsibility we have for safeguarding privacy. As the Group increasingly adopts digital solutions to deliver next-generation consumer financial services, we appreciate our clients, customers and others may wish to understand how this may impact the use of their personal information. A globally applicable Barclays Data Privacy Policy and associated Standards set out what is expected of all Group businesses and functions when collecting, using and sharing personal information. To promote clear accountability, the Data Privacy Policy and associated Standards include responsibilities for the Business Senior Manager who has ultimate responsibility for the processing of personal data within that business. An agreed assurance programme measures compliance with the Data Privacy Policy and associated Standards. Barclays Group colleagues must complete annual data privacy training which is reviewed and refreshed each year, with additional tailored training provided as necessary. The Group Data Protection Officer (GDPO) reports on data privacy issues to the highest level of management. Through client, customer and employee privacy notices, we endeavour to explain clearly and openly how and why we use personal information and the legal grounds we rely upon. When we receive complaints, we seek to address these fairly. Several jurisdictions also provide individuals with specific rights, such as the right to have access to or request deletion of their personal information. Barclays provides a publicly accessible mailbox and secure channels via its website to enable individuals to make their privacy requests and receive responses from a dedicated team. Barclays requires its suppliers to comply with data protection and privacy laws, regulations and standards relevant to the jurisdictions in which they operate and relevant to any transferred personal data. Our requirements are set out and principally managed through our supplier contracts, which require that suppliers commit to ensuring personal data shared with them is safeguarded and respected throughout the supply chain. ## Data security As detailed below, Barclays' Chief Information Security Office operates controls aimed at mitigating cybersecurity-related risks and understanding internal and external threats. Barclays deploys controls designed to protect its sensitive information and the data that has been entrusted to us by customers and clients, in line with our Standards, taking into account findings from internal and external reviews of our controls. Barclays seeks to protect the security of data we share with third parties, including by conducting remote and on-site inspections of certain suppliers to review their controls against contractual obligations and industry standards. A Third-Party Service Provider Framework is in place which sets out control requirements for business units to manage the operational, reputational, conduct and legal risks to Barclays through its supply chain. The nature of such controls is described in further detail below. In operating under a hybrid working model, we have continued to educate colleagues on cybersecurity risks in order to help minimise risks related to remote working, such as data exploitation or leakage. Barclays works with industry bodies and cybersecurity vendors to learn and evolve from risk events in other organisations. Our teams use such intelligence to simulate plausible cybersecurity and data compromise scenarios that allow us to exercise, review and improve our response and recovery plans in preparation for evolving threats. ## Operational resilience The stability and resilience of our systems, workforce and premises, and the continued provision of third-party services, all have a direct impact on the quality of our service. Resilience and security are key priorities for the Board. Barclays continues to strengthen its resilience posture and is focused on its ability to recover from a range of 'severe but plausible' scenarios which could cause detriment to its customers and clients and the broader financial market. To enable this, we define Group-wide business services and their interdependencies across the Group, including technology, third-party services and our people and premises. Recovery plans and business response plans have been developed for a range of different disruption events, such as cyber or data integrity disruptions, technology failures, or the unavailability of our colleagues. These recovery plans are reviewed and validated through regular testing which supports our aim to reduce the volume and impact of operational incidents year-on-year. We also conduct regular assurance on third parties to assess their capability. Operational resilience is delivered through an established and robust Operational Resilience Framework which is underpinned by a Policy, Standards, methodologies and procedures, and is aligned to the requirements and expectations defined by our regulators. Our Operational Resilience Framework is integrated with Barclays' Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF) and sets the tone from the top. The Standards are embedded within the Barclays --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) Controls Framework and provide a consistent approach across the Group. The Operational Recovery Planning Policy and Standards drive the identification of the business services that are most important to Barclays, its customers, clients and the markets in which Barclays operates. The Standards also define requirements for setting recovery targets, mapping of dependencies, planning and testing. Resilience and security are the responsibility of everyone within the Group. All permanent employees are required to complete annual mandatory training on these topics. Please refer to page 100 for details of Barclays PLC Board Risk Committee oversight relating to operational resilience. Please refer to the 'Material existing and emerging risks' section in our Risk review on pages 193 to 194 for further details on cyber attacks, data management and information protection. Please refer to the 'Supervision and regulation' section in our Risk review on page 309 for further details on our regulatory approach to managing such risks. # Chief Information Security Office Barclays' Chief Information Security Office exists to keep the bank, its customers, clients, and colleagues safe and secure, and to support the resilience of our operations. It supports Barclays' ability to operate in a protected and secure environment, and actively promotes a culture of security as everyone's responsibility. The Group Chief Information Security Officer (CISO) heads Barclays' Chief Information Security Office. Barclays' Group CISO reports directly to the Group Co-Chief Operating Officers (members of the Group Executive Committee). Barclays' Group CISO is responsible for assessing and managing Barclays' risks from cybersecurity threats, and overseeing key areas that include cybersecurity operations (including cyberthreat intelligence), proactive defence (which includes penetration testing and vulnerability management), security architecture and engineering, cyber posture and assurance (which includes third-party security management), data security, and identity and access management. The Group CISO is also supported by a team of CISOs and BISOs (Business Information Security Officers) for business units, regions and jurisdictions. Chief Information Security Office leaders manage Barclays' cybersecurity activities and are accountable for the day-to-day monitoring of residual risk, identification of gaps, oversight of remedial actions and implementation of strategy. The Group CISO has more than 25 years of experience managing cybersecurity for global financial institutions, leading large-scale initiatives across all cybersecurity domains, including cyber defence, application security, vulnerability assessment, data protection, third-party risk, cyber resilience, and security engineering. The Group CISO and supporting leadership team collectively have advanced degrees and senior level experience managing cybersecurity risks in a variety of sectors, including those that represent critical national infrastructure, such as health care, telecommunications and financial institutions. They are supported by teams of subject matter experts and analysts in a variety of specialisations. Supporting the delivery of Barclays' cyber and information security strategy are multiple management committees, forums, and councils, including Cyber Control Councils for each of the 12 Standards supporting the Group Information and Cybersecurity Policy (as more fully described below). These Cyber Control Standards Councils feed into the Cybersecurity Risk Category Controls Forum, the Group Controls Committee, the Group Risk Committee, and ultimately the Board Risk Committee. In addition, the Group Co-Chief Operating Officers hold business reviews that include management updates on the status of cybersecurity across the Group, and a standalone Chief Operating Office Controls Forum that also escalates to the Group Controls Committee. Barclays' Operational Risk and Internal Audit functions provide independent views of cyber risk management from second and third line of defence perspectives. Barclays assesses its cybersecurity activities against the industry-recognised National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Cybersecurity Framework. Under Barclays' ERMF, there is an Information and Cyber Security Policy supported by 12 Standards which define the minimum requirements for cybersecurity matters across the Barclays Group. The Policy is embedded into the Group's ERMF with Standards to implement cybersecurity risk management. The Standards cover the following topics: Cryptography, Network Security, Security Configuration, Data Loss Prevention, Vulnerability Management, Data Security, Incident Response & Threat Intelligence, Threat Management, Governance, Identity & Access Management, Third Party Information and Cyber Security, and Application Security. The Group CISO approves and is accountable for the Information and Cyber Security Policy and associated Standards. As part of our programme, we periodically assess our performance against these Standards and identify areas for improvement and remediation. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Other Governance (continued) The Board Risk Committee, within its oversight of Operational Risk as a principal risk, is responsible for overseeing risks arising from cybersecurity threats. In 2025, the Group CISO provided updates to the Board Risk Committee about cybersecurity risks facing the Group. Such updates addressed topics that included the cybersecurity threat environment and ransomware attack preparedness, measurement of Barclays' risk and control posture, cybersecurity incident trends and Barclays' response, plans to improve Barclays' ability to recover from a material cyber attack scenario, Barclays' vulnerability management, privileged access to Barclays' systems, and regulatory developments. In addition, the Group Co-Chief Operating Officers provided updates to the Board detailing the progress being made to strengthen cybersecurity capabilities and reduce risk across the organisation as the threat environment continues to evolve. Engaging external security consultants to conduct penetration tests, attack simulations and other reviews to independently benchmark Barclays' cybersecurity capabilities is an important part of our cybersecurity programme that allows us to identify and remediate cybersecurity weaknesses. In 2025, individual testing activities were undertaken as part of the Chief Information Security Office's threat-led assurance model to assess Barclays' cyber defence capabilities. Barclays also engages and partners with third-party security providers on certain activities such as cyber recovery, software vulnerability scanning, penetration testing, distributed denial of service (DDoS) attack prevention, phishing simulations, third-party risk management, incident response, threat intelligence, fraud prevention, and industry benchmarking. An important part of Barclays' security and cybersecurity environment is its Joint Operations Centres (JOCs), which operate 24/7 from three globally strategic locations, linking Barclays' security professionals and incident response managers with control functions and business unit representatives. The JOCs deliver security responsiveness by uniting core security functions and providing a central information and coordination point for security incident management and escalation, based on defined severity levels. During escalating, significant incidents, the Barclays Crisis Management Team monitors the response by Incident Management Teams, Resilience Leads, and others, and will invoke the relevant Barclays Crisis Leadership Teams (CLTs) if the severity of the incident so requires. CLTs are business-led teams at entity, business unit, and regional levels that provide strategic leadership in a crisis, maintain incident management oversight, and co-ordinate key decision-making. To manage security risk from Barclays' third-party suppliers, many of which perform critical services for Barclays' businesses and handle sensitive Barclays data, we have a set of contractual Information and Cyber Security Supplier Control Obligations that are based on requirements in our internal Standards. Using our dedicated Third Party Security Management team's capabilities, as well as third-party tooling, we conduct assurance over our third parties and their respective suppliers and partners against those obligations. Activity is structured on a risk-based approach that prioritises suppliers that underpin our most important business services. Identified issues are managed formally, but we also engage proactively with third-party suppliers to help them strengthen their security and resilience posture. To recognise the risk presented by third-party suppliers, which are increasingly targeted by threat actors, we regularly alert third-party suppliers where we anticipate that they may be more vulnerable and should take preventative action. Notwithstanding such third-party risk management efforts, Barclays does not have direct control over the cybersecurity of the systems of its third parties and their respective suppliers and partners, limiting the Group's ability to effectively protect and defend against certain threats. # Certifications Barclays holds four ISO 27001 certifications (i.e., the international standard on how to manage information security), the Cyber Essentials/Cyber Essentials Plus Certification, and a UK certification for Digital Banking. # Training Barclays requires colleagues to complete mandatory information security training at least annually. Topics covered include incident reporting procedures, protecting sensitive data, device security, data leakage prevention, social engineering awareness, and password management. Consequences of non-completion may include disciplinary action and impact to compensation. Barclays performs a number of key activities related to identifying, investigating, responding to and containing phishing, including an operational process that provides education and awareness through phishing simulation exercises, and management interventions for employees who demonstrate susceptibility to phishing lures. To report suspected phishing to Barclays' JOCs for further investigation, colleagues have a reporting tool integrated into their email account and receive feedback on whether the reported email was suspect or genuine. Barclays uses metrics to continually refine its phishing education and training. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-K 180 # Risk review The management of risk is a critical underpinning to the execution of Barclays’ strategy. The material risks and uncertainties the Group faces across its business and portfolios are key areas of management focus. | | | Page | Pillar 3 Report | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Risk management strategy | Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF) | 182 | 105 | | Overview of Barclays’ approach to risk management. A detailed overview together with more specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment can be found in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 or at barclays.com | Segregation of duties – the ‘Three Lines of Defence’ model | 182 | 105 | | | Principal risks | 183 | 106 | | | Risk appetite | 183 | 106 | | | Risk committees | 183 | 108 | | | Barclays’ risk culture | 183 | 109 | | | Our Code of Conduct – the Barclays Way | 183 | 110 | | Material existing and emerging risks | Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one principal risk | 184 | N/A | | Insight into the level of risk across our business and portfolios, the material existing and emerging risks and uncertainties we face and the key areas of management focus. | Climate risk | 190 | N/A | | | Credit risk | 191 | N/A | | | Market risk | 192 | N/A | | | Treasury and Capital risk | 192 | N/A | | | Liquidity risk | 192 | N/A | | | Capital risk | 193 | N/A | | | Interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB) | 193 | N/A | | | Operational risk | 193 | N/A | | | Tax risk | 197 | N/A | | | Model risk | 197 | N/A | | | Compliance risk | 198 | N/A | | | Financial crime risk | 198 | N/A | | | Reputation risk | 199 | N/A | | | Legal risk and legal, competition and regulatory matters | 199 | N/A | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk review (continued) | | Page | Pillar 3 Report | | --- | --- | --- | | Principal risk management Barclays’ approach to risk management for each principal risk with focus on organisation and structure and roles and responsibilities. | Climate risk management | 202 | 116 | | Credit risk management | 205 | 119 | | Market risk management | 206 | 156 | | Treasury and capital risk management | 207 | 173 | | Operational risk management | 209 | 181 | | Model risk management | 209 | 186 | | Compliance risk management | 210 | 189 | | Financial crime risk management | 212 | 191 | | Reputation risk management | 212 | 193 | | Legal risk management | 212 | 195 | | Climate risk performance | Carbon-related assets | 214 | N/A | | Elevated risk sectors | 214 | N/A | | Financing (capital markets) | 217 | N/A | | Credit risk performance | Credit risk | 222 | N/A | | Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and risk transfer | 224 | N/A | | Expected Credit Losses | 226 | N/A | | Movement in gross exposures and impairment allowance including provisions for loan commitments and financial guarantees (audited) | 231 | N/A | | Management adjustments to models for impairment (audited) | 239 | N/A | | Climate risk ECL assessment | 242 | N/A | | Measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis | 243 | N/A | | Analysis of the concentration of credit risk | 252 | N/A | | The approach to management and representation of credit quality | 254 | N/A | | Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types | 262 | N/A | | Forbearance | 265 | N/A | | Assets held for sale | 268 | N/A | | Market risk performance | Market risk overview and summary of performance | 273 | 91 | | Treasury and capital risk performance | Treasury and Capital risk | 275 | N/A | | Capital risk overview and summary of performance | 286 | N/A | | Interest rate risk in the banking book | 293 | N/A | | Operational risk performance | Operational risk overview and summary of performance | 295 | 100 | | Operational risk profile | 295 | 102 | | Model risk performance | Model risk overview | 298 | N/A | | Compliance risk performance | Compliance risk overview | 298 | N/A | | Financial Crime risk performance | Financial Crime risk overview | 298 | | | Reputation risk performance | Reputation risk overview | 299 | N/A | | Legal risk performance | Legal risk overview | 299 | N/A | | Supervision and regulation | | 300 | N/A | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 182 # Risk management # Barclays' risk management strategy This section introduces the Group’s approach to managing and identifying risks, and for fostering a sound risk culture. ## Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF) The ERMF governs the way in which the Group identifies and manages its risks. It outlines the highest level arrangements for risk management by setting out standards, objectives and key responsibilities of different groups of employees of the Group. It is approved by the Barclays PLC Board on recommendation of the Group Board Risk Committee and the Group Chief Risk Officer. The ERMF sets out: - principal risks faced by the Group, which guide the organisation of risk management processes - risk appetite requirements. This helps define the level of risk we are willing to undertake in our business - risk management and segregation of duties: The ERMF defines a Three Lines of Defence model - roles and responsibilities for key risk management and governance: The accountabilities of the Group CEO, Group CRO and other senior managers, as well as an overview of Barclays PLC committees. The ERMF is complemented by frameworks, policies and standards which are mainly aligned to individual principal risks: - frameworks cover high level principles guiding the management of principal risks, and set out details of which policies are needed, and high level governance arrangements - policies set out the control objectives and high level requirements to address the key principles articulated in their associated frameworks. Policies state ‘what’ those within scope are required to do - standards set out the detail of the control requirements to ensure the control objectives set by the policies are met. ## Segregation of duties – the ‘Three Lines of Defence’ model The ERMF sets out a clear lines of defence model. All colleagues are responsible for understanding and managing risks within the context of their individual roles and responsibilities, as set out below. - The first line comprises all employees engaged in the revenue-generating and client-facing areas of the Group and all associated support functions, including Finance, Operations, Treasury and Human Resources. The first line is responsible for identifying and managing the risks in which they are engaged, operating within applicable limits, and escalating risk events or issues as appropriate. Employees in the first line have primary responsibility for their risks and their activities are subject to oversight from the relevant parts of the second and third lines. - The second line comprises the Risk and Compliance functions. The role of the second line is to establish the limits, rules and constraints, and the frameworks, policies and standards under which all activities shall be performed, consistent with the risk - appetite of the Group, and to oversee the performance of the Group against these limits, rules and constraints. - Controls for first line activities will ordinarily be established by the control officers operating within the control framework of the firm. These will remain subject to oversight by the second line. - The third line of defence is Internal Audit, and is responsible for providing independent assurance over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and controls over current, systemic and evolving risks. - The Legal function provides support to all areas of the bank and is not formally part of any of the three lines of defence, The Legal function is responsible for proactively identifying, communicating and providing legal advice on applicable laws, rules and regulations. Except in relation to the legal advice it provides or procures, it is subject to second line oversight with respect to its own operational and compliance risks, as well as with respect to the legal risk to which the bank is exposed. ## Tesco Bank On 1 November 2024, the Group completed the acquisition of Tesco Bank. Following the acquisition, the Tesco Bank business has begun to transition across to the Group risk framework, with dispensations in place for material divergences from existing Group policy requirements. Full alignment and changes to the Tesco Bank risk approach are part of the wider integration programme and activities. ![img-68.jpeg](img-68.jpeg) --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk management (continued) ## Principal risks The ERMF identifies ten principal risks namely: climate risk, credit risk, market risk, treasury and capital risk, operational risk, model risk, compliance risk, financial crime, reputation risk and legal risk. Financial crime risk was elevated to a principal risk in the ERMF, effective from 1 January 2025. Previously, financial crime risk was managed as part of compliance risk. Recognising the increased external threat of financial crime, this change will enhance transparency and visibility of financial crime risk within the Group and reinforce independent assessment, management and oversight of financial crime risk. Each of the principal risks is overseen by an accountable executive within the Group who is responsible for overseeing and/or assigning responsibilities for the framework, policies and standards that set out associated responsibilities and expectations and detail the related requirements around risk management. In addition, certain risks span across more than one principal risk. ## Risk appetite Risk appetite is defined as the level of risk which the Group is prepared to accept in carrying out its activities. It provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board with respect to the Group's current and evolving risk profile, allowing strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis. Risk appetite is approved by the Barclays PLC Board in aggregate and disseminated across legal entities and businesses, supported by limits to enable and control specific exposures and activities that have material concentration risk implications. ## Risk committees Barclays various risk committees consider risk matters relevant to their business, and escalate as required to the Group Risk Committee (GRC), whose Chair, in turn, escalates to the Barclays PLC Board Risk Committees and the Barclays PLC Board. In addition to setting the risk appetite of the Group, the Board is responsible for approving the ERMF, and reviewing reputation risk matters. It receives regular information on the risk profile of the Group, and has ultimate responsibility for risk appetite and capital plans. Further, there are two Board-level committees which oversee the application of the ERMF and implementation of key aspects, the Barclays PLC Board Risk Committee (BRC) and the Barclays PLC Board Audit Committee (BAC). Additionally, the Barclays PLC Board Remuneration Committee oversees pay practices focusing on aligning pay to sustainable performance. - The Barclays PLC Board Risk Committee (BRC): the BRC monitors the Group's risk profile against the agreed appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, the actions taken by management are reviewed to ascertain that the BRC is comfortable with them. The BRC also reviews certain key risk methodologies, the effectiveness of risk management, and the Group's risk profile, including the material issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The committee also commissions regular updates and in-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by business heads, the Group CRO or senior risk managers. - The Barclays PLC Board Audit Committee (BAC): the BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, quarterly papers on accounting judgements, including a review of the adequacy of impairment allowances. - The Barclays PLC Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo): the RemCo receives proposals on ex-ante and ex-post risk adjustments to variable remuneration based on risk management performance including events, issues and the wider risk profile. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives. The terms of reference and additional details on membership and activities for each of the principal Board committees are available from the corporate governance section of the Barclays website at: home.barclays/who-we-are/our-governance/board-committees/ The GRC is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the risk profile of the Group. This includes coverage of all principal risks (with the exception of certain decisions on matters impacting reputation risk), and any other material risks, to which the Group is exposed. The GRC reviews and recommends the proposed risk appetite and associated limits to the BRC. The committee covers all business units and legal entities of the Group and incorporates specific coverage of Barclays Bank Group. Risk themes and horizon scanning reports, highlighting emerging and forward looking risks, are regularly presented to the BRC for discussion and analysis. The themes are derived and quantified from principal risk horizon scanning and risk registers, complemented by senior management and BRC input. Watching brief items are collated and informed along the risk themes as a list of risks which may have a more limited impact and likelihood in the near-term but have the potential to develop and meet the risk theme definition in the future. The inventory of risk themes is updated regularly with key changes presented to the BRC. Key risk themes are a subset of the risk themes considered most topical at that moment and material to the Group considering the external environment. The BRC semi-annually reviews and discusses a report titled 'Key Risk Themes and Management Actions'. ## Barclays' risk culture Risk culture can be defined as the norms, attitudes and behaviours related to risk awareness, risk taking and risk management. This is reflected in how the Group identifies, escalates and manages risk matters. Barclays is committed to maintaining a robust risk culture in which: - management expect, model and reward the right behaviours from a risk and control perspective - colleagues identify, manage and escalate risk and control matters, and meet their responsibilities around risk management. The Group CEO works with the Executive Management to embed a strong risk culture within the firm, with particular regard to the identification, escalation and management of risk matters, in accordance with the ERMF. This is supported by our Purpose, Values and Mindset, as well by as by setting a standard of consistent excellence. Specifically, all employees regardless of their positions, functions or locations must play their part in the Group's risk management. Employees are required to be familiar with risk management policies which are relevant to their responsibilities, know how to escalate actual or potential risk issues, and have a role-appropriate level of awareness of the risk management process as defined by the ERMF. ## Our Code of Conduct – the Barclays Way Globally, all colleagues must attest to the 'Barclays Way', our Code of Conduct, and comply with all frameworks, policies and standards applicable to their roles. The Code of Conduct outlines the Purpose, Values and Mindset which govern our 'Barclays Way' of working across our business globally. It constitutes a reference point covering all aspects of colleagues' working relationships, and provides guidance on working with other Barclays employees, customers and clients, governments and regulators, business partners, suppliers, competitors and the broader community. See home.barclays/our-sustainability-/sustainability-resource-hub/statements-and-policy-positions/ for more details. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks ## Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance The Group has identified a broad range of risks to which its businesses are exposed. Material risks are those to which senior management pay particular attention and which could cause the delivery of the Group’s strategy, results of operations, financial condition and/or prospects to differ materially from expectations. Emerging risks are those which have unknown components, the impact of which could crystallise over a longer time period. The factors set out below should not be regarded as a complete and comprehensive statement of all the potential risks and uncertainties which the Group faces. For example, certain other factors beyond the Group’s control, including escalation of global conflicts, acts of terrorism, natural disasters, pandemics and similar events, although not detailed below, could have a similar impact on the Group. ## Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one principal risk ### i) Business conditions, general economy and geopolitical issues The Group’s operations are subject to changes in global and local economic and market conditions, as well as geopolitical developments, which may have a material impact on the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. A deterioration in global or local economic and market conditions may result in (among other things): (i) deteriorating business, consumer or investor confidence and lower levels of investment and productivity, which in turn may lead to lower customer and client activity, including lower demand for borrowing; (ii) higher default rates, delinquencies, write-offs and impairment charges as borrowers struggle with their debt commitments; (iii) subdued asset prices, which may impact the value of collateral held by the Group and require the Group and its clients to post additional collateral in order to satisfy margin calls; (iv) mark-to-market losses in trading portfolios resulting from changes in factors such as creditworthiness, securities prices and solvency of counterparties; and (v) revisions to calculated expected credit losses (ECLs) leading to increases in impairment allowances. In addition, the Group’s ability to borrow from other financial institutions or raise funding from external investors may be affected by deteriorating economic conditions and market disruption. Geopolitical events can also cause financial instability and affect economic growth. During 2025, global economic conditions have been marked by uncertainty driven by a rapidly developing geopolitical environment, the impact of US trade policies, diverging monetary policies, continued economic slowdown in China and structural economic issues in the UK and the EU. Without limitation, the Group has observed the following macroeconomic risk themes / trends: - Limitations on economic output growth, mostly driven by: (i) tight labour markets and low productivity growth in the main western economies; (ii) large fiscal deficits; and (iii) uncertainty about the impact of trade policies, export controls and tariff implementation across the globe dampening business and consumer sentiment and economic activity through constrained consumer spending and business investment outside of sectors such as artificial intelligence (AI) and defence. These factors could lead to economic stagnation or even recessionary dynamics across Europe, the UK and the US which could have a material adverse effect on the Group's results of operations and profitability. - In the US, executive and legislative initiatives in areas such as trade, foreign policy, energy, immigration, federal government spending, regulatory and institutional change, among others, has led to uncertainty about the long term net impact of these factors on the wider economy and the overall effects on prices, labour markets, consumer spending, business sentiment and fiscal balances. A significant proportion of the Group’s portfolio is located in the US, including a major credit card portfolio and a range of corporate and investment banking exposures. If the aforementioned factors have a long term negative impact on interest rates, inflation, business performance, employment, competitiveness and economic output, this could lead to higher levels of impairment and/or lower revenues, which could have a material adverse effect on the Group's results of operations and profitability. - The US administration's approach to foreign policy and regulatory and institutional frameworks has departed from that of previous administrations. The challenges to the status quo could have long term impacts on the US and its trading partners and there is a risk that this will result in disruption to the long term standing of the US. A potential deterioration of the perceived US exceptionalism that drives demand for US assets and sustains the USD’s role as a reserve currency could materialise in episodes of uncertainty and volatility in global financial markets that could negatively impact the business environments the Group and its clients operate in. - The adoption of tariffs and other protectionist measures and countermeasures could further complicate the economic outlook for the EU, China and other export-driven emerging markets given their trade surpluses. A worsening economic outlook for these markets could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business in the affected regions. - The EU faces a number of structural challenges and is vulnerable to adverse geopolitical developments. Key difficulties for the EU include heavily indebted governments, a lack of productivity growth, tight labour markets and deteriorating demographics. In addition, some of the EU's key economic sectors, including automobiles, chemicals and renewables among others, are under pressure from competitive imports and changing trade patterns. Uncertainty surrounding NATO's future and pressure to increase spending add to the vulnerability. A deterioration in these difficulties could adversely impact the Group's business in the EU. - In China, while headline GDP growth in 2025 has been broadly in line with its target of around 5%, recently released economic data has shown a weakening with a continued property market slump and a more challenging environment for its export-driven sectors, while concerns remain over the longer term risks of deflation, weak domestic demand and an ageing demographic, which will all have led to a more uncertain outlook. The combination of these risks pressuring the financial sector and precipitating wider systemic concerns could affect the exposures of the Group across global markets which are subject to contagion effects. - The UK, which is the Group's main retail banking market, faces a number of structural challenges. While the Labour government has identified economic growth as a priority, it has so far remained --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) subdued, falling short of market expectations. Furthermore, the fiscal position of the UK has remained challenging and there are risks of further economic headwinds, such as supply chain disruptions and trade fragmentation leading to higher inflation, which could have a material adverse effect on the Group's results of operations and profitability. The long term impact of the Labour government's fiscal policy could be detrimental for growth as well as for business and consumer sentiment, with risks to the Group's retail and corporate businesses. - Weak economic sentiment is also reflected in the market's view of UK assets, widening spreads for UK government and UK corporate debt, softening of the housing market and lowering valuations of UK equities compared with non-UK peers. This may have a material adverse impact on the collateral held by the Group in relation to its secured lending portfolios and may result in higher impairments and capital requirements. The UK stock market in particular continues to face structural headwinds, ranging from economic uncertainty and sectoral concentration to limited domestic capital deployment and regulatory constraints, potentially undermining its competitiveness and investor appeal, leaving the Group, and its large UK corporate clients, indirectly exposed to potential risks relating to capital access and strategic positioning. - The loss of 'the presumption of conformity' is widely reported to have raised costs for UK customers and clients exporting to the EU as it results in their products no longer being presumed to be in line with corresponding EU rules. This, together with the risk of regulatory divergence between the UK and the EU has had, and may continue to have, an adverse impact on both the Group's EU and UK operations. Efforts to recalibrate the relationship between both parties are ongoing with the first review of the EU-UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement (TCA) expected in 2026. The trend for the EU-UK relationship is shifting from a minimalist post-Brexit stance toward structured cooperation on trade, climate, security, mobility and regulatory alignment, but risks to materialisation remain. A deterioration in the aforementioned economic and business environment could result in (among other things): - A prolonged slowdown in the markets where the Group operates, with lower economic output, higher unemployment and depressed property prices, which could lead to increased impairments in relation to a number of the Group's portfolios (including, but not limited to, the UK mortgage portfolio, the unsecured lending portfolio (including credit cards) and commercial real estate exposures). - Increased market volatility (in particular in currencies and interest rates), which could impact the Group's trading book positions and affect the underlying value of assets held in the banking book, including securities held by the Group for liquidity purposes. In addition, market confidence and depositor perceptions of banking fragility as seen in certain institutions in 2023 could increase the severity and velocity of deposit outflows, impacting the Group's liquidity position; - A credit rating downgrade for one or more members of the Group (either directly or indirectly as a result of a downgrade in the UK sovereign credit ratings), which could significantly increase the Group's cost of funding and/or reduce its access to funding, widen credit spreads and have a material adverse impact on the Group's interest margins and liquidity position; and/or - A market-wide widening of credit spreads or reduced investor appetite for the Group's debt securities, which could negatively impact the Group's cost of and/or access to funding. In addition to weak/unfavourable economic conditions, other risk factors could adversely affect the business environment in which the Group operates: - During 2025, financial markets volatility and risk of disorderly markets have been driven by developments in the technological sector, where the deployment of AI and high expectations of returns have led to historic levels of capital expenditure and equity valuations on a select few, mostly US, corporations. Concentration risk and a potential valuation bubble if reality fails to meet expectations could lead to strong market corrections and negative wealth effects, which in turn, may impact the wider economy and cause a deterioration in the business and economic environment. - Economic activity is largely dependent on data, technology, networks, infrastructure and cybersecurity, heightening the risk and potential impact of service disruptions, either accidental or driven by bad actors such as cybercriminals or state sponsored actors using asymmetric tactics. - Financial institutions are often perceived to have a role in global developments or events like geopolitical conflicts, climate change, digitalisation, fraud, money laundering, and sanctions, which give rise to reputational risks which are complicated to navigate. - Disruptions to global supply chains have underlined the potential for further adverse impacts on the markets in which the Group operates. Further geopolitical deterioration, particularly in Ukraine, the Middle East and/or South China Sea, and trade protectionism related de-coupling of production chains could also have a negative impact on the markets in which the Group operates. - Diverging financial, conduct and prudential regulations between the jurisdictions where the Group operates increase the complexity and costs of compliance. In particular, increasing uncertainty and regulatory divergence between different jurisdictions relating to climate risk will add complexity and increase costs for compliance against varying regulatory expectations whilst also making it difficult for the Group to effectively and consistently manage stakeholder expectations and climate risks across its portfolios. The circumstances mentioned above could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition, prospects, liquidity, capital position and credit ratings (including potential credit rating agency changes of outlooks or ratings), as well as on the Group's customers, clients, employees and suppliers. # ii) The impact of interest rate changes on the Group's profitability The impact from changes to interest rates are potentially significant for the Group, especially given the uncertainty as to the size and frequency of such changes, particularly in the Group's main markets of the UK, the US and the EU. --- Material existing and emerging risks (continued) Interest rate cuts could put pressure on the Group's net interest margins (the difference between lending income and borrowing costs) due to either a delay in passthrough or a smaller passthrough of the interest rate cuts to customer and client deposits. In that scenario the maturing structural hedges (portion maturing as part of the amortising structure) will be replenished at lower rates and this could adversely affect the profitability and prospects of the Group. Higher interest rates could result in higher funding costs either due to higher refinancing costs or due to deposit balance mix changes as customers and counterparties prefer switching into deposits that pay a higher rate. In addition, interest rates remaining higher for longer (due to either smaller or less frequent than expected interest rate cuts, or larger or more frequent than expected interest rate increases), could lead to generally weaker than expected growth, reduced business confidence and higher unemployment. This, combined with the impact that higher interest rates may have on the affordability of loan arrangements for borrowers (especially when combined with inflationary pressures), could cause stress in the lending portfolio and underwriting activity of the Group. This could result in higher credit losses, driving increased impairment charges which would most notably impact retail unsecured portfolios and wholesale non-investment grade lending. This could have a material effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. In addition, changes in interest rates could have an adverse impact on the value of the securities held in the Group's liquid asset portfolio. Consequently, this could create more volatility than expected through the Group's fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) reserve and could adversely affect the profitability and prospects of the Group. ### iii) Competition in the banking and financial services industry The Group operates in a highly competitive environment in which it must evolve and adapt to significant changes as a result of regulatory reform, technological advances, increased public scrutiny and changes to market and economic conditions. The Group expects that competition in the financial services industry will remain intense and may have a material adverse effect on the Group's future business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. New competitors in the financial services industry continue to emerge. For example, technological advances and the growth of e-commerce have made it possible for non-banks to offer products and services that traditionally were banking products such as electronic securities trading, payments processing and online automated algorithmic-based investment advice. Furthermore, payments processing and other services could be significantly disrupted by technologies, such as blockchain (used in deposit tokenisations and stablecoins) and 'buy now pay later' lending, both of which have been the subject of significant FCA initiatives in recent years, with the FCA starting to regulate 'buy now pay later' lending from 15 July 2026. Furthermore, the introduction of central bank digital currencies could have a significant impact on the banking system and the role of commercial banks by disrupting the current provision of banking products and services. This disruption could allow new competitors, some previously hindered by banking regulation (such as certain FinTechs), to provide customers with access to banking facilities and increase the disintermediation of banking services. New technologies and changing consumer behaviour have previously required, and could continue to require, the Group to incur additional costs to modify or adapt its products or make additional capital investments in its businesses to attract and retain clients and customers or to match products and services offered by its competitors, including technology companies. For example, the Group has continued to take steps to expand its investment in and to integrate AI technologies. Such AI technologies and services are rapidly evolving, and require significant investment, including development and operational costs, to meet the changing needs and expectations of the Group's customers and clients. For related competition risks refer to c) "New and emergent technology" in v) Operational Risk below. Ongoing or increased competition and/or disintermediation of banking services may put pressure on the pricing of the Group's products and services, which could reduce the Group's revenues and profitability, or may cause the Group to lose market share, particularly with respect to traditional banking products such as deposits, bank accounts and mortgage lending. This competition may be on the basis of the quality and variety of products and services offered, transaction execution, innovation, reputation and/or price. These factors may be exacerbated by further regulatory change. The failure of any of the Group's businesses to meet the expectations of clients and customers, whether due to general market conditions, underperformance, a decision not to offer a particular product or service, branch closures, changes in client and customer expectations or other factors, could affect the Group's ability to attract or retain clients and customers. Any such impact could, in turn, reduce the Group's revenues. ### iv) Regulatory change agenda and impact on business model The Group's business is subject to ongoing regulation and associated regulatory risks, including the effects of changes in the laws, regulations, policies, voluntary codes of practice and interpretations of the foregoing in the UK, the US, the EU, and the other markets in which it operates. Many legislative and regulatory changes that are relevant to the Group's business may have an effect beyond the country in which they are enacted, either because the Group's regulators, which include sectoral regulators within the banking and finance industries and legislators in national and supranational governments deliberately enact laws and/or regulations with extra-territorial effect or its global operations mean that the Group gives effect to local laws and regulations on a wider basis. In recent years, regulators and governments have focused on reforming both the prudential regulation of the financial services industry and the ways in which the business of financial services is conducted. Measures taken include enhanced capital, liquidity and funding requirements, the structural separation or prohibition of certain activities by banks, changes in the operation of capital markets activities, the introduction of tax levies and transaction taxes, changes in compensation practices, and more detailed requirements on how business is conducted and clients and customers are treated. Governments and regulators in the UK, the US, the EU or elsewhere may intervene further in relation to areas of industry risk and/or regulatory risk already identified, or in new areas, which could adversely affect the Group. Current and anticipated areas of particular focus for the Group's regulators, where regulatory changes could have a material effect on the Group's business, financial condition, results of operations, prospects, capital, liquidity or funding position, and reputation, include, but are not limited to: - the continued focus by regulators, international bodies, organisations and unions on how institutions conduct --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) business, particularly with regard to the delivery of fair outcomes for customers and ensuring the orderly and transparent operation of global financial markets, including the FCA's ongoing consultation regarding the imposition of a motor finance customer compensation scheme, the consumer duty in the UK, and the FCA's review of the provision of financial advice to consumers; - the implementation of any conduct measures as a result of regulators' focus on and review of organisational culture, employee behaviour and whistleblowing, and the UK regulators' focus on firms' management of non-financial misconduct matters; - the UK regulators' strategy for and promotion of competitive markets and growth, both domestically and internationally, including an increasing focus on streamlining and simplifying regulation; - following on from the simplification of the UK listing regime in July 2024 and the introduction of a new regime for public offers and admission to trading of securities in the UK in January 2026, the reforms to the regulatory frameworks supporting the wholesale financial markets, including recent (and expected) changes to the UK regime for asset management, changes to the bond and derivative transparency regime and potential reforms regarding the quality and accessibility of bond market data through the establishment of a consolidated tape; - the increasing regulatory expectations and requirements relating to various aspects of operational resilience, including an increasing focus on minimising the impact of operational disruptions (including digital operational disruptions and IT systems failures) on the UK and EU financial sector, the role of critical third-party service providers to financial institutions, and operational incident and third party reporting requirements; - the focus globally on technology adoption and digital delivery, including the use of AI, digital assets and digital money (including central bank digital currencies), payments and related infrastructure, and cybersecurity. This also includes the introduction of new and/or enhanced laws and/or regulatory standards in these areas, underpinned by customer protection principles, and actions by regulators that are designed to support the use of AI in the financial sector; - the continued evolution of the UK's regulatory framework following the UK's withdrawal from the EU, particularly following the implementation of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2023 (FSMA 2023) which provides for the ongoing revocation and repeal of assimilated law relating to financial services and, where relevant, its replacement with rules enacted (or to be enacted) by UK regulators, as well as any areas of divergence between the UK and EU regulatory regimes; - the harmonisation of EU market access for non-EU banks, which will limit the Barclays Bank Group's ability to service EU customers from the UK going forward; - the implementation of the reforms to the finalisation of the Basel III package, which includes changes to the RWA approaches to credit risk, market risk, counterparty risk, operational risk and credit valuation adjustments risk, implementation of the fundamental review of the trading book (FRTB) proposals, the application of input and output floors and the leverage ratio, as well as reforms to other aspects of prudential regulation, including the large exposures framework, and amendments to the Bank of England's approach to setting a minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL); - the review of regulation of the US banking sector under the current US administration, including easing capital requirements or other prudential requirements; - the review of regulation of the EU financial sector with a view to enhancing competitiveness of EU banks in particular, which will likely include the easing of regulatory burdens and capital requirements, simplification of regulations and an enhanced supervisory role for the European Supervisory Authorities; - greater monitoring of, and implementation of policies to address capital requirements, liquidity risk, and credit risk management and continuing focus on review and assurance activities, reporting methodology and data quality in relation to these prudential requirements; - increasing regulatory expectations of firms around governance and risk management frameworks, particularly for the management of climate change and other sustainability-related risks, enhanced sustainability disclosure and reporting obligations, corporate sustainability due diligence obligations, anti-greenwashing rules and requirements to develop and disclose a climate transition plan, as well as reactions to such initiatives, including taking a different or opposing stance in relation to legislation and rules related to sustainability, and jurisdictional divergence, potentially leading to conflict between initiatives; - the incorporation of climate change considerations, including transition risks in particular, within the global prudential framework; - the operation of, and recent and prospective reforms to, the UK ring-fencing regime, which requires, among other things, the separation of the retail and SME deposit-taking activities of UK banks from wholesale and investment banking operations into a legally distinct, operationally separate and economically independent entity (i.e., a 'ring-fenced' bank), which is not permitted to undertake a range of activities; - the introduction of measures in the UK designed to preserve access to cash for consumers (including the retention of specific branches) and, more generally, access to payment accounts; - changes in national or supra-national requirements regarding the ability to offshore or outsource the provision of services and resources or transfer material risk or data to companies located in other countries, which could impact the Group's ability to implement globally consistent and efficient operating models; - financial crime, fraud and market abuse standards and increasing expectations for related control frameworks, to ensure firms are adapting to new threats and are protecting customers from cyber-enabled crime and, in the UK, reforms relating to authorised push payment fraud reimbursements and the ability of payment service providers to delay the processing of transactions in certain circumstances; - the reform to corporate criminal liability in the Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act 2023 in the UK, which also introduced a failure to prevent fraud offence from September 2025, and prospective amendments to further expand the scope of corporate criminal liability; - the application and enforcement of economic sanctions, including those with extra-territorial effect and those arising from geopolitical tensions; - individual operating entities within the Barclays Group may be required to comply with additional regulatory --- # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) requirements in order to facilitate the Barclays Group's resolution planning; - continuing regulatory focus on data privacy, including the processing of personal data, safeguards against unauthorised or improper access or disclosure, adherence to cookie and cookie banner compliance, and the use of personal data in AI systems; - continuing regulatory focus on policies and procedures for identifying and managing cybersecurity risks, cybersecurity governance and the corresponding disclosure and reporting obligations; - ongoing requirements to allocate and monitor management accountability within the Group (for example, the requirements of the Senior Managers and Certification Regime in the UK and similar regimes elsewhere that are either in effect, are due to come into effect in the future or are under consideration, including new rules in the EU applicable to appointing senior managers), as well as requirements relating to executive remuneration and, separately, potential reforms to the UK's SMCR; and - continuing regulatory focus on the effectiveness of internal systems and controls and risk management frameworks. For further details on the regulatory supervision of, and regulations applicable to, the Group, refer to the Supervision and regulation section on page 300. # v) Change delivery and execution risks The Group constantly adapts and transforms the way it conducts business in response to changing customer behaviour and needs, technological developments, regulatory expectations, increased competition and cost management initiatives. The Group's strategy is focused on a plan to become simpler, better and more balanced. This strategy is intended to enable the Group to improve its customer service, provide more support to consumers and businesses, deliver higher quality income growth and build returns. Accordingly, effective management of transformation projects is required to successfully deliver the Group's strategic priorities, involving delivering on both externally driven programmes and key business initiatives to deliver revenue growth, product enhancement and operational efficiency outcomes. The magnitude, complexity and, at times, concurrent demands of the projects required to meet these priorities can result in heightened execution risk. The ability to execute the Group's strategy may be limited by operational capacity and the increasing complexity of the regulatory environment in which the Group operates. In addition, whilst the Group continues to pursue cost management initiatives, they may not be as effective as expected and cost saving targets may not be met. The failure to successfully deliver or achieve any of the expected benefits of these strategic initiatives and/or the failure to meet customer and stakeholder expectations could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition, customer outcomes, prospects and reputation. The Group also needs to ensure that its strategy and business model adapt to changing national and international standards, industry and scientific practices, regulatory requirements and market expectations regarding climate change, which remain under continuous development. The Group may face challenges from changing circumstances and external factors which are beyond the Group's control, including the rapid growth of energy demand, lingering geopolitical uncertainty, and the lack of policy consistency between, and within, jurisdictions. Achieving the Group's climate-related ambitions and targets will also depend on a number of factors outside the Group's control, including reliable forecasts of hazards from physical climate models and availability of data / models to measure / assess climate impact on clients. The pathway to net zero is uncertain, complex and dependent on progress in various areas such as advances in low-carbon technologies, progress by clients towards their own net zero goals, and supportive public policies in markets where the Group operates. If there is a lack of progress in the aforementioned areas, the Group may fail to achieve its climate related ambitions and targets, and this could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, operations, financial condition, prospects and reputation. # vi) Holding company structure of Barclays PLC and its dependency on distributions from its subsidiaries Barclays PLC is a holding company and its principal sources of income are, and are expected to continue to be, distributions (in the form of dividends and interest payments) from operating subsidiaries which also hold the principal assets of the Group. As a separate legal entity, Barclays PLC relies on such distributions in order to be able to meet its obligations as they fall due (including its payment obligations with respect to its debt securities) and to create distributable reserves for capital distributions (such as dividends to ordinary shareholders and share buybacks). The ability of Barclays PLC's subsidiaries to pay dividends and interest and Barclays PLC's ability to receive such distributions from its investments in its subsidiaries and other entities will be subject not only to the financial performance of such subsidiaries and entities and prevailing macroeconomic conditions but also to applicable laws, capital regulations (including internal MREL requirements) and other restrictions (including restrictions imposed by governments and/or regulators, which limit management's flexibility in determining capital distributions and capital allocation). These laws, capital regulations and restrictions could limit the payment of dividends and distributions to Barclays PLC by its subsidiaries and any other entities in which it holds an investment from time to time, which could restrict Barclays PLC's ability to meet its obligations and/or to make capital distributions (such as dividends to ordinary shareholders and share buybacks). # vii) Application of resolution measures and stabilisation powers under the UK Banking Act Under the UK Banking Act 2009, as amended (Banking Act), substantial powers are granted to the Bank of England (or, in certain circumstances, HM Treasury), in consultation with the PRA, the FCA and HM Treasury, as appropriate, as part of the UK's special resolution regime (SRR). These powers enable the relevant UK resolution authority to implement resolution measures and stabilisation options with respect to a UK bank or investment firm and certain of its affiliates (currently including Barclays PLC) (each, a relevant entity) in circumstances in which the relevant UK resolution authority is satisfied that the resolution conditions are met. The SRR consists of five stabilisation options: (i) private sector transfer of all or --- Material existing and emerging risks (continued) part of the business or shares of the relevant entity; (ii) transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity to a ‘bridge bank' established by the Bank of England; (iii) transfer to an asset management vehicle wholly or partly owned by the Bank of England; (iv) the cancellation, transfer or dilution of the relevant entities' equity (including Barclays PLC's ordinary share capital) and write-down or conversion of the relevant entity's capital instruments and liabilities (the bail-in tool); and (v) temporary public ownership (i.e. nationalisation). In addition, the relevant UK resolution authority may, in certain circumstances, in accordance with the Banking Act require the permanent write-down or conversion into equity of any outstanding Additional Tier 1 securities, Tier 2 securities or internal eligible liabilities prior to, or together with, the exercise of any stabilisation option. In addition, any such action could result in the dilution, transfer or cancellation of Barclays PLC's ordinary share capital, and/or the write-down or conversion of capital instruments and internal eligible liabilities and therefore reduce or extinguish Barclays PLC's obligations to relevant shareholders and or creditors. Measures that could be taken to reduce or eliminate the risk of resolution action being taken include restricting Barclays PLC's ability to pay dividends to ordinary shareholders. Shareholders and creditors should assume that, in a resolution situation, public financial support will only be available to a relevant entity as a last resort after the relevant UK resolution authorities have assessed and used, to the maximum extent practicable, the available resolution tools, including the bail-in tool (the Bank of England's preferred approach for the resolution of the Group is a bail-in strategy with a single point of entry at Barclays PLC). The exercise of any of such powers under the Banking Act or any suggestion of any such exercise could materially adversely affect the value of Barclays PLC ordinary shares, could lead to shareholders losing some or all of their investment and could mean that creditors may not recover all or any of the sums they are owed. The ‘no creditor worse off' safeguard within the Banking Act requires that no shareholder or creditor must be left worse off from the use of resolution powers than they would have been if the relevant entity had entered insolvent liquidation. Whilst shareholders and creditors may be entitled to compensation where there is determined to have been a shortfall following a valuation, there can be no assurance that shareholders and creditors would recover any such compensation promptly or that such compensation will be equivalent to the full losses that they have incurred whether in resolution or otherwise. viii) M&A and strategic initiatives The Group may, from time to time, pursue acquisitions, disposals or other strategic initiatives which could subject it to a variety of risks and uncertainties. In connection with acquisitions, actual results associated with acquired businesses may differ from the anticipated results, including with respect to: (i) overall future performance of the assets and liabilities acquired and the ability to capitalise on anticipated growth opportunities; (ii) level of integration achieved, and the cost and timing of any integration and the resulting ability to realise expected synergies; (iii) failure to retain key employees, customers and suppliers of the acquired business (iv) cost and timing to achieve separation from any legacy businesses; and (v) the extent to which contingent risks arise in the acquired business. In connection with disposals, the Group may be required to continue to provide transitional services to the transferred business for a period of time. In respect of transactions announced but not yet completed, it may be necessary to obtain regulatory and other approvals, or satisfy other conditions, before completion can occur, and there can be no assurance that such approvals will be obtained or such conditions satisfied (either at all or on terms which are acceptable to the Group). Transactions that are announced may be subject to lengthy delays or may not proceed to completion. Strategic activity of this nature is time-consuming and could produce unforeseen regulatory or operating difficulties, cause the Group to incur additional expenses or require incremental financial, capital, management and other resources. The Group may also be exposed to post-transactional contractual claims in connection with acquisitions, disposals or other strategic activity. Any of these risks could result in a failure to realise the anticipated benefits of any such strategic activity, or otherwise have a material adverse effect on the Group's results of operations, financial conditions and prospects. ix) Card Partnerships The Group maintains several co-branded credit cards and credit card partnership agreements in the US and the UK. Such arrangements are a means of reaching new customers and expanding brand reach, but there is significant competition among card issuers for these relationships. A deterioration in or failure to maintain these credit card relationships with co-brand partners, including non-renewal of contracts with existing partners, early termination of partnership arrangements due to a contractual breach and changes in consumer behaviour regarding spending patterns, could have a negative impact on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. x) Evolving landscape with respect to artificial intelligence (including generative and agoretic artificial intelligence) (AI) and machine learning technologies The use of rapidly evolving technologies such as AI, by the Group and its third-party service providers, while presenting significant benefits, can also present risks and challenges to the Group's business. Use of AI (and particularly the growing use of agentic AI) may expose the Group to liability, reputational harm, regulatory actions and threats of litigation, particularly if such technology produces errors or hallucinations, or results in output that is biased, harmful, discriminatory or that infringes the intellectual property or data privacy rights of third parties, or otherwise if such technology does not function as intended. The use of AI by the Group's third-party service providers in their business activities, whether or not disclosed or known to the Group, could also expose the Group to risks. While the Group believes it conducts appropriate diligence prior to onboarding third-party service providers, the failure of one or more such service provider to meet the Group's expectations may have an adverse effect on the Group's operations or financial condition, result in legal or regulatory violations, jeopardise the Group's intellectual property rights, cause the Group to be in breach of its contracts or give rise to issues pertaining to data privacy and data protection. This may arise as a result of a service provider, including by use of AI tools in contravention of agreements with the Group, inputting the Group's confidential or proprietary information into AI tools, sourcing data for development, training or fine-tuning of the tool from unlawful sources or in an otherwise unlawful manner or implementing the roll --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) out of new AI tools or functionalities without the Group's approval. See "supplier exposure" for more information regarding risks arising with respect to suppliers. In addition, laws and regulations focused on the use and provision of AI technologies may impose certain obligations on the Group. For example, emerging AI regulations may require the Group to conduct complex impact assessments, risk evaluations or other compliance reviews prior to deploying AI tools for certain high-risk applications, including automated decision-making that affects individuals. Such assessments can be resource-intensive, time-consuming and may require input from third party specialist advisers. Any failure to conduct these assessments properly, or at all, could result in regulatory enforcement action, monetary penalties, mandatory cessation of AI system usage, litigation and potential liability, as well as other adverse consequences. Furthermore, the regulatory framework for AI continues to evolve and is largely unsettled and fast-moving to varying extents in the jurisdictions in which the Group operates. Uncertainty in the legal regulatory regime relating to AI may require significant resources to modify and maintain business practices to comply with laws, the nature of which cannot be determined at this time. Several jurisdictions around the globe, including Europe and certain U.S. states, have already proposed or enacted laws governing AI. For example, the EU Artificial Intelligence Act (the "EU AI Act"), which came into force on 1 August 2024, will generally become fully applicable after a two-year transitional period, with certain obligations taking effect at an earlier or later time. The EU AI Act introduces various requirements for AI systems and models placed on the market or put into service in the EU, including specific transparency and other requirements for general purpose AI systems and the models on which they are based. In the US, while the White House signed an Executive Order Removing Barriers to American Leadership in Artificial Intelligence which prioritises deregulation, several states are considering enacting or have already enacted regulations concerning the use of artificial intelligence technologies. These include the California Transparency in Frontier Artificial Intelligence Act, the Utah Artificial Intelligence Consumer Protection Amendments, the updated California Consumer Privacy Act regulations (which came into effect 1 January 2026) and the Colorado Consumer Protections for Artificial Intelligence Act (effective 30 June 2026). While the UK does not currently have in place any general statutory regulation of AI, some form of regulation is anticipated, although its content and timing is currently uncertain. Other jurisdictions may decide to adopt similar or more restrictive legislation that may render the use of such technologies challenging or risky. Divergence in legislation and regulatory approach across jurisdictions may make it harder for the Group to conduct its business using AI, lead to regulatory fines or penalties, require the Group to change its product offerings or business practices, or limit the Group's use of AI. If the Group's use of AI is restricted, it could lead to business disruption and the Group's business may be less efficient or may be at a competitive disadvantage. Replacement of these technologies with compliant alternatives could require substantial capital expenditures or lead to a loss of proprietary data or historical optimisation. Additionally, if new regulations substantially restrict the Group's usage of AI to drive business efficiencies, the Group could face significantly higher operating costs to re-hire personnel or obtain third-party support to perform tasks previously handled by automated systems, requiring costly and time-intensive recruitment, training or outsourcing arrangements. Moreover, the Group's failure, or perceived failure, to comply fully with developing laws and regulations relating to AI or machine learning technologies, or meet evolving and varied stakeholder expectations and industry standards, could harm the Group's business, reputation, financial condition, and operating results. See "Processing errors" and "Model risk" for more information regarding the potential consequences of integrating AI into the Group's product or service offerings, "Data management, information protection and AI" for more information relating to risks relating to data protection and compliance with existing and future laws and regulations, and "Cyber attacks" for more information on the cybersecurity risks relating to AI technologies. # Material existing and emerging risks impacting individual principal risks ## i) Climate risk Climate risk is the risk of financial losses arising from climate change, through physical risks and risks associated with transitioning to a lower carbon economy. Climate risk is a principal risk under Barclays' ERMF. The Climate Risk Policy focuses on managing the impacts of climate change across the Group's financial and operational risk categories as defined in the Climate Risk Framework. Climate risk may also drive non-financial risks such as reputational and legal risk, which continue to be managed under their respective risk frameworks. Physical risks, such as acute weather events (e.g. cyclones, hurricanes and floods) and long-term climate pattern shifts (e.g. droughts, temperature and precipitation levels), can lead to damage to fixed assets, operational disruptions, changes in production outputs and increased costs (among other things). A transition to a low-carbon economy requires policy and regulatory changes, technological innovations, and reshaped consumer behaviour and market sentiment. This can lead to transition risks from increased costs and reduced revenues. The potential impacts of both physical and transition risks on the economy may include lower GDP growth, higher unemployment, shortage of raw materials and products, supply chain disruptions, significant fluctuations in prices of assets (such as in the real estate sector), and shifting demands for goods and services. These impacts could subsequently affect the business model and profitability of both the Group and its clients. There is significant uncertainty surrounding the timeframes in which both these physical and transition risks may manifest, adding further challenges to the Group in assessing, quantifying and managing the risks associated with climate change within its downstream financed portfolios. Additionally, divergence in climate policies and regulatory standards across different jurisdictions may lead to inconsistencies in reporting, risk assessment methodologies and compliance requirements, making it challenging for the Group to adopt a unified approach to managing climate risk and meeting regulatory obligations. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) This fragmentation increases operational complexity and the cost of compliance, and undermines the Group's ability to effectively manage climate risks, including transition risks associated with high-emitting clients. In 2025, mounting evidence pointed to a rise in physical risks, with acute events such as wildfires, droughts, and flash floods affecting multiple geographies globally. The UK experienced its hottest summer on record, with temperatures exceeding the long-term average by 1.5°C. In the US, the number of wildfires reported by the National Interagency Fire Centre surpassed the 10-year average, while proposed reforms to the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) raised concerns about future disaster recovery capacity. There is also evidence of chronic physical risks materialising, with the Met Office's annual State of the UK Climate Report confirming that temperature and rainfall extremes are becoming more prevalent. The intensification of physical risks could increase risks in the Group's portfolios (e.g. UK mortgage portfolio) and also damage the Group's facilities and infrastructure, leading to a potential adverse impact on its financial position. The Group recognises climate risk as an amplifier of existing risk categories, exerting influence across multiple principal risk types and heightening their severity. The Group's wholesale credit corporate clients that are most exposed to climate-related risks—particularly those operating in high-emitting sectors with limited transition preparedness—are likely to experience operational and financial challenges. Such vulnerabilities can lead to a deterioration in creditworthiness, thereby increasing credit risk within the Group's portfolios. In addition, both physical and transition risk drivers have the potential to trigger price shocks, devalue market instruments, prompt deposit outflows, and erode the value of sovereign bonds. These developments could adversely impact the Group's liquidity position and capital buffers, while also necessitating adjustments to funding strategies and capital planning requirements. The Group's Risk Register process reflects the potential effects of climate risk drivers on the Group's principal risks and its portfolios. Based on the 2025 assessment, climate risk is assessed as having a higher materiality rating within the Group Risk Register for Credit Risk and Treasury & Capital Risk than across other principal risk categories. The Group may face difficulties from changing circumstances and external factors which are beyond the Group's control, which can provide challenges to the Group in meeting its climate-related ambitions and targets. These difficulties include geopolitical issues, energy security and other considerations such as policy environment, technological advancements and market dynamics for a low-carbon economy. The pathway to net zero is uncertain, complex and dependent on progress in various areas such as advances in low-carbon technologies, collective action by clients to meet their own climate goals and supportive government policies in markets where the Group operates. Furthermore, the Group's business and operations have been, and may continue to be, adversely impacted by the perception that its response to climate change is ineffective, insufficient, or otherwise inappropriate, which could result in potential adverse impacts on its financial position. For further information on Barclays approach to climate change, refer to the Climate Risk Management Section ## ii) Credit risk Credit risk is the risk of loss to the Group from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the Group, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral, and other receivables. Credit risk is impacted by a number of factors outside the Group's control, including wider economic conditions. ## a) Impairment Impairment is calculated in line with the requirements of IFRS9. Loss allowances, based on ECLs, are measured on a forward-looking basis using a broad range of financial metrics and application of complex judgements. Accordingly, impairment charges are potentially volatile and may not successfully predict actual credit losses, particularly under stressed conditions. Failure by the Group to accurately estimate credit losses through ECLs could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition, and prospects. For further details, refer to Note 8. ## b) Specific portfolios, sectors and concentrations The Group is subject to risks arising from changes in credit quality and recovery rates for loans and advances due from borrowers and counterparties. Additionally, the Group is subject to a concentration of those risks where it has significant exposures to borrowers and counterparties in specific sectors, or to particular types of borrowers and counterparties. Any deterioration in the credit quality of such borrowers and counterparties could lead to lower recoverability from loans and advances, and higher impairment charges. Accordingly, any of the following areas of uncertainty could have a material adverse impact on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition, and prospects: - Consumer affordability: higher inflation and higher interest rates could increase the cost of living and negatively impact a customer's ability to service debt payments, leading to increased arrears in both unsecured and secured products. The risk is further heightened with uncertainty around global fiscal policy including tariffs and sovereign debt which could increase inflation and weaken economic growth. Additionally, there is potential US consumer credit weakness from all time high consumer debt and student loan debt which could strain consumer affordability, leading to higher arrears and ECLs. - UK Retail, Hospitality and Leisure: the continuing cost of living pressures, falling consumer confidence, or other macroeconomic factors adversely affecting consumers could trigger a contraction in demand which, together with rising business costs including from taxes, would add pressure to sectors heavily reliant on consumer discretionary spending. This represents a potential risk in the Group's UK corporate portfolio as a higher probability of default exists for retailers, hospitality and leisure providers and their landlords while these pressures remain. - Real Estate: UK property represents a significant portion of the Group's overall retail credit exposure. The Group remains at risk of increased impairment from a material fall in property prices. The impact of affordability shocks as customers switch from lower to higher rates has continued to decrease during 2025 and arrears rates have stabilised. Any future increase in interest rates, however, would likely lead to an increase in missed payments and reduction in market demand which would put downward pressure on property prices and, in turn, impact the Group's impairment and capital position. --- # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) Furthermore, certain segments of the housing market could be subject to specific valuation impacts (for example, properties within the residential loan portfolio may be exposed to physical or transition climate risks). The Group's corporate exposure is conservatively positioned with low loan-to-value ratios but remains vulnerable to a weak commercial real estate market. Landlords serving business tenants whose income is based on discretionary consumer spending are also at risk from reduced rent collection. - Leveraged Finance Underwriting: the Group takes on non-investment grade underwriting exposures, including single name risk, particularly in the US and the UK. The market environment has remained constructive and highly competitive in 2025, despite geopolitical tensions and concern around the impact of tariffs. - Oil & Gas sector: In the short term, the sector is vulnerable to geopolitical shifts impacting supply and demand. In the longer term, costs associated with the transition to renewable sources of energy may place greater financial demands on oil and gas companies. - Information Technology: companies may struggle to monetise their technology offerings, including usage of AI or alternatively, may find their offerings disrupted by other emerging new technology. The Group's clients also face heightened risk from data security breaches and ransomware and/or cyber attacks as well as from the malicious use of AI, all of which could negatively impact their ability to service debt obligations. - Sovereign wholesale exposure: the Group is exposed to sovereigns with sovereign debt to GDP ratios above 100% with low economic growth. Failure to reduce public spending could cause debt levels to become unmanageable and damage investor confidence, potentially delaying economic recovery which, in turn, could materially adversely affect the Group's results of operations including, but not limited to, increased credit losses. - Private Credit: the private credit industry operates largely outside of the traditional banking system and public markets, and is characterised by risks associated with the use of leverage, illiquid investments, structural complexity and limited disclosure. As a result, certain other risks to which the Group is exposed may be amplified by its activities in the private credit sector. In addition, due to the interconnectedness between private credit and other areas of economic activity and second order losses resulting from private credit exposure, private credit presents a risk to financial system stability. The Group also has large individual exposures to single name counterparties (such as brokers, central clearing houses, dealers, banks, mutual and hedge funds, and other institutional clients) in both its lending and trading activities, including derivative trades. The default of one such counterparty could cause contagion across clients involved in similar activities and/or adversely impact asset values should margin calls necessitate rapid asset disposals by that counterparty to raise liquidity. In addition, where such counterparty risk has been mitigated by taking collateral, credit risk may remain high if the collateral held cannot be monetised or has to be liquidated at prices which are insufficient to recover the full amount of the loan or derivative exposure. Any such defaults could have a material adverse effect on the Group's results due to, for example, increased credit losses and higher impairment charges. Impact to the creditworthiness of the Group's clients, customers and counterparties (particularly in high carbon sectors), can also arise out of climate-related legal actions or investigations commenced against the Group's clients, customers and counterparties (particularly in high carbon sectors), where outcomes of such actions have material financial impacts, which can in turn increase credit risk within Group portfolios. For further details on the Group's approach to credit risk, refer to the credit risk management and credit risk performance sections. ## ii) Market risk Market risk is the risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the Group's assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange rates, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations. Economic and financial market uncertainties remain elevated, amid ongoing geopolitical conflicts, shifting trade policies, and persistent inflationary pressures. A disruptive transition to lower interest rate levels, deteriorating trade, and intensifying geopolitical tensions could heighten market risks for the Group's portfolios. In addition, the Group's trading business could be vulnerable were there to be a prolonged period of elevated asset price volatility, particularly if it adversely affects market liquidity. Such a scenario could impact the Group's ability to execute client trades and may also result in lower client flow-driven income and/or market-based losses on its existing portfolio of assets. These can include higher hedging costs from rebalancing risks that need to be managed dynamically as market levels and their associated volatilities change. Changes in market conditions could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. For further details on the Group's approach to market risk, refer to the market risk management and market risk performance sections. ## iv) Treasury and capital risk There are three primary types of treasury and capital risk faced by the Group: ### a) Liquidity risk Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets. This could cause the Group to fail to meet regulatory and/or internal liquidity requirements, make repayments of principal or interest as they fall due or to support day-to-day business activities. Key liquidity risks that the Group faces include: - Stability of the Group's deposit funding profile: deposits which are payable on demand or at short notice could be adversely affected by the Group failing to preserve the current level of customer and investor confidence or as a result of competition in the banking industry. - Ongoing access to wholesale funding: the Group regularly accesses the money and capital markets to provide short-term and long-term unsecured and secured funding to support its operations. A loss of counterparty confidence, or adverse market conditions, could lead to a reduction in the tenor, or an increase in the costs, of the Group's unsecured and secured wholesale funding or affect the Group's access to such funding. - Impacts of market volatility: adverse market conditions, with increased volatility in asset prices, could: (i) negatively impact the Group's liquidity position through increased derivative margin requirements and/or wider haircuts when monetising liquidity pool --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) securities; (ii) make it more difficult for the Group to execute secured financing transactions; and (iii) expose the Group to currency risk leading to increased cash flow currency mismatch. - Intraday liquidity usage: increased cash and collateral requirements for payments and securities settlement systems could negatively impact the Group's liquidity position, as cash and liquid assets required for intraday purposes are unavailable to meet other outflows. - Off-balance sheet commitments: deterioration in economic and market conditions could cause customers to draw on off-balance sheet commitments provided to them, for example revolving credit facilities, negatively affecting the Group's liquidity position. - Credit rating changes and impact on funding costs: any reductions in a credit rating (in particular, any downgrade below investment grade) may affect the Group's access to money or capital markets and/or the terms on which the Group is able to obtain market funding. For example, this could lead to increased costs of funding and wider credit spreads, the triggering of additional collateral or other requirements in derivative contracts and other secured funding arrangements, or limits on the range of counterparties who are willing to enter into transactions with the Group. ## b) Capital risk Capital risk is the risk that the Group has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments and stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory stress testing purposes). This also includes the risk from the Group's pension plans. Key capital risks that the Group faces include: - Failure to meet prudential capital requirements: this could lead to the Group being unable to support some or all of its business activities, a failure to pass regulatory stress tests, increased cost of funding due to deterioration in investor appetite and / or credit ratings and restrictions on distributions (including in respect of its shares and/or additional tier 1 instruments), leading to an inability to comply with the Group's distribution policy and/or the need to take additional measures to strengthen the Group's capital or leverage position. - Adverse changes in FX rates impacting capital ratios: the Group has capital resources, risk weighted assets and leverage exposures denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign currency exchange rates may adversely impact the sterling equivalent value of these items. As a result, the Group's regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements. Failure to appropriately manage the Group's balance sheet to take account of foreign currency movements could result in an adverse impact on the Group's regulatory capital and leverage ratios. - Adverse movements in the pension fund: adverse movements in pension assets and liabilities for defined benefit pension schemes could result in deficits on a technical provision and/or IAS 19 accounting basis. This could lead to the Group making substantial additional contributions to its pension plans and/or a deterioration in its capital position. The market value of pension fund assets might decline or investment returns might reduce. Under IAS 19, the liabilities discount rate is derived from the yields of high-quality corporate bonds. Therefore, the valuation of the Group's defined benefits schemes would be adversely affected by a prolonged fall in the discount rate due to a persistent low interest rate and/or credit spread environment. Inflation is another significant risk driver to the pension fund as the liabilities are adversely impacted by an increase in long-term inflation expectations. ## c) Interest rate risk in the banking book Interest rate risk in the banking book is the risk that the Group is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and liabilities. This also includes credit spread risk in the banking book, the risk that the Group is exposed to capital or income volatility because of changes in credit spreads on its (non-traded) assets and liabilities. The Group's hedging programmes for interest rate risk in the banking book rely on behavioural assumptions and, as a result, the effectiveness of the hedging strategy cannot be guaranteed. A potential mismatch in the balance or duration of the hedging assumptions could lead to earnings deterioration if there are interest rate movements which are not adequately hedged. A decline in interest rates may also compress net interest margins on retail and corporate portfolios. In addition, the Group's liquid asset portfolio is exposed to potential capital and/or income volatility due to movements in market rates and prices which may have a material adverse effect on the capital position of the Group. > For further details on the Group's approach to treasury and capital risk, refer to the treasury and capital risk management and treasury and capital risk performance sections. ## v) Operational risk Operational risk is the risk of loss to the Group from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to external events where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks. Examples include: ### a) Operational resilience The Group functions in a highly competitive market, with customers and clients that expect consistent and smooth business processes. The loss of or disruption to business processing is a material inherent risk within the Group and across the financial services industry, which has impacted the Group in the past and may continue to impact the Group in the future, whether arising through failures in the Group's technology systems, cyber and/or data integrity disruptions, unavailability of services supplied by third parties, or unavailability of personnel and premises. A challenge for the Group, as for all companies, is the ability to recover from and remain within impact tolerance for a pervasive cyber attack which impacts a number of applications, data and infrastructure services, or a third party. Failure to build resilience and recovery capabilities into business processes, or into the services on which the Group's business processes depend, may result in significant customer harm, costs to reimburse losses incurred by the Group's customers and clients, and reputational damage. There are also risks associated with increasing regulatory focus and new developments on operational resilience, which are considered in risk factor (iv) 'Regulatory change agenda and impact on business model' above. ### b) Cyber attacks Cyber attacks continue to be a global threat inherent across all industries, with the number and severity of attacks continuing to rise. The financial sector remains a primary target for cybercriminals, hostile nation states (including nation-state-sponsored groups), opportunists and hacktivists. The Group experiences numerous attempts to compromise its cybersecurity protections. In 2025, cybersecurity incidents experienced by the Group included phishing and cyber incidents within our supply chain. The Group cannot provide absolute security against cyber attacks. Malicious actors, who are increasingly sophisticated in their --- # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) methods, tactics, techniques and procedures, seek to steal money, gain unauthorised access to, destroy or manipulate data, and disrupt operations. Further, some attacks may not be recognised or discovered until launched or after initial entry into the environment, such as novel or zero-day attacks that are launched before patches are available and defences can be readied. Other attacks may take advantage of the window during which patching or the deployment of other defences is underway, but not yet complete. Malicious actors are also increasingly developing methods to avoid detection and alerting capabilities, including by employing counter-forensic tactics, making response activities more difficult. Additionally, the Group's deployment of agentic AI with access to systems, data and third-party tools creates an expanded attack surface for cyber attacks, as threat actors may exploit inadequate permissioning controls to manipulate agents into executing unauthorised actions, accessing sensitive information or initiating malicious transactions beyond their intended scope, and the autonomous nature of these systems may enable attackers to conduct multi-step attacks that evade traditional security controls before detection occurs. Cyber attacks can originate from a wide variety of sources and target the Group in numerous ways, including via the Group's networks, systems, applications, devices, or parties such as service providers and other suppliers, counterparties, employees, contractors, customers or clients, presenting the Group with a vast and complex defence perimeter. Moreover, the Group does not have direct control over the cybersecurity of the systems of its clients, customers, counterparties and third-party service providers and suppliers, limiting the Group's ability to effectively protect and defend against certain threats. Some of the Group's third-party service providers and suppliers have experienced successful attempts to compromise their cybersecurity. These have included incidents resulting in the compromise of the Group's data and ransomware attacks that disrupted service providers' or suppliers' operations and, in some cases, have had impacts on the Group's operations. Such cyber attacks are likely to continue. Many of the Group's agreements with third parties include liability or indemnification provisions, but the Group may not be able to recover sufficiently, or at all, under these provisions to adequately offset any losses or other adverse impacts the Group may incur from third party incidents. Inadequacies in, or failures in the adherence to, the Group's cybersecurity policies, procedures or controls; failure to keep pace with evolving technology; instances of employee negligence, recklessness, malfeasance, poor password management, or susceptibility to social engineering; misconfigurations in technology and security infrastructure; authentication and access management lapses; imperfect control frameworks or operational effectiveness; and human, governance or technological error could also compromise the Group's ability to successfully prevent and defend against cyber attacks. Furthermore, certain legacy technologies that are at or approaching end-of-life may not be able to maintain acceptable levels of security. The Group's assessment of its cybersecurity risk reflects an elevated cybersecurity risk profile due to factors such as the onset of AI, which may be used to facilitate increasingly sophisticated attacks including AI-enabled social engineering; ongoing work to address areas in need of enhancement identified through cybersecurity testing; bad actors' increasing ability to elude our defences and take advantage of customer and employee behaviours in novel ways; and geopolitical events that could impact the Group directly, or indirectly through its critical suppliers or national infrastructure. Certain cybersecurity risks to the Group may be unknown to management and therefore not fully accounted for in the Group's cybersecurity assessments, strategy and programme priorities. The Group uses targeted external independent reviews to help ensure that the Group's assessment of cybersecurity risk is comprehensive and dynamic, and the Group continues to implement enhancements identified through previous cybersecurity testing and reviews. Common types of cyber attacks include deployment of malware to obtain covert access to systems and data; ransomware attacks that render systems and data unavailable through encryption and attempts to leverage business interruption or stolen data for extortion; novel or zero-day exploits; denial of service and distributed denial of service attacks; infiltration via business email compromise; social engineering, including phishing, vishing and smishing; automated attacks using botnets; third-party customer, vendor, service provider and supplier account takeover; malicious activity facilitated by an insider; and credential validation or stuffing attacks using login and password pairs from unrelated breaches. A successful cyber attack of any type has the potential to cause serious harm to the Group or its clients and customers, including exposure to potential contractual liability, claims, litigation, regulatory or other government action, loss of existing or potential customers, damage to the Group's brand and reputation, and other financial loss. The impact of a successful cyber attack is also likely to include operational consequences (such as unavailability of services, networks, systems, devices or data), remediation of which could come at significant cost. While the Group maintains insurance coverage that may, subject to relevant retentions, cover certain types of losses related to cybersecurity incidents, such insurance coverage may be insufficient to cover all losses and may not take into account potential loss of business or other financial harm. A successful cyber attack may result in significant fines and penalties to the Group. In addition, any new regulatory measures introduced to mitigate these risks are likely to result in increased technology and compliance costs for the Group. For further details on the Group's approach to cyber attacks, see the operational risk performance section. For further details on cybersecurity regulation applicable to the Group, refer to the Supervision and regulation section. # c) New and emergent technology Technology is fundamental to the Group's business and the financial services industry. Technological advancements present opportunities to develop new and innovative ways of doing business across the Group, with new solutions being developed both in-house and in association with third party companies. The rapid development in AI is an area of technological advancement that the Group is monitoring closely. This includes the identification of potential use cases for responsible adoption of AI in the Group's own operations as well as managing the salient risks and other threats third party usage of AI may pose, including with respect to intellectual property ownership and infringement, cybersecurity, antitrust and fraud. For example, the Group may be unable to protect certain materials created using AI technologies with copyrights or patents given the position of courts and intellectual property offices in the US and in some other jurisdictions on the need for a certain level of human inventorship. Additionally, inventions or works of authorship created using AI technologies may be based on, rely on, or contain --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) materials that were used in the training of such technologies and which are subject to third-party intellectual property rights. This could expose the Group to claims of intellectual property infringement or misappropriation. Other related risks include exposure to open-source software risks when using AI-based coding tools (that have been developed using vast amounts of open-source software) to write software. The use of copyrighted materials in AI and machine learning technology has not been fully interpreted by courts, creating additional uncertainty regarding potential intellectual property risks. In addition, while AI can present significant benefits, it also presents significant and evolving risks and challenges to the Group's business, such as those related to algorithmic fairness, data life-cycle management, data ethics, data privacy and security and records management (e.g. the risks arising from any failure to appropriately identify and retain prompts, logs, outputs and intermediate artefacts from an AI process in accordance with business needs, as set out in the applicable retention schedule, and data protection laws). AI also poses data sourcing, technology integration and process issues and programme bias in decision-making algorithms. Any of these risks could impair the adoption and acceptance of AI and result in regulatory investigations or actions, litigation, client dissatisfaction, reputational harm and adverse effects on its business and financial condition. These risks may be more significant for certain AI tools (for example, agentic AI has the potential to exacerbate certain risks, such as those relating to data privacy and security, due to its autonomous nature) or if AI is deployed in an uncoordinated but widespread way within the Group (particularly relating to the use of AI agents). If the output from AI in the Group's products, systems or solutions is deemed to be inaccurate or questionable, or if the use of AI does not operate as anticipated or perform as promised (including in relation to confidential information and personal data), the Group may be exposed to additional liability, reputational harm, potential regulatory enforcement and threats of litigation, as further described at "Evolving landscape with respect to artificial intelligence (including generative and agentic artificial intelligence) (AI) and machine learning technologies," "Model risk" and "Data management, information protection and AI". Alongside those risks associated with the deployment of AI, risks could also arise from decisions not to deploy the technology. As the adoption of AI quickens, risks arising from competition with the Group's peers are intensified. Any failures to adequately leverage AI technologies, or the adoption of an overly conservative approach to AI implementation, could cause the Group to miss significant business opportunities, fall behind competitors, and adversely affect its growth prospects and financial performance. Pressure to recruit personnel with specific AI-based skill sets and to upskill existing employees in this context may give rise to significant costs and/or may be difficult to sustain, and such steps do not necessarily mitigate these risks from competitors. # d) Fraud The nature of fraud is wide-ranging and continues to evolve, as criminals seek opportunities to target the Group's business activities and exploit changes in customer behaviour, product and channel use (such as the increased use of digital products and enhanced online services). Fraud attacks vary, can be highly sophisticated (e.g. leveraging deepfake and automation capabilities), and be orchestrated by organised crime groups or individuals. Bad actors use various techniques to target customers and colleagues directly (i.e. third party fraud) or the Group directly (i.e. first party fraud such as, for example, intentionally providing false information to Barclays for personal gain). Authorised Push Payment (APP) scams are a growing fraud type where customers are deceived to transfer funds from their accounts to bad actors. Fraud can also be committed by one or more employees and workers of an entity (i.e. internal fraud) or may manifest as unauthorised trading fraud. The impact from fraud can lead to customer harm, financial losses to both the Group and its customers, loss of business, missed business opportunities, and reputational damage, all of which could have a material adverse impact on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition, and prospects. # e) Data management, information protection and AI The Group holds and processes large volumes of data, including personal information, financial data and other confidential information, and the Group's businesses are subject to complex and evolving laws and regulations governing the privacy and protection of data, including Regulation (EU) 2016/679 (the General Data Protection Regulation as it applies in the EU and the UK). This data could relate to: (i) the Group's clients, customers, prospective clients and customers and their employees; (ii) clients and customers of the Group's clients and customers and their employees; (iii) the Group's suppliers, counterparties and other external parties, and their employees; and (iv) the Group's employees and prospective employees. This data may also be held and processed for the Group by third-party vendors, partners, or suppliers which therefore exposes the Group to risks from vulnerabilities and noncompliance in its supply chain. The international nature of both the Group's business and its IT infrastructure also means that data and personal information may be available in countries other than those from where the information originated. Accordingly, the Group must ensure that its collection, use, transfer and storage of data, including personal information, complies with all applicable laws and regulations in all relevant jurisdictions, which could: (i) increase the Group's compliance and operating costs; (ii) impact the development of new products or services or the offering of existing products or services; (iii) affect how products and services are offered to clients and customers; (iv) demand significant oversight by the Group's management; and (v) require the Group to review some elements of the structure of its businesses, operations and systems in less efficient ways. Data, including personal information, is subject to external as well as internal (whether intentional or accidental) security risks. Concerns regarding the effectiveness of the Group's measures to safeguard data, including personal information, or even the perception that those measures are inadequate, could expose the Group to the risk of loss or unavailability of data or data integrity issues and/or cause the Group to lose existing or potential clients and customers, and thereby reduce the Group's revenues. Furthermore, any failure or perceived failure by the Group to comply with applicable privacy or data protection laws and regulations may subject it to potential contractual liability, claims, litigation, regulatory or other government action (including significant regulatory fines) and require changes to certain operations or practices which could also inhibit the Group's development or marketing of certain products or services or increase the costs of offering them to customers. Any of these events could damage the Group's reputation, subject the Group to material fines or other monetary penalties, --- Material existing and emerging risks (continued) make the Group liable for the payment of compensatory damages, divert management's time and attention, lead to enhanced regulatory oversight and otherwise materially adversely affect its business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. Further, there is increased risk of inadvertent disclosure of confidential information or personal information in connection with the utilisation of AI technologies, whether through AI model errors, data breaches, or other vulnerabilities, which may also result in stronger regulatory scrutiny, leading to legal and regulatory investigations and enforcement actions that could negatively impact the Group's business, even if unfounded. AI technologies are highly reliant on the collection and analysis of large amounts of data, which may be overbroad, insufficient, or contain biased, inaccurate or incomplete information. There often exists a lack of transparency regarding the sources of data (including personal data) used to train or develop AI technologies or how inputs are converted to outputs and the Group may not be able to fully validate this process and its accuracy (particularly where it is part of a complex, multi-step process and inaccurate or incomplete information may be compounded across many steps, such as in agentic AI systems). This could result in outputs that include or are derived from inaccurate, incomplete or erroneous information, or that include AI bias, AI hallucinations, harmful content, discrimination, violation of privacy law or intellectual property infringement or misappropriation. Additionally, if the AI model in a tool used by the Group has been trained by a third party in a manner that is not compliant with data protection laws, there is a risk that the Group will be held liable in certain jurisdictions (e.g. the EU). For further details on data protection regulation applicable to the Group, refer to the supervision and regulation section and for further detail on the associated risks, refer to the sections entitled “Evolving landscape with respect to artificial intelligence (including generative and agentic artificial intelligence) (AI) and machine learning technologies” and “New and emergent technology”. f) Algorithmic trading In some areas of the investment banking business, trading algorithms are used to price, trade and risk manage client and principal transactions. An algorithmic error could result in erroneous or duplicated transactions, a system outage, or impact the Group's pricing abilities, which could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition, prospects and reputation. g) Processing errors The Group's businesses are highly dependent on its ability to process and monitor, on a daily basis, a very large number of transactions, many of which are highly complex and occur at high volumes and frequencies, across numerous and diverse markets in many currencies. Given the Group's diverse customer base and geographical reach and the increase in volume, speed, frequency and complexity of transactions, especially electronic transactions (as well as the requirements to report such transactions on a real-time basis to clients, regulators and exchanges), developing, maintaining and upgrading operational systems and infrastructure becomes more challenging. The risk of systems or human error, including errors produced through the integration of AI technologies, in connection with such transactions increases with these developments, as well as the potential consequences of such errors due to the speed and volume of transactions involved and the potential difficulty associated with discovering errors quickly enough to limit the resulting consequences. As the Group works to implement AI technologies into the Group's product and service offerings, these challenges may become more significant, as AI technologies give rise to risk of bias, errors and hallucinations which may impact the Group's ability to accurately execute, track or report transactions. There can be no assurances that AI usage will enhance the Group's product or services offerings, and any such errors or inaccuracies resulting from AI usage could result in competitive or reputational harm or increased legal liability as further described in c) New and emergent technology and vi) Model risk. Furthermore, events that are wholly or partially beyond the Group's control, such as a spike in transaction volume, could adversely affect the Group's ability to process transactions or provide banking and payment services. Processing errors could result in the Group, among other things: (i) failing to provide information, services and liquidity to clients and counterparties in a timely manner; (ii) failing to settle and/or confirm transactions; (iii) causing funds transfers, capital markets trades and/or other transactions to be executed erroneously, illegally or with unintended consequences; and (iv) adversely affecting financial, trading or currency markets. Any of these events could materially disadvantage the Group's customers, clients and counterparties (including them suffering financial loss) and/or result in a loss of confidence in the Group which, in turn, could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. Any of these events could also lead to breaches of laws, rules or regulations and, hence, regulatory enforcement actions, which could result in significant financial loss, imposition of additional capital requirements, enhanced regulatory supervision and reputational damage. h) Supplier exposure The Group depends on suppliers for the provision of many of its services and the development of technology, including AI technology. Whilst the Group depends on suppliers, it remains fully accountable to its customers and clients for risks arising from the actions of suppliers and may not be able to recover from its suppliers any amounts paid to customers and clients for losses suffered by them. The dependency on suppliers and sub-contracting of outsourced services introduces concentration risk where the failure of specific suppliers could have an impact on the Group's ability to continue to provide material services to its customers. In addition, the use of third-party AI technologies, and the use of AI by suppliers, may expose the Group to risk, as it can be very difficult, if not impossible, to validate the processes used by third-party AI technology providers in their collection and use of data in developing and training AI technologies or the conversion of inputs to outputs. Over-reliance on a small number of suppliers of AI services may create operational resilience and concentration risk, heightening the potential for macro-level disruption if any one provider experiences outage, compromise, or model instability. --- # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) For further information on AI-related risks, including in connection with suppliers, please see the sections entitled “Evolving landscape with respect to artificial intelligence (including generative and agentic artificial intelligence) (AI) and machine learning technologies”, “New and emergent technology”, “Data management, information protection and AI,” and “Model risk”. Failure to adequately manage supplier risk could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. ## i) Estimates and judgements relating to critical accounting policies and regulatory disclosures The preparation of financial statements requires the application of accounting policies and judgements to be made in accordance with IFRS. Regulatory returns and capital disclosures are prepared in accordance with the relevant capital reporting and liquidity requirements and also require assumptions and estimates to be made. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements and regulatory returns and disclosures, include credit impairment provisions, taxes, fair value of financial instruments, goodwill and intangible assets, pensions and post-retirement benefits, the calculation of RWAs, capital and liquidity metrics, and provisions including conduct and legal, competition and regulatory matters (please refer to the notes to the audited financial statements for further details). There is a risk that if the judgement exercised, or the estimates or assumptions used, subsequently turn out to be incorrect or are altered as a result of assurance work and subsequent feedback from the Group's regulators, this could result in material losses to the Group, beyond what was anticipated or provided for, including as a result of changes to treatments or stated capital or liquidity positions in regulatory returns and capital and liquidity disclosures. If capital and liquidity requirements are not met as a result of changes in interpretation, compliance with the Group's distribution policy could be impacted and/or additional measures may be required to strengthen the Group's capital or leverage position, which may also lead to the Group's inability to achieve stated targets. Further development of accounting standards and regulatory interpretations could also materially impact the Group's results of operations, financial condition and prospects. ## j) Tax risk The Group is required to comply with the domestic and international tax laws and practice of all countries in which it has business operations. There is a risk that the Group could suffer losses due to additional tax charges, other financial costs or reputational damage as a result of failing to comply with such laws and practice (including where the Group's interpretation of such laws differs from the interpretation of tax authorities), or by failing to manage its tax affairs in an appropriate manner, with much of this risk attributable to the international structure of the Group. In addition, the introduction of new international tax regimes, increasing tax authority focus on reporting and disclosure requirements around the world as well as the digitalisation of the administration of tax have the potential to increase the Group's tax compliance obligations further. In 2023, the UK Government enacted legislation on the OECD Inclusive Framework on Base Erosion and Profit Shifting Pillar Two Framework introducing a global minimum tax rate of 15%. The UK's Pillar Two rules applied from 1 January 2024 and increased the Group's tax compliance obligations. In the US, the corporate alternative minimum tax on adjusted financial statements income introduced by the Inflation Reduction Act became effective on 1 January 2023. These tax regimes have required system and process changes that introduce additional operational risks. ## k) Ability to hire and retain appropriately qualified employees As a regulated financial institution, the Group requires diversified and specialist skilled colleagues. The Group's ability to attract, develop and retain a diverse mix of talent is key to the delivery of its core business activity and strategy. This is impacted by a range of external and internal factors, such as the Group's reputation, macroeconomic factors (including increased competition for limited resources during economic growth periods), governmental factors (including labour, immigration and related policies in the jurisdictions in which the Group operates), regulatory factors (including compensation restrictions for senior executives), and operational factors (including adequate processes and systems to support the hiring and retention of qualified employees). Failure to attract or prevent the departure of appropriately specialised employees could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. Additionally, this may result in disruption to service which could in turn lead to customer harm and reputational damage. ## vi) Model risk Model risk is the potential for adverse consequences from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports. The Group relies on models to support a broad range of business and risk management activities, including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risk, valuing exposures (including the calculation of impairment), conducting stress testing, calculating RWAs and assessing capital adequacy, supporting new business acceptance, risk and reward evaluation, managing client assets, and meeting reporting requirements. Models are imperfect representations of reality as they rely on simplifying assumptions; as such they are subject to intrinsic uncertainty as well as errors and inappropriate use. This may be exacerbated when dealing with unprecedented scenarios, as was the case during the COVID-19 pandemic, when simplifying assumptions were required due to the lack of reliable historical reference points and data. Model uncertainty, errors and inappropriate use may result in (among other things) the Group making inappropriate business decisions and/or inaccuracies or errors in the Group's risk management and regulatory reporting processes. In addition, the rapid development of AI, especially agentic AI, creates further challenges due to the unique and heightened risks presented by these model types. This includes risks arising from AI hallucinating and providing false information, the exacerbation of bias and fairness risk due to the automation of outcomes and the absence or insufficiency of human oversight (particularly relating to agentic AI). This could result in a significant financial loss, imposition of additional capital requirements, enhanced regulatory supervision and reputational damage, all of which could have a material adverse effect on the Group's business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. For further details on the Group's approach to model risk, refer to the model risk management and model risk performance sections and the section on “New and emergent technology”. ## --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) ## vii) Compliance risk Compliance risk is the risk of poor outcomes for, or harm to, customers, clients and markets, arising from the delivery of the Group’s products and services (conduct risk) and the risk to the Group, its clients, customers or markets from a failure to comply with the laws, rules and regulations (LRR) applicable to the firm. Previously, financial crime risk was managed as part of compliance risk, but was elevated to a principal risk in the ERMF, effective from 1 January 2025. Consequently, the Compliance Risk taxonomy at the Group was revised to better reflect material and emerging risks. Compliance risks have been categorised into six core areas, including: ### a) Wholesale conduct risk The Group’s businesses are exposed to risk of detriment to colleagues, customers or market participants as a result of failures to adhere to proper standards of wholesale conduct when carrying out the Group’s business activities. Examples of wholesale conduct which could have a material adverse effect on business include: (i) undertaking business communications via unauthorised channels and / or inappropriate conduct or behaviour; (ii) business conflicts of interest that lead to the detriment of customers or market participants; (iii) trade lifecycle processes that do not meet regulatory requirements or harm market participants; (iv) the risk of engaging in insider dealing behaviours or breaching of information barriers; and (v) the risk of engaging or attempting to engage in market manipulation. ### b) Customer protection risk The Group must ensure that its customers, particularly those that are vulnerable, are able to make well-informed decisions on how best to use our financial services and understand the protections available to them if something goes wrong. Poor customer outcomes can result from the failure to: (i) design and distribute products and services that deliver good customer outcomes; (ii) remediate, provide redress, or appropriately respond to complaints; (iii) identify and safeguard client money and assets, including deposits; (iv) manage investment products and services in line with customer expectation; and (v) provide customer services that deliver good customer outcomes. ### c) Product design and review risk Products and services must meet the needs of clients, customers, markets and the Group throughout their life cycle. However, there is a risk that the design and review of the Group’s products and services fail to reasonably consider and address potential or actual negative outcomes for customers, which may result in customer harm, enforcement action (including regulatory fines and/or sanctions), redress and remediation and reputational damage. Both the design and review of products and services are a key area of focus for regulators and the Group. ### d) Regulatory compliance risk The Group must ensure that business activities, and those carrying them out, observe relevant laws, codes, rules and regulations that are applicable to them. We must also ensure our employees are adequately supervised, manage personal conflicts of interest, and disclose activities which may harm customers, the Group and the markets in which the Group operates. Regulators around the world continue to emphasise the importance of culture and personal accountability and enforce the adoption of adequate internal reporting and whistleblowing procedures to help to promote appropriate conduct and drive positive outcomes for customers, colleagues, clients and markets. The requirements and expectations of the UK Senior Managers Regime, Certification Regime and Conduct Rules reinforce additional accountabilities for individuals across the Group, with an increased focus on governance and rigor, with similar requirements also introduced in other jurisdictions globally. Failure to meet these requirements and expectations may lead to regulatory sanctions, both for the individuals and the Group. ### e) Data privacy risk The Group must ensure that personal data is handled in a way that meets data privacy laws, rules and regulations and the rights and expectations of individuals. We do this by establishing mechanisms to govern and oversee the use of personal data and managing personal data in line with individuals’ rights and expectations. Any failure complying with applicable rules, laws and regulations may subject the Group to potential contractual liability, claims, litigation, fines; reputational damage; and cause enhanced regulatory oversight. ## f) Laws, rules and regulations risk The Group is subject to a range of laws, rules and regulations. A failure to comply with these may have an adverse effect on the Group’s business, customers and the markets within which it operates and could result in reputational damage, penalties, damages or fines. > For further details on the Group’s approach to compliance risk, refer to the compliance risk management and compliance risk performance sections. ## viii) Financial crime risk Financial crime risk is the risk that the Group and its associated persons (employees or third parties) commit or facilitate financial crime, and/or the Group’s products and services are used to facilitate financial crime. Financial crime risk management incorporates anti-bribery & corruption, anti-money laundering (including terrorist financing), tax evasion facilitation and sanctions risks (including proliferation financing). The Group is subject to laws and regulations governing these areas, including “failure to prevent” offences whereby the Group may be liable for failure to prevent crimes carried out by persons acting on its behalf. Bribery and corruption occur where a person improperly obtains or retains business, improperly secures a business or personal advantage and induces another person to perform their role in breach of an expectation of good faith, impartiality, or trust. Risks related to bribery and corruption may arise for the Group in connection with (i) employees/prospective employees who have connections to external stakeholders, Politically Exposed Persons, or public officials; (ii) different types of payments and expenses such as facilitation payment requests, gifts and entertainment, charitable donations, commercial sponsorships and political donations; (iii) certain types of funding provided to customers with increased exposure to public officials; (iv) third parties who are engaged by Barclays to win or retain business; (v) Barclays proprietary investments, joint ventures and mergers and acquisition or (vi) suppliers who act for and on behalf of the Group. --- # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) Money laundering, the processing of assets derived from criminal activity, and terrorist financing have been identified as major threats to the international financial services community and therefore to the Group. The UK has legislation designed to manage the risk of money laundering and to combat terrorism (together ‘AML’) and outlines the offences and penalties for failing to comply. This legislation, together with regulations, rules and industry guidance, forms the cornerstone of AML obligations for UK firms. The requirements of UK legislation apply to the Group globally and as a transatlantic bank, Barclays AML standards take account of US AML requirements, in addition to the EU and other jurisdictions in which we operate. The Group also takes account of guidance issued by bodies such as the Wolfsberg Group. Sanctions are restrictions on activity with targeted countries, regions, governments, entities, individuals, and industries that are imposed by bodies such as the European Union (EU), the United Nations (UN), (including but not limited to the proliferation of nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons). As a global financial institution, The Group must comply with applicable sanctions laws, rules and regulations in every jurisdiction in which it operates, or which apply to it because of the place of incorporation of its Group members. In order to protect its reputation and other legitimate business interests, in certain circumstances, Barclays’ sanctions risk appetite may be more conservative than its legal obligations. Tax evasion is a financial crime and a predicate offence to money laundering in the UK and in many other countries in which we operate. The Group may be exposed to facilitation risks associated with tax evasion by virtue of its interactions with customers and clients or in connection with employees or third parties acting on our behalf. Failure to appropriately manage these financial crime risks may undermine market integrity and may result in harm to the Group’s clients, customers, counterparties or employees, diminished confidence in financial products and services, damage to the Group's reputation, regulatory breaches and/or financial penalties. ## ix) Reputation risk Reputation risk is the risk that an action, transaction, investment, event, decision or business relationship will reduce trust in the Group’s integrity and/or competence. Any material lapse in standards of integrity, compliance, customer service or operating efficiency may represent a potential reputation risk. Stakeholder expectations constantly evolve, and so reputation risk is dynamic and varies between geographical regions, groups and individuals. A risk arising in one business area can have an adverse effect upon the Group’s overall reputation and any one transaction, investment or event (in the perception of key stakeholders) can reduce trust in the Group’s integrity and competence. The Group’s association with sensitive topics and sectors has been, and in some instances continues to be, an area of concern for stakeholders, including: (i) the financing of, and investments in, businesses which operate in sectors that are sensitive because of their relative carbon intensity or local environmental impact; (ii) potential association with human rights violations (including combating modern slavery) in the Group’s operations or supply chain and by clients and customers; and (iii) the financing of businesses which manufacture and export military and riot control goods and services. Reputation risk could also arise from negative public opinion about the actual, or perceived, manner in which the Group (including its employees, clients and other associations) conducts its business activities, or the Group’s financial performance, as well as actual or perceived practices in banking and the financial services industry generally. Modern technologies, in particular online social media channels and other broadcast tools that facilitate communication with large audiences in short time frames and with minimal costs, may significantly enhance and accelerate the distribution and effect of damaging information and allegations. Negative public opinion may adversely affect the Group’s ability to retain and attract customers, in particular, corporate and retail depositors, and to retain and motivate staff. It could also have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. Claims of potential greenwashing arising from sustainability-related statements made by the Group may also give rise to reputation risk. In addition to the above, reputation risk has the potential to arise from operational issues or conduct matters which cause harm to customers, clients, market integrity, effective competition or the Group (refer to ‘iv) Operational risk’ above). For further details on the Group’s approach to reputation risk, refer to the reputation risk management and reputation risk performance sections. For further details on the Group’s approach to reputation risk, refer to the reputation risk management and reputation risk performance sections. ## x) Legal risk and legal, competition and regulatory matters The Group conducts diverse activities in a highly regulated global market which exposes it and its employees to legal risk arising from: (i) the multitude of laws, rules and regulations that apply to the activities it undertakes, which are highly dynamic, may vary between jurisdictions and/or conflict (particularly in relation to issues perceived as politically sensitive, such as policies and initiatives around diversity, equity and inclusion or sustainability), and may be unclear in their application to particular circumstances especially in new and emerging areas; and (ii) the diversified and evolving nature of the Group’s businesses and business practices. In each case, this exposes the Group and its employees to the risk of investigation or enforcement action, loss or the imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of members of the Group to meet applicable laws, rules, regulations or contractual requirements or to assert or defend their intellectual property rights. Legal risk may arise in relation to any number of the material existing and emerging risks identified above. The risk of non-compliance with the relevant rules and regulations may manifest itself where regulatory rules take the form of principles or outcome-based regulation. Uncertainty in regulatory expectations (including as a result of interpretation of principles-based regulation) may also lead to the risk that a regulator or another public body may look back at the Group’s historical conduct and find that there has been a mismatch between the prevailing market practices at the relevant time and the regulatory expectations, guidance or interpretations that have since developed. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) A breach of applicable laws, rules and/or regulations by the Group or its employees could result in criminal prosecution, regulatory censure, withdrawal or restriction of regulatory authorisations, licences and permissions, potentially significant fines, remedial orders and other sanctions in the jurisdictions in which the Group operates. Where clients, customers or other third parties are harmed by the Group's conduct, this may also give rise to civil legal proceedings, including class actions. In this regard, the growing claimant law firm market and the globalisation of class actions have enabled mass tort litigation and multi-claimant litigation on matters relating to competition, data breaches and sustainability. Any such litigation could lead to unmeritorious or speculative claims, inconsistent outcomes and the potential for disproportionate costs and burdens for the Group. Clients and customers of the Group who qualify as eligible complainants under the Financial Services and Markets Act (as amended) may also bring complaints against the Group before the Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS). As the Ombudsman has a relatively high degree of discretion when adjudicating complaints, dispute resolution through the FOS is inherently more uncertain than adjudication through the courts in traditional civil legal proceedings. FOS decisions have knock-on impacts on the Group, as the Group is required under the relevant regulatory rules to consider and take appropriate measures to provide redress to customers who may have suffered similar detriments but have not complained. Other legal disputes may also arise between the Group and third parties relating to matters such as breaches or enforcement of legal rights or obligations arising under contracts, statutes or common law. Adverse findings in any such matters may result in the Group being liable to third parties or may result in the Group's rights not being enforced or not being enforced in the manner intended or desired by the Group. Following the landmark Supreme Court judgment in Johnson v FirstRand Bank Ltd (London Branch) (t/a MotoNovo Finance) [2025] UKSC 33, which found that an unfair relationship under the Consumer Credit Act 1974 existed between a motor finance lender and its customer based on the particular facts of that case, the FCA is consulting on an industry-wide compensation scheme for affected motor finance customers. The FCA has stated that, if it introduces a redress scheme, it expects to publish a policy statement and final rules in February or March 2026, with compensation to consumers beginning later in 2026. The nature, extent and timing of any remediation action, if required, under the FCA compensation scheme remain uncertain. Further details of legal, competition and regulatory matters to which the Group is currently exposed are set out in Note 25. In addition to matters specifically described in Note 25, the Group is engaged in various other legal proceedings which arise in the ordinary course of business. The Group is also subject to requests for information, investigations and other reviews (including skilled person reviews) by regulators and other public bodies. These may be in connection with business activities in which the Group is, or has been, engaged, or areas of particular regulatory focus, such as financial crime, money laundering or terrorist financing. In addition, regulatory authorities' approaches and expectations, including their policies and priorities for enforcement investigations or actions, may change from time to time. The Group may also (from time to time) be subject to claims and/or legal proceedings and other investigations relating to financial and non-financial disclosures made by members of the Group (including, but not limited to, regulatory capital and liquidity reporting and sustainability disclosures). Financial institutions, including the Group, may face increasing litigation, conduct, enforcement and contract liability risks related to climate change, environmental degradation and other social, governance and sustainability-related issues as a result of their business activities. There are an increasing number of new climate and sustainability-related laws and regulations, many of which are beginning to diverge between jurisdictions. Divergence has also been notable in respect of diversity, equity and inclusion, where the enforcement landscape and legal obligations in certain jurisdictions are increasingly at odds with agendas in others. In particular, in the US, changing federal enforcement priorities and legal interpretations regarding diversity and inclusion programmes present unknown and evolving risks. Broader climate and sustainability-related legislation is also at risk of imposing requirements on international companies which do not align with regulatory frameworks in other jurisdictions in which those companies operate in some cases meaning that multiple sets of diverging jurisdictional requirements are being applied to the same company. There is growing demand from investors and customers for sustainable products and services as well as greater transparency in respect of business operations. This has been accompanied by increased regulatory and NGO scrutiny which can create litigation or enforcement risk, either for not disclosing relevant information or due to the information disclosed. In particular, there has been an increasing focus on greenwashing, with greater consumer protection powers afforded to the Competition and Markets Authority under the Digital Markets, Competition and Consumers Act 2024 which can be used to tackle greenwashing. Certain stakeholders have taken legal action (including under "soft law" mechanisms) against the Group and others (including regulators, campaign groups and customers) may decide to do so in the future for allegedly financing or contributing to climate change, environmental degradation and other social, governance and sustainability-related issues, or because the Group's response to climate change or other sustainability factors is perceived to be ineffective, insufficient or inappropriate, including relative to the Group's stated ambitions. On the other hand, laws, regulatory processes and policies seeking to restrict or prohibit doing certain business with entities are often identified as "boycotting" or "discriminating" against particular industries. In certain jurisdictions there has been a push towards policies and regulation which restrict consideration of sustainability factors in investment processes or otherwise, in order to protect the energy and other high carbon sectors from any risks of divestment or challenges in accessing finance. The outcome of legal, competition and regulatory matters, both those to which the Group is currently exposed and any others which may arise in the future, is difficult to predict (and any provision made in the Group's financial statements relating to those matters may not be sufficient to cover actual losses). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Material existing and emerging risks (continued) In connection with such matters, the Group may incur significant expense, regardless of the ultimate outcome, and any such matters could expose the Group to any of the following outcomes: substantial monetary damages or settlements (including with respect to third-party litigation funding) and/or fines; remediation of affected customers and clients; other penalties and injunctive relief; additional litigation; criminal prosecution; the loss of any existing agreed protection from prosecution; regulatory restrictions on the Group’s business operations including the withdrawal or restriction of authorisations, licences or permissions; increased regulatory compliance requirements or changes to laws or regulations; suspension of operations; public reprimands or censure; loss of significant assets or business; a negative effect on the Group’s reputation; loss of confidence by investors, counterparties, clients and/or customers; risk of credit rating agency downgrades; potential negative impact on the availability and/or cost of funding and liquidity; and/or dismissal or resignation of key individuals. In light of the uncertainties involved in legal, competition and regulatory matters, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters (including formerly active matters or those arising after the date of this Annual Report) will not have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management ## Climate risk management In Barclays' Climate Risk Framework (CRF), climate risk is defined as the risk of financial losses arising from climate change, through physical risks and risks associated with transitioning to a lower carbon economy. ## Overview The Group has developed the CRF for managing financial and operational risks stemming from climate change. It is underpinned by the Climate Risk Policy and Climate Risk Standard. The CRF, Climate Risk Policy and Climate Risk Standard apply to Barclays' business activities, with a focus on lending, capital markets and investments. Barclays' approach to managing climate risk is proportionate to the level of risk it faces, with a focus on prioritising and monitoring of material physical and transition risks within Barclays' portfolios (for physical and transition risk definitions, please see the Barclays Climate Strategy section on page 68). The approach is customised to reflect portfolio characteristics, size and exposure to specific climate risk drivers. Climate risk is recognised as a driver of other existing financial risks (Credit, Market, Treasury and Capital) and operational risks, and is not treated as a standalone risk type. The non-financial risks (e.g. reputation risks) associated with climate change continue to be managed under their respective frameworks. To operationalise its CRF, Barclays has and continues to implement new processes, tools, models and data repository as applicable, whilst also enhancing its existing ones. The Group regularly reviews its approach and practices for alignment with regulatory developments and industry-standard practices for climate risk. Barclays has designed and implemented targeted controls to manage climate-related risks. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities The Group Head of Climate Risk is the accountable executive for the management and oversight of climate risk. On behalf of the Board, the BRC plays an important role in overseeing and challenging the Group's progress towards achieving its climate targets and assessing the impact of climate risks on the Group's overall risk profile and financial position. The Group and its legal entities have various governance structures, including committees and forums, to oversee and manage climate risk effectively. Additionally, Heads of Climate Risk have been appointed across key Barclays legal entities (as applicable) to support the oversight and management of climate risk. Barclays has implemented controls to manage climate-related risks. The Climate Risk Control Forum provides oversight of climate related controls, including reviewing risk events, policy and issues management. Please see pages 160-161 for further details on the governance structures and primary accountable executives responsible for managing climate risk. ## Risk appetite Barclays' approach to setting risk appetite for climate risk is aligned with its ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050 and its commitment to align its financing with the goals and timelines of the Paris Agreement, including working towards its 2030 financed emissions reduction targets. Climate risk considerations have been included in the risk appetite qualitative statements and quantitative constraints. The risk appetite for climate risk is managed through risk limits, triggers and indicators set across different Principal Risks (including Credit Risk, Market Risk and Treasury & Capital Risk), portfolios, sectors, asset classes and products. Regular monitoring, reporting and governance provide oversight so that exposures remain within the appetite and corrective actions are taken to address any breaches or excesses. The Group continues to regularly review its risk appetite and makes enhancements to maintain alignment with the Group's strategic objectives as a part of its business planning process. The risk appetite is formally reviewed and approved by the Board annually. Please see page 64 of the Barclays Transition Update for further details on Barclays' climate risk appetite. ## Risk Identification Barclays employs a multi-layered risk identification approach, beginning with the analysis of transmission channels through which climate risk can drive risks in Barclays' traditional risk categories. Horizon scanning is conducted to identify emerging risk themes, potential risk drivers, and key regulatory updates. Assessments are performed to identify and analyse the vulnerability of different geographies and industry sectors to various physical and transition risk drivers. Countries and sectors judged to be at elevated risk are subject to heightened risk management. Refer to page 216 for details on sector exposures. To identify property level physical hazards for Barclays' asset-backed lending and financing portfolios such as Private Bank and Wealth Management, Mortgages and Structured Lending and Financing portfolios, Barclays uses third party data providers in addition to the internal data sources. Climate risks identified through these processes guide Barclays in defining priorities and focus areas for granular assessment within principal risk categories, such as Credit, Market, and Operational risk. The below table provides examples of how Barclays' CRF considers potential key effects of climate risk drivers on Barclays' financial and operational Principal Risk types. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) | Principal Risk | Example effects of climate risk drivers | | --- | --- | | Credit risk | A changing climate (i.e. more frequent and more intense physical hazards) and society's response (i.e. increased transition factors such as new policies or technologies to reduce carbon emissions) impacts credit risk. The impact on credit risk relates to the failure of clients, customers or counterparties to meet their obligations as a result of physical and transition risks, which may lead to potential losses and/or exposures outside Barclays' risk appetite in retail and wholesale credit portfolios. Climate change can drive direct impacts such as damage to fixed assets from physical hazards, leading to changes in output and increased costs. Indirect impacts may include material disruptions to supply chains and shifting demand for goods and services. Transition risk factors such as low-carbon policies or technologies could also change the value and creditworthiness of counterparties, clients and customers. | | Market risk | The impact on market risk relates to potential adverse changes in the value of Barclays' assets and liabilities from fluctuations in market variables as a result of physical and transition risks, which may lead to potential losses due to changes in equity and commodity prices and credit spreads. Either physical hazards or transition risk factors have the potential to trigger large, sudden and negative price adjustments where climate risk has not yet been incorporated into prices, driving additional market risk. Fluctuations in markets and prices in susceptible sectors or countries could drive losses to the value of Barclays' assets and liabilities. | | Treasury & capital risk | The impact on treasury & capital risk relates to the impact on the capital requirements and liquidity funding requirements as a result of physical and transition risks, which may lead to changes in capital plans, funding plan requirements, asset and liabilities management and exposures to changes in interest rates. Climate events can drive treasury & capital risk as counterparties draw down deposits and credit lines. Physical hazards or transition factors could lead to increased volatility, which could in turn change the value of investments and drive changes to funding requirements and accessibility, capital planning, capital requirements, or hedging methodologies. | | Operational risk | Physical hazards and transition risk factors can lead to impacts on Barclays' own operations including damage or unsuitability of premises, disruption to business operations and supply chain and ability to recover from outages (e.g. caused by workforce, technology and third-party service providers). For example, extreme weather events can impact the operation of bank offices, branches, and support facilities such as data centres. The transition to a low-carbon economy can lead to changes in operational processes; for example, to mitigate climate impacts we need to decarbonise our buildings or requirements to achieve more carbon efficient buildings. Transition risks can also drive secondary impacts on operational risks such as the risk of misreporting as a result of enhanced regulatory disclosures requirements, or physical security breaches and branch closures as a result of protests related to Barclays' lending activities. | # Risk Register and Materiality Assessment Barclays uses its Risk Register process to assess the potential effects of climate risk drivers on principal risks and its portfolios. The Group Risk Register contains risks that may impact forward-looking business plans of the Group and its key legal entities and business units. The materiality of climate risks is derived either quantitatively (typically based on stress testing) or through qualitative estimations. The potential impact is evaluated based on an adverse but plausible stress scenario. The Risk Register process has been extended to cover materiality assessment over the short, medium and long term for climate risk (please see page 33 for further details). Climate risk is assessed as having a higher materiality rating within the Group Risk Register for credit risk and treasury & capital risk than across other principal risk categories. The Group Risk Register is refreshed on at least an annual basis and is subsequently used to support strategic planning and risk management activities. # Risk assessment The Group has developed a suite of tools and practices to assess climate risk, leveraging both qualitative insights and quantitative techniques. These tools and practices enable evaluation of potential exposures and vulnerabilities across portfolios of other principal risk types. For credit risk, Barclays has integrated climate risk considerations into key processes of the credit lifecycle, including credit assessment, annual review and transaction approval processes. The Climate and Environmental Lens questionnaire is used to evaluate climate physical risks, climate transition risks and environmental risks (as relevant) for corporate clients operating in elevated risk sectors. The outputs from Climate and Environmental lens assessments are used to inform various credit processes. Climate risk factors are included in the downside cashflow modelling within the credit analysis process, and influence internal credit ratings when there is demonstrable evidence that such factors can have material adverse impact on the counterparty's financial position. For the UK Mortgage portfolio, where appropriate, evaluation for climate risks is considered in the property valuation and credit-granting processes. Barclays actively monitors concentrations of physical risk in the BUK Mortgage portfolio and manages these as appropriate - focus to date has been on managing risk across the highest flood risk bands. Additionally, Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) ratings have been identified and assessed for portfolios that are particularly vulnerable to transition risk. For market risk, the impact of climate risk is measured by applying a multi-asset combined stress scenario, which stresses the core risks susceptible to climate risks over long and short-term horizons (short-term is anything less than 10 days, while long-term is anything longer than 10 days). The estimated impact is calculated and reported internally on a weekly basis. The pattern of stress losses arising from the stress scenario is used to estimate and set ongoing limits, under which Barclays monitors and controls market risk arising from climate change. For treasury and capital risk (TCR), climate risk considerations have also been incorporated into the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP). The climate-related risk variables and stress scenarios have been integrated in the Group-wide internal stress testing framework to understand and quantify potential impact on Barclays' capital position (refer to page 106 for more details). Further, TCR considerations also include the assessment of liquidity and pension risk. For liquidity risk, assessments are informed by the application of industry and country classifications and evaluated using internal --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) stress testing and portfolio-specific analysis to determine material areas of climate risk (e.g. by asset class or product type) that could impact funding and liquidity ratios. For pension risk, key risk indicators based on the impact of physical and transition risk drivers on the pension fund have been defined. These are reviewed and monitored on a quarterly basis. For operational risk, the primary objective is to ensure resilience against physical climate-related events. Climate risks are assessed within existing business-as-usual operational risk processes, with climate considerations embedded into premises management and operational recovery planning to strengthen business continuity and response capabilities. Climate risk factors have been integrated into Structured Scenario Assessments, which capture extreme but plausible operational tail risks. In addition to this, Barclays' material third party suppliers' vulnerabilities to physical risk events are assessed, and where appropriate, control requirements are set to manage these risks. For further details on reputational risk, refer to the Managing Impacts in lending and financing section. Barclays' work on assessing climate-related risks has focused on the short (0-1 year) and medium term (1-5 years) horizons, in line with our financial planning cycle. However, the longer-term climate (> 5 years) risks have been considered using both quantitative approaches, such as reverse stress testing, and qualitative analysis. ## Risk monitoring and reporting Barclays has adopted an integrated approach to managing and mitigating climate risks, combining continuous monitoring at a portfolio level, and bottom-up transaction-level assessments. At the portfolio level, Barclays translates its climate risk appetite into a series of limits, triggers, and indicators to control risk-taking across different Principal Risks (including Credit Risk, Market Risk and Treasury & Capital Risk), portfolios, material sectors, asset classes and products. These limits are subject to regular monitoring and reporting to the relevant governance forums and committees. At a transaction level, Barclays integrates climate considerations into credit decisioning and underwriting processes. Enhanced oversight and additional scrutiny have been introduced for new deals originated in elevated climate risk sectors, particularly those where Barclays has set sector targets and/or external position statements. Within the Global Markets business activities (Lending/Underwriting Structured Finance), new guidelines have been implemented to support new transactions and annual reviews across portfolios (including Commercial / Residential Real Estate, ABS, CLOs, Structured Credits and Equities). The guidelines and criteria for additional scrutiny are reviewed and updated regularly. Barclays' bespoke tool BlueTrack™ is used for measuring emissions and setting emission reduction sector targets for its financed portfolio. Currently, BlueTrack™ covers nine sectors as mentioned in pages 32-56. Barclays has developed the Client Transition Framework (CTF) to evaluate corporate clients' progress towards low-carbon business models. Details of the clients in scope of the CTF and its methodology are on page 39. The client CTF scores and emissions data from BlueTrack™ are further used to inform key risk management practices, including risk monitoring, setting limits, managing concentrations, credit decisions and stress testing exercises. Stress testing, scenario analysis, ICAAP, and ILAAP are also used by Barclays to manage and mitigate financial risks. These exercises help the assessment of Barclays' resilience under adverse scenarios, with the aim of ensuring the bank maintains sufficient capital and liquidity buffers to withstand shocks. For further details on Barclays' approach to scenario analysis, please see page 64-67. Climate risk-related management information packs, including exposure and risk metrics for climate risk, are produced and reported to various committees and governance forums, including CRC. The oversight by committees within Group and its legal entities seek to ensure proper oversight and monitoring of climate-sensitive exposures. Barclays seeks to continuously monitor regulatory developments, including emerging disclosure standards on climate and wider sustainability areas, and build internal capabilities to meet these new requirements. This also includes strengthening our scenario analysis capabilities and evaluating the feasibility of conducting scenario analysis for longer time horizons. During 2025, Barclays conducted an exploratory exercise to extend climate scenario analysis from a 5 year period to a 10 year period. We continue to reflect on the outcomes of this exercise to deepen our understanding and support the further development of long term assessment capabilities. ## Key enhancements Barclays remains committed to maintaining a robust risk management framework for climate risk, with a continued focus on achieving greater maturity and integration across its operational processes. In 2025, notable enhancements were made in the following areas: - The climate risk models within Barclays' capital assessment framework have been further refined and updated in line with the strategic plan to advance modelling capabilities. These models undergo independent model validation to ensure robustness and regulatory alignment. - The physical risk assessment capabilities have been strengthened to ensure greater consistency in scenario design across diverse hazards and geographies. These enhancements also enable the integration of secondary transmission channels including insurance market dynamics, changes in consumer preferences and additional macroeconomic variables. - Barclays has continued to enhanced its control environment for climate risk by implementing new controls, reinforcing existing ones and developing a comprehensive control library to support consistent monitoring and adherence. - In response to regulatory requirements, progress has been made within Barclays Europe to embed nature risk into its stress testing framework and ICAAP assessments, compared with last year's exploratory exercise. This includes enhancements to stress testing models, and the adoption of a joint climate- and nature-informed scenario narrative. The focus was on key nature-related risk drivers, including pollution, water stress, land use change, soil degradation, decline in pollinators and waste management (including recycling acceleration). --- # Principal risk management (continued) ## Credit risk management (audited) The risk of loss to the Group from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the Group, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables. ## Overview The credit risk that the Group faces arises from wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts with clients' trading activities, including debt securities, settlement balances with market counterparties, fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) assets and reverse repurchase loans. Credit risk management objectives are to: - maintain a framework of controls to oversee credit risk - identify, assess and measure credit risk clearly and accurately across the Group and within each separate business, from the level of individual facilities up to the total portfolio - control and plan credit risk taking in line with external stakeholder expectations, including risk return objectives, and avoiding undesirable concentrations - monitor credit risk and adherence to agreed controls. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities The first line of defence has primary responsibility for managing credit risk within the risk appetite and limits set by the Risk function, supported by a defined set of policies, standards and controls. In the entities, business risk committees (attended by the first line) monitor and review the credit risk profile of each business unit, where the most material issues are escalated to the Retail Credit Risk Management Committee, Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee and Group Risk Committee. Wholesale and retail portfolios are managed separately to reflect the differing nature of the assets; wholesale balances tend to be larger and are managed on an individual basis, while retail balances are greater in number but lesser in value and are, therefore, managed in aggregated segments. The responsibilities of the credit risk management teams in the businesses, the sanctioning team and other shared services include: sanctioning new credit agreements (principally wholesale); setting strategies for approval of transactions (principally retail); setting risk appetite; monitoring risk against limits and other parameters; maintaining robust processes, data gathering, quality, storage and reporting methods for effective credit risk management; performing effective turnaround and workout scenarios for wholesale portfolios via dedicated restructuring and recoveries teams; maintaining robust collections and recovery processes/units for retail portfolios; and review and validation of credit risk measurement models. The credit risk management teams in each legal entity are accountable to the relevant Legal Entity CRO, who reports to the Group CRO. For wholesale portfolios, credit risk managers are organised in sanctioning teams by geography, industry and/or product. In wholesale portfolios, credit risk approval is undertaken by experienced credit risk professionals operating within a clearly defined delegated authority framework, with only the most senior credit officers assigned the higher levels of delegated authority. The largest credit exposures, which are outside the Risk Sanctioning Unit or Risk Distribution Committee authority, require the support of a Senior Credit Officer. For exposures in excess of the Senior Credit Officer's authority, approval by Group Senior Credit Officer/Board Risk Committee is also required. The Group Credit Risk Committee, attended by Senior Credit Officers, provides a formal mechanism for the Group Senior Credit Officer to exercise the highest level of credit authority over the most material Group single name exposures. ## Credit risk mitigation The Group employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate credit risks. These can broadly be divided into three types: - netting and set-off - collateral - risk transfer. ## Netting and set-off Credit risk exposures can be reduced by applying netting and set-off. For derivative transactions, the Group's normal practice is, on a legal entity basis, to enter into standard master agreements with counterparties (e.g. ISDAs). These master agreements typically allow for netting of credit risk exposure to a counterparty resulting from derivative transactions against the obligations to the counterparty in the event of default, and so produce a lower net credit exposure. These agreements may also reduce settlement exposure (e.g. for foreign exchange transactions) by allowing payments on the same day in the same currency to be set-off against one another. ## Collateral The Group has the ability to call on collateral in the event of default of the counterparty, comprising: - home loans: a fixed charge over residential property in the form of houses, flats and other dwellings - wholesale lending: a fixed charge over commercial property and other physical assets, in various forms - other retail lending: includes charges over other physical assets; second lien charges over residential property; and finance lease receivables - derivatives: the Group also often seeks to enter into a margin agreement (e.g. Credit Support Annex) with counterparties with which the Group has master netting agreements in place. These annexes to master agreements provide a mechanism for further reducing credit risk, whereby collateral (margin) is posted on a regular basis (typically daily) to collateralise the mark to market exposure of a derivative portfolio measured on a net basis - reverse repurchase agreements: collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which have been legally transferred to the Group subject to an agreement to return them for a fixed price - financial guarantees and similar off-balance sheet commitments: cash collateral may be held against these arrangements. --- # Principal risk management (continued) ## Risk transfer A range of instruments including guarantees, credit insurance, credit derivatives and securitisation can be used to transfer credit risk from one counterparty to another. These mitigate credit risk in three main ways: - if the risk is transferred to a counterparty which is more creditworthy than the original counterparty, then overall credit risk is reduced - where recourse to the first counterparty remains, both counterparties must default before a loss materialises. This is less likely than the default of either counterparty individually so credit risk is reduced - first loss exposures across pools of credit risk can be hedged via synthetic securitisation structures, typically via CLN (credit linked notes) issuance. As these are fully funded upfront they provide for a direct reduction in credit risk exposure on referenced pools. In addition, referenced pools of assets can be securitised with specific tranches of risk sold to investors to provide direct reduction in credit risk exposures. > Detailed policies are in place to appropriately recognise and record credit risk mitigation. For more information, refer to pages 131 to 134 of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). ## Governance and oversight of ECLs under IFRS 9 The Group’s organisational structure and internal governance processes oversee the estimation of ECL across several areas, including: i) setting requirements in policy, including key assumptions and the application of key judgements; ii) the design and execution of models; and iii) review of ECL results. i) Impairment policy requirements are set and reviewed regularly, at a minimum annually, to maintain adherence to accounting standards. Key judgements inherent in policy, including the estimated life of revolving credit facilities and the quantitative criteria for assessing the significant increase in credit risk (SICR), are separately supported by analytical study. In particular, the quantitative thresholds used for assessing SICR are subject to a number of internal validation criteria, particularly in retail portfolios where thresholds decrease as the origination Probability of Default (PD) of each facility increases. Key policy requirements are also aligned to the Group’s credit risk management strategy and practices, for example, wholesale customers that are risk managed on an individual basis are assessed for ECL on an individual basis upon entering Stage 3; furthermore, key internal risk management indicators of high risk are used to set SICR policy, for example, retail customers identified as high risk account management are automatically deemed to have met the SICR criteria. ii) ECL is estimated in line with internal policy requirements using models which are validated by a qualified independent party to the model development area, the Independent Validation Unit (IVU), before first use and on a regular basis, at a minimum every three years. Each model is designated an owner who is responsible for: - model maintenance: monitoring of model performance including backtesting by comparing predicted ECL versus flow into stage 3 and coverage ratios; proposing material changes for independent IVU approval; and recalibrating model parameters on more timely data - proposing post-model adjustments (PMA) to address model weaknesses or to account for situations where known or expected risk factors and information have not been considered in the modelling process. All PMAs relating to model deficiencies, regardless of value are approved by IVU for a set time period. Material PMAs are approved before first use whilst immaterial PMAs are approved as part of IVU's annual review process. PMAs representing Expert Judgement are validated by Risk, as the second line of defence and approved for a set time period. The most material PMAs are also approved by the CRO. Models must also assess ECL across a range of future economic conditions. These economic scenarios are generated via an independent model and ultimately set by the Senior Scenario Review Committee. Economic scenarios are regenerated at a minimum twice annually but more frequently if deemed appropriate, and also to align with the Group’s medium term planning exercise. Each model used in the estimation of ECL, including key inputs, are governed by a series of internal controls, which include the validation of completeness and accuracy of data in golden source systems, documented data transformations and documented lineage of data transfers between systems. iii) The Group Impairment Committee, formed of members from both Finance and Risk and attended by both the Group Finance Director and the Group CRO (or their delegates), is responsible for overseeing impairment policy and practice across the Group and will approve impairment results. Reported results and key messages are communicated to the BAC, which has an oversight role and provides challenge of key assumptions, including the basis of the scenarios adopted. Impairment results are then factored into management decision making, including but not limited to, business planning, risk appetite setting and portfolio management. ## Market risk management (audited) The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the Group’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations. ## Overview Market risk arises primarily as a result of client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market-making activities, risk management solutions and execution of syndications. Upon execution of a trade with a client, the Group will look to hedge against the risk of the trade moving in an adverse direction. Mismatches between client transactions and hedges result in market risk due to changes in asset prices, volatility or correlations. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities Market risk in the businesses resides primarily in Investment Bank and Treasury. These businesses have the mandate to assume market risk. The front office and Treasury trading desks are responsible for managing market risk on a day-to-day basis, where they are required to understand and adhere to all limits applicable to their businesses. The Market Risk team supports the trading desks with the day-to-day limit management of market risk exposures through governance processes which are outlined in supporting market risk policies and standards. Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees and Group committees, including the Market Risk Committee (MRC). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) The objectives of market risk management are to: - identify, understand and control market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight - facilitate business growth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework - control market risk in the businesses according to the allocated appetite. To meet the above objectives, a governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF. The BRC recommends market risk appetite to the Board for their approval. The Market Risk Principal Risk Lead (PR Lead) is responsible for the Market Risk Control Framework and, under delegated authority from the Group CRO, agrees with the business CROs a limit framework within the context of the approved market risk appetite. The Market Risk Committee (MRC) reviews and makes recommendations concerning the group-wide market risk profile. This includes overseeing the operation of the Market Risk Framework and associated policies and standards, monitoring market and regulatory changes, and reviewing limit utilisation levels. The committee is chaired by the PR Lead and attendees include the business heads of market risk and business aligned market risk managers. In addition to MRC, the Investment Bank Risk Committee ('IBRC') is the main forum in which market risk exposures are discussed and reviewed with senior business heads. The Committee is chaired by the BBPLC CRO and meets weekly, covering current market events, notable market risk exposures, and key risk topics. New business initiatives are generally socialised at IBRC before any changes to risk appetite or associated limits are considered in other governance committees. The head of each business is accountable for all market risks associated with its activities, while the head of the market risk team covering each business is responsible for implementing the risk control framework for market risk. # Management value at risk (VaR) VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology with a one-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level is used for all trading books and some banking books. Limits are applied at the total level as well as by risk factor type, which are then cascaded down to particular trading desks and businesses by the market risk management function. See the market risk performance section for a review of management VaR. # Treasury and capital risk management This comprises: - Liquidity risk: The risk that the Group is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets. - Capital risk: The risk that the Group has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments and stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This also includes the risk from the Group's pension plans. - Interest rate risk in the banking book: The risk that the Group is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and liabilities. This also includes credit spread risk in the banking book, the risk that the Group is exposed to capital or income volatility because of changes in credit spreads on its (non-traded) assets and liabilities. The Treasury function manages treasury and capital risk exposure on a day-to-day basis with the Group Treasury Committee acting as the principal management body. The Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for oversight and provides insight into key capital, liquidity, interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB) and pension risk management activities. The assessment and management of the Group's capital and liquidity position and IRRBB and pension risk requires the use of judgement, assumptions and estimates. Please see the description of material existing and emerging risks beginning on page 184 of this Annual Report for further details on such judgements, assumptions and estimates, including the potential risks involved. # Liquidity risk management (audited) ## Overview The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in order to retain the confidence of the financial markets and maintain the sustainability of the business. Treasury and Capital Risk have created a framework to manage all liquidity risk exposures under both normal and stressed conditions. The framework is designed to maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount, quality and funding tenor profile to remain within the liquidity limits set by the Barclays PLC Board. The Board sets liquidity limits on both internal and regulatory liquidity metrics. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing liquidity risk within the set risk appetite. Both Risk and Treasury contribute to the production of the Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP). The Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for the management and governance of the liquidity risk mandate, as defined by the Board. The liquidity risk management framework established by Treasury and Capital Risk is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding, consistent with the risk appetite set by the Board. The framework incorporates a range of ongoing business management tools to monitor and stress test the Group's balance sheet and recovery plan, including limit setting. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools designed to control the level of liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds. Adherence to limits reduces the likelihood that a liquidity stress event could lead to an inability to meet Group's obligations as they fall due. For more information on market risk management, refer to the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report p156 to 165 (unaudited). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) The Board approves the Group funding plan, internal stress tests, regulatory stress test results, recovery plan and liquidity risk qualitative statement that supports the Group risk appetite. The Group Treasury Committee is responsible for monitoring and managing liquidity risk in line with the Group's funding management objectives, funding plan and risk appetite. The Treasury and Capital Risk Committee monitors and reviews the liquidity risk profile and control environment, providing second line oversight of the management of liquidity risk. The BRC reviews the risk profile, liquidity risk qualitative statement, and the impact of stress scenarios on the Group funding plan/forecast in order to agree the Group's projected funding abilities. The Group BRC also approves liquidity limits to define the Group's risk appetite liquidity constraint. ## Capital risk management (audited) ### Overview Capital risk is managed through ongoing monitoring and management of the capital and leverage position, regular stress testing and a robust capital governance framework. The objectives of the framework are to maintain adequate capital for the Group and legal entities to withstand the impact of the risks that may arise under normal and stressed conditions, and maintain adequate capital to cover current and forecast business needs and associated risks to provide a viable and sustainable business offering. The Group aims to prudently manage its overall leverage position (including risk of excessive leverage) by utilising plausible stress scenarios, reviewing and deploying management actions in response to deteriorating economic and commercial positions. In order to manage contingent leverage risk, the Group considers the context from which the business consumption arises, the impact of client utilisation on leverage and the available actions to manage. ### Organisation, roles and responsibilities Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing and monitoring capital adequacy. The Treasury and Capital Risk function provides oversight of capital risk. Production of the Barclays PLC Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) is the responsibility of Treasury. Capital risk management is underpinned by a control framework and policy. The capital management strategy, outlined in the Group and legal entity capital plans, is developed in alignment with the control framework and policy for capital risk, and is implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group's objectives. The Board approves the Group capital plan, internal stress tests and results of regulatory stress tests, and the Group recovery plan. The Group Treasury Committee is responsible for monitoring and managing capital risk in line with the Group's capital management objectives, capital plan and risk frameworks. The Treasury and Capital Risk Committee monitors and reviews the capital risk profile and control environment, providing second line oversight of the management of capital risk. The BRC reviews the risk profile, and reviews risk appetite at least annually and the impact of stress scenarios on the Group capital plan/forecast in order to agree the Group's projected capital adequacy. Local management assures compliance with an entity's minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs) with oversight by the Group Treasury Committee, as required. In 2025, Barclays complied with all regulatory minimum capital requirements. Contingent leverage risk is managed by; i) setting comprehensive leverage (and RWA) targets for each business as part of the Treasury capital management process, taking into account adherence to early warning indicators and maintain a healthy leverage ratio, and; ii) Monitoring execution of actions taken to course-correct as necessary. The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of schemes to meet pension payments is achieved with investments and contributions. Pension risk arises because the market value of pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of pension liabilities might increase. The Group monitors the pension risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes and works with the relevant pension fund's trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances, the Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group's main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012. ## Interest rate risk in the banking book management (IRRBB) ### Overview Interest rate risk in the banking book is driven by customer and counterparties deposit taking and lending activities, investments in the liquid asset portfolio and funding activities. As per the Group's policy to remain within the defined risk appetite, hedging strategies are executed to mitigate the various IRRBB risks that result from these activities. However, the Group remains susceptible to interest rate risk and other non-traded market risks from the following key sources: - Interest rate and repricing risk: the risk that net interest income could be adversely impacted by a change in interest rates, differences in the timing of interest rate changes between assets and liabilities, and other constraints on interest rate changes as per product terms and conditions. - Customer behavioural risk: the risk that net interest income could be adversely impacted by the discretion that customers and counterparties may have in respect of being able to vary from their contractual obligations with Barclays. This risk is often referred to by industry regulators as 'embedded option risk'. - Investment risks in the liquid asset portfolio: the risk that the fair value of assets held in the liquid asset portfolio and associated risk management portfolios could be adversely impacted by market volatility, creating volatility in capital directly. ### Organisation, roles and responsibilities The entity ALCOs and/or treasury committees, together with the Group Treasury Committee, are responsible for monitoring and managing IRRBB risk in line with the Group's management objectives and risk frameworks. The GRC and Treasury and Capital Risk Committee monitors and reviews the IRRBB risk profile and control environment, providing second line oversight of the management of IRRBB. The BRC reviews the interest rate risk profile, including review of the risk appetite at least annually and the impact of stress scenarios on the interest rate risk of the Group's banking books. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) In addition, the Group’s IRRBB policy sets out the processes and key controls required to identify all IRRBB risks arising from banking book operations, to monitor the risk exposures via a set of metrics with a frequency in line with the risk management horizon, and to manage these risks within agreed risk appetite and limits. ## Operational risk management The risk of loss to the Group from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to external events (for example, fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks. ## Overview The management of operational risk has three key objectives: - deliver and oversee an operational risk capability owned and used by business leaders to enable sound risk decisions over the long term - provide the frameworks, policies and standards to enable management to meet their risk management responsibilities while the second line of defence provides robust, independent, and effective oversight and challenge - deliver a consistent and aggregated measurement of operational risk that will provide clear and relevant insights, so that the right management actions can be taken to keep the operational risk profile consistent with the Group’s strategy, the stated risk appetite and stakeholder needs. The Group operates within a system of internal controls that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing it to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damages. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities The prime responsibility for the management of operational risk and the compliance with control requirements rests within the business and functional units where the risk arises. The operational risk profile and control environment is reviewed by management through business risk committees and control committees. Operational risk issues escalated from these meetings are considered through the second line of defence review meetings. Depending on their nature, the outputs of these meetings are presented to the Group Controls and Risk Committee, the BRC or the BAC. In addition, specific reports are prepared by Operational Risk on a regular basis for the GRC and the BRC. Legal entities, businesses and functions are required to report their operational risks on both a regular and an event-driven basis. The reports include a profile of the material risks that may threaten the achievement of their objectives and the effectiveness of key controls, operational risk events and a review of scenarios. The Group Head of Operational Risk and Risk Oversight is responsible for establishing, owning and maintaining an appropriate group-wide Operational Risk Framework and for overseeing the portfolio of operational risk across the Group. The Operational Risk function acts in a second line of defence capacity, and is responsible for defining and overseeing the implementation of the framework and monitoring the Group’s operational risk profile, including risk-based review and challenge. The Operational Risk function alerts management when risk levels exceed acceptable tolerance in order to drive timely decision- making and actions by the first line of defence. ## Operational risk categories Operational risks are grouped into risk categories to support effective risk management, measurement and reporting. These comprise: Data & Records Management Risk; Financial Reporting Risk; Fraud Risk; Cyber & Information Security Risk; Operational Recovery Planning Risk; People Risk; Premises Risk; Physical Security Risk; Risk Reporting Risk; Change Delivery Management Risk; Supplier Risk; Tax Risk; Technology Risk; and Transaction Processing Risk. The Operational Risk Taxonomy also includes operational risks associated with other Principal Risks, including Compliance, Financial Crime, Legal, Climate, Model, Reputation Risk and the operational failures of Financial Principal Risk processes. > For definitions of the Group’s Operational Risk Categories and connected risks, refer to the management of operational risk section in pages 181 to 185 of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). ## Model risk management The potential for adverse consequences from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports. ## Overview The Bank uses models to support a broad range of activities, including formulating business strategies, informing business decisions, identifying and measuring risks, valuing exposures, conducting stress testing, assessing adequacy of capital, managing client assets, measuring compliance with internal risk limits, maintaining the formal control apparatus of the Group, meeting financial and regulatory reporting and disclosure requirement. Since models are imperfect and incomplete representations of reality, they may be subject to uncertainty, errors and inappropriate use affecting the accuracy of their output. Model risk can lead to financial loss, poor business and strategic decision making, or damage to a bank’s reputation. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities Model Risk is a principal risk within the ERMF and is centrally governed by the Group’s Model Risk Management (MRM) function. MRM is an independent function responsible for establishing and maintaining the framework and the model inventory needed to assess, manage, and report model risk. The Global Head of MRM reports directly to the Group Chief Risk Officer. The Head of AI/ML Risk, reports into the Global Head of MRM. MRM establishes model risk policies and standards, sets out and monitors model risk appetite, validates and approves models, reports on model risk, operates the controls that govern models and maintains the inventory of all models used by the Group globally. The Model Risk Framework, which is owned by the Head of MRM, provides the overview for management and governance of Model risk in Barclays, including key components such as the Model Risk Policy, the AI Policy and supporting standards, reporting and escalation paths for breaches of policy. The Model Risk Policy prescribes the end-to-end requirements for the identification, measurement and management of model risk covering model documentation, development, monitoring, annual assessment and review, independent validation, approval, and change and reporting processes, and assigns clear roles and responsibilities for the end-to-end management of model risk. The Artificial Intelligence (AI) Policy lays out the requirements for management and oversight of risks associated with use of AI and is supported by the AI standard. The primary objectives of this Policy are to: - Define Ethical AI Principles to enable ethical, lawful, and appropriate use of AI. - Establish an enterprise-wide definition of AI, define risks stemming from use of AI and define prohibited, high, medium and low risk uses of AI to enable consistent identification of AI Systems, and the risks associated with their use. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) - Define governance and escalation pathways to provide transparency on AI use and associated risks to Senior Management. - Define control objective for AI training and literacy. MRM operates the Group Model Risk Committee (GMRC), the purpose of which is to review and monitor the Model Risk profile and control environment across the Model Risk portfolio and assess the exposure against the approved appetite and associated tolerances. The GMRC escalates to the Group Risk Committee (GRC). MRM also operates the Model Risk Control Forum (MR CF) that oversees the consistent and effective implementation of the Operational Risk Framework (ORF) as relating to Model Risk. The MR CF escalates to the Group Controls Committee. MRM reports on the model risk profile to the Group Board Risk Committee, the Group Risk Committee, key Barclays Legal Entity risk and control committees and forums. These committees consider Model Risk matters relevant to them and escalate as required in compliance with the Operation of Committees Policy and internal applicable governance policies. Cross functional oversight of AI Risk in the bank, is provided by the Group AI Governance Council, under the mandate of Head of AI/ML Risk. The Head of AI/ML Risk is also responsible for establishing the AI Risk Appetite, and enabling reporting of compliance with the AI Policy and AI Standard to the Group and local entity Board Risk Committee(s). In addition, the Model Strategy and Oversight (MSO) Team, which is a first line independent team, provides oversight of strategic modelling decisions of material models, in particular ensuring compliance with regulations and relevant technical standards, following a risk-based approach focusing on material modelling issues, including: - Ensures a comprehensive / consistent approach taken across the bank to deliver material models requirements; - Provides challenge to modelling decisions taken by Model Owners and Developers; - Participates in the requisite forum (i.e. Group Model Management Steering Committee) to facilitate Senior Management oversight of the strategic approach taken for the development/re-development of material models and of key model aspects of associated rating systems within Barclays. As per the ERMF, the first line of defence (1LOD) is comprised of all employees engaged in the revenue generating and client facing areas of the firm as well as all associated support functions, including Finance, Treasury, Technology and Operations, Human Resources, and Administration. Employees of Risk and Compliance are the second line of defence (2LOD). The 1LOD for Model Risk is represented by 1LOD areas developing, using and owning models. 2LOD areas develop, use or employ models as well. In such cases, these 2LOD areas will be subject to independent oversight from MRM and within the MRM framework are considered as 1LOD. MRM is the 2LOD for Model Risk. # Compliance Risk management The risk of poor outcomes for, or harm to, customers, clients and markets, arising from the delivery of Barclays products and services (Conduct Risk), and the risk to Barclays, its clients, customers or markets from a failure to comply with the laws, rules and regulations (LRR) applicable to the firm. ## Overview Compliance Risk incorporates wholesale conduct, customer protection, data privacy, regulatory compliance, product design and review, and laws, rules and regulation risks. Barclays has no appetite for material breaches of LRR, or Compliance Risk issues and events that are material, systemic, not promptly remediated, not reported to regulators in a timely manner where required, and/or are likely to result in regulatory enforcement. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities The Compliance Risk Management Framework (CRMF) outlines how the Barclays Group manages and measures its Compliance Risk Profile. The Group Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for developing, maintaining and overseeing a group-wide CRMF. The Group Chief Compliance Officer is responsible for providing effective oversight of Compliance Risk in line with the CRMF at the Entity and Subsidiary level. This includes overseeing the development and maintenance of the relevant Compliance Risk policies and associated standards, the monitoring of and reporting on the consistent application and the effectiveness of the implementation of the controls by management, to manage Compliance Risk. It is the responsibility of the first line of defence to establish controls to mitigate and monitor its compliance risk exposure. The responsibility for LRR risk management sits across various functions and business units, including Legal, Chief Controls Office, Risk and Compliance. Senior managers are accountable within their areas of responsibility for owning and managing Compliance Risk in accordance with the CRMF, as defined within their regulatory Statement of Responsibilities, and a dedicated team has been established in Compliance to oversee and support senior managers in LRR risk management. Compliance as an independent second line function oversees that Compliance Risks are effectively identified, managed, monitored and escalated, and has a key role in helping Barclays achieve the right conduct outcomes and evolve a compliance-focused culture. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) The Bank's Chief Compliance Officers provides independent check and challenge to Business Senior Management to ensure their Compliance Risk management accountabilities are carried out effectively, including, but not limited to risk assessments, mitigation plans and reporting. The governance of Compliance Risk within the Group is fulfilled through management committees and forums operated by the first and second lines of defence, with clear escalation and reporting lines into Board level committees. The Barclays Group and Barclays Bank Group Risk Committee and the Barclays Bank UK Group Risk Committee are the primary second line governance committee for the oversight of the Compliance Risk profile and responsibilities include the identification and discussion of any emerging Compliance Risk exposures in the Barclays Group and Barclays Bank Group. ## Culture and conduct We believe the stronger the Group's culture, the better the choices our people will make and the stronger the business will be for all stakeholders. While the Group's culture helps us reduce the impact of poor conduct on customers, we also do not intend to repeat the errors of the past. The Group's most senior leaders spend significant time setting the right tone at Barclays, and the Purpose and Values are now deeply embedded in their messages. The Barclays Way sets out the standards and behaviour all employees must demonstrate and guides the execution of our business. We also strengthen our culture with clear and effective controls. We continue investing to enhance controls to support the Group's commitment to conducting all activities with integrity. > For details of the Board's role in embedding our Culture, Purpose, Values and Mindset, please refer to page 81 of the Directors' Report. ## The Barclays Mindset The Barclays Mindset acts as an operating manual for how to get things done. It focuses on three key elements that are core to our success – Empower, Challenge and Drive. Research shows that when we demonstrate behaviours aligned to these three elements, outcomes are better, colleagues are more engaged and they are more likely to stay longer to build their career at Barclays. > For further details, see page 26 in Strategy for more information on the Barclays Mindset. ## Managing Compliance risks > See page 104 in the Directors' report in addition to pages 198 and 298 in the risk review section for more information on how the Group defines, manages and mitigates Compliance risks. ## Product design and review risk It is important that the design of products and services meets the needs of clients, customers and markets as well as being aligned with Barclays' policies. We do this by operating two processes, which together form our product design and review risk framework. We have a process that supports the Group in the approval and implementation of New and Amended Products and Approval process (known as the NAPA Process, set out in the Barclays NAPA Policy and Standards). This process outlines the requirements and risk assessment standards that must be met to help ensure that new and amended products and services are appropriately designed prior to their launch. In addition we have a complementary process that reviews the existing portfolio of products and services throughout their lifecycle (known as the Product Review Process, set out in the Barclays Product Review Policy and Standard). This process considers information about the performance and operation of the product or service through a conduct lens. Wherever a product or service is found to be outside appetite, the product or service owner must seek to ensure actions are taken to address it. These actions are validated by functional areas, including Legal and Compliance. Areas of Barclays that undertake Investment activity also operate additional product governance processes and controls, reflecting the higher risk of these more complex products and the importance of products and services meeting the needs of Clients. > The BPLC, BBPLC and BBUKPLC Board Risk Committees review, on behalf of their respective Boards, the management of Compliance risk and the Compliance risk profile for their respective entities. Please refer to the report of the BPLC Board Risk Committee on pages 100 and 104 and the reports of the BBPLC and BBUKPLC Board Risk Committees within the BBPLC and BBUKPLC 2025 Annual Reports available at home.barclays/investor-relations/reports-and-events/annual-reports/ for more information. ## Customer communications It is important that engagement with customers is open and honest and that we treat them fairly to avoid foreseeable harm and to make sure they are not exploited or misled. The Group continues to take steps to ensure that customers' needs and priorities are understood before making recommendations and that the communications we provide allow informed decisions to be made. We work to achieve this through a number of controls which focus on ensuring our customers receive clear information in order to understand the risks and benefits of the products we offer. For example: - communications are sufficient, targeted and distributed to recipients whom Barclays knows or reasonably believes may stand to benefit from the communication, and are communicated in a manner and style that will be understood by the average recipient (or likely recipient), - communications are withdrawn from further circulation when they are no longer accurate or fit for purpose, and - customers do not receive inadequate advice, misleading information, unsuitable products or unacceptable service. The Group's processes include a review of relevant communications which are supported by the Compliance and Legal functions to help ensure we meet both internal customer engagement standards and we are compliant with external regulations. Furthermore annual mandatory training is completed by marketing colleagues. The training covers key customer and brand standards along with the role and key policies set by external regulators e.g. regulatory requirements may require communications to be provided that are accessible to customers, or provide customers with the option to 'opt out'. ## Remediation and redress Barclays recognises that customer harm may occur as a result of our error, actions or inactions, and that we must undertake appropriate activity designed to ensure our customers are put back in the position they would have been in had the issue not occurred. Remediation can be proactive, where we have identified the issue ourselves (for example through identifying a pattern in customer complaints), or reactive, where identified by a third party such as a regulator of Barclays. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) Where it is appropriate, Barclays works to ensure the operation of consistent principles for remediation which includes timely notification to the relevant regulatory bodies. ## Financial Crime Risk management The risk that Barclays and its associated persons (employees or third parties) commit or facilitate financial crime, and/or Barclays products and services are used to facilitate financial crime. Financial Crime undermines market integrity and may result in: Harm to clients, customers, counterparties or employees; diminished confidence in financial products and services; damage to Barclays reputation; regulatory breaches; and/or financial penalties. ## Overview Financial Crime risk management incorporates anti-bribery and corruption, anti-money laundering (including terrorist financing), tax evasion facilitation and sanctions risks (including proliferation financing). Barclays has no appetite for Financial Crime risk issues and events that are material, systemic, not promptly remediated, not reported to regulators in a timely manner where required, and/or are likely to result in regulatory enforcement. Barclays will enable and support clients and customers to safely pursue their financial objectives and avoid causing negative impacts to the same through regulatory or legislative breaches, including potential or foreseeable harm, caused by financial crime. Barclays strives to prevent detect and report financial crime through the execution of its end-to-end control framework. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities The Financial Crime Risk Management Framework (FCRMF) outlines how the Group manages and measures its Financial Crime risk profile. The Group Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for developing and overseeing the implementation of the FCRMF and the Financial Crime Policy. This includes defining the relevant control objectives, principles and other core requirements for the activities of the Group. It is the responsibility of the first line of defence to maintain and embed the necessary risk and control environment for effective risk management and to ensure accurate, transparent and timely reporting on Financial Crime risk to the relevant governance fora. Senior managers are accountable within their areas of responsibility for the identification and management of financial crime risk in accordance with the FCRMF, as defined within their regulatory Statement of Responsibilities. Financial Crime Compliance, as an independent second line function, oversees that financial crime risks are effectively identified, managed, monitored and escalated, providing check and challenge to the business and ensuring that accountabilities are carried out effectively. The governance of Financial Crime Risk within Barclays is fulfilled through management committees and forums operated by the first and second lines of defence, with clear escalation and reporting lines into Board level committees. The Group Chief Compliance Officer provides reporting as required by Executive and Corporate Governance to support the oversight of the Group Financial Crime Risk profile. In addition, Legal Entity and Regional Chief Compliance Officers and entity Money Laundering Reporting Officers (MLROs) will provide reporting as required by their entity Executive and Corporate (Board-level) Governance arrangements to support the oversight of the entity Financial Crime Risk profile. ## Reputation Risk management The risk that an action, transaction, investment, event, decision, or business relationship will reduce trust in the Group's integrity and/or competence. ## Overview A reduction of trust in the Group's integrity and competence may reduce the attractiveness of the Group to stakeholders and could lead to negative publicity, loss of revenue, regulatory or legislative action, loss of existing and potential client business, reduced workforce morale and difficulties in recruiting talent. Ultimately it may destroy shareholder value. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities The Barclays PLC Board is responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of the Barclays Group management of reputation risk. The Group Chief Compliance Officer is responsible for developing and overseeing the implementation of Reputation Risk Management Framework, Policies and Associated Standards. The Reputation Risk Management Framework (RRMF) sets out what is required to manage reputation risk across the Group, including escalations to the Group Reputation Risk Committee, as required. Each colleague is responsible for identifying, assessing and escalating reputation risk. The Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank UK Group are required to operate within established reputation risk appetite, and its component businesses prepare reports for its respective Risk and Board Risk Committees highlighting their most significant current and potential reputation risks and issues and how they are being managed. These reports are a key internal source of information for the quarterly reputation risk reports which are prepared for the Barclays Group ExCo and reviewed by the Group Board twice yearly. ## Legal Risk management The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet applicable laws, rules, regulations or contractual requirements or assert or defend its intellectual property rights. ## Overview In conjunction with the Barclays Operational Risk Framework, the Group wide Legal Risk Management Framework (LRMF) comprises a number of integrated components that details how the Group identifies, manages and measures its legal risk profile. The multitude of laws and regulations across the globe are highly dynamic and their application to particular circumstances is often unclear resulting in a high level of inherent legal risk. The LRMF seeks to mitigate legal risk through the implementation of Group wide legal risk policies requiring the engagement of legal professionals to provide legal advice in situations that have the potential for legal risk, identification and management of legal risks by those professionals, and escalation of legal risk as necessary. Legal risk is also mitigated by the requirements of the Compliance Risk Management Framework (CRMF), including the responsibility of legal professionals to proactively identify, communicate and provide legal advice on applicable laws, rules and regulations. Notwithstanding these mitigating actions, the Group operates with a level of residual legal risk, for which the Group has limited tolerance. ## Organisation, roles and responsibilities The Group's businesses and functions have responsibility for identifying and escalating legal risk to the Legal Function, as well as responsibility for adherence to control requirements. The Legal Function organisation and coverage model aligns legal expertise to --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Principal risk management (continued) businesses, functions, products, activities and geographic locations so that the Group receives legal advice and support from appropriate legal professionals, working in partnership proactively to identify, manage and escalate legal risks as necessary. The senior management of the Legal Function oversees, challenges and monitors the legal risk profile and effectiveness of the legal risk control environment across the Group. The Legal Function provides support to all areas of the bank and is not formally part of any of the three lines of defence. Except in relation to the legal advice it provides or procures, the Legal Function is subject to oversight from the second line of defence with respect to its own operational and compliance risks, as well as with respect to the legal risk to which the bank is exposed. The Group General Counsel is responsible for developing and maintaining the Group wide LRMF. This includes defining the relevant legal risk policies and producing the Group wide qualitative statement for legal risk as part of Barclays' risk appetite statement. The legal entity General Counsels are responsible for the adoption and effective implementation of legal risk policies in the respective legal entity. The legal risk profile and control environment is reviewed by management through business risk committees and control committees. The Group Risk Committee is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of risk management across the Group. Escalation paths from this committee exist to the Barclays PLC Board Risk Committee. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Climate risk ## Climate risk performance ### Carbon-related assets According to TCFD, certain industry segments are more likely to be financially impacted than others due to their exposure to certain transition and physical risk factors for example, greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, extreme weather events like storms, hurricanes etc and dependencies on stable weather conditions for their operations and products. These higher risk industry segments are grouped into four key areas: Energy; Transportation; Materials and Buildings; and Agriculture, Food, and Forest Products. Barclays' exposures to the industries within these groups are reported as carbon-related assets and can be found in the table on the following page. ## Elevated risk sectors Barclays has assessed the physical and transition risks associated with Corporate and Financials sectors to identify and categorise industry segments / activities with heightened vulnerability to climate risks as elevated sectors. In each sector there are a range of vulnerabilities; whilst Barclays distinguishes elevated activities within high-level sectors, not all our clients in sectors classified as elevated will have high carbon intensity or physical risk vulnerability. Residential Real Estate exposures are included in this table as they are also susceptible to climate-related risks, even though Residential Real Estate is not classified as an economic sector. The UK mortgage portfolio exposures are included with the Residential Real Estate and flagged as elevated, while recognising that this portfolio contains a range of vulnerabilities to climate-related risks. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Climate risk (continued) Carbon-related assets (Incl. sub-sector breakdown)¹ | | Physical Risk² | Transition Risk² | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | £m | | | £m | | | | | | | | | | Loans & advances³ | Loan commitments⁴ | Total | Of which: Elevated | Loans & advances³ | Loan commitments⁴ | Total | Of which: Elevated | % Change | | Agriculture, food and forest products (logging) | | | 3,227 | 856 | 4,083 | 4,035 | 3,430 | 803 | 4,233 | 4,179 | (4%) | | Agriculture | ✓ | ✓ | 3,227 | 856 | 4,083 | 4,035 | 3,430 | 803 | 4,233 | 4,179 | | | Energy and water | | | 3,951 | 16,964 | 20,915 | 20,757 | 2,846 | 17,010 | 19,856 | 19,684 | 5% | | Power utilities⁵ | ✓ | ✓ | 3,521 | 15,279 | 18,800 | 18,800 | 2,284 | 15,401 | 17,685 | 17,685 | | | Metals (waste and recycling) | | | 73 | 85 | 158 | — | 66 | 106 | 172 | — | | | Water utilities | ✓ | ✓ | 357 | 1,600 | 1,957 | 1,957 | 496 | 1,503 | 1,999 | 1,999 | | | Manufacturing | | | 5,845 | 31,063 | 36,908 | 11,887 | 5,527 | 30,519 | 36,046 | 12,344 | 2% | | Automotive | | ✓ | 689 | 4,213 | 4,902 | 4,670 | 673 | 4,460 | 5,133 | 4,782 | | | Cements | | ✓ | 67 | 214 | 281 | 281 | 34 | 303 | 337 | 337 | | | Chemicals | | ✓ | 387 | 3,642 | 4,029 | 3,761 | 380 | 3,729 | 4,109 | 3,736 | | | Food, beverage and tobacco | | ✓ | 918 | 5,638 | 6,556 | 652 | 925 | 5,906 | 6,831 | 814 | | | Manufacturing - others⁶ | | ✓ | 2,819 | 14,956 | 17,775 | 562 | 2,745 | 13,368 | 16,113 | 698 | | | Metals | | ✓ | 285 | 251 | 536 | 229 | 281 | 387 | 668 | 262 | | | Oil and gas (refining) | ✓ | ✓ | 300 | 1,262 | 1,562 | 1,562 | 118 | 1,454 | 1,572 | 1,572 | | | Packaging manufacturers: metal, glass and plastics | | | 105 | 187 | 292 | — | 135 | 242 | 377 | — | | | Paper and forest products (excluding logging) | | | 260 | 545 | 805 | — | 219 | 544 | 763 | — | | | Steel | | ✓ | 15 | 155 | 170 | 170 | 17 | 126 | 143 | 143 | | | Materials and building | | | 23,910 | 13,131 | 37,041 | 1,439 | 22,786 | 12,596 | 35,382 | 1,270 | 5% | | Construction and materials | ✓ | | 1,768 | 1,524 | 3,292 | 1,439 | 1,956 | 1,326 | 3,282 | 1,270 | | | Real estate management and development | | | 22,142 | 11,607 | 33,749 | — | 20,830 | 11,270 | 32,100 | — | | | Mining and quarrying | | | 1,240 | 7,905 | 9,145 | 9,145 | 1,406 | 7,538 | 8,944 | 8,883 | 2% | | Mining (incl. diversified miners)⁷ | ✓ | ✓ | 129 | 1,522 | 1,651 | 1,651 | 263 | 1,612 | 1,875 | 1,814 | | | Oil and gas (extraction) | ✓ | ✓ | 1,111 | 6,383 | 7,494 | 7,494 | 1,143 | 5,926 | 7,069 | 7,069 | | | Transport and storage | | | 1,930 | 7,591 | 9,521 | 6,817 | 1,735 | 7,508 | 9,243 | 6,716 | 3% | | Aviation | ✓ | ✓ | 365 | 2,412 | 2,777 | 2,684 | 232 | 2,346 | 2,578 | 2,474 | | | Oil and gas (midstream) | ✓ | ✓ | 112 | 2,502 | 2,614 | 2,614 | 163 | 2,566 | 2,729 | 2,729 | | | Other transport services | | | 754 | 1,442 | 2,196 | — | 686 | 1,318 | 2,004 | — | | | Ports | ✓ | | 101 | 25 | 126 | 126 | 87 | 88 | 175 | 175 | | | Road haulage | | ✓ | 366 | 520 | 886 | 471 | 430 | 484 | 914 | 495 | | | Shipping | | ✓ | 232 | 690 | 922 | 922 | 137 | 706 | 843 | 843 | | | Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure | | | 2,362 | 6,179 | 8,541 | 4,559 | 2,487 | 5,560 | 8,047 | 4,270 | 6% | | Oil and gas (wholesale) | | ✓ | 766 | 1,670 | 2,436 | 2,015 | 889 | 1,340 | 2,229 | 1,882 | | | Others | | ✓ | 1,596 | 4,509 | 6,105 | 2,544 | 1,598 | 4,220 | 5,818 | 2,388 | | | Other financial institutions | | | 534 | 542 | 1,076 | — | 380 | 469 | 849 | — | 27% | | Real estate management and development (REITs) | | | 534 | 542 | 1,076 | — | 380 | 469 | 849 | — | | | Home Loans | | | 177,333 | 11,879 | 189,212 | 184,252 | 168,061 | 11,433 | 179,494 | 174,520 | 5% | | Residential real estate | ✓ | | 177,333 | 11,879 | 189,212 | 184,252 | 168,061 | 11,433 | 179,494 | 174,520 | | | Carbon-related assets/Elevated risk sector: Grand total | | | 220,332 | 96,110 | 316,442 | 242,891 | 208,658 | 93,436 | 302,094 | 231,866 | 5% | | Total Loans & advances & Loan commitments | | | 429,998 | 403,314 | 833,312 | 833,312 | 414,483 | 407,799 | 822,282 | 822,282 | 1% | | Carbon-related assets / Total Loans & advances and Loan commitments | | | 51 % | 24 % | 38% | 29 % | 50% | 23% | 37% | 28% | 1% | | Sub-total of sectors spanning in multiple industries | | | | | | | | | | | | | Oil and gas | | | 2,289 | 11,817 | 14,106 | 13,685 | 2,313 | 11,286 | 13,599 | 13,252 | 4% | Notes: 1 As industries decarbonise, sectors will increasingly include both carbon and non-carbon related activities e.g. Power utilities will also include, in part, their generation capacity from renewable energy sources. 2 Physical risk and transition risk indicators are added for elevated risk sectors to indicate the primary drivers of risk. See page 33 for further details. 3 Loans & advances includes debt securities at amortised cost amounting to £68,475m (2024: £68,210m) of which carbon related assets are £1,233m (2024: £1,929m). These carbon related assets comprise £414m (2024: £1,388m) in Materials and buildings, £281m (2024: £241m) in Other financial corporations, £391m (2024: £228m) in Transport and storage, £131m (2024: £63m) in Energy and water and £15m (2024: £9m) in Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure. 4 Loan commitments excludes the fair value exposures of £21,292m in 2025 (2024: £15.350m). 5 Power utilities includes exposure towards renewable energy of £4,968m (2024: £3,565m). 6 Manufacturing - others includes areas such as Medical and surgical equipment, Mining, quarrying and construction machinery, Special purpose machinery, Aerospace, Soaps and detergents, Cleaning and polishing preparations, Brushes, Stationery goods, Valves and compressors, Agricultural machinery & tractors, etc. 7 Diversified miners with minority interests in thermal coal mining are included in this category. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Climate risk (continued) ## Nature priority sectors As per TNFD's recommendation, certain industry segments ("nature priority sectors") are considered to have material nature-related dependencies and impacts. The table below shows Barclays exposure to these sectors which we have produced by mapping the industry codes provided by the TNFD to Barclays Industry classifications. The monitoring and reporting of our exposures to these priority sectors will evolve as approaches to nature-related risk management continue to develop. As a result, metrics and methodologies applied may change in future. It is also important to note that nature-related risks within a sector can vary substantially at the company or project level. Credit exposures to nature priority sectors 1,2 | | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | (£m) | | | (£m) | | | | | Loans & advances1 | Loan commitments4 | Total | Loans & advances1 | Loan commitments4 | Total % change | | Agriculture | 3,227 | 856 | 4,083 | 3,430 | 803 | 4,233 (4%) | | Food, Beverage and tobacco | 918 | 5,638 | 6,556 | 925 | 5,906 | 6,831 (4%) | | Paper and forest products | 260 | 545 | 805 | 219 | 544 | 763 6% | | Oil and gas | 2,289 | 11,817 | 14,106 | 2,313 | 11,286 | 13,599 4% | | Power utilities5 | 3,521 | 15,279 | 18,800 | 2,284 | 15,401 | 17,685 6% | | Cement | 67 | 214 | 281 | 34 | 303 | 337 (17%) | | Chemicals | 387 | 3,642 | 4,029 | 380 | 3,729 | 4,109 (2%) | | Construction and materials | 2,073 | 2,126 | 4,199 | 2,315 | 1,941 | 4,256 (1%) | | Manufacturing - personal care products | 43 | 1,253 | 1,296 | 49 | 578 | 627 107% | | Manufacturing - semiconductors and semiconductor equipments | 270 | 733 | 1,003 | 254 | 582 | 836 20% | | Manufacturing - textiles, apparel and luxury Goods | 103 | 380 | 483 | 152 | 459 | 611 (21%) | | Metals | 285 | 251 | 536 | 347 | 453 | 800 (33%) | | Mining (incl. diversified miners)6 | 129 | 1,522 | 1,651 | 263 | 1,612 | 1,875 (12%) | | Packaging manufacturers: metal, glass and plastics | 105 | 187 | 292 | 135 | 242 | 377 (23%) | | Steel | 15 | 155 | 170 | 17 | 126 | 143 19% | | Automotive | 689 | 4,213 | 4,902 | 673 | 4,460 | 5,133 (5%) | | Aviation | 365 | 2,412 | 2,777 | 232 | 2,346 | 2,578 8% | | Other transport services | 754 | 1,442 | 2,196 | 686 | 1,318 | 2,004 10% | | Ports | 101 | 25 | 126 | 87 | 88 | 175 (28%) | | Road haulage | 366 | 520 | 886 | 430 | 484 | 914 (3%) | | Shipping | 232 | 690 | 922 | 137 | 706 | 843 9% | | Pharmaceuticals | 111 | 6,260 | 6,371 | 345 | 6,491 | 6,836 (7%) | | Sewerage, waste collection, treatment and disposal | 234 | 471 | 705 | 244 | 484 | 728 (3%) | | Water utilities | 357 | 1,600 | 1,957 | 512 | 1,508 | 2,020 (3%) | | Nature priority sector assets: Grand total | 16,901 | 62,231 | 79,132 | 16,463 | 61,850 | 78,313 1% | | Total Loans and advances and Loan commitments | 429,998 | 403,314 | 833,312 | 414,483 | 407,799 | 822,282 1% | | Nature priority sectors assets / Total Loans and advances and Loan commitments | 4% | 15% | 9% | 4% | 15% | 10% (1%) | Notes: 1. The scope of nature priority sector mapping is based on our periodic assessment of version 1 of the TNFD published in September 2023. 2. The TNFD highlights real estate development as a priority sector for nature. Barclays has £34,825m (2024: £32,949m) of Loans and advances and Loan commitments to Real estate management and development related to nature priority sectors, of which the majority is from real estate investment activity. As a result, this has been excluded from the priority sector assets for Nature. 3. Loans and advances includes debt securities at amortised cost amounting to £68,475m (2024: £68,210m) of which nature related assets are £522m (2024: £291m). These nature related assets comprise £391m (2024: £228m) in Transport and storage and £131m (2024: £63m) in Energy and water. 4. Loan commitments excludes the fair value exposures of £21,292m in 2025 (2024: £15.350m). 5. Power utilities includes exposure towards renewable energy of £4,968m (2024: £3,565m). 6. Diversified miners with minority interests in thermal coal mining are included in this category --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Climate risk (continued) ## Financing To facilitate greater understanding and transparency of our capital markets financing, we disclose the total capital raised for clients across all sectors using data sourced from Dealogic. We have provided the breakdown of our 2024 and 2025 financing below. We have constructed this table based on the mapping of issuers' industry assignment in Dealogic data and Barclays' internal industry taxonomy called Barclays Industry Classification (BIC). Financing volumes are reported on a manager-proceeds basis including bonds, equities, loans and securitised bonds and no modifications have been made by Barclays. This data represents a third party view of our financing and is subject to Dealogic's league table methodology, which pro-rates volume across lead-managers. We are presenting the data in this format to support transparency and comparability but it should be noted that this data is subject to further analysis and methodological enhancements, before it is included in BlueTrack™. | Carbon-related sectors in wholesale credit (Dealogic Industry Classification)1 | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 31.12.2025 (£m) | Of which: Elevated | 31.12.2024 (£m) | Of which: Elevated | % Change | | Agriculture, food and forest products | 44 | 44 | 95 | 95 | (54)% | | Agriculture | 44 | 44 | 95 | 95 | | | Energy and water | 24,702 | 24,702 | 28,979 | 28,979 | (15%) | | Power utilities2 | 22,569 | 22,569 | 27,868 | 27,868 | | | Water utilities | 2,133 | 2,133 | 1,111 | 1,111 | | | Manufacturing | 38,765 | 11,755 | 31,901 | 10,973 | 22% | | Automotive | 5,888 | 5,888 | 5,347 | 5,347 | | | Cements | 140 | 140 | 344 | 344 | | | Chemicals | 2,674 | 2,674 | 4,146 | 3,894 | | | Food, beverage and tobacco | 7,133 | 347 | 7,591 | 115 | | | Manufacturing - others | 19,950 | 988 | 10,618 | 49 | | | Metals | 554 | 499 | 1,280 | 623 | | | Oil and gas (refining) | 614 | 614 | 601 | 601 | | | Packaging manufacturers: metal, glass and plastics | 502 | — | 1,056 | — | | | Paper and forest products | 705 | — | 918 | — | | | Steel | 605 | 605 | — | — | | | Materials and building | 7,218 | 900 | 6,190 | 731 | 17% | | Construction and materials | 1,133 | 900 | 810 | 731 | | | Real estate management and development | 6,085 | — | 5,380 | — | | | Mining and quarrying | 7,683 | 7,683 | 6,290 | 6,244 | 22% | | Mining (Incl. diversified miners)3 | 843 | 843 | 585 | 539 | | | Oil and gas (extraction) | 6,840 | 6,840 | 5,705 | 5,705 | | | Transport & storage | 16,156 | 13,447 | 17,190 | 15,182 | (6%) | | Aviation | 3,822 | 3,822 | 4,292 | 4,292 | | | Oil and gas (midstream) | 7,979 | 7,979 | 10,076 | 10,076 | | | Other transport services | 1,763 | — | 1,620 | — | | | Ports | — | — | 64 | 64 | | | Road haulage | 954 | 8 | 633 | 245 | | | Shipping | 1,638 | 1,638 | 505 | 505 | | | Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure | 4,722 | 2,508 | 4,160 | 1,066 | 14% | | Oil and gas (wholesale) | 776 | 484 | 235 | 100 | | | Others | 3,946 | 2,024 | 3,925 | 966 | | | Other financial institutions | 1,919 | — | 1,774 | — | 8% | | Real estate management and development (REITs) | 1,919 | — | 1,774 | — | | | Carbon-related assets/ Elevated risk sector: Grand total | 101,209 | 61,039 | 96,579 | 63,270 | 5% | | Capital market financing total | 425,697 | | 415,433 | | 2% | | Financing to carbon-related sector / Total capital market financing % | 24% | | 23% | | 1% | | Sub-total of sectors spanning in multiple industries | | | | | | | Oil and gas | 16,209 | 15,917 | 16,617 | 16,482 | (2)% | Notes: 1. As industries decarbonise, sectors will increasingly include both carbon and non-carbon related activities e.g. Power utilities will also include, in part, their generation capacity from renewable energy sources. 2. Power utilities includes exposures towards renewable energy of £3,024m (2024: £2,428m). 3. Diversified miners with minority interests in thermal coal mining are included in this category. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Climate risk (continued) ## Subsidence: Total Volume of stock (as % of total UK Mortgages portfolio) per risk band Subsidence is driven by the interplay of precipitation, temperature and soil type factors, which result in volumetric changes to the soil. Increased volatility in weather conditions, as a result of climate change, contributes to the acceleration of subsidence impacts. Some areas, particularly those with high concentrations of clay soil, for example London, are more susceptible to subsidence. This shrink-swell impact can cause localised property level impacts, resulting in impacts to the valuation of a property, or impacts to affordability through remediation costs and high insurance premiums. Barclays works with a third-party climate data provider to support climate risk data enhancements within the UK Mortgages portfolio. This includes the ability to map subsidence risk at a property level granularity. The subsidence risk scoring is based on soil properties, in particular the extent to which the soil will shrink under hot and dry weather conditions, as well as the predicted temperature and probability of extreme rainfall. These variables are combined with subsidence claims per postcode to generate a pseudo-quantitative score, where a property in class 9 is around nine times as likely as a property in class 1 to make a subsidence claim. A small proportion of the UK Mortgage portfolio is not mapped to a subsidence risk score (c.6.3%). This is due either to a lack of data coverage (i.e. the property is not covered by underlying maps), or a lack of certainty in address matching. | | | As at 30 September 2025 | As at 30 September 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Risk Band | Qualitative Risk Score | Volume % | Volume % | | 0 | No Subsidence Risk | - | - | | 1 | Low | 9.6 | 9.6 | | 2 | | 36.2 | 36.1 | | 3 | | 23.2 | 23.4 | | 4 | Moderate | 4.7 | 4.7 | | 5 | | 4.4 | 4.6 | | 6 | | 3.3 | 3.3 | | 7 | High | 2.3 | 2.4 | | 8 | | 0 | 0 | | 9 | | 0.2 | 0.2 | | 10 | Very High | 5.1 | 5.3 | | 11 | | 0 | 0 | | 12 | | 2.5 | 2.6 | | 13 | | 0 | 0 | | 14 | | 0 | 0 | | 15 | | 2.1 | 2.2 | | Missing | | 6.3 | 5.6 | Note: Data collected from 3rd party source based on one quarter lag. 30 September 2025 closest available dataset. ## Flood: Total Volume of stock (as % of total UK Mortgages portfolio) per risk band Flooding in the UK is forecast to increase over time, with the potential for this increase to accelerate if greenhouse gas emissions are not reduced. The increased risk of flooding has the potential to impact the valuation of properties directly, as well as indirectly where areas may become high risk and property demand falls. Remediation costs, high insurance premiums or potential lack of insurance coverage have the potential to impact affordability. Barclays works with a third-party climate data provider to support climate risk data enhancements within the UK Mortgages portfolio. This has enabled Barclays to move from postcode level to property level flood data granularity. Flood Risk bands are based on average annual loss, generated using flood hazard frequency and flood depth from tidal, surface, pluvial and fluvial flooding and accounting for the mitigating impact of flood defences where these are present. Properties in the Moderate and High Risk bands are expected to face above average insurance costs given their elevated exposure to flood risk. Those within the Very High band and which meet certain requirements (e.g. owner-occupied, built before-2009, are a single residential unit or a building comprising of two or three residential units) are considered likely to be eligible for Flood Re (a government subsidised flood insurance scheme) until the scheme's expected expiry in 2039. | | As at 30 September 2025 | As at 30 September 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | Risk Band | Volume % | Volume % | | Negligible | 80.2 | 80.9 | | Very Low | 7.4 | 7.6 | | Low | 1.8 | 1.8 | | Moderate | 1.6 | 1.6 | | High | 2.6 | 2.6 | | Very High | 1.2 | 1.2 | | Missing | 5.3 | 4.3 | Note: Data collected from 3rd party source based on one quarter lag. 30 September 2025 closest available dataset. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 219 # Risk performance - Climate risk (continued) ## Flood: Very High & High Flood Risk Exposure per region (as % of Total Regional Exposure) The map below represents the proportion of properties within the UK Mortgages portfolio at High and Very High risk of flood per region as a percentage of the total regional exposure (excluding Kensington Mortgage Company originated properties). The flood metrics are presented on current risk levels and are based on average annual loss, generated using flood hazard frequency and flood depth from tidal, surface, pluvial and fluvial flooding and accounting for the mitigating impact of flood defences where these are present. The mapping covers c.95% of the UK Mortgages portfolio on a total exposure basis - the remaining c.5% of properties are not currently mapped to flood risk ratings on a property level basis as a result of a lack of data coverage (i.e. the property is not covered by underlying maps), or a lack of certainty in address matching. ## % of Total Lending (as % of total UK Mortgages balances) High: 2.5% Very High: 1.0% ## Scotland % of Total Lending: 3.9% of which: High: 1.8% Very High: 0.9% ## North West % of Total Lending: 6.3% of which: High: 2.8% Very High: 1.8% ## Northern Ireland % of Total Lending: 0.9% of which: High: 1.1% Very High: 0.5% ## West Midlands % of Total Lending: 5.4% of which: High: 1.6% Very High: 0.5% ## Wales % of Total Lending: 2.3% of which: High: 2.3% Very High: 0.6% ## South West % of Total Lending: 6.5% of which: High: 2.4% Very High: 0.9% North East % of Total Lending: 2.0% of which: High: 1.2% Very High: 0.7% Yorks & the Humber % of Total Lending: 4.3% of which: High: 2.3% Very High: 1.3% East Midlands % of Total Lending: 4.8% of which: High: 2.6% Very High: 2.9% East of England % of Total Lending: 12.2% of which: High: 2.4% Very High: 1.0% London % of Total Lending: 31.0% of which: High: 2.6% Very High: 0.6% South East % of Total Lending: 20.4% of which: High: 3.1% Very High: 1.0% Darker shades indicate higher proportion of high or very high flood risk exposure High and Very High Flood Risk are shown as % of regional exposure Note: Data collected from third party source based on one quarter lag. 30 September 2025 closest available dataset. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 220 # Risk performance - Climate risk (continued) ## Coastal Erosion: Total Volume of stock (as % of total UK Mortgages portfolio) per risk band Coastal Erosion is defined as the loss or displacement of land, or the long-term removal of sediment and rocks along the coastline due to the action of waves, currents, tides, wind-driven water, waterborne ice, or other impacts of storms. The increased volatility of weather conditions, as a result of climate change contribute to the acceleration of coastal erosion impacts. Coastal erosion risk is calculated using the modelled hazard level and the likelihood of that particular hazard impacting the value of the property. For example, a score of 100 (Very High Risk) might be assigned to a property within an area of predicted coastline retreat. In this situation, the likelihood of the ground collapsing is high (the coastal erosion data has determined that the current surface will no longer exist in a defined number of years) and the potential severity of damage to the property is also high (the building itself could partially or completely collapse into the sea). | | As at 30 September 2025 | As at 30 September 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | Risk Band | Volume % | Volume % | | Negligible | 93.7 | 94.4 | | Low | - | - | | Moderate | - | - | | Very High | - | - | | Missing | 6.3 | 5.6 | **Note** Data collected from 3rd party source based on one quarter lag, 30 September 2025 closest available dataset. ## Current and Potential Energy Performance Certificate (EPC): Total Volume of stock (as % of total UK Mortgages portfolio) per EPC rating The transition risk in the UK Mortgages portfolio is assessed via the distribution of Current & Potential EPC ratings across the portfolio. One of the levers to decarbonise the UK housing stock for the UK Government is to tighten energy efficiency requirements. In 2024, the UK Government announced that the minimum EPC rating of rental properties will be raised to EPC C (from EPC E) by 2030. It is anticipated that any tightening of Minimum Energy Efficiency Standards (MEES) will focus initially on buy-to-let properties. Buy-to-Let properties which are privately rented are currently required to have a minimum EPC rating of E. The transition risk identified has the potential to impact the valuation of properties directly, alongside impacting affordability as properties which fall under MEES may no longer be able to be rented out or the landlord may need to pay for retrofitting to be brought up to standard. EPC ratings range from A (most efficient) to G (least efficient). Current & Potential EPC ratings are used as the basis for assessing expected energy costs but do not give a precise picture of emission intensity. The UK Mortgages portfolio is mapped to the Government EPC Register. Properties may not feature on the Government EPC Register as some properties may have never been required to have an EPC rating (not been sold or rented out since 2007), their EPC rating may have expired (EPC ratings are valid for 10 years) or the property may be in Scotland or Northern Ireland (which use separate databases). Whilst Barclays' proportion of 'missing EPC ratings' has declined year on year, the issue of missing EPC ratings is prevalent across the industry. Current EPC: Residential and Buy-to-let balances and volume of stock per EPC rating as at September 2025¹ | Current EPC Rating | Residential Mortgage Balances | Balance as % of Residential Mortgages portfolio | Volume as % of Residential Mortgages portfolio | Buy-to-Let Mortgage Balances | Balance as % of Buy-to-Let Mortgages portfolio | Volume as % of Buy-to-Let Mortgages portfolio | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | % | % | £m | % | % | | A | 1,011 | 0.7 | 0.5 | 17 | 0.1 | 0.1 | | B | 24,534 | 16.5 | 15.3 | 1,724 | 11 | 9.2 | | C | 31,462 | 21.1 | 20.3 | 5,176 | 32.9 | 33.9 | | D | 45,311 | 30.4 | 28.2 | 5,285 | 33.6 | 34.1 | | E | 16,364 | 11 | 9.4 | 1,308 | 8.3 | 8.4 | | F | 3,632 | 2.4 | 2 | 80 | 0.5 | 0.5 | | G | 685 | 0.5 | 0.4 | 23 | 0.1 | 0.1 | | Missing | 25,988 | 17.4 | 23.9 | 2,105 | 13.5 | 13.7 | | Total | 148,987 | 100 | 100 | 15,718 | 100 | 100 | **Note:** 1 Data matching provided by 3rd party source based on one quarter lag, 30 September 2025 closest available dataset - EPC monitoring based on 30 September 2025 portfolio and 30 September 2025 Government EPC Register. If no valid EPC is mapped, the expired EPC (where available) is included as a proxy. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 221 # Risk performance - Climate risk (continued) EPC: Residential and Buy-to-let balances and volume of stock per EPC rating as at September 2024¹ | Current EPC Rating | Residential Mortgage Balances | Balance as % of Residential Mortgages portfolio | Volume as % of Residential Mortgages portfolio | Buy-to-Let Mortgage Balances | Balance as % of Buy-to-Let Mortgages portfolio | Volume as % of Buy-to-Let Mortgages portfolio | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | % | % | £m | % | % | | A | 601 | 0.4 | 0.3 | 19 | 0.1 | 0.1 | | B | 23,205 | 16.5 | 15.2 | 1,940 | 11 | 9.1 | | C | 26,952 | 19.1 | 18.4 | 5,456 | 30.9 | 31.8 | | D | 42,000 | 29.8 | 27.4 | 5,986 | 33.9 | 34.2 | | E | 16,695 | 11.9 | 9.9 | 1,587 | 9 | 9.2 | | F | 3,817 | 2.7 | 2.1 | 98 | 0.6 | 0.6 | | G | 723 | 0.5 | 0.4 | 25 | 0.1 | 0.1 | | Missing | 26,769 | 19.1 | 26.3 | 2,529 | 14.4 | 14.9 | | Total | 140,762 | 100 | 100 | 17,640 | 100 | 100 | Note: 1 Data matching provided by 3rd party source based on one quarter lag, 30 September 2024 closest available dataset - EPC monitoring based on Sept-24 portfolio and Sept-24 Government EPC Register. If no valid EPC is mapped, the expired EPC (where available) is included as a proxy. Potential EPC¹: Residential and Buy-to-let balances and volume of stock per EPC rating as at September 2025² | Potential EPC Rating | Residential Mortgage Balances | Balance as % of Residential Mortgages portfolio | Volume as % of Residential Mortgages portfolio | Buy-to-Let Mortgage Balances | Balance as % of Buy-to-Let Mortgages portfolio | Volume as % of Buy-to-Let Mortgages portfolio | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | % | % | £m | % | % | | A | 15,459 | 10.4 | 9.8 | 412 | 2.6 | 2.9 | | B | 59,211 | 39.7 | 38.3 | 7,253 | 46.1 | 46.6 | | C | 39,260 | 26.4 | 22.7 | 5,268 | 33.5 | 32.7 | | D | 6,874 | 4.6 | 4.2 | 596 | 3.8 | 3.7 | | E | 1,769 | 1.2 | 1 | 69 | 0.4 | 0.4 | | F | 349 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 11 | 0.1 | 0.1 | | G | 76 | 0.1 | 0 | 3 | 0 | 0 | | Missing | 25,989 | 17.4 | 23.8 | 2,106 | 13.5 | 13.6 | | Total | 148,987 | 100 | 100 | 15,718 | 100 | 100 | Note: 1 The potential EPC is the EPC rating that a property can reasonably be expected to achieve if the recommended energy efficiency upgrades are undertaken. 2 Data matching provided by 3rd party source based on one quarter lag, 30 September 2025 closest available dataset - EPC monitoring based on Sept-25 portfolio and Sept-25 Government EPC Register. If no valid EPC is mapped, the expired EPC (where available) is included as a proxy. Potential EPC: Residential and Buy-to-let balances and volume of stock per EPC rating as at September 2024¹ | Potential EPC Rating | Residential Mortgage Balances | Balance as % of Residential Mortgages portfolio | Volume as % of Residential Mortgages portfolio | Buy-to-Let Mortgage Balances | Balance as % of Buy-to-Let Mortgages portfolio | Volume as % of Buy-to-Let Mortgages portfolio | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | % | % | £m | % | % | | A | 13,892 | 9.9 | 9.3 | 474 | 2.7 | 2.9 | | B | 52,672 | 37.4 | 36 | 8,017 | 45.4 | 45.8 | | C | 37,461 | 26.6 | 22.4 | 5,802 | 32.9 | 31.8 | | D | 7,471 | 5.3 | 4.6 | 716 | 4.1 | 4 | | E | 2,012 | 1.4 | 1.1 | 87 | 0.5 | 0.5 | | F | 398 | 0.3 | 0.2 | 13 | 0.1 | 0.1 | | G | 87 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 3 | 0 | 0 | | Missing | 26,769 | 19 | 26.3 | 2,528 | 14.3 | 14.9 | | Total | 140,762 | 100 | 100 | 17,640 | 100 | 100 | Note: 1 Data matching provided by 3rd party source based on one quarter lag, 30 September 2024 closest available dataset - EPC monitoring based on Sept-24 portfolio and Sept-24 Government EPC Register. If no valid EPC is mapped, the expired EPC (where available) is included as a proxy. # Business Banking - Livestock & Dairy Exposure Given methane's global warming potential the Livestock & Dairy sector is a significant contributor to the UK's emissions footprint and is therefore susceptible to the transition risks of climate change, namely changes in Consumer sentiment, or policy, via introduction of potential emissions taxation. The Client Transition Tool is completed for Barclays Bank UK Business Banking clients in Livestock & Dairy sectors for all new or refinanced lending to assess transition trajectories against Barclays' targets and benchmarks. This tool provides further granularity on clients' transition plans and progress. The Client Transition Tool has been enhanced in 2025 to make it easier for Relationship Manager's to complete on behalf of clients and increase the consistency in scoring Alongside this, Barclays Bank UK have also implemented an improved Climate and Environment Lens questionnaire for clients in elevated climate risk sectors to provide enhanced insight into the climate risk of Barclays Bank UK clients. The Barclays Bank UK Group utilises exposure data to identify what proportion of the Business Banking Agriculture portfolio consists of lending to Dairy & Livestock clients. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk # Credit risk Credit risk: summary of contents | | | Page | | --- | --- | --- | | Credit risk represents a significant risk and mainly arises from exposure to loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts entered into with clients. | Credit risk overview and summary of performance | 223 | | | Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and risk transfer | 224 | | This section outlines the expected credit loss allowances, the movements in allowances during the period, material management adjustments to model output and measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis. | Expected Credit Losses | 226 | | | • Loans and advances at amortised cost by geography | 226 | | | • Loans and advances at amortised cost by product | 230 | | | • Movement in gross exposure and impairment allowance including provisions for loan commitments and financial guarantees | 231 | | | • Stage 2 decomposition | 238 | | | Management adjustments to models for impairment | 239 | | | Measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis | 243 | | The Group reviews and monitors risk concentrations in a variety of ways. This section outlines performance against key concentration risks. | Analysis of the concentration of credit risk | 252 | | | • Credit risk concentration by Industry for contractual maturity, staging and geography | 252 | | | Approach to management and representation of credit quality | 254 | | | • Asset credit quality | 254 | | | • Debt securities | 254 | | | • Balance sheet credit quality | 255 | | | • Credit exposures by internal PD grade | 257 | | Credit risk monitors exposure performance across a range of significant portfolios. | Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types | 262 | | | • Secured home loans | 262 | | | • Retail Credit cards and Retail Other | 264 | | The Group monitors exposures to assets where there is a heightened likelihood of default and assets where an actual default has occurred. From time to time, suspension of certain aspects of client credit agreements are agreed, generally during temporary periods of financial difficulties where the Group is confident that the client will be able to remedy the suspension. This section outlines the current exposure to assets with this treatment. | Forbearance | 265 | | | • Retail forbearance programmes | 266 | | | • Wholesale forbearance programmes | 267 | | This section provides an analysis of credit risk on debt securities and derivatives. | Analysis of debt securities | 267 | | | Analysis of derivatives | 268 | | This section provides an analysis of credit risk on assets held for sale | Assets held for sale | 268 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 223 # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Credit Risk All disclosures in this section, pages 223 to 272 are unaudited unless otherwise stated. ## Overview Credit risk represents a significant risk to the Group, arising primarily from loans and advances and counterparty credit risk from derivative contracts with clients. The credit risk disclosures exclude financial assets not subject to credit risk, such as equity securities, and certain contingent liabilities including performance guarantees. These disclosures are materially aligned with the recommendations of the Taskforce on Disclosures about Expected Credit Losses (DECL). ## Summary of performance in the year ### Gross exposure Gross loans and advances, including debt securities at amortised cost, increased by £15.7bn to £435.3bn (2024: £419.6bn) principally driven by growth in UK Mortgages (£9.2bn), UK Corporate Banking (£4.4bn), UK Cards (£1.4bn), IB (£1.1bn), and a £0.9bn increase in USCB from the partnership with GM. Offsets included £(1.0)bn ESHLA repayments, £(0.8)bn government scheme lending repayments in Business Banking, and the impact of a stronger sterling against the US dollar (c.7%). ### Partnership with General Motors (GM) Barclays USCB entered into an exclusive co-branded credit card partnership with GM on August 22, 2025. As at December 31, 2025, gross loans and advances at amortised cost include £1.3bn of balances arising from this arrangement, comprising £1.2bn of consumer and £0.1bn of the business card receivables, together with an associated impairment allowance of £0.1bn. ### Exposure net of risk mitigation The Group's net exposure to credit risk increased by 3% to £1,108bn (2024: £1,074bn), primarily reflecting higher cash and balances at central banks (£19.6bn), cash collateral and settlement balances (£11bn) and increased holding of trading portfolio assets (£11.1bn). This was partially offset by a decrease in assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (£4.8bn) and a decrease in assets held for sale driven by the disposal of the German consumer finance business (£3.7bn). Overall, the credit risk mitigation held against total exposure remained broadly stable at 41% (2024: 42%). ## Credit quality Delinquencies remained broadly stable across the Group, supported by a range of ongoing risk management actions designed to maintain the Group's defensive position amid macroeconomic headwinds. The Corporate loan portfolio continued to benefit from high-quality exposures and credit protection, and single name charges remained idiosyncratic in nature. Further analysis of the credit quality of assets is presented in the approach to management and representation of credit quality section. ## Stage movements Stage 2 gross exposures decreased by £(6.5)bn, primarily reflecting transfers to Stage 1 following the rebuild of UK Mortgages impairment models, which now better capture consumer behaviour, and the impact of a stronger sterling against the US dollar. Stage 3 balances increased to £7.5bn (2024: £7.4bn) due to single name charges in IB, partially offset by repayments in Business Banking. Refer to page 226 for further details. ## Scenario Global growth slows modestly as rising US tariffs and retaliatory measures disrupt trade flows, though domestic demand in advanced economies remains resilient. For Q425, macroeconomic scenarios have been refreshed and are designed around a wide range of economic outcomes, with the Downside 2 (DS2) scenario broadly aligned to Barclays' 2025 Internal Stress Test (IST25), incorporating climate-related drivers. Refer to the Barclays' resilience to climate scenarios on page 64 for further details. ## ECL Impairment allowances on loans and advances at amortised cost including off-balance sheet exposures, increased to £5.7bn (2024: £5.5bn) largely attributable to a single name charge in IB, elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty, GM portfolio acquisition and Tesco stage migration. This was partially offset by UK Cards model remediation and a stronger sterling against the US dollar. On-balance sheet coverage remained strong and stable at 1.2% (2024: 1.2%). ## Credit impairment charges/(releases) Credit impairment charges increased to £2,279m (2024: £1,982m) reflecting acquisition of the GM portfolio, a single name charge in IB and elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty. ## Management adjustments Economic uncertainty adjustments increased to £115m (2024: £78m), reflecting an additional provision for elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty following tariff developments. This was partially offset by the retirement of adjustments following the rebuild of UK Mortgages impairment models, which now better capture consumer responses to the macroeconomic outlook. Refer to the Management adjustment to models for impairment section on page 239 for further details. ## Climate Barclays assesses climate-related physical and transition risks through scenario analysis and targeted reviews of climate-sensitive portfolios. The DS2 scenario is broadly aligned with the climate-aware IST25, and selected portfolios incorporate enhanced customer-level climate-risk modelling. ## Assets Held for Sale The sale of the German consumer finance business, previously classified as held for sale, has been completed. The 'Held for Sale' section continues to include credit risk disclosures for a co-branded card portfolio in the USCB. Further detail can be found in the Financial statements section in Note 8 Credit impairment charges/(releases). Description of terminology can be found in the glossary, available at home.barclays/annualreport. Refer to the credit risk management section for the details of governance, policies and procedures. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 224 # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and risk transfer The following tables present a reconciliation between the Group's maximum exposure and its net exposure to credit risk, reflecting the financial effects of risk mitigation reducing the Group's exposure. The Group mitigates the credit risk to which it is exposed through netting and set-off, collateral and risk transfer. Further detail on the Group's policies to each of these forms of credit enhancement is presented on pages 131 to 132 of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). ## Collateral obtained Where collateral has been obtained in the event of default, the Group does not, ordinarily, use such assets for its own operations and they are usually sold on a timely basis. The carrying value of assets held by the Group as at 31 December 2025, as a result of the enforcement of collateral, was £47m (2024: £12m). Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and risk transfer (audited) | | Maximum exposure | Netting and set-off | Cash collateral | Non-cash collateral | Risk transfer | Exposure net of risk mitigation | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | On-balance sheet: | | | | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | 229,752 | — | — | — | — | 229,752 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 130,532 | — | — | — | — | 130,532 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost: | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 177,333 | — | (11) | (177,294) | (6) | 22 | | Retail credit cards | 36,952 | — | — | — | — | 36,952 | | Retail other | 13,914 | — | (1,064) | (2,657) | (43) | 10,150 | | Corporate loans | 133,324 | (2,977) | (1,429) | (76,288) | (9,683) | 42,947 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 361,523 | (2,977) | (2,504) | (256,239) | (9,732) | 90,071 | | Of which credit-impaired (Stage 3): | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 1,883 | — | — | (1,883) | — | — | | Retail credit cards - excluding POCI | 486 | — | — | — | — | 486 | | Retail credit cards - POCI | 24 | — | — | — | — | 24 | | Retail other - excluding POCI | 116 | — | — | (90) | — | 26 | | Retail other - POCI | 15 | — | — | — | — | 15 | | Corporate loans | 2,355 | — | (22) | (1,410) | (426) | 497 | | Total credit-impaired loans and advances at amortised cost | 4,879 | — | (22) | (3,383) | (426) | 1,048 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 68,475 | — | — | (136) | — | 68,339 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 17,622 | — | — | (17,622) | — | — | | Trading portfolio assets: | | | | | | | | Debt securities | 94,359 | — | — | (639) | — | 93,720 | | Traded loans | 12,249 | — | — | (4,907) | — | 7,342 | | Total trading portfolio assets | 106,608 | — | — | (5,546) | — | 101,062 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement: | | | | | | | | Loans and advances | 47,672 | — | (17) | (43,588) | — | 4,067 | | Debt securities | 3,214 | — | — | (359) | — | 2,855 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | 132,488 | — | (1,396) | (130,734) | — | 358 | | Other financial assets | 83 | — | — | — | — | 83 | | Total financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 183,457 | — | (1,413) | (174,681) | — | 7,363 | | Derivative financial instruments | 252,459 | (194,743) | (30,758) | (12,646) | (4,121) | 10,191 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 74,390 | — | — | (2,390) | (134) | 71,866 | | Other assets | 847 | — | (1) | — | — | 846 | | Assets held for sale | 5,801 | — | — | — | — | 5,801 | | Total on-balance sheet | 1,431,466 | (197,720) | (34,676) | (469,260) | (13,987) | 715,823 | | Off-balance sheet: | | | | | | | | Contingent liabilities | 25,374 | — | (1,768) | (768) | (194) | 22,644 | | Loan commitments | 424,606 | — | (492) | (52,384) | (2,437) | 369,293 | | Total off-balance sheet | 449,980 | — | (2,260) | (53,152) | (2,631) | 391,937 | | Total | 1,881,446 | (197,720) | (36,936) | (522,412) | (16,618) | 1,107,760 | The above table excludes any credit risk mitigation that does not impact the expected credit loss for financial assets measured at amortised cost. Off-balance sheet exposures are shown gross of provisions of £416m (2024: £439m), see Note 24 for further details. In addition to the above, the Group holds forward starting reverse repos with notional contract amounts of £81.5bn (2024: £108.6bn) which are fully collateralised. Corporate loans at amortised cost include £1.8bn (2024: £3.3bn) of BBLS, CBILS and CLBILS supported by UK government guarantees of £1.8bn (2024: £3.2bn), which are included within the Risk transfer column in the table. Reported off-balance sheet loan commitments also include exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and risk transfer (audited) | | Maximum exposure | Netting and set-off | Cash collateral | Non-cash collateral | Risk transfer | Exposure net of risk mitigation | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | On-balance sheet: | | | | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | 210,184 | — | — | — | — | 210,184 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 119,843 | — | — | — | — | 119,843 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost: | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 168,061 | — | (22) | (168,026) | — | 13 | | Retail credit cards | 34,779 | — | — | — | — | 34,779 | | Retail other | 13,808 | — | (1,106) | (2,502) | (36) | 10,164 | | Corporate loans | 129,625 | (3,006) | (1,107) | (67,909) | (11,548) | 46,055 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 346,273 | (3,006) | (2,235) | (238,437) | (11,584) | 91,011 | | Of which credit-impaired (Stage 3): | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 1,875 | — | — | (1,874) | — | 1 | | Retail credit cards - excluding POCI | 396 | — | — | — | — | 396 | | Retail credit cards - POCI | 40 | — | — | — | — | 40 | | Retail other - excluding POCI | 217 | — | (21) | (175) | — | 21 | | Retail other - POCI | 17 | — | — | — | — | 17 | | Corporate loans | 2,490 | — | (32) | (1,108) | (415) | 935 | | Total credit-impaired loans and advances at amortised cost | 5,035 | — | (53) | (3,157) | (415) | 1,410 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 68,210 | — | — | (583) | (90) | 67,537 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 4,734 | — | — | (4,734) | — | — | | Trading portfolio assets: | | | | | | | | Debt securities | 78,014 | — | — | (657) | — | 77,357 | | Traded loans | 13,470 | — | — | (878) | — | 12,592 | | Total trading portfolio assets | 91,484 | — | — | (1,535) | — | 89,949 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement: | | | | | | | | Loans and advances | 45,068 | — | (17) | (41,766) | — | 3,285 | | Debt securities | 2,965 | — | — | (182) | — | 2,783 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | 141,773 | — | (2,429) | (138,905) | — | 439 | | Other financial assets | 110 | — | — | — | — | 110 | | Total financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 189,916 | — | (2,446) | (180,853) | — | 6,617 | | Derivative financial instruments | 293,530 | (230,434) | (30,637) | (12,633) | (5,284) | 14,542 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 78,055 | — | — | (1,104) | (246) | 76,705 | | Other assets | 891 | — | (1) | — | — | 890 | | Assets held for sale | 9,544 | — | — | — | — | 9,544 | | Total on-balance sheet | 1,412,664 | (233,440) | (35,319) | (439,879) | (17,204) | 686,822 | | Off-balance sheet: | | | | | | | | Contingent liabilities | 25,346 | — | (2,664) | (441) | (248) | 21,993 | | Loan commitments | 423,149 | — | (550) | (55,327) | (1,899) | 365,373 | | Total off-balance sheet | 448,495 | — | (3,214) | (55,768) | (2,147) | 387,366 | | Total | 1,861,159 | (233,440) | (38,533) | (495,647) | (19,351) | 1,074,188 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 226 # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Expected Credit Losses Loans and advances at amortised cost by geography Total loans and advances at amortised cost in the credit risk performance section includes loans and advances at amortised cost to banks and loans and advances at amortised cost to customers. The table below presents a product and geographical breakdown of loans and advances at amortised cost and the impairment allowance by stage; and includes purchased or originated credit-impaired (POCI) balances. POCI balances represent a fixed pool of assets purchased at a deep discount to face value reflecting credit losses incurred from the point of origination to date of acquisition. The table also presents stage allocation of debt securities and off-balance sheet loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. Impairment allowance under IFRS 9 considers both the drawn and the undrawn counterparty exposure. For retail portfolios, the total impairment allowance is allocated to gross loans and advances to the extent allowance does not exceed the drawn exposure and any excess is reported on the liabilities side of the balance sheet as a provision. For wholesale portfolios, impairment allowance on undrawn exposure is reported on the liability side of the balance sheet as a provision. Loans and advances at amortised cost by geography (audited) | As at 31 December 2025 | Gross exposure | | | | | Impairment allowance | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | Retail mortgages | 159,825 | 13,757 | 1,836 | — | 175,418 | 15 | 16 | 60 | — | 91 | | Retail credit cards | 14,922 | 1,943 | 279 | 24 | 17,168 | 171 | 398 | 174 | — | 743 | | Retail other | 9,867 | 1,512 | 286 | 15 | 11,680 | 98 | 178 | 214 | — | 490 | | Corporate loans¹ | 54,182 | 6,936 | 1,392 | — | 62,510 | 125 | 180 | 422 | — | 727 | | Total UK | 238,796 | 24,148 | 3,793 | 39 | 266,776 | 409 | 772 | 870 | — | 2,051 | | Retail mortgages | 1,829 | 72 | 131 | — | 2,032 | 2 | — | 24 | — | 26 | | Retail credit cards | 18,801 | 2,536 | 1,776 | — | 23,113 | 395 | 796 | 1,395 | — | 2,586 | | Retail other | 2,482 | 206 | 63 | — | 2,751 | 3 | 5 | 19 | — | 27 | | Corporate loans | 66,671 | 3,702 | 1,767 | — | 72,140 | 82 | 135 | 382 | — | 599 | | Total Rest of the World | 89,783 | 6,516 | 3,737 | — | 100,036 | 482 | 936 | 1,820 | — | 3,238 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 328,579 | 30,664 | 7,530 | 39 | 366,812 | 891 | 1,708 | 2,690 | — | 5,289 | | Debt Securities at amortised cost | 68,126 | 371 | — | — | 68,497 | 13 | 9 | — | — | 22 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost including Debt Securities | 396,705 | 31,035 | 7,530 | 39 | 435,309 | 904 | 1,717 | 2,690 | — | 5,311 | | Off-balance sheet loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts² | 410,493 | 16,473 | 812 | 5 | 427,783 | 144 | 240 | 32 | — | 416 | | Total²,⁴ | 807,198 | 47,508 | 8,342 | 44 | 863,092 | 1,048 | 1,957 | 2,722 | — | 5,727 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) | As at 31 December 2025 | Net Exposure | | | | | Coverage ratio | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 % | Stage 2 % | Stage 3 excluding POCI % | Stage 3 POCI % | Total % | | Retail mortgages | 159,810 | 13,741 | 1,776 | — | 175,327 | — | 0.1 | 3.3 | — | 0.1 | | Retail credit cards | 14,751 | 1,545 | 105 | 24 | 16,425 | 1.1 | 20.5 | 62.4 | — | 4.3 | | Retail other | 9,769 | 1,334 | 72 | 15 | 11,190 | 1.0 | 11.8 | 74.8 | — | 4.2 | | Corporate loans1 | 54,057 | 6,756 | 970 | — | 61,783 | 0.2 | 2.6 | 30.3 | — | 1.2 | | Total UK | 238,387 | 23,376 | 2,923 | 39 | 264,725 | 0.2 | 3.2 | 22.9 | — | 0.8 | | Retail mortgages | 1,827 | 72 | 107 | — | 2,006 | 0.1 | — | 18.3 | — | 1.3 | | Retail credit cards | 18,406 | 1,740 | 381 | — | 20,527 | 2.1 | 31.4 | 78.5 | — | 11.2 | | Retail other | 2,479 | 201 | 44 | — | 2,724 | 0.1 | 2.4 | 30.2 | — | 1.0 | | Corporate loans | 66,589 | 3,567 | 1,385 | — | 71,541 | 0.1 | 3.6 | 21.6 | — | 0.8 | | Total Rest of the world | 89,301 | 5,580 | 1,917 | — | 96,798 | 0.5 | 14.4 | 48.7 | — | 3.2 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 327,688 | 28,956 | 4,840 | 39 | 361,523 | 0.3 | 5.6 | 35.7 | — | 1.4 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 68,113 | 362 | — | — | 68,475 | — | 2.4 | — | — | — | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost including debt securities | 395,801 | 29,318 | 4,840 | 39 | 429,998 | 0.2 | 5.5 | 35.7 | — | 1.2 | | Off-balance sheet loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts2 | 410,349 | 16,233 | 780 | 5 | 427,367 | — | 1.5 | 3.9 | — | 0.1 | | Total2,4 | 806,150 | 45,551 | 5,620 | 44 | 857,365 | 0.1 | 4.1 | 32.6 | — | 0.7 | Notes: 1 Includes Business Banking, which has a gross exposure of £12.4bn and an impairment allowance of £326m. This comprises £62m impairment allowance on £9.3bn Stage 1 exposure, £50m on £2.3bn Stage 2 exposure and £214m on £0.8bn Stage 3 exposure. Excluding this, total coverage for corporate loans in UK is 0.8%. 2 Excludes loan commitments and financial guarantees of £22.2bn carried at fair value and includes exposure relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale. 3 Other financial assets subject to impairment excluded in the table above include cash collateral and settlement balances, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income and other assets. These have a total gross exposure of £224.1bn and an impairment allowance of £150m. This comprises £18m impairment allowance on £222.4bn Stage 1 exposure, £8m on £1.6bn Stage 2 exposure and £124m on £127m Stage 3 exposure. 4 The annualised loan loss rate is 52bps after applying the total impairment charge of £2,279m. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Loans and advances at amortised cost by geography (audited) | As at 31 December 2024 | Gross exposure | | | | | Impairment allowance | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | Retail mortgages | 145,039 | 19,507 | 1,793 | — | 166,339 | 36 | 61 | 61 | — | 158 | | Retail credit cards | 13,497 | 2,064 | 179 | 40 | 15,780 | 219 | 440 | 91 | — | 750 | | Retail other | 10,606 | 1,218 | 257 | 17 | 12,098 | 135 | 110 | 138 | — | 383 | | Corporate loans¹ | 52,284 | 7,266 | 2,171 | — | 61,721 | 133 | 196 | 420 | — | 749 | | Total UK | 221,426 | 30,055 | 4,400 | 57 | 255,938 | 523 | 807 | 710 | — | 2,040 | | Retail mortgages | 1,651 | 89 | 169 | — | 1,909 | 2 | 1 | 26 | — | 29 | | Retail credit cards | 17,629 | 2,953 | 1,724 | — | 22,306 | 334 | 807 | 1,416 | — | 2,557 | | Retail other | 1,844 | 155 | 121 | — | 2,120 | 3 | 1 | 23 | — | 27 | | Corporate loans | 64,224 | 3,901 | 945 | — | 69,070 | 76 | 135 | 206 | — | 417 | | Total Rest of the World | 85,348 | 7,098 | 2,959 | — | 95,405 | 415 | 944 | 1,671 | — | 3,030 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 306,774 | 37,153 | 7,359 | 57 | 351,343 | 938 | 1,751 | 2,381 | — | 5,070 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 64,988 | 3,245 | — | — | 68,233 | 12 | 11 | — | — | 23 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost including debt securities | 371,762 | 40,398 | 7,359 | 57 | 419,576 | 950 | 1,762 | 2,381 | — | 5,093 | | Off-balance sheet loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts² | 412,255 | 18,728 | 1,168 | 6 | 432,157 | 164 | 250 | 25 | — | 439 | | Total³,⁴ | 784,017 | 59,126 | 8,527 | 63 | 851,733 | 1,114 | 2,012 | 2,406 | — | 5,532 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Loans and advances at amortised cost by geography (audited) | As at 31 December 2024 | Net Exposure | | | | | Coverage ratio | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 % | Stage 2 % | Stage 3 excluding POCI % | Stage 3 POCI % | Total % | | Retail mortgages | 145,003 | 19,446 | 1,732 | — | 166,181 | — | 0.3 | 3.4 | — | 0.1 | | Retail credit cards | 13,278 | 1,624 | 88 | 40 | 15,030 | 1.6 | 21.3 | 50.8 | — | 4.8 | | Retail other | 10,471 | 1,108 | 119 | 17 | 11,715 | 1.3 | 9.0 | 53.7 | — | 3.2 | | Corporate loans1 | 52,151 | 7,070 | 1,751 | — | 60,972 | 0.3 | 2.7 | 19.3 | — | 1.2 | | Total UK | 220,903 | 29,248 | 3,690 | 57 | 253,898 | 0.2 | 2.7 | 16.1 | — | 0.8 | | Retail mortgages | 1,649 | 88 | 143 | — | 1,880 | 0.1 | 1.1 | 15.4 | — | 1.5 | | Retail credit cards | 17,295 | 2,146 | 308 | — | 19,749 | 1.9 | 27.3 | 82.1 | — | 11.5 | | Retail other | 1,841 | 154 | 98 | — | 2,093 | 0.2 | 0.6 | 19.0 | — | 1.3 | | Corporate loans | 64,148 | 3,766 | 739 | — | 68,653 | 0.1 | 3.5 | 21.8 | — | 0.6 | | Total Rest of the World | 84,933 | 6,154 | 1,288 | — | 92,375 | 0.5 | 13.3 | 56.5 | — | 3.2 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 305,836 | 35,402 | 4,978 | 57 | 346,273 | 0.3 | 4.7 | 32.4 | — | 1.4 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 64,976 | 3,234 | — | — | 68,210 | — | 0.3 | — | — | — | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost including debt securities | 370,812 | 38,636 | 4,978 | 57 | 414,483 | 0.3 | 4.4 | 32.4 | — | 1.2 | | Off-balance sheet loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts2 | 412,091 | 18,478 | 1,143 | 6 | 431,718 | — | 1.3 | 2.1 | — | 0.1 | | Total3,4 | 782,903 | 57,114 | 6,121 | 63 | 846,201 | 0.1 | 3.4 | 28.2 | — | 0.6 | Notes: 1 Includes Business Banking, which has a gross exposure of £13.1bn and an impairment allowance of £356m. This comprises £60m impairment allowance on £8.9bn Stage 1 exposure, £60m on £2.8bn Stage 2 exposure and £236m on £1.5bn Stage 3 exposure. Excluding this, total coverage for corporate loans in UK is 0.8%. 2 Excludes loan commitments and financial guarantees of £16.3bn carried at fair value and includes exposure relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale. 3 Other financial assets subject to impairment excluded in the table above include cash collateral and settlement balances, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income and other assets. These have a total gross exposure of £204.2bn and an impairment allowance of £156m. This comprises £19m impairment allowance on £202.7bn Stage 1 exposure, £7m on £1.3bn Stage 2 exposure and £130m on £139m Stage 3 exposure. 4 The annualised loan loss rate is 46bps after applying the total impairment charge of £1,982m. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Loans and advances at amortised cost by product (audited) The table below presents a product breakdown by stages of loans and advances at amortised cost. Also included is a breakdown of Stage 2 past due balances. Loans and advances at amortised cost by product (audited) | As at 31 December 2025 | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | | | | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Not past due | <=30 days past due | >30 days past due | Total | | | | | Gross exposure | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail mortgages | 161,654 | 11,072 | 2,033 | 724 | 13,829 | 1,967 | — | 177,450 | | Retail credit cards | 33,723 | 3,832 | 317 | 330 | 4,479 | 2,055 | 24 | 40,281 | | Retail other | 12,349 | 1,398 | 207 | 113 | 1,718 | 349 | 15 | 14,431 | | Corporate loans | 120,853 | 10,409 | 71 | 158 | 10,638 | 3,159 | — | 134,650 | | Total | 328,579 | 26,711 | 2,628 | 1,325 | 30,664 | 7,530 | 39 | 366,812 | | Impairment allowance | | | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 17 | 9 | 4 | 3 | 16 | 84 | — | 117 | | Retail credit cards | 566 | 840 | 138 | 216 | 1,194 | 1,569 | — | 3,329 | | Retail other | 101 | 126 | 28 | 29 | 183 | 233 | — | 517 | | Corporate loans | 207 | 298 | 7 | 10 | 315 | 804 | — | 1,326 | | Total | 891 | 1,273 | 177 | 258 | 1,708 | 2,690 | — | 5,289 | | Net exposure | | | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 161,637 | 11,063 | 2,029 | 721 | 13,813 | 1,883 | — | 177,333 | | Retail credit cards | 33,157 | 2,992 | 179 | 114 | 3,285 | 486 | 24 | 36,952 | | Retail other | 12,248 | 1,272 | 179 | 84 | 1,535 | 116 | 15 | 13,914 | | Corporate loans | 120,646 | 10,111 | 64 | 148 | 10,323 | 2,355 | — | 133,324 | | Total | 327,688 | 25,438 | 2,451 | 1,067 | 28,956 | 4,840 | 39 | 361,523 | | Coverage ratio | % | % | % | % | % | % | % | % | | Retail mortgages | — | 0.1 | 0.2 | 0.4 | 0.1 | 4.3 | — | 0.1 | | Retail credit cards | 1.7 | 21.9 | 43.5 | 65.5 | 26.7 | 76.4 | — | 8.3 | | Retail other | 0.8 | 9.0 | 13.5 | 25.7 | 10.7 | 66.8 | — | 3.6 | | Corporate loans | 0.2 | 2.9 | 9.9 | 6.3 | 3.0 | 25.5 | — | 1.0 | | Total | 0.3 | 4.8 | 6.7 | 19.5 | 5.6 | 35.7 | — | 1.4 | As at 31 December 2024 | Gross exposure | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Retail mortgages | 146,690 | 16,790 | 2,034 | 772 | 19,596 | 1,962 | — | 168,248 | | Retail credit cards | 31,126 | 4,435 | 303 | 279 | 5,017 | 1,903 | 40 | 38,086 | | Retail other | 12,450 | 1,056 | 211 | 106 | 1,373 | 378 | 17 | 14,218 | | Corporate loans | 116,508 | 10,849 | 144 | 174 | 11,167 | 3,116 | — | 130,791 | | Total | 306,774 | 33,130 | 2,692 | 1,331 | 37,153 | 7,359 | 57 | 351,343 | Impairment allowance | Retail mortgages | 38 | 42 | 13 | 7 | 62 | 87 | — | 187 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Retail credit cards | 553 | 959 | 122 | 166 | 1,247 | 1,507 | — | 3,307 | | Retail other | 138 | 76 | 17 | 18 | 111 | 161 | — | 410 | | Corporate loans | 209 | 316 | 7 | 8 | 331 | 626 | — | 1,166 | | Total | 938 | 1,393 | 159 | 199 | 1,751 | 2,381 | — | 5,070 | Net exposure | Retail mortgages | 146,652 | 16,748 | 2,021 | 765 | 19,534 | 1,875 | — | 168,061 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Retail credit cards | 30,573 | 3,476 | 181 | 113 | 3,770 | 396 | 40 | 34,779 | | Retail other | 12,312 | 980 | 194 | 88 | 1,262 | 217 | 17 | 13,808 | | Corporate loans | 116,299 | 10,533 | 137 | 166 | 10,836 | 2,490 | — | 129,625 | | Total | 305,836 | 31,737 | 2,533 | 1,132 | 35,402 | 4,978 | 57 | 346,273 | | Coverage ratio | % | % | % | % | % | % | % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Retail mortgages | — | 0.3 | 0.6 | 0.9 | 0.3 | 4.4 | — | | Retail credit cards | 1.8 | 21.6 | 40.3 | 59.5 | 24.9 | 79.2 | — | | Retail other | 1.1 | 7.2 | 8.1 | 17.0 | 8.1 | 42.6 | — | | Corporate loans | 0.2 | 2.9 | 4.9 | 4.6 | 3.0 | 20.1 | — | | Total | 0.3 | 4.2 | 5.9 | 15.0 | 4.7 | 32.4 | — | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) # Movement in gross exposures and impairment allowance including provisions for loan commitments and financial guarantees (audited) The following tables present a reconciliation of the opening to the closing balance of the gross exposure and impairment allowance. Transfers between stages in the tables have been reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year. 'Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes' includes additional drawdowns and partial repayments from existing facilities. Additionally, the below tables do not include other financial assets subject to impairment such as debt securities at amortised cost, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, cash collateral and settlement balances, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income and other assets. The movements are measured over a 12-month period. Loans and advances at amortised cost (audited) | | Stage 1 | | Stage 2 | | Stage 3 excluding POCI | | Stage 3 POCI | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | | Retail mortgages | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 146,690 | 38 | 19,596 | 62 | 1,962 | 87 | — | — | 168,248 | 187 | | Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 | (8,750) | (3) | 8,750 | 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 | 12,686 | 26 | (12,686) | (26) | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers to Stage 3 | (389) | (1) | (502) | (5) | 891 | 6 | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 3 | 108 | 2 | 119 | — | (227) | (2) | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 32,944 | 4 | 1,186 | 2 | 7 | — | — | — | 34,137 | 6 | | Refinements to models used for calculation1 | — | (19) | — | (36) | — | 6 | — | — | — | (49) | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes | (7,660) | (26) | (683) | 25 | (113) | 30 | — | — | (8,456) | 29 | | Final repayments | (13,634) | (3) | (1,802) | (5) | (431) | (20) | — | — | (15,867) | (28) | | Disposals2 | (341) | (1) | (149) | (4) | (104) | (5) | — | — | (594) | (10) | | Write-offs | — | — | — | — | (18) | (18) | — | — | (18) | (18) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 161,654 | 17 | 13,829 | 16 | 1,967 | 84 | — | — | 177,450 | 117 | | Retail credit cards | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 31,126 | 553 | 5,017 | 1,247 | 1,903 | 1,507 | 40 | — | 38,086 | 3,307 | | Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 | (1,716) | (51) | 1,716 | 51 | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 | 2,220 | 444 | (2,220) | (444) | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers to Stage 3 | (728) | (26) | (922) | (351) | 1,650 | 377 | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 3 | 30 | 15 | 20 | 8 | (50) | (23) | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year3 | 4,999 | 111 | 617 | 188 | 75 | 54 | — | — | 5,691 | 353 | | Refinements to models used for calculation1 | — | 57 | — | (274) | — | 1 | — | — | — | (216) | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes4 | (1,906) | (526) | 290 | 782 | (6) | 1,074 | (16) | — | (1,638) | 1,330 | | Final repayments | (302) | (11) | (39) | (13) | (35) | (28) | — | — | (376) | (52) | | Disposals2 | — | — | — | — | (457) | (368) | — | — | (457) | (368) | | Write-offs | — | — | — | — | (1,025) | (1,025) | — | — | (1,025) | (1,025) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 33,723 | 566 | 4,479 | 1,194 | 2,055 | 1,569 | 24 | — | 40,281 | 3,329 | # Notes: 1. Refinements to models used for calculation reported within Retail mortgages include a £(49)m movement in the calculated ECL for the UK Mortgages portfolio. In Retail credit cards, this include a £(204)m movement in UK Cards and a £(12)m movement in US Cards portfolio, respectively. These reflect model enhancements made during the year. Barclays continually reviews the output of models to determine accuracy of the ECL calculation including review of model monitoring, external benchmarking and experience of model operation over an extended period of time. This helps to ensure that the models used continue to reflect the risks inherent in the businesses. 2. The £594m of gross disposals reported within Retail mortgages include £584m transfer of facilities to a non-consolidated SPV for the purpose of securitisation and £10m relates to sale of the Italian mortgage loans. The £457m of gross disposals reported within Retail credit cards relate to debt sales undertaken during the year. 3. Business activity in the year reported within Retail credit cards include £1.2bn related to acquisition of the GM co-branded card portfolio within USCB. 4. 'Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes' reported within Retail credit cards include a gain recognised on the reassessment of purchased or originated credit-impaired (POCI) assets, where the expected credit loss on POCI assets is lower than anticipated at the time of purchase. The resulting increase in carrying value is recognised within gross exposure rather than as a negative impairment allowance. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Loans and advances at amortised cost (audited) | | Stage 1 | | Stage 2 | | Stage 3 excluding POCI | | Stage 3 POCI | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | | Retail other | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 12,450 | 138 | 1,373 | 111 | 378 | 161 | 17 | — | 14,218 | 410 | | Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 | (733) | (12) | 733 | 12 | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 | 372 | 24 | (372) | (24) | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers to Stage 3 | (206) | (3) | (119) | (28) | 325 | 31 | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 3 | 58 | 2 | 4 | 4 | (62) | (6) | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 4,683 | 37 | 494 | 58 | 37 | 34 | — | — | 5,214 | 129 | | Refinements to models used for calculation | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes¹ | (1,080) | (62) | (16) | 55 | 34 | 180 | (2) | — | (1,064) | 173 | | Final repayments | (3,195) | (23) | (379) | (5) | (205) | (20) | — | — | (3,779) | (48) | | Disposals² | — | — | — | — | (43) | (32) | — | — | (43) | (32) | | Write-offs | — | — | — | — | (115) | (115) | — | — | (115) | (115) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 12,349 | 101 | 1,718 | 183 | 349 | 233 | 15 | — | 14,431 | 517 | | Corporate loans | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 116,508 | 209 | 11,167 | 331 | 3,116 | 626 | — | — | 130,791 | 1,166 | | Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 | (3,993) | (19) | 3,993 | 19 | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 | 3,316 | 70 | (3,316) | (70) | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers to Stage 3 | (895) | (5) | (748) | (32) | 1,643 | 37 | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 3 | 441 | 18 | 459 | 14 | (900) | (32) | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year³ | 28,142 | 49 | 1,134 | 40 | 341 | 29 | — | — | 29,617 | 118 | | Refinements to models used for calculation⁴ | — | (65) | — | (24) | — | — | — | — | — | (89) | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes | 3,727 | (21) | (41) | 95 | (108) | 476 | — | — | 3,578 | 550 | | Final repayments | (26,236) | (28) | (2,008) | (56) | (511) | (10) | — | — | (28,755) | (94) | | Disposals² | (157) | (1) | (2) | (2) | (121) | (21) | — | — | (280) | (24) | | Write-offs | — | — | — | — | (301) | (301) | — | — | (301) | (301) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 120,853 | 207 | 10,638 | 315 | 3,159 | 804 | — | — | 134,650 | 1,326 | Notes: 1 'Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes' reported within Retail other include a gain recognised on the reassessment of purchased or originated credit-impaired (POCI) assets, where the expected credit loss on POCI assets is lower than anticipated at the time of purchase. The resulting increase in carrying value is recognised within gross exposure rather than as a negative impairment allowance. 2 The £43m of gross disposals reported within Retail other and £280m of gross disposals reported within Corporate loans relate to debt sales undertaken during the year. 3 Business activity in the year reported within Corporate loans include £0.1bn related to acquisition of the GM co-branded card portfolio within USCB. 4 Refinements to models used for calculation reported within Corporate loans include a £(89)m movement in the calculated ECL for the UKCB and IB portfolio. These reflect model enhancements made during the year. Barclays continually reviews the output of models to determine accuracy of the ECL calculation including review of model monitoring, external benchmarking and experience of model operation over an extended period of time. This helps to ensure that the models used continue to reflect the risks inherent in the businesses. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Reconciliation of ECL movement to credit impairment charge/(release) for the period | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Retail mortgages | (20) | (42) | 20 | — | (42) | | Retail credit cards | 13 | (53) | 1,455 | — | 1,415 | | Retail other | (37) | 72 | 219 | — | 254 | | Corporate loans | (1) | (14) | 500 | — | 485 | | ECL movements excluding disposals and write-offs¹ | (45) | (37) | 2,194 | — | 2,112 | | ECL movement on loan commitments and other financial guarantees | (20) | (10) | 7 | — | (23) | | ECL movement on other financial assets | (1) | 1 | (6) | — | (6) | | ECL movement on debt securities at amortised cost | 1 | (2) | — | — | (1) | | Recoveries and reimbursements² | 9 | (29) | (147) | — | (167) | | ECL charge on assets held for sale³ | | | | | 181 | | Total exchange and other adjustments | | | | | 183 | | Total credit impairment charge for the year | | | | | 2,279 | # Notes: 1 In 2025, gross write-offs amounted to £1,459m and post write-off recoveries amounted to £83m. Net write-offs represent gross write-offs less post write-off recoveries and amounted to £1,376m. 2 Recoveries and reimbursements include £84m for reimbursements where the Group has entered into financial guarantee contracts which provide credit protection over certain assets with third parties and cash recoveries of previously written-off amounts of £83m. 3 ECL charge on assets held for sale relate to the charges on a co-branded card portfolio in USCB and the German consumer finance business. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Loan commitments and financial guarantees (audited)¹ | | Stage 1 | | Stage 2 | | Stage 3 excluding POCI | | Stage 3 POCI | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Gross exposure | ECL | Gross exposure | ECL | Gross exposure | ECL | Gross exposure | ECL | Gross exposure | ECL | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail mortgages | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 11,093 | — | 340 | — | 2 | — | — | — | 11,435 | — | | Net transfers between stages | 131 | — | (141) | — | 10 | — | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 8,970 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 8,970 | — | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movement due to exposure and risk parameter changes | (8,097) | — | (44) | — | (10) | — | — | — | (8,151) | — | | Limit management and final repayments | (342) | — | (30) | — | (2) | — | — | — | (374) | — | | As at 31 December 2025 | 11,755 | — | 125 | — | — | — | — | — | 11,880 | — | | Retail credit cards | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 162,471 | 53 | 2,515 | 13 | 122 | — | 6 | — | 165,114 | 66 | | Net transfers between stages | (1,837) | 13 | 1,760 | (13) | 77 | — | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 28,148 | 18 | 341 | 3 | 1 | — | — | — | 28,490 | 21 | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movement due to exposure and risk parameter changes | (6,183) | (24) | (1,845) | 9 | (72) | — | (1) | — | (8,101) | (15) | | Limit management and final repayments | (13,584) | (8) | (220) | (9) | (24) | — | — | — | (13,828) | (17) | | Disposal² | (5,291) | — | (221) | — | (10) | — | — | — | (5,522) | — | | As at 31 December 2025 | 163,724 | 52 | 2,330 | 3 | 94 | — | 5 | — | 166,153 | 55 | | Retail other | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 8,416 | 6 | 440 | — | 25 | — | — | — | 8,881 | 6 | | Net transfers between stages | (31) | — | 28 | — | 3 | — | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 625 | — | 1 | — | — | — | — | — | 626 | — | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movement due to exposure and risk parameter changes | (341) | (5) | 7 | — | 12 | — | — | — | (322) | (5) | | Limit management and final repayments | (797) | — | (33) | — | (20) | — | — | — | (850) | — | | Disposal² | (756) | — | (30) | — | (1) | — | — | — | (787) | — | | As at 31 December 2025 | 7,116 | 1 | 413 | — | 19 | — | — | — | 7,548 | 1 | | Corporate loans | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 230,275 | 105 | 15,433 | 237 | 1,019 | 25 | — | — | 246,727 | 367 | | Net transfers between stages | (122) | 41 | 216 | (41) | (94) | — | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 48,961 | 28 | 2,701 | 61 | 405 | — | — | — | 52,067 | 89 | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movement due to exposure and risk parameter changes | 9,733 | (57) | (480) | 36 | (291) | 11 | — | — | 8,962 | (10) | | Limit management and final repayments | (60,949) | (26) | (4,265) | (56) | (340) | (4) | — | — | (65,554) | (86) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 227,898 | 91 | 13,605 | 237 | 699 | 32 | — | — | 242,202 | 360 | Notes: 1 Loan commitments reported also include exposure relating to financial assets classified as held for sale. 2 The gross disposals reported within Retail credit cards and Retail other relate to the German consumer finance business; sale of which was completed in Q125. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Loans and advances at amortised cost (audited) | | Stage 1 | | Stage 2 | | Stage 3 excluding POCI | | Stage 3 POCI | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | | Retail mortgages | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 150,202 | 50 | 19,469 | 105 | 2,424 | 428 | — | — | 172,095 | 583 | | Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 | (10,013) | (5) | 10,013 | 5 | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 | 6,591 | 29 | (6,591) | (29) | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers to Stage 3 | (388) | — | (530) | (10) | 918 | 10 | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 3 | 82 | 3 | 142 | 2 | (224) | (5) | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 22,881 | 8 | 792 | 4 | 7 | — | — | — | 23,680 | 12 | | Refinements to models used for calculation | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes | (7,297) | (37) | (918) | 36 | (53) | 23 | — | — | (8,268) | 22 | | Final repayments | (12,680) | (5) | (2,099) | (11) | (394) | (24) | — | — | (15,173) | (40) | | Disposals1 | (2,688) | (5) | (682) | (40) | (699) | (328) | — | — | (4,069) | (373) | | Write-offs | — | — | — | — | (17) | (17) | — | — | (17) | (17) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 146,690 | 38 | 19,596 | 62 | 1,962 | 87 | — | — | 168,248 | 187 | | Retail credit cards | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 30,409 | 523 | 5,578 | 1,630 | 1,720 | 1,333 | — | — | 37,707 | 3,486 | | Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 | (2,093) | (66) | 2,093 | 66 | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 | 1,933 | 461 | (1,933) | (461) | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers to Stage 3 | (702) | (26) | (1,079) | (469) | 1,781 | 495 | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 3 | 26 | 13 | 25 | 10 | (51) | (23) | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year2 | 7,217 | 184 | 400 | 118 | 32 | 29 | 40 | — | 7,689 | 331 | | Refinements to models used for calculation3 | — | 5 | — | (29) | — | 4 | — | — | — | (20) | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes | 658 | (450) | 838 | 628 | (7) | 1,143 | — | — | 1,489 | 1,321 | | Final repayments | (136) | (7) | (41) | (16) | (5) | (3) | — | — | (182) | (26) | | Transfers to assets held for sale4 | (5,495) | (64) | (689) | (161) | (57) | (46) | — | — | (6,241) | (271) | | Disposals1 | (691) | (20) | (175) | (69) | (407) | (322) | — | — | (1,273) | (411) | | Write-offs | — | — | — | — | (1,103) | (1,103) | — | — | (1,103) | (1,103) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 31,126 | 553 | 5,017 | 1,247 | 1,903 | 1,507 | 40 | — | 38,086 | 3,307 | | Retail other | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 8,469 | 59 | 1,343 | 118 | 493 | 176 | — | — | 10,305 | 353 | | Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 | (619) | (8) | 619 | 8 | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 | 423 | 27 | (423) | (27) | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers to Stage 3 | (209) | (2) | (151) | (30) | 360 | 32 | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 3 | 82 | 1 | 52 | 4 | (134) | (5) | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year2 | 7,590 | 105 | 252 | 30 | 24 | 22 | 17 | — | 7,883 | 157 | | Refinements to models used for calculation | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes | (265) | (33) | (125) | 13 | 59 | 116 | — | — | (331) | 96 | | Final repayments | (3,021) | (11) | (194) | (5) | (273) | (41) | — | — | (3,488) | (57) | | Disposals1 | — | — | — | — | (46) | (34) | — | — | (46) | (34) | | Write-offs | — | — | — | — | (105) | (105) | — | — | (105) | (105) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 12,450 | 138 | 1,373 | 111 | 378 | 161 | 17 | — | 14,218 | 410 | Notes: 1 The £4.1bn of gross disposals reported within Retail mortgages include £3.2bn sale of the Italian mortgage portfolio and £0.8bn of transfer of facilities to a non-consolidated SPV for the purpose of securitisation. The £1.3bn of gross disposals reported within Retail credit cards include £0.9bn sale of the outstanding US Cards receivables to Blackstone and £0.4bn of other debt sales undertaken during the year. The £46m of gross disposals reported within Retail other relate to debt sales undertaken during the year. 2 Business activity in the year reported within Retail credit cards and Retail other includes an acquisition of Tesco Bank, comprising £4.2bn of credit card receivables and £4.1bn of unsecured personal loans. 3 Refinements to models used for calculation reported within Retail credit cards include a £(31)m movement in UK Cards and a £11m movement in the US Cards portfolio. These reflect model enhancements made during the year. Barclays continually reviews the output of models to determine accuracy of the ECL calculation including review of model monitoring, external benchmarking and experience of model operation over an extended period of time. This helps to ensure that the models used continue to reflect the risks inherent across the businesses. 4 Transfers to assets held for sale reported within Retail credit cards relate to a co-branded card portfolio within USCB. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Loans and advances at amortised cost (audited) | | Stage 1 | | Stage 2 | | Stage 3 excluding POCI | | Stage 3 POCI | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | | Corporate loans | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 112,505 | 287 | 13,302 | 414 | 2,554 | 598 | — | — | 128,361 | 1,299 | | Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 | (3,810) | (28) | 3,810 | 28 | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 | 3,316 | 75 | (3,316) | (75) | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Transfers to Stage 3 | (1,073) | (6) | (892) | (37) | 1,965 | 43 | — | — | — | — | | Transfers from Stage 3 | 269 | 14 | 230 | 22 | (499) | (36) | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 27,032 | 45 | 897 | 36 | 415 | 26 | — | — | 28,344 | 107 | | Refinements to models used for calculation¹ | — | (6) | — | 42 | — | — | — | — | — | 36 | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes | 4,191 | (124) | (531) | 4 | (631) | 341 | — | — | 3,029 | 221 | | Final repayments | (25,861) | (46) | (2,322) | (98) | (363) | (21) | — | — | (28,546) | (165) | | Transfers to assets held for sale² | (49) | (1) | (9) | (3) | (1) | (1) | | | (59) | (5) | | Disposals³ | (12) | (1) | (2) | (2) | (2) | (2) | — | — | (16) | (5) | | Write-offs | — | — | — | — | (322) | (322) | — | — | (322) | (322) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 116,508 | 209 | 11,167 | 331 | 3,116 | 626 | — | — | 130,791 | 1,166 | Reconciliation of ECL movement to credit impairment charge/(release) for the period | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Retail mortgages | (7) | (3) | 4 | — | (6) | | Retail credit cards | 114 | (153) | 1,645 | — | 1,606 | | Retail other | 79 | (7) | 124 | — | 196 | | Corporate loans | (76) | (78) | 353 | — | 199 | | ECL movement excluding assets held for sale ,disposals and write-offs⁴ | 110 | (241) | 2,126 | — | 1,995 | | ECL movement on loan commitments and financial guarantees | (9) | (37) | (19) | — | (65) | | ECL movement on other financial assets | 3 | 5 | (3) | — | 5 | | ECL movement on debt securities at amortised cost | 1 | (5) | — | — | (4) | | Recoveries and reimbursements⁵ | (21) | 20 | (90) | — | (91) | | ECL charge on assets held for sale⁶ | | | | | 74 | | Total exchange and other adjustments | | | | | 68 | | Total credit impairment charge for the year | | | | | 1,982 | # Notes: 1. Refinements to models used for calculation reported within Corporate loans include a £69m movement in IB and a £(33)m movement in the ESHLA portfolio. These reflect model enhancements made during the year. Barclays continually reviews the output of models to determine accuracy of the ECL calculation including review of model monitoring, external benchmarking and experience of model operation over an extended period of time. This helps to ensure that the models used continue to reflect the risks inherent across the businesses. 2. Transfers to assets held for sale reported within Corporate loans relate to a co-branded card portfolio within USCB. 3. The £16m of gross disposals reported within Corporate loans relate to debt sales undertaken during the year. 4. In 2024, gross write-offs amounted to £1,547m and post write-off recoveries amounted to £76m. Net write-offs represent gross write-offs less post write-off recoveries and amounted to £1,471m. 5. Recoveries and reimbursements include £15m for reimbursements where the Group has entered into financial guarantee contracts which provide credit protection over certain assets with third parties and cash recoveries of previously written off amounts of £76m. 6. ECL charge on assets held for sale relate to the German consumer finance business. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Loan commitments and financial guarantees (audited)¹ | | Stage 1 | | Stage 2 | | Stage 3 excluding POCI | | Stage 3 POCI | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | Gross exposure £m | ECL £m | | Retail mortgages | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 7,776 | — | 448 | — | 4 | — | — | — | 8,228 | — | | Net transfers between stages | (47) | — | 41 | — | 6 | — | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 8,048 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 8,048 | — | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movement due to exposure and risk parameter changes | (4,336) | — | (106) | — | (7) | — | — | — | (4,449) | — | | Limit management and final repayments | (348) | — | (43) | — | (1) | — | — | — | (392) | — | | As at 31 December 2024 | 11,093 | — | 340 | — | 2 | — | — | — | 11,435 | — | | Retail credit cards | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 144,791 | 59 | 2,807 | 54 | 142 | — | — | — | 147,740 | 113 | | Net transfers between stages | (1,940) | 30 | 1,853 | (30) | 87 | — | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 31,376 | 13 | 226 | 5 | 2 | — | 6 | — | 31,610 | 18 | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movement due to exposure and risk parameter changes | 2,148 | (36) | (1,969) | 4 | (88) | — | — | — | 91 | (32) | | Limit management and final repayments | (13,904) | (13) | (402) | (20) | (21) | — | — | — | (14,327) | (33) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 162,471 | 53 | 2,515 | 13 | 122 | — | 6 | — | 165,114 | 66 | | Retail other | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 8,607 | 6 | 535 | 2 | 44 | — | — | — | 9,186 | 8 | | Net transfers between stages | (9) | — | (8) | — | 17 | — | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 781 | 2 | 1 | — | — | — | — | — | 782 | 2 | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movement due to exposure and risk parameter changes | 110 | (2) | (77) | (2) | (13) | — | — | — | 20 | (4) | | Limit management and final repayments | (1,073) | — | (11) | — | (23) | — | — | — | (1,107) | — | | As at 31 December 2024 | 8,416 | 6 | 440 | — | 25 | — | — | — | 8,881 | 6 | | Corporate loans | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 212,889 | 108 | 20,418 | 231 | 847 | 44 | — | — | 234,154 | 383 | | Net transfers between stages | 1,241 | 29 | (1,555) | (32) | 314 | 3 | — | — | — | — | | Business activity in the year | 50,411 | 33 | 1,666 | 31 | 193 | — | — | — | 52,270 | 64 | | Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movement due to exposure and risk parameter changes | 10,109 | (39) | (1,383) | 70 | (46) | (14) | — | — | 8,680 | 17 | | Limit management and final repayments | (44,375) | (26) | (3,713) | (63) | (289) | (8) | — | — | (48,377) | (97) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 230,275 | 105 | 15,433 | 237 | 1,019 | 25 | — | — | 246,727 | 367 | Note: 1 Loan commitments reported also include exposure relating to financial assets classified as held for sale. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Stage 2 decomposition Stage 2 exposures are predominantly identified using quantitative tests where the lifetime probability of default (PD) has deteriorated more than a pre-determined amount since origination during the year. This is augmented by inclusion of accounts meeting the designated high risk criteria (including watchlist) for the portfolio under the qualitative test. A small number of accounts (3.2% of impairment allowance and 2.3% of gross exposure) included within Stage 2 are not otherwise identified by the quantitative or qualitative tests but are more than 30 days past due. The percentage triggered by these backstop criteria is a measure of the effectiveness of the Stage 2 criteria in identifying deterioration prior to delinquency. These balances include items in the UK Corporate Bank and Investment Bank for reasons such as outstanding interest and fees rather than principal balances. Loans and advances at amortised cost | | Gross Exposure | | | | Impairment Allowance | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Quantitative test | Qualitative test | 30 days past due backstop | Total Stage 2 | Quantitative test | Qualitative test | 30 days past due backstop | Total Stage 2 | | As at 31 December 2025² | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail mortgages | 9,824 | 3,470 | 463 | 13,757 | 13 | 2 | 1 | 16 | | Retail credit cards | 1,267 | 660 | 16 | 1,943 | 259 | 127 | 12 | 398 | | Retail other | 1,051 | 430 | 31 | 1,512 | 146 | 20 | 12 | 178 | | Corporate loans | 5,285 | 1,618 | 33 | 6,936 | 131 | 48 | 1 | 180 | | Total UK | 17,427 | 6,178 | 543 | 24,148 | 549 | 197 | 26 | 772 | | Retail mortgages | 3 | 17 | 52 | 72 | — | — | — | — | | Retail credit cards | 1,830 | 661 | 45 | 2,536 | 597 | 172 | 27 | 796 | | Retail other | 36 | 125 | 45 | 206 | 5 | — | — | 5 | | Corporate loans | 2,211 | 1,467 | 24 | 3,702 | 83 | 50 | 2 | 135 | | Total Rest of the World | 4,080 | 2,270 | 166 | 6,516 | 685 | 222 | 29 | 936 | | Retail mortgages | 9,827 | 3,487 | 515 | 13,829 | 13 | 2 | 1 | 16 | | Retail credit cards | 3,097 | 1,321 | 61 | 4,479 | 856 | 299 | 39 | 1,194 | | Retail other | 1,087 | 555 | 76 | 1,718 | 151 | 20 | 12 | 183 | | Corporate loans | 7,496 | 3,085 | 57 | 10,638 | 214 | 98 | 3 | 315 | | Total Stage 2 | 21,507 | 8,448 | 709 | 30,664 | 1,234 | 419 | 55 | 1,708 | | As at 31 December 2024² | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail mortgages | 9,143 | 9,681 | 683 | 19,507 | 42 | 15 | 4 | 61 | | Retail credit cards | 1,719 | 345 | — | 2,064 | 367 | 73 | — | 440 | | Retail other | 746 | 464 | 8 | 1,218 | 94 | 15 | 1 | 110 | | Corporate loans | 5,406 | 1,743 | 117 | 7,266 | 143 | 52 | 1 | 196 | | Total UK | 17,014 | 12,233 | 808 | 30,055 | 646 | 155 | 6 | 807 | | Retail mortgages | 3 | 13 | 73 | 89 | 1 | — | — | 1 | | Retail credit cards | 2,200 | 744 | 9 | 2,953 | 620 | 183 | 4 | 807 | | Retail other | 15 | 72 | 68 | 155 | — | 1 | — | 1 | | Corporate loans | 2,985 | 903 | 13 | 3,901 | 103 | 32 | — | 135 | | Total Rest of the World | 5,203 | 1,732 | 163 | 7,098 | 724 | 216 | 4 | 944 | | Retail mortgages | 9,146 | 9,694 | 756 | 19,596 | 43 | 15 | 4 | 62 | | Retail credit cards | 3,919 | 1,089 | 9 | 5,017 | 987 | 256 | 4 | 1,247 | | Retail other | 761 | 536 | 76 | 1,373 | 94 | 16 | 1 | 111 | | Corporate loans | 8,391 | 2,646 | 130 | 11,167 | 246 | 84 | 1 | 331 | | Total Stage 2 | 22,217 | 13,965 | 971 | 37,153 | 1,370 | 371 | 10 | 1,751 | Notes: 1. Where balances satisfy more than one of the above three criteria for determining a significant increase in credit risk, the corresponding gross exposure and impairment allowance have been assigned in order of categories presented. 2. Exposure exclude the portfolios which have been classified as assets held for sale. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Management adjustments to models for impairment (audited) Management adjustments to impairment models are applied in order to factor in certain conditions or changes in policy that are not fully incorporated into the impairment models, or to reflect additional facts and circumstances at the period end. Management adjustments are reviewed and incorporated into future model development where applicable. Management adjustments are captured through “Economic uncertainty” and “Other” adjustments, and are presented by product and geography below: | Management adjustments to models for impairment allowance presented by product and geography (audited) | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Impairment allowance pre management adjustments^{1} | Economic uncertainty adjustments (a) | Other adjustments (b) | Management adjustments^{2} (a+b) | Total impairment allowance^{3} | Proportion of Management adjustments to total impairment allowance | | As at 31 December 2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | % | | Retail mortgages | 76 | — | 15 | 15 | 91 | 16.5 | | Retail credit cards | 761 | — | — | — | 761 | — | | Retail other | 406 | — | 85 | 85 | 491 | 17.3 | | Corporate loans | 714 | 39 | 53 | 92 | 806 | 11.4 | | Total UK | 1,957 | 39 | 153 | 192 | 2,149 | 8.9 | | Retail mortgages | 25 | — | 1 | 1 | 26 | 3.8 | | Retail credit cards | 2,505 | 31 | 87 | 118 | 2,623 | 4.5 | | Retail other | 27 | — | — | — | 27 | — | | Corporate loans | 823 | 44 | 13 | 57 | 880 | 6.5 | | Total Rest of the World | 3,380 | 75 | 101 | 176 | 3,556 | 4.9 | | Total | 5,337 | 114 | 254 | 368 | 5,705 | 6.5 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 21 | 1 | — | 1 | 22 | 4.5 | | Total including debt securities at amortised cost | 5,358 | 115 | 254 | 369 | 5,727 | 6.4 | | As at 31 December 2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Retail mortgages | 51 | 36 | 71 | 107 | 158 | 67.7 | | Retail credit cards | 787 | — | (22) | (22) | 765 | (2.9) | | Retail other | 298 | — | 90 | 90 | 388 | 23.2 | | Corporate loans | 759 | 42 | 39 | 81 | 840 | 9.6 | | Total UK | 1,895 | 78 | 178 | 256 | 2,151 | 11.9 | | Retail mortgages | 29 | — | — | — | 29 | — | | Retail credit cards | 2,631 | — | (23) | (23) | 2,608 | (0.9) | | Retail other | 24 | — | 4 | 4 | 28 | 14.3 | | Corporate loans | 695 | — | (2) | (2) | 693 | (0.3) | | Total Rest of the World | 3,379 | — | (21) | (21) | 3,358 | (0.6) | | Total | 5,274 | 78 | 157 | 235 | 5,509 | 4.3 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 30 | — | (7) | (7) | 23 | (30.4) | | Total including debt securities at amortised cost | 5,304 | 78 | 150 | 228 | 5,532 | 4.1 | Notes: 1. Includes £4.3bn (2024: £4.7bn) of modelled ECL, £0.7bn (2024: £0.5bn) of individually assessed impairments, £(0.2)bn (2024: £(0.3)bn) of ECL from assets held for sale (co-branded card portfolio) and £0.6bn (2024: £0.4bn) of ECL from benchmarked exposures and debt securities. 2. Management adjustments related to other financial assets subject to impairment not included in the table above include cash collateral and settlement balances £1m (2024: £(1)m), reverse repurchase agreements £1m (2024: £(2)m) and financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income £nil (2024: £(2)m) within the IB portfolio. 3. Total impairment allowance consists of ECL stock on drawn and undrawn exposures. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Economic uncertainty adjustments presented by stage (audited) | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail mortgages | — | — | — | — | | Retail credit cards | — | — | — | — | | Retail other | — | — | — | — | | Corporate loans | 23 | 10 | 6 | 39 | | Total UK | 23 | 10 | 6 | 39 | | Retail mortgages | — | — | — | — | | Retail credit cards | — | 31 | — | 31 | | Retail other | — | — | — | — | | Corporate loans | 13 | 31 | — | 44 | | Total Rest of the World | 13 | 62 | — | 75 | | Total | 36 | 72 | 6 | 114 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 1 | — | — | 1 | | Total including debt securities at amortised cost | 37 | 72 | 6 | 115 | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail mortgages | 7 | 18 | 11 | 36 | | Retail credit cards | — | — | — | — | | Retail other | — | — | — | — | | Corporate loans | 26 | 10 | 6 | 42 | | Total UK | 33 | 28 | 17 | 78 | | Retail mortgages | — | — | — | — | | Retail credit cards | — | — | — | — | | Retail other | — | — | — | — | | Corporate loans | — | — | — | — | | Total Rest of the World | — | — | — | — | | Total | 33 | 28 | 17 | 78 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | — | — | — | — | | Total including debt securities at amortised cost | 33 | 28 | 17 | 78 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Economic uncertainty adjustments Economic uncertainty adjustments are captured in two ways. First, customer uncertainty: the identification of customers and clients who may be more vulnerable to economic instability; and second, model uncertainty: to capture the impact of model limitations and sensitivities to specific macroeconomic parameters, which are applied at a portfolio level. The Group continues to monitor the elevated tariffs, trade tensions, and geopolitical risks, especially in the US. In response, an adjustment of £81m introduced during Q125 has been retained, with any resulting effects on customer behaviour yet to materialise. Total economic uncertainty adjustments as at 31 December 2025 are £115m (2024: £78m) and include: **Customer and client uncertainty provisions of £115m (2024: £53m):** - Retail mortgages (UK) £nil (2024: £11m): The prior refinancing risk adjustment was retired following the rebuild of the UK Mortgages impairment models, which now better capture sensitivity to interest rate and inflation movements - Retail credit cards (ROW) £31m (2024: £nil): This adjustment reflects elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty, with impacts yet to materialise in consumer behaviour - Corporate loans (UK) £39m (2024: £42m): This adjustment reflects potential cross-default risk on Barclays' lending in respect of clients who have taken out Bounce Back Loans - Corporate loans (ROW) £44m (2024: £nil): This adjustment reflects elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty, with impacts yet to materialise in borrower behaviour - Model uncertainty provisions of £nil (2024: £25m): **Retail mortgages (UK) £nil (2024:£25m):** The prior adjustment to address model over-sensitivity was retired following the rebuild of the UK Mortgages impairment models, which now better capture consumer responses to the macroeconomic outlook ## Other adjustments Other adjustments are operational and remain in place until incorporated into the underlying models. These adjustments result from data limitations and model performance related issues identified through model monitoring and other established governance processes. Total other adjustments as at 31 December 2025 are £254m (2024: £150m) and include: - Retail mortgages (UK) £15m (2024: £71m): The reduction is driven by the retirement of adjustments following the rebuild of the UK Mortgages impairment models - Retail credit cards (UK) £nil (2024: £(22)m): The prior adjustment to address default over-prediction was retired following model remediation in the UK Cards portfolio - Retail credit cards (ROW) £87m (2024: £(23)m): This adjustment reflects provisioning for the GM consumer cards portfolio acquired during the year, while the previously held high-risk account management (HRAM) adjustment was retired following model remediation in USCB - Retail other (UK) £85m (2024: £90m) and Corporate loans (UK) £53m (2024: £39m): These include adjustments for definition of default (DOD) criteria under the Capital Requirements Regulation and model monitoring outcomes, which were re-sized during the year - Corporate loans (ROW) £13m (2024: £(2)m): This adjustment reflects provisioning for the GM business cards portfolio acquired during the year - Debt securities £nil (2024: £(7)m): The movement is driven by the retirement of the Exposure at Default recalibration adjustment following model remediation in the IB portfolio --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Climate Risk ECL assessment Barclays performed a credit risk assessment of physical and transition risks due to climate change. This was delivered through a combination of a scenario approach and targeted reviews of specific portfolios identified as more susceptible to climate risk. **Scenario Approach:** The IFRS 9 Downside 2 scenario has been updated and aligned to the 2025 Internal Stress Test scenario which is climate aware, ensuring that climate is being considered within the modelled ECL output via existing macroeconomic variables. **Specific Approach:** The approach reviewed portfolios previously identified from both internal and external stress tests as more susceptible to climate risks. In particular, climate modelling techniques were utilised to inform customer level PD and LGD spreads of physical and transition risk due to climate change for i) the UK Mortgages portfolio (both PD and LGD) and ii) Wholesale elevated risk sector exposures (PD only). The output of this review did not provide variances in ECL deemed sufficiently certain to warrant raising an additional climate-related charge in 2025. Whilst there have been no separately identifiable charges relating to climate risk in the 2025 reported ECL, it is acknowledged that impairment could increase over time as risks become more tangible and impact consumers and clients through physical risks or via impacts from the transition to a low carbon economy. Therefore, Barclays continues to review credit risk outputs to determine if any additional physical or transition climate risks are identified that are not sufficiently captured via model output. Refer to the Barclays resilience to climate scenarios on page 64 for further details. --- # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis The measurement of modelled ECL involves complexity and judgement, including estimation of probabilities of default (PD), loss given default (LGD), a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives, estimation of exposures at default (EAD) and assessing significant increases in credit risk. The Group uses a five-scenario model to calculate ECL. An external consensus forecast is assembled from key sources, including HM Treasury (short and medium term forecasts) and Bloomberg (based on median of economic forecasts) which forms the Baseline scenario. In addition, two adverse scenarios (Downside 1 and Downside 2) and two favourable scenarios (Upside 1 and Upside 2) are derived, with associated weightings. The adverse scenarios are calibrated to a broadly similar severity to the Group's internal stress tests and stress scenarios provided by regulators whilst also considering IFRS 9 specific sensitivities and non-linearity. The favourable scenarios are designed to reflect plausible upside risks to the Baseline scenario which are broadly consistent with the economic narrative approved by the Senior Scenario Review Committee. All scenarios are regenerated at a minimum semi-annually. The scenarios include key economic variables, (including GDP, unemployment, House Price Index (HPI) and base rates in both the UK and US markets), and expanded variables using statistical models based on historical correlations. The upside and downside shocks are designed to evolve over a five-year stress horizon, with all five scenarios converging to a steady state after approximately seven years. The same scenarios used in the estimation of expected credit losses are also used to inform the Group's internal planning. Scenarios used to calculate the Group's ECL charge were refreshed in Q425, with the Baseline scenario reflecting the latest consensus macroeconomic forecasts available at the time of the scenario refresh. The Baseline scenario continues to reflect the rapidly changing trade policies and uncertainty around potential tariffs to be imposed by the US administration and responses by other governments. Global growth slows modestly as rising US tariffs and retaliatory measures disrupt trade flows, dampen business confidence, and weigh on investment, though domestic demand in advanced economies remains resilient. UK and US GDP growth in 2026 is expected to be 1.1% and 2.0% respectively. Labour markets in major economies soften slightly amid increased uncertainty and slower export-orientated activity. However, the weakening is contained and does not rise significantly from current levels. UK and US quarterly unemployment rates peak at 4.9% and 4.5%, respectively. Central Banks continue to loosen monetary policy with both the Bank of England the Federal Reserve finishing 2026 with an interest rate of 3.25%. The Downside scenarios have been calibrated to capture an escalation of trade tensions, where tariffs imposed by the US prompt retaliation from its trading partners with adverse implications for consumer prices and investment sentiment. A sharp slowdown in immigration coupled with mass deportations disrupts the US labour market, compounding downside risks to growth. In addition, global supply chains are severely disrupted as firms delay investment, reassess production locations and hoard production inputs. Imports into the US contract sharply due to higher prices and exports fall due to retaliation. The combination of trade impact and consumer uncertainty triggers a sharp recession, not only in the US but also in the UK and Europe driven by a severe decline in exports, business sentiment and with investment and consumption plans being put on hold. The rapid fall in external demand and a retrenchment in business investment push up unemployment rates, where job losses are concentrated in trade-exposed sectors (machinery, autos, consumer durables) but also spill into services. The Federal Reserve initially holds rates steady, weighing the inflation shock against the deteriorating real economy. However, as the slowdown deepens and the labour market loosens, the Federal Reserve cuts rates swiftly to stimulate aggregate demand. The Bank of England eases monetary policy amid a disinflationary environment and looser labour markets. In the Upside scenarios, a rise in labour force participation and higher productivity contribute to accelerated economic growth, without creating new inflationary pressures. Central banks lower interest rates stimulating private consumption and investment growth. Demand for labour increases and unemployment rates stabilise and start falling again. As geopolitical tensions ease, low inflation supports consumer purchasing power and contributes further to healthy GDP growth. The strong economic outlook and lower interest rates provide a boost to house prices growth and support bullish financial markets. The methodology for estimating scenario weights involves simulating a range of future paths for UK and US GDP using historical data with the five scenarios mapped against the distribution of these future paths. The median is centred around the Baseline with scenarios further from the Baseline attracting a lower weighting before the five weights are normalised to total 100%. The movement in weights is driven by the combined impact of two factors: (i) improvement in GDP growth in the Baseline scenario, bringing the Baseline scenario closer to the Upside scenarios; and (ii) model improvements, which increase the Baseline weight and reduce the weights of the tail scenarios. For further details see page 246. The Group has retained the £81m uncertainty adjustment introduced in Q125 across the US Consumer Bank and Investment Bank businesses, reflecting elevated tariffs, trade tensions, and geopolitical risks, with any resulting effects on customer behaviour yet to materialise. For further details see pages 239 to 241. The following tables show the key macroeconomic variables used in the five scenarios (5 year annual paths), the weights applied to each scenario and the macroeconomic variables by scenario using 'specific bases' i.e. the most extreme position of each variable in the context of the scenario, for example, the highest unemployment for downside scenarios and the lowest unemployment for upside scenarios. 5-year average tables and movement over time graphs provide additional transparency. Annual paths show quarterly averages for the year (unemployment and base rate) or change in the year (GDP and HPI). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Average macroeconomic variables used in the calculation of ECL (audited) | As at 31 December 2025 | 2025 | 2026 | 2027 | 2028 | 2029 | % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Baseline | | | | | | | | UK GDP1 | | 1.5 | 1.1 | 1.4 | 1.4 | 1.4 | | UK unemployment2 | | 4.7 | 4.9 | 4.8 | 4.8 | 4.7 | | UK HPI3 | | 1.5 | 2.9 | 2.5 | 4.3 | 3.8 | | UK bank rate6 | | 4.2 | 3.4 | 3.4 | 3.5 | 3.6 | | US GDP1 | | 2.1 | 2.0 | 2.0 | 2.0 | 2.0 | | US unemployment4 | | 4.2 | 4.5 | 4.4 | 4.4 | 4.4 | | US HPI3 | | 3.2 | 1.7 | 1.9 | 2.6 | 2.6 | | US federal funds rate6 | | 4.2 | 3.4 | 3.3 | 3.3 | 3.5 | Downside 2 | UK GDP1 | 1.5 | (2.5) | (1.2) | 2.8 | 1.1 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | UK unemployment2 | 4.7 | 5.8 | 7.7 | 6.9 | 5.7 | | UK HPI3 | 1.5 | (24.9) | (5.1) | 9.6 | 14.2 | | UK bank rate6 | 4.2 | 2.3 | 0.5 | 0.4 | 1.1 | | US GDP1 | 2.1 | (2.7) | (2.8) | 1.6 | 2.4 | | US unemployment4 | 4.2 | 5.7 | 8.0 | 7.9 | 5.9 | | US HPI5 | 3.2 | (8.2) | (1.7) | 7.2 | 7.7 | | US federal funds rate6 | 4.2 | 3.6 | 2.4 | 1.4 | 1.2 | Downside 1 | UK GDP1 | 1.5 | (0.7) | 0.1 | 2.1 | 1.3 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | UK unemployment2 | 4.7 | 5.3 | 6.3 | 5.8 | 5.2 | | UK HPI3 | 1.5 | (11.8) | (1.3) | 6.9 | 8.9 | | UK bank rate6 | 4.2 | 2.9 | 2.0 | 1.9 | 2.4 | | US GDP1 | 2.1 | (0.3) | (0.4) | 1.8 | 2.2 | | US unemployment4 | 4.2 | 5.1 | 6.2 | 6.1 | 5.1 | | US HPI5 | 3.2 | (3.3) | 0.1 | 4.9 | 5.1 | | US federal funds rate6 | 4.2 | 3.6 | 2.8 | 2.4 | 2.4 | Upside 2 | UK GDP1 | 1.5 | 2.7 | 3.7 | 2.9 | 2.4 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | UK unemployment2 | 4.7 | 4.3 | 4.0 | 3.9 | 3.8 | | UK HPI3 | 1.5 | 11.9 | 8.4 | 5.1 | 4.1 | | UK bank rate6 | 4.2 | 3.1 | 2.3 | 2.3 | 2.6 | | US GDP1 | 2.1 | 2.8 | 3.1 | 2.8 | 2.8 | | US unemployment4 | 4.2 | 3.9 | 3.7 | 3.7 | 3.7 | | US HPI5 | 3.2 | 6.2 | 4.7 | 4.8 | 4.9 | | US federal funds rate6 | 4.2 | 3.0 | 2.5 | 2.5 | 2.5 | Upside 1 | UK GDP1 | 1.5 | 1.9 | 2.6 | 2.2 | 1.9 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | UK unemployment2 | 4.7 | 4.6 | 4.4 | 4.4 | 4.3 | | UK HPI3 | 1.5 | 7.4 | 5.4 | 4.7 | 3.9 | | UK bank rate6 | 4.2 | 3.2 | 2.8 | 2.8 | 3.1 | | US GDP1 | 2.1 | 2.4 | 2.6 | 2.4 | 2.4 | | US unemployment4 | 4.2 | 4.2 | 4.1 | 4.1 | 4.1 | | US HPI5 | 3.2 | 4.0 | 3.3 | 3.7 | 3.7 | | US federal funds rate6 | 4.2 | 3.3 | 2.8 | 2.8 | 3.0 | Notes: 1 Average Real GDP seasonally adjusted change in year. 2 Average UK unemployment rate 16-year+. 3 Change in year end UK HPI = Halifax HPI Meth2 All Houses, All Buyers index. 4 Average US civilian unemployment rate 16-year+. 5 Change in year end US HPI = FHFA house price index, relative to prior year end. 6 Average rate. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) | As at 31 December 2024 | 2024 | 2025 | 2026 | 2027 | 2028 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Baseline | % | % | % | % | % | | UK GDP1 | 1.0 | 1.4 | 1.5 | 1.6 | 1.5 | | UK unemployment2 | 4.3 | 4.4 | 4.5 | 4.4 | 4.4 | | UK HPI3 | 2.8 | 3.3 | 1.6 | 4.5 | 3.0 | | UK bank rate6 | 5.1 | 4.3 | 4.0 | 4.0 | 3.8 | | US GDP1 | 2.7 | 2.0 | 2.0 | 2.0 | 2.0 | | US unemployment4 | 4.1 | 4.3 | 4.2 | 4.2 | 4.2 | | US HPI5 | 6.5 | 2.6 | 2.7 | 3.0 | 3.0 | | US federal funds rate6 | 5.1 | 4.1 | 4.0 | 3.8 | 3.8 | | Downside 2 | | | | | | | UK GDP1 | 1.0 | (2.3) | (1.3) | 2.6 | 2.3 | | UK unemployment2 | 4.3 | 6.2 | 8.1 | 6.6 | 5.5 | | UK HPI3 | 2.8 | (24.8) | (5.2) | 10.0 | 14.6 | | UK bank rate6 | 5.1 | 3.5 | 1.7 | 0.6 | 1.1 | | US GDP1 | 2.7 | (1.3) | (1.3) | 3.3 | 2.9 | | US unemployment4 | 4.1 | 5.8 | 7.2 | 6.2 | 5.5 | | US HPI5 | 6.5 | (8.0) | (0.7) | 5.2 | 4.0 | | US federal funds rate6 | 5.1 | 2.5 | 0.6 | 0.8 | 1.5 | | Downside 1 | | | | | | | UK GDP1 | 1.0 | (0.5) | 0.1 | 2.1 | 1.9 | | UK unemployment2 | 4.3 | 5.3 | 6.3 | 5.5 | 5.0 | | UK HPI3 | 2.8 | (11.6) | (1.8) | 7.2 | 8.7 | | UK bank rate6 | 5.1 | 3.9 | 2.9 | 2.3 | 2.4 | | US GDP1 | 2.7 | 0.3 | 0.4 | 2.7 | 2.4 | | US unemployment4 | 4.1 | 5.1 | 5.7 | 5.2 | 4.9 | | US HPI5 | 6.5 | (2.7) | 1.0 | 4.1 | 3.5 | | US federal funds rate6 | 5.1 | 3.4 | 2.3 | 2.3 | 2.7 | | Upside 2 | | | | | | | UK GDP1 | 1.0 | 3.0 | 3.7 | 2.9 | 2.4 | | UK unemployment2 | 4.3 | 3.8 | 3.4 | 3.5 | 3.5 | | UK HPI3 | 2.8 | 11.9 | 8.4 | 5.1 | 4.1 | | UK bank rate6 | 5.1 | 3.9 | 2.9 | 2.8 | 2.8 | | US GDP1 | 2.7 | 2.8 | 3.1 | 2.8 | 2.8 | | US unemployment4 | 4.1 | 3.8 | 3.5 | 3.5 | 3.5 | | US HPI5 | 6.5 | 6.2 | 4.7 | 4.8 | 4.9 | | US federal funds rate6 | 5.1 | 3.7 | 3.3 | 3.1 | 2.8 | | Upside 1 | | | | | | | UK GDP1 | 1.0 | 2.2 | 2.6 | 2.2 | 2.0 | | UK unemployment2 | 4.3 | 4.1 | 4.0 | 4.0 | 4.0 | | UK HPI3 | 2.8 | 7.6 | 4.9 | 4.8 | 3.5 | | UK bank rate6 | 5.1 | 4.1 | 3.5 | 3.4 | 3.3 | | US GDP1 | 2.7 | 2.4 | 2.6 | 2.4 | 2.4 | | US unemployment4 | 4.1 | 4.0 | 3.9 | 3.9 | 3.9 | | US HPI5 | 6.5 | 4.4 | 3.7 | 3.9 | 3.9 | | US federal funds rate6 | 5.1 | 4.0 | 3.8 | 3.6 | 3.3 | # Notes: 1 Average Real GDP seasonally adjusted change in year. 2 Average UK unemployment rate 16-year+. 3 Change in year end UK HPI = Halifax All Houses, All Buyers index, relative to prior year end. 4 Average US civilian unemployment rate 16-year+. 5 Change in year end US HPI = FHFA house price index, relative to prior year end. 6 Average rate. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) | Scenario weighting (audited)1 | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Upside 2% | Upside 1% | Baseline% | Downside 1% | Downside 2% | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | Scenario weighting | 14.4 | 27.4 | 38.5 | 12.7 | 7.0 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | Scenario weighting | 17.4 | 26.8 | 32.5 | 14.7 | 8.6 | # Note 1 For further details on changes to scenario weights see page 243. Specific bases show the most extreme position of each variable in the context of the downside/upside scenarios, for example, the highest unemployment for downside scenarios, average unemployment for baseline scenarios and lowest unemployment for upside scenarios. GDP and HPI downside and upside scenario data represents the lowest and highest cumulative position relative to the start point, in the 20 quarter period. | Macroeconomic variables (specific bases) (audited)1 | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Upside 2 | Upside 1 | Baseline | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | | As at 31 December 2025 | % | % | % | % | % | | UK GDP2 | 14.5 | 10.8 | 1.4 | (0.3) | (3.5) | | UK unemployment3 | 3.8 | 4.3 | 4.8 | 6.5 | 8.1 | | UK HPI4 | 34.6 | 24.9 | 3.0 | (12.6) | (28.0) | | UK bank rate | 2.3 | 2.8 | 3.6 | 4.6 | 4.6 | | US GDP2 | 14.6 | 12.4 | 2.0 | (0.2) | (4.6) | | US unemployment3 | 3.7 | 4.1 | 4.4 | 6.6 | 8.8 | | US HPI4 | 26.2 | 19.3 | 2.4 | (1.5) | (8.1) | | US federal funds rate | 2.5 | 2.8 | 3.5 | 4.3 | 4.3 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | UK GDP2 | 15.0 | 11.6 | 1.4 | 0.2 | (2.9) | | UK unemployment3 | 3.4 | 3.9 | 4.4 | 6.5 | 8.4 | | UK HPI4 | 36.3 | 25.9 | 3.0 | (11.3) | (26.8) | | UK bank rate | 2.8 | 3.3 | 4.2 | 5.3 | 5.3 | | US GDP2 | 14.9 | 12.8 | 2.2 | 0.4 | (2.1) | | US unemployment3 | 3.5 | 3.8 | 4.2 | 5.9 | 7.5 | | US HPI4 | 30.1 | 24.4 | 3.5 | 1.1 | (4.0) | | US federal funds rate | 2.8 | 3.3 | 4.2 | 5.3 | 5.3 | Average basis represents the average quarterly value of variables in the 20 quarter period with GDP and HPI based on yearly average and quarterly CAGRs respectively. | Macroeconomic variables (5 year averages) (audited)1 | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Upside 2 | Upside 1 | Baseline | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | | As at 31 December 2025 | % | % | % | % | % | | UK GDP2 | 2.7 | 2.0 | 1.4 | 0.9 | 0.3 | | UK unemployment6 | 4.1 | 4.5 | 4.8 | 5.5 | 6.2 | | UK HPI7 | 6.1 | 4.5 | 3.0 | 0.6 | (2.0) | | UK bank rate | 2.9 | 3.2 | 3.6 | 2.7 | 1.7 | | US GDP5 | 2.7 | 2.4 | 2.0 | 1.1 | 0.1 | | US unemployment6 | 3.9 | 4.1 | 4.4 | 5.4 | 6.3 | | US HPI7 | 4.8 | 3.6 | 2.4 | 1.9 | 1.5 | | US federal funds rate | 2.9 | 3.2 | 3.5 | 3.1 | 2.5 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | UK GDP2 | 2.6 | 2.0 | 1.4 | 0.9 | 0.5 | | UK unemployment6 | 3.7 | 4.0 | 4.4 | 5.3 | 6.1 | | UK HPI7 | 6.4 | 4.7 | 3.0 | 0.8 | (1.6) | | UK bank rate | 3.5 | 3.9 | 4.2 | 3.3 | 2.4 | | US GDP5 | 2.9 | 2.5 | 2.2 | 1.7 | 1.2 | | US unemployment6 | 3.7 | 3.9 | 4.2 | 5.0 | 5.8 | | US HPI7 | 5.4 | 4.5 | 3.5 | 2.4 | 1.2 | | US federal funds rate | 3.6 | 4.0 | 4.2 | 3.2 | 2.1 | # Notes: 1 UK GDP = Real GDP growth seasonally adjusted; UK unemployment = UK unemployment rate 16-year+; UK HPI (31.12.24) = Halifax All Houses, All Buyers Index; UK HPI (31.12.25) = Halifax HPI Meth2 All Houses, All Buyers index; US GDP = Real GDP growth seasonally adjusted; US unemployment = US civilian unemployment rate 16-year+; US HPI = FHFA house price index. 20 quarter period starts from Q125 (2024: Q124). 2 Maximum growth relative to Q424 (2024: Q423), based on 20 quarter period in Upside scenarios; 5-year yearly average CAGR in Baseline; minimum growth relative to Q424 (2024: Q423), based on 20 quarter period in Downside scenarios. 3 Lowest quarter in Upside scenarios; 5-year average in Baseline; highest quarter in Downside scenarios. Period based on 20 quarters from Q125 (2024: Q124). 4 Maximum growth relative to Q424 (2024: Q423), based on 20 quarter period in Upside scenarios; 5-year quarter end CAGR in Baseline; minimum growth relative to Q424 (2024: Q423), based on 20 quarter period in Downside scenarios. 5 5-year yearly average CAGR, starting 2024 (2024: 2023). 6 5-year average, Period based on 20 quarters from Q125 (2024: Q124). 7 5-year quarter end CAGR, starting Q424 (2024: Q423). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) The graphs below plot the historical data for the quarterly, year on year GDP growth rate (Q v Q-4) and the quarterly unemployment rate in the UK and US as well as the forecasted data under each of the five scenarios. ![img-69.jpeg](img-69.jpeg) UK GDP (%) ![img-70.jpeg](img-70.jpeg) UK unemployment (%) US GDP (%) ![img-71.jpeg](img-71.jpeg) GDP growth based on year on year growth each quarter (Q/(Q-4)). ![img-72.jpeg](img-72.jpeg) US unemployment (%) --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## ECL sensitivity analysis (audited) The table below shows the modelled ECL assuming each of the five modelled scenarios are 100% weighted with the dispersion of results around the Baseline, highlighting the impact on exposure and ECL across the scenarios. Model exposure uses exposure at default (EAD) values and is not directly comparable to gross exposure used in other disclosures. | As at 31 December 2025 | Scenarios | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Weighted1 | Upside 2 | Upside 1 | Baseline | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | | Stage 1 Model exposure (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 149,004 | 151,314 | 150,144 | 148,760 | 146,786 | 144,360 | | Retail credit cards2 | 61,320 | 61,096 | 61,204 | 61,325 | 61,569 | 61,724 | | Retail other | 6,260 | 6,378 | 6,326 | 6,268 | 6,106 | 5,927 | | Corporate loans2 | 220,292 | 222,057 | 221,337 | 220,646 | 218,634 | 213,827 | | Stage 1 Model ECL (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 3 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 6 | 13 | | Retail credit cards2 | 561 | 523 | 541 | 561 | 599 | 637 | | Retail other | 32 | 30 | 31 | 31 | 35 | 38 | | Corporate loans2 | 231 | 201 | 212 | 221 | 274 | 329 | | Stage 1 Coverage (%) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Retail credit cards | 0.9 | 0.9 | 0.9 | 0.9 | 1.0 | 1.0 | | Retail other | 0.5 | 0.5 | 0.5 | 0.5 | 0.6 | 0.6 | | Corporate loans | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.2 | | Stage 2 Model exposure (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 13,586 | 11,276 | 12,446 | 13,830 | 15,804 | 18,230 | | Retail credit cards2 | 5,307 | 5,133 | 5,224 | 5,301 | 5,478 | 5,759 | | Retail other | 1,164 | 1,046 | 1,098 | 1,156 | 1,318 | 1,497 | | Corporate loans2 | 18,172 | 16,264 | 17,037 | 17,836 | 19,979 | 24,927 | | Stage 2 Model ECL (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 16 | 6 | 8 | 11 | 33 | 79 | | Retail credit cards2 | 1,183 | 1,099 | 1,138 | 1,175 | 1,277 | 1,415 | | Retail other | 81 | 67 | 72 | 77 | 102 | 134 | | Corporate loans2 | 477 | 383 | 415 | 454 | 604 | 879 | | Stage 2 Coverage (%) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.2 | 0.4 | | Retail credit cards | 22.3 | 21.4 | 21.8 | 22.2 | 23.3 | 24.6 | | Retail other | 7.0 | 6.4 | 6.6 | 6.7 | 7.7 | 9.0 | | Corporate loans | 2.6 | 2.4 | 2.4 | 2.5 | 3.0 | 3.5 | | Stage 3 Model exposure (£m)3 | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 1,621 | 1,621 | 1,621 | 1,621 | 1,621 | 1,621 | | Retail credit cards2 | 2,158 | 2,158 | 2,158 | 2,158 | 2,158 | 2,158 | | Retail other | 128 | 128 | 128 | 128 | 128 | 128 | | Corporate loans2 | 3,650 | 3,650 | 3,650 | 3,650 | 3,650 | 3,650 | | Stage 3 Model ECL (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 43 | 32 | 35 | 38 | 59 | 98 | | Retail credit cards2 | 1,592 | 1,548 | 1,573 | 1,596 | 1,632 | 1,663 | | Retail other | 79 | 76 | 77 | 77 | 80 | 87 | | Corporate loans2,4 | 60 | 57 | 57 | 59 | 64 | 71 | | Stage 3 Coverage (%) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 2.7 | 2.0 | 2.2 | 2.3 | 3.6 | 6.0 | | Retail credit cards | 73.8 | 71.7 | 72.9 | 74.0 | 75.6 | 77.1 | | Retail other | 61.7 | 59.4 | 60.2 | 60.2 | 62.5 | 68.0 | | Corporate loans4 | 1.6 | 1.6 | 1.6 | 1.6 | 1.8 | 1.9 | | Total Model ECL (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 62 | 39 | 45 | 51 | 98 | 190 | | Retail credit cards2 | 3,336 | 3,170 | 3,252 | 3,332 | 3,508 | 3,715 | | Retail other | 192 | 173 | 180 | 185 | 217 | 259 | | Corporate loans2,4 | 768 | 641 | 684 | 734 | 942 | 1,279 | | Total Model ECL | 4,358 | 4,023 | 4,161 | 4,302 | 4,765 | 5,443 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) | Reconciliation to total ECL | £m | | --- | --- | | Total weighted model ECL | 4,358 | | ECL from individually assessed exposures4 | 672 | | ECL from benchmarked exposures and others5 | 542 | | ECL from debt securities at amortised cost | 22 | | ECL from held for sale assets (co-branded card portfolio) | (235) | | ECL from post model management adjustments | 368 | | Of which: ECL from economic uncertainty adjustments | 114 | | Total ECL | 5,727 | # Notes: 1. Model exposures are allocated to a stage based on an individual scenario rather than a probability-weighted approach as required for Barclays reported impairment allowances. As a result, it is not possible to back solve the final reported weighted ECL from individual scenarios given balances may be assigned to a different stage dependent on the scenario. 2. Model exposure and ECL reported within Retail credit cards and Corporate loans continue to include a co-branded card portfolio in USCB, classified as assets held for sale. 3. Model exposures allocated to Stage 3 do not change in any of the scenarios as the transition criteria relies only on observable evidence of default as at 31 December 2025 and not on the macroeconomic scenario. 4. Material corporate loan defaults are individually assessed across different recovery strategies. As a result, ECL of £672m is reported as an individually assessed impairment in the reconciliation table. 5. ECL from benchmarked exposures and others includes ECL on Tesco Bank of £400m calculated using a benchmarked approach based on UK cards and UK retail loans. The sensitivity of these exposures would materially reflect the sensitivity of the benchmarked model. The use of five scenarios with associated weighting results in a total weighted ECL uplift from the Baseline ECL of 1.3%. Retail mortgages: Total weighted ECL of £62m represents a 21.6% increase over the Baseline ECL (£51m). Total ECL increases to £190m under the Downside 2 scenario, driven by a fall in UK HPI. Retail credit cards: Total weighted ECL of £3,336m is broadly aligned to the Baseline ECL (£3,332m). Total ECL increases to £3,715m under the Downside 2 scenario, driven by an increase in UK and US unemployment rate. Retail other: Total weighted ECL of £192m represents a 3.8% increase over the Baseline ECL (£185m). Total ECL increases to £259m under the Downside 2 scenario, largely driven by an increase in UK unemployment rate. Corporate loans: Total weighted ECL of £768m represents a 4.6% increase over the Baseline ECL (£734m). Total ECL increases to £1,279 under the Downside 2 scenario, driven by a decrease in UK and US GDP. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) | As at 31 December 2024 | Scenarios1 | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Weighted2 | Upside 2 | Upside 1 | Baseline | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | | Stage 1 Model exposure (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 139,086 | 140,828 | 140,079 | 139,188 | 136,671 | 134,861 | | Retail credit cards | 63,937 | 63,821 | 63,859 | 63,894 | 63,980 | 63,975 | | Retail other | 7,952 | 8,074 | 8,025 | 7,968 | 7,804 | 7,614 | | Corporate loans | 213,905 | 216,064 | 215,215 | 214,293 | 212,007 | 207,062 | | Stage 1 Model ECL (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 1 | — | 1 | 1 | 3 | 6 | | Retail credit cards | 535 | 512 | 523 | 534 | 560 | 586 | | Retail other | 34 | 32 | 32 | 33 | 36 | 40 | | Corporate loans | 270 | 235 | 247 | 258 | 311 | 363 | | Stage 1 Coverage (%) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Retail credit cards | 0.8 | 0.8 | 0.8 | 0.8 | 0.9 | 0.9 | | Retail other | 0.4 | 0.4 | 0.4 | 0.4 | 0.5 | 0.5 | | Corporate loans | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.2 | | Stage 2 Model exposure (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 20,401 | 18,178 | 19,072 | 20,134 | 23,359 | 26,339 | | Retail credit cards | 6,904 | 6,747 | 6,817 | 6,889 | 7,052 | 7,310 | | Retail other | 1,232 | 1,110 | 1,159 | 1,215 | 1,380 | 1,570 | | Corporate loans | 21,197 | 18,889 | 19,793 | 20,827 | 23,238 | 28,340 | | Stage 2 Model ECL (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 4 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 8 | 16 | | Retail credit cards | 1,473 | 1,387 | 1,422 | 1,459 | 1,567 | 1,714 | | Retail other | 81 | 68 | 72 | 77 | 101 | 134 | | Corporate loans | 532 | 424 | 461 | 505 | 655 | 932 | | Stage 2 Coverage (%) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | | Retail credit cards | 21.3 | 20.6 | 20.9 | 21.2 | 22.2 | 23.4 | | Retail other | 6.6 | 6.1 | 6.2 | 6.3 | 7.3 | 8.5 | | Corporate loans | 2.5 | 2.2 | 2.3 | 2.4 | 2.8 | 3.3 | | Stage 3 Model exposure (£m)3 | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 1,062 | 1,062 | 1,062 | 1,062 | 1,062 | 1,062 | | Retail credit cards | 2,197 | 2,197 | 2,197 | 2,197 | 2,197 | 2,197 | | Retail other | 158 | 158 | 158 | 158 | 158 | 158 | | Corporate loans | 4,051 | 4,051 | 4,051 | 4,051 | 4,051 | 4,051 | | Stage 3 Model ECL (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 19 | 12 | 14 | 17 | 29 | 41 | | Retail credit cards | 1,625 | 1,585 | 1,606 | 1,627 | 1,663 | 1,695 | | Retail other | 92 | 90 | 91 | 92 | 95 | 97 | | Corporate loans4 | 71 | 66 | 67 | 69 | 79 | 89 | | Stage 3 Coverage (%) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 1.8 | 1.1 | 1.3 | 1.6 | 2.7 | 3.9 | | Retail credit cards | 74.0 | 72.1 | 73.1 | 74.1 | 75.7 | 77.2 | | Retail other | 58.2 | 57.0 | 57.6 | 58.2 | 60.1 | 61.4 | | Corporate loans4 | 1.8 | 1.6 | 1.7 | 1.7 | 2.0 | 2.2 | | Total Model ECL (£m) | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 24 | 13 | 17 | 21 | 40 | 63 | | Retail credit cards | 3,633 | 3,484 | 3,551 | 3,620 | 3,790 | 3,995 | | Retail other | 207 | 190 | 195 | 202 | 232 | 271 | | Corporate loans4 | 873 | 725 | 775 | 832 | 1,045 | 1,384 | | Total Model ECL | 4,737 | 4,412 | 4,538 | 4,675 | 5,107 | 5,713 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) | Reconciliation to total ECL | £m | | --- | --- | | Total weighted model ECL | 4,737 | | ECL from individually assessed exposures4 | 461 | | ECL from benchmarked exposures and others5 | 358 | | ECL from debt securities at amortised cost | 23 | | ECL from held for sale assets (co-branded card portfolio) | (282) | | ECL from post model management adjustments | 235 | | Of which: ECL from economic uncertainty adjustments | 78 | | Total ECL | 5,532 | # Notes: 1. Model exposure and ECL reported within Retail credit cards and Retail Other excludes the German consumer finance business, sale of which completed after the balance sheet date. Model exposure and ECL reported within Retail credit cards and Corporate loans continue to include a co-branded card portfolio, as its sale is expected to close in 2026. 2. Model exposures are allocated to a stage based on an individual scenario rather than a probability-weighted approach as required for Barclays reported impairment allowances. As a result, it is not possible to back solve the final reported weighted ECL from individual scenarios given balances may be assigned to a different stage dependent on the scenario. 3. Model exposures allocated to Stage 3 do not change in any of the scenarios as the transition criteria relies only on observable evidence of default as at 31 December 2024 and not on the macroeconomic scenario. 4. Material corporate loan defaults are individually assessed across different recovery strategies. As a result, ECL of £461m is reported as an individually assessed impairment in the reconciliation table. 5. ECL from benchmarked exposures and others includes ECL on Tesco Bank of £209m calculated using a benchmarked approach based on UK cards and UK retail loans. The sensitivity of these exposures would materially reflect the sensitivity of the benchmarked model. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Analysis of the concentration of credit risk A concentration of credit risk exists when a number of counterparties are located in a common geographical region or are engaged in similar activities and have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic or other conditions. The Group implements limits on concentrations in order to mitigate the risk. The table below presents an industry credit risk concentration analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost net of impairment allowance including breakdown by geographical location of the counterparty or customers, impairment stage, maturity and an indicator of inclusion in carbon-related sectors. A further table is included with geography, impairment stage and maturity allocation of debt securities at amortised cost, off- balance sheet commitments and financial guarantees and contingent liabilities at amortised cost. Further detail on the Group policies with regard to managing concentration risk is presented in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). Credit risk concentration by Industry for contractual maturity, staging and geography Loans and advances at amortised cost net of impairment allowance | Industry | Geography (audited) | | | | | Stage (audited) | | | | Maturity | | | | Carbon related sectors1 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | United Kingdom | Americas | Europe | Others | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 32 | Total | < 1 year | 1-5 Years | >5 years | Total | | | As at 31 December 2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | Agriculture, Food and Forest Products | 3,153 | — | 74 | — | 3,227 | 2,649 | 412 | 166 | 3,227 | 642 | 1,239 | 1,346 | 3,227 | Yes | | Mining and Quarrying | 689 | 358 | 221 | 8 | 1,276 | 1,233 | 36 | 7 | 1,276 | 834 | 347 | 95 | 1,276 | Yes | | Manufacturing | 3,841 | 1,150 | 760 | 361 | 6,112 | 4,327 | 1,574 | 211 | 6,112 | 3,068 | 2,472 | 572 | 6,112 | Yes | | Government and central bank | 2,538 | — | 118 | 478 | 3,134 | 2,979 | 37 | 118 | 3,134 | 153 | 455 | 2,526 | 3,134 | | | Banks | 717 | 3,435 | 1,746 | 2,740 | 8,638 | 8,638 | — | — | 8,638 | 8,591 | 46 | 1 | 8,638 | | | Energy and water | 2,219 | 1,069 | 294 | 324 | 3,906 | 3,559 | 177 | 170 | 3,906 | 866 | 1,730 | 1,310 | 3,906 | Yes | | Materials and Building | 20,677 | 2,414 | 398 | 365 | 23,854 | 21,356 | 2,199 | 299 | 23,854 | 4,761 | 13,251 | 5,842 | 23,854 | Yes | | Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure | 7,846 | 675 | 251 | 509 | 9,281 | 7,492 | 1,574 | 215 | 9,281 | 3,433 | 5,083 | 765 | 9,281 | | | Transport and storage | 928 | 344 | 205 | 125 | 1,602 | 1,377 | 112 | 113 | 1,602 | 344 | 1,070 | 188 | 1,602 | Yes | | Home Loans | 175,327 | 118 | 832 | 1,056 | 177,333 | 161,637 | 13,813 | 1,883 | 177,333 | 1,983 | 8,912 | 166,438 | 177,333 | Yes | | Business and other services | 13,154 | 5,614 | 4,024 | 1,354 | 24,146 | 20,677 | 2,679 | 790 | 24,146 | 7,252 | 14,640 | 2,254 | 24,146 | | | Other Financial Institutions | 6,021 | 30,761 | 8,521 | 2,845 | 48,148 | 46,359 | 1,523 | 266 | 48,148 | 15,074 | 27,033 | 6,041 | 48,148 | | | Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending | 27,615 | 20,939 | 1,410 | 902 | 50,866 | 45,405 | 4,820 | 641 | 50,866 | 10,508 | 20,291 | 20,067 | 50,866 | | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 264,725 | 66,877 | 18,854 | 11,067 | 361,523 | 327,688 | 28,956 | 4,879 | 361,523 | 57,509 | 96,569 | 207,445 | 361,523 | | | Debt securities at amortised cost2 | 28,143 | 19,395 | 17,523 | 3,414 | 68,475 | 68,113 | 362 | — | 68,475 | 10,664 | 31,655 | 26,156 | 68,475 | | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost including debt securities | 292,868 | 86,272 | 36,377 | 14,481 | 429,998 | 395,801 | 29,318 | 4,879 | 429,998 | 68,173 | 128,224 | 233,601 | 429,998 | | | Contingent liabilities | 5,521 | 12,320 | 5,084 | 1,544 | 24,469 | 22,448 | 1,905 | 116 | 24,469 | 24,469 | — | — | 24,469 | | | Loan commitments | 118,101 | 239,886 | 35,665 | 9,662 | 403,314 | 388,045 | 14,568 | 701 | 403,314 | 403,294 | 17 | 3 | 403,314 | | | Total off-balance sheet2 | 123,622 | 252,206 | 40,749 | 11,206 | 427,783 | 410,493 | 16,473 | 817 | 427,783 | 427,763 | 17 | 3 | 427,783 | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Loans and advances at amortised cost net of impairment allowance | Industry | Geography (audited) | | | | | Stage (audited) | | | | Maturity | | | | Carbon related sectors1 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | United Kingdom | Americas | Europe | Others | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 32 | Total | < 1 year | 1-5 Years | >5 years | Total | | | As at 31 December 2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | Agriculture, Food and Forest Products | 3,430 | — | — | — | 3,430 | 2,518 | 484 | 428 | 3,430 | 769 | 1,109 | 1,552 | 3,430 | Yes | | Mining and Quarrying | 515 | 708 | 189 | — | 1,412 | 1,335 | 76 | 1 | 1,412 | 346 | 1,060 | 6 | 1,412 | Yes | | Manufacturing | 3,578 | 1,418 | 828 | 349 | 6,173 | 4,764 | 1,237 | 172 | 6,173 | 3,151 | 2,715 | 307 | 6,173 | Yes | | Government and central bank | 3,373 | — | 2 | 342 | 3,717 | 3,674 | 43 | — | 3,717 | 254 | 291 | 3,172 | 3,717 | | | Banks | 730 | 3,573 | 1,301 | 2,721 | 8,325 | 8,323 | 2 | — | 8,325 | 8,166 | 159 | — | 8,325 | | | Energy and water | 2,109 | 401 | 203 | 287 | 3,000 | 2,537 | 206 | 257 | 3,000 | 809 | 1,300 | 891 | 3,000 | Yes | | Materials and Building | 18,502 | 2,816 | 399 | 220 | 21,937 | 18,987 | 2,536 | 414 | 21,937 | 4,535 | 10,944 | 6,458 | 21,937 | Yes | | Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure | 7,934 | 831 | 294 | 616 | 9,675 | 7,850 | 1,565 | 260 | 9,675 | 3,647 | 4,943 | 1,085 | 9,675 | | | Transport and storage | 763 | 421 | 300 | 96 | 1,580 | 1,321 | 164 | 95 | 1,580 | 480 | 925 | 175 | 1,580 | Yes | | Home Loans | 166,181 | 113 | 899 | 868 | 168,061 | 146,652 | 19,534 | 1,875 | 168,061 | 1,674 | 9,585 | 156,802 | 168,061 | Yes | | Business and other services | 13,266 | 5,196 | 3,646 | 1,031 | 23,139 | 19,301 | 3,049 | 789 | 23,139 | 6,510 | 13,524 | 3,105 | 23,139 | | | Other Financial Institutions | 6,772 | 30,791 | 7,121 | 2,553 | 47,237 | 45,689 | 1,474 | 74 | 47,237 | 16,552 | 24,002 | 6,683 | 47,237 | | | Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending | 26,745 | 20,079 | 994 | 769 | 48,587 | 42,885 | 5,032 | 670 | 48,587 | 10,505 | 19,218 | 18,864 | 48,587 | | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 253,898 | 66,347 | 16,176 | 9,852 | 346,273 | 305,836 | 35,402 | 5,035 | 346,273 | 57,398 | 89,775 | 199,100 | 346,273 | | | Debt securities at amortised cost2 | 25,939 | 19,721 | 15,558 | 6,992 | 68,210 | 64,976 | 3,234 | — | 68,210 | 7,051 | 32,631 | 28,528 | 68,210 | | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost including debt securities | 279,837 | 86,068 | 31,734 | 16,844 | 414,483 | 370,812 | 38,636 | 5,035 | 414,483 | 64,449 | 122,406 | 227,628 | 414,483 | | | Contingent liabilities | 5,721 | 10,742 | 5,514 | 2,381 | 24,358 | 21,028 | 2,835 | 495 | 24,358 | 24,358 | — | — | 24,358 | | | Loan commitments | 114,458 | 243,619 | 41,361 | 8,361 | 407,799 | 391,227 | 15,893 | 679 | 407,799 | 407,731 | 68 | — | 407,799 | | | Total off-balance sheet3 | 120,179 | 254,361 | 46,875 | 10,742 | 432,157 | 412,255 | 18,728 | 1,174 | 432,157 | 432,089 | 68 | — | 432,157 | | Notes: 1 Refer to Carbon related assets table on page 215 for more details on the "Exposures towards sectors that highly contribute to carbon related assets" under the respective Industry sectors. 2 The Off-balance sheet contingent liabilities and loan commitments excludes the fair value balance of £22,197m in 2025 (2024: £16,338m) and includes exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale. 3 Debt securities at amortised cost primarily includes £40,375m (2024: £39,699m) in Government and central bank, £25,064m (2024: £24,007m) in other financial institutions, £414m (2024: £1,388m) in materials & building and £802m (2024: £1,249m) in Banks. - For analysis of Debt securities by issuer, refer to "Analysis of Debt Securities" on page 267. 4 Loans and advances stage 3 includes POCI assets of £39m (2024: £57m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## The approach to management and representation of credit quality ### Asset credit quality The credit quality distribution is based on the IFRS 9 12-month probability of default (PD) at the reporting date to ensure comparability with other ECL disclosures in the Expected Credit Losses section. The following internal measures are used to determine credit quality for loans: | PD Range % | Internal Default Grade Band | Default Probability | | | Credit Quality description | Moody's | Standard and Poor's | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | >Min | Mid | <=Max | | | | | 0.00 to < 0.15 | 1 | 0.00% | 0.01% | 0.02% | | Aaa, Aa1, Aa2 | AAA, AA+, AA, AA- | | | 2 | 0.02% | 0.03% | 0.03% | Strong | Aa3 | AA- | | | 3 | 0.03% | 0.04% | 0.05% | | A1, A2, A3 | A+, A | | | 4 | 0.05% | 0.08% | 0.10% | | A1, A2, A3 | A- | | | 5 | 0.10% | 0.13% | 0.15% | | Baa1 | BBB+ | | 0.15 to < 0.25 | 6 | 0.15% | 0.18% | 0.20% | Strong | Baa2 | BBB | | | 7 | 0.20% | 0.23% | 0.25% | | Baa2 | BBB- | | 0.25 to < 0.50 | 8 | 0.25% | 0.28% | 0.30% | | Baa3 | BBB- | | | 9 | 0.30% | 0.35% | 0.40% | Strong | Baa3 | BB+ | | | 10 | 0.40% | 0.45% | 0.50% | | Ba1 | BB+ | | 0.50 to < 0.75 | 11 | 0.50% | 0.55% | 0.60% | Strong | Ba1 | BB | | | 12 | 0.60% | 0.68% | 0.75% | Satisfactory | Ba2 | BB | | 0.75 to < 2.50 | 12 | 0.75% | 0.98% | 1.20% | | Ba2, Ba3 | BB, BB- | | | 13 | 1.20% | 1.38% | 1.55% | Satisfactory | Ba3 | BB- | | | 14 | 1.55% | 1.85% | 2.15% | | B1 | B+ | | | 15 | 2.15% | 2.33% | 2.50% | | B1, B2 | B+ | | 2.50 to < 10.00 | 15 | 2.50% | 2.78% | 3.05% | | B1, B2 | B+ | | | 16 | 3.05% | 3.75% | 4.45% | | B2 | B | | | 17 | 4.45% | 5.40% | 6.35% | Satisfactory | B3 | B | | | 18 | 6.35% | 7.50% | 8.65% | | B3, Caa1 | B- | | | 19 | 8.65% | 9.33% | 10.00% | | Caa2 | B- | | 10.00 to < 100.00 | 19 | 10.00% | 10.68% | 11.35% | Satisfactory | Caa2 | B- | | | 20 | 11.35% | 15.00% | 18.65% | Higher Risk | Caa2 | CCC+ | | | 21 | 18.65% | 30.00% | 99.99% | Higher Risk | Caa3, Ca, C | CCC, CCC-, CC, C | | 100.00 (Default) | 22 | 100% | 100% | 100% | Credit Impaired | D | D | For retail clients, a range of analytical tools is used to derive the probability of default of clients at inception and on an ongoing basis. For loans that are not past due, these descriptions can be summarised as follows: **Strong**: there is a very high likelihood of the asset being recovered in full. **Satisfactory**: while there is a high likelihood that the asset will be recovered and therefore, of no cause for concern to the Group, the asset may not be collateralised, or may relate to unsecured retail facilities. At the lower end of this grade there are customers that are being more carefully monitored, for example, corporate customers which are indicating some evidence of deterioration, home loans with a high loan to value, and unsecured retail loans operating outside normal product guidelines. **Higher risk**: there is concern over the obligor's ability to make payments when due. However, these have not yet converted to actual delinquency. There may also be doubts over the value of collateral or security provided. However, the borrower or counterparty is continuing to make payments when due and is expected to settle all outstanding amounts of principal and interest. Loans that are past due are monitored closely, with impairment allowances raised as appropriate and in line with the Group's impairment policies. These loans are all considered higher risk for the purpose of this analysis of credit quality. ### Debt securities For assets held at fair value, the carrying value on the balance sheet will include, among other things, the credit risk of the issuer. Most listed and some unlisted securities are rated by external rating agencies. The Group mainly uses external credit ratings provided by Standard & Poor's, Fitch or Moody's. Where such ratings are not available or are not current, the Group will use its own internal ratings for the securities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Balance sheet credit quality The following tables present the credit quality of the Group’s assets exposed to credit risk. ## Overview As at 31 December 2025, the ratio of the Group’s on-balance sheet assets classified as strong (0.0 to <0.60%) remained stable at 87% (2024: 86%) of total assets exposed to credit risk. Further analysis of debt securities by issuer and issuer type and netting and collateral arrangements on derivative financial instruments is presented in the Analysis of debt securities section and Analysis of derivatives section. | Balance sheet credit quality (audited) | | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | PD Range | | | | PD range | | | | | | 0.0 to <0.60% £m | 0.60 to <11.35% £m | 11.35 to 100% £m | Total £m | 0.0 to <0.60% % | 0.60 to <11.35% % | 11.35 to 100% % | Total % | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | 229,752 | — | — | 229,752 | 100 | — | — | 100 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 117,555 | 12,970 | 7 | 130,532 | 90 | 10 | — | 100 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost: | | | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 167,674 | 6,805 | 2,854 | 177,333 | 94 | 4 | 2 | 100 | | Retail credit cards | 12,288 | 22,612 | 2,052 | 36,952 | 33 | 61 | 6 | 100 | | Retail other | 7,928 | 5,601 | 385 | 13,914 | 57 | 40 | 3 | 100 | | Corporate loans | 100,457 | 28,503 | 4,364 | 133,324 | 76 | 21 | 3 | 100 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 288,347 | 63,521 | 9,655 | 361,523 | 80 | 17 | 3 | 100 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 67,920 | 495 | 60 | 68,475 | 99 | 1 | — | 100 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 15,672 | 1,950 | — | 17,622 | 89 | 11 | — | 100 | | Trading portfolio assets: | | | | | | | | | | Debt securities | 79,724 | 14,144 | 491 | 94,359 | 84 | 15 | 1 | 100 | | Traded loans | 5,339 | 5,241 | 1,669 | 12,249 | 43 | 43 | 14 | 100 | | Total trading portfolio assets | 85,063 | 19,385 | 2,160 | 106,608 | 80 | 18 | 2 | 100 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement: | | | | | | | | | | Loans and advances | 27,093 | 20,037 | 542 | 47,672 | 57 | 42 | 1 | 100 | | Debt securities | 2,030 | 930 | 254 | 3,214 | 63 | 29 | 8 | 100 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | 96,857 | 35,131 | 500 | 132,488 | 73 | 27 | — | 100 | | Other financial assets | 64 | 19 | — | 83 | 77 | 23 | — | 100 | | Total financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 126,044 | 56,117 | 1,296 | 183,457 | 68 | 31 | 1 | 100 | | Derivative financial instruments | 237,405 | 14,617 | 437 | 252,459 | 94 | 6 | — | 100 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 74,328 | 62 | — | 74,390 | 100 | — | — | 100 | | Other assets | 780 | 65 | 2 | 847 | 92 | 8 | — | 100 | | Assets held for sale | 2,461 | 3,130 | 210 | 5,801 | 42 | 54 | 4 | 100 | | Total on-balance sheet | 1,245,327 | 172,312 | 13,827 | 1,431,466 | 87 | 12 | 1 | 100 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Balance sheet credit quality (audited) | | PD Range | | | PD range | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 0.0 to <0.60% £m | 0.60 to <11.35% £m | 11.35 to 100% £m | Total £m | 0.0 to <0.60% % | 0.60 to <11.35% % | 11.35 to 100% % | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | 210,184 | — | — | 210,184 | 100 | — | — | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 104,446 | 15,371 | 26 | 119,843 | 87 | 13 | — | | Loans and advances at amortised cost: | | | | | | | | | Retail mortgages | 160,441 | 5,332 | 2,288 | 168,061 | 96 | 3 | 1 | | Retail credit cards | 11,157 | 21,779 | 1,843 | 34,779 | 32 | 63 | 5 | | Retail other | 6,014 | 7,390 | 404 | 13,808 | 44 | 53 | 3 | | Corporate loans | 95,560 | 29,303 | 4,762 | 129,625 | 73 | 23 | 4 | | Total loans and advances at amortised cost | 273,172 | 63,804 | 9,297 | 346,273 | 79 | 18 | 3 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 67,645 | 565 | — | 68,210 | 99 | 1 | — | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 2,966 | 1,768 | — | 4,734 | 63 | 37 | — | | Trading portfolio assets: | | | | | | | | | Debt securities | 65,994 | 11,478 | 542 | 78,014 | 84 | 15 | 1 | | Traded loans | 2,543 | 7,442 | 3,485 | 13,470 | 19 | 55 | 26 | | Total trading portfolio assets | 68,537 | 18,920 | 4,027 | 91,484 | 75 | 21 | 4 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement: | | | | | | | | | Loans and advances | 25,051 | 19,444 | 573 | 45,068 | 56 | 43 | 1 | | Debt securities | 1,756 | 1,156 | 53 | 2,965 | 59 | 39 | 2 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | 103,571 | 37,565 | 637 | 141,773 | 74 | 26 | — | | Other financial assets | 88 | 22 | — | 110 | 80 | 20 | — | | Total financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 130,466 | 58,187 | 1,263 | 189,916 | 68 | 31 | 1 | | Derivative financial instruments | 275,232 | 18,104 | 194 | 293,530 | 94 | 6 | — | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 78,005 | 50 | — | 78,055 | 100 | — | — | | Other assets | 815 | 69 | 7 | 891 | 91 | 8 | 1 | | Assets held for sale | 1,178 | 8,235 | 131 | 9,544 | 12 | 87 | 1 | | Total on-balance sheet | 1,212,646 | 185,073 | 14,945 | 1,412,664 | 86 | 13 | 1 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Credit exposures by internal PD grade The below tables represent credit risk profiles by PD grade for loans and advances at amortised cost, contingent liabilities and loan commitments. Stage 1 higher risk assets, presented gross of associated collateral held, are of weaker credit quality but have not significantly deteriorated since origination. IFRS 9 Stage 1 and Stage 2 classification is not dependent solely on the absolute probability of default but on elements that determine a significant increase in credit risk, including relative movement in probability of default since initial recognition. There is therefore no direct relationship between credit quality and IFRS 9 stage classification. Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail mortgages (audited) | Grade | PD range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 11,602 | 68 | — | — | 11,670 | — | — | — | — | — | 11,670 | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 91,122 | 2,291 | — | — | 93,413 | 2 | 1 | — | — | 3 | 93,410 | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 39,834 | 2,907 | — | — | 42,741 | 5 | 2 | — | — | 7 | 42,734 | — | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 17,191 | 2,681 | — | — | 19,872 | 10 | 2 | — | — | 12 | 19,860 | 0.1 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 1,548 | 2,704 | — | — | 4,252 | — | 4 | — | — | 4 | 4,248 | 0.1 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 296 | 2,265 | — | — | 2,561 | — | 4 | — | — | 4 | 2,557 | 0.2 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 61 | 913 | — | — | 974 | — | 3 | — | — | 3 | 971 | 0.3 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 1,967 | — | 1,967 | — | — | 84 | — | 84 | 1,883 | 4.3 | | Total | | | 161,654 | 13,829 | 1,967 | — | 177,450 | 17 | 16 | 84 | — | 117 | 177,333 | 0.1 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail credit cards (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 1,749 | 38 | — | — | 1,787 | 40 | 23 | — | — | 63 | 1,724 | 3.5 | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 2,360 | 5 | — | — | 2,365 | 3 | — | — | — | 3 | 2,362 | 0.1 | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 3,082 | 5 | — | — | 3,087 | 7 | — | — | — | 7 | 3,080 | 0.2 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 5,132 | 12 | — | — | 5,144 | 22 | — | — | — | 22 | 5,122 | 0.4 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 11,536 | 125 | — | — | 11,661 | 127 | 8 | — | — | 135 | 11,526 | 1.2 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 9,431 | 2,344 | — | — | 11,775 | 321 | 368 | — | — | 689 | 11,086 | 5.9 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 433 | 1,950 | — | — | 2,383 | 46 | 795 | — | — | 841 | 1,542 | 35.3 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 2,055 | 24 | 2,079 | — | — | 1,569 | — | 1,569 | 510 | 75.5 | | Total | | | 33,723 | 4,479 | 2,055 | 24 | 40,281 | 566 | 1,194 | 1,569 | — | 3,329 | 36,952 | 8.3 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail other (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 46 | 1 | — | — | 47 | — | — | — | — | — | 47 | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 454 | 6 | — | — | 460 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 459 | 0.2 | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 889 | 12 | — | — | 901 | 2 | — | — | — | 2 | 899 | 0.2 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 6,491 | 63 | — | — | 6,554 | 28 | 3 | — | — | 31 | 6,523 | 0.5 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 2,894 | 266 | — | — | 3,160 | 23 | 11 | — | — | 34 | 3,126 | 1.1 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 1,515 | 1,066 | — | — | 2,581 | 39 | 67 | — | — | 106 | 2,475 | 4.1 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 60 | 304 | — | — | 364 | 8 | 102 | — | — | 110 | 254 | 30.2 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 349 | 15 | 364 | — | — | 233 | — | 233 | 131 | 64.0 | | Total | | | 12,349 | 1,718 | 349 | 15 | 14,431 | 101 | 183 | 233 | — | 517 | 13,914 | 3.6 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for corporate loans² (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 41,676 | 405 | — | — | 42,081 | 6 | 6 | — | — | 12 | 42,069 | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 25,812 | 40 | — | — | 25,852 | 8 | — | — | — | 8 | 25,844 | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 14,313 | 577 | — | — | 14,890 | 12 | 22 | — | — | 34 | 14,856 | 0.2 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 17,115 | 612 | — | — | 17,727 | 33 | 3 | — | — | 36 | 17,691 | 0.2 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 17,605 | 3,447 | — | — | 21,052 | 85 | 50 | — | — | 135 | 20,917 | 0.6 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 4,140 | 3,603 | — | — | 7,743 | 57 | 100 | — | — | 157 | 7,586 | 2.0 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 192 | 1,954 | — | — | 2,146 | 6 | 134 | — | — | 140 | 2,006 | 6.5 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 3,159 | — | 3,159 | — | — | 804 | — | 804 | 2,355 | 25.5 | | Total | | | 120,853 | 10,638 | 3,159 | — | 134,650 | 207 | 315 | 804 | — | 1,326 | 133,324 | 1.0 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for loans and advances at amortised cost² (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 55,073 | 512 | — | — | 55,585 | 46 | 29 | — | — | 75 | 55,510 | 0.1 | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 119,748 | 2,342 | — | — | 122,090 | 14 | 1 | — | — | 15 | 122,075 | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 58,118 | 3,501 | — | — | 61,619 | 26 | 24 | — | — | 50 | 61,569 | 0.1 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 45,929 | 3,368 | — | — | 49,297 | 93 | 8 | — | — | 101 | 49,196 | 0.2 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 33,583 | 6,542 | — | — | 40,125 | 235 | 73 | — | — | 308 | 39,817 | 0.8 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 15,382 | 9,278 | — | — | 24,660 | 417 | 539 | — | — | 956 | 23,704 | 3.9 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 746 | 5,121 | — | — | 5,867 | 60 | 1,034 | — | — | 1,094 | 4,773 | 18.6 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 7,530 | 39 | 7,569 | — | — | 2,690 | — | 2,690 | 4,879 | 35.5 | | Total | | | 328,579 | 30,664 | 7,530 | 39 | 366,812 | 891 | 1,708 | 2,690 | — | 5,289 | 361,523 | 1.4 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail mortgages (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 26,799 | 649 | — | — | 27,448 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 27,447 | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 90,420 | 6,864 | — | — | 97,284 | 16 | 3 | — | — | 19 | 97,265 | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 18,574 | 4,417 | — | — | 22,991 | 8 | 6 | — | — | 14 | 22,977 | 0.1 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 9,829 | 2,945 | — | — | 12,774 | 12 | 10 | — | — | 22 | 12,752 | 0.2 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 863 | 2,741 | — | — | 3,604 | 1 | 19 | — | — | 20 | 3,584 | 0.6 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 83 | 1,681 | — | — | 1,764 | — | 16 | — | — | 16 | 1,748 | 0.9 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 122 | 299 | — | — | 421 | — | 8 | — | — | 8 | 413 | 1.9 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 1,962 | — | 1,962 | — | — | 87 | — | 87 | 1,875 | 4.4 | | Total | | | 146,690 | 19,596 | 1,962 | — | 168,248 | 38 | 62 | 87 | — | 187 | 168,061 | 0.1 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail credit cards³ (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 119 | — | — | — | 119 | — | — | — | — | — | 119 | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 1,706 | 4 | — | — | 1,710 | 2 | — | — | — | 2 | 1,708 | 0.1 | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 3,592 | 5 | — | — | 3,597 | 9 | — | — | — | 9 | 3,588 | 0.3 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 5,758 | 10 | — | — | 5,768 | 26 | — | — | — | 26 | 5,742 | 0.5 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 10,298 | 171 | — | — | 10,469 | 179 | 12 | — | — | 191 | 10,278 | 1.8 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 9,330 | 2,907 | — | — | 12,237 | 290 | 446 | — | — | 736 | 11,501 | 6.0 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 323 | 1,920 | — | — | 2,243 | 47 | 789 | — | — | 836 | 1,407 | 37.3 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 1,903 | 40 | 1,943 | — | — | 1,507 | — | 1,507 | 436 | 77.6 | | Total | | | 31,126 | 5,017 | 1,903 | 40 | 38,086 | 553 | 1,247 | 1,507 | — | 3,307 | 34,779 | 8.7 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail other (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 76 | 1 | — | — | 77 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 76 | 1.3 | | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 575 | 5 | — | — | 580 | 2 | — | — | — | 2 | 578 | 0.3 | | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 774 | 6 | — | — | 780 | 4 | — | — | — | 4 | 776 | 0.5 | | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 4,539 | 59 | — | — | 4,598 | 11 | 3 | — | — | 14 | 4,584 | 0.3 | | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 5,762 | 239 | — | — | 6,001 | 82 | 10 | — | — | 92 | 5,909 | 1.5 | | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 656 | 887 | — | — | 1,543 | 21 | 41 | — | — | 62 | 1,481 | 4.0 | | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 68 | 176 | — | — | 244 | 17 | 57 | — | — | 74 | 170 | 30.3 | | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 378 | 17 | 395 | — | — | 161 | — | 161 | 234 | 40.8 | | | Total | | | 12,450 | 1,373 | 378 | 17 | 14,218 | 138 | 111 | 161 | — | 410 | 13,808 | 2.9 | | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for corporate loans³ (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 41,412 | 228 | 3 | — | 41,643 | 6 | 1 | 2 | — | 9 | 41,634 | — | | | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 24,082 | 145 | — | — | 24,227 | 10 | — | — | — | 10 | 24,217 | — | | | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 11,933 | 575 | — | — | 12,508 | 9 | 2 | — | — | 11 | 12,497 | 0.1 | | | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 16,861 | 377 | — | — | 17,238 | 23 | 3 | — | — | 26 | 17,212 | 0.2 | | | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 16,673 | 3,766 | — | — | 20,439 | 79 | 44 | — | — | 123 | 20,316 | 0.6 | | | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 5,331 | 3,857 | — | — | 9,188 | 73 | 128 | — | — | 201 | 8,987 | 2.2 | | | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 216 | 2,219 | — | — | 2,435 | 9 | 153 | — | — | 162 | 2,273 | 6.7 | | | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 3,113 | — | 3,113 | — | — | 624 | — | 624 | 2,489 | 20.0 | | | | Total | | | 116,508 | 11,167 | 3,116 | — | 130,791 | 209 | 331 | 626 | — | 1,166 | 129,625 | 0.9 | | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for loans and advances at amortised cost (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 68,406 | 878 | 3 | — | 69,287 | 8 | 1 | 2 | — | 11 | 69,276 | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 116,783 | 7,018 | — | — | 123,801 | 30 | 3 | — | — | 33 | 123,768 | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 34,873 | 5,003 | — | — | 39,876 | 30 | 8 | — | — | 38 | 39,838 | 0.1 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 36,987 | 3,391 | — | — | 40,378 | 72 | 16 | — | — | 88 | 40,290 | 0.2 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 33,596 | 6,917 | — | — | 40,513 | 341 | 85 | — | — | 426 | 40,087 | 1.1 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 15,400 | 9,332 | — | — | 24,732 | 384 | 631 | — | — | 1,015 | 23,717 | 4.1 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 729 | 4,614 | — | — | 5,343 | 73 | 1,007 | — | — | 1,080 | 4,263 | 20.2 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 7,356 | 57 | 7,413 | — | — | 2,379 | — | 2,379 | 5,034 | 32.1 | | Total | | | 306,774 | 37,153 | 7,359 | 57 | 351,343 | 938 | 1,751 | 2,381 | — | 5,070 | 346,273 | 1.4 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for contingent liabilities (audited) | Grade | PD range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1-3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 8,837 | — | — | — | 8,837 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 8,836 | — | | 4-5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 3,920 | 178 | — | — | 4,098 | 2 | — | — | — | 2 | 4,096 | — | | 6-8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 3,645 | 5 | — | — | 3,650 | 2 | — | — | — | 2 | 3,648 | 0.1 | | 9-11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 2,025 | 92 | — | — | 2,117 | 3 | — | — | — | 3 | 2,114 | 0.1 | | 12-14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 2,773 | 230 | — | — | 3,003 | 12 | 3 | — | — | 15 | 2,988 | 0.5 | | 15-19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 1,163 | 691 | — | — | 1,854 | 15 | 16 | — | — | 31 | 1,823 | 1.7 | | 20-21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 85 | 709 | — | — | 794 | 1 | 84 | — | — | 85 | 709 | 10.7 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 116 | — | 116 | — | — | 23 | — | 23 | 93 | 19.8 | | Total | | | 22,448 | 1,905 | 116 | — | 24,469 | 36 | 103 | 23 | — | 162 | 24,307 | 0.7 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for contingent liabilities (audited) | Grade | PD range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1-3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 8,132 | 310 | — | — | 8,442 | 1 | 1 | — | — | 2 | 8,440 | — | | | | 4-5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 4,934 | — | — | — | 4,934 | 2 | — | — | — | 2 | 4,932 | — | | | | 6-8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 2,717 | 391 | — | — | 3,108 | 2 | — | — | — | 2 | 3,106 | 0.1 | | | | 9-11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 2,177 | 119 | — | — | 2,296 | 4 | — | — | — | 4 | 2,292 | 0.2 | | | | 12-14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 2,309 | 563 | — | — | 2,872 | 12 | 7 | — | — | 19 | 2,853 | 0.7 | | | | 15-19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 730 | 937 | — | — | 1,667 | 22 | 36 | — | — | 58 | 1,609 | 3.5 | | | | 20-21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 29 | 515 | — | — | 544 | — | 82 | — | — | 82 | 462 | 15.1 | | | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 495 | — | 495 | — | — | 16 | — | 16 | 479 | 3.2 | | | | Total | | | 21,028 | 2,835 | 495 | — | 24,358 | 43 | 126 | 16 | — | 185 | 24,173 | 0.8 | | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for loan commitments¹² (audited) | Grade | PD range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1-3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 99,493 | 254 | — | — | 99,747 | 4 | — | — | — | 4 | 99,743 | — | | 4-5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 91,508 | 890 | — | — | 92,398 | 7 | — | — | — | 7 | 92,391 | — | | 6-8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 59,653 | 768 | — | — | 60,421 | 6 | 1 | — | — | 7 | 60,414 | — | | 9-11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 70,160 | 696 | — | — | 70,856 | 8 | — | — | — | 8 | 70,848 | — | | 12-14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 52,220 | 2,994 | — | — | 55,214 | 38 | 28 | — | — | 66 | 55,148 | 0.1 | | 15-19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 14,387 | 5,332 | — | — | 19,719 | 40 | 42 | — | — | 82 | 19,637 | 0.4 | | 20-21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 624 | 3,634 | — | — | 4,258 | 5 | 66 | — | — | 71 | 4,187 | 1.7 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 696 | 5 | 701 | — | — | 9 | — | 9 | 692 | 1.3 | | Total | | | 388,045 | 14,568 | 696 | 5 | 403,314 | 108 | 137 | 9 | — | 254 | 403,060 | 0.1 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for loan commitments¹² (audited) | Grade | PD range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at December 31 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1-3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 92,589 | 342 | — | — | 92,931 | 3 | — | — | — | 3 | 92,928 | — | | 4-5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 82,489 | 342 | — | — | 82,831 | 8 | — | — | — | 8 | 82,823 | — | | 6-8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 63,004 | 1,071 | — | — | 64,075 | 12 | 1 | — | — | 13 | 64,062 | — | | 9-11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 70,770 | 904 | — | — | 71,674 | 19 | 1 | — | — | 20 | 71,654 | — | | 12-14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 68,038 | 3,179 | — | — | 71,217 | 36 | 12 | — | — | 48 | 71,169 | 0.1 | | 15-19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 13,633 | 6,535 | — | — | 20,168 | 41 | 50 | — | — | 91 | 20,077 | 0.5 | | 20-21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 704 | 3,520 | — | — | 4,224 | 2 | 60 | — | — | 62 | 4,162 | 1.5 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 673 | 6 | 679 | — | — | 9 | — | 9 | 670 | 1.3 | | Total | | | 391,227 | 15,893 | 673 | 6 | 407,799 | 121 | 124 | 9 | — | 254 | 407,545 | 0.1 | Notes: 1 Excludes loan commitments and financial guarantees of £22.2bn (2024: £16.3bn) carried at fair value. 2 Reported off-balance sheet loan commitments also include exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale. 3 Exposures reported within Retail credit cards and Corporate loans does not include co-branded card portfolio which is classified as assets held for sale. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types This section provides an analysis of principal portfolios and businesses, in particular, home loans, credit cards, unsecured loans and other retail lending. The UK home loans portfolio comprises first lien home loans and accounts for 97% (2024: 97%) of the Group’s total home loan balances. | Home loans principal portfolios | | | | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | | | As at 31 December | 2025 | 2024 | | Gross loans and advances (£m) | 172,415 | 163,197 | | >90 day arrears, excluding recovery book (%) | 0.1 | 0.2 | | Annualised gross charge-off rates (%) | 0.5 | 0.5 | | Recovery book proportion of outstanding balances (%) | 0.6 | 0.6 | | Recovery book impairment coverage ratio (%)^{1} | 4.3 | 3.7 | **Note:** 1. Recovery Book Impairment Coverage Ratio excludes KMC. Within the UK home loans portfolio: - Gross loans and advances increased by £9.2bn (5.6%) reflecting a £10.2bn (7.0%) increase in Residential, partially offset by a decrease of £0.9bn (5.0%) in Buy-to-Let (BTL). - Owner-occupied interest-only home loans comprised 13% (2024: 15%) of total balances. The average balance weighted LTV on owner occupied loans increased to 55.1% (2024: 52.7%). - BTL home loans comprised 9.9% (2024: 11.0%) of total balances. In BTL, the average balance weighted LTV increased to 56.9% (2024: 55.7%). | Home loans principal portfolios - distribution of balances by LTV^{1} | | | | | | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Distribution of Balances | | | | Distribution of impairment allowance | | | | Coverage ratio | | | | | | Stage 1 % | Stage 2 % | Stage 3 % | Total % | Stage 1 % | Stage 2 % | Stage 3 % | Total % | Stage 1 % | Stage 2 % | Stage 3 % | Total % | | Barclays UK | | | | | | | | | | | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | <=75% | 73.4 | 6.9 | 0.9 | 81.2 | 3.3 | 14.1 | 49.9 | 67.3 | — | 0.1 | 2.5 | — | | >75% and <=90% | 16.0 | 1.0 | 0.1 | 17.1 | 4.3 | 6.3 | 11.7 | 22.3 | — | 0.3 | 7.3 | 0.1 | | >90% and <=100% | 1.7 | — | — | 1.7 | 0.8 | 0.5 | 5.4 | 6.7 | — | 0.7 | 22.7 | 0.2 | | >100% | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | 3.6 | 3.7 | — | 2.9 | 31.3 | 5.9 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | <=75% | 74.5 | 10.7 | 0.9 | 86.1 | 8.3 | 15.8 | 18.7 | 42.8 | — | 0.1 | 1.8 | — | | >75% and <=90% | 11.8 | 1.2 | 0.1 | 13.1 | 10.2 | 24.2 | 9.7 | 44.1 | 0.1 | 1.7 | 13.0 | 0.3 | | >90% and <=100% | 0.8 | — | — | 0.8 | 1.3 | 2.3 | 4.0 | 7.6 | 0.1 | 4.9 | 35.8 | 0.8 | | >100% | — | — | — | — | 0.2 | 1.4 | 3.9 | 5.5 | 1.6 | 45.9 | 68.7 | 24.8 | **Note:** 1. Portfolio marked to market based on the most updated valuation including recovery book balances. Updated valuations reflect the application of the latest HPI available as at 31 December 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Home loans principal portfolios – average LTV | As at 31 December | Barclays UK | | | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | | Overall portfolio LTV (%): | | | | Balance weighted % | 55.2 | 53.0 | | Valuation weighted % | 41.5 | 39.7 | | For >100% LTVs: | | | | Balances £m | 49 | 30 | | Marked to market collateral £m | 47 | 26 | | Average LTV: Balance weighted % | 143.8 | 190.3 | | Average LTV: Valuation weighted % | 120.6 | 142.0 | | % of Balances in Recoveries | 18.0 | 30.7 | Home loans principal portfolios - new lending | As at 31 December 2025 | Barclays UK | | | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | | New Home loan bookings (£m) | 34,326 | 23,895 | | New home loan proportion above 90% LTV (%) | 2.8 | 0.9 | | Average LTV on new home loan: balance weighted (%) | 69.6 | 65.5 | | Average LTV on new home loan: valuation weighted (%) | 61.1 | 56.3 | New Home loan bookings increased 44% to £34.3bn, in line with business strategy and larger mortgage market. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) The principal portfolios listed below accounted for 91% (2024: 91%) of the Group’s total retail credit cards and retail other. Retail Credit Cards and Retail Other | | Gross exposure £m | 30 day arrears rate, excluding recoveries book % | 90 day arrears rate, excluding recoveries book % | Annualised gross write-off rates % | Annualised net write-off rates % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | Barclays UK | | | | | | | UK cards^{1} | 17,169 | 0.8 | 0.2 | 1.0 | 0.8 | | UK personal loans^{1} | 8,515 | 1.1 | 0.5 | 0.7 | 0.6 | | Barclays Partner Finance | 1,210 | 0.7 | 0.3 | 1.2 | 1.2 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | | | | | | | US cards^{2} | 29,100 | 3.0 | 1.6 | 3.4 | 3.2 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | Barclays UK | | | | | | | UK cards^{1} | 15,781 | 0.7 | 0.2 | 1.1 | 0.9 | | UK personal loans^{1} | 8,051 | 1.0 | 0.4 | 0.7 | 0.5 | | Barclays Partner Finance | 1,609 | 0.6 | 0.3 | 1.0 | 1.0 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | | | | | | | US cards^{2} | 28,548 | 3.0 | 1.6 | 3.8 | 3.7 | Note: 1 Includes Tesco Bank. Tesco Bank arrears rates are calculated using POCI balances adjusted to fair value. 2 Includes a co-branded card portfolio in USCB, classified as held for sale (see table below). UK cards: Gross exposure increased from £15.8bn to £17.2bn following a growth in spend and new promotional balance lending. 30 and 90 day arrears rates remained stable at 0.8% (2024: 0.7%) and 0.2% (2024: 0.2%) respectively. Gross and net write-off rates reduced slightly to 1.0% (2024: 1.1%) and 0.8% (2024: 0.9%), reflecting the impact of reduced flow into delinquency in 2024 flowing into write-off. UK personal loans: Gross exposure increased from £8.1bn to £8.5bn due to a growth in new lending. 30 and 90 day arrears rates remained stable at 1.1% (2024: 1.0%) and 0.5% (2024: 0.4%) respectively. Gross and net write off rates also remained stable at 0.7% (2024: 0.7%) and 0.6% (2024: 0.5%) respectively. Barclays Partner Finance: 30 and 90 day arrears rates remained stable at 0.7% (2024: 0.6%) and 0.3% (2024: 0.3%) respectively with total exposure reducing to £1.2bn (2024: £1.6bn) due to a strategic decision to reduce the number of active partner businesses. Both annualised gross and net write off rates increased to 1.2% (2024: 1.0%) following the reduction in gross exposure. US cards: 30 day and 90 day arrears rates remained flat at 3.0% (2024: 3.0%) and 1.6% (2024: 1.6%) respectively. Gross and net write off rates reduced to 3.4% (2024: 3.8%) and 3.2% (2024: 3.7%) respectively reflecting lower default volumes and stable recovery performance. Retail Credit Cards and Retail Other held for sale | | Gross exposure | 30 day arrears rate, excluding recoveries book | 90 day arrears rate, excluding recoveries book | Annualised gross write-off rates | Annualised net write-off rates | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 5,988 | 1.8 | 0.9 | 2.1 | 1.9 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 6,241 | 1.3 | 0.5 | 2.0 | 2.0 | | Head Office - German consumer finance business | 3,733 | 1.8 | 0.9 | 1.3 | 1.2 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Forbearance Forbearance measures consist of concessions towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting their financial commitments ('financial difficulties'). Analysis of forbearance programmes | | Balances | | | | | Impairment allowance | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | Barclays UK¹ | 46 | 120 | 868 | 5 | 1,039 | — | 22 | 235 | — | 257 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | — | — | 495 | — | 495 | — | — | 239 | — | 239 | | Head Office | 4 | — | 1 | — | 5 | — | — | — | — | — | | Total retail | 50 | 120 | 1,364 | 5 | 1,539 | — | 22 | 474 | — | 496 | | Barclays UK | 61 | 156 | 210 | — | 427 | — | 4 | 32 | — | 36 | | Barclays Investment Bank | — | 348 | 1,094 | — | 1,442 | — | 23 | 272 | — | 295 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 2 | 427 | 131 | — | 560 | — | 8 | 44 | — | 52 | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | — | 11 | 57 | — | 68 | — | — | 3 | — | 3 | | Head Office | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Total wholesale | 63 | 942 | 1,492 | — | 2,497 | — | 35 | 351 | — | 386 | | Group total | 113 | 1,062 | 2,856 | 5 | 4,036 | — | 57 | 825 | — | 882 | As at 31 December 2024 | Barclays UK | 58 | 108 | 596 | — | 762 | — | 15 | 133 | — | 148 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | — | — | 448 | — | 448 | — | — | 209 | — | 209 | | Head Office | 4 | 1 | 7 | — | 12 | — | — | 2 | — | 2 | | Total retail | 62 | 109 | 1,051 | — | 1,222 | — | 15 | 344 | — | 359 | | Barclays UK | 74 | 91 | 431 | — | 596 | — | 2 | 37 | — | 39 | | Barclays Investment Bank | — | 361 | 514 | — | 875 | — | 14 | 103 | — | 117 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 2 | 597 | 109 | — | 708 | — | 11 | 41 | — | 52 | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | — | 1 | 205 | — | 206 | — | — | 16 | — | 16 | | Head Office | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Total wholesale | 76 | 1,050 | 1,259 | — | 2,385 | — | 27 | 197 | — | 224 | | Group total | 138 | 1,159 | 2,310 | — | 3,607 | — | 42 | 541 | — | 583 | Analysis of Portfolios- held for sale in Forbearance Programmes | | Balances | | | | | Impairment allowance | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | Stage 1 £m | Stage 2 £m | Stage 3 excluding POCI £m | Stage 3 POCI £m | Total £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | Head Office | | | | | | | | | | | | German consumer finance business | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | Head Office | | | | | | | | | | | | German consumer finance business | 1 | 1 | 25 | — | 27 | — | — | 18 | — | 18 | Retail balances on forbearance reflected the inclusion of Tesco Bank in Barclays UK. Wholesale forborne balances rose overall in 2025, principally driven by material new cases in Barclays Investment Bank offset by cases returning to live and balance reductions on remaining cases in Barclays UK Corporate Bank, Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management and Barclays UK. Note: 1 Tesco Bank balances included for 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 266 # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Retail forbearance programmes Forbearance on the Group’s principal retail portfolios is presented below. The principal portfolios account for 98% (2024: 98%) of total retail forbearance balances. Analysis of Key Portfolios in Forbearance Programmes | | Balances on Forbearance Programmes | | Marked to market LTV of forbearance balances: balance weighted | Marked to market LTV of forbearance balances: valuation weighted | Impairment allowances marked against balances on forbearance programmes | Total balances on forbearance programmes coverage ratio | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | % of gross retail loans and advances | % | | | | | | | £m | £m | % | % | £m | % | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | Barclays UK | | | | | | | | UK Home Loans | 574 | 0.3 | 51.2 | 40.8 | 12 | 2.1 | | UK cards¹ | 308 | 1.8 | n/a | n/a | 146 | 47.4 | | UK personal loans¹ | 114 | 1.3 | n/a | n/a | 69 | 60.5 | | Barclays Partner Finance | 12 | 1.0 | n/a | n/a | 8 | 65.0 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | | | | | | | | US cards | 495 | 1.7 | n/a | n/a | 239 | 48.3 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | Barclays UK | | | | | | | | UK Home Loans | 473 | 0.3 | 51.3 | 41.8 | 10 | 2.1 | | UK cards | 192 | 1.7 | n/a | n/a | 76 | 39.6 | | UK personal loans | 51 | 1.3 | n/a | n/a | 34 | 66.7 | | Barclays Partner Finance | 16 | 1.0 | n/a | n/a | 9 | 56.3 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | | | | | | | | US cards | 448 | 1.6 | n/a | n/a | 209 | 46.7 | | Head Office | | | | | | | | Italy Mortgages | 12 | 30.0 | 78.5 | 48.9 | 2 | 16.7 | Analysis of Portfolios- held for sale in Forbearance Programmes | | Balances on Forbearance Programmes | | Marked to market LTV of forbearance balances: balance weighted | Marked to market LTV of forbearance balances: valuation weighted | Impairment allowances marked against balances on forbearance programmes | Total balances on forbearance programmes coverage ratio | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | % of gross retail loans and advances | % | | | | | | | £m | £m | % | % | £m | % | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | Head Office | | | | | | | | German consumer finance business | — | — | — | — | — | — | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | Head Office | | | | | | | | German consumer finance business | 27 | 0.7 | n/a | n/a | 18 | 66.7 | Note: 1 Tesco Bank balances included for 2025. UK home loans: Forbearance balances increased to £574m (2024: £473m) due to a sustained level of new flow, combined with high retention from the elevated inflow in 2024. UK cards: Balances on forbearance increased to £308m (2024: £192m) due to the inclusion of Tesco Bank and the proportion of the portfolio on forbearance remained relatively stable. UK personal loans: Balances on forbearance increased to £114m (2024: £51m), due to the inclusion of Tesco Bank and the proportion of the portfolio on forbearance remained stable. Barclays Partner Finance: Balances on forbearance reduced to £12m (2024: £16m) in line with the reduction in the overall portfolio. US cards: Forbearance balances increased to £495m (2024: £448m) reflecting an increase in new enrolments in 2025 following delinquency trends through the year. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Wholesale forbearance programmes The table below details balance information for wholesale forbearance cases. | Analysis of wholesale balances in forbearance programmes | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Balances on forbearance programmes | | Impairment allowances marked against balances on forbearance programmes | Total balances on forbearance programmes coverage ratio | | | Total balances | % of gross wholesale loans and advances | £m | % | | | £m | % | | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | Barclays UK | 427 | 2.3 | 36 | 8.4% | | Barclays Investment Bank | 1,442 | 1.9 | 295 | 20.5% | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 560 | 1.9 | 52 | 9.3% | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | 68 | 1.1 | 3 | 4.4% | | Total | 2,497 | 1.9 | 386 | 15.5% | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | Barclays UK | 596 | 2.9 | 39 | 6.5% | | Barclays Investment Bank | 875 | 1.2 | 117 | 13.4% | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 708 | 2.7 | 52 | 7.3% | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | 206 | 3.4 | 16 | 7.8% | | Total | 2,385 | 1.8 | 224 | 9.4% | ## Analysis of debt securities Debt securities include government securities held as part of the Group's treasury management portfolio for liquidity and regulatory purposes, and are for use on a continuing basis in the activities of the Group. The following tables provide an analysis of debt securities held by the Group for trading and investment purposes by issuer type. Further information on the credit quality of debt securities is presented in the Balance sheet credit quality section. As of December 2025, of the total £238bn (2024: £224bn) bonds positions, £48bn (2024: £46bn) is from US Government Bonds and £36bn (2024: £28bn) is from UK Government bonds. | Debt securities | | | | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | | Of which issued by: | | | | Governments and other public bodies | 141,715 | 134,786 | | Corporate and other issuers | 45,638 | 45,559 | | US agency | 23,730 | 17,262 | | Mortgage and asset backed securities | 26,988 | 26,354 | | Total | 238,071 | 223,961 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Analysis of derivatives The tables below set out the fair values of the derivative assets together with the value of those assets subject to enforceable counterparty netting arrangements for which the Group holds offsetting liabilities and eligible collateral. | Derivative assets (audited) | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | | Balance sheet assets | Counterparty netting | Net exposure | Balance sheet assets | Counterparty netting | Net exposure | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Foreign exchange | 76,887 | 58,029 | 18,858 | 126,098 | 98,677 | 27,421 | | Interest rate | 93,241 | 65,415 | 27,826 | 95,796 | 70,138 | 25,658 | | Credit derivatives | 7,851 | 6,350 | 1,501 | 6,898 | 5,728 | 1,170 | | Equity and stock index | 72,339 | 63,100 | 9,239 | 62,912 | 54,237 | 8,675 | | Commodity derivatives | 2,141 | 1,849 | 292 | 1,826 | 1,654 | 172 | | Total derivative assets | 252,459 | 194,743 | 57,716 | 293,530 | 230,434 | 63,096 | | Cash collateral held | | | 30,758 | | | 30,637 | | Net exposure less collateral | | | 26,958 | | | 32,459 | Derivative asset exposures would be £226bn (2024: £261bn) lower than reported under IFRS if netting were permitted for assets and liabilities with the same counterparty or for which the Group holds cash collateral. Similarly, derivative liabilities would be £218bn (2024: £254bn) lower reflecting counterparty netting and collateral placed. In addition, non-cash collateral of £13bn (2024: £13bn) was held in respect of derivative assets. The Group received collateral from clients in support of over the counter derivative transactions. These transactions are generally undertaken under International Swaps and Derivative Association (ISDA) agreements governed by either UK or New York law. ## Assets held for sale This section presents a co-branded card portfolio in USCB classified as assets held for sale. Further, the sale of the German consumer finance business was completed in Q125. For further details on assets held for sale, see Note 40 to the financial statements. ## Loans and advances by product Loans and advances to customers classified as assets held for sale (audited) | | Stage 1 | | | Stage 2 | | | Stage 3 | | | Total | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Gross £m | ECL £m | Coverage % | Gross £m | ECL £m | Coverage % | Gross £m | ECL £m | Coverage % | Gross £m | ECL £m | Coverage % | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Retail credit cards - US | 5,468 | 65 | 1.2 | 466 | 124 | 26.6 | 54 | 44 | 81.5 | 5,988 | 233 | 3.9 | | Retail credit cards - Germany | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Retail other - Germany | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Corporate loans - US | 43 | 1 | 2.3 | 6 | 2 | 33.3 | — | — | — | 49 | 3 | 6.1 | | Total Rest of the World | 5,511 | 66 | 1.2 | 472 | 126 | 26.7 | 54 | 44 | 81.5 | 6,037 | 236 | 3.9 | As at 31 December 2024 | Retail credit cards - US | 5,495 | 64 | 1.2 | 689 | 161 | 23.4 | 57 | 46 | 80.7 | 6,241 | 271 | 4.3 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Retail credit cards - Germany | 1,908 | 18 | 0.9 | 307 | 29 | 9.4 | 93 | 69 | 74.2 | 2,308 | 116 | 5.0 | | Retail other - Germany | 1,134 | 16 | 1.4 | 220 | 33 | 15.0 | 71 | 48 | 67.6 | 1,425 | 97 | 6.8 | | Corporate loans - US | 49 | 1 | 2.0 | 9 | 3 | 33.3 | 1 | 1 | 100.0 | 59 | 5 | 8.5 | | Total Rest of the World | 8,586 | 99 | 1.2 | 1,225 | 226 | 18.4 | 222 | 164 | 73.9 | 10,033 | 489 | 4.9 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 269 # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) ## Stage 2 decomposition Loans and advances at amortised cost classified as held for sale | | Gross Exposure | | | | Impairment Allowance | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Quantitative test | Qualitative test | 30 days past due backstop | Total Stage 2 | Quantitative test | Qualitative test | 30 days past due backstop | Total Stage 2 | | As at 31 December 2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail credit cards - US | 365 | 100 | 1 | 466 | 98 | 25 | 1 | 124 | | Retail credit cards - Germany | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Retail other - Germany | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Corporate loan - US | 6 | — | — | 6 | 2 | — | — | 2 | | Total Stage 2 | 371 | 100 | 1 | 472 | 100 | 25 | 1 | 126 | | As at 31 December 2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail credit cards - US | 564 | 123 | 2 | 689 | 130 | 30 | 1 | 161 | | Retail credit cards - Germany | 209 | 96 | 2 | 307 | 19 | 9 | 1 | 29 | | Retail other - Germany | 207 | 11 | 2 | 220 | 31 | 1 | 1 | 33 | | Corporate loan - US | 7 | 2 | — | 9 | 2 | 1 | — | 3 | | Total Stage 2 | 987 | 232 | 6 | 1,225 | 182 | 41 | 3 | 226 | ## Management adjustments to models for impairment (audited) Management adjustments to models for impairment allowance presented by product (audited) | | Impairment allowance pre management adjustments | Economic uncertainty adjustments¹ (a) | Other adjustments (b) | Management adjustments (a+b) | Total impairment allowance | Proportion of Management adjustments to total impairment allowance | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | % | | Retail credit cards - US | 232 | 5 | — | 5 | 237 | 2.1 | | Retail credit cards - Germany | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Retail other - Germany | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Corporate loans - US | 3 | — | — | — | 3 | — | | Total Rest of the World | 235 | 5 | — | 5 | 240 | 2.1 | | As at 31 December 2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | % | | Retail credit cards - US | 277 | — | — | — | 277 | — | | Retail credit cards - Germany | 101 | — | 16 | 16 | 117 | 13.7 | | Retail other - Germany | 80 | — | 17 | 17 | 97 | 17.5 | | Corporate loans - US | 5 | — | — | — | 5 | — | | Total Rest of the World | 463 | — | 33 | 33 | 496 | 6.7 | Note: 1 Reflects a Stage 2 adjustment for elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty; with impacts yet to materialise in consumer behaviour. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Credit exposures by internal PD grade | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail credit cards - US (audited) | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure | Coverage ratio % | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 165 | — | — | — | 165 | — | — | — | — | — | 165 | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 953 | — | — | — | 953 | 3 | — | — | — | 3 | 950 | 0.3 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 1,351 | 1 | — | — | 1,352 | 6 | — | — | — | 6 | 1,346 | 0.4 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 1,795 | 5 | — | — | 1,800 | 18 | — | — | — | 18 | 1,782 | 1.0 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 1,149 | 226 | — | — | 1,375 | 34 | 35 | — | — | 69 | 1,306 | 5.0 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | 55 | 234 | — | — | 289 | 4 | 89 | — | — | 93 | 196 | 32.2 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 54 | — | 54 | — | — | 44 | — | 44 | 10 | 81.5 | | Total | | | 5,468 | 466 | 54 | — | 5,988 | 65 | 124 | 44 | — | 233 | 5,755 | 3.9 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail credit cards - Germany (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Total | | | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail other - Germany (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Net exposure | Coverage ratio % | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Total | | | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Corporate loans - US (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 2 | — | — | — | 2 | — | — | — | — | — | 2 | — | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 41 | — | — | — | 41 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 40 | 2.4 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | — | 6 | — | — | 6 | — | 2 | — | — | 2 | 4 | 33.3 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Total | | | 43 | 6 | — | — | 49 | 1 | 2 | — | — | 3 | 46 | 6.1 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail credit cards - US (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 5,495 | — | — | — | 5,495 | 64 | — | — | — | 64 | 5,431 | 1.2 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | — | 689 | — | — | 689 | — | 161 | — | — | 161 | 528 | 23.4 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 57 | — | 57 | — | — | 46 | — | 46 | 11 | 80.7 | | Total | | | 5,495 | 689 | 57 | — | 6,241 | 64 | 161 | 46 | — | 271 | 5,970 | 4.3 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail credit cards - Germany (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 62 | — | — | — | 62 | — | — | — | — | — | 62 | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 289 | — | — | — | 289 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 288 | 0.3 | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 152 | — | — | — | 152 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 151 | 0.7 | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 250 | — | — | — | 250 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 249 | 0.4 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 928 | 5 | — | — | 933 | 9 | — | — | — | 9 | 924 | 1.0 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 227 | 229 | — | — | 456 | 6 | 15 | — | — | 21 | 435 | 4.6 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | — | 73 | — | — | 73 | — | 14 | — | — | 14 | 59 | 19.2 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 93 | — | 93 | — | — | 69 | — | 69 | 24 | 74.2 | | Total | | | 1,908 | 307 | 93 | — | 2,308 | 18 | 29 | 69 | — | 116 | 2,192 | 5.0 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Credit risk (continued) Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail other - Germany (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | — | — | — | — | — | 1 | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | 25 | — | — | — | 25 | — | — | — | — | — | 25 | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | 110 | — | — | — | 110 | — | — | — | — | — | 110 | — | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | 294 | — | — | — | 294 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 293 | 0.3 | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 534 | 17 | — | — | 551 | 6 | 4 | — | — | 10 | 541 | 1.8 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | 170 | 182 | — | — | 352 | 9 | 22 | — | — | 31 | 321 | 8.8 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | — | 21 | — | — | 21 | — | 7 | — | — | 7 | 14 | 33.3 | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 71 | — | 71 | — | — | 48 | — | 48 | 23 | 67.6 | | Total | | | 1,134 | 220 | 71 | — | 1,425 | 16 | 33 | 48 | — | 97 | 1,328 | 6.8 | Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Corporate loans - US (audited) | Grade | PD Range % | Credit quality description | Gross carrying amount | | | | | Allowance for ECL | | | | | Net exposure £m | Coverage ratio % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 excluding POCI | Stage 3 POCI | Total | | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 - 3 | 0.0 to <0.05% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 4 - 5 | 0.05 to <0.15% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 6 - 8 | 0.15 to <0.30% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 9 - 11 | 0.30 to <0.60% | Strong | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 12 - 14 | 0.60 to <2.15% | Satisfactory | 49 | — | — | — | 49 | 1 | — | — | — | 1 | 48 | 2.0 | | 15 - 19 | 2.15 to <11.35% | Satisfactory | — | 9 | — | — | 9 | — | 3 | — | — | 3 | 6 | 33.3 | | 20 - 21 | 11.35 to <100% | Higher Risk | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | 22 | 100% | Credit Impaired | — | — | 1 | — | 1 | — | — | 1 | — | 1 | — | 100.0 | | Total | | | 49 | 9 | 1 | — | 59 | 1 | 3 | 1 | — | 5 | 54 | 8.5 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 273 # Risk performance - Market risk # Market risk ## Summary of contents | | | Page | | --- | --- | --- | | Outlines key measures used to summarise the market risk profile of the bank such as value at risk (VaR). | Market risk overview and summary of performance | 273 | | The Group discloses details on management measures of market risk. Total management VaR includes all trading positions and is presented on a diversified basis by risk factor. This section also outlines the macroeconomic conditions modelled as part of the Group’s risk management framework. | Traded market risk | 273 | | | Review of management measures | 273 | | | • The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaR | 274 | ## Market risk All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated. ### Overview This section contains key statistics describing the market risk profile of the Group. The market risk management section provides a description of management VaR. ### Measures of market risk in the Group and accounting measures Traded market risk measures such as VaR and balance sheet exposure measures have fundamental differences: - balance sheet measures show accruals-based balances or marked to market values as at the reporting date; - VaR measures also take account of current marked to market values, but in addition hedging effects between positions are considered; - market risk measures are expressed in terms of changes in value or volatilities as opposed to static values. For these reasons, it is not possible to present direct reconciliations of traded market risk and accounting measures. ## Summary of performance in the period Average Management VaR decreased 31% to £18m (2024: £26m). The decrease was mainly due to a combination of a reduction in the size of the funded, fair value leverage loan exposure in 2025 as well as an overall prudent risk positioning. ## Traded market risk review ### Review of management measures The following disclosures provide details on management measures of market risk. Refer to the market risk management section of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited) for more detail on management measures and the differences when compared to regulatory measures. The table below shows the total management VaR on a diversified basis by risk factor. Total management VaR includes all trading positions in IB and Treasury and it is calculated with a one-day holding period, measured to a confidence level of 95%. Limits are applied against each risk factor VaR as well as total management VaR, which are then cascaded further by risk managers to each business. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Market risk (continued) The daily average, high and low values of management VaR | Management VaR (95%, one day) (audited) | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | For the year ended 31 December | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | | Average | High¹ | Low¹ | Average | High¹ | Low¹ | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Credit risk | 15 | 21 | 11 | 21 | 27 | 17 | | Interest rate risk | 15 | 25 | 5 | 15 | 25 | 7 | | Equity risk | 7 | 14 | 4 | 6 | 12 | 2 | | Basis risk | 6 | 9 | 4 | 5 | 8 | 4 | | Spread risk | 5 | 7 | 3 | 5 | 7 | 3 | | Foreign exchange risk | 5 | 10 | 3 | 4 | 9 | 2 | | Commodity risk | — | 1 | — | — | 1 | — | | Inflation risk | 5 | 8 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 2 | | Diversification effect¹ | (40) | n/a | n/a | (34) | n/a | n/a | | Total management VaR | 18 | 30 | 8 | 26 | 36 | 15 | Note: 1 Diversification effects recognise that forecast losses from different assets or businesses are unlikely to occur concurrently, hence the expected aggregate loss is lower than the sum of the expected losses from each area. Historical correlations between losses are taken into account in making these assessments. The high and low VaR figures reported for each category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the high and low VaR reported as a whole. Consequently, a diversification effect balance for the high and low VaR figures would not be meaningful and is therefore omitted from the above table. ![img-73.jpeg](img-73.jpeg) Group Management VaR --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk # Treasury and Capital risk # Treasury and Capital risk: summary of contents | | | Page | | --- | --- | --- | | Liquidity risk performance | | | | The risk that the firm is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets. This section provides an overview of the Group's liquidity risk. | Liquidity overview and summary of performance | 276 | | | • Liquidity risk stress testing | 276 | | | • Internal Liquidity Stress Test | 276 | | | • Liquidity regulation | 277 | | | • Liquidity Coverage Ratio | 277 | | | • Net Stable Funding Ratio | 278 | | The liquidity pool is held unencumbered and is intended to offset stress outflows. | Liquidity pool | 278 | | | • Composition of the liquidity pool | 278 | | | • Liquidity pool by currency | 278 | | | • Management of the liquidity pool | 279 | | | • Contingent liquidity | 279 | | The basis for sound liquidity risk management is a funding structure that reduces the probability of a liquidity stress leading to an inability to meet funding obligations as they fall due. | Funding structure and funding relationships | 279 | | | • Deposit funding | 280 | | | • Wholesale funding | 280 | | Provides details on the contractual maturity of all financial instruments and other assets and liabilities. | Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities | 282 | | Capital risk performance | | | | Capital risk is the risk that the firm has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This also includes the risk from the firm's pension plans. | Capital risk overview and summary of performance | 286 | | | Regulatory minimum capital, leverage and MREL requirements | 286 | | | • Capital | 286 | | This section details the Group's capital position providing information on both capital resources and capital requirements. It also provides details of the leverage ratios and exposures. | • Leverage | 286 | | This section outlines the Group's capital ratios, capital composition, and provides information on significant movements in CET1 capital during the year. | Analysis of capital resources | 287 | | | Capital ratios | 287 | | | • Capital resources | 287 | | | • Movement in CET1 capital | 288 | | This section outlines risk weighted assets by risk type, business and macro drivers. | Analysis of risk weighted assets | 289 | | | • Risk weighted assets by risk type and business | 289 | | | • Movement analysis of risk weighted assets | 289 | | This section outlines the Group's leverage ratios, leverage exposure composition, and provides information on significant movements in the IFRS and leverage balance sheet. | Analysis of leverage ratios and exposures | 290 | | | • Leverage ratios and exposures | 290 | | The Group discloses the two sources of foreign exchange risk that it is exposed to. | Foreign exchange risk | 290 | | | • Transactional foreign currency exposure | 290 | | | • Translational foreign exchange exposure | 290 | | | • Functional currency of operations | 290 | | A review focusing on the UK retirement fund, which represents the majority of the Group's total retirement benefit obligation. | Pension risk review | 291 | | | • Assets and liabilities | 291 | | | • IAS 19 position | 291 | | | • Risk measurement | 292 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 276 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) | Interest rate risk in the banking book performance | | | --- | --- | | A description of the non-traded market risk framework is provided. | Net interest income sensitivity 293 | | The Group discloses a sensitivity analysis on pre-tax net interest income for non-trading financial assets and liabilities. The analysis is carried out by business unit and currency. | • by currency 293 | | The Group measures some non-traded market risks, in particular prepayment, recruitment, and residual risk using an economic capital methodology. | Analysis of equity sensitivity 294 | | The Group discloses the overall impact of a parallel shift in interest rates on other comprehensive income and cash flow hedges. | Volatility of the FVOCI portfolio in the liquidity pool 294 | | The Group measures the volatility of the value of the FVOCI instruments in the liquidity pool through non-traded market risk VaR. | | # Liquidity risk All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated. ## Overview The Group's liquidity risk is managed within the Principal Risk: Treasury and Capital Risk Framework which is designed to enable the Group to maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality, and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the Group's Risk Appetite and PRA Regulatory requirements. The liquidity risk framework is delivered via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. This section provides an analysis of the Group's: (i) summary of performance, (ii) liquidity risk stress testing, iii) liquidity regulation, iv) liquidity pool, (v) funding structure and funding relationships, (vi) credit ratings, and (vii) contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities. For further detail on liquidity risk governance and framework, refer to pages 174 to 179 in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). ## Key metrics Liquidity Coverage Ratio¹ 170% Net Stable Funding Ratio² 135% 1. LCR represents average of the last 12 spot month end ratios. 2. NSFR represents average of the last four spot quarter end ratios. # Summary of performance The liquidity pool at £338bn (December 2024: £297bn) reflects the Group's prudent approach to liquidity management. The Average Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) remained well above the 100% regulatory requirement at 170% (December 2024: 172%), equivalent to a surplus of £131bn (December 2024: £127bn). The Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) (average of last four quarter ends) was 135% (December 2024: 135%), which represents a surplus of £166bn (December 2024: £163bn) above the 100% regulatory requirement. During the year, the Group issued £16.1bn of minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) instruments in a range of tenors and currencies. Barclays Bank PLC continued to issue in the shorter-term and medium-term markets and Barclays Bank UK PLC continued to issue in the shorter-term markets and maintain active secured funding programmes. This funding capacity enables the respective entities to maintain their stable and diversified funding bases. The Group's reliance on short-term wholesale funding, as measured by the proportion of wholesale funding maturing in less than one year increased year-on-year to 38% (December 2024: 30%). # Liquidity risk stress testing The Group defines its risk appetite liquidity constraint by setting limits on internal liquidity risk stress tests and external regulatory metrics, namely the LCR and NSFR. # Internal Liquidity Stress Test (ILST) The Internal Liquidity Stress Test measures the potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of internally defined stress scenarios, which are then used to determine the size of the liquidity pool that is immediately available to meet anticipated outflows should a stress occur. As part of the ILST, the Group runs four liquidity stress scenarios, aligned to the PRA's prescribed stresses: - 90 days market-wide stress event - 30 days Barclays-specific stress event - 30 days combined market-wide and Barclays-specific stress event - 12 months market wide stress. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Key ILST assumptions For the year ended 31 December 2025 | Drivers of Liquidity Risk | ILST Combined stress – key assumptions | | --- | --- | | Secured and Unsecured Funding Risk | Zero rollover of maturing wholesale unsecured funding | | | Partial loss of repo capacity on non-extremely liquid repos at contractual maturity date | | | Roll of repo for extremely liquid repo at wider haircut at contractual maturity date | | | Withdrawal of contractual buyback obligations, excess client futures margin, Prime Brokerage (PB) client cash and overfifts | | Buffer Monetisation Risk | Haircuts applied to the market value of marketable assets held in the liquidity buffer, as well as inability to monetise assets | | Deposits Risk | Retail and Corporate deposit outflows as counterparties seek to diversify their deposit balances | | Settlement Risk | Liquidity held to meet increased intraday liquidity usage due to payment and receipts volatility, loss of unsecured credit lines and haircuts applied to collateral values used to back secured credit lines | | | Liquidity support to liquidity buffer in the event of an operational outage | | Intra-Group Liquidity Risk | Liquidity support for material subsidiaries. Surplus liquidity held within certain subsidiaries is not taken as a benefit to the wider Group | | Cross-Currency Liquidity Risk | Deterioration in FX market capacity that may result in restriction in net currency positions (managed as a separate framework) | | Facilities Risk | Drawdown on committed facilities based on facility and counterparty type | | | Drawing on credit card facilities based on modelling purchase and payment factors | | | Partial drawdown on the mortgage portfolio | | Rating Downgrade Risk | Collateral outflows due to a two-notch credit rating downgrade | | Derivatives & Collateral Risk | Increase in the Group's initial margin requirement across all major exchanges | | | Variation margin outflows from collateralised risk positions | | | Outflow of collateral owing but not called | | | Loss of internal sources of funding within the PB synthetics business | | Franchise-Viability Risk | Liquidity held to enable the firm to meet select non-contractual obligations to ensure market confidence in the firm is maintained, including debt buy-backs, swap tear-ups and increased prime brokerage margin debits | | Concentration Risk | Funding from counterparties providing greater than 1% of total funding | As at 31 December 2025, the Group held eligible liquid assets well in excess of 100% of net stress outflows of the 30 days combined scenario, which has the highest net outflows of the three short-term liquidity stress scenarios and the 12 month market-wide scenario. ## Liquidity regulation Barclays Group monitors its position against both the LCR and NSFR according to the PRA regulatory requirements which include certain Basel III standards that were retained in the UK regulatory framework from 1 January 2022 as part of the UK's withdrawal from the EU. The LCR requirement takes into account the relative stability of different sources of funding and potential incremental funding requirements in a stress. The LCR is designed to promote short-term resilience of a bank's liquidity risk profile by holding sufficient High Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) to survive an acute stress scenario lasting for 30 days. The NSFR has been developed to promote a sustainable and stable structure of assets and liabilities. ## Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) The external LCR requirement is designed to promote short-term resilience of a bank's liquidity risk profile by holding sufficient High Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) to survive an acute stress scenario lasting for 30 days. | Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR)1 | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December | £bn | £bn | | LCR Eligible High Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) | 321 | 304 | | Net stress outflows | (190) | (177) | | Surplus | 131 | 127 | | Liquidity coverage ratio | 170% | 172% | Note: 1 Represents average of the last 12 spot month end ratios. In June 2025, Barclays implemented a new methodology for calculating net stress outflows related to secured financing transactions in the liquidity coverage ratio. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) The external NSFR metric requires banks to maintain a stable funding profile taking into account both on and certain off balance sheet exposures over a medium to long term period. The ratio is defined as the Available Stable Funding (capital and certain liabilities which are defined as stable sources of funding) relative to the Required Stable Funding (a measure of assets on the balance sheet and certain off balance sheet exposures which may require longer term funding). The NSFR was 135% at December 2025 (December 2024: 135%) (average of last four quarter ends) equivalent to a surplus of £166bn (2024: £163bn) above the regulatory requirement and demonstrates Barclays' stable balance sheet funding profile. | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)¹ | £bn | £bn | | Total Available Stable Funding | 639 | 630 | | Total Required Stable Funding | 473 | 467 | | Surplus | 166 | 163 | | Net Stable Funding Ratio | 135% | 135% | **Note:** 1. Represents average of the last four spot quarter end ratios. To define the risk appetite liquidity constraint, Barclays establishes minimum LCR, NSFR and ILST limits. Risks to market funding conditions, the Group's liquidity position and funding profile are assessed continuously, and actions are taken to manage the size of the liquidity pool and the funding profile as appropriate. ## Liquidity pool The Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 2025 was £338bn (2024: 297bn). In 2025, the month-end liquidity pool ranged from £326bn to £352bn (2024: £297bn to £341bn), and the month-end average balance was £337bn (2024: 322bn). The liquidity pool is held unencumbered and is intended to offset stress outflows. It comprises the following cash and unencumbered assets. ### Composition of the Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 2025 | | LCR eligible High Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA)² | | | | | Liquidity pool | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Cash £bn | Level 1 £bn | Level 2A £bn | Level 2B £bn | Total £bn | 2025 £bn | 2024 £bn | | Cash and deposits with central banks² | 219 | | | | 219 | 237 | 216 | | Government bonds³ | | | | | | | | | AAA to AA- | | 55 | 7 | | 62 | 62 | 55 | | A+ to A- | | 14 | | | 14 | 14 | 2 | | BBB+ to BBB- | | 2 | | | 2 | 2 | 1 | | Total government bonds | | 71 | 7 | | 78 | 78 | 58 | | Other | | | | | | | | | Government guaranteed issuers, PSEs and GSEs | | 4 | | | 4 | 7 | 9 | | International organisations and MDBs | | 7 | | | 7 | 7 | 7 | | Covered bonds | | 3 | 4 | | 7 | 8 | 7 | | Other | | | | 5 | 5 | 1 | | | Total other | | 14 | 4 | 5 | 23 | 23 | 23 | | Total as at 31 December 2025 | 219 | 85 | 11 | 5 | 320 | 338 | | | Total as at 31 December 2024 | 196 | 74 | 9 | 2 | 281 | | 297 | **Notes:** 1. The LCR eligible HQLA is adjusted for operational restrictions upon consolidation under Article 8 of the Liquidity Coverage Ratio section of the PRA rulebook (CRR) such as trapped liquidity within Barclays subsidiaries. It also reflects differences in eligibility of assets between the LCR and Barclays' Liquidity Pool. 2. Includes cash held at central banks and surplus cash at central banks related to payment schemes. Of which over 99.5% (2024: over 98%) was placed with the Bank of England, US Federal Reserve, European Central Bank, Bank of Japan and Swiss National Bank. 3. Of which over 85% (2024: over 85%) comprised UK, US, French, German, Japanese, Swiss and Dutch securities. The Group liquidity pool is well diversified by major currency and the Group monitors ILST stress scenarios for major currencies. ### Liquidity pool by currency | | USD £bn | EUR £bn | GBP £bn | Other £bn | Total £bn | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2025 | 111 | 66 | 124 | 37 | 338 | | Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2024 | 92 | 75 | 109 | 21 | 297 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Management of the liquidity pool The composition of the liquidity pool is subject to limits set by the Board and the second-line liquidity, credit and market risk functions. In addition, the investment of the liquidity pool is monitored for concentration risk by issuer, currency and asset type. Given the returns generated by these highly liquid assets, the risk and reward profile is continuously managed. As at 31 December 2025, 68% (2024: 60%) of the liquidity pool was located in Barclays Bank PLC, 17% (2024: 23%) in Barclays Bank UK PLC and 9% (2024: 9%) in Barclays Bank Ireland PLC. The residual portion of the liquidity pool is held outside of these entities, predominantly in the US subsidiaries, to meet entity-specific stress outflows and local regulatory requirements. To the extent the use of this portion of the liquidity pool is restricted due to local regulatory requirements, it is assumed to be unavailable to the rest of the Group in calculating the LCR. ## Contingent liquidity In addition to the Group liquidity pool, the Group has access to other unencumbered assets which provide a source of contingent liquidity. While these are not relied on in the Group's ILST, a portion of these assets may be monetised in a stress to generate liquidity through their use as collateral for secured funding or through outright sale. In a Barclays-specific, market-wide or combined liquidity stress, liquidity available via market sources could be severely disrupted. In circumstances where market liquidity is unavailable or available only at significantly elevated prices, the Group could generate liquidity via central bank facilities. To this end, as at 31 December 2025, the Group had £81.9bn (December 2024: £87.9bn) of assets positioned at various central banks. For more detail on the Group's other unencumbered assets, see pages 201 to 205 in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). ## Funding structure and funding relationships The basis for sound liquidity risk management is a funding structure that reduces the probability of a liquidity stress leading to an inability to meet funding obligations as they fall due. The Group's overall funding strategy is to develop a diversified funding base (geographically, by type and by counterparty) and maintain access to a variety of alternative funding sources, to provide protection against unexpected fluctuations, while minimising the cost of funding. Within this, the Group aims to align the sources and uses of funding. As such, retail and corporate loans and advances are largely funded by deposits in the relevant entities, with the surplus primarily funding the liquidity pool. The majority of reverse repurchase agreements are matched by repurchase agreements. Derivative liabilities and assets are largely matched. A substantial proportion of balance sheet derivative positions qualify for counterparty netting and the remaining portions are largely offset when netted against cash collateral received and paid. Wholesale debt and equity is used to fund residual assets. These funding relationships are summarised below: | Assets | 2025 £bn | 2024 £bn | Liabilities | 2025 £bn | 2024 £bn | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Loans and advances at amortised cost^{1} | 400 | 392 | Deposits at amortised cost | 586 | 561 | | Group liquidity pool | 338 | 297 | <1 Year wholesale funding | 84 | 55 | | | | | >1 Year wholesale funding | 136 | 131 | | Reverse repurchase agreements, trading portfolio assets, cash collateral and settlement balances | 471 | 433 | Repurchase agreements, trading portfolio liabilities, cash collateral and settlement balances | 359 | 358 | | Derivative financial instruments | 252 | 294 | Derivative financial instruments | 241 | 279 | | Other assets^{2} | 83 | 102 | Other liabilities | 60 | 62 | | | | | Equity | 78 | 72 | | Total assets | 1,544 | 1,518 | Total liabilities | 1,544 | 1,518 | Notes: 1 Adjusted for liquidity pool debt securities reported at amortised costs of £30bn (December 2024: £22bn). 2 Other assets include fair value assets that are not part of reverse repurchase agreements or trading portfolio assets, and other asset categories. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 280 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) Deposit funding | | | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Funding of loans and advances | Loans and advances, debt securities at amortised cost | Deposits at amortised cost | Loan: deposit ratio¹ | Loan: deposit ratio | | As at 31 December 2025 | £bn | £bn | % | % | | Barclays UK | 230 | 245 | 94 | 92 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 30 | 89 | 34 | 31 | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | 15 | 72 | 21 | 21 | | Barclays Investment Bank | 130 | 156 | 83 | 88 | | Barclays US consumer Bank | 22 | 24 | 92 | 91 | | Head Office | 3 | — | | | | Barclays Group | 430 | 586 | 73 | 74 | Note: 1 The loan: deposit ratio is calculated as loans and advances at amortised cost and debt securities at amortised cost divided by deposits at amortised cost. As at 31 December 2025, £254bn (2024: £233bn) of deposits at amortised cost were insured through the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)¹ and other similar schemes. In addition to these customer deposits £4.1bn (2024: £8.0bn) of other liabilities are insured by other governments. Contractually, current accounts are repayable on demand and savings accounts at short notice. In practice, their observed maturity is typically longer than their contractual maturity. Similarly, repayment profiles of certain types of assets e.g. mortgages, overdrafts and credit card lending, differ from their contractual profiles. The Group therefore assesses the behavioural maturity of both customer assets and liabilities to identify structural balance sheet funding gaps. In doing so, it applies quantitative modelling and qualitative assessments which take into account historical experience, current customer composition, and macroeconomic projections. The Group's broad base of customers, numerically and by depositor type, helps protect against unexpected fluctuations in balances and hence provides a stable funding base for the Group's operations and liquidity needs. # Wholesale funding Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank UK Group maintain access to a variety of sources of wholesale funds in major currencies, including those available from term investors across a variety of distribution channels and geographies, short-term funding markets and repo markets. Barclays Bank Group has direct access to US, European and Asian capital markets through its global investment banking operations and to long-term investors through its clients worldwide. Key sources of wholesale funding include money markets, certificates of deposit, commercial paper, medium term issuances (including structured notes) and securitisations. Key sources of wholesale funding for Barclays Bank UK Group include money markets, certificates of deposit, commercial paper, covered bonds and other securitisations. The Group expects to continue issuing public wholesale debt from Barclays PLC (the Parent company), in order to maintain compliance with indicative MREL requirements and maintain a stable and diverse funding base by type, currency and market. During the year, the Group issued £16.1bn of MREL instruments from Barclays PLC in a range of different currencies and tenors. Barclays Bank PLC continued to issue in the shorter-term markets and medium-term notes programmes. Barclays Bank UK PLC continued to issue in the shorter-term markets and maintain active secured funding programmes. This funding capacity enables the respective entities to maintain their stable and diversified funding bases. As at 31 December 2025, the Group's total wholesale funding outstanding (excluding repurchase agreements) was £220.1bn (2024: £186.0bn), of which £20.4bn (2024: £20.5bn) was secured funding and £199.7bn (2024: £165.5bn) unsecured funding. Unsecured funding includes £88.0bn (2024: £78.9bn) of privately placed senior unsecured notes issued through a variety of distribution channels including intermediaries and private banks. Wholesale funding of £83.9bn (2024: £55.0bn) matures in less than one year, representing 38% (December 2024: 30%) of total wholesale funding outstanding. This includes £28.4bn (2024: £22.0bn) related to term funding². Although not a requirement, the liquidity pool exceeded the wholesale funding maturing in less than one year by £254bn (2024: £242bn). Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank UK Group also support various central bank monetary initiatives, such as the Bank of England's Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME), and the European Central Bank's Targeted Long-Term Refinancing Operations (TLTRO). These are reported under 'repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing' on the balance sheet. In addition, Barclays repaid £8.4bn of its TFSME drawings reducing its outstanding balance to £10bn at year end. ¹FSCS insured deposit limit increased from £85,000 to £120,000 from Dec 1, 2025 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) Maturity profile of wholesale funding¹² | | <1 month £bn | 1-3 months £bn | 3-6 months £bn | 6-12 months £bn | <1 year £bn | 1-2 years £bn | 2-3 years £bn | 3-4 years £bn | 4-5 years £bn | >5 years £bn | Total £bn | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Barclays PLC (the Parent company) | | | | | | | | | | | | | Senior unsecured (Public benchmark) | 1.9 | — | 0.6 | — | 2.5 | 7.3 | 7.5 | 8.6 | 3.8 | 27.0 | 56.7 | | Senior unsecured (Privately placed) | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.9 | 1.1 | | Subordinated liabilities | — | — | 1.5 | — | 1.5 | — | 1.5 | — | 1.1 | 7.1 | 11.2 | | Barclays Bank Group | | | | | | | | | | | | | Senior unsecured (Privately placed)³ | 2.7 | 5.8 | 5.5 | 9.5 | 23.5 | 12.9 | 12.1 | 9.9 | 8.0 | 20.3 | 86.7 | | Certificates of deposit and commercial paper | 0.6 | 2.3 | 22.1 | 14.8 | 39.8 | — | — | — | — | — | 39.8 | | Asset backed commercial paper | 2.3 | 8.9 | 1.1 | — | 12.3 | — | — | — | — | — | 12.3 | | Asset backed securities | — | — | 0.4 | 0.1 | 0.5 | 0.2 | 1.3 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 2.7 | 4.9 | | Subordinated liabilities | — | — | — | 0.4 | 0.4 | 0.3 | 0.1 | — | — | 0.3 | 1.1 | | Barclays Bank UK Group | | | | | | | | | | | | | Senior unsecured (Privately placed) | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.2 | | Certificates of deposit and commercial paper | 2.9 | — | — | — | 2.9 | — | — | — | — | — | 2.9 | | Covered bonds | — | — | — | — | — | 0.5 | 0.2 | 0.6 | 0.6 | 0.1 | 2.0 | | Asset backed securities | — | — | 0.3 | 0.2 | 0.5 | — | — | — | — | — | 0.5 | | Subordinated liabilities | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.7 | 0.7 | | Total as at 31 December 2025 | 10.4 | 17.0 | 31.5 | 25.0 | 83.9 | 21.2 | 22.7 | 19.3 | 13.8 | 59.2 | 220.1 | | Of which secured | 2.3 | 8.9 | 1.8 | 0.3 | 13.3 | 0.7 | 1.5 | 0.7 | 0.7 | 3.5 | 20.4 | | Of which unsecured | 8.1 | 8.1 | 29.7 | 24.7 | 70.6 | 20.5 | 21.2 | 18.6 | 13.1 | 55.7 | 199.7 | | Total as at 31 December 2024 | 7.9 | 21.3 | 11.9 | 13.9 | 55.0 | 23.0 | 17.5 | 18.6 | 15.1 | 56.8 | 186.0 | | Of which secured | 2.4 | 8.8 | 2.1 | 0.8 | 14.1 | 1.1 | 0.5 | 0.9 | 0.6 | 3.3 | 20.5 | | Of which unsecured | 5.5 | 12.5 | 9.8 | 13.1 | 40.9 | 21.9 | 17.0 | 17.7 | 14.5 | 53.5 | 165.5 | Notes: 1 The composition of wholesale funds comprises the balance sheet reported financial liabilities at fair value, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities. It does not include participation in the central bank facilities reported within repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing. 2 Term funding comprises public benchmark and privately placed senior unsecured notes, covered bonds, asset-backed securities and subordinated debt where the original maturity of the instrument was more than one year. 3 Includes structured notes of £73.5bn, of which £21.8bn matures within one year. # Currency composition of wholesale debt As at 31 December 2025, the proportion of wholesale funding by major currencies was as follows: Currency composition of wholesale funding | | USD % | EUR % | GBP % | Other % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Certificates of deposit and commercial paper | 73 | 26 | — | 1 | | Asset backed commercial paper | 86 | 6 | 8 | — | | Senior unsecured (Public benchmark) | 61 | 23 | 12 | 4 | | Senior unsecured (Privately placed) | 60 | 17 | 5 | 18 | | Covered bonds / Asset backed securities | 66 | 14 | 20 | — | | Subordinated liabilities | 54 | 26 | 15 | 5 | | Total as at 31 December 2025 | 64 | 21 | 6 | 9 | | Total as at 31 December 2024 | 66 | 18 | 7 | 9 | To manage cross currency refinancing risk, the Group manages to currency mismatch limits, which limit risk at specific maturities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities The table below provides detail on the contractual maturity of all financial instruments and other assets and liabilities. Derivatives (other than those designated in a hedging relationship) and trading portfolio assets and liabilities are included in the 'not more than one month' column at their fair value. Liquidity risk on these items is not managed on the basis of contractual maturity since they are not held for settlement according to such maturity and will frequently be settled before contractual maturity at fair value. Derivatives designated in a hedging relationship are included according to their contractual maturity. Open-dated financial assets and liabilities are included within 'not more than one month' due to the availability of withdrawals or redemptions at any time, without notice. | Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited) | | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | Not more than one month £m | Over one month but not more than three months £m | Over three months but not more than six months £m | Over six months but not more than one year £m | Over one year but not more than three years £m | Over three years but not more than five years £m | Over five years £m | Total £m | | Assets | | | | | | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | 229,752 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 229,752 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 87,432 | 43,100 | — | — | — | — | — | 130,532 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 390 | 5,136 | 1,776 | 3,362 | 18,130 | 13,525 | 26,156 | 68,475 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks and customers | 23,738 | 6,113 | 7,690 | 19,968 | 58,229 | 38,340 | 207,445 | 361,523 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 10,826 | 338 | 520 | 406 | 1,971 | 2,816 | 745 | 17,622 | | Trading portfolio assets | 190,061 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 190,061 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 146,471 | 13,492 | 4,506 | 4,153 | 10,863 | 3,036 | 4,336 | 186,857 | | Derivative financial instruments | 249,744 | 146 | 201 | 371 | 1,622 | 302 | 73 | 252,459 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 1,370 | 2,064 | 483 | 885 | 13,412 | 22,875 | 33,305 | 74,394 | | Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | — | — | 5,932 | — | — | — | — | 5,932 | | Other financial assets | 743 | 47 | 43 | 6 | 5 | 2 | 1 | 847 | | Total financial assets | 940,527 | 70,436 | 21,151 | 29,151 | 104,232 | 80,896 | 272,061 | 1,518,454 | | Other assets | | | | | | | | 25,711 | | Total assets | | | | | | | | 1,544,165 | | Liabilities | | | | | | | | | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks and customers | 462,723 | 42,184 | 38,930 | 33,970 | 6,563 | 699 | 544 | 585,613 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 84,836 | 32,747 | — | — | — | — | — | 117,583 | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing | 10,174 | 4,507 | 75 | 3,030 | 4,354 | — | 3,030 | 25,170 | | Debt securities in issue | 6,206 | 10,732 | 23,120 | 13,302 | 17,566 | 16,036 | 32,071 | 119,033 | | Subordinated liabilities | — | — | 1,522 | 400 | 1,870 | 1,063 | 8,099 | 12,954 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | 57,737 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 57,737 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 162,852 | 29,816 | 16,489 | 14,172 | 31,413 | 19,693 | 19,673 | 294,108 | | Derivative financial instruments | 240,147 | 23 | 53 | 13 | 258 | 100 | 214 | 240,808 | | Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Other financial liabilities | 4,602 | 4 | 30 | 53 | 196 | 154 | 813 | 5,852 | | Total financial liabilities | 1,029,277 | 120,013 | 80,219 | 64,940 | 62,220 | 37,745 | 64,444 | 1,458,858 | | Other liabilities | | | | | | | | 7,071 | | Total liabilities | | | | | | | | 1,465,929 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited) | As at 31 December 2024 | Not more than one month £m | Over one month but not more than three months £m | Over three months but not more than six months £m | Over six months but not more than one year £m | Over one year but not more than three years £m | Over three years but not more than five years £m | Over five years £m | Total £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Assets | | | | | | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | 210,184 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 210,184 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 82,661 | 37,182 | — | — | — | — | — | 119,843 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 233 | 1,009 | 2,218 | 3,591 | 20,231 | 12,400 | 28,528 | 68,210 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks and customers | 24,290 | 6,237 | 8,327 | 18,544 | 57,020 | 32,755 | 199,100 | 346,273 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 1,390 | 37 | 292 | 359 | 1,676 | 980 | — | 4,734 | | Trading portfolio assets | 166,453 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 166,453 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 152,935 | 11,628 | 4,489 | 4,494 | 10,174 | 5,568 | 4,446 | 193,734 | | Derivative financial instruments | 291,006 | 293 | 512 | 710 | 783 | 79 | 147 | 293,530 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 1,473 | 1,067 | 351 | 944 | 14,239 | 23,511 | 36,474 | 78,059 | | Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | — | 3,710 | — | — | 6,144 | — | — | 9,854 | | Other financial assets | 786 | 29 | 55 | 18 | 2 | — | 1 | 891 | | Total financial assets | 931,411 | 61,192 | 16,244 | 28,660 | 110,269 | 75,293 | 268,696 | 1,491,765 | | Other assets | | | | | | | | 26,437 | | Total assets | | | | | | | | 1,518,202 | | Liabilities | | | | | | | | | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks and customers | 450,889 | 40,688 | 34,512 | 26,999 | 5,283 | 1,505 | 787 | 560,663 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 76,655 | 29,574 | — | — | — | — | — | 106,229 | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing | 18,771 | 1,823 | 84 | 8,537 | 10,200 | — | — | 39,415 | | Debt securities in issue | 2,928 | 16,868 | 5,859 | 3,469 | 17,477 | 15,378 | 30,423 | 92,402 | | Subordinated liabilities | — | 96 | 65 | 80 | 2,126 | 1,583 | 7,971 | 11,921 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | 56,908 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 56,908 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 160,429 | 23,084 | 16,739 | 15,328 | 28,320 | 19,050 | 19,274 | 282,224 | | Derivative financial instruments | 278,616 | 27 | 18 | 17 | 282 | 263 | 192 | 279,415 | | Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | — | 3,726 | — | — | — | — | — | 3,726 | | Other financial liabilities | 4,957 | 4 | 30 | 61 | 202 | 140 | 739 | 6,133 | | Total financial liabilities | 1,050,153 | 115,890 | 57,307 | 54,491 | 63,890 | 37,919 | 59,386 | 1,439,036 | | Other liabilities | | | | | | | | 6,685 | | Total liabilities | | | | | | | | 1,445,721 | Expected maturity date may differ from the contractual dates, to account for: - trading portfolio assets and liabilities and derivative financial instruments, which may not be held to maturity as part of the Group's trading strategies - corporate and retail deposits, reported under deposits at amortised cost, are repayable on demand or at short notice on a contractual basis. In practice, their behavioural maturity is typically longer than their contractual maturity, and therefore these deposits provide stable funding for the Group's operations and liquidity needs because of the broad base of customers, both numerically and by depositor type - loans to corporate and retail customers, which are included within loans and advances at amortised cost and financial assets at fair value, may be repaid earlier in line with terms and conditions of the contract - debt securities in issue, subordinated liabilities, and financial liabilities designated at fair value, may include early redemption features. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Contractual maturity of financial liabilities on an undiscounted basis The table below presents the cash flows payable by the Group under financial liabilities by remaining contractual maturities at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual undiscounted cash flows of all financial liabilities (i.e. nominal values). The balances in the below table do not agree directly to the balances in the consolidated balance sheet as the table incorporates all cash flows, on an undiscounted basis, related to both principal as well as those associated with all future coupon payments. Derivative financial instruments held for trading and trading portfolio liabilities are included in the 'not more than one month' column at their fair value. Open-dated financial liabilities are also included within 'not more than one month'. Contractual maturity of financial liabilities - undiscounted (audited) | | Not more than one month £m | Over one month but not more than three months £m | Over three months but not more than six months £m | Over six months but not more than one year £m | Over one year but not more than three years £m | Over three years but not more than five years £m | Over five years £m | Total £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks and customers | 462,812 | 42,491 | 39,430 | 34,773 | 6,917 | 777 | 805 | 588,005 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 84,850 | 32,908 | — | — | — | — | — | 117,758 | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing | 10,185 | 4,520 | 75 | 3,111 | 4,498 | — | 3,627 | 26,016 | | Debt securities in issue | 6,217 | 10,793 | 23,413 | 13,619 | 18,533 | 18,178 | 48,191 | 138,944 | | Subordinated liabilities | — | — | 1,562 | 418 | 1,975 | 1,263 | 10,502 | 15,720 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | 57,737 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 57,737 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 162,942 | 29,981 | 16,677 | 14,449 | 32,852 | 21,679 | 34,103 | 312,683 | | Derivative financial instruments | 240,103 | 67 | 54 | 13 | 278 | 115 | 415 | 241,045 | | Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Other financial liabilities | 4,606 | 16 | 48 | 89 | 323 | 262 | 3,977 | 9,321 | | Total financial liabilities | 1,029,452 | 120,776 | 81,259 | 66,472 | 65,376 | 42,274 | 101,620 | 1,507,229 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks and customers | 451,093 | 40,992 | 34,963 | 27,670 | 5,579 | 1,752 | 1,025 | 563,074 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 76,658 | 29,745 | — | — | — | — | — | 106,403 | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing | 18,790 | 1,832 | 84 | 8,822 | 10,953 | — | — | 40,481 | | Debt securities in issue | 2,937 | 16,981 | 5,938 | 3,593 | 18,365 | 17,563 | 46,183 | 111,560 | | Subordinated liabilities | — | 96 | 65 | 80 | 2,283 | 1,777 | 10,726 | 15,027 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | 56,908 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 56,908 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 160,604 | 23,256 | 16,968 | 15,709 | 29,999 | 21,427 | 34,407 | 302,370 | | Derivative financial instruments | 278,620 | 27 | 18 | 17 | 304 | 307 | 403 | 279,696 | | Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | — | 3,726 | — | — | — | — | — | 3,726 | | Other financial liabilities | 4,963 | 16 | 49 | 96 | 322 | 239 | 4,149 | 9,834 | | Total financial liabilities | 1,050,573 | 116,671 | 58,085 | 55,987 | 67,805 | 43,065 | 96,893 | 1,489,079 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Maturity of off-balance sheet commitments given The table below presents the maturity split of the Group’s off-balance sheet commitments given at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the undiscounted cash flows (i.e. nominal values) on the basis of earliest opportunity at which they are available. Maturity analysis of off-balance sheet commitments given (audited) | | Not more than one month £m | Over one month but not more than three months £m | Over three months but not more than six months £m | Over six months but not more than one year £m | Over one year but not more than three years £m | Over three years but not more than five years £m | Over five years £m | Total £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | Contingent liabilities and financial guarantees | 25,372 | — | 1 | 1 | — | — | — | 25,374 | | Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions | 1,103 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 1,103 | | Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments¹ | 423,420 | — | — | — | 63 | 17 | 3 | 423,503 | | Total off-balance sheet commitments given | 449,895 | — | 1 | 1 | 63 | 17 | 3 | 449,980 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | Contingent liabilities and financial guarantees | 25,322 | 22 | 1 | 1 | — | — | — | 25,346 | | Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions | 1,432 | 1 | — | — | — | — | — | 1,433 | | Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments¹ | 421,648 | — | — | — | 68 | — | — | 421,716 | | Total off-balance sheet commitments given | 448,402 | 23 | 1 | 1 | 68 | — | — | 448,495 | Note: 1 Includes exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Capital risk All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated. ### Overview The CET1 ratio, among other metrics, is a measure of the capital strength and resilience of Barclays. Maintenance of our capital resources is vital in order to meet the overall regulatory capital requirement, to withstand the impact of the risks that may arise under normal and stressed conditions, and maintain adequate capital to cover current and forecast business needs and associated risks to provide a viable and sustainable business offering. This section provides an overview of the Group's: (i) CET1 capital, leverage and own funds and eligible liabilities requirements; (ii) capital resources; (iii) risk weighted assets (RWAs); (iv) leverage ratios and exposures; and (v) own funds and eligible liabilities. More details on monitoring and managing capital risk may be found in the risk management sections of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). ### Significant regulatory updates in the period The Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) has continued its phased implementation of the Basel 3.1 standards. Following near final policy statements in December 2023 and September 2024, the PRA announced in January 2025 that full implementation would be delayed until 1 January 2027, a timeline that has now been confirmed in the PRA's final rules published in January 2026. In July 2025, the PRA consulted on targeted amendments to the market risk framework and confirmed a staged approach to the Fundamental Review of the Trading Book (FRTB), under which implementation of the Internal Models Approach (IMA) will be deferred by one year to 1 January 2028, while all other FRTB elements remain scheduled for implementation from 1 January 2027. This timeline was also confirmed by the PRA in January 2026. ### Key metrics Common Equity Tier 1 ratio 14.3% UK leverage ratio 5.1% Own funds and eligible liabilities ratio as a percentage of RWAs 35.8% ## Summary of performance in the period The Group continues to be in excess of overall capital, leverage and MREL regulatory requirements. The CET1 ratio increased to 14.3% (December 2024: 13.6%). Taking into account the impact of the £1.0bn share buyback announced today, the CET1 ratio as of 31 December 2025 would be reduced to 14.0% (at the top end of the 13-14% target range). The c.80bps increase in 2025 was driven by a CET1 capital increase of £2.5bn to £51.1bn and an RWA decrease of £1.4bn to £356.8bn Significant movements in the year were: - c.170bps increase from attributable profit - c.100bps decrease driven by shareholder distributions including the interim dividend payment of 3.0p per share paid in September 2025, the completed £2.0bn share buybacks announced with FY24 and H125 Results, and the ongoing £0.5bn share buyback announced with Q325 Results, as well as the accrual for the FY25 dividend - c.30bps increase from other CET1 capital movements, including an increase in the fair value through other comprehensive income reserve - c.20bps decrease as a result of a £5.2bn increase in RWAs, excluding the impact of foreign exchange movements. This was primarily driven by lending growth in the UK businesses and an increase in USCB, including the acquisition of the GM portfolio, partially offset by the disposal of the German consumer finance business and of Barclays' joint venture interest in Entercard Group AB (Entercard) - A £1.1bn decrease in CET1 capital due to a decrease in the currency translation reserve was partially offset by a £6.5bn decrease in RWAs as a result of foreign exchange movements - The UK leverage ratio increased to 5.1% (December 2024: 5.0%), as Tier 1 capital increased by £3.2bn, partially offset by a £40.8bn increase in leverage exposure to £1,247.3bn. The increase in leverage exposure was largely driven by an increase in trading activity in IB and higher lending in Barclays UK and UKCB, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD ## Minimum capital requirements As at 31 December 2025, the Group's Overall Capital Requirement for CET1, excluding any applicable PRA buffer, was 12.2% and comprised a 4.5% Pillar 1 minimum, a 2.5% Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB), a 1.5% Global Systemically Important Institution (G-SII) buffer, a 2.7% Pillar 2A requirement and a 1.0% Countercyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB). The Group's CCyB is based on the buffer rate applicable for each jurisdiction in which the Group has exposures. The buffer rates set by other national authorities for non-UK exposures are not currently material. The Group's Pillar 2A requirement is 4.8% with at least 56.25% to be met with CET1 capital, equating to 2.7% of RWAs. The Pillar 2A requirement, based on a point in time assessment, has been set as a proportion of RWAs and is subject to at least annual review. The Group's CET1 target ratio of 13-14% takes into account minimum capital requirements and applicable buffers. The Group remains above its minimum capital regulatory requirements and applicable buffers. ## Minimum leverage requirements As at 31 December 2025, the Group was subject to a UK leverage ratio requirement of 4.1%. This comprises the 3.25% minimum requirement, a G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer (G-SII ALRB) of 0.53% and a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (CCLB) of 0.3%. The Group is also required to disclose an average UK leverage ratio which is based on capital on the last day of each month in the quarter and an exposure measure for each day in the quarter. ## Minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities As at 31 December 2025, the Group was required to meet the higher of: (i) two times the sum of 8% Pillar 1 and 4.8% Pillar 2A equating to 25.5% of RWAs; and (ii) 6.75% of leverage exposures. CET1 capital cannot be counted towards both MREL and the buffers, meaning that the buffers, including the confidential institution-specific PRA buffer, will effectively be applied above MREL requirements. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Capital resources | Capital ratios^{1,2} | | | | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December | 2025 | 2024 | | CET1 | 14.3% | 13.6% | | Tier 1 (T1) | 17.9% | 16.9% | | Total regulatory capital | 20.4% | 19.6% | | MREL ratio as a percentage of total RWAs | 35.8% | 34.4% | | Own funds and eligible liabilities | | | | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | | Total equity excluding non-controlling interests per the balance sheet | 77,784 | 71,821 | | Less: other equity instruments (recognised as AT1 capital) | (12,725) | (12,075) | | Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable ordinary share dividends | (778) | (786) | | Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable repurchase of shares | (271) | — | | Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable other equity coupons | (36) | (35) | | Other regulatory adjustments and deductions | | | | --- | --- | --- | | Additional value adjustments (PVA) | (1,956) | (2,051) | | Goodwill and intangible assets | (8,255) | (8,272) | | Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding temporary differences | (1,069) | (1,451) | | Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges | 666 | 2,930 | | Excess of expected losses over impairment | (436) | (403) | | Gains or losses on liabilities at fair value resulting from own credit | 904 | 981 | | Defined benefit pension fund assets | (2,398) | (2,367) | | Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments | (14) | (1) | | Adjustment under IFRS 9 transitional arrangements | — | 138 | | Other regulatory adjustments | (346) | 129 | | CET1 capital | 51,070 | 48,558 | | AT1 capital | | | | --- | --- | --- | | Capital instruments and related share premium accounts | 12,758 | 12,108 | | Other regulatory adjustments and deductions | (33) | (32) | | AT1 capital | 12,725 | 12,076 | | T1 capital | 63,795 | 60,634 | | T2 capital | | | | --- | --- | --- | | Capital instruments and related share premium accounts | 8,835 | 9,150 | | Qualifying T2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries | 55 | 367 | | Other regulatory adjustments and deductions | (71) | (33) | | Total regulatory capital | 72,614 | 70,118 | | Less: Ineligible T2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries | (55) | (367) | | --- | --- | --- | | Eligible liabilities | 55,106 | 53,547 | | Total own funds and eligible liabilities^{3} | 127,665 | 123,298 | | Total RWAs (Unaudited) | 356,774 | 358,127 | | --- | --- | --- | ## Notes: 1. 2024 comparatives for Capital and RWAs have been calculated applying the IFRS 9 transitional arrangements in accordance with the CRR. Effective from 1 January 2025, the IFRS 9 transitional arrangements no longer applied. 2. 2024 comparatives for total capital were calculated applying the grandfathering of certain capital instruments within Tier 2 capital. Effective from 29 June 2025, the grandfathered instruments no longer qualified as Tier 2 capital. 3. As at 31 December 2025, the Group's MREL requirement, excluding the institution-specific confidential PRA buffer, was to hold £108.9bn of own funds and eligible liabilities equating to 30.5% of RWAs. The Group remains above its MREL regulatory requirement including the institution-specific confidential PRA buffer. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 288 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) Movement in CET1 capital | | 2025£m | | --- | --- | | Opening balance as at 1 January | 48,558 | | Profit for the period attributable to equity holders | 7,172 | | Own credit relating to derivative liabilities | (15) | | Ordinary share dividends paid and foreseen | (1,200) | | Purchased and foreseeable share repurchase | (2,500) | | Other equity coupons paid and foreseen | (998) | | Increase in retained regulatory capital generated from earnings | 2,459 | | Net impact of share schemes | 190 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve | 773 | | Currency translation reserve | (1,132) | | Other reserves | (68) | | Decrease in other qualifying reserves | (237) | | Pension remeasurements within reserves | (14) | | Defined benefit pension fund asset deduction | (31) | | Net impact of pensions | (45) | | Additional value adjustments (PVA) | 95 | | Goodwill and intangible assets | 17 | | Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences | 382 | | Excess of expected loss over impairment | (33) | | Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments | (13) | | Adjustment under IFRS 9 transitional arrangements | (138) | | Other regulatory adjustments | 25 | | Increase in regulatory capital due to adjustments and deductions | 335 | | Closing balance as at 31 December | 51,070 | CET1 capital increased by £2.5bn to £51.1bn (December 2024: £48.6bn). Significant movements in the period were: - £7.2bn of capital generated from profit partially offset by distributions of £4.7bn comprising: - £2.5bn share buybacks including the now completed £1.0bn announced with FY24 results and £1.0bn announced with H125 results and the ongoing £0.5bn share buyback announced with Q325 results - £1.2bn of ordinary share dividends paid and foreseen reflecting £0.4bn interim dividend paid in September 2025 and a £0.8bn accrual towards the FY25 dividend - £1.0bn of equity coupons paid and foreseen - £0.2bn decrease in other qualifying reserves including a £1.1bn reduction in the currency translation reserve primarily as a result of the strengthening of spot GBP against USD, partially offset by a £0.8bn gain in the fair value through other comprehensive income reserve. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 289 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Risk weighted assets Risk weighted assets (RWAs) by risk type and business | | Credit risk | | Counterparty credit risk | | | | Market risk | | Operational risk | Total RWAs | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Std £m | IRB £m | Std £m | IRB £m | IRB £m | CVA £m | Std £m | IMA £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | Barclays UK | 16,731 | 55,037 | 132 | 8 | — | 43 | 177 | — | 13,697 | 85,825 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 3,878 | 18,341 | 89 | 312 | 1 | 4 | 31 | 343 | 3,510 | 26,509 | | Barclays Private Bank & Wealth Management | 4,981 | 580 | 112 | 19 | — | 11 | 39 | 240 | 2,054 | 8,036 | | Barclays Investment Bank | 44,961 | 49,750 | 21,986 | 19,442 | 165 | 3,030 | 12,018 | 20,111 | 25,238 | 196,701 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 21,050 | 1,004 | — | 1 | — | — | — | — | 5,393 | 27,448 | | Head Office | 5,405 | 5,439 | 1 | 5 | — | — | 219 | 59 | 1,127 | 12,255 | | Barclays Group | 97,006 | 130,151 | 22,320 | 19,787 | 166 | 3,088 | 12,484 | 20,753 | 51,019 | 356,774 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | | | Barclays UK | 15,516 | 55,301 | 146 | 11 | — | 74 | 228 | — | 13,181 | 84,457 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 3,932 | 15,680 | 106 | 336 | — | 12 | 16 | 548 | 3,282 | 23,912 | | Barclays Private Bank & Wealth Management | 5,058 | 434 | 118 | 31 | — | 16 | 44 | 330 | 1,859 | 7,890 | | Barclays Investment Bank | 40,957 | 49,231 | 21,889 | 24,094 | 70 | 2,913 | 12,442 | 23,023 | 24,164 | 198,783 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 21,019 | 966 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 4,864 | 26,849 | | Head Office | 6,580 | 8,162 | 1 | 20 | — | 4 | — | 212 | 1,257 | 16,236 | | Barclays Group | 93,062 | 129,774 | 22,260 | 24,492 | 70 | 3,019 | 12,730 | 24,113 | 48,607 | 358,127 | ## Movement analysis of risk weighted assets | Risk weighted assets | Credit risk £m | Counterparty credit risk £m | Market risk £m | Operational risk £m | Total RWAs £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2024 | 222,836 | 49,841 | 36,843 | 48,607 | 358,127 | | Book size | 13,766 | (1,994) | (3,031) | 2,412 | 11,153 | | Acquisitions and disposals | (3,322) | — | — | — | (3,322) | | Book quality | (1,888) | (618) | — | — | (2,506) | | Model updates | 304 | 68 | — | — | 372 | | Methodology and policy | (305) | (229) | — | — | (534) | | Foreign exchange movement¹ | (4,234) | (1,707) | (575) | — | (6,516) | | Total RWA movements | 4,321 | (4,480) | (3,606) | 2,412 | (1,353) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 227,157 | 45,361 | 33,237 | 51,019 | 356,774 | Note: 1 Foreign exchange movements does not include impact of foreign exchange for modelled market risk or operational risk. Total RWAs decreased £1.4bn to £356.8bn (Dec 2024: £358.1bn). Credit risk RWAs increased £4.3bn: - A £13.8bn increase in book size primarily reflecting lending growth in UK businesses and business activity within IB - A £3.3bn decrease in acquisitions and disposals reflecting the sale of the German Consumer Finance business and of Barclays' joint venture interest in Entercard, partially offset by the acquisition of the GM portfolio - A £1.9bn decrease in book quality RWAs primarily driven by improvements in credit quality within the Barclays UK mortgages portfolio - A £4.2bn decrease as a result of foreign exchange movements primarily due to the strengthening of spot GBP against USD Counterparty credit risk RWAs decreased £4.5bn: - A £4.5bn decrease in the RWAs primarily reflecting trading activity and the impact of foreign exchange movements due to the strengthening of spot GBP against USD Market risk RWAs decreased £3.6bn: - A £3.0bn decrease in book size due to trading activity within Global Markets Operational risk RWAs increased £2.4bn: - A £2.4bn increase in book size primarily driven by the inclusion of higher 2025 income compared to 2022 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 290 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Leverage ratios and exposures | Leverage ratios^{1} | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | | UK leverage ratio^{2} | 5.1% | 5.0% | | T1 capital | 63,795 | 60,634 | | UK leverage exposure | 1,247,313 | 1,206,502 | | Average UK leverage ratio | 4.7% | 4.6% | | Average T1 capital | 63,277 | 60,291 | | Average UK leverage exposure | 1,358,364 | 1,308,335 | ## Notes: 1. 2024 comparatives for UK leverage ratios have been calculated applying the IFRS 9 transitional arrangements in accordance with the CRR. Effective from 1 January 2025, the IFRS 9 transitional arrangements no longer applied. 2. Although the leverage ratio is expressed in terms of T1 capital, the leverage ratio buffers and 75% of the minimum requirement must be covered solely with CET1 capital. The CET1 capital held against the 0.53% G-SII ALRB was £6.6bn and against the 0.3% CCLB was £3.7bn. The UK leverage ratio increased to 5.1% (December 2024: 5.0%), as Tier 1 capital increased by £3.2bn, partially offset by a £40.8bn increase in leverage exposure to £1,247.3bn. The increase in leverage exposure was largely driven by an increase in trading activity in IB and higher lending in Barclays UK and UKCB, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD. ## Foreign exchange risk (audited) The Group is exposed to two sources of foreign exchange risk. ### a) Transactional foreign currency exposure Transactional foreign currency exposures represent exposure on banking assets and liabilities, denominated in currencies other than the functional currency of the transacting entity. The Group’s risk management policies are designed to prevent the holding of significant open positions in foreign currencies outside the trading portfolio managed by Barclays Investment bank which is monitored through VaR. Banking book transactional foreign exchange risk outside of Barclays Investment bank is monitored on a daily basis by the market risk function and minimised by the businesses. ### b) Translational foreign exchange exposure The Group’s investments in overseas subsidiaries and branches create capital resources denominated in foreign currencies, principally USD and EUR. Changes in the GBP value of the net investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital. The Group’s strategy is to minimise the volatility of the CET1 ratios caused by foreign exchange movements, by matching the CET1 capital movements to the revaluation of the Group’s foreign currency RWA exposures. ## Functional currency of operations (audited) | | Foreign currency net investments £m | Borrowings which hedge the net investments £m | Derivatives which hedge the net investments £m | Structural currency exposures pre-economic hedges £m | Other equity Instruments £m | Remaining structural currency exposures £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | USD | 26,370 | (4,406) | (2,141) | 19,823 | (5,450) | 14,373 | | EUR | 10,195 | (6,097) | — | 4,098 | (1,310) | 2,788 | | INR | 1,489 | — | (1,259) | 230 | — | 230 | | JPY | 544 | (177) | — | 367 | — | 367 | | Other currencies | 2,007 | (8) | (989) | 1,010 | (1,127) | (117) | | Total | 40,605 | (10,688) | (4,389) | 25,528 | (7,887) | 17,641 | | 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | USD | 28,012 | (6,243) | (2,230) | 19,539 | (5,846) | 13,693 | | EUR | 9,549 | (5,655) | — | 3,894 | (264) | 3,630 | | INR | 1,403 | — | (992) | 411 | — | 411 | | JPY | 628 | (215) | — | 413 | — | 413 | | Other currencies | 2,037 | (76) | (792) | 1,169 | (849) | 320 | | Total | 41,629 | (12,189) | (4,014) | 25,426 | (6,959) | 18,467 | Other equity instruments relate to exposures arising on foreign currency denominated preference share and AT1 instruments. These are accounted for at historical cost under IFRS and do not qualify as hedges for accounting purposes. The gain or loss arising from changes in the GBP value of these instruments is recognised on redemption in retained earnings. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 291 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) During 2025, total structural currency exposure net of hedging instruments decreased to £17.6bn (2024: £18.5bn). Foreign currency net investments decreased to £40.6bn (2024: £41.6bn) driven predominantly by a £1.6bn decrease in USD, offset by £0.6bn increase in EUR. The hedges (excluding economic hedges) associated with these investments decreased to £15.1bn (2024: £16.2bn). ## Pension risk review From 1 July 2025, the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) was amended to become a sectionalised scheme to meet the requirements of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Banking Reform) (Pensions) Regulations 2015, creating two separate sections - the Barclays Bank Section and the Barclays UK Section. The UKRF is closed to new entrants and there is no new final salary benefit being accrued. Existing active members accrue a combination of a contributory cash balance benefit and a voluntary defined contribution element. Pension risk arises as the market value of the pension fund assets may decline, investment returns may reduce or the estimated value of the pension liabilities may increase. The UKRF represents approximately 95.3% (2024: 96%) of the Barclays Group's total retirement benefit obligations globally, comprising approximately 91.5% in the Barclays Bank Section and approximately 3.8% in the Barclays UK Section. Refer to the Management of pension risk section in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited) for more information on how pension risk is managed. ## Assets The Trustee Board of the UKRF defines its overall long-term investment strategy for each of the Barclays Bank Section and Barclays UK Section, investing across a broad range of asset classes. This results in a diversified portfolio comprising both return seeking assets and liability matching assets, designed to better align with future pension obligations. The two most significant risks within the asset portfolio are exposure to credit spreads and growth assets. The split of scheme assets is shown within Note 32 to the financial statements. The fair value of the UKRF assets was £21.7bn as at 31 December 2025 (2024¹: £21.9bn), comprising £20.9bn in the Barclays Bank Section and £799m in the Barclays UK Section. ## Liabilities The UKRF retirement benefit obligations are a series of future cash flows with relatively long duration. On an IAS 19 basis these cash flows are sensitive to changes in the expected long-term price inflation rate (RPI) and the discount rate (GBP AA corporate bond yield): - An increase in long-term expected inflation corresponds to an increase in liabilities; - A decrease in the discount rate corresponds to an increase in liabilities. Pension risk is generated through the Group's defined benefit schemes and this risk is set to reduce over time as the main defined benefit scheme is closed to new entrants. The charts below outline the shape of the UKRF Barclays Bank Section and Barclays UK Section's liability cash flow profile respectively as at 31 December 2025 that takes account of the future inflation indexing of payments to beneficiaries. ## Barclays Bank Section The majority of the liability cash flows (approximately 97%) fall within the next 40 years, with payments peaking between 0 and 10 years and declining thereafter. The precise shape of the cash flow profile is sensitive to changes in inflation and longevity expectations, as well as member behaviour, including transfers out of the scheme. Transfers out accelerate the timing of benefit payments and therefore bring forward the associated liability cash flows. For more detail on the UKRF's financial and demographic assumptions, see Note 32 to the financial statements. ![img-74.jpeg](img-74.jpeg) Barclays Bank Section - Proportion of liability cash flows (%) A 0-10 years B 11-20 years C 21-30 years D 31-40 years E 41-50 years F 51+ years ![img-75.jpeg](img-75.jpeg) Barclays Bank Section - Net IAS 19 position¹ (£bn) The graph above illustrates the movement in the UKRF Barclays Bank Section's net IAS 19 position over the past four years. In 2025, favourable market movements largely offset the proportional transfer out of the surplus resulting from sectionalisation. From 1st July 2025 onward, the figures shown relate solely to the Barclays Bank Section. Refer to Note 32 to the financial statements for the sensitivity of the UKRF liabilities to changes in key assumptions. Note: 1 Figures prior to 1 July 2025 refer to the UKRF before sectionalisation --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 292 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Barclays UK Section The majority of the liability cash flows (approximately 86%) fall within the next 20 years, with payments peaking between 11 and 20 years and declining thereafter. The shape of the cash flow profile is sensitive to changes in inflation expectations and member behaviour, including transfers out of the scheme. Transfers out accelerate the timing of benefit payments and therefore bring forward the associated liability cash flows. Further information on the financial and demographic assumptions applied to the Barclays UK Section is provided in Note 32 to the financial statements. ## Barclays UK Section - Proportion of liability cash flows (%) ![img-76.jpeg](img-76.jpeg) A 0-10 years 38 B 11-20 years 48 C 21-30 years 14 D 31+ years 0 ## Barclays UK Section - Net IAS 19 position The Barclays UK Section's net IAS 19 position was £69m as at 31 December 2025, with the increase primarily driven by positive equity market returns. ## Risk measurement In line with Barclays' risk management framework, the assets and liabilities of the UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) are modelled within a Value-at-Risk (VaR) framework to assess the volatility of the pension position at a total portfolio level for each of the Barclays Bank Section and the Barclays UK Section. This approach enables the risks, diversification and liability matching characteristics of the UKRF's obligations and investments to be adequately captured. VaR is measured and monitored on a quarterly basis. Risks are reviewed and reported regularly at forums including the Board Risk Committee, the Group Risk Committee and the Pensions Executive Board. The VaR model takes into account the valuation of the liabilities on an IAS 19 basis (see Note 32 to the financial statements). The Trustee receives quarterly VaR measures on a funding basis. The UKRF Barclays Bank Section pension liability is sensitive to post-retirement mortality assumptions, which are reviewed regularly (See Note 32 to the financial statements). To mitigate part of this risk the Barclays Bank Section has entered into longevity reinsurance contracts approximately 70% of current pensioner liabilities. By contrast, benefits under the UKRF Barclays UK Section are provided as a lump sum at retirement rather than a lifetime pension, and therefore the Barclays UK section is not exposed to post-retirement longevity risk. In addition, the impact of pension risk to the Group is taken into account as part of the stress testing process. Stress testing is performed internally on at least an annual basis. The UKRF exposure is also included as part of regulatory stress tests. Barclays defined benefit pension schemes affect capital in two ways: - An IAS 19 deficit is treated as a liability on the Group's balance sheet. Movement in a deficit due to remeasurements, including actuarial losses, are recognised immediately through Other Comprehensive Income and as such reduces shareholders' equity and CET1 capital. An IAS 19 surplus is treated as an asset on the balance sheet and increases shareholders' equity; however, it is deducted for the purposes of determining CET1 capital. - In the Group's statutory balance sheet an IAS 19 surplus or deficit is partially offset by a deferred tax liability or asset respectively. These may or may not be recognised for calculating CET1 capital depending on the overall deferred tax position of the Group at the particular time. Pension risk is taken into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment undertaken by the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) at least annually. The resulting Pillar 2A requirement forms part of the Group's overall capital requirement. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 293 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Interest rate risk in the banking book All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated. ### Overview The treasury and capital risk framework covers interest rate sensitive exposures held in the banking book, mostly relating to amortised cost accounted and fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) instruments. The potential volatility of net interest income is measured by an Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) metric which is monitored regularly and reported to senior management and the Barclays PLC Board Risk Committee as part of the limit monitoring framework. For further detail on the interest rate risk in the banking book governance and framework refer to page 177 in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). ### Key metrics **AEaR** **-£6m** AEaR across the Group from a -25bps Shock to forward interest rate curves. ### Summary of performance in the period Barclays PLC’s strategy remains to stabilise income over time. The reduction in NII sensitivity during the year to a -25 basis points interest rate shock is driven by increased structural hedge duration reflecting the observed stability in deposit balances during the year. ### Net interest income sensitivity The table below shows a sensitivity analysis on pre-tax net interest income for non-traded financial assets and liabilities, including the effect of any hedging. This analysis is not a forward guidance on NII and is intended as a quantification of risk exposure utilising the NII metric as described in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited), which includes documentation of the main model assumptions. | Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currency (audited) | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | | 2024 | | | | +25 basis points | -25 basis points | +25 basis points | -25 basis points | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | £m | £m | | GBP | 31 | (41) | 56 | (76) | | USD | (43) | 42 | (30) | 30 | | EUR | (4) | 3 | (5) | 5 | | Other currencies | 11 | (10) | 3 | (3) | | Total | (5) | (6) | 24 | (44) | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 294 # Risk performance - Treasury and Capital risk (continued) ## Analysis of equity sensitivity Equity sensitivity measures the overall impact of a +/-25bps movement in interest rates on retained earnings, FVOCI, cash flow hedging reserves and pensions. For non-NII items a DV01 metric is used, which is an indicator of the shift in value for a 1bp movement in the yield curve. | Analysis of equity sensitivity (audited) | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | | 2024 | | | | +25 basis points | -25 basis points | +25 basis points | -25 basis points | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Net interest income | (5) | (6) | 24 | (44) | | Taxation effects on the above | 1 | 2 | (6) | 11 | | Effect on profit for the year | (4) | (4) | 18 | (33) | | As percentage of net profit after tax | (0.1%) | (0.1%) | 0.3% | (0.5%) | | Effect on profit for the year (per above) | (4) | (4) | 18 | (33) | | Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve | (193) | 200 | (189) | 196 | | Cash flow hedge reserve | (1,211) | 1,211 | (907) | 907 | | Taxation effects on the above | 393 | (395) | 307 | (309) | | Effect on equity | (1,015) | 1,012 | (771) | 761 | | As percentage of equity | (1.3%) | 1.3% | (1.1%) | 1.0% | Movements in the FVOCI reserve impact CET1 capital. However, movements in the cash flow hedging reserve and pensions remeasurement reserve recognised in FVOCI do not affect CET1 capital. ## Volatility of the FVOCI portfolio in the liquidity pool Changes in value of FVOCI exposures flow directly through capital via the FVOCI reserve. The volatility of the value of the FVOCI investments in the liquidity pool is captured and managed through a value measure rather than an earning measure, i.e. non-traded market risk VaR. Daily VaR is calculated using a historical simulation methodology with a one-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level. Although the underlying methodology to calculate the non-traded VaR is identical to the one used in traded management VaR, the two measures are not directly comparable. The non-traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the FVOCI exposures. These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment. | Analysis of volatility of the FVOCI portfolio in the liquidity pool | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | | Average | High | Low | Average | High | Low | | For the year ended 31 December | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Non-traded market value at risk (daily, 95%) | 49 | 60 | 32 | 61 | 70 | 50 | Daily Value at Risk has been lower on an average in 2025 relative to 2024 driven by a combination of position changes and market volatility reduction. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 295 # Risk performance - Operational risk # Operational risk All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated. ## Overview Operational risks are inherent in the Group’s business activities, and it is not cost effective or possible to attempt to eliminate all operational risks. The Operational Risk Framework is therefore focused on identifying operational risks, assessing them and managing them within the Group’s approved risk appetite The Operational Risk principal risk comprises the following Risks Categories: Change Delivery Management Risk, Data and Records Management Risk; Financial Reporting Risk; Fraud Risk; Cyber & Information Security Risk; Operational Recovery Planning Risk; People Risk; Physical Security Risk; Premises Risk; Risk Reporting Risk; Supplier Risk; Tax Risk; Technology Risk and Transaction Processing Risk. The operational risk profile is also informed by a number of Connected Risks: Resilience, Third Party Service Provider and Model Connected Risk. These Connected Risks represent material threats to the Group, which extend across multiple risk categories, and therefore require a coordinated approach to overseeing the risk exposure and/or consolidated reporting. For definitions of these risks refer to 180 to 184 of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025. To provide complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the Operational Risk Taxonomy extends beyond the risks listed above to cover operational risks associated with other Principal Risks too. This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events above the Group’s reportable threshold, which have had a financial impact in 2025. The Group’s operational risk profile is informed by bottom-up risk assessments undertaken by each business unit and top-down qualitative review for each risk type. Fraud, Transaction Processing, Cyber and Information Security continue to be highlighted as key operational risk exposures. For information on compliance risk events, see the compliance risk section. ## Key metrics **83%** of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a loss value of £50,000 or less **86%** of events by number are due to External Fraud **51%** of losses are from events aligned to External Fraud **49%** of losses are from events aligned to Execution, Delivery and Process Management ## Summary of performance in the period During 2025, total operational risk losses¹ increased to £143m (2024: £127m) while the number of recorded events for 2025 (2,943) increased from the level for 2024 (2,392). The total operational risk losses for the year were mainly driven by events falling within the Execution, Delivery & Process Management and External Fraud categories, which tend to be high volume and low impact events. ## Operational risk profile Within operational risk, there are a large number of smaller value risk events. In 2025, 83% (2024: 86%) of the Group’s reportable operational risk events by volume had a value of less than £50,000 each. Cumulatively, events under this £50,000 threshold accounted for only 33% (2024: 31%) of the Group’s total net operational risk losses. A small proportion of operational risk events have a material impact on the financial results of the Group. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F 296 # Risk performance - Operational risk (continued) The analysis below presents the Group’s operational risk events by Basel event category: ## Operational risk events by Basel event category¹ ### % of total risk events by count | Internal fraud | % of total risk events by value | | --- | --- | | 2025 0.0 | Internal fraud | | 2024 0.1 | 2025 0.2 | | | 2024 0.0 | | External fraud | External fraud | | --- | --- | | 2025 86.0 | 2025 50.6 | | 2024 83.9 | 2024 41.9 | | Execution delivery and process management | Execution delivery and process management | | --- | --- | | 2025 13.6 | 2025 48.8 | | 2024 15.8 | 2024 38.6 | | Employment practices and workplace safety | Employment practices and workplace safety | | --- | --- | | 2025 0.0 | 2025 0.0 | | 2024 0.0 | 2024 0.0 | | Damage to physical assets | Damage to physical assets | | --- | --- | | 2025 0.0 | 2025 0.1 | | 2024 0.1 | 2024 19.3 | | Clients, products and business practices | Clients, products and business practices | | --- | --- | | 2025 0.1 | 2025 0.1 | | 2024 0.0 | 2024 0.0 | | Business disruption and system failures | Business disruption and system failures | | --- | --- | | 2025 0.3 | 2025 0.3 | | 2024 0.1 | 2024 0.1 | ### Note 1 The data disclosed includes operational risk losses for reportable events impacting the Barclays Group business areas, having impact of > £10,000 and excludes events that are compliance or legal risk, aggregate and boundary events. A boundary event is an operational risk event that results in a credit risk impact. Due to the nature of risk events that keep evolving, prior year losses are updated. - External Fraud remains the category with the highest frequency of events at 86% of total events in 2025 (2024: 84%). Impacts from events arising from External Fraud increased in 2025 to £72m (2024: £53m) and accounted for 51% of total 2025 losses (2024: 42%). In this category, high volume, low impact events are driven by transactional fraud linked to debit and credit card activity, as well as the growing incidence of Authorised Push Payment (APP) scams, where customers are deceived into transferring funds to bad actors. - Execution, Delivery and Process Management impacts increased to £70m (2024: £49m) and accounted for 49% (2024: 39%) of total operational risk losses. The events in this category are typical of the banking industry as a whole where high volumes of transactions are processed on a daily basis, mapping mainly to Barclays Transaction Processing risk type. The overall frequency of events in this category decreased to 14% of total events by volume (2024: 16%). Fraud remains an industry-wide threat with criminals using varied techniques to target customers and colleagues directly (i.e., Third Party Fraud), or the Group directly (i.e., First Party Fraud). In the UK and Europe, Authorised Push Payment (APP) Scams particularly continue to be a growing fraud type where customers are deceived to transfer funds from their account to a bad actor. The Group continues to work closely with external partners on various fraud prevention initiatives and continues to improve the fraud control environment through focused investment in enhancing fraud prevention systems and tools to combat the increasing level of fraud attempts whilst minimising disruption to genuine transactions. Fraud can also be committed by one or more employees across any of the Group entities (i.e., Internal Fraud or Unauthorised Trading Fraud) and the Group maintains a robust control environment to limit exposure. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Risk performance - Operational risk (continued) Operational resilience has remained a key area of focus for the Group over the past year, with global events demonstrating that severe but plausible disruption is no longer theoretical. The evolving threat landscape, characterised by increasing cyber sophistication, geopolitical tension, supplier disruption and interconnected financial market infrastructures, highlights the need for resilience to be designed, embedded, tested and sustained across our important business services, if we are to avoid intolerable harm. The Group remains committed to sustained and disciplined investment in end-to-end resilience capabilities, as expectations evolve and the external operating environment becomes increasingly complex. Operational risk associated with cybersecurity remains a top focus for the Group. The sophistication of threat actors continues to grow as noted by multiple external risk events observed throughout the year. Ransomware attacks across the global Barclays supplier base were observed and the Group worked closely with the affected suppliers to manage potential impacts to the Group and its clients and customers. The Group's cybersecurity incidents did not materially impact the Group's business strategy, results of operations, or financial condition, and there were no material loss events associated with cybersecurity recorded within the event categories above. The Group businesses are highly dependent on its ability to process and monitor, on a daily basis, a very large number of transactions, many of which are highly complex and occur at high volumes and frequencies, across numerous and diverse markets in many currencies. Given the Group's diverse customer base and geographical reach and the increase in volume, speed, frequency and complexity of transactions, especially electronic transactions (as well as the requirements to report such transactions on a real-time basis to clients, regulators and exchanges), developing, maintaining and upgrading operational systems and infrastructure becomes more challenging. The Group continues to focus on automation and simplification programmes to improve the overall control environment and manage the risk of processing errors as well as ensuring scalability of operations. For further information, refer to the Operational Risk Management section. Note: total External Fraud losses in 2025 including those from events with impact <£10,000 amounted to £180m (2024: £171m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Risk performance - Model risk, Compliance risk, Financial Crime risk, Reputation risk and Legal Risk ## Model risk, Compliance risk, Financial Crime risk, Reputation risk and Legal risk All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated. ## Model risk Barclays is committed to continuously improving model risk management and made a number of enhancements in 2025, including: - Progressed with the established regulatory remediation programme to meet PRA’s Supervisory Statement 1/23 Model risk management principles for banks. Key updates include enhancements to model development, validation and monitoring practices, establishment of additional roles and responsibilities with regards to models, introduction of quantitative processes framework and defined monitoring framework principles and design. - Introduced Artificial Intelligence(AI) Standard in support of the AI Policy, further developed of approach to AI validation, including Generative AI, and design of associated governance framework. - Expanded model risk framework to provide transparency around risk themes (Data and Technology) outside the Model Risk Framework that may impact model outputs. ## Compliance risk Barclays is committed to continuing to drive the right culture throughout all levels of the organisation. Barclays will continue to enhance effective management of Compliance Risk and appropriately consider the relevant tools, governance and management information in decision-making processes. Focus on the management of Compliance Risk is ongoing and, alongside other relevant business and control management information, the Compliance Risk Dashboard is a key component of this. Barclays continues to review the role and impact of Compliance Risk events and issues in the remuneration process at both the individual and business level. The Compliance Risk Taxonomy was refreshed and re-categorised into six core risks, namely wholesale conduct, customer protection, data privacy, regulatory compliance, product design and review and laws, rules and regulation risks. Financial Crime Risk was also separated into a standalone principal risk category, to reinforce the visibility and focus on this key area of risk to the business. Businesses have continued to assess and prioritise the consideration of driving good customer outcomes as we deliver the Group’s strategic change agenda. As part of the 2025 Medium-Term Planning Process material Compliance Risks associated with strategic and financial plans were assessed and businesses ensured that driving good outcomes for customers is at the heart of these plans. Throughout 2025, Compliance Risks, including outcomes for our customers, were raised by each business area for consideration by the relevant Board level committees. These Committees reviewed the risks raised and whether management’s proposed actions were appropriate to mitigate the risks effectively. Barclays continued to incur costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, please refer to Note 25 Legal, competition and regulatory matters and Note 23 Provisions, for further details. Costs include customer redress and remediation. Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of delivering the Group’s strategy and an ongoing commitment to improve oversight of culture and conduct. The control environment and compliance risk profile, informed by the Compliance Risk Dashboards, are presented to the respective Board Risk Committees and senior management. The Compliance Risk Dashboards set out key indicators in relation to Compliance risk and continue to allow effective oversight and decision-making and ensure the Group operates within Risk Appetite. Adherence to tolerances is assessed by the business through the key indicators as part of the Compliance Risk Dashboard governance process. Barclays remains focused on the continuous improvements being made to manage risk effectively with an emphasis on enhancing governance and management information to identify risk at earlier stages. --- # Risk performance - Model risk, Compliance risk, Financial Crime risk, Reputation risk and Legal Risk (continued) ## Financial Crime risk Barclays is committed to driving a strong financial crime risk management culture across all levels of the organisation. Effective 1 January 2025, the Barclays Group elevated financial crime risk - incorporating anti-bribery and corruption, anti-money laundering (including terrorist financing), anti-tax evasion facilitation and sanctions risks (including proliferation financing) - to a principal risk within the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), reflecting the evolving external threat landscape and regulatory expectations. During 2025, the financial crime principal risk was embedded, with financial crime and compliance risks being reported separately to the Board. A key area of focus has been enhancing the financial crime control environment to address emerging threats and evolving laws, rules and regulations. Throughout 2025, the Board and relevant committees received updates on the Group's financial crime risk profile and emerging risks in the context of the macroeconomic, regulatory and geopolitical outlook. These risks continue to be monitored on an ongoing basis. Effective 1st January 2026, the combined Financial Crime Policy was replaced by four policies that set detailed requirements for managing anti-bribery and corruption, anti-money laundering, anti-tax evasion facilitation and sanctions risks. This approach supports differentiated reporting and oversight of risk management across the four financial crime risks. To further embed financial crime as a principal risk, the Barclays updated its financial crime risk appetite statement. Recognising the risk-based approach to financial crime risk management, Barclays financial crime risk appetite, approved by the Group Executive Committee, is that "Barclays has no appetite for Financial Crime Risk issues and events that are material, systemic, not promptly remediated, not reported to regulators in a timely manner where required, and/or are likely to result in regulatory enforcement". The Group continued to incur costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, refer to Note 25 Legal, competition and regulatory matters and Note 23 Provisions for further details. Costs include customer redress and remediation, as well as fines and settlements. Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of delivering the Group's strategy and an ongoing commitment to improve oversight of culture and conduct. ## Reputation risk Barclays is committed to identifying reputation risks and issues as early as possible and managing them appropriately. At a Group level throughout 2025, reputation risks and issues were overseen by the Board which reviews the processes and policies which Barclays identifies and manages reputation risk. Within the Barclays Bank UK Group and the Barclays Bank Group reputation risks and issues were overseen by the respective risk and Board risk committees. The top live and emerging reputation risks and issues within the Barclays Bank UK Group and the Barclays Bank Group are included within an overarching twice yearly report at the respective Board level. The Board reviews reputation risks escalated by businesses and considers whether management's proposed actions, for example attaching conditions to proposed client transactions or increased engagement with impacted stakeholders, were appropriate to mitigate the risks effectively. The Board also received regular updates with regard to key reputation risks and issues, including: Barclays response to global conflicts; association with sensitive sectors; access to banking; lending practices and the resilience of key Barclays systems and processes. The Group continued to incur costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, please refer to Note 25 Legal, competition and regulatory matters and Note 23 Provisions, for further details. Costs include customer redress and remediation, as well as fines and settlements. Resolution of these matters remains an ongoing commitment to improve oversight of culture and conduct and management of reputation risks. ## Legal risk The Group remains committed to continuous improvements in managing legal risk effectively. During 2025, the Group wide LRMF was updated in line with other Principal Risk Frameworks to provide consistency in the bank's risk management documentation. The Group wide LRMF continues to complement the CRMF, which includes the responsibility of the Legal Function to proactively identify, communicate and provide legal advice on applicable laws, rules and regulations. Other improvements during 2025 included a review and update of the supporting legal risk policies, standards and mandatory training, reinforced by ongoing engagement with and education of the Group's businesses and functions by Legal Function colleagues. Legal risk tolerances and legal risk appetite have also been reviewed. Tolerance adherence is assessed through key indicators, which are also used to evaluate the legal risk profile and are reviewed, at least annually, through the relevant risk and control committees. Mandatory controls to manage legal risks are set out in the legal risk standards and are subject to ongoing monitoring. The CRMF referred to above (and described in more detail on page 298) also mitigates legal risk. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Supervision and regulation ## Supervision of the Group The Group’s operations, including its overseas branches, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a large number of rules and regulations applicable to the conduct of banking and other financial services business in each of the jurisdictions in which the Group operates. These apply to business operations, impact financial returns and include capital, leverage and liquidity requirements, authorisation, registration and reporting requirements, restrictions on certain activities, and conduct of business regulations, amongst other applicable regulatory requirements. Regulatory developments in one or more jurisdictions may impact the Group globally. We focus particularly on UK, US and EU regulation in this Report due to the location of the Group’s principal areas of business. Regulations elsewhere may also have a significant impact on the Group due to the location of its branches, subsidiaries and, in some cases, clients. For more information on the risks related to the supervision and regulation of the Group, including regulatory change, see the material existing and emerging risk entitled ‘Regulatory Change agenda and impact on Business Model’ in the Material existing and emerging risks section. ## Supervision in the UK In the UK, day-to-day regulation and supervision of the Group is divided between the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) (a division of the Bank of England (BoE)) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). In addition, the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE has influence on the prudential requirements that may be imposed on the banking system through its powers of direction and recommendation. Certain members of the Group are also subject to regulatory initiatives undertaken by the UK Payment Systems Regulator (PSR), as a participant in payment systems regulated by the PSR. The Government is proposing that the FCA take on all of the PSR’s responsibilities and relevant members of the Group will continue to be subject to payment supervision by the FCA when this transfer of powers comes into effect. Members of the Group may also be subject to claims managed by the Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) which, whilst not a regulator, provides a means of redress in customer disputes without the involvement of the UK courts. In July 2025, the FCA consulted on modernising the redress system administered by the FOS with the aim of identifying areas of duplication and/or complexity and improving the role that the FOS plays in customer disputes. Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank UK PLC are both authorised with permission to accept deposits, amongst other things, and are subject to prudential supervision by the PRA and to conduct regulation and supervision by the FCA. Barclays Bank UK PLC is the ring-fenced bank within the Barclays Group. Barclays Bank PLC is the non ring-fenced bank within the Barclays Group. Barclays Bank PLC is subject to prudential supervision on a solo-consolidated basis and the Barclays Bank UK Group is subject to prudential supervision on a sub-consolidated basis and on an individual basis. The Group as a whole is also subject to prudential supervision by the PRA on a group consolidated basis. Barclays PLC has been approved by the PRA as a financial holding company. Barclays Capital Securities Limited (BCSL), which provides clients with access to equities and equity financing services across European and Asian markets, is authorised and subject to prudential supervision by the PRA as a PRA-designated investment firm and is subject to conduct regulation and supervision by the FCA. Certain members of the Barclays Group are regulated on a solo basis by the FCA, including Barclays Investment Solutions Limited, Barclays Asset Management Limited, Clydesdale Financial Services Limited and Kensington Mortgage Company Limited. The Group also has appointed representative arrangements in place: (i) Barclays Execution Services Limited is an appointed representative of Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank UK PLC; (ii) Barclays Global Service Centre Private Limited is an appointed representative of Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Bank UK PLC and Clydesdale Financial Services Limited; and (iii) Tesco Stores Limited is an introducer appointed representative of Barclays Bank UK PLC. These are arrangements under which the appointed representative is permitted to carry on certain regulated activities in the UK which its principal takes responsibility for and oversees. Appointed representative arrangements must comply with certain statutory and FCA rules, including on prescribed contractual terms and ongoing monitoring and supervision of the appointed representative by the principal. The PRA’s supervision of the Group is conducted through a variety of regulatory tools, including the collection of information by way of prudential returns or cross-firm reviews, reports obtained from skilled persons, information gathering, stress testing, regular supervisory visits and regular continuous assessment meetings with the Group’s management and relevant stakeholders to discuss matters such as strategy, governance, controls, financial resilience, operational resilience, risk management, and recovery and resolution. Further, the BoE, as the UK resolution authority, informs prudential requirements and sets requirements for the Group relating to resolution preparedness. The FCA’s supervision of the UK firms in the Group is carried out through a combination of proactive engagement meetings, regular supervisory visits, information gathering and regular meetings with the Group’s management and relevant stakeholders to discuss matters such as business and customer strategy, fair treatment of customers, and financial crime controls, as well as cross-sectoral reviews which analyse the different areas of the market and the risks that may lie ahead. The FCA and the PRA also apply the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (the SMCR) which imposes a regulatory approval, individual accountability and fitness and propriety framework in respect of senior individuals within relevant firms. FCA supervision has focused on strategic transformation, financial crime controls, conduct risk and customer/client outcomes under the consumer duty (which now applies to both open and closed products), firm culture and non-financial misconduct, fraud controls and reimbursement, access to cash, the fair treatment of vulnerable customers, operational resilience (including cyber risk), the controls framework and payment account access and closures. PRA supervision has focused on strategic transformation, financial and operational resilience (including cyber risk), governance, capital risk management, model risk management, data risk management, systems and controls, climate risk and resolvability, where resolvability is reviewed in conjunction with the Resolution Directorate (a division of the BoE). Both the PRA and the FCA apply standards that generally either anticipate or go beyond requirements established by global or EU standards, whether in relation to capital, leverage and liquidity, resolvability and resolution or matters of conduct. The UK is in the process of reviewing, repealing and, where relevant, replacing the EU legislation that was onshored into UK law following the --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 301 # Supervision and regulation (continued) UK's departure from the EU (known as "assimilated law"). The Financial Services and Markets Act 2023 (FSMA 2023) established a framework for the revocation of assimilated law relating to financial services. However, the Government is not expected to revoke assimilated law relating to financial services unless the FCA and/or PRA have drafted and consulted on rules in the relevant areas, where it is appropriate that the provisions are replaced. There is a significant volume of assimilated law for the UK Government to repeal and replace, so this process remains ongoing and the regulatory landscape continues to develop. There is potential for an increase in regulatory implementation costs to adapt systems and controls, as a result of these developments, although areas of divergence from assimilated law have been limited to date. FSMA 2023 also introduced the framework for the 'designated activities regime' (DAR). The DAR framework allows HM Treasury to designate certain activities which do not require regulatory authorisation to carry them out, but which are currently subject to FCA and PRA supervision under assimilated law. In January 2025, the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Designated Activities) (Supervision and Enforcement) Regulations 2025 came into effect. These Regulations give the FCA supervisory and enforcement powers in respect of short selling and consumer composite investment activities. # Supervision in the EU The Group's operations in the EU are authorised and regulated by a combination of its home regulators and host regulators in the EU countries where the Group operates. Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is licensed as a credit institution by the Central Bank of Ireland (CBI) and is therefore subject to supervision by the CBI as home state or competent authority under various EU financial services directives and regulations. It is further designated as a significant institution falling under direct supervision on a solo basis by the European Central Bank (ECB) for prudential purposes. Barclays Bank Ireland PLC's EU branches are also subject to direct supervision for local conduct purposes by national supervisory authorities in the EU jurisdictions where they are established. Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is subject to the requirements set by the Single Resolution Board (SRB) as its resolution authority. The Group provides the majority of its cross-border banking and investment services to EEA clients via Barclays Bank Ireland PLC. Additionally, Barclays Bank PLC and BCSL are authorised in certain EEA Member States to enable them to continue to conduct a limited range of activities without a physical presence,, including accessing EEA trading venues and interdealer trading. Directive (EU) 2024/1619 (CRD VI) contains a prohibition on providing core banking services, such as lending and deposit-taking into the EU from a third country entity, subject to certain exemptions. These CRD VI changes are currently pending Member State implementation from January 2026 and should enter into force in the majority of jurisdictions from January 2027. As a result of CRD VI, Barclays Bank PLC and BCSL may be limited in their ability to provide certain core banking services into the EU from January 2027. Barclays Bank PLC has a branch in Paris (to facilitate access to TARGET 2), which is regulated by the Autorité de Contrôle Prudentiel et de Résolution (ACPR) and will also be subject to new regulatory requirements under CRD VI. On 21 January 2026, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC announced that it had commenced the implementation of its plan to re-domicile its registered office from Dublin to Paris, which is to be effected by changing its corporate form to a Societas Europaea followed by a transfer of its registered office. The change of corporate form will be effected via a court approved merger process, which commenced in Q4 2025 and is expected to complete in Q4 2026. Following completion of the merger, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC (then to be named, with effect from completion of the merger, Barclays Europe SE) intends to apply for the relocation of its registered office to Paris. Following this re-domiciliation, Barclays Europe SE would be subject to supervision by the ACPR, the Autorité de Marchés Financiers and the European Central Bank. The re-domiciliation is subject to certain conditions, including the approval of those regulators. It is expected to be completed in H1 2027. # Supervision in the US Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and its New York branch, and Barclays Bank PLC's US subsidiaries are subject to a comprehensive regulatory framework involving numerous statutes, rules and regulations in the US. For example, the Group's US activities and operations are subject to supervision and regulation by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (FRB), as well as additional supervision, requirements and restrictions imposed by other federal and state regulators and self-regulatory organisations (SROs). In some cases, US requirements may impose restrictions on the Group's global activities, in addition to its activities in the US. Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays US Holdings Limited (BUSHL), Barclays US LLC (BUSL), and Barclays Group US Inc. (BGUS) are regulated as bank holding companies (BHCs) by the FRB. BUSL is the Group's ultimate US holding company that holds substantially all of the Group's US subsidiaries (including Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI) and Barclays Bank Delaware). BUSL is subject to requirements in respect of capital adequacy, capital planning and stress testing, risk management and governance, liquidity, leverage limits, large exposure limits, restrictions on activities and financial regulatory reporting. Barclays Bank PLC's New York branch is also subject to enhanced prudential standards relating to, among other things, liquidity and risk management. Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BUSHL and BUSL have financial holding company (FHC) status under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956. FHC status allows these entities to engage in a variety of financial and related activities, directly or through subsidiaries, including underwriting, dealing and market making in securities. Failure to maintain FHC status could result in increasingly stringent penalties and, ultimately, in the closure or cessation of certain operations in the US. In addition to oversight by the FRB, Barclays Bank PLC's New York branch and many of the Group's subsidiaries are regulated by additional US authorities based on the location or activities of those entities. The New York branch of Barclays Bank PLC is subject to supervision and regulation by the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYSDFS). Barclays Bank Delaware, a Delaware chartered bank, is subject to supervision and regulation by the Delaware Office of the State Bank Commissioner, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the FRB and the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB). The deposits of Barclays Bank Delaware are insured by the FDIC, up to applicable limits. Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BUSHL, BUSL, and BGUS are required to act as a source of strength for Barclays Bank Delaware. This could, among other things, require these entities to provide capital support to Barclays Bank Delaware if it fails to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 302 # Supervision and regulation (continued) The Group's US securities broker/dealer and investment banking operations are conducted primarily through BCI, and are also subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) and other government agencies and SROs under US federal and state securities laws. BCI is also registered as a Futures Commission Merchant with the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), through which the Group conducts its US futures and options on futures business, including client clearing operations, which are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the CFTC, the National Futures Association and other SROs. Under the US framework for regulating swaps and security-based swaps established under Title VII of the Dodd-Frank Act, the CFTC has regulatory authority over swaps, the SEC has regulatory authority over security-based swaps, and the CFTC and SEC jointly regulate mixed swaps (as such terms are defined in the relevant legislation). The Group's activities related to US swaps and security-based swaps are principally conducted by Barclays Bank PLC and are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the CFTC and the SEC, respectively. Barclays Bank PLC is registered as a swap dealer with the CFTC and conditionally registered as a security-based swap dealer with the SEC. Barclays Bank PLC is also subject to the FRB swaps rules with respect to margin and capital requirements. In addition, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is registered as a swap dealer with the CFTC and is subject to the FRB swaps rules with respect to margin and capital. # Supervision in Asia Pacific, Middle East and Africa The Group's operations in Asia Pacific, Middle East and Africa are supervised and regulated by a broad range of national banking and financial services regulators. # Prudential regulation ## Prudential regulation in the UK Certain Basel III standards were originally implemented in EU and UK law through the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) and the Capital Requirements Directive IV (CRD IV), as amended by CRR II and CRD V. These standards were retained in the UK regulatory framework via a series of onshoring instruments when the UK withdrew from the EU. Under the assimilated law version of the CRR (the UK CRR), the Group is subject to a binding Pillar 1 minimum capital requirement to satisfy a Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 4.5% of risk-weighted assets (RWAs), a Tier 1 capital ratio of 6.0% of RWAs and a total capital ratio of 8.0% of RWAs. However, in practice the Group is required to and does hold capital significantly in excess of this requirement. Additional capital requirements apply to the Group including Pillar 2A minimum requirements and capital buffers, including the capital conservation buffer (CCB), the countercyclical capital buffer (CCyB), the other systemically important institutions (O-SII) buffer and the global systemically important institutions (G-SII) buffer, as well as PRA buffer requirements (the Pillar 2B), as explained further below. Global systemically important banks (G-SIBs), such as the Barclays Group, are subject to a number of additional prudential requirements, including the requirement to hold additional loss-absorbing capacity and additional capital buffers (including via the G-SII buffer requirement) above the level otherwise required by Basel III standards. The Group is subject to a 'combined buffer requirement' consisting of (i) a CCB of 2.5% of RWAs, (ii) systemic risk buffers (G-SII and O-SII buffers) and (iii) a CCyB of 1% of RWAs. The level of the G-SII buffer is set by the PRA which follows the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision G-SIB framework. The G-SII buffer ranges from 1% to 3.5% of RWAs in line with a bank's systemic importance and must be met with CET1 capital. On 27 November 2025, the FSB published an update to its list of G-SIBs, maintaining the 1.5% G-SII buffer that applies to the Group. The O-SII buffer can be set between 0% and 3% and has to be met solely with CET1 capital. The O-SII buffer rate applicable to Barclays Bank UK PLC is currently set by the PRA at 1% of RWAs. The CCyB is used to help ensure capital levels respond to the risk environment. By increasing the CCyB when vulnerabilities are judged to be building up, the FPC seeks to ensure banks have an additional cushion of capital with which to absorb potential losses, enhancing their resilience and helping to ensure the stable provision of financial services. The CCyB is composed of UK and overseas elements, set by authorities in individual jurisdictions. In the UK, the CCyB rate is set by the FPC and is calculated by reference to banks' relevant UK exposures. The CCyB rate applicable to the Group is currently 1%. Like the CCB, the CCyB must be met entirely with CET1 capital. The PRA requires UK firms to hold additional capital to cover risks which the PRA assesses are not fully captured by the Pillar 1 capital requirement. The PRA sets this additional capital requirement (Pillar 2A) at least annually, derived from each firm's individual capital guidance. Under current PRA rules, the Pillar 2A requirement must be met with at least 56.25% CET1 capital, no more than 43.75% additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital and no more than 25% tier 2 capital. In addition, the capital that firms use to meet their minimum requirements (Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A) cannot be counted towards meeting the combined buffer requirement. In February and October 2025, the PRA issued two policy statements (PS2/25 and PS18/25) regarding changes to the Pillar 2A capital framework, including retiring the refined methodology for calculating Pillar 2A requirements in light of incoming proposals to implement Basel III standards (discussed further below) and streamlining firm-specific capital communications. In January 2026, the final rules retiring the refined methodology to Pillar 2A were published as part of PS2/26. The PRA may also impose a confidential 'PRA buffer' to cover risks over a forward looking planning horizon, including with regard to firm-specific stresses or management and governance weaknesses. The PRA buffer must be met separately to the combined buffer requirement, and must be met fully with CET1 capital. On 2 December 2025, the FPC published its assessment of the appropriate level of capital requirements for the UK banking system. The FPC judged that the appropriate benchmark for the system-wide level of tier 1 capital is now at around 13% of RWAs, compared with 14% of RWAs in 2015. As at 31 December 2025, the Group's overall capital requirement for CET1 (excluding any applicable PRA buffer) was 12.2% comprising a 4.5% Pillar 1 minimum, a 2.5% CCB, a 1.5% G-SII buffer, a 2.7% Pillar 2A requirement and a 1% CCyB. On 22 April 2025, the PRA announced that it will introduce new rules that require firms to manage their step-in risk, that is, the risk which a bank incurs when it provides financial support to an unconsolidated entity that is facing stress in the absence of, or in excess of, any contractual obligations to provide such support. The PRA's supervisory statement concerning step-in risk takes effect from 1 January 2026 and will require firms to put in place policies and processes to identify and evaluate their relationship with certain unconsolidated --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Supervision and regulation (continued) entities where they act as a sponsor, invest in their debt or equity, or have other contractual or non-contractual exposures that lead them to be exposed to the performance of the entity. Additionally, they must consider whether there are any indicators of significant step-in risk in relation to those entities that have been assessed as being material and determining whether mitigating action is needed when significant step-in risk is identified. In December 2023, the PRA published its first collection of near-final policy proposals for implementing certain remaining Basel III standards (Basel 3.1), including revised frameworks for market risk, operational risk and Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) risk. A second policy statement was published by the PRA in September 2024, including near-final rules on credit risk and credit risk mitigation, the implementation of an output floor (requiring reported RWAs calculated under standardised and modelled approaches to be a minimum of 72.5% of fully standardised calculations), and disclosure and reporting. The implementation date for these standards has been extended to 1 January 2027, with a transitional period to ensure full implementation by 1 January 2030. In addition, with effect from 1 January 2026, the PRA has made amendments to the Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (CRR) Part and Definition of Capital Part of the PRA Rulebook, among others, to assimilate provisions of the onshored CRR into the PRA Rulebook, with certain changes. Further, on 28 October 2025, through PS 19/25, the PRA issued "near final" provisions proposed to take effect on 1 January 2027. As well as transposing certain UK CRR provisions into the PRA Rulebook, including those on securitisation, groups and consolidation, settlement risk and counterparty credit risk, with accompanying changes to PRA guidance, the near-final provisions implement a number of policy changes, in particular in relation to securitisation. In January 2026, through PS3/26, the PRA published the final policy materials and confirmed that there is no substantive difference between these and the near final rules published as part of PS19/25. In PS1/26, the PRA announced that it is taking forward adjustments to the implementation of the comprehensive amendments to the market risk framework under Basel 3.1, known as the Fundamental Review of the Trading Book (FRTB), and is seeking to implement the majority of these changes from 1 January 2027 (except the introduction of a new internal model approach (FRTB-IMA), the implementation of which will be delayed to 1 January 2028). PRA CP14/24 proposed certain changes to the large exposures (LE) framework. A number of the proposals took effect on 1 January 2026. The PRA has removed the option for firms to exempt exposures to the UK deposit guarantee scheme (DGS) for large exposure limits, as well as the option for firms to use immovable property as credit risk mitigation (CRM) for large exposure purposes and it has eliminated the stricter requirements on large exposures to certain French counterparties. The PRA is expected to finalise the remaining proposals in CP14/24 in 2026. These proposals include (i) removing the possibility for firms to use internal model (IM) methods to calculate exposure values to securities financing transactions (SFTs), (ii) amending the limits to trading book exposures for third-party exposures and for intra-group exposures and (iii) introducing a mandatory substitution approach to calculate the effect of the use of CRM techniques. Additional minimum prudential requirements that apply to the Group to ensure that sufficient resources are maintained to provide loss absorption in a resolution context are discussed in the subsection titled 'TLAC and MREL' below. In May 2025, the PRA published a policy statement (PS6/25), amending Supervisory Statement SS5/21, on its approach to the supervision of international firms. Although the policy statement is primarily relevant to non-UK banks and investment firms, parts of the policy statement are also relevant to UK banks and set out the PRA's updated expectations regarding their booking model arrangements. ## Prudential regulation in the EU In the EU, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is subject to CRR and CRD, each as amended, which implement the Basel III framework. Under this framework, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is identified as an O-SII by the CBI, which has imposed an O-SII buffer on Barclays Bank Ireland PLC of 1%. The implementation of the final part of Basel III (Basel 3.1) is effected through CRR III, which has applied since January 2025, save for those provisions relating to the Fundamental Review of the Trading Book (or FRTB), which have been deferred until January 2027 by the European Commission through a Delegated Regulation. The European Commission is also consulting on the approach for implementing the FRTB. The European Banking Authority (EBA) has issued a no action letter recommending that competent authorities not prioritise enforcement of the new boundaries of the trading book. Given the most recent revision to the timetable for the implementation of Basel 3.1 in the UK to January 2027 (which was triggered by uncertainties in relation to the US implementation), this currently aligns the EU with the UK. The EU implementation otherwise largely follows Basel 3.1 and has significant overlap with the proposed UK rules, save for important divergences, for example on certain exposure classes, risk weights and application of models. The European Commission has also proposed a new approach to securitisation from a prudential perspective with a view to stimulating the market in securitised products. ## Prudential regulation in the US In the US, the Barclays Bank Group (including BUSL) is subject to prudential requirements for large domestic US banking organisations, foreign banking organisations and their intermediate holding companies (IHCs) set by the FRB and other US regulatory agencies. BUSL is a "Category III" IHC. BUSL (and Barclays Bank Delaware) is subject to reduced (calibrated at 85%) standardised liquidity requirements, including the liquidity coverage ratio and the net stable funding ratio (NSFR). BUSL is also subject to the FRB's rules regarding single counterparty credit limits (SCCL). The SCCL apply to the largest US BHCs and foreign banks' (including the Group's) US operations. The SCCL creates two separate limits for foreign banks, the first on combined US operations (CUSO) and the second on the US IHC (BUSL). The SCCL for BUSL, as a US BHC, requires that exposure to an unaffiliated counterparty of BUSL not exceed 25% of BUSL's tier 1 capital. With respect to the CUSO, the SCCL rule allows certification to the FRB that a foreign bank complies with comparable home country regulation. Barclays Bank PLC has complied with the CUSO requirement since 1 January 2022. To date, Barclays Bank PLC has not relied on home country certification. ## Stress testing The Group and certain of its members are subject to supervisory stress testing exercises in a number of jurisdictions, designed to assess the resilience of banks to adverse economic or financial developments and ensure that they have robust, forward-looking capital planning processes that account for the risks associated with their business profile. Assessment by regulators is --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Supervision and regulation (continued) on both a quantitative and qualitative basis, the latter focusing on such elements as data provision and stress testing capability, including model risk management and internal management processes and controls. ## Recovery and Resolution ### Stabilisation and resolution framework The current UK framework for recovery and resolution was established by the Banking Act 2009, as amended. The EU framework was established by the 2014 Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD), as amended by BRRD II. The BoE, as the UK resolution authority, has the power to resolve a UK financial institution that is failing or likely to fail by exercising certain stabilisation tools, including (i) bail-in: the cancellation, transfer or dilution of a relevant entity's equity and write-down or conversion of the claims of a relevant entity's unsecured creditors (including holders of capital instruments) and conversion of those claims into equity as necessary to restore solvency; (ii) the transfer of all or part of a relevant entity's business to a private sector purchaser; and (iii) the transfer of all or part of a relevant entity's business to a "bridge bank" controlled by the BoE. When exercising any of its stabilisation powers, the BoE must generally provide that shareholders bear first losses, followed by creditors in accordance with the priority of their claims in insolvency. In order to enable the exercise of its stabilisation powers, the BoE may impose a temporary stay on the rights of creditors to terminate, accelerate or close out contracts, or override events of default or termination rights that might otherwise be invoked as a result of a resolution action and modify contractual arrangements in certain circumstances (including a variation of the terms of any securities). HM Treasury may also amend the law for the purpose of enabling it to use its powers under this regime effectively, potentially with retrospective effect. In addition and distinct from bail-in, the BoE has the power to permanently write-down, or convert into equity, tier 1 capital instruments, tier 2 capital instruments and internal eligible liabilities at the point of non-viability of an institution pursuant to broader resolution powers under the Banking Act. The BoE's preferred approach for the resolution of the Group is a bail-in strategy with a single point of entry at Barclays PLC. Under such a strategy, Barclays PLC's subsidiaries would remain operational while Barclays PLC's capital instruments and eligible liabilities would be written down or converted to equity in order to recapitalise the Group and allow for the continued provision of services and operations throughout the resolution. The order in which the bail-in tool is applied reflects the hierarchy of capital instruments under applicable UK legislation and rules, and otherwise respecting the hierarchy of claims in an ordinary insolvency. Accordingly, the more subordinated the claim, the more likely losses will be suffered by owners of the claim. The PRA has made rules that require authorised firms to draw up recovery plans and resolution packs. Recovery plans are designed to outline credible actions that authorised firms could implement in the event of severe stress in order to restore their business to a stable and sustainable condition. The submission of resolution packs was suspended by the PRA in 2018 until further notice and replaced by annual resolution reporting. It continues to be suspended pending PRA assessment of areas of potential duplication between different reporting expectations. The Barclays Group, however, is required to provide the PRA with a recovery plan periodically, although the Group maintains and refreshes this on an annual basis. Removal of potential impediments to an orderly resolution of a banking group or one or more of its subsidiaries is considered as part of the BoE's resolution planning for each firm, and the BoE can require firms to make significant changes in order to enhance their resolvability through exercising its various powers to direct to address any firm relevant issues. Under the BoE's Resolvability Assessment Framework (RAF), firms are required to have in place capabilities covering three resolvability outcomes: (i) adequate financial resources; (ii) being able to continue to do business through resolution and restructuring; and (iii) being able to communicate and coordinate within the firm and with authorities. Barclays Group's second self-assessment report on resolvability under the RAF was submitted to the PRA/BoE in 2023 and the BoE's assessment on the report was published in August 2024. The BoE identified that there were no shortcomings, deficiencies or substantive impediments in the Group's capabilities that could impede Barclays' ability to execute the preferred resolution strategy. The BoE did note that there were three areas for further enhancement relating to the provision of timely valuations, in respect of operational continuity in resolution relating to the inclusion of resolution-resilient language in service contracts, and restructuring planning. Barclays is taking steps to ensure that these enhancements are made as part of Barclays' broader commitment to further embed, test and refine the Group's resolution capabilities and operational preparedness for resolution. In January 2025, amendments to the PRA rules were introduced that require firms to make submissions under the relevant resolution rules on a 'periodic' basis rather than the previous fixed two-year cycles (PS1/25). The BoE and PRA require firms to submit their next resolution self-assessment in 2026, with a public disclosure to be made in 2027. While regulators in many jurisdictions have indicated a preference for single point of entry resolution for the Group, additional resolution or bankruptcy provisions may apply to certain non-UK Group entities or branches. In the EU, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is required by the ECB to submit a standalone BRRD compliant recovery plan on an annual basis. As a Significant Institution under direct ECB supervision, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC falls within the remit of the Single Resolution Board (SRB). Under the provisions of the BRRD and EU Single Resolution Mechanism Regulation (SRMR), the SRB is required to determine the optimal resolution strategy for Barclays Bank Ireland PLC and, also, to prepare a resolution plan for the bank. The SRB undertakes this work within the context of the BoE's preferred resolution strategy of single point of entry with bail in at Barclays PLC. In order to carry out its mandate, the SRB collects detailed structural and other information from Barclays Bank Ireland PLC on a regular basis, as well as engaging with the bank to identify and address impediments to resolution. This work is done in coordination with the BoE, as the Group's resolution authority. Barclays Bank Ireland PLC meets the SRB's requirements for resolution as set out in the SRB's 'Expectations for Banks'. In April 2023, the European Commission also proposed certain reforms to strengthen the EU's bank crisis management and deposit insurance (CMDI) framework, including extending depositor protection to public entities and client money deposited in certain types of client funds. The EU legislative process remains ongoing and the future of this proposal is not yet clear in the new legislative cycle of 2024-2029. In the US, Title I of the Dodd-Frank Act (DFA), as amended, and the implementing regulations issued by the FRB and the FDIC require each foreign-based bank holding --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Supervision and regulation (continued) company with assets of $250bn or more, including those within the Group, to prepare and submit a plan for the orderly resolution of subsidiaries and operations that are domiciled in the US or conducted in whole or material part in the US in the event of future material financial distress or failure. The Group submitted a "targeted plan" in December 2021. The agencies did not identify any shortcomings or deficiencies with the Group's 2021 US Resolution Plan. In August 2024, the FRB and FDIC finalised new guidance for foreign triennial full filers (such as the Group) that would affect the content required to be included in the US Resolution Plan. The final guidance generally represents an expansion of the current 165(d) resolution planning guidance applicable to the Group. The Group submitted its "full" US Resolution Plan in respect of its US operations on 1 October 2025. BUSL may also be resolved under the Orderly Liquidation Authority established by Title II of the DFA, a regime for the orderly liquidation of systemically important financial institutions by the FDIC, as an alternative to proceedings under the US Bankruptcy Code. In addition, the licensing authorities of Barclays Bank PLC New York branch and of Barclays Bank Delaware have the authority to take possession of the business and property of the applicable branch or entity they license and/or to revoke or suspend such license. # TLAC and MREL The Group is under the supervision of the BoE, as the UK resolution authority, and is subject to a Minimum Requirement for Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL), which includes a component reflecting the FSB's standards on total loss absorbing capacity (TLAC). Since 1 January 2022, G-SIBs with resolution entities incorporated in the UK have been required to meet an MREL equivalent to the higher of: (i) two times the sum of their Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements; or (ii) the higher of two times their leverage ratio requirement or 6.75% of leverage exposures. The Barclays Group is also required to meet binding external MRELs in 2025 on the basis of a bail-in resolution strategy comprising a binding minimum capital requirement of 12.8% of RWAs, MREL of 25.7% of RWAs, and a loss-absorbing capacity (MREL plus buffers) of 30.5% of RWAs. Internal MREL for material subsidiaries is subject to a scalar in the 75-90% range of the external requirement that would apply to the subsidiary if it were a resolution entity. The starting point for the scalar is 90% for ring-fenced bank sub-groups. On 15 July 2025, the BoE published a policy statement on amendments to its statement of policy (the MREL SoP) regarding its approach to setting MREL, which took effect on 1 January 2026. The focus of the amendments is consolidation and simplification through the restatement (where appropriate and with modifications) of provisions relating to TLAC in the MREL SoP. Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is subject to the SRB's MREL policy, as issued in May 2024, in respect of the internal MREL that it will be required to issue to the Group. The SRB's current calibration of internal MREL for non-resolution entities is expressed as two ratios that have to be met in parallel: (a) two times the sum of: (i) the firm's Pillar 1 requirement; and (ii) its Pillar 2 requirement; and (b) two times the leverage ratio requirement. The SRB's policy does not apply any scalar in respect of the internal MREL requirement. Under the SRB MREL policy, a bank specific adjustment and a market confidence charge can be applied by the SRB to MREL requirements. Since 1 January 2024, a revised deduction regime applies for the indirect subscription of instruments eligible for internal MREL to avoid the double-counting of MREL elements at the level of intermediate entities within a resolution group. In the US, the FRB's TLAC rule includes provisions that require BUSL to have: (i) a specified outstanding amount of eligible long-term debt; (ii) a specified outstanding amount of TLAC (consisting of common and preferred equity regulatory capital plus eligible long-term debt); and (iii) a specified common equity buffer. In addition, the FRB's TLAC rule prohibits BUSL, for so long as the Group's overall resolution plan treats BUSL as a non-resolution entity, from issuing TLAC to entities other than those within the Group. # The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) The UK has a statutory compensation fund called the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS), which is intended to protect customers on the failure of authorised financial services firms, and which is funded by way of annual levies on most authorised firms. The maximum cover under the FSCS in relation to a deposit is £120,000 per eligible depositor per bank. The Bank Resolution (Recapitalisation) Act 2025 introduced a new option for funding the continuity of banking services through the recapitalisation of a failing firm. The funds needed for recapitalisation may now be provided by the FSCS at the direction of the Bank of England and subsequently recouped via a levy on firms. This option may support the sale of all, or part, of the firm to a private sector purchaser or a transfer to a bridge bank, where that is judged to be in the public interest. This expands the functions of the FSCS in relation to the failure of deposit takers beyond enabling the making of compensation payments to eligible depositors of failed banks to include enabling the making of recapitalisation payments where required to do so by the Bank of England acting as resolution authority. # Structural reform In the UK, the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 put in place a framework for ring-fencing certain operations of large banks. Ring-fencing requires, among other things, the separation of the retail and SME deposit-taking activities of UK banks from wholesale and investment banking operations into a legally distinct, operationally separate and economically independent entity (i.e., a 'ring-fenced bank'), which is not permitted to undertake a range of activities. Under FSMA, the PRA is required to review its ring-fencing rules every five years following the rules coming into force, with the first report having been published in January 2024. The PRA intends to consult in due course on targeted reforms to its ring-fencing rules as a result of its review, although the overall conclusion was that most of those rules are performing satisfactorily. Separately, HM Treasury has introduced legislative amendments to implement near-term reforms to the ring-fencing regime which took effect in February 2025. These reforms have, amongst other measures, increased the core deposit threshold (which determines whether a UK bank is subject to the ring-fencing regime) from £25bn to £35bn, exempted predominantly retail-focused banks from the ring-fencing regime by introducing a secondary threshold (referred to as the trading assets exemption), permitted ring-fenced banks to establish branches and subsidiaries outside of the UK or the EEA (subject to PRA rules) and introduced a new four-year transition period for UK non-ring-fenced banks to comply with the ring-fencing regime following mergers or acquisitions. In the UK Chancellor's 2025 Mansion House speech the UK Government committed to meaningful reform of the UK's ring-fencing regime, with HM Treasury confirming it will undertake a short review of the ring-fencing regime, working with the --- # Supervision and regulation (continued) Bank of England and reporting into the Economic Secretary to HM Treasury. The review will focus on allowing ring-fenced banks to provide more products and services to UK businesses, addressing inefficiencies in how ring-fencing is applied to banking groups, and examining the case for allowing banks to share resources and services more flexibly across the ring-fence. The review is expected to report by early 2026. In the EU, structural reform is taking the form of further integration of the banking union and on the financial markets side the Savings and Investment Union (SIU), which intends to further consolidate and integrate financial and capital markets in the EU. This will coincide with an increasing focus on legislation by way of directly applicable regulations and the intended transfer of further supervisory powers to the European Supervisory Authorities (ESAs), including, in particular, the European Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA). Aside from the SIU, which consists of a number of initiatives, structural reform in the EU will also occur through the Retail Investment Strategy (RIS), which intends to incentivise further retail investment in the EU. Under the RIS, retail investors should receive a higher level of investor protection, the use of inducements will be limited, information to client will focus on value for money over less tangible aspects and there will be increasing efforts to improve financial literacy and crack down on financial influencers and other unregulated investment advisers. US regulation places further substantive limits on the activities that may be conducted by banks and holding companies, including foreign banking organisations such as the Group. The ‘Volcker Rule', which was part of the DFA and which came into effect in the US in 2015, prohibits banking entities from undertaking certain proprietary trading activities and limits such entities' ability to sponsor or invest in certain private equity funds and hedge funds (in each case broadly defined). As required by the rule, the Group has developed and implemented an extensive compliance and monitoring programme addressing proprietary trading and covered fund activities (both inside and outside of the US). ## Market infrastructure regulation In recent years, regulators as well as global-standard setting bodies such as the International Organization of Securities Commissions (IOSCO) have focused on improving transparency and reducing risk in markets, particularly risks related to over-the-counter (OTC) derivative transactions. This focus has resulted in a variety of new regulations across the G20 countries and beyond that require or encourage on-venue trading, clearing, posting of margin and disclosure of pre-trade and post-trade information. The wholesale financial markets in the EU are facing reform to further harmonise supervision of financial markets and market infrastructure and integrate the approach to the EU financial markets under the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive and Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation (collectively referred to as MiFID II), which will affect how the Group transacts with counterparties and customers in the EU and how it packages its investment services. Various aspects of MiFID II and related legislation have been subject to change as a result of the EU's ongoing focus on regulatory simplification and the development of the SIU, with a goal of increasing the involvement of investors in the EU financial markets. As part of this, in December 2025 the European Commission announced its plan for the further development of capital market integration and supervision within the EU, which will lead to significant central securities depositories (CSDs), central counterparties (CCPs) and trading venues being subjected to direct supervision by the ESMA. This follows the trend of granting ESMA supervisory powers over key market infrastructure parties, such as trade repositories, consolidated tape providers and credit rating agencies. In the UK, FSMA 2023 introduced reforms to remove certain requirements which were previously applicable to trading in wholesale markets and to promote investment in line with the Wholesale Markets Review. Other changes, for example on trade transparency requirements have been progressed by way of amendments to regulatory rules and guidance and an FCA review of the UK transaction reporting regime is underway. ## Regulation of the derivatives market The European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) imposes requirements in the EU and the UK which are designed to improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market. EMIR has operational and financial impacts on the Group, including by imposing collateral requirements on the Group, as well as a requirement to centrally clear certain OTC derivatives contracts with certain market participants. Following the UK's departure from the EU, EMIR rules were onshored into English law and now form part of UK assimilated law (UK EMIR). Access to the clearing services of certain Central Counterparties (CCPs) used by Group entities is currently permitted under temporary equivalence and recognition regimes in the UK and the EU. In the UK, the temporary recognition regime for non-UK CCPs has now been extended until the end of December 2027. Targeted amendments to the UK EMIR reporting framework were implemented in September 2024, which aimed to align the regime with international guidance (where appropriate). In August 2025, the PRA published a policy statement on amendments to trade repository reporting requirements under UK EMIR. The implementation date for these changes is 26 January 2026. In the EU, access to the clearing services of certain non-EU CCPs used by Group entities is permitted through recognised third country CCPs. For UK CCPs, this recognition is currently envisaged to end on 30 June 2028. In April 2024, amendments to the EU EMIR reporting requirements (relating to the details and formats of reports, for example) introduced by regulatory and implementing technical standards under the EMIR REFIT Regulation took effect. Further proposals to amend the EU EMIR framework (Regulation (EU) 2024/2987 and Directive (EU) 2024/2994, referred to collectively as EMIR 3) came into force on 24 December 2024. The changes introduced by EMIR 3 seek to reduce the reliance and exposure to third-country CCPs and enhance the competitiveness of CCPs in the EU. EMIR 3 will require EU entities to clear a representative amount of their trades through EU authorised CCPs, as part of the new “active account” regime which requires certain financial and non-financial counterparties exceeding the clearing threshold in defined categories of derivative contracts to hold at least one clearing account at CCPs authorised in the EU. These changes aim to reduce the concentration of exposures to systemically important UK CCPs in particular, but other EMIR 3 changes will also apply. For example, EMIR 3 will amend the intragroup transactions definition, removing the need for equivalence decisions to have been issued, which may make it easier to rely on the relevant intragroup exemptions in respect of clearing and margin requirements. US regulators have imposed similar rules as in the EU with respect to the mandatory on-venue trading and clearing of certain derivatives, and post-trade transparency, as well as in relation to the margining of OTC derivatives. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 307 # Supervision and regulation (continued) In December 2017, the CFTC and the European Commission recognised the trading venues of each other's jurisdiction to allow market participants to comply with mandatory on-venue trading requirements while trading on certain venues recognised by the other jurisdiction. In August 2024, the CFTC extended temporary relief that would permit trading venues and market participants located in the UK to continue to rely on this mutual recognition framework following the withdrawal of the UK from the EU. Certain participants in US swap markets are required to register with the CFTC as 'swap dealers' or 'major swap participants' and/or, with the SEC as 'security-based swap dealers' or 'major security-based swap participants'. Such registrants are subject to CFTC and/or SEC regulation and oversight. Barclays Bank PLC is registered with the CFTC as a swap dealer and conditionally registered with the SEC as a security-based swap dealer. In addition, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is registered as a Swap Dealer with the CFTC. Accordingly, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC are both subject to CFTC rules on business conduct, record-keeping and reporting, and Barclays Bank PLC is subject to SEC rules on business conduct, record-keeping and reporting. However, since Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC are non-US swap dealers, and Barclays Bank PLC is a non-US security-based swap dealer, whether and the extent to which such CFTC or SEC requirements apply to any particular swap transaction may depend on whether the counterparty to such swap transaction is a US person or guaranteed by or affiliated with a US person, or whether the transaction is arranged, negotiated, or executed by US-based Barclays personnel. Additionally, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC have elected to comply with certain CFTC/SEC requirements, as applicable, through 'substituted compliance' with EU/UK requirements pursuant to relevant determinations and related relief issued by the CFTC and the SEC, as applicable. Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC are subject to FRB rules on capital and margin. In 2024, the CFTC adopted amendments to its capital and financial reporting requirements for swap dealers. The new rules codify certain no-action relief and add specificity as to existing reporting requirements. # Other significant regulatory developments in the US In 2024, the standard settlement cycle in the U.S. for most broker-dealer transactions in securities was shortened from two business days after the trade (T+2) to one business day after the trade (T+1). The UK and EU markets will seek to introduce similarly shortened settlement cycles. On 13 October 2023, the SEC adopted new rules to establish broad reporting requirements of the terms of securities loans to FINRA for public dissemination, and requiring FINRA to make publicly available certain information it receives regarding those lending transactions. On the same day, the SEC also adopted new rules requiring a wide range of firms to file monthly reports with the SEC for large short positions in equity securities on a new Form SHO and amendments to the National Market System plan governing the Consolidated Audit Trail, which adds an additional reporting requirement for CAT-reporting firms relying on the bona fide market maker exception to Reg SHO's locate requirement. These reporting rules (with respect to the securities lending and monthly large short positions reporting requirements, but not the bona fide market maker identifier) were successfully challenged in court, and have been remanded to allow the agency to consider the rules' cumulative impact. On 3 December 2025, the SEC provided an extension of the compliance dates for large short position reporting to 2 January 2028 and for securities lending reporting to 28 September 2028. On 13 December 2023, the SEC adopted rule amendments under the Exchange Act that, among other things, will mandate central clearing of certain US Treasury securities transactions and amend the broker-dealer customer protection rule as it applies to margin posted for certain transactions in US Treasury securities. These rule amendments could impose additional costs on the Group's Treasury securities trading activity. Although there is some discussion as to whether deadlines for implementation might be extended, the amended rule's compliance date has been extended to 31 December 2026 for cash transactions and 30 June 2027 for repurchase transactions. On 18 September 2024, the SEC unanimously amended certain rules under Regulation NMS (National Market System) to adopt variable minimum pricing increments, reduce access fee caps for protected quotations, and require that the amount of exchange fees and rebates be determinable at the time of execution, among other changes. The rule survived a recent challenge and the SEC has extended the compliance timelines for the amendments regarding the minimum pricing increment and access fee caps until November 2026 and the exchange fee determinability rule until February 2026. On 20 December 2024, the SEC adopted amendments to the broker-dealer customer protection rule to require certain broker-dealers to perform their reserve computations for accounts of customers and proprietary accounts of broker-dealers and make any required deposits into their reserve bank accounts daily rather than weekly. As a result of the amendments, BCI will be required to adjust its existing processes to move from a weekly to a daily computation. The compliance date for the rule change was initially 31 December 2025; however, the SEC has extended the compliance date until 30 June 2026. # Other regulation ## Consumer protection, non-financial misconduct, SMCR reform, access to cash, account closures and push payment fraud The FCA's consumer duty has effect in relation to new and existing products or services that are open to sale or renewal, as well as closed products and services. The duty sets higher expectations for the standard of care that firms provide to retail customers and impacts all aspects of Barclays' retail businesses, including every retail customer journey, product and service as well as Barclays' relationships with partners, suppliers and third parties. There are ongoing costs for the industry as a result of extensive monitoring and evidential requirements in respect of the consumer duty. The FCA has engaged with the industry on streamlining its rules in light of the introduction of the consumer duty, and will continue to look for opportunities to streamline requirements and reduce complexity for businesses. The consumer duty remains a priority for the FCA for its supervision of the retail banking industry and its expectations for firms to embed the consumer duty into their culture and purpose continue in 2026. Other areas of strategic priority for the FCA's supervision include the fair treatment of customers in financial difficulty, access for customers to payment accounts and banking services (discussed further below), compliance with operational resilience rules, the continued management of financial crime and fraud risks, and the role of banks in developing sustainable finance offerings and the importance of ensuring that sustainability-related claims --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Supervision and regulation (continued) associated with products are clear, fair and not misleading. The FCA is consulting on a new regulatory regime in the UK for previously unregulated buy-now-pay later consumer credit (CP25/23). The FCA is consulting on an industry-wide compensation scheme for motor finance customers who were treated unfairly, following the landmark Supreme Court judgement in Johnson v FirstRand Bank Ltd (London Branch) (t/a MotoNovo Finance) [2025] UKSC 33. In Johnson, the Supreme Court found that an unfair relationship under the Consumer Credit Act 1974 existed between a motor finance lender and its customer, based on the particular facts of the case. The final terms of the compensation scheme remain uncertain pending responses to the FCA's consultation paper and publication of the FCA's Policy Statement and final scheme rules, which is currently expected in early 2026. Accordingly, the legal and regulatory outcomes and the nature, extent and timing of any remediation action, if required, remain uncertain. On 12 December 2025, following its 2 July 2025 consultation paper (CP25/18). the FCA published its policy statement in relation to tackling non-financial misconduct in financial services (PS25/23). The policy statement provides firms with more power to take robust action against serious misconduct and provides further clarity on situations where non-financial misconduct amounts to a breach of the FCA's rules. The new guidance comes into force on 1 September 2026 alongside the new FCA rule explicitly covering bullying, harassment and violence. In July 2025, the PRA and the FCA both released consultation papers (CP18/25 and CP25/21) regarding SMCR reform, including allowing greater flexibility for firms where unexpected or temporary changes in management are required. The UK government is also considering the abolition of the certification regime to replace this with a more proportionate approach. FSMA 2023 introduced new provisions under which HM Treasury may designate current account providers that have a significant role in the provision of UK cash access and empowered the FCA to make rules to ensure the reasonable provision of cash access services. In September 2024, the FCA introduced new rules which require designated firms to consider the impact of a closure of cash access facilities (branches, shared banking hubs and cash machines that provide cash deposit or withdrawal services) on their customers' everyday banking needs and the availability and provision of alternatives. Barclays Bank UK PLC has been designated as a relevant current account provider and is therefore subject to the rules. HM Treasury previously announced plans to increase the notice period for closing accounts to 90 days and introduce a requirement to provide reasons for the decision to exit (save in financial crime exits), which have now been enshrined through statutory instrument (The Payment Services and Payment Accounts (Contract Termination)(Amendment) Regulations 2025) that are to take effect from April 2026. FSMA 2023 contains provisions mandating that the Payment Systems Regulator (PSR) and any successor regulator (including, as described above, the potential transfer of the PSRs functions to the FCA) require the reimbursement of authorised push payment scams by payment service providers, including Barclays. This new reimbursement requirement took effect in October 2024. It has imposed a maximum reimbursement limit of £85,000 with costs split 50:50 between the sending and receiving firms. Similar but less stringent rules will apply in the EU with the expected adoption in 2026 of the proposed amendment to the Payment Services Directive and the new Payment Services Regulation (together known as PSD3). In the EU, new initiatives such as the proposed Regulation on Financial Data Access (FIDA) establish a framework on data sharing between financial institutions at the initiative of customers, allowing financial institutions to better tailor products and services. In the US, changing federal enforcement priorities and legal interpretations regarding diversity and inclusion programmes present unknown and evolving risks. # Data protection Most jurisdictions where the Group operates have adopted or are considering comprehensive laws concerning data protection and privacy. Regulations regarding data protection are increasing in number, as well as levels of enforcement, as manifested in increased amounts of fines and the severity of other penalties. We expect that personal privacy and data protection will continue to receive attention and focus from regulators, as well as public scrutiny and attention. As the global data protection regulatory landscape continues to evolve, non-compliance with applicable requirements may result in regulatory fines and other penalties. In response to ongoing legal and regulatory developments, Barclays will continue to assess potential regulatory nexus arising from its operational and geographic footprint. The EU's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and the UK's General Data Protection Regulation (UK GDPR) provide a framework of rights and duties designed to safeguard personal data and apply to the activities conducted from an establishment in the EU or the UK, respectively. The extraterritorial effect of the GDPR and the UK GDPR means entities established outside the EU or the UK may fall respectively within the GDPR or the UK GDPR's ambit when offering goods or services to EU/UK based customers or clients or conducting behavioural monitoring of individuals in the EU/UK. The UK's Data (Use and Access) Act 2025 (DUAA) became law on 19 June 2025, with the first provisions coming into force on 19 August. One of the effects on the DUAA is a divergence between the EU GDPR and UK GDPR, including the threshold approach to international data transfers, and more flexible rules for automated decision-making. Most provisions of the EU's Data Act (Regulation (2023/2854) came into effect on 12 September 2025. The Act aims to enhance the availability and reuse of data generated by consumers and businesses, particularly from connected products and related services, by granting users easier access to their data and enabling share between service providers. The data regime in China is likely to continue to evolve, governing the collection, processing and cross-border transfers of China-based individuals' personal data and restricted data as defined in national and sectoral rules (e.g., macro/derived characteristics data which, if tampered with, divulged or destroyed, may endanger China's economic operation, social stability, national security - among other things - having regard to the volume and granularity of the data). In India, the implementation rules of the Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023 (namely Digital Personal Data Protection Rules, 2025) has been published on 13 November 2025 to fully implement the Act in 2027 in a phased manner for a robust mechanism of privacy protection and rights. Except under certain exemptions, its scope would include the processing of personal data in India and would extend to the processing of, and offering goods and services to, India-based individuals outside of India. In the US, Barclays Bank Delaware is subject to the US Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act --- # Supervision and regulation (continued) (GLBA) and the California Consumer Privacy Act of 2018, as amended by the California Privacy Rights Act of 2020 (CPRA). The GLBA limits the use and disclosure of non-public personal information to non-affiliated third parties, and requires financial institutions to provide written notice of their privacy policies and practices and implement certain information security policies and practices. Any violations of the GLBA could subject Barclays Bank Delaware to additional reporting requirements or regulatory investigation or audits by the financial regulators. More broadly, the Group's US operations are subject to the CPRA which applies to personal information that is not collected, processed, sold or disclosed subject to the GLBA. The CPRA requires applicable members of the Group to both provide California residents with additional disclosures regarding the collection, use and sharing of personal information and grant California residents access, deletion, correction and other rights, including the right to opt-out of certain sales or transfers of personal information and the right to limit the processing of sensitive personal information to certain purposes. Additionally, in September 2025, the California Privacy Protection Agency amended the CPRA regulations, with various implementation deadlines through 2028. The amended CPRA regulations contain significant updates, including compliance obligations for use of automated decision making technologies to make a signification decision (including financial, lending and employment-related decisions) about a consumer, risk assessment obligations and requirements to conduct cybersecurity audits. Any violations of the CPRA may be subject to enforcement by the California Privacy Protection Agency and the California Attorney General and the imposition of monetary penalties, as well as potential lawsuits arising from the private right of action provided to California residents in the case of certain data breaches. Bills proposed in the United States Congress and in the legislatures of various US states from time to time, if enacted, may have further impact on the data privacy practices of Barclays' US operations. In addition, all 50 states have laws including obligations to provide notification of security breaches of computer databases that contain personal information to affected individuals, state officers and others. In May 2024, the SEC adopted amendments to expand the scope of and introduce new requirements under Regulation S-P, a set of privacy rules adopted pursuant to the GLBA and the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act of 2003 that govern the treatment of non-public personal information about consumers by certain financial institutions, including BCI. In addition to expanding the scope of customer information protected under Regulation S-P's safeguards and disposal rules, the amendments will require covered financial institutions to (i) develop, implement and maintain written policies and procedures for an incident response programme reasonably designed to detect, respond to and recover from unauthorised access to or use of customer information, (ii) notify individuals whose sensitive customer information was, or is reasonably likely to have been, accessed or used without authorisation as soon as practicable, but not later than 30 days, after becoming aware that an incident has or is reasonably likely to have occurred and (iii) establish, maintain and enforce written policies and procedures reasonably designed to require oversight and monitoring of service providers, including by requiring relevant service providers to provide notification to the covered institution as soon as possible, but no later than 72 hours, after becoming aware of a breach in security has occurred resulting in unauthorised access to a customer information system maintained by the service provider. In October 2024, the CFPB released its final rule titled "Required Rulemaking on Personal Financial Data Rights" as required to implement Section 1033 of the Consumer Financial Protection Act of 2010. The final rule requires banks, credit unions and other financial service providers that meet the definition of covered data providers to make covered data regarding covered products and services available in an electronic form to consumers and authorised third parties, subject to a number of requirements. The final rule also sets out criteria a third party must satisfy in order to be an authorised third party and therefore access consumers' data, including certifying to the relevant consumer it will satisfy certain obligations regarding the collection, use and retention of covered data and obtaining express and informed consumer consent. Compliance with this rule will be phased in over several years, with the first set of requirements taking effect from 1 April 2026, and with Barclays Bank Delaware becoming subject to the rule on 1 April 2027. However, in August 2025, the CFPB released an Advanced Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, titled "Personal Financial Data Rights Reconsideration", to seek comments related to implementation of Section 1033, and, in October 2025, the US District Court for the Eastern District of Kentucky issued a preliminary injunction preventing the CFPB from enforcing the Required Rulemaking on Personal Financial Data Rights while the rule is reconsidered. Finally, jurisdictions are increasingly enacting data localisation laws that require certain categories of data to be stored within specific geographic boundaries or not be accessible in certain specified foreign jurisdictions or by certain foreign actors. For example, the Department of Justice's final rule implementing Executive Order 14117 prohibits or restricts certain transactions that may enable access by countries of concern or covered persons to US Government-related data or Americans' bulk sensitive personal data. In a review of its cross-border data transfer process, the Group found no transactions implicated by the rule and is implementing measures to ensure continued compliance with the rule. ## Cybersecurity, cryptoassets and operational resilience Regulators globally continue to focus on cybersecurity risk management, organisational operational resilience and overall soundness across all financial services firms, with customer and market expectations of uninterrupted access to financial services remaining at an all-time high. The regulatory focus has been further heightened by the increasing number of high-profile ransomware and other supply chain attacks seen across the industry in recent years and the growing reliance of financial services on Cloud and other third party service providers. This is evidenced by the continuing introduction of new laws and regulatory frameworks directed at enhancing resilience of both firms and their critical third party providers. The UK operational resilience framework introduced in March 2021 requires in-scope firms to identify their important business services, set impact tolerances metrics for the maximum tolerable level of disruption for each important business service, and carry out an annual self-assessment of the firm's operational resilience, which is approved by the board and informed by the firm's scenario testing regime. In December 2024, the FCA and the PRA each published a consultation paper (CP24/28 and CP17/24 respectively) on proposals for firms to report operational incidents and their material third party arrangements to enhance the operational resilience framework. The FCA's consultation period ended in March 2025 and we are still expecting publication of its finalised rules. The PRA has stated --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Supervision and regulation (continued) that the proposed implementation date for its proposals will be no earlier than the second half of 2026. The UK Government's response to its consultation on proposed legislative measures on ransomware was published in July 2025, considering proposals for the introduction of a ransomware payment prevention regime and mandatory incident reporting. It is unclear at this stage whether or how these proposals will be reflected in legislation and/or regulation, but if progressed they would constitute the first specific measures in UK law to counter ransomware payment. On 17 July 2024, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) finalised revisions to the prudential framework for banks' exposures to cryptoassets. The standards set out minimum requirements, which means implementation by BCBS members may result in stricter standards that may include outright prohibition in bank dealings in certain cryptoassets. Implementation of the standards by member jurisdictions, including the PRA and BoE, was expected by 1 January 2026, although the BCBS announced in November 2025 that it intends to conduct a further, targeted review of the standards. Furthermore, on 6 November 2023, the PRA published a 'Dear CEO' letter setting out its expectations for deposit-takers which plan to introduce innovations in the use of deposits, e-money and regulated stablecoins. In this letter, the PRA provided that deposit-taking entities must only provide innovations in digital money to retail customers in the form of deposits, and any issuance of e-money or regulated stablecoins to retail customers must be done from separate non-deposit taking entities within the banking group. Separately, amendments to the Money Laundering, Terrorist Financing and Transfer of Funds (Information on the Payer) Regulations 2017 (MLRs) have brought cryptoassets within the scope of AML restrictions, including customer due diligence requirements and the FATF travel rule. Banks must therefore comply with these requirements when facilitating transactions in cryptoassets. The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Cryptoassets) Regulations 2026 will introduce new regulated activities in relation to certain categories of cryptoassets from 25 October 2027, and enable the FCA to issue directions, guidance and rules in advance of full commencement on 25 October 2027. FSMA 2023 introduced a new regime for designated critical third party providers (CTPs). In November 2024, the FCA, PRA, and BoE jointly released the final rules and expectations for designated CTPs with the final rules having taken effect from 1 January 2025. Whilst the new rules apply to designated CTPs themselves, there may be additional impact and costs for the Group incurred in connection with updating existing supplier arrangements to reflect the new CTP requirements where suppliers are designated as critical CTPs. The EU's Digital Operational Resilience Act (DORA) entered into force in January 2023 and has applied from 17 January 2025, introducing comprehensive and sector specific regulation on Information Communication Technologies (ICT) incident reporting, testing and third party risk management, and provides for direct oversight of critical third party providers servicing the EU financial services sector. Firms which do not meet the regulations under DORA can face significant fines and other regulatory measures. Particularly for systemic banks, (digital) operational resilience and cybersecurity are at the forefront of the ECB's and other supervisory authorities' priorities. The EU's Network and Information Security (NIS) Directive, which aimed to improve the resilience of network and information systems in the EU against cybersecurity risks, has been updated. The revised version, NIS2, applies from 18 October 2024 and imposes stricter security, governance and incident reporting requirements. Failure to comply can lead to significant fines and senior manager liability among other things. By 17 April 2025, EU member states were required to identify and list the specific entities that fall within the scope of NIS2. The extraterritorial effect of NIS2 means entities established outside the EU may fall within its ambit if providing certain services in the EU. The UK's original NIS Directive was transposed into UK law under the NIS Regulations 2018. These regulations are set to be strengthened under the new Cyber Security and Resilience Bill, which was introduced to Parliament on 12 November 2025. The Bill aims to enhance national resilience by expanding the scope of the regulations to cover more digital services and supply chains, increase incident reporting and grant regulators greater powers to collect information and investigate potential vulnerabilities. In 2023, the SEC adopted disclosure rules regarding cybersecurity risk management, governance and incident reporting by US-listed companies, including foreign private issuers such as Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC. Pursuant to those rules, if Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC are required or determine to disclose material cybersecurity incidents under home country or stock exchange rules, they are required to also furnish this information with the SEC on the SEC's website, in accordance with their obligations as foreign private issuers. In late 2023, the New York Department of Financial Services (NYDFS) amended its cybersecurity regulation applying to the New York Branch of Barclays Bank PLC, with various implementation deadlines through November 2025. The NYDFS's amended cybersecurity regulation contains significant updates, including enhanced notification requirements, cybersecurity governance obligations, and requirements applicable to cybersecurity policies and procedures. In May 2025, requirements to conduct automated scans or manual reviews of information systems for vulnerability management, to implement policies governing access privileges and to implement certain controls for monitoring and responding to threats (such as controls designed to protect against malicious code) went into effect, and in November 2025, requirements to expand multi-factor authentication and to implement policies and procedures for the creation and maintenance of an asset inventory became effective. The existing and anticipated requirements specified in the UK, EU, and US for increased controls will serve to improve industry standardisation and resilience capabilities, enhancing Barclays' ability to deliver services during periods of potential disruption. Such measures are resulting in increased technology and compliance costs for the Group. # Artificial intelligence A number of jurisdictions where the Barclays Group operates have adopted or are considering adopting new laws regulating artificial intelligence (AI). The EU's Artificial Intelligence Act (EU AI Act), which entered into force on 1 August 2024, provides rights and duties designed to ensure the safe and ethical deployment of AI. The EU AI Act requires organisations to ensure suitable levels of AI literacy within their workforce (albeit this obligation may be removed as a result of the EU's Digital Omnibus proposals put forward in November 2025) and categorises AI systems based on their level of risk. It has a phased approach to compliance, with the literacy obligations and the first set of requirements prohibiting certain uses of AI having applied from 2 February 2025, and rules on general purpose AI models having applied from 2 August 2025. It also establishes a rigorous compliance regime for high-risk AI applications (which provisions apply from 2 August 2027, subject to possible delay under the EU's Digital Omnibus proposals). The extraterritorial effect of the EU AI Act --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Supervision and regulation (continued) means entities established outside the EU fall with the EU AI Act's ambit if they provide or deploy AI in the EU or the output of their AI is used in the EU. In the U.S. on the other hand, some states are considering enacting or have already enacted comprehensive laws that adopt risk-based frameworks and principles (such as Colorado's An Act Concerning Consumer Protections In Interactions with AI Systems and the Texas Responsible AI Governance Act), while other states are focusing on applications perceived as higher-risk (such as laws regulating the use of automated decision tools and AI in recruitment, hiring, promotion, and other employment decisions). Comprehensive state laws impose heightened obligations on developers and deployers of high-risk AI systems (which include tools that make financial, lending and employment-related decisions), such as by requiring impact assessments, transparency disclosures and risk-management controls. Laws regulating higher risk applications, such as New York City Local Law 144 and amendments to civil rights laws in California and Illinois, require employers to conduct bias audits, provide transparency through notice to candidates and employees, ensure such systems do not discriminate against applicants or employees on the basis of protected classes, and maintain records of automated-decision system data and audit results. Notably, however, in December 2025, President Trump signed an executive order outlining various plans to attempt to restrict certain U.S. states from enforcing their own AI laws, in favour of a "single national framework". The Group is continuing to monitor these developments and the applicability of state laws regulating AI. # Regulatory initiatives on sustainability ## Regulatory initiatives on sustainability in the UK In the UK, the FCA published final rules on the UK Sustainability Disclosure Requirements regime in November 2023 which set out new requirements to prepare sustainability-related product and entity level disclosures for certain firms, as well as a new sustainable investment labelling regime and anti-greenwashing rule applicable to all authorised firms. The new anti-greenwashing rule (and associated guidance) came into force on 31 May 2024 and the labelling regime was made available from 31 July 2024, whilst the disclosure regime continues to be implemented on a phased basis from late 2024 until the end of 2026. In April 2025, the FCA confirmed that it had paused plans to extend the SDR and investment labels regime to portfolio management. The Digital Markets, Competition and Consumers Act 2024 (DMCCA) received Royal Assent in May 2024, introducing major updates to UK competition and consumer protection laws. These reforms included the expansion of the powers held by the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA), in relation to digital markets, merger control and antitrust rules, as well as consumer law. As a result of these reforms, the CMA is able to directly impose significant fines of up to 10% of global turnover for breaches of consumer protection law. As one of the regulators entrusted with consumer protection in the UK, the CMA has been actively focusing on misleading environmental claims. The CMA has the ability to investigate potential breaches of consumer protection laws by financial services firms also, and the FCA will be able to make recommendations to the CMA to exercise its powers under the DMCCA. The DMCCA also simplifies and enhances the process by which the regulators may obtain enforcement orders and undertakings for breaches of consumer law. The Advertising Standards Authority is responsible for regulating the content of advertisements, sales promotions and direct marketing in the UK, and has also been focusing on greenwashing, including investigating and making rulings against advertisements from financial services firms due to greenwashing. In its election manifesto, the Government stated that it would mandate UK regulated financial institutions and FTSE 100 companies to develop and implement credible transition plans that align with the 1.5°C goal of the Paris Agreement. Consequently, it consulted on how best to take that commitment forward in June to September 2025 but has yet to publish the outcome. The UK's Transition Plan Taskforce (TPT) concluded its work on a disclosure framework for transition plans in October 2024, with the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) Foundation now assuming responsibility for the TPT's disclosure materials. In June 2025, the IFRS Foundation published a guidance document about transition plans, building on the material developed by the TPT. If the Government and UK regulators do mandate transition plan disclosures, it is widely expected that the work of the TPT will likely form the basis of these requirements. In September 2024, the Government published information on its framework to create UK Sustainability Reporting Standards (UK SRS). Subject to an affirmative endorsement decision, and following a consultation process, the Government would create the first two UK Sustainability Reporting Standards, based on those of the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) (IFRS S1 on general requirements for disclosure of sustainability related financial information and IFRS S2 on climate-related disclosures) and these standards will form part of a wider Sustainability Disclosure Reporting (SDR) framework led by HM Treasury. The Government carried out its consultation on the UK SRS in June to September 2025 and is expected to publish the first two UK Sustainability Reporting Standards (SRS) in early 2026. As there is some overlap between IFRS S2 and the TPT Disclosure Framework, the FCA reviewed, through its consultation on implementing UK-endorsed ISSB standards, the possibility of strengthening its expectations for transition plan disclosures with reference to the TPT Disclosure Framework, as noted above. In addition, TCFD-aligned reporting requirements apply to UK publicly quoted companies, large private companies and LLPs (in addition to existing TCFD-related reporting requirements under the UK Listing Rules). On 3 December 2025, the PRA published a policy statement (PS25/25) providing feedback to responses the PRA received in relation to consultation paper 10/25 (Updates to SS3/19 (Enhancing banks' and insurers' approaches to managing the financial risks from climate change)). The PRA also published a supervisory statement (SS5/25) which replaces SS3/19 and sets out updated PRA expectations for firms' approaches to managing climate-related risks, reflecting new international standards and embedding improved understanding of climate-related risks. It aims to ensure that firms build the capabilities and resilience needed to effectively manage these risks. SS5/25 took effect on 3 December 2025. The PRA confirmed in PS25/25 that firms will be expected to carry out an internal review of their current status in meeting the expectations set out in SS5/25 within six months of commencement and the PRA does not expect firms to close identified gaps within the six-month review period. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 312 # Supervision and regulation (continued) ## Regulatory initiatives on sustainability in the EU The EU Regulation on Sustainable Finance Disclosures Regulation (SFDR) and related Delegated Regulations require financial market participants (FMPs) to disclose how they integrate environmental, social and governance factors in their investment decisions for certain financial products and to publish principal adverse impact statements. The SFDR applies to entities established in the EU and in-scope products marketed in the EU, regardless of the location of the entity. The SFDR is currently under review by the Commission, which has published a draft amending regulation. ESMA has also published guidelines for funds in-scope of SFDR regarding the use of sustainability-related terms in their names. In addition, the EU Taxonomy Regulation provides for a general framework for the development of an EU-wide classification system for environmentally sustainable economic activities. It sets mandatory entity-level disclosure requirements for companies which fall under the scope of the EU Accounting Directive, in relation to eligibility and alignment of their business activities with the EU Taxonomy Regulation. The EU Taxonomy Regulation also imposes product level disclosure obligations for FMPs on the extent to which their financial products are Taxonomy aligned or not. In February 2025, the European Commission published the Omnibus I Package which aims to simplify certain EU sustainability-related regulations, the main changes being those to the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) and the Directive on Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence (CSDDD). The CSRD introduced significant sustainability related reporting obligations covering a wide range of topics beyond climate change for various entities, including EU banks and certain non-EU companies and banks (by virtue of having EU listings or significant business in the EU), with reporting to commence on a phased basis from the financial year 2024. One of the component parts of the Omnibus I Package is the "Stop-the-Clock" Directive, which came into force in April 2025 and delays the reporting start date for unlisted large companies and listed SMEs by two years. Another component of the Omnibus I Package is a "Quick Fix" Delegated Act, which came into force in November 2025 and extends a number of phase-in provisions and reliefs for companies that started reporting for financial year 2024. The last major component of the Omnibus I Package is the "Requirements" Proposal, which amends substantive provisions of the CSRD and CSDDD including the scope of application, reporting in relation to the value chain, and transition plan requirements under the CSDDD. The EU Parliament and Council of the European Union reached a provisional political agreement on the "Requirements" Proposal in December 2025. Related technical sustainability reporting standards (i.e., the European Sustainability Reporting Standards, or the 'ESRS') were published in 2023 but are currently being revised in order to reduce the amount of data collection. Disclosure requirements apply to companies in respect of their global operations, and not just their operations within the EU. The European Commission was also expected to develop assurance standards to support the requirements introduced by the CSRD to put sustainability reporting on a similar footing to financial reporting audit requirements. However, the European Commission has announced that it will deprioritise work on the assurance standards until 1 October 2027. Until adopted, Member States are free to apply national standards for assurance in the meantime. CRR II established, for certain large financial institutions, a Pillar 3 disclosure framework for information on environmental, social and governance risks, including physical risks and transition risks. Amendments included in the CRR III and CRD VI banking package will extend the scope of these disclosures and the emphasis on sustainability, with a number of new sustainability-related requirements, including the development of mandatory prudential transition plans and new supervisory powers for competent authorities specifically relating to sustainability risk, including assessment of prudential transition plans and sustainability risk governance and risk management processes now being part of the Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process. The ECB has made, and continues to regard, the supervision of the approach of institutions to sustainability risk a priority. In July 2024, the Directive on Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence (CSDDD) entered into force, and will require certain EU and non-EU entities to carry out due diligence in relation to their own operations and 'chain of activities', in order to identify and prevent, bring to an end or mitigate the actual and potential adverse impact of their own operations, the operations of their subsidiaries or of their business partners on human rights and the environment. For regulated financial undertakings, CSDDD currently covers own operations and the upstream value chain but not the activities of their downstream business partners that receive their financial services and products. These obligations will apply after transposition into national laws in each EU Member State on a phased basis from July 2029. The CSDDD previously required in-scope companies to adopt and put into effect a climate transition plan. However, this requirement will be removed under the "Requirements" Proposal of the Omnibus I Package. The CSDDD has the potential to be a particularly significant measure, with failure to comply with obligations under the CSDDD potentially giving rise to the imposition of administrative fines based on net worldwide turnover. ## Regulatory initiatives on sustainability in the US Barclays may be impacted by various sustainability-related regulatory and legislative developments in the US at both the federal and state level. The rules adopted by the SEC in March 2024 that would have required US-listed companies (including foreign private issuers such as Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC) to disclose extensive climate-related information have been stayed by the SEC pending the outcome of ongoing litigation, which the SEC has declined to defend. However, bills proposed or adopted by the legislatures of certain US states may still impose climate-related disclosure or other sustainability-related requirements. In California, the Climate Corporate Data Accountability Act (SB-253) and the Greenhouse Gases: Climate-Related Financial Risk Act (SB-261) adopted in 2023, require both public and private U.S.-based companies (including U.S. subsidiaries of non-U.S. companies) that do business in California to publish and submit climate-related financial risk reports with the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and report greenhouse gas emissions data in 2026. However, in response to an injunction granted by the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals in the ongoing litigation against SB-261 and SB-253, CARB confirmed on 1 December 2025 that it would not take enforcement action against any entity that does not post and submit a climate-related financial risk report pursuant to SB-261 by the 1 January 2026 statutory deadline. In New York, proposed legislation – the Climate Corporate Data Accountability Act (S. 3456 / A. 4282) – was introduced in --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 313 # Supervision and regulation (continued) 2025, and is a refreshed version of prior proposed legislation. As an example of legislation and initiatives taking a different or opposing position on sustainability matters, in 2021, Texas adopted anti-boycott legislation prohibiting Texas state entities from entering into contracts with companies that boycott energy companies. Barclays is monitoring such legislative developments and their impact on Barclays' US operations and reporting obligations. # Sanctions and financial crime The UK Bribery Act 2010 introduced a new form of corporate criminal liability focused broadly on a company's failure to prevent bribery on its behalf. The Criminal Finances Act 2017 introduced new corporate criminal offences of failing to prevent the facilitation of UK and overseas tax evasion. The Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act 2023 (ECCTA) extends the concept of corporate criminal liability such that certain economic crimes (such as fraud and false accounting) committed by "senior managers" acting within the scope of their actual or apparent authority, can be attributed to the company, for the purposes of holding the company criminally liable. The ECCTA has also created a new offence, in force from 1 September 2025, of failing to prevent a person associated with the Group from committing fraud for the benefit of the Group. These offences have broad application and in certain circumstances may have extraterritorial impact on entities, persons or activities located outside the UK, including Barclays PLC's subsidiaries outside the UK. If enacted, reforms proposed under the draft Crime and Policing Bill 2025 would expand corporate criminal liability to all criminal offences (and not just certain economic crimes, as is currently the case under ECCTA), if any such offence is committed by a senior manager acting within the scope of their authority. The UK Bribery Act requires the Group to have adequate procedures to prevent bribery which, due to the extraterritorial nature of the Act, makes this both complex and costly. Additionally, the Criminal Finances Act requires the Group to have reasonable procedures in place to prevent the criminal facilitation of tax evasion by persons acting for, or on behalf of, the Group. The ECCTA similarly requires the Group to have reasonable procedures in place to prevent a person associated with the Group from committing fraud. The Sanctions and Anti-Money Laundering Act 2018 (the Sanctions Act) became law in the UK in 2018. Following the UK's withdrawal from the EU, the Sanctions Act allowed for the adoption of an autonomous UK sanctions regime which came into force in 2021, as well as a more flexible licensing regime post-Brexit. This regime applies within the UK and in relation to the conduct of all UK persons wherever they are in the world; it also applies to overseas branches of UK companies (including the Barclays Bank PLC New York branch). Within the EU, there is a system of autonomous sanctions by which the European Council adopts a decision made by the EU's Common Foreign and Security Policy. The measures stated in the Council decision are either implemented at the EU level, by way of Regulation, or at a national level in Member States. Regulations are binding and directly effective throughout the EU. Each measure will specify the territorial scope of the relevant sanctions but these can apply broadly within the territory of any EU Member States and to EU nationals wherever they are located as well as to third country branches of EU companies. The EU's anti-money laundering regime has been implemented through a series of the Fourth to Sixth Anti-Money Laundering Directives, which Member States are then required to transpose into their local law – the Fourth and Fifth Anti-Money Laundering Directives (2015/849 and 2018/843) set out the current requirements for Member States to transpose in respect of AML. In order to harmonise its approach to anti-money laundering, the EU has introduced a new Sixth Anti-Money Laundering Directive (EU) 2024/1640, which will repeal and replace the previous Directives and which Member States will be required to implement by 2027, and the Anti-Money Laundering Regulation (EU) 2024/1624, which will have direct effect in Member States, with most provisions in force from 2027. Furthermore, the Anti-Money Laundering Agency Regulation (EU) 2024/1620 establishes the Authority for Anti-Money Laundering and Countering the Financing of Terrorism (AMLA) which will have direct supervisory powers over the 40 most systemic financial institutions in the EU and will indirectly impact other market parties. In the US, the Bank Secrecy Act, the USA PATRIOT Act 2001, the Anti-Money Laundering Act of 2020 and regulations thereunder contain numerous anti-money laundering and anti-terrorist financing requirements for financial institutions. In addition, the Group is subject to the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, which prohibits, among other things, corrupt payments to foreign government officials. It is also subject to various economic sanctions and similar laws, regulations and executive orders administered by the US government, which prohibit or restrict some or all business activities and other dealings with or involving certain individuals, entities, groups, countries and territories. In some cases, US state and federal regulations addressing sanctions, money laundering and other financial crimes may impact entities, persons or activities located or undertaken outside the US, including Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries. US government authorities have aggressively enforced these laws, and expanded authorities threatening the imposition of sanctions, against financial institutions in recent years. As a result of the conflict in Ukraine, there has been an increased regulatory focus on sanctions compliance in various jurisdictions, including the US, UK and EU. Government authorities have significant discretion in the administration of such restrictions, which may rapidly change or diverge across jurisdictions and, in some cases, conflict with local laws of other jurisdictions. Failure of a financial institution to ensure compliance with such laws could have serious legal, financial and reputational consequences for the institution. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Financial review A review of the Group’s performance, including the key performance indicators, and the contribution of each of our businesses to the overall performance of the Group. | | Page | | --- | --- | | Key performance indicators | 315 | | Consolidated summary income statement | 317 | | Income statement commentary | 318 | | Consolidated summary balance sheet | 319 | | Balance sheet commentary | 320 | | Analysis of results by business | 321 | | Non-IFRS performance measures | 330 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 315 # Key performance indicators In assessing the financial performance of the Group, management uses a range of KPIs which focus on the Group's financial strength, the delivery of sustainable returns and cost management. KPIs reflect the targets and ambitions followed during 2025. # Non-IFRS performance measures The Group's management believes that the non-IFRS performance measures included in this document provide valuable information to the readers of the financial statements as they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the businesses' performance between financial periods, and provide more detail concerning the elements of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of the Group. They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by management. However, any non-IFRS performance measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well. Refer to the non-IFRS performance measures section for further information and calculations of non-IFRS performance measures included throughout this section and the most directly comparable IFRS measures. | Definition | Why is it important and how the Group performed | | | --- | --- | --- | | Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio Capital requirements are part of the regulatory framework governing how banks and depository institutions are supervised. Capital ratios express a bank's capital as a percentage of its risk weighted assets (RWAs) as defined by the PRA. CET1 ratio is a measure of capital as defined within the Definition of Capital section of the PRA's Prudential and Resolution Policy - Banking Index. | The Group's capital management objective is to maximise shareholder value by prudently managing the level and mix of its capital to: ensure the Group and all of its subsidiaries are appropriately capitalised relative to their regulatory minimum and stressed capital requirements, support the Group's risk appetite, growth and strategic options, while seeking to maintain a robust credit proposition for the Group. The CET1 ratio increased to 14.3% (December 2024: 13.6%), as CET1 capital increased by £2.5bn to £51.1bn and RWAs decreased by £1.4bn to £356.8bn. Taking into account the £1.0bn share buyback announced at FY25 Results, the CET1 ratio as at 31 December 2025 would be reduced to 14.0% (at the top-end of the 13-14% target range). Group target: a CET1 ratio in the range of 13-14%.1 | CET1 ratio 14.3% 2024: 13.6% 2023: 13.8% | | Return on average shareholders' equity (RoE) RoE is calculated as profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, as a proportion of average shareholders' equity excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments. | This measure indicates the return generated by the management of the business based on shareholders' equity. RoE for the Group was 9.8% (2024: 9.1%, 2023: 7.6%). | Group RoE 9.8% 2024: 9.1% 2023: 7.6% | | Return on average tangible shareholders' equity (RoTE) RoTE is calculated as Group attributable profit, as a proportion of average tangible shareholders' equity. | This measure indicates the return generated by the management of the business based on ordinary shareholders' tangible equity. Achieving a target RoTE demonstrates the organisation's ability to execute its strategy and align management's interests with the shareholders'. RoTE lies at the heart of the Group's capital allocation and performance management process. The Group performed in line with RoTE guidance in 2025. Statutory Group RoTE was 11.3% (FY24: 10.5%). All divisions delivered double-digit RoTE in FY25 2025 Group guidance: RoTE of c.11%1 2026: targeting Group RoTE2 of greater than 12%3 | Group RoTE 11.3% 2024: 10.5% 2023: 9.0% | # Notes: 1. Group RoTE guidance was updated at Q325 Results, from c.11% to greater than 11%. 2. Management does not assess forward-looking "return on equity" (target RoE) as a performance indicator of the business, and therefore reconciliation of the forward-looking non IFRS measure "return on tangible equity" (target RoTE) to an equivalent IFRS measure is not available without unreasonable efforts. 3. Our targets and guidance are based on management's current expectations as to the macroeconomic environment and the business and are subject to change. --- Key performance indicators (continued) | Definition | Why is it important and how the Group performed | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Total operating expenses | Barclays views total operating expenses as a key strategic area for banks; those who actively manage costs and control them effectively will gain a strong competitive advantage. Group total operating expenses increased to £17.7bn (2024: £16.7bn). Group operating costs, which exclude litigation and conduct charges and UK regulatory levies, increased to £17.0bn (FY24: £16.2bn), reflecting Tesco Bank run rate and integration costs, further investment spend, business growth, and inflation, partially offset by c.£700m of cost efficiency savings. Litigation and conduct charges of £0.4bn (FY24: £0.2bn), included a £235m charge for motor finance redress in Q325. | | | | Total operating expenses £17.7bn 2024: £16.7bn 2023: £16.9bn | | Cost: income ratio Total operating expenses divided by total income. | This is a measure management uses to assess the productivity of the business operations. Managing the cost base is a key execution priority for management and includes a review of all categories of discretionary spending and an analysis of how we can run the business to ensure that costs increase at a slower rate than income. The Group cost: income ratio was 61% (2024: 62%), in line with our guidance of c.61%, driven by continued cost discipline and positive operating leverage. 2025 Group target: a cost:income ratio of c.61%. 2026: targeting Group cost:income ratio of high 50s in percentage terms.¹ | | | | Cost: income ratio 61% 2024: 62% 2023: 67% | Note: 1 Our targets and guidance are based on management's current expectations as to the macroeconomic environment and the business and are subject to change. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Consolidated summary income statement | For the year ended 31 December | 2025 | 20241 | 2023 | 2022 | 2021 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Interest income | 36,189 | 38,326 | 35,075 | 19,096 | 11,240 | | Interest expense | (21,688) | (25,390) | (22,366) | (8,524) | (3,167) | | Net interest income | 14,501 | 12,936 | 12,709 | 10,572 | 8,073 | | Fee and commission income | 11,282 | 10,847 | 10,121 | 9,637 | 9,880 | | Fee and commission expense | (3,784) | (3,600) | (3,592) | (3,038) | (2,206) | | Net fee and commission income | 7,498 | 7,247 | 6,529 | 6,599 | 7,674 | | Other income | 7,141 | 6,605 | 6,140 | 7,785 | 6,193 | | Total income | 29,140 | 26,788 | 25,378 | 24,956 | 21,940 | | Operating costs | (17,040) | (16,195) | (16,714) | (14,957) | (14,092) | | UK regulatory levies | (313) | (320) | (180) | (176) | (170) | | Litigation and conduct | (392) | (220) | (37) | (1,597) | (397) | | Total operating expenses | (17,745) | (16,735) | (16,931) | (16,730) | (14,659) | | Other net income/(expenses) | 23 | 37 | (9) | 6 | 260 | | Profit before impairment | 11,418 | 10,090 | 8,438 | 8,232 | 7,541 | | Credit impairment (charges)/releases | (2,279) | (1,982) | (1,881) | (1,220) | 653 | | Profit before tax | 9,139 | 8,108 | 6,557 | 7,012 | 8,194 | | Tax charge | (1,926) | (1,752) | (1,234) | (1,039) | (1,138) | | Profit after tax | 7,213 | 6,356 | 5,323 | 5,973 | 7,056 | | Non-controlling interests | (41) | (49) | (64) | (45) | (47) | | Other equity instrument holders | (997) | (991) | (985) | (905) | (804) | | Attributable profit | 6,175 | 5,316 | 4,274 | 5,023 | 6,205 | | Selected financial statistics | | | | | | | Basic earnings per ordinary share | 43.8p | 36.0p | 27.7p | 30.8p | 36.5p | | Diluted earnings per ordinary share | 42.3p | 34.8p | 26.9p | 29.8p | 35.6p | | Return on average shareholders’ equity | 9.8% | 9.1% | 7.6% | 8.9% | 11.2% | | Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity | 11.3% | 10.5% | 9.0% | 10.4% | 13.1% | | Cost: income ratio | 61% | 62% | 67% | 67% | 67% | The financial information above is extracted from the published accounts. This information should be read together with the information included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements. Q424 and FY24 included the £556m day 1 gain from the acquisition of Tesco Bank. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 318 # Consolidated summary income statement ## 2025 compared to 2024 - Barclays delivered a profit before tax of £9,139m (FY24: £8,108m), RoE of 9.8%, (FY24: 9.1%), RoTE of 11.3% (FY24: 10.5%) and EPS of 43.8p (FY24: 36.0p) - The Group has a diverse income profile across businesses and geographies. The year-on-year appreciation of average GBP against USD negatively impacted income and profits, and positively impacted credit impairment charges and total operating expenses - Group income increased 9% to £29,140m driven by higher structural hedge income, higher income in Global Markets across FICC and Equities, Tesco Bank NII and lending growth, partially offset by the non-repeat of the £556m day 1 gain from the acquisition of Tesco Bank in the prior year - Group total operating expenses increased to £17,745m (FY24: £16,735m) - Group operating costs increased 5% to £17,040m, reflecting Tesco Bank run rate and integration costs, further investment spend, business growth and inflation, partially offset by c.£700m of cost efficiency savings - FY25 total structural cost actions of £285m (FY24: £273m) with Q425 structural cost actions of £90m (Q424: £110m) - Litigation and conduct charges of £392m (FY24: £220m), included a £235m charge for motor finance redress in Q325 - Credit impairment charges increased to £2,279m (FY24: £1,982m), primarily driven by the impact of the GM portfolio acquisition, an IB single name charge and elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty. Total coverage ratio remained stable at 1.2% (December 2024: 1.2%) - The effective tax rate (ETR) was 21.1% (FY24: 21.6%). The 2025 ETR included tax relief on payments made under Additional Tier 1 (AT1) instruments and on holdings of inflation-linked government bonds - Attributable profit was £6,175m (FY24: £5,316m) Please refer to the Financial review section in the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2024 for a comparative discussion of the 2024 financial results compared to 2023. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Consolidated summary balance sheet | As at 31 December | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | 2022 | 2021 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Assets | | | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | 229,752 | 210,184 | 224,634 | 256,351 | 238,574 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 130,532 | 119,843 | 108,889 | 112,597 | 92,542 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 68,475 | 68,210 | 56,749 | 45,487 | 31,831 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks | 8,638 | 8,327 | 9,459 | 10,015 | 9,698 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to customers | 352,885 | 337,946 | 333,288 | 343,277 | 319,922 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost | 17,622 | 4,734 | 2,594 | 776 | 3,227 | | Trading portfolio assets | 190,061 | 166,453 | 174,605 | 133,813 | 147,035 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 186,857 | 193,734 | 206,651 | 213,568 | 191,972 | | Derivative financial instruments | 252,459 | 293,530 | 256,836 | 302,380 | 262,572 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 74,394 | 78,059 | 71,836 | 65,062 | 61,753 | | Other assets | 32,490 | 37,182 | 31,946 | 30,373 | 25,159 | | Total assets | 1,544,165 | 1,518,202 | 1,477,487 | 1,513,699 | 1,384,285 | | Liabilities | | | | | | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks | 20,413 | 13,203 | 14,472 | 19,979 | 17,819 | | Deposits at amortised cost from customers | 565,200 | 547,460 | 524,317 | 525,803 | 501,614 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 117,583 | 106,229 | 94,084 | 96,927 | 79,371 | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowings at amortised cost | 25,170 | 39,415 | 41,601 | 27,052 | 28,352 | | Debt securities in issue | 119,033 | 92,402 | 96,825 | 112,881 | 98,867 | | Subordinated liabilities | 12,954 | 11,921 | 10,494 | 11,423 | 12,759 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | 57,737 | 56,908 | 58,669 | 72,924 | 54,169 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 294,108 | 282,224 | 297,539 | 271,637 | 250,960 | | Derivative financial instruments | 240,808 | 279,415 | 250,044 | 289,620 | 256,883 | | Other liabilities | 12,923 | 16,544 | 17,578 | 16,193 | 13,450 | | Total liabilities | 1,465,929 | 1,445,721 | 1,405,623 | 1,444,439 | 1,314,244 | | Equity | | | | | | | Called up share capital and share premium | 4,178 | 4,186 | 4,288 | 4,373 | 4,536 | | Other equity instruments | 12,725 | 12,075 | 13,259 | 13,284 | 12,259 | | Other reserves | 1,628 | (468) | (77) | (2,192) | 1,770 | | Retained earnings | 59,253 | 56,028 | 53,734 | 52,827 | 50,487 | | Total equity excluding non-controlling interests | 77,784 | 71,821 | 71,204 | 68,292 | 69,052 | | Non-controlling interests | 452 | 660 | 660 | 968 | 989 | | Total equity | 78,236 | 72,481 | 71,864 | 69,260 | 70,041 | | Total liabilities and equity | 1,544,165 | 1,518,202 | 1,477,487 | 1,513,699 | 1,384,285 | | Net asset value per ordinary share | 469p | 414p | 382p | 347p | 339p | | Tangible net asset value per share | 409p | 357p | 331p | 295p | 291p | | Number of ordinary shares of Barclays PLC (in millions) | 13,867 | 14,420 | 15,155 | 15,871 | 16,752 | | Year-end USD exchange rate | 1.34 | 1.25 | 1.28 | 1.20 | 1.35 | | Year-end EUR exchange rate | 1.15 | 1.21 | 1.15 | 1.13 | 1.19 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 320 # Balance sheet commentary ## 2025 compared to 2024 ### Total assets Total assets increased £26.0bn to £1,544.2bn. Cash and balances at central banks increased by £19.6bn to £229.8bn primarily driven by a higher liquidity pool, funded by increased wholesale funding and deposit growth across businesses. Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks and customers increased £15.3bn to £361.5bn driven by an increase in Barclays UK and UKCB lending, reflecting growth in mortgages and cards lending in Retail Banking and the strategic focus to grow customer lending in UKCB. Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost increased £12.9bn to £17.6bn due to growth in secured financing balances. Trading portfolio assets increased £23.6bn to £190.1bn driven by increased trading activity to facilitate client demand in Global Markets, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD. Financial assets at fair value through the income statement decreased £6.9bn to £186.9bn as underlying growth in financing balances were more than offset by increased netting opportunities and the strengthening of spot GBP against USD. Derivative financial instrument assets decreased £41.1bn to £252.5bn primarily driven by a reduction in mark-to-market on FX derivatives and strengthening of spot GBP against USD, partially offset by an increase in equity derivatives. ### Total liabilities Total liabilities increased £20.2bn to £1,465.9bn. Deposits at amortised cost to banks and customers increased £25.0bn to £585.6bn driven by deposit growth in International Corporate Bank, treasury and UKCB, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD. Derivative financial instrument liabilities decreased £38.6bn to £240.8bn primarily driven by a reduction in mark-to-market on FX derivatives and strengthening of spot GBP against USD, partially offset by an increase in equity derivatives. Financial liabilities designated at fair value increased £11.9bn to £294.1bn driven by increase in client activity and growth in financing balances partially offset by increased netting opportunities and the strengthening of spot GBP against USD. ### Total shareholders' equity Total shareholders' equity increased £6.0bn to £77.8bn. Retained earnings increased £3.3bn to £59.3bn, mainly due to profits of £6.2bn and net movements on employee share schemes of £0.5bn offset by share repurchases of £2.2bn and dividends of £1.2bn. Other equity instruments increased to £12.7bn, due to issuance of four AT1 instruments (£3.8bn) partially offset by three redemptions (£3.1bn). AT1 securities are perpetual subordinated contingent convertible securities structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under prevailing capital rules applicable as at the relevant issue date. Other reserves increased by £2.1bn during the year, resulting in a closing balance of a £1.6bn gain. This change was mainly due to a £2.3bn gain in the cash flow hedging reserve driven by fair value gains on interest rate swaps from a decrease in GBP and USD forward curves, and transferred losses from de-designated hedges, Additional significant movements within other reserves included a £0.8bn gain in the fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) reserve, reducing the loss to £1.1bn. This was largely due to a decrease in the USD rates curve and a tightening of the Euro asset swap spread. These gains were partially offset by a £1.1bn loss in the currency translation reserve which resulted in a closing accumulated gain of £2.5bn, principally reflecting movements in USD exchange rates. Net asset value per share increased to 469p (December 2024: 414p). TNAV per share increased to 409p (December 2024: 357p) as EPS of 43.8p, and a 16p benefit from the cash flow hedging reserve were partially offset by an 8p reduction from dividends paid during FY25. The impact of the share buybacks executed throughout 2025 was broadly neutral to TNAV per share due to an increase in the Barclays share price. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Analysis of results by business Barclays UK | | 2025 | 2024¹ | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Income statement information | | | | | Net interest income | 7,653 | 6,627 | 6,431 | | Net fee, commission and other income | 1,055 | 1,647 | 1,156 | | Total income | 8,708 | 8,274 | 7,587 | | Operating costs | (4,746) | (4,235) | (4,393) | | UK regulatory levies | (85) | (78) | (30) | | Litigation and conduct | (51) | (16) | 8 | | Total operating expenses | (4,882) | (4,329) | (4,415) | | Other net income | — | — | — | | Profit before impairment | 3,826 | 3,945 | 3,172 | | Credit impairment charges | (413) | (365) | (304) | | Profit before tax | 3,413 | 3,580 | 2,868 | | Attributable profit | 2,443 | 2,465 | 1,962 | | Performance measures | | | | | Return on average allocated equity | 15.5% | 16.9% | 14.0% | | Return on average allocated tangible equity | 20.7% | 23.1% | 19.2% | | Average allocated equity | £15.8bn | £14.6bn | £14.0bn | | Average allocated tangible equity | £11.8bn | £10.7bn | £10.2bn | | Cost: income ratio | 56% | 52% | 58% | | Loan loss rate (bps) | 18 | 16 | 14 | | Net interest margin | 3.63% | 3.29% | 3.13% | | Key facts | | | | | UK mortgage balances | £172.4bn | £163.1bn | £163.5bn | | Mortgage gross lending flow | £34.3bn | £23.9bn | £22.7bn | | Average LTV of mortgage portfolio² | 55% | 53% | 54% | | Average LTV of new mortgage lending² | 70% | 66% | 63% | | Number of branches | 206 | 221 | 306 | | Digitally active customers³ | 13.9m | 13.4m | 12.7m | | 30 day arrears rate - total UK cards | 0.8% | 0.7% | 0.9% | | 90 day arrears rate - total UK cards | 0.2% | 0.2% | 0.2% | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 17,900 | 18,000 | 6,800 | | Balance sheet information | | | | | Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost | £216.5bn | £207.7bn | £202.8bn | | Total assets | £299.6bn | £299.8bn | £293.1bn | | Customer deposits at amortised cost | £244.6bn | £244.2bn | £241.1bn | | Loan: deposit ratio | 94% | 92% | 92% | | Risk weighted assets | £85.8bn | £84.5bn | £73.5bn | # Notes: 1. Q424 and FY24 included the day 1 impacts from the acquisition of Tesco Bank: total income gain of £556m, credit impairment charges of £209m, and profit before tax benefit of £347m. 2. Average loan to value (LTV) of mortgages is balance weighted and reflects both residential and buy-to-let (BTL) mortgage portfolios within the Home Loans portfolio. 3. Excludes Tesco Bank. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 322 # Analysis of results by business (continued) ## Analysis of Barclays UK | | 2025 | 2024¹ | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Analysis of total income | | | | | Retail Banking | 6,582 | 6,270 | 5,693 | | Business Banking | 2,126 | 2,004 | 1,894 | | Total income | 8,708 | 8,274 | 7,587 | | Analysis of credit impairment (charges)/releases | | | | | Retail Banking | (374) | (394) | (332) | | Business Banking | (39) | 29 | 28 | | Total credit impairment charges | (413) | (365) | (304) | | Analysis of loans and advances to customers at amortised cost | | | | | Retail Banking | £198.6bn | £188.0bn | £179.8bn | | Business Banking | £17.9bn | £19.7bn | £23.0bn | | Total loans and advances to customers at amortised cost | £216.5bn | £207.7bn | £202.8bn | | Analysis of customer deposits at amortised cost | | | | | Retail Banking | £192.7bn | £191.4bn | £185.4bn | | Business Banking | £51.9bn | £52.8bn | £55.7bn | | Total customer deposits at amortised cost | £244.6bn | £244.2bn | £241.1bn | ## 2025 compared to 2024 - Profit before tax decreased 5% to £3,413m. Barclays UK delivered a RoE of 15.5% (FY24:16.9%) and RoTE of 20.7% (FY24: 23.1%) supported by robust income, the integration of Tesco Bank, disciplined cost management and normalising levels of impairment underpinned by strong asset quality - Total income increased 5% to £8,708m. NII increased 15% to £7,653m, as higher structural hedge income and the impact from Tesco Bank were partially offset by retail deposit dynamics. Net fee, commission and other income decreased 36% to £1,055m primarily driven by the non-repeat of the day 1 gain from the acquisition of Tesco Bank - Total operating expenses increased 13% to £4,882m, driven by Tesco Bank run and integration costs, and inflation. Ongoing efficiency savings continue to be reinvested, to drive sustainable improvement to the cost: income ratio - Credit impairment charges were £413m (FY24: £365m), underpinned by balance growth and stable credit performance. The UK cards 30 and 90 day arrears rates were 0.8% (Q424: 0.7%) and 0.2% (Q424: 0.2%) respectively. The UK cards total coverage ratio decreased to 4.3% (December 2024: 4.8%) driven by resilient customer behaviour - Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost increased £8.8bn to £216.5bn, primarily driven by growth in mortgages and cards lending in Retail Banking, partially offset by continued repayment of government scheme lending in Business Banking - Customer deposits at amortised cost increased by £0.4bn to £244.6bn, driven by an increase in Retail Banking deposits, partially offset by a reduction in Business Banking current accounts. The loan:deposit ratio remained broadly stable at 94% (December 2024: 92%) - RWAs increased to £85.8bn (December 2024: £84.5bn) primarily due to growth in mortgages and cards lending in Retail Banking, partially offset by securitisations ## Note: 1 FY24 included the day 1 impacts from the acquisition of Tesco Bank: total income gain of £556m, credit impairment charges of £209m, and profit before tax benefit of £347m Please refer to the Financial review section in the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2024 for a comparative discussion of the 2024 financial results compared to 2023. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Analysis of results by business (continued) ## Barclays UK Corporate Bank | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Income statement information | | | | | Net interest income | 1,480 | 1,206 | 1,160 | | Net fee, commission, trading and other income | 584 | 574 | 610 | | Total income | 2,064 | 1,780 | 1,770 | | Operating costs | (989) | (935) | (905) | | UK regulatory levies | (29) | (37) | (8) | | Litigation and conduct | (39) | (1) | 1 | | Total operating expenses | (1,057) | (973) | (912) | | Other net expenses | — | — | (3) | | Profit before impairment | 1,007 | 807 | 855 | | Credit impairment (charges)/releases | (37) | (76) | 27 | | Profit before tax | 970 | 731 | 882 | | Attributable profit | 648 | 490 | 584 | | Performance measures | | | | | Return on average allocated equity | 18.9% | 16.0% | 20.5% | | Return on average allocated tangible equity | 18.9% | 16.0% | 20.5% | | Average allocated equity | £3.4bn | £3.1bn | £2.9bn | | Average allocated tangible equity (£bn) | £3.4bn | £3.1bn | £2.9bn | | Cost: income ratio | 51% | 55% | 52% | | Loan loss rate (bps) | 12 | 29 | (10) | | Key facts | | | | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 1,900 | 1,900 | 1,800 | | Balance sheet information | | | | | Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost | £30.0bn | £25.4bn | £26.4bn | | Deposits at amortised cost | £88.7bn | £83.1bn | £84.9bn | | Risk weighted assets | £26.5bn | £23.9bn | £20.9bn | | Analysis of total income | £m | £m | £m | | Corporate lending | 357 | 267 | 262 | | Transaction banking | 1,707 | 1,513 | 1,508 | | Total income | 2,064 | 1,780 | 1,770 | ## 2025 compared to 2024 - Profit before tax increased 33% to £970m. UKCB delivered a RoE of 18.9% (FY24: 16.0%), RoTE of 18.9% (FY24: 16.0%), as increased income from higher average deposit and lending balances was partially offset by continued investment and higher RWAs to support future growth ambitions - Total income increased 16% to £2,064m, NII increased 23% to £1,480m, driven by higher average deposit and lending balances, and higher structural hedge income. Net fee, commission, trading and other income was broadly stable at £584m - Total operating expenses increased 9% to £1,057m, including a litigation and conduct charge of £39m in Q225. Operating costs increased 6% to £989m, reflecting higher investment spend to support business growth ambitions, with ongoing efficiency savings offsetting inflationary headwinds - Credit impairment charges were £37m (FY24: £76m), reflecting stable underlying credit performance and limited single name charges - Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost increased to £30.0bn (December 2024: £25.4bn), reflecting the strategic focus to grow lending - Deposits at amortised cost increased to £88.7bn (December 2024: £83.1bn), driven by an inflow of balances from new and existing clients - RWAs increased to £26.5bn (December 2024: £23.9bn), reflecting higher client lending limits and growth in lending balances Please refer to the Financial review section in the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2024 for a comparative discussion of the 2024 financial results compared to 2023. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Analysis of results by business (continued) ## Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Income statement information | | | | | Net interest income | 799 | 767 | 768 | | Net fee, commission and other income | 581 | 542 | 440 | | Total income | 1,380 | 1,309 | 1,208 | | Operating costs | (994) | (911) | (795) | | UK regulatory levies | (10) | (9) | (4) | | Litigation and conduct | (9) | — | 2 | | Total operating expenses | (1,013) | (920) | (797) | | Other net income | — | — | — | | Profit before impairment | 367 | 389 | 411 | | Credit impairment charges | 8 | (6) | (4) | | Profit before tax | 375 | 383 | 407 | | Attributable profit | 291 | 288 | 330 | | Performance measures | | | | | Return on average allocated equity | 24.3% | 25.7% | 29.9% | | Return on average allocated tangible equity | 26.3% | 28.1% | 32.7% | | Average allocated equity | £1.2bn | £1.1bn | £1.1bn | | Average allocated tangible equity (£bn) | £1.1bn | £1.0bn | £1.0bn | | Cost: income ratio | 73% | 70% | 66% | | Loan loss rate (bps) | (5) | 4 | 3 | | Key facts | | | | | Net new assets under management¹ | £3.3bn | £3.7bn | | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 2,100 | 1,900 | 2,100 | | Balance sheet information | | | | | Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost | £14.7bn | £14.5bn | £13.6bn | | Deposits at amortised cost | £72.0bn | £69.5bn | £60.3bn | | Risk weighted assets | £8.0bn | £7.9bn | £7.2bn | | Invested assets² | £140.6bn | £124.6bn | £108.8bn | | Of which | | | | | Assets under management¹ | £52.9bn | £47.7bn | £41.7bn | | Assets under supervision¹ | £87.7bn | £76.9bn | £67.1bn | | Client assets and liabilities³ | £227.6bn | £208.9bn | £182.9bn | ## 2025 compared to 2024 - Profit before tax decreased 2% to £375m with RoE of 24.3% (FY24: 25.7%) and RoTE of 26.3% (FY24: 28.1%). The business continues to see an inflow of new client balances across deposits, lending and investments reflecting strong product offering and client engagement, as well as ongoing investment to support future growth and efficiency ambitions - Total income increased 5% to £1,380m, driven by growth in deposit, invested asset and loan balances from net new inflows and market movements - Total operating expenses increased 10% to £1,013m, reflecting higher investment spend to support business growth ambitions, with ongoing efficiency savings offsetting inflationary headwinds - Client assets and liabilities increased £18.7bn to £227.6bn, driven by net new inflows of invested assets, deposits and loan balances and market movements, partially offset by FX impact - RWAs were broadly stable at £8.0bn (December 2024: £7.9bn) ## Notes: 1. Refer to page 373 for further information on net new assets under management, assets under management and assets under supervision. 2. Invested assets (held off-balance sheet) represent assets under management and supervision. Uninvested cash held under an investment mandate and reported within deposits is excluded from invested assets. 3. Client assets and liabilities refers to deposits, lending and invested assets. Please refer to the Financial review section in the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2024 for a comparative discussion of the 2024 financial results compared to 2023. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Analysis of results by business (continued) ## Barclays Investment Bank | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Income statement information | | | | | Net interest income | 1,334 | 1,031 | 1,393 | | Net trading income | 7,197 | 6,241 | 6,040 | | Net fee, commission and other income | 4,524 | 4,533 | 3,602 | | Total income | 13,055 | 11,805 | 11,035 | | Operating costs | (7,927) | (7,666) | (7,619) | | UK regulatory levies | (181) | (187) | (123) | | Litigation and conduct | (28) | (55) | 5 | | Total operating expenses | (8,136) | (7,908) | (7,737) | | Other net income | — | — | — | | Profit before impairment | 4,919 | 3,897 | 3,298 | | Credit impairment charges | (305) | (123) | (102) | | Profit before tax | 4,614 | 3,774 | 3,196 | | Attributable profit | 3,092 | 2,513 | 2,041 | | Performance measures | | | | | Return on average allocated equity | 10.6% | 8.5% | 7.0% | | Return on average allocated tangible equity | 10.6% | 8.5% | 7.0% | | Average allocated equity | £29.1bn | £29.7bn | £29.0bn | | Average allocated tangible equity (£bn) | £29.1bn | £29.7bn | £29.0bn | | Income over average risk weighted assets | 6.6% | 5.8% | 5.5% | | Cost: income ratio | 62% | 67% | 70% | | Loan loss rate (bps) | 23 | 10 | 9 | | Key facts | | | | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 7,200 | 7,100 | 7,100 | | Balance sheet information | | | | | Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost | £70.0bn | £69.7bn | £62.7bn | | Loans and advances to banks at amortised cost | £7.4bn | £6.8bn | £7.3bn | | Debt securities at amortised cost | £52.9bn | £47.9bn | £38.9bn | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | £130.3bn | £124.4bn | £108.9bn | | Trading portfolio assets | £189.5bn | £166.1bn | £174.5bn | | Derivative financial instrument assets | £251.5bn | £291.6bn | £255.1bn | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | £183.6bn | £190.4bn | £202.5bn | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | £121.6bn | £111.1bn | £102.3bn | | Deposits at amortised cost | £156.1bn | £140.5bn | £132.7bn | | Derivative financial instrument liabilities | £240.6bn | £279.0bn | £249.7bn | | Risk weighted assets | £196.7bn | £198.8bn | £197.3bn | | Analysis of total income | £m | £m | £m | | FICC | 5,429 | 4,667 | 4,845 | | Equities | 3,225 | 2,875 | 2,373 | | Global Markets | 8,654 | 7,542 | 7,218 | | Advisory | 676 | 661 | 593 | | Equity capital markets | 278 | 351 | 219 | | Debt capital markets | 1,510 | 1,492 | 1,148 | | Banking fees and underwriting | 2,464 | 2,504 | 1,960 | | Corporate lending | 247 | 153 | 213 | | Transaction banking | 1,690 | 1,606 | 1,644 | | International Corporate Bank | 1,937 | 1,759 | 1,857 | | Investment Banking | 4,401 | 4,263 | 3,817 | | Total income | 13,055 | 11,805 | 11,035 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 326 # Analysis of results by business (continued) ## 2025 compared to 2024 - IB has a diverse income profile across businesses and geographies. The 3% appreciation of average GBP against USD adversely impacted income and profits, and positively impacted credit impairment charges and total operating expenses - Profit before tax increased to £4,614m (FY24: £3,774m). RoE of 10.6% (FY24:8.5%) and RoTE of 10.6% (FY24: 8.5%), were driven by strong performance in Global Markets and the International Corporate Bank, whilst maintaining cost and capital discipline, driving positive operating jaws and improved RWA productivity - Total income increased 11% to £13,055m, including adverse average FX impacts - Global Markets income increased 15% to £8,654m across FICC and Equities - FICC income increased 16% to £5,429m, reflecting continued support provided to clients through a range of environments, including a strong performance in Macro, Securitised products and Credit, and sustained strength in Fixed Income Financing - Equities income increased 12% to £3,225m (up 17% excluding the prior year £125m fair value gain on Visa B shares in Q124), reflecting growth in Prime Financing due to increased client balances and Cash from strong client activity across products - Investment Banking income increased 3% to £4,401m - Banking fees and underwriting income decreased 2% to £2,464m, primarily driven by a 21% decline in Equity Capital Markets fees due to a strong prior year comparator, which included a large UK rights issue in Q224, partially offset by Debt Capital Markets and Advisory - International Corporate Bank income increased 10% to £1,937m. Corporate lending income increased to £247m due to net gains on fair value lending and cost of hedging (c.£130m)¹. Transaction banking income increased 5% to £1,690m, as higher income from growth in deposit balances was partially offset by margin compression due to change in deposits product mix - Total operating expenses increased 3% to £8,136m, driven by inflationary headwinds, higher performance costs and expenses associated with supporting the business strategy, partially offset by efficiency savings and FX - Credit impairment charges were £305m (FY24: £123m), primarily driven by a single name charge in Q325 and elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty booked in Q125 - Loans and advances at amortised costs increased to £130.3bn (December 2024: £124.4bn) driven by increased investment in debt securities in treasury - Trading portfolio assets increased to £189.5bn (December 2024: £166.1bn) driven by increased trading activity to facilitate client demand in Global Markets, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD - Financial assets at fair value through the income statement decreased to £183.6bn (December 2024: £190.4bn) as underlying growth in financing balances were more than offset by increased netting opportunities and the strengthening of spot GBP against USD - Derivative financial instrument assets decreased to £251.5bn (December 2024: £291.6bn) and liabilities decreased to £240.6bn (December 2024: £279.0bn) primarily driven by a reduction in mark-to-market on FX derivatives and strengthening of spot GBP against USD, partially offset by an increase in equity derivatives - Deposits at amortised cost increased to £156.1bn (December 2024: £140.5bn) driven by growth in deposits across International Corporate Bank and treasury, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD - RWAs were broadly stable at £196.7bn (December 2024: £198.8bn) mainly driven by business activity as we continued to support clients through a range of environments, offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD ## Note: 1. FY25 included c.£45m of fair value gains on lending and cost of hedging. FY24 included c.£85m of fair value losses on leverage finance lending. Please refer to the Financial review section in the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2024 for a comparative discussion of the 2024 financial results compared to 2023. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Analysis of results by business (continued) Barclays US Consumer Bank | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Income statement information | | | | | Net interest income | 2,820 | 2,659 | 2,604 | | Net fee, commission and other income | 861 | 667 | 664 | | Total income | 3,681 | 3,326 | 3,268 | | Operating costs | (1,637) | (1,612) | (1,650) | | UK regulatory levies | — | — | — | | Litigation and conduct | (8) | (14) | (6) | | Total operating expenses | (1,645) | (1,626) | (1,656) | | Other net income | — | — | — | | Profit before impairment | 2,036 | 1,700 | 1,612 | | Credit impairment charges | (1,521) | (1,293) | (1,438) | | Profit before tax | 515 | 407 | 174 | | Attributable profit | 390 | 302 | 131 | | Performance measures | | | | | Return on average allocated equity | 9.5% | 8.1% | 3.4% | | Return on average allocated tangible equity | 11.0% | 9.1% | 4.1% | | Average allocated equity | £4.1bn | £3.7bn | £3.8bn | | Average allocated tangible equity | £3.5bn | £3.3bn | £3.2bn | | Cost: income ratio | 45% | 49% | 51% | | Loan loss rate (bps) | 496 | 431 | 514 | | Net interest margin | 11.14% | 10.65% | 10.85% | | Key facts | | | | | US cards 30 day arrears rate | 3.0% | 3.0% | 2.9% | | US cards 90 day arrears rate | 1.6 | 1.6% | 1.5% | | US cards customer FICO score distribution¹ | | | | | <660 | 13% | 12% | 12% | | >660 | 87% | 88% | 88% | | End net receivables (reported) ($bn) | 36.6 | 33.1 | 32.2 | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 2,300 | 2,300 | 600 | | Balance sheet information | | | | | Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost | £21.1bn | £20.0bn | £24.2bn | | Deposits at amortised cost | £24.2bn | £23.3bn | £19.7bn | | Risk weighted assets | £27.4bn | £26.8bn | £24.8bn | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 328 # Analysis of results by business (continued) ## 2025 compared to 2024 - The 3% appreciation of average GBP against USD adversely impacted income and profits, and positively impacted credit impairment charges and total operating expenses - Profit before tax increased to £515m (FY24: £407m). RoE of 9.5% (FY24: 8.1%) and RoTE of 11.0% (FY24: 9.1%), reflected continued operational progress, as increased income from business growth and higher net interest margins were partially offset by higher impairment charges relating to the acquisition of the GM portfolio in August 2025 and macroeconomic uncertainty. - Total income increased 11% to £3,681m, driven by organic business growth, the acquisition of the GM portfolio, increased purchase activity, and a c.£40m one-off benefit related to partner rewards in Q425. NII increased 6% to £2,820m with a net interest margin (NIM) of 11.14% (FY24: 10.65%), including business growth and repricing initiatives. Net fee, commission and other income increased 29% to £861m driven by purchases, and fee growth - Total operating expenses increased 1% to £1,645m, driven by partner-related expenses and supporting business growth, with ongoing efficiency savings offsetting inflationary headwinds - Credit impairment charges were £1,521m (FY24: £1,293m), driven by the impact from the acquisition of the GM portfolio and elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty. The lower charge in prior year was influenced by the impact of credit risk management actions and methodology enhancements. US cards 30 and 90 day arrears rates¹ were 3.0% (Q424: 3.0%) and 1.6% (Q424: 1.6%) respectively. The USCB total coverage ratio decreased to 11.1% (December 2024: 11.4%) due to the acquisition of the GM portfolio - Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost increased to £21.1bn (December 2024: £20.0bn), reflecting the acquisition of the GM portfolio and organic growth, partially offset by strengthening of spot GBP against USD - Deposits at amortised cost increased to £24.2bn (December 2024: £23.3bn), with growth in retail savings which is in line with USCB's ambition to grow core deposits, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD - RWAs increased to £27.4bn (December 2024: £26.8bn), reflecting the acquisition of the GM portfolio and organic growth, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD ## Notes: 1. Based on average open customer accounts. 2. Including a co-branded card portfolio classified as assets held for sale. Please refer to the Financial review section in the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2024 for a comparative discussion of the 2024 financial results compared to 2023. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Analysis of results by business (continued) ## Head Office | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Income statement information | | | | | Net interest income | 415 | 646 | 353 | | Net fee, commission and other income | (163) | (352) | 157 | | Total income | 252 | 294 | 510 | | Operating costs | (747) | (836) | (1,352) | | UK regulatory levies | (8) | (9) | (14) | | Litigation and conduct | (257) | (134) | (48) | | Total operating expenses | (1,012) | (979) | (1,414) | | Other net income/ (expenses) | 23 | 37 | (6) | | Loss before impairment | (737) | (648) | (910) | | Credit impairment charges | (11) | (119) | (60) | | Loss before tax | (748) | (767) | (970) | | Attributable loss | (689) | (742) | (774) | | Performance measures | | | | | Average allocated equity | £9.3bn | £6.5bn | £5.0bn | | Average allocated tangible equity | £5.7bn | £2.9bn | £1.1bn | | Key facts | | | | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 61,600 | 61,800 | 74,000 | | Balance sheet information | | | | | Risk weighted assets | £12.3bn | £16.2bn | £19.0bn | ## 2025 compared to 2024 - Loss before tax was £748m (FY24: £767m) - Total income decreased to £252m (FY24: £294m), primarily from the impact of the disposal of the German consumer finance business in Q125 and a fair value write-down of a legacy portfolio, partially offset by the non-recurrence of the prior year loss on sale of the performing Italian retail mortgage portfolio - Total operating expenses increased to £1,012m (FY24: £979m), primarily driven by higher litigation and conduct charges including the £235m charge for motor finance redress in FY25 (FY24: £90m) and the expense for the employee share grant announced at FY24 Results, partially offset by the impact of the disposal of the German consumer finance business - Credit impairment charges decreased to £11m (FY24: £119m), driven by the disposal of the German consumer finance business and non-repeat of the prior year loss on sale of the non-performing Italian retail mortgage portfolio - RWAs decreased to £12.3bn (December 2024: £16.2bn), driven by the disposal of the German consumer finance business and the disposal of Barclays' joint venture interest in Entercard Please refer to the Financial review section in the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2024 for a comparative discussion of the 2024 financial results compared to 2023. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 330 # Non-IFRS performance measures The Group’s management believes that the non-IFRS performance measures included in this document provide valuable information to the readers of the financial statements as they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the businesses’ performance between financial periods, and provide more detail concerning the elements of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of the Group. They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by management. However, any non-IFRS performance measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 331 # Non-IFRS performance measures (continued) ## Margins analysis | For the year ended 31 December | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | 2023 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Net interest income | Average customer assets | Net interest margin | Net interest income | Average customer assets | Net interest margin | Net interest income | Average customer assets | Net interest margin | | | £m | £m | % | £m | £m | % | £m | £m | % | | Barclays UK | 7,653 | 210,925 | 3.63 | 6,627 | 201,152 | 3.29 | 6,431 | 205,667 | 3.13 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 1,480 | 26,142 | 5.66 | 1,206 | 22,776 | 5.30 | 1,160 | 23,207 | 5.00 | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | 799 | 14,827 | 5.39 | 767 | 13,983 | 5.49 | 768 | 13,935 | 5.51 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank¹ | 2,820 | 25,313 | 11.14 | 2,659 | 24,978 | 10.65 | 2,604 | 23,999 | 10.85 | | Group excluding IB and Head Office¹ | 12,752 | 277,207 | 4.60 | 11,259 | 262,889 | 4.28 | 10,963 | 266,808 | 4.11 | | Barclays Investment Bank | 1,334 | | | 1,031 | | | 1,393 | | | | Head Office | 415 | | | 646 | | | 353 | | | | Barclays Group Net interest income | 14,501 | | | 12,936 | | | 12,709 | | | Note: 1 Includes average customer assets balances classified as held for sale. The Group excluding IB and Head Office Net interest margin increased by 32 bps from 4.28% to 4.60% in 2025, due to higher structural hedge income, partially offset by adverse product dynamics in deposits. ## Structural hedge The Group employs a structural hedge programme designed to stabilise NIM on fixed rate non-maturity balance sheet items that are behaviourally stable. As interest rates move, such balances would otherwise drive material income volatility where there is a re-pricing mismatch with floating rate assets. The structural hedge predominantly covers non-interest-bearing current accounts and the fixed portion of instant access savings accounts as well as equity, which are invested into either floating rate customer assets or balances at central banks, creating an exposure to changes in interest rates. The structural hedge is executed via a portfolio of receive-fixed, pay variable interest rate swaps, with an amortising structure so that a small portion matures and is reinvested each month at prevailing market rates. The pay-floating leg of the interest rate swaps nets down a proportion of the receive-floating income from the customer assets, leaving a receive-fixed income stream from the structural hedge. The purpose of the structural hedge is to smooth the Group NII through time. The floating leg of the swap will re-price immediately, whereas the fixed rate yield on the portfolio reprices gradually, as a portion of the swap portfolio matures and the roll is re-invested onto new market rates. When interest rates are higher than our structural hedge yield, the pay-floating rate will typically be higher than our average receive-fixed rate. In this scenario, when viewed in isolation, the structural hedge will be a net drag to Group NII. When floating rates are lower than our structural hedge yield, the hedge in isolation will be a net benefit. Since the receive-fixed swaps are booked for a specific term, an element of NII is 'locked in'. The income stabilising feature of the structural hedge provides greater net interest income certainty through the interest rate cycle. The structural hedge is one component of a larger portfolio of interest rate risk management activities that includes non-structural hedging (e.g. pay-fixed and receive-variable flows for asset hedging), and other offsetting flows. The net risk of these positions is executed externally through interest rate swaps and managed for accounting risk (i.e. income volatility arising from the accounting mismatch of swaps at fair value through profit and loss and underlying hedged items at amortised cost) within the cash flow hedging reserve¹. Overall the Group has external derivatives designated as cash flow hedges that hedge interest rate risk with a notional £114.6bn (December 2024: £105.6bn) which reflects the structural hedge notional of £236.1bn (December 2024: £232.3bn) netted with non-structural hedging positions of £121.5bn (December 2024: £126.7bn). The majority of these interest rate swaps are cleared with Central Clearing Counterparties and margined daily. Economic risk management objectives and strategies have remained consistent. The stability of the hedgeable balances through 2025 have supported the full reinvestment of maturing hedges, increasing the notional by £4bn, and an increase in the average hedge duration from c.3 to c.3.5 years, which further increase the stability of income. Cash flow hedges on the net externalised risk position have likewise been adjusted through designation/de-designation activity throughout the year, with associated reserve amounts recycled back to the income statement over the life of the respective designations. Gross structural hedge contributions were £5,923m (2024: £4,708m). Gross structural hedge contributions represent the absolute interest income earned on the fixed legs of the swaps in the structural hedge as the floating leg is offset by the base rate funding of the deposits. Note: 1 Structural hedging derivatives are a component of the net externalised interest rate risk. The net externalised risk position is managed within the cash flow hedging reserve. Note 14 includes details of the net externalised interest rate risk position in "Interest Rate derivatives designated as cash flow hedges" on page 372 and cash flow hedge of interest rate risk on page 377. --- Non-IFRS performance measures (continued) Returns | Return on average tangible equity | For the year ended 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | Attributable profit/(loss) | 2,443 | 648 | 291 | 3,092 | 390 | (689) | 6,175 | | Average equity | £15.8bn | £3.4bn | £1.2bn | £29.1bn | £4.1bn | £9.3bn | £62.9bn | | Average goodwill and intangibles | £(4.0)bn | — | £(0.1)bn | — | £(0.6)bn | £(3.6)bn | £(8.3)bn | | Average tangible equity | £11.8bn | £3.4bn | £1.1bn | £29.1bn | £3.5bn | £5.7bn | £54.6bn | | Return on average tangible equity | 20.7% | 18.9% | 26.3% | 10.6% | 11.0% | n/m | 11.3% | Barclays Group average tangible shareholder's equity based on a CET1 ratio of 13.5% was £53.6bn | Return on average tangible equity | For the year ended 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | Attributable profit/(loss) | 2,465 | 490 | 288 | 2,513 | 302 | (742) | 5,316 | | Average equity | £14.6bn | £3.1bn | £1.1bn | £29.7bn | £3.7bn | £6.5bn | £58.7bn | | Average goodwill and intangibles | £(3.9)bn | — | £(0.1)bn | — | £(0.4)bn | £(3.6)bn | £(8.0)bn | | Average tangible equity | £10.7bn | £3.1bn | £1.0bn | £29.7bn | £3.3bn | £2.9bn | £50.7bn | | Return on average tangible equity | 23.1% | 16.0% | 28.1% | 8.5% | 9.1% | n/m | 10.5% | | Return on average tangible equity | For the year ended 31 December 2023 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | Attributable profit/(loss) | 1,962 | 584 | 330 | 2,041 | 131 | (774) | 4,274 | | Average equity | £14.0bn | £2.9bn | £1.1bn | £29.0bn | £3.8bn | £5.0bn | £55.8bn | | Average goodwill and intangibles | £(3.8)bn | — | £(0.1)bn | — | £(0.6)bn | £(3.9)bn | £(8.4)bn | | Average tangible equity | £10.2bn | £2.9bn | £1.0bn | £29.0bn | £3.2bn | £1.1bn | £47.4bn | | Return on average tangible equity | 19.2% | 20.5% | 32.7% | 7.0% | 4.1% | n/m | 9.0% | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 333 # Non-IFRS performance measures (continued) ## Reconciliation of total operating expenses to operating costs | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Total operating expenses | (17,745) | (16,735) | (16,931) | | UK regulatory levies | (313) | (320) | (180) | | Litigation and conduct | (392) | (220) | (37) | | Operating costs | (17,040) | (16,195) | (16,714) | ## Reconciliation of group net interest income excluding IB and Head Office | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Total Barclays Group net interest income | 14,501 | 12,936 | 12,709 | | Barclays Investment Bank | 1,334 | 1,031 | 1,393 | | Head Office | 415 | 646 | 353 | | Group NII excluding IB and Head Office | 12,752 | 11,259 | 10,963 | ## Tangible net asset value per share | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Total equity excluding non-controlling interests | 77,784 | 71,821 | 71,204 | | Other equity instruments | (12,725) | (12,075) | (13,259) | | Shareholders’ equity attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent | 65,059 | 59,746 | 57,945 | | Goodwill and intangibles | (8,284) | (8,275) | (7,794) | | Tangible shareholders’ equity attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent | 56,775 | 51,471 | 50,151 | | Shares in issue¹ | 13,867m | 14,420m | 15,155m | | Net asset value per share | 469p | 414p | 382p | | Tangible net asset value per share | 409p | 357p | 331p | Note: 1 The number of shares of 13,867m as at 31 December 2025 is different from the 13,865m quoted in the 2 January 2026 announcement entitled “Total Voting Rights” because the share buyback transaction executed on 30 December 2025 did not settle until 2 January 2026. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Non-IFRS performance measures (continued) Return on equity | | Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent £m | Average equity bn | Return on average equity % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | For the year ended 31 December 2025 | | | | | Barclays UK | 2,443 | 15.8 | 15.5 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 648 | 3.4 | 18.9 | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | 291 | 1.2 | 24.3 | | Barclays Investment Bank | 3,092 | 29.1 | 10.6 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 390 | 4.1 | 9.5 | | Head Office | (689) | 9.3 | n/m | | Barclays Group | 6,175 | 62.9 | 9.8 | | For the year ended 31 December 2024 | | | | | Barclays UK | 2,465 | 14.6 | 16.9 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 490 | 3.1 | 16.0 | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | 288 | 1.1 | 25.7 | | Barclays Investment Bank | 2,513 | 29.7 | 8.5 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 302 | 3.7 | 8.1 | | Head Office | (742) | 6.5 | n/m | | Barclays Group | 5,316 | 58.7 | 9.1 | | For the year ended 31 December 2023 | | | | | Barclays UK | 1,962 | 14.0 | 14.0 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | 584 | 2.9 | 20.5 | | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | 330 | 1.1 | 29.9 | | Barclays Investment Bank | 2,041 | 29.0 | 7.0 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 131 | 3.8 | 3.4 | | Head Office | (774) | 5.0 | n/m | | Barclays Group | 4,274 | 55.8 | 7.6 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 335 # Appendix: Loan loss rate Calculations | Loan loss rate | For the year ended 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Credit impairment (charges)/ releases | (413) | (37) | 8 | (305) | (1,521) | (11) | (2,279) | | Gross loans and advances held at amortised cost (including portfolios reclassified as held for sale)1 | £231.9bn | £30.2bn | £15.1bn | £131.0bn | £30.6bn | £2.5bn | £441.3bn | | Loan loss rate (bps) | 18 | 12 | (5) | 23 | 496 | n/m | 52 | | Loan loss rate | For the year ended 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Credit impairment charges | (365) | (76) | (6) | (123) | (1,293) | (119) | (1,982) | | Gross loans and advances held at amortised cost (including portfolios reclassified as held for sale)1 | £227.5bn | £25.8bn | £14.7bn | £124.9bn | £30.0bn | £6.7bn | £429.6bn | | Loan loss rate (bps) | 16 | 29 | 4 | 10 | 431 | n/m | 46 | | Loan loss rate | For the year ended 31 December 2023 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Credit impairment (charges)/ releases | (304) | 27 | (4) | (102) | (1,438) | (60) | (1,881) | | Gross loans and advances held at amortised cost (including portfolios reclassified as held for sale)1 | £223.3bn | £26.6bn | £13.8bn | £109.4bn | £28.0bn | £8.2bn | £409.3bn | | Loan loss rate (bps) | 14 | (10) | 3 | 9 | 514 | n/m | 46 | Note: 1 Includes gross loans and advances to customers and banks, in addition to debt securities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 336 # Appendix: Income over RWAs Calculations Income over RWAs | | Year ended 31.12.25 | Year ended 31.12.24 | Year ended 31.12.23 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Barclays Investment Bank | £m | £m | £m | | Income | 13,055 | 11,805 | 11,035 | | Average RWAs | £198.6bn | £202.7bn | £199.2bn | | Income over average RWAs | 6.6 % | 5.8 % | 5.5 % | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Financial statements Detailed analysis of our statutory accounts, independently audited and providing in-depth disclosure on the financial performance of the Group. | | | Page | Note | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Consolidated financial statements | Independent Auditor’s Report (PCAOB ID: 1118) | 339 | | | | Consolidated income statement | 342 | | | | Consolidated statement of comprehensive income | 343 | | | | Consolidated balance sheet | 344 | | | | Consolidated statement of changes in equity | 345 | | | | Consolidated cash flow statement | 347 | | | | Parent company accounts | 348 | | | Notes to the financial statements | Material accounting policies | 351 | 1 | | Financial performance and returns | Segmental reporting | 355 | 2 | | | Net interest income | 357 | 3 | | | Net fee and commission income | 358 | 4 | | | Net trading income | 360 | 5 | | | Net investment income/(expense) | 360 | 6 | | | Infrastructure, administrative and general expenses | 360 | 7 | | | Credit impairment charges | 361 | 8 | | | Tax | 365 | 9 | | | Earnings per share | 369 | 10 | | | Dividends on ordinary shares | 369 | 11 | | Assets and liabilities held at fair value | Trading portfolio | 370 | 12 | | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 370 | 13 | | | Derivative financial instruments | 371 | 14 | | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 378 | 15 | | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 378 | 16 | | Assets at amortised cost and other investments | Fair value of financial instruments | 379 | 17 | | | Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities | 391 | 18 | | | Property, plant and equipment | 392 | 19 | | | Leases | 394 | 20 | | | Goodwill and intangible assets | 396 | 21 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 338 # Financial statements (continued) | | | Page | Note | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings | Other liabilities | 400 | 22 | | | Provisions | 400 | 23 | | | Contingent liabilities and commitments | 402 | 24 | | | Legal, competition and regulatory matters | 402 | 25 | | Capital instruments, equity and reserves | Subordinated liabilities | 407 | 26 | | | Ordinary shares, share premium and other equity | 409 | 27 | | | Reserves | 410 | 28 | | | Non-controlling interests | 411 | 29 | | Employee benefits | Staff costs | 412 | 30 | | | Share-based payments | 413 | 31 | | | Pensions and post-retirement benefits | 415 | 32 | | Scope of consolidation | Principal subsidiaries | 421 | 33 | | | Structured entities | 422 | 34 | | | Investments in associates and joint ventures | 425 | 35 | | | Securitisations | 426 | 36 | | | Assets pledged, collateral received and assets transferred | 428 | 37 | | Other disclosure matters | Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration | 430 | 38 | | | Auditor’s remuneration | 432 | 39 | | | Assets and liabilities included in disposal group classified as held for sale | 432 | 40 | | | Barclays PLC (the Parent company) | 433 | 41 | | | Related undertakings | 434 | 42 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 339 # Independent Auditor's Report ## Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm To the Shareholders and Board of Directors Barclays PLC: ## Opinions on the Consolidated Financial Statements and Internal Control Over Financial Reporting We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Barclays PLC and subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2025 and 2024, the related consolidated income statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated statements of changes in equity, and consolidated cash flow statements for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2025, and the related notes and specific disclosures described in Note 1 of the consolidated financial statements as being part of the consolidated financial statements (collectively, the consolidated financial statements). We also have audited the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2025, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2025 and 2024, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2025, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards, as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2025 based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. ## Basis for Opinions The Company's management is responsible for these consolidated financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management's report on internal control over financial reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's consolidated financial statements and an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB. We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud, and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the consolidated financial statements included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions. ## Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting A company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements. Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate. ## Critical Audit Matters The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the consolidated financial statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that: (1) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the consolidated financial statements and (2) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgements. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the consolidated financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate. --- Independent Auditor's Report (continued) ### Impairment allowance for loans and advances at amortized cost, including off-balance sheet elements of the allowance As discussed in note 8 to the consolidated financial statements, and in the Credit risk management (audited) disclosures on pages 178 to 227, the Company's impairment allowance for loans and advances, including off-balance sheet elements at amortised cost was £5.7bn as at December 31, 2025. We identified the assessment of impairment allowance for loans and advances at amortised cost, including off balance sheet elements as a critical audit matter. A high degree of audit effort, including specialised skills and knowledge was required because it involved significant measurement uncertainty. Complex and subjective auditor judgement was required to assess the following: Model estimations -- Complex and subjective auditor judgement was applied in assessing the Company's modelled estimations of Expected Credit Losses (“ECL”) due to the inherently judgemental nature of the underlying modelling techniques and assumptions, including the use of either the IFRS 9 Probability of Default (“PD”) models, the Loss Given Default (“LGD”) models and the Exposure at Default (“EAD”) models or an appropriate proxy. Certain IFRS 9 models and assumptions are the key drivers of complexity and uncertainty, and minor changes to these could have a significant effect on the Company's calculation of the ECL estimate.Economic scenarios -- Complex and subjective auditor judgement was applied in assessing the forward-looking economic scenarios used by the Company as an input to calculate ECL, the probability weightings applied to them and the complexity of models used to derive the probability weightings.Qualitative adjustments -- Complex and subjective auditor judgement was applied in assessing certain qualitative adjustments to the model-driven impairment allowance due to the inherent estimation uncertainty associated with these adjustments. The following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter. - We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over the Company's process for estimating the impairment allowance for loans and advances at amortised cost, including off-balance sheet elements. This included controls relating to (1) model validation, implementation and monitoring, (2) the authorisation and calculation of qualitative adjustments and management overlays, (3) the selection and implementation of economic variables and the controls over the economic scenario selection and probabilities, and (4) credit reviews that determine customer risk ratings used in the models for a population of wholesale customers. - We involved credit risk modelling professionals with specialised skills and knowledge, who assisted in the following: - Evaluating the Company's impairment methodologies for compliance with IFRS 9; - Inspecting model code for the calculation of certain components of the ECL model to assess its consistency with the Company's modelling methodology; - Evaluating model changes (including the updated model code) for a selection of models which were changed or updated during the year as to whether they were appropriate by assessing the updated model methodology against the applicable accounting standard; - Reperforming the calculation of certain adjustments to assess consistency with the qualitative adjustment methodologies; - Evaluating the model output for a selection of models by inspecting the corresponding model functionality and independently implementing the model by rebuilding the model code and comparing our independent output with management's output; - Assessing the appropriateness of certain assumptions by inspecting and evaluating management's documented methodology for how the assumption is determined; and - Reperforming and assessing, for a selection of models, the reasonableness of the model predictions by comparing them against actual results and evaluating the resulting differences. - In addition, we involved economic professionals with specialised skills and knowledge, who assisted in: - Assessing the reasonableness of the Company's methodology and models used for determining the economic scenarios used and the probability weightings applied to them; - Assessing key economic variables which included comparing a selection of economic variables to external sources; and - Assessing the overall reasonableness of the economic forecasts by comparing the Company's forecasts to our own modelled forecasts. ### Valuation of certain level 3 and level 2 financial instruments recorded at fair value As discussed in Note 17 to the Company's consolidated financial statements, the balances of financial assets and liabilities recorded at fair value as at December 31, 2025 were £704bn and £593bn, respectively. This includes Level 3 assets (£24bn) and liabilities (£8bn) respectively. The Company has Level 2 financial assets at fair value of £512bn and financial liabilities at fair value of £540bn . The Company is required to apply valuation techniques which often involve the exercise of significant judgement and the use of assumptions and valuation models over Level 3 and certain Level 2 financial assets and liabilities. We identified the valuation of level 3 and certain level 2 financial instruments recorded at fair value as a critical audit matter. This is because there was significant measurement uncertainty associated with the fair value estimates of these instruments and subjective auditor judgement, including specialised skills and knowledge, was required to evaluate pricing data inputs, valuation models and fair value adjustments ("FVA"), including portfolio-level FVAs related to credit, collateralisation and funding (commonly referred to as "XVAs"). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 341 # Independent Auditor's Report (continued) The following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter: - We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over the Company’s process to measure fair value of these portfolios. This included controls related to (1) the independent price verification (IPV) of certain pricing data inputs, (2) the determination or calculation of FVAs, including exit price adjustments (to mark the portfolio to bid or offer prices), model shortcoming reserves to address model limitations and XVAs, and (3) the validation, completeness, implementation and usage of valuation models including assessment of the impact of model limitations and assumptions. - For a selection of collateral disputes identified by management, we challenged management’s valuation where significant fair value differences were observable through comparison with the market participant’s valuation on the other side of the trade. We also utilised collateral dispute data to identify fair value financial instruments with significant fair value differences against market counterparties and selected these to independently reprice. - We performed a retrospective review by inspecting significant gains and losses on a selection of new fair value financial instruments, historical exit prices on similar instruments and restructurings throughout the audit period and evaluated whether these data points indicated elements of fair value not incorporated into the current valuation methodologies. We also inspected movements in unobservable inputs throughout the period to challenge whether any gain or loss generated was appropriate. - We involved valuation professionals with specialised skills and knowledge, who assisted in the following: - Independently re-pricing a selection of fair value financial instruments and challenging management on the valuations where they were outside our tolerance; and - Challenging the appropriateness of significant models and methodologies used in calculating fair values, risk exposures and in calculating FVAs and XVAs, including comparison to industry practice. - We inspected trading revenue arising on level 3 positions to assess whether material gains or losses generated were in line with the accounting standards. # UK Pension Scheme – Defined Benefit Obligation (DBO) assumptions As discussed in Note 32 to the consolidated financial statements, the total fair value of the Company’s defined benefit obligation as of December 31, 2025 was £19.3bn, of which £18.4bn was related to the UK Retirement Fund (UKRF). The determination of the Company’s defined benefit pension obligation with respect to these plans is dependent on certain actuarial assumptions, including the discount rate, inflation rate (or retail price index) and mortality assumptions. We identified the valuation of the defined benefit obligation in respect of UKRF as a critical audit matter. Subjective and complex auditor judgement, including specialized skills and knowledge, was required in evaluating the discount rates, retail price index ('RPI') and mortality assumptions used, as small changes would have a significant impact on the measurement of the defined benefit obligation. The following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter: - We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over the Company’s defined benefit obligation process, this included controls related to management’s review of IAS 19 assumptions including discount rate, RPI and mortality assumptions, and; - We involved actuarial professionals with specialised skills and knowledge who assisted in assessing the Company’s discount rate, RPI and mortality assumptions by evaluating those assumptions against expectations derived from external sources. /s/ KPMG LLP We have served as the Company’s auditor since 2017. London, United Kingdom February 9, 2026 --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Consolidated financial statements ## Consolidated income statement | For the year ended 31 December | Notes | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | £m | £m | £m | | Interest and similar income | 3 | 36,189 | 38,326 | 35,075 | | Interest and similar expense | 3 | (21,688) | (25,390) | (22,366) | | Net interest income | | 14,501 | 12,936 | 12,709 | | Fee and commission income | 4 | 11,282 | 10,847 | 10,121 | | Fee and commission expense | 4 | (3,784) | (3,600) | (3,592) | | Net fee and commission income | | 7,498 | 7,247 | 6,529 | | Net trading income | 5 | 7,042 | 5,768 | 5,945 | | Net investment income | 6 | 10 | 216 | 61 | | Gain on acquisition | | — | 556 | — | | Other income | | 89 | 65 | 134 | | Total income | | 29,140 | 26,788 | 25,378 | | Staff costs | 30 | (10,607) | (9,876) | (10,017) | | Infrastructure costs | 7 | (3,704) | (3,549) | (4,095) | | Administration and general expenses | 7 | (2,729) | (2,770) | (2,602) | | UK regulatory levies | | (313) | (320) | (180) | | Litigation and conduct | | (392) | (220) | (37) | | Operating expenses | | (17,745) | (16,735) | (16,931) | | Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures | | 66 | 37 | (9) | | Loss on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures | | (43) | — | — | | Profit before impairment | | 11,418 | 10,090 | 8,438 | | Credit impairment charges | 8 | (2,279) | (1,982) | (1,881) | | Profit before tax | | 9,139 | 8,108 | 6,557 | | Taxation | 9 | (1,926) | (1,752) | (1,234) | | Profit after tax | | 7,213 | 6,356 | 5,323 | | Attributable to: | | | | | | Equity holders of the parent | | 6,175 | 5,316 | 4,274 | | Other equity instrument holders | | 997 | 991 | 985 | | Total equity holders of the parent | | 7,172 | 6,307 | 5,259 | | Non-controlling interests | 29 | 41 | 49 | 64 | | Profit after tax | | 7,213 | 6,356 | 5,323 | | Earnings per share | | p | p | p | | Basic earnings per ordinary share | 10 | 43.8 | 36.0 | 27.7 | | Diluted earnings per share | 10 | 42.3 | 34.8 | 26.9 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Consolidated financial statements (continued) ## Consolidated statement of comprehensive income | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | For the year ended 31 December | £m | £m | £m | | Profit after tax | 7,213 | 6,356 | 5,323 | | Other comprehensive income/(loss) that may be recycled to profit or loss: | | | | | Currency translation reserve | | | | | Currency translation differences¹ | (1,131) | (59) | (1,110) | | Tax | (1) | 13 | 9 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve movements relating to debt securities | | | | | Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value | 1,024 | (863) | 1,486 | | Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit on disposal | 191 | (164) | (26) | | Net (gain)/losses relating to (releases of) impairment | (3) | 1 | (1) | | Net (losses)/gains due to fair value hedging | (142) | 325 | (1,184) | | Tax | (297) | 194 | (78) | | Cash flow hedging reserve | | | | | Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value | 3,675 | (784) | 4,447 | | Net (gains)/losses transferred to net profit | (522) | 1,842 | 423 | | Tax | (889) | (281) | (1,342) | | Other comprehensive income that may be recycled to profit or loss | 1,905 | 224 | 2,624 | | Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss: | | | | | Retirement benefit remeasurements | (10) | (427) | (1,193) | | Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve movements relating to equity instruments | — | — | (3) | | Own credit | 89 | (1,130) | (983) | | Tax | (30) | 432 | 611 | | Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss | 49 | (1,125) | (1,568) | | Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the year | 1,954 | (901) | 1,056 | | Total comprehensive income for the year | 9,167 | 5,455 | 6,379 | | Attributable to: | | | | | Equity holders of the parent | 9,126 | 5,406 | 6,315 | | Non-controlling interests | 41 | 49 | 64 | | Total comprehensive income for the year | 9,167 | 5,455 | 6,379 | Note: 1 Includes £44m loss (2024: £1m loss; 2023: £0m gain) on recycling of currency translation differences to net profit. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Consolidated financial statements (continued) ## Consolidated balance sheet | As at 31 December | Notes | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | £m | £m | | Assets | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | | 229,752 | 210,184 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | | 130,532 | 119,843 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | | 68,475 | 68,210 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks | | 8,638 | 8,327 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to customers | | 352,885 | 337,946 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost | | 17,622 | 4,734 | | Trading portfolio assets | 12 | 190,061 | 166,453 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 13 | 186,857 | 193,734 | | Derivative financial instruments | 14 | 252,459 | 293,530 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 15 | 74,394 | 78,059 | | Investments in associates and joint ventures | 35 | 739 | 891 | | Goodwill and intangible assets | 21 | 8,284 | 8,275 | | Property, plant and equipment | 19 | 3,720 | 3,604 | | Current tax assets | | 276 | 155 | | Deferred tax assets | 9 | 4,992 | 6,321 | | Retirement benefit assets | 32 | 3,308 | 3,263 | | Assets included in disposal group classified as held for sale | 40 | 5,932 | 9,854 | | Other assets | | 5,239 | 4,819 | | Total assets | | 1,544,165 | 1,518,202 | | Liabilities | | | | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks | | 20,413 | 13,203 | | Deposits at amortised cost from customers | | 565,200 | 547,460 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | | 117,583 | 106,229 | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing at amortised cost | | 25,170 | 39,415 | | Debt securities in issue | | 119,033 | 92,402 | | Subordinated liabilities | 26 | 12,954 | 11,921 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | 12 | 57,737 | 56,908 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 16 | 294,108 | 282,224 | | Derivative financial instruments | 14 | 240,808 | 279,415 | | Current tax liabilities | | 868 | 566 | | Deferred tax liabilities | 9 | 13 | 18 | | Retirement benefit liabilities | 32 | 265 | 240 | | Provisions | 23 | 1,664 | 1,383 | | Liabilities included in disposal group classified as held for sale | 40 | — | 3,726 | | Other liabilities | 22 | 10,113 | 10,611 | | Total liabilities | | 1,465,929 | 1,445,721 | | Equity | | | | | Called up share capital and share premium | 27 | 4,178 | 4,186 | | Other equity instruments | 27 | 12,725 | 12,075 | | Other reserves | 28 | 1,628 | (468) | | Retained earnings | | 59,253 | 56,028 | | Total equity excluding non-controlling interests | | 77,784 | 71,821 | | Non-controlling interests | 29 | 452 | 660 | | Total equity | | 78,236 | 72,481 | | Total liabilities and equity | | 1,544,165 | 1,518,202 | The Board of Directors approved the financial statements on pages 342 to 437 on 9 February 2026. Nigel Higgins Group Chairman C.S. Venkatakrishnan Group Chief Executive Anna Cross Group Finance Director --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Consolidated financial statements (continued) ## Consolidated statement of changes in equity | | Called up share capital and share premium^{1} | Other equity instruments^{1} | Other reserves^{2} | Retained earnings | Total equity excluding non-controlling interests | Non-controlling interests | Total equity | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Balance as at 1 January 2025 | 4,186 | 12,075 | (468) | 56,028 | 71,821 | 660 | 72,481 | | Profit after tax | — | 997 | — | 6,175 | 7,172 | 41 | 7,213 | | Currency translation movements | — | — | (1,132) | — | (1,132) | — | (1,132) | | Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve | — | — | 773 | — | 773 | — | 773 | | Cash flow hedges | — | — | 2,264 | — | 2,264 | — | 2,264 | | Retirement benefit remeasurements | — | — | — | (14) | (14) | — | (14) | | Own credit reserve | — | — | 63 | — | 63 | — | 63 | | Total comprehensive income for the year | — | 997 | 1,968 | 6,161 | 9,126 | 41 | 9,167 | | Employee share schemes and hedging thereof | 150 | — | — | 1,127 | 1,277 | — | 1,277 | | Issue and redemption of other equity instruments | — | 651 | — | (4) | 647 | — | 647 | | Other equity instruments coupons paid | — | (997) | — | — | (997) | — | (997) | | Redemption of preference shares | — | — | — | (59) | (59) | (211) | (270) | | Movement in treasury shares^{3} | — | — | (379) | 71 | (308) | — | (308) | | Vesting of shares under employee share schemes | — | — | 343 | (625) | (282) | — | (282) | | Dividends paid | — | — | — | (1,213) | (1,213) | (41) | (1,254) | | Repurchase of shares | (158) | — | 158 | (2,241) | (2,241) | — | (2,241) | | Other reserve movements | — | (1) | 6 | 8 | 13 | 3 | 16 | | Balance as at 31 December 2025 | 4,178 | 12,725 | 1,628 | 59,253 | 77,784 | 452 | 78,236 | | Balance as at 1 January 2024 | 4,288 | 13,259 | (77) | 53,734 | 71,204 | 660 | 71,864 | | Profit after tax | — | 991 | — | 5,316 | 6,307 | 49 | 6,356 | | Currency translation movements | — | — | (46) | — | (46) | — | (46) | | Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve | — | — | (507) | — | (507) | — | (507) | | Cash flow hedges | — | — | 777 | — | 777 | — | 777 | | Retirement benefit remeasurements | — | — | — | (303) | (303) | — | (303) | | Own credit reserve | — | — | (822) | — | (822) | — | (822) | | Total comprehensive income for the year | — | 991 | (598) | 5,013 | 5,406 | 49 | 5,455 | | Employee share schemes and hedging thereof | 103 | — | — | 874 | 977 | — | 977 | | Issue and redemption of other equity instruments | — | (1,155) | — | (96) | (1,251) | — | (1,251) | | Other equity instruments coupons paid | — | (991) | — | — | (991) | — | (991) | | Movement in treasury shares | — | — | (269) | — | (269) | — | (269) | | Vesting of shares under employee share schemes | — | — | 268 | (508) | (240) | — | (240) | | Dividends paid | — | — | — | (1,221) | (1,221) | (49) | (1,270) | | Repurchase of shares | (205) | — | 205 | (1,760) | (1,760) | — | (1,760) | | Other reserve movements | — | (29) | 3 | (8) | (34) | — | (34) | | Balance as at 31 December 2024 | 4,186 | 12,075 | (468) | 56,028 | 71,821 | 660 | 72,481 | Notes: 1. For further details refer to Note 27. 2. For further details refer to Note 28. 3. The movement in treasury shares of £71m reflects the difference between the release price and the purchase price of the treasury shares transferred to retained earnings. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Consolidated financial statements (continued) | | Called up share capital and share premium | Other equity instruments | Other reserves | Retained earnings | Total equity excluding non-controlling interests | Non-controlling interests | Total equity | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Balance as at 1 January 2023 | 4,373 | 13,284 | (2,192) | 52,827 | 68,292 | 968 | 69,260 | | Profit after tax | — | 985 | — | 4,274 | 5,259 | 64 | 5,323 | | Currency translation movements | — | — | (1,101) | — | (1,101) | — | (1,101) | | Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve | — | — | 194 | — | 194 | — | 194 | | Cash flow hedges | — | — | 3,528 | — | 3,528 | — | 3,528 | | Retirement benefit remeasurements | — | — | — | (855) | (855) | — | (855) | | Own credit reserve | — | — | (710) | — | (710) | — | (710) | | Total comprehensive income for the year | — | 985 | 1,911 | 3,419 | 6,315 | 64 | 6,379 | | Employee share schemes and hedging thereof | 124 | — | — | 497 | 621 | — | 621 | | Issue and exchange of other equity instruments | — | (30) | — | (38) | (68) | (312) | (380) | | Other equity instruments coupons paid | — | (985) | — | — | (985) | — | (985) | | Movement in treasury shares | — | — | (285) | — | (285) | — | (285) | | Vesting of shares under employee share schemes | — | — | 277 | (506) | (229) | — | (229) | | Dividends paid | — | — | — | (1,210) | (1,210) | (64) | (1,274) | | Repurchase of shares | (209) | — | 209 | (1,257) | (1,257) | — | (1,257) | | Other reserve movements | — | 5 | 3 | 2 | 10 | 4 | 14 | | Balance as at 31 December 2023 | 4,288 | 13,259 | (77) | 53,734 | 71,204 | 660 | 71,864 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 347 # Consolidated financial statements (continued) ## Consolidated cash flow statement | For the year ended 31 December | Notes | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | £m | £m | £m | | Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities: | | | | | | Profit before tax | | 9,139 | 8,108 | 6,557 | | Adjustment for non-cash items: | | | | | | Credit impairment charges | | 2,279 | 1,982 | 1,881 | | Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and intangibles | | 1,776 | 1,734 | 2,147 | | Other provisions, including pensions | | 760 | 500 | 482 | | Net loss on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment | | 52 | 20 | 11 | | Other non-cash movements, including exchange rate movements | | 6,187 | 2,384 | 10,729 | | Changes in operating assets and liabilities | | | | | | Net decrease in cash collateral and settlement balances | | 1,390 | 2,391 | 1,165 | | Net (increase)/decrease in loans and advances at amortised cost | | (17,403) | 284 | 10,947 | | Net increase in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | | (12,888) | (2,140) | (1,818) | | Net increase/(decrease) in deposits at amortised cost | | 24,950 | 14,952 | (6,958) | | Net increase/(decrease) in debt securities in issue | | 20,925 | (9,978) | (19,640) | | Net (decrease)/increase in repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing | | (14,245) | (2,186) | 14,549 | | Net decrease/(increase) in derivative financial instruments | | 2,464 | (7,303) | 5,968 | | Net (increase)/decrease in trading portfolio assets | | (23,608) | 8,152 | (40,792) | | Net increase/(decrease) in trading portfolio liabilities | | 829 | (1,761) | (14,255) | | Net increase/(decrease) in financial assets and liabilities at fair value through the income statement | | 18,761 | (2,408) | 32,819 | | Net increase in other assets | | (158) | (4,040) | (1,521) | | Net increase/(decrease) in other liabilities | | (1,078) | (2,295) | (2,362) | | Corporate income tax paid | | (1,393) | (1,283) | (836) | | Net cash from operating activities | | 18,739 | 7,113 | (927) | | Purchase of debt securities at amortised cost | | (19,215) | (28,945) | (19,977) | | Proceeds from redemption or sale of debt securities at amortised cost | | 17,889 | 17,505 | 7,332 | | Purchase of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | | (50,511) | (80,980) | (66,415) | | Proceeds from sale or redemption of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | | 55,057 | 73,819 | 59,756 | | Purchase of property, plant and equipment and investment in intangibles | | (1,859) | (1,574) | (1,718) | | Disposal/(Acquisition) of business | | — | (460) | (2,415) | | Other cash flows associated with investing activities² | | 234 | 2,749 | 23 | | Net cash from investing activities | | 1,595 | (17,886) | (23,414) | | Dividends paid and other coupon payments on equity instruments | | (2,251) | (2,261) | (2,259) | | Issuance of subordinated liabilities | 26 | 1,772 | 1,870 | 1,523 | | Redemption of subordinated liabilities | 26 | (727) | (476) | (2,239) | | Issue of shares and other equity instruments | | 3,869 | 1,684 | 3,251 | | Repurchase of shares and other equity instruments | | (5,644) | (4,525) | (4,750) | | Issuance of debt securities¹ | | 11,326 | 12,144 | 9,836 | | Redemption of debt securities¹ | | (5,459) | (7,143) | (6,252) | | Capital contribution | | (40) | — | — | | Net purchase of treasury shares | | (590) | (509) | (499) | | Net cash from financing activities | | 2,256 | 784 | (1,389) | | Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents | | (1,738) | (2,407) | (5,053) | | Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents | | 20,852 | (12,396) | (30,783) | | Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year | | 235,611 | 248,007 | 278,790 | | Cash and cash equivalents at end of year | | 256,463 | 235,611 | 248,007 | | Cash and cash equivalents comprise: | | | | | | Cash and balances at central banks | | 229,752 | 210,184 | 224,634 | | Loans and advances to banks with original maturity of three months or less | | 7,354 | 7,230 | 6,639 | | Cash collateral balances with central banks with original maturity of three months or less | | 17,375 | 16,650 | 15,450 | | Treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity of three months or less | | 1,982 | 1,547 | 1,284 | | Cash and cash equivalents at end of year | | 256,463 | 235,611 | 248,007 | Notes: 1. Issuance of debt securities and redemption of debt securities included in financing activities relate to instruments that qualify as eligible liabilities and satisfy regulatory requirements for MREL instruments that came into effect during 2019. Refer to Note 1, paragraph 4(v), for further details. 2. This primarily relates to the net proceeds from sale of Entercard for 2025 and Italian retail mortgage portfolio for 2024. Interest received was £35,835m (2024: £38,212m; 2023: £35,089m) and interest paid was £21,517m (2024: £25,287m; 2023: £20,303m). Dividends received were £0m (2024: £3m; 2023: £0m). The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities. These amounted to £3,007m (2024: £2,945m; 2023: £3,758m) and are included within the cash and cash equivalents. For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits and cash equivalents comprise highly liquid investments that are convertible into cash with an insignificant risk of changes in value with original maturities of three months or less. Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are not considered to be part of cash equivalents. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Parent company accounts Income statement and other comprehensive income | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | For the year ended 31 December | Notes | £m | £m | £m | | Dividend received from subsidiaries | 41 | 4,185 | 3,087 | 2,818 | | Net interest expense | | (28) | (15) | (11) | | Other income/(expense) | 41 | 714 | 1,183 | 1,174 | | Operating expenses | | (321) | (264) | (296) | | Profit before tax | | 4,550 | 3,991 | 3,685 | | Taxation | | 90 | 91 | 81 | | Profit after tax | | 4,640 | 4,082 | 3,766 | | Other comprehensive income | | — | — | — | | Total comprehensive income | | 4,640 | 4,082 | 3,766 | | Profit after tax attributable to: | | | | | | Ordinary equity holders | | 3,643 | 3,092 | 2,781 | | Other equity instrument holders | | 997 | 990 | 985 | | Profit after tax | | 4,640 | 4,082 | 3,766 | | Total comprehensive income attributable to: | | | | | | Ordinary equity holders | | 3,643 | 3,092 | 2,781 | | Other equity instrument holders | | 997 | 990 | 985 | | Total comprehensive income | | 4,640 | 4,082 | 3,766 | For the year ended 31 December 2025, profit after tax was £4,640m (2024: £4,082m, 2023: £3,766m) and total comprehensive income was £4,640m (2024: £4,082m, 2023: £3,766m). The Company has 64 members of staff (2024: 58, 2023: 61). Balance sheet | | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December | Notes | £m | £m | | Assets | | | | | Investment in subsidiaries | 41 | 63,907 | 63,315 | | Loans and advances to subsidiaries | 41 | 15,730 | 18,407 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 41 | 50,921 | 44,435 | | Derivative financial instruments | | 69 | 31 | | Other assets | | 468 | 441 | | Total assets | | 131,095 | 126,629 | | Liabilities | | | | | Deposits at amortised cost | | 543 | 542 | | Gross cash collateral and settlements liabilities | 41 | 9 | — | | Debt securities in issue | 41 | 14,476 | 16,337 | | Subordinated liabilities | 41 | 8,644 | 9,706 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 41 | 48,800 | 42,324 | | Derivative financial instruments | 41 | 535 | 654 | | Other liabilities | | 99 | 80 | | Total liabilities | | 73,106 | 69,643 | | Equity | | | | | Called up share capital and share premium | 41 | 4,178 | 4,186 | | Other equity instruments | 41 | 12,673 | 12,033 | | Other reserves | | 1,360 | 1,202 | | Retained earnings | | 39,778 | 39,565 | | Total equity | | 57,989 | 56,986 | | Total liabilities and equity | | 131,095 | 126,629 | The financial statements on pages 348 to 350 and the accompanying note on page 433 were approved by the Board of Directors on 9 February 2026 and signed on its behalf by: Nigel Higgins Group Chairman C.S.Venkatakrishnan Group Chief Executive Anna Cross Group Finance Director --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Parent company accounts (continued) Statement of changes in equity | | Called up share capital and share premium | Other equity instruments | Other reserves | Retained earnings | Total equity | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Balance as at 1 January 2025 | 4,186 | 12,033 | 1,202 | 39,565 | 56,986 | | Profit after tax and other comprehensive income | — | 997 | — | 3,643 | 4,640 | | Issue of shares under employee share schemes | 151 | — | — | 38 | 189 | | Issue and exchange of other equity instruments | — | 641 | — | — | 641 | | Vesting of shares under employee share schemes | — | — | — | (21) | (21) | | Dividends paid | — | — | — | (1,213) | (1,213) | | Other equity instruments coupons paid | — | (997) | — | — | (997) | | Repurchase of shares | (158) | — | 158 | (2,241) | (2,241) | | Other reserve movements | (1) | (1) | — | 7 | 5 | | Balance as at 31 December 2025 | 4,178 | 12,673 | 1,360 | 39,778 | 57,989 | | Balance as at 1 January 2024 | 4,288 | 13,198 | 997 | 39,545 | 58,028 | | Profit after tax and other comprehensive income | — | 990 | — | 3,092 | 4,082 | | Issue of shares under employee share schemes | 103 | — | — | 22 | 125 | | Issue and exchange of other equity instruments | — | (1,165) | — | (93) | (1,258) | | Vesting of shares under employee share schemes | — | — | — | (24) | (24) | | Dividends paid | — | — | — | (1,221) | (1,221) | | Other equity instruments coupons paid | — | (990) | — | — | (990) | | Repurchase of shares | (205) | — | 205 | (1,760) | (1,760) | | Other reserve movements | — | — | — | 4 | 4 | | Balance as at 31 December 2024 | 4,186 | 12,033 | 1,202 | 39,565 | 56,986 | Statement of changes in equity | | Notes | Called up share capital and share premium | Other equity instruments | Other reserves | Retained earnings | Total equity | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Balance as at 1 January 2023 | | 4,373 | 13,250 | 788 | 39,256 | 57,667 | | Profit after tax and other comprehensive income | | — | 985 | — | 2,781 | 3,766 | | Issue of shares under employee share schemes | | 124 | — | — | 22 | 146 | | Issue and exchange of other equity instruments | | — | (52) | — | (25) | (77) | | Vesting of shares under employee share schemes | | — | — | — | (22) | (22) | | Dividends paid | | — | — | — | (1,210) | (1,210) | | Other equity instruments coupons paid | | — | (985) | — | — | (985) | | Repurchase of shares | | (209) | — | 209 | (1,257) | (1,257) | | Balance as at 31 December 2023 | | 4,288 | 13,198 | 997 | 39,545 | 58,028 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Parent company accounts (continued) Cash flow statement | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | For the year ended 31 December | £m | £m | £m | | Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities: | | | | | Profit before tax | 4,550 | 3,991 | 3,685 | | Adjustment for non-cash items: | | | | | Other non-cash items | 285 | 107 | (627) | | Changes in operating assets and liabilities | (50) | (85) | 17 | | Net cash generated from operating activities | 4,785 | 4,013 | 3,075 | | Net increase in loans and advances to subsidiaries of the parent¹ | (4,874) | (8,008) | (2,587) | | Capital contribution to and investment in subsidiary | (676) | 1,214 | 83 | | Net cash used in investing activities | (5,550) | (6,794) | (2,504) | | Issue of shares and other equity instruments | 3,856 | 1,660 | 3,251 | | Redemption of other equity instruments | (3,146) | (2,765) | (3,181) | | Issuance of debt securities²,³ | 12,371 | 13,420 | 9,836 | | Redemption of debt securities²,³ | (7,001) | (5,415) | (6,251) | | Issuance of subordinated liabilities³ | — | — | 1,180 | | Redemption of subordinated liabilities³ | (615) | (339) | (1,944) | | Repurchase of shares | (2,241) | (1,760) | (1,257) | | Dividends paid | (1,213) | (1,221) | (1,210) | | Coupons paid on other equity instruments | (997) | (991) | (985) | | Net cash generated from/(used in) financing activities | 1,014 | 2,589 | (561) | | Net (decrease)/increase in cash equivalents | 249 | (192) | 10 | | Cash equivalents at beginning of year | 294 | 486 | 476 | | Cash equivalents at end of year⁴ | 543 | 294 | 486 | # Notes: 1 Includes financial assets at fair value through the income statement. 2 Includes financial liabilities designated at fair value. 3 In 2024, 'net increase in debt securities in issue' were presented as a net inflow of £8,005m (2023:£3,585m) and 'proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated liabilities' as a net outflow of £339m (2023: £1,944m). In 2025 these transactions are presented on a gross basis. 4 Cash equivalents comprise loans and advances to banks with original maturity of three months or less, contained within loans and advances to subsidiaries. The Parent company's principal activity is to hold the investment in its wholly-owned subsidiaries, Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Bank UK PLC, Barclays Execution Services Limited and Barclays Principal Investments Limited. Dividends received are treated as operating income. Interest received was £3,182m (2024: £2,828m; 2023: £2,360m) and interest paid was £3,210m (2024: £2,888m; 2023: £2,355m). Dividends received were £4,185m (2024: £3,087m; 2023: £2,818m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements For the year ended 31 December 2025 This section describes the Group’s material accounting policies and critical accounting estimates and judgements that relate to the financial statements and notes as a whole. If an accounting policy or a critical accounting estimate or judgement relates to a particular note, disclosure is contained within the relevant note. # 1 Material accounting policies ## 1. Reporting entity Barclays PLC is a public company limited by shares registered in England under company number 48839, having its registered office at 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP. These financial statements are prepared for Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries (the Group) under Section 399 of the Companies Act 2006. The Group is a major global financial services provider engaged in retail banking, credit cards, wholesale banking, investment banking, wealth management and investment management services. In addition, separate financial statements have been presented for the holding company. ## 2. Compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards The consolidated financial statements of the Group, and the separate financial statements of Barclays PLC, have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards. The consolidated financial statements of the Group, and the separate financial statements of Barclays PLC, have also been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), including interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee, as there are no applicable differences between UK-adopted international accounting standards and IFRS as issued by the IASB for the periods presented. The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the consolidated and separate financial statements are set out below, and in the relevant notes to the financial statements. These policies have been consistently applied. ## 3. Basis of preparation The consolidated and separate financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention modified to the extent required or permitted under IFRS as set out in the relevant accounting policies. These financial statements are stated in millions of Pounds Sterling (£m), the functional currency of Barclays PLC. The Group has adopted the UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and the financial statements have been prepared in compliance with these principles. The financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis, as the Board is satisfied that the Group and the parent company have the resources to continue in business for a period of at least 12 months from approval of the financial statements. In making this assessment, the Board has considered a wide range of information relating to present and future conditions and includes a review of a working capital report (WCR). The WCR is used by the Board to assess the future performance of the Group and that it has the resources in place that are required to meet its ongoing regulatory requirements. The assessment is based upon business plans that contain future projections of profitability taken from the Group’s medium-term plan, as well as projections of regulatory capital requirements and business funding needs. The WCR also includes an assessment of the impact of internally- generated stress testing scenarios on the liquidity and capital requirement forecasts. The stress tests used were based upon an assessment of reasonably possible downside economic scenarios that the Group could experience. The WCR showed that the Group had sufficient capital and liquidity in place to support its future business requirements and remained above its regulatory minimum requirements in the stress scenarios. Accordingly, the Directors concluded that there was a reasonable expectation that the Group and Parent company has adequate resources to continue as a going concern for a period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements. ## 4. Accounting policies The Group prepares financial statements in accordance with IFRS. The Group’s material accounting policies relating to specific financial statement items, together with a description of the accounting estimates and judgements that were critical to preparing those items, are set out under the relevant notes. Accounting policies that affect the financial statements as a whole are set out below. ### (i) Consolidation The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays PLC and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities over which Barclays PLC has control. The Group has control over another entity when the Group has all of the following: 1) power over the relevant activities of the investee, for example, through voting or other rights 2) exposure to, or rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the investee, and 3) the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 352 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 As the consolidated financial statements include partnerships where the Group member is a partner, advantage has been taken of the exemption under Regulation 7 of the Partnership (Accounts) Regulations 2008 with regard to preparing and filing of individual partnership financial statements. Details of the principal subsidiaries are given in Note 33. ## (ii) Foreign currency translation Transactions in foreign currencies are translated into Sterling at the rate ruling on the date of the transaction. Foreign currency monetary balances are translated into Sterling at the period end exchange rates. Exchange gains and losses on such balances are taken to the income statement. The Group’s foreign operations (including subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and branches) based mainly outside the UK may have different functional currencies. The functional currency of an operation is the currency of the main economy to which it is exposed. Prior to consolidation (or equity accounting) the assets and liabilities of non-Sterling operations are translated at the period end exchange rate and items of income, expense and other comprehensive income are translated into Sterling at the rate on the date of the transactions. Exchange differences arising on the translation of foreign operations are included in currency translation reserves within equity. These are transferred to the income statement when the Group disposes of the entire interest in a foreign operation, when partial disposal results in the loss of control of an interest in a subsidiary, when an investment previously accounted for using the equity method is accounted for as a financial asset, or on the disposal of a foreign operation within a branch. ## (iii) Financial assets and liabilities ### Recognition The Group recognises financial assets and liabilities when it becomes a party to the terms of the contract. Trade date or settlement date accounting is applied, depending on the classification of the financial asset. ### Classification and measurement Financial assets are classified on the basis of two criteria: i) the business model within which financial assets are managed, and ii) their contractual cash flow characteristics (whether the cash flows represent ‘solely payments of principal and interest’ (SPPI)). The Group assesses the business model criteria at a portfolio level. Information that is considered in determining the applicable business model includes (i) policies and objectives for the relevant portfolio, (ii) how the performance and risks of the portfolio are managed, evaluated and reported to management, and (iii) the frequency, volume and timing of sales in prior periods, sales expectation for future periods, and the reasons for such sales. The contractual cash flow characteristics of financial assets are assessed with reference to whether the cash flows represent SPPI. Terms that could change the contractual cash flows, so that it would not meet the condition for SPPI are considered, including: (i) contingent and leverage features, (ii) non-recourse arrangements, (iii) features that could modify the time value of money, and (iv) Social, Environmental and Sustainability-linked features. Terms with de minimis impact do not preclude cash flows from representing SPPI. The accounting policy for each type of financial asset or liability is included within the relevant note for the item. The Group’s policies for determining the fair values of the assets and liabilities are set out in Note 17. ### Derecognition The Group derecognises a financial asset, or a portion of a financial asset, from its balance sheet where (i) the contractual rights to cash flows from the asset have expired, or (ii) the contractual rights to cash flows from the asset have been transferred (usually by sale) and with them either (a) substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset have been transferred, or (b) where neither substantially all the risks and reward have been transferred or retained, where control over the asset has been lost. It may not be obvious whether substantially all of the risks and rewards of a transferred asset, or portion of an asset, have been transferred. It is often necessary to perform a quantitative analysis that compares the Group's exposure to variability in asset cash flows before the transfer with its retained exposure after the transfer. A cash flow analysis of this nature may require judgement. In particular, it is necessary to estimate the asset’s expected future cash flows, as well as potential variability around this expectation. The method of estimating expected future cash flows depends on the nature of the asset, with market and market-implied data used to the greatest extent possible. The potential variability around this expectation is typically determined by stressing underlying parameters to create reasonable alternative upside and downside scenarios. Probabilities are then assigned to each scenario. Stressed parameters may include default rates, loss severity or prepayment rates. Financial liabilities are derecognised when the liability has been settled, has expired or has been extinguished. An exchange of an existing financial liability for a new liability with the same lender on substantially different terms – generally a difference of 10% or more in the present value of the cash flows or a substantive qualitative amendment – is accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 353 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## Accounting for reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing Reverse repurchase agreements (and stock borrowing or similar transactions) are a form of secured lending whereby the Group provides a loan or cash collateral in exchange for the transfer of collateral, generally in the form of marketable securities subject to an agreement to transfer the securities back at a fixed price in the future. Repurchase agreements are where the Group obtains such loans or cash collateral in exchange for the transfer of collateral. The Group purchases (a reverse repurchase agreement) or borrows securities subject to a commitment to resell or return them. The securities are not included in the balance sheet as the Group does not acquire the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration paid (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a loan asset at amortised cost, unless it is designated or mandatorily at fair value through profit and loss. The Group may also sell (a repurchase agreement) or lend securities subject to a commitment to repurchase or redeem them. The securities are retained on the balance sheet as the Group retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration received (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a financial liability at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss. ## (iv) Issued debt and equity instruments Issued financial instruments or their components are classified as liabilities if the contractual arrangement results in the Group having an obligation to either deliver cash or another financial asset, or a variable number of equity shares, to the holder of the instrument. If this is not the case, the instrument is generally an equity instrument and the proceeds included in equity, net of transaction costs. Dividends and other returns to equity holders are recognised when paid or declared by the members at the Annual General Meeting and treated as a deduction from equity. Where issued financial instruments contain both liability and equity components, these are accounted for separately. The fair value of the debt is estimated first and the balance of the proceeds is included within equity. ## (v) Cash flow statement Cash comprises cash on hand and balances at central banks. Cash equivalents comprise loans and advances to banks, cash collateral balances with central banks related to payment schemes and treasury and other eligible bills, all with original maturities of three months or less. Investments in debt securities at amortised cost are deemed to be investing activities for the purposes of the cash flow statement, except those instruments considered to be cash equivalents. Debt securities issued and redeemed are considered to be operating activities, except qualifying eligible liabilities that satisfy regulatory requirements for MREL instruments (or have previously satisfied these requirements since 2019 when they came into effect), which are considered to be financing activities. ## 5. New and amended standards and interpretations ### Future accounting developments The following accounting standards have been issued by the IASB, but are not yet effective: ### Amendment to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 - Classification and Measurement of Financial Instruments In May 2024, the IASB issued targeted amendments to IFRS 9 to address feedback received from stakeholders following a post-implementation review. The amendments include: - additional guidance to clarify when certain financial assets may be compliant with SPPI requirements, including instruments with contingent features (e.g. ESG-linked financing), as well as contractually-linked instruments and non-recourse financing. - clarifying the derecognition requirements for financial assets and financial liabilities, including establishing a new accounting policy choice for derecognition of a financial liability when a payment is initiated by the reporting entity using an electronic payment system provided specified criteria is met. The amendments are effective from 1 January 2026. The adoption of the derecognition amendments is expected to result in a change of policy for derecognising certain types of financial liabilities. As a result of these amendments, it is expected that the impacted liabilities will be reclassified from cash collateral and settlement balances to trading portfolio liabilities. No other material impacts are anticipated from the adoption of these derecognition amendments or from the other changes introduced to IFRS 9. The quantitative impact of IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 amendments will continue to be assessed in 2026. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 354 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements In April 2024, the IASB issued IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements, which replaces IAS 1. IFRS 18 introduces new requirements for presentation within the statement of profit or loss, including specified totals and subtotals, it requires entities to classify all income and expenses into five categories: operating, investing, financing, income tax and discontinued operations, and introduces defined subtotals, including operating profit. IFRS 18 requires entities to assess whether they have a IFRS 18 defined specified main business activity. For those entities with a specified main business activity, certain income and expenses will be recorded in the operating category, which may have been recorded in another category if the entity did not have a specified main business activity. The standard introduces new aggregation and disaggregation principles for financial information and narrow scope amendments to IAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows by using operating profit as the starting point for the indirect method and removing optionality in the classification of interest and dividends. The standard requires disclosure of management-defined performance measures (MPMs). The Group has commenced its IFRS 18 impact assessment. The Group expects to have an IFRS 18 specified main business activity, allowing significant items from the Group's operations to be reported within the operating category. The Group is also assessing the impact on management-defined performance measures (MPMs) and the enhanced disaggregation requirements introduced by IFRS 18. In 2026, the Group will continue to assess the impact of IFRS 18. The new standard is effective from 1 January 2027. ## 6. Critical accounting estimates and judgements The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying the accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements are highlighted under the relevant note. Information about estimates, and other sources of estimation uncertainty at the end of the reporting period, that are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are disclosed within the relevant note. - Credit impairment charges on page 363 - Tax on page 365 - Fair value of financial instruments on page 379 - Goodwill and intangible assets on page 397 - Provisions, including conduct and legal, competition and regulatory matters on page 400 - Pensions and post-retirement benefit obligations on page 417 ## 7. Other disclosures To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, certain disclosures required under IFRS have been included within the Risk review section as follows: - Credit risk on pages 204 to 206 and 222 to 272 - Market risk on pages 206 to 207 and 273 to 274 - Treasury and Capital risk – liquidity on pages 207 and 276 to 285 - Treasury and Capital risk – capital on pages 208 to 208 and 286 to 290 These disclosures are covered by the audit opinion (included on pages 339 to 341) where referenced as audited. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 355 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 # Financial performance and returns The Notes included in this section focus on the results and performance of the Group. Information on the income generated, expenditure incurred, segmental performance, tax, earnings per share and dividends are included here. # 2 Segmental reporting ## Presentation of segmental reporting Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive Committee, which is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, and has been identified as the chief operating decision-maker. All transactions between business segments are conducted on an arm's-length basis. Income and expenses directly associated with each segment are included in determining business segment performance. Barclays is a British universal bank diversified by business, geography and income type, serving consumer and wholesale customers and clients globally. In addition to its rooting in the UK, Barclays also has a strong presence in the US. The Group presents its financial disclosures through the following five operating segments (plus Head Office): - Barclays UK broadly represents businesses that sit within the UK ring-fenced bank entity, Barclays Bank UK PLC, and comprises Retail Banking (which includes Personal Banking and Barclaycard Consumer UK) and Business Banking - Barclays UK Corporate Bank brings together lending, trade and working capital, liquidity, payments and FX solutions for UK corporate clients with an annual turnover from £6.5 million and higher, excluding those clients that form part of the FTSE 350, which are included within the IB - Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management serves UK and international private banking clients, providing a range of investment, banking and lending products alongside expert advice. It also serves UK wealth management and UK digital investing clients offering a range of financial services - Barclays Investment Bank incorporates the Global Markets, Investment Banking and International Corporate Banking businesses, serving FTSE 350, multinationals and financial institution clients that are regular users of Investment Bank services - Barclays US Consumer Bank is a co-branded credit card issuer and financial services partner in the United States for travel, entertainment, retail and affinity institutions. It offers co-branded, small business and private label credit cards, instalment loans, online savings accounts and certificates of deposits The tables below also include Head Office, which comprises central support, central treasury operations, Barclays Execution Services assets, the Payment Acceptance business and legacy businesses ## Analysis of results by business | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank & Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Group results | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | For the year ended 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | Net interest income | 7,653 | 1,480 | 799 | 1,334 | 2,820 | 415 | 14,501 | | Non-interest income | 1,055 | 584 | 581 | 11,721 | 861 | (163) | 14,639 | | Total income | 8,708 | 2,064 | 1,380 | 13,055 | 3,681 | 252 | 29,140 | | Of which inter-segmental income/(expense) | (5) | 1,868 | 1,840 | (3,577) | (6) | (120) | — | | Operating costs | (4,746) | (989) | (994) | (7,927) | (1,637) | (747) | (17,040) | | UK regulatory levies | (85) | (29) | (10) | (181) | — | (8) | (313) | | Litigation and conduct | (51) | (39) | (9) | (28) | (8) | (257) | (392) | | Total operating expenses | (4,882) | (1,057) | (1,013) | (8,136) | (1,645) | (1,012) | (17,745) | | Other net income1 | — | — | — | — | — | 23 | 23 | | Profit/(loss) before impairment | 3,826 | 1,007 | 367 | 4,919 | 2,036 | (737) | 11,418 | | Credit impairment (charges)/ releases | (413) | (37) | 8 | (305) | (1,521) | (11) | (2,279) | | Profit/(loss) before tax | 3,413 | 970 | 375 | 4,614 | 515 | (748) | 9,139 | | Total assets (£bn) | 299.6 | 71.3 | 41.9 | 1,072.4 | 34.6 | 24.4 | 1,544.2 | | Total liabilities (£bn) | 280.3 | 103.7 | 80.4 | 965.9 | 25.4 | 10.2 | 1,465.9 | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 17,900 | 1,900 | 2,100 | 7,200 | 2,300 | 61,600 | 93,000 | | Average number of employees (full time equivalent) | | | | | | | 93,100 | | Average number of employees (headcount) | | | | | | | 94,700 | Note: 1 Other net income represents the share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures and the profit or loss on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank & Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Group results | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | For the year ended 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | Net interest income | 6,627 | 1,206 | 767 | 1,031 | 2,659 | 646 | 12,936 | | Non-interest income | 1,647 | 574 | 542 | 10,774 | 667 | (352) | 13,852 | | Total income | 8,274 | 1,780 | 1,309 | 11,805 | 3,326 | 294 | 26,788 | | Of which inter-segmental income/(expense) | (29) | 2,379 | 2,148 | (3,909) | (8) | (581) | — | | Operating costs | (4,235) | (935) | (911) | (7,666) | (1,612) | (836) | (16,195) | | UK regulatory levies | (78) | (37) | (9) | (187) | — | (9) | (320) | | Litigation and conduct | (16) | (1) | — | (55) | (14) | (134) | (220) | | Total operating expenses | (4,329) | (973) | (920) | (7,908) | (1,626) | (979) | (16,735) | | Other net income1 | — | — | — | — | — | 37 | 37 | | Profit/(loss) before impairment | 3,945 | 807 | 389 | 3,897 | 1,700 | (648) | 10,090 | | Credit impairment charges | (365) | (76) | (6) | (123) | (1,293) | (119) | (1,982) | | Profit/(loss) before tax | 3,580 | 731 | 383 | 3,774 | 407 | (767) | 8,108 | | Total assets (£bn) | 299.8 | 61.2 | 34.1 | 1,053.9 | 35.4 | 33.8 | 1,518.2 | | Total liabilities (£bn) | 284.1 | 94.4 | 75.0 | 952.1 | 24.5 | 15.6 | 1,445.7 | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 18,000 | 1,900 | 1,900 | 7,100 | 2,300 | 61,800 | 93,000 | | Average number of employees (full time equivalent) | | | | | | | 91,300 | | Average number of employees (headcount) | | | | | | | 92,900 | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank & Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Group results | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | For the year ended 31 December 2023 | | | | | | | | | Net interest income | 6,431 | 1,160 | 768 | 1,393 | 2,604 | 353 | 12,709 | | Non-interest income | 1,156 | 610 | 440 | 9,642 | 664 | 157 | 12,669 | | Total income | 7,587 | 1,770 | 1,208 | 11,035 | 3,268 | 510 | 25,378 | | Of which inter-segmental income/(expense) | (73) | 1,524 | 1,707 | (2,590) | (5) | (563) | — | | Operating costs | (4,393) | (905) | (795) | (7,619) | (1,650) | (1,352) | (16,714) | | UK bank levy | (30) | (8) | (4) | (123) | — | (14) | (180) | | Litigation and conduct | 8 | 1 | 2 | 5 | (6) | (48) | (37) | | Total operating expenses | (4,415) | (912) | (797) | (7,737) | (1,656) | (1,414) | (16,931) | | Other net expenses1 | — | (3) | — | — | — | (6) | (9) | | Profit/(loss) before impairment | 3,172 | 855 | 411 | 3,298 | 1,612 | (910) | 8,438 | | Credit impairment (charges)/releases | (304) | 27 | (4) | (102) | (1,438) | (60) | (1,881) | | Profit/(loss) before tax | 2,868 | 882 | 407 | 3,196 | 174 | (970) | 6,557 | | Total assets (£bn) | 293.1 | 61.5 | 32.0 | 1,019.2 | 33.6 | 38.1 | 1,477.5 | | Total liabilities (£bn) | 264.2 | 85.9 | 60.9 | 904.5 | 21.1 | 69.0 | 1,405.6 | | Number of employees (full time equivalent) | 6,800 | 1,800 | 2,100 | 7,100 | 600 | 74,000 | 92,400 | | Average number of employees (full time equivalent) | | | | | | | 92,900 | | Average number of employees (headcount) | | | | | | | 94,800 | Note: 1 Other net income represents the share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures and the profit or loss on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures. Inter-segmental income/(expense) refers to the internal charging of revenues between different business segments, reflecting how resources such as funding, capital, or services are utilised across the organisation. Segments that operate with a net customer deposit position contribute surplus deposits as a funding source for other Group segment activities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 Income by geographic region¹ | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | For the year ended 31 December | £m | £m | £m | | United Kingdom | 15,811 | 13,927 | 13,295 | | Americas | 9,541 | 8,772 | 8,109 | | Europe | 2,269 | 2,734 | 2,517 | | Asia | 1,433 | 1,273 | 1,370 | | Africa and Middle East | 86 | 82 | 87 | | Total | 29,140 | 26,788 | 25,378 | Income from individual countries which represent more than 5% of total income¹ | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | For the year ended 31 December | £m | £m | £m | | United Kingdom | 15,811 | 13,927 | 13,295 | | United States | 9,388 | 8,614 | 7,911 | Note: 1 The geographical analysis is based on the location of the office where the transactions are recorded. # 3 Net interest income ## Accounting for interest income and expenses Interest income on loans and advances at amortised cost, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income and interest expense on financial liabilities held at amortised cost are calculated using the effective interest method, which allocates interest, and direct and incremental fees and costs, over the expected lives of the assets and liabilities. The effective interest method requires the Group to estimate future cash flows, in some cases based on its experience of customers' behaviour, considering all contractual terms of the financial instrument, as well as the expected lives of the assets and liabilities. The Group incurs certain costs to originate credit card balances with the most significant being co-brand partner fees. To the extent these costs are attributed to customers that continuously carry an outstanding balance (revolvers) and incremental to the origination of credit card balances, they are capitalised and subsequently included within the calculation of the effective interest rate. They are amortised to interest income over the period of expected repayment of the originated balance. Costs attributed to customers that settle their outstanding balances each period (transactors) are deferred on the balance sheet as a cost of obtaining a contract and amortised to fee and commission expense over the life of the customer relationship (refer to Note 4). | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Cash and balances at central banks | 8,730 | 11,076 | 10,262 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 2,820 | 2,445 | 2,337 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks and customers | 18,662 | 17,836 | 14,742 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | 3,134 | 3,821 | 4,907 | | Cash collateral | 2,134 | 2,408 | 2,375 | | Other¹ | 709 | 740 | 452 | | Interest and similar income | 36,189 | 38,326 | 35,075 | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks and customers | (12,284) | (14,092) | (11,252) | | Debt securities in issue | (6,006) | (6,708) | (6,344) | | Subordinated liabilities | (855) | (945) | (866) | | Cash collateral | (1,501) | (2,276) | (2,254) | | Other² | (1,042) | (1,369) | (1,650) | | Interest and similar expense | (21,688) | (25,390) | (22,366) | | Net interest income | 14,501 | 12,936 | 12,709 | Notes: 1 Includes interest income from reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost. 2 Includes interest expense from repurchase agreement and other similar secured borrowing at amortised cost and lease expense. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 # 4 Net fee and commission income # Accounting for net fee and commission income The Group recognises fee and commission income charged for services provided by the Group as and when performance obligations are satisfied, for example, on completion of the underlying transaction. Incremental costs are reported within fee and commission expense if they are directly attributable to generating identifiable fee and commission income. Where the contractual arrangements also result in the Group recognising financial instruments in scope of IFRS 9, such financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value in accordance with IFRS 9 before applying the provisions of IFRS 15. Fee and commission income is disaggregated below by fee types that reflect the nature of the services offered across the Group and operating segments, in accordance with IFRS 15. The table below includes a total for fees in scope of IFRS 15. Refer to Note 2 for more detailed information about operating segments. | | 2025 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Fee type | | | | | | | | | Transactional | 1,226 | 462 | 30 | 336 | 2,727 | 272 | 5,053 | | Advisory | — | — | 344 | 710 | — | — | 1,054 | | Brokerage and execution | 201 | — | 158 | 1,824 | — | — | 2,183 | | Underwriting and syndication | 36 | 102 | — | 2,656 | — | — | 2,794 | | Other | 7 | — | — | — | — | 19 | 26 | | Total revenue from contracts with customers | 1,470 | 564 | 532 | 5,526 | 2,727 | 291 | 11,110 | | Other non-contract fee income | — | 26 | — | 146 | — | — | 172 | | Fee and commission income | 1,470 | 590 | 532 | 5,672 | 2,727 | 291 | 11,282 | | Fee and commission expense | (480) | (92) | (39) | (1,253) | (1,858) | (62) | (3,784) | | Net fee and commission income | 990 | 498 | 493 | 4,419 | 869 | 229 | 7,498 | | | 2024 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Fee type | | | | | | | | | Transactional | 1,150 | 448 | 33 | 336 | 2,661 | 342 | 4,970 | | Advisory | — | — | 319 | 739 | — | — | 1,058 | | Brokerage and execution | 215 | — | 129 | 1,580 | — | — | 1,924 | | Underwriting and syndication | 36 | 92 | — | 2,596 | — | — | 2,724 | | Other | 15 | 1 | — | — | — | 18 | 34 | | Total revenue from contracts with customers | 1,416 | 541 | 481 | 5,251 | 2,661 | 360 | 10,710 | | Other non-contract fee income | — | 25 | — | 112 | — | — | 137 | | Fee and commission income | 1,416 | 566 | 481 | 5,363 | 2,661 | 360 | 10,847 | | Fee and commission expense | (408) | (90) | (38) | (1,121) | (1,855) | (88) | (3,600) | | Net fee and commission income | 1,008 | 476 | 443 | 4,242 | 806 | 272 | 7,247 | | | 2023 | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays UK | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management | Barclays Investment Bank | Barclays US Consumer Bank | Head Office | Barclays Group | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Fee type | | | | | | | | | Transactional | 1,124 | 429 | 32 | 327 | 2,603 | 301 | 4,816 | | Advisory | 52 | — | 251 | 652 | — | — | 955 | | Brokerage and execution | 234 | — | 89 | 1,674 | — | — | 1,997 | | Underwriting and syndication | 33 | 82 | — | 1,998 | — | — | 2,113 | | Other | 36 | 1 | — | — | — | 64 | 101 | | Total revenue from contracts with customers | 1,479 | 512 | 372 | 4,651 | 2,603 | 365 | 9,982 | | Other non-contract fee income | — | 28 | 1 | 110 | — | — | 139 | | Fee and commission income | 1,479 | 540 | 373 | 4,761 | 2,603 | 365 | 10,121 | | Fee and commission expense | (368) | (96) | (33) | (1,247) | (1,765) | (83) | (3,592) | | Net fee and commission income | 1,111 | 444 | 340 | 3,514 | 838 | 282 | 6,529 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 359 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## Fee types ### Transactional Transactional fees are service charges on deposit accounts, cash management services fees and transactional processing fees. These include interchange and merchant fee income generated from credit and bank card usage. Transaction and processing fees are recognised at the point in time the transaction occurs or service is performed. Interchange and merchant fees are recognised upon settlement of the card transaction payment. The Group incurs certain card-related costs, including those related to cardholder reward programmes and payments to co-brand partners. Cardholder reward programme costs related to customers that settle their outstanding balance each period (transactors) are expensed when incurred and presented in fee and commission expense, while costs related to customers that continuously carry an outstanding balance (revolvers) are included in the effective interest rate of the receivable (refer to Note 3). Payments to partners for new cardholder account originations related to transactor accounts are deferred as costs to obtain a contract under IFRS 15, while costs related to revolver accounts are included in the effective interest rate of the receivable (refer to Note 3). Those costs deferred under IFRS 15 are capitalised and amortised over the estimated life of the customer relationship. Payments to co-brand partners based on revenue sharing to the extent the revenue share relates to 'revolvers' are included in the effective interest rate of the receivable and to the extent revenue share relates to 'transactors' it is presented in fee and commission expense. Payments based on profitability are presented in fee and commission expense. ### Advisory Advisory fees are generated from wealth management services and investment banking advisory services related to mergers, acquisitions and financial restructurings. Wealth management advisory fees are earned over the period the services are provided and are generally recognised quarterly when the market value of client assets is determined. Investment banking advisory fees are recognised at the point in time when the services related to the transaction have been completed under the terms of the engagement. Investment banking advisory costs are recognised as incurred in fee and commission expense if direct and incremental to the advisory services or are otherwise recognised in operating expenses. ### Brokerage and execution Brokerage and execution fees are earned for executing client transactions with various exchanges and over-the-counter markets and assisting clients in clearing transactions and facilitating foreign exchange transactions for spot/forward contracts. Brokerage and execution fees are recognised at the point in time the associated service has been completed, which is generally the trade date of the transaction. ### Underwriting and syndication Underwriting and syndication fees are earned for the distribution of client equity or debt securities and the arrangement and administration of a loan syndication. This includes commitment fees to provide loan financing. Underwriting fees are generally recognised on trade date if there is no remaining contingency, such as the transaction being conditional on the closing of an acquisition or another transaction. Underwriting costs are deferred and recognised in fee and commission expense when the associated underwriting fees are recorded. Syndication fees are earned for arranging and administering a loan syndication; however, the associated fee may be subject to variability until the loan has been syndicated to other syndicate members or until other contingencies have been resolved, and therefore the fee revenue is deferred until the uncertainty is resolved. Included in the underwriting and syndication fees are loan commitment fees, when the drawdown is not probable. Such commitment fees are recognised over time through to the contractual maturity of the commitment. ### Contract assets and contract liabilities The Group had no material contract assets or contract liabilities as at 31 December 2025 (2024: £nil; 2023: £nil). ### Impairment of fee receivables and contract assets During 2025, there have been no material impairments recognised in relation to fees receivable and contract assets (2024: £nil; 2023: £nil). Fees in relation to transactional business can be added to outstanding customer balances. These amounts may be subsequently impaired as part of the overall loans and advances balance. ### Remaining performance obligations The Group applies the practical expedient of IFRS 15 and does not disclose information about remaining performance obligations that have original expected durations of one year or less or because the Group has a right to consideration that corresponds directly with the value of the service provided to the client or customer. ### Costs incurred in obtaining or fulfilling a contract The Group expects that incremental costs of obtaining a contract, such as success fee and commission fees paid are recoverable and therefore capitalises such contract costs. Capitalised contract costs net of amortisation as at 31 December 2025 are £161m (2024: £122m; 2023: £217m). Capitalised contract costs are amortised over the customer relationship period, depending on the transfer of services to which the asset pertains. In 2025, the amount of amortisation was £35m (2024: £62m; 2023: £55m) and there was no impairment loss recognised in connection with the capitalised contract costs (2024: £nil; 2023: £nil). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 # 5 Net trading income ## Accounting for net trading income Trading positions are held at fair value, and the resulting gains and losses are included in net trading income, together with interest and dividends arising from long and short positions and funding costs relating to trading activities. Incremental costs are reported within net trading income if they are directly attributable to generating identifiable trading income. Income arises from both the sale and purchase of trading positions, margins that are achieved through market-making and customer business, and from changes in fair value caused by movements in interest and exchange rates, equity prices and other market variables. Gains or losses on non-trading financial instruments designated or mandatorily at fair value, with changes in fair value recognised in the income statement, are included in net trading income where the business model is to manage assets and liabilities on a fair value basis, which includes the use of derivatives. Gains and losses are also reported in net trading income where an instrument is designated at fair value to eliminate an accounting mismatch. | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Net gains on financial instruments held for trading | 5,054 | 4,038 | 4,257 | | Net gains on financial instruments mandatorily at fair value | 1,327 | 1,201 | 1,308 | | Net gains on financial instruments designated at fair value | 661 | 529 | 380 | | Net trading income | 7,042 | 5,768 | 5,945 | # 6 Net investment income ## Accounting for net investment income Dividends are recognised when the right to receive the dividend has been established. Incremental costs are reported within net investment income if they are directly attributable to generating identifiable investment income. Other accounting policies relating to net investment income are set out in Note 13 and Note 15. | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Net gains from financial instruments mandatorily at fair value | 252 | 326 | 171 | | Net (losses)/gains from disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | (191) | 164 | 26 | | Net losses from disposal of financial assets and liabilities measured at amortised cost1 | (18) | (209) | (17) | | Dividend income | — | 3 | — | | Net losses on other investments | (33) | (68) | (119) | | Net investment income | 10 | 216 | 61 | Note: 1 Included within the 2024 balance are losses of £220m on sale of the performing Italian retail mortgage portfolio. # 7 Infrastructure, administration and general expenses | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Infrastructure costs | | | | | Property and equipment | 1,928 | 1,815 | 1,948 | | Depreciation and amortisation | 1,756 | 1,700 | 1,784 | | Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets | 20 | 34 | 363 | | Total infrastructure costs | 3,704 | 3,549 | 4,095 | | Administration and general expenses | | | | | Consultancy, legal and professional fees | 790 | 829 | 782 | | Marketing and advertising | 618 | 649 | 585 | | Other administration and general expenses | 1,321 | 1,292 | 1,235 | | Total administration and general expenses | 2,729 | 2,770 | 2,602 | | Total infrastructure, administration and general expenses | 6,433 | 6,319 | 6,697 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 361 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## 8 Credit impairment charges/(releases) ### Accounting for the impairment of financial assets #### Impairment The Group is required to recognise expected credit losses (ECLs) based on unbiased forward-looking information for all financial assets at amortised cost, lease receivables, debt financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income, loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. At the reporting date, an allowance (or provision for loan commitments and financial guarantees) is required for the 12-month (Stage 1) ECLs. If the credit risk has significantly increased since initial recognition (Stage 2), or if the financial instrument is credit impaired (Stage 3), an allowance (or provision) should be recognised for the lifetime ECLs. The measurement of ECL is calculated using three main components: (i) probability of default (PD) (ii) loss given default (LGD) and (iii) the exposure at default (EAD). The 12-month and lifetime ECLs are calculated by multiplying the respective PD, LGD and the EAD. The 12-month and lifetime PDs represent the PD occurring over the next 12 months and the remaining maturity of the instrument respectively. The EAD represents the expected balance at default, taking into account the repayment of principal and interest from the balance sheet date to the default event together with any expected drawdowns of committed facilities. The LGD represents expected losses on the EAD given the event of default, taking into account, among other attributes, the mitigating effect of collateral value at the time it is expected to be realised and the time value of money. Expected credit loss measurement is based on the ability of borrowers to make payments as they fall due. The Group also considers sector-specific risks and whether additional adjustments are required in the measurement of ECL. Credit risk may be impacted by climate considerations for certain sectors, such as oil and gas. Determining a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition: The Group assesses when a significant increase in credit risk has occurred based on quantitative and qualitative assessments. The credit risk of an exposure is considered to have significantly increased when: #### i) Quantitative test The annualised lifetime PD has increased by more than an agreed threshold relative to the equivalent at origination. PD deterioration thresholds are defined as percentage increases, and are set at an origination score band and segment level to ensure the test appropriately captures significant increases in credit risk at all risk levels. Generally, thresholds are inversely correlated to the origination PD, i.e. as the origination PD increases, the threshold value reduces. The assessment of the point at which a PD increase is deemed 'significant', is based upon analysis of the portfolio's risk profile against a common set of principles and performance metrics (consistent across both retail and wholesale businesses), incorporating expert credit judgement, where appropriate. Application of quantitative PD floors does not represent the use of the low credit risk exemption as exposures can separately move into Stage 2 via the qualitative route described below. Wholesale assets apply a 100% increase in PD and 0.2% PD floor to determine a significant increase in credit risk. Retail assets apply bespoke relative increase and absolute PD thresholds based on product type and origination PD. Thresholds are subject to maximums defined by Group policy and typically apply minimum relative thresholds of 50-100% and a maximum relative threshold of 400%. For existing/historical exposures where origination point scores or data are no longer available or do not represent a comparable estimate of lifetime PD, a proxy origination score is defined, based upon: - back-population of the approved lifetime PD score either to origination date or, where this is not feasible, as far back as possible (subject to a data start point no later than 1 January 2015); or - use of available historical account performance data and other customer information, to derive a comparable 'proxy' estimation of origination PD. #### ii) Qualitative test This is relevant for accounts that meet the portfolio's 'high risk' criteria and are subject to closer credit monitoring. High risk customers may not be in arrears, but either through an event or an observed behaviour exhibit credit distress. The definition and assessment of high risk includes as wide a range of information as reasonably available, such as industry and Group-wide customer level data, including, but not limited to bureau scores and high consumer indebtedness index, wherever possible or relevant. While the high risk populations applied for IFRS 9 impairment purposes are aligned with risk management processes, they are also regularly reviewed and validated to ensure that they capture any incremental segments where there is evidence of credit deterioration. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 362 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## iii) Backstop criteria This is relevant for accounts that are more than 30 calendar days past due. The 30 days past due criteria is a backstop rather than a primary driver of moving exposures into Stage 2. The criteria for determining a significant increase in credit risk for assets with bullet repayments follows the same principle as all other assets, i.e. quantitative, qualitative and backstop tests are all applied. Exposures will move back to Stage 1 once they no longer meet the criteria for a significant increase in credit risk. This means that, at a minimum all payments must be up-to-date, the PD deterioration test is no longer met, the account is no longer classified as high risk, and the customer has evidenced an ability to maintain future payments. Exposures are only removed from Stage 3 and reassigned to Stage 2 once the original default trigger event no longer applies. Exposures being removed from Stage 3 must no longer qualify as credit impaired, and: a) the obligor will also have demonstrated consistently good payment behaviour over a 12-month period, by making all consecutive contractual payments due and, for forborne exposures, the relevant EBA defined probationary period has also been successfully completed or; b) (for non-forborne exposures) the performance conditions are defined and approved within an appropriately sanctioned restructure plan, including 12 months' payment history. Management overlays and other exceptions to model outputs are applied only if consistent with the objective of identifying significant increases in credit risk. ## Forward-looking information The measurement of ECL involves complexity and judgement, including estimation of PD, LGD, a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives (where contractual life is not appropriate), and estimation of EAD and assessing significant increases in credit risk. Credit losses are the expected cash shortfalls from what is contractually due over the expected life of the financial instrument, discounted at the original effective interest rate (EIR). ECLs are the unbiased probability-weighted credit losses determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes and considering future economic conditions. Refer to the Measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis section on page 243 for further details. ## Definition of default, credit impaired assets, write-offs, and interest income recognition The definition of default for the purpose of determining ECLs, and for internal credit risk management purposes, has been aligned to the Regulatory Capital CRR Article 178 definition of default, to maintain a consistent approach with IFRS 9 and associated regulatory guidance. The Regulatory Capital CRR Article 178 definition of default considers indicators that the debtor is unlikely to pay, includes exposures in forbearance and is no later than when the exposure is more than 90 days past due. When exposures are identified as credit impaired at the time when they are purchased or originated, interest income is calculated on the carrying value net of the impairment allowance. An asset is considered credit impaired when one or more events occur that have a detrimental impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset. This comprises assets defined as defaulted and other individually assessed exposures where imminent default or actual loss is identified. Uncollectable loans are written off against the related allowance for loan impairment on completion of the Group's internal processes and when all reasonably expected recoverable amounts have been collected. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited to the income statement. The timing and extent of write-offs may involve some element of subjective judgement. Nevertheless, a write-off will often be prompted by a specific event, such as the inception of insolvency proceedings or other formal recovery action, which makes it possible to establish that some or the entire advance is beyond realistic prospect of recovery. ## Purchased or originated credit impaired (POCI) Purchased or originated credit impaired assets include a fixed pool of credit card and unsecured personal loan balances that were purchased as part of the Tesco acquisition at a deep discount to face value, reflecting credit losses incurred from the point of origination to the date of acquisition. Hence, POCI assets do not carry any impairment allowance on initial recognition. All changes in lifetime expected credit losses subsequent to the assets' initial recognition are recognised as an impairment charge. Over time, these POCI assets will run off as the loans redeem, pay down or as loans are written off. ## Accounting for purchased financial guarantee contracts The Group may enter into a financial guarantee contract that requires the issuer of such contract to reimburse the Group for a loss it incurs because a specified debtor fails to make payment when due in accordance with the terms of a debt instrument. For these separate financial guarantee contracts, the Group recognises a reimbursement asset aligned with the recognition of the underlying ECLs, if it is considered virtually certain that a reimbursement would be received if the specified debtor fails to make payment when due in accordance with the terms of the debt instrument. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 363 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## Loan modifications and renegotiations that are not credit-impaired When modification of a loan agreement occurs as a result of commercial restructuring activity rather than due to the credit risk of the borrower, an assessment must be performed to determine whether the terms of the new agreement are substantially different from the terms of the existing agreement. This assessment considers both the change in cash flows arising from the modified terms, as well as the change in overall instrument risk profile. In respect of payment holidays granted to borrowers that are not due to forbearance, if the revised cash flows on a present value basis (based on the original EIR) are not substantially different from the original cash flows, the loan is not considered to be substantially modified. Where terms are substantially different, the existing loan will be derecognised and a new loan will be recognised at fair value, with any difference in valuation recognised immediately within the income statement, subject to observability criteria. Where terms are not substantially different, the loan carrying value will be adjusted to reflect the present value of modified cash flows discounted at the original EIR, with any resulting gain or loss recognised immediately within the income statement as a modification gain or loss. ## Expected life Lifetime ECLs must be measured over the expected life. This is restricted to the maximum contractual life and takes into account expected prepayment, extension, call and similar options. The exceptions are certain revolving financial instruments, such as credit cards and bank overdrafts, that include both a drawn and an undrawn component where the entity's contractual ability to demand repayment and cancel the undrawn commitment does not limit the entity's exposure to credit losses to the contractual notice period. For revolving facilities, expected life is analytically derived to reflect the behavioural life of the asset, i.e. the full period over which the business expects to be exposed to credit risk. Behavioural life is typically based upon historical analysis of the average time to default, closure or withdrawal of facility. Where data is insufficient or analysis inconclusive, an additional 'maturity factor' may be incorporated to reflect the full estimated life of the exposures, based upon experienced judgement and/or peer analysis. Potential future modifications of contracts are not taken into account when determining the expected life or EAD until they occur. ## Discounting ECLs are discounted at the EIR at initial recognition or an approximation thereof and consistent with income recognition. For loan commitments, the EIR is the rate that is expected to apply when the loan is drawn down and a financial asset is recognised. Issued financial guarantee contracts are discounted at the risk-free rate. Lease receivables are discounted at the rate implicit in the lease. For variable/ floating rate financial assets, the spot rate at the reporting date is used and projections of changes in the variable rate over the expected life are not made to estimate future interest cash flows or for discounting. ## Modelling techniques Currently, Internal Ratings-Based models are leveraged to calculate the point-in-time PD and LGD, which serve as key inputs to the IFRS 9 models. Thereafter, these inputs are extrapolated by the IFRS 9 models to create macroeconomic sensitive forecasts of PDs, LGDs and, in turn, ECL. ## Forbearance A financial asset is subject to forbearance when it is modified due to the credit distress of the borrower. A modification made to the terms of an asset due to forbearance will typically be assessed as a non-substantial modification that does not result in derecognition of the original loan, except in circumstances where debt is exchanged for equity. Both performing and non-performing forbearance assets are classified as Stage 3, except where it is established that the concession granted has not resulted in diminished financial obligation and that no other regulatory definition of default criteria have been triggered, in which case, the asset is classified as Stage 2. The minimum probationary period for non-performing forbearance is 12 months, and for performing forbearance, 24 months. Hence, a minimum of 36 months is required for non-performing forbearance to move out of a forborne state. No financial instrument in forbearance can transfer back to Stage 1 until all of the Stage 2 thresholds are no longer met, and can only move out of Stage 3 when no longer credit impaired. ## Critical accounting estimates and judgements Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include: | Judgements | Estimates | | --- | --- | | Identification and application of management adjustments in response to circumstances outside the scope of the model. | Estimates include modelling assumptions, such as forward-looking modelled parameters (PD, EAD & LGD), and a range of unbiased future economic scenarios and scenario weightings. | These estimates are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in material adjustment to the carrying amounts of financial instruments in scope of IFRS 9 impairment within the next financial year. IFRS 9 impairment involves several important areas of judgement, including estimating forward-looking modelled parameters (PD, LGD and EAD), developing a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimating expected lives and assessing significant increases in credit risk, based on the Group's experience of managing credit risk. The determination of expected life is most material for Barclays' credit card portfolios which is obtained via behavioural life analysis to materially capture the risk of these facilities. Within the retail and small businesses portfolios, which comprise large numbers of small homogeneous assets with similar risk characteristics where credit scoring techniques are generally used, the impairment allowance is calculated using forward-looking modelled parameters that are typically run at account level. There are many models in use, each tailored to a product, line of business or customer category. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 364 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 Judgement and knowledge is needed in selecting the statistical methods to use when the models are developed or revised. Management adjustments to impairment models, which contain an element of subjectivity, are applied in order to factor in certain conditions or changes in policy that are not fully incorporated into the impairment models, or to reflect additional facts and circumstances at the period end. Management adjustments are reviewed and incorporated into future model development, where appropriate. For individually significant assets in Stage 3, impairment allowances are calculated on an individual basis, and all relevant considerations that have a bearing on the expected future cash flows across a range of economic scenarios are taken into account. These considerations can be particularly subjective and can include the business prospects for the customer, the realisable value of collateral, the Group's position relative to other claimants, the reliability of customer information and the likely cost and duration of the work-out process. The level of the impairment allowance is the difference between the value of the discounted expected future cash flows (discounted at the loan's original effective interest rate), and its carrying amount. Furthermore, judgements change with time as new information becomes available or as work-out strategies evolve, resulting in frequent revisions to the impairment allowance as individual decisions are taken. Changes in these estimates would result in a change in the allowances and have a direct impact on the impairment charge. Further information on impairment allowances, impairment charges, management adjustments to models for impairment, measurement uncertainty, sensitivity analysis and related credit information is set out within the Credit risk performance section. Temporary adjustments to calculated IFRS 9 impairment allowances may be applied in limited circumstances to account for situations where known or expected risk factors or information have not been considered in the ECL assessment or modelling process. For further information please see page 239 in the Credit risk performance section. Information about the potential impact of the physical and transition risks of climate change on borrowers is considered, taking into account reasonable and supportable information to make accounting judgements and estimates. Climate change is inherently of a long-term nature, with significant levels of uncertainty, and consequently requires judgement in determining the possible impact in the next financial year, if any. Credit impairment charges/(releases) | | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | 2023 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Impairment charges/(releases) | Recoveries and reimbursements1 | Total2,3 | Impairment charges/(releases) | Recoveries and reimbursements1 | Total2 | Impairment charges/(releases) | Recoveries and reimbursements1 | Total | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Loans and advances at amortised cost4 | 2,452 | (180) | 2,272 | 2,115 | (94) | 2,021 | 2,017 | (73) | 1,944 | | Off-balance sheet loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts | 1 | — | 1 | (46) | — | (46) | (61) | — | (61) | | Total | 2,453 | (180) | 2,273 | 2,069 | (94) | 1,975 | 1,956 | (73) | 1,883 | | Cash collateral and settlement balances | 1 | — | 1 | (3) | — | (3) | 4 | — | 4 | | Financial instruments at fair value through other comprehensive income | (3) | — | (3) | 1 | — | 1 | (1) | — | (1) | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost | 5 | — | 5 | 8 | — | 8 | — | — | — | | Other financial assets measured at amortised cost | 3 | — | 3 | 1 | — | 1 | (5) | — | (5) | | Credit impairment charges / (releases) | 2,459 | (180) | 2,279 | 2,076 | (94) | 1,982 | 1,954 | (73) | 1,881 | Notes: 1 Recoveries and reimbursements include £84m (2024: £15m, 2023: £29m) for reimbursements where the Group has entered into financial guarantee contracts that provide credit protection over certain assets with third parties and cash recoveries of previously written off amounts of £96m (2024: £79m, 2023: £44m). 2 Includes net impairment charge on co-branded card portfolio of £176m (2024:£160m) within USCB classified as held for sale. 3 Includes net impairment charge of £101m related to the acquisition of GM portfolio. 4 Includes debt securities at amortised cost. # Write-offs that can be subjected to enforcement activity The contractual amount outstanding on financial assets that were written off during the year, and that can still be subjected to enforcement activity is £883m (2024: £746m, 2023: £597m) including £63m pertaining to co-branded card portfolio within USCB classified as held for sale in December 2024. This is lower than the write-offs presented in the movement in the gross exposures and impairment allowance table due to assets sold during the year post write-offs and post write-off recoveries. # Modification of financial assets Financial assets of £2,488m (2024: £2,146m, 2023: £2,690m), with a loss allowance measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL, were subject to non-substantial modification during the year, with a resulting loss of £84m (2024: £78m, 2023: £4m). The gross carrying amount of financial assets subject to non-substantial modification for which the loss allowance has changed to a 12-month ECL during the year amounts to £221m (2024: £101m, 2023: £149m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 365 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## 9 Tax ### Accounting for income taxes The Group applies IAS 12 Income Taxes in accounting for taxes on income. Income tax payable on taxable profits (current tax) is recognised as an expense in the periods in which the profits arise. Withholding taxes are also treated as income taxes. Income tax recoverable on tax allowable losses is recognised as a current tax asset, only to the extent that it is regarded as recoverable by offsetting against taxable profits arising in the current or prior periods. Current tax is measured using tax rates and tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible temporary differences, and the carry forward of unused tax credits and unused tax losses can be utilised. Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all taxable temporary differences, except for the initial recognition of goodwill. Deferred tax is not recognised where the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, affects neither the accounting profit nor taxable profit or loss. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates and legislation enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date that are expected to apply when the deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset when there is both a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis. The Group has adopted the International Tax Reform - Pillar Two Model Rules amendments to IAS 12, which were issued on 23 May 2023 and approved by the UK Endorsement Board on 19 July 2023, and has applied the exception set out in paragraph 4A in respect of recognising and disclosing information about deferred tax assets and liabilities related to Pillar Two income taxes. The Group considers an uncertain tax position to exist when it considers that ultimately, in the future, the amount of profit subject to tax may be greater than the amount initially reflected in the Group's tax returns. The Group accounts for provisions in respect of uncertain tax positions in two different ways. A current tax provision is recognised when it is considered probable that the outcome of a review by a tax authority of an uncertain tax position will alter the amount of cash tax due to, or from, a tax authority in the future. From recognition, the current tax provision is then measured at the amount the Group ultimately expects to pay the tax authority to resolve the position. The accrual of interest and penalty amounts in respect of uncertain income tax positions is recognised as an expense within profit before tax. Deferred tax provisions are adjustments made to the carrying value of deferred tax assets in respect of uncertain tax positions. A deferred tax provision is recognised when it is considered probable that the outcome of a review by a tax authority of an uncertain tax position will result in a reduction in the carrying value of the deferred tax asset. From recognition of a provision, measurement of the underlying deferred tax asset is adjusted to take into account the expected impact of resolving the uncertain tax position on the loss or temporary difference giving rise to the deferred tax asset. The approach taken to measurement takes account of whether the uncertain tax position is a discrete position that will be reviewed by the tax authority in isolation from any other position, or one of a number of issues that are expected to be reviewed together concurrently and resolved simultaneously with a tax authority. The Group's measurement of provisions is based upon its best estimate of the additional profit that will become subject to tax. For a discrete position, consideration is given only to the merits of that position. Where a number of issues are expected to be reviewed and resolved together, the Group will take into account not only the merits of its position in respect of each particular issue, but also the overall level of provision relative to the aggregate of the uncertain tax positions across all the issues that are expected to be resolved at the same time. In addition, in assessing provision levels, it is assumed that tax authorities will review uncertain tax positions and that all facts will be fully and transparently disclosed. ### Critical accounting estimates and judgements Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include: | Judgements | Estimates | | --- | --- | | Recognition of deferred tax assets and determination of provisions for uncertain tax positions. | Measurement of deferred tax balances and the level of provisioning for uncertain tax positions. | The Group does not consider there to be a significant risk of a material adjustment to the carrying amount of current and deferred tax balances, including provisions for uncertain tax positions in the next financial year. The provisions for uncertain tax positions cover a diverse range of issues and reflect advice from external counsel, where relevant. It should be noted that only a proportion of the total uncertain tax positions will be under audit at any point in time, and could therefore be subject to challenge by a tax authority over the next year. Deferred tax assets have been recognised based on business profit forecasts, which included consideration for the current view of climate impacts. Details on the recognition of deferred tax assets are provided in this note. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Current tax charge/(credit) | | | | | Current year | 1,905 | 1,633 | 1,359 | | Adjustments in respect of prior years | (131) | 26 | (181) | | | 1,774 | 1,659 | 1,178 | | Deferred tax charge/(credit) | | | | | Current year | 58 | 128 | (95) | | Adjustments in respect of prior years | 94 | (35) | 151 | | | 152 | 93 | 56 | | Tax charge | 1,926 | 1,752 | 1,234 | The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to the Group's profit before tax. | | 2025 | 2025 | 2024 | 2024 | 2023 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | % | £m | % | £m | % | | Profit before tax | 9,139 | | 8,108 | | 6,557 | | | Tax charge based on the applicable UK corporation tax rate of 25% (2024: 25%; 2023: 23.5%) | 2,285 | 25.0% | 2,027 | 25.0% | 1,541 | 23.5% | | Impact of profits/losses earned in territories with different statutory rates to the UK (weighted average tax rate is 24% (2024: 23.8%; 2023: 23.6%)) | (93) | (1.0%) | (97) | (1.2%) | 4 | 0.1% | | Recurring items: | | | | | | | | Non-creditable taxes, including withholding taxes | 148 | 1.6% | 105 | 1.3% | 130 | 2.0% | | Impact of UK bank levy being non-deductible | 57 | 0.6% | 56 | 0.7% | 42 | 0.6% | | Non-deductible expenses | 53 | 0.6% | 61 | 0.8% | 65 | 1.0% | | Changes in recognition of deferred tax and effect of unrecognised tax losses | 49 | 0.5% | 69 | 0.8% | (58) | (0.9%) | | Other items, including banking surcharge1 | (8) | (0.1%) | 91 | 1.1% | 49 | 0.8% | | Adjustments in respect of prior years | (37) | (0.4%) | (9) | (0.1%) | (30) | (0.5%) | | Non-taxable gains and income | (87) | (1.0%) | (125) | (1.5%) | (65) | (1.0%) | | Tax relief on holdings of inflation-linked government bonds | (221) | (2.4%) | (186) | (2.3%) | (214) | (3.3%) | | Tax relief on payments made under AT1 instruments | (244) | (2.7%) | (241) | (3.0%) | (222) | (3.4%) | | Non-recurring items: | | | | | | | | Non-deductible impairments and losses on divestments | 13 | 0.1% | — | — | — | — | | Non-deductible provisions for investigations and litigation | 11 | 0.1% | (1) | (0.0%) | — | — | | Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress | — | — | 2 | 0.0% | (8) | (0.1%) | | Total tax charge | 1,926 | 21.1% | 1,752 | 21.6% | 1,234 | 18.8% | Note: 1 Banking surcharge includes the impact of the 3% UK banking surcharge rate on profits/losses and tax adjustments relating to UK banking entities. # Factors influencing the effective tax rate The effective tax rate of 21.1% is lower than the UK corporation tax rate of 25%, primarily due to tax relief on payments made under AT1 instruments and tax relief on holdings of inflation-linked government bonds. These factors, which have each decreased the effective tax rate, are partially offset by non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes. The tax charge for the year includes a credit in respect of prior years of £133m in relation to the gain that arose on the acquisition of Tesco Bank. During the year, the Group has engaged with HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) to help determine the tax treatment of this gain, and following that engagement that amount is being treated as non-taxable in Barclays Bank UK PLC's corporation tax return for the year ended 31 December 2024. The tax charge for the year also includes £23m in respect of global minimum tax arising under the Pillar Two rules. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 367 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## Factors that may influence the effective tax rate in future periods The Group’s future tax charge will be sensitive to the geographic mix of profits earned, the tax rates in force and changes to the tax rules in the jurisdictions that the Group operates in. Tax law is, at times, complex, and it is the role of courts and tribunals to act as the final authority on the correct interpretation of tax law. In October 2023, a First-tier Tax Tribunal hearing took place between Barclays Bank PLC and HMRC in respect of the UK corporation tax treatment of an element of the finance costs associated with reserve capital instruments issued as part of the capital raising announced by Barclays in October 2008, which have since been redeemed. The judgment was handed down in March 2024 and was in HMRC’s favour. In January 2025, Barclays was granted permission from the Upper Tribunal to appeal against the judgment, and the Upper Tribunal will hear the case in 2026. A provision is carried that is expected to be sufficient to cover the tax cost (once tax attributes that are available to partially offset a potential tax liability in respect of this issue are taken into account) in the event that the appeal is unsuccessful and the existing judgment were to stand. ## Tax in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. ## Tax included directly in equity Tax included directly in equity comprises a £278m credit (2024: £135m credit) relating to share-based payments and deductible costs on issuing other equity instruments. ## Deferred tax assets and liabilities The deferred tax amounts on the balance sheet were as follows: | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | UK Tax Group | 3,408 | 4,451 | | US Intermediate Holding Company Tax Group ('IHC Tax Group') | 1,005 | 1,162 | | Barclays Bank PLC's US Branch Tax Group | 255 | 270 | | Other (outside the UK and US tax groups) | 324 | 438 | | Deferred tax asset | 4,992 | 6,321 | | Deferred tax liability | (13) | (18) | | Net deferred tax | 4,979 | 6,303 | ## UK Tax Group deferred tax asset The deferred tax asset in the UK Tax Group of £3,408m (2024: £4,451m) includes £1,031m (2024: £1,385m) relating to tax losses, with the balance relating to temporary differences. There is no time limit on utilisation of UK tax losses, and business profit forecasts indicate that these losses will be fully recovered. ## US deferred tax assets in the IHC and US Branch Tax Groups The deferred tax asset in the IHC Tax Group of £1,005m (2024: £1,162m) includes £12m (2024: £38m) relating to tax losses, with the balance relating to temporary differences. The deferred tax asset in Barclays Bank PLC’s US Branch Tax Group of £255m (2024: £270m) relates entirely to temporary differences. In relation to the IHC Tax Group, these temporary differences include £307m (2024: £365m) arising from New York State and City prior net operating loss conversion that can be carried forward and will expire in 2034. Business profit forecasts indicate that these amounts will be utilised prior to expiry. ## Other deferred tax assets (outside the UK and US tax groups) The deferred tax asset of £324m (2024: £438m) in other entities within the Group includes £54m (2024: £111m) relating to tax losses. These deferred tax assets relate to a number of different territories and their recognition is based on profit forecasts or local country law, which indicate that it is probable that those deferred tax assets will be fully recovered. Of the deferred tax asset of £324m (2024: £438m), an amount of £12m (2024: £4m) relates to entities that have suffered a loss in either the current or prior year, and for which the utilisation of the deferred tax is dependent on future taxable profits. This has been taken into account in reaching the above conclusion that these deferred tax assets will be fully recovered in the future. The table below shows movements on deferred tax assets and liabilities during the year. The amounts are different from those disclosed on the balance sheet and in the preceding table as they are presented before offsetting asset and liability balances where there is a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 | | Fixed asset timing differences | Fair value through other comprehensive income | Cash flow hedges | Retirement benefit obligations | Loan impairment allowance | Own credit | Share-based payments and deferred compensation | Other temporary differences | Tax losses carried forward | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Assets | 1,435 | 765 | 1,223 | 43 | 499 | 394 | 534 | 1,203 | 1,534 | 7,630 | | Liabilities | (117) | — | (13) | (897) | — | — | — | (300) | — | (1,327) | | As at 1 January 2025 | 1,318 | 765 | 1,210 | (854) | 499 | 394 | 534 | 903 | 1,534 | 6,303 | | Income statement | 104 | — | — | 8 | (181) | — | 46 | 287 | (416) | (152) | | Other comprehensive income and reserves | — | (297) | (874) | (11) | — | (28) | 168 | — | — | (1,042) | | Other movements | (13) | — | — | (5) | (32) | — | (17) | (42) | (21) | (130) | | | 1,409 | 468 | 336 | (862) | 286 | 366 | 731 | 1,148 | 1,097 | 4,979 | | Assets | 1,507 | 468 | 336 | 52 | 286 | 366 | 731 | 1,306 | 1,097 | 6,149 | | Liabilities | (98) | — | — | (914) | — | — | — | (158) | — | (1,170) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 1,409 | 468 | 336 | (862) | 286 | 366 | 731 | 1,148 | 1,097 | 4,979 | | Assets | 1,277 | 571 | 1,477 | 38 | 628 | 85 | 449 | 1,146 | 1,748 | 7,419 | | Liabilities | (124) | — | — | (1,014) | — | — | — | (343) | — | (1,481) | | As at 1 January 2024 | 1,153 | 571 | 1,477 | (976) | 628 | 85 | 449 | 803 | 1,748 | 5,938 | | Income statement | 159 | — | — | 4 | (110) | 1 | (34) | 101 | (214) | (93) | | Other comprehensive income and reserves | — | 194 | (269) | 118 | — | 308 | 110 | 1 | — | 462 | | Other movements | 6 | — | 2 | — | (19) | — | 9 | (2) | — | (4) | | | 1,318 | 765 | 1,210 | (854) | 499 | 394 | 534 | 903 | 1,534 | 6,303 | | Assets | 1,435 | 765 | 1,223 | 43 | 499 | 394 | 534 | 1,203 | 1,534 | 7,630 | | Liabilities | (117) | — | (13) | (897) | — | — | — | (300) | — | (1,327) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 1,318 | 765 | 1,210 | (854) | 499 | 394 | 534 | 903 | 1,534 | 6,303 | Other movements include the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates, as well as deferred tax amounts relating to acquisitions and disposals. The amount of deferred tax assets expected to be recovered after more than 12 months is £5,516m (2024: £6,663m). The amount of deferred tax liability expected to be settled after more than 12 months is £1,058m (2024: £1,044m). These amounts are before offsetting asset and liability balances where there is a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis. ## Unrecognised deferred tax ## Tax losses and temporary differences Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of gross deductible temporary differences of £288m (2024: £373m), unused tax credits of £336m (2024: £359m), and gross tax losses of £21,002m (2024: £21,295m). The tax losses include capital losses of £3,986m (2024: £3,903m). Of these tax losses, £13m (2024: £13m) expire within five years, £2,216m (2024: £6m) expire within six to ten years, £9,466m (2024: £11,789m) expire within eleven to twenty years and £9,307m (2024: £9,487m) can be carried forward indefinitely. Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of these items because it is not probable that future taxable profits and gains will be available against which they can be utilised. ## Group investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates Deferred tax is not recognised in respect of the value of the Group's investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates where the Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences, and it is probable that such differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future. The aggregate amount of these temporary differences for which deferred tax liabilities have not been recognised was £869m (2024: £920m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) For the year ended 31 December 2025 ## 10 Earnings per share | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent | 6,175 | 5,316 | 4,274 | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | million | million | million | | Basic weighted average number of shares in issue | 14,112 | 14,755 | 15,445 | | Number of potential ordinary shares | 492 | 516 | 450 | | Diluted weighted average number of shares | 14,604 | 15,271 | 15,895 | | | Basic earnings per share | | | Diluted earnings per share | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | 2025 | 2024 | | | p | p | p | p | p | | Earnings per ordinary share | 43.8 | 36.0 | 27.7 | 42.3 | 34.8 | The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the profit attributable to equity holders of the parent and the basic weighted average number of shares excluding treasury shares held in employee benefit trusts or held for trading. When calculating the diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is adjusted for the effects of all expected dilutive potential ordinary shares held in respect of Barclays PLC, totalling 492m (2024: 516m, 2023: 450m) shares. The number of share options and share awards outstanding under schemes that were considered to be potentially dilutive was 629m (2024: 713m, 2023: 750m) of which share options accounted for 152m (2024: 185m, 2023: 232m) with a strike prices ranging from £0.84 to £2.99. Of the total number of employee share options and share awards at 31 December 2025, 28m (2024: 29m, 2022: 39m) were anti-dilutive. The 643m decrease (2024: 690m decrease, 2023: 888m decrease) in the basic weighted average number of shares is primarily due to the impact of the share buyback programmes carried out each year. ## 11 Dividends on ordinary shares The Directors have approved a total dividend in respect of 2025 of 8.6p per ordinary share of 25p each. The full year dividend for 2025 of 5.6p per ordinary share will be paid on 31 March 2026 to shareholders on the Share Register on 20 February 2026. On 31 December 2025, there were 13,867m ordinary shares in issue. The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2025 do not reflect this dividend, which will be accounted for in shareholders' equity as an appropriation of retained profits in the year ending 31 December 2026. For qualifying American Depositary Receipt (ADR) holders, the 2025 full year dividend of 5.6p per ordinary share becomes 22.4p per American Depositary Share (ADS) (representing four shares). The ex-dividend date for ADR holders is 20 February 2026. The dividend record date is 20 February 2026 and dividend payment date for ADR holders is 31 March 2026. The Directors have confirmed their intention to initiate a share buyback of up to £1bn after the balance sheet date. The proposed share buyback is expected to commence in the first quarter of 2026. The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2025 do not reflect the impact of the proposed share buyback, which will be accounted for as and when shares are repurchased by the Company. The 2025 financial statements include the 2025 interim dividend of £422m (2024: £425m, 2023: £417m); a full year dividend declared in relation to 2024 of £791m (2023: £796m, 2022: £793m) and share buyback programmes totalling £2,229m (2024: £1,750m, 2023: £1,250m). Dividends and share buybacks are funded out of distributable reserves. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 370 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value # Assets and liabilities held at fair value The notes included in this section focus on assets and liabilities the Group holds and recognises at fair value. Detail regarding the Group's approach to managing market risk can be found in the Market risk management section. # 12 Trading portfolio ## Accounting for trading portfolio assets and liabilities All assets and liabilities held for trading purposes are held at fair value, with gains and losses in the changes in fair value taken to the income statement in net trading income (Note 5). | | Trading portfolio assets | | Trading portfolio liabilities | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Debt securities and other eligible bills | 94,359 | 78,014 | (33,217) | (37,050) | | Equity securities | 83,242 | 74,859 | (24,520) | (19,858) | | Traded loans | 12,249 | 13,470 | — | — | | Commodities | 211 | 110 | — | — | | Trading portfolio assets/(liabilities) | 190,061 | 166,453 | (57,737) | (56,908) | # 13 Financial assets at fair value through the income statement ## Accounting for financial assets designated at fair value Financial assets, other than those held for trading, are classified in this category if they are so irrevocably designated at inception and the use of the designation removes or significantly reduces an accounting mismatch. Subsequent changes in fair value for these instruments are recognised in the income statement in net investment income, except if reporting it in trading income reduces an accounting mismatch. The details on how the fair value amounts are derived for financial assets at fair value are described in Note 17. ## Accounting for financial assets mandatorily at fair value Financial assets that are held for trading are recognised at fair value through profit or loss. In addition, financial assets are held at fair value through profit or loss if they do not contain contractual terms that give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are SPPI, or if the financial asset is not held in a business model that is either (i) a business model to collect the contractual cash flows or (ii) a business model that is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling. | | Mandatorily at fair value | | Designated at fair value | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Loans and advances | 45,474 | 42,487 | 2,198 | 2,581 | 47,672 | 45,068 | | Debt securities | 2,911 | 2,783 | 303 | 182 | 3,214 | 2,965 | | Equity securities | 3,400 | 3,818 | — | — | 3,400 | 3,818 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 132,488 | 141,773 | — | — | 132,488 | 141,773 | | Other financial assets | 83 | 110 | — | — | 83 | 110 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 184,356 | 190,971 | 2,501 | 2,763 | 186,857 | 193,734 | # Credit risk of financial assets designated at fair value and related credit derivatives The following table shows the maximum exposure to credit risk, the changes in fair value attributable to changes in credit risk, and the cumulative changes in fair value since initial recognition for loans and advances. The table does not include debt securities designated at fair value as they have minimal exposure to credit risk due to limited gross exposure. | | Maximum exposure as at 31 December | | Changes in fair value during the year ended | | Cumulative changes in fair value from inception | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Loans and advances designated at fair value, attributable to credit risk | 2,198 | 2,581 | 2 | (1) | (6) | (8) | | Value mitigated by related credit derivatives | 193 | 405 | (2) | — | (2) | — | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 371 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## 14 Derivative financial instruments ### Accounting for derivatives Derivative instruments are contracts whose value is derived from one or more underlying financial instruments or indices defined in the contract. They include swaps, forward-rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments and primarily affect the Group's net interest income, net trading income and derivative assets and liabilities. Notional amounts of the contracts are not recorded on the balance sheet. Derivatives are used to hedge interest rate, credit risk, inflation risk, exchange rate, commodity equity exposures, and exposures to certain indices, such as house price indices and retail price indices related to non-trading positions. All derivative instruments are held at fair value through profit or loss, except for derivatives that are in a designated cash flow or net investment hedge accounting relationship. Derivatives are classified as assets when their fair value is positive or as liabilities when their fair value is negative. ### Hedge accounting The Group applies the requirements of IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement for hedge accounting purposes. The Group applies hedge accounting to represent the economic effects of its interest rate, currency and contractually-linked inflation risk management strategies. Where derivatives are held for risk management purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation and hedge effectiveness, the Group applies fair value hedge accounting, cash flow hedge accounting, or hedging of a net investment in a foreign operation, as appropriate to the risks being hedged. ### Fair value hedge accounting Changes in fair value of derivatives that qualify and are designated as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. The fair value changes adjust the carrying value of the hedged asset or liability held at amortised cost. For hedged items classified as fair value through other comprehensive income, fair value movements attributable to the hedged risk are transferred from other comprehensive income to the income statement. If hedge relationships no longer meet the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge accounting is discontinued. For fair value hedges of interest rate risk, the fair value adjustment to the hedged item is amortised to the income statement over the period to maturity of the previously designated hedge relationship, using the effective interest method. If the hedged item is sold or repaid, the unamortised fair value adjustment is recognised immediately in the income statement. ### Cash flow hedge accounting For qualifying cash flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the effective portion of the cash flow hedge is recognised initially in other comprehensive income, and then recycled to the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in the income statement immediately. When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the hedged item is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was recognised in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement. ### Hedges of net investments The Group's net investments in foreign operations, including monetary items accounted for as part of the net investment, are hedged for foreign currency risks using both derivatives and foreign currency borrowings. Hedges of net investments are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges; the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is being recognised directly in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion being recognised immediately in the income statement. The cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement on the disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation, or other reductions in the Group's investment in the operation. ## Total derivatives | | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Notional contract amount | Fair value | | Notional contract amount | Fair value | | | | | Assets | Liabilities | | Assets | Liabilities | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading | 100,471,927 | 249,743 | (240,127) | 84,125,071 | 290,991 | (278,595) | | Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management | 320,316 | 2,716 | (681) | 310,376 | 2,539 | (820) | | Derivative assets/(liabilities) | 100,792,243 | 252,459 | (240,808) | 84,435,447 | 293,530 | (279,415) | Further information on netting arrangements of derivative financial instruments can be found within Note 18. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments held for trading and held for risk management are set out in the following table: Derivatives held for trading and held for risk management | | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Notional contract amount | Fair value | | Notional contract amount | Fair value | | | | | Assets | Liabilities | | Assets | Liabilities | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Derivatives held for trading | | | | | | | | Foreign exchange derivatives | | | | | | | | OTC derivatives | 8,237,176 | 73,994 | (71,556) | 8,249,213 | 123,489 | (116,429) | | Derivatives cleared by central counterparty | 276,189 | 251 | (221) | 240,612 | 228 | (235) | | Exchange traded derivatives | 20,733 | 1 | (1) | 27,441 | 7 | (7) | | Foreign exchange derivatives | 8,534,098 | 74,246 | (71,778) | 8,517,266 | 123,724 | (116,671) | | Interest rate derivatives | | | | | | | | OTC derivatives | 32,249,542 | 90,240 | (77,130) | 26,422,379 | 91,488 | (79,925) | | Derivatives cleared by central counterparty | 42,748,421 | 1,428 | (1,131) | 36,810,961 | 1,479 | (1,344) | | Exchange traded derivatives | 11,473,370 | 1,498 | (1,457) | 7,672,496 | 2,664 | (2,698) | | Interest rate derivatives | 86,471,333 | 93,166 | (79,718) | 70,905,836 | 95,631 | (83,967) | | Credit derivatives | | | | | | | | OTC derivatives | 671,066 | 4,169 | (4,666) | 593,702 | 3,474 | (4,307) | | Derivatives cleared by central counterparty | 1,065,702 | 3,682 | (3,713) | 943,413 | 3,424 | (3,148) | | Credit derivatives | 1,736,768 | 7,851 | (8,379) | 1,537,115 | 6,898 | (7,455) | | Equity and stock index derivatives | | | | | | | | OTC derivatives | 739,183 | 22,178 | (27,092) | 598,297 | 21,965 | (26,319) | | Exchange traded derivatives | 2,769,230 | 50,161 | (51,063) | 2,347,247 | 40,947 | (42,309) | | Equity and stock index derivatives | 3,508,413 | 72,339 | (78,155) | 2,945,544 | 62,912 | (68,628) | | Commodity derivatives | | | | | | | | OTC derivatives | 4,681 | 15 | (16) | 7,084 | 17 | (32) | | Exchange traded derivatives | 216,634 | 2,126 | (2,081) | 212,226 | 1,809 | (1,842) | | Commodity derivatives | 221,315 | 2,141 | (2,097) | 219,310 | 1,826 | (1,874) | | Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading | 100,471,927 | 249,743 | (240,127) | 84,125,071 | 290,991 | (278,595) | | Total OTC derivatives | 41,901,648 | 190,596 | (180,460) | 35,870,675 | 240,433 | (227,012) | | Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty | 44,090,312 | 5,361 | (5,065) | 37,994,986 | 5,131 | (4,727) | | Total exchange traded derivatives | 14,479,967 | 53,786 | (54,602) | 10,259,410 | 45,427 | (46,856) | | Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading | 100,471,927 | 249,743 | (240,127) | 84,125,071 | 290,991 | (278,595) | | Derivatives held for risk management | | | | | | | | Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges | | | | | | | | OTC foreign exchange derivatives | 30,429 | 2,485 | (86) | 35,202 | 2,338 | (320) | | OTC interest rate derivatives | — | — | — | 105 | — | — | | Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty | 120,983 | — | — | 111,873 | — | — | | Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges | 151,412 | 2,485 | (86) | 147,180 | 2,338 | (320) | | Derivatives designated as fair value hedges | | | | | | | | OTC interest rate derivatives | 5,963 | 75 | (552) | 11,955 | 165 | (434) | | Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty | 158,552 | — | — | 147,227 | — | — | | Derivatives designated as fair value hedges | 164,515 | 75 | (552) | 159,182 | 165 | (434) | | Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments | | | | | | | | OTC foreign exchange derivatives | 4,389 | 156 | (43) | 4,014 | 36 | (66) | | Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments | 4,389 | 156 | (43) | 4,014 | 36 | (66) | | Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management | 320,316 | 2,716 | (681) | 310,376 | 2,539 | (820) | | Total OTC derivatives | 40,781 | 2,716 | (681) | 51,276 | 2,539 | (820) | | Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty | 279,535 | — | — | 259,100 | — | — | | Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management | 320,316 | 2,716 | (681) | 310,376 | 2,539 | (820) | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 373 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## Hedge accounting Hedge accounting is applied predominantly for the following risks: - Interest rate risk – arises due to a mismatch between fixed interest rates and floating interest rates. Interest rate risk also includes exposure to inflation risk for certain types of investments - Currency risk – arises due to assets or liabilities being denominated in different currencies than the functional currency of the relevant entity. At a consolidated level, currency risk also arises when the functional currency of subsidiaries are different from the parent - Contractually-linked inflation risk – arises from financial instruments within contractually specified inflation risk. The Group does not hedge inflation risk that arises from other activities In order to hedge these risks, the Group uses the following hedging instruments: - Interest rate derivatives to swap interest rate exposures into either fixed or variable rates - Currency derivatives to swap foreign currency exposures into the entity’s functional currency, and net investment exposure to local currency - Inflation derivatives to swap inflation exposure into either fixed or variable interest rates In some cases, certain items that are economically hedged may be ineligible hedged items for the purposes of IAS 39, such as core deposits and equity. In these instances, a proxy hedging solution can be utilised, whereby portfolios of floating rate assets are designated as eligible hedged items in cash flow hedges. In some hedging relationships, the Group designates risk components of hedged items as follows: - Benchmark interest rate risk as a component of interest rate risk, such as the Risk Free Rate (RFR) component - Inflation risk as a contractually specified component of a debt instrument - Exchange rate risk for foreign currency financial assets or financial liabilities - Components of cash flows of hedged items, for example, certain interest payments for part of the life of an instrument Using the benchmark interest rate risk results in other risks, such as credit risk and liquidity risk, being excluded from the hedge accounting relationship. In respect of many of the Group’s hedge accounting relationships, the hedged item and hedging instrument change frequently due to the dynamic nature of the risk management and hedge accounting strategy. The Group applies hedge accounting to dynamic scenarios, predominantly in relation to interest rate risk, with a combination of hedged items in order for its financial statements to reflect as closely as possible the economic risk management undertaken. In some cases, if the hedge accounting objective changes, the relevant hedge accounting relationship is de-designated and is replaced with a different hedge accounting relationship. Changes in the GBP value of net investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital. The Group mitigates this by matching the CET1 capital movements to the revaluation of the foreign currency RWA exposures. Net investment hedges are designated, where necessary, to reduce the exposure to movement in a particular exchange rate to within limits mandated by Risk. As far as possible, existing external currency liabilities are designated as the hedging instruments. The hedging instruments share the same risk exposures as the hedged items. Hedge effectiveness is determined with reference to quantitative tests, predominantly regression testing, but to the extent hedging instruments are exposed to different risks than the hedged items, this could result in hedge ineffectiveness or hedge accounting failures. Sources of ineffectiveness include the following: - Mismatches between the contractual terms of the hedged item and hedging instrument, including basis differences - Changes in credit risk of the hedging instruments - If a hedging relationship becomes over-hedged, for example, in hedges of net investments if the net asset value designated at the start of the period falls below the amount of the hedging instrument - Cash flow hedges using external swaps with non-zero fair values. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value Hedged items in fair value hedges | Hedged item statement of financial position classification and risk category | Accumulated fair value adjustment included in carrying amount | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Carrying amount | Total | Of which: Accumulated fair value adjustment on items no longer in a hedge relationship | Change in fair value used as a basis to determine ineffectiveness | Hedge ineffectiveness recognised in the income statements1 | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | 2025 | | | | | | | Assets | | | | | | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | 1,989 | (3,342) | (1,709) | (196) | 1 | | - Inflation risk | 280 | 188 | 79 | (9) | — | | Debt securities classified at amortised cost | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | 11,652 | 27 | (1) | 102 | 32 | | - Inflation risk | 8,704 | (1,332) | (2) | 17 | 12 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income2 | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | 48,598 | (1,502) | (410) | 31 | 167 | | - Inflation risk | 8,813 | (142) | (48) | 62 | (14) | | Total assets | 80,036 | (6,103) | (2,091) | 7 | 198 | | Liabilities | | | | | | | Debt securities in issue | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | (50,966) | 1,826 | 557 | (746) | (20) | | Subordinated liabilities | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | (11,179) | 358 | 2 | (237) | 1 | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks and customers | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | (13,058) | (14) | (1) | (1) | 3 | | Total liabilities | (75,203) | 2,170 | 558 | (984) | (16) | | Total hedged items | 4,833 | (3,933) | (1,533) | (977) | 182 | | 2024 | | | | | | | Assets | | | | | | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | 2,394 | (3,853) | (1,786) | (848) | 22 | | - Inflation risk | 318 | 219 | 102 | (17) | 7 | | Debt securities classified at amortised cost | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | 8,223 | (47) | 8 | 62 | 69 | | - Inflation risk | 10,100 | (1,400) | (37) | (575) | (40) | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | 47,293 | (1,381) | (423) | (126) | 226 | | - Inflation risk | 8,477 | (254) | (86) | (113) | (35) | | Total assets | 76,805 | (6,716) | (2,222) | (1,617) | 249 | | Liabilities | | | | | | | Debt securities in issue | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | (50,209) | 2,747 | 775 | 333 | (49) | | Subordinated liabilities | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | (10,765) | 648 | 38 | (4) | 8 | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks and customers | | | | | | | - Interest rate risk | (8,596) | (12) | (1) | (4) | (2) | | Total liabilities | (69,570) | 3,383 | 812 | 325 | (43) | | Total hedged items | 7,235 | (3,333) | (1,410) | (1,292) | 206 | Notes: 1. Hedge ineffectiveness is recognised in net interest income. 2. For items classified as fair value through other comprehensive income, the hedge accounting adjustment is not included in the carrying amount, but rather adjusts other comprehensive income. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value The following table shows the fair value hedging instruments that are carried on the Group's balance sheet: | Hedge type | Risk category | Carrying value | | | Nominal amount | Change in fair value used as a basis to determine ineffectiveness | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Derivative assets | Derivative liabilities | Loan liabilities | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | Fair value | Interest rate risk | 2 | (317) | — | 145,474 | 1,231 | | | Inflation risk | 73 | (235) | — | 19,041 | (72) | | | Total | 75 | (552) | — | 164,515 | 1,159 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | Fair value | Interest rate risk | 26 | (3) | — | 138,354 | 861 | | | Inflation risk | 139 | (431) | — | 20,828 | 637 | | | Total | 165 | (434) | — | 159,182 | 1,498 | The following table profiles the expected notional values of current hedging instruments in future years: | | 2025 | 2026 | 2027 | 2028 | 2029 | 2030 | 2031 and later | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Fair value hedges of: | | | | | | | | | Interest rate risk (outstanding notional amount) | 145,474 | 121,544 | 107,350 | 94,230 | 81,454 | 60,932 | 48,248 | | Inflation risk (outstanding notional amount) | 19,041 | 17,794 | 15,874 | 13,660 | 11,364 | 9,332 | 7,769 | There are 2,194 (2024: 2,212) interest rate risk fair value hedges with an average fixed rate of 3.33% (2024: 3.29%) across the relationships and 188 (2024: 196) inflation risk fair value hedges with an average rate of 0.75% (2024: 0.59%) across the relationships. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value Hedged items in cash flow hedges and hedges of net investments in foreign operations | Description of hedge relationship and hedged risk | Change in value of hedged item used as the basis for recognising ineffectiveness | Balance in cash flow hedging reserve for continuing hedges | Balance in currency translation reserve for continuing hedges | Balances remaining in cash flow hedging reserve for which hedge accounting is no longer applied | Balances remaining in currency translation reserve for which hedge accounting is no longer applied | Hedging gains or losses recognised in other comprehensive income | Hedge ineffectiveness recognised in the income statement1 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | 2025 | | | | | | | | | Assets | | | | | | | | | Cash flow hedge of: | | | | | | | | | Interest rate risk | | | | | | | | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | (806) | (193) | — | 642 | — | (806) | 12 | | Cash and balances at central banks | (782) | (227) | — | 805 | — | (782) | 6 | | Foreign exchange risk | | | | | | | | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | (1,638) | 120 | — | — | — | (1,638) | 18 | | Debt securities classified at amortised cost | (309) | (23) | — | — | — | (309) | 1 | | Inflation risk | | | | | | | | | Debt securities classified at amortised cost | (113) | (143) | — | (21) | — | (113) | 8 | | Liabilities | | | | | | | | | Cash flow hedge of: | | | | | | | | | Foreign exchange risk | | | | | | | | | Debt securities in issue | 9 | 16 | — | — | — | 9 | — | | Subordinated liabilities | 5 | 4 | — | — | — | 5 | — | | Total cash flow hedge | (3,634) | (446) | — | 1,426 | — | (3,634) | 45 | | Hedge of net investment in foreign operations | | | | | | | | | USD foreign operations | (589) | — | 1,118 | — | — | (589) | — | | EUR foreign operations | 299 | — | 89 | — | — | 299 | — | | Other foreign operations | (156) | — | (39) | — | (13) | (156) | — | | Total foreign operations | (446) | — | 1,168 | — | (13) | (446) | — | | 2024 | | | | | | | | | Assets | | | | | | | | | Cash flow hedge of: | | | | | | | | | Interest rate risk | | | | | | | | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | 362 | 608 | — | 1,273 | — | 362 | 18 | | Cash and balances at central banks | 443 | 674 | — | 1,389 | — | 443 | 8 | | Foreign exchange risk | | | | | | | | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | 300 | 106 | — | — | — | 300 | 5 | | Debt securities classified at amortised cost | (449) | 142 | — | — | — | (449) | — | | Inflation risk | | | | | | | | | Debt securities classified at amortised cost | 118 | (73) | — | 25 | — | 118 | — | | Liabilities | | | | | | | | | Cash flow hedge of: | | | | | | | | | Foreign exchange risk | | | | | | | | | Subordinated liabilities | 34 | (12) | — | — | — | 34 | — | | Total cash flow hedge | 808 | 1,445 | — | 2,687 | — | 808 | 31 | | Hedge of net investment in foreign operations | | | | | | | | | USD foreign operations | 160 | — | 1,520 | — | — | 160 | — | | EUR foreign operations | (242) | — | (209) | — | — | (242) | — | | Other foreign operations | (18) | — | 100 | — | 23 | (18) | — | | Total foreign operations | (100) | — | 1,411 | — | 23 | (100) | — | Note: 1 Hedge ineffectiveness is recognised in net interest income. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value The following table shows the cash flow and net investment hedging instruments that are carried on the Group's balance sheet: | Hedge type | Risk category | Carrying value | | | Nominal amount | Change in fair value used as a basis to determine ineffectiveness | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Derivative assets | Derivative liabilities | Loan liabilities | | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | Cash flow | Interest rate risk | — | — | — | 114,610 | 1,606 | | | Foreign exchange risk | 2,485 | (86) | — | 30,429 | 1,952 | | | Inflation risk | — | — | — | 6,373 | 121 | | | Total | 2,485 | (86) | — | 151,412 | 3,679 | | Net investment | Foreign exchange risk | 156 | (43) | (10,688) | 15,077 | 446 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | Cash flow | Interest rate risk | — | — | — | 105,600 | (779) | | | Foreign exchange risk | 2,338 | (320) | — | 35,202 | 120 | | | Inflation risk | — | — | — | 6,378 | (118) | | | Total | 2,338 | (320) | — | 147,180 | (777) | | Net investment | Foreign exchange risk | 36 | (66) | (12,189) | 16,203 | 100 | There are 20 (2024: 45) foreign exchange risk cash flow hedges with an average foreign exchange rate of 162.69 JPY:1 GBP (2024: 142.93 JPY: 1 GBP) across the relationships, 11 (2024: 11) foreign exchange risk cash flow hedges with an average foreign exchange rate of 1.26 USD:1 GBP (2024: 1.26 USD:1 GBP) across the relationships, 14 (2024: 11) foreign exchange risk cash flow hedges with an average foreign exchange rate of 1.97 AUD:1 GBP (2024: 1.94 AUD:1 GBP) across the relationships and 2 (2024: 2) foreign exchange risk cash flow hedges with an average foreign exchange rate of 1.12 CHF:1 GBP (2024: 1.12 CHF:1 GBP) across the relationships. The effect on the income statement and other comprehensive income of recycling amounts in respect of cash flow hedges and net investment hedges of foreign operations is set out in the following table: | | 2025 | | 2024 | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Amount recycled from other comprehensive income due to hedged item affecting income statement | Amount recycled from other comprehensive income due to sale of investment, or cash flows no longer expected to occur | Amount recycled from other comprehensive income due to hedged item affecting income statement | Amount recycled from other comprehensive income due to sale of investment, or cash flows no longer expected to occur | | Description of hedge relationship and hedged risk | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Cash flow hedge of interest rate risk | | | | | | Recycled to net interest income | (1,293) | — | (1,830) | — | | Cash flow hedge of foreign exchange risk | | | | | | Recycled to trading income | 1,835 | (20) | (12) | — | | Hedge of net investment in foreign operations | — | — | — | — | | Recycled to trading income | — | (18) | — | (1) | A detailed reconciliation of the movements of the cash flow hedging reserve and the currency translation reserve is as follows: | | 2025 | | 2024 | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Cash flow hedging reserve | Currency translation reserve | Cash flow hedging reserve | Currency translation reserve | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Balance on 1 January | (2,930) | 3,625 | (3,707) | 3,671 | | Currency translation movements | 41 | (1,595) | 24 | (160) | | Hedging gains/(losses) for the year | 3,634 | 446 | (808) | 100 | | Amounts reclassified in relation to cash flows affecting profit or loss | (522) | 18 | 1,842 | 1 | | Tax | (889) | (1) | (281) | 13 | | Balance on 31 December | (666) | 2,493 | (2,930) | 3,625 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 378 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## 15 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income ### Accounting for financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) Financial assets that are debt instruments held in a business model that is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling and that contain contractual terms that give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are SPPI are measured at FVOCI. They are subsequently remeasured at fair value and changes therein (except for those relating to impairment, interest income and foreign currency exchange gains and losses) are recognised in other comprehensive income until the assets are sold. Interest (calculated using the effective interest method) is recognised in the income statement in net interest income (Note 3). Upon disposal, the cumulative gain or loss in other comprehensive income is recognised in net investment income (Note 6). In determining whether the business model is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets, it is determined that both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets are integral to achieving the objective of the business model. The Group will consider past sales and expectations about future sales to establish if the business model is achieved. For equity securities that are not held for trading, the Group may make an irrevocable election on initial recognition to present subsequent changes in the fair value of the instrument in other comprehensive income (except for dividend income which is recognised in profit or loss). | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Debt securities and other eligible bills | 72,023 | 74,772 | | Equity securities | 4 | 4 | | Loans and advances | 2,367 | 3,283 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 74,394 | 78,059 | ## 16 Financial liabilities designated at fair value ### Accounting for liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (Note 14). In accordance with IFRS 9, financial liabilities may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement within net trading income (Note 5) and net investment income (Note 6). Movements in own credit are reported through other comprehensive income, unless the effects of changes in the liability's credit risk would create or enlarge an accounting mismatch in P&L. In these scenarios, all gains and losses on that liability (including the effects of changes in the credit risk of the liability) are presented in P&L. On derecognition of the financial liability, no amount relating to own credit risk is recycled to the income statement. The details on how the fair value amounts are arrived at for financial liabilities designated at fair value are described in Note 17. | | 2025 | | 2024 | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Fair value | Contractual amount due on maturity | Fair value | Contractual amount due on maturity | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Debt securities | 86,676 | 101,106 | 80,218 | 96,316 | | Deposits | 48,960 | 51,225 | 46,383 | 48,201 | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing | 158,452 | 158,870 | 155,606 | 156,180 | | Other financial liabilities | 20 | 20 | 17 | 17 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 294,108 | 311,221 | 282,224 | 300,714 | The cumulative own credit net loss recognised is £1,335m (2024: £1,434m loss). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value # 17 Fair value of financial instruments ## Accounting for financial assets and liabilities – fair value Financial instruments that are held for trading are recognised at fair value through profit or loss. In addition, financial assets are held at fair value through profit or loss if they do not contain contractual terms that give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are SPPI, or if the financial asset is not held in a business model that is either (i) a business model to collect the contractual cash flows or (ii) a business model that is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling. Subsequent changes in fair value for these instruments are recognised in the income statement in net investment income, except if reporting it in trading income reduces an accounting mismatch. Wherever possible, fair value is determined by reference to a quoted market price for that instrument. For many of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, including derivatives, quoted prices are not available and valuation models are used to estimate fair value. The models calculate the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific contract and then discount these values back to a present value. These models use as their basis independently sourced market inputs including, for example, interest rate yield curves, equities and commodities prices, option volatilities and currency rates. For financial liabilities measured at fair value, the carrying amount also reflects the effect on fair value of changes in own credit spreads derived from observable market data, such as in primary issuance and redemption activity for structured notes. The Group uses the portfolio exemption in IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement to measure the fair value of groups of financial assets and liabilities. Financial instruments are measured using the price that would be received to sell a net long position (i.e. an asset) for a particular risk exposure or to transfer a net short position (i.e. a liability) for a particular risk exposure in an orderly transaction between market participants at the balance sheet date under current market conditions. Accordingly, the Group measures the fair value of the group of financial assets and liabilities consistently with how market participants would price the net risk exposure at the measurement date. On initial recognition, the transaction price often reflects the fair value of the asset or liability. However, in some circumstances, fair value may differ to the transaction price when there is information to the contrary. If the fair value of the instrument is observable from current market transactions in the same instrument, or based on a valuation technique whose inputs only include observable inputs, then the instrument is initially recognised at fair value and the difference to the transaction price is recognised in profit or loss. For valuations that have made use of unobservable inputs, the difference between the model valuation and the initial transaction price (day one profit) is recognised in profit or loss either: on a straight-line basis over the term of the transaction; or over the period until all inputs will become observable where appropriate; or released in full when previously unobservable inputs become observable. Various factors influence the availability of observable inputs, and these may vary from product-to-product and change over time. Factors include the depth of activity in the relevant market, the type of product, whether the product is new and not widely traded in the marketplace, the maturity of market modelling and the nature of the transaction (bespoke or generic). To the extent that valuation is based on models or inputs that are not observable in the market, the determination of fair value can be more subjective, dependent on the significance of the unobservable input to the overall valuation. Unobservable inputs are determined based on the best information available, for example, by reference to similar assets, similar maturities, or other analytical techniques. The sensitivity of valuations used in the financial statements to possible changes in significant unobservable inputs is shown on page 388. ## Valuation Control Framework The Barclays Group has an established valuation control framework that oversees valuation methodologies, standards and procedures. ## Critical accounting estimates and judgements Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include: | Judgements | Estimates | | --- | --- | | Classification of financial instruments with significant unobservable inputs as Level 3. | Valuation of Level 3 assets and liabilities are typically determined by referencing observable inputs, historical data, or employing other analytical techniques. | These estimates are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of financial assets and financial liabilities measured at fair value within the next financial year. The valuation of financial instruments often involves a significant degree of judgement and complexity, in particular where valuation models make use of unobservable inputs ('Level 3' assets and liabilities). This note provides information on these instruments, including the related unrealised gains and losses recognised in the period, a description of significant valuation techniques and unobservable inputs, and a sensitivity analysis. For assets and liabilities traded in active markets, it is determined that the market valuation includes a representation of the prevailing view of climate-related risks. Within less active markets, for counterparties and instruments identified as being more susceptible to climate change risk, an impact assessment was performed through increasing their probability of default. The change in valuation of the assets and liabilities from this assessment was sufficiently immaterial to necessitate any amendment to the reported 2025 year-end valuations. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## Valuation Assets and liabilities are classified according to a hierarchy that reflects the observability of significant market inputs. The three levels of the fair value hierarchy are defined below, with judgement applied in determining the boundary between Level 2 and 3 classifications. ## Valuation techniques using quoted market prices – Level 1 Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 1 if their value is observable in an active market. Such instruments are valued by reference to unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets where the quoted price is readily available, and the price represents actual and regularly occurring market transactions. An active market is one in which transactions occur with sufficient volume and frequency to provide pricing information on an ongoing basis. ## Valuation techniques using observable inputs – Level 2 Assets and liabilities classified as Level 2 have been valued using models whose inputs are observable either directly or indirectly. A valuation input is considered observable if it can be directly observed from transactions in an active market, or if there is compelling external evidence demonstrating an executable exit price. Valuations based on observable inputs include assets and liabilities, such as swaps and forwards that are valued using market standard pricing techniques, and options that are commonly traded in markets where all the inputs to the market standard pricing models are observable. For certain instruments that derive a fair value using unobservable inputs that are not considered significant, then the asset or liability may be classified as Level 2. ## Valuation techniques using significant unobservable inputs – Level 3 Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 3 if their valuation incorporates significant inputs that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). Unobservable input levels are generally determined via reference to observable inputs, historical observations or using other analytical techniques. The following table shows the Group's assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by the fair value hierarchy and balance sheet classification: | Assets and liabilities held at fair value | | | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | | | | 2024 | | | | | | | Valuation techniques used | | | | Valuation techniques used | | | | | | | Quoted market price Level 1 | Observable inputs Level 2 | Significant unobservable inputs Level 3 | Total | Quoted market price Level 1 | Observable inputs Level 2 | Significant unobservable inputs Level 3 | Total | | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | | Trading portfolio assets | 111,158 | 68,556 | 10,347 | 190,061 | 77,761 | 78,577 | 10,115 | 166,453 | | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 5,140 | 173,140 | 8,577 | 186,857 | 3,526 | 181,784 | 8,424 | 193,734 | | | Derivative financial assets | 108 | 250,639 | 1,712 | 252,459 | 101 | 291,352 | 2,077 | 293,530 | | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 51,717 | 19,578 | 3,099 | 74,394 | 25,913 | 48,407 | 3,739 | 78,059 | | | Investment property | — | — | 43 | 43 | — | — | 9 | 9 | | | Total assets | 168,123 | 511,913 | 23,778 | 703,814 | 107,301 | 600,120 | 24,364 | 731,785 | | | Trading portfolio liabilities | (42,917) | (14,733) | (87) | (57,737) | (27,694) | (28,819) | (395) | (56,908) | | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | (1,702) | (287,532) | (4,874) | (294,108) | (181) | (278,785) | (3,258) | (282,224) | | | Derivative financial liabilities | (93) | (237,650) | (3,065) | (240,808) | (86) | (276,148) | (3,181) | (279,415) | | | Total liabilities | (44,712) | (539,915) | (8,026) | (592,653) | (27,961) | (583,752) | (6,834) | (618,547) | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value The following table shows the Group's Level 3 assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by product type: | As at31 December 2025 | Loans | Corporate debt | Asset backed securities | Government and Government sponsored debt | Private equity investments | Issued debt | Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements | Interest rate derivatives | Equity derivatives | Other products1 | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Trading portfolio assets | 5,667 | 1,849 | 874 | 1,513 | — | — | — | — | — | 444 | 10,347 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 5,990 | 905 | 188 | 33 | 1,260 | — | 97 | — | — | 104 | 8,577 | | Derivative financial assets | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 759 | 522 | 431 | 1,712 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 2,235 | 25 | 756 | 79 | 4 | — | — | — | — | — | 3,099 | | Investment property | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 43 | 43 | | Total assets | 13,892 | 2,779 | 1,818 | 1,625 | 1,264 | — | 97 | 759 | 522 | 1,022 | 23,778 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | — | (36) | — | (34) | — | — | — | — | — | (17) | (87) | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | — | — | — | — | (20) | (3,760) | (887) | — | — | (207) | (4,874) | | Derivative financial liabilities | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (612) | (1,602) | (851) | (3,065) | | Total liabilities | — | (36) | — | (34) | (20) | (3,760) | (887) | (612) | (1,602) | (1,075) | (8,026) | | As at31 December 2024 | Loans | Corporate debt | Asset backed securities | Government and Government sponsored debt | Private equity investments | Issued debt | Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements | Interest rate derivatives | Equity derivatives | Other products1 | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Trading portfolio assets | 6,146 | 1,590 | 991 | 1,018 | — | — | — | — | — | 370 | 10,115 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 5,455 | 913 | 139 | 35 | 1,166 | — | 539 | — | — | 177 | 8,424 | | Derivative financial assets | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 1,193 | 481 | 403 | 2,077 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 2,858 | 108 | 757 | 12 | 4 | — | — | — | — | — | 3,739 | | Investment property | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 9 | 9 | | Total assets | 14,459 | 2,611 | 1,887 | 1,065 | 1,170 | — | 539 | 1,193 | 481 | 959 | 24,364 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | — | (374) | (6) | — | — | — | — | — | — | (15) | (395) | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | — | — | — | — | (17) | (1,842) | (1,379) | — | — | (20) | (3,258) | | Derivative financial liabilities | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (1,013) | (1,219) | (949) | (3,181) | | Total liabilities | — | (374) | (6) | — | (17) | (1,842) | (1,379) | (1,013) | (1,219) | (984) | (6,834) | Note: 1 Other products include certificate of deposits, funds and fund-linked products, equity cash products, investment property, credit derivatives and foreign exchange derivatives. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 382 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## Valuation techniques The valuation techniques and observability used are described below: ### Loans **Description**: A drawn lending facility issued to corporate clients and customers. Also includes Prime Brokerage Margin lending, and other similar secured lending agreements. The agreements are primarily short-term in nature. **Valuation**: Loans are valued either using a price-based approach, or through models that discount expected future cash flows based on interest rates and loan spreads. Prime Brokerage Margin Lending transactions are generally valued by discounting the expected future cash flows, using industry standard models that incorporate market interest rates and repurchase rates, based on the specific details of the transaction. **Observability**: Within this loan population, the price or loan spread may be generally unobservable. For Margin Lending inputs are deemed observable up to liquid maturities, and are determined based on the specific features of the transaction. Unobservable inputs are generally set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques, or inferred via another reasonable method. ### Corporate debt **Description**: Primarily corporate bonds. **Valuation**: Corporate bonds are valued using observable market prices sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing sources. **Observability**: Prices for actively-traded bonds are considered observable. Unobservable bond prices are generally determined by reference to bond yields or credit default swap (CDS) spreads for actively-traded instruments issued by or referencing the same (or a similar) issuer. ### Asset backed securities **Description**: Securities that are linked to the cash flows of a pool of referenced assets via securitisation. The category includes residential mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities, collateralised debt obligations (CDOs), collateralised loan obligations (CLOs) and other asset backed securities. **Valuation**: Where available, valuations are based on observable market prices sourced from broker quotes and inter-dealer prices and external vendors who provide pricing. Otherwise, valuations are determined using industry standard discounted cash flow analysis that calculates the fair value based on valuation inputs, such as constant default rate, conditional prepayment rate, loss given default and yield. These inputs are determined by reference to a number of sources, including proxying to observed transactions, market indices or market research, and by assessing underlying collateral performance. Proxying to observed transactions, indices or research requires an assessment and comparison of the relevant securities' underlying attributes, including collateral, tranche, vintage, underlying asset composition (historical losses, borrower characteristics and loan attributes, such as loan to value ratio and geographic concentration) and credit ratings (original and current). **Observability**: Where an asset backed product does not have an observable market price and the valuation is determined using a discounted cash flow analysis, the instrument is considered unobservable. ### Government and Government sponsored debt **Description**: Government bonds, supra sovereign bonds and agency bonds. **Valuation**: Liquid bonds that are actively traded through an exchange or clearing house are marked to the levels observed in these markets. Other actively traded bonds are valued using observable market prices sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing sources. **Observability**: Observability assessment is performed with reference to bond market trading data. Bonds are assessed at Level 1 if they are traded in active market with a quoted price in line with requirements of IFRS 13. Unobservable bonds prices are generally determined by reference to bond yields for actively traded bonds from the same (or a similar) issuer. ### Private equity investments **Description**: Includes investments in equity holdings in operating companies not quoted on a public exchange. **Valuation**: Private equity investments are valued in accordance with the 'International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines' that require the use of a number of individual pricing benchmarks, such as the prices of recent transactions in the same or similar entities, discounted cash flow analysis and comparison with the earnings or revenue multiples of listed companies. While the valuation of unquoted equity instruments is subjective by nature, the relevant methodologies are commonly applied by other market participants and have been consistently applied over time. **Observability**: Inputs are considered observable if there is active trading in a liquid market of products with significant sensitivity to the inputs. Unobservable inputs include earnings or revenue estimates, multiples of comparative companies, marketability discounts and discount rates. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 383 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## Issued debt Description: Debt notes issued by Barclays. Valuation: Issued debt is valued using discounted cash flow techniques incorporating various inputs observed for each instrument. Observability: Barclays issued notes are generally observable. Structured notes are debt instruments containing embedded derivatives. Where either an input to the embedded derivative or the debt instrument is deemed unobservable and significant to the overall valuation of the note, the structured note is classified as Level 3. ## Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements Description: Includes securities purchased under resale agreements, securities sold under repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending agreements. The agreements are primarily short-term in nature. Valuation: Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are generally valued by discounting the expected future cash flows, using industry standard models that incorporate market interest rates and repurchase rates based on the specific details of the transaction. Observability: Inputs are deemed observable up to liquid maturities or for consensus pricing with low pricing-range and are determined based on the specific features of the transaction. Unobservable inputs are generally set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method. ## Interest rate derivatives Description: Derivatives linked to interest rates or inflation indices. The category includes futures, interest rate and inflation swaps, swaptions, caps, floors, inflation options and other exotic interest rate derivatives. Valuation: Interest rate and inflation derivatives are generally valued using curves of forward rates constructed from market data to project and discount the expected future cash flows of trades. Instruments with optionality are valued using volatilities implied from market inputs and use industry standard or bespoke models depending on the product type. Observability: In general, inputs are considered observable up to liquid maturities that are determined separately for each input and underlying. Unobservable inputs are generally set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method. ## Equity derivatives Description: Exchange traded or OTC derivatives linked to equity indices and single names. The category includes vanilla and exotic equity products. Valuation: Equity derivatives are valued using industry standard models. Valuation inputs include stock prices, dividends, volatilities, interest rates, equity repurchase curves and, for multi-asset products, correlations. Observability: In general, valuation inputs are observable up to liquid maturities that are determined separately for each input and underlying. Unobservable inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method. ## Foreign exchange derivatives Description: Derivatives linked to the foreign exchange (FX) market. The category includes FX forward contracts, FX swaps and FX options. The majority are traded as over the counter (OTC) derivatives. Valuation: FX derivatives are valued using industry standard and bespoke models, depending on the product type. Valuation inputs include FX rates, interest rates, FX volatilities, interest rate volatilities, FX interest rate correlations and others, as appropriate. Observability: FX correlations, forwards and volatilities are generally observable up to liquid maturities that are determined separately for each input and underlying. Unobservable inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method. ## Credit derivatives Description: Derivatives linked to the credit spread of a referenced entity, index or basket of referenced entities or a pool of referenced assets (e.g. a securitised product). The category includes single name and index credit default swaps (CDS) and total return swaps (TRS). Valuation: Credit derivatives are valued on industry standard models, using curves of credit spreads as the principal input. Credit spreads are observed directly from broker data, third party vendors or priced to proxies. Observability: Credit derivative contracts referencing entities that are actively traded are generally considered observable. Other valuation inputs are considered observable, if products with significant sensitivity to the inputs are actively traded in a liquid market. Unobservable valuation inputs are generally determined with reference to recent benchmark transactions or inferred from observable trades of the same issuer or similar entities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 384 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## Assets and liabilities transferred between levels During the year ended 31 December 2025, there were £42.7bn assets and £(9.9)bn liabilities transferred from Level 2 to Level 1 (year ended 31 December 2024: there were no material transfers). Additionally, there were £0.8bn assets and £(2.8)bn liabilities transferred from Level 2 to Level 3 (year ended 31 December 2024: there were no material transfers). These transfers reflect enhancement to the Group's levelling policy, including the use of additional data in the active market assessment of Level 1 government bonds and updated assessments of unobservable market parameters for government bonds and issued debt, resulting in an increase in Level 3 balances. ## Level 3 movement analysis The following table summarises the movements in the Level 3 balances during the year. Transfers have been reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year. Asset and liability transfers between Level 2 and Level 3 are primarily due to i) an increase or decrease in observable market activity related to an input or ii) a change in the significance of the unobservable input, with assets and liabilities classified as Level 3 if an unobservable input is deemed significant. Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities | | As at 1 January 2025 | Purchases | Sales | Issues | Settlements | Total gains and (losses) in the period recognised in the income statement | | Total gains and (losses) in the period recognised in OCI | Transfers | | As at 31 December 2025 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | | | | Trading income2 | Other income | | In | Out | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Trading portfolio assets | 10,115 | 5,810 | (4,157) | — | (1,554) | 151 | — | — | 382 | (400) | 10,347 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 8,424 | 2,858 | (1,202) | — | (1,436) | 95 | 72 | — | 60 | (294) | 8,577 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 3,739 | 922 | (640) | — | (1,030) | 4 | (2) | — | 118 | (12) | 3,099 | | Investment property | 9 | 34 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 43 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | (395) | (55) | 25 | — | 352 | 2 | — | — | (28) | 12 | (87) | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | (3,258) | — | 28 | (503) | 1,020 | 43 | (3) | — | (2,954) | 753 | (4,874) | | Net derivative financial instruments1 | (1,104) | (447) | 220 | — | — | (44) | — | — | 3 | 19 | (1,353) | | Total | 17,530 | 9,122 | (5,726) | (503) | (2,648) | 251 | 67 | — | (2,419) | 78 | 15,752 | Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities | | As at 1 January 2024 | Purchases | Sales | Issues | Settlements | Total gains and (losses) in the period recognised in the income statement | | Total gains and (losses) in the period recognised in OCI | Transfers | | As at 31 December 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | | | | Trading income2 | Other income | | In | Out | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Trading portfolio assets | 6,509 | 5,848 | (1,817) | — | (865) | (9) | — | — | 775 | (326) | 10,115 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 8,249 | 2,704 | (2,072) | — | (793) | (1) | 218 | — | 207 | (88) | 8,424 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 1,078 | 3,116 | (43) | — | — | 3 | 22 | (1) | 49 | (485) | 3,739 | | Investment property | 2 | 9 | (2) | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 9 | | Trading portfolio liabilities | (368) | (26) | 20 | — | — | (7) | — | — | (15) | 1 | (395) | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | (1,222) | (415) | 19 | (1,146) | 143 | (74) | (20) | — | (893) | 350 | (3,258) | | Net derivative financial instruments1 | (1,113) | (568) | (6) | — | (16) | (64) | (1) | — | 163 | 501 | (1,104) | | Total | 13,135 | 10,668 | (3,901) | (1,146) | (1,531) | (152) | 219 | (1) | 286 | (47) | 17,530 | Notes: 1 The derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £1,712m (2024: £2,077m) and derivative financial liabilities are £(3,065)m (2024: £(3,181)m). 2 Trading income represents gains and losses on Level 3 financial instruments which in the majority are offset by losses and gains on financial instruments disclosed in Level 2. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value # Unrealised gains and losses on Level 3 assets and liabilities The following table discloses the unrealised gains and losses recognised in the year, arising on Level 3 assets and liabilities held at year end. Unrealised gains and (losses) recognised during the period on Level 3 assets and liabilities held at year end | | 2025 | | | | 2024 | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Income statement | | Other comprehensive income | Total | Income statement | | Other comprehensive income | Total | | | Trading income1 | Other income | | | Trading income1 | Other income | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Trading portfolio assets | 36 | — | — | 36 | (9) | — | — | (9) | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 94 | 72 | — | 166 | 2 | 94 | — | 96 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 4 | (1) | — | 3 | 3 | 22 | (1) | 24 | | Investment property | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Trading portfolio liabilities | 1 | — | — | 1 | (7) | — | — | (7) | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 43 | (3) | — | 40 | (77) | (9) | — | (86) | | Net derivative financial instruments | (44) | — | — | (44) | (57) | (1) | — | (58) | | Total | 134 | 68 | — | 202 | (145) | 106 | (1) | (40) | Note: 1 Trading income represents gains and losses on Level 3 financial instruments which in the majority are offset by losses and gains on financial instruments disclosed in Level 2. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value # Significant unobservable inputs The following table discloses the valuation techniques and significant unobservable inputs for material products recognised at fair value and classified as Level 3 along with the range of values used for those significant unobservable inputs: | | Valuation technique(s)1 | Significant unobservable inputs | 2025 Range | | 2024 Range | | Units2 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | Min | Max | Min | Max | | | Derivative financial instruments3 | | | | | | | | | Interest rate derivatives | Discounted cash flows | Inflation forwards | n/m4 | n/m4 | 3 | 3 | % | | | | Credit spread | 8 | 2,070 | 14 | 1,972 | bps | | | | Yield | — | 5 | — | 12 | % | | | Option model | Interest rate volatility | 29 | 152 | 19 | 175 | bps vol | | | | FX - IR correlation | (36) | 30 | (36) | 30 | % | | | | IR - IR correlation | 35 | 98 | 33 | 98 | % | | | | IR - Inflation correlation | 10 | 10 | 10 | 10 | % | | | | Inflation - Inflation correlation | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | % | | Equity derivatives | Discounted cash flow | Discount margin | (190) | 350 | (215) | 351 | bps | | | Option model | Equity volatility | 1 | 88 | 1 | 133 | % | | | | Equity - equity correlation | 15 | 100 | 40 | 100 | % | | Non-derivative financial instruments | | | | | | | | | Loans | Discounted cash flows | Loan spread | 30 | 942 | 35 | 908 | bps | | | | Credit spread | 194 | 420 | 194 | 1,011 | bps | | | | Discount margin | 780 | 1,170 | 230 | 345 | bps | | | | Yield | 5 | 8 | 2 | 18 | % | | | Comparable pricing | Comparable price | — | 186 | — | 240 | points | | Asset backed securities | Comparable pricing | Comparable price | — | 530 | — | 125 | points | | | Discounted cash flows | Discount margin | n/m4 | n/m4 | (137) | (25) | bps | | | Option Model | Equity volatility | n/m4 | n/m4 | 15 | 32 | % | | Private equity investments | EBITDA multiple | EBITDA multiple | 6 | 17 | 2 | 7 | Multiple | | | Earnings multiple | Earnings multiple | 1 | 11 | 3 | 17 | Multiple | | | Discounted cash flow | Credit spread | 297 | 522 | 210 | 430 | bps | | | | Discount margin | 8 | 10 | 8 | 10 | % | | Corporate debt | Comparable pricing | Comparable price | — | 239 | — | 2,322 | points | | Government and Government sponsored debt | Comparable pricing | Comparable price | — | 231 | — | 123 | points | | Issued debt | Discounted cash flows | Credit spread | 80 | 120 | 50 | 198 | bps | | | Option model | Equity volatility | 1 | 95 | 1 | 111 | % | | | | Interest rate volatility | 37 | 178 | 19 | 211 | bps vol | | Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements | Discounted cash flows | Repo spread | 100 | 148 | 14 | 186 | bps | # Notes: 1. A range has not been provided for Net Asset Value as there would be a wide range reflecting the diverse nature of the positions. 2. The units used to disclose ranges for significant unobservable inputs are percentages, points and basis points. Points are a percentage of par; for example, 100 points equals 100% of par. A basis point equals 1/100th of 1%; for example, 150 basis points equals 1.5%. 3. Certain derivative instruments are classified as Level 3 due to a significant unobservable credit spread input into the calculation of the Credit Valuation Adjustment for the instruments. 4. Non-material Level 3 balances for these unobservable inputs. The following section describes the significant unobservable inputs identified in the table above, and the sensitivity of fair value measurement of the instruments categorised as Level 3 assets or liabilities to increases in significant unobservable inputs. Where sensitivities are described, the inverse relationship will also generally apply. Where reliable interrelationships can be identified between significant unobservable inputs used in fair value measurement, a description of those interrelationships is included below. # Forwards A price or rate that is applicable to a financial transaction that will take place in the future. In general, a significant increase in a forward in isolation will result in a fair value increase for the contracted receiver of the underlying (currency, bond, commodity, etc.), but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 387 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## Credit spread Credit spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Credit spreads reflect the additional yield that a market participant demands for taking on exposure to the credit risk of an instrument and forms part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation. In general, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation will result in a fair value decrease for a cash asset. For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation can result in a fair value increase or decrease, depending on the specific terms of the instrument. ## Volatility Volatility is a measure of the variability or uncertainty in return for a given derivative underlying. It is an estimate of how much a particular underlying instrument input or index will change in value over time. In general, volatilities are implied from observed option prices. For unobservable options the implied volatility may reflect additional assumptions about the nature of the underlying risk, and the strike/maturity profile of a specific contract. In general, a significant increase in volatility in isolation will result in a fair value increase for the holder of a simple option, but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument. There may be interrelationships between unobservable volatilities and other unobservable inputs (e.g. when equity prices fall, implied equity volatilities generally rise) but these are generally specific to individual markets and may vary over time. ## Correlation Correlation is a measure of the relationship between the movements of two variables. Correlation can be a significant input into the valuation of derivative contracts with more than one underlying instrument. Credit correlation generally refers to the correlation between default processes for the separate names that make up the reference pool of a collateralised debt obligation (CDO) structure. A significant increase in correlation in isolation can result in a fair value increase or decrease, depending on the specific terms of the instrument. ## Discount Margin Discount margin represents the additional yield over a benchmark rate that market participants require to compensate for credit risk, liquidity risk and other factors associated with the instrument. It is commonly used in discounted cash flow valuations. In general, a significant increase in discount margin in isolation will result in a fair value decrease for the instrument, as higher required returns reduce present value. The sensitivity depends on the specific terms of the instrument. ## Repo Spread Repo spread refers to the difference between the repurchase agreement rate and a benchmark funding rate. It reflects market conditions, counterparty credit risk and liquidity premiums that influence the cost of financing through repos. In general, a significant increase in repo spread in isolation will result in a fair value decrease for the instrument, as higher financing costs reduce its attractiveness. The sensitivity is dependent on the specific contractual terms. ## Comparable price Comparable instrument prices are used in valuation by calculating an implied yield (or spread over a liquid benchmark) from the price of a comparable observable instrument, then adjusting that yield (or spread) to account for relevant differences, such as maturity or credit quality. Alternatively, a price-to-price basis can be assumed between the comparable and unobservable instruments in order to establish a value. Loans include a portfolio of loans extended to clients within the Group's leveraged finance business. Leveraged finance loans are originated where Barclays provides financing commitments to clients to facilitate strategic transactions, such as leverage buyouts and acquisitions. The sensitivity of the portfolio to unobservable inputs is judgmental, reflecting their illiquid nature and the significance of unobservable price inputs to the valuation. In general, a significant increase in comparable price in isolation will result in an increase in the price of the unobservable instrument. For derivatives, a change in the comparable price in isolation can result in a fair value increase or decrease depending on the specific terms of the instrument. ## Loan spread Loan spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Loan spreads typically reflect credit quality, the level of comparable assets, such as gilts and other factors, and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation. In general, a significant increase in loan spreads in isolation will result in a fair value decrease for a loan. ## EBITDA multiple EBITDA multiple is the ratio of the valuation of the investment to the earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation. In general, a significant increase in the multiple will result in a fair value increase for an investment. ## Earnings multiple Earnings or Revenue multiple is the ratio of the valuation of the investment to the earnings or revenue. In general, a significant increase in the multiple will result in a fair value increase for an investment. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 388 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## Sensitivity Analysis Sensitivity analysis is performed on products with significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) to generate a range of reasonably possible alternative valuations. The sensitivity methodologies applied take account of the nature of the valuation techniques used, as well as the availability and reliability of observable proxy and historical data and the impact of using alternative models. Sensitivities are calculated on a monthly basis. The calculation is based on range or spread data of a reliable reference source or a scenario based on relevant market analysis alongside the impact of using alternative models. Sensitivities are calculated without reflecting the impact of any diversification in the portfolio. Sensitivity analysis of valuations using unobservable inputs (relates to Level 3 portfolios) | | 2025 | | | | 2024 | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Favourable changes | | Unfavourable changes | | Favourable changes | | Unfavourable changes | | | | Income statement | Equity | Income statement | Equity | Income statement | Equity | Income statement | Equity | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Loans | 245 | 21 | (324) | (37) | 653 | 43 | (766) | (43) | | Corporate debt | 88 | — | (68) | — | 87 | — | (56) | — | | Asset backed securities | 51 | 6 | (43) | (6) | 57 | 4 | (40) | (4) | | Government and Government sponsored debt | 45 | — | (41) | — | 47 | — | (56) | — | | Private equity investments | 218 | 1 | (218) | (1) | 232 | — | (232) | — | | Interest rate derivatives | 109 | — | (134) | — | 98 | — | (212) | — | | Equity derivatives | 336 | — | (336) | — | 199 | — | (269) | — | | Other products¹ | 109 | 312 | (108) | (89) | 92 | — | (104) | — | | Total | 1,201 | 340 | (1,272) | (133) | 1,465 | 47 | (1,735) | (47) | Note: 1 Other products include issued debt, reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements, certificate of deposits, funds and fund-linked products, equity cash products, credit derivatives and foreign exchange derivatives The effect of stressing unobservable inputs to a range of reasonably possible alternatives, alongside considering the impact of using alternative models, would be to increase fair values by up to £1,541m (2024: £1,512m) or to decrease fair values by up to £1,405m (2024: £1,782m) with substantially all the potential effect impacting profit and loss. Unfavourable changes shown in the table above are partly provided for through the capital and prudential valuation adjustment framework. ## Fair value adjustments Key balance sheet valuation adjustments are quantified below: | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Exit price adjustments derived from market bid-offer spreads | (628) | (542) | | Uncollateralised derivative funding | 62 | 19 | | Derivative credit valuation adjustments | (155) | (184) | | Derivative debit valuation adjustments | 119 | 108 | ## Exit price adjustments derived from market bid-offer spreads The Group uses mid-market pricing where it is a market-maker and has the ability to transact at, or better than, mid-price (which is the case for certain equity, bond and vanilla derivative markets). For other financial assets and liabilities, bid-offer adjustments are recorded to reflect the exit level for the expected close out strategy. The methodology for determining the bid-offer adjustment for a derivative portfolio involves calculating the net risk exposure by offsetting long and short positions by strike and term in accordance with the risk management and hedging strategy. Bid-offer levels are generally derived from market quotes, such as broker data. Less liquid instruments may not have a directly observable bid-offer level. In such instances, an exit price adjustment may be derived from an observable bid-offer level for a comparable liquid instrument, or determined by calibrating to derivative prices, or by scenario or historical analysis. Exit price adjustments derived from market bid-offer spreads have increased by £86m. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value ## Discounting approaches for derivative instruments ### Collateralised In line with market practice, the methodology for discounting collateralised derivatives takes into account the nature and currency of the collateral that can be posted within the relevant credit support annex (CSA). The CSA aware discounting approach recognises the ‘cheapest to deliver’ option that reflects the ability of the party posting collateral to change the currency of the collateral. ### Uncollateralised A fair value adjustment of £62m is applied to account for the impact of incorporating the cost/benefit of funding into the valuation of uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivative portfolios and collateralised derivatives where the terms of the agreement do not allow the rehypothecation of collateral received. The derivative funding adjustment has moved by £43m. ### Derivative credit and debit valuation adjustments Derivative credit valuation adjustments and derivative debit valuation adjustments are incorporated into derivative valuations to reflect the impact on fair value of counterparty credit risk and Barclays’ own credit quality, respectively. These adjustments are calculated for uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivatives across all asset classes. Derivative credit valuation adjustments and derivative debit valuation adjustments are calculated using estimates of exposure at default, probability of default and recovery rates, at a counterparty level. Counterparties include (but are not limited to) corporates, Sovereigns and Sovereign agencies and Supranationals. Exposure at default is generally estimated through the simulation of underlying risk factors through approximating with a more vanilla structure, or by using current or scenario-based mark to market as an estimate of future exposure. Probability of default and recovery rate information is generally sourced from the credit default swap (CDS) markets. Where this information is not available, or considered unreliable, alternative approaches are taken based on mapping internal counterparty ratings onto historical or market-based default and recovery information. Derivative credit valuation adjustments decreased by £(29)m. Derivative debit valuation adjustments increased by £11m. Correlation between counterparty credit and underlying derivative risk factors, termed ‘wrong-way’, or ‘right-way’ risk, is not systematically incorporated into the derivative credit valuation adjustments calculation, but is adjusted where the underlying exposure is directly related to the counterparty. Barclays continues to monitor market practices and activity to ensure the approach to uncollateralised derivative valuation remains appropriate. ## Unrecognised gains as a result of the use of valuation models using unobservable inputs The amount that is yet to be recognised in income, relating to the difference between the transaction price (the fair value at initial recognition) and the amount that would have arisen had valuation models using unobservable inputs been used on initial recognition, is £264m (2024: £273m) for financial instruments measured at fair value. There are additions and FX revaluation of £55m (2024: £173m) and amortisation and releases of £64m (2024: £105m) for these instruments. For financial instruments carried at amortised cost, the amount that is yet to be recognised in income is £164m (2024: £173m). There are additions of £nil (2024: £nil) and amortisation and releases of £9m (2024: £19m) for these instruments. ## Third-party credit enhancements Structured and brokered certificates of deposit issued by the Group are insured up to $250,000 per depositor by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) in the United States. The FDIC is funded by fees that Barclays and other banks pay for deposit insurance coverage. The carrying value of these issued certificates of deposit that are designated under the IFRS 9 fair value option includes this third-party credit enhancement. The on-balance sheet value of these brokered certificates of deposit amounted to £4,156m (2024: £4,844m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value # Comparison of carrying amounts and fair values for assets and liabilities not held at fair value The following table shows the fair value of financial assets and liabilities measured at amortised cost disaggregated by the fair value hierarchy and balance sheet classification | As at 31 December | 2025 | | | | | 2024 | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Carrying amount | Fair value | Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Carrying amount | Fair value | Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Financial assets | | | | | | | | | | | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 68,475 | 67,442 | 34,118 | 29,853 | 3,471 | 68,210 | 67,354 | 19,341 | 46,429 | 1,584 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | 361,523 | 361,517 | 7,631 | 71,157 | 282,729 | 346,273 | 343,016 | 6,977 | 73,606 | 262,433 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 17,622 | 17,622 | — | 17,622 | — | 4,734 | 4,734 | — | 4,734 | — | | Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | 5,801 | 6,065 | — | — | 6,065 | 9,544 | 9,628 | — | 3,520 | 6,108 | | Financial liabilities | | | | | | | | | | | | Deposits at amortised cost | (585,613) | (585,689) | (421,488) | (160,433) | (3,768) | (560,663) | (560,393) | (410,955) | (146,607) | (2,831) | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing | (25,170) | (25,170) | — | (25,170) | — | (39,415) | (39,415) | — | (39,415) | — | | Debt securities in issue | (119,033) | (121,439) | — | (119,590) | (1,849) | (92,402) | (94,463) | — | (92,066) | (2,397) | | Subordinated liabilities | (12,954) | (13,483) | — | (12,764) | (719) | (11,921) | (12,434) | — | (11,697) | (737) | | Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | — | — | — | — | — | (3,647) | (3,647) | — | (3,647) | — | The fair value is an estimate of the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. As a wide range of valuation techniques are available, it may not be appropriate to directly compare this fair value information to independent market sources or other financial institutions. Different valuation methodologies and assumptions can have a significant impact on fair values which are based on unobservable inputs. # Debt securities at amortised cost Debt securities at amortised cost are valued using observable market prices sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing sources. Observability assessment is performed with reference to bond market trading data. Bonds are assessed at Level 1 if they are traded in active market, with a quoted price in line with requirements of IFRS 13. Where market data for the underlying bond is unavailable, a number of proxy/extrapolation techniques are employed to determine the appropriate fair value. The enhancements noted in levelling policy are applicable to the government bond reported at amortised cost. # Loans and advances at amortised cost The fair value of loans and advances, for the purpose of this disclosure, is derived from discounting expected cash flows in a way that reflects the current market price or loan spreads of the borrowers. Where market data or credit information on the underlying borrowers is unavailable, a number of proxy/extrapolation techniques are employed to determine the appropriate discount rates. # Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending The fair value of reverse repurchase agreements approximates carrying amounts as these balances are generally short dated and fully collateralised. # Deposits at amortised cost In many cases, the fair value disclosed approximates carrying value because the instruments are short-term in nature or have interest rates that reprice frequently, such as customer accounts and other deposits and short-term debt securities. The fair value for deposits with longer-term maturities, mainly time deposits, are estimated using discounted cash flows applying either market rates or current rates for deposits of similar remaining maturities. # Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing The fair value of repurchase agreements approximates carrying amounts as these balances are generally short dated. # Debt securities in issue Fair values of other debt securities in issue are based on quoted prices where available or, where the instruments are short dated, carrying amount approximates fair value. # Subordinated liabilities Fair values for dated and undated convertible and non-convertible loan capital are based on quoted market rates for the issuer concerned or issuers with similar terms and conditions. # Assets & liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale The fair value for the purposes of this disclosure has been prepared in accordance with the products held for sale, and valuation techniques used to determine the expected sales price of these assets and liabilities that will be achieved when the disposal group is sold. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets and liabilities held at fair value # 18 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities The Group reports financial assets and financial liabilities on a net basis on the balance sheet, only if there is a legally enforceable right to set-off the recognised amounts, and there is intention to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The following table shows the impact of netting arrangements on: - All financial assets and liabilities that are reported net on the balance sheet - All derivative financial instruments and reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing agreements that are subject to enforceable master netting arrangements or similar agreements, but do not qualify for balance sheet netting. | | Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Effects of offsetting on-balance sheet | | | Related amounts not offset | | | Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements1 | Balance sheet total4 | | | Gross amounts | Amounts offset1 | Net amounts reported on the balance sheet | Financial instruments | Financial collateral2 | Net amount | | | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | Derivative financial assets | 291,146 | (42,571) | 248,575 | (194,743) | (43,404) | 10,428 | 3,884 | 252,459 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending5 | 779,674 | (630,480) | 149,194 | — | (148,845) | 349 | 916 | 150,110 | | Total assets | 1,070,820 | (673,051) | 397,769 | (194,743) | (192,249) | 10,777 | 4,800 | 402,569 | | Derivative financial liabilities | (278,718) | 43,257 | (235,461) | 194,743 | 28,546 | (12,172) | (5,347) | (240,808) | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing3 | (802,164) | 630,480 | (171,684) | — | 171,684 | — | (11,938) | (183,622) | | Total liabilities | (1,080,882) | 673,737 | (407,145) | 194,743 | 200,230 | (12,172) | (17,285) | (424,430) | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | Derivative financial assets | 334,885 | (47,207) | 287,678 | (230,434) | (43,270) | 13,974 | 5,852 | 293,530 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending5 | 701,482 | (556,373) | 145,109 | — | (144,670) | 439 | 1,398 | 146,507 | | Total assets | 1,036,367 | (603,580) | 432,787 | (230,434) | (187,940) | 14,413 | 7,250 | 440,037 | | Derivative financial liabilities | (318,897) | 46,040 | (272,857) | 230,434 | 27,677 | (14,746) | (6,558) | (279,415) | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing3 | (731,622) | 556,373 | (175,249) | — | 175,249 | — | (19,772) | (195,021) | | Total liabilities | (1,050,519) | 602,413 | (448,106) | 230,434 | 202,926 | (14,746) | (26,330) | (474,436) | # Notes: 1. Amounts offset for derivative financial assets additionally includes cash collateral netted of £6,086m (2024: £5,126m). Amounts offset for derivative financial liabilities additionally includes cash collateral netted of £5,400m (2024: £6,293m). Settlements assets and liabilities have been offset amounting to £38,196m (2024: £25,133m). 2. Financial collateral of £43,404m (2024: £43,270m) was received in respect of derivative assets, including £30,758m (2024: £30,637m) of cash collateral and £12,646m (2024: £12,633m) of non-cash collateral. Financial collateral of £28,546m (2024: £27,677m) was placed in respect of derivative liabilities, including £23,369m (2024: £23,126m) of cash collateral and £5,177m (2024: £4,551m) of non-cash collateral. The collateral amounts are limited to net balance sheet exposure, so as to not include overcollateralisation. 3. This column includes contractual rights of set-off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction. 4. The balance sheet total is the sum of 'Net amounts reported on the balance sheet that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements' and 'Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements'. 5. Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of £150,110m (2024: £146,507m) is split by fair value £132,488m (2024: £141,773m) and amortised cost £17,622m (2024: £4,734m). Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing of £183,622m (2024: £195,021m) is split by fair value £158,452m (2024: £155,606m) and amortised cost £25,170m (2024: £39,415m). These offsetting and collateral arrangements and other credit risk mitigation strategies used by the Group are further explained in the Credit risk management section. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 392 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets at amortised cost and other investments # Assets at amortised cost and other investments The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s property, plant and equipment, leases and goodwill and intangible assets. Details regarding the Group’s liquidity and capital position can be found in the Treasury and Capital risk section. # 19 Property, plant and equipment ## Accounting for property, plant and equipment Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, which includes direct and incremental acquisition costs less accumulated depreciation and provisions for impairment, if required. Subsequent costs are capitalised if these result in enhancement of the asset. Depreciation is provided on the depreciable amount of items of property, plant and equipment on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful economic lives. Depreciation rates, methods and the residual values underlying the calculation of depreciation of items of property, plant and equipment are kept under review to take account of any change in circumstances, including consideration on future Climate and Sustainability investments. The Group uses the following annual rates in calculating depreciation: | Annual rates in calculating depreciation | Depreciation rate | | --- | --- | | Freehold land | Not depreciated | | Freehold buildings | 2-3.3% | | Leasehold property | Over the remaining life of the lease | | Costs of adaptation of freehold and leasehold property | 6-10% | | Equipment installed in freehold and leasehold property | 6-10% | | Computers and similar equipment | 17-33% | | Fixtures and fittings and other equipment | 9-20% | Costs of adaptation and installed equipment are depreciated over the shorter of the life of the lease or the depreciation rates noted in the table above. # Investment property The Group initially recognises investment property at cost, and subsequently at fair value at each balance sheet date, reflecting market conditions at the reporting date. Gains and losses on remeasurement are included in the income statement. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets at amortised cost and other investments | | Investment property | Property | Equipment | Right of use assets1 | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Cost | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 9 | 3,628 | 2,245 | 2,215 | 8,097 | | Additions | 33 | 215 | 267 | 156 | 671 | | Disposals2 | — | (158) | (68) | (87) | (313) | | Exchange and other movements | 1 | (192) | 11 | 45 | (135) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 43 | 3,493 | 2,455 | 2,329 | 8,320 | | Accumulated depreciation and impairment | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | — | (1,798) | (1,557) | (1,138) | (4,493) | | Depreciation charge3 | — | (139) | (236) | (136) | (511) | | Impairment3 | — | (3) | (1) | (7) | (11) | | Disposals2 | — | 156 | 60 | 79 | 295 | | Exchange and other movements | — | 99 | 7 | 14 | 120 | | As at 31 December 2025 | — | (1,685) | (1,727) | (1,188) | (4,600) | | Net book value | 43 | 1,808 | 728 | 1,141 | 3,720 | | Cost | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 2 | 3,578 | 2,347 | 2,002 | 7,929 | | Additions | 9 | 165 | 186 | 48 | 408 | | Disposals | (2) | (140) | (273) | (96) | (511) | | Exchange and other movements | — | 25 | (15) | 261 | 271 | | As at 31 December 2024 | 9 | 3,628 | 2,245 | 2,215 | 8,097 | | Accumulated depreciation and impairment | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | — | (1,778) | (1,563) | (1,171) | (4,512) | | Depreciation charge3 | — | (143) | (250) | (139) | (532) | | Impairment3 | — | (1) | — | (14) | (15) | | Disposals | — | 131 | 258 | 94 | 483 | | Exchange and other movements | — | (7) | (2) | 92 | 83 | | As at 31 December 2024 | — | (1,798) | (1,557) | (1,138) | (4,493) | | Net book value | 9 | 1,830 | 688 | 1,077 | 3,604 | Notes: 1 Right of use (ROU) asset balances relate to property leases under IFRS 16. Refer to Note 20 for further details. 2 Disposals primarily pertain to fully depreciated assets which are not in use. 3 Depreciation charge and impairment charge is part of Infrastructure, Administration and General expenses shown in Note 7. 4 In 2024, Exchange and other movements in Right of use (ROU) asset balances include modification related to a lease extended by $\sim 91$ years Property rentals of £7m (2024: 11m) have been included in other income. The fair value of investment property is determined by reference to current market prices for similar properties, adjusted as necessary, for condition and location, or by reference to recent transactions updated to reflect current economic conditions. Discounted cash flow techniques may be employed to calculate fair value where there have been no recent transactions, using current external market inputs, such as market rents and interest rates. Valuations are carried out by management with the support of appropriately qualified independent valuers. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 394 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets at amortised cost and other investments ## 20 Leases ### Accounting for leases When the Group is the lessee, it is required to recognise both: - a lease liability, measured at the present value of remaining cash flows on the lease - a right of use (ROU) asset, measured at the amount of the initial measurement of the lease liability, plus any lease payments made prior to commencement date, initial direct costs, and estimated costs of restoring the underlying asset to the condition required by the lease, less any lease incentives received. Subsequently the lease liability will increase for the accrual of interest, resulting in a constant rate of return throughout the life of the lease, and reduce when payments are made. The right of use asset will amortise to the income statement over the life of the lease. When the lease liability is remeasured, a corresponding adjustment is made to the carrying amount of the ROU asset, or is recorded in the income statement if the carrying amount of the ROU asset has been reduced to nil. On the balance sheet, the ROU assets are included within property, plant and equipment and the lease liabilities are included within other liabilities. The Group applies the recognition exemption in IFRS 16 for leases with a term not exceeding 12 months. For these leases, the lease payments are recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis is more appropriate. When the Group is the lessor, the lease must be classified as either a finance lease or an operating lease. A finance lease is a lease that confers substantially all the risks and rewards of the leased assets on the lessee. An operating lease is a lease where substantially all of the risks and rewards of the leased asset remain with the lessor. ### As a lessor Finance lease receivables are included within loans and advances at amortised cost. The following table sets out a maturity analysis of lease receivables, showing the lease payments to be received after the reporting date. | | 2025 | | | | 2024 | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Gross investment in finance lease receivables | Future finance income | Present value of minimum lease payments receivable | Unguaranteed residual values | Gross investment in finance lease receivables | Future finance income | Present value of minimum lease payments receivable | Unguaranteed residual values | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Not more than one year | 1 | — | 1 | — | 7 | (1) | 6 | — | | One to two years | 3 | (1) | 2 | — | 3 | (1) | 2 | — | | Two to three years | 1 | — | 1 | — | — | — | — | — | | Total | 5 | (1) | 4 | — | 10 | (2) | 8 | — | Barclays provided leasing and other asset finance facilities to businesses and individual customers. There is no significant impairment allowance for finance lease receivables in current and previous year. The Group does not have any material operating leases as a lessor. ### Finance lease income Finance lease income is included within interest income. The following table shows amounts recognised in the income statement during the year. | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Finance income from net investment in lease | 1 | 2 | | Profit on sales | — | — | ### As a lessee The Group leases various offices, branches and other premises under non-cancellable lease arrangements to meet its operational business requirements. In some instances, Barclays will sublease property to third parties when it is no longer needed to meet business requirements. Currently, Barclays does not have any material subleasing arrangements. ROU asset balances relate to property leases only. Refer to Note 19 for the carrying amount of ROU assets. The total expenses recognised during the year for short-term leases were £1m (2024: £1m). The portfolio of short-term leases to which Barclays is exposed at the end of the year is not dissimilar to the expenses recognised in the year. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets at amortised cost and other investments ## Lease liabilities | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | As at 1 January | 1,205 | 971 | | Interest expense | 71 | 71 | | New leases | 155 | 45 | | Disposals | (14) | (18) | | Cash payments | (196) | (204) | | Exchange and other movements¹ | 57 | 340 | | As at 31 December (see Note 22) | 1,278 | 1,205 | ## Note: 1. Exchange and other movements in 2024 include modification related to a lease extended by ~91 years The table below sets out a maturity analysis of undiscounted lease liabilities, showing the lease payments after the reporting date. ## Undiscounted lease liabilities maturity analysis | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Not more than one year | 187 | 195 | | One to two years | 170 | 173 | | Two to three years | 153 | 149 | | Three to four years | 142 | 126 | | Four to five years | 120 | 113 | | Five to ten years | 503 | 395 | | Greater than ten years | 3,474 | 3,754 | | Total undiscounted lease liabilities as at 31 December | 4,749 | 4,905 | In 2024, Barclays had a lease modification for property "New York, 745 7th Avenue" wherein there was an extension of lease term by ~91 years. In addition to the cash flows identified above, the Group is exposed to: - Variable lease payments: This variability will typically arise from either inflation index instruments or market-based pricing adjustments. Currently, Barclays has 205 (2024: 238) leases out of the total 603 (2024: 631) leases with variable payment terms. Of the gross cash flows identified above, £4,613m (2024: £4,634m) is attributable to leases with some degree of payment variability. - Extension and termination options: The table above represents Barclays' best estimate of future cash outflows for leases, including assumptions regarding the exercising of contractual extension and termination options. The above gross cash flows include adjustments of £5m (2024: £10m) and £1,820m (2024: £1,872m) in respect of leases for which Barclays is highly likely to exercise an early termination and a lease extension option, respectively. In 2025, the Group does not have any sale and leaseback transaction (2024: Nil). The Group does not have any restrictions or covenants imposed by the lessor on its property leases which restrict its businesses. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets at amortised cost and other investments # 21 Goodwill and intangible assets ## Accounting for goodwill and intangible assets ### Goodwill Goodwill arising on the acquisition of subsidiaries represents the excess of the fair value of the purchase consideration over the fair value of the Group's share of the assets acquired and the liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed on the date of the acquisition. Goodwill is reviewed annually for impairment, or more frequently when there are indications that impairment may have occurred. The test involves comparing the carrying value of a cash generating unit (CGU), including goodwill with the present value of the pre-tax cash flows, discounted at a rate of interest that reflects the inherent risks, of the CGU to which the goodwill relates, or the CGU's fair value if this is higher. ### Intangible assets Intangible assets are initially recognised when they are separable or arise from contractual or other legal rights, the cost can be measured reliably and, in the case of intangible assets not acquired in a business combination, where it is probable that future economic benefits attributable to the assets will flow from their use. For internally generated intangible assets, only costs incurred during the development phase are capitalised. Expenditure in the research phase is expensed when it is incurred. Intangible assets are stated at cost (which is, in the case of assets acquired in a business combination, the acquisition date fair value) less accumulated amortisation and impairment, if any, and are amortised over their useful lives in a manner that reflects the pattern to which they contribute to future cash flows, generally using the amortisation periods set out below: | Annual rates in calculating amortisation | Amortisation period | | --- | --- | | Goodwill | Not amortised | | Internally generated software^{1} | 12 months to 6 years | | Other software | 12 months to 6 years | | Core Deposits | 12 months to 5 years | | Brand | 12 months to 10 years | | Customer lists | 12 months to 25 years | | Licences and other | 12 months to 25 years | ## Note: 1. Exceptions to the above rate relate to useful lives of certain core banking platforms that are assessed individually and, if appropriate, amortised over longer periods ranging from 10 to 15 years. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets at amortised cost and other investments Intangible assets are reviewed for impairment when there are indications that impairment may have occurred. Intangible assets not yet available for use are reviewed annually for impairment. | | Intangible assets | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Goodwill | Internally generated software | Other software | Core deposits | Brand | Customer lists | Licences and other | Total | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | 2025 | | | | | | | | | | Cost | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | 5,308 | 7,280 | 671 | 17 | 7 | 1,230 | 219 | 14,732 | | Additions | — | 1,341 | 4 | — | — | — | — | 1,345 | | Disposals1 | — | (1,306) | (5) | — | — | — | (3) | (1,314) | | Exchange and other movements | (35) | (74) | (4) | — | — | (78) | (14) | (205) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 5,273 | 7,241 | 666 | 17 | 7 | 1,152 | 202 | 14,558 | | Accumulated amortisation and impairment | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | (858) | (3,897) | (486) | (1) | (2) | (1,073) | (140) | (6,457) | | Disposals1 | — | 1,306 | 4 | — | — | — | 3 | 1,313 | | Amortisation charge2 | — | (1,135) | (63) | (3) | (1) | (33) | (10) | (1,245) | | Impairment charge2 | — | (8) | (1) | — | — | — | — | (9) | | Exchange and other movements | — | 41 | 2 | — | — | 71 | 10 | 124 | | As at 31 December 2025 | (858) | (3,693) | (544) | (4) | (3) | (1,035) | (137) | (6,274) | | Net book value | 4,415 | 3,548 | 122 | 13 | 4 | 117 | 65 | 8,284 | | 2024 | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | 5,035 | 7,190 | 717 | — | 7 | 1,569 | 156 | 14,674 | | Additions | 263 | 1,225 | 12 | 17 | — | 66 | 66 | 1,649 | | Disposals1 | — | (1,156) | (58) | — | — | (90) | (6) | (1,310) | | Exchange and other movements | 10 | 21 | — | — | — | (315) | 3 | (281) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 5,308 | 7,280 | 671 | 17 | 7 | 1,230 | 219 | 14,732 | | Accumulated amortisation and impairment | | | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2024 | (858) | (3,965) | (478) | — | (1) | (1,438) | (140) | (6,880) | | Disposals1 | — | 1,156 | 58 | — | — | 90 | 6 | 1,310 | | Amortisation charge2 | — | (1,066) | (67) | (1) | (1) | (28) | (5) | (1,168) | | Impairment charge2 | — | (19) | — | — | — | — | — | (19) | | Exchange and other movements | — | (3) | 1 | — | — | 303 | (1) | 300 | | As at 31 December 2024 | (858) | (3,897) | (486) | (1) | (2) | (1,073) | (140) | (6,457) | | Net book value | 4,450 | 3,383 | 185 | 16 | 5 | 157 | 79 | 8,275 | Notes: 1 Disposals pertain to fully amortised assets which are not in use. 2 Amortisation charge and impairment charge is part of Infrastructure, Administration and General expenses shown in Note 7. # Goodwill Goodwill and Intangible assets are allocated to business operations according to business segments as follows: | | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Goodwill | Intangibles | Total | Goodwill | Intangibles | Total | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Barclays UK | 3,872 | 1,013 | 4,885 | 3,872 | 1,042 | 4,914 | | Barclays UK Corporate Bank | — | 256 | 256 | — | 59 | 59 | | Barclays UK Private Bank and Wealth Management | 95 | 298 | 393 | 95 | 251 | 346 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 414 | 516 | 930 | 444 | 513 | 957 | | Barclays Investment Bank | — | 1,751 | 1,751 | 0 | 1,902 | 1,902 | | Head Office | 34 | 35 | 69 | 39 | 58 | 97 | | Total | 4,415 | 3,869 | 8,284 | 4,450 | 3,825 | 8,275 | # Critical accounting estimates and judgements # Goodwill Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include: | Judgements | Estimates | | --- | --- | | Identification of cash generating units (CGUs) and allocation of goodwill for impairment testing. | The value-in-use (VIU) of a CGU for impairment testing includes forecasting future cash flows and determination of the discount rate. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 398 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets at amortised cost and other investments The Group does not consider there to be a significant risk of a material adjustment to the carrying amount of goodwill in the next financial year. Testing goodwill for impairment involves a significant amount of judgement. Goodwill is allocated to CGUs for the purpose of impairment testing. The review of goodwill for impairment involves calculating a value in use (VIU) valuation, which is compared to the carrying value of a CGU associated with the goodwill to determine whether any impairment has occurred. This includes the identification of independent CGUs across the organisation and the allocation of goodwill to those CGUs. The calculation of a value in use contains a high degree of uncertainty in estimating the future cash flows and the rates used to discount them. Key judgements include determining the carrying value of the CGU, the cash flows and discount rates used in the calculation. - The cash flow forecasts used by management involve judgement and are based upon a view of the prospects of the business and market conditions at the point in time the assessment is prepared, including the potential effect of climate change. The estimation of cash flows is sensitive to the periods for which detailed forecasts are available and to assumptions regarding long-term sustainable cash flows. - The discount rates applied to the future cash flows also involve judgement. The discount rates used are compared to market participants to ensure that they are appropriate and based on an estimated cost of equity for each CGU. - The choice of a terminal growth rate used to determine the present value of the future cash flows of the CGUs is also a judgement that can impact the outcome of the assessment. The terminal growth rate and discount rates used may vary due to external market rates and economic conditions that are beyond management's control, including the potential effect of climate change. Further details of some of the key judgements are set out below. ## 2025 impairment review The 2025 impairment review was performed during Q4 2025, with the approach and analysis set out below. ## Determining the carrying value of CGUs The carrying value for each CGU is the sum of the tangible equity, goodwill and intangible asset balances associated with that CGU. The Group manages the assets and liabilities of its CGUs with reference to the tangible equity of the respective businesses. That tangible equity is derived from the level of risk weighted assets (RWAs) and capital required to be deployed in the CGU and therefore reflects its relative risk, as well as the level of capital that management consider a market participant would be required to hold and retain to support business growth. Goodwill is initially allocated to CGUs or groups of CGUs that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the acquisition that generated it. Goodwill is only reallocated if there is a change in its use or when reporting structures are altered in a way that changes the composition of one or more cash generating units to which goodwill has been allocated. During H1 2025, Barclays Bank UK Group revised its internal reporting structure to align with strategic changes and allocation of resources. As a result, a new reportable segment of Retail Banking has replaced the previously reported Personal Banking and Barclaycard Consumer UK segments. ## Cash flows The five-year cash flows used in the calculation are based on the formally agreed medium-term plans approved by the Board. These are prepared using macroeconomic assumptions which management consider reasonable and supportable, and reflect business agreed initiatives for the forecast period. The macroeconomic assumptions underpinning the medium-term plan were determined during 2025 and management has considered whether there are subsequent significant changes in those assumptions which would adversely impact the results of the impairment review. As required by IAS 36, estimates of future cash flows exclude cash inflows or outflows that are expected to arise from restructuring initiatives where a constructive obligation to carry out the plan does not yet exist. In line with prior year treatment, the Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) portfolio has been excluded from the Business Banking CGU cash flows. This is a legacy loan portfolio which was previously within the Non-Core bank and was not part of the business to which the goodwill relates. As such, the cash flows relating to this portfolio have been excluded from the Business Banking VIU calculation. ## Discount rates IAS 36 requires that the discount rate used in a value in use calculation reflects the pre-tax rate an investor would require if they were to choose an investment that would generate similar cash flows to those that the entity expects to generate from the asset. In determining the discount rate, management identified the cost of equity associated with market participants that closely resemble the Group's CGUs. The cost of equity has been used as the discount rate in the impairment assessment and applied to the post-tax cash flows of the CGU. This post-tax method incorporates the impact of changing tax rates on the cash flows and is expected to produce the same VIU result as a pre-tax method adjusted for varying tax rates. Using the resultant VIU, the equivalent pre-tax discount rate has been calculated. The cost of equity rate used for all CGUs in this year's calculation has increased to reflect volatility in markets, an increase in risk free rate and a higher market risk premium rate. The range of equivalent pre-tax discount rates applicable across the CGUs range from 15.2% to 19.6% (2024: 14.7% to 19.2%). ## Terminal growth rate The terminal growth rate is used to estimate the effect of projecting cash flows to the end of an asset's useful economic life. It is management's judgement that the cash flows associated with the CGUs will grow in line with the major economies in which the Group operates. Inflation rates are used as an approximation of future growth rates and form the basis of the terminal growth rates applied. The terminal growth rate used is 2.0% (2024: 2.0%). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Assets at amortised cost and other investments ## Outcome of goodwill and intangibles review The Retail Banking CGU carries the majority of the Group's goodwill balance, predominantly as a consequence of the Woolwich acquisition. The goodwill within Retail Banking was £3,243m (2024: £3,243m), of which £2,501m (2024: £2,501m) was attributable to Woolwich, and within Business Banking was £629m (2024: £629m), fully attributable to Woolwich. The largest portion of the Group's intangible assets sits within the Barclays Investment Bank CGU, with an allocation of £1,751m (2024: £1,902m). Based on management's plans and assumptions the value in use exceeds the carrying value of the CGUs and no impairment has been indicated in 2025. The outcome of the impairment review for Retail Banking, Business Banking and Barclays US Consumer Bank are set out below: | Cash generating unit | Tangible equity | Goodwill | Intangibles | Carrying value | Value in use | Value in use exceeding carrying value 2025 | Value in use exceeding carrying value 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Retail Banking | 9,619 | 3,243 | 795 | 13,657 | 19,961 | 6,304 | 1,925 | | Business Banking | 1,987 | 629 | 208 | 2,824 | 8,069 | 5,245 | 3,197 | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 3,055 | 414 | 519 | 3,988 | 7,081 | 3,093 | 480 | | Total | 14,661 | 4,286 | 1,522 | 20,469 | 35,111 | 14,642 | 5,602 | **Note:** 1. For comparative purposes, the 2024 figures have been re-presented to reflect the cash-generating units within the new operating divisions introduced in the first half of 2025. Goodwill related to Retail Banking, which was previously reported under Personal Banking and Barclaycard Consumer UK, has now been reclassified accordingly. All of the above CGUs have seen an increase in value in use in the period, which is mainly attributable to improved performance expectations. ## Sensitivity of key judgements Headroom is sensitive to possible adverse changes in the key assumptions that support the recoverable amount: **Cash flows:** The medium-term plans used to determine the cash flows used in the VIU calculation rely on macroeconomic forecasts, including interest rates, GDP and unemployment, and forecast levels of market and client activity. Interest rate assumptions impact planned cash flows from both customer income and structural hedge contributions and therefore cash flow expectations are highly sensitive to movements in the yield curve. The cash flows also contain assumptions with regard to the prudential and financial conduct regulatory environment which may be subject to change. Given the current level of economic uncertainty, a 10% reduction in cash flows has been provided to show the sensitivity of the outcome to a change in these key assumptions. **Discount rate:** The discount rate should reflect the market risk-free rate adjusted for the inherent risks of the business it is applied to. Management have identified discount rates for comparable businesses and consider these to be a reasonable estimate of a suitable market rate for the profile of the business unit being tested. The risk that these discount rates may not be appropriate is quantified below and shows the impact of a 100bps change in the discount rate. **Terminal growth rate:** The terminal growth rate is used to estimate the cash flows into perpetuity based on the expected longevity of the CGU's businesses. The terminal growth rate is sensitive to uncertainties in the macroeconomic environment. The risk that using inflation data may not be appropriate for its determination is quantified below and shows the impact of 100bps change in the terminal growth rate. **Allocated capital rate:** Tangible equity is allocated based on the level of risk weighted assets (RWAs) and capital required to be deployed in the CGU, which is dependent on the relative risk of businesses. The capital rate used in determining the level of tangible equity allocated to the CGU and its capital cash flows could move over time. The impact of a 50bps increase in capital rate is quantified below. The sensitivity of the value in use to key judgements in the calculations for certain CGUs holding goodwill balances is set out below: | Cash generating unit | Carrying value | Value in use | Value in use exceeding carrying value | Discount rate | Reduction in headroom | | | | Change required to reduce headroom to zero | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | | | 100 bps increase in the discount rate | 100 bps decrease in terminal growth rate | 50 bps increase to allocated capital rate | 10% reduction in forecasted cash flows | Discount rate | Terminal growth rate | Allocated capital rate | Cash flows | | | £m | £m | £m | % | £m | £m | £m | £m | % | % | % | % | | Retail Banking | 13,657 | 19,961 | 6,304 | 19.6 | (1,164) | (676) | (428) | (2,189) | 7.4 | (17.8) | 7.4 | (28.8) | | Barclays US Consumer Bank | 3,988 | 7,081 | 3,093 | 16.8 | (572) | (368) | (229) | (901) | 8.0 | (16.8) | 6.7 | (34.3) | | Total | 17,645 | 27,042 | 9,397 | | | | | | | | | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings # Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings The notes included in this section focus on the Group's accruals, provisions and contingent liabilities. Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is probable that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, and it can be reliably estimated. Contingent liabilities reflect potential liabilities that are not recognised on the balance sheet. ## 22 Other liabilities | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Accruals and deferred income | 4,261 | 4,479 | | Other creditors | 4,477 | 4,828 | | Items in the course of collection due to other banks | 97 | 99 | | Lease liabilities (refer to Note 20) | 1,278 | 1,205 | | Other liabilities | 10,113 | 10,611 | ## 23 Provisions ### Accounting for provisions Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is more likely than not that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, which can be reliably estimated. ### Critical accounting estimates and judgements Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include: | Judgements | Estimates | | --- | --- | | Determination as to whether a present obligation exists. | Estimation uncertainty in the probability, timing, nature and quantum of outflows. | These estimates are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of provisions within the next financial year. The financial reporting of provisions involves a significant degree of judgement and is complex. Identifying whether a present obligation exists and estimating the probability, timing, nature and quantum of the outflows that may arise from past events requires judgements to be made based on the specific facts and circumstances relating to individual events and often requires specialist professional advice. When matters are at an early stage, accounting judgements and estimates can be difficult because of the high degree of uncertainty involved. Management continues to monitor matters as they develop to re-evaluate on an ongoing basis whether provisions should be recognised, however there can remain a wide range of possible outcomes and uncertainties, particularly in relation to legal, competition and regulatory matters, and as a result, it is often not practicable to make meaningful estimates, even when matters are at a more advanced stage. The amount that is recognised as a provision can also be very sensitive to the assumptions made in calculating it. This gives rise to a large range of potential outcomes which require judgement in determining an appropriate provision level. See Note 25 for more detail of legal, competition and regulatory matters. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings | | Redundancy and restructuring | Legal, competition and regulatory matters | | Onerous contracts | Sundry provisions | Total | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 1 January 2025 | 213 | 299 | 59 | 14 | 359 | 944 | | Additions | 267 | 302 | 114 | 41 | 165 | 889 | | Amounts utilised | (210) | (43) | (89) | (14) | (76) | (432) | | Unused amounts reversed | (79) | (13) | (3) | — | (48) | (143) | | Exchange and other movements | (1) | (2) | (2) | — | (5) | (10) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 190 | 543 | 79 | 41 | 395 | 1,248 | | Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | | | | | | 439 | | Net change in expected credit loss provision and other movements | | | | | | (23) | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | 416 | | Total provisions | | | | | | | | As at 1 January 2025 | | | | | | 1,383 | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | 1,664 | Provisions expected to be recovered or settled within no more than 12 months after 31 December 2025 are £1,400m (2024: £1,192m). ## Redundancy and restructuring These provisions comprise the estimated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs where an obligation exists. For example, when the Group has a detailed formal plan for restructuring a business and has raised valid expectations in those affected by the restructuring by announcing its main features or starting to implement the plan. ## Customer redress Customer redress provisions comprise the estimated cost of making redress payments to customers, clients and counterparties for losses or damages associated with inappropriate judgement in the execution of the Group's business activities. ## Motor finance provision From 2003 to late 2019, Clydesdale Financial Services Limited (CFSL), a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, provided motor finance to customers in the UK. In January 2024, the FCA appointed a skilled person to undertake a review of the historical use of discretionary commission arrangements and sales in the motor finance market across several firms. This review followed two final decisions by the UK Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) and a number of complaints and court claims, including some against CFSL. On 7 October 2025, the FCA began consulting on an industrywide compensation scheme for eligible motor finance customers. Barclays has engaged with the FCA as part of its consultation process and the FCA has stated that, if it introduces a redress scheme, it expects to publish a policy statement and final rules in February or March 2026, with compensation to consumers beginning later in 2026. The FCA has indicated that it expects to lift the existing pause on the handling of certain motor finance complaints on 31 May 2026, subject to the terms of the FCA redress scheme, if adopted. Barclays considers it more likely than not that a redress scheme will be implemented by the FCA. As a result, Barclays has recognised a provision of £325m in respect of this matter as at 31 December 2025 (as at 31 December 2024: £90m). Recognising that the proposed terms of the FCA redress scheme are subject to consultation, in calculating potential redress costs and the amount of provision required, Barclays has applied a weighted average of multiple scenarios, each incorporating differing evaluations of the FCA's current proposals. The current provision reflects the estimated number of motor finance cases falling within the scope of the FCA redress scheme as proposed by the FCA consultation paper (which covers regulated motor finance agreements between 6 April 2007 and 1 November 2024 where a commission was payable by the lender to the broker), the anticipated level of customer redress reflecting the FCA's proposed methodology, the estimated customer response rate with reference to Barclays previous remediation exercises, and the costs associated with implementing the FCA's proposed approach to customer engagement. The final terms of the FCA redress scheme remain uncertain pending publication of the FCA's policy statement and final scheme rules. Accordingly, the legal and regulatory outcomes and the nature, extent and timing of any remediation action, if required, remain uncertain. The ultimate financial impact on Barclays could differ from the recognised provision, which represents Barclays' best estimate of the cost of redress based on the information currently available to Barclays. ## Legal, competition and regulatory matters The Group is engaged in various legal proceedings, both in the UK and a number of other overseas jurisdictions, including the US. For further information in relation to legal proceedings and discussion of the associated uncertainties, refer to Note 25. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings ## Onerous contracts Onerous contract provisions comprise an estimate of the unavoidable costs involved with fulfilling the terms and conditions of contracts net of any expected benefits to be received. ## Sundry provisions This category includes provisions that do not fit into any of the other categories, such as fraud losses and dilapidation provisions. ## Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees provisions are accounted under IFRS9. Impairment allowance under IFRS 9 considers both the drawn and the undrawn counterparty exposure. For retail portfolios, the total impairment allowance is allocated to the drawn exposure to the extent that the allowance does not exceed the exposure as ECL is not reported separately. Any excess is reported on the liability side of the balance sheet as a provision. For wholesale portfolios, the impairment allowance on the undrawn exposure is reported on the liability side of the balance sheet as a provision. Further analysis of the movement is disclosed within the 'Movement in gross exposures and impairment allowance including provisions for loan commitments and financial guarantees' in the expected credit loss provision table on page 231. ## 24 Contingent liabilities and commitments ### Accounting for contingent liabilities Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events and present obligations where the transfer of economic resources is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised on the balance sheet, but are disclosed unless the likelihood of an outflow of economic resources is remote. The following table summarises the nominal principal amount of contingent liabilities and commitments which are not recorded on-balance sheet: | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security | 16,749 | 16,713 | | Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements | 8,625 | 8,633 | | Total contingent liabilities and financial guarantees | 25,374 | 25,346 | | • Of which: Financial guarantees and letters of credit carried at fair value | 905 | 988 | | Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions | 1,103 | 1,433 | | Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments | 423,503 | 421,716 | | Total commitments1 | 424,606 | 423,149 | | • Of which: Loan commitments carried at fair value | 21,292 | 15,350 | ### Note: 1 Includes exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale. Provisions for expected credit losses held against contingent liabilities and commitments equal £416m (2024: £439m) and are reported in Note 23. Further details on contingent liabilities relating to legal and competition and regulatory matters can be found in Note 25. ## 25 Legal, competition and regulatory matters The Group faces legal, competition and regulatory challenges, many of which are beyond our control. The extent of the impact of these matters cannot always be predicted but may materially impact our operations, financial results, condition and prospects. Matters arising from a set of similar circumstances can give rise to either a contingent liability or a provision, or both, depending on the relevant facts and circumstances. The recognition of provisions in relation to such matters involves critical accounting estimates and judgements in accordance with the relevant accounting policies applicable to Note 23, Provisions. We have not disclosed an estimate of the potential financial impact or effect on the Group of contingent liabilities where it is not currently practicable to do so. Various matters detailed in this note seek damages of an unspecified amount. While certain matters specify the damages claimed, such claimed amounts do not necessarily reflect the Group's potential financial exposure in respect of those matters. Matters are ordered under headings corresponding to the financial statements in which they are disclosed. ## 1. Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC ### Proceedings relating to certain advisory services agreements In 2023, Barclays Bank PLC received requests for arbitration from two Jersey special purpose vehicles connected to PCP International Finance Limited asserting claims in relation to the October 2008 capital raising. This matter is now concluded, and there are no other outstanding matters relating to the advisory services agreements. ### Civil actions related to LIBOR and other benchmarks Various individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group and other banks in relation to the alleged manipulation of LIBOR and/or other benchmarks. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings ## US civil actions related to LIBOR Multiple civil actions have been filed in the US against the Group and other banks alleging manipulation of USD LIBOR, Sterling LIBOR and the LIBOR benchmark that was administered by the Intercontinental Exchange Inc. and certain of its affiliates (ICE LIBOR). With respect to USD LIBOR, one action alleging that Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI) and other financial institutions individually and collectively violated provisions of the US Sherman Antitrust Act (Sherman Act), the US Commodity Exchange Act, the US Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act (RICO), the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and various state laws by manipulating USD LIBOR rates remains, seeking unspecified damages. In September 2025, the US federal district court in the Southern District of New York (SDNY) granted the defendants' motion for summary judgment and dismissed the remaining USD LIBOR litigations, including the action against the Group. The plaintiffs are appealing the decision. A separate USD LIBOR action pending in the SDNY was previously settled. The settlement is not material to the Group's operating results, cash flows or financial position. With respect to Sterling LIBOR, consolidated class actions filed in the SDNY against Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and other Sterling LIBOR panel banks alleging, among other things, manipulation of the Sterling LIBOR rate in violation of the Sherman Act, US Commodity Exchange Act and RICO, were dismissed in 2018. The US Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit (Second Circuit) affirmed the dismissal in September 2025. This matter is concluded. With respect to ICE LIBOR, in August 2020, a group of individual plaintiffs in the US District Court for the Northern District of California on behalf of individual borrowers and consumers of loans and credit cards with variable interest rates linked to USD ICE LIBOR brought an action against Barclays Bank PLC and other financial institutions alleging Sherman Act violations. The defendants' motion to dismiss the case was granted in 2022. The US Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit affirmed the dismissal in December 2024. The plaintiffs' petition for US Supreme Court review was denied in June 2025, concluding the matter. ## Non-US benchmarks civil actions The remaining UK claim, issued in 2017, against Barclays Bank PLC and other banks in connection with alleged manipulation of LIBOR has now settled. The settlement is not material to the Group's operating results, cash flows or financial position. Proceedings are ongoing in Spain and Italy relating to alleged manipulation of LIBOR and EURIBOR. The proceedings in Israel have concluded. ## Foreign exchange civil actions Legal proceedings have been brought or are threatened against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and Barclays Execution Services Limited (BX) in connection with alleged manipulation of foreign exchange in the UK, the Netherlands, Israel, Brazil and Australia. In Australia, the court has approved the settlement and the proceedings are concluded. In Israel, a settlement in principle has been agreed subject to court approval. The settlements are not material to the Group's operating results, cash flows or financial position. The above-mentioned proceedings include a class action filed against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BX, BCI and other financial institutions in the UK Competition Appeal Tribunal (CAT) in 2019. The CAT refused to certify the claim in 2022 and in 2023, the Court of Appeal overturned the CAT's decision and found that the claim should be certified on an opt-out basis. Barclays and the other financial institutions involved appealed this decision and, in December 2025, the UK Supreme Court issued a judgment in their favour, establishing that this claim should be brought as an opt-in class action. ## Metals-related civil actions A US civil complaint alleging manipulation of the price of silver in violation of the US Commodity Exchange Act, the Sherman Act and state antitrust and consumer protection laws was brought by a proposed class of plaintiffs against a number of banks, including Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and BX. The complaint, which is filed in the SDNY, was dismissed against the Barclays entities and certain other defendants in 2018, and against the remaining defendants in 2023. The plaintiffs have appealed the dismissal of the complaint against all defendants. Civil actions have also been filed in Canadian courts against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Capital Canada Inc. and BCI on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging manipulation of gold and silver prices. The Barclays entities have reached a settlement in principle, which will require court approval. The settlement is not material to the Group's operating results, cash flows or financial position. ## US residential mortgage-related civil action There remains one US Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities (RMBS) related civil action arising from unresolved repurchase requests submitted by Trustees for certain RMBS, alleging breaches of various loan-level representations and warranties made by Barclays Bank PLC and/or a subsidiary acquired in 2007. Barclays' motion to dismiss the action was denied in 2023. The parties appealed the decision and in January 2025, the appellate court reversed the lower court's decision and dismissed the action. The plaintiff has requested review by the New York State Court of Appeals. ## Government and agency securities civil actions ### Treasury auction securities civil actions Consolidated purported class action complaints filed in US federal court against Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and other financial institutions under the Sherman Act and state common law allege that the defendants: (i) conspired to manipulate the US Treasury securities market; and/or (ii) conspired to prevent the creation of certain platforms by boycotting or threatening to boycott such trading platforms. The court dismissed the consolidated action in 2021 and the plaintiffs filed an amended complaint. The defendants' motion to dismiss the amended complaint was granted in 2022. The plaintiffs appealed this decision, and in February 2024 the appellate court affirmed the dismissal. The plaintiffs did not seek US Supreme Court review, thereby concluding the matter. In addition, certain plaintiffs have filed a related, direct action against BCI and certain other financial institutions, alleging that defendants conspired to fix and manipulate the US Treasury securities market in violation of the Sherman Act, the US Commodity Exchange Act and state common law. This action remains stayed. --- Notes to the financial statements (continued) Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings ### Variable Rate Demand Obligations civil actions Civil actions have been filed against Barclays Bank PLC and BCI and other financial institutions alleging the defendants conspired or colluded to artificially inflate interest rates set for Variable Rate Demand Obligations (VRDOs). VRDOs are municipal bonds with interest rates that reset on a periodic basis, most commonly weekly. An action in state court has been filed by private plaintiffs on behalf of the state of California. A settlement in principle has been agreed in that action, subject to court approval. This settlement is not material to the Group's operating results, cash flows or financial position. In addition, three purported class action complaints have been consolidated in the SDNY. In the consolidated SDNY class action, certain of the plaintiffs' claims were dismissed in 2020 and 2022 and the plaintiffs' motion for class certification was granted in 2023, which means the case may proceed as a class action. The defendants appealed and the decision was affirmed by the Second Circuit in August 2025. The defendants have petitioned for US Supreme Court review. ### Odd‐lot corporate bonds antitrust class action In 2020, BCI, together with other financial institutions, was named as a defendant in a purported class action in the US. The complaint alleges a conspiracy to boycott developing electronic trading platforms for odd‐lots and price fixing. The plaintiffs demand unspecified money damages. The defendants' motion to dismiss was granted in 2021, which the plaintiffs appealed. In July 2024, the Second Circuit vacated the judgment and remanded the case to the SDNY, where the plaintiffs filed a second amended complaint in September 2024. The defendants' motion to dismiss was granted in its entirety in September 2025. The parties have stipulated to the discontinuance of the action, thereby concluding the matter. ### Credit Default Swap civil action A purported antitrust class action is pending in New Mexico federal court against Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and various other financial institutions. The plaintiffs, the New Mexico State Investment Council and certain New Mexico pension funds, allege that the defendants conspired to manipulate the benchmark price used to value Credit Default Swap (CDS) contracts at settlement (i.e. the CDS final auction price). The plaintiffs allege violations of US antitrust laws and the US Commodity Exchange Act, and unjust enrichment under state law. The defendants' motion to dismiss was denied in 2023. In January 2024, the SDNY ruled that settlement in an earlier CDS antitrust litigation bars these plaintiffs from asserting claims based on conduct occurring before 30 June 2014. The plaintiffs appealed to the Second Circuit and the appeal was denied in May 2025. The case has returned to New Mexico federal court and the defendants have filed a motion for judgment on the pleadings. ### Interest rate swap and credit default swap US civil actions Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI, together with other financial institutions that act as market makers for interest rate swaps (IRS), are named as defendants in several antitrust actions, including one purported class action and individual actions brought by certain swap execution facilities, which are consolidated in the SDNY. The complaints allege the defendants conspired to prevent the development of exchanges for IRS and demand unspecified money damages. The parties have reached a settlement of the class action, which received final court approval and was paid in 2024. The individual claims are proceeding separately in the SDNY. ### BDC Finance L.L.C. In 2008, BDC Finance L.L.C. (BDC) filed a complaint in the Supreme Court of the State of New York, demanding damages of $298m, alleging that Barclays Bank PLC had breached a contract in connection with a portfolio of total return swaps governed by an ISDA Master Agreement. Following a trial, the court ruled in 2018 that Barclays Bank PLC was not a defaulting party, which was affirmed on appeal. Barclays Bank PLC filed a counterclaim against BDC for damages, legal fees, expenses and interest. In November 2025, the court granted Barclays' pretrial motion to exclude certain evidence. BDC is appealing. A trial on damages will be scheduled. ### Civil actions in respect of the US Anti-Terrorism Act Eight civil actions, on behalf of more than 4,000 plaintiffs, were filed in US federal courts in the US District Court in the Eastern District of New York (EDNY) and SDNY against Barclays Bank PLC and a number of other banks. The complaints generally allege that Barclays Bank PLC and those banks engaged in a conspiracy to facilitate US dollar‐denominated transactions for the Iranian government and various Iranian banks, which in turn funded acts of terrorism that injured or killed the plaintiffs or the plaintiffs' family members. The plaintiffs seek to recover damages for pain, suffering and mental anguish under the US Anti-Terrorism Act, which allows for the trebling of any proven damages. The court granted the defendants' motions to dismiss three out of the six actions in the EDNY. The plaintiffs appealed in one action and the dismissal was affirmed, and judgment was entered, in 2023. The plaintiffs' motion to vacate the judgment was denied in September 2025. The other two dismissed actions in the EDNY were consolidated into one action. The plaintiffs in that action, and in one other action in the EDNY, filed amended complaints and the defendants' motion to dismiss is fully briefed. The two other actions in the EDNY are currently stayed. Out of the two actions in the SDNY, the court granted the defendants' motion to dismiss the first action. That action is stayed, and the second SDNY action is stayed pending any appeal on the dismissal of the first. ### Shareholder derivative action In 2020, a purported Barclays shareholder filed a purported derivative action in New York state court against BCI and a number of current and former members of the Board of Directors of Barclays PLC and senior executives or employees of the Group. The shareholder plaintiff filed the claim on behalf of nominal defendant Barclays PLC, alleging that the individual defendants harmed the company through breaches of their duties, including under the Companies Act 2006. The plaintiff sought damages on behalf of Barclays PLC for the losses that Barclays PLC allegedly suffered as a result of these alleged breaches. An amended complaint was filed in 2021, which BCI and certain other defendants moved to dismiss. The motion to dismiss was granted in 2022. The plaintiff appealed the decision, and the dismissal was unanimously affirmed in 2023 by the First Judicial Department in New York. The plaintiff appealed the First Judicial Department's decision to the New York Court of Appeals. The dismissal was affirmed by the New York Court of Appeals in May 2025, concluding the matter. In --- Notes to the financial statements (continued) Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings November 2025, the same plaintiff filed a new complaint in New York state court against the same defendants. Barclays has not yet been served. Skilled person review in relation to historical timeshare loans and associated matters Clydesdale Financial Services Limited (CFSL), a subsidiary of the Group which trades as Barclays Partner Finance and houses Barclays' point-of-sale finance business, was required by the FCA to undertake a skilled person review in 2020 following concerns about historical affordability assessments for certain loans to customers in connection with timeshare purchases. The skilled person review was concluded in 2021. CFSL complied fully with the skilled person review requirements, including carrying out certain remediation measures. CFSL was not required to conduct a full back book review. Instead, CFSL reviewed limited historical lending to ascertain whether its practices caused customer harm and has remediated any examples of harm. This work was substantially completed during 2023, utilising provisions booked to account for any remediations. This matter is now concluded. Motor finance commission arrangements From 2003 to late 2019, CFSL, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, provided motor finance to customers in the UK. In 2020, CFSL was transferred from Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays Principal Investments Ltd (BPIL), another subsidiary of Barclays PLC. Barclays Bank PLC has provided an intragroup indemnity to BPIL in respect of historical litigation and conduct matters relating to CFSL. In January 2024, the FCA appointed a skilled person to undertake a review of the historical use of discretionary commission arrangements and sales in the motor finance market across several firms. This review followed two final decisions by the UK Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) and a number of complaints and court claims, including some against CFSL. On 7 October 2025, the FCA began consulting on an industry-wide compensation scheme for eligible motor finance customers. Barclays has engaged with the FCA as part of its consultation process and the FCA has stated that, if it introduces a redress scheme, it expects to publish a policy statement and final rules in February or March 2026, with compensation to consumers beginning later in 2026. The FCA has indicated that it expects to lift the existing pause on the handling of certain motor finance complaints on 31 May 2026, subject to the terms of the FCA redress scheme, if adopted. Barclays considers it more likely than not that a redress scheme will be implemented by the FCA. As a result, Barclays has recognised in CFSL a provision of £325m in respect of this matter as at 31 December 2025 (as at 31 December 2024: £90m). Recognising that the proposed terms of the FCA redress scheme are subject to consultation, in calculating potential redress costs and the amount of provision required, Barclays has applied a weighted average of multiple scenarios, each incorporating differing evaluations of the FCA's current proposals. The current provision reflects the estimated number of motor finance cases falling within the scope of the FCA redress scheme as proposed by the FCA consultation paper (which covers regulated motor finance agreements between 6 April 2007 and 1 November 2024 where a commission was payable by the lender to the broker), the anticipated level of customer redress reflecting the FCA's proposed methodology, the estimated customer response rate with reference to Barclays' previous remediation exercises and the costs associated with implementing the FCA's proposed approach to customer engagement. The final terms of the FCA redress scheme remain uncertain pending publication of the FCA's policy statement and final scheme rules. Accordingly, the legal and regulatory outcomes and the nature, extent and timing of any remediation action, if required, remain uncertain. The ultimate financial impact on Barclays could differ from the recognised provision, which represents Barclays' best estimate of the cost of redress based on the information currently available to Barclays. Over-issuance of securities in the US In 2022, executive management became aware that Barclays Bank PLC had issued securities materially in excess of the set amount under its US shelf registration statements. In 2022, a purported class action claim was filed in the US District Court in Manhattan seeking to hold Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and former and current executives responsible for declines in the price of Barclays PLC's American depositary receipts, which the plaintiffs claim occurred as a result of alleged misstatements and omissions in its public disclosures. The defendants' motion to dismiss the case was granted in part and denied in part in February 2024. The parties reached a settlement in respect of such lawsuit, which has received final court approval and has been paid, concluding the matter. The financial impact of this settlement is not material to the Group's operating results, cash flows or financial position. In addition, holders of VXX ETNs have brought a purported class action in the SDNY against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, and former and current executives and board members in the US alleging, among other things, that Barclays' failure to disclose that these ETNs were unregistered securities misled investors and that, as a result, Barclays is liable for the holders' alleged losses following the suspension of further sales and issuances of the ETNs. The plaintiffs were granted leave to amend and filed a new complaint in March 2024. Barclays' motion to dismiss was granted in March 2025. The plaintiffs' motion for reconsideration was denied in June 2025. The plaintiffs are appealing the decision. In March 2024, a purported class action was filed in the SDNY against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and former and current executives. The plaintiff purports to bring claims on behalf of a class of short sellers, alleging that their short positions suffered substantial losses when Barclays suspended new issuances and sales of VXX ETNs as a result of the over-issuance of securities. Barclays' motion to dismiss was granted in March 2025. The plaintiff appealed the decision granting Barclays' motion to dismiss and, in December 2025, the Second Circuit affirmed the dismissal. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings ## 2. Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank UK PLC ### HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) assessments concerning UK Value Added Tax In 2018, HMRC issued notices that have the effect of either removing certain Barclays overseas subsidiaries that have operations in the UK from Barclays' UK VAT group or preventing them from joining it. Supplies between members of a UK VAT group are generally free from VAT. The notices had both retrospective and prospective effect. Barclays appealed HMRC's decisions to the First-Tier Tribunal (Tax Chamber) in relation to both the retrospective VAT assessments and the ongoing VAT payments made since 2018. £181m of VAT (inclusive of interest) was assessed retrospectively by HMRC covering the periods 2014 to 2018, of which approximately £128m is expected to be attributed to Barclays Bank UK PLC and £53m to Barclays Bank PLC. This retrospectively assessed VAT was paid in 2018 and an asset, adjusted to reflect expected eventual recovery, is recognised. Since 2018 Barclays has paid, and recognised as an expense, VAT on intra-group supplies from the relevant subsidiaries to the members of the VAT group. In respect of the ongoing VAT payments, the court upheld HMRC's denial of the VAT grouping in August 2024. Barclays has appealed this decision to the Upper Tribunal. ### FCA investigations concerning financial crime systems and controls and compliance with the Money Laundering Regulations The FCA conducted civil enforcement investigations into Barclays Bank PLC's and Barclays Bank UK PLC's compliance with the Money Laundering Regulations and the FCA's Principles of Business and Rules relating to anti-money laundering and financial crime systems and controls. The FCA's investigation of Barclays Bank PLC focused primarily on the historical oversight and management of a customer with heightened risk. In July 2025, Barclays Bank PLC agreed a settlement with the FCA to resolve the investigation. At the same time, Barclays Bank UK PLC reached a settlement with the FCA in a separate investigation concerning the onboarding of a client money account for an FCA-regulated firm. The FCA recognised Barclays' cooperation in both matters, which are now concluded. ### UK bank levy In November 2024, HMRC updated its published guidance on the treatment of beneficiary accounts for the purposes of the exclusion of protected deposits from the UK bank levy charge. HMRC's interpretation of the UK bank levy legislation differs from Barclays' interpretation of the legislation, which has been applied in Barclays' UK bank levy returns and which Barclays continues to consider is correct. In December 2024, HMRC wrote to notify Barclays of its intention to challenge this treatment. Whilst engagement with HMRC continued during 2025, discussions remain at a relatively early stage and assessments have not yet been issued. ## 3. Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC ### Potential indemnity claim relating to the sale of Barclays Consumer Bank Europe In January 2025, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC completed the sale of certain assets and liabilities, specifically the Consumer Bank Europe, its German consumer finance business, to BAWAG P.S.K., a wholly-owned subsidiary of BAWAG Group AG (BAWAG). As part of the transaction, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC provided BAWAG with a capped indemnity in relation to transfer taxes on certain assets. Discussions with the relevant taxation authority are ongoing and are at an early stage. No formal assessment has been issued. ## 4. Barclays PLC ### Civil action in respect of statements concerning Barclays' former CEO In 2023, a purported class action was filed in federal court in California against Barclays PLC and a number of current and former senior executives of Barclays PLC. It was amended in 2024 to assert US securities law claims against Barclays PLC and individual defendants, and a UK securities law claim against Barclays PLC. The complaint seeks to hold the defendants responsible for declines in the price of Barclays PLC's American depositary receipts and Barclays PLC's ordinary shares, which the plaintiffs claim occurred as a result of alleged misstatements and omissions in Barclays' public disclosures relating to its former CEO's relationship with Jeffrey Epstein. The defendants filed motions to dismiss and in June 2025, the court dismissed the UK securities law claim against Barclays PLC and granted an individual defendant's motion to dismiss in part. Another individual defendant's motion to dismiss was denied. The defendants moved for reconsideration or, alternatively, leave to appeal, which is pending before the court. The plaintiffs filed a second amended complaint in July 2025, repleading the UK securities law claim against Barclays PLC and which Barclays PLC has moved to dismiss. ### General The Group is engaged in various other legal, competition and regulatory matters in the UK, the US and a number of other overseas jurisdictions. It is subject to legal proceedings brought by and against the Group which arise in the ordinary course of business from time to time, including (but not limited to) disputes in relation to contracts, securities, guarantees, debt collection, consumer credit, fraud, trusts, client assets, competition, data management and protection, intellectual property, money laundering, financial crime, employment, environmental and other statutory and common law issues. The Group is also subject to enquiries and examinations, requests for information, audits, investigations and legal and other proceedings by regulators, governmental and other public bodies in connection with (but not limited to) consumer protection measures, measures to combat money laundering and financial crime, compliance with legislation and regulation, wholesale trading activity and other areas of banking and business activities in which the Group is or has been engaged. The Group is cooperating with the relevant authorities and keeping all relevant agencies briefed as appropriate in relation to these matters and others described in this note on an ongoing basis. At the present time, Barclays PLC does not expect the ultimate resolution of any of these other matters to have a material adverse effect on the Group's financial position. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such matters and the matters specifically described in this note, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters (including formerly active matters or those matters arising after the date of this note) will not be material to Barclays PLC's results, operations or cash flows for a particular period, depending on, among other things, the amount of the loss resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of profit otherwise reported for the reporting period. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Capital instruments, equity and reserves # Capital instruments, equity and reserves The notes included in this section focus on the Group's loan capital and shareholders' equity, including issued share capital, retained earnings, other equity balances and interests of minority shareholders in our subsidiary entities (non-controlling interests). For more information on capital management and how the Group maintains sufficient capital to meet our regulatory requirements, refer to the Capital risk management section. # 26 Subordinated liabilities Accounting for subordinated liabilities Subordinated liabilities are measured at amortised cost, using the effective interest method under IFRS 9. | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | As at 1 January | 11,921 | 10,494 | | Issuances | 1,772 | 1,870 | | Redemptions | (727) | (476) | | Other | (12) | 33 | | As at 31 December | 12,954 | 11,921 | Issuances of £1,772m comprise £1,045m EUR 4.616% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes issued externally by Barclays PLC and £727m mezzanine and junior securitisation notes issued externally by a Barclays securitisation special purpose vehicle (SPV). Redemptions of £727m comprise £500m GBP 3.750% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes, £115m SGD 3.750% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes issued externally by Barclays PLC, £112m USD Floating Rate Notes issued externally by a Barclays subsidiary, Other movements predominantly comprise foreign exchange movements and fair value hedge adjustments. Subordinated liabilities include accrued interest and none of the Group's subordinated liabilities are secured other than the £732m subordinated notes. Dated subordinated liabilities | | Initial call date | Maturity date | 2025 £m | 2024 £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Barclays PLC issued | | | | | | 3.750% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (GBP 500m) | 2025 | 2030 | — | 483 | | 3.750% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (SGD 200m) | 2025 | 2030 | — | 117 | | 5.20% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 2,050m) | | 2026 | 1,522 | 1,580 | | 1.125% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,000m) | 2026 | 2031 | 876 | 810 | | 4.836% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 2,000m) | 2027 | 2028 | 1,472 | 1,535 | | 8.407% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (GBP 1,000m) | 2027 | 2032 | 1,023 | 1,010 | | 5.088% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (USD 1,500m) | 2029 | 2030 | 1,063 | 1,088 | | 3.564% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (USD 1,000m) | 2030 | 2035 | 657 | 663 | | 6.158% Fixed to Floating Tier 2 Subordinated Callable notes (AUD 500m) | 2030 | 2035 | 249 | 248 | | Floating Rate Tier 2 Subordinated Callable Notes (AUD 500m) | 2030 | 2035 | 249 | 248 | | 4.973% Fixed Rate Resetting Tier 2 Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,500m) | 2031 | 2036 | 1,371 | 1,324 | | 4.616% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,250m) | 2032 | 2037 | 1,126 | — | | 7.119% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (USD 1,500m) | 2033 | 2034 | 1,105 | 1,146 | | 3.811% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (USD 1,000m) | 2041 | 2042 | 562 | 590 | | Barclays Bank PLC issued | | | | | | 5.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (GBP 274m) | | 2026 | 279 | 279 | | 5.4% Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan (JPY 15,000m) | | 2027 | 71 | 76 | | 6.33% Subordinated Notes (GBP 50m) | | 2032 | 46 | 45 | | Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 68m) | | 2040 | 59 | 56 | | External issuances by other subsidiaries | | | 492 | 623 | | External issuances by Barclays securitisation SPV | | 2036 | 732 | — | | Total dated subordinated liabilities | | | 12,954 | 11,921 | Note: 1 Instrument values are disclosed to the nearest million. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 408 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Capital instruments, equity and reserves ## Dated subordinated liabilities Dated subordinated liabilities are issued by Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiaries for the development and expansion of their businesses and to strengthen their respective capital bases. The principal terms of the dated subordinated liabilities are described below: ### Subordination Dated subordinated liabilities issued by Barclays PLC rank behind the claims against Barclays PLC of unsecured unsubordinated creditors, but before the claims of the holders of its equity. All dated subordinated liabilities externally issued by Barclays Bank PLC rank behind the claims against Barclays Bank PLC of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors, but before the claims of the holders of its equity. The dated subordinated liabilities externally issued by Barclays Bank PLC subsidiaries are similarly subordinated as the external subordinated liabilities issued by Barclays Bank PLC. The dated subordinated liabilities issued externally by a Barclays Bank UK securitisation SPV are asset backed securities with limited recourse obligations against the SPV's assets. The junior and mezzanine notes rank behind the senior notes issued by the Barclays Bank UK SPV. Noteholders will have no recourse to Barclays Bank UK PLC as a source of payment. ### Maturity Dated floating rate subordinated liabilities externally issued by Barclays Bank PLC subsidiaries £492m( 2024:£623m) with maturities ranging from 2026 to 2032. ### Interest Interest on the Floating Rate Notes is fixed periodically in advance, based on the related market rates. Interest on Fixed Rate Notes is set by reference to market rates at the time of issuance and fixed until maturity. Interest on the 3.811% USD Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable notes, 1.125% EUR Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes, 3.564% USD Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes, 4.973% EUR Fixed Rate Resetting Tier2 Subordinated Callable Notes, 4.616% EUR Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes, and the 8.407% GBP Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes are fixed until the call date. After the respective call dates, in the event that they are not redeemed, the interest rates will be reset and fixed until maturity based on a market rate. Interest on the 5.088% USD Fixed-to-Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes, 6.158% AUD Fixed to Floating Tier 2 Subordinated Callable notes and 7.119% USD Fixed-to-Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes are fixed until the call date. After the call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the interest rate will reset periodically in advance based on market rates. ### Repayment Those subordinated liabilities with a call date are repayable at the option of the issuer on such call date in accordance with the conditions governing the respective debt obligations, some in whole or in part, and some only in whole. The remaining dated subordinated liabilities outstanding at 31 December 2025 are redeemable only on maturity, subject in particular cases to provisions allowing an early redemption in the event of certain changes in tax law, or to certain changes in legislation or regulations. Any repayments prior to maturity require, in the case of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC, the prior consent of the PRA, or in the case of the overseas issues, the approval of the local regulator for that jurisdiction and of the PRA in certain circumstances. There are no committed facilities in existence at the balance sheet date which permit the refinancing of debt beyond the date of maturity. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Capital instruments, equity and reserves # 27 Ordinary shares, share premium, and other equity Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid | | Number of shares | Ordinary share capital | Ordinary share premium | Total share capital and share premium | Other equity instruments | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | As at 1 January 2025 | 14,420 | 3,605 | 581 | 4,186 | 12,075 | | Issued to staff under share incentive plans | 83 | 20 | 130 | 150 | — | | AT1 securities issuance | — | — | — | — | 3,784 | | AT1 securities redemption | — | — | — | — | (3,133) | | Repurchase of shares | (636) | (158) | — | (158) | — | | Other movements | — | — | — | — | (1) | | As at 31 December 2025 | 13,867 | 3,467 | 711 | 4,178 | 12,725 | | As at 1 January 2024 | 15,155 | 3,789 | 499 | 4,288 | 13,259 | | Issued to staff under share incentive plans | 83 | 21 | 82 | 103 | — | | AT1 securities issuance | — | — | — | — | 1,598 | | AT1 securities redemption | — | — | — | — | (2,753) | | Repurchase of shares | (818) | (205) | — | (205) | — | | Other movements | — | — | — | — | (29) | | As at 31 December 2024 | 14,420 | 3,605 | 581 | 4,186 | 12,075 | # Called up share capital Called up share capital comprises 13,867m (2024: 14,420m) ordinary shares of 25p each. # Share repurchase At the 2025 AGM on 7 May 2025, Barclays PLC was authorised to repurchase up to an aggregate of $1,437\mathrm{m}$ of its ordinary shares of 25p each. The authorisation is effective until the AGM in 2026 or the close of business on 30 June 2025, whichever is the earlier. During 2025, 636m shares were repurchased with a total nominal value of £158m (2024: 818m shares with a nominal value of £205m). # Other equity instruments Other equity instruments of £12,725m (2024: £12,075m) include AT1 securities issued by Barclays PLC. The AT1 securities are perpetual securities with no fixed maturity and are structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under prevailing capital rules applicable as at the relevant issue date. In 2025, there were four issuances of AT1 instruments, in the form of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, for £3,784m (2024: two issuances for £1,598m) which includes issuance costs of £15m (2024: £6m). There were three redemptions in 2025 totalling £3,133m (2024: two redemptions totalling £2,753m). AT1 equity instruments | | Initial call date | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | £m | £m | | AT1 equity instruments - Barclays PLC | | | | | 7.125% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities | 2025 | — | 996 | | 6.375% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities1 | 2025 | — | 994 | | 6.125% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD 1,500m) | 2025 | — | 1,142 | | 8.875% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities1 | 2027 | 1,247 | 1,247 | | 8.300% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (SGD 450m) | 2027 | 264 | 264 | | 4.375% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD 1,500m)1 | 2028 | 1,075 | 1,078 | | 7.300% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (SGD 400m) | 2028 | 248 | 248 | | 9.250% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities1 | 2028 | 1,484 | 1,497 | | 8.000% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD 2,000m) | 2029 | 1,647 | 1,647 | | 9.625% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD 1,750m)1 | 2029 | 1,395 | 1,395 | | 5.400% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (SGD 600m)1 | 2030 | 343 | 339 | | 8.500% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities1 | 2030 | 1,245 | 1,228 | | 8.375% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities1 | 2031 | 993 | — | | 4.650% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (SGD 500m)1 | 2031 | 290 | — | | 7.625% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD 1,500m) | 2035 | 1,181 | — | | 6.125% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (EUR 1,500m)1 | 2035 | 1,313 | — | | Total AT1 equity instruments | | 12,725 | 12,075 | Note: 1 Reported net of securities held by the Group. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Capital instruments, equity and reserves The principal terms of the AT1 securities are described below: - AT1 securities rank behind the claims against Barclays PLC i) of all creditors of Barclays PLC; ii) such claims which are expressed to be subordinated to the claims of unsubordinated creditors of Barclays PLC, but not further or otherwise; or iii) such claims which are, or are expressed to be, junior to the claims of other creditors of Barclays PLC, whether subordinated or unsubordinated, other than claims which rank, or are expressed to rank, pari passu with, or junior to, the claims of holders of the AT1 securities of Barclays PLC. - AT1 securities are undated and are redeemable, at the option of Barclays PLC, in whole on either (i) the initial reset date, or on any fifth anniversary after the initial reset date or (ii) any day falling in a named period ending on the initial reset date, or on any fifth anniversary after the initial reset date. In addition, the AT1 securities are redeemable, at the option of Barclays PLC, in whole in the event of certain changes in the tax or regulatory treatment of the securities and, in certain cases, on a clean-up call. Any redemptions require the prior permission of the PRA. - Interest on the AT1 securities is due and payable only at the sole discretion of Barclays PLC, and Barclays PLC has sole and absolute discretion at all times and for any reason to cancel (in whole or in part) any interest payment that would otherwise be payable on any interest payment date. - The Additional Tier 1 securities shall convert into ordinary shares of Barclays PLC, at a predetermined price, should the fully loaded CET1 Ratio fall below 7%. # 28 Reserves ## Currency translation reserve The currency translation reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on the retranslation of the Group's net investment in foreign operations, net of the effects of hedging. ## Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve The fair value through other comprehensive income reserve represents the changes in the fair value of financial instruments accounted for at fair value through other comprehensive income investments since initial recognition. ## Cash flow hedging reserve The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that will be recycled to profit or loss when the hedged transactions affect profit or loss. ## Own credit reserve The own credit reserve reflects the cumulative own credit gains and losses on financial liabilities at fair value. Amounts in the own credit reserve are not recycled to profit or loss in future periods. ## Other reserves and treasury shares Other reserves relate to redeemed ordinary and preference shares issued by the Group. Treasury shares relate to Barclays PLC shares held in relation to the Group's various share schemes. These schemes are described in Note 31. Treasury shares are deducted from shareholders' equity within other reserves. | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Currency translation reserve | 2,493 | 3,625 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve | (1,100) | (1,873) | | Cash flow hedging reserve | (666) | (2,930) | | Own credit reserve | (990) | (1,059) | | Other reserves and treasury shares | 1,891 | 1,769 | | Total | 1,628 | (468) | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Capital instruments, equity and reserves ## 29 Non-controlling interests | | Profit attributable to non-controlling interest | | Equity attributable to non-controlling interest | | Dividends paid to non-controlling interest | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Barclays Bank PLC issued: | | | | | | | | - Preference shares | 32 | 41 | 318 | 529 | 32 | 41 | | Undated subordinated liabilities | 8 | 8 | 126 | 126 | 8 | 8 | | Other non-controlling interests | 1 | — | 8 | 5 | 1 | — | | Total | 41 | 49 | 452 | 660 | 41 | 49 | In 2025, there were no issuances (2024: none) and £211m redemptions (2024: £0m). Other non-controlling interests relates to the holding in Female Innovators Lab LP, see Note 43 for more details. ## Barclays Bank PLC and protective rights of non-controlling interests Barclays PLC holds 100% of the voting rights of Barclays Bank PLC. As at 31 December 2025, Barclays Bank PLC has in issue preference shares and undated subordinated liabilities instruments. These are non-controlling interests to the Group. A fixed coupon rate is attached to all undated subordinated liabilities instruments until the initial call date. After the initial call date, in the event they are not redeemed, coupon payments in relation to the 6.125% Undated Notes are fixed periodically in advance for five-year periods based on market rates. Coupon payments for all other undated subordinated liabilities instruments are at rates fixed periodically in advance based on market rates. The payment of preference share dividends are at the discretion of Barclays Bank PLC, save that payment of preference share dividends will be compulsory where Barclays PLC has declared or paid a dividend on ordinary shares, or in certain cases, any class of preference shares, in the preceding six-month period. If Barclays Bank PLC does not declare or pay in full any dividend on the preference shares, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays PLC are restricted from paying dividends on ordinary shares until a dividend or coupon is next paid on these instruments or the instruments are redeemed or purchased by Barclays Bank PLC. Any unpaid dividends will accumulate if not paid and dividends not paid become payable if Barclays PLC subsequently declares or pays a dividend on ordinary shares, or in certain cases, any class of preference shares, or in certain other circumstances. There are no restrictions on Barclays Bank PLC's ability to remit capital to Barclays PLC as a result of these issued instruments. The payment of undated subordinated liabilities instrument coupons are typically at the sole discretion of Barclays Bank PLC. No dividend or coupon payments may be made unless Barclays Bank PLC satisfies a specified solvency test. Preference share redemptions are typically at the discretion of Barclays Bank PLC and are redeemable in whole, but not in part, at the initial call date and on any dividend payment date after the initial call date, pursuant to their respective terms. Undated subordinated liabilities instruments are repayable, at the option of Barclays Bank PLC in whole at the initial call date and on any fifth anniversary after the initial call date. In addition, each issue of undated subordinated liabilities instruments is repayable, at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole for certain tax reasons, either at any time, or on an interest payment date. There are no events of default except non-payment of principal or mandatory interest. Any repayments or redemptions require the prior consent of the PRA, and in respect of the preference shares, any such redemption will be subject to the Companies Act 2006 and the Articles of Barclays Bank PLC. | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | Instrument | £m | £m | | Preference Shares: | | | | US Dollar Preference Shares | 318 | 318 | | Euro Preference Shares | — | 211 | | Total Barclays Bank PLC Preference Shares | 318 | 529 | | Undated subordinated liabilities: | | | | 5.03% Undated Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan (JPY8bn) | 39 | 39 | | 5.0% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY12bn) | 53 | 53 | | 6.125% Undated Subordinated Notes (£550m) | 34 | 34 | | Total undated subordinated liabilities | 126 | 126 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits # Employee benefits The notes included in this section focus on the costs and commitments associated with employing our staff. # 30 Staff costs # Accounting for staff costs Deferred cash and share awards are made to employees to incentivise performance over the period employees provide services. To receive an award, an individual must have provided service over the vesting period and been employed on the scheduled vesting date or be considered an eligible leaver. The expense for deferred cash and share awards is recognised over the period employees' services contribute to the awards. The Group considers it appropriate to recognise the expense over the vesting period, including the financial year prior to the grant date. The accounting policies for share-based payments and retirement benefits are included in Note 31 and Note 32, respectively. | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Incentive awards granted: | | | | | Current year bonus | 1,422 | 1,278 | 1,202 | | Deferred bonus | 786 | 636 | 543 | | Total incentive awards granted | 2,208 | 1,914 | 1,745 | | Reconciliation of incentive awards granted to income statement charge: | | | | | Less: deferred bonuses granted but not charged in current year | (555) | (452) | (384) | | Add: current year charges for deferred bonuses from previous years | 426 | 405 | 390 | | Other differences between incentive awards granted and income statement charge | 3 | (2) | (1) | | Income statement charge for performance costs | 2,082 | 1,865 | 1,750 | | Other income statement charges: | | | | | Salaries | 5,099 | 4,994 | 5,120 | | Social security costs | 863 | 754 | 755 | | Retirement benefits1 | 572 | 558 | 539 | | Other compensation costs | 637 | 587 | 555 | | Total compensation costs2 | 9,253 | 8,758 | 8,719 | | Other resourcing costs: | | | | | Outsourcing | 929 | 693 | 601 | | Redundancy and restructuring | 199 | 235 | 452 | | Temporary staff costs | 70 | 61 | 91 | | Other | 156 | 129 | 154 | | Total other resourcing costs | 1,354 | 1,118 | 1,298 | | Total staff costs | 10,607 | 9,876 | 10,017 | | Group compensation costs as a % of total income | 31.8 | 32.7 | 34.4 | | Group staff costs as a % of total income | 36.4 | 36.9 | 39.5 | # Notes: 1 Retirement benefits charge includes £382m (2024: £377m; 2023: £371m) with respect to defined contribution schemes and £190m (2024: £181m; 2023: £168m) with respect to defined benefit schemes. 2 £834m (2024: £875m; 2023: £860m) of Group compensation cost was capitalised as internally generated software and excluded from the staff costs disclosed above. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits # 31 Share-based payments # Accounting for share-based payments Employee incentives include awards in the form of shares and share options, as well as offering employees the opportunity to purchase shares on favourable terms. The cost of the employee services received in respect of the shares or share options granted is recognised in the income statement over the period that employees provide services. The overall cost of the award is calculated using the number of shares and options expected to vest and the fair value of the shares or options at the date of grant. The number of shares and options expected to vest takes into account the likelihood that applicable performance and service conditions included in the terms of the awards will be met. For other share-based payment schemes, such as Sharesave and Sharepurchase, there are non-vesting conditions which must be met. Failure to meet the non-vesting condition is treated as a cancellation, resulting in an acceleration of recognition of the cost of the employee services. The fair value of shares is the market price ruling on the grant date, in some cases adjusted to reflect restrictions on transferability. The fair value of options granted is determined using the Black-Scholes model to estimate the numbers of shares likely to vest. The model takes into account the exercise price of the option, the current share price, the risk-free interest rate, the expected volatility of the share price over the life of the option and other relevant factors. Market conditions that must be met in order for the award to vest are also reflected in the fair value of the award, as are any other non-vesting conditions – such as continuing to make payments into a share-based savings scheme. The charge for the year arising from share-based payment schemes was as follows: | | Charge for the year | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | | £m | £m | £m | | Share Value Plan and Deferred Share Value Plan | 353 | 319 | 284 | | Others | 259 | 178 | 191 | | Total equity settled | 612 | 497 | 475 | | Cash settled | 40 | 10 | 4 | | Total Share-based payments | 652 | 507 | 479 | The terms of the main current plans are as follows: # Share Value Plan (SVP) SVP awards have been granted to participants in the form of a conditional right to receive Barclays PLC shares or provisional allocations of Barclays PLC shares which vest or are considered for release over a period of three, four, five or seven years. Participants do not pay to receive an award or to receive a release of shares. SVP awards are also made to eligible employees for recruitment purposes. All awards are subject to potential forfeiture in certain leaver scenarios. # Deferred Share Value Plan (DSVP) The terms of the DSVP are materially the same as the terms of the SVP as described above, save that Executive Directors are not eligible to participate in the DSVP, and the DSVP operates over market purchase shares only. # Other schemes In addition to the SVP and DSVP, the Barclays PLC Group operates a number of other schemes settled in Barclays PLC Shares including Sharesave (both UK and Ireland), Sharepurchase (both UK and overseas), and the Barclays PLC Group Long Term Incentive Plan. A delivery of upfront shares to 'Material Risk Takers' can be made as a Share Incentive Award (Holding Period) under the SVP. A free share award was delivered under the SVP to all eligible employees in 2025, with this award being subject to a two-year holding period. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits ## Share option and award plans The weighted average fair value per award granted, weighted average share price at the date of exercise/release of shares during the year, weighted average contractual remaining life and number of options and awards outstanding (including those exercisable) at the balance sheet date were as follows: | | 2025 | | | | 2024 | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Weighted average fair value per award granted in year | Weighted average share price at exercise/ release during year | Weighted average remaining contractual life | Number of options/ awards outstanding | Weighted average fair value per award granted in year | Weighted average share price at exercise/ release during year | Weighted average remaining contractual life | Number of options/ awards outstanding | | | £ | £ | in years | (000s) | £ | £ | in years | (000s) | | SVP and DSVP1,2 | 2.86 | 3.09 | 1 | 438,402 | 1.52 | 1.74 | 1 | 504,825 | | Others1,3 | 1.46-3.55 | 3.04-3.99 | 0-3 | 210,182 | 0.81-2.10 | 1.71-2.12 | 0-3 | 240,029 | SVP and DSVP are nil cost awards on which the performance conditions are substantially completed at the date of grant. Consequently, the fair value of these awards is based on the market value at that date. Sharesave has a contractual life of 3 years and 5 years, the expected volatility is 29.04% for 3 years and 26.48% for 5 years. The risk-free interest rates used for valuations are 3.47% and 3.56% for 3 years and 5 years, respectively. The pure dividend yield rates used for valuations are 1.99% and 2.14% for 3 years and 5 years respectively. The repo rates used for valuations are (0.60)% and (0.69)% for 3 years and 5 years respectively. The inputs into the model, such as risk-free interest rate, expected volatility, pure dividend yield rates and repo rates are derived from market data. ## Movements in options and awards The movement in the number of options and awards for the major schemes and the weighted average exercise price of options was: | | SVP and DSVP1,2 | | Others1,3 | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Number (000s) | | Number (000s) | | Weighted average exercise price (£) | | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | | Outstanding at beginning of year/acquisition date | 504,825 | 495,724 | 240,029 | 288,755 | 1.19 | 1.06 | | Granted in the year | 144,110 | 224,385 | 102,649 | 132,013 | 2.99 | 1.79 | | Exercised/released in the year | (190,408) | (191,471) | (123,832) | (163,322) | 1.01 | 0.95 | | Less: forfeited in the year | (20,125) | (23,813) | (7,874) | (15,164) | 1.44 | 1.19 | | Less: expired in the year | — | — | (790) | (2,253) | 1.19 | 1.25 | | Outstanding at end of year | 438,402 | 504,825 | 210,182 | 240,029 | 1.54 | 1.19 | | Of which exercisable: | — | — | 39,755 | 25,164 | 0.95 | 1.23 | ## Notes: 1. Options/award granted over Barclays PLC shares. 2. Weighted average exercise price is not applicable for SVP and DSVP awards as these are not share option schemes. 3. The number of awards within Others at the end of the year principally relates to Sharesave (number of awards exercisable at end of year was 22,046,433 (2024: 5,343,579)). The weighted average exercise price relates to Sharesave. Awards and options granted to employees and former employees under the Group’s share plans may be satisfied using new issue shares, treasury shares and market purchase shares. Awards granted under the DSVP may be satisfied using market purchase shares only. There were no significant modifications to the share-based payments arrangements in 2025 and 2024. As at 31 December 2025, the total liability arising from cash-settled employee share-based payments transactions was £40m (2024: £11m). ## Holdings of Barclays PLC shares and hedges Various employee benefit trusts established by the Group hold shares in Barclays PLC to meet obligations under the Barclays share-based payment schemes. The total number of Barclays shares held in these employee benefit trusts at 31 December 2025 was 20m (2024: 19m). Dividend rights have been waived on all these shares. The total market value of the shares held in trust based on the year end share price of £4.80 (2024: £2.68) was £96m (2024: £50m). For accounting of treasury shares, see Note 28. The Group has entered into physically settled forward contracts to hedge the settlement of certain share-based payment schemes. The fixed forward price to be paid under these contracts is £30m and has been recorded in retained earnings. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits ## 32 Retirement benefits ### Accounting for retirement benefits The Group operates a number of pension schemes and post-employment benefit schemes. Defined contribution – the Group recognises contributions due in respect of the accounting period in the income statement. Any contributions unpaid at the balance sheet date are included as a liability. Defined benefit – the Group recognises its obligations to members of each scheme at the period end, less the fair value of the scheme assets after applying the asset ceiling test. Each scheme’s obligations are calculated using the projected unit credit method. Scheme assets are stated at fair value as at the period end. Changes in pension scheme liabilities or assets (remeasurements) that do not arise from regular pension cost, net interest on net defined benefit liabilities or assets, past service costs, settlements or contributions to the scheme, are recognised in other comprehensive income. Remeasurements comprise experience adjustments (differences between previous actuarial assumptions and what has actually occurred), the effects of changes in actuarial assumptions, return on scheme assets (excluding amounts included in the interest on the assets) and any changes in the effect of the asset ceiling restriction (excluding amounts included in the interest on the restriction). The cost of providing healthcare benefits to retired employees is accrued as a liability in the financial statements over the period that the employees provide services to the Group, using a methodology similar to that for defined benefit pension schemes. ## Pension schemes ### UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) The UKRF is the Group’s main scheme, representing 95.3% (2024: 96%) of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations. Between 1 January 2025 and 30 June 2025, Barclays Bank PLC was the principal employer of the UKRF, with Barclays Bank UK PLC and Barclays Execution Services Limited as the participating employers. From 1 July 2025, the UKRF was amended to become a sectionalised scheme to meet the requirements of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Banking Reform) (Pensions) Regulations 2015, creating two separate sections - the Barclays Bank Section and the Barclays UK Section. From 1 July 2025, Barclays Bank PLC became the principal employer of the Barclays Bank Section, with Barclays Execution Services Limited as a participating employer. From that date, Barclays Bank UK PLC participates only in the Barclays UK Section and is solely responsible for funding that section. Sectionalisation did not change the balance sheet position of the UKRF from the Group's perspective, and employees’ benefits are unchanged. The UKRF was closed to new entrants on 1 October 2012, and comprises a number of different benefit categories, the two most significant of which are: - Afterwork, which comprises a contributory cash balance defined benefit element, and a voluntary defined contribution element. The cash balance element is accrued each year and revalued until Normal Retirement Age in line with the increase in Retail Price Index (RPI) (up to a maximum of 5% p.a.). The risks that Barclays is exposed to in relation to Afterwork are limited although additional contributions are required if pre-retirement investment returns are not sufficient to provide for the benefits. - The 1964 Pension Scheme. Most UK employees recruited before July 1997 built up benefits in this non-contributory defined benefit scheme in respect of service up to 31 March 2010. Pensions were calculated by reference to service and pensionable salary. From 1 April 2010, members became eligible to accrue future service benefits in either Afterwork or the Pension Investment Plan, a historic defined contribution section which is now closed to future contributions. The risks that Barclays is exposed to in relation to the 1964 Pension Scheme are typical of final salary pension schemes, principally that investment returns fall short of expectations, that inflation exceeds expectations, and that retirees live longer than expected. ### Barclays Pension Savings Plan (BPSP) The BPSP is a defined contribution scheme providing benefits for all new UK hires from 1 October 2012. BPSP is not subject to the same investment return, inflation or life expectancy risks for Barclays that defined benefit schemes are. Members’ benefits reflect contributions paid and the level of investment returns achieved. ## Other Apart from the UKRF and the BPSP, Barclays operates a number of smaller pension and long-term employee benefits and post-retirement healthcare plans globally, the largest of which are the US defined benefit and defined contribution schemes. Many of the schemes are funded, with assets backing the obligations held in separate legal vehicles, such as trusts. Others are operated on an unfunded basis. The benefits provided, the approach to funding, and the legal basis of the schemes, reflect local environments. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits # Governance The UKRF operates under trust law and is managed and administered on behalf of the members in accordance with the terms of the Trust Deed and Rules and all relevant legislation. The Trustee is Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited, a private limited company and a wholly owned subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. The Trustee is the legal owner of the assets of the UKRF, which are held separately from the assets of the Group. The Trustee Board comprises six Management Directors selected by Barclays, of whom three are independent Directors, with no relationship with Barclays (and who are not members of the UKRF), plus three Member Nominated Directors selected from eligible active, deferred or pensioner members of the UKRF, who apply for the role. The BPSP is a group personal pension arrangement which operates as a collection of personal pension plans. Each personal pension plan is a direct contract between the employee and the BPSP provider (Legal & General Assurance Society Limited), and is regulated by the FCA. Similar principles of pension governance apply to the Group's other pension schemes, depending on local legislation. # Amounts recognised The following tables include amounts recognised in the income statement and an analysis of benefit obligations and scheme assets for all Group defined benefit schemes. The net position is reconciled to the assets and liabilities recognised on the balance sheet. The tables include funded and unfunded post-retirement benefits. The income statement charge with respect to Defined contribution schemes is disclosed as part of footnotes to Note 30 Staff costs. Income statement charge/(credit) | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Current service cost | 171 | 180 | 165 | | Net finance income | (159) | (154) | (222) | | Past service cost | 18 | — | — | | Other movements | 1 | 1 | 3 | | Total | 31 | 27 | (54) | Balance sheet reconciliation | | 2025 | | 2024 | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Total | Of which relates to UKRF | Total | Of which relates to UKRF | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Benefit obligation at beginning of the year | (19,600) | (18,729) | (21,513) | (20,618) | | Current service cost | (171) | (143) | (180) | (155) | | Interest costs on scheme liabilities | (1,029) | (994) | (933) | (901) | | Past service cost | (18) | — | — | — | | Remeasurement gain – financial | 536 | 548 | 1,794 | 1,797 | | Remeasurement (loss)/gain – demographic | (59) | (47) | 12 | 13 | | Remeasurement loss – experience | (196) | (202) | (55) | (54) | | Employee contributions | (5) | — | (6) | — | | Benefits paid | 1,206 | 1,163 | 1,230 | 1,189 | | Exchange and other movements | 25 | — | 51 | — | | Benefit obligation at end of the year | (19,311) | (18,404) | (19,600) | (18,729) | | Fair value of scheme assets at beginning of the year | 22,623 | 21,928 | 24,914 | 24,234 | | Interest income on scheme assets | 1,188 | 1,164 | 1,087 | 1,062 | | Employer contribution | 55 | 42 | 37 | 22 | | Remeasurement – return on scheme assets less than discount rate | (292) | (303) | (2,192) | (2,184) | | Employee contributions | 5 | — | 6 | — | | Benefits paid | (1,195) | (1,163) | (1,221) | (1,189) | | Exchange and other movements | (30) | (14) | (8) | (17) | | Fair value of scheme assets at end of the year | 22,354 | 21,654 | 22,623 | 21,928 | | Net surplus | 3,043 | 3,250 | 3,023 | 3,199 | | Retirement benefit assets | 3,308 | 3,250 | 3,263 | 3,199 | | Retirement benefit liabilities | (265) | — | (240) | — | | Net retirement benefit assets | 3,043 | 3,250 | 3,023 | 3,199 | Included within the total benefit obligation is £701m (2024: £695m) relating to overseas pensions and £206m (2024: £175m) relating to other post-employment benefits. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits Breakdown of the UKRF benefit obligation and assets split by section | | 2025 | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays Bank Section | Barclays UK Section | UKRF Total | UKRF Total | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Active members | 981 | 719 | 1,700 | 1,699 | | Deferred members (Afterwork) | 1,828 | 11 | 1,839 | 1,716 | | Deferred members (non-Afterwork) | 3,786 | — | 3,786 | 4,269 | | Pensioners and Dependents | 11,079 | — | 11,079 | 11,045 | | Benefit obligation at end of the year | 17,674 | 730 | 18,404 | 18,729 | | Assets at end of the year | 20,855 | 799 | 21,654 | 21,928 | Barclays previously considered the potential implications for the UKRF of the ruling and appeal in Virgin Media v NTL Pension Trustees II Ltd. This activity did not identify any relevant amendments to the UKRF (of the nature of that found to have been void in the Virgin Media case) that were not subject to actuarial confirmation. Since this activity was completed the Pension Schemes Bill 2025 (the Bill) has been published, which once in force will enable trustees to obtain retrospective actuarial confirmation in certain circumstances. Progress of the Bill continues to be tracked by Barclays. The position remains that no material additional benefit obligation is expected As at 31 December 2025, the UKRF as a whole was in surplus versus benefit obligations by £3,250m (2024: £3,199m). The Barclays Bank Section had a surplus of £3,181m and the Barclays UK Section had a surplus of £69m. The weighted average duration of the benefit payments reflected in the defined benefit obligation for the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF is 11 years and Barclays UK Section is 10 years (2024 UKRF: 11 years). The UKRF expected benefits promised to date are projected to be paid out for in excess of 50 years, although 35% of the benefits are expected to be paid in the next 10 years; 34% in years 11 to 20 and 20% in years 21 to 30. The remainder of the benefits are expected to be paid beyond 30 years. Of the £1,163m (2024: £1,189m) UKRF benefits paid out, £148m (2024: £165m) related to transfers out. Where a scheme's assets exceed its obligation, an asset is recognised to the extent that it does not exceed the present value of future contribution holidays or if the Group has an unconditional right to a refund of this asset at the end of the life of the plan (the asset ceiling). In the case of the UKRF the asset ceiling is not applied as, in certain specified circumstances such as wind-up, the Group expects to be able to recover any surplus or reduce contributions. Similarly, a liability in respect of future minimum funding requirements is not recognised. The Trustee does not have a substantive right to augment benefits, nor do they have the right to wind up the plan except in the dissolution of the Group or termination of contributions by the Group. The application of the asset ceiling to other plans and recognition of additional liabilities in respect of future minimum funding requirements are considered on an individual plan basis. # Critical accounting estimates and judgements Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include: # Estimates Valuation of defined benefit scheme obligations are dependent on a number of assumptions, the most critical being discount rates, price inflation, and life expectancy. These estimates are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amount of defined benefit obligations within the next financial year. Below is a summary of the main financial and demographic assumptions adopted for both sections of the UKRF with the Barclays Bank Section representing 91.5% of the UKRF benefit obligation and the Barclays UK Section representing 3.8%. | Key UKRF financial assumptions | 2025 | | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays Bank Section | Barclays UK Section | UKRF | | | % p.a. | % p.a. | % p.a. | | Discount rate | 5.46 | 5.42 | 5.44 | | Inflation rate (RPI) | 2.92 | 2.89 | 3.32 | The discount rate assumption for 2025 for both sections of the UKRF was based on a standard WTW RATE Link model. The RPI inflation assumption for 2025 was set by reference to the Bank of England's implied inflation curve. The inflation assumption incorporates a deduction of 20 basis points as an allowance for an inflation risk premium. The methodology used to derive the discount rate and inflation assumptions is consistent with that used at the prior year end. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits The Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF’s post-retirement mortality assumptions are based on best estimates derived from an analysis in 2022 of the UKRF’s own post-retirement mortality experience and taking account of recent evidence from published mortality surveys. An allowance has been made for future mortality improvements based on the 2024 core projection model published by the Continuous Mortality Investigation Bureau subject to a long-term trend of 1.1% per annum in future improvements (2024: 1.25% per annum). Barclays UK Section of the UKRF does not have any post-retirement mortality assumptions as it only provides a cash lump sum at retirement, not a pension for life. The table below shows how the assumed life expectancy, for members of the Barclays Bank Section, has changed since last year: | Assumed life expectancy^{1} | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | Life expectancy at 60 for current pensioners (years) | | | | – Males | 26.6 | 26.5 | | – Females | 29.3 | 29.4 | | Life expectancy at 60 for future pensioners currently aged 40 (years) | | | | – Males | 28.0 | 28.0 | | – Females | 30.6 | 30.8 | Note: 1 The life expectancies disclosed are in respect of a population of the membership that represents ≥60% of the Defined Benefit Obligation of the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF (excluding Afterwork, which has no post-retirement mortality risk) with the remaining members having life expectancy at age 60 of between 26.4 years and 29.3 years. Approximately, 70% of the longevity risk for current pensioners of the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF has been reinsured and the transactions will provide income to the Section if pensions are paid out for longer than expected. The contracts form part of the Section’s investment portfolio. ## Sensitivity analysis on actuarial assumptions The sensitivity analysis has been calculated by valuing the UKRF liabilities, using the amended assumptions shown in the table below and keeping the remaining assumptions the same as disclosed in the table above, except in the case of the inflation sensitivity where other assumptions that depend on assumed inflation have also been amended correspondingly. The difference between the recalculated liability figure and that stated in the balance sheet reconciliation table above is the figure shown. The selection of these movements to illustrate the sensitivity of the defined benefit obligation to key assumptions should not be interpreted as Barclays expressing any specific view of the probability of such movements happening. Change in key assumptions for the UKRF | | 2025 (Decrease)/Increase in defined benefit obligation | 2025 | 2025 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Barclays Bank Section £bn | Barclays UK Section £bn | UKRF £bn | | Discount rate | | | | | 0.5% p.a. increase | (0.9) | (0.03) | (1.0) | | 0.25% p.a. increase | (0.4) | (0.02) | (0.5) | | 0.25% p.a. decrease | 0.5 | 0.02 | 0.5 | | 0.5% p.a. decrease | 1.0 | 0.04 | 1.1 | | Assumed RPI | | | | | 0.5% p.a. increase | 0.7 | 0.03 | 0.7 | | 0.25% p.a. increase | 0.3 | 0.01 | 0.3 | | 0.25% p.a. decrease | (0.3) | (0.01) | (0.4) | | 0.5% p.a. decrease | (0.6) | (0.03) | (0.7) | | Life expectancy at 60 | | | | | One year increase | 0.5 | 0.00 | 0.5 | | One year decrease | (0.5) | 0.00 | (0.5) | ## Assets A long-term investment strategy has been set for the Barclays Bank Section and Barclays UK Section of the UKRF, with asset allocation comprising a mixture of gilts, bonds, and other appropriate assets. This strategy recognises that different asset classes are likely to produce different long-term returns, and some asset classes may be more volatile than others. The long-term investment strategies ensure, among other aims, that investments are adequately diversified. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits The value of the assets of the schemes and their percentage in relation to total scheme assets were as follows: Analysis of scheme assets | | Total | | | | Of which relates to UKRF | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Quoted1£m | Unquoted1,2£m | Value£m | % of total fair value of scheme assets% | Quoted1£m | Unquoted1,2£m | Value£m | % of total fair value of scheme assets% | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | Bonds - fixed government | 1,975 | 4 | 1,979 | 8.9 | 1,769 | 4 | 1,773 | 8.2 | | Bonds - index-linked government | 8,283 | — | 8,283 | 37.1 | 8,269 | — | 8,269 | 38.2 | | Bonds - corporate and other3 | 1,767 | 5,015 | 6,782 | 30.3 | 1,562 | 5,015 | 6,577 | 30.4 | | Equities | 227 | — | 227 | 1.0 | 99 | — | 99 | 0.4 | | Private equities | — | 1,859 | 1,859 | 8.3 | — | 1,859 | 1,859 | 8.6 | | Property | 22 | 1,392 | 1,414 | 6.3 | — | 1,392 | 1,392 | 6.4 | | Infrastructure | — | 414 | 414 | 1.9 | — | 413 | 413 | 1.9 | | Hedge funds | 13 | 1,635 | 1,648 | 7.4 | — | 1,635 | 1,635 | 7.6 | | Derivatives | 1 | (1,476) | (1,475) | (6.6) | — | (1,475) | (1,475) | (6.8) | | Longevity reinsurance contracts | — | (103) | (103) | (0.5) | — | (103) | (103) | (0.5) | | Cash and liquid assets4 | 2,309 | (1,093) | 1,216 | 5.4 | 2,305 | (1,093) | 1,212 | 5.6 | | Mixed investment funds | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Other | 15 | 95 | 110 | 0.5 | — | 3 | 3 | — | | Fair value of scheme assets5 | 14,612 | 7,742 | 22,354 | 100.0 | 14,004 | 7,650 | 21,654 | 100.0 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | | | | Bonds - fixed government | 1,546 | — | 1,546 | 6.8 | 1,306 | — | 1,306 | 6.0 | | Bonds - index-linked government | 8,234 | — | 8,234 | 36.4 | 8,214 | — | 8,214 | 37.5 | | Bonds - corporate and other | 5,604 | 717 | 6,321 | 27.9 | 5,395 | 717 | 6,112 | 27.9 | | Equities | 121 | — | 121 | 0.5 | — | — | — | — | | Private equities | — | 2,134 | 2,134 | 9.4 | — | 2,134 | 2,134 | 9.7 | | Property | 19 | 1,238 | 1,257 | 5.6 | — | 1,238 | 1,238 | 5.6 | | Infrastructure | — | 1,388 | 1,388 | 6.1 | — | 1,388 | 1,388 | 6.3 | | Hedge funds | 9 | 1,390 | 1,399 | 6.2 | — | 1,390 | 1,390 | 6.3 | | Derivatives | (7) | (1,799) | (1,806) | (8.0) | (7) | (1,799) | (1,806) | (8.2) | | Longevity reinsurance contract | — | (117) | (117) | (0.5) | — | (117) | (117) | (0.5) | | Cash and liquid assets4 | (454) | 2,529 | 2,075 | 9.2 | (464) | 2,529 | 2,065 | 9.4 | | Mixed investment funds | 8 | — | 8 | — | — | — | — | — | | Other | 7 | 56 | 63 | 0.4 | — | 4 | 4 | — | | Fair value of scheme assets5 | 15,087 | 7,536 | 22,623 | 100.0 | 14,444 | 7,484 | 21,928 | 100.0 | # Notes: 1 During the year ended 31 December 2025, there were c£3bn assets re-classified from unquoted to quoted under cash and liquid assets and c£4bn assets reclassified from quoted to unquoted for Bonds - corporate and other (year ended 31 December 2024: there were no material re-classifications). These re-classifications reflect enhancement to the Bank's levelling policy, including the use of additional data in the active market assessment of issued debt. 2 Valuation of unquoted assets is provided by the underlying managers or qualified independent valuers. The valuation for some of the unquoted assets, in particular private equities, is based on valuations as at 30 September 2025 adjusted by cash flows, these being the latest available valuations as at the point of publication. All valuations are determined in accordance with relevant industry guidance. Barclays does not believe these valuations will differ materially from the fair value, in the context of the overall UKRF asset size. 3 During the year ended 31 December 2025, there were c£740m of infrastructure loan assets reclassified to Bonds - corporate and other (2024 classification : Infrastructure). 4 Cash and liquid assets for the UKRF consists of £189m (2024: £484m) of cash including receivables/payables, £2,116m (2024: £2,529m) of pooled cash funds and £(1,093)m (2024: £(948)m) of repurchase agreements. 5 Included within the fair value of UKRF assets was nil (2024: nil) relating to shares in Barclays PLC and nil (2024: nil) relating to bonds issued by Barclays PLC. The UKRF also invests in pooled investment vehicles which may hold shares or debt issued by Barclays PLC. The value of the UKRF assets split by section are shown in the table below. UKRF assets split by section | | Barclays Bank Section | | | | Barclays UK Section | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Quoted £m | Unquoted £m | Value £m | % of total fair value of scheme assets % | Quoted £m | Unquoted £m | Value £m | % of total fair value of scheme assets % | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | Bonds - fixed government | 1,721 | 4 | 1,725 | 8.3 | 48 | — | 48 | 6.0 | | Bonds - index-linked government | 7,751 | — | 7,751 | 37.2 | 518 | — | 518 | 64.8 | | Bonds - corporate and other | 1,471 | 4,729 | 6,200 | 29.7 | 91 | 286 | 377 | 47.2 | | Equities | — | — | — | — | 99 | — | 99 | 12.4 | | Private equities | — | 1,859 | 1,859 | 8.9 | — | — | — | — | | Property | — | 1,392 | 1,392 | 6.7 | — | — | — | — | | Infrastructure | — | 413 | 413 | 2.0 | — | — | — | — | | Hedge funds | — | 1,635 | 1,635 | 7.8 | — | — | — | — | | Derivatives | — | (1,478) | (1,478) | (7.1) | — | 3 | 3 | 0.4 | | Longevity reinsurance contracts | — | (103) | (103) | (0.5) | — | — | — | — | | Cash and liquid assets | 2,288 | (830) | 1,458 | 7.0 | 17 | (263) | (246) | (30.8) | | Other | — | 3 | 3 | — | — | — | — | — | | Fair value of scheme assets | 13,231 | 7,624 | 20,855 | 100.0 | 773 | 26 | 799 | 100.0 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 420 # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Employee benefits At 31 December 2025, 39% of the Barclays Bank Section assets and 38% of the Barclays UK Section assets (2024 UKRF: 38%) were invested in liability-driven investment strategies; primarily UK gilts as well as interest rate and inflation swaps. These swaps are used to better match the assets to its liabilities. The swaps are used to reduce the scheme's inflation and duration risks against its liabilities. The UKRF employs derivative instruments, where appropriate, to match assets more closely to liabilities, or to achieve a desired exposure or return. The value of assets shown reflects the assets held by the UKRF, with any derivative holdings reflected on a fair value basis. The Trustee also uses repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase agreements to achieve the Trustee's liability hedging objective. The UKRF has a comprehensive and robust liquidity framework in place. The aim of the liquidity framework is to ensure that benefit payments and other liquidity outflows are paid in due course, sufficient liquidity and collateral is maintained to achieve strategic allocation targets and that all liquidity outflows/collateral needs are covered without forced sale or strategic asset allocation changes. The Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF holds two longevity reinsurance contracts covering 70% of the current pensioner liabilities of the Barclays Bank Section. The contracts provide income to the Section if pensions are paid out for longer than expected. At 31 December 2025, the combined value of the contracts was £(103)m (2024: £(117)m). The negative value reflects the estimated impact of changes in the reinsurance market, demographic assumptions and risk premia since the contracts were entered into. For information on the UKRF Trustee's approach to Responsible Investment and Climate Risk, in the context of managing the UKRF, please refer to the UKRF Trustee website at epa.towerswatson.com/accounts/barclays/public/barclays-bank-responsible-investment-policy/. ## Funding valuation The UKRF annual funding update as at 30 September 2024 showed a funding surplus of £1.75bn. The 30 September 2025 funding update is not available at the date of this report, as the triennial funding valuations for the UKRF are due to be completed in 2026 with an effective date of 30 September 2025. The main differences between the funding and accounting assumptions are a different approach to setting the discount rate and a more conservative life expectancy assumption for funding. As part of the 2022 triennial funding valuation, the Trustee and Barclays Bank PLC agreed an annual adequacy test on a basis more prudent than the IAS 19 or funding bases. Should the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF be sufficiently funded on this basis, the regular employer contributions to this Section to fund future Afterwork accrual will not be required in the following calendar year. The test will be reviewed at the 2025 triennial valuation, which is expected to be completed in 2026. The test was passed in September, so no regular employer contributions to the Barclays Bank Section are required for 2026. Regular employer contributions are being paid to the Barclays UK Section to fund future Afterwork accrual, an annual adequacy test does not apply to this Section. ## Other support measure agreed Collateral – Barclays Bank PLC has entered into an agreement with the UKRF Trustee to provide collateral to cover at least 100% of any Barclays Bank Section funding deficit with an overall cap of £8.4bn. Barclays Bank UK PLC has entered into an agreement with the UKRF Trustee to provide collateral to cover at least 100% of any Barclays UK Section funding deficit with an overall cap of £0.6bn. The collateral pools are currently zero, reflecting the surplus funding position of each Section. The arrangements provide the UKRF Trustee with dedicated access to pools of assets in the event of Barclays Bank PLC or Barclays Bank UK PLC not paying any required deficit reduction contribution to their respective Sections or in the event of their respective insolvency. ## Contribution There were nil (2024: nil) Section 75 contributions included within the Group's contributions paid. The Group's expected contribution to the UKRF in respect of defined benefits in 2026 is £59m. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation # Scope of consolidation The notes included in this section present information on the Group's investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates and its interests in structured entities. Detail is also given on securitisation transactions the Group has entered into and arrangements that are held off-balance sheet. # 33 Principal subsidiaries The significant judgements used in applying this policy are set out below. # Accounting for investment in subsidiaries In the individual financial statements of Barclays PLC, investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less impairment. Principal subsidiaries for the Group are set out below. This includes those subsidiaries that are most significant in the context of the Group's business, results or financial position. The principal subsidiaries are held directly or indirectly via intermediate holding companies within the Group. There were no significant changes in ownership interests in these subsidiaries during the year, and the Group did not lose control of any of these subsidiaries. There has been no material percentage change in the Group's shareholding for its main subsidiaries since 2024. | Company name | Principal place of business or incorporation | Nature of business | Percentage of voting rights held | Non-controlling interests - proportion of ownership interests | Non-controlling interests - proportion of voting interests | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | | % | % | % | | Barclays Bank PLC | United Kingdom | Banking, holding company | 100 | 1 | — | | Barclays Bank UK PLC | United Kingdom | Banking, holding company | 100 | — | — | | Barclays Bank Ireland PLC | Ireland | Banking | 100 | — | — | | Barclays Execution Services Limited | United Kingdom | Service company | 100 | — | — | | Barclays Capital Inc. | United States | Securities dealing | 100 | — | — | | Barclays Capital Securities Limited | United Kingdom | Securities dealing | 100 | — | — | | Barclays Securities Japan Limited | Japan | Securities dealing | 100 | — | — | | Barclays US LLC | United States | Holding company | 100 | — | — | | Barclays Bank Delaware | United States | Credit card issuer | 100 | — | — | The country of registration or incorporation is also the principal area of operation of each of the above subsidiaries. Ownership interests are in some cases different to voting interests due to the existence of non-voting equity interests, such as preference shares. Refer to Note 29 for more information. # Significant judgements and assumptions used to determine the scope of the consolidation Determining whether the Group has control of an entity is generally straightforward based on ownership of the majority of the voting capital. However, in certain instances, this determination will involve judgement, particularly in the case of structured entities where voting rights are often not the determining factor in decisions over the relevant activities. This judgement will involve assessing the purpose and design of the entity. It will also often be necessary to consider whether the Group, or another involved party with power over the relevant activities, is acting as a principal in its own right or as an agent on behalf of others. There is also often considerable judgement involved in the ongoing assessment of control over structured entities. In this regard, where market conditions have deteriorated, such that the other investors' exposures to the structure's variable returns have been substantively eliminated, the Group may conclude that the managers of the structured entity are acting as its agent and therefore will consolidate the structured entity. An interest in equity voting rights exceeding $50\%$ would typically indicate that the Group has control of an entity. Until 25 October 2024, Palomino Limited was excluded from consolidation, despite the Group holding $100\%$ of the voting rights as it was managed by an external counterparty and the Group was not exposed to its variable returns. Following the termination of the management agreement, as from 26 October 2024, the entity is now fully consolidated. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation ## Significant restrictions As is typical for a group of its size and international scope, there are restrictions on the ability of Barclays PLC to obtain distributions of capital, access the assets or repay the liabilities of members of its Group due to the statutory, regulatory and contractual requirements of its subsidiaries and due to the protective rights of non-controlling interests. These are considered below. ## Regulatory requirements Barclays' principal subsidiary companies have assets and liabilities before intercompany eliminations of £2,132bn (2024: £2,015bn) and £2,031bn (2024: £1,919bn) respectively. Certain of these assets and liabilities are subject to prudential regulation and regulatory capital requirements in the countries in which they are regulated. These require entities to maintain minimum capital levels which cannot be returned to the parent company, Barclays PLC, on a going concern basis. In order to meet capital requirements, subsidiaries may issue certain equity-accounted and debt-accounted financial instruments and non-equity instruments, such as Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments and other forms of subordinated liabilities. Refer to Note 26 and Note 27 for particulars of these instruments. These instruments may be subject to cancellation clauses or preference share restrictions that would limit the ability of the entity to repatriate the capital on a timely basis. ## Liquidity requirements Regulated subsidiaries of the Group are required to meet applicable PRA or local regulatory requirements pertaining to liquidity. The regulated subsidiaries include Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Capital Securities Limited (which are regulated on a combined basis under a Domestic Liquidity Sub-Group (DoLSub) arrangement), Barclays Bank UK PLC, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC, Barclays Capital Inc. and Barclays Bank Delaware. Refer to the Liquidity risk section for further details of liquidity requirements, including those of the Group's significant subsidiaries. ## Statutory requirements The Group's subsidiaries are subject to statutory requirements not to make distributions of capital and unrealised profits and generally to maintain solvency. These requirements restrict the ability of subsidiaries to make remittances of dividends to Barclays PLC, the ultimate parent, except in the event of a legal capital reduction or liquidation. In most cases, the regulatory restrictions referred to above exceed the statutory restrictions. ## Asset encumbrance The Group uses its financial assets to raise finance in the form of securitisations and through the liquidity schemes of central banks, as well as to provide security to the UK Retirement Fund. Once encumbered, the assets are not available for transfer around the Group. The assets typically affected are disclosed in Note 37. ## Other restrictions The Group is required to maintain cash balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities, and these amounted to £3,007m (2024: £2,945m). ## 34 Structured entities A structured entity is an entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity. Voting rights may relate to administrative tasks only, with the relevant activities of the entity being directed by means of contractual arrangements. Structured entities are generally created to achieve a narrow and well-defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities. Depending on the Group's power over the activities of the entity and its exposure to and ability to influence its own returns, it may consolidate the entity. In other cases, it may sponsor or have exposure to such an entity, but not consolidate it. ## Consolidated structured entities The Group has contractual arrangements which may require it to provide financial support to the following types of consolidated structured entities: - Securitisation vehicles: The Group uses securitisation as a source of financing and a means of risk transfer. Where entities are controlled by the Group, they are consolidated. Refer to Note 36 for further detail. - Commercial Paper (CP) conduits: These entities issue CP and use the proceeds to lend to clients as part of the Group's multi-seller conduit programme. The Group has provided £21.0bn (2024: £23.9bn) in contractual liquidity facilities to the CP conduits that the Group consolidates. These amounts represent the maximum the conduits can lend externally. The amounts of CP conduit lending (drawn and undrawn) to unconsolidated structured entities can be seen in Other interests in unconsolidated structured entities under multi-seller conduit programme in the Nature of interest table. - Employee benefit trusts: The Group provides capital contributions to employee benefit trusts to enable them to meet obligations to employees in relation to share-based remuneration arrangements. - Tender Option Bond (TOB) trusts: During 2025, the Group provided undrawn liquidity facilities of £4.0bn (2024: £4.0bn) to consolidated TOB trusts. These trusts invest in fixed income instruments issued by state, local or other municipalities in the United States, funded by long-term senior floating-rate notes and junior residual securities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation ## Unconsolidated structured entities The term ‘unconsolidated structured entities’ refers to structured entities not controlled by Barclays, and are established either by Barclays or a third party. An interest in a structured entity is any form of contractual or non-contractual involvement which creates variability in returns arising from the performance of the entity for the Group. Such interests include holdings of debt or equity securities, derivatives that transfer financial risks from the entity to the Group, lending, loan commitments, financial guarantees and investment management agreements. The Group enters into transactions with unconsolidated structured entities in the normal course of business to facilitate customer transactions, to provide risk management services and for specific investment opportunities. This is predominantly within the Barclays Investment Bank. Structured entities may take the form of funds, trusts, securitisation vehicles, and private investment companies. The largest transactions for Barclays include loans and derivatives with hedge fund structures and special purpose entities, multi-seller conduit lending, holding notes issued by securitisation vehicles, and facilitating customer requirements through funds. The nature and extent of the Group’s interests in structured entities is summarised below: Summary of interests in unconsolidated structured entities | | Secured financing £m | Short-term traded interests £m | Traded derivatives £m | Other interests £m | Total £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | Assets | | | | | | | Trading portfolio assets | — | 31,386 | — | — | 31,386 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 79,053 | — | — | 654 | 79,707 | | Derivative financial instruments | — | — | 6,257 | — | 6,257 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | — | — | — | 3,811 | 3,811 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | — | — | — | 47,279 | 47,279 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | — | — | — | 23,818 | 23,818 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 7,049 | — | — | — | 7,049 | | Other assets | — | — | — | — | — | | Total assets | 86,102 | 31,386 | 6,257 | 75,562 | 199,307 | | Liabilities | | | | | | | Derivative financial instruments | — | — | 6,451 | — | 6,451 | As at 31 December 2024 | Assets | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Trading portfolio assets | — | 23,941 | — | — | 23,941 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 87,546 | — | — | 1,295 | 88,841 | | Derivative financial instruments | — | — | 6,540 | — | 6,540 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | — | — | — | 5,571 | 5,571 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | — | — | — | 47,151 | 47,151 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | — | — | — | 24,331 | 24,331 | | Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending | 3,145 | — | — | — | 3,145 | | Other assets | — | — | — | — | — | | Total assets | 90,691 | 23,941 | 6,540 | 78,348 | 199,520 | | Liabilities | | | | | | | Derivative financial instruments | — | — | 6,978 | — | 6,978 | Secured financing arrangements, short-term traded interests and traded derivatives are typically managed under Market risk management policies described in the Market risk management section, which includes an indication of the change of risk measures compared to last year. For this reason, the total assets of these entities are not considered meaningful for the purposes of understanding the related risks, and so have not been presented. Other interests include conduits and lending where the interest is driven by normal customer demand. As at 31 December 2025, Barclays entered into transactions with approximately 8,000 (2024: 5,000) structured entities. ## Secured financing The Group routinely enters into reverse repurchase contracts, margin lending, stock borrowing and similar arrangements on normal commercial terms where the counterparty to the arrangement is a structured entity. Due to the nature of these arrangements, especially the transfer of collateral and ongoing margining, the Group is able to manage its variable exposure to the performance of the structured entity counterparty. The counterparties included in secured financing mainly include hedge fund limited structures, investment companies and special purpose entities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation ## Short-term traded interests As part of its market making activities, the Group buys and sells interests in structured vehicles, which are predominantly debt securities issued by asset securitisation vehicles. Such interests are typically held individually or as part of a larger portfolio for no more than 90 days. In such cases, the Group typically has no other involvement with the structured entity other than the securities it holds as part of trading activities and its maximum exposure to loss is restricted to the carrying value of the asset. ## Traded derivatives The Group enters into a variety of derivative contracts with structured entities which reference market risk variables, such as interest rates, equities, foreign exchange rates and credit indices among other things. The main derivative types which are considered interests in structured entities include equity options, index-based and entity-specific credit default swaps, and total return swaps. Interest rate swaps and foreign exchange derivatives that are not complex and which expose the Group to insignificant credit risk by being senior in the payment waterfall of a securitisation and derivatives that are determined to introduce risk or variability to a structured entity are not considered to be an interest in an entity and have been excluded from the disclosures. A description of the types of derivatives and the risk management practices are detailed in Note 14. The risk of loss may be mitigated through ongoing margining requirements, as well as a right to cash flows from the structured entity which are senior in the payment waterfall. Such margining requirements are consistent with market practice for many derivative arrangements and in line with the Group's normal credit policies. Derivative transactions require the counterparty to provide cash or other collateral under margining agreements to mitigate counterparty credit risk. The Group is mainly exposed to settlement risk on these derivatives which is mitigated through daily margining. Total notional contract amounts were £641,837m (2024: £712,793m). Except for credit default swaps where the maximum exposure to loss is the swap notional amount, it is not possible to estimate the maximum exposure to loss in respect of derivative positions as the fair value of derivatives is subject to changes in market rates of interest, exchange rates and credit indices which by their nature are uncertain. In addition, the Group's losses would be subject to mitigating action under its traded market risk and credit risk policies that require the counterparty to provide collateral in cash or other assets in most cases. ## Other interests in unconsolidated structured entities The Group's interests in structured entities not held for the purposes of short-term trading activities are set out below, summarised by the nature of the interest and limited to significant categories, based on maximum exposure to loss. ### Nature of interest | | Multi-seller conduit programme £m | Lending £m | Other £m | Total £m | Of which: Barclays owned, not consolidated entities1 £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | — | 25 | 629 | 654 | — | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | — | 2,367 | 1,444 | 3,811 | — | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | 9,697 | 37,582 | — | 47,279 | — | | Debt securities at amortised cost | — | — | 23,818 | 23,818 | — | | Other assets | — | — | — | — | — | | Total on-balance sheet exposures | 9,697 | 39,974 | 25,891 | 75,562 | — | | Total off-balance sheet notional amounts | 11,326 | 24,866 | — | 36,192 | — | | Maximum exposure to loss | 21,023 | 64,840 | 25,891 | 111,754 | — | | Total assets of the entity | 32,527 | 195,337 | 81,686 | 309,550 | — | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | — | 27 | 1,268 | 1,295 | — | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | — | 3,206 | 2,365 | 5,571 | — | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | 11,103 | 36,048 | — | 47,151 | — | | Debt securities at amortised cost | — | — | 24,331 | 24,331 | — | | Other assets | — | — | — | — | — | | Total on-balance sheet exposures | 11,103 | 39,281 | 27,964 | 78,348 | — | | Total off-balance sheet notional amounts | 11,530 | 25,737 | — | 37,267 | — | | Maximum exposure to loss | 22,633 | 65,018 | 27,964 | 115,615 | — | | Total assets of the entity | 41,431 | 203,723 | 75,284 | 320,438 | — | Note: 1 Comprises of Barclays owned, not consolidated structured entities per IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements. Refer to Note 33 Principal subsidiaries for more details on consolidation. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation ## Maximum exposure to loss Unless specified otherwise below, the Group’s maximum exposure to loss is the total of its on-balance sheet positions and its off-balance sheet arrangements, being loan commitments and financial guarantees. Exposure to loss is mitigated through collateral, financial guarantees, the availability of netting and credit protection held. ## Multi-seller conduit programme Barclays’ multi-seller conduit programme engages in providing financing to various clients and holds whole or partial interests in pools of receivables or similar obligations. These instruments are protected from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduit entities. The Group’s off-balance sheet exposure included in the table above represents liquidity facilities that are provided to the conduit for the benefit of the holders of the commercial paper issued by the conduit and will only be drawn where the conduit is unable to access the commercial paper market. If these liquidity facilities are drawn, the Group is protected from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduit. ## Lending The portfolio includes lending provided by the Group to unconsolidated structured entities in the normal course of its lending business to earn income in the form of interest and lending fees and includes loans to structured entities that are generally collateralised by property, equipment or other assets. All loans are subject to the Group’s credit sanctioning process. Collateral arrangements are specific to the circumstances of each loan, with additional guarantees and collateral sought from the sponsor of the structured entity for certain arrangements. During the period, the Group incurred immaterial impairment against such facilities. ## Other This includes fair value loans with structured entities where the market risk is materially hedged with corresponding derivative contracts, interests in debt securities issued by securitisation vehicles and drawn and undrawn loan facilities to these entities. In addition, other includes investment funds with interests restricted to management fees based on performance of the fund and trusts held on behalf of beneficiaries with interests restricted to unpaid fees. ## Assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities Barclays is considered to sponsor another entity if: it had a key role in establishing that entity, it transferred assets to the entity, the Barclays name appears in the name of the entity or it provides guarantees on the entity’s performance. As at 31 December 2025, assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities were £1,060m (2024: £890m). ## 35 Investments in associates and joint ventures ### Accounting for associates and joint ventures The equity accounted associates include the Group’s investment in the Business Growth Fund £724m (2024: £678m) which has increased primarily due to a fair value gain in its investments by £64m (2024: £30m). The equity accounted joint ventures has decreased to £nil (2024: £199m) due to the announced sale of the holding during the year. The joint ventures held at fair value through profit or loss has increased to £211m (2024: £171m). | | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Associates | Joint ventures | Total | Associates | Joint ventures | Total | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Equity accounted | 739 | — | 739 | 692 | 199 | 891 | | Held at fair value through profit or loss | — | 211 | 211 | — | 171 | 171 | | Total | 739 | 211 | 950 | 692 | 370 | 1,062 | Summarised financial information for the Group’s equity accounted associates and joint ventures is set out below. The amounts shown are the Group’s share of the net income of the investees for the year ended 31 December 2025, with the exception of certain undertakings for which the amounts are based on accounts made up to dates not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date. | | Associates | | | Joint ventures | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Profit/(loss) from continuing operations | 64 | 30 | (10) | 6 | 8 | 1 | | Other comprehensive income/(loss) | — | — | — | (4) | (1) | (3) | | Total comprehensive income/(loss) from continuing operations | 64 | 30 | (10) | 2 | 7 | (2) | Unrecognised shares of the losses of individually immaterial associates and joint ventures were £nil (2024: £nil). The Group has provided guarantees amounted to £nil (2024: £nil) to its associates and joint ventures. The Barclays drawn commitments to finance or otherwise provide resources to its associates and joint ventures are £474m (2024: £474m) The Barclays share of the associates and joint ventures unutilised credit facilities commitments amounted to £nil (2024: £1,389m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation # 36 Securitisations # Accounting for securitisations The Group uses securitisations as a source of finance and a means of risk transfer. Such transactions generally result in the transfer of contractual cash flows from portfolios of financial assets to holders of issued debt securities. Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction; lead to partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group's continuing involvement in those assets or lead to derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer. Full derecognition only occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets, or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment, and also transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk. In the course of its normal banking activities, the Group transfers financial assets, either where legal rights to the cash flows from the asset are passed to the counterparty or beneficially, where the Group retains the rights to the cash flows, but assumes a responsibility to transfer them to the counterparty. Depending on the nature of the transaction, this may result in derecognition of the assets in their entirety, partial derecognition or no derecognition of the assets subject to the transfer. A summary of the main transactions, and the assets and liabilities and the financial risks arising from these transactions, is set out below: # Transfers of financial assets that do not result in derecognition # Securitisations The Group was party to securitisation transactions involving its credit card balances, consumer and mortgage loans. In these transactions, the assets, interests in the assets, or beneficial interests in the cash flows arising from the assets, are transferred to a special purpose entity, which then issues interest bearing debt securities to third-party investors. Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction. Partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group's continuing involvement in those assets can also occur or derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer. The following table shows the carrying amount of securitised assets that have not resulted in full derecognition, together with the associated liabilities, for each category of asset on the balance sheet: | | 2025 | | | | 2024 | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Assets | | Liabilities | | Assets | | Liabilities | | | | Carrying amount | Fair value | Carrying amount | Fair value | Carrying amount | Fair value | Carrying amount | Fair value | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | | | | | | | | | | Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending | 12,288 | 12,318 | (2,213) | (2,210) | 10,115 | 10,698 | (2,130) | (2,134) | | Mortgage assets | 236 | 238 | (21) | (26) | 254 | 263 | (21) | (20) | | Financial assets at FVTPL | | | | | | | | | | Mortgage assets | 1,523 | 1,523 | — | — | 576 | 576 | — | — | | Assets included in disposal group classified as held for sale | | | | | | | | | | Personal Loans | — | — | — | — | 846 | 826 | — | — | | Total | 14,047 | 14,079 | (2,234) | (2,236) | 11,791 | 12,363 | (2,151) | (2,154) | Balances included within loans and advances at amortised cost represent securitisations where substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset have been retained by the Group, and balances included within Financial assets at FVTPL and Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale represent securitisations where the risks and rewards are neither substantially transferred nor retained. The relationship between the transferred assets and the associated liabilities is that holders of notes may only look to cash flows from the securitised assets for payments of principal and interest due to them under the terms of their notes, although the contractual terms of their notes may be different to the maturity and interest of the transferred assets. If Barclays transfers a financial asset, but does not transfer or retain substantially all the risk and rewards of the asset and retains control over it, the transferred assets is recognised to the extent of Barclays' continuing involvement. Total Financial assets of £21,932m (2024: £11,951m) were originally transferred in this manner and the carrying value of the asset representing continued involvement is included in the table above. For transfers of assets in relation to repurchase agreements, refer to Note 37. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation # Continuing involvement in financial assets that have been derecognised In some cases, the Group may have transferred a financial asset in its entirety but may have continuing involvement in it. This arises in asset securitisations where loans and asset backed securities were derecognised as a result of the Group's involvement with asset backed securities, residential mortgage backed securities and commercial mortgage backed securities. Continuing involvement largely arises from providing financing into these structures in the form of retained notes, which do not bear first losses. The table below shows the potential financial implications of such continuing involvement: | Type of transfer | Continuing involvement1 | | | Gain from continuing involvement | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Carrying amount | Fair value | Maximum exposure to loss2 | For the year ended | Cumulative to 31 December | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | 2025 | | | | | | | Asset backed securities | 67 | 67 | 141 | 3 | 5 | | Residential mortgage backed securities | 3,456 | 3,452 | 3,456 | 150 | 414 | | Commercial mortgage backed securities | 360 | 328 | 360 | 5 | 26 | | Total | 3,883 | 3,847 | 3,957 | 158 | 445 | | 2024 | | | | | | | Asset backed securities | 53 | 53 | 130 | 1 | 1 | | Residential mortgage backed securities | 4,462 | 4,454 | 4,462 | 194 | 261 | | Commercial mortgage backed securities | 377 | 334 | 377 | 3 | 21 | | Total | 4,892 | 4,841 | 4,969 | 198 | 283 | # Notes: 1. Assets which represent the Group's continuing involvement in derecognised assets are recorded in Loans and advances at amortised cost and Debt securities at FVTPL. 2. Maximum exposure to loss includes notional value of undrawn loan commitment, if any. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation # 37 Assets pledged, collateral received and assets transferred Assets are pledged or transferred as collateral to secure liabilities under repurchase agreements, securitisations and stock lending agreements or as security deposits relating to derivatives. Assets transferred are non-cash assets transferred to a third party that do not qualify for derecognition from the Group balance sheet, for example, because Barclays retains substantially all the exposure to those assets under an agreement to repurchase them in the future for a fixed price. Assets pledged or transferred as collateral include all assets categorised as encumbered in the disclosure in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited), other than those held in commercial paper conduits. In these transactions, the Group will be required to step in to provide financing itself under a liquidity facility if the vehicle cannot access the commercial paper market. Where non-cash assets are pledged or transferred as collateral for cash received, the asset continues to be recognised in full, and a related liability is also recognised on the balance sheet. Where non-cash assets are pledged or transferred as collateral in an exchange for non-cash assets, the transferred asset continues to be recognised in full, and there is no associated liability as the non-cash collateral received is not recognised on the balance sheet. The Group is unable to use, sell or pledge the transferred assets for the duration of the transaction and remains exposed to interest rate risk and credit risk on these pledged assets. Unless stated, the counterparty's recourse is not limited to the transferred assets. Collateralised transactions, such as securities lending and borrowing, repurchase and derivative transactions are conducted in accordance with standard terms which are customary in the market. The following table summarises the nature and carrying amount of the assets pledged as security: | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Cash collateral | 79,653 | 76,401 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | 38,095 | 63,531 | | Trading portfolio assets | 115,923 | 107,368 | | Financial assets at fair value through the income statement | 5,726 | 5,728 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 17,438 | 20,982 | | Assets pledged | 256,835 | 274,010 | The following table summarises the transferred financial assets and the associated liabilities. The transferred assets represent the gross carrying value of the assets pledged and the associated liabilities represent the liability recorded on the balance sheet: | | Transferred assets | Associated liabilities | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | Derivatives | 79,753 | (79,753) | | Repurchase agreements | 64,689 | (45,810) | | Securities lending arrangements | 99,238 | — | | Other | 13,155 | (12,658) | | | 256,835 | (138,221) | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | Derivatives | 75,157 | (75,157) | | Repurchase agreements | 77,793 | (53,481) | | Securities lending arrangements | 106,106 | — | | Other | 14,954 | (13,580) | | | 274,010 | (142,218) | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Scope of consolidation For repurchase agreements, the difference between transferred assets and the associated liabilities is predominantly due to IFRS netting. Included within Other are agreements where a counterparty's recourse is limited to the transferred assets. The relationship between the gross transferred assets and the associated liabilities is that holders of notes may only look to cash flows from the securitised assets for payments of principal and interest due to them under the terms of their notes. | | Carrying value | | | | Fair value | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Transferred assets | Associated liabilities | Transferred assets | Associated liabilities | Net position | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | 2025 | | | | | | | Recourse to transferred assets only | 12,524 | (2,234) | 12,556 | (2,236) | 10,320 | | 2024 | | | | | | | Recourse to transferred assets only | 10,369 | (2,151) | 10,961 | (2,154) | 8,807 | The Group has an additional £10,567m (2024: £9,500m) of loans and advances within its asset backed funding programmes that can readily be used to raise additional secured funding and are available to support future issuances. # Collateral held as security for assets Under certain transactions, including reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing transactions, the Group is allowed to resell or re-pledge the collateral held. Collateralised transactions, such as securities lending and borrowing, repurchase and derivative transactions are conducted in accordance with standard terms, which are customary in the market. The fair value at the balance sheet date of collateral accepted and re-pledged or transferred to others was as follows: | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Fair value of securities accepted as collateral | 1,513,869 | 1,318,862 | | Of which fair value of securities re-pledged/transferred to others | 1,382,090 | 1,191,938 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Other disclosure matters # Other disclosure matters The notes included in this section focus on related party transactions, Auditor's remuneration, Barclays PLC (the Parent company) disclosure, Directors' remuneration and Transition disclosures. Related parties include any subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures and Key Management Personnel. # 38 Related party transactions and Directors' remuneration # Related party transactions Parties are considered to be related if one party has the ability to control the other party or exercise significant influence over the other party in making financial or operational decisions, or one other party controls both. # Subsidiaries Transactions between Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries meet the definition of related party transactions. Where these are eliminated on consolidation, they are not disclosed in the Group's financial statements. Transactions between Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries are fully disclosed in Barclays PLC's financial statements. A list of the Group's principal subsidiaries is shown in Note 33. # Associates, joint ventures and other entities The Group provides banking services to its associates, joint ventures and the Group pension funds (principally the UK Retirement Fund), providing loans, overdrafts, interest and non-interest bearing deposits and current accounts to these entities, as well as other services. Group companies also provide investment management and custodian services to the Group pension schemes. All of these transactions are conducted on the same terms as third-party transactions. Summarised financial information for the Group's investments in associates and joint ventures is set out in Note 35. Amounts included in the Group's financial statements, in aggregate, by category of related party entity are as follows: | | Associates | Joint ventures | Pension funds | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | For the year ended and as at 31 December 2025 | | | | | Total income | 18 | 43 | 8 | | Credit impairment charges | — | — | — | | Operating expenses | (22) | — | (1) | | Total assets | — | — | — | | Total liabilities | 126 | — | 140 | | For the year ended and as at 31 December 2024 | | | | | Total income | (2) | 56 | 2 | | Credit impairment charges | — | — | — | | Operating expenses | (21) | — | (1) | | Total assets | — | 1,104 | 0 | | Total liabilities | 64 | — | 176 | | For the year ended and as at 31 December 2023 | | | | | Total income | 13 | 70 | 4 | | Credit impairment charges | — | — | — | | Operating expenses | (20) | — | (1) | Total liabilities includes derivatives transacted on behalf of the pension funds of £89m (2024: £100m). # Key Management Personnel Key Management Personnel are defined as those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of Barclays PLC (directly or indirectly) and comprise the Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC, certain direct reports of the Group Chief Executive and the heads of major business units and functions. The Group provides banking services to Key Management Personnel and persons connected to them. The balances outstanding as at 31 December were as follows: Banking services provided | | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Loans outstanding as at 31 December | 15.4 | 17.5 | | Deposit outstanding as at 31 December | 27.5 | 23.3 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Other disclosure matters ## Total commitments outstanding Total commitments outstanding refers to the total of any undrawn amounts on credit cards and/or overdraft facilities provided to Key Management Personnel. Total commitments outstanding as at 31 December 2025 were £0.5m (2024: £0.6m). All loans to Key Management Personnel (and persons connected to them) were made in the ordinary course of business; were made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the same time for comparable transactions with other persons; and did not involve more than a normal risk of collectability or present other unfavourable features. ## Remuneration of Key Management Personnel Total remuneration awarded to Key Management Personnel below represents salaries, short-term benefits and pensions contributions received during the year and awards made as part of the latest remuneration decisions in relation to the year. Costs recognised in the income statement reflect the accounting charge for the year included within operating expenses. The difference between the values awarded and the recognised income statement charge principally relates to the recognition of costs for deferred awards. Figures are provided for the period that individuals met the definition of Key Management Personnel. | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Salaries and other short-term benefits | 48.3 | 45.0 | 33.3 | | Pension costs | 0.1 | 0.1 | — | | Other long-term benefits | 13.6 | 10.5 | 7.2 | | Share-based payments | 26.2 | 18.1 | 10.2 | | Employer social security charges on emoluments | 10.2 | 8.7 | 6.3 | | Costs recognised for accounting purposes | 98.4 | 82.4 | 57.0 | | Employer social security charges on emoluments | (10.2) | (8.7) | (6.3) | | Other long-term benefits – difference between awards granted and costs recognised | 9.5 | 6.6 | 1.1 | | Share-based payments – difference between awards granted and costs recognised | 11.7 | 7.4 | 6.0 | | Total remuneration awarded | 109.4 | 87.7 | 57.8 | ## Disclosure required by the Companies Act 2006 The following information regarding the Barclays PLC Board of Directors is presented in accordance with the Companies Act 2006: | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Aggregate emoluments¹ | 11.4 | 10.9 | 9.8 | | Amounts paid under LTIPs² | 1.2 | — | — | | | 12.6 | 10.9 | 9.8 | ## Notes: 1. The aggregate emoluments include amounts paid for the 2025 year. In addition, deferred share awards for 2025 with a total value at grant of £1.3m (2024: £1.8m, 2023: £1.5m) will be made to Directors, which will only vest subject to meeting certain conditions. 2. The figure above for "Amounts paid under LTIPs" relates to tranches of prior year LTIP awards that were released to Directors during the year. The LTIP figure in the single total figure table for Executive Directors' 2025 remuneration in the Directors' Remuneration report relates to the 2023-2025 LTIP cycle, the first tranche of which is scheduled to be released following the performance period ending on 31 December 2025. There were no pension contributions paid to defined contribution schemes on behalf of Directors (2024: £nil, 2023: £nil). There were no notional pension contributions to defined contribution schemes. As at 31 December 2025, there were no Directors accruing benefits under a defined benefit scheme (2024: nil, 2023: nil). ## Directors' and Officers' shareholdings and options The beneficial ownership of ordinary share capital of Barclays PLC by all Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC (involving 30 persons) at 31 December 2025 amounted to 18,192,011 (2024: 20,479,846) ordinary shares of 25p each (0.13% of the ordinary share capital outstanding). As at 31 December 2025, Executive Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC (involving 19 persons) held options to purchase a total of 59,803 (2024: 49,911) Barclays PLC ordinary shares of 25p each at a weighted average price of 148p under Sharesave. ## Advances and credit to Directors and guarantees on behalf of Directors In accordance with Section 413 of the Companies Act 2006, the total amount of advances and credits made available in 2025 to persons who served as Directors during the year was £0.7m (2024: £0.6m). The total value of guarantees entered into on behalf of Directors during 2025 was £nil (2024: £nil). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Other disclosure matters # 39 Auditor's remuneration Auditor's remuneration is included within consultancy, legal and professional fees in administration and general expenses and comprises: | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Audit of the Barclays Group's annual accounts | 13 | 13 | 11 | | Other services: | | | | | Audit of the Company's subsidiaries1 | 57 | 58 | 53 | | Other audit related fees2 | 15 | 14 | 12 | | Other services | 5 | 6 | 2 | | Total auditor's remuneration | 90 | 91 | 78 | # Notes: 1 Comprises the fees for the statutory audit of subsidiaries both inside and outside the UK and fees for work performed by associates of KPMG in respect of the consolidated financial statements of the Company. 2 Comprises services in relation to statutory and regulatory filings. These include audit services for the review of the interim financial information under the Listing Rules of the UK listing authority. Audit scope changes are finalised following the completion of the audit and recognised when agreed. The 2025 audit fee includes £nil (2024: 2m, 2023: £1m) relating to the previous year's audit. | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Barclays associated pension schemes | £m | £m | £m | | Audit fee | 0.6 | 0.3 | 0.3 | Under SEC regulations the remuneration of our auditors is required to be presented as follows: audit fees £77m (2024: £77m, 2023: £70m), audit-related fees £9m (2024: £9m, 2023: £6m), tax fees £nil (2024: £nil, 2023: £nil), and all other fees £4m (2024: £5m, 2023: £2m). # 40 Assets and liabilities included in disposal group classified as held for sale ## Accounting for Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities The Group applies IFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. Non-current assets (or disposal groups) are classified as held for sale when their carrying amount is to be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than continuing use. In order to be classified as held for sale, the asset must be available for immediate sale in its present condition subject only to terms that are usual and customary, and the sale must be highly probable. Non-current assets (or disposal groups) held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less cost to sell. Assets and liabilities classified as held for sale are presented separately in the consolidated balance sheet. Management judgement is required in determining whether the IFRS 5 held for sale classification criteria are met, in particular whether the sale is highly probable and expected to qualify for recognition as a completed sale within 12 months of classification. This assessment requires consideration of how committed management is to the sales plan, the likelihood of obtaining regulatory or other external approvals which is often required for sales of banking operations and how committed the buyer is to complete the sales transaction within the agreed timelines. The perimeter of the disposal group has been accounted for in line with the requirements of IFRS 5 as at 31 December 2025. A detailed analysis of the disposal group is presented below. The 2025 disposal group relates to a USCB co-branded Cards portfolio. Barclays has decided not to compete to become the sole issuer for this portfolio leading to its transfer in H1 2026. The portfolio is expected to be sold at a premium. The extension to the 1 year sale period is aligned to the signed contractual arrangements in place to allow the transition of the portfolio in a controlled and effective manner. The 2024 disposal group includes the USCB Cards portfolio and the German Consumer Finance Business within Head Office. The fair value level of the financial instruments included in held for sale along with corresponding fair value hierarchy under IFRS13 is disclosed on page 390. | As at 31 December | 2025 | 2024 | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | | | | Loans and advances to customers | 5,801 | 9,544 | | Intangible assets | 11 | 25 | | Property, plant and equipment | — | 24 | | Other assets | 120 | 261 | | Total assets classified as held for sale | 5,932 | 9,854 | | Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale | | | | --- | --- | --- | | Deposits from customers | — | 3,647 | | Other liabilities | — | 77 | | Provisions | — | 2 | | Total liabilities classified as held for sale | — | 3,726 | | Net assets classified as held for sale | 5,932 | 6,128 | | --- | --- | --- | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Other disclosure matters ## 41 Barclays PLC (the Parent company) ### Total income #### Dividend received from subsidiaries Dividends received from subsidiaries of £4,185m (2024: £3,087m, 2023: £2,818m) relates to dividends received from Barclays Execution Services Limited £190m, Barclays Bank UK PLC £1,425m and Barclays Bank PLC £2,570m. #### Other income Other income of £714m (2024: £1,183m, 2023: £1,174m expense) includes £997m (2024: £990m, 2023: £985m) of income received from gross coupon payments on Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank UK PLC-issued AT1 securities, net fee and commission income from subsidiaries £154m (2024: £135m, 2023: £139m) and foreign exchange and fair value losses of £(437)m (2024: £58m gain, 2023: £(50)m loss). ### Total assets and liabilities #### Investment in subsidiaries The investment in subsidiaries of £63,907m (2024: £63,315m) predominantly relates to investments in the ordinary shares of Barclays Bank PLC of £36,340m (2024: £36,340m) and their AT1 securities of £10,460m (2024: £9,616m), as well as investments in the ordinary shares of Barclays Bank UK PLC of £14,245m (2024: £14,245m) and their AT1 securities of £2,230m (2024: £2,435m). The increase of £592m during the year resulted from net issuances of AT1 holdings. #### Impairment in subsidiaries At the end of each reporting period, an impairment review is undertaken in respect of investment in the ordinary shares of subsidiaries. Where impairment may be indicated a test of the carrying value against the recoverable value is performed; impairment being indicated where the investment exceeds the recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is calculated as a value in use (VIU) which is derived from the present value of future cash flows expected to be received from the investment. The VIU calculations use forecast profits based on financial budgets approved by management, covering a five-year period as an approximation of future cash flows discounted using a pre-tax discount rate appropriate to the subsidiary being tested. A terminal growth rate has then been applied to the cash flows thereafter, which is based upon expectations of future inflation rates. The 2025 review did not identify any subsidiaries with indicators of impairment. #### Loans and advances to subsidiaries During the year, loans and advances to subsidiaries decreased by £2,677m to £15,730m (2024: £18,407m). The decrease was largely due to maturities of £2,161m intra-group loans to Barclays PLC subsidiaries. #### Subordinated liabilities and debt securities in issue During the year, subordinated liabilities decreased to £8,644m (2024: £9,706m) primarily due to maturity of £615m of Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (£500m and SGD 200m) and FX impact of £453m. Debt securities in issue of £14,476m (2024: £16,337m) have reduced during the year primarily due to redemption of £2,391m Fixed Rate Senior Notes and FX impact of £521m. This is partially offset by issuance of £(1,100)m of Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes. #### Financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value Financial liabilities designated at fair value of £48,800m (2024: £42,324m) primarily included new senior issuances of £10,226m during the year with principal amounts of £1,803m Fixed Rate Resetting Senior Callable Notes, £2,033m Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes, £6,317m Fixed-to-Floating Rate Senior Callable Notes. Barclays PLC also issued £1,045m of Subordinated Debt in the year with principal amounts of EUR 1,250m of Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes. The increase is partially offset by redemption of senior debt of £4,610m (2024:£3,577m). The proceeds raised through these transactions were used to invest in subsidiaries of Barclays PLC and are included within the financial assets designated at fair value through the income statement balance of £50,921m (2024: £44,435m). The effect of changes in the liabilities at fair value, including those due to credit risk, is expected to offset the changes in the fair value of the related financial asset in the income statement. At year end the carrying amount of financial liabilities was £1,168m higher than the contractual amount on maturity (2024: £195m lower). #### Derivative financial instruments During the year, derivative financial liabilities decreased by £119m to £535m (2024: £654m). This is primarily driven by the gain in derivatives due to mark to market movement. ### Total equity #### Called up share capital and share premium Called up share capital and share premium of Barclays PLC is £4,178m (2024: £4,186m). The decrease in the year is primarily due to £636m shares repurchased with a total nominal value of £158m. This decrease was partially offset by shares issued under employee share schemes. #### Other equity instruments Other equity instruments of £12,673m (2024: £12,033m) comprises AT1 securities issued by Barclays PLC. The AT1 securities are perpetual securities with no fixed maturity and are structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under prevailing capital rules applicable as at the relevant issue date. During the year, there were four AT1 issuances with principal amounts totalling £3,799m (USD 1,500m, £1,000m, EUR 1,500m and SGD 500m) and three redemptions with principal amounts totalling £3,120m (USD 1,500m and £2,000m). For further details, please refer to Note 27. The Parent company financials on pages 348 to 350 form part of this note. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Other disclosure matters ## 42 Related undertakings The Group’s corporate structure consists of a number of related undertakings, comprising subsidiary undertakings, joint ventures, associated undertakings and significant holdings. A full list of these related undertakings is set out below, together with the country of incorporation, registered office (or principal place of business) and the identity and percentage of each share class held by the Group. The information is provided as at 31 December 2025. The entities are grouped by the countries in which they are incorporated. The profits earned by the activities of these entities are in some cases taxed in countries other than the country of incorporation, for example, where the entity carries on business through a branch in a territory outside of its country of incorporation. Barclays PLC Country Snapshot provides details of where the Group carries on its business, where its profits are subject to tax and the taxes it pays in each country it operates in. ## Wholly owned subsidiaries Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings below are wholly owned and included in the consolidation and the share capital held by the Group comprises ordinary and/or common shares, which are held by subsidiaries of Barclays PLC. Unless otherwise stated, the Group holds 100% of the nominal value of each share class. | Notes | | | --- | --- | | A | Directly held by Barclays PLC | | B | Partnership Interest | | C | Membership Interest | | D | Class D Shares | | E | Preference Shares | | F | A Preference Shares | | G | B Preference Shares | | H | Ordinary/Common Shares in addition to other shares | | I | A Ordinary Shares | | J | B Ordinary Shares | | K | C Ordinary Shares | | L | F Ordinary Shares | | M | First Preference Shares, Second Preference Shares | | N | Registered Address not in country of Incorporation | | O | Core Shares, Insurance (Classified) Shares | | P | Class B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J and K | | Q | Non-Redeemable Ordinary Shares | | Notes | | | --- | --- | | R | Class A, B and C Shares | | S | Class A and Class B Shares | | T | PEF Carry Shares | | U | Not Consolidated (see Note 34 IFRS12 Structured entities) | | V | USD Linked Ordinary Shares | | W | Redeemable Class B Shares | | X | Capital Contribution Shares | | Y | Class A Redeemable Preference | | Z | Class B Redeemable Preference | | AA | First Class Common Shares, Second Class Common Shares | | CC | Non-Voting Redeemable Preference Shares | | DD | Ordinary "F" Shares - Variable | | EE | Class C Preferred Shares and Class D Preferred Shares | | FF | Trust Interest | | GG | A1 Ordinary Shares (42.85%) and A2 Preference Shares (45.15%) | | HH | A2 Ordinary Shares (14.14%) and A3 Ordinary Shares(68.10%) | | II | LLC Share | | JJ | A Shares (4.99%) and B Shares (100%) | | KK | Class A Ordinary Shares (34.47%) and Class C Ordinary Shares (22.98%) | | LL | Class A Ordinary Shares (49.52%) and Preference Shares (48.25%) | ## Wholly owned subsidiaries Note ### United Kingdom #### 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP - Aequor Investments Limited - Ardencroft Investments Limited - B D & B Investments Limited - B.P.B. (Holdings) Limited - Barclay Leasing Limited - Barclays Aldersgate Investments Limited - Barclays Asset Management Limited - Barclays Bank PLC A, H - Barclays Bank UK PLC A - Barclays Capital Asia Holdings Limited - Barclays Capital Nominees (No.2) Limited - Barclays Capital Nominees (No.3) Limited - Barclays Capital Nominees Limited - Barclays Capital Securities Client Nominee Limited - Barclays Capital Securities Limited - Barclays CCP Funding LLP B - Barclays Converted Investments (No.2) Limited - Barclays Direct Investing Nominees Limited - Barclays Directors Limited - Barclays Equity Holdings Limited - Barclays Execution Services Limited A - Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited - Barclays Financial Planning Nominee Company Limited - Barclays Funds Investments Limited | Wholly owned subsidiaries | Note | | --- | --- | | Barclays Gaia Holdings Limited | | | Barclays Group Holdings Limited | | | Barclays Industrial Development Limited | | | Barclays Industrial Investments Limited | | | Barclays Insurance Services Company Limited | | | Barclays International Holdings Limited | | | Barclays Investment Management Limited | | | Barclays Investment Solutions Limited | | | Barclays Leasing (No.9) Limited | | | Barclays Long Island Limited | | | Barclays Nominees (George Yard) Limited | U | | Barclays OCIO Services Limited | | | Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited | | | Barclays Principal Investments Limited | A, I, J | | Barclays Private Bank | | | Barclays SAMS Limited | | | Barclays Security Trustee Limited | A | | Barclays Services (Japan) Limited | | | Barclays Shea Limited | | | Barclays Term Funding Limited Liability Partnership | B | | Barclays UK Investments Limited | | | Barclays Unquoted Investments Limited | | | Barclays Wealth Nominees Limited | | | Barclaycard Payments Limited | | | Barclayshare Nominees Limited | | | Barcosec Limited | | | Barsec Nominees Limited | | | BB Client Nominees Limited | | | BMI (No.9) Limited | | | BNRI ENG 2014 Limited Partnership | B | | BNRI ENG GP LLP | B | | BNRI England 2010 Limited Partnership | B | | BNRI England 2012 Limited Partnership | B | | Carnegie Holdings Limited | | | Chapelcrest Investments Limited | | | Clydesdale Financial Services Limited | | | Cornwall Home Loans Limited | | | CPIA England 2009 Limited Partnership | B | | CPIA England No.2 Limited Partnership | B | | Dorset Home Loans Limited | | | Durlacher Nominees Limited | | | Eagle Financial and Leasing Services (UK) Limited | | | Finpart Nominees Limited | | | FirstPlus Financial Group Limited | | | Foltus Investments Limited | | | Global Dynasty Natural Resource Private Equity Limited Partnership | B | | Globe Nominees Limited | | | Hawkins Funding Limited | | | Heraldglen Limited | H, M | | Isle of Wight Home Loans Limited | | | J.V. Estates Limited | | | Kirsche Investments Limited | | | Long Island Assets Limited | | | Maloney Investments Limited | | | Menlo Investments Limited | | | Mercantile Credit Company Limited | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Other disclosure matters | Wholly owned subsidiaries | Note | | --- | --- | | Mercantile Leasing Company (No.132) Limited | | | MK Opportunities LP | B | | Naxos Investments Limited (In Liquidation 14 January 2026) | | | North Colonnade Investments Limited | | | Northwharf Investments Limited | T,H | | Northwharf Nominees Limited | | | Oak Pension Asset Management Limited | U | | Radbroke Mortgages UK Limited | | | Real Estate Participation Management Limited | | | Real Estate Participation Services Limited | | | Relative Value Investments UK Limited Liability Partnership | B | | Relative Value Trading Limited | | | Roder Investments No. 1 Limited | H, E | | Roder Investments No. 2 Limited | H, E | | RVT CLO Investments LLP | B | | Surety Trust Limited | | | Sustainable Impact Capital Limited | | | Swan Lane Investments Limited | | | US Real Estate Holdings No.1 Limited | | | US Real Estate Holdings No.2 Limited | | | US Real Estate Holdings No.3 Limited | | | US Real Estate Holdings No.4 Limited | | | US Real Estate Holdings No.5 Limited | | | US Real Estate Holdings No.6 Limited | | | Water Street Investments Limited | U | | Wedd Jefferson (Nominees) Limited | | | Westferry Investments Limited | | | Woolwich Homes Limited | | | Woolwich Qualifying Employee Share Ownership Trustee Limited | | | Zeban Nominees Limited | | | C/O Teneo Financial Advisory Limited, 3rd Floor, The Colmore Building, 20 Colmore Circus Queensway, Birmingham, West Midlands, B4 6AT | | | Barclays Nominees (Branches) Limited (In Liquidation) | | | Leonis Investments LLP (In Liquidation) | B | | 2nd Floor, Marlow International, Parkway, Marlow, SL7 1YL, United Kingdom | | | Kensington Mortgage Company Limited | | | Kensington Mortgage Services Limited | | | 1-4, Clyde Place Lane, Glasgow, G5 8DP | | | R.C. Greig Nominees Limited | | | 50 Lothian Road, Festival Square, Edinburgh, EH3 9WJ | | | BNRI PIA Scot GP Limited | | | BNRI Scots GP, LLP | B | | Pecan Aggregator LP | B | | Logic House, Waterfront Business Park, Park, Fleet Road, Fleet, Hampshire, GU51 3SB | | | The Logic Group Enterprises Limited | | | Wholly owned subsidiaries | Note | | --- | --- | | The Logic Group Holdings Limited | I | | 9, allée Scheffer, L-2520, Luxembourg | | | Barclays Claudas Investments Partnership | B, N | | Barclays Pelleas Investments Limited Partnership | B, N | | Barclays Blossom Finance Limited Partnership | B, N | | Argentina | | | Marval, O'Farrell & Mairal, Av. Leandro N.Alem 882, Buenos Aires, 27000 A.T.P. | | | Compañía Regional del Sur S.A.(In Liquidation) | | | Brazil | | | Av. Brigadeiro Faria Lima, No.4.440, 12th Floor, Bairro Itaim Bibi, Sao Paulo, CEP, 04538-132 | | | Barclays Brasil Assessoria Financeira Ltda | | | Canada | | | Bay Wellington Tower, Brookfield Place, 47th floor, 181 Bay Street, Toronto, Ontario, M5J 2T3 | | | Barclays Capital Canada Inc. | | | Barclays Corporation Limited | | | 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP | | | CPIA Canada Holdings | B, N | | Cayman Islands | | | PO Box 309, Ugland House, George Town, Grand Cayman, KY1-1104 | | | Alymere Investments Limited | F, G, H | | Analytical Trade UK Limited | | | Barclays Capital (Cayman) Limited | | | Barclays Securities Financing Limited | F, G, H | | Barclays US Holdings Limited | E, I | | Braven Investments No.1 Limited | | | Capton Investments Limited | | | Claudas Investments Limited | H, Y, Z | | Claudas Investments Two Limited | | | CPIA Investments No.2 Limited | E, H | | Gallen Investments Limited | | | Hornbeam Limited | U | | Mintaka Investments No. 4 Limited | | | Palomino Limited | | | Pelleas Investments Limited | | | Pippin Island Investments Limited | | | Razzoli Investments Limited | E, H | | RVH Limited | E, H | | France | | | 34-36 avenue de Friedland, 75008, Paris | | | Barclays ADF SA | | | Guernsey | | | P.O. Box 33, Dorey Court, Admiral Park, St. Peter Port, GY1 4AT | | | Wholly owned subsidiaries | Note | | --- | --- | | Barclays Insurance Guernsey PCC Limited | O | | Barclays UKRF No.1 IC Limited | U | | Barclays UKRF ICC Limited | U | | Barclays UKRF No.2 IC Ltd | U | | Hong Kong | | | Level 41, Cheung Kong Center, 2 Queen's Road Central, N/A, Hong Kong | | | Barclays Capital Asia Limited | | | India | | | Nirlon Knowledge Park, Level 9, Block B-6, Off Western Express Highway, Goregaon (East), Mumbai, 400063 | | | Barclays Securities (India) Private Limited | | | Barclays Wealth Trustees (India) Private Limited | | | Barclays Investments & Loans (India) Private Limited | E, H | | 5th to 12th Floor (Part), Building G2, Gera Commerzone SEZ, Survey No.65, Kharadi, Pune, 411014 | | | Barclays Global Service Centre Private Limited | | | Ireland | | | One Molesworth Street, Dublin 2, D02 RF29 | | | Barclaycard International Payments Limited | | | Barclays Bank Ireland Public Limited Company | | | Barclays Europe Client Nominees Designated Activity Company | | | Barclays Europe Firm Nominees Designated Activity Company | | | Barclays Europe Nominees Designated Activity Company | | | 25-28 North Wall Quay, Dublin1, D01 Erimon Home Loans Ireland Limited | | | 70 Sir John Rogerson's Quay, Dublin 2, D02 R296 | | | Barclays Finance Ireland Limited | | | Isle of Man | | | Eagle Court, Circular Road, Douglas, IM1 1AD | | | Barclays Nominees (Manx) Limited (In Liquidation) | U | | Barclays Private Clients International Limited | I, I, U | | c/o Zedra Trust Company (Isle of Man) Limited, 2nd Floor, St Georges Court, Upper Church Street, Douglas, IM1 1EE | | | Barclays Holdings (Isle of Man) Limited (In Liquidation) | | | Japan | | | 10-1, Roppongi 6-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo | | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Other disclosure matters | Wholly owned subsidiaries | Note | | --- | --- | | Barclays Funds and Advisory Japan | | | Barclays Securities Japan Limited | F, H | | Jersey | | | 28 Esplanade, St Helier, JE2 3QA | | | Barclays Services Jersey Limited (In Liquidation) | | | 13 Library Place, St Helier, JE4 8NE | | | Barclays Nominees (Jersey) Limited | U | | Barclaytrust Channel Islands Limited | U | | Estera Trust (Jersey) Limited, 13-14 Esplanade, St Helier, JE1 1EE | | | MK Opportunities GP Ltd | | | 3rd Floor, 44 Esplanade, St. Helier, JE4 9WG, Jersey | | | Barclaycard Payments Holdings Limited | | | Barclaycard Payments Midco Limited | | | Luxembourg | | | 9, allée Scheffer, L-2520, Luxembourg | | | Barclays Bedivere Investments S.à r.l. | H, I, J | | Barclays Cantal Investments S.à r.l. | S | | Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l. | | | Barclays Treasury Luxembourg S.à r.l. | | | Barclays Claudas Investments S.à r.l. | | | Barclays International Luxembourg Dollar Holdings S.à r.l. | | | Barclays Lamorak Investments S.à r.l. | Q | | Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings S.à r.l. | Q | | Barclays Luxembourg Global Funding S.à r.l. | | | Barclays Luxembourg Holdings S.à r.l. | | | Barclays Luxembourg Holdings SSC | B | | BNRI Limehouse No.1 S.à r.l. | P | | 68-70 Boulevard de la Petrusse, L-2320 | | | Adler Toy Holding Sarl | | | 10 rue du Château d’Eau, Leudelange, Grand Duchy of Luxembourg L-3364 | | | BPM Management GP SARL | | | Mauritius | | | C/O Rogers Capital Corporate Services Limited, 3rd Floor, Rogers House, No.5 President John Kennedy Street, Port Louis | | | Barclays Capital Mauritius Limited (In Liquidation) | | | Barclays Capital Securities Mauritius Limited | | | Fifth Floor Ebene Esplanade, 24 Bank Street, Cybercity 72201 Ebene | | | Barclays Mauritius Overseas Holdings Limited | | | Wholly owned subsidiaries | Note | | --- | --- | | Mexico | | | Paseo de la Reforma 505, Torre Mayor Floor 41, Colona Cuauhtémoc, 06500, Mexico City | | | Barclays Bank Mexico, S.A. | J, L | | Barclays Capital Casa de Bolsa, S.A. de C.V. | J, L | | Grupo Financiero Barclays Mexico, S.A. de C.V. | J, L | | Monaco | | | 31 Avenue de la Costa, Monte Carlo BP 339 | | | Barclays Private Asset Management (Monaco) S.A.M | | | Saudi Arabia | | | 3rd Floor Al Dahna Center, 114 Al-Ahsa Street, PO Box 1454, Riyadh 11431 | | | Barclays Saudi Arabia (In Liquidation) | | | Building 4.09- Unit 2- Level 9th, King Abdullah Financial District Riyadh, KSA, Kingdom Abdullah Financial District, Riyadh | | | Barclays Regional Headquarters Company | | | Singapore | | | 10 Marina Boulevard, #25-01 Marina Bay Financial Centre, Tower 2, 018983 | | | Barclays Merchant Bank (Singapore) Ltd. | | | Spain | | | Calle Jose, Abascal 51, 28003, Madrid | | | Barclays Tenedora De Inmuebles SL. | | | Switzerland | | | Chemin de Grange Canal 18-20, PO Box 3941, 1211, Geneva | | | Barclays Bank (Suisse) SA | | | Barclays Switzerland Services SA | | | BPB Holdings SA | | | Taiwan | | | 19F-1, No. 7, Xinyi Road, Sec. 5, Taipei, A322, Taiwan | | | Barclays Securities Taiwan Limited | | | Turkey | | | 13th floor, Kanyon Office Block, Büyükdere Caddesi, Levent, Istanbul, 34394 | | | Barclays Menkul Değerler Anonim Şirketi | | | United States | | | Corporation Service Company, 251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington, DE 19808 | | | Analytical Trade Holdings LLC | | | Barclays Asset Backed Depositor LLC | C | | Barclays Bank Delaware | E, H | | Barclays Capital Derivatives Funding LLC | C | | Barclays STBT Inc. | | | Barclays Capital Equities Trading GP | B | | Wholly owned subsidiaries | Note | | --- | --- | | Barclays Capital Holdings Inc. | F, G, H | | Barclays Capital Real Estate Finance Inc. | | | Barclays Capital Real Estate Holdings Inc. | | | Barclays Capital Real Estate Inc. | | | Barclays Commercial Mortgage Securities LLC | C | | Barclays Dryrock Funding LLC | C | | Barclays Financial LLC | C | | Barclays Group US Inc. | F, H | | Barclays Lifestyles LLC | C | | Barclays Nest LLC | C | | Barclays Oversight Management Inc. | | | Barclays Receivables LLC | C | | Barclays Services Corporation | | | Barclays Services LLC | C | | Barclays US CCP Funding LLC | C | | Barclays US Investments Inc. | | | Barclays US LLC | H, EE | | BCAP LLC | C | | Gracechurch Services Corporation | | | Lagalla Investments LLC | | | Marbury Holdings LLC | | | Preferred Liquidity, LLC | I | | Procella Investments No.2 LLC | II | | Procella Investments No.3 LLC | II | | Relative Value Holdings, LLC | | | Surrey Funding Corporation | | | Sussex Purchasing Corporation | | | Sutton Funding LLC | C | | US Secured Investments LLC | X | | Verain Investments LLC | | | Wilmington Riverfront LLC | C | | 100 Bank Street, Suite 630, Burlington, Vermont 05401 | | | Barclays Insurance U.S. Inc. | | | Corporation Service Company, 80 State Street, Albany, NY, 12207-2543 | | | Barclays Equity Holdings Inc. | | | Corporation Service Company, Goodwin Square, 225 Asylum Street, 20th Floor Hartford CT 06103 | | | Barclays Capital Inc. | | | Corporation Service Company, 2626, Glenwood Ave, Suite 550, Raleigh, NC, 27608 | | | Barclays US GPF Inc. | | | Equifirst Corporation (In Liquidation, dissolved with State of North Carolina) | | | Rodney Square North, 1100, North Market Street, Wilmington, Delaware, 19890 | | | Barclays Dryrock Issuance Trust | FF | | 745 Seventh Avenue, New York, NY10019 | | | Alynore Investments Limited Partnership | B, N | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Notes to the financial statements (continued) Other disclosure matters ## Other Related Undertakings Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings below are included in the consolidation and the share capital held by the Group comprises ordinary and/or common shares, which are held by subsidiaries of Barclays PLC. The percentage of the nominal value of each share class held by the Group is provided below. | Other Related Undertakings | % | Note | | --- | --- | --- | | United Kingdom | | | | 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP | | | | Barclaycard Funding PLC | 100.00 | I | | Barclays Covered Bonds Limited Liability Partnership | 50.00 | B | | Barclays Secured Funding (LM) Limited | 20.00 | | | Barclays Secured Notes Finance LLP | 20.00 | B | | 80 Fenchurch Street, London EC3M 4AE | | | | Igloo Regeneration (General Partner) Limited | 25.00 | K, U | | 3-5 London Road, Rainham, Gillingham, Kent ME8 7RG | | | | Trade Ideas Limited | 20.00 | U | | 50 Lothian Road, Festival Square, Edinburgh, EH3 9WJ | | | | Equistone Founder Partner III L.P. | 20.00 | B, U | | Enigma, Wavendon Business Park Milton Keynes, MK17 | | | | Intelligent Processing Solutions Limited | 19.50 | U | | 180 Borough High Street, London SE1 1LB | | | | Protium Green Solutions Limited | | U, GG | | 13-15 York Buildings, London, WC2N 6JU | | | | BGF Group PLC | 24.60 | I, U | | Unit 9 Westbrook Court, Sharrowvale Road, Sheffield, S11 8YZ | | | | Palms Row Healthcare Holdings Limited | 100.00 | U, CC | | 3rd Floor 19-20 Berners Street, London, W1T 3NW | | | | AVFI TIDE 1 LP | 41.30 | B, U | | 3rd Floor, 19-20 Berners Street, London W1T 3NW | | | | Female Innovators Lab L.P. | 60.00 | B | 6th Floor 60 Gracechurch Street, London, EC3V 0HR | Other Related Undertakings | % | Note | | --- | --- | --- | | BMC (UK) Ltd | | U, LL | | 1301 K Street Nw, Washington DC 20005, United States | | | | Barclays Pre-Seed Investments I LP | 100.00 | B, N, U | | Barclays Pre-Seed Investments II LP | 100.00 | B, N, U | | The White House, High Street, Dereham, Norfolk, NR19 1DR | | | | Naked Energy Limited | 25.80 | G, U | | Belgium | | | | Klipperstraat 15 2030 Antwerp | | | | Euphony Benelux NV (In Administration) | 20.00 | U | | Cayman Islands | | | | Maples Corporate Services Limited, PO Box 309, Ugland House, South Church Street, Grand Cayman, KY1-1104 | | | | Southern Peaks Mining LP | 54.05 | B, U | | SPM GP Limited | 90.00 | U | | Korea, Republic of | | | | 18th Floor, Daishin Finance Centre, 343, Samil-daero, Jung-go, Seoul | | | | Woori BC Pegasus Securitization Specialty Co. Ltd | 70.00 | AA | | Luxembourg | | | | 9, allée Scheffer, L-2520, Luxembourg | | | | Barclays Alzin Investments S.à r.l. | 100.00 | D, S | | Barclays Bordang Investments S.à r.l. | 100.00 | S | | 17, Boulevard F.W. Raiffeisen | | | | Salica Growth Debt Fund II SCSp | 33.00 | B, U | | Netherlands | | | | Winschoterdiep, 70, Groningen, 9723AB, Groningen, Cube Solidus B.V. | | U, JJ | | Alexanderstraat 18, The Hague, 2514 JM, Zuid-Holland | | | | Tulip Oil Holding BV | | U, KK | ## Joint Ventures The related undertaking below is dealt with as a Joint Venture¹ in accordance with s.18, Schedule 4, The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 and is proportionally consolidated. The proportion of the capital of the related undertaking held by the Group is stated below. | Joint Venture | % | Note | | --- | --- | --- | | United Kingdom | | | | All Saints Triangle, Caledonian Road, London, N1 9UT | | | | Vaultex UK Limited | 50.00 | | ## Joint management factors The Board of Directors of the above Joint Venture comprises two Barclays representative Directors, two JV partner Directors and two non-JV partner Directors. The Board of Directors are responsible, amongst other things, for setting the company strategy and budgets. The last financial year of the above JV ended on 3 October 2025 and the average number of monthly employees reported in the accounts was 1,118. ## Notes: 1. This is distinct to how the term "joint venture" may be used for the purposes of IFRS. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 438 # Additional unaudited information # Shareholder information ## Annual General Meeting (AGM) The Barclays PLC 2026 AGM will be held on Thursday 7 May at QEII Centre Broad Sanctuary, Westminster London SW1P 3EE as described in the Notice of Meeting, to be published on the Company's website (home.barclays/agm). ## Keep your personal details up to date Please remember to tell Equiniti if: - you move - you need to update your bank or building society details. If you are a Shareview member, you can update your bank or building society account or address details online. If you are not a Shareview member you can update details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details on the next page. ## Key dates 20 February 2026 Full year dividend record date 31 March 2026 Full year dividend payment date 28 April 2026 Q1 Results Announcement 7 May 2026 Annual General Meeting ## Dividends The Barclays PLC 2025 full year dividend for the year ended 31 December 2025 will be 5.6p per share, making the 2025 total dividend 8.6p per share. ## Dividend Reinvestment Plan Barclays offers a share alternative in the form of a dividend reinvestment plan (DRIP) for those shareholders who wish to elect to use their dividend payments to purchase additional ordinary shares, rather than receive a cash payment. The DRIP is provided and administered by Barclays' registrar, Equiniti. ## Share Price Share price Information on the Barclays share price and other share price tools are available at: home.barclays/investorrelations. Further details regarding the DRIP can be found at home.barclays/dividends and www.shareview.co.uk/info/drip. ## Share Dealing Services, donations to charity and returns to shareholders During 2025, we offered shareholders the option to donate to ShareGift as part of the Share Dealing Service, which resulted in over £78,000 in donations. The initiative is aimed at shareholders with relatively small shareholdings for whom it might otherwise be uneconomical to deal. Over £0.5m has been donated as part of the Share Dealing Service since it was launched in 2017. Some shareholders also opt to sell their holding, as is their right to, resulting in approximately £23.91m being returned to shareholders in 2025, with a total of £95.66m returned via this service since it was introduced. ## Shareholder Asset Reunification Programme In November 2025, we launched a new shareholder asset reunification programme instructing Prosearch, a specialist tracing company, to help us trace over 38,000 lost shareholders. We want to reunite shareholders who have lost touch with the company, with their shareholding and unclaimed dividends. To date, we have already reunited over £362,000 worth of shares and unclaimed dividends to shareholders via this programme. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 439 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Shareholder security Shareholders should be wary of any cold calls, emails, texts or instant messages with an offer to buy or sell shares. Fraudsters often use persuasive and high pressure techniques to lure shareholders into high-risk investments or scams. You should treat any unsolicited calls with caution. Please keep in mind that firms authorised by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) are unlikely to contact you out of the blue. You should consider getting independent financial or professional advice from someone unconnected to the respective firm before you hand over any money. ## Report a scam If you suspect that you have been approached by fraudsters please tell the FCA using the share fraud reporting form at fca.org.uk/consumers/scams. You can also call the FCA Helpline on 0800 111 6768 or through Action Fraud on 0300 123 2040. ## Managing your shares online ### Shareview Barclays shareholders can go online to manage their shareholding and find out about Barclays performance by joining Shareview. Through Shareview, you: - will receive the latest updates from Barclays direct to your email; - can update your address and bank details online; - can vote in advance of general meetings. To join Shareview, please follow these two easy steps: Step 1 Go to portfolio.shareview.co.uk Step 2 Register for electronic communications by following the instructions on screen ## Useful contact details ### Registrar ### Holders of ordinary shares The Barclays share register is maintained by Equiniti. If you have any questions about your Barclays shares, please contact Equiniti by visiting shareview.co.uk By phone: +44 (0)371 384 2055* (UK & International telephone number) For the hearing and speech impaired Equiniti welcome calls via Relay UK. For more information see relayuk.bt.com. By post: Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 6DA To find out more, contact Equiniti or visit: home.barclays/dividends ### Holders of American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) ADRs represent the ownership of Barclays PLC shares which are traded on the New York Stock Exchange. ADRs carry prices, and pay dividends, in US dollars. If you have any questions about your Barclays ADRs, please contact Shareowner Services: Electronically: shareowneronline.com/informational/contact-us/ By phone: +1 800 990 1135 (toll free in the US and Canada) +1 651 453 2128 (outside the US and Canada) By post: Shareowner Services, PO Box 64504, St Paul, MN 55164-0504, USA Delivery of ADR certificates and overnight mail By post: Shareowner Services, 1110 Centre Pointe Curve, Suite 101, Mendota Heights, MN 55120-4100, USA Qualifying ADR holders should contact Shareowner Services for further details regarding the DRIP --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 440 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Shareholder Relations If you have any questions for Barclays about your shareholding, please contact us: By email: privateshareholderrelations@barclays.com By post: Private Shareholder Relations, Barclays PLC, 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP Please do not use this channel for general solicitations, marketing or general communications. Any non-shareholder-related enquiries will not receive a response. ## Alternative formats Shareholder documents can be provided in large print, audio CD or Braille free of charge by calling Equiniti. +44 (0)371 384 2055a (UK & International telephone number) ## Note a Lines open 8.30am to 5.30pm (UK time) Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 441 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Articles of Association Barclays PLC (the "Company") is a public limited company registered in England and Wales under company number 48839. Barclays, originally named Barclay & Company Limited was incorporated in England and Wales on 20 July 1896 under the Companies Acts 1862 to 1890 as a company limited by shares. The company name was changed to Barclays Bank Limited on 17 February 1917 and it was registered on 15 February 1982 as a public limited company under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1980. On 1 January 1985, the company changed its name to Barclays PLC. The objects of the Company are unrestricted. The current Articles of Association were adopted at the Company's Annual General Meeting ("AGM") on 9 May 2024, in substitution for and to the exclusion of Articles adopted on 5 May 2021. The following is a summary and explanation of the current Articles of Association, which are available for inspection. ## Directors (i) The minimum number of Directors (excluding alternate Directors) is five. There is no maximum limit. There is no age limit for Directors. (ii) Excluding executive remuneration and any other entitlement to remuneration for extra services (including service on board committees) under the Articles, a Director is entitled to a fee at a rate determined by the Board but the aggregate fees paid to all Directors shall not exceed £3,000,000 per annum or such higher amount as may be approved by an ordinary resolution of the Company. Each Director is entitled to reimbursement for all reasonable travelling, hotel and other expenses properly incurred by him/her in or about the performance of his/her duties. (iii) No Director may act (either himself/herself or through his/her firm) as an auditor of the Company. A Director may hold any other office of the Company on such terms as the Board shall determine. (iv) At each AGM of the Company, one third of the Directors (rounded down) are required under the Articles of Association to retire from office by rotation and may offer themselves for re-election. The Directors so retiring are first, those who wish to retire and not offer themselves for re-election, and, second those who have been longest in office (and in the case of equality of service length are selected by lot). Other than a retiring Director, no person shall (unless recommended by the Board) be eligible for election unless a member notifies the Company Secretary in advance of his/her intention to propose a person for election. It is Barclays' practice that all Directors offer themselves for re-election annually in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code. (v) The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy amongst the Directors. Any Director so appointed holds office until the next AGM, when he/she may offer himself/herself for reappointment. He/she is not taken into account in determining the number of Directors retiring by rotation. (vi) The Board may appoint any Director to any executive position or employment in the Company on such terms as they determine. (vii) The Company may by ordinary resolution remove a Director before the expiry of his/her period of office (without prejudice to a claim for damages for breach of contract or otherwise) and may by ordinary resolution appoint another person who is willing to act to be a Director in his/her place. (viii) A Director may appoint either another Director or some other person approved by the Board to act as his/her alternate with power to attend Board meetings and generally to exercise the functions of the appointing Director in his/her absence (other than the power to appoint an alternate of his/her appointor). (ix) The Board may authorise any matter in relation to which a Director has, or can have, a direct interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict with, the Company's interests. Only Directors who have no interest in the matter being considered will be able to authorise the relevant matter and they may impose limits or conditions when giving authorisation if they think this is appropriate. (x) A Director may hold positions with or be interested in other companies and, subject to legislation applicable to the Company and the FCA's requirements, may contract with the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested. (xi) A Director may not vote or count towards the quorum on any resolution concerning any proposal in which he/she (or any person connected with him/her) has a material interest (other than by virtue of his/her interest in securities of the Company) or if he/she has a duty which conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company, unless the resolution relates to any proposal: (a) to indemnify a Director or provide him/her with a guarantee or security in respect of money lent by him/her to, or any obligation incurred by him/her or any other person for the benefit of (or at the request of), the Company (or any other member of the Group); (b) to indemnify or give security or a guarantee to a third party in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company (or any other member of the Group) for which the Director has personally assumed responsibility, in whole or in part; (c) to obtain insurance for the benefit of Directors; (d) involving the acquisition by a Director of any securities of the Company (or any other member of the Group) pursuant to an offer to existing holders of securities or to the public; (e) that the Director underwrite any issue of securities of the Company (or any other member of the Group); (f) concerning any other company in which the Director is interested as an officer or creditor or shareholder but, broadly, only if he/she (together with his/her connected persons) is directly or indirectly interested in less than 1% of either any class of the issued equity share capital or of the voting rights of that company; and (g) concerning any other arrangement for the benefit of employees of the Company (or any other member of the Group) under which the Director benefits or stands to benefit in a similar manner to the employees concerned and which does not give the Director any advantage which the employees to whom the arrangement relates would not receive. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 442 # Additional unaudited information (continued) (xii) A Director may not vote or be counted in the quorum on any resolution which concerns his/her own employment or appointment to any office of the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested. (xiii) Subject to applicable legislation, the provisions described in sub-paragraphs (x), (xi) and (xii) may be relaxed or suspended by an ordinary resolution of the members of the Company or any applicable governmental or other regulatory body. (xiv) The Board may exercise all of the powers of the Company to borrow money, to mortgage or charge its undertaking, property and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities. # Classes of Shares The Company only has Ordinary Shares in issue. The Articles of Association also provide for pound sterling preference shares of £100 each, US dollar preference shares of US$100 each, US dollar preference shares of $0.25 each, euro preference shares of €100 each and yen preference shares of ¥10,000 each (together, the "Preference Shares"). In accordance with the authority granted at the AGM on 9 May 2024, Preference Shares may be issued by the Board from time to time in one or more series with such rights and subject to such restrictions and limitations as the Board may determine. No Preference Shares have been issued to date. # Dividends Subject to the provisions of the Articles and applicable legislation, the Company in general meeting may declare dividends on the Ordinary Shares by ordinary resolution, but any such dividend may not exceed the amount recommended by the Board. The Board may also pay interim or final dividends if it appears they are justified by the Company's financial position. Each Preference Share confers the right to a preferential dividend ("Preference Dividend") payable in such currency at such rates (whether fixed or calculated by reference to or in accordance with a specified procedure or mechanism), on such dates and on such other terms as may be determined by the Board prior to allotment thereof. The Preference Shares rank in regard to payment of dividends in priority to the holders of Ordinary Shares and any other class of shares in the Company ranking junior to the Preference Shares. Dividends may be paid on the Preference Shares if, in the opinion of the Board, the Company has sufficient distributable profits, after payment in full or the setting aside of a sum to provide for all dividends payable on (or in the case of shares carrying a cumulative right to dividends, before) the relevant dividend payment date on any class of shares in the Company ranking pari passu with or in priority to the relevant series of Preference Shares as regards participation in the profits of the Company. If the Board considers that the distributable profits of the Company available for distribution are insufficient to cover the payment in full of Preference Dividends, Preference Dividends shall be paid to the extent of the distributable profits on a pro rata basis. Notwithstanding the above, the Board may, at its absolute discretion, determine that any Preference Dividend which would otherwise be payable may either not be payable at all or only payable in part. If any Preference Dividend on a series of Preference Shares is not paid, or is only paid in part, for the reasons described above, holders of Preference Shares will not have a claim in respect of such non-payment. If any dividend on a series of Preference Shares is not paid in full on the relevant dividend payment date, a dividend restriction shall apply. The dividend restriction means that, subject to certain exceptions, neither the Company nor Barclays Bank may (a) pay a dividend on, or (b) redeem, purchase, reduce or otherwise acquire, any of their respective ordinary shares, other preference shares or other share capital ranking equal or junior to the relevant series of Preference Shares until the earlier of such time as the Company next pays in full a dividend on the relevant series of Preference Shares or the date on which all of the relevant series of Preference Shares are redeemed. All unclaimed dividends payable in respect of any share may be invested or otherwise made use of by the Board for the benefit of the Company until claimed. If a dividend is not claimed after six years of it becoming payable, it is forfeited and reverts to the Company. The net proceeds from the sale of shares owned by untraced Shareholders, as well as any unclaimed dividend or other sum in respect of such shares, shall be forfeited by the relevant untraced Shareholder and shall belong to the Company to use as the Board thinks fit. The Board may, with the approval of an ordinary resolution of the Company, offer Shareholders the right to choose to receive an allotment of additional fully paid Ordinary Shares instead of cash in respect of all or part of any dividend. The Company currently provides a dividend reinvestment programme. # Redemption and Purchase Subject to applicable legislation and the rights of the other shareholders, any share may be issued on terms that it is, at the option of the Company or the holder of such share, redeemable. The Directors are authorised to determine the terms, conditions and manner of redemption of any such shares under the Articles of Association. # Calls on capital The Directors may make calls upon the members in respect of any monies unpaid on their shares. A person upon whom a call is made remains liable even if the shares in respect of which the call is made have been transferred. Interest will be chargeable on any unpaid amount called at a rate determined by the Board (of not more than 20% per annum). If a member fails to pay any call in full (following notice from the Board that such failure will result in forfeiture of the relevant shares), such shares (including any dividends declared but not paid) may be forfeited by a resolution of the Board, and will become the property of the Company. Forfeiture shall not absolve a previous member for amounts payable by him/her (which may continue to accrue interest). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) The Company also has a lien over all partly paid shares of the Company for all monies payable or called on that share and over the debts and liabilities of a member to the Company. If any monies which are the subject of the lien remain unpaid after a notice from the Board demanding payment, the Company may sell such shares. ## Annual and other general meetings The Company is required to hold an AGM in addition to such other general meetings as the Directors think fit. The type of the meeting will be specified in the notice calling it. Under the Companies Act 2006, the AGM must be held within six months of the financial year end. A general meeting may be convened by the Board on requisition in accordance with the applicable legislation. In the case of an AGM, a minimum of 21 clear days' notice is required. The notice must be in writing and must specify the place, the day and the hour of the meeting, and the general nature of the business to be transacted. A notice convening a meeting to pass a special resolution shall specify the intention to propose the resolution as such. The accidental failure to give notice of a general meeting or the non-receipt of such notice will not invalidate the proceedings at such meeting. Subject as noted above, all Shareholders are entitled to attend and vote at general meetings. The Articles do, however, provide that arrangements may be made for simultaneous attendance at a satellite meeting place or, if the meeting place is inadequate to accommodate all members and proxies entitled to attend, another meeting place may be arranged to accommodate such persons other than that specified in the notice of meeting, in which case Shareholders may be excluded from the principal place. The Articles also allow for a hybrid meeting, whereby Shareholders may attend by electronic means or physically. Holders of Preference Shares have no right to receive notice of, attend or vote at, any general meetings of the Company as a result of holding Preference Shares. ## Notices A document or information may be sent by the Company in hard copy form, electronic form, by being made available on a website, or by another means agreed with the recipient, in accordance with the provisions set out in the Companies Act 2006. Accordingly, a document or information may only be sent in electronic form to a person who has agreed to receive it in that form or, in the case of a company, who has been deemed to have so agreed pursuant to applicable legislation. A document or information may only be sent by being made available on a website if the recipient has agreed to receive it in that form or has been deemed to have so agreed pursuant to applicable legislation, and has not revoked that agreement. In respect of joint holdings, documents or information shall be sent to the joint holder whose name stands first in the register. A member who (having no registered address within the UK) has not supplied an address in the UK at which documents or information may be sent in hard copy form, or an address to which notices, documents or information may be sent or supplied by electronic means, is not entitled to have documents or information sent to him/her. The Company may choose to send notice in hard copy form alone to some or all members and/or choose not to send notice to a particular member where it considers this necessary or appropriate to deal with legal, regulatory or practical problems in, or under the laws of, any territory. In addition, the Company may cease to send notices to any member who has been sent documents on two consecutive occasions over a period of at least 12 months and when each of those documents is returned undelivered or notification is received that they have not been delivered. ## Capitalisation of profits The Company may, by ordinary resolution, upon the recommendation of the Board capitalise all or any part of an amount standing to the credit of a reserve or fund to be set free for distribution provided that amounts from the share premium account, capital redemption reserve or any profits not available for distribution should be applied only in paying up unissued shares to be allotted to members credited as fully paid and no unrealised profits shall be applied in paying up debentures of the Company or any amount unpaid on any share in the capital of the Company. ## Indemnity Subject to applicable legislation, every current and former Director or other officer of the Company (other than any person engaged by the company as auditor) shall be indemnified by the Company against any liability in relation to the Company, other than (broadly) any liability to the Company or a member of the Group, or any criminal or regulatory fine. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Dividends on the ordinary shares of Barclays PLC The dividends declared for each of the last five years were: | Pence per 25p ordinary share | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | 2022 | 2021 | | Half year | 3.00 | 2.90 | 2.70 | 2.25 | 2.00 | | Full year | 5.60 | 5.50 | 5.30 | 5.00 | 4.00 | | Total | 8.60 | 8.40 | 8.00 | 7.25 | 6.00 | | US Dollars per 25p ordinary share | | | | | | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | 2022 | 2021 | | Half year | 0.04 | 0.04 | 0.03 | 0.03 | 0.03 | | Full year | 0.08 | 0.07 | 0.07 | 0.06 | 0.05 | | Total | 0.12 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.09 | 0.08 | The gross dividends applicable to an American Depositary Share (ADS) representing four ordinary shares, before deduction of withholding tax, are as follows: | US Dollars per American Depositary Share | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | 2022 | 2021 | | Half year | 0.16 | 0.15 | 0.13 | 0.10 | 0.11 | | Full year | 0.30 | 0.27 | 0.27 | 0.24 | 0.22 | | Total | 0.46 | 0.42 | 0.40 | 0.34 | 0.33 | The final dividends shown above are expressed in Dollars translated at the closing spot rate for Pounds Sterling as determined by Bloomberg at 5pm in New York City (the 'Closing Spot Rate') on the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report. No representation is made that Pounds Sterling amounts have been, or could have been, or could be, converted into Dollars at these rates. ## Trading market for ordinary shares of Barclays PLC The principal trading market for Barclays PLC ordinary shares is the London Stock Exchange. At the close of business on 31 December 2025, 13,866,661,730 ordinary shares were in issue. Ordinary share listings were also obtained on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) with effect from 9 September 1986. Trading on the NYSE is in the form of ADSs under the symbol 'BCS'. Each ADS represents four ordinary shares and is evidenced by an American Depositary Receipt (ADR). The ADR depositary is JP Morgan Chase Bank, N.A. Details of trading activity are published in the stock tables of leading daily newspapers in the US. As at December 31, 2025, 299,037,602 ADSs were outstanding (equivalent to 1,196,150,408 ordinary shares or approximately 8.63% of the total outstanding ordinary shares of Barclays PLC on that date). In addition, there were 1,578 record holders of ordinary shares of Barclays PLC with US addresses as at December 31, 2025, representing 0.03% of the outstanding ordinary shares. Barclays ADSs are held both in the US and worldwide. Since a certain number of the ordinary shares and ADSs were held by brokers or other nominees, the number of record holders in the US may not be representative of the number of beneficial holders or of their country of residence. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 445 # Additional unaudited information (continued) Shareholdings at 31 December 2025¹ | | Number of shareholders | Percentage of holders % | Shares held | Percentage of capital % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Classification of shareholders | | | | | | Personal Holders | 181,113 | 98.67 | 305,449,527 | 2.20 | | Banks and Nominees | 1,701 | 0.93 | 11,319,402,910 | 81.63 | | Other Companies | 745 | 0.40 | 2,241,799,316 | 16.17 | | Insurance Companies | 1 | — | 208 | — | | Pension Funds | 4 | — | 9,769 | — | | Total | 183,564 | 100 | 13,866,661,730 | 100 | | Shareholding range | | | | | | 1 - 100 | 15,400 | 8.39 | 553,369 | 0.01 | | 101 - 250 | 41,317 | 22.51 | 8,395,175 | 0.06 | | 251 - 500 | 49,053 | 26.72 | 17,149,355 | 0.12 | | 501 - 1,000 | 28,114 | 15.32 | 19,820,462 | 0.14 | | 1,001 - 5,000 | 34,210 | 18.64 | 75,719,057 | 0.55 | | 5,001 - 10,000 | 7,808 | 4.25 | 55,015,732 | 0.40 | | 10,001 - 25,000 | 4,721 | 2.57 | 71,282,600 | 0.51 | | 25,001 - 50,000 | 1,216 | 0.66 | 41,564,891 | 0.30 | | 50,001 and over | 1,725 | 0.94 | 13,577,161,089 | 97.91 | | Total | 183,564 | 100.00 | 13,866,661,730 | 100 | | United States Holdings | 1,578 | 0.86 | 4,230,437 | 0.03 | Note: 1 These figures do not include Barclays Sharestore members. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 446 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Taxation of UK holders The following is a summary of certain UK tax issues which are likely to be material to the holding and disposal of Ordinary Shares of Barclays PLC or ADSs representing such Ordinary Shares (the "Shares"). It is based on the current laws of England and Wales, UK tax law and the practice of His Majesty's Revenue and Customs ("HMRC"), each of which may be subject to change, possibly with retrospective effect and in particular it does not contemplate any changes in law announced, but not yet enacted, as part of the UK government's Autumn Budget on 26 November 2025 (the "Budget"). It is a general guide for information purposes and should be treated with appropriate caution. It is not intended as tax advice and it does not purport to describe all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to a prospective purchaser, holder or disposer of Shares. In particular, save where expressly stated to the contrary, this summary deals with shareholders who are resident and, in the case of individuals, domiciled in (and only in) the UK for UK tax purposes, who hold their Shares as investments (other than under an individual savings account) and who are the absolute beneficial owners of their Shares and any dividends paid on them. The statements are not addressed to: (i) shareholders who own (or are deemed to own) 10% or more of the voting power of Barclays PLC; (ii) shareholders who hold Shares as part of hedging transactions; (iii) investors who have (or are deemed to have) acquired their Shares by virtue of an office or employment; and (iv) shareholders who hold Shares in connection with a trade, profession or vocation carried on in the UK (whether through a branch or agency or, in the case of a corporate shareholder, through a permanent establishment, or otherwise). It does not discuss the tax treatment of classes of shareholder subject to special rules, such as dealers in securities. Persons who are in any doubt as to their tax position should consult their professional advisers. Persons who may be liable to taxation in jurisdictions other than the UK in respect of their acquisition, holding or disposal of Shares are particularly advised to consult their professional advisers as to whether they are so liable. ## i. Taxation of dividends In accordance with UK law, Barclays PLC pays dividends on the Shares without any deduction or withholding for or on account of any taxes imposed by the UK government or any UK taxing authority. The total dividends (including any dividends paid by Barclays PLC) paid to a UK resident individual shareholder in a tax year (the "Total Dividend Income") will generally form part of that shareholder's total income for UK income tax purposes, and will be subject to UK income tax at the rates discussed below. For dividends paid on or after 6 April 2016, the rate of UK income tax applicable to the Total Dividend Income will depend on the amount of the Total Dividend Income and the UK income tax band(s) that the Total Dividend Income falls within when included as part of the shareholder's total income for UK income tax purposes for that tax year. For the tax year from 6 April 2025 to 5 April 2026 (inclusive), a nil rate of UK income tax applies to the first £500 of Total Dividend Income received by an individual shareholder in that tax year (the "Nil Rate Amount"). For the 2024-2025 tax year, the Nil Rate Amount was £500. For the 2023-2024 tax year, the Nil Rate Amount was £1,000. For the 2018-2019, 2019-2020, 2020-2021, 2021-2022 and 2022-2023 tax years, the Nil Rate Amount was £2,000. Where the Total Dividend Income received by an individual shareholder in a tax year exceeds the relevant Nil Rate Amount for that tax year, the excess amount (the "Remaining Dividend Income") will, at the date hereof, be subject to UK income tax at the following current rates for the tax year from 6 April 2025 to 5 April 2026: (a) at the rate of 8.75% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the basic tax band; (b) at the rate of 33.75% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the higher tax band; and (c) at the rate of 39.35% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the additional tax band. The tax rates for the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the basic tax band and the higher tax band have been provisionally increased by 2% for the tax year from 6 April 2026 to 5 April 2027 to 10.75% and 35.75% respectively pursuant to a series of parliamentary resolutions that give provisional statutory effect to certain aspects of the UK government's Autumn Budget on 26 November 2025. It is expected these increases will be given permanent statutory effect following the enactment of the Finance (No. 2) Bill 2024-26. In determining the tax band the Remaining Dividend Income falls within for a tax year, the individual shareholder's Total Dividend Income for the tax year in question (including the portion comprising the Nil Rate Amount) will be treated as the top slice of the shareholder's total income for UK income tax purposes. Subject to special rules for small companies, UK resident shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax will not generally be subject to UK corporation tax on the dividends paid on the Shares, provided the dividend falls within an exempt class and certain conditions are met. ## ii. Taxation of shares under the Dividend Re-Investment Plan Where a shareholder elects to purchase Shares using their cash dividend as part of the Dividend Re-Investment Plan, such shareholder will generally be liable for UK tax on the amount of the dividend as described in (i) Taxation of dividends above, in the same way as the shareholder would have been on the receipt of a cash dividend. For capital gains purposes, the base cost of Shares purchased under the Dividend Re-Investment Plan will be the amount of the cash dividend used to purchase such Shares. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 447 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## iii. Taxation of capital gains The disposal of Shares (including, for the avoidance of doubt, any shares purchased as part of the Dividend Re-Investment Plan or previously purchased as part of the Scrip Dividend Programme) may, depending on the shareholder's circumstances, give rise to a liability to UK tax on chargeable capital gains. Where Shares are sold, a liability to UK tax may result if the proceeds from that sale exceed the sum of the base cost of the Shares sold and any other allowable deductions such as share dealing costs and, in certain circumstances, indexation relief (discussed further below). To arrive at the total base cost of any Barclays PLC shares held, in appropriate cases the amount subscribed for rights taken up in 1985, 1988 and 2013 must be added to the cost of all such shares held. For this purpose, current legislation permits the market valuation at 31 March 1982 to be substituted for the original cost of shares purchased before that date, subject to certain exceptions for shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax. Shareholders other than those within the charge to UK corporation tax should note that, following the Finance Act 2008, no indexation allowance will be available. Following the Finance Act 2018, shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax may be eligible for indexation allowance for the period of ownership of their Shares up to December 2017, but no indexation allowance will be available in respect of the period of ownership starting on or after 1 January 2018. Chargeable capital gains may also arise from the gifting of Shares to connected parties such as relatives (although not spouses or civil partners) and family trusts. The calculations required to compute chargeable capital gains may be complex. Shareholders are advised to consult their personal financial adviser for further information regarding a possible tax liability in respect of their holdings of shares. ## iv. Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax Dealings in Shares (including, for the avoidance of doubt, any Shares purchased as part of the Dividend Re-Investment Plan or previously purchased as part of the Scrip Dividend Programme) will generally be subject to UK stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax (although see the comments below as regards ADSs in the section 'Taxation of US holders - UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax'). Any document effecting the transfer on sale of Shares will generally be liable to stamp duty at 0.5% of the consideration paid for that transfer (rounded up to the next £5). An unconditional agreement to transfer Shares, or any interest therein, will generally be subject to stamp duty reserve tax at 0.5% of the consideration given. Such liability to stamp duty reserve tax will be cancelled, or a right to a repayment (generally with interest) in respect of the stamp duty reserve tax liability will arise, if the agreement is completed by a duly stamped transfer within six years of the agreement having become unconditional. Both stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax are normally the liability of the transferee. Paperless transfers of Shares within CREST are liable to stamp duty reserve tax rather than stamp duty. Stamp duty reserve tax on transactions settled within the CREST system or reported through it for regulatory purposes will be collected by CREST. Special rules apply to certain categories of person, including intermediaries, market makers, brokers, dealers and persons connected with depository arrangements and clearance services. ## v. Inheritance tax An individual may be liable to inheritance tax on the transfer of Shares (including, for the avoidance of doubt, any Shares purchased as part of the Dividend Re-Investment Plan or previously purchased as part of the Scrip Dividend Programme). Where an individual is so liable, inheritance tax may be charged on the amount by which the value of his or her estate is reduced as a result of any transfer by way of gift or other gratuitous transaction made by them or treated as made by them. ## Taxation of US Holders The following is a summary of certain US federal income tax considerations and certain UK tax considerations to the purchase, ownership and disposition of Ordinary Shares of Barclays PLC or ADSs representing such Ordinary Shares (the "Shares") that are likely to be relevant for US Holders (as defined below) who own the Shares as capital assets for tax purposes. This discussion is not a comprehensive analysis of all the potential US or UK tax consequences that may be relevant to US Holders and does not discuss particular tax consequences that may be applicable to US Holders who may be subject to special tax rules, such as banks, brokers or dealers in securities or currencies, traders in securities that elect to use a mark-to-market method of accounting for securities holdings, financial institutions, tax-exempt organisations, regulated investment companies, life insurance companies, entities or arrangements that are treated as partnerships for US federal income tax purposes (or partners therein), holders that own or are treated as owning 10% or more of the stock of Barclays PLC measured either by voting power or value, holders that hold Shares as part of a straddle or a hedging or conversion transaction, holders that purchase or sell Shares as part of a wash sale, holders whose functional currency is not the US Dollar, or holders who are resident, or who are carrying on a trade, in the UK. The summary also does not address state or local taxes or any aspect of US federal taxation other than US federal income taxation (such as the estate and gift tax, any alternative minimum tax or the Medicare tax on net investment income). Investors are advised to consult their tax advisers regarding the tax implications of their particular holdings, including the consequences under applicable state and local law, and in particular whether they are eligible for the benefits of the Treaty (as defined below). This discussion is based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "IRC"), its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations, published rulings and court decisions, and on the Double Taxation Convention between the UK and the US as entered into force in March 2003 (the "Treaty"), and, in respect of UK tax, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention between the UK and the US as entered into force on 11 November 1979 (the "Estate and Gift Tax Convention"), the current UK tax law and the practice of HMRC, all of which are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis. This discussion is based in part upon the representations of the ADR Depositary and the assumption that each obligation of the Deposit Agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its terms. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) A "US Holder" is a beneficial owner of Shares that is a citizen or resident of the United States or a US domestic corporation or that otherwise is subject to US federal income taxation on a net income basis in respect of such Shares and that is fully eligible for benefits under the Treaty. In general, the holders of ADRs evidencing ADSs will be treated as owners of the underlying Ordinary Shares for the purposes of the Treaty, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention, and the IRC. Generally, exchanges of shares for ADRs and ADRs for shares will not be subject to US federal income tax or to UK capital gains tax. # Taxation of dividends Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, the gross amount of any distribution of cash or property with respect to the Shares (including any amount withheld in respect of UK taxes) that is paid out of Barclays PLC's current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for US federal income tax purposes) will be includible in a US Holder's taxable income as ordinary dividend income on the day such US Holder receives the dividend, in the case of Ordinary Shares, or the date the Depositary receives the dividends, in the case of ADRs, and will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction allowed to corporations under the IRC. Dividends paid by Barclays PLC to an individual with respect to the Shares will generally be subject to taxation at a preferential rate if the dividends are "qualified dividend income". Subject to certain exceptions for short-term positions, dividends paid on the Shares will be treated as qualified dividend income if (i) the Shares are readily tradable on an established securities market in the United States or Barclays PLC is eligible for the benefits of a comprehensive tax treaty with the United States that the US Treasury determines is satisfactory for purposes of this provision and that includes an exchange of information program, and (ii) Barclays PLC was not a PFIC (as defined below) in the year of the distribution or the immediately preceding taxable year. The ADRs are listed on the New York Stock Exchange, and will qualify as readily tradable on an established securities market so long as they are so listed. In addition, the US Treasury has determined that the Treaty meets the requirements for reduced rates of taxation, and Barclays PLC believes that it is eligible for the benefits of the Treaty. Based on its audited financial statements and relevant market and shareholder data, Barclays PLC believes that it was not treated as a PFIC for US federal income tax purposes with respect to its 2024 or 2025 taxable years. In addition, based on its audited financial statements and current expectations regarding the value and nature of its assets, the sources and nature of its income, and relevant market and shareholder data, Barclays PLC does not anticipate becoming a PFIC for its current taxable year or in the foreseeable future. Dividends paid by Barclays PLC to a US Holder with respect to the Shares will not be subject to UK withholding tax. For foreign tax credit purposes, dividends will generally be income from sources outside the US and will generally be "passive" income for purposes of computing the foreign tax credit allowable to a US Holder. The amount of the dividend distribution includable in income will be the US Dollar value of the distribution, determined at the spot Pound Sterling/US Dollar rate on the date the dividend distribution is includable in income, regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US Dollars. Generally, any gain or loss resulting from currency exchange fluctuations during the period from the date the dividend payment is includable in income to the date the payment is converted into US Dollars will be treated as ordinary income or loss and, for foreign tax credit limitation purposes, from sources within the US, and will not be eligible for the special tax rates applicable to qualified dividend income. Distributions in excess of current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for US federal income tax purposes, will be treated as a return of capital to the extent of the US Holder's basis in the Shares and thereafter as capital gain. Because Barclays PLC does not currently maintain calculations of earnings and profits for US federal income tax purposes, US Holders should expect that distributions with respect to the Shares will generally be treated as dividends. US Holders that receive a distribution of additional shares or rights to subscribe for additional shares as part of a pro rata distribution to all our shareholders generally will not be subject to US federal income tax in respect of the distribution, unless the US Holder has the right to receive cash or property, in which case the US Holder will be treated as if it received cash equal to the fair market value of the distribution. # Taxable sale or other disposition of Shares Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, upon a sale or other taxable disposition of the Shares, US Holders generally will not be subject to UK tax, but will realise gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes in an amount equal to the difference between the US Dollar value of the amount realised on the disposition and the US Holder's adjusted tax basis in the Shares, as determined in US Dollars. Such gain or loss will be capital gain or loss, and will generally be long-term capital gain or loss if the Shares have been held for more than one year. Long-term capital gain of a noncorporate US Holder is generally taxed at preferential rates. The gain or loss will generally be income or loss from sources within the United States for foreign tax credit limitation purposes. The deductibility of capital losses is subject to limitations. # Taxation of passive foreign investment companies (PFICs) Based on its audited financial statements and relevant market and shareholder data, Barclays PLC believes that it was not treated as a PFIC for US federal income tax purposes with respect to its 2024 or 2025 taxable years. In addition, based on its audited financial statements and current expectations regarding the value and nature of its assets, the sources and nature of its income, and relevant market and shareholder data, Barclays PLC does not anticipate becoming a PFIC for its current taxable year or in the foreseeable future. This conclusion is a factual determination that is made annually and thus may be subject to change. In general, Barclays PLC will be a PFIC with respect to a US Holder if, for any taxable year in which a US Holder holds the Shares, either (i) at least 75% of the gross income of Barclays PLC for the taxable year is passive income, or (ii) at least 50% of the value, generally determined on the basis of a quarterly average, of Barclays PLC's assets is attributable to assets that produce or are held for the production of passive income (including cash). With certain exceptions, a US Holder's Shares will be treated as stock of a PFIC if Barclays PLC was a PFIC at any time during such holder's holding period in its Shares. If Barclays PLC were to be treated as a PFIC with respect to a US Holder, unless such US Holder elected to be taxed annually on a mark-to-market basis with respect to its Shares, gain and certain "excess distributions" would be treated as having been realised ratably over a US --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 449 # Additional unaudited information (continued) Holder's holding period for the Shares and generally would be taxed at the highest tax rate in effect for each such year to which the gain was allocated, together with an interest charge in respect of the tax attributable to each such year. ## UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax No obligation to pay UK stamp duty will arise on the transfer on sale of an ADS, provided that any instrument of transfer is not executed in, and remains at all times outside, the UK. No UK stamp duty reserve tax is payable in respect of an agreement to transfer an ADS. For the UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax implications of dealings in Ordinary Shares, see the section 'Taxation of UK holders - (iv) Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax' above. ## UK estate and gift tax Under the Estate and Gift Tax Convention, Shares held by an individual US holder who is US domiciled for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Tax Convention and who is not for such purposes a UK national generally will not, provided any US federal estate or gift tax chargeable has been paid, be subject to UK inheritance tax on the individual's death or on a lifetime transfer of Shares, except in certain cases where the Shares are comprised in a settlement (unless the settlor was US domiciled and not a UK national at the time of the settlement), are part of the business property of a UK permanent establishment of an enterprise, or pertain to a UK fixed base of an individual used for the performance of independent personal services. In cases where the Shares are subject to both UK inheritance tax and US federal estate or gift tax, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention generally provides a credit against US federal tax liability for the amount of any inheritance tax paid in the UK. ## Foreign Financial Asset Reporting Certain US Holders that own "specified foreign financial assets" with an aggregate value in excess of US$50,000 on the last day of the taxable year or US$75,000 at any time during the taxable year are generally required to file an information statement along with their tax returns, currently on Form 8938, with respect to such assets. "Specified foreign financial assets" include any financial accounts held at a non-US financial institution, as well as securities issued by a non-US issuer that are not held in accounts maintained by financial institutions. The understatement of income attributable to "specified foreign financial assets" in excess of US$5,000 extends the statute of limitations with respect to the tax return to six years after the return was filed. US Holders who fail to report the required information could be subject to substantial penalties. US Holders are encouraged to consult with their own tax advisors regarding the possible application of these rules, including the application of the rules to their particular circumstances. ## Backup Withholding and Information Reporting Dividends paid on, and proceeds from the sale or other disposition of, the Shares to a US Holder generally may be subject to the information reporting requirements of the IRC and may be subject to backup withholding unless the US Holder provides an accurate taxpayer identification number and makes any other required certification or otherwise establishes an exemption. Backup withholding is not an additional tax. The amount of any backup withholding from a payment to a US Holder will be allowed as a refund or credit against the US Holder's US federal income tax liability, provided the required information is furnished to the US Internal Revenue Service ("IRS") in a timely manner. A holder that is not a US Holder may be required to comply with certification and identification procedures in order to establish its exemption from information reporting and backup withholding. ## FATCA Risk Factor In certain circumstances, payments on shares or ADSs may be subject to US withholding taxes on "passthru payments", starting on the date that is two years after the date on which final regulations defining this concept are adopted in the United States. Under the "Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act" (or "FATCA"), as well as intergovernmental agreements between the United States and other countries and implementing laws in respect of the foregoing, certain US-source payments (including dividends and interest) and certain payments made by, and financial accounts held with, entities that are classified as financial institutions under FATCA are subject to a special information reporting and withholding tax regime. Regulations implementing withholding in respect of "passthru payments" under FATCA have not yet been adopted or proposed. The United States has entered into an intergovernmental agreement regarding the implementation of FATCA with the UK (the "UK IGA"). Under the UK IGA, as currently drafted, it is not expected that Barclays PLC will be required to withhold tax under FATCA on payments made with respect to the shares or ADSs. However, significant aspects of when and how FATCA will apply remain unclear, and no assurance can be given that withholding under FATCA will not become relevant with respect to payments made on or with respect to the shares or ADSs in the future. Holders should consult their own tax advisers regarding the potential impact of FATCA. The Barclays Group has registered with the Internal Revenue Service ("IRS") for FATCA. The Global Intermediary Identification Number (GIIN) for Barclays PLC in the United Kingdom is E1QAZN.00000.LE.826 and it is a Reporting Model 1 FFI. The GIINs for other parts of the Barclays Group or Barclays branches outside of the UK may be obtained from your usual Barclays contact on request. The IRS list of registered Foreign Financial Institutions is publicly available on the IRS website. ## Exchange controls and other limitations affecting security holders Other than certain economic sanctions which may be in force from time to time, there are currently no UK laws, decrees or regulations which would affect the transfer of capital or remittance of dividends, interest and other payments to holders of Barclays securities who are not residents of the UK. There are also no restrictions under the Articles of Association of Barclays PLC, or (subject to the effect of any such economic sanctions) under current UK laws, which relate only to non-residents of the UK, and which limit the right of such non-residents to hold Barclays securities or, when entitled to vote, to do so. ## Documents on display It is possible to read and copy documents that have been filed by Barclays PLC with the US Securities and Exchange Commission via commercial document retrieval services, and from the website maintained by the US Securities and Exchange Commission at www.sec.gov. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 450 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Fees and charges payable by a holder of ADSs The ADR depositary collects fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing ordinary shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal or from intermediaries acting for them. The charges of the ADR depositary payable by investors are as follows: | Type of service | ADR depositary actions | Fee | | --- | --- | --- | | ADR depositary or substituting the underlying shares | Issuance of ADSs against the deposit of ordinary shares, including deposits and issuances in respect of: • Share distributions, stock splits, rights issues, mergers • Exchange of securities or other transactions or event or other distribution affecting the ADSs or deposited securities | $5.00 or less per 100 ADSs (or portion thereof) evidenced by the new ADSs delivered | | Receiving or distributing cash dividends | Distribution of cash dividends | $0.05 or less per ADS^{1} | | Selling or exercising rights | Distribution or sale of securities, the fee being in an amount equal to the fee for the execution and delivery of ADSs which would have been charged as a result of the deposit of such securities | $5.00 or less per each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof) | | Withdrawing an underlying ordinary share | Acceptance of ADSs surrendered for withdrawal of deposited ordinary shares | $5.00 or less for each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof) | | General depositary services, particularly those charged on an annual basis | Other services performed by the ADR depositary in administering the ADS program | No fee currently payable | | Expenses of the ADR depositary | Expenses incurred on behalf of Holders in connection with: • Expenses of the ADR depositary in connection with the conversion of foreign currency into US dollars (which are paid out of such foreign currency) • Taxes and other governmental charges • Cable, telex and facsimile transmission/delivery • Transfer or registration fees, if applicable, for the registration of transfers or underlying ordinary shares • Any other charge payable by ADR depositary or its agents | Expenses payable at the sole discretion of the ADR depositary by billing Holders or by deducting charges from one or more cash dividends or other cash distributions | Note: 1. The fee in relation to the distribution of cash dividends was 0.011618 per ADS in respect of dividends paid in the year ended 31 December 2025. ## Fees and payments made by the ADR depositary to Barclays The ADR depositary has agreed to provide Barclays with an amount based on any cash dividend, issuance and cancellations fees charged during each twelve-month period for expenses incurred by Barclays in connection with the ADS program. Barclays is entitled to $4,004,907 for the year ended 31 December 2025, though such amount has not yet been paid to Barclays by the ADR depositary. Under certain circumstances, including non-routine corporate actions, removal of the ADR depositary or termination of the ADS program by Barclays, Barclays may be charged by the ADR depositary certain fees (including in connection with depositary services, certain expenses paid on behalf of Barclays, an administrative fee, fees for non-routine services and corporate actions and any other reasonable fees/expenses incurred by the ADR depositary). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 451 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## NYSE Corporate Governance Statement As our main listing is on the London Stock Exchange, we follow the UK Corporate Governance Code. However, as Barclays also has American Depositary Receipts listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), we are also subject to the NYSE's Corporate Governance Rules (NYSE Rules). We are exempt from most of the NYSE Rules, which US domestic companies must follow, because we are a non-US company listed on the NYSE. However, we are required to provide annual and interim written affirmations to the NYSE of our compliance with the applicable NYSE Rules and must also disclose any significant differences between our corporate governance practices and those followed by domestic US companies listed on the NYSE. Key differences between the Code and NYSE Rules are set out here: ## Director Independence NYSE Rules require the majority of the Board to be independent. The Code requires at least half of the Board (excluding the Chairman) to be independent. The NYSE Rules contain different tests from the Code for determining whether a Director is independent. We follow the Code's recommendations as well as developing best practices among other UK public companies. The independence of our non-executive Directors is reviewed by the Board on an annual basis and it takes into account the guidance in the Code and the criteria we have established for determining independence, which are described in the Directors' Report. ## Board Committees We have a Board Nominations Committee and a Board Remuneration Committee, both of which are broadly similar in purpose and constitution to the Committees required by the NYSE Rules and whose terms of reference comply with the Code's requirements. The NYSE Rules state that both Committees must be composed entirely of independent Directors. As the Group Chairman was independent on appointment, the Code permits him to chair the Board Nominations Committee. Except for this appointment, both Committees are composed solely of non-executive Directors, whom the Board has determined to be independent. We comply with the NYSE Rules requirement that we have a Board Audit Committee comprised solely of independent non-executive Directors as defined in Rule 10A-3 of the Exchange Act. However, we follow the Code recommendations, rather than the NYSE Rules, regarding the responsibilities of the Board Audit Committee (except for applicable mandatory responsibilities under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act), although both are broadly comparable. Although the NYSE Rules state that the Board Audit Committee is to take responsibility for risk oversight, Barclays has an additional Board Committee which addresses different areas of risk management. To enhance Board governance of risk, Barclays has the Board Risk Committee. A full description of the Board Risk Committee can be found in the Directors' Report. ## Corporate Governance Guidelines The NYSE Rules require domestic US companies to adopt and disclose corporate governance guidelines. There is no equivalent recommendation in the Code but the Board Nominations Committee has developed corporate governance guidelines, 'Corporate Governance in Barclays', which have been approved and adopted by the Board. ## Code of Ethics The NYSE Rules require that domestic US companies adopt and disclose a code of business conduct and ethics for Directors, officers and employees. The Barclays Way was introduced in 2013, this is a Code of Conduct which outlines the Values and Behaviours which govern our way of working across our business globally. The Barclays Way has been adopted on a Group-wide basis by all Directors, Officers and employees. The Barclays Way is available to view on the Barclays website at https://home.barclays/content/dam/home-barclays/documents/citizenship/the-way-we-do-business/The_Barclays_Way.pdf ## Shareholder Approval of Equity-compensation Plans The NYSE listing standards require that shareholders must be given the opportunity to vote on all equity-compensation plans and material revisions to those plans. We comply with UK requirements, which are similar to the NYSE standards. However, the Board does not explicitly take into consideration the NYSE's detailed definition of what are considered 'material revisions'. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Major shareholders Major shareholders do not have different voting rights from those of other shareholders. Information provided to the Company by substantial shareholders pursuant to the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules are published via a Regulatory Information Service and is available on the Company’s website. Refer to the Directors’ report, Other statutory information section for a breakdown of major shareholders as at 31 December 2025. Comparatives for 2024 and 2023 are presented below. As at 31 December 2024, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares: | Holder | Number of Barclays shares | % of total voting rights attached to issued share capital^{1} | | --- | --- | --- | | BlackRock Inc^{2} | 944,022,209 | 5.78 | ## Notes: 1. The percentage of voting rights detailed above was calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTRs. 2. Total shown includes 6,687,206 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. Part of the holding is held as American Depositary Receipts. As at 31 December 2023, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares: | Person interested | Number of Barclays Shares | % of total voting rights attaching to issued share capital^{1} | | --- | --- | --- | | BlackRock Inc^{2} | 944,022,209 | 5.78 | ## Notes: 1. The percentage of voting rights detailed above was calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTRs. 2. Total shown includes 6,687,206 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. Part of the holding is held as American Depositary Receipts. On 25 January 2024, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC beneficial ownership of 1,303,920,163 ordinary shares of the Company as at 31 December 2023, representing 8.6% of that class of shares. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 453 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Disclosure controls and procedures The Chief Executive, C.S. Venkatakrishnan, and the Group Finance Director, Anna Cross, conducted with Group Management an evaluation of the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Group's disclosure controls and procedures of Barclays PLC as at 31 December 2025, which are defined as those controls and procedures designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in reports filed or submitted under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the US Securities and Exchange Commission's rules and forms. As of the date of the evaluation, the Chief Executive and Group Finance Director concluded that the design and operation of these disclosure controls and procedures were effective. ## Board of Directors See the Directors' report for biographies. ### Group Executive Committee | Officers of the Group | | Date of Appointment as Officer | | --- | --- | --- | | Anna Cross | Group Finance Director | 2022 | | C S Venkatakrishnan | Group Chief Executive | 2021 | | Wally Adeyemo | Group Head of Strategy Transformation | 2025 | | Craig Bright | Group Co-Chief Operating Officer and Co-CEO, Barclays Execution Services | 2025 | | Stephen Dainton | President Barclays Bank PLC and Head of Investment Bank Management | 2024 | | Anne Marie Darling | Group Co-Chief Operating Officer and Co-CEO, Barclays Execution Services | 2025 | | Cathal Deasy | Global Co-Head of Investment Banking | 2024 | | Matt Fitzwater | Group Chief Compliance Officer | 2024 | | Matt Hammerstein | Chief Executive of UK Corporate Bank and Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility | 2019 | | Adeel Khan | Head of Global Markets | 2024 | | Vim Maru | CEO, Barclays UK | 2023/2024 | | Denny Nealon | CEO, US Consumer Bank and Barclays Bank Delaware | 2024 | | Tristram Roberts | Group HR Director | 2015 | | Taalib Shaah | Group Chief Risk Officer | 2020 | | Stephen Shapiro | Group General Counsel | 2017 | | Sasha Wiggins | CEO, Private Bank and Wealth Management | 2020/2024 | | Taylor Wright | Global Co-Head of Investment Banking | 2024 | ## C.S. Venkatakrishnan, Group Chief Executive, Executive Director See the Directors' report for biography. ## Anna Cross, Group Finance Director, Executive Director See the Directors' report for biography. ## Wally Adeyemo, Group Head of Strategy Transformation Wally Adeyemo is Barclays' Group Head of Strategy and Transformation and a part of the Group Executive Committee. He previously served as the 15th U.S. Deputy Secretary of the Treasury, serving as the department's second-highest ranking official and Chief Operating Officer. In addition to driving the implementation of Treasury's strategic plan, Wally led the agency's work on financial sector issues that overlapped with national security, such as cyber security, financial crimes, sanctions, and other issues. Prior to Treasury, Wally served as Deputy National Security Adviser for International Economics, and as the US representative for the G7 and G20. He also was a senior adviser at BlackRock to chairman and CEO Larry Fink. A member of the Aspen Economic Strategy Group and the U.S. Council on Foreign Relations, Wally is currently a distinguished fellow at the Columbia University Institute of Global Politics and Center for Global Energy Policy. ## Craig Bright, Group Co-Chief Operating Officer and Co-CEO, Barclays Execution Services Craig Bright is Group Co-Chief Operating Officer and Co-CEO of Barclays Execution Services and is a member of the Group Executive Committee of Barclays, based in London. Craig co-leads and sets the strategy for the Chief Operating Office spanning technology and operations, including data, cybersecurity, real estate, procurement, and group controls. With 30 years of experience in technology and financial services, Craig joined Barclays in 2020 as Group Chief Information Officer. Prior to that he served as the Chief Information Officer for the Westpac Group, accountable for consumer, business, wealth and institutional services across Westpac, Bank of Melbourne, St George Bank, Bank of SA (South Australia) and Westpac New Zealand. Before that Craig was the Chief Technology Officer for Citi's Global Consumer Bank. During his career Craig has led large-scale technology functions, designing and implementing complex and large-scale cloud and digital strategies enabling colleagues, customers, and clients. Craig holds a Bachelor of Computing from Monash University, Australia. ## Stephen Dainton, President Barclays Bank PLC and Head of Investment Bank Management Stephen Dainton is President of Barclays Bank PLC and Head of Investment Bank Management, based in London. He is a member of the Group Executive Committee for Barclays and chairs the Investment Bank Management Team. Stephen is accountable for the governance and regulatory obligations of Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC), exercising executive management responsibilities associated with the operation of the legal entity and the Investment Bank. Stephen has over 30 years of experience in global markets across trading, sales, risk, capital --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) markets, structuring, and research. He joined Barclays in September 2017 as Global Head of Equities and Co-Head of Global Markets. Before Barclays, Stephen spent 14 years at Credit Suisse where he served as Co-Head of Global Markets for the EMEA region. He joined Credit Suisse in 2003 in the Equity Division and went on to become Head of Equities for the region, before assuming his global markets role. Previously, Stephen worked at Goldman Sachs as Head of US and International Equities, based in New York. He has also held roles in Equities at Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette in both London and New York. ## Anne Marie Darling, Group Co-Chief Operating Officer and Co-CEO, Barclays Execution Services Anne Marie Darling is Group Co-Chief Operating Officer and Co-CEO of Barclays Execution Services, and is a member of the Group Executive Committee. She co-leads Barclays' global operations and technology teams, driving innovation and growth across the organization and delivering seamless experiences for clients worldwide. Leading a global team of 60,000+, Anne Marie drives operational excellence and spearheads digital transformation, harnessing technology and AI to unlock new revenue streams and elevate client experience. Her strategic vision ensures Barclays remains at the forefront of the industry. Prior to joining Barclays, Anne Marie was a Partner at Goldman Sachs, where she held senior leadership roles over a 25-year career, including Head of Marquee Digital Distribution Strategy, Head of Global Multi-Asset Platform Sales, Head of Global FICC Execution Services and COO of Global Securities Client Strategy. She played a key role in shaping strategy and digital client solutions and served on several firmwide committees. She was named Managing Director in 2007 and Partner in 2012. Anne Marie is an influential leader in the industry, serving as an Independent Non-Executive Director on the Nasdaq Exchange Board and on the Presidential Leadership Council for both Columbia and Brown Universities. She also serves on the President's Advisory Council on Athletics for Brown University and is a member of the New York City Executive Committee for Classroom Champions reflecting her personal passion for sports. In addition, she is deeply committed to advancing diversity and inclusion as Co-Chair of the Diversity & Inclusion Advisory Council for Brown University. She graduated from Brown University with a degree in Engineering and holds an MBA from New York University's Stern School of Business. ## Cathal Deasy, Global Co-Head of Investment Banking Cathal Deasy is Global Co-Head of Investment Banking and a member of the Group Executive Committee of Barclays, based in London. He is also a member of the Investment Bank Management Team and is Co-Chair of the Investment Banking Management Team. Cathal co-leads and sets the strategy for the Investment Banking business across coverage, capital markets origination, and mergers & acquisitions. With over 20 years of experience in investment banking and mergers & acquisitions, Cathal joined Barclays in 2023. Prior to that he served as Global Co-Head of Mergers & Acquisitions and Co-Head of EMEA Investment Banking and Capital Markets at Credit Suisse. He was also a member of their IBCM Management Committee. Before that Cathal held a number of investment banking roles at Deutsche Bank. During his career, Cathal has advised companies and played key roles in transactions for, among others, Cinven, Rio Tinto, DuPont, Scout24, and Paysafe. He has deep experience advising boards and senior management teams on strategic matters such as large-scale acquisitions and mergers; portfolio reshaping including divestments and spin-offs; and public M&A including strategic shareholder engagement, defence and activism. Cathal received a Masters in Business Studies and a Bachelor of Commerce from University of Cork, Ireland.. ## Matt Fitzwater, Group Chief Compliance Officer Matt is the Group Chief Compliance Officer at Barclays and part of the Group Executive Committee, based in London. He's also the Group sponsor for Wellbeing. Matt joined Barclays in 2014 and has taken on several roles in the Legal function, including Interim Co Group General Counsel. Most recently, he was the Group Centre General Counsel, handling litigation, financial crime, employment, competition, and regulatory matters globally across all business lines. He also served as the Global Head of Litigation, Investigation, and Enforcement, and was the Interim Group Head of Compliance from late 2022 through June 2023. Before Barclays, Matt was Special Counsel at Sullivan & Cromwell in New York, representing large financial institutions in criminal and regulatory matters. Originally from Greenville, Ohio, Matt graduated from The Ohio State University College of Law in 2001 and Miami University (Ohio) in 1998 with a double major in History and Political Science, summa cum laude and Phi Beta Kappa. ## Matt Hammerstein, Chief Executive of UK Corporate Bank and Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility Matt Hammerstein is Chief Executive of the UK Corporate Bank and is a member of the Group Executive Committee. He is also Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility. He leads a team that supports the delivery of the bank's strategy and is focused on helping Barclays act responsibly for the common good and the long term. He is responsible for the Public Policy agenda, working closely with governments, regulators, the media and key policymakers to deliver for Barclays customers, clients and stakeholders. Before this role he was the CEO for Barclays Bank UK, covering Retail Banking, Investments and Wealth UK, Business Banking and Barclaycard UK. Prior to that, Matt was Head of Retail Lending covering both the secured and unsecured lending businesses. Matt joined Barclays in 2004 as Director of Group Strategy, later progressing to become the Group Chief of Staff; a key strategic role in which he provided vital support to the Group CEO during the financial crisis. Matt went on to manage Barclays Group Corporate Strategy and Corporate Relations, Barclays Customer and Client Experience in Retail and Business Banking and Barclays UK Retail Products and Segments. Before Joining Barclays, Matt was a Senior Management Consultant at Marakon Associates where he worked for 12 years in the financial services, consumer products and energy sectors within the Americas and Europe. Matt graduated with a degree in Mechanical Engineering from Yale University, and an MBA from the University of Chicago. Matt is a member of the Charities Aid Foundation America Board. Matt is also Chair of the FCA Practitioner Panel and active ambassador in Barclays for inclusion, wellbeing and anything that makes the workplace more fun. ## Adeel Khan, Head of Global Markets Adeel Khan is Head of Global Markets and a member of the Group Executive Committee for Barclays and the Investment Bank Management Team. Based in London, Adeel leads our Credit, Macro, Securitised Products and Equities businesses. Adeel has held a number of leadership roles since joining Barclays in 2008. Prior to assuming his current position in 2024, he served as Co-Head of Global Markets since 2021, and Global Head of Credit Products since 2014. Prior to Barclays, Adeel worked at BlueBay Asset Management where he was also a member of the Investment Committee. Adeel graduated from the London School of Economics with a master's degree in Finance & Economics and a bachelor's degree in Econometrics. Adeel serves on the Board of Directors of EMpowerUK. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 455 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Vim Maru, CEO Barclays UK Vim Maru is Chief Executive Officer of Barclays UK. Vim is also a member of the Group Executive Committee. Vim joined Barclays in February 2023 as Global Head of Consumer Banking and Payments, leading the business portfolio which included Consumer Cards and Payments (US Consumer Bank, Barclaycard Payments, Global Private Bank and Consumer Bank Europe) and UK Corporate Banking and Global Transaction Banking. Vim is also a Non-Executive Director of Barclays US LLC. Prior to Barclays, Vim spent 11 years at Lloyds Banking Group, latterly as the Group Director for Retail and 12 years at Santander UK in a range of roles, and is a Chartered Accountant, ## Denny Nealon, CEO US Consumer Bank and Barclays Bank Delaware Denny Nealon is the Chief Executive Officer for Barclays US Consumer Bank (USCB) and Barclays Bank Delaware (BBDE) where he is responsible for the overall leadership and direction of Barclays' consumer business in the United States, which includes award-winning credit card programs, personal loans and retail deposits. He joined Barclays Group Executive Committee in February 2024 and is part of Barclays America's management team and serves as a Director on both the BBDE and IHC Boards. Denny has over 25 years of experience in the U.S. credit card industry and first joined Barclays in 2004. Most recently, Denny served as President of the USCB with responsibility for the day-to-day management of the consumer business. Prior to this, he was Head of the US Partnership business, where he oversaw strategic relationships with leading brands across the airline, travel and entertainment, financial institution, and retail segments. Prior to joining Barclays, Denny worked at Bank One and Chase Card Services, where he held leadership positions in finance, business development and partnership management. Denny graduated from the U.S. Naval Academy and served seven years as a Logistics and Supply Corps officer before joining the corporate sector. He also holds an MBA from the University of Maryland, with concentrations in Finance and International Business. ## Tristram Roberts, Group HR Director Tristram is the Group Human Resources Director and a member of the Group Executive Committee. Tristram joined Barclays in July 2013 as HR Director for the Investment Bank. His remit was expanded in May 2014 to include HR responsibilities for Barclays Non-Core, and he became the Group HR Director in December 2015. Prior to Barclays, Tristram was Head of Human Resources for Global Functions and Operations & Technology at HSBC, as well as Group Head of Performance and Reward. Previously, he was Group Reward and Policy Director for Vodafone Group plc. Tristram began his career in consulting. He became a partner with Arthur Andersen in 2001 and was subsequently a partner with both Deloitte and KPMG. ## Taalib Shaah, Group Chief Risk Officer Taalib Shaah is Group Chief Risk Officer for Barclays, based in London. He is responsible for helping to define, set and manage the risk profile of the bank and leads the risk management organisation across the group. He is a member of the Group Executive Committee. Taalib joined Barclays in late 2014 as Chief Risk Officer for the Investment Bank and in 2017 assumed the role of Chief Risk Officer for Barclays International (BBPLC), responsible for the Corporate and Investment Bank, the Private Bank and the Cards & Payments business. He assumed his current role in October 2020. Prior to Barclays, Taalib spent four years at Citigroup where he was most recently Chief Risk Officer for Market Risk, Real Estate Credit, Treasury, Private Equity and Head of Model Validation. Previously, Taalib spent 17 years at Credit Suisse, working in various areas, including risk and the front office. He began his career at Ernst and Young. Taalib holds an MA in Engineering Science and Economics from Oxford University and is a Chartered Accountant. ## Stephen Shapiro, Group General Counsel Stephen is an experienced lawyer and company secretary with a deep understanding of legal, corporate governance and regulatory matters. Holding the role of Group General Counsel, he oversees Barclays' global Legal function. Stephen is also a member of the Group Executive Committee (ExCo). Stephen previously served as the Group Company Secretary and Deputy General Counsel of SABMiller plc. Prior to this, he practised law as a partner in a law firm in South Africa, and subsequently in corporate law and M&A at Hogan Lovells in the UK. He was appointed as Group Company Secretary of Barclays in November 2017 and was subsequently appointed Group General Counsel in August 2020. Stephen is an active industry contributor and has served as a member of the Executive Committee of the GC100, the Association of General Counsel and Company Secretaries working in FTSE100 companies, and as its Vice-Chair. Stephen also previously served as Chairman of the ICC UK's Committee on Anti-Corruption. ## Sasha Wiggins, CEO, Private Bank and Wealth Management Sasha Wiggins is Chief Executive of Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management, and she is a member of the Group Executive Committee. Sasha joined Barclays in 2002, progressing through a number of roles in the Private Bank. In 2015 she was appointed CEO of Barclays Bank Ireland and subsequently became the Group Chief of Staff in 2018. Sasha joined the Group Executive Committee as the Group Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility, accountable for the Bank's overall sustainability agenda and Barclays engagement with governments, regulators, the media and key policymakers. She assumed her current role in February 2024. Sasha is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Securities & Investment. She is also Vice Chair of the Royal Marsden Cancer Charity's Corporate Partnerships Board and trustee on the Board of Grief Encounter, a national charity supporting bereaved children and young people. ## Taylor Wright, Global Co-Head of Investment Banking Taylor Wright is Global Co-Head of Investment Banking and a member of the Group Executive Committee at Barclays, based in New York. He is also a member of the Investment Bank Management Team and is Co-Chair of the Investment Banking Management Team. Appointed to his current role in 2023, Taylor co-leads and sets the strategy for the Investment Banking business across coverage, capital markets and mergers & acquisitions. He was previously the Global Co-Head of Capital Markets, and prior to that, Co-Head of Equity Capital Markets for the Americas. Taylor has over 30 years of experience in Investment Banking and Capital Markets. Prior to joining Barclays, he spent 25 years at Morgan Stanley in New York and Hong Kong, principally in Equity Capital Markets. Over his career, Taylor has originated and led more than US$250 billion of equity and equity-linked offerings across multiple industries and geographies. Taylor has played key roles in transactions for, among others, Arm Holdings, AIG, AIB, AXA/Equitable, RBS/Citizens Financial, GE, Korea Telecom, Moelis & Company, Ryan Specialty, UMC and Tradeweb, has led TARP refinancings for multiple US regional banks, and was an advisor to the US Department of Treasury during the financial crisis. Taylor received an MBA from the University of Virginia's Darden Graduate School of Business Administration and received a BA degree in English from Cornell University. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 456 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Service contracts and letters of appointment Each Executive Director has a service contract, whereas the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors each have a letter of appointment. Copies of the service contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company's registered office. The effective dates of the current Directors' appointments disclosed in their service contracts or letters of appointment are shown in the table below. As stated in the letters of appointment, the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors are appointed for an initial term of three years and are subject to annual re-election by shareholders. On expiry of the initial term and subject to the needs of the Board, Non-Executive Directors may be invited to serve a further three years. Non-Executive Directors appointed beyond six years will be at the discretion of the Board Nominations Committee. The effective dates of appointment of those Directors that stepped down from the Board in 2025 are also shown below. | | Effective date of appointment | | --- | --- | | Chairman | | | Nigel Higgins | 1 March 2019 (as a Non-Executive Director) 2 May 2019 (as Chairman) | | Executive Directors | | | C.S. Venkatakrishnan | 1 November 2021 | | Anna Cross | 23 April 2022 | | Non-Executive Directors | | | Robert Berry | 8 February 2022 | | Dawn Fitzpatrick | 25 September 2019 | | Mary Francis | 1 October 2016 | | Brian Gilvary | 1 February 2020 | | Sir John Kingman | 1 June 2023 | | Diony Lebot | 17 March 2025 | | Mary Mack | 1 June 2025 | | Marc Moses | 23 January 2023 | | Brian Shea | 19 July 2024 | | Julia Wilson | 1 April 2021 | | Former Non-Executive Directors | | | Tim Breedon^{1} | 1 November 2012 | | Diane Schueneman^{2} | 25 June 2015 | ## Notes 1. Tim Breedon stepped down from the Board with effect from 30 April 2025. 2. Diane Schueneman stepped down from the Board with effect from 31 January 2025. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 457 # Additional unaudited information (continued) # Executive Directors' policy on payment for loss of office (including following a takeover) The Committee's approach to payments in the event of termination is to take account of the individual circumstances including the reason for termination, individual performance, contractual obligations and the terms of the deferred bonus plans and LTIPs in which the Executive Director participates. | Standard provision | Commentary | | --- | --- | | Notice period | Executive Directors may be required to work during their notice period, or may be placed on garden leave, or may not be required to work the full notice period and instead may be provided with pay in lieu of notice. For C.S. Venkatakrishnan, the contractual notice period is 12 months’ notice from the Company and six months’ notice from the Executive Director, as his existing notice period prior to his appointment to the Board was honoured when he was promoted to the Board. For Anna Cross, the contractual notice period is six months’ notice from the Company and six months’ notice from the Executive Director (she did not have any pre-existing contractual commitment to a longer period). | | Pay during notice period or payment in lieu of notice per service contracts | Salary and pension allowance will continue to be paid monthly, and other contractual benefits provided, through the notice period. Where Barclays elects to terminate employment with immediate effect by making a payment in lieu of notice, the Executive Director will receive salary as a lump sum or in instalments. Any payments may be subject to mitigation as relevant. In the event of termination for gross misconduct neither notice nor payment in lieu of notice is given. | | Eligibility for annual bonus and LTIP awards | There is no automatic entitlement to be granted a bonus or LTIP award for the year of termination, but eligibility for either or both may be considered at the Committee’s discretion, pro-rated for service, and subject to performance measures being met. No annual bonus or LTIP award would be granted in the case of gross misconduct or resignation. | | Treatment of unvested deferred bonus and LTIP awards | The treatment of unvested deferred bonus or LTIP awards will be in accordance with the relevant plan rules. Unvested deferred bonus and LTIP awards normally lapse if the Executive Director leaves by reason of resignation prior to the fifth anniversary of the date of grant, is terminated for gross misconduct or cause, or is otherwise not an ‘eligible leaver’. Eligible leaver is defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the Executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group, or otherwise at the discretion of the Committee. The Committee will normally apply its discretion to apply eligible leaver status in the event of resignation after the fifth anniversary of grant, or in the case of deferred bonuses if it is the employer that terminates employment (other than in circumstances that amount to gross misconduct or dismissal for cause). Where eligible leaver treatment applies, deferred bonus and LTIP awards will normally continue to vest, on the scheduled vesting dates and subject to the rules of the relevant plan, unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. On death, deferred bonus and LTIP awards are normally accelerated and deferred bonus awards are released in full. In an ‘eligible leaver’ situation and in the case of death, LTIP awards are pro-rated for time (over the whole performance period, including the preliminary performance period prior to grant) and with the proportion that vests remaining subject to performance against the performance conditions, subject to the Committee’s discretion to determine otherwise, in accordance with the plan rules, as amended from time to time. Any post-vesting holding period to which vested or unvested shares may be subject, under the terms of their award, will normally continue to apply following cessation of employment. Unvested awards that continue beyond termination remain subject to malus provisions, which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses and LTIP awards (including to nil), and after vesting awards remain subject to clawback provisions (as described in the main policy). In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event, the Committee has absolute discretion to determine whether all outstanding awards would vest early (subject to applicable regulation and to achievement, or the Committee’s estimate of achievement, of any performance conditions for the LTIP) or whether they should continue in the same or revised form following the change of control. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange existing awards for awards over shares in an acquiring company with the agreement of that company. In the event of an internal reorganisation, the Committee may determine that outstanding awards will be exchanged for equivalent awards in another company. | | Repatriation | Except in the case of gross misconduct or resignation, where an Executive Director has been relocated at the commencement of or during their employment, the Company may pay for the Executive Director’s repatriation costs in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including temporary accommodation, payment of removal costs and relocation flights for the Executive Director, spouse and children. The Company will pay the Executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay tax on his or her other income relating to the termination of employment. | | Other | Except in the case of gross misconduct or resignation, the Company may pay for the Executive Director’s legal fees and tax advice relating to the termination of employment and other reasonable benefits and provide outplacement services, plus any tax liabilities that may arise as a result. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 458 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Remuneration policy – Non-Executive Directors | Element and purpose | Operation | Maximum value | | --- | --- | --- | | Fees Reflect individual responsibilities and membership of Board Committees and are set to attract Non-Executive Directors who have relevant skills and experience to oversee the implementation of our strategy Fees are set at a level which reflects the role, responsibilities and time commitment which are expected from the Chair and Non-Executive Directors | The Chair is paid an all-inclusive fee for all Board responsibilities. The Chair has a time commitment equivalent of up to 80% of a full-time role. The other Non-Executive Directors receive a basic Board fee, with additional fees payable where individuals take on additional roles or responsibilities, including, but not limited to, serving as a member or Chair of a Committee of the Board or as a Senior Independent Director. Fees are periodically reviewed by the Board. Non-Executive Directors may also receive fees where they serve as directors of subsidiary companies of Barclays PLC. In the case of certain subsidiary appointments, such additional remuneration is approved by the Barclays PLC Board Remuneration Committee. No variable pay is provided, enabling the Chair and Non-Executive Directors to maintain appropriate independence, focus on long-term decision-making and constructively review and challenge the performance of the Executive Directors. | Fees are reviewed against those for Non-Executive Directors in banks and other companies of similar size and complexity. Other than in exceptional circumstances, fees will not increase by more than 20% above the current fee levels during this policy period. Additional fees may be paid for new Committees of the Board and/or where a Non-Executive Director takes on additional responsibilities and/or performs an additional role, provided these are not greater than fees payable for the existing roles on the Committees of the Board as detailed in the Annual report on Directors' remuneration. Any increases to such additional fees over the period of the policy will be made in accordance with the principles set out above for current fees. | | Benefits To provide a competitive and cost-effective benefits package appropriate to the role and location | The Chair is provided with private medical cover subject to the terms of the Barclays’ scheme rules from time to time, and is provided with the use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes (including settlement of any tax liabilities that may arise from this benefit). Benefits which are minor in nature and in any event do not exceed a cost of £500 may be provided to Non-Executive Directors. Non-Executive Directors are not eligible to join Barclays’ pension plans. | | | Expenses | The Chair and Non-Executive Directors are reimbursed for any reasonable and appropriate expenses incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by Barclays. | | | Bonus and share plans | The Chair may be invited to participate in Sharesave, an HMRC employee tax advantaged share scheme, due to the level of their time commitment to the role. The Chair is not eligible to participate in any other Barclays’ cash, share or long-term incentive plans. All other Non-Executive Directors are not eligible to participate in Barclays’ cash, share or long-term incentive plans. | | | Shareholding requirements | An element of the basic fee before deduction of tax and other statutory deductions, equal to £100,000 for the Chair and £30,000 for each Non-Executive Director, is used to purchase Barclays’ shares which are retained on the Non-Executive Director’s behalf until they retire from the Board. | | | Notice and termination provisions | Instead of service contracts, the Chair and the Non-Executive Directors each have a letter of appointment that reflect their responsibilities and time commitments. Non-Executive Directors are entitled to notice under their letters of appointment but, other than in respect of the Chair, no compensation is due in the event of termination, other than standard payments for the period served up to the termination date. Each Director’s appointment is for an initial three-year term, renewable at Barclays’ discretion for a further term of three years thereafter and subject to annual re-election by shareholders. Non-Executive Directors appointed beyond six years will be at the discretion of the Board Nominations Committee. **Notice period** Chair: Six months from the Company, six months from the Chair. **Termination payment policy** The Chair’s appointment may be terminated by Barclays on six months’ notice or immediately in which case six months’ fees are payable in instalments at the times they would have been received had the appointment continued, but subject to mitigation if they were to obtain alternative employment. No continuing payments of fees (or benefits) are due if a Non-Executive Director is not re-elected by shareholders at the Barclays PLC AGM. | | In accordance with the policy table above, any new Chair would be paid an all-inclusive fee only and any new Non-Executive Director would be paid a basic fee for their appointment as a Non-Executive Director, plus fees for their participation on and/or chairing of any Board committees and for taking on additional responsibilities and/or performing an additional role, time apportioned in the first year as necessary. No sign-on payments are offered to Non-Executive Directors --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 459 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Insider trading policies The Barclays Group has adopted insider trading policies and procedures governing the purchase, sale, and other dealings in securities issued by members of the Barclays Group by directors, senior management and certain employees that are designed to promote compliance with applicable insider trading laws, rules and regulations. These policies and procedures are included in the Barclays Group Securities Dealing Code, which is filed as Exhibit 11.2 to this annual report on Form 20-F. The Barclays Group monitors inside information as defined under the Market Abuse Regulation 2014/596 (as it forms part of domestic law by virtue of the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018, as amended) ("MAR") as part of its compliance with MAR and as part of its disclosure controls and procedures, and imposes restrictions on trading in its own securities for its own account when it has undisclosed inside information. The Barclays Group also generally refrains from trading in its own securities for its own account during its regular closed periods. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 460 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Repurchase of Shares by Barclays and Affiliated Purchasers | Month | Period | Total Shares Purchased | Average Price Paid Per Share (pence) | Total Number of Shares Purchased as Part of Publicly Announced Plans or Programs | Maximum Number (or Approximate GBP Value) of Shares that May Yet be Purchased Under the Plans or Programs | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Jan-25 | Month 1 | | | | | | Feb-25 | Month 2 | 41,243,285 | 302.32p | 41,243,285 | £875,313,846.96 | | Mar-25 | Month 3 | 71,123,102 | 297.61p | 112,366,387 | £663,642,726.30 | | Apr-25 | Month 4 | 53,810,458 | 271.61p | 166,176,845 | £517,489,815.80 | | May-25 | Month 5 | 52,890,588 | 314.78p | 219,067,433 | £351,001,571.63 | | Jun-25 | Month 6 | 55,243,599 | 326.64p | 274,311,032 | £170,554,506.75 | | Jul-25 | Month 7 | 54,726,113 | 343.08p | 329,037,145 | £982,800,000.38 | | Aug-25 | Month 8 | 69,069,991 | 368.29p | 398,107,136 | £728,420,209.05 | | Sep-25 | Month 9 | 67,205,614 | 375.83p | 465,312,750 | £475,841,530.14 | | Oct-25 | Month 10 | 68,589,545 | 381.11p | 533,902,295 | £714,439,533.45 | | Nov-25 | Month 11 | 57,279,037 | 409.29p | 591,181,332 | £480,000,009.31 | | Dec-25 | Month 12 | 46,412,512 | 449.45p | 637,593,844 | £271,400,260.97 | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 461 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Number of employees split by grade | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Senior | 8 % | 8 % | 8 % | | Middle | 43 % | 42 % | 42 % | | Junior | 49 % | 50 % | 50 % | Senior - Managing Director and Director Middle - Assistant Vice President and Vice President Junior - Business Analyst grades ## Number of employees split by region (full time equivalent) | | 2025 | | 2024 | | 2023 | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | UK | 44,700 | 48 % | 45,200 | 49 % | 45,000 | 49 % | | APAC | 33,600 | 36 % | 32,300 | 35 % | 31,100 | 34 % | | Americas | 11,100 | 12 % | 11,300 | 12 % | 12,200 | 13 % | | CEME | 3,600 | 4 % | 4,100 | 4 % | 4,100 | 4 % | | Barclays Group | 93,000 | 100 % | 92,900 | 100 % | 92,400 | 100 % | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 462 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Section 13(r) to the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Iran sanctions and related disclosure) Section 13(r) of the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934 as amended (the "Exchange Act") requires each SEC reporting issuer to disclose in its annual and, if applicable, quarterly reports whether it or any of its affiliates have knowingly engaged in certain activities, transactions or dealings relating to Iran or with the Government of Iran or certain designated natural persons or entities involved in terrorism or the proliferation of weapons of mass destruction during the period covered by the report. The requirement includes disclosure of activities not prohibited by U.S. or other law, even if conducted outside the U.S. by non-U.S. companies or affiliates in compliance with local law. Pursuant to Section 13(r) of the Exchange Act, we note the following in relation to activity that occurred in 2025, the reporting period covered by this annual report. For completeness, we also include activity that we became aware of in 2025, even if such activity occurred prior to the reporting period. Except as noted below, Barclays intends to continue the activities described. Barclays does not allocate profits at the level of these activities, which in any event would not be significant, and we therefore report only gross revenue where measurable. Barclays attributed revenue of approximately GBP 7,515.00 in relation to the activities disclosed below. ## Legacy Guarantees Between 1992 and 2006, Barclays entered into several guarantees for the benefit of Iranian banks in connection with the supply of goods and services by Barclays customers to Iranian buyers (the "Iranian guarantees"). These were counter guarantees issued to Iranian banks to support guarantees issued by these banks to the Iranian buyers. The Iranian banks and a number of the Iranian buyers were either subsequently designated as Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons ("SDNs") by the U.S. Department of the Treasury's Office of Foreign Assets Control ("OFAC") or are owned by the Government of Iran. In addition, between 1993 and 2005, Barclays entered into similar guarantees for the benefit of a Syrian bank that was subsequently designated pursuant to the Weapons of Mass Destruction Proliferators Sanctions Regulations ("WMDPSR") in August 2011 (the "WMDPSR guarantees"). These guarantees were issued either on: (i) an "extend or pay" basis, which means that, although the guarantee is of limited duration on its face, until there is full performance under the contract to provide goods and services, the terms of the guarantee require Barclays to maintain the guarantee or pay the beneficiary bank the full amount of the guarantee; or (ii) the basis that Barclays' obligations can be discharged only with the consent of the beneficiary counterparty. Barclays is not able to exit its obligations under the above guarantees unilaterally, and thus it maintains a limited legacy portfolio of these guarantees, which complied with applicable laws and regulations at the time they were entered into. Barclays intends to terminate the guarantees where an agreement can be reached with the counterparty, in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to the Iranian guarantees and revenue of approximately GBP 7,405 in relation to the WMDPSR guarantees prior to the lifting of sanctions against the Syrian bank. ## Lease Payments Barclays is party to a long-term lease, entered in 1979, with the National Iranian Oil Company ("NIOC"), pursuant to which Barclays rents part of NIOC House in London. The lease is for 60 years, contains no early termination clause, and has 14 years remaining. Barclays makes lease payments in GBP to the bank account of a solicitor that represents an entity owned by the Government of Iran. The payments are made in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity. ## Local Clearing Systems Banks based in the United Arab Emirates ("UAE"), including certain Iranian banks designated pursuant to the Global Terrorism Sanctions Regulations ("GTSR") and/or Government of Iran-owned banks, participate in the various banking payment and settlement systems used in the UAE (the "UAE Clearing Systems"). Barclays, by virtue of its banking activities in the UAE, participates in the UAE Clearing Systems, in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. To mitigate the risk of engaging in transactions in which participant Iranian SDN and/or Government of Iran-owned banks may be involved, Barclays has implemented restrictions relating to its involvement in the UAE Clearing Systems. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity. ## Other Activity In 2025, Barclays processed payments to the embassy of the Government of Iran in the UK in relation to persons paying fees for renewing or replacing passports, visa applications, and other administrative matters. The payments were processed in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity. Barclays holds accounts for several UK-resident individuals employed by a UK-based SDN entity that is ultimately owned by the Government of Iran. Payments are received in GBP from UK-based payment services companies and are credited to the customers' accounts with Barclays. The payments are processed in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. No payments are received directly from any entity owned by the Government of Iran or any SDN. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity. In 2025, on behalf of certain customers in the UK, Barclays processed indirect payments from various UK-based offices of Iranian SDNs, Government of Iran-owned entities, and SDNs designated pursuant to the GTSR (the "entities"). The payments were for general business expenses, including rent, salary payments, tax payments, office maintenance, utility payments, and business travel expenses. A UK accounting firm remitted the payments on behalf of the entities, and all the payments were processed in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed revenue of approximately GBP 25 in 2025 in relation to this activity. Barclays maintains a customer relationship with a UK-incorporated charity that works in the areas of blood cancer and stem cell transplantation. In 2025, Barclays processed one payment, on behalf of our customer, where the ultimate beneficiary of the payment was a medical organization affiliated with the Government of Iran. The payment was for the procurement of a blood sample from an individual in --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) Iran who is a potential donor. The payment was processed in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed revenue of approximately GBP 10 in 2025 in relation to this activity. In 2025, the UK Government expanded their "Legal Services" General Licence to allow the payment of fees for legal services provided to entities designated under the Iran (Sanctions) (Nuclear) (EU Exit) Regulations, and the Iran (Sanctions) (EU Exit) Regulations 2023. Several Barclays customers relied upon this General Licence for the receipt of fees due in relation to legal services given to Government of Iran-owned entities. All related payments being processed under this General Licence were done in accordance with applicable laws and regulations, including with the General Licence itself. Barclays attributed GBP 45 revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity. Barclays acted as a correspondent bank for a payment in 2025, which was remitted from a private Indian Commercial entity to a UK-based patent and trademark agent. The payment was settling an invoice for services and fees provided by the UK agent to the Indian Company in connection with applying for a trademark with the Iranian trademark office. The payment did not involve a customer of Barclays, was not to or from any individual or entity owned by the Government of Iran or any SDN, and was processed in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed GBP 15 of revenue in 2025 in relation to this payment. Barclays maintains a customer relationship with His Majesty's Revenue & Customs, a UK Government agency, which receives funds from financial institutions, some of which are entities designated pursuant to the GTSR, and/or ultimately owned by the Government of Iran, in relation to the settlement of tax liabilities with the UK Government. The payments were processed in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed revenue of approximately GBP 15 in 2025 in relation to this activity. # Frozen Accounts Barclays, and several Barclays customers, continue to hold funds belonging to various SDNs and Government of Iran-owned entities in internal blocked and sundry accounts, some of which are interest bearing. These accounts are held in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 464 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Summary of Barclays Group share and cash plans and long-term incentive plans Barclays operates a number of share, cash and long-term incentive plans. The principal plans used for awards made in or, in respect of, the 2025 performance year are shown in the table below. Awards are granted by the Barclays PLC Board Remuneration Committee or a delegated sub-committee (the "Committee"), and are subject to the applicable plan rules (as amended from time to time). Share awards are granted over ordinary shares in Barclays PLC ("Shares"). Barclays has a number of employee benefit trusts which operate in conjunction with these plans. In some cases the trustee purchases Shares in the market to satisfy awards; in others, new issue or treasury Shares may be used to satisfy awards where the appropriate shareholder approval has been obtained. Summary of principal share and cash plans and long-term incentive plans | Name of plan | Eligible employees | Executive Directors eligible | Delivery | Design details | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Share Value Plan (SVP) | All employees (including executive Directors of Barclays PLC) | Yes | Deferred Share awards, typically released in instalments over a three, four, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions | • The SVP typically used for mandatory deferral of a proportion of bonus into Shares where bonus is above a threshold (set annually by the Committee). The SVP is also used to deliver the upfront portion of a Material Risk Taker’s (“MRT”) variable remuneration that must be delivered in Shares in line with regulatory requirements. • This plan typically works in tandem with the CVP (below). • SVP awards typically vest over three, four, five or seven years dependent on future service. • Vesting is subject to malus terms, suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the SVP. • On cessation of employment, eligible leavers (as set out in the rules of the SVP) normally remain eligible for release (on the scheduled release dates) subject to the Committee and/or trustee discretion. For other leavers, including where the employee resigns before the third anniversary of grant, awards will normally lapse. • On change of control, awards may vest at the Committee’s and/or trustee’s discretion. • For SVP awards made to Material Risk Takers (“MRTs”), a holding period of either 6 or 12 months will apply to Shares (after tax) on release. | | Deferred Share Value Plan (SVP) | All employees (excluding executive Directors of Barclays PLC) | No | Deferred Share awards, typically released in instalments over a three, four, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions | • The DSVP is in all material respects the same as the SVP described above. The principle difference is that the DSVP has not been approved by Barclays Shareholders and therefore the Executive Directors of Barclays PLC are not eligible to participate and the plan operates over market purchase Shares only. | | Cash Value Plan (CVP) | All employees (including executive Directors of Barclays PLC) | Yes | Deferred cash award typically released in instalments over a three, four, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions | • The CVP is typically used for mandatory deferral of a proportion of bonus where bonus is above a threshold (set annually by the Committee). • This plan typically works in tandem with the SVP. • CVP awards vest over three, four, five or seven years dependent on future service. • Vesting is subject to malus terms, suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the CVP. • Change of control and leaver provisions are as for SVP. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 465 # Additional unaudited information (continued) | Barclays Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) | Selected employees (including executive Directors of Barclays PLC) | Yes | Awards over Shares subject to risk-adjusted performance conditions and malus provisions | • Awarded on a discretionary basis with participation reviewed by the Committee. • Awards only vest if the forward-looking performance conditions are satisfied over a three year period. • LTIP awards vest over seven years dependent on future service. • Vesting is subject to malus terms, suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the LTIP. • Any Shares released under the LTIP award (after payment of tax) will be subject to an additional holding period of no less than the minimum regulatory requirements (currently 12 months). • On cessation of employment, eligible leavers (as set out in the rules of the LTIP) normally remain eligible for release (on the scheduled release dates) pro-rated for time and performance. For other leavers, awards will normally lapse. • On change of control, awards may vest at the Committee’s discretion. | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Sharesave | All employees in the UK and Ireland (including executive Directors of Barclays PLC) | Yes | Options over Shares at a discount of 20%, with Shares delivered or cash value of savings returned after three or five years | • HMRC tax advantaged plan in the UK and approved by the Revenue Commissioners in Ireland. • Opportunity to purchase Shares at a discount price (currently a 20% discount) set on award date with savings made over three or five year term. • Maximum individual savings of £300 per month or the Euro equivalent in Ireland. • On cessation of employment, eligible leavers may exercise options and acquire Shares to the extent of their savings for six months. • On change of control, participants may exercise options and acquire Shares to the extent of their savings for six months. | | Sharepurchase | All employees in the UK (including executive Directors of Barclays PLC) | Yes | Shares purchased from gross salary deductions and Dividend/Matching Shares are held in trust for three to five years | • HMRC tax advantaged plan in the UK. • Participants may purchase up to £1,800 of Shares each tax year (“Partnership Shares”). • Barclays matches the first £600 of Partnership Shares on a one for one basis for each tax year (“Matching Shares”). • Dividends received are awarded as Dividend Shares. • Partnership Shares may be withdrawn at any time (though if removed prior to three years from award, the corresponding Matching Shares are forfeited). • Depending on reason for and timing of leaving, Matching Shares may be forfeited. • On change of control, participants are able to instruct the Sharepurchase trustee how to act or vote on their behalf in relation to their Shares. | | Global Sharepurchase | Employees in certain jurisdictions other than the UK ((including executive Directors of Barclays PLC) | Yes | Shares purchased from net salary deductions and Dividend/Matching Shares are held in trust for three to five years | • Global Sharepurchase is an extension of the Sharepurchase plan (above). • Operates in substantially the same way as Sharepurchase but without the tax advantages. | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 466 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Average deposits at amortised cost, average interest rate paid - split by type and UK vs Non-UK The following tables present average deposits at amortised cost and their associated interest expense by deposit type split into UK & Non-UK. For the year ended 31 December 2025 the region has been updated to reflect the location of the office in which the deposits are recorded. For the year ended 31 December 2024 and 2023 the region is based on the customer location. | For the year ended 31 December 2025 | Average deposits at amortised cost £m | Interest expense £m | Average interest rate % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | UK | | | | | Non-interest bearing current and demand accounts | 106,757 | — | — | | Interest bearing current and demand accounts | 72,469 | 1,305 | 1.8 | | Savings and time deposits^{1} | 264,776 | 7,431 | 2.8 | | Total UK | 444,002 | 8,736 | 2.0 | | Non-UK | | | | | Non-interest bearing current and demand accounts | 9,942 | — | — | | Interest bearing current and demand accounts | 32,106 | 860 | 2.7 | | Savings and time deposits^{1} | 88,103 | 2,688 | 3.1 | | Total Non-UK | 130,151 | 3,548 | 2.7 | | Total deposits at amortised cost | 574,153 | 12,284 | 2.1 | | For the year ended 31 December 2024 | Average deposits at amortised cost £m | Interest expense £m | Average interest rate % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | UK | | | | | Non-interest bearing current and demand accounts | 110,562 | — | — | | Interest bearing current and demand accounts | 65,110 | 1,250 | 1.9 | | Savings and time deposits^{1} | 218,228 | 6,586 | 3.0 | | Total UK | 393,900 | 7,836 | 2.0 | | Non-UK | | | | | Non-interest bearing current and demand accounts | 9,881 | — | — | | Interest bearing current and demand accounts | 32,876 | 914 | 2.8 | | Savings and time deposits^{1,2} | 121,573 | 5,342 | 4.4 | | Total Non-UK | 164,330 | 6,256 | 3.8 | | Total Deposits at amortised cost | 558,230 | 14,092 | 2.5 | | For the year ended 31 December 2023 | Average deposits at amortised cost £m | Interest expense £m | Average interest rate % | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | UK | | | | | Non-interest bearing current and demand accounts | 124,145 | — | — | | Interest bearing current and demand accounts | 52,005 | 734 | 1.4 | | Savings and time deposits^{1} | 224,019 | 5,358 | 2.4 | | Total UK | 400,169 | 6,092 | 1.5 | | Non-UK | | | | | Non-interest bearing current and demand accounts | 16,454 | — | — | | Interest bearing current and demand accounts | 14,938 | 335 | 2.2 | | Savings and time deposits^{1,2} | 120,688 | 4,824 | 4.0 | | Total Non-UK | 152,080 | 5,159 | 3.4 | | Total Deposits at amortised cost | 552,249 | 11,251 | 2.0 | Notes: 1 For information on term deposits please refer to the Barclays PLC Annual Report contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities note. 2 Average deposits includes held for sale balances generating interest expense. As at 31st December 2025, deposits at amortised cost in offices in the United Kingdom received from non-residents amounted to £46,346m (2024: £43,069m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Uninsured other time deposits Uninsured deposits are presented on an approximate basis based on Barclays Group’s deposits less those eligible for the deposit insurance schemes. The maturity for uninsured deposits is based on the residual maturity. | | 2025 £m | 2024 £m | | --- | --- | --- | | 3 months or less | 85,297 | 83,283 | | 3 to 6 months | 32,167 | 27,355 | | 6 to 12 months | 21,167 | 16,003 | | 12 months and over | 3,790 | 4,618 | | Total | 142,421 | 131,259 | As at 31 December 2025, £278m (2024: £433m) of U.S. time deposits were in excess of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation insurance limit. Of the total deposits at amortised cost, there are uninsured deposits of £331,932m (2024: £327,188m) which are not insured through the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) or other similar deposits schemes. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 468 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Contractual obligations Contractual obligations include debt securities and purchase obligations. | Contractual obligations | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Payments due by period | | | | | | | Less than one year £m | Between one to three years £m | Between three to five years £m | After five years £m | Total £m | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | Long-term debt^{1} | 56,022 | 20,508 | 19,441 | 58,693 | 154,664 | | Purchase obligations | 1,000 | 1,080 | 358 | 74 | 2,512 | | Total | 57,022 | 21,588 | 19,799 | 58,767 | 157,176 | | As at 31 December 2024 | | | | | | | Long-term debt^{1} | 29,690 | 20,648 | 19,340 | 56,909 | 126,587 | | Purchase obligations | 920 | 1,248 | 563 | 201 | 2,932 | | Total | 30,610 | 21,896 | 19,903 | 57,110 | 129,519 | Note: 1. Long-term debt has been prepared to reflect cash flows on an undiscounted basis, which includes interest payments. Net cash flows from derivatives used to hedge long-term debt amount to £(1.8)bn (2024: £(3.2)bn). Further information on the contractual maturity of the Group's assets, liabilities (including lease liabilities), and contingent liabilities and commitments is provided in the Liquidity Risk section. ## Securities Investment securities include debt securities reported at amortised cost and financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income. Investment in debt securities principally include government securities held as part of the liquidity risk management within the Treasury and Capital Risk framework. In addition, the Group holds investments in corporate securities. The weighted average yield for each maturity range is determined by dividing the annualized interest income for the year ended December 31, 2025, by the book value of debt securities as of that date. ## Maturities and yield of investment debt securities | | Maturing within one year | | Maturing after one but within five years | | Maturing after five but within ten years | | Maturing after ten years | | Total | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Amount £m | Yield % | Amount £m | Yield % | Amount £m | Yield % | Amount £m | Yield % | Amount £m | Yield % | | As at 31 December 2025 | | | | | | | | | | | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 10,664 | 3.8 % | 31,655 | 3.4 % | 3,159 | 4.6 % | 22,997 | 4.2 % | 68,475 | 3.8 % | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 4,730 | 2.8 % | 35,467 | 3.4 % | 23,879 | 3.4 % | 7,947 | 2.9 % | 72,023 | 3.3 % | | Total book value | 15,394 | | 67,122 | | 27,038 | | 30,944 | | 140,498 | | The above table is only for debt securities held at the reporting date and does not include associated hedges. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Average balance sheet Average balances are based upon monthly averages. UK and Non-UK is based on the location of the office where the transactions are recorded. | Assets | | 2025 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Average balance £m | Net interest¹ £m | Rate % | | Cash and balances at central banks | UK | 102,040 | 3,677 | 3.6 | | Cash and balances at central banks | Non-UK | 125,164 | 5,053 | 4.0 | | Cash and balances at central banks | Total | 227,204 | 8,730 | 3.8 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | UK | 281,872 | 12,623 | 4.5 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | Non-UK | 81,684 | 6,039 | 7.4 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost²,⁵,⁶ | Total | 363,556 | 18,662 | 5.1 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | UK | 56,122 | 2,160 | 3.8 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | Non-UK | 14,554 | 660 | 4.5 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | Total | 70,676 | 2,820 | 4.0 | | Cash collateral | UK | 55,507 | 1,812 | 3.3 | | Cash collateral | Non-UK | 25,698 | 322 | 1.3 | | Cash collateral | Total | 81,205 | 2,134 | 2.6 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | UK | 6,345 | 219 | 3.5 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | Non-UK | 993 | 7 | 0.7 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | Total | 7,338 | 226 | 3.1 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | UK | 72,579 | 2,969 | 4.1 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | Non-UK | 5,389 | 165 | 3.1 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | Total | 77,968 | 3,134 | 4.0 | | Other³ | | | 483 | | | Total interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income | | 827,947 | 36,189 | 4.4 | | Less: interest and similar expense | | | (21,688) | | | Net interest income | | | 14,501 | | | Other assets⁴ | | 931,075 | | | | Total | | 1,759,022 | | | | Percentage of total average interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income for offices outside the UK | | 31% | | | Notes: 1 Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest. 2 Loans and advances at amortised cost include all doubtful lending. Interest receivable on such lending has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Barclays Group. 3 Other principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity and interest income on pensions. 4 The interest on Trading portfolio assets, Derivative financial instruments and Financial assets at fair value through the income statement are recognised in net trading income and the average balances for these assets are included in Other assets. 5 Average loans and advances include held for sale balances generating interest income. 6 Material loan fees included in interest income for 2025 is £1,125m (2024: £1,143m, 2023: £973m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) | Assets | | 2024 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Average balance £m | Net interest¹ £m | Rate % | | Cash and balances at central banks | UK | 112,440 | 5,177 | 4.6 | | Cash and balances at central banks | Non-UK | 120,834 | 5,899 | 4.9 | | **Cash and balances at central banks** | **Total** | 233,274 | 11,076 | 4.7 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | UK | 266,183 | 11,695 | 4.4 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | Non-UK | 84,146 | 6,141 | 7.3 | | **Loans and advances at amortised cost²,⁵,⁶** | **Total** | 350,329 | 17,836 | 5.1 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | UK | 52,446 | 2,010 | 3.8 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | Non-UK | 9,968 | 435 | 4.4 | | **Debt securities at amortised cost** | **Total** | 62,414 | 2,445 | 3.9 | | Cash collateral | UK | 52,889 | 1,785 | 3.4 | | Cash collateral | Non-UK | 25,299 | 623 | 2.5 | | **Cash collateral** | **Total** | 78,188 | 2,408 | 3.1 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | UK | 3,421 | 110 | 3.2 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | Non-UK | 772 | 28 | 3.6 | | **Reverse repurchase agreements** | **Total** | 4,193 | 138 | 3.3 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | UK | 74,712 | 3,558 | 4.8 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | Non-UK | 4,817 | 263 | 5.5 | | **Fair value through other comprehensive income** | Total | 79,529 | 3,821 | 4.8 | | Other² | | | 602 | | | **Total interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income** | | 807,927 | 38,326 | 4.7 | | Less: interest and similar expense | | | (25,390) | | | Net interest income | | | 12,936 | | | Other assets⁴ | | 795,976 | | | | **Total** | | 1,603,903 | | | | **Percentage of total average interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income for offices outside the UK** | | 30% | | | # Notes 1. Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest. 2. Loans and advances at amortised cost include all doubtful lending. Interest receivable on such lending has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Barclays Group. 3. Other principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity and interest income on pensions. 4. The interest on Trading portfolio assets, Derivative financial instruments and Financial assets at fair value through the income statement are recognise principally in net trading income and the average balances for these assets are included in Other assets. 5. Average loans and advances include held for sale balances generating interest income. 6. Material loan fees included in interest income for 2025 is £1,125m (2024: £1,143m, 2023: £973m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) | Assets | | 2023 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Average balance £m | Net interest¹ £m | Rate % | | Cash and balances at central banks | UK | 121,390 | 4,979 | 4.1 | | Cash and balances at central banks | Non-UK | 133,302 | 5,279 | 4.0 | | **Cash and balances at central banks** | **Total** | 254,692 | 10,258 | 4.0 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | UK | 271,774 | 9,599 | 3.5 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | Non-UK | 84,556 | 5,143 | 6.1 | | **Loans and advances at amortised cost²,⁵** | **Total** | 356,330 | 14,742 | 4.1 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | UK | 46,793 | 2,103 | 4.4 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | Non-UK | 5,023 | 234 | 4.7 | | **Debt securities at amortised cost** | **Total** | 51,816 | 2,337 | 4.5 | | Cash collateral | UK | 56,030 | 1,683 | 3.0 | | Cash collateral | Non-UK | 25,875 | 692 | 2.7 | | **Cash collateral** | **Total** | 81,905 | 2,375 | 2.9 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | UK | 1,504 | 45 | 3.0 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | Non-UK | 1,247 | 55 | 4.4 | | **Reverse repurchase agreements** | **Total** | 2,751 | 100 | 3.6 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | UK | 65,001 | 4,745 | 7.3 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | Non-UK | 3,458 | 162 | 4.7 | | **Fair value through other comprehensive income** | **Total** | 68,459 | 4,907 | 7.2 | | Other² | | | 303 | | | **Total interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income** | | 815,953 | 35,022 | 4.3 | | Less: interest and similar expense | | | (22,313) | | | Net interest income | | | 12,709 | | | Other assets⁴ | | 779,822 | | | | **Total** | | 1,595,775 | | | | **Percentage of total average interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income for offices outside the UK** | | 31% | | | # Notes 1. Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest. 2. Loans and advances at amortised cost include all doubtful lending. Interest receivable on such lending has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Barclays Group. 3. Other principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity and interest income on pensions. 4. The interest on Trading portfolio assets, Derivative financial instruments and Financial assets at fair value through the income statement are recognise principally in net trading income and the average balances for these assets are included in Other assets. 5. Material loan fees included in interest income for 2025 is £1,125m (2024: £1,143m, 2023: £973m). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 472 # Additional unaudited information (continued) | Liabilities | | 2025 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Average balance £m | Net interest¹ £m | Rate % | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | UK | 337,245 | 8,736 | 2.6 | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | Non-UK | 120,209 | 3,548 | 3.0 | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | Total | 457,454 | 12,284 | 2.7 | | Cash collateral | UK | 47,513 | 1,093 | 2.3 | | Cash collateral | Non-UK | 26,071 | 408 | 1.6 | | Cash collateral | Total | 73,584 | 1,501 | 2.0 | | Debt securities in issue | UK | 71,146 | 4,077 | 5.7 | | Debt securities in issue | Non-UK | 34,651 | 1,929 | 5.6 | | Debt securities in issue | Total | 105,797 | 6,006 | 5.7 | | Subordinated liabilities | UK | 12,364 | 813 | 6.6 | | Subordinated liabilities | Non-UK | 594 | 42 | 7.1 | | Subordinated liabilities | Total | 12,958 | 855 | 6.6 | | Repurchase agreements | UK | 31,144 | 649 | 2.1 | | Repurchase agreements | Non-UK | 3,460 | 221 | 6.4 | | Repurchase agreements | Total | 34,604 | 870 | 2.5 | | Other² | | | 172 | | | Total interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest expense | | 684,397 | 21,688 | 3.2 | | Other liabilities and Shareholders' equity³ | | 1,074,625 | | | | Total | | 1,759,022 | | | | Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest expense for offices outside the UK | | 27% | | | # Notes 1 Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest. 2 Other principally includes lease interest. 3 The interest on Trading portfolio liabilities, Derivative financial instruments and Financial liabilities at fair value through the income statement are recognised principally in net trading income and the average balances for these liabilities are included in Other liabilities and Shareholders' equity. | Liabilities | | 2024 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Average balance £m | Net interest¹ £m | Rate % | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | UK | 324,000 | 9,215 | 2.8 | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | Non-UK | 113,787 | 4,877 | 4.3 | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost⁴ | Total | 437,787 | 14,092 | 3.2 | | Cash collateral | UK | 46,875 | 1,510 | 3.2 | | Cash collateral | Non-UK | 25,327 | 766 | 3.0 | | Cash collateral | Total | 72,202 | 2,276 | 3.2 | | Debt securities in issue | UK | 68,578 | 4,655 | 6.8 | | Debt securities in issue | Non-UK | 30,457 | 2,053 | 6.7 | | Debt securities in issue | Total | 99,035 | 6,708 | 6.8 | | Subordinated liabilities | UK | 10,800 | 895 | 8.3 | | Subordinated liabilities | Non-UK | 668 | 50 | 7.5 | | Subordinated liabilities | Total | 11,468 | 945 | 8.2 | | Repurchase agreements | UK | 42,314 | 1,121 | 2.6 | | Repurchase agreements | Non-UK | 1,673 | 123 | 7.4 | | Repurchase agreements | Total | 43,987 | 1,244 | 2.8 | | Other² | | | 125 | | | Total interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest expense | | 664,479 | 25,390 | 3.8 | | Other liabilities and Shareholders' equity³ | | 939,424 | | | | Total | | 1,603,903 | | | | Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest expense for offices outside the UK | | 26% | | | # Notes 1 Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest. 2 Other principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity. 3 The interest on Trading portfolio liabilities, Derivative financial instruments and Financial liabilities at fair value through the income statement are recognise principally in net trading income and the average balances for these liabilities are included in Other liabilities. 4 Average interest bearing deposits at amortised cost include held for sale balances generating interest expense --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Additional unaudited information (continued) | Liabilities | | 2023 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | Average balance £m | Net interest¹ £m | Rate % | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | UK | 317,497 | 7,530 | 2.4 | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | Non-UK | 94,154 | 3,722 | 4.0 | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | Total | 411,651 | 11,252 | 2.7 | | Cash collateral | UK | 45,188 | 1,454 | 3.2 | | Cash collateral | Non-UK | 25,678 | 800 | 3.1 | | Cash collateral | Total | 70,866 | 2,254 | 3.2 | | Debt securities in issue | UK | 71,956 | 4,346 | 6.0 | | Debt securities in issue | Non-UK | 36,272 | 1,952 | 5.4 | | Debt securities in issue | Total | 108,228 | 6,298 | 5.8 | | Subordinated liabilities | UK | 10,393 | 811 | 7.8 | | Subordinated liabilities | Non-UK | 769 | 55 | 7.2 | | Subordinated liabilities | Total | 11,162 | 866 | 7.8 | | Repurchase agreements | UK | 34,313 | 1,362 | 4.0 | | Repurchase agreements | Non-UK | 1,899 | 73 | 3.9 | | Repurchase agreements | Total | 36,212 | 1,435 | 4.0 | | Other² | | | 208 | | | Total interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest expense | | 638,119 | 22,313 | 3.5 | | Other liabilities and Shareholders' equity³ | | 957,656 | | | | Total | | 1,595,775 | | | | Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest expense for offices outside the UK | | 25% | | | # Notes 1 Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest. 2 Other principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity. 3 The interest on Trading portfolio liabilities, Derivative financial instruments and Financial liabilities at fair value through the income statement are recognise principally in net trading income and the average balances for these liabilities are included in Other liabilities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 474 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Changes in total interest – volume and rate analysis The following tables allocate changes in interest between changes in volume and changes in interest rates for the last two years. Volume and rate variances have been calculated on the movement in the average balances and the change in the interest rates on average interest earning assets and average interest bearing liabilities. Where variances have arisen from changes in both volumes and interest rates, these have been allocated proportionately between the two. | Interest income | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | 2025/2024 Change due to increase/(decrease) in: | | | 2024/2023 Change due to increase/(decrease) in: | | | | | | Total change £m | Volume £m | Rate £m | Total change £m | Volume £m | Rate £m | | Cash and balances at central banks | UK | (1,500) | (448) | (1,052) | 198 | (384) | 582 | | Cash and balances at central banks | Non-UK | (846) | 205 | (1,051) | 620 | (527) | 1,147 | | Cash and balances at central banks | Total | (2,346) | (243) | (2,103) | 818 | (911) | 1,729 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | UK | 928 | 699 | 229 | 1,890 | (206) | 2,096 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | Non-UK | (102) | (181) | 79 | 1,204 | (24) | 1,228 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost | Total | 826 | 518 | 308 | 3,094 | (230) | 3,324 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | UK | 150 | 142 | 8 | (93) | 237 | (330) | | Debt securities at amortised cost | Non-UK | 225 | 207 | 18 | 201 | 216 | (15) | | Debt securities at amortised cost | Total | 375 | 349 | 26 | 108 | 453 | (345) | | Cash collateral | UK | 27 | 86 | (59) | 102 | (98) | 200 | | Cash collateral | Non-UK | (301) | 10 | (311) | (69) | (15) | (54) | | Cash collateral | Total | (274) | 96 | (370) | 33 | (113) | 146 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | UK | 109 | 100 | 9 | 65 | 61 | 4 | | Reverse repurchase agreements | Non-UK | (21) | 6 | (27) | (27) | (18) | (9) | | Reverse repurchase agreements | Total | 88 | 106 | (18) | 38 | 43 | (5) | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | UK | (589) | (100) | (489) | (1,187) | 635 | (1,822) | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | Non-UK | (98) | 28 | (126) | 101 | 72 | 29 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | Total | (687) | (72) | (615) | (1,086) | 707 | (1,793) | | Other interest and similar income | | (119) | — | (119) | 299 | — | 299 | | Total interest receivable | | (2,137) | 754 | (2,891) | 3,304 | (51) | 3,355 | | Interest expense | | | | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | | 2025/2024 Change due to increase/(decrease) in: | | | 2024/2023 Change due to increase/(decrease) in: | | | | | | Total change £m | Volume £m | Rate £m | Total change £m | Volume £m | Rate £m | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | UK | (479) | 366 | (845) | 1,684 | 157 | 1,527 | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | Non-UK | (1,329) | 262 | (1,591) | 1,155 | 822 | 333 | | Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost | Total | (1,808) | 628 | (2,436) | 2,839 | 979 | 1,860 | | Cash collateral | UK | (417) | 21 | (438) | 55 | 54 | 1 | | Cash collateral | Non-UK | (358) | 22 | (380) | (34) | (11) | (23) | | Cash collateral | Total | (775) | 43 | (818) | 21 | 43 | (22) | | Debt securities in issue | UK | (578) | 169 | (747) | 309 | (211) | 520 | | Debt securities in issue | Non-UK | (124) | 261 | (385) | 101 | (344) | 445 | | Debt securities in issue | Total | (702) | 430 | (1,132) | 410 | (555) | 965 | | Subordinated liabilities | UK | (82) | 119 | (201) | 84 | 33 | 51 | | Subordinated liabilities | Non-UK | (8) | (6) | (2) | (5) | (7) | 2 | | Subordinated liabilities | Total | (90) | 113 | (203) | 79 | 26 | 53 | | Repurchase agreements | UK | (472) | (261) | (211) | (239) | 275 | (514) | | Repurchase agreements | Non-UK | 98 | 116 | (18) | 50 | (10) | 60 | | Repurchase agreements | Total | (374) | (145) | (229) | (189) | 265 | (454) | | Other interest expense | | 47 | — | 47 | (83) | — | (83) | | Total interest payable | | (3,702) | 1,069 | (4,771) | 3,077 | 758 | 2,319 | --- Additional unaudited information (continued) ### Credit risk additional disclosure This section of the report contains supplementary information that is more detailed or contains longer histories than the data presented in the Risk review section. ### Potential problem loans Potential problem loans are those loans for which serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrower to continue to comply with repayment terms in the near future. The loans and advances at amortised cost by product disclosure in the credit risk section includes gross exposure and associated impairment allowance for assets classified as Stage 2, but not past due i.e. assets satisfying the criteria for a significant increase in Credit Risk, but which are still complying with repayment terms. A financial asset is subject to forbearance when it is modified due to the credit distress of the borrower. A modification made to the terms of an asset due to forbearance will typically be assessed as a non-substantial modification that does not result in derecognition of the original loan, except in circumstances where debt is exchanged for equity. Both performing and non-performing forbearance assets are classified as Stage 3 except where it is established that the concession granted has not resulted in diminished financial obligation and that no other regulatory definition of default criteria has been triggered, in which case the asset is classified as Stage 2. The minimum probationary period for non-performing forbearance is 12 months and for performing forbearance, 24 months. Hence, a minimum of 36 months is required for non-performing forbearance to move out of a forborne state. Further details can be found in the credit risk section. In order to assess asset credit quality, 12-month PDs are used to map assets into strong, satisfactory, higher risk or credit impaired. A credit risk profile by internal PD grade for gross loans and advances at amortised cost and allowance for ECL is shown in the credit risk section, analysing each of these categories by stage. Wholesale accounts that are deemed to contain heightened levels of risk are recorded on graded watchlists comprising four categories, graded in line with the perceived severity of the risk attached to the lending, and its probability of default. Where a counterparty’s financial health gives grounds for concern, it is immediately placed into the appropriate category. Once an account has been placed on a watchlist, the exposure is monitored and, where appropriate, exposure reductions are effected. Further information on monitoring weaknesses in portfolios can be found in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited). --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 476 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Impairment | Allocation of the allowance for credit losses | | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Balance at end of period applicable to: | Amounts | | % of loans in each category to total loans | | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | | | | Loans and Advances at amortised cost to Banks | 11 | 9 | 2.3 % | 2.4 % | | Loans and Advances at amortised cost to Customers | 5,278 | 5,061 | 97.0 % | 96.7 % | | FVOCI | 1 | 2 | 0.7 % | 0.9 % | | Loans and advances¹ | 5,290 | 5,072 | 100.0 % | 100.0 % | | Net Charge offs during the period to average loans outstanding² | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Balance at end of period applicable to: | Amounts | | | | | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | £m | | Loans and Advances at amortised cost to Banks | | | | | Net charge off | — | — | — | | Average loans | 8,920 | 8,473 | 10,671 | | Ratio % | — % | — % | — % | | Loans and Advances at amortised cost to Customers | | | | | Net charge off | 1,393 | 1,501 | 1,095 | | Average loans | 354,636 | 341,856 | 345,659 | | Ratio % | 0.4 % | 0.4 % | 0.3 % | | FVOCI | | | | | Net charge off | — | — | — | | Average loans | 2,797 | 1,784 | 346 | | Ratio % | — % | — % | — % | | Consolidated basis | | | | --- | --- | --- | | Allowance for credit losses to total loans outstanding during | Amounts | | | | 2025 | 2024 | | As at 31 December | £m | £m | | Allowance for credit losses | 5,290 | 5,072 | | Total loans outstanding | 369,180 | 354,626 | | Ratio % | 1.4 % | 1.4 % | Notes: 1. Total loans outstanding excludes Debt securities at amortized cost. 2. Average loans and advances include held for sale balances. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 477 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Maturity analysis of gross loans and advances Traded Loans are included in the 'on demand' column at their fair value. Liquidity risk on these items is not managed on the basis of contractual maturity since these items are not held for settlement according to such maturity and will frequently be settled before contractual maturity at fair value. ### 20 F-Maturity analysis of gross loans and advances | As at 31st December 2025 | Less than 1 year £m | One to five years £m | Five to fifteen years £m | Over fifteen years £m | Total £m | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks | 8,649 | — | — | — | 8,649 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to customers | 50,345 | 98,390 | 68,469 | 140,959 | 358,163 | | Loans and advances at fair value through other comprehensive income | 72 | 815 | 1,480 | — | 2,367 | | Loans and advances at fair value through profit and loss | 40,188 | 3,980 | 2,146 | 1,358 | 47,672 | | Traded loans | 12,249 | — | — | — | 12,249 | | Total gross loans and advances | 111,503 | 103,185 | 72,095 | 142,317 | 429,100 | | As at 31 December 2024 | Less than 1 year £m | One to five years £m | Five to fifteen years £m | Over fifteen years £m | Total £m | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks | 8,336 | — | — | — | 8,336 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to customers | 50,338 | 91,514 | 69,730 | 131,425 | 343,007 | | Loans and advances at fair value through other comprehensive income | 74 | 1,786 | 1,423 | — | 3,283 | | Loans and advances at fair value through profit and loss | 38,930 | 3,105 | 1,614 | 1,418 | 45,067 | | Traded loans | 13,470 | — | — | — | 13,470 | | Total gross loans and advances | 111,148 | 96,405 | 72,767 | 132,843 | 413,163 | ### Interest rate sensitivity of gross loans and advances. Maturity > 1 year | As at 31 December | 2025 | | | 2024 | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | Fixed rate £m | Variable rate £m | Total £m | Fixed rate £m | Variable rate £m | Total £m | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks | — | — | — | — | — | — | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to customers | 173,093 | 134,725 | 307,818 | 161,647 | 131,022 | 292,669 | | Loans and advances at fair value through other comprehensive income | — | 2,295 | 2,295 | — | 3,209 | 3,209 | | Loans and advances at fair value through profit and loss | 3,672 | 3,812 | 7,484 | 2,504 | 3,633 | 6,137 | | Total loans and advances | 176,765 | 140,832 | 317,597 | 164,151 | 137,864 | 302,015 | ### Notional principal amounts of credit derivatives | As at 31 December | 2025 £m | 2024 £m | | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | | Credit derivatives held or issued for trading purposes^{1} | 1,736,768 | 1,537,115 | **Note** 1. Includes credit derivatives held as economic hedges which are not designated as hedges for accounting purposes. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 478 # Additional unaudited information (continued) ## Related party transactions additional disclosure For US disclosure purposes, the aggregate emoluments of all Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC who held office during the year (2025: 33 persons, 2024: 32 persons, 2023: 29 persons) for the year ended 31 December 2025 amounted to £98.3m (2024: £82.3m, 2023: £57.0m). In addition, the aggregate amount set aside for the year ended 31 December 2025, to provide pension benefits for the Directors and Officers amounted to £0.1m (2024: £0.1m, 2023: £nil). The expiry dates of the 59,803 options held by Executive Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC as at 31 December 2025 are as follows: - 30 April 2026: 21,428 shares - 30 April 2027: 15,853 shares - 30 April 2028: 2,072 shares - 30 April 2029: 3,682 shares - 30 April 2030: 10,558 shares - 30 April 2031: 6,210 shares --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F # Glossary of Terms 'Acceptances and endorsements' Acceptances are an undertaking by a bank to pay a bill of exchange drawn on a customer, for which reimbursement by the customer is normally immediate. Endorsements are to change the payee of a bill of exchange but with no change to the bank's liability. 'Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital' A type of capital as defined in CRR, largely comprising eligible non-common equity capital securities and any related share premium. 'Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities' Non-common equity securities that are eligible as AT1 capital. 'Advanced Internal Ratings Based (A-IRB)' See 'Internal Ratings Based (IRB)'. 'Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA)' An approach used to quantify required capital for operational risk. Under the AMA, banks are allowed to develop their own empirical model to quantify the required capital for operational risk. Banks can only use this approach subject to approval from their applicable local regulators. 'Agency Bonds' Bonds issued by state and / or government agencies or government-sponsored entities. 'Agency Mortgage-Backed Securities' Mortgage-Backed Securities issued by government-sponsored entities. 'All price risk (APR)' An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default, for the correlation trading portfolio. 'American Depositary Receipts (ADR) or American Depositary Shares (ADS)' A negotiable certificate that represents the ownership of depositary shares in a non-US company (e.g. Barclays) trading on US financial markets. 'Americas' Geographic segment comprising the US, Canada and countries where Barclays operates within Latin America. 'Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR)' A measure of the potential change in Net Interest Income (NII) due to interest rate movement over a one-year period. 'Annualised cumulative weighted average lifetime PD' The Probability of Default (PD) over the remaining life of the asset, expressed as an annual rate, reflecting a range of possible economic scenarios. 'Application scorecards' Algorithm based decision-making tools used to aid business decisions and manage credit risk, based on available customer data at the point of application for a product. 'Arrears' Customers are said to be in arrears when they are behind in fulfilling their obligations, with the result that an outstanding loan is unpaid or overdue. Such customers are also said to be in a state of delinquency. When a customer is in arrears, their entire outstanding balance is said to be delinquent, meaning that delinquent balances are the total outstanding loans on which payments are overdue. 'Asia' Geographic segment comprising countries where Barclays operates within Asia and the Middle East. 'Asset Backed Commercial Paper (ABCP)' Typically short-term notes secured on specified assets issued by consolidated special purpose entities for funding purposes. 'Asset Backed Securities (ABS)' Securities that represent an interest in an underlying pool of referenced assets. The referenced pool can comprise any assets which attract a set of associated cash flows but are commonly pools of residential or commercial mortgages and, in the case of a Collateralised Debt Obligation (CDO), the referenced pool may be ABS or other classes of assets. 'Asset swap spreads' The difference between the yield of the bond and the fixed rate leg of the corresponding interest rate swap. Primarily used to measure the credit risk associated with a bond. 'Assets Under Management (AUM)' Total market value of client investment balances managed within investment mandates where Barclays provides discretionary portfolio management or advisory services. Total Assets Under Management excludes uninvested cash held under an investment mandate. 'Assets Under Supervision (AUS)' Total market value of client investment balances where Barclays provides custodian or transactional services. 'Attributable profit' Profit after tax that is attributable to ordinary equity holders of Barclays adjusted for the after tax amounts of capital securities classified as equity. 'Average allocated tangible equity' (for businesses) Calculated as the average of the previous month's period end allocated tangible equity and the current month's period end allocated tangible equity. The average allocated tangible equity for the period is the average of the monthly averages within that period. 'Average tangible shareholders' equity' (for Barclays Group) Calculated as the average of the previous month's period end tangible shareholders' equity and the current month's period end tangible shareholders' equity. The average tangible shareholders' equity for the period is the average of the monthly averages within that period. 'Average tangible shareholders' equity' (for businesses) Calculated as the average of the previous month's period end allocated tangible equity and the current month's period end allocated tangible equity. The average allocated tangible equity for the period is the average of the monthly averages within that period. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Average UK leverage ratio' In accordance with the PRA Rulebook, calculated as the average capital measure based on the last day of each month in the quarter divided by the average exposure measure for the quarter, where the average exposure is based on each day in the quarter. 'Back testing' Includes a number of techniques that assess the continued statistical validity of a model by simulating how the model would have predicted recent experience. 'Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio' In the context of the credit risk disclosures on secured home loans, a means of calculating marked to market (MTM) LTVs derived by calculating individual LTVs at account level, and weighting it by the balances to arrive at the average position. Balance weighted LTV ratio is calculated using the following formula: LTV = ((loan 1 balance x MTM LTV% for loan 1) + (loan 2 balance x MTM LTV% for loan 2) + ...) / total outstanding balances in portfolio. 'Bank of England (BoE)' The central bank of the United Kingdom with devolved responsibility for managing monetary policy and to oversee regulation of the UK's financial sector. The BoE prudentially regulates and supervises certain financial services firms through the PRA. 'Bank of England levy scheme' or 'BoE levy scheme' A levy scheme which commenced on 1 March 2024 replacing the Cash Ratio Deposit scheme as a means of funding the BoE's monetary policy and financial stability operations. 'Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD)' The Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (Directive 2014/59/EU) established a framework for the recovery and resolution of EU credit institutions and investment firms. 'Barclaycard Consumer UK' One of three segments within Barclays UK comprising the UK Barclaycard business. 'Barclays' or 'Barclays Group' or 'Group' Barclays PLC, together with its subsidiaries. 'Barclays Africa' or 'Absa' or 'Absa Group Limited' Absa Group Limited (formerly Barclays Africa Group Limited), which was previously a subsidiary of the Barclays Group. As a consequence of its disposals of shares in April 2022 and September 2022, the Barclays Group has now exited its shareholding in Absa Group Limited. 'Barclays Bank Group' Barclays Bank PLC, together with its subsidiaries. 'Barclays Bank Ireland PLC' Barclays Bank Ireland PLC, also known as Barclays Europe and BBI. 'Barclays Bank UK Group' Barclays Bank UK PLC, together with its subsidiaries. 'Barclays Execution Services' or 'BX' or 'Group Service Company' Barclays Execution Services Limited, the Group-wide service company providing technology, operations and functional services to businesses across the Barclays Group. 'Barclays Investment Bank (IB)' The Barclays Group's investment bank which consists of origination led and returns focused Global Markets and Investment Banking businesses. 'Barclays Operating Businesses' The core Barclays businesses, comprising Barclays UK (which consists of the Personal Banking, Business Banking and the Barclaycard Consumer UK businesses), UKCB, PBWM, IB and USCB. 'Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management (PBWM)' This division serves UK and international private banking clients providing a range of investment, banking and lending products alongside expert advice. It also serves UK wealth management and UK digital investing clients offering a range of financial services. 'Barclays UK' This segment broadly represents businesses that sit within the UK ring-fenced bank entity, Barclays Bank UK PLC, and comprises Personal Banking, Business Banking and Barclaycard Consumer UK. 'Barclays US Consumer Bank (USCB)' This is a co-branded credit card issuer and financial services partner in the United States for travel, entertainment, retail and affinity institutions. It offers co-branded, small business and private label credit cards, installment loans, online savings accounts and certificates of deposits. 'Barclays UK Corporate Bank (UKCB)' This division brings together lending, trade and working capital, liquidity, payments and FX solutions for UK corporate clients with an annual turnover from £6.5 million and higher, excluding those clients that form part of the FTSE 350, which are included within the IB. 'Basel 3' or 'Basel III' The third of the Basel Accords, setting minimum requirements and standards that apply to internationally active banks. Basel 3 is a set of measures developed by BCBS aiming to strengthen the regulation, supervision and risk management of banks. 'Basel 3.1' This refers to the revision of BCBS standards to complete the BCBS' post global financial crisis reforms. Basel 3.1 introduces changes to how to calculate capital requirements for all risk types, for both standardised and internal model approaches. 'Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS)' or 'The Basel Committee' A forum for regular cooperation on banking supervisory matters which develops global supervisory standards for the banking industry. Its 45 members are officials from central banks or prudential supervisors from 28 jurisdictions. 'Basic Indicator Approach (BIA)' An approach used to quantify required capital for operational risk. Under the BIA, banks are required to hold regulatory capital for operational risk equal to $15\%$ of the annual average, calculated over a rolling three-year period, of the relevant income indicator for the bank as whole. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Basis point(s)' or 'bp(s)' One hundredth of a per cent (0.01%); 100 basis points is 1%. The measure is used for quoting movements in interest rates, yields on securities and for other purposes. 'Basis risk' Index/tenor risk that arises when floating rate products are linked to different interest rate indices, which are imperfectly correlated, especially under stressed market conditions. 'Behavioural scorecards' Algorithm-based decision tools used to aid business decisions and manage credit risk based on existing customer data derived from account usage. 'Board' The board of directors of the relevant Barclays Group entity. 'Book quality' In the context of the Capital Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly or half yearly results), changes in RWAs caused by factors such as underlying customer behaviour or demographics leading to changes in risk profile. 'Book size' In the context of the Capital Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly or half yearly results), changes in RWAs driven by business activity, including net originations or repayments. 'Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS)' A UK government (British Business Bank) backed loan scheme which allowed SMEs to borrow between £2,000 and £50,000. The UK Government guarantees 100% of the loan and pays the first 12 months of interest on behalf of the borrowers, subject to terms and conditions. The scheme closed on 31 March 2021. 'Business Banking' One of three segments within Barclays UK. Includes Business Banking services for UK clients with an annual turnover of typically up to £6.5 million, as well as the Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) portfolio. 'Business Growth Fund (BGF)' An independent company established by the UK's largest banks, including Barclays, to help young, fast-growing businesses by providing long-term growth capital. Barclays holds an associate interest in BGF. 'Business scenario stresses' Multi-asset scenario analysis of extreme, but plausible, events that may impact the market risk exposures of the IB. 'Buy to let mortgage' A mortgage whereby the intention of the customer at origination is to let the property. 'Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB)' A capital buffer of 2.5% of a bank's total exposures that needs to be met with an additional amount of Common Equity Tier 1 capital above the 4.5% minimum requirement for Common Equity Tier 1 set out in CRR. Its objective is to conserve a bank's capital by ensuring that banks build up surplus capital outside periods of stress which can be drawn down if losses are incurred. 'Capital ratios' Key financial ratios measuring the bank's capital adequacy or financial strength expressed as a percentage of RWAs. 'Capital Requirements Directive (CRD)' Directive 2013/36/EU (as amended), which accompanies the CRR and which prescribes further prudential standards including capital buffers and "Pillar 2A" capital requirements. CRD was implemented before Brexit. In the EU, further amendments to CRD are made by CRD VI. 'Capital Requirements Directive VI (CRD VI)' The Sixth Capital Requirements Directive, being an EU amending Directive accompanied by an amending Regulation (CRR III) which together prescribe EU capital adequacy and liquidity requirements, and which implement Basel 3.1 in the European Union. 'Capital requirements on the underlying exposures (KIRB)' An approach available to banks when calculating RWAs for securitisation exposures. This is based upon the RWA amounts that would be calculated under the IRB approach for the underlying pool of securitised exposures in the programme, had such exposures not been securitised. 'Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR)' Refers to EU CRR and/or UK CRR as the context requires. 'Capital Requirements Regulation III (CRR III)' Regulation (EU) 2024/1623, introducing further amendments to EU CRR as regards to requirements for credit risk, credit valuation adjustment risk, operational risk, market risk and the output floor. 'Capital resources' Common Equity Tier 1, Additional Tier 1 capital and Tier 2 capital that are eligible to satisfy regulatory capital requirements. Referred to as 'own funds' within EU and UK regulatory texts. 'Capital risk' The risk that the Barclays Group has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the Barclays Group's pension plans. 'Cash Ratio Deposit scheme' A scheme that previously funded the BoE's monetary policy and financial stability functions, until it was replaced with the BoE levy scheme on 1 March 2024. 'CBE' Consumer Bank Europe which was previously the German consumer finance business for Barclays Bank Ireland PLC. On 3 February 2025, Barclays PLC announced that Barclays Bank Ireland PLC had completed the sale of the CBE business to BAWAG P.S.K, a wholly owned subsidiary of BAWAG Group AG. 'Central Bank of Ireland (CBI)' The Central Bank of Ireland is responsible for maintaining monetary stability, promoting financial stability, and regulating financial institutions to safeguard the integrity of the financial system in Ireland. The CBI is the Irish national competent authority for the purposes of the SSM and EMIR. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Central Counterparty' or 'Central Clearing Counterparties (CCPs)' A clearing house mediating between the buyer and the seller in a financial transaction, such as a derivative contract or repurchase agreement (Repo). Where a CCP is used, a single bi-lateral contract between the buyer and seller is replaced with two contracts, one between the buyer and the CCP and one between the CCP and the seller. The use of CCPs allows for greater oversight and improved credit risk mitigation in over-the-counter (OTC) markets. 'Charge-off' In the retail segment this refers to the point in time when collections activity changes from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the full balance. This is normally when six payments are in arrears. 'Client assets and liabilities' Deposits, lending and invested assets. 'Climate Risk' The risk of financial loss arising from climate change, through physical risks and risks associated with transitioning to a low-carbon economy. Climate Risk focuses on the Financial and Operational Risks associated with climate change. 'CLOs and other insured assets' Highly-rated CLO positions wrapped by monolines, non-CLOs wrapped by monolines and other assets wrapped with Credit Support Annex (CSA) protection. 'Clydesdale Financial Services Limited (CFSL)' This houses Barclays' point-of-sale finance business and trades as Barclays Partner Finance. 'Collateralised Debt Obligation (CDO)' A security issued by a third party which references Asset Backed Securities and/or certain other related assets purchased by the issuer. CDOs may feature exposure to sub-prime mortgage assets through the underlying assets. 'Collateralised Loan Obligation (CLO)' A security backed by repayments from a pool of commercial loans. 'Collateralised Mortgage Obligation (CMO)' A security backed by mortgages. A special purpose entity receives income from the mortgages and passes them on to investors in the security. 'Combined Buffer Requirement (CBR)' The total Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to meet the combined requirements of the Capital Conservation Buffer, the G-SII Buffer, the Countercyclical Capital Buffer, and the O-SII Buffer if applicable to a firm. 'Commercial paper (CP)' Typically short-term notes issued by entities, including banks, for funding purposes. 'Commercial real estate (CRE)' Commercial real estate includes office buildings, medical centres, hotels, retail stores, shopping centres, farm land, multifamily housing buildings, warehouses, garages, industrial properties and other similar properties. Commercial real estate loans are loans backed by a package of commercial real estate. Note: for the purposes of the Credit Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly or half yearly results), the UK CRE portfolio includes property investment, development, trading and housebuilders but excludes social housing contractors. 'Commissions and other incentives' Includes commission-based arrangements, guaranteed incentives and Long Term Incentive Plan awards. 'Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission Framework (COSO)' A joint initiative of five private sector organisations dedicated to the development of frameworks and providing guidance on enterprise risk management, internal control and fraud deterrence. 'Commodity derivatives' Exchange traded and over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives based on an underlying commodity (e.g. metals, precious metals, oil and oil related products, power and natural gas). 'Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC)' Certain participants in US swap markets are required to register with the CFTC as 'swap dealers' or 'major swap participants' and/or with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) as 'security-based swap dealers' or 'major security-based swap participants'. Such registrants are subject to CFTC and/or SEC regulation and oversight. Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC are registered with the CFTC as swap dealers and are subject to CFTC oversight. 'Commodity risk' Measures the impact of changes in commodity prices and volatilities, including the basis between related commodities (e.g. Brent vs. West Texas Intermediate crude prices). 'Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital' The highest quality form of regulatory capital under CRR that comprises common shares issued and related share premium, retained earnings and other reserves, less specified regulatory adjustments. 'Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio' A measure of CET1 capital expressed as a percentage of RWAs. 'Compensation: income ratio' The ratio of compensation expense over total income. Compensation represents total staff costs less non-compensation items (consisting of outsourcing, staff training, redundancy costs and retirement costs). 'Compliance Risk' The risk of poor outcomes for, or harm to, customers, clients and markets, arising from the delivery of the firm's products and services (also known as 'Conduct Risk') and the risk to Barclays, its clients, customers or markets from a failure to comply with the laws, rules and regulations applicable to the firm (also known as Laws, Rules and Regulations Risk or 'LRR Risk'). 'Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review (CCAR)' An annual exercise, required by and evaluated by the Federal Reserve, through which the largest banks' holding companies operating in the US assess whether they have sufficient capital to continue operations through periods of economic and financial stress and have robust capital-planning processes that account for their unique risks. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Comprehensive Risk Capital Charge (CRCC)' An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default, for the correlation trading portfolio. 'Comprehensive Risk Measure (CRM)' An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default, for the correlation trading portfolio. Also referred to as All Price Risk (APR) and Comprehensive Risk Capital Charge (CRCC). 'Constant Currency Basis' Excluding the impact of foreign currency conversion to GBP when comparing financial results in two different financial periods. 'Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS)' A loan scheme by the British Business Bank (BBB) to support UK based small and medium-sized businesses (turnover of up to £45 million) adversely impacted by COVID-19. The CBILS provided loans of up to £5 million which are backed by an 80% UK Government (BBB) guarantee. The UK Government will pay interest and fees for the first 12 months on behalf of the borrowers, subject to terms and conditions. This scheme ended on 31 March 2021. 'Coronavirus Large Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CLBILS)' A loan scheme by the British Business Bank (BBB) to support UK based medium-sized businesses (turnover above £45 million, but with no access to Covid Corporate Finance Facility (CCFF)) adversely impacted by COVID-19. The CLBILS provided loans of up to £200 million which are backed by an 80% UK Government (BBB) guarantee. This scheme ended on 31 March 2021. 'Correlation risk' Refers to the change in marked to market value of a security when the correlation between the underlying assets changes over time. 'Cost: income jaws' Relationship between the percentage change movement in operating expenses relative to total income. 'Cost: income ratio' Total operating expenses divided by total income. 'Cost of Equity' The rate of return targeted by the equity holders of a company. 'Countercyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB)' A capital buffer that requires banks to have an additional cushion of Common Equity Tier 1 capital with which to absorb potential losses, enhancing their resilience and contributing to a stable financial system. 'Countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (CCLB)' A macroprudential capital buffer that has applied to specific PRA regulated institutions since 2018 and is calculated at 35% of any risk weighted Countercyclical Capital Buffer set by the Financial Policy Committee (FPC). The CCLB applies in addition to the minimum of 3.25% and any G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer that applies. 'Counterparty credit risk (CCR)' The risk that a counterparty to a transaction could default before the final settlement of a transaction's cash flows. In the context of RWAs, a component of RWAs that represents the risk of loss from derivatives, repurchase agreements and similar transactions as a result of the default of the counterparty. 'Coverage ratio' This represents the percentage of impairment allowance reserve against the gross exposure. 'Covered bonds' Debt securities backed by a portfolio of mortgages that are segregated from the issuer's other assets solely for the benefit of the holders of the covered bonds. 'Covid Corporate Financing Facility (CCFF)' BoE scheme to support liquidity among larger investment grade firms which make a material UK contribution, helping to bridge COVID-19 disruption to their cash flows. The BoE provided liquidity by purchasing short-term debt in the form of commercial paper from corporates. Barclays acted as dealer. This scheme closed for new purchases of commercial paper with effect from 23 March 2021. 'Credit conversion factor (CCF)' A factor used to estimate the risk from off-balance sheet commitments for the purpose of calculating the total Exposure at Default (EAD) used to calculate RWAs. 'Credit default swaps (CDS)' A contract under which the protection seller receives premiums or interest-related payments in return for contracting to make payments to the protection buyer in the event of a defined credit event. Credit events normally include bankruptcy, payment default on a reference asset or assets, or downgrades by a rating agency. 'Credit derivatives (CDs)' An arrangement whereby the credit risk of an asset (the reference asset) is transferred from the buyer to the seller of the protection. 'Credit impairment charges' Impairment charges on loans and advances to customers and banks and impairment charges on fair value through other comprehensive income assets and reverse repurchase agreements. 'Credit market exposures' Assets and other instruments relating to commercial real estate and leveraged finance businesses that have been significantly impacted by the deterioration in the global credit markets. The exposures include positions subject to fair value movements in the income statement, positions that are classified as loans and advances, and available for sale and other assets. 'Credit quality step' An indicator of credit risk. In the context of the Standardised Approach to calculating credit risk RWAs, a "credit quality assessment scale" maps the credit assessments of a recognised credit rating agency or export credit agency to certain "credit quality steps" that determine the risk weight to be applied to an exposure. 'Credit rating' An evaluation of the creditworthiness of an entity seeking to enter into a credit agreement. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Credit risk' The risk of loss to Barclays from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to Barclays, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables. In the context of RWAs, it is the component of RWAs that represents the risk of loss in loans and advances and similar transactions resulting from the default of the counterparty. 'Credit risk mitigation' A range of techniques and strategies used to actively mitigate credit risks to which the bank is exposed. These can be broadly divided into three types: collateral, netting and set-off, and risk transfer. 'Credit spread' The premium over the benchmark or risk-free rate required by the market to accept a lower credit quality. 'Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA)' The difference between the risk-free value of a portfolio of trades and the market value which takes into account the counterparty's risk of default. The CVA therefore represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the credit risk of the counterparty due to any failure to perform contractual agreements. 'Customer assets' Represents loans and advances to customers. Average balances are calculated as the sum of all daily balances for the year to date divided by number of days in the year to date. 'Customer deposits' Money deposited by all individuals and companies that are not credit institutions. Such funds are recorded as liabilities in the Barclays Group's balance sheet under "deposits at amortised cost" (Customer liabilities). 'Customer liabilities' See 'Customer deposits'. 'Daily Value at Risk (DVaR)' An estimate of the potential loss which might arise from market movements under normal market conditions if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day, measured to a specified confidence level. 'Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA)' The opposite of Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA). It is the difference between the risk-free value of a portfolio of trades and the market value which takes into account the Barclays Group's risk of default. The DVA, therefore, represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the credit risk of the Barclays Group due to any failure to perform contractual obligations. The DVA decreases the value of a liability to take into account a reduction in the remaining balance that would be settled should the Barclays Group default or not perform any contractual obligations. 'Debt buybacks' Purchases of the Barclays Group's issued debt securities, including equity accounted instruments, leading to their de-recognition from the balance sheet. 'Debt securities in issue' Transferable securities evidencing indebtedness of the Barclays Group. These are liabilities of the Barclays Group and include certificates of deposit and commercial paper. 'Default fund contributions' The contribution made by members of a Central Counterparty (CCP). All members are required to contribute to this fund in advance of using a CCP. The default fund can be used by the CCP to cover losses incurred by the CCP where losses are greater than the margins provided by a defaulting member. 'Default grades' The Barclays Group classifies ranges of default probabilities into a set of 21 intervals called default grades, in order to distinguish differences in the Probability of Default (PD) risk. 'Delinquency' See 'Arrears'. 'Deposit Guarantee Scheme (DGS)' The EU Directive on Deposit Insurance (Directive 2014/49/EU) was transposed into Irish law through the European Union (Deposit Guarantee Schemes) Regulations 2015 which came into effect on 20 November 2015. The CBI as the 'designated authority' is required to calculate risk based deposit insurance contributions in accordance with the EBA's guidelines "on methods for calculating contributions to deposit guarantee schemes." The DGS is administered by the CBI and is funded by the credit institutions covered by the scheme. 'Derivatives netting' Adjustments applied across asset and liability marked to market derivative positions pursuant to legally enforceable bilateral netting agreements and eligible cash collateral received in derivative transactions that meet the requirements of BCBS 270 (Basel III leverage ratio framework and disclosure requirements). 'Digital Operational Resilience Act (DORA)' the European Union's Digital Operational Resilience Act (Regulation (EU) 2022/2554) has applied from 17 January 2025. This EU regulation introduces comprehensive and sector specific regulation on Information Communication Technologies (ICT) risk management, ICT incident management and reporting, information sharing, digital operational resilience testing and provides for oversight by the European Supervisory Authorities of critical third-party providers servicing the EU financial services sector. 'Diversification effect' Reflects the fact that the risk of a diversified portfolio is smaller than the sum of the risks of its constituent parts. It is measured as the sum of the individual asset class Daily Value at Risk (DVaR) estimates less the total DVaR. 'Dodd-Frank Act (DFA)' The US Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010, as amended. 'Domestic Liquidity Sub-Group Arrangement' An intra-group capital and liquidity support agreement that secures certain regulatory permissions authorised by the PRA. 'Economic Value of Equity (EVE)' A measure of the potential change in value of expected future cash flows due to an adverse interest rate movement, based on existing balance sheet run-off profile. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) ‘Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) or (ESHLA portfolio)’ A Barclays UK portfolio primarily consisting of long dated fixed rate loans extended to counterparties in the UK Education, Social Housing and Local Authority sectors. ‘Effective Expected Positive Exposure (EEPE)’ The weighted average over time of effective expected exposure. The weights are the proportion that an individual exposure represents of the entire exposure horizon time interval. ‘Effective interest rate (EIR)’ As defined in IFRS 9 Financial Instruments, effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts through the expected life of the financial asset or financial liability to the gross carrying amount of a financial asset or to the amortised cost of a financial liability. ‘Eligible liabilities’ Liabilities and capital instruments that are eligible to meet MREL that do not already qualify as Own funds. ‘Encumbrance’ The use of assets to secure liabilities, such as by way of a lien or charge. ‘Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)’ The Barclays Group’s risk management responsibilities are laid out in the Enterprise Risk Management Framework, which describes how Barclays identifies and manages risk. The framework identifies the principal risks faced by the Barclays Group, sets out risk appetite requirements, sets out roles and responsibilities for risk management, and sets out risk committee structure. ‘Equities’ Trading businesses encompassing Cash Equities, Equity Derivatives & Equity Financing, part of IB. ‘Equity and stock index derivatives’ Derivatives whose value is derived from equity securities. This category includes equity and stock index swaps and options (including warrants, which are equity options listed on an exchange). The Barclays Group also enters into fund-linked derivatives, being swaps and options whose underlyings include mutual funds, hedge funds, indices and multi-asset portfolios. An equity swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange periodic payments, based upon a notional principal amount, with one side paying fixed or floating interest and the other side paying based on the actual return of the stock or stock index. An equity option provides the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a specified stock, basket of stocks or stock index at a specified price or level on or before a specified date. ‘Equity risk’ In the context of trading book capital requirements, the risk of change in market value of an equity investment. ‘Equity structural hedge’ An interest rate hedge in place to reduce earnings volatility of the overnight / short-term equity investment and to smooth the income over a medium/long term. ‘EU CRR’ Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 as amended. EU CRR prescribes prudential requirements including minimum capital requirements, for EU banks and certain other entities. EU CRR was amended by CRR III as part of the EU’s implementation of Basel 3.1. The amendments entered into force from January 2025, other than those relating to market risk, whose entry into force was delayed until January 2026 by a Delegated Act of the European Commission. In June 2025 the European Commission proposed a further delay to January 2027. ‘EU Risk Reduction Measure package’ A collection of amending Regulations and Directives that update core EU regulatory texts and which came into force on 27 June 2019. ‘Euro Interbank Offered Rate (EURIBOR)’ A benchmark interest rate at which banks can borrow funds from other banks in the European interbank market. ‘Europe’ Geographic segment comprising countries in which Barclays operates within the EU, Northern Continental and Eastern Europe. ‘European Banking Authority (EBA)’ The EBA is an independent EU authority which works to ensure effective and consistent prudential regulation and supervision across the European banking sector. Its overall objectives are to maintain financial stability in the EU and to safeguard the integrity, stability, efficiency and orderly functioning of the banking sector. ‘European Banking Union’ is an EU concept aimed at safeguarding the stability of the EU banking sector and includes as two of its pillars the SSM and SRM. ‘European Central Bank (ECB)’ The European Central Bank is responsible, among other things, for the prudential supervision of credit institutions located in EU member states participating in European Banking Union within the Single Supervisory Mechanism. ‘European Economic Area (EEA)’ The European Economic Area is a free-trade zone established by the EEA Agreement, which came into effect on January 1, 1994. It includes all 27 EU member states and 3 EFTA states (Iceland, Liechtenstein, and Norway), aiming to promote the free movement of goods, services, capital, and people within a unified market. The EEA allows the participating EFTA countries to participate fully in the EU single market without being EU members. ‘European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR)’ The European Market Infrastructure Regulation (Regulation 648/2012) imposes requirements in the EU which are designed to improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market. EMIR has operational and financial impacts on the Barclays Group, including by imposing collateral requirements and a requirement to centrally clear certain OTC derivatives contracts transacted with a broad range of market participants. ‘European Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA)’ An independent European supervisory authority with the remit of enhancing the protection of investors and reinforcing stable and well-functioning financial markets in the European Union. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) ‘Eurozone’ Represents the 20 European Union countries that have adopted the Euro as their common currency. The 20 countries are Austria, Belgium, Croatia, Cyprus, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia and Spain. ‘Exchange-traded notes (ETNs)’ Unsecured debt securities that track an underlying index of securities and trade on a stock exchange. ‘Expected Credit Losses (ECL)’ A present value measure of the credit losses expected to result from default events that may occur during a specified period of time. ECLs must reflect the present value of cash shortfalls, and the unbiased and probability weighted assessment of a range of outcomes. ‘Expected Losses’ A regulatory measure of anticipated losses for exposures captured under an Internal Ratings Based (IRB) credit risk approach for capital adequacy calculations. It is measured as the Barclays Group’s modelled view of anticipated losses based on Probability of Default (PD), Loss Given Default (LGD) and Exposure at Default (EAD), with a one-year time horizon. ‘Expert lender models’ Models of risk measures that are used for parts of the portfolio where the risk drivers are specific to a particular counterparty, but where there is insufficient data to support the construction of a statistical model. These models utilise the knowledge of credit experts that have in depth experience of the specific customer type being modelled. ‘Exposure’ Generally refers to positions or actions taken by a bank, or consequences thereof, that may put a certain amount of a bank’s resources at risk. ‘Exposure at Default (EAD)’ The estimation of the extent to which the Barclays Group may be exposed to a customer or counterparty in the event of, and at the time of, that customer’s or counterparty’s default. At default, the customer may not have drawn the loan fully or may already have repaid some of the principal, so that exposure may be less than the approved loan limit. ‘External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAI)’ Institutions whose credit assessments may be used by credit institutions for the determination of risk weight exposures according to CRR. ‘External ratings based approach / internal assessment approach (SEC-ERBA / IAA)’ This is a method to calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts for securitisation positions. Under the SEC-ERBA approach, regulatory capital is assigned to securitisation tranches on the basis of their external credit rating. The SEC-ERBA approach can also be used for unrated ABCP exposures where the institution has the regulatory permission to use the Internal Assessment Approach (IAA) to assign a credit rating to the unrated ABCP exposure. ‘Federal Housing Finance Agency (FHFA)’ An independent federal agency in the United States that oversees the secondary mortgage market and regulates Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, as well as 11 Federal Home Loan banks. The FHFA also sets the Housing Price Index (HPI) in the United States. ‘Federal Reserve Board (FRB)’ The Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, commonly known as the Federal Reserve Board, is responsible for – amongst other things – setting monetary policy in the US. ‘FICC’ Represents Macro (including rates and currency), Credit and Securitised products, part of IB. ‘Financial collateral comprehensive method (FCCM)’ A credit risk mitigation calculation approach which applies volatility adjustments to the market value of exposure and collateral when calculating RWA values. ‘Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)’ The statutory body responsible for conduct of business regulation and supervision of UK authorised firms. The FCA also has responsibility for the prudential regulation of firms that do not fall within the PRA’s scope. ‘Financial crime risk’ The risk that the Group and its associated persons (employees or third parties) commit or facilitate financial crime, and/or the Group’s products and services are used to facilitate financial crime. Financial crime undermines market integrity and may result in: harm to clients, customers, counterparties or employees; diminished confidence in financial products and services; damage to the Group’s reputation; regulatory breaches; and/or financial penalties. ‘Financial Policy Committee (FPC)’ The BoE’s Financial Policy Committee identifies, monitors and takes action to remove or reduce systemic risks with a view to protecting and enhancing the resilience of the UK financial system. The FPC also has a secondary objective to support the economic policy of the UK Government. ‘Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)’ The UK’s scheme for the compensation of customers of authorised financial services firms that are unable to pay claims. ‘Financial Stability Board (FSB)’ An international body that monitors and makes recommendations about the global financial system. It promotes international financial stability by coordinating national financial authorities and international standard-setting bodies as they work toward developing strong regulatory, supervisory and other financial sector policies. It fosters a level playing field by encouraging coherent implementation of these policies across sectors and jurisdictions. ‘Fitch’ A credit rating agency, including Fitch Ratings Inc. and its affiliated entities. ‘Forbearance Programmes’ Forbearance programmes assist customers in financial difficulty through agreements to accept less than contractual amounts due where financial distress would otherwise prevent satisfactory repayment within the original terms and conditions of the contract. These agreements may be initiated by the customer, Barclays or a third party and include approved debt counselling plans, minimum due reductions, interest rate concessions and switches from capital and interest repayments to interest-only payments. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Foreclosures in Progress' The process by which a bank initiates legal action against a customer with the intention of terminating a loan agreement whereby the bank may repossess the property used as collateral for the loan, subject to applicable law, and recover amounts it is owed. 'Foreign exchange derivatives' The Barclays Group's principal exchange rate-related contracts are forward foreign exchange contracts, currency swaps and currency options. Forward foreign exchange contracts are agreements to buy or sell a specified quantity of foreign currency, usually on a specified future date at an agreed rate. Currency swaps generally involve the exchange, or notional exchange, of equivalent amounts of two currencies and a commitment to exchange interest periodically until the principal amounts are re-exchanged on a future date. Currency options provide the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a fixed amount of a currency at a specified exchange rate on or before a future date. As compensation for assuming the option risk, the option writer generally receives a premium at the start of the option period. 'Foreign exchange risk' In the context of DVaR, the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates and volatilities. 'Foundation Internal Ratings Based (F-IRB)' See 'Internal Ratings Based (IRB)'. 'FTSE 350' The Financial Times Stock Exchange index comprising the 350 largest companies by capitalisation listed on the London Stock Exchange. 'Full time equivalent (FTE)' Full time equivalent units are the on-job hours paid for employee services divided by the number of ordinary-time hours normally paid for a full-time staff member when on the job (or contract employees where applicable). 'Fully loaded' When a measure is presented or described as being on a fully loaded basis, it is calculated without applying the transitional provisions set out in Part Ten of CRR. 'Fundamental Review of the Trading Book (FRTB)' A comprehensive suite of capital rules developed by the BCBS as part of Basel III and applicable to banks' wholesale trading activities. 'Funded credit protection' A technique of credit risk mitigation where the reduction of the credit risk on the exposure of an institution derives from the right of that institution, in the event of the default of the counterparty or on the occurrence of other specified credit events relating to the counterparty, to liquidate, or to obtain transfer or appropriation of, or to retain certain assets or amounts, or to reduce the amount of the exposure to, or to replace it with the amount of the difference between the amount of the exposure and the amount of a claim on the institution. 'FVOCI' Fair value through other comprehensive income. 'FVTPL' Fair value through profit or loss. 'FY23 Investor Update' An event held in connection with Barclays resegmentation of businesses which was announced on 20 February 2024 and is part of its strategy to become Simpler, Better and more Balanced. Introducing the new segments of Barclays UK, Barclays UK Corporate Bank, Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management, Barclays Investment Bank, Barclays US Consumer Bank and Head Office. 'Gains on acquisitions' The amount by which an acquirer's interest in the net fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities, recognised in a business combination, exceeds the cost of the combination. 'General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)' GDPR (Regulation (EU) 2016/679) is a regulation intended to strengthen and unify data protection for all individuals within the European Union. GDPR forms part of UK law (UK GDPR) pursuant to the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018, as amended and the supplemental Data Protection Act 2018. 'General market risk' The risk of a price change in a financial instrument due to a change in the level of interest rates or owing to a broad equity market movement unrelated to any specific attributes of individual securities. 'Global Markets' Offers clients a full range of liquidity, risk management and financing solutions, ideas and content tailored to their investment and risk management needs, including execution capabilities across the spectrum of financial products. 'Global Systemically Important Banks (G-SIBs or G-SIIs)' Global financial institutions whose size, complexity and systemic interconnectedness, mean that their distress or failure would cause significant disruption to the wider financial system and economic activity. The Financial Stability Board and the BCBS publish a list of global systemically important banks. 'Grandfathering' In the context of capital resources, the phasing in of the application of instrument eligibility rules, which allows formerly compliant capital instruments to be included in regulatory capital, subject to certain thresholds which decrease over the transitional period. 'Gross charge-off rates' Represents the balances charged-off to recoveries in the reporting period, expressed as a percentage of average outstanding balances excluding balances in recoveries. Charge-off to recoveries generally occurs when the collections focus switches from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the entire outstanding balance, and represents a fundamental change in the relationship between the bank and the customer. This is a measure of the proportion of customers that have gone into default during the period. 'Gross Domestic Product (GDP)' Measures the total value of goods and services produced in a country within a specific time period. 'Gross new lending' New lending advanced to customers during the period. 'Gross write-off rates' Expressed as a percentage and represent balances written off in the reporting period divided by gross loans and advances held at amortised cost at the balance sheet date. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Group net interest income excluding Barclays Investment Bank and Head Office' A measure of Barclays Group net interest income, excluding the net interest income reported in Barclays Investment Bank and Head Office. 'G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer (G-SII ALRB)' A macroprudential buffer that applies to G-SIBs and other major domestic UK banks and building societies, including banks that are subject to ring-fencing requirements. The G-SII ALRB will be calibrated as 35% of the combined buffers that apply to the bank. 'G-SII Buffer' Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to be held to ensure that G-SIBs build up surplus capital to compensate for the systemic risk that such institutions represent to the financial system. 'Guarantee' Unless otherwise described, an undertaking by a third party to pay a creditor should a debtor fail to do so. It is a form of credit substitution. 'Head Office' Comprises head office central support, central treasury operations, Barclays Execution Services assets and legacy businesses. Following the resegmentation announced at the FY23 Investor Update on 20 February 2024, Head Office also includes the German consumer finance business (sold early Q1 2025), and the Payment acceptance business (rebranded merchant acquiring business), for which a partnership with Brookfield Asset Management Ltd was announced in April 2025. 'High-Net-Worth' Businesses that provide banking and other services to high net worth customers. 'High-quality liquid assets (HQLA)' Comprise eligible and unencumbered cash or assets that can be converted into cash at little or no loss of value in private markets, to meet liquidity needs arising from a liquidity stress scenario or event. Among other things, HQLA should be unencumbered and liquid in markets during a time of stress. These include cash and claims on central governments and central banks. Please refer to 'Level 1 assets' and 'Level 2 assets'. 'High Risk' In retail banking, 'High Risk' is defined as the subset of up-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed behaviour, exhibit potential financial difficulty. Where appropriate, these customers are proactively contacted to assess whether assistance is required. 'Home loan' A loan to purchase a residential property. The property is then used as collateral to guarantee repayment of the loan. The borrower gives the lender a lien against the property and the lender can foreclose on the property if the borrower does not repay the loan per the agreed terms. Also known as a residential mortgage. 'IAASA' Irish Auditing and Accounting Supervisory Authority. 'IASB' International Accounting Standards Board. 'Identified Impairment (II)' Specific impairment allowances for financial assets, estimated individually. 'IFRS' International Financial Reporting Standards. 'IFRS 9 transitional arrangements' Following the application of IFRS 9 as of 1 January 2018, transitional arrangements under which Article 473a of CRR permits institutions to phase-in the impact on capital and leverage ratios of the impairment requirements under the new accounting standard. 'IHC' or 'US IHC' The intermediate US holding company, Barclays US LLC, which holds most of Barclays' subsidiaries and assets in the US. 'Impairment Allowances' A provision held on the balance sheet as a result of the raising of a charge against profit for expected losses in the lending book. An impairment allowance may either be identified or unidentified, and individual or collective. 'Income' Total income, unless otherwise specified. 'Incremental Risk Charge (IRC)' An estimate of the incremental risk arising from rating migrations and defaults for traded debt instruments beyond what is already captured in specific market risk VaR for the non-correlation trading portfolio. 'Independent Validation Unit (IVU)' The function within Barclays responsible for independent review, challenge and approval of all models. 'Individual liquidity guidance (ILG)' Guidance given to a bank about the amount, quality and funding profile of liquidity resources that the PRA has asked the bank to maintain. 'Inflation risk' In the context of DVaR, the impact of changes in inflation rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives. 'Inorganic activity' Refers to certain inorganic transactions announced as part of the FY23 Investor Update designed to improve Group RoTE beyond 2024. In FY24 this included the £220m loss on sale of the performing Italian retail mortgage portfolio, the £9m loss on disposal from the German consumer finance business and the £26m loss on sale of the non-performing Italian retail mortgage portfolio. This was offset by the day 1 net profit before tax of £346m from the acquisition of Tesco Bank. 'Insurance Risk' The risk of the Barclays Group's aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of insurance contracts being inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies. 'Interchange' Income paid to a credit card issuer for the clearing and settlement of a sale or cash advance transaction. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Interest-only home loans' Under the terms of these loans, the customer makes payments of interest only for the entire term of the mortgage, although customers may make early repayments of the principal within the terms of their agreement. The customer is responsible for repaying the entire outstanding principal on maturity, which may require the sale of the mortgaged property. 'Interest rate derivatives' Derivatives linked to interest rates. This category includes interest rate swaps, collars, floors options and swaptions. An interest rate swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange fixed rate and floating rate interest by means of periodic payments based upon a notional principal amount and the interest rates defined in the contract. Certain agreements combine interest rate and foreign currency swap transactions, which may or may not include the exchange of principal amounts. A basis swap is a form of interest rate swap, in which both parties exchange interest payments based on floating rates, where the floating rates are based upon different underlying reference indices. In a forward rate agreement, two parties agree a future settlement of the difference between an agreed rate and a future interest rate, applied to a notional principal amount. The settlement, which generally occurs at the start of the contract period, is the discounted present value of the payment that would otherwise be made at the end of that period. 'Interest rate risk' The risk of interest rate volatility adversely impacting the Barclays Group's NIM. In the context of the calculation of market risk DVaR, measures the impact of changes in interest (swap) rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives. 'Interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB)' The risk that the Barclays Group is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and liabilities. 'Internal Assessment Approach (IAA)' One of three types of calculation that a bank with permission to use the Internal Ratings Based (IRB) approach may apply to securitisation exposures. It consists of mapping a bank's internal rating methodology for credit exposures to those of an External Credit Assessment Institution (ECAI) to determine the appropriate risk weight based on the ratings based approach. Its applicability is limited to ABCP programmes related to liquidity facilities and credit enhancement. 'Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP)' It describes how the Barclays Group identifies, manages and qualifies the risks to which it is exposed, in pursuit of its business strategy. It assesses whether the quality and quantity of capital is available to absorb capital losses for the risks the firm undertakes. The capital adequacy is assessed on a point of time basis and on a forward looking basis taking into account baseline and stressed economic capital conditions. 'Internal Model Approach (IMA)' In the context of RWAs, a method for calculating RWAs where the exposure amount has been derived via the use of a regulator approved internal market risk model. 'Internal Model Method (IMM)' In the context of RWAs, a method for calculating RWAs where the exposure amount has been derived via the use of a regulator approved internal counterparty credit risk model. 'Internal Ratings Based (IRB)' An approach under the CRR framework that relies on the bank's internal models to derive the risk weights. The IRB approach is divided into two alternative applications, Advanced and Foundation: Advanced Internal Ratings Based (A-IRB): the bank uses its own estimates of Probability of Default (PD), Loss Given Default (LGD) and credit conversion factor to model a given risk exposure. Foundation Internal Ratings Based (F-IRB): the bank applies its own PD as for A-IRB, but it uses standard parameters for the LGD and the credit conversion factor. The F-IRB approach is specifically designed for wholesale credit exposures. Hence retail, equity, securitisation positions and non-credit obligations asset exposures are treated under standardised or A-IRB. 'Internal Ratings Based approach (SEC-IRBA)' This is a method to calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts for securitisation positions. Under this method, an institution must be able to model regulatory capital requirements for underlying exposures in the securitisation as if these had not been securitised ('KIRB'), subject to certain other inputs and criteria. 'International Corporate Bank' Provides lending, trade & working capital, liquidity, payments and FX solutions to multinational companies and financial institutions globally and to FTSE 350 companies in the UK. 'Invested assets' Invested assets (held off-balance sheet) represent assets under management and supervision. Uninvested cash held under an investment mandate and reported within customer deposits is excluded from invested assets. 'Investment Banking' Provides clients with strategic advice on mergers and acquisitions (M&A), corporate finance, financial risk management and equity and debt issuance. As part of its International Corporate Bank offering it also provides lending, trade & working capital, liquidity, payments and FX solutions to multinational companies and financial institutions globally and to FTSE 350 companies in the UK. 'Investment Banking Fees' In the context of IB analysis of total income, fees generated from origination activity businesses – including financial advisory, debt and equity underwriting. 'Investment grade' A debt security, treasury bill or similar instrument with a credit rating of AAA to BBB as measured by external credit rating agencies. 'Investor Compensation Scheme (ICS)' The Investor Compensation Directive (Directive 97/9/EC) sets out the basis for clients of investment firms (including banks that carry out investment services) to receive statutory compensation when an authorised investment firm fails. In Ireland, the Investor Compensation Act 1998 (ICA) provides for the establishment of the Investor Compensation Company DAC which administers the ICS. IPO' Initial Public Offering --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'IRB Roadmap' Contains several EBA technical standards and sets of guidelines developed with the intent to reduce unwarranted variability across firms in IRB Risk-Weighted Assets for Credit Risk. The PRA required UK firms to implement these changes from 1 January 2022. 'ISDA Master Agreement' The most commonly used master contract for over-the-counter (OTC) derivative transactions internationally. It is part of a framework of documents, designed to enable OTC derivatives to be documented fully and flexibly. The framework consists of a master agreement, a schedule, confirmations, definitions booklets, and a credit support annex. The ISDA Master Agreement is published by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA). 'Key Risk Scenarios (KRS)' Key Risk Scenarios are a summary of the extreme potential risk exposure for each key risk in each business and function, including an assessment of the potential frequency of risk events, the average size of losses and three extreme scenarios. The Key Risk Scenario assessments are a key input to the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) calculation of regulatory and economic capital requirements. 'Large exposure' A large exposure is defined as the total exposure of a bank to a counterparty or group of connected clients, whether in the banking book or trading book or both, which in aggregate equals or exceeds 10% of the bank's eligible Tier 1 capital. 'Legal risk', 'Laws, Rules and Regulations Risk' or 'LRR risk' The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet applicable laws, rules and regulations or contractual requirements or to assert or defend its intellectual property rights. 'Lending' In the context of IB analysis of total income, lending income includes NII, gains or losses on loan sale activity, and risk management activity relating to the loan portfolio. 'Letters of credit' A letter typically used for the purposes of international trade guaranteeing that a debtor's payment to a creditor will be made on time and in full. In the event that the debtor is unable to make payment, the bank will be required to cover the full or remaining amount of the purchase. 'Level 1 assets' High-quality liquid assets (HQLA) under local rules implementing the Basel Committee's Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), including cash, central bank reserves and higher quality government securities. 'Level 2 assets' High-quality liquid assets (HQLA) under local rules implementing the Basel Committee's Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), comprising Level 2A assets, including, e.g. lower quality government securities, covered bonds and corporate debt securities, and Level 2B assets, including, e.g. lower rated corporate bonds, Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities and equities that meet certain conditions. 'Lifetime expected credit losses' An assessment of expected losses associated with default events that may occur during the life of an exposure, reflecting the present value of cash shortfalls over the remaining expected life of the asset. 'Lifetime Probability' The likelihood of accounts entering default during the expected remaining life of the asset. 'Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR)' The ratio of the stock of high-quality liquid assets (HQLA) to expected net cash outflows over the next 30 days. 'Liquidity Pool' The Barclays Group liquidity pool comprises cash at central banks and highly liquid collateral specifically held by the Barclays Group as a contingency to enable the bank to meet cash outflows in the event of stressed market conditions. 'Liquidity Risk' The risk that the Barclays Group is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations, or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets. 'Liquidity risk appetite (LRA)' The level of liquidity risk that the Barclays Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. 'Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework)' The Liquidity Risk Management Framework incorporates liquidity policies, systems and controls that the Barclays Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within tolerances approved by the Board and regulatory agencies. 'Litigation and conduct charges' or 'Litigation and conduct' Litigation and conduct charges include regulatory fines, litigation settlements and conduct-related customer redress. 'Loan loss rate (LLR)' Quoted in basis points and represents total impairment charges divided by total gross loans and advances held at amortised cost (including portfolios reclassified to assets held for sale) at the balance sheet date. 'Loan to deposit ratio' or 'Loan: deposit ratio' Total loans and advances at amortised costs divided by deposits at amortised cost. 'Loan to value (LTV) ratio' Expresses the amount borrowed against an asset (i.e. a mortgage) as a percentage of the appraised value of the asset. The ratios are used in determining the appropriate level of risk for the loan and are generally reported as an average for new mortgages or an entire portfolio. Also see 'Marked to market (MTM) LTV ratio'. 'London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR)' A benchmark interest rate at which banks can borrow funds from other banks in the London interbank market, currently phased out. 'Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)' The Barclays PLC Group Long Term Incentive Plan. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Loss Given Default (LGD)' The percentage of Exposure at Default (EAD) that will not be recovered following default. LGD comprises the actual loss (the part that is not expected to be recovered), together with the economic costs associated with the recovery process. 'Management VaR' A measure of the potential loss of value arising from unfavourable market movements at a specific confidence level, if current positions were to be held unchanged for a predefined period. IB uses Management VaR with a two-year equally weighted historical period, at a 95% confidence level, with a one day holding period. 'Mandatory break clause' In the context of counterparty credit risk, a contract clause that means a trade will be ended on a particular date. 'Marked to market approach' A counterparty credit risk exposure calculation approach which uses the current marked to market value of derivative positions as well as a potential future exposure add-on to calculate an exposure to which a risk weight can be applied. This is also known as the Current Exposure Method. 'Marked to market (MTM) LTV ratio' The loan amount as a percentage of the current value of the asset used to secure the loan. Also see 'Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio' and 'Valuation weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio'. 'Market risk' The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the Barclays Group's assets and liabilities from fluctuations in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations. 'Master netting agreement' An agreement that provides for a single net settlement of all financial instruments and collateral covered by the agreement in the event of the counterparty's default, bankruptcy or insolvency, resulting in a reduced exposure. 'Master trust securitisation programme' A securitisation structure where a trust is set up for the purpose of acquiring a pool of receivables. The trust issues multiple series of securities backed by these receivables. 'Material Risk Takers (MRTs)' Categories of staff whose professional activities have or are deemed to have a material impact on Barclays' risk profile, as determined in accordance with the European Banking Authority regulatory technical standard on the identification of such staff. 'Maximum Distributable Amount (MDA)' The MDA is a factor representing the available distributable profit of an institution whilst remaining in excess of its Combined Buffer Requirement (CBR). UK and EU regulations place restrictions on a bank's dividend, AT1 securities coupon and variable compensation decisions depending on its proximity to meeting the buffer. 'Medium-Term Notes (MTNs)' Corporate notes (or debt securities) continuously offered by a company to investors through a broker dealer. MTN tenors from under 1 year to 30 years. They can be issued with a fixed or floating interest rate or with a more complex calculation of the interest rate; with a fixed maturity date (non-callable) or with embedded call or put options or early repayment triggers. MTNs are most generally issued as senior, unsecured debt. 'Methodology and policy' In the context of the Capital Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly or half yearly results), the effect on RWAs of methodology changes driven by regulatory policy changes. 'MiFID II' Refers to either the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive 2014/65/EC and the Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation 600/2014 (as amended), which together are European Union laws that provide harmonised regulation for investment services across the member states of the European Economic Area, or these rules and regulations as they form part of UK law pursuant to the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (as amended), as applicable. 'Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)' A European Union-wide requirement under the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive for all European banks and investment banks to hold a minimum level of equity and/or loss absorbing eligible liabilities to ensure the operation of the bail-in tool to absorb losses and recapitalise an institution in resolution, or these rules and regulations as they form part of UK law pursuant to the UK transposition of the Directive and the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (as amended). An institution's MREL requirement is set by its resolution authority. 'Model risk' The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports. 'Model updates' In the context of the Capital Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly or half yearly results), changes in RWAs caused by model implementation, changes in model scope or any changes required to address model malfunctions. 'Model validation' Process through which models are independently challenged, tested and verified to prove that they have been built, implemented and used correctly, and that they continue to be fit-for-purpose. 'Modelled VaR' In the context of RWAs, market risk calculated using Value at Risk (VaR) models laid down by the CRR and supervised by the PRA. 'Money market funds' Investment funds typically invested in short-term debt securities such as CP. 'Monoline derivatives' Derivatives with a monoline insurer such as credit default swaps referencing the underlying exposures held. 'Moody's' A credit rating agency, including Moody's Investors Service, Inc. and its affiliated entities. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Mortgage Servicing Rights (MSR)' A contractual agreement in which the right to service an existing mortgage is sold by the original lender to another party that specialises in the various functions involved with servicing mortgages. 'Multilateral development banks' Financial institutions created for the purposes of development, where membership transcends national boundaries. 'Net asset value per share' Calculated by dividing shareholders' equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments, by the number of issued ordinary shares. 'Net Interest Income (NII)' The difference between interest income on assets and interest expense on liabilities. 'Net Interest Margin (NIM)' Net interest income divided by the sum of average customer assets. 'Net investment income' Changes in the fair value of financial instruments designated at fair value, dividend income and the net result on disposal of available for sale assets. 'Net new assets under management' The net inflows and outflows of client balances within discretionary portfolio management and advisory mandates. Excludes market performance and foreign exchange translation but includes reinvested dividend payments. 'Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)' The ratio of available stable funding to required stable funding over a one-year time horizon, assuming a stressed scenario. The ratio is required to be over 100%. Available stable funding would include items such as equity capital, preferred stock with a maturity of over one year, or liabilities with a maturity of over one year. The required amount of stable funding is calculated as the sum of the value of the assets held and funded by the institution, multiplied by a specific required stable funding factor assigned to each particular asset type, added to the amount of potential liquidity exposure multiplied by its associated required stable funding factor. 'Net trading income' Gains and losses arising from trading positions which are held at fair value, in respect of both market-making and customer business, together with interest, dividends and funding costs relating to trading activities. 'Net write-off rate' Expressed as a percentage and represents balances written off in the reporting period less any post write-off recoveries divided by gross loans and advances held at amortised cost at the balance sheet date. 'Net written credit protection' In the context of leverage exposure, the net notional value of credit derivatives protection sold and credit derivatives protection bought. 'New bookings' The total of the original balance on accounts opened in the reporting period, including any applicable fees and charges included in the loan amount. 'Non-asset backed debt instruments' Debt instruments not backed by collateral, including government bonds, US agency bonds, corporate bonds, commercial paper, certificates of deposit, convertible bonds, corporate bonds and issued notes. 'Non-Traded Market Risk' The risk that the current or future exposure in the banking book (i.e. non-traded book) will impact the bank's capital and/or earnings due to adverse movements in Interest or foreign exchange rates. 'Non-Traded VaR' Reflects the volatility in the value of the fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) investments in the liquidity pool which flow directly through capital via the FVOCI reserve. The underlying methodology to calculate non-traded VaR is similar to Traded Management VaR, but the two measures are not directly comparable. The Non-Traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the FVOCI exposures. These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment. 'Notch' A single unit of measurement in a credit rating scale. 'Notional amount' The nominal or face amount of a financial instrument, such as a loan or a derivative, that is used to calculate payments made on that instrument. 'Open Banking' The Payment Services Directive (PSD2) and the Open API standards and data sharing remedy imposed by the UK Competition and Markets Authority following its Retail Banking Market Investigation Order. 'Operating leverage' Operating expenses compared to total income less credit impairment charges and other provisions. 'Operational risk' The risk of loss to the Barclays Group from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to external events (e.g. fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks. 'Operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct' A measure of total operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct charges. 'Operating costs' A measure of total operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct charges and UK regulatory levies. 'Operational Riskdata eXchange Association (ORX)' A not-for-profit industry association dedicated to advancing the measurement and management of operational risk in the global financial services industry. Barclays is a member of ORX. 'Origination led' Focus on high-margin, low-capital fee-based activities and related hedging opportunities. 'O-SII Buffer' CET1 capital required to be held under the UK and EU regimes to ensure that Other Systemically Important Institutions (O-SIIs) build up surplus capital to compensate for the systemic risk that such institutions represent to the financial system. 'Other systemically important institutions (O-SII)' Other systemically important institutions are institutions that are deemed to create risk to financial stability due to their systemic importance. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Over-issuance of Securities' Over-issuance of securities under Barclays Bank PLC's US shelf registration statements on Form F-3 filed with the US Securities and Exchange Commission in 2018 and 2019. 'Over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives' Derivative contracts that are traded (and privately negotiated) directly between two parties. They offer flexibility because, unlike standardised exchange-traded products, they can be tailored to fit specific needs. 'Overall capital requirement' The overall capital requirement is the sum of capital required to meet the total of a Pillar 1 requirement, a Pillar 2A requirement, a Global Systemically Important Institution (G-SII) buffer, a Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) and a Countercyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB). 'Own credit' The effect of changes in the Barclays Group's own credit standing on the fair value of financial liabilities. 'Own funds' The sum of Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital. 'Own funds and eligible liabilities ratio' A risk-based ratio representing the Own funds and eligible liabilities of the institution expressed as a percentage of total RWAs. 'Owner occupied mortgage' A mortgage where the intention of the customer at origination was to occupy the property. 'Partner profit share' Payments made to partners based on the financial performance of the credit card portfolios. 'Past due items' Refers to loans where the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of the loan contract. 'Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) redress' Provision for the settlement of PPI mis-selling claims and related claims management costs. 'Pension Risk' The risk of the Barclays Group's earnings and capital being adversely impacted by the Barclays Group's defined benefit obligations increasing or the value of the assets backing these defined benefit obligations decreasing due to changes in both the level and volatility of prices. 'Performance costs' The accounting charge recognised in the period for performance awards. For deferred incentives and long-term incentives, the accounting charge is spread over the relevant periods in which the employee delivers service. 'Period end allocated tangible equity' Allocated tangible equity is calculated as 13.5% (2024: 13.5%) of RWAs for each business, adjusted for capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting assumptions the Barclays Group uses for capital planning purposes. Head Office allocated tangible equity represents the difference between the Barclays Group's tangible shareholders' equity and the amounts allocated to businesses. 'Period end tangible shareholder's equity' (for Barclays Group) Shareholders' equity attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent, adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. 'Period end tangible shareholder's equity (for businesses)' Allocated tangible equity is calculated as 13.5% (2024: 13.5%) of RWAs for each business, adjusted for capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Barclays Group uses for capital planning purposes. Head Office allocated tangible equity represents the difference between the Barclays Group's tangible shareholders' equity and the amounts allocated to businesses. 'Personal Banking' One of three segments within Barclays UK. The business within the UK that offers retail solutions to help customers with their day-to-day banking needs. 'Pillar 1 requirements' The minimum regulatory capital requirements under CRR, covering credit (including counterparty credit) risk, market risk operational risk, settlement risk and CVA. 'Pillar 2A requirements' The additional regulatory capital requirement to meet risks not captured under Pillar 1 requirements. These requirements are the outcome of the bank's ICAAP and the complementary supervisory review and evaluation carried out by the relevant regulator. 'Pillar Two' The UK implemented Pillar Two legislation in the Finance (No.2) Act 2023 to introduce the OECD's global minimum tax rules for accounting periods beginning on or after 31 December 2023. The EU Minimum Tax Directive (Pillar Two) (Council Directive (EU) 2022/2523) entered into force on 23 December 2022 and requires all member states to apply a Qualifying Domestic Minimum Top-up Tax (QDMTT) to in scope multi-national groups within the EU. 'Post-Model Adjustment (PMA)' In the context of Basel models, a PMA is a short-term increase in regulatory capital applied at portfolio level to account for model input data deficiencies, inadequate model performance or changes to regulatory definitions (e.g. definition of default) to ensure the model output is accurate, complete and appropriate. 'Potential Future Exposure (PFE) on derivatives' A regulatory calculation in respect of the Barclays Group's potential future credit exposure on both exchange traded and OTC derivatives, calculated by assigning a standardised percentage (based on the underlying risk category and residual trade maturity) to the gross notional value of each contract. 'PRA waivers' PRA approvals which modify or waive existing rules. Waivers are specific to an organisation and require applications being submitted to and approved by the PRA. 'Primary securitisations' The issuance of securities (bonds and commercial papers) for fund-raising. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Primary Stress Tests' In the context of Traded Market Risk and Stress Testing, Primary Stress Tests apply stress moves to key liquidity risk factors for each of the major trading asset classes. 'Prime Services' Involves financing of fixed income and equity positions using Repo and stock lending facilities. The Prime Services business also provides brokerage facilitation services for hedge fund clients offering execution and clearance facilities for a variety of asset classes. 'Principal' In the context of a debt liability, the total amount borrowed, or the part of the amount borrowed which remains unpaid (excluding interest). 'Principal Risks' The principal risks affecting the Barclays Group, as described in the Risk Review section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report. 'Private equity investments' Investments in equity securities in operating companies not quoted on a public exchange. Investment in private equity often involves the investment of capital in private companies or the acquisition of a public company that results in the delisting of public equity. Capital for private equity investment is raised by retail or institutional investors and used to fund investment strategies such as leveraged buyouts, venture capital, growth capital, distressed investments and mezzanine capital. 'Pro-cyclicality' Movements in financial variables (including capital requirements) following natural fluctuations in the economic cycle, where the subsequent impact on lending or other market behaviours acts as an amplification of the economic cycle by the financial sector. 'Probability of Default (PD)' The likelihood that a loan will not be repaid and will fall into default. PD may be calculated for each client who has a loan (normally applicable to wholesale customers/clients) or for a portfolio of clients with similar attributes (normally applicable to retail customers). To calculate PD, Barclays assesses the credit quality of borrowers and other counterparties and assigns them an internal risk rating. Multiple rating methodologies may be used to inform the rating decision on individual large credits, such as internal and external models, rating agency ratings, and for wholesale assets, market information such as credit spreads. For smaller credits, a single source may suffice such as the result from an internal rating model. 'Product structural hedge' An interest rate hedge put in place to reduce earnings volatility on product balances with instant access (such as non-interest bearing current accounts and managed rate deposits) and to smoothen the income over a medium/long term. 'Profit before impairment' Calculated by excluding credit impairment charges or releases from profit before tax. 'Properties in Possession held as 'Loans and Advances to Customers' Properties in the UK and Italy where the customer continues to retain legal title but where the bank has enforced the possession order as part of the foreclosure process to allow for the disposal of the asset or the court has ordered the auction of the property. 'Properties in Possession held as 'Other Real Estate Owned' Properties in South Africa where the bank has taken legal ownership of the title as a result of purchase at an auction or similar and treated as 'Other Real Estate Owned' within other assets on the bank's balance sheet. 'Proprietary trading' When a bank, brokerage or other financial institution trades on its own account, at its own risk, rather than on behalf of customers, so as to make a profit for itself. 'Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA)' The PRA is part of the BoE and regulates and supervises banks, building societies, insurers and a small number of significant investment banks in the UK. 'Prudential Valuation Adjustment (PVA)' A calculation which adjusts the accounting values of positions held on the balance sheet at fair value to comply with regulatory valuation standards, which place greater emphasis on the inherent uncertainty around the value at which a trading book position could be exited. 'Public benchmark' Unsecured medium-term notes issued in public syndicated transactions. 'Qualifying central bank claims' An amount calculated in line with the PRA rules allowing banks to exclude claims on the central bank from the calculation of the leverage exposure measure, as long as these amounts are matched by liabilities denominated in the same currency and of identical or longer maturity. 'Qualifying Revolving Retail Exposure (QRRE)' In the context of the IRB approach to credit risk RWA calculations, an exposure meeting the criteria set out in Article 154(4) of UK CRR and Article 147(5a) of EU CRR (as applicable). It includes most types of credit card exposure. 'Rates' In the context of IB income analysis, trading revenue relating to government bonds and interest rate derivatives. 'Re-aging' The returning of a delinquent account to up-to-date status without collecting the full arrears (principal, interest and fees). 'Real Estate Mortgage Investment Conduits (REMICs)' An entity that holds a fixed pool of mortgages and that is separated into multiple classes of interests for issuance to investors. 'Recovery book' Represents the total amount of exposure which has been transferred to recovery units who set and implement strategies to recover the Barclays Group's exposure. 'Recovery book Impairment Coverage Ratio' Impairment allowance held against recoveries balances expressed as a percentage of balance in recoveries. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) ‘Recovery book proportion of outstanding balances’ Represents the amount of recoveries (gross month-end customer balances of all accounts that have charged-off) as at the period end compared to total outstanding balances. The size of the recovery book would ultimately have an impact on the overall impairment requirement on the portfolio. Balances in recovery will decrease if assets are written-off, amounts are collected, or assets are sold to a third party (i.e. debt sale). ‘Regulatory capital’ The amount of capital that a bank holds to satisfy regulatory requirements. ‘Renegotiated loans’ Loans are generally renegotiated either as part of an ongoing customer relationship or in response to an adverse change in the circumstances of the borrower. In the latter case, renegotiation can result in an extension of the due date of payment or repayment plans under which the Barclays Group offers a concessionary rate of interest to genuinely distressed borrowers. This will result in the asset continuing to be overdue, and individually impaired if the renegotiated payments of interest and principal will not recover the original carrying amount of the asset. In other cases, renegotiation will lead to a new agreement, which is treated as a new loan. ‘Repurchase agreement (Repo)’ or ‘Reverse repurchase agreement (Reverse repo)’ Arrangements that allow counterparties to use financial securities as collateral for an interest bearing cash loan. The borrower agrees to sell a security to the lender subject to a commitment to repurchase the asset at a specified price on a given date. For the party selling the security (and agreeing to repurchase it in the future), it is a repurchase agreement or repo; for the counterparty to the transaction (buying the security and agreeing to sell in the future), it is a reverse repurchase agreement or reverse repo. ‘Reputation risk’ The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the Barclays Group’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public. ‘Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities (RMBS)’ Securities that represent interests in a group of residential mortgages. Investors in these securities have the right to cash received from future mortgage payments (interest and/or principal). ‘Residual maturity’ The remaining contractual term of a credit obligation associated with a credit exposure. ‘Restructured loans’ Comprises loans where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. Where the concession results in the expected cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate being less than the loan’s carrying value, an impairment allowance will be raised. ‘Retail Loans’ Loans to individuals or small and medium sized enterprises rather than to financial institutions and larger businesses. It includes both secured and unsecured loans such as mortgages and credit card balances, as well as loans to certain smaller business customers, typically with exposures up to £3 million or with an annual turnover of up to £5 million. ‘Return on average Risk Weighted Assets (RoRWA)’ Statutory profit after tax as a proportion of average RWAs. ‘Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity (RoTE)’ (for Barclays Group) Annualised Group attributable profit, as a proportion of average shareholders’ tangible equity. ‘Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity (RoTE)’ (for businesses) Annualised business attributable profit, as a proportion of that business’s average allocated tangible equity. ‘Risk appetite’ The level of risk that Barclays is prepared to accept whilst pursuing its business strategy, recognising a range of possible outcomes as business plans are implemented. ‘Risks not in VaR (RNIVs)’ Refers to all the key market risks which are not captured or not well captured within the VaR model framework. ‘Risk weighted assets (RWAs) / Risk weighted exposure amounts (RWEAs)’ A measure of a bank’s assets adjusted for their associated risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the Basel framework as implemented in local law. ## RWA Flow / movements in RWAs ### Book size/Asset size #### Credit risk and counterparty risk (including CVA) This represents RWA movements driven by changes in the size and composition of underlying positions, measured using EAD values for existing portfolios over the period. This includes, but is not exclusive to: - new business and maturing loans - changes in product mix and exposure growth for existing portfolios - book size reductions owing to risk mitigation and write-offs. #### Market risk This represents RWA movements owing to the changes in risk level i.e. trading positions and volumes driven by business activity. ### Book quality/Asset quality #### Credit risk and counterparty risk (including CVA) This represents RWA movements driven by changes in the underlying credit quality and recoverability of portfolios and reflected through model calibrations or realignments where applicable. This includes, but is not exclusive to: - PD migration and LGD changes driven by economic conditions - ratings migration for standardised exposures --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) ## Market risk This is the movement in RWAs owing to changing risk levels in the trading book caused by fluctuations in market conditions. ## Model updates ### Credit risk and counterparty risk (including CVA) This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external model updates. This includes, but is not exclusive to: - updates to existing model inputs driven by both internal and external review - model enhancements to improve models performance ## Market risk This is the movement in RWAs reflecting change in model scope, changes to market data levels, volatilities, correlations, liquidity and ratings used as input for the internal modelled RWA calculations. ## Methodology and policy ### Credit risk and counterparty risk (including CVA) This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external methodology, policy and regulatory changes. This includes, but is not exclusive to: - updates to RWA calculation methodology, communicated by the regulator - the implementation of credit risk mitigation to a wider scope of portfolios ## Market risk This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external methodology, policy and regulatory changes for market risk. ## Acquisitions and disposals This is the movement in RWAs as a result of the disposal or acquisition of business operations impacting the size of banking and trading portfolios. ## Foreign exchange movements This is the movement in RWAs as a result of changes in the exchange rate between the functional currency of the Barclays business area or portfolio and our presentational currency for consolidated reporting. It should be noted that foreign exchange movements shown in RWA flow or movements in RWAs tables do not include the impact of foreign exchange for the counterparty credit risk or market risk RWAs. ## Other This is the movement in RWAs driven by items that cannot be reasonably assigned to the other driver categories. In relation to market risk RWAs, this includes changes in measurement that are not driven by methodology, policy or model updates. ‘Sarbanes-Oxley requirements’ The Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 (SOX), which was introduced by the government of the United States to safeguard against corporate governance scandals. ‘Secondary Stress Tests’ Secondary Stress Tests are used in measuring potential losses arising from illiquid market risks that cannot be hedged or reduced within the time period covered in Primary Stress Tests. ‘Second Lien’ Debt that is issued against the same collateral as higher lien debt but that is subordinate to such higher lien debt. In the case of default, compensation for this debt will only be received after the first lien has been repaid and thus represents a riskier investment than the first lien. ‘Secured Overnight Financing Rate (SOFR)’ A broad measure of the cost of borrowing cash overnight collateralised by US Treasury securities in the Repo market. ‘Securities Financing Transactions (SFT)’ In the context of RWAs, any of the following transactions: a repurchase transaction, a securities or commodities lending or borrowing transaction, or a margin lending transaction whereby cash collateral is received or paid in respect of the transfer of a related asset. ‘Securities Financing Transactions adjustments’ In the context of a bank’s leverage ratio, a regulatory add-on calculated as exposure less collateral, taking into account master netting agreements. ‘Securities lending arrangements’ Arrangements whereby securities are legally transferred to a third party subject to an agreement to return them at a future date. The counterparty generally provides collateral against non-performance in the form of cash or other assets. ‘Securitisation’ Typically, a process by which debt instruments, such as mortgage loans or credit card balances, are aggregated into a pool, which is used to back new securities. A company sells these pools of assets to a special purpose vehicle (SPV) which then issues securities backed by the assets. This allows the credit quality of the assets to be separated from the credit rating of the original borrower. ‘Set-off clauses’ In the context of counterparty credit risk, contract clauses that allow Barclays to set off amounts owed to us by a counterparty against amounts owed by us to the counterparty. ‘Settlement balances’ Receivables or payables recorded between the date (the trade date) a financial instrument (such as a bond) is sold, purchased or otherwise closed out, and the date the asset is delivered by or to the entity (the settlement date) and cash is received or paid. ‘Settlement Netting’ Netting approach used in the calculation of the leverage exposure measure whereby firms may calculate their exposure value of regular way purchases and sales awaiting settlement. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) ‘Settlement risk’ The risk that settlement in a transfer system will not take place as expected, usually owing to a party defaulting on one or more settlement obligations. ‘Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SICR)’ Barclays assesses when a significant increase in credit risk has occurred based on quantitative and qualitative assessments. ‘Single Resolution Board (SRB)’ The Single Resolution Board is the central resolution authority within the European Banking Union, established to ensure an orderly resolution of failing banks with minimal impact on the economy and public finances. It was created in 2015 as part of the broader banking union reforms and acts as the bank resolution authority for a subset of banks in the euro area. The SRB's mission is to avoid future bailouts by placing the burden of resolution on the banks themselves. ‘Single Resolution Fund (SRF)’ is an emergency fund that may be used as part of the SRM. Institutions that come within the scope of the SRMR are required to make ex-ante contributions to the SRF calculated by the SRB (in accordance with the SRMR) on an annual basis ‘Single Resolution Mechanism Regulation (SRMR)’ The Single Resolution Mechanism Regulation (Regulation 806/2014) established the single resolution mechanism (SRM), which is comprised of the Single Resolution Board (SRB) and the National Resolution Authorities of participating countries. The purpose of the SRMR is to ensure an orderly resolution of failing banks with minimal costs for taxpayers and to the real economy. ‘Single Supervisory Mechanism (SSM)’ The Single Supervisory Mechanism is a framework for the prudential supervision of credit institutions located in EU member states participating in European Banking Union, primarily overseen by the European Central Bank (ECB) and also comprising the national competent authorities of the participating member states. It aims to ensure the safety and stability of the European banking system by coordinating the supervision of significant institutions across member states. ‘Slotting’ Slotting is internal Barclays terminology for what is known as “Specialised Lending” in the IRB approach. A standard set of rules is required to be used in credit risk RWA calculations, based upon an assessment of factors such as the financial strength of the counterparty. The requirements for the application of the Specialised Lending approach are detailed in Article 153(5) of CRR. ‘Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises (SME)’ An enterprise which employs fewer than 250 persons and which has an annual turnover which does not exceed EUR 50 million, and / or an annual balance sheet total not exceeding EUR 43 million. Within the SME category, a small enterprise is defined as an enterprise which employs fewer than 50 persons and whose annual turnover and/or annual balance sheet total does not exceed EUR 10 million. This is defined in accordance with Commission Recommendation 2003/361/EC of 6 May 2003 concerning the definition of micro, small and medium sized enterprises. ‘Software intangibles benefit’ A benefit introduced as part of the EU response package to the COVID-19 pandemic and subsequently reversed in the UK. Since 1 January 2022, software assets are fully deducted from CET 1 capital under UK rules. ‘Sovereign exposure(s)’ Exposures to central governments, including holdings in government bonds and local government bonds. ‘Special purpose entity’ A legally separate vehicle established to carry out a specific financial or operational objective, such as isolating risk or facilitating securitisation. It is typically structured to be bankruptcy-remote, ensuring its obligations remain independent of the financial position of the sponsoring organisation. SPEs may be subsidiaries or orphan entities, depending on the intended legal and accounting treatment. ‘Specific market risk’ A risk that is due to the individual nature of an asset and can potentially be diversified or the risk of a price change in an investment due to factors related to the issuer or, in the case of a derivative, the issuer of the underlying investment. ‘Spread risk’ Measures the impact of changes to the swap spread, i.e. the difference between swap rates and government bond yields. ‘Stage 1’ This represents financial instruments where the credit risk of the financial instrument has not increased significantly since initial recognition. Stage 1 financial instruments are required to recognise a 12-month expected credit loss allowance. ‘Stage 2’ This represents financial instruments where the credit risk of the financial instrument has increased significantly since initial recognition. Stage 2 financial instruments are required to recognise a lifetime expected credit loss allowance. ‘Stage 3’ This represents financial instruments where the financial instrument is considered impaired. Stage 3 financial instruments are required to recognise a lifetime expected credit loss allowance. ‘Standard & Poor’s’ A credit rating agency, including S&P Global Inc. and its affiliated entities. ‘Standardised Approach’ / ‘STD’ A method of calculating RWAs that relies on a mandatory framework set by the regulator to derive risk weights based on counterparty type and credit rating. ‘Standardised Approach (SEC-SA)’ This is a method to calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts for securitisation positions. Under this method, an institution must be able to calculate regulatory capital requirements per standardised approach for underlying exposures in the securitisation as if these had not been securitised (‘KSA’), subject to certain other inputs and criteria. ‘Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments’ Agreements to lend to a customer in the future, subject to certain conditions. Such commitments are either made for a fixed period, or have no specific maturity but are cancellable by the lender subject to notice requirements. ‘Statutory’ Line items of income, expense, profit or loss, assets, liabilities or equity stated in accordance with the requirements of the UK Companies Act 2006 and the requirements of IFRS. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'Statutory return on average shareholders' equity' Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders as a proportion of average shareholders' equity. 'Sterling Over Night Index Average (SONIA)' A risk free interest rate that reflects banks' and building societies' wholesale overnight funding rates in the sterling unsecured market administrated and calculated by the BoE. 'Stress Testing' A process which involves identifying possible future adverse events or changes in economic conditions that could have unfavourable effects on the Barclays Group (either financial or non-financial), assessing the Barclays Group's ability to withstand such changes, and identifying management actions to mitigate the impact. 'Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR)' An estimate of the potential loss arising from a 12-month period of significant financial stress calibrated to 99% confidence level over a 10-day holding period. 'Structural cost actions (SCA)' Cost actions taken to improve future financial performance. 'Structural FX' Foreign currency positions taken to hedge against the adverse effect of exchange rates on capital ratios. Under Article 352(2) of UK CRR the PRA may permit banks to exclude such Structural FX positions from the calculation of its market risk RWAs. On 15 December 2021 the PRA issued Barclays this permission, taking effect from 31 December 2021. Any FX positions that are in excess of what is required to hedge the adverse effects of exchange rates on the bank's capital ratio are not in scope of this exemption and will therefore be captured under the standardised market risk approach. 'Structural hedge' or 'hedging' An interest rate hedge in place to reduce earnings volatility and to smooth the income over a medium/long term on positions that exist within the balance sheet and do not re-price in line with market rates. See also 'Equity structural hedge' and 'Product structural hedge'. 'Structural model of default' A model based on the assumption that an obligor will default when its assets are insufficient to cover its liabilities. 'Structured credit' Includes the legacy structured credit portfolio primarily comprising derivative exposures and financing exposures to structured credit vehicles. 'Structured entity' An entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding control. Structured entities are generally created to achieve a narrow and well defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities. 'Structured finance or structured notes' A structured note is an investment tool that pays a return linked to the value or level of a specified asset or index and sometimes offers capital protection if the value declines. Structured notes can be linked to equities, interest rates, funds, commodities and foreign currency. 'Sub-prime' Sub-prime is defined as loans to borrowers typically having weakened credit histories that include payment delinquencies and potentially more severe problems such as court judgments and bankruptcies. They may also display reduced repayment capacity as measured by credit scores, high debt-to-income ratios, or other criteria indicating heightened risk of default. 'Subordinated liabilities' Liabilities which, in the event of insolvency or liquidation of the issuer, are subordinated to the claims of depositors and other creditors of the issuer. 'Supranational bonds' Bonds issued by an international organisation, where membership transcends national boundaries (e.g. the European Union or World Trade Organisation). 'Synthetic Securitisation Transactions' Securitisation transactions effected through the use of derivatives. 'Tangible Net Asset Value (TNAV)' Shareholders' equity excluding non-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. 'Tangible Net Asset Value per share' Calculated by dividing shareholders' equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments, less goodwill and intangible assets, by the number of issued ordinary shares. 'Tangible shareholders' equity' Shareholders' equity excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. 'Term premium' Additional interest required by investors to hold assets with a longer period to maturity. 'Tesco Bank' The retail banking business acquired from Tesco Personal Finance plc on 1 November 2024, which includes credit cards, unsecured personal loans, savings and operating infrastructure. 'The Standardised Approach (TSA)' An approach used to quantify required capital for operational risk. Under TSA, banks are required to hold regulatory capital for operational risk equal to the annual average, calculated over a rolling three-year period, of the relevant income indicator (across all business lines), multiplied by a supervisory defined percentage factor by business lines. 'The three lines of defence' The three lines of defence operating model enables Barclays to separate risk management activities between those client facing areas of the Barclays Group and associated support functions responsible for identifying risk, operating within applicable limits and escalating risk events (first line); colleagues in Risk and Compliance who establish the limits, rules and constraints under which the first line operates and monitor their performance against those limits and constraints (second line); and, colleagues in Internal Audit who provide assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control over risks --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) (third line). The Legal function does not sit in any of the three lines, but supports them all. The Legal function is, however, subject to oversight from Risk and Compliance with respect to its own Operational and Compliance Risks, as well as with respect to the Legal Risk to which Barclays is exposed. 'Third country' As defined in CRR, a country or territory outside the United Kingdom. 'Third Party Service Providers (TPSP)' Third Party Service Provider means any entity that has entered an arrangement with Barclays in order to provide business functions, activities, goods and/or services to Barclays. 'Through-the-cycle' A long-run average through a full economic cycle 'Tier 1 capital' The sum of the Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital. 'Tier 1 capital ratio' The ratio which expresses Tier 1 capital as a percentage of RWAs under CRR. 'Tier 2 (T2) capital' A type of capital as defined in CRR principally composed of capital instruments, subordinated loans and share premium accounts where qualifying conditions have been met. 'Tier 2 (T2) securities' Securities that are treated as Tier 2 (T2) capital. 'Total balances on forbearance programmes coverage ratio' Impairment allowance held against forbearance balances expressed as a percentage of balance in forbearance. 'Total capital ratio' Total regulatory capital as a percentage of RWAs. 'Total Loss Absorbing Capacity (TLAC)' A standard published by the FSB which is applicable to G-SIBs and requires a G-SIB to hold a prescribed minimum level of instruments and liabilities that should be readily available for bail-in within resolution to absorb losses and recapitalise the institution. See also 'Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)'. 'Total outstanding balance' In retail banking, total outstanding balance is defined as the gross month-end customer balances on all accounts, including accounts charged off to recoveries. 'Total return swap' An instrument whereby the seller of protection receives the full return of the asset, including both the income and change in the capital value of the asset. The buyer of the protection in return receives a predetermined amount. 'Traded Market Risk' The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions. 'Trading book' All positions in financial instruments and commodities held by an institution either with trading intent, or in order to hedge positions held with trading intent. 'Traditional Securitisation Transactions' Securitisation transactions in which an underlying pool of assets generates cash flows to service payments to investors. 'Transitional' When a measure is presented or described as being on a transitional basis, it is calculated in accordance with the transitional provisions set out in CRR. 'Treasury and Capital Risk' This comprises of Liquidity Risk, Capital Risk and Interest Rate Risk in the banking book. 'Twelve month expected credit losses' The portion of the lifetime ECL arising if default occurs within 12 months of the reporting date (or shorter period if the expected life is less than 12 months), weighted by the probability of said default occurring. 'Twelve month PD' The likelihood of accounts entering default within 12 months of the reporting date. 'Unencumbered' Assets not used to secure liabilities or otherwise pledged. 'United Kingdom (UK)' Geographic segment where Barclays operates comprising the UK. 'UK bank levy' A levy that applies to UK banks, building societies and the UK operations of foreign banks. The levy is payable based on a portion of the UK chargeable equity and liabilities of the bank on its balance sheet date. 'UK Cards' Suite of credit cards offered to individual consumers located in the UK to suit their borrowing needs e.g. purchase spend, balance transfer, or rewards. This includes the Tesco Bank cards. 'UK Personal Loans' Individual unsecured personal loans predominantly recruited from the Group's current account base in the UK. This includes the Tesco Bank loans portfolio. 'UK CRR' Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, as amended, as it forms part of UK law by virtue of the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018, as amended. UK CRR prescribes prudential requirements, including minimum capital requirements, for UK banks and certain other entities. 'UK leverage exposure' Calculated as per the PRA Rulebook, where the exposure calculation also includes the FPC's recommendation to allow banks to exclude claims on the central bank from the calculation of the leverage exposure measure, as long as these are matched by liabilities denominated in the same currency and of identical or longer maturity. 'UK leverage ratio' As per the PRA Rulebook, means a bank's Tier 1 capital divided by its total exposure measure, with this ratio expressed as a percentage. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on form 20-F # Glossary of Terms (continued) 'UK regulatory levies' Comprises the BoE levy scheme and the UK bank levy. 'Unfunded credit protection' A technique of credit risk mitigation where the reduction of the credit risk on the exposure of an institution derives from the obligation of a third party to pay an amount in the event of the default of the borrower or the occurrence of other specified credit events. 'US Partner Portfolio' Barclays co-branded credit card programmes with companies across various sectors including but not limited to travel, entertainment and retail. 'US Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities' Securities that represent interests in a group of US residential mortgages. 'Valuation weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio' In the context of credit risk disclosures on secured home loans, a means of calculating marked to market LTVs derived by comparing total outstanding balance and the value of total collateral we hold against these balances. Valuation weighted Loan to Value ratio is calculated using the following formula: LTV = total outstandings in portfolio/total property values of total outstandings in portfolio. 'Value at Risk (VaR)' A measure of the potential loss of value arising from unfavourable market movements at a specific confidence level and within a specific timeframe. 'Weighted off balance sheet commitments' Regulatory add-ons to the leverage exposure measure based on credit conversion factors used in the Standardised Approach to credit risk. 'Wholesale loans' or 'wholesale lending' Lending to larger businesses, financial institutions and sovereign entities. 'WM&I' The Wealth Management & Investments business, which was transferred from Barclays UK to PBWM on 1 May 2023. 'Working Group on Sterling Risk-Free Reference Rates (RFRWG)' A group mandated with catalysing a broad-based transition to using SONIA as the primary sterling interest rate benchmark in bond, loan and derivatives markets. 'Write-off (gross)' The point where it is determined that an asset is irrecoverable, or it is no longer considered economically viable to try to recover the asset or it is deemed immaterial or full and final settlement is reached and the shortfall written off. In the event of write-off, the customer balance is removed from the balance sheet and the impairment allowance held against the asset is released. Net write-offs represent gross write-offs less post write-off recoveries. 'Wrong-way risk' Arises in a trading exposure when there is significant correlation between the underlying asset and the counterparty, which in an event of default would lead to a significant mark to market loss. When assessing the credit exposure of a wrong-way trade, analysts take into account the correlation between the counterparty and the underlying asset as part of the sanctioning process. --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 501 # Exhibit Index ## EXHIBIT INDEX | Exhibit | Description | | --- | --- | | 1.1 | Articles of Association of Barclays PLC (incorporated by reference to Barclays PLC’s Form 6-K (File No. 001-09246) filed with the SEC on May 10, 2024) | | 2.1 | Long Term Debt Instruments: Barclays PLC is not party to any single instrument relating to long-term debt pursuant to which a total amount of securities exceeding 10% of its total assets (on a consolidated basis) is authorised to be issued. Barclays PLC hereby agrees to furnish to the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Commission”), upon its request, a copy of any instrument defining the rights of holders of its long-term debt or the rights of holders of the long-term debt of any of its subsidiaries for which consolidated or unconsolidated financial statements are required to be filed with the Commission. | | 2.2 | Description of the Registrant’s Securities Registered Pursuant to Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 | | 4.1 | Rules of the Barclays Group Incentive Share Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-167232) filed on June 1, 2010) | | 4.2 | Rules of the Barclays Group Share Value Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 to Barclays PLC’s 2022 Form 20-F (File No. 001-09246) filed with the SEC on February 15, 2023) | | 4.3 | Rules of the Barclays PLC Long Term Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 to Barclays PLC’s 2022 Form 20-F (File No. 001-09246) filed with the SEC on February 15, 2023) | | 4.4 | Rules of the Barclays Group Deferred Share Value Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 to Barclays PLC’s 2022 Form 20-F (File No. 001-09246) filed with the SEC on February 15, 2023) | | 4.5 | Contract of Employment - C.S. Venkatakrishnan (incorporated by reference to the 2021 Form 20-F/A filed on May 23, 2022) | | 4.6 | Appointment Letter – Mary Francis (incorporated by reference to the 2018 Form 20-F filed on February 21, 2019) | | 4.9 | Appointment Letter – Nigel Higgins (incorporated by reference to the 2019 Form 20-F filed on February 13, 2020) | | 4.10 | Appointment Letter – Dawn Fitzpatrick (incorporated by reference to the 2019 Form 20-F filed on February 13, 2020) | | 4.11 | Appointment Letter – Brian Gilvary (incorporated by reference to the 2019 Form 20-F filed on February 13, 2020) | | 4.12 | Appointment Letter - Julia Wilson (incorporated by reference to the 2021 Form 20-F/A filed on May 23, 2022) | | 4.13 | Appointment Letter - Robert Berry (incorporated by reference to the 2021 Form 20-F/A filed on May 23, 2022) | | 4.14 | Contract of Employment - Anna Cross (incorporated by reference to the 2021 Form 20-F/A filed on May 23, 2022) | | 4.15 | Appointment Letter - Marc Moses (incorporated by reference to the 2022 Form 20-F filed with the SEC on February 15, 2023) | | 4.16 | Appointment Letter - Sir John Kingman (incorporated by reference to the 2023 Form 20-F filed with the SEC on February 20, 2024) | | 4.17 | Appointment Letter - Brian Shea (incorporated by reference to the 2024 Form 20-F filed with the SEC on February 13, 2025) | | 4.18 | Appointment Letter - Diony Lebot | | 4.19 | Appointment Letter - Mary Mack | | 8.1 | List of subsidiaries. The list of subsidiaries of Barclays PLC can be found on page 434 of the Form 20-F | | 11.2 | Barclays Group Securities Dealing Code | | 12.1 | Certifications filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240. 13(a)-14(a) | | 13.1 | Certifications filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240. 13(a) and 18 U.S.C 1350(a) and 1350(b) | | 15.1 | Consent of KPMG LLP for incorporation by reference of reports in certain securities registration statements of Barclays PLC. | | 97.1 | Compensation Recovery Policy (incorporated by reference to the 2023 Form 20-F filed with the SEC on February 20, 2024) | | 99.1 | A table setting forth the issued share capital of Barclays Group’s total shareholders’ equity, indebtedness and contingent liabilities as at 31 December 2025 | | 101.INS | Inline XBRL Instance Document - the instance document does not appear in the Interactive Data File because its XBRL tags are embedded within the Inline XBRL document | | 101.SCH | Inline XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema | | 101.CAL | Inline XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Calculation Linkbase | | 101.DEF | Inline XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Definition Linkbase | | 101.LAB | Inline XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Label Linkbase | | 101.PRE | Inline XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Presentation Linkbase | | 104 | Cover Page Interactive Data File (formatted as inline XBRL and contained in Exhibit 101) | --- Strategy Shareholder information Climate and sustainability report Governance Risk review Financial review Financial Statements Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025 on Form 20-F 502 # Signatures ## Signatures The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf. Date February 10, 2026 Barclays PLC (Registrant) By /s/ Anna Cross Anna Cross, Group Finance Director